co
O
z . "w /' '
_ > S
ON NOIXOXIXSNI NVlNOSHXIWS^Si 8 HVUQ I l\lB RAR 8 ES^SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXOJ
“ ^ _ = co = co
V,
or
<
“ 5 5 A" 5 2 '**
-Z ^ z ^ J z
111 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXnXIXSNI NVINOSHXIINS S3IHVB8H L I B R /
r- z r- ^ ^ z r- _ z “
rn xondcJX ^ m g m
ON^ NOIXOXIXSNl"~NVINO$HXIINS S3 I BVH8 n~L I B RAR I E $ ^SMITHSON I AN ™ INSTITUTION NQIXO
CO z ___ CO z «*- , CO z >v, CO
s •- /^Ssl&X - , . . 2 S < as- 5
* A0** 3 i ® 3 5 »
o
z
> ,"Wr S > t*Wr S ^ > NsguiisjS^ s ^ >
Z CO z CO * Z W *• Z
II LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXOXIXSNI NVINOSHXIWS S3IHVB8I1 UBB)
~ co r: .... co —
O Ng<P^/ H O _ XgUus^ O v ~ NjQoxV^ q
ON^NOIXOILLSNI^NVINOSHXIWS S3liJVMail LIBRARIES^ SMITHSONIAN^INSTITUTION 2 NOIXfl
z __ r- v z _ r~ Z _ z
O « *
W
ZQ
>
ro XjvAsv^y rn !±f rn
co *' =: co £ <o
11 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXOXIXSNI NVINOSHXIWS S3 I UVU 9 11 L I B R /
z > W z CO z co "*
<
z
o
<8
V,
w$Wa O
7/W J/A V*
y/¥ 'jffl/, x
- , 7 f/r £
s " ^ | 5 > ‘ I NgNw'SX > w
DN NOU.rU.IJ.SNI NWIN0SHimS<°S3iavaanZUBRARIEs',,SMITH$0NIAN INSTITUTION NOIXO
CO _ ^ \ CO _ _ zz CO := co
Vi
UJ
-
o:
<
m 5 *W 2 5 X3§HP' 2’*" " ' 5 \SS 9**®' « ^
111 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXnXIXSNI NVINOSHXIIAIS S3I&VH9I1 UBRi
5 *z ^ _ v z r- z n _
m 2 . m 2 m ^ S <v 2 W
ION NOIXOXIXSNI NVINOSHXIIAIS S3IHV9 9H LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXO
CO Z _ _ ^ co Z ,cy. CO z *r, g
z /^SroSv =« a 5 ^ /^rro^v s ^
CO
o
z
> ”*3^ 2 ^<2-2^ > W’ 2 2 >
an^LIBRARI ES ^SMITHSON IAN INSTITUTION NOIXOXIXSNI NVINOSHXIWS^SB I BVB 8 ll_ LI B R/
CO
CO
UJ
CO
svW
/JVf
2E ‘ .^y > ' 2E Xgvosnj^ >
wiNOSHims^sa i ava a nzu b rar i es^smithsonian institution NoixruusNi_NviNosHxiw!
•- t/l *" m — f<o —r V
O X^osva^ «. O
-* 2 ^ 2
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXnXUSN! NVINOSHXH/VS SBlUVHail LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAI
z r- . z *” z
m v -c _ ^
NVIM0SH1IWS S3 I HVM a n L I B RAR I E S ^SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOlinXIXSN! NVINOSHXM
SsIS&v * , ^ | §j >^s«srv g | ^ .g
| W 1 ^ I 1 I 1
Z w » Z - OT ‘ Z CO
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIi.rUIJ.SNI NVINOSHXIIVS S3iaVM8n LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAI
2> - - ^ CO ^ CO
/^/ §. «»
NVINOSHXUAIS^Saiava 8n'JUBRARIES^SMITHS0NIAN"J|NSTITUTI0N:ZN0lirUIXSNl'JNVIN0SHlllM
Z r- Z 13 Z _ ^ V
O xCv”7D?v ~ /5Qn7\ O _ _ /''V1 vox O x&t>tc/£v
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOlilUIXSNI NVINOSHIIWS S3 I BV8 8 IT LI B RAR I ES SMITHSON I A
Z V CO 2 C/J 2 ^ _ _
^ i ii^ i [
nvinoshxms</,s3i a’vaai izu b rar i es^smithsonian ^institution NouruixsNi_NviNOSHxm
w 5 _ « 5 _ w z '
H
O Z ' O X^VOS^X am X^ASVV^ o ** }>5P
2 - ^ 2 Z
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOlilUIXSNI NVINOSHXIWS SSiavaSH LI B RAR I ES_ SMITHSONIA
X ✓ - C W JjKs I /3S£D\ 5 r; /
f v*W 5l“ "Ao\ ! — Avid® WJw^vA — . &— /Ar/p\ f -n / iWu/a
4P^ rr? m V u> s%5nfS$y m N^v^cJ^ ^
CO ~ CO \ Z
NVINOSHillNS SBIdV^ail LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXfUIXSN! NVINOSHim
_ CO 2 </> z v, 00 2 _ _ _
s , ,-S E s .<
«/ a z zi z
CO
o
2
> IS ^ A 2 N^-tlJ-s^ s >
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIXIUIXSNI NVINOSHXIWS^Sa IBVaan^LIBRARI ES SMITHSON I A
’ ^ O = .... CO
CO
U1
;
TRANSACTIONS
- of -
the Wisconsin
Academy of
Sciences,
Arts &
Letters
Volume 74
1986
ri.i
r ■■■■■ . ■ .1 -.'rl ■ ,j
i ;=/'■ V ■ - > X'-f
•fM my , :,x
m-
it
<wA :.i,i
<v
.
■ «< i ; ■ ■ ii w-
'j/yk''i'
$X
»
. ) '":n ?
. /■
V
Ill/,
i
xX; s.t •-]•/' -
"I-- :xi: 'Jj.'
X • hnlu^'&ii w- . /, -., „ „.y,
;\X/X iW
X (
';,/V
mm
4$
tX'XJhm^
>y. /,/.'
• Xv// •' ;>
f©
, ,XXK
)?■ ./"C- \r-Hm:
4P.
4;'^h x
XX -V>
/tv:4'K:
:W, •’ ! ■ ■ i
4
•| H x;>
/>X :6;.-|
In' / (
X:<
t¥.'
y.ku.
uCisS^ -,,'v('r
; wm
v ,.V ^f ;•'
:d ' iii{ i'f
y V . I XXXX 'i\'J/V\ \\ T
f
I
• i,
mi
'.Va v v
n%i
fe£: I • h
W'f4
-ft
■%Y- Ai V;.r
'(4 m.,'
X J) '
6_.;v '’H»3 ' i > ,
•yA
■ t y
m
X
XXMXXXX
/ u^;1 fX -k -X V, )rfv q/'-^U'n'
*Mrv: jX:
ixv
W:
kVx. '}^4-,:
•Jv
S:|fe : ; V; ' X' \ % XX
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
WISCONSIN ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES, ARTS
AND LETTERS
Volume 74, 1986
Funds for this issue of the Transactions
have been provided by
the Elizabeth F. McCoy Memorial Fund
Co-editors
PHILIP WHITFORD
KATHRYN WHITFORD
Copyright © 1986
Wisconsin Academy of Science, Arts and Letters.
Manufactured in United States of America.
All Rights Reserved.
TRANSACTIONS OF THE
WISCONSIN ACADEMY
Established 1870
Volume 74, 1986
THE MINK RIVER— A FRESHWATER ESTUARY 1
Janet R. Keough
PLEISTOCENE CARIBOU IN CENTRAL WISCONSIN 12
Charles A. Long
TECHNOLOGY, INSTITUTIONS, GLOBAL ECONOMY 14
AND WORLD PEACE
Peter Dorner
“THE MAN WHO LIVED AMONG THE CANNIBALS”: 19
MELVILLE IN MILWAUKEE
Thomas Pribek
SIMULATION IN LANDSCAPE PLANNING AND DESIGN: 27
THE ART OF VISUAL REPRESENTATION
Bruce H. Murray and Charles S. Law
WOMAN AS EROS-ROSE IN GERTRUDE STEIN’S TENDER BUTTONS 34
AND CONTEMPORANEOUS PORTRAITS
Doris T. Wight
ASPECTS OF MORALITY IN THE MUSIC OF THE MIDDLE AGES 41
John Holzaepfel
POPULATION ECOLOGY OF ROCK DOVES IN A SMALL CITY 50
James Krakowski and Neil F. Payne
IDENTIFICATION OF WISCONSIN CATFISHES (ICTALURIDAE): 58
A KEY BASED ON PECTORAL FIN SPINES
Weldon Paruch
SOME MODERN IDEAS IN ANCIENT INDIA 63
K. S. N. Rao
ALLUSIONS TO THE AENEID IN PARADISE LOST , 70
BOOKS XI AND XII
John Banschbach
PRODUCTIVITY OF RACCOONS IN SOUTHWESTERN WISCONSIN 75
Neil F. Payne and David A. Root
HISTORICAL CHANGES IN WATER QUALITY AND BIOTA OF 81
DEVILS LAKE, SAUK COUNTY, 1866-1985
Richard A. Lillie and John W. Mason
SUPPLEMENTAL DISTRIBUTION RECORDS FOR 105
WISCONSIN TERRESTRIAL GASTROPODS
Joan P. Jass
THE UNUSUAL AND THE EERIE IN AARON BOHROD’S 108
EARLY PAINTINGS: 1933-1939
Carole Singer
HAWTHORNE * S ENOCH: PROPHETIC IRONY IN THE SCARLET LETTER 122
Henry J. Lindborg
A PRELIMINARY STUDY OF THE MACROBENTHOS OF 126
WAVE-SWEPT AND PROTECTED SITES ON THE LAKE MICHIGAN
SHORELINE AT TOFT POINT NATURAL AREA, WISCONSIN
Glenn Metzler and Paul E. Sager
SEASONAL MOVEMENTS OF WHITE-TAILED DEER ON 133
DECLINING HABITATS IN CENTRAL WISCONSIN
Robert K. Murphy, John R. Cary, Raymond K. Anderson and Neil F. Payne
NEW DISTRIBUTIONAL RECORDS FOR WISCONSIN 138
AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES
Philip A. Cochran and John D. Lyons
FOREST FLOOR BIOMASS AND NUTRIENTS IN RED MAPLE 142
(Acer rubrum L.) STANDS OF WISCONSIN AND MICHIGAN
James E. Johnson, Carl L. Haag and David E. Goetsch
EDITORIAL POLICY
The TRANSACTIONS of the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Let¬
ters is an annual publication devoted to original papers, preference being given to
the works of Academy members. Sound manuscripts dealing with features of the
State of Wisconsin and its people are especially welcome; papers on more general
topics are occasionally published. Subject matter experts review each manuscript
submitted.
Contributors are asked to submit two copies of their manuscripts. Manuscripts
should be typed double-spaced on 8/2 x 11 inch bond paper. The title of the paper
should be centered at the top of the first page. The author’s name and brief address
should appear below the title. Each page of the manuscript beyond the first should
bear the page number and author’s name for identification, e.g. Brown-2, Brown-3,
etc. Identify on a separate page, the author with his institution, if appropriate, or
with his personal address to be used in Authors’ Addresses at the end of the printed
volume. If possible, contributors should also send an IBM compatible 5 and lA inch
disk copy of the manuscript.
The style of the text may be that of scholarly writing in the field of the author.
To expedite editing and minimize printing costs the Editor suggests that the general
form of the current volume of TRANSACTIONS be examined and followed when¬
ever possible. For Science papers, an abstract is requested. Documentary notations
may be useful especially for the Arts and Letters papers, and should be numbered
for identification in the text. Such notations as a group, should be separate from the
text pages and may occupy one or more pages as needed. References Cited should be
listed alphabetically at the end of the manuscript unless included in notations. The
style of the references will be standardized as in current volume to promote accuracy
and reduce printing costs.
Figures should be prepared to permit reduction. Lettering should be large
enough to form characters at least 1 mm high after reduction. Only high contrast
glossy prints, not larger than 8 Vi x 11 inches, or good black ink drawings on bond
paper, are suitable for reproduction. (Copies run by dry photocopiers will do for the
second copy, but are not sharp enough for printing.) Figures (graphs, drawings or
photos) should be numbered on the back of each original copy, accompanied by a
list of clear explanatory legends for each. Credit sources and/or copyright clearance
in the legend if appropriate.
Printing is expensive. Each paper will be subject to a per page charge to the
author, the rate being determined yearly. When a paper is accepted, authors without
departmental or grant funds for publication should request that the Director of the
Academy (at the Academy address) waive page charges. Galley proofs and edited
manuscript copy will be forwarded to the authors for proof reading prior to publica¬
tion; both must be returned to the editor within one week. Reprints should be
ordered when proof is returned; forms and instructions will be sent to the authors.
Each author will receive one complimentary copy of the volume of TRANSAC¬
TIONS in which his work appears.
Papers received after July 1 will be considered for the next annual volume.
Manuscripts should be sent to:
Dr. Carl N. Haywood, Department of History
University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire
Eau Claire, WI 54701
* If possible, contributors should also send an IBM compatible 5 and Va inch disk copy of the
manuscript.
WISCONSIN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, ARTS AND LETTERS
The Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters was chartered by the State Legislature on
March 16, 1870 as an incorporated society serving the people of the State of Wisconsin by
encouraging investigation and dissemination of knowledge of the sciences, arts and letters.
OFFICERS
PRESIDENT
Gerald Viste, Wausau
PRESIDENT-ELECT
Jerry Apps, Madison
IMMEDIATE PAST PRESIDENT
Joyce Erdman, Madison
VICE PRESIDENTS
John Rusch (sciences), Superior
John Mominee (arts), Platteville
Richard Boudreau (letters), LaCrosse
SECRETARY-TREASURER
Pat Blankenburg, Madison
COUNCILORS-AT-LARGE
Jon Harkness, Wausau
Ann Peck ham, Middleton
Nancy Noeske , Milwaukee
Karen Johnson Boyd, Racine
James Crow, Madison
John Wilde, Evansville
James R. Johnson, River Falls
Daniel O. Trainer, Stevens Point
COUNCILOR EMERITUS
John W. Thomson, Mt. Horeb
COUNCIL-APPOINTED POSITIONS
LIBRARIAN
Jack A. Clarke, Madison
EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR and
DIRECTOR— JUNIOR ACADEMY
LeRoy R. Lee, Madison
EDITORS
Kathryn and Philip Whitford, Transactions
Patricia Powell, Review
P>;
THE MINK RIVER — A FRESHWATER ESTUARY
Janet R. Keough
Center for Great Lakes Studies
University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee
Abstract
The Mink River Estuary is one of the few remaining natural wetlands along
the Lake Michigan coastal zone. The river flows through a bedrock valley across the
Door Co., Wisconsin, peninsula. Surficial materials forming its watershed are
glacial and post-glacial, mainly shoreline material placed during higher levels of
Lake Michigan.
The dynamics of Lake Michigan play an important role in the control of wet¬
land plant communities. Most expand and contract as the lake level falls and rises
over the long-term. Lake seiches cause the water in the wetlands to flow upstream
and downstream in both a daily and hourly cycle, generating a persistent gradient
between the alkaline headwater springs and more neutral lake.
Land use adjacent to the river has changed little since presettlement, although
the upland forest in the surrounding watershed has been largely replaced by farm
fields. The estuary consists of several vegetation types. The deep marsh and shallow
marsh types are inhabited by communities of few species, owing to disturbance by
long-term changes in lake water level. The wet meadow, shrub carr, and lowland
forest types are more diverse, largely because they are more protected from extreme
water level change by elevation and, in the case of wet meadow species, by the
development of hummocks by Carex stricta. Peak above- and below-ground
biomass found in herbaceous wetland communities in 1981 are presented. Perennial
species peak in August, while annuals peak in September; most below-ground
accumulation peaks in September.
Introduction
The U.S. shoreline of the Great Lakes is
nearly 4000 miles in length. Wetlands occupy
only a small proportion of the coastal
region; 1370 coastal wetlands, comprising an
area of 466 square miles, have been iden¬
tified (Herdendorf et al. 1981). Approx¬
imately 30% of U.S. Great Lake wetlands
occur adjacent to Lake Michigan. Many
rivers that flow into the Great Lakes were
once associated with wetland areas; most of
these are now either heavily disturbed or
have been destroyed by urban development.
Curtis did not recognize Great Lakes coastal
wetlands as a community type in his Vegeta¬
tion of Wisconsin (1959). In recent years,
there have been a number of descriptive
studies of wetlands along the Lower Great
Lakes (Williamson 1979, Brant and Herden¬
dorf 1972, Fahselt 1981, Hanink 1979,
Herdendorf et al. 1981, Jaworski and
Raphael 1976, Mudroch 1981, Geis, 1985,
Geis and Kee 1977, Stuckey 1971, 1975,
LeMay and Mulamoottil 1980, Farney and
Bookhout 1982, and Ruta 1981). The few
studies of Wisconsin coastal wetlands deal
primarily with those along Green Bay
(Bosley 1976, 1978, Harris et al. 1977,
Hewlett 1974, and Roznik 1978).
The Mink River supports one of the best
of the remaining Lake Michigan coastal
wetlands. Located near the tip of the
Wisconsin Door County Peninsula, the
Mink River flows southeastward into
1
2
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Fig. 1. Location of the Mink River on the Door
County, Wisconsin, peninsula.
Rowley Bay of Lake Michigan (Figure 1).
The watershed lies in Liberty Grove Town¬
ship (T32N, R28 and 29E). In this paper, I
will describe the physical setting of the Mink
River wetlands and the vegetation types pres¬
ent and their dynamic relationship with Lake
Michigan.
Topography and Geology
Rowley Bay and the Mink River lie in a
bedrock valley that extends across the Door
peninsula from Green Bay to Lake Michigan
(Kowalke 1946). During the Algonquin
period, when the level of Lake Michigan was
higher, the valley formed a strait connecting
Green Bay to Lake Michigan from Ellison
Bay to Rowley Bay. The underlying bedrock
is Silurian Niagara dolomite; as elsewhere in
the Door Peninsula, this formation dips to
the southeast, and forms the primary aqui¬
fer. A wide portion of the river, “Rogers
Lake,” may represent a natural depression
in the bedrock or an area eroded by the
channel before descending into Lake Mich¬
igan. Bedrock is within four feet of the sur¬
face near Ellison Bay and outcrops in the
upland around the Mink River. The upland
is covered by Pleistocene drift and shoreline
deposits. Most of the region was inundated
by post-Pleistocene stages of Lake Michi¬
gan, resulting in permeable deposits of sand
and gravel along the west side of the river
(Sherrill 1978). Thwaites and Bertrand
(1957) and Kowalke (1946) suggested that
the uplands to the northeast and southwest
of the river were islands in Lake Algonquin,
a higher stage of Lake Michigan. A shoreline
formed by Glacial Lake Algonquin
(11,000-12,000 yr BP) has been found along
Rowley Bay in Newport State Park at
approximately 75 feet above present lake
level. A Glacial Lake Nipissing shoreline
(3,500-6,000 yr BP) occurs 21 feet above
present level (Frelich 1979, Dorr and
Eschmann 1977). The ancient beach ridges
evident in the landscape around Rowley Bay
were Lake Nipissing beaches. The marsh
along the Mink River is underlain by alluvial
fine sand, silt and clay and organic material.
Fig. 2. Topography of the area surrounding the Mink
River. Contour interval is 10 feet. Stippled areas repre¬
sent open water and lakeshore boundaries.
1986]
Keough—Mink River Estuary
3
These fine grey sediments and the sandy soils
of the surrounding area were probably
deposited during this post-glacial lake stage.
Declining lake level and land rebound have
raised the old beaches and also separated the
Mink River watershed from Green Bay (Fig¬
ure 2).
Hydrology
Hydrologic aspects of the watershed are
the most important factors contributing to
the character of the Mink River wetland.
There are three primary sources of water:
precipitation, groundwater springs, and
Lake Michigan. Surface runoff from the
small watershed is limited by lowland forest
vegetation.
Springs located in the lowland forest sur¬
rounding the marsh discharge into the
Fig. 3. Mean annual level of Lake Michigan,
1935-1981 (from N.O.A.A. 1981).
wetland creeks throughout the year. Springs
also emerge within the wetland; these have
been observed as open pools in February sur¬
rounded by the snow-covered marsh.
Weathered limestone is exposed at the bot¬
tom of the headwater springs, attesting to
their origin in the bedrock aquifer.
The channels connecting the headwater
springs to the river appear well entrenched in
the substrate. A review of past aerial
photographs (1938, 1952, 1962, 1967, 1974,
1978) indicates that location of the channels
has not changed appreciably in almost 50
years. Sherrill (1978) suggested that the drift
overlying the bedrock around and under the
Mink River is shallow. The main channel of
the Mink River forms a distinct and ap¬
parently unchanging bend as it flows near an
upland bedrock knoll. Although most of the
depression containing the river and wetland
appears to have been filled by lake sediments
and beach deposits, the channel forms sug¬
gest bedrock control of the major channels.
Rainfall is moderate; the NOAA station
on nearby Washington Island records an
average annual precipitation of 29 inches.
Approximately half of this amount falls dur¬
ing the growing season.
Precipitation and spring flow vary little
from year to year. However, Lake Michigan
plays a dominant role in wetland dynamics.
The level of the lake has varied widely in
historic time (Figure 3). Aerial photographs
May 21 May 22 May 23
Fig. 4. Measurement of water level fluctuation in one of the headwater creeks, approximately 100 meters from a
bedrock spring, taken between May 21-23, 1983. While the amplitude varies, the period is constant throughout the ice-
free season.
4
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
taken since 1938 show that during periods of
high lake levels, the open water area of the
river and marsh increased along the entire
length of the river. In alternating periods
when the lake level was low, the wetland
communities expanded into the open water.
Seiche activity originating in the lake
results in water moving upstream and then
downstream daily; superimposed is another
mode in which water moves up and down the
river in approximately an hourly cycle. An
example of seiche activity is shown in Figure
4; this measurement was made with a water
level recorder located upstream of Rogers
Lake in one of the headwater creeks. Fluc¬
tuations at the mouth of the River are typi¬
cally between 10 an 30 cm in magnitude, and
occasionally much larger following high
winds. Both seiche modes cause the water to
rise and fall throughout the wetland,
throughout the ice-free season. This results
in mixing between the highly alkaline water
discharging from the headwater springs and
the water from Lake Michigan that is driven
upstream. Water samples have been col¬
lected during all ice-free seasons; an example
of the chemical gradient found along the
length of the Mink River is illustrated in
Figure 5. Specific conductance and alkalinity
Fig. 5. Evidence of a chemical gradient along the
Mink River channel. The X-axis is a series of sample sta¬
tions along the length of the river, from a headwater
spring and creek (left) through the river channel (center)
to Rowley Bay (right). Specific conductance and alka¬
linity both decrease along the river.
range from 475 to 275 mmhos/cm and 260 to
110 mg/1 respectively; this pattern is main¬
tained from the time of ice-melt in spring
through the time when the bay and river sur¬
faces freeze in winter. Based on these seiche
movements and the chemical gradient, the
Mink River may be considered a true estu¬
ary.
Land Use
The Door Peninsula has had a relatively
long history of human activity. Initially, In¬
dian tribes moving up and down the lake-
shore probably used the area around the
Mink River for encampments. There was a
more permanent village on the south side of
the bay, but it is not clear whether this was a
Winnebago or Potawotami tribe. Logging
removed most of the upland forest cover
during the late 1800’s. White cedar in the
lowland forest was also harvested for both
lumber and cedar oil; an oil-distilling factory
was located near Rowley Bay. There was
LOWLAND FOREST
NORTHERN MESIC FOREST
El
□
DRY- MES 1C FORES T
BOREAL FOREST
NORTHERN MESIC FOREST with ASPEN and BIRC
Fig. 6. A map of the presettlement forest in the area of
the Mink River (derived from Findley, 1976 and per¬
sonal communication). Emergent marsh is not mapped.
Vegetation types follow Curtis (1959).
1986]
Keough—Mink River Estuary
5
considerable land speculation during this
period as well; much of the Mink River basin
was platted and some lots sold, although no
development occurred. Farms were cleared
in portions of the Mink River watershed, as
everywhere in the Door Peninsula (Holand,
1959). Thus, the Mink River wetland is not
surrounded by a pristine landscape; yet, for
the most part, the vegetation surrounding
the wetland and river is similar to that before
settlement. The township including the Mink
River was surveyed in 1835. A map of the
forest vegetation has been derived from
Findley (1976 and personal comm) and from
the General Land Office Survey Notes
(Figure 6). Although most of the upland
forest has been replaced by open fields and
orchards, a northern wet forest, dominated
by white cedar and tamarack with some
black ash, still borders the river (Figure 7).
Wit Orchard Farmland
Fig. 7. A map of present land use in the Mink River
watershed; note that the areas adjacent to Ellison Bay
and Green Bay are not included here.
An excellent northern mesic forest stand oc¬
cupies the land just north of Rowley Bay.
Present Vegetation
The emergent marsh along the Mink River
is the most dynamic feature of the watershed
vegetation. Lake level controls the succes¬
sion of wetland communities along the Mink
River. The marsh has contracted and ex¬
panded as Lake Michigan has risen and
fallen. The plant communities present at a
given time are the result of the opposing
forces of community development and of
disturbance. The extent of dominant com¬
munities in 1981 is illustrated in Figure 8.
During the 1980 and 1981 growing
seasons, the emergent communities were
Fig. 8. A map of the vegetation of the Mink River
estuary, as found in 1981-1982. Vegetation types are:
SH, shrub carr; W, wet meadow; shallow marsh domi¬
nated by Carex (SM) and Phragmites (P); deep marsh
dominated by Scirpus (SC), Zizania (Z), Sparganium
(SP), and Typha (T).
6
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Table 1. Plant species found in Mink River vegetation communities.
Nomenclature follows Gleason and Cronquist (1963).
1986]
Keough — Mink River Estuary
7
sampled, and observations were made of
submergent species (species are listed in
Table 1). Estimates of biomass were made
using samples of above- and below-ground
material harvested in each community every
month during the two growing seasons. Peak
biomass values from that period are pre¬
sented in Table 2, and each community is
described below.
Deep Marsh
The deep marsh complex occurs adjacent
to channels of the Mink River. Several
species form this community type, but
seldom do more than two or three occur
together. For example, Sparganium eurycar -
pum forms monotypic stands near the river
mouth and in patches on mud flats in
“Rogers Lake.” Occasionally, a few in¬
dividuals of Sagittaria latifoiia are inter¬
mixed with Sparganium, Zizania aquatica is
found in monotypic stands on mudflats.
Zizania populations fluctuate widely from
year to year; dense populations are found
only during years when mudflats are exposed
or near the water surface. For example, in
1982, the level of Lake Michigan was 6
inches lower than in 1981 . Mud flats were ex¬
posed in Rogers Lake, and supported more
numerous and dense Zizania populations
than the previous year.
Scirpus validus occurs over a wide range
of water level conditions. This species forms
monotypic stands on shallow organic mud¬
flats around Rogers Lake. With Sagittaria
latifoiia , it forms two-species stands along
the Mink River channel. A tall form, pro¬
bably a hybrid with S. acutus (Galen Smith,
pers. comm), grows with Eleocharis smallii
around the edge of Rowley Bay. Scirpus
americanus also forms monotypic stands in
deep water in the open bay, where the
populations are exposed to wind and waves.
Typha angustifolia also forms single species
Table 2. Peak biomass of emergent herbaceous communities of the Mink River estuary in 1981 .
Month of peak biomass occurrence is indicated.
8
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
stands along the Mink River channels and in
Rogers Lake.
Shallow Marsh
This type includes two species associa¬
tions. An even mixture of Carex aquatilis
and C. prairea forms extensive meadows
that fringe the spring-fed channels upstream.
These are the only two species in most of the
area; along the channel-marsh interface,
they mingle with Typha lati folia, Phragmites
australis , Scirpus validus , Calamagrostis
canadensis and Carex stricta. Phragmites
australis is found to be dominant in exten¬
sive clones within the area of the Carex
aquatilis-prairea community. This species
forms a complete canopy with individuals of
the two Carex species as a sparce understory.
P. australis is common in disturbed wetland
sites in Wisconsin, but in the Mink River
shallow marsh there is little evidence of
human disturbance. However, Phragmites
may have invaded the wetland after a distur¬
bance, such as a fire during a dry period of
low lake level. The reason for its continued
persistence is not known.
Wet Meadow
A wet meadow community dominated by
Carex stricta and Calamagrostis canadensis
borders the entire marsh. This community is
the most diverse wetland type around the
Mink River and includes several carices and
other forbs (Table 1). Some of these, in¬
cluding Calamagrostis , Campanula apari-
noides, and Lobelia kalmii, are modal in fen
communities in Wisconsin (Curtis, 1959).
Wet meadow borders swamp forest and
shrub carr, and is often invaded by woody
species (Salix spp. Cornus stolonifera, Thuja
occidentals, Spiraea alba). Dead woody
stems are frequently found, evidence of past
invasion thwarted by periods of high water.
Review of early aerial photographs sug¬
gests that this community may be resistant to
long-term fluctuations in water level. The
co-dominants, Calamagrostis canadensis
and Carex stricta, occupy tall (up to 50 cm)
hummocks formed by the latter, often sur¬
rounded by shallow standing water. These
hummocks may provide a habitat that is not
appreciably affected by changes in water
level, or may permit development of propa-
gules over a wide range of elevations above
water. Substrate cores were taken in all
wetland populations. Except in cores from
the wet meadow, all of the present plant
communities were underlain by remains of
different species. Sedge and grass roots and
rhizomes were found within and under the
hummocks, suggesting that, while other
communities were shifting with time and en¬
vironmental conditions, the wet meadow has
been persistant. Pieces of wood were occa¬
sionally found in cores, indicating tem¬
porary invasion by trees and shrubs.
Shrub Carr
The interface between the marsh and the
surrounding upland is inhabited by a mix¬
ture of small trees, shrubs, and herbaceous
wetland species, forming a shrub carr com¬
munity that expands and contracts with the
changing lake level. Species such as Cornus
stolonifera, Spiraea alba, Alnus rugosa and
seedlings of Thuja occidentals, Larix
laricina, Acer spicatum, and Salix spp. in¬
vade the wet meadow during drier periods.
Dead stems indicate the return of high water.
This appears to be a temporary community,
as long as occasional periods of high water
conditions continue to occur. With a drastic
long-term lowering of water level, this com¬
munity would probably develop into low¬
land forest.
Lowland Forest
A lowland swamp community surrounds
most of the Mink River marsh. Thuja occi¬
dentals is dominant, but there are signifi¬
cant numbers of Betula lutea and B. papyrif-
era, Fraxinus nigra, Larix laricina, Populus
deltoides, Acer spicatum, and Abies balsa-
mea. The importance of each varies greatly
and is probably dependent on stand history
and hydrology. This lowland forest has been
1986]
Keough — Mink River Estuary
9
disturbed by logging and by natural events.
The latter are evidenced by much wind throw
and root upheaval, resulting from flooding,
storms, and ice activity. This forest com¬
munity has largely protected the river and
wetland from human disturbance by virtue
of the wet organic soil and dense vegetation.
Wetland Community Biomass
During the 1981 growing season, biomass
samples were collected monthly from the
major emergent vegetation types. These are
presented as peak above-ground and below¬
ground biomass estimates (Table 2). Shrub
carr, swamp forest, and Scirpus americanus
communities were not sampled. Submergent
vegetation also was not sampled because, in
general, individuals occur in small patches
amid emergent plants, and because represen¬
tative sites could not be identified. The areal
extent of each community is a highly dy¬
namic parameter that will vary from year to
year as the communities expand and contract
in response to lake level changes. The extent
of each of these communities was estimated
in 1981 (Table 2).
Peak biomass alone is not adequate to
represent relative vegetation importance,
however. Zizania aquatica is an example of
an annual plant in which a cohort of seeds
develops simultaneously, all flowering and
setting seed at roughly the same time. Peren¬
nial species, on the other hand, develop
rhizomatous ramets continuously during the
growing season; examples of these are
Eleocharis palustris, Scirpus validus, and
Sparganium eurycarpum ; some of these,
such as Sparganium and Typha angustifolia,
exhibit synchronous flowering and seed set
as well. Stem death may occur throughout
the growing season; this is evident within the
Scirpus populations upstream from Rowley
Bay. Often, peak above-ground and below¬
ground biomass did not occur during the
same month. Those populations that peaked
in September also had seeds maturing at that
time. In other communities, stems and leaves
were senescent by September. Most rhizo¬
matous species develop storage material and
over-wintering buds in the fall. Nonetheless,
measurements of peak biomass permit com¬
parison between communities and provide
estimates of the maximum amount of pro¬
duction available to the system food web.
The wet-meadow community produced
the largest peak biomass and had the greatest
areal extent. This is intriguing in light of the
apparent stability of this association. Much
litter is present throughout the year, sug¬
gesting that production does not immedi¬
ately enter the food web, and that this is a
zone of accumulation. The shallow marsh
community also seems to accumulate litter.
The above-ground biomass of deep water
communities is lost over winter, presumably
broken up and removed by ice action, spring
runoff and high water. Rafts of Scirpus
stems are found along the beaches in spring;
however, the amount and distribution of an¬
nual dead biomass through the river and bay
is not known. The fate of production from
other deep marsh species, whether by
decomposition or outflow, is also unknown.
Discussion
The Mink River estuary is one of only a
few Lake Michigan coastal wetlands that
have not been significantly influenced by
human activity. As such, it provides an op¬
portunity to learn how plant and animal
communities and individual species adapt
and function in the coastal zone. The Mink
River estuary, like other coastal wetlands, is
subjected to various degrees of natural
disturbance — principally changes in water
level, but also massive ice movement and
wave and wind activity. The low diversity of
most plant communities in Rowley Bay and
along the Mink River suggests that this site
may be subject to more than average distur¬
bance. The deep water communities experi¬
ence the largest long-term changes in water
level, as well as substantial wave action.
Natural disturbance is sufficiently intense
and frequent that there is not enough time
for the development of diverse communities.
10
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
More protected communities, such as the
wet meadow around the edge of the wetland,
are more species-rich. The wet meadow com¬
munity develops on and around Carexstricta
hummocks; this topographic diversity,
located higher in the watershed, permits the
establishment of more species. Keddy and
Reznicek (1985) suggested that the zonation
of communities may be related to the posi¬
tion of maximum and minimum high water.
They suggest that certain communities — wet
meadow and shallow marsh— -depend upon
periodically exposed substrate for seed
establishment. This appears to be so in the
Mink River system; only those species that
can survive by reproducing vegetatively per¬
sist in deep water. Zizania aquatica requires
mudflat conditions in spring to germinate.
Woody species on the shrub carr do not
establish on hummocks, but in the low spots
on the wet meadow. They are repeatedly
killed by high water. Regeneration of such
communities seems to be in phase with the
cycle of low water conditions in Lake
Michigan.
Little is known about the food web
associated with Lake Michigan coastal
wetlands. Harris et al. (1977) and Roznik
(1978) have suggested that certain birds may
respond to the dynamic structure of these
emergent plant communities as water level
changes from year to year. Furthermore, lit¬
tle is known about how the chemical gradi¬
ent along the river may influence the
distribution of aquatic plants or animals.
Many intriguing questions can be raised con¬
cerning long-term fluctuations in biomass
production by the various plant commu¬
nities, as well as the fate of biomass and its
contribution to the food web of the river and
bay. Much can be learned about the adapta¬
tions of organisms in such a frequently dis¬
turbed coastal environment. Examples in¬
clude the adaptations to long-term water
level fluctuations by Carex stricta and
Calamagrostis canadensis , by species of Scir-
pus (S. americanum, S. acutus, and S.
validus ), and by Zizania aquatica. While
some coastal wetlands have been protected
as natural reserves and are recognized as in¬
cluding unusual species associations or
unique habitats, many biological and physi¬
cal dynamics are still waiting to be explored.
Acknowledgements
Forest Stearns is gratefully acknowledged
for support and encouragement during the
entire course of this study, and, with Glenn
Guntenspergen, offered many helpful sug¬
gestions on the manuscript. Many thanks are
due the faculty and staff of the U.W. Center
for Great Lakes Studies, whose equipment
and expertise made the field work possible.
U.W. -Green Bay generously provided lodg¬
ing at Toft Point, under the administration
of Keith White. Field assistance was pro¬
vided by many persons, the most persistent
of whom included Joyce Witebsky, Glenn
Guntenspergen, and Steve Kroeger. Peter
Salamun and Margaret Summerfield helped
with identification of submergent species.
The study was supported by a grant from the
Wisconsin Coastal Management Program to
Forest Stearns and by the Raymond Hatcher
Fund through the U.W. -Milwaukee Botany
Department. This is Contribution 289, U.W.
Center for Great Lakes Studies.
References Cited
Bosley, T. R. 1976. Green Bay’s west shore
coastal wetlands: a history of change. M.S.
Thesis. University of Wisconsin-Green Bay. 92
pp.
Bosley, T. R. 1978. Loss of wetlands on the west
shore of Green Bay. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci.,
Arts and Lett. 66:235-245.
Brant, R. A. and C. E. Herdendorf. 1972.
Delineation of Great Lakes estuaries. In Proc.
15th Conf. Great Lakes Research., I. A. G. L.
R., Ann Arbor, MI. pp. 710-718.
Curtis, J. T. 1959. Vegetation of Wisconsin.
University of Wisconsin Press, Madison, WI.
657 pp.
Dorr, J. A. Jr. and D. F. Eschman. 1977.
Geology of Michigan. University of Michigan
Press, Ann Arbor. 475 pp.
Fahselt, D. and M. A. Maun. 1980. A quan-
1986]
Keough — Mink River Estuary
11
titative study of the shoreline marsh com¬
munities along Lake Huron in Ontario. Can. J.
Plant Sci. 60:669-678.
Farney, R. A. and T. A. Bookhout. 1982. Vege¬
tation changes in a Lake Erie marsh (Winous
Point, Ottawa County, Ohio) during high
water years. Ohio Acad. Sci. 82:103-107.
Frelich, F. T. 1979. Vascular plants of Newport
State Park, Wisconsin. Wisconsin Dept.
Natural Resources, Research Report No. 100.
Madison, WI. 34 pp.
Findley, R. W. 1976. Original vegetation cover of
Wisconsin. Map. USDA Forest Service, North
Central Experiment Station, St. Paul, MN. 1 p.
Geis, J. W. 1985. Environmental influences on
the distribution and composition of wetlands in
the Great Lakes basin. In Prince, H. and F. M.
D’ltri, Eds. Coastal Wetlands. Lewis Publ.,
Chelsea, ML pp 15-32.
Geis, J. W. and J. L. Kee. 1977. Coastal wetlands
along Lake Ontario and St. Lawrence River in
Jefferson County, New York. State Univ. of
New York, Inst, of Environmental Program
Affairs, Syracuse, N.Y. 130 pp.
Gleason, H. A. and A. Cronquist. 1963. Manual
of Vascular Plants of Northeastern United
States and Adjacent Canada. Van Nostrand
Co., New York. 810 pp.
Hanick, M. S. 1979. Wetland loss and coastal
land use changes in Monroe Co., Michigan.
1912-1975. MS Thesis. Eastern Michigan
University, Ypsilanti, MI. 118 pp.
Harris, H. J., T. R. Bosley, and F. D. Roznik.
1977. Green Bay’s coastal wetlands— a picture
of dynamic change. In DeWitt, C. B. and
E. Soloway, Eds. Wetlands. Ecology, Values,
and Impacts. Proceedings Waubesa Confer¬
ence, Madison, WI. pp 337-358.
Herdendorf, C. E., S. M. Hartley, and M. D.
Barnes. 1981. Fish and wildlife resources of the
Great Lakes coastal wetlands within the United
States. Vol. I. Overview. Report No.
FWS/OBS-8 1 /o2-V 1 . U.S. Fish and Wildlife
Service. Washington, D.C. 469 pp.
Holand, H. 1959. Old Peninsula Days. Twayne
Publishers, New York. 425 pp.
Hewlett, G. F. 1974. The rooted vegetation of
West Green Bay with reference to environmen¬
tal change. MS Thesis. Syracuse Univ., Syra¬
cuse, N.Y. 213 pp.
Jaworski, E. and C. N. Raphael. 1976. Modifica¬
tion of coastal wetlands in southeastern
Michigan and management alternatives. Mich¬
igan Academician 8(3):303-317.
Keddy, P. A. and A. A. Reznicek. 1985. Vegeta¬
tion dynamics, buried seeds, and water level
fluctuations on the shorelines of the Great
Lakes. In Prince, H. and F. M. D’ltri, Eds.
Coastal Wetlands. Lewis Publ. pp 33-58.
Kowalke, O. L. 1946. Highest abandoned beach
ridges in northern Door County, Wisconsin.
Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 38:293-
298.
LeMay, M. and G. Mulamoottil. 1980. A limno¬
logical survey of eight waterfront marshes. Ur¬
ban Ecology 5:55-67.
Mudroch, A. 1981. A study of selected Great
Lakes coastal marshes. Scientific Series #122.
Nat. Water Res. Inst., Inland Waters Direc¬
torate, Burlington, Ontario. 44 pp.
N.O.A.A. 1981. Hydrograph of monthly mean
levels of the Great Lakes. U.S. Dept. Com¬
merce, Washington, D.C. 1 p.
Roznik, F. D. 1978. Response of the yellow¬
headed blackbird to vegetation and water level
changes in the coastal marshes of Green Bay.
MS Thesis. Univ. Wisconsin-Green Bay. 99 pp.
Ruta, P. J. 1981. Littoral macrophyte com¬
munities of the St. Lawrence River, New York.
MS Thesis. SUNY College Environ. Sci. For.,
Syracuse, NY. 153 pp.
Sherrill, M. G. 1978. Geology and groundwater
in Door County, Wisconsin, with emphasis on
contamination potentials in the Silurian
dolomite. Water Supply Paper 2047. U.S.
Geol. Survey and Wisconsin Dept. Nat. Re¬
sources, Madison, WI. 38 pp.
Stuckey, R. L. 1971. Changes of vascular aquatic
plants during 70 years in Put-In-Bay Harbor,
Lake Erie, Ohio. Ohio J. Science. 71:321-342.
Stuckey, R. L. 1975. A floristic analysis of the
vascular plants of a marsh at Perry’s Victory
Monument, Lake Erie. Michigan Botanist 14:
144-166.
Thwaites, F. T. and K. Bertrand. 1957.
Pleistocene geology of the Door Peninsula,
Wisconsin. Geol. Soc. Amer. Bull. 68:831-880.
Williamson, B. B. 1979. The wetlands of Dickin¬
son Island, St. Clair Co., Michigan and its
response to water level fluctuations. MS
Thesis, Eastern Michigan University, Ypsi¬
lanti, MI. 96 pp.
PLEISTOCENE CARIBOU IN CENTRAL WISCONSIN
Charles A. Long
Department of Biology
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
In the summer of 1985, Jack and Mona
Zelienka found an antler while excavating
their peat bog 6 miles southeast of Coloma,
on County JJ in the township of Richford,
Waushara County, Wisconsin. The antler
was stained and heavy with mineral replace¬
ment, obviously of great age, broken at all
distal aspects (during excavation), and was
shed from a Late Pleistocene caribou
(Rangifer tarandus). The bog, which had
been previously excavated 10 to 12 feet in
some places to create a pond, was deepened
to nearly 30 feet. Subsequently the antler
was discovered in the excavated sediments of
marl and peat; its depth in the peat was
estimated at between 12 and 25 feet. The bog
is sited near the proposed Ice Age Trail along
the Wisconsin terminal moraine in Cary
drift. This is the first record of the caribou
from central Wisconsin, and one of but a
few for the state.
The antler (all in one piece) consists of a
brow tine (or “shovel”) with tip broken
away (length 153 mm); a main beam approx-
Fig. 1. Antler of caribou excavated from peat in Richford Township, Waushara County, Wisconsin.
12
1986]
Long — Caribou in Central Wisconsin
13
imately 625 mm measured to the terminal
palmate expansion, broken off and hollow;
from the burr about 150 mm to the base of
the first palmate tine; and along the beam
260 mm beyond to the next and opposite tine
(entirely broken away). The length from tip
of brow tine to the broken expansion is
approximately 700 mm. The first palmate
tine on the main beam measured 350 mm
from the beam to the deepest notch of the
palm, which was 205 mm across. Its greatest
length was 392 mm. The diameter of the
ovate base, shed from the pedicel, is about
42 to 47.5 mm in diameter, and of the burr
approximately 61.5 mm (see Fig. 1).
Never common in Wisconsin and Upper
Michigan in historic times, caribou wan¬
dered into these areas from muskeg habitats
in nearby Minnesota and Ontario. A. W.
Schorger (1942) reviewed the records and
reports of caribou, listing several from the
Upper Peninsula of Michigan and question¬
able ones for the Brule area in northwest
Wisconsin, probably escaped animals from
the Pierce estate. Among prehistoric bones
found in Polk County, also northwest Wis¬
consin, a few were reported as caribou (Eddy
and Jenks, 1935).
The caribou apparently wandered into
lower Michigan after the Wisconsin glacier
receded. Specimens were dated at 11,200 and
5,870 ±200 years BP. Baker (1983) suggests
that historical records represent the wood¬
land caribou, whereas the prehistoric cari¬
bou were of a larger Arctic form (but the
woodland caribou is a large form). Sub¬
specific characters are hardly obvious in
broken and fragmentary remains of antlers.
Even the sex is impossible to know. Banfield
(1974) and other Canadian workers con¬
sidered all the large woodland caribou to
belong to one subspecies, R. t. caribou.
Apparently all the caribou in Wisconsin
belonged to this species and descended from
the same stock.
The antler herein described is slightly
smaller but very similar in form to that
figured by West (1978) from southeast Wis¬
consin. The nearest of his records is approx¬
imately 150 km southeastward, in Sheboy¬
gan County. The other is from Wauwatosa,
near Milwaukee.
West (1978) assigned his specimens to Late
Pleistocene age, one antler dated by its
sediments to about 12,500 years BP. In sum¬
mary, all known prehistoric caribou from
Wisconsin are scattered along the front of
the Wisconsinan moraines in Polk, Wau¬
shara and Sheboygan counties, and near
Milwaukee. I acknowledge with thanks the
cooperation of both of the Zelienkas.
Literature Cited
Baker, R. H. 1983. Michigan mammals.
Michigan State Univ. Press and Wayne State
Press, Detroit, Michigan. 642 pp., illus.
Banfield, A. W. F. 1974. The mammals of Can¬
ada. Univ. Toronto Press, Toronto. 438 pp.
Eddy, S. and A. E. Jenks. 1935. A kitchen
midden with bones of extinct animals in the
Upper Lakes area. Science, 81(2109):535.
Schorger, A. W. 1942. Extinct and endangered
mammals and birds of the Upper Great Lakes
Region. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett.
34:23-44.
West, R. M. 1978. Late Pleistocene (Wiscon¬
sinan) caribou from southeastern Wisconsin.
Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 66:
50-53.
TECHNOLOGY, INSTITUTIONS, GLOBAL ECONOMY
AND WORLD PEACE
Peter Dorner
Dean of International Studies and Programs
University of Wisconsin-Madison
It seems quite natural for creative human
beings to invent or modify techniques for
satisfying their changing needs and wants. In
this process and over time, the concept of
what constitutes a natural resource changes
with changing human aims, objectives and
ambitions. What constitutes a resource in
human terms is indeed a function of knowl¬
edge and technique. Only a little more than a
century ago petroleum near the surface was
considered a nuisance; today it is referred to
as black gold. The moon was a romantic
symbol and outer space a void throughout
most of history; today both are becoming
highly prized resources. The changing view
of resources brought about by new knowl¬
edge, new techniques and new wants often
leads to conflict. New or modified human
institutions are required to manage these
conflicts and to keep them from destroying
the community.
Changing techniques and scientifically ad¬
vanced technologies, like new resources,
often require a redefinition of the political
unit that makes public policy. In the more or
less self-sufficient Wisconsin farming com¬
munities of 100 years ago, where the major
source of power and transport was the horse,
local communities could set the rules. But
with the coming of the automobile, a hodge¬
podge of local rules and regulations proved
chaotic. The building of roads, the registra¬
tion and licensing of both vehicles and
drivers, the handling and sale of gasoline,
the responsible and safe use of these power¬
ful “horse-less carriages,’ * etc., required a
new set of institutions and a larger political
unit to make public rules. The State of Wis¬
consin had to get involved in these policies.
Neighboring states had to coordinate their
policies on a number of issues and still other
policies had to be set at the national (federal)
level. The airplane created still more com¬
plex problems, and commercial air travel
could not function today without at least
minimal international rules and proce¬
dures— for example a common language for
international air traffic controllers and
common safety and security procedures.
As I look at our national experience over
the past 50 years or so, within my own life¬
time, it seems that our policy response to
problems created by ever changing technol¬
ogies and new resources has moved from
local to state to federal levels. I think this
shift has been mostly the result of three
factors: (1) Technology made the local
community an inappropriate political unit
for policy, thus the regulatory powers of
government have shifted from the states to
the federal level. One good example is in the
regulation and control of the increasing
number of complex chemical compounds
used in many production processes. (2) Our
large internal common market made policy
at the state level an ineffective instrument
for various forms of market intervention —
e.g. farm policy, product safety, labor
legislation, setting and monitoring stan¬
dards, etc. These too are related to techno¬
logical innovation resulting in an ever
increasing labor mobility and a changing
market structure of the economy. (3) Institu¬
tions at the state and local level have at times
failed to protect equally the individual rights
guaranteed by the federal constitution and so
various questions of social, economic, and
civil rights were appealed at the federal level.
14
1986]
Dorner— Global Economy and World Peace
15
The role of the federal government and
our interpretation of appropriate action
under the constitution also gets re-defined,
especially in times of crisis. Our view of the
appropriate role of the federal government
in economic planning and intervention in the
economy of the 1930s, or its role in defining
and protecting the civil rights of all citizens
in the 1950s and 1960s, are good examples of
such re-definition.
I wish to emphasize that it is the level at
which policy is formulated that has shifted
to the more comprehensive political unit.
Managing the consequences of powerful
technology and avoiding chaos through
relative uniformity of rules must be
addressed by policy at this higher level.
Implementation, of course, may remain at
the local level. And I certainly do not
minimize the very important, creative and
experimental nature of state and local
governments in tackling problems and
setting patterns for action later taken and
made applicable at the federal level. This has
been a common pattern throughout our his¬
tory. One of the areas in which we see this
local experimentation operating today is in
the variety of community land trusts, public
development corporations and collective
property rights institutions. I also admit to
the likelihood of decentralization in the
private economy and even new prospects of
cottage industry based on the computer as
suggested by Alan Toeffler in The Third
Wave. Yet while this may be one impact of
computers, their increasing power and
complexity and potential for misuse is also
bringing more federal concern and control.
This interacting process outlined earlier —
new wants, new knowledge, new techniques,
new resources, new conflicts, new policies,
new institutions, and yet additional new
wants, etc. — is not new. What has changed
and what is relatively new is the power and
scope of our modern technologies. The con¬
sequences of many modern technologies
cannot be confined to local communities,
and in many cases cannot even be confined
to the political units called nations. Ours is a
world, says Harlan Cleveland,
“where science, which has always been tran¬
sitional, keeps inventing inherently global
technologies— for weather observations, mili¬
tary reconnaissance, telecommunications, data
processing, resource sensing, and orbital in¬
dustry. As a result ... we find ourselves mov¬
ing beyond concepts of national ownership,
sovereignty and citizenship to ideas such as the
global commons, the international monitoring
of global risks, and ‘the common heritage of
mankind’” (Cleveland, 1985).
We live now in a world of increasing eco¬
nomic interdependence among nations
whose institutions remain geared to address¬
ing problems within their own national
boundaries. But the scope and reach of
global technology has consequences beyond
the control of these national institutions.
Despite the size of its economy and its
sophisticated science, the United States is
tied into this web of interdependence just as
other nations are. We can no longer with¬
draw from the world and return to the isola¬
tionist ideology of a century ago, nor can we
dominate the world, a role more or less dic¬
tated to us by circumstances for 20 years
after World War II.
The US now depends on foreign sources
for more than half of its supply of 15
minerals crucial for our industrial and post¬
industrial technologies. For 8 of these
minerals, import dependence runs between
80 and 100 percent. Oil production within
the US is not likely to see a major spurt and
we will probably become increasingly depen¬
dent on oil imports. Our agriculture and
parts of our manufacturing industry depend
heavily on foreign markets.
One important change in the world
economy has been the dramatic increase in
world wide trade. The dependence of the US
economy on international trade tripled in the
period 1965-1979. A corollary of this
increased trade is an economy less amenable
16
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
to direction by domestic economic policies.
These last twenty years, concludes
G. Edward Schuh,
“have been a period in which the economic
integration of the international economy has
far outdistanced its political integration. In
fact, we have witnessed a successive break¬
down and growing irrelevance of international
institutions at the very time that our respective
economies have become increasingly inte¬
grated. Domestic economic policies have less
and less relevance in today’s world, and do
little more than create suspicion and lack of
confidence in national governments since their
policies do less and less what they say they
will” (Schuh, 1985).
“No nation/ * concludes Harlan Cleve¬
land, “controls even that central symbol of
national independence, the value of its
money; inflation and recession are both
transnational.”
Perhaps the closest we have come to a
really transnational institution with power to
enforce its decisions is the increasingly
complex multi-national corporation. Al¬
though they have been much criticized for
some of their international practices, often
appropriately, it is almost impossible to
conceive of the world economy functioning
without them. One-fifth of the world’s gross
product is created by these multi-nationals —
more of them based in the US than anywhere
else. In many commodities, world trade is
dominated by the multi-nationals, and a
large part of registered international trade is
indeed the internal transactions of these
international companies. With cheap and
rapid transportation and instant communi¬
cation, these large multi-national corpora¬
tions have the capacity quickly to shift
capital, technology and management all over
the world. Is it any wonder that national
policies do less and less of what they say they
will?
Strong economic interdependencies, how¬
ever, are not the only global ties among
nations. Another major consequence of
modern technologies is their environmental
impact. More and more species are threat¬
ened with extinction. The burning of greater
amounts of fossil fuels and widespread
deforestation in various parts of the world
raises the C02 content of the atmosphere.
Acid rain and dying forests are not confined
to the areas where the sulfur compounds
enter the atmosphere.
Of course, the most powerful and poten¬
tially destructive technologies of all are
nuclear weapons. This has led many to re¬
evaluate the meaning of “national secur¬
ity”— concluding that such security is not
likely to be found in more weaponry of
increasingly devastating power. There is,
says Thomas Wilson,
“an unavoidable nexus between the security of
a nation and the state of the planet; there is a
connecting link between the peace of nations
and the integrity of natural systems; there is a
critical relationship between international
order and ecological balance. Indeed, the
threat to the security of nations today is much
more easily comprehended from an ecological
than from a military perspective. This point is
made with great force by the . . . ‘Nuclear
Winter Study’” (Wilson, 1985).
Modern science and technology have
brought new possibilities for global (and
indeed extra-global) actions and impacts.
The reach and power of some of these tech¬
nologies have consequences that cannot be
contained in national decision-making
systems. The human drive to “control
nature for human purposes” must itself be
controlled to avoid the potential widespread
destruction of natural systems, without
which human life would be impossible. The
international institutions thus far created are
not yet capable of dealing constructively
with the global problems that modern
science and technology have borne.
My comments should not be interpreted as
being in any way anti-science or anti-tech¬
nology. The earth’s 4-5 billion people and
the many yet to be added before world
population levels off (even with the best of
efforts and the use of new technologies)
cannot be fed without continued develop¬
ments in science and technology. Nor can
1986]
Dorner — Global Economy and World Peace
17
critical soils and fragile environments be
protected and preserved without new scien¬
tific knowledge and its well-designed techno¬
logical application. These must be selective
developments, to be sure. All that is new and
all that is possible is not necessarily de¬
sirable. We must by all means give as much
public policy and institutional attention to
alleviating the negative socio-economic and
environmental consequences of technolog¬
ical developments as we do to the fostering
and the diffusion of new technologies. Sci¬
ence and technology have negative conse¬
quences as well as positive ones. But those
negative consequences are likely to call for
more research, new knowledge and addi¬
tional developments in technology.
In view of these urgent global problems,
national policies often seem petty and
contradictory. Said Saudi Prince Sultan
Saud as he looked out the window of the
space shuttle Discovery, “Looking at it from
here, the troubles all over the world and not
just the Middle East look very strange as you
see the boundaries and borderlines dis¬
appearing. I think lots of people who are
involved in causing most of these problems
ought to come up here and take a look.”
Must we wait for world government
before any progress can be made in con¬
trolling these potentially destructive trends?
We should recognize that some progress has
been made on a variety of issues. Inter¬
national need not always be global and in¬
volve all nation states. In several areas na¬
tions in a particular region are working
together on common problems. In other
regions, of course, adjoining nations are at
war. We are not very far along the path of
creating appropriate institutions and
enforcement powers to control some of the
threatening consequences of the new tech¬
nologies. In a view that’s probably over op¬
timistic, Thomas Wilson (1985) concludes:
“If national security is dependent upon world
security ... if there is no other way to save our
own outstretched necks — then the imperative
drive of national interest in national security
impels governments not toward divisive and
hostile behavior but toward cooperative and
collaborative behavior in world affairs,
whether they like each other or not.’’
There is an urgent need for new institu¬
tional forms to deal with the complex issues
threatening the global economy and environ¬
ment. Fashioning such transnational institu¬
tions would be more easily accomplished in a
world at peace rather than a world of sus¬
picious and warring nations. Individual na¬
tions, especially the biggest and the most
powerful, must seek cooperation and accom¬
modation rather than threats and confronta¬
tion, dialogue and debate rather than ac¬
cusations and denunciations.
As educators, we must recognize that
many issues can no longer be kept in separ¬
ate compartments for domestic and inter¬
national solution. Most major domestic
policies of the United States have significant
effects on almost every other nation. What
the United States is able to do, or wants to
do, also depends increasingly on the acts and
policies of other countries. That is what
interdependence means. Educators at all
levels must be aware of the fact that in a
democratic system where people are the
ultimate policy makers, individual citizens
must be taught to understand these com¬
plexities. And elected officials must be able
to comprehend these issues so they can help
educate the public and provide the informed
judgments required for sound policies.
In analyzing the need for institutional
change to resolve domestic conflicts and
attempt to make private, individual action
consistent with the larger public purpose, the
late John R. Commons, Wisconsin’s great
institutional economist, suggested that it is
quite reasonable to expect that individual
action is intended to serve individual goals
and purposes. The real question, however, is
whether individual action also furthers, or at
least does not conflict with, the larger public
purposes, or whether it serves only private
purposes (Commons, 1924). We might para¬
phrase Commons and suggest that individual
18
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
nations today must see their own policies in a
similar light: it is not a question of whether
their policies should serve their own national
purposes, that must be taken for granted.
But the real question is whether national
policies also advance, or at least do not
conflict with, the broader international
public purposes. In our increasingly inter¬
dependent world, self interest must be re¬
evaluated constantly. Following a course of
narrow self interest, whether at the indi¬
vidual level or that of the nation state can be
self defeating and destructive.
We must learn to extend our sense of
community to peoples in far away places
with customs and beliefs quite different
from our own. Extending and identifying
our self-interest within ever-widening
contexts is a basic ingredient of human
history. For most people the nation state was
the latest of these extensions. But these
urgent global issues now require that we
extend our empathy to other people around
the world. Achieving this is the fundamental
role of new institutions. This, of course,
requires a positive effort on all our parts to
understand other peoples and their cultures,
their languages, their history and their
aspirations.
We are born into a world of going con¬
cerns and established institutions. We
essentially inherit a system and take its
governing institutions pretty much for
granted. Most of us do not get involved in
creating new institutions. At best we help to
reshape the ones we inherited, and then
usually only marginally. Creating new trans¬
national institutions to deal with truly global
issues, whose rules and procedures provide
mutual benefits and mutual restraints for the
weak as well as for the powerful will be an
immense task. We must not underestimate
the difficulties involved. But neither can we
withdraw and fail to address these issues — in
our schools, at our universities, in political
debates.
It does, perhaps, call for a new type of
citizenship, where the responsibilities of
citizenship are defined in a broader context.
We must be ever conscious not only of the
lives and the needs of other humans on this
space ship earth— this global village. We
must also be increasingly sensitive to the
protection of the natural systems which
sustain us. In closing, I should like to quote
from a 1922 book by L. P. Jacks entitled
Constructive Citizenship.
We human beings are apt to think our race the
only object in creation that really matters. We
have developed a kind of class-consciousness
in presence of the universe. The human race is
all-important in its own eyes: nature is there to
be ruled by us; her forces are meant to turn
our wheels; her materials to be exploited for
our enrichment; her laws to provide for our
comfort; and the very stars in their courses
must be yoked to our wagons. We have still to
learn that the human race is tolerated in the
universe only on strict conditions of good
behavior. If we neglect our citizenship there,
or think that we can play fast and loose with
the laws that are written there, laws that were
not voted into existence by us, those other
citizenships will come to grief. This human
class-consciousness in presence of the rest of
the universe is not a good thing. It is a
dangerous thing. Unless we bear that in mind,
our study of the rights and duties of the citizen
is not worthwhile (Jacks, 1922).
References
Cleveland, Harlan (1985), “The Passing of Re¬
moteness,” HHH Institute Newsletter, Univer¬
sity of Minnesota, May, Volume 8, No. 1 .
Commons, John R. (1924). Legal Foundations of
Capitalism , MacMillin Company (republished
in 1957 by University of Wisconsin Press).
Jacks, L. P. (1922). Constructive Citizenship,
London: Hodder and Stoughton, Ltd.
Schuh, G. Edward (1985). “The International
Capital Market as a Source of Instability in In¬
ternational Commodity Markets,” paper given
at the XIX International Conference of
Agricultural Economists, August 26-Septem-
ber 4, 1985, Malaga Spain.
Wilson, Thomas W. Jr. (1985). “The Global
Environment and The Quest for Peace: A
Revolution In The Scale of Things,” Social
Education, March.
“THE MAN WHO LIVED AMONG THE CANNIBALS”:
MELVILLE IN MILWAUKEE
Thomas Pribek
Department of English
University of Wisconsin-LaCrosse
Early in 1886, after years of literary
silence, Herman Melville began writing his
last book, Billy Budd. He died five years
later, virtually unnoticed, because many
people believed that he had died years
before. In fact, in twenty years of employ¬
ment as customs’ Inspector for the Port of
New York Melville continued to write but
published only a small volume of Civil War
poems for public sale. He also wrote Clare l
and another volume of poetry, both printed
in limited editions for his family and friends.
Therefore, the final phase of Melville’s
public literary career— and his last work in
prose before Billy Budd — was a brief at¬
tempt at lecturing, during which he once
toured the Midwest and spoke in Milwaukee.
Melville met with decidedly-mixed success
over these years, 1857-60, and it became
clear to him that he would not make much
money, nor would he revive his popularity as
the author of adventure and travel narra¬
tives. The lecture tours were really his last
efforts to maintain a career as a popular
writer, and their ultimate failure probably
accounted for his decision not to make a
prose romance out of his last adventure, his
trip to the Holy Land in 1856-57, but the
philosophical poem Clarel , written for in¬
timate acquaintances. His first lecture was
“Statues in Rome,” adapted from this trip;
his last was called “Traveling.”
Ironically, his nearest success on stage
went back to the beginning of his career. The
lecture he delivered in Milwaukee and else¬
where his second year on speaking tour was
“The South Seas,” actually fitting the
reputation he worked so hard to overcome as
“the man who lived among the cannibals,”
as he summarized his reputation in a letter to
Nathaniel Hawthorne.1 It became certain,
finally, that he could not appeal to audiences
as an entertainer, like the reigning stage star
Bayard Taylor and the later star, Twain, nor
could he be accepted as a philosopher or
social commentator, like the reigning sage of
New England Ralph Waldo Emerson.
Melville spoke in Milwaukee on February
25, 1859. By the time he appeared there, a
late stop during the second lecture tour, he
was working much harder to please local
crowds than most critics have assumed.2 His
subject, content, and delivery were
calculated for stage success. However, the
Milwaukee performance was fairly typical in
its dubious outcome. In books, Melville
could be risque, impudent, even raucous.
However, this character he found only
through literary personae; Melville in person
was urbane, often subdued, even shy and un¬
comfortable among strangers. He lacked
Twain’s talent for embodying his literary
characters. Melville in person was usually a
New England gentleman who remembered
his genteel roots. (With the possible excep¬
tions of James Fenimore Cooper, James
Russell Lowell, and Emerson, Melville had
more claim to New England gentry than
any of the prominent nineteenth-century
writers.)3
Melville was thirty-seven when he decided
to try lecturing, thirty-nine by the time he
appeared in Milwaukee. He had been a
writer for thirteen years and a farmer, too,
for half that time; but now, with a chronic
back problem that would plague him the rest
of his life, he was forced to rely almost en¬
tirely on his father-in-law to support his
family. Normally active and independent,
Melville was irritated by the prospect of a
19
20
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
sedentary life and family charity. He had
already realized what many other writers
more salable than he had found: few people
could earn a living as an author, but several
supported themselves writing and giving live
appearances, by traveling the lyceum circuit.
Melville was now unusually pressed for
money. He was overdrawn on his accounts
with publishers. One publisher of two recent
books had gone out of business and was sell¬
ing its plates, and another had lost its stock
of some earlier books in a warehouse fire.
Melville had nothing new ready for sale,
having just returned from his trip to the
Holy Land. A series of lectures seemed a
practical venture for turning his recent ex¬
cursion into something immediately profit¬
able. So Melville wrote “Statues in Rome,”
an analysis of the philosophy of art, with an
added dose of gossip and personal anec¬
dotes. He knew the subject would attract lit¬
tle interest in itself.4
This first lecture, delivered through the
1857-58 lecture season (the winter months),
generally received poor reviews. It was not a
shrewd choice of topic for one whose forte
was tale-telling rather than descriptive or
critical analysis; moreover, reviewers gener¬
ally agreed that Melville’s delivery was
rather dry. He had hoped for publicity to
generate invitations and was thus disap¬
pointed. In addition, the reviewers tended to
focus on characterizing the man who lived
with the cannibals, rather than the author of
a piece of statuary. Audiences preferred a
glimpse of an entertaining personality,
rather than a systematic analysis of works of
art which they could not see before them.
Nonetheless, he was sufficiently encouraged,
and paid, to plan a second season in a more
business-like manner. He began a correspon¬
dence to arrange a professional circuit from
New England, into the Southern states, and
through the Midwest, rather than waiting for
invitations.5
An old family friend, William E. Cramer,
editor and owner of the Milwaukee Daily
Wisconsin , undertook the local publicity and
might even have suggested Melville to the
Young Men’s Association, which sponsored
the Milwaukee appearance. Melville spoke in
Albany Hall, appropriately named to sug¬
gest that the city’s cultural tastes were as
refined as those of an eastern city, and
Cramer appealed to civic pride, pointing out
in advance notices that a well-attended lec¬
ture “always gives a stranger a good impres¬
sion of the intellectual culture of the city.’’6
Melville had a promising field before him
in Milwaukee in 1859; the city was growing
and its affluent citizens eager to show their
interest in things cultural. The Young Men’s
Association was composed, like many sim¬
ilarly-named groups in the Midwest and
across Wisconsin, of business and profes¬
sional men who were accumulating a library,
presenting lectures and debates, and offering
educational courses from a variety of cul¬
tural topics. A Young Men’s Association or
Young Men’s Library Association existed in
Beloit, Columbus, Fond du Lac, Janesville,
Kenosha, LaCrosse, Madison, Oshkosh,
Portage, Racine, Sheboygan, Watertown,
Waukesha, and Waupun. They shared the
name and corresponded on arranging pro¬
grams, although they had no state- wide
organization.7
In the 1850s, lyceums grew faster in the
Midwest than any other part of the country
and continued their popularity into the Civil
War years. Chicago, Sheboygan, and
Milwaukee were among the best stops for a
speaker; the cities usually drew large crowds
and offered good money — $50 a night was
standard in eastern cities but only a few such
stops existed in the West. Bayard Taylor
once wrote from Milwaukee, “The people
are infatuated. If I lecture next winter, I can
spend three months in the West and have
engagements for every night.’’ This was
Taylor’s impression in 1854, when Milwau¬
kee also heard such speakers as Emerson,
Horace Mann, and Horace Greeley.8
Nonetheless, the midwestern audience was
a somewhat difficult one for New Englanders.
Newspaper reviewers were antagonistic
1986]
Pribek — Melville in Milwaukee
21
toward any Easterner who showed the slight¬
est trace of snobbery or disrespect for the
culture of the West; in addition, the charac¬
ter of midwestern audiences and their expec¬
tations sharply differed from those in New
England. The Young Men’s Associations at¬
tracted people with social expectations and
pretensions, but these lyceum organizations
in the West belonged to a second phase of
the movement and lacked its original New
England roots in the drive for popular
literacy and free public education. By the
standards of the time, Wisconsin had al¬
ready accomplished such improvements in
its first decade of statehood. Consequently,
audiences in this state and others in the
Midwest demanded as much entertainment
as edification and were generally unreceptive
to speakers who appeared as though they
wanted to “school” the audience.9
For instance, Cramer’s paper pointed out
that Melville’s lecture was “entertaining”
and “ also instructive” (emphasis added),
suggesting the educational material was
secondary. Cramer wrote that Melville “lay
open a field of adventure and wanderings to
which one rarely has his attention called”
(emphasis added). Melville found out that
reviewers were quick to bristle at the suspi¬
cion that they were being patronized or
treated like uneducated backwoodsmen.
Milwaukee’s literacy was accomplished in
part by German immigration, half the city
by 1860. The German population in partic¬
ular regarded itself as better educated and
cultivated than other nationalities, including
the native Americans, and very much re¬
sented being considered a pioneer settle¬
ment.10
When Melville first published south-sea
adventures like Typee and Omoo , he had
been accused of romantic exaggeration of
the exotic island life. His new lecture on
“The South Seas,” however, now brought
occasional complaints among midwestern re¬
viewers that he was rehearsing well known
material which any library could yield. For
once, Melville found himself accused of a
want of originality and a failure to be suffi¬
ciently exotic and entertaining.11 The
Milwaukee Daily Free Democrat , for in¬
stance, commented, “On the whole, we
think there are few who knew much more
about the South Seas, after he concluded,
than before he began.” Melville had said
that this lecture was not to be a personal
narrative — “a great mistake,” said the
paper, “for had he stated some of the scenes
which he had passed through himself, and
thereby invested his lecture with some life,
instead of telling us what the primary
geographies told us in our schooldays, he
would have created a better impression in
Milwaukee.”
The starting time for Melville’s lecture was
moved up a half-hour so that Albany Hall
could offer a held-over performance of
Father Kemp’s Old Folks Concert Troupe, a
costumed choir and orchestra with a variety
of sacred and patriotic music. The choir
alone numbered thirty-seven people; the
group was billed as “The Largest Concert
Troupe in the World.” Melville was in com¬
petition with a musical extravaganza, and
although the auditorium was reserved for
him, he was obliged to defer to the more
popular show. In fact, the newspaper adver¬
tisements for performances at Albany Hall
and elsewhere indicate a demand for drama
and musical entertainment. Other selections
in the winter season included a “Grand Mas¬
querade Ball” and “St. David’s Vocal and
Instrumental Concert.” Melville’s competi¬
tion on February 25th at Johnson’s Athen-
eum was selections from The Merchant of
Venice and Rob Roy. The Atheneum was
also booked for Uncle Tom's Cabin , partly a
musical on stage, and Ten Nights in a Bar¬
room , starring the popular cracker-barrel
comedian “Yankee” Locke. Such variety
acts of the lyceum stage have been called
“prevaudeville.”12
The advance publicity for Melville’s lec¬
ture billed him as the author of Typee, his
first book of south-sea adventure — not as
the author of any metaphysical allegories,
22
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
like Mardi and Moby-Dick , that were not
selling now. Cramer had specifically re¬
minded people that Melville had lived with
cannibals and experienced episodes beyond
the wonders of imagination. He did have ex¬
actly the kind of material that might keep an
audience spell bound. Bayard Taylor was
due in town for the Young Men’s Associa¬
tion the next week, and his stage personality
suggests what the audience preferred.
Taylor, popular as a world traveler, wore
costumes of places he described; his best
known outfit was a pseudo-arab costume
complete with scimitar. He avoided being a
moral observer and spiced up his lectures
with exotic-sounding poetry. He avoided us¬
ing a script and the appearance of delivering
a packaged performance. The Daily Wiscon¬
sin called his manner “enthusiastic” and
“eloquent,” noting his handsomeness made
him popular particularly with the ladies. He
spoke in Milwaukee on “Life at the North,”
travelogues being among the most popular
stage programs. Taylor had accompanied
Commodore Matthew Perry in the Pacific
and had also some claim to being an expert
on far- western islands. Taylor was willing to
make money as a specimen from unknown
parts of the world, an entertainer with
adventure stories.13 However, Melville, as
everyone knew, had lived with cannibals and
had experiences as wild as anything that
Taylor might describe.
Nevertheless, Melville could not compete
as a comparable entertainer, although he did
make certain efforts to please his audience.
He announced that this lecture was not to be
an intellectual argument, but a collection of
facts and impressions without a theme. Even
his choice of material was a concession to
popular taste. However, Melville’s Pacific
travels were fifteen years old and his
memory less vivid than Taylor’s. Melville
had outgrown his former character. So he
did not put all his material into the form of a
personal narrative and actually opened with
a summary of literary references on the
South Seas and geographical information
before recounting any of the “exceptional
phenomena” that his audience had come
for — indeed, was led to believe they would
get, according to the advance publicity. In
fact, there was little on cannibalism and no
lewdness. Melville did attempt to appeal to
the audience taste for the exotic and sensa¬
tional with description of the bizarre “devil¬
fish,” the art of tattooing, and a sly
reference to the “awful ceremony” of the
taboo, a subject he said that he could not
reveal in such a proper atmosphere as this,
although it contained strangeness transcend¬
ing the wildest romances of Mrs. Radcliffe.
He spoke about Free Lovers, Mormons, and
various utopian societies seeking asylums, all
objects of public curiosity at the time.14 He
recounted an anecdote of meeting a Pro¬
fessor of Moral Philosophy who had aban¬
doned civilized life for the sylvan retreat of
the islands and three wives, the kind of
sailor’s yarn that the reviewers could ques¬
tion (in good nature) and appreciate for its
romantic sentiments; overstepping the
bounds of the probable and decent might be
dubious history and morality, but good
theater. He even worked in a reference to the
Newall House, a stylish Milwaukee hotel, to
contrast primitive culture to civilized society.
Imagine, he said, a bare-limbed savage with
awful tattoos appearing at such a proper
place; this image might appeal to civic pride,
and, at the same time, the touch of titillation
made good theater.
On the whole, however, Melville was
“packaged” more obviously than an au¬
dience would desire. For instance, one at¬
tempt at describing sea colors, which
reviewers noted, has a consciously rhetorical
and literary style. Here is Melville’s text, in
an exaggerated gothic style with allusions to
the Bible and Paradise Lost:
I have been in a whaleboat at midnight when,
having lost the ship, we would keep steering
through the lonely night for her, while the sea
that weltered by us would present the pallid
look of the face of a corpse, and lit by its spec¬
tral gleam we men in the boats showed to each
1986]
Pribek — Melville in Milwaukee
23
other like so many weather-beaten ghosts.
Then to mark Leviathan come wallowing
along, dashing the pale sea into sparkling
cascades of fire, showering it all over till the
monster would look like Milton’s Satan,
riding the flame billows of the infernal world.
We [theater audience] might fill night after
night with that fertile theme . . . and tell of the
adventurous sailors. (165-66)15
However, Melville dropped the scene for
that night and had nothing marvelous to
develop from such supernatural portent. He
made no real effort at suspense and delivered
the description without any spontaneity or
sensationalism in which the audience might
participate. The Daily Free Democrat thus
complained that Melville offered few il¬
lustrations beyond general comments, cut
short the personal anecdotes, and then gave
“word-painting” rather than anecdotes with
“any inherent or thrilling interest.”
Melville was most emphatically himself in
an ironic passage criticizing missionary work
as personal gain, jingoism and colonialism,
and Emersonian optimism:
[T]he result of civilization, at the Sandwich
Islands and elsewhere, is found productive to
the civilizers, destructive to the civilizees. It is
said to be compensation — a very philosophical
word; but it appears to be very much on the
principle of the old game, “You lose, I win”:
good philosophy for the winner. (179)
Although he announced no theme to his lec¬
ture, Melville had an explicit message: leave
the islands alone. He told his audience that
Americans should have no pretensions of
civilizing other people until they civilized
themselves. He meant no particular criticism
of his audience here, although such a remark
was ill-placed in Milwaukee, especially
before people who subscribed to a lecture
program chosen to represent a highly-
refined, established culture, and who were
also drawn to hear Melville by Cramer’s ad¬
vice that they show interest in intellectual
offerings. As in the reference to the Newall
House, Milwaukeeans wanted to be compli¬
mented for their civilization. They may
indeed have come principally for entertain¬
ment; however, they were not going to ap¬
plaud heartily for someone who would lift
the veil only slightly upon the voluptuary life
of the South Seas they imagined, and who
then told them that they had no right to
gawk upon the rest from any superior per¬
spective. Bayard Taylor encouraged audi¬
ences to imagine themselves in foreign lands;
Melville told them to stay home and civilize
themselves.
In the words of Cramer’s review in the
Daily Wisconsin , adventurers had “no
right” to interfere with existing cultures. The
United States should leave Hawaii alone and
thus keep it from “the demoralizing associa¬
tions of modern civilization.” Even Cramer,
who was determined to be sympathetic to
Melville in his paper, did not comment on
the sentiments his friend expressed. He
would not criticize him, but Cramer could
hardly tell the civilized people of Milwaukee
that they were no better than naked savages
and that the tattooed Polynesian would be as
amused by the elegant functions in the
Newall House as its patrons would be by
him. Cramer did little more than summarize
the lecture after some opening impressions
of Melville as a speaker. He wrote favorably
of Melville and his delivery, endorsing the
lecture as a whole, but avoiding specific sup¬
port for the themes.
The Daily Free Democrat had no restraint;
the audience would have preferred, it said,
“personal reminiscences ... to such bom¬
bast.” So, “The lecture was attentively
listened to,” noted the reporter, “but the ap¬
preciation of it, we think, was testified by
the limited applause at the close. The
Association, we think, received more profit
from the lecture than the audience.” The
snide remark that the audience had not got¬
ten its money’s worth was about the worst
judgment a reviewer could pronounce. Peo¬
ple were not going to quibble too much
about a speaker’s sentiments, so long as the
speaker was entertaining. For this one ob-
24
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
server, at least, Melville had not passed the
crucial test. The Daily Free Democrat said
Melville had a “large audience . . . perhaps
the most of whom were disappointed in the
lecturer.” He gave “a literary effort below
mediocrity, unless he intended it as a
reading. In fact, it seemed as though he had
one of his romances before him, and had
selected the most uninteresting passages to
read for our edification.” The audience
listened “attentively,” according to this
report; however, newspapers invariably
complimented local audiences so, sometimes
the greater to criticize an uninteresting
speaker. “[S]o general were his remarks that
they failed to create much interest in the
minds of hearers,” the paper said.
The Daily Sentinel agreed that Melville
had “an unusually large audience” to hear
him talk about the beauties of the tropics “in
his own inimitable way.” The Sentinel of¬
fered little actual review and principally
summarized the lecture, as the Daily
Wisconsin had done. Only the hostile Daily
Free Democrat undertook a critique rather
than a summary. Although the Sentinel
would appear to have approved of Melville
by its comment on his “inimitable” style,
the compliment is hardly hearty and even
has a certain irony. Familiarity with the
idiom of newspaper reviewing in the nine¬
teenth century suggests that the term was
something of a cliche; it was often used in
advance publicity in place of anything more
precise, and in a review, it may mean only
that the reviewer had not really observed
anything remarkable. “As a lecturer,” the
reporter noted, “Mr. Melville sustains the
idea we have formed of him in ‘Typeer’ [sic],
a soft voluptuous ease is the predominant
characteristic. . . . [T]he same drowsy
enchantment that makes his writings so
fascinating radiates from the speaker.” The
Sentinel's reviewer might have been a subtle
reader of Melville, if indeed he had read
Melville, for few critics would have called
Typee “drowsy enchantment.” The book
actually had been accused of lewdness, Mun-
chausenism, and trumped-up criticism of
colonial missionaries. Moreover, Melville
read his new material from a script— only
the Daily Free Democrat was unhappy for
this— but, even though the Sentinel did not
register any criticism of its own, its report of
Melville’s subdued manner was not generally
an endorsement of stage skill. Audiences
usually preferred a more animated speaker.
In a sense, the Sentinel had called Melville
“bookish,” a term the Daily Free Democrat
used as sharp criticism.
Cramer’s review in his own paper was the
only solidly-complimentary one that Melville
received. The Daily Wisconsin, in fact, said
a “very large and appreciative audience”
heard Melville, although it did not judge the
applause, as the Daily Free Democrat had
done. The Daily Wisconsin denied that Mel¬
ville read a “stilted lecture” nor indulged in
“rhetorical flights,” but instead spoke in
“delicious literary languor . . . graceful and
musical.” Melville was not one for stage
theatrics, but instead spoke “as one would
like to sit down to a club room, and with the
blue smoke of a meerschaum gracefully curl¬
ing and floating away . . . dream for hours,
even till the night wore away.” Cramer’s
simile was appropriate; in fact, Melville was
generally best in intimate surroundings.
Albany Hall seated about 800 people. The
actual attendance can only be estimated — all
papers called it “large”— but despite the
Daily Free Democrat's insinuation about the
Young Men’s Association profiting at the
audience’s expense, the receipts do not sug¬
gest a tremendously successful booking or a
capacity crowd. The Association actually
lost money on the particular performance.
The ledger records $50.45 received at the
door, $50 for Melville’s fee, and another
$29.50 for expenses. The door receipts do
not include subscribers to the season lecture
program, but there is no estimate of exactly
how many members attended. Ticket prices
were 25<P, the standard charge for stage per-
1986]
Pribek— Melville in Milwaukee
25
formances (Father Kemp’s Troupe charged
the same). At any rate, the “large” crowd
did not draw enough from the public to meet
expenses for the performance. A “large”
audience was another standard comment in
reviews and might often mean no more than
an average crowd. For instance, the Sentinel
specifically said that Father Kemp’s con¬
certs were “fully attended. . . . The Hall will
be hardly large enough to hold all who wish
to hear them,” the paper predicted. The
Daily Wisconsin complained that ladies were
forced to stand.16
So, it is doubtful if Melville had anywhere
near a full house. The Young Men’s Associa¬
tion did not renew its invitation to Melville
when he expressed interest in performing a
third season. Melville did get bookings the
next year in the East but received almost no
response from places on his midwestern
tour. Melville was not cut out to offer the
kind of entertainment which inspired enthu¬
siastic reviewers and return crowds, who had
plenty of top-name talent to choose from.
By estimates, Melville was only the sixth
most popular of ten speakers on the Associa¬
tion’s 1858-59 program in Milwaukee. 17
Cramer’s review in the Daily Wisconsin
was favorable; the Sentinel's was essentially
noncommittal; the Daily Free Democrat's
was hostile. The Daily Wisconsin and
Sentinel put Melville on page one; the Daily
Free Democrat put him back on page three.
All told, Melville did comparatively well in
Milwaukee. He also appeared in Chicago,
Rockford, and Quincy, Illinois, but got few
good reviews, most observers agreeing that
he had no distinctive stage personality,
seemed too rehearsed, and spoke too softly.
The eastern reviewers had been generally
favorable about “The South Seas,” but
there was, ultimately, little encouragement
for trying the midwestern states again.
Melville only performed in ten cities during
the 1858-59 season, and although he made
more money than he had the year before in
sixteen cities and was apparently becoming
more comfortable on stage, he had not done
well enough to expect a new career as a
lecturer — particularly if he had to rely on
pleasing western audiences. In Michigan,
Bayard Taylor wrote a parody of “The
Raven,” comparing the bird’s “nevermore”
and the student’s vain efforts to escape, to
fans and agents with speaking invitations
rapping at his chamber door and allowing
him sleep “nevermore.” Melville had no
such troubles to complain of. 18
In addition, Melville had not managed to
generate any new demand for the once-
popular south sea narratives. He was already
working on poetry in the summer of 1859,
and, without much enthusiasm, looking into
possibilities for publishing a first volume of
verse. He also prepared a third lecture, as a
more practical venture. However, to cancel
his debts to his father-in-law, which Melville
had been accumulating ever since his mar¬
riage, he agreed to deed his farm property to
his wife, amounting to an admission of his
failure as head-of-family and provider. The
consensus among the family — Herman’s
too, probably, though he resisted it — was
that he would have to find steady work and
give up uncertain literary pursuits. He ap¬
proved of efforts to find him a political ap¬
pointment, although he did not actively pur¬
sue one.19
Lecturing was still his only immediate
source of income, but his third season was
the least profitable of all. Melville was so
outwardly depressed and physically weak
that family members suggested a vacation at
sea again in 1860, as they had the year before
he tried lecturing. He planned to go through
the South Seas again; ironically, he became
sea sick on the voyage out— the only time
this had ever happened to him — and he cut
short the voyage. When he landed in San
Francisco, he decided to go home immedi¬
ately. In fact, Melville received an invitation
to read there, which he declined, although he
had manuscripts with him.20 By coincidence,
Melville’s final realization that he would
26
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
have to stay home and work at some routine
came just before Mark Twain first lighted
out for the western territories and began to
find an idiom for himself as a world traveler
and writer.
Melville’s difficulties as a popular writer
have been exaggerated and romanticized. He
never was as much the deliberate outcast as
some readers have thought; he never was an
Edgar Allan Poe or Charles Baudelaire,
writing what he thought profound to spite a
public who never could appreciate him.21
Even Melville’s most critically-condemned
and publicly-ignored books, Pierre and The
Confidence-Man, were disappointments be¬
cause he had thought that they would sell.
Melville did not imagine himself essentially
at odds with the bourgeois reading public,
although he did finally realize that what
talent he had as a writer would never make
him rich or even provide a sole means of sup¬
port. His lecturing, like his last romances,
was a disappointment to Melville because he
believed that it might work. But he found
out, once again, that he did not have what it
took to please the crowd.
Notes
1 See letter to Hawthorne in Moby -Dick, ed. Harrison
Hayford and Hershel Parker (New York: Norton, 1967)
556-60.
2 Merrell R. Davis, “Melville’s Midwestern Lecture
Tour, 1859,’’ Philological Quarterly 20 (1941): 57, sug¬
gests that Melville’s South Sea lecture lacked spontane¬
ity because he had no fresh observations on his ex¬
periences; and Merton M. Sealts, Jr., Melville as
Lecturer (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1957) 100-01,
121-23, believes that Melville “was thoroughly tired” of
trying to rework the popular subject and, furthermore,
had “grown alien to mid-century America.”
3 See comments from his cousin Henry Gansevoort in
Jay Leyda, The Melville Log: A Documentary Life of
Herman Melville, 1819-1891, 2 vols. (1951; rpt. New
York: Gordian Press, 1969) 2: 600-01; Alfred Kazin,
An American Procession: The Major American Writers
from 1830 to 1930— The Crucial Century (New York:
Knopf, 1984) 131-60; and Sealts 61.
4 Leon Howard, Herman Melville: A Biography
(Berkeley: U of California P, 1951) 21 1 , 256-57.
5 Howard 258-60; and Sealts 58.
6 Newspaper reviews are taken from the collections of
the State Historical Society, Madison.
7 See Ralph M. Aderman, “When Herman Melville
Lectured Here,” Historical Messenger 9.2 (1953): 3;
Carl Bode, The American Lyceum: Town Meeting of
the Mind (1956; rpt. Carbondale: Southern Illinois UP,
1968) 174-75; and John C. Colson, ‘“Public Spirit’ at
Work: Philanthropy and Pubic Libraries in Nineteenth-
Century Wisconsin,” Wisconsin Magazine of History
59.3 (1976): 192-209.
8 Bode 168, 175.
9 Bode 98, 166-68; Davis 52-53; and Sealts 61, 83-84.
10 Kathleen Warnes, “Milwaukee: The German
Athens in America, 1835-1920,” Wisconsin Academy of
Sciences, Arts, and Letters Symposium and Conference,
Wausau, 25 April 1986. None of the German-language
papers in Milwaukee reviewed Melville.
1 1 See Sealts 73-74, 94.
12 Richard Nelson Current, Wisconsin: A Bicenten¬
nial History (New York: Norton, 1977) 147.
13 See Bode 217-19.
14 Sealts 64.
15 The full text of “The South Seas” is reconstructed
by Sealts (155-80). Page references for passages quoted
in the test of this essay are contained in parentheses.
16 Davis 47; Leyda 603; and Sealts 76, 93.
17 Howard 261.
18 Bode 218-19; and Sealts 92-93, 99-100.
19 Howard 262-67.
20 Howard 267-69.
21 Kazin calls Melville a “captive to the commercial
capital,” New York City (137), and recalls that Sam
Melville, the “Mad Bomber” killed at Attica State Cor¬
rectional Facility in 1971, took his name for Herman,
whom he identified with revolution (158). In addition,
Edwin Haviland Miller, Melville (New York: Persea,
1975) 295, says that Melville could not resign himself to
giving audiences what they wanted.
SIMULATION IN LANDSCAPE PLANNING AND DESIGN:
THE ART OF VISUAL REPRESENTATION
Bruce H. Murray and Charles S. Law
Department of Landscape Architecture
University of Wisconsin-Madison
This paper examines the subject of visual
representation in landscape planning and
design by subdividing the subject into several
related sub-topics including its relationship
to environmental impact assessment and
contemporary problem-solving, the benefits
associated with simulation use and how that
has led to the development of a simulation
course at the University of Wisconsin.
A Brief History
Throughout history man has used visual
representations such as drawings, paintings
and three-dimensional objects to simulate
visual modifications to his world. Some of
the earliest simulations used by environmen¬
tal planners and designers were pottery
models built during the 1st and 2nd centuries
AD in China. These miniature representa¬
tions illustrating ornate wall and roof details
were used to guide the wooden architecture
of the time.1 Other early simulations in¬
cluded maps, plans, sections, elevations,
sketches and perspective drawings — tech¬
niques that are still in much use today. An
early development by the landscape architect
Humphrey Repton used illustrations hinged
in such a way that both existing and pro¬
posed environmental conditions could be
displayed at the same time. This technique
using “slides” of proposed improvements
could be flipped up to cover only those parts
of the landscape to be changed. Repton
believed this provided a far more effective
means than maps or plans to help clients
visualize the effects of environmental
changes.2 Similar overlay techniques are in
wide spread use today and serve as the basis
for much of the work produced by planners
and designers.
Early techniques like Repton’ s slides
which were dependent upon pen and ink,
pencil, and watercolors were subsequently
augmented by photography as a tool for
visual representation. Initially in the nine¬
teenth century, on-site eye-level photog¬
raphy became popular and later with the ad¬
vent of World War II, aerial photography
became available and gained widespread use.
More recent advancements including the use
of photo-mosaic and stereo-pair photog¬
raphy have greatly facilitated large scale
analysis of land areas for design and plan¬
ning.
Recent technological developments have
made new visual tools available to land plan¬
ners and designers including movies, video
and computers for analysis and communica¬
tion. On the horizon are the use of highly
realistic computer-generated animations
similar to those used in many recent “box
office” hits.
This discussion might lead one to believe
that there is an ever increasing reliance on
the use of visual simulations in landscape
planning and design. Such a conclusion
would be only partly true. As noted, the
practice of landscape planning and design
has always relied on the use of simulations
although it is now adopting the use of more
sophisticated technological innovations.
The growing use of more complex and
sophisticated simulation techniques in land¬
scape architectural practice and research
poses a new set of challenges for profes¬
sionals. These include keeping abreast of
new developments and understanding their
strengths and weaknesses, limitations and
opportunities, and knowing where to inte¬
grate them into the design and planning pro¬
cess.
27
28
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Simulation and Environmental
Impact Assessment
One of the most important single actions
that has been devised to elevate the im¬
portance of environmental management and
visual simulation in this country, was enact¬
ment of Public Law 91-190, the National En¬
vironmental Policy Act (NEPA) in 1969.
The purposes of this legislation were:
“To declare a national policy which will
encourage productive and enjoyable harmony
between man and his environment; to promote
efforts which will prevent or eliminate damage
to the environment and biosphere and stimu¬
late the health and welfare of man; to enrich
the understanding of the ecological systems
and national resources important to the
Nation; and to establish a Council on
Environmental Quality. (42U.S.C. 4321). ”3
But what does this have to do with visual
simulation?
The Act goes on into additional detail as
exemplified in the next excerpt:
“(b) in order to carry out the policy set
forth in this Act, it is the continuing respon¬
sibility of the Federal Government to use all
practical means, consistent with other essen¬
tial considerations of national policy, to im¬
prove and coordinate Federal plans, func¬
tions, programs, and resources to the end that
the nation may—
(2) assure for all Americans safe, healthful,
productive and esthetically and culturally
pleasing surroundings;’’4
The responsibility for carrying out this
mandate at the Federal level is stipulated in
Sec. 102 of the act as follows:
“Sec. 102
(A) Utilize a systematic interdisciplinary ap¬
proach which will insure the integrated use
of natural and social sciences and the en¬
vironmental design arts in planning and in
decision making which may have an impact
on man’s environment.’’5
The scope and purpose of NEPA extends
beyond an analysis of the impact of proposed
actions upon “esthetically and culturally
pleasing surroundings.”
One Federal agency that has taken this
responsibility of exploring the area of visual
impact seriously is the Bureau of Land
Management, Division of Recreation and
Cultural Resources. In 1980, a well illus¬
trated report was published under the title
VISUAL RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
PROGRAM.6 Whereas the document deals
with the broader subject of visual resource
management, one section is devoted entirely
to “VISUAL SIMULATION TECH¬
NIQUES.’ ’ Several visual simulation tech¬
niques are described and illustrated and
focus on such projects as highways, dams,
power plants, and overhead transmission
line structures to mention a few. In addition
to these subjects, illustrations of various
techniques have been provided as concrete
examples of the effectiveness of various
techniques to simulate proposed actions of
various types of landscape conditions.
The leadership that was provided at the
national level through enactment of NEPA
was echoed by various states including
Wisconsin. In 1971, Assembly Bill 875 was
enacted and became known as the Wisconsin
Environmental Policy Act (WEPA). Upon
reading WEPA, the reader is struck by the
similarities in purposes and language with
NEPA. Whereas NEPA mandates environ¬
mental impact assessment by Federal agen¬
cies, WEPA focuses upon the mandate of
conducting environmental impact assess¬
ments on certain specified actions that could
have deleterious affects upon the environ¬
ment of Wisconsin.
Unfortunately, the administration of
WEPA has not been accompanied by consis¬
tent applications of visual simulations as a
means of evaluating the acceptability of cer¬
tain visual impacts that accompany develop¬
mental actions in Wisconsin.
The Role of Simulation in Contemporary
Problem-Solving in Wisconsin
A number of recent case studies illustrate
the usefulness of visual simulations in envi¬
ronmental decision-making. These applica-
1986]
Murray and Law— Landscape Planning and Design
29
Fig. la. A typical streetscene in a Wisconsin Community.
Fig. lb. Three-dimensional model simulating proposed streetscene changes.
30
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
tions range in scope across political levels
and the variety of available simulation tech¬
niques.
Wausau Sign Ordinance—
Hand-drawn simulations were recently
developed for use by a grassroots organiza¬
tion in Wausau, Wisconsin to illustrate the
impact of a proposed sign ordinance. From
35 mm slides of several urban streetscapes,
illustrations of the existing scenes without
signage were generated. Two drawings were
then superimposed on the original illustra¬
tions; one depicting existing sign conditions,
the other showing the changes necessary to
comply with the proposed ordinance. This
technique provided a quick and efficient
means for illustrating the effects of the pro¬
posed mandate.
UW Band Practice Facility—
As part of a University of Wisconsin class
exercise, landscape architecture students pre¬
pared three-dimensional simulation models
to provide design recommendations for a
proposed university band practice shelter.
This proposed facility, to be built in an area
providing unobstructed views to the border¬
ing lake and along a notable segment of
Madison’s Park and Pleasure Drive system
requires a design that is responsive to the
area’s character and sensitive features.
Again working from 35 mm slides of the
area, a stage-set apparatus was built in which
several scale models of proposed design solu¬
tions for the practice facility were placed.
This combination of elements provided an
opportunity to evaluate the models in terms
of position, form, color, and texture against
the “backdrop” of the existing context. As a
result an exhaustive list of design recommen¬
dations were tested, evaluated and estab¬
lished before any construction took place.
Community Applications —
In the Fall of 1985, fourteen students in
Landscape Architecture focused upon down¬
town Lake Geneva, Wisconsin. In this ad¬
vanced design studio, the project scope en¬
compassed social-demographic considera¬
tions, development of a land-use and open-
space master plan and analysis and design of
retail structures in the downtown district.
Detailed elevation drawings, depicting how
the appearance of each building could be im¬
proved, were created by the students.
An outgrowth of this project was a large
model representing recommended improve¬
ments for each building in the four block
area of the downtown (Fig la,b). The model,
representing each of the eight blockfaces,
was elevated to shoulder height, so that peo¬
ple could move through the model and ex¬
perience how the downtown would look if
recommendations were implemented. The
model was also video taped by placing the
video camera on a cart with the operator,
and moving the cart through the space be¬
tween each block of the model to represent
the dynamics of driving through the down¬
town.
Overhead Transmission Lines —
Several years ago, B. Murray and
B. Niemann (Professor, U.W. Madison, De¬
partment of Landscape Architecture) pro¬
vided testimony concerning whether over¬
head transmission lines should be con¬
structed in the vicinity of the Cross Plains
unit of the National Ice Age Reserve (the
Reserve). Among the numerous exhibits
used were illustrations depicting the visual
impact associated with overhead lines. Util¬
izing photographs of the site, with wood
poles in place, including installed insulators,
the electric lines were rendered in the
photograph. This simulation served to il¬
lustrate how overhead transmission lines
would alter views to and from the Reserve
from certain vantage points within and
around the Reserve. Graphite pencils were
used to illustrate the variegated play of light
on the surface of the lines. At certain times
during the afternoon, light would be re¬
flected from the lines creating white lines
against a darker background of land and
1986]
Murray and Law— Landscape Planning and Design
31
Fig. 2b. Computer-generated image simulating proposed building changes.
32
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
vegetation thereby increasing the visibility of
overhead lines. The utility was subsequently
required to place the lines underground in
order to preserve the visual quality of the
Reserve.
UW Emission Control Facility —
To illustrate the effectiveness of dynamic
simulations in environmental planning, com¬
puter generated graphics were used to il¬
lustrate the addition of an emissions control
system to an existing heating plant on the
University of Wisconsin campus (Fig 2a, b).
These images provide the viewer with the op¬
portunity to quickly add or subtract the pro¬
posed addition to a plan, elevation or per¬
spective view of the present structure. In ad¬
dition, the computer images could be rotated
to give the viewer the impression of “walk¬
ing” around the structure. Such a dramatic
technique not only serves the viewer with a
vicarious experience of the setting but gives
the designer the capability to quickly
manipulate and evaluate several alternative
solutions.
Benefits of Visual Simulation
While the reasons for using visual simula¬
tions and some of the past and present uses
have been discussed, little has been said
about the benefits derived from such work.
The principle objective associated with
simulation use is the ability to evaluate alter¬
native futures and proposed actions. For ex¬
ample, what will the environment look like,
what will be the relationship of spaces, and
what materials, colors, and textures should
be used to complement the existing land¬
scape?
Simulation is intended to provide valid,
reliable, and useful information about the
visual landscape to those who manage the
environment, who promulgate and imple¬
ment policy, and who plan and design
physical changes in the environment. In
other words, simulation is intended to pro¬
vide information to improve the quality of
decision-making with reference to envi¬
ronmental management as well as to change
and modification. Simulation can also help
identify and specify problems that will
emerge that might otherwise be ignored or
misunderstood. It can provide information
based on empirical data rather than on
guesses and intuition, thus providing an em¬
pirical basis for the establishment of new ap¬
proaches to environmental planning, man¬
agement and design.
Whenever growth occurs, environmental
modification will occur. Hundreds of
thousands of new environments are changed
or created each year, ranging from indi¬
vidual housing developments to clearcutting
on the National Forests. Evaluating all such
environments after alteration would be an
enormous costly and inefficient undertak¬
ing. One way to gain a better understanding
of the impact of these changes on our visual
environment is through simulation. Simula¬
tion studies provide a means for assessing
the nature of the environmental impact
before a project begins. This information
makes it possible to modify, fine-tune, or
abandon the proposal before any irreversible
action takes place. Thus, simulation pro¬
vides a cost-efficient means to evaluate a
range of solutions and their associated costs.
Simulation can also be used to improve
communication problems between and
among participants involved in the design/
planning process and enhance public partici¬
pation by facilitating heightened under¬
standing of potential impacts. In many
cases, simulation is perceived as an integral
part of the planning/design process. There
are several reasons for this. First, it provides
an early opportunity for interested parties to
participate directly in the design/planning
process. Second, it gives the user the ability
to utilize the simulated options as an educa¬
tional tool, informing clients as to what is
possible and how the solution is responsive
to the project objectives— -that is, to their
needs and wishes. And third, it gives both
1986]
Murray and Law — Landscape Planning and Design
33
the client and the designer/planner an op¬
portunity to explore the meanings each
derives from the several options.
Visual Simulation Course:
Theory and Practice
It is apparent from the preceding sections
that public policy legislation and review has
resulted in the creation of instruments that
require an analysis of environmental, eco¬
nomic and social impacts as a prerequisite
for granting authority to proceed with cer¬
tain types of development. It is also evident
that visual simulation has been and is being
incorporated into some decision-making
issues. Lastly, the point has been made that
benefits are derived from carrying out visual
simulations that may either stand alone or
accompany other aspects of environmental
impact assessment. If one can accept the
relevance of visual simulation, a cogent
question requiring an answer is “how are in¬
dividuals prepared to perform visual simula¬
tions through public and private entities and
for many different types of clients?” Univer¬
sities can provide an important resource for
advancing the science of visual simulation.
One response can be found in the Depart¬
ment of Landscape Architecture at the Uni¬
versity of Wiscon sin - M adison . In the Spring
of 1986, a course entitled “Visual Simula¬
tion in Landscape Planning and Design”
was offered for the first time. The purpose
of this required course is to involve graduate
students in the ethical, theoretical and prac¬
tical dimensions of the art and science of
visual simulation.
Conclusion
The profession of landscape planning and
design is experiencing the growing use of
more complex and sophisticated techniques
for visual representation. As more tech¬
niques are developed and refined, landscape
simulation will continue to be used as a
means for evaluating the visual effects of
human-altered environments. At present,
however, the administration of public pol¬
icies requiring visual impact evaluations
such as NEPA and WEPA are not accom¬
panied by the consistent use of simulations.
This poses a new set of challenges for plan¬
ning and design professionals. In response,
the Department of Landscape Architecture
at the University of Wisconsin has intro¬
duced a new course designed to help prepare
and inform students about the advantages
and potential pitfalls associated with visual
simulation work. The authors believe it is
evident from the case studies reported that
the University has established a solid foun¬
dation in this important area in the educa¬
tion of future landscape planners and de¬
signers.
Notes
1 Norwich, J. J. 1979. Great Architecture of the
World . New York: Bonanza Books.
2 Goode, P. 1984. Humphrey Repton. Landscape
Planner: Avant la lettre. Landscape Architecture.
74(l):54-56.
3 National Environmental Policy Act of 1969.
4 Ibid.
5 Ibid.
6 Visual Resource Management Program. 1980. U.S.
Government Printing Office: 0-302-993.
WOMAN AS EROS-ROSE IN GERTRUDE STEIN’S TENDER BUTTONS
AND CONTEMPORANEOUS PORTRAITS
Doris T. Wight
Baraboo, Wisconsin
As the blind glass of the opening still-life
of Tender Buttons , 1 Gertrude Stein presents
herself like the Greek seer Tiresias. She is
our prophet, our Sibyl. And like Tiresias and
the typical Sibyl, she is of ambiguous sex.
While clearly female physically in real life,
Stein thinks of herself as male in the great
poetry of her 1913 Tender Buttons— one of
the keys to this work that many baffled
readers have missed. Earlier, in fact, in
Stein’s lesbian-autobiographical novel
Things As They Are , Adele/Stein actually
exclaims at one point,
“I always did thank God I wasn’t born a
woman.”
In “Objects,” the second section of the
triad “Objects,” “Food,” and “Rooms”
that comprise Tender Buttons , Stein intends
to view simultaneously, both subjectively
and objectively, the world “out there.”
Understandably, things nameable emerge on
her writing tablet in a complicated form.
One half of Stein partakes of, yet criticizes,
the hard handsome glory of the male spirit
dominant in the second still-life of Tender
Buttons, GLAZED GLITTER. But Stein’s
second half feels the debasement, yet soft
sensual appeal of the female, seen in anthro¬
pomorphic, dualistic thinking as matter
itself, and objectified in A SUBSTANCE IN
A CUSHION, the third still-life of “Ob¬
jects.”
Characteristically, while the Sibyl takes an
intellectual stance, she is not sexless; instead,
knowing herself erotically drawn to women
rather than to men, she comes into the posi¬
tion of Sappho. And the Sapphic passion —
in Gertrude Stein’s case her desire for Alice
Toklas — is one of the ecstatic messages
expressed cryptically in the tiny exploding
still-lifes and in similar imagistic passages
within the more abstract meditations of
Tender Buttons. For while the sheer poetry
of WATER RAINING, A PETTICOAT,
RED ROSES, A SOUND, and multitudes of
other little poetic bursts can be interpreted in
a single dimension as statements about Prag¬
matic philosophy, often they also present
fleeting insights into the charms of the
female human being; and these erotic pre¬
occupations emerge in phrases, lines,
sentences, paragraphs, everywhere, just as
Freud in The Interpretation of Dreams
found human desire all-pervasive in the
human unconscious. And if Gertrude Stein,
Sibyl and Sappho both, thus mixed abstract
philosophy with concrete poetry, it was
inevitable. For Stein’s chief endeavor in
writing Tender Buttons was to effect a
reconciliation between the competing claims
within her of thinking and feeling, of the
dualism in her own subjective being that she
projects onto the shifting external objects of
her contemplation.
To study Gertrude Stein’s imagery pre¬
senting woman as aesthetic object in Tender
Buttons I will for the moment concentrate,
with grossly simplified poetic analysis, on a
single poem, one that seems among the least
obscure and is certainly among the most
charming.
A PETTICOAT
A light white, a disgrace, an ink spot, a rosy
charm. (471)
There happen to be exactly 17 syllables
here, as in the Japanese haiku, if one counts
the title as part of the poem— which of
course one does not do in haiku, since haiku
usually lack titles. What is important is that,
like haiku, Stein’s poem uses the juxtaposi-
34
1986]
Wight— Woman As Eros-Rose
35
tion of ideas and the connotations of words
to create the message, rather than cause-and-
effect logic. At first glance A PETTICOAT
appears to promise a series of qualities
defining a woman’s undergarment, but a
second look shows a certain light-hearted
confusion— for an ink spot is not typical of
petticoats! An ink spot is a sign of soiling,
however, casting a blight on the white purity
of the woman’s intimate apparel, and per¬
haps by association, therefore, with the
virtue of the woman’s body beneath the
petticoat too? Or is the implication that
using ink, perhaps writing or the profession
of a writer, damages a woman’s femininity,
signified by her rosily charming undergar¬
ments? The poem insists that some disgrace
is involved in petticoats, or at least in one of
these items. There is clearly what one almost
always has in Stein: a riddle, a mystery-
even an implied narrative.
From a strictly external view, the poem
has the air of a perfect little song. The
accented syllables of the title A PETT'I-
COAT' and of the last phrase “a ro'sy
charm'” are identical, as are the intervening
three phrases, “a light' white'” and “a
dis ' -grace'” and “an ink' spot'” so that
the whole can be thought of as either linear
or circular, or both. And when finally the
lost pattern of the title comes back in the
final phrase, we breathe a sigh, fulfilled by
the perfection. Assonance working behind
the scenes along with alliteration gives the
flounces needed to create the pretty petti¬
coat.
Of course there is much more to A
PETTICOAT than mere sound-charm. The
sound-charm (magical incantation?) reflects
the sense charm, ready to be fathomed. A
petticoat is a little, light thing, a “female”
thing as opposed to a big heavy garment like
a male’s overcoat; it is, moreover, an under¬
garment, an appropriate metapor for the
more protected sex. Read in the context of
its surrounding poems in Tender Buttons ,
AN UMBRELLA (an object which also
flares out roundedly) and A WAIST (here
described as gliding in slim charm like a
star), the femininity of the petticoat is
strengthened all the more.
A PETTICOAT begins with the phrase
“A light white.” What is the meaning here?
The allusion may be to difference itself, with
the reader’s attention drawn to the fact that
“white” is not merely an abstract idea, but
exists in many different particular white
things. Or perhaps as she often does, Stein is
transferring a word or part of a word from
its own place to another; and if she is using
such a device here, “a light white” might be
“a white light,” perhaps a spotlight, or just
a white dot or spot to contrast with the third
phrase of this still-life, “an ink spot.” As it
happens, the still-life directly preceding A
PETTICOAT ends with the word “dot.”
Such trails, like the fact that the poem
directly following also contains the word
“disgrace,” must be followed as one
unwinds Stein’s twisting threads. Some
appear less significant than others, but there
is no avoiding the all-pervading color
symbolism of Tender Buttons.
Returning to the idea of different shades
of white, we might discover “cream” as one
of the possibilities. Cream is not pure
blazing white, but a yellowish-white color; it
happens to be one of Stein’s code- words for
the delightful and fulfilling life. Associations
with cream — milk, ice cream, custard, cows,
the country, meadows, milking stools, even
roast beef (the cow cooked) in Stein’s writing
signify hedonistic pleasure, both sexual and
gustatory ecstasy: the joys of living. Hedon¬
ism and delicate, flippant joy in hedonism
were expressed to perfection by writers in
Stein’s favorite period in English literature.
Robert Herrick also wrote of petticoats2 and
the disgrace of “a sweet disorder in the
dress.” Stein’s vocabulary in A PETTI¬
COAT, both in word and thought, is inter¬
estingly similar to Herrick’s, and his telling
young women to gather rosebuds while they
may in “To the Virgins to Make Much of
Time” reminds one of Stein’s virgin in IN
BETWEEN, which deepens the erotic level
36
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
of A PETTICOAT (brackets below give my
suggested reading):
IN BETWEEN
In between a place and candy is a narrow
foot-path that shows more mounting than
anything, so much really that a calling
meaning a bolster measured a whole thing
with that. A virgin a whole virgin is judged
made and so between curves and outlines and
real seasons and more out glasses and a
perfectly unprecedented arrangement between
old ladies and mild colds there is no satin
wood shining. (472)
[“In between a place’’ (place of delight;
also, place is a chime for “Alice) “and candy’’
(the sweet of desire) “is a narrow foot-path’’
(a difficult place to travel) “that shows more
mounting’’ (reference to mounting excite¬
ment, or mounting as taking a sexual position)
“than anything. . . .’’ The “bolster’’ can be
“the bold sister”; also, might be an age
reference to Gertrude and Alice, several of
which occur within Tender Buttons, whom
Gertrude alludes to as “yellow” or “mellow”
or as “mutton” rather than lambs in
MUTTON; this poem in fact ends on the age
question, with allusion to Gertrude and
Alice’s “perfectly unprecedented arrange¬
ment,” which differs from one made between
“old ladies” (sexually cold, presumably) and
the hotter one between women like Stein and
Toklas as “mild colds” (only mildly olds). “A
whole virgin” (an intact virgin) is judged
“made” (maid; also, made a virgin, but “un¬
done” voluntarily). Stein plays throughout
with the idea of “wholeness,” “holeness,”
and perhaps even “holiness” and “evil” if the
“satin” in the last phrase is Satan.]
Another suggestive little scene, here of
intercourse and its aftermath, occurs in RED
ROSES, the poem directly preceding IN
BETWEEN:
A cool red rose and a pink cut pink, a
collapse and a sold hole, a little less hot. (472)
[Something “red” (code word for woman,
with the “something” here her private part;
could also refer to male’s organ) that was
“cool” (not stimulated) “rose” (became
excited and swelled; if male organ, became
erect) while “a pink” (one person’s pink part,
lips or nipple or finger-“pinkie” or private
part) “cut” (inserted itself into) “pink”
(another’s intimate body part). There was a
collapsing (emission and/or deflation), and
“as for the old hole, it was a little less hot
after that”; or there may even be an obscene
reference to “old ass hole.” (I will not go into
matter here, but Stein matches Joyce’s early
scene in Ulysses that shows Leopold Bloom
performing his bowel functions with her
Tender Buttons poems A BROWN and A
PAPER.]
The poem that follows IN BETWEEN and
RED ROSES is called COLORED HATS,
and may be one of the clearest references in
Tender Buttons to the trip to Spain that
Stein and Toklas took as Gertrude ran away
from the strained situation with Leo at their
apartment at 27 rue de Fleurus and tried to
decide what to do.3 Avila was one of the
places that Stein and Toklas visited and
loved, and Avila is a place that happens to be
famous for its colored hats. In Avila Camilo
Jos6 Cela writes
In the regions of Barco de Avila,
Piedrahita, Hoyocasero — and occasionally in
the city itself — we can still sometimes see
women wearing the pleasing gorra of curled
straw. It is a tall helmet-like hat adorned with
different coloured wools ... of material
coloured according to a woman’s condition. If
she is a spinster the material is green, red for a
married woman and black for a widow. It is
curious to notice how often in their dress we
see Castilian women wearing some adherence
to colours indicating virginity, married state
or widowhood. . . .4
With this in mind, one reads Stein’s
COLORED HATS with new understanding,
finding in the poem meaningful references to
women’s married-state conditions like preg¬
nancy (“broad stomachs”) and childbirth
(“the least thing is lightening”) and to their
virginity-associated conditions like menstru¬
ation (“custard whole”). One even sees a
reference in COLORED HATS to the virgin
“Saint Teresa, the “Little Flower” who is
1986]
Wight— Woman As Eros-Rose
37
everywhere worshipped in Avila, as well as a
jocular reference to Louisa May Alcott’s
virginal Little Women and perhaps even to
Pearl, the sinning Puritan Hester Prynne’s
bastard child. (In this quotation my inter¬
pretations occur within the quoted poem
itself, enclosed in brackets. To making read¬
ing easier, Stein’s own words are italicized.)
COLORED HATS
Colored hats are necessary to show that
curls [“girls,” indicated by a rhyming word
and also by association of “girls” and
“curls”] are worn [worn out, exhausted —
what Stein had observed as a medical student
helping to deliver babies] by an addition of
blank spaces [extra spaces, thus pregnancy],
this makes the difference between single lines
[virgin’s lines] and broad stomachs, the least
thing [the baby] is lightening [makes the
mother weigh less when it is born], the least
thing makes a little flower [a little flow-er of
water and blood, as well as a little flower or
bud-baby, one saintly like St. Teresa] and a
big delay [de-lay, pun of the lengthy laying-in
process of birth] a big delay that makes more
nurses than little women [children, virgins,
also women little again after childbirth] really
[materially, factually] little women. So clean is
a light that nearly all of it shows pearls and
little ways [weighs, weights, reference to mat¬
ter] . A large hat is tall and me and all custard
whole. (473)
The allusion to children in COLORED
HATS, the little things that lighten broad
stomachs, is repeated two poems later in A
LITTLE CALLED PAULINE, where Stein
announces that a ‘Tittle” (a baby) called
by any name whatsoever “shows” (signifies)
1) mothers (half-rhyme with “shudders”),
2) udders (perfect rhyme with “shudders”),
3) shudders (literal quivers in Stein, who
while assisting in the delivery of babies as
part of her medical training had been so
appalled at the process of childbirth):
A LITTLE CALLED PAULINE
A little called anything shows shudders. . . .
(473)
To return however, to the comparative
innocence of PETTICOAT. Besides fem¬
ininity, A PETTICOAT features another
important Stein theme: her writing. This is
the idea behind “an ink spot” (both pubic
hair and “ink’s pot”) which leads ultimately
to the relief of “a rosy charm.” Alluring in
her saucy undergarments, Miss Alice Toklas
is a light white or white light beacon. She is
also a disgrace if the world sees her as what
she is, Gertrude’s lesbian lover.
To support this contention and my inter¬
pretation of the petticoat poem, let us look
at female figures in the portraits written at
the same time of Tender Buttons. In many of
these portraits Alice Toklas5 is the heroine
who comes to “save” Gertrude by her loving
support and her erotic charms which awaken
Stein to the poetry of life. Naturally, images
of woman as eros-rose, Beauty, are more
indirect in Stein’s Tender Buttons, which
seeks to personify through objects, than in
her portraits, which attempt to render living
people. The images of erotic woman in the
portraits, while still disguised through obfus¬
cating language, should be relatively easy to
fathom, but for many critics this has not
been the case, and many do not locate Alice
Toklas behind all the multiple-image tempt¬
resses “Susie Asado” and “Preciosilla” and
as the fellow gypsy with Gertrude Stein in
“A Sweet Tail (Gypsies).” Richard Bridg¬
man even discounts Carl Van Vechten’s sug¬
gestion that the famous flamenco dancer la
Argentina was one of the female images
behind these portraits.6 Similarly, other
excellent critics such as Marjorie Perloff in
The Poetics of Indeterminacy,1 James
Mellow in Charmed Circle: Gertrude Stein &
Company ,8 and Wendy Steiner in Exact
Resemblance to Exact Resemblance: The
Literary Portraiture of Gertrude Stein,9 all
appear confounded because there may have
been more than one dancer seen by Gertrude
and Alice in their wanderings in Spain when
the portraits were written, or for other
overly-specific reasons. However, if one
38
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
allows that multiple, ambiguous identifica¬
tions are true, but that behind them all is
invariably the figure of Alice Toklas, every¬
thing falls into place, and one can relax and
attend to Stein’s experiments in these por¬
traits and in Tender Buttons, where Ger¬
trude Stein tried in words, like her Cubist
friends in their medium, paint, to render the
rhythms, sounds, shapes, colors of the
external world.
In “Susie Asado” Stein gives us, in one
erotically pulsing woman, a nursery rhyme
tea hostess, a chirping bird, a Japanese
geisha, a Spanish dancer clicking her heels
down in a silvery-lit Madrid night spot or
“cellar,” a witch from MacBeth, an incubus
riding a victim, Alice Toklas as Gertrude’s
“sweetie” or “Sweet T[oklas]” serving tea
at 27 rue de Fleurus, and many other
versions of all the beckoning desirability of
Nature seen as female Being. Here in its
entirety, with selective decodings, is “Susie
Asado,” wherein Stein presents one of her
most vivid images of woman as enchantress,
yet combines this with a possible philosophic
questioning about the nature of matter and
even a suggested solution to the problem of
human suffering (again, brackets are my
hints on a reading, and to aid the reader I
have italicized Stein’s own words):
Sweet sweet sweet sweet sweet tea.
Susie [Jewsy, choosey, choose me] Asado
[as I do].
Sweet sweet sweet sweet sweet tea.
Susie Asado [Mikado, the Japanese
geisha reference].
A lean on the shoe [the Spanish dancer,
perhaps la Argentina] this means slips [lips]
slips hers [slippers].
When the ancient light grey is clean it is
yellow, it is a silver [“la Argentina,” “the
Silver one”] seller.
This is a please [request] this is a please
[appease], there are the saids to jelly [“jelly,”
a black jazz word referring to Jellyroll Morton
who played piano in a brothel, was a code
word for intercourse in Stein’s story in Three
Lives about a black girl named Melanctha;
also here are the jelly and the “he said, she
said’s” of the ladies’ tea party]. These are the
wets [wets, sweets] these say the sets to leave a
crown to Incy [inky] .
Incy is short for incubus.
A pot [pot, spot, belly] . ^4 pot is a beginning
of a rare bit [rarebit] of trees [cheese]. Trees
[also tease] tremble, the old vats are in bobbles
[bubbles, bubbling vats of Macbeth’s witches,
women as creators of magical brews] , bobbles
which shade [spade] and shove [shovel] and
render clean [rend her clear], render clean
must.
Drink pups [drink ups: kisses, suckings].
Drink pups drink pups [The doubling here,
as in other Steinian words and phrases and
lines, creates mutual participation] lease a
sash hold, see it shine and a bobolink [woman
as bird, a favorite Stein association] has pins.
It shows a nail [an “ale” as intoxicating
beverage brewed by witches; also an “ail,” a
pain of sentient desire].
What is a nail [“a nail” can be “an ail,” so
that Stein asks, “What is an ail?” or “What is
a feeling of pain? What is sensation?” These
are favorite questions of the Gertrude Stein
who studied philosophy with William James.
Also, these words may be read in another
Steinian way, as making a statement of defini¬
tion of the word “what,” or “matter, sub¬
stance.” Stein tells us in that way of reading
the sentence, “ ‘What’ is an ail,” meaning that
the philosophic questions concerning “what-
ness, substance,” are an ail, a painful prob¬
lem, for us humans].
What is a nail [Stein repeats her phrase,
underscoring her point, or forcing us to shift
ground, cubistically, to constantly new views
of the words’ possibilities. Stein could be
asking simply about a materially substantial
“nail” with a specific function, a pointed
object the purpose of which is to join sub¬
stances together]. A nail is unison [union;
Stein answers her own question, as she will
ultimately in Tender Buttons, by combining
intellectual meaning and sentient drives in
humans and all nature. The answer favors
unity, yet there are a plurality of strands being
united, not a dualistically conceived mutually-
exclusive spirit or matter. The solution is
Pragmatic, joyously sensual, celebrating eros
and woman]. Sweet sweet sweet sweet sweet
tea [Stein ends by drinking the witches’
1986]
Wight— Woman As Eros-Rose
39
delicious poison offered by her bewitching
Alice]. (549)
“Preciosilla” is another rhythmic marvel,
ending with the same dark-skinned
(“toasted’*) Susie, Gertrude’s “Jewsie” (her
pet name for Alice), her “precious silly,”
again her favorite “cream” dish or dessert
after she has told brother Leo, now no
longer a member of the household but an
unwelcome guest, to “Go”:
. . . diamonds white, diamonds bright,
diamonds in the in the light, diamonds light
diamonds door diamonds hanging to be four,
two four, all before, this bean, lessly, all most,
a best, willow, vest, a green guest, guest, go go
go go go go, go. Go go. Not guessed. Go go.
Toasted susie is my ice-cream. (551)
The dancer in the companion portrait to
“Susie Asado,” “Preciosilla,” does more
than dance. Bait, Preciosilla’s clothes are
torn off, and she is urged towards a “single
mingle,” union, in the third paragraph:
“Bait, bait, tore, tore her clothes toward it,
toward a bit to ward a sit, sit down in, in
vacant surely lots, a single mingle, bait and
wet . . .” (550)
This is obscene, as is the title of “A Sweet
Tail (Gypsies)” obscene. And again in “A
Sweet Tail” there is depicted what can be
construed as an explicit scene of intercourse
between two women (“curves”). “Hold in
that curl [girl] with a good man,” Stein tells
herself, assuming the male point of view,
and teasing herself and us with all sorts of
jokes and puns and meaningful suggestions
involving holes in cheese, and pinnings, and
a petticoat beloved, whom she urges to
“come”; the portrait of the wandering
lovers embracing even ends with the “dear
noise” of orgasmic bliss:
Curves. Hold in the coat [goat, go at]. . . .
Hold in that curl [girl] with a good man. Hold
[hole] in cheese. ... A cool brake [“break”
with Leo, again the invisible third party] . . .
Come a little cheese \please]. Come in to sun
with holy pin [hole leaping] and have the petti¬
coat to say [save] the day ... a dear noise [an
orgiastic moan, an “Adear” or “Ada(r)”
noise, Ada being a code name for Alice in
Stein's writing]. (571-74)
Whether as the synecdochic petticoat who
brings rosy charm at last to a disgraced Ger¬
trude; or as the “Ada” who inspired Ger¬
trude to write a loving portrayal of herself in
Stein’s very first portrait; or as the “she”
who comes bringing salvation to Gertrude in
the revelatory portrait “Two: Gertrude Stein
and Her Brother,” which documents Ger¬
trude’s and brother Leo’s falling-out; or as
the glittering dancer “Susie Asado” or
“Preciosilla”; or as Gertrude’s fellow
expatriate in Spain, one of the pair of Wan¬
dering Jews in “A Sweet Tail (Gypsies)”— in
whatever shape or form she assumes, always
behind Stein’s Sapphic and Sibyllic images
of women at the time of Tender Buttons and
the companion portraits blooms the eros-
rose Alice Toklas.
Notes
1 See Tender Buttons in Selected Writings of Gertrude
Stein ed. by Carl Van Vechten, New York: Random
House, 1962, 459-509. An excellent preliminary analysis
of Tender Buttons can be found in Richard Bridgman’s
Gertrude Stein in Pieces. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1970. To understand the thinking of Gertrude
Stein, however, one should read William James’ Prag¬
matism along with Tender Buttons, for the philosophy
of James, Stein’s teacher at Radcliffe, colors her
thought throughout. One of the best articles on Tender
Buttons is Neal Schmitz’s “Gertrude Stein as Post-
Modernist: the rhetoric of Tender Buttons,” Journal of
Modern Literature, 3 (1974), 1203-1218.
2 Herrick’s “Delight in Disorder” in The Literature
of England, 5th ed. 1, Ed. George K. Anderson &
William E. Buckler. Chicago: Scott Foresman & Co.
1958. 1007.
A sweet disorder in the dress
Kindles in clothes a wantonness. . . .
A winning wave, deserving note,
In the tempestuous petticoat. . . .
Like Stein, Herrick is suggestively fond of feasting
with cream and other goodies. In “The Wake” (an
annual parish festival) he urges his beloved to “Come,
Anthea, let us two/Go to feast, as others do,” for
“Tarts and custards, creams and cakes, /Are the junkets
still at wakes ...” 1005-6.
40
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
The inclusion of this note on a poet from English
literature gives me the opportunity to point out how
deep were Stein’s knowledge of, and love for, this
literature and the English language itself, which is why I
chose to cite a large historical compilation rather than
merely a volume of Robert Herrick’s poetry. Stein read
avidly and constantly in English literature, and the
riddles of early English literature, in fact, provide one
key to Stein’s writing style, as do the classical rhetorical
devices found so abundantly in Stein’s particular pas¬
sion, Shakespeare.
Stein’s language experiments, it is true, usually follow
thoughts metonymically rather than metaphorically,
and so she often does the opposite of what medieval
allegorists and nineteenth century Symbolists did.
Understanding this is one of the keys to understanding
Stein’s writing. Study of Roman Jakobson’s article on
Aphasia is helpful here: see “Two Aspects of Language
and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances” in Funda¬
mentals of Language » The Hague, 1956, 55-82, and the
use to which David Lodge puts this material in “The
Language of Modernist Fiction: Metaphor and Meton¬
ymy” in Modernism 1890-1930. Middlesex, England,
Penguin Books Ltd., 1976. In the end, Stein avails
herself of a multitude of possibilities of thought and
language extension, and to read her one must adopt an
elastic approach.
3 Carl Van Vechten, Two: Gertrude Stein and Her
Brother and Other Early Portraits 1908-1912. New
Haven: Yale University Press, 1951.
4 Barcelona-Madrid : Editorial Noguer, S.A., 5th ed.,
1964, 26.
5 Van Vechton’s Selected Writings contains several of
the Toklas portraits to which I will refer, “Susie
Asado,” “Preciosilla,” and “A Sweet Tail (Gypsies).”
6 Bridgman, 138.
7 Perloff, Marjorie. “Poetry as Word System: The
Art of Gertrude Stein.” The Poetics of Indeterminacy.
New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1981.
8 Mellow, James R. Charmed Circle, Gertrude Stein
& Company. New York: Praeger Publishers, 1974.
9 Steiner, Wendy. Exact Resemblance to Exact Re¬
semblance. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1978.
ASPECTS OF MORALITY IN THE MUSIC OF THE MIDDLE AGES
John Holzaepfel
Madison , Wisconsin
I
For discipline has no more open pathway to the mind than through the ear.
Boethius, De institutione musica
In his classic study of medieval aesthetics,
Edgar de Bruyne identifies St. Augustine as
the principal source of transmission of Bib¬
lically-oriented aesthetics for the Middle
Ages.1 In the fervor of faith following his
conversion, Augustine himself formulated
several unprecedented aesthetic theories. His
abundant writings about music lead to C. J.
Perl’s conclusion that, for Augustine,
music communicates a knowledge about God,
indeed the very knowing of God, and more¬
over, as becomes clear from the manner of
expression, it mediates this knowledge more
clearly, more directly, than could words by
themselves.2
This “very knowing of God” is a process
involving the interrelation of sound and
time, and the regard of the mind toward that
interrelation. Thus does the regard — the
modes of perception and response — in turn
constitute a significant measure of the
morality of any culture; the following is a
study of that regard in the Middle Ages.
The numerical aspect is the most well-
known. The Greek view of the relation
between music and numbers, attested to by
numerous writers of antiquity,3 can be seen
through Lewis Rowell’s neat summation:
To the Greek mind, the experience of
musical rhythm was an outward manifestation
of man’s biological rhythms and the proper
proportions of the world of forms he
inhabited. For rhythm to work its effects upon
man, it must be intelligible to his sense
perception ...» and his apprehension of
rhythms required him to form mental images
that resembled the sounds he perceived. In this
way he was brought into tune with the world
of external forms in a totally balanced, har¬
monious, mental and physical state.4
The mental imagery was number and
proportion, as Pythagoras had discovered.
But it should be emphasized that rhythm was
meant not only as pulse and metre. To the
Greeks, music was primarily verse, and
rhythm connected music with language.5
This aesthetic, “mathematics incarnate in
physical form,”6 was transmitted to the
Middle Ages through the enormous influ¬
ence of the Timaeus of Plato (specifically, in
the commentary on it written in the 3rd cen¬
tury by Chalcidius) and— more importantly
for music — through the writings of Boeth¬
ius. Boethius asserted the superiority of the
speculative over the practical in music — the
superiority of musica disciplina , as it was by
this time known, over musica sonora. This
division was partly the result of an attempt
by Boethius’ contemporary Cassiodorus to
distinguish the liberal arts (numerous in
Greek antiquity, reduced to seven by
Martianus Capella in his Marriage of
Mercury and Philology) by designating those
dealing with human affairs (the trivium of
grammar, logic or dialectic, and rhetoric) as
artes, the remainder (the numerically-related
quadrivium of arithmetic, geometry, music
and astronomy) as disciplinae. All of the
artes liberates were in antiquity originally
known as propaideumata , and affinities had
41
42
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
existed between them.7 Indeed, Boethius
himself, in his last work, has Philosophy call
upon:
. . . the sweet persuasiveness of rhetoric, which
can only be kept on the right path if it does not
swerve from our precepts, and if it harmon¬
izes, now in a lighter, now in a graver mood
with the music native to our halls.8
But there is little doubt that, in Cassiodorus’
terminology, the trivium was seen as
inferior, artes triviales — primarily utilitarian
and “wholly propaedeutic” themselves to
the abstract speculation afforded by the
quadrivium. 9
Boethius, through a tripartite division of
musica into mundana (the music of the
spheres), Humana (that of both the body and
the soul), and instrumental is (the sound),
reinforced this hierarchy, elevating it
(perhaps unintentionally) to an aesthetic
principle that dominates both the theory and
aesthetics of music throughout the Middle
Ages. The appeal was to the mind, to ratio,
through number and the properties of num¬
ber, through the medieval belief that the
mind could perceive images of a Divine
Order in an otherwise terrifying and mean¬
ingless universe. These images (and all things
and ideas were, in the Timaean account,
only images: diversities proceeding from an
essential unity) could be subjected to
speculation (from speculum, mirror) by
deducing numerical proportions in them — a
wholly interior activity of the intellect — and
subsequently reflect some aspect of nature’s
manner of operation within Divine Order.
The speculum showed how things act when
they thus belong to a type.
However, problems arise when we try to
determine any kind of comprehensive corres¬
pondence between this view of music and the
influence it had on both the thought and
action of the Middle Ages. “Medieval theory
reduced the idea of beauty to that of per¬
fection, proportion, and splendor,” wrote
Huizinga.10 It is not at all certain that
medieval practice did so. Huizinga goes on,
many treatises on the aesthetics of music were
written, but these treatises, constructed
according to the musical theories of antiquity,
which were no longer understood, teach us
little about the way in which the men of the
Middle Ages really enjoyed music . . .n
We need not acquiesce in Huizinga’s harsh
conclusion that “substituting for beauty the
notions of measure, order, and appropriate¬
ness offered a very defective explanation of
it,”12 in order to see one thing clearly: the
aesthetic record is but part of the reality of
the medieval musical experience.
One problem is that the aesthetic record
reflects, in the main, the concerns of the
Church: “Musical sensation was immedi¬
ately absorbed in religious feeling.”13 This
originated with Augustine, himself acutely
sensitive to the aural enticement of music, of
the “peril of pleasure.”
Yet when it befalls me to be more moved with
the voice than the words sung, I confess to
have sinned penally, and then had rather not
hear music.14
Augustine’s solution to this moral dilemma
was to make of music a metaphor for com¬
munication with God. In the Middle Ages,
the emotions were seen as the effects of the
senses on the mind, and the senses were
lowest in the structure of the mental facul¬
ties, to be superintended by imagination,
reason, and intelligence. And Denis the
Carthusian, also aware of the emotional
effects of music, was reduced, in an age of
increasing Christian domination, to describ¬
ing them in terms of sin. 15 Christian doctrine
was more secure when it could absorb
musica sonora into musica disciplina.
The Greeks had done this too. Sachs wrote
that the scholars of antiquity attempted to
classify melodies (which originated in
improvisation, with little or no thought
given to such representations as vibration
ratios), calling this classification “a sham
legalization of lawlessness,”16 one that
persisted into the Middle Ages, in the form
of the church modes. These modes were de-
1986]
Holzaepfel — Music of the Middle Ages
43
signed to house pre-existing chant melodies
(which “in notation look so neat and equal-
tempered”), and all modes relied on the
octave to delineate range; the melodies them¬
selves “had no octave at all or at best one
that served in a passing capacity.” 17
But doctrine is one thing, devotion
another. And if Carrolly Erickson is correct
in maintaining that religious devotion in the
Middle Ages “followed a rhythm of its own,
and did not correspond in any direct way to
the maturing of ecclesiastical institutions or
to the political victories or defeats of the
church,”18 the capacity of the written record
to account for the relation of music to
morality is even further reduced.
Another problem quickly follows: the
overwhelming proportion of extant medieval
art is Church art. In fact, musica sacra is all
that survives of early medieval music, al¬
though Sachs asserted that secular song was
both socially and politically more important
in the daily life of the time. 19 So the question
finally turns into an old one: how much do
the treatises have to do with the moral
concepts and conduct of their time? If a
connection existed between music and
morality, even a unity such as obtained
between morality and science (through the
links of grammar and poetry), it must be
looked for beyond the realm of number, in
other modes through which the mind per¬
ceives and represents the world.
II
Sight is often deceived, hearing serves as guarantee.
Ambrose of Milan, Commentary on St. Luke
Two historical events unique to the Middle
Ages can help bring the problems into focus.
One event was musical: the advent of
polyphony in a musical tradition which until
the ninth century had been exclusively
monodic. “The invention of polyphony was
undoubtedly the most significant event in the
history of Western music,” Richard Hoppin
flatly and rightly declares.20
The other event, which preceded poly¬
phony (indeed, made it possible), was the
advent of musical notation. As part of a
larger process involving a gradual shift in the
orientation of the medieval mind from a pre¬
literate, predominantly oral-aural mentality
to a predominantly literate-visualist one, this
phenomenon was cultural in a more compre¬
hensive way. Both can be examined in the
light of the other great theory of music
handed down by the Greeks, the doctrine of
ethos, described by Aristotle in the Politics:
. . . melodies themselves ... do contain imita¬
tions of character . . . with the rhythms the
situation is the same. . . . From all this it is
clear that music is capable of creating a
particular quality of character in the soul. . . .
There also seems to be a close relation of some
sort between the soul and harmoniai and
rhythms, which is why many wise men say
either that the soul is a harmonia or that it
contains one.21
If melodies imitate character, notation imi¬
tates melodies; sight imitates sound. What
was the origin of music-writing?
The medieval belief, persistent in sub¬
sequent eras, was formed by the Gregorian
legend during the Carolingian Renaissance.
Leo Treitler has facilitated understanding
how this legend succeeded in its purpose, by
drawing a parallel with the modern view of
musical invention and transmission:
A corpus of music has originated in a
certain time and place and through the agency
of a particular person [in the one view,
Gregory I receiving chant melodies from the
dove; in the other, the composer writing under
the guidance of divine inspiration]. At the
44
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
moment of its origin it is written down. The
repertory has spread through a transmission
that has left a multiplicity of versions [ in the
one view, varying mss. of the same chant
melody; in the other, differing copies and edi¬
tions of the same work]. After some time it is
observed that the versions do not agree with
one another. This is interpreted as the conse¬
quence of a process of corruption, and an
editorial enterprise is undertaken to restore
and establish the original. As standard for the
enterprise a source closest to the point of
origin, an original version is sought [in the one
view, through the efforts of Charlemagne and
Alcuin, in the other, through the efforts of the
Urtextherausgeber] . 22
But Treitler argues that the original
purpose of music-writing was descriptive.
The earliest extant examples of proto¬
notation appear to consist of punctuation
signs borrowed from script writing placed in
relation to the chant text so as to show the
singer where to pause, lengthen a word or
syllable, inflect the voice, etc., all in relation
to a previously known melody. They were
visual aids to the memory of sounds, sup¬
porting the “performance of a text already
known and accepted.” The later diagram¬
matic notation of the anonymous musica
enchiriadis and the musica disciplina of
Aurelian of Redme, both dating from the
ninth century, display evidence of the
earliest attempts to actually picture the
sound-space of a melody by placing both the
notation symbol (the neume) and the text
syllable at points in space corresponding to
the pitch location of the melody.23
The Gregorian legend was a tool of policy
in the ecclesiastical history of the Holy
Roman Empire, a tool used in the Carolin-
gian literacy campaign. “The script culture
that the Carolingians created is the general
background against which the foundation of
a notational practice becomes understand¬
able.”24 The campaign itself was theological,
the liberal arts now serving in toto as
propaedeutic to the understanding of the
Scriptures. In a realm whose governing was
obstructed by numerous vernacular varieties
of Latin, to say nothing of native Germanic,
Frankish, Slavic, even non-Indo-European
dialects, a uniform and standard repertory
of chant melodies offered a persuasive, even
seductive means to solve the political prob¬
lem of polyglottism. Codifying the melodies
by encasing them in the eight church modes
narrowed the tonal unorthodoxy. The estab¬
lishment of standardized Latin as the
language of the Roman Church was brought
about in large part through music- writing, a
process that made its first appearances about
fifty years after the beginning of Charle¬
magne’s campaign. “The occidental nota¬
tional system is par excellence a control
system,” wrote Charles Seeger, a statement
that is applicable on several levels, musical,
cultural, political — and thus moral.25
But control is not the end of the matter.
The evolution of the word from symbol to
fact (the former an ancient, even prehistoric
awareness inherited by the Middle Ages, the
latter wholly foreign to the medieval mind,
familiar enough to the modern) can be found
condensed in subsequent developments of
medieval music notation:
The idea of a control system is just the right
way to think about the role of notation in an
oral performing tradition. Yet there is a point
beyond which controls operate so closely and
so constantly that the notation becomes in
actuality a system of direct representation
rather than of controls. When it functions that
way, notation has realized an ideal that was
expressed by writers on music . . . from
Carolingian times to the thirteenth century—
for [57c] explicit notations that could be read
off by performers coming to them cold, for
prescriptive rather than descriptive notations.
. . . When writing is conceived in the light of a
complete equivalence between uttered [or
sung] sound and written sign it can function
as an autonomous mode of direct communica¬
tion, and no longer just as an aid to memory.
26
Polyphony had undoubtedly been in the
air. It should be emphasized at this point
1986]
Holzaepfel— Music of the Middle Ages
45
that it is evident, from their manner of
discussion, that authors of the early treatises
on polyphony— Regino of Priim, Hucbald,
and the anonymous author(s) of the musica
and scholia enchiriadis — were describing
something that had existed in practice for
some time. Poor ensemble is as eternal as
Divine Order, and in a group performance
of monody this heterophony, to use the
modern euphemism, must frequently have
hinted at the possibilities inherent in inten¬
tional divergence. The medieval belief that
some of the mysteries of nature could not be
understood by the intellect alone is reflected
in a question asked in the musica enchiriadis:
why do certain tones sound well in combina¬
tion, while others do not? A speculative
answer is offered, one which, in its deference
to the past, typifies the medieval spirit and
connects both parts of the Greek tradition:
There are several writings of the ancients in
which it is convincingly shown . . . that the
same numerical proportions by which differ¬
ent tones sound together in consonance also
determine the way of life, the behavior of the
human body, and the harmony of the uni¬
verse.27
Now, Bukofzer could say, “polyphony
deserves to be called the image of universal
harmony rather than monody.”28
Polyphony— the deliberate simultanaiety
of two or more musical lines— signalled an
incorporation of the plurality of the world of
sound into an unprecedentedly complex and
powerful symbolic of harmony. The ancient
belief in this symbolic became audible.
Horizontal and vertical truth, never re¬
garded by the Middle Ages as contradictory
or dualistic, could be heard. “The discipline
of music,” Cassiodorus had written earlier,
is diffused through all the actions of our life.
. . . Musical science is the discipline which
treats of numbers in their relation to those
things which are found in sounds.29
Polyphony was not just a new dimension to
this, but a fusion: musica disciplina become
musica sonora.
Or confusion? In medieval grammatical
and philosophical usage, one sometimes
meant the other, i.e., con/fusion seen as
“coming together” or “intertwining.”
Polyphony could appeal to the imagination,
through the construction of images (here,
consonances) reflecting order, and to the
intellect— ratio— through numerical porpor-
tion. But its impact on the aural sense was
the most perplexing and the most dangerous.
The medieval concept of the psyche was of a
tripartite mind: “The recollective faculty is
placed at the rear [of the head], the
speculative power is foremost, and reason
exercises its power at the center.”30 Sound
infiltrates the first two on its way to the
memory, from which it is then often impos¬
sible to eradicate. Polyphonic sounds in the
memory could be activated — relocated from
sense outward through reason to specula¬
tion, where they could reflect the harmony
of the mind with the external world from
which they came. As the temptation grew to
make polyphony more complex and sophisti¬
cated, so did ideas of order, ideas of music
and time.
Ill
Music reveals, beyond the manifestations of the senses,
the inner will that arouses them.
Schopenhauer, The World as Will and Idea
It is useful to here reiterate that the tradition, improvisation, and non-intellec-
invention and performance of early medieval tualism.”31 The foundations of music, then,
music were oral, and relied “on memory, were not sacred/political — the Church
46
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
merely appropriated practice— but sacred/
societal, or more accurately, sacred/ com¬
munal; the heritage stems from the tribal
era,32 a world of sound and memory but not
yet of order. Noise, writes Jacques Attali, is
a source of power. “It is sounds and their
arrangements that fashion societies. With
noise is born disorder and its opposite: the
world.”33 The evolution of order parallels
the development of consciousness, and here
we must briefly turn to the affinities between
music and rhetoric.
All human culture was . . . initially rhetorical
in the sense that before the introduction of
writing all culture was oral. This means not
merely that all verbal communication — there
are obviously other kinds of communication—
was oral, effectively limited to sound, but also
that the economy of thought was oral.
So writes Walter Ong in his essay on
Rhetoric and the Origins of Consciousness.34
This economy is a result of the nature of
sound. It is not just that sound was an essen¬
tial means of communication and survival in
oral cultures. Sound is unique among the
senses in that it is polysemous. Its signals
embody multiple meanings, are susceptible
to multiple interpretations, because sound,
unlike the signals to the other senses,
presents itself not in sequence but in simul¬
taneity. Furthermore, since “hearing can not
eliminate selectively — there is no aural
equivalent of averting one’s face or eyes,”35
of spitting out, of withdrawing touch-
sound is inescapable.
Rather than trying to make distinctions,
rhetoric unifies, by working “through the
imagination, which euphemizes actuality
through hyperbole and antithesis.”36 In
music, actualities are hyperbolized as well.
The perception of sustained and repeated
sounds, both macro- and microcosmic, were
fashioned into images of order. This order,
rhythm, became sacred when one could sub¬
mit to it in return for protection (from the
threat represented in the multiplicity of the
sound-world) and security (which became
belief and eventually, knowledge). In this
way music is linked as semiotics with the
rhetoric Ong claims “clearly occupies an
intermediary stage between the unconscious
and the conscious.”37
Sachs provocatively suggested that rhythm
“played no essential role in the music of
ancient and medieval Europe,” substantiat¬
ing this by pointing to the almost total
absence of percussion instruments in both
Antiquity and the Middle Ages. And
Johannes de Grocheo, writing ca. 1300,
stated that no monody (sacred or secular)
was it a precise mensurata ,38 Rhythm was a
necessity only in terms of the dance. But
dance, being of the flesh, was inferior to
song, which, carrying the Word, was at least
potentially of the spirit.
Nonetheless, “the major new preoccupa¬
tion of composers and theorists of music in
the twelfth and thirteenth centuries [was] the
coordination of time, a newly recognized
dimension for musical ordering,” writes
Treitler. “The regulation of two or more
voices in respect of both pitch and time
created a new level of complexity. It called
for decisions to be made in advance”— de¬
cisions now in the hands of the composer —
“and communicated, through notation” —
now a set of instructions which restricted
improvisation and were to become more and
more specific— “to performers. The effect
of this was a tendency to fix music, both
conceptually” — ideas of what music was and
what it could be used for — “and nota-
tionally — not for canonical reasons”— these
were beginning to lose, ever so gradually,
their validity— “or initially for aesthetic
ones” — these would be noticed later — “but
primarily for practical purposes.”39
But why regulation, and why the tendency
to fix? The Timaean universe created by God
was one of perfect, perpetual, harmonious,
circular motion. If in the medieval mind
morality was a process of subservience, of
submission, of self-imposition, why the
growing need to control the external world
of sound? Perhaps it was not to facilitate
1986]
Holzaepfel — Music of the Middle Ages
47
finding one’s place in the Divine Plan, not
another allegory of world harmony, but a
symptom of the soul in disharmony.
The major change in the mind of man . . .
which distinguishes the Middle Ages from
antiquity and which caused the fundamental
reconstruction of man’s basic concepts and
attitudes is centered around the act of re¬
directing the path of causality.40
Redirection began with the birth of
Christianity, “God’s personal entry into his¬
tory,’’41 and the consequent concept of
linear time. This concept generated the
medieval distinction between vertical and
horizontal truth, allegory and typology, and
originated with Augustine. Augustine pre¬
sented his discovery of the relation of time to
memory in the eleventh chapter of the Con¬
fessions:
I am about to repeat a Psalm that I know.
Before I begin, my expectation is extended
over the whole; but when I have begun, how
much soever of it I shall separate off into the
past, is extended along my memory; thus the
life of this action of mine is divided between
my memory as to what I have repeated, and
expectation as to what I am about to repeat;
but “consideration” is present with me, that
through it what was future, may be conveyed
over, so as to become past. Which the more it
is done again and again, so much the more the
expectation being shortened, is the memory
enlarged; till the whole expectation be at
length exhausted, when that whole action
being ended, shall have passed into memory.
And this which takes place in the whole
Psalm, the same takes place in each several
portion of it, and each several syllable; the
same holds in that larger action, whereof this
Psalm may be a part; the same holds in the
whole life of man, whereof all the actions of
man are parts; the same holds through the
whole age of the sons of men, whereof all the
lives of men are parts.42
In chapter 12, Augustine distinguishes
between sound and music; “a tune is a
formed sound.” Time is the sine qua non of
one becoming the other:
... for we do not first in time utter formless
sounds without singing, and subsequently
adapt or fashion them into the form of a
chant, as wood or silver, whereof a chest or
vessel is fashioned. For such materials do by
time also precede the forms of the things made
of them, but in singing it is not so; for when it
is sung, its sound is heard; for there is not first
a formless sound, which is afterwards formed
into a chant. For each sound, so soon as
made, passeth away, nor canst thou find
ought to recall, and by art to compose. So
then the chant is concentrated in its sound.43
Memory of events creates the awareness of
time. Time in turn is the vehicle of sound
and music. For sound to become music, it
must do so at the time it exists; it cannot be
refashioned. It must be fashioned entirely
within the present , its own presence . “But
the present, should it always be present, and
never pass into time past, verily it should not
be time, but eternity.”44 Music is thus an
intermittent glimpse (hearing, really) of
eternity, passing in and out of existence with
time. But why is the present not always
present?
Here we may turn to Augustine’s earlier
De musica libra sex , to the final book, in
comparison with which the first five were
“child’s play.”45 We return to the realm of
musica speculativa , of numerical propor¬
tion. Augustine posits a level of numbers,
and traces them upwards, each level evoking
a new layer of consciousness: hearing
through the reacting numbers, recognition
through the memorial, pronunciation
(singing?) through the advancing, delight
through the judicial, appraisal through “still
others, and in accordance with these more
hidden numbers we bring another judgment
on this delight, a kind of judgment on the
judicial numbers.”46 Then we find a new,
Augustinian insight:
And, if we have been right in our judgment,
the very sense of delight could not have been
favorable to equal intervals and rejected
perturbed ones, unless it itself were imbued
with numbers; then, too, the reason laid upon
48
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
this delight cannot at all judge of the numbers
it has under it, without more powerful num¬
bers.47
This, O’Connell believes, implies that
reacting numbers— embodying sound— are
at the bottom of a cascade of numbers pro¬
ceeding from God, and that the even deeper
implication, therefore, “is that the
intelligible is, quite literally, a ‘remembered’
world, one of which the soul is literally re¬
minded, to which it needs to be recalled.”48
That the experience of time is a reflection
of the soul’s fall from grace is an idea that
recurs in the Confessions. After discussing
the memorial-temporal relation and apply¬
ing it to the whole life of mankind, Augus¬
tine adds, “but because Thy loving-kindness
is better than all lives, behold, my life is but
a distraction.”49
Plotinus had written that the soul passes
from an original, timeless state into motion,
and that “time moved with it.”50 Being in
time means motion in time. It is a fallen
condition; we have been “sewn into the
order” of time as a consequence.51 In the
Augustinian meaning, the original sin was
tripartite: through 1) curiosity, the soul was
seduced into 2) “carnal concupiscence,”
which, by detouring the soul’s attention to
the body, results in 3) neglect of the soul’s
true master, God.52 Original sin was the
result of what Plotinus called the element of
“restlessly active nature” contained in the
soul;53 the world of time is the punishment
for that sin by prolonging it. The world we
perceive through the lower levels of numbers
is a product of our morality.54
But morality, as the Middle Ages knew, is
in use, specificially, in bene utendo. The
mind could be freed from time by using
time. Had human nature remained obedient,
it “should have no such connections as are
contingent on birth and death.”55 The
implication could not be more clear: time
and sin are coeternal. Through the use of
time to transcend time, music could com¬
municate the very knowing of God. Truth,
the Middle Ages also knew, depended on the
accuracy of reproduction of an idea.
Notes
1 de Bruyne, Edgar, The Esthetics of the Middle
Ages, trans. E. B. Hennessy. New York: Frederick
Ungar, 1969. p.44.
2 Perl, Carl Johann, “Augustine and Music,”
Musical Quarterly, XLI, 4 (October 1955), 507.
3 Strunk, Oliver, Source Readings in Music History.
New York: W. W. Norton and Co., 1950. pp. 3-56.
4 Rowell, Lewis, “Time in the Musical Consciousness
of Old High Civilizations — East and West,” in The
Study of Time, III, ed. J. T. Fraser, N. Lawrence and
D. Park. New York: Springer- Ver lag (1978) 606.
5 Georgiades, Thrasybulos, Music and Language.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1982. p. 4.
6 de Bruyne, op. cit, p. 48.
7 Kresteff, Assen D., “ Musica Disciplina and Musica
Sonora ,” Journal of Research in Music Education, X, 1
(Spring, 1962), 13.
8 Boethius, The Consolation of Philosophy , trans.
S. J. Trester. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1923.21-25.
9 Kresteff, p. 18.
10 Huizinga, J. The Waning of the Middle Ages.
Garden City: Doubleday and Co., n.d. (originally publ.
1924) p.267.
11 ibid., p. 268.
12 ibid., p. 269.
13 ibid., p. 267.
14 Augustine, Confessions, trans. E. B. Pusey. New
York: Pocket Books, 1951. p. 202.
15 Huizinga, pp. 267-68.
16 Sachs, Curt, “Primitive and Medieval Music: A
Parallel,” Journal of the American Musicological
Society, XIII (1960), 44.
17 ibid., p. 46.
11 Erickson, Carrolly, The Medieval Vision. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1976. p. 66.
19 Ibid., p. 43. For another viewpoint on the relations
between Church, music, and medieval life, see
Huizinga, pp. 250-51.
20 Hoppin, Richard, Medieval Music. New York:
W. W. Norton and Co., 1978. p. 186.
21 Barker, Andrew, ed., Greek Musical Writings, v.I.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1984. pp.
175-76. Elsewhere, Barker elaborates Sach’s issue of the
“sham legalization of lawlessness:” “The harmoniai
are treated as theoretical abstractions of melodic
sequences occurring in actual tunes . . . rather than as
scalar structures consciously adopted by the musicians
themselves to form a predetermined framework for
their melodies.” (ibid. , p. 28 In)
22 Treitler, Leo, “Homer and Gregory: The Trans-
1986]
Holzaepfel — Music of the Middle Ages
49
mission of Epic Poetry and Plainchant,” Musical
Quarterly , LX, 3 (July 1974), 341-42.
23 Treitler, ibid., p. 342, and “Reading and Singing:
on the genesis of occidental music-writing,” Early
Music History 4, ed. Iain Fenlon, Cambridge: Cam¬
bridge University Press, 1984, pp. 141-53 and passim .
Note especially, in the latter article, Treitler ’s observa¬
tion that the concept of music as language is a “topos
that runs through the medieval theoretical literature as
the fundamental principle of musical structure.” (p.
146)
24 , “Reading and Singing,” p. 141.
25 Dictionary of Folklore, Mythology, and Legend
(1972), pp. 825-29, cited in Treitler, “Oral, Written,
and Literate Process in the Transmission of Medieval
Music,” Speculum, 56, 3 (1981) 488.
26 Treitler, “Oral, Written, and Literate Process in
the transmission of Medieval Music,” Speculum, 56, 3
(1981), pp. 489-90.
27 musica enchiriadis, ed. Martin Gerbert in
Scriptores ecclesiastici de musica medii aevi (St. Blasien,
1784, I, 172), cited in Bukofzer, “Speculative Thinking
in Medieval Music,” Speculum, XVII, 2 (April 1942)
174.
28 Bukofzer, ibid., p. 174.
29 Strunk, p. 88. Compare this with the definition
proposed by Webern, paraphrasing Goethe: “Music is
natural law related to the sense of hearing.” (The Path
to the New Music, Bryn Mawr, 1963, p. 11)
30 Bernardus Silvestris, Cosmographia, trans.
W. Wetherbee. New York: Columbia University Press,
1973. p. 123.
31 Sachs, p. 44.
32 ibid .
33 Attali, Jacques, Noise, trans. B. Massumi. Min¬
neapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1985. p. 6. On
noise as disorder, cf . Kubler, George, The Shape of
Time, New Haven: Yale University Press, 1962. p. 20.
“All substantial signals can be regarded both as
transmission and as initial commotions.”
34 Ong, Walter, S. J. Rhetoric, Romance, and
Technology , Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1971.
P-2.
35 Ong, Walter, S. J. The Presence of the Word, New
Haven: Yale University Press, 1967, p. 130.
36 Gilbert Durand, Les Structures anthropologiques
de Timaginaire (Paris, 1960), cited in Ong, Rhetoric,
Romance, and Technology , p. 13.
37 Ong, ibid. pp. 11-12.
38 Sachs, p. 46.
39 Treitler, “Oral, Written, and Literate Process,”
pp. 490-91.
40 Kresteff, p. 20.
41 Ong, The Presence of the Word, p. 11.
42 Augustine, pp. 236-37.
43 ibid., pp. 264-65.
44 ibid., p. 224.
45 De Musica, VI, cited in O’Connell, Robert J., S.J.
Art and the Christian Intelligence in St. Augustine.
Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1978. p. 66.
46 De Musica, VI, cited in Perl, p. 503.
47 ibid., p. 504.
48 O’Connell, pp. 66-68, 70-71.
49 Augustine, p. 237.
50 Ennead, III, 7, “On Eternity and Time,” cited in
O’Connell, p. 79.
51 De Musica, VI, 30, cited in O’Connell, p. 75.
52 De Musica, IV, op. cit., p. 74.
53 Ennead, op. cit.
54 O’Connell, p. 84.
55 De Vera Religione, 88. cited in O’Connell, p. 89.
POPULATION ECOLOGY OF ROCK DOVES IN A SMALL CITY
James Krakowski
College of Natural Resources
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
and
Neil F. Payne
College of Natural Resources
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
Abstract:
We studied population dynamics of rock doves (Columba livia) in Stevens
Point, Wisconsin from June 1976 through September 1977. A relatively stationary
population of about 900 rock doves used 112 roosting sites within the city. Eight
communal roosts contained 70% of the population. Rock doves nesting in com¬
munal roosts may be more productive than pairs nesting on houses. Annual incre¬
ment was estimated at 43%, but mortality and dispersal rates were balancing. Rock
doves were relatively healthy; the only zoonosis was Chlamydia , found in 21% of
103 blood samples. Rock doves were considered a nuisance by 37% of 1,299
households interviewed. The rock dove population should be managed by reducing
the number of large roosts and adopting procedures to reduce food sources.
Introduction
Rock doves (feral pigeons) can be found in
almost every urban area in North America,
and are controversial in most. Large concen¬
trations can cause health hazards (Scott
1964), noise, aircraft threats (Solman 1974,
and economic loss (Murton et al. 1972a). By
contrast, they are beneficial scavengers, and
the only large wild bird readily viewed in
downtown areas (Scott 1961). Most efforts
to reduce the population size of rock doves
have temporary effect until the population
recovers through recruitment (Scott 1961,
Murton et al. 1972a). This study was in¬
itiated in response to complaints of nuisance
rock doves. It examines recruitment, nesting
locations, movement patterns to food and
water, and nuisance status of rock doves in a
typical midwestern city to identify weak
ecological links which might be exploited for
population control.
Study Area
The city of Stevens Point in Portage
County, central Wisconsin, contains 24,000
people in an area of 29 km2. Most houses
and business establishments within the inner
core of the city were built between 1870 and
1930. Architectural designs include Italia-
nate, Victorian, Neoclassical Revival,
Prairie, and Southwest Bungalow. Churches
are of the Gothic style with domes showing
Polish influence. Suitable rock dove roosting
and nesting habitat results from the intricate
ornamentation, complex roof structure, ga¬
bles, and long over-hanging eaves of build¬
ings. Such architecture is typical of urban
areas in Wisconsin. Railroad cars transpor¬
ting grain are subject to spillage, and are
emptied and washed in Stevens Point, pro¬
viding rock doves with food. Winters are
severe, averaging 74 days/year when the
maximum temperature is 0°C or below.
Stevens Point averages 122 cm of snowfall/
year.
Methods
From June 1976 through September 1977
daily movements were observed with spot¬
ting scope and binoculars from high vantage
points. Nesting and roosting-site suitability
50
1986]
Krakowski and Payne— Rock Doves in a Small City
51
was identified by the number of rock doves
using the site, amount of overhead cover,
and nesting success after a season of obser¬
vation. Productivity of 15 house nest sites
and 2 church communal nest sites was com¬
pared during summer 1977.
Rock doves were live-trapped with a wood
frame drop net triggered by a pull-string, a
wood frame top-slotted drop-in trap, and
with a fish landing net used in the roosts at
night. Doves were banded, and marked with
color-coded patagial tags and spray paint on
wings to identify individuals and flocks.
Population density was identified by 2
types of monthly observations: doves were
counted in their roosting areas by night, and
at feeding and loafing sites by day. Flock
counts were most effective during winter,
when rock doves concentrated daily at loaf¬
ing areas, and few were on nests. Photo¬
graphs were used to facilitate counts of large
flocks. At intervals each month, daily obser¬
vations of movement patterns to food and
water were made from roofs of various
buildings within the city, and on ground near
roosting, nesting, staging, feeding, watering,
and loafing areas. During winter months,
local rural pigeon roosts were surveyed with
binoculars for marked dispersed urban rock
doves. Doves loaf on roofs of silos, barns,
and other buildings, especially on clear, cold
winter days. Requests were made through
the local newspaper for sightings of marked
rock doves outside of Stevens Point.
Blood samples and cloacal swabs were col¬
lected monthly and analyzed at cooperating
laboratories for the following zoonoses and
blood parasites: influenza, parainfluenza,
Newcastle disease, western equine encephali¬
tis, eastern equine encephalitis, St. Louis
equine encephalitis, California encephalitis,
chlamydiosis, histoplasmosis, blastomyco¬
sis, cryptococcosis, salmonella, Haemopro-
teus , Leucocytozoan , Plasmodium . Blood
was obtained through heart puncture with a
22 guage, 3.8-cm needle used with a 5 cc
vacutainer. All rock doves were returned
alive to the population.
Results
Nesting and Roosting Sites.— Most of the
112 nesting locations found were in the cen¬
tral part of the city where the older houses
and buildings are located. Eight large (<30
birds) nest sites accounted for 70% of
Stevens Point’s rock doves. These large nest
sites were higher than 6 m, protected from
the weather, and inaccessible to humans and
other animals.
Of 970 rock doves, 30% nested on 92
houses. These were older houses with eaves,
dormers, roof support brackets, or other
structures of a characteristic height, shape,
depth, and overhead coverage lacking on
newer houses in the city. A count of 502
houses with apparently suitable nesting
habitat in the community indicated that
12-15% of available nesting structures were
being used. Rock doves roosted mostly
under the dormer eaves and on the brackets.
Single pairs of rock doves occupied the
roost/nest niches of houses. Additional rock
doves roosting at the same site usually were
the pair’s most recent progeny. The mean
height from the ground of a house roost was
Table 1. Results of a survey of all Stevens Point
households with rock doves where the question, “Do
you believe pigeons are a nuisance?” was asked.
52
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
6.5 m. Selection by rock doves of aspect
TV =107) showed no distinct pattern, al¬
though they seemed to avoid west, north,
and south sides of houses.
A complete house-to-house survey of the
central (older) section of Stevens Point,
where rock doves occurred, was conducted
for locations of pigeon activity and to deter¬
mine if people considered rock doves a
nuisance. Of 1,299 people sampled, 58%
thought rock doves were not a nuisance
(Table 1).
Production. — We banded, marked, and
released 284 rock doves, including 56
juveniles, with patagial markers. We
monitored 281 nests (246 nests at 2 churches,
30 nests on 15 houses, 3 nests in trees, 2 nests
at a school).
During April-August 1977, 86% (N=10)
of the house-nesting rock doves nested on
the 15 houses studied intensively. House¬
nesting rock doves usually did not renest
(Table 2) or nest at all during a 5-month
period from late fall to early spring. Hatch¬
ing success of 281 nests observed throughout
the city was 71%. From 544 eggs laid, 288
rock doves (53%) fledged. During April-
August 1977, 70 house-nesting rock doves
fledged 37 young, or 53% of their popula¬
tion, compared to 104% for the 2 churches
studied (Table 2). The number of young pro¬
duced was different (P<0.01, a:2 = 9.47,
Table 2. Productivity of communal nest sites versus house sites in Stevens Point, WI, 1977.
“ Includes renests.
Table 3. Estimated productivity and annual increment for the Stevens Point, WI, pigeon population, 1977.
“ Average N pigeons at roost site.
* Communal roost productivity value of 1 .35 fledglings/nest and 3 nests/year.
c House roost productivity value of 1.23 fledglings/nest and 2 nests/year.
d Total young = nests x productivity value (b or c).
Nr -No (891 +669) -891
Annual Increment =
N;
1560
= 43 °7o
1986]
Krakowski and Payne— -Rock Doves in a Small City
53
df = 2) between the 15 house sites studied
and the communal nest sites in the 2
churches, but the number of fledglings/nest
was similar between 1 of the churches and
the houses (Table 2). On the 15 houses
studied intensively, at least 57% of the rock
doves were non-breeders (Table 2); on the 92
houses with rock doves, at least 28% of the
rock doves were non-breeders (Table 3). In
the 2 communal nest sites studied inten¬
sively, at least 28% of the rock doves were
non-breeders (Table 2); in the 5 communal
nest sites, at least 61% of the rock doves
were non-breeders (Table 3). Overall, 51%
of the rock doves in Stevens Point were non¬
breeders in 1977 (Table 3).
Although more nests were produced in the
1st nest attempt, nest success reached 71%
with the 3rd nest attempt (Table 4), of which
68% were started in June and July. First nest
attempts of the year were 81% successful
during April through July 1977. No eggs
were laid in December and January and no
young fledged in February.
The rock dove population was relatively
stable, fluctuating between 850 and 1,030
birds from May 1976 to August 1977, or
76-89 rock doves/km2 (Table 5). In August
1976, 66% of the population of rock doves
(7V=910) lived in communal nest sites, 32%
on houses, and 2% on other buildings. A
population decline in March 1977 followed a
very cold winter. A decline in May 1977
resulted from more rock doves (140) than
usual being shot by the Stevens Point Police
Department in response to complaints; the
effect on nesting is unknown.
Mortality and Dispersal— We estimated
an annual increment of 43% for the rock
dove population by expanding productivity
values obtained from known church and
house nest sites to the other nest sites in
Stevens Point (Table 3). From January
through August 1977, the mortality of 155
rock doves was accounted for. With an esti¬
mated production of 670 rock doves, 515
rock doves remained unaccounted for. Al¬
though the study period did not cover the
Table 4. Nest attempts of 64 pairs of rock doves at 2
churches and the fate of their 160 nests, Stevens
Point, WI, January-September 1977.
N nest attempts
° Nest mortality = number of nests abandoned or
destroyed before hatching and is part of the unsuc¬
cessful nests.
6 Successful nest = fledged at least 1 young.
Table 5. Monthly census of rock doves in
Stevens Point, WI.
last 4 months of 1977, data from the same
period in 1976 indicated that little mortality
occurred. We found only 8 dead rock doves
from September to December 1976. Much of
this mortality probably was caused by
human-related activities (i.e., shooting, trap¬
ping, road-kills). Such mortality was dif¬
ficult to monitor because some people shoot
and trapped rock doves secretly, and road-
kills often were picked up immediately by
the city sanitation crew. Dispersal, perhaps
to rural roosts, may have been high. No
marked rock doves were observed during 3
visits to adjacent rural roosts in winter
54
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
1976, and no one responded to newspaper
articles requesting sightings of marked rock
doves outside Stevens Point. However, in
1986, a student reported shooting a banded
rock dove in late 1977 at his rural farm
about 10 km from Stevens Point.
We found 4 rock doves killed by hawks, 1
by an owl, 10 by car collision, and 4 by
shooting. We found 4 adult and 88 juvenile
rock doves dead in the 2 church nest sites,
August 1976- August 1977, with a high of 14
dead juveniles in September 1976 and March
1977. Of 53 juveniles patagium-marked at
the 2 churches from May through August
1977, 43% were recaptured there at the end
of August 1977. Others were observed on
ledges outside the churches, on nearby
houses, and at communal nest sites down¬
town.
Tests for zoonoses produced positive re¬
sults only for Chlamydia , which occurred in
21% of 103 blood samples examined for it.
Of 224 blood smears examined for parasites,
3% contained 7 Haemoproteus and 1 sus¬
pected Plasmodium. These results reflect a
low incidence of parasites compared to other
studies (Table 6). No other zoonoses were
found in the 451 blood samples, 384 cloacal
swabs, and 15 fecal samples examined.
Movement to Food and Water.-— The Soo
Line railroad track area within Stevens
Point’s city limits was the main feeding area.
Most rock doves spent at least part of each
day there. After snow melt this source was
augmented by seeds and litter picked up in
an athletic field and throughout the city, but
the tracks were the main food source. Water
was obtained from pools on buildings after
precipitation and from the Wisconsin River.
The Wisconsin River was used more often
during summer.
Observations revealed the following daily
schedule for rock doves in Stevens Point
during summer:
Sunrise to 1 hour after— about Vs of the
city’s rock doves were feeding, courting,
and flying in the Soo Line track area.
Others were occupied with young and/or
eggs or loafed near the roost area.
Rest of morning— the rock doves were
back around the roost site or in its
general area. They loafed in the sun or
picked up food and grit nearby. Noon
through afternoon— the birds were back
at the Soo Line tracks, but not all at the
same time. During this period, small
groups (4-25) were constantly leaving and
flying into the area; only 150-300 birds
could ever be counted at any one time at
the railroad tracks. However, during this
period most of the city’s rock dove popu¬
lation visited the Soo Line track area as
the primary food source in the city, as
evidenced by color-coded patagial tags
and spray-painted wings.
One hour before sunset to sunset— the
rock doves were in or near the roosting
area, loafing or feeding.
Sunset— all rock doves were roosting.
During winter the schedule changed in
that the rock doves arrived at the tracks 3
hours after sunrise and left 3 hours before
sunset. They spent proportionally more of
Table 6. A comparison of various geographical locations for the incidence of
Haemoproteus columhae in rock doves.
N rock doves
% infection Sampled Location Authority
3.0 224 Stevens Point, WI This study
58.3 60 Henrico Co., VA Jochen 1962
82.2 — Honolulu, HA Kartman 1949
57.7 — Parana, Brazil Giovanni 1946
1986]
Krakowski and Payne — Rock Doves in a Small City
55
their time in the track area during winter
because it was their only food source and no
nesting occurred. Therefore, we saw larger
concentrations (500-800) at the tracks during
winter. Spring and fall were transitional
periods between the 2 schedules.
Discussion
Nesting and Roosting Sites.— Rock dove
roosting/nesting sites in Stevens Point were
characteristic of those in other urban areas
(Potts and Wolmendorf 1960, Scott 1961,
Woldow 1972). Feral rock doves are colonial
nesters like their ancestors which nest in
coastal caves (Gompertz 1957) and roost in
groups (Goodwin 1960). Rock doves in Ste¬
vens Point used only 12-15% of available
house roosts and all available communal
sites. Communal sites were crowded. House
sites may be marginal habitat for rock doves,
perhaps occupied by surplus or subordinate
birds from overcrowded communal sites, as
Murton et al. (1974) suggested.
We observed no seasonal preference of
nesting sites. Rock doves leave sites exposed
to cold weather winds (Woldow 1972), and
move to locations not facing prevailing
winds (Murton et al. 19726). The rock doves
of Stevens Point were observed to avoid
cold winter winds, seek shade during hot
summer days, seek sunlight during cold
winter days, and avoid the north and west
sides of houses which receive the harsh cold
winds of Wisconsin’s winters, and the south
side which was hot during nesting in sum¬
mer. Overhanging eaves of dormers and the
proximity of other houses apparently pro¬
vided enough protection from the weather
all year on some houses. Rock doves used
certain houses as loafing areas during winter
days; these houses had poorly insulated,
gently sloping roofs. Roofs too steep were
difficult to walk on. Poorly insulated roofs
radiated heat which reduced snow and per¬
haps warmed the rock doves.
Population Characteristics. —The relative
monthly stability of the rock dove popula¬
tion probably was due to a combination of
year-round availability of food and water,
relatively few breeders (49%), distributing
reproduction over a long time (9 mo.), and
probably high dispersal rates. The size of the
rock dove population (850-1030) in Stevens
Point may be related to the number of com¬
munal nest sites within the city, food avail¬
ability, and low incidence of parasites and
disease. Four large sites not intensively
studied in the downtown area were used by
300 rock doves, but only an estimated 18%
nested in what may have been generally un¬
suitable nesting habitat with few nest sites.
These sites also may have contained many
young-of-the-year from other sites; young
rock doves marked from the 2 churches were
seen at these sites.
Human-related activities probably were
the major mortality factors for adult rock
doves. Most of the increment of young birds
could not be accounted for later, and may
have dispersed outside the city or the popula¬
tion pressure may have forced subordinate
non-breeding adults to disperse. Because
many fledged young-of-the-year were forced
from their natural area by established adults,
they probably sustained higher mortality
than adults from shooting and trapping.
Fledging success in Stevens Point compared
favorably with that in Maryland (Schein
1954), England (Murton et al. 1972a), and
New Zealand (Dilks 1975) even though
weather extremes are greatest in Stevens
Point. Mortality of squabs may result from
exposure, disease, and sibling rivalry. Mur¬
ton and Clarke (1968) stated that the weak¬
ened condition of adults in late summer due
to moulting, rearing several clutches, and a
lack of food supplies caused higher nestling
deaths. The cold winters of Stevens Point
may eliminate rock doves that are weak or
subordinate. Weak birds which are often
chronic or subclinical disease carriers may
succumb with the added stress of weather.
Subordinate rock doves also may be culled
from the population by exposure to winter
weather.
The 2 church communal nest sites pro-
56
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
duced more young than the house sites partly
because rock doves prefer communal nest
sites; more rock doves are available to pro¬
duce more young there. The apparent dif¬
ference in the number of birds fledged prob¬
ably is due to most birds in the churches
nesting and many renesting. House nesting
birds laid only 1 clutch or did not nest during
a 5-month period. Murton et al. (1974)
stated that rock doves which could not estab¬
lish themselves at their natal area were sub¬
ordinate. Murton et al. (1974) also stated
that reproduction was best at the natal area.
Displaced rock doves from the Stevens Point
communal roosts therefore might not be as
successful.
Ready sources of food and water in
Stevens Point were available throughout the
year only a short distance from the nest sites.
Especially important is the availability of
food and water at the railroad tracks during
winter, when the ground is covered with
snow. The food that is eaten at the tracks is
supplemented by weed seeds found within
the city during spring and summer. Murton
et al. (1972a) stated that food directly af¬
fected the breeding success and size of a
population of rock doves in Manchester,
England. Ricklefs (1972) stated that the
number of clutches is an integral part of the
annual fecundity and depends in large part
on the length of the season that is suitable
for reproduction. Ricklefs (1972) also noted
that the long breeding season in rock doves is
attributed to their varied and flexible diet.
The results of the rock dove nuisance
survey and the complaints which led the city
of Stevens Point to invite and support our
study suggest that rock doves are a valued
wildlife resource, but that the density of 76
rock doves/km2 is too high. Public opinion
must be considered in management objec¬
tives. Efforts should be aimed at maintain¬
ing an acceptable population size by moni¬
toring and managing on an annual basis.
Temporary rock dove control, such as shoot¬
ing, trapping, drugging, poisoning, repel¬
lents, or destruction of nests and eggs, have
been tried in other cities with relatively little
success (Scott 1961) because they are short
term in effect. The public often is offended
by many of the temporary control measures
(Penn 1965). Some of these are of value
when used in conjunction with more perma¬
nent measures.
Control efforts should concentrate on nest
site elimination and prevention. These
methods offer permanent control and have
been part of successful rock dove control
programs (Potts and Wolmendorf 1960,
Scott 1961). In the case of Stevens Point, the
dependable source of food at the railroad
station was probably the key factor, especi¬
ally in winter, in maintaining the population
of rock doves at 76-89/km2. The daily prac¬
tice of washing out grain cars with hot water
provided a regular source of food, grit, and
water during these critical months. Reduc¬
tion of the rock dove population probably
would occur if the station could reduce the
spillage of grain atop grain cars and on the
tracks, and if it could wash the cars less
often, inside a building, or on top of a single
catch basin to which the birds were pre¬
vented access.
Acknowledgments
The city of Stevens Point and the Univer¬
sity of Wisconsin-Stevens Point provided
financial assistance. We also thank many
undergraduate and graduate students of the
University for assistance.
Literature Cited
Dilks, P. J. 1975. The breeding of the feral
pigeon in Hawke’s Bay, New Zealand. Notor-
nis 22:295-301.
Gompertz, T. 1957. Some observations on the
feral pigeon in London. Bird Study 4:2-13.
Goodwin, D. 1960. Comparative ecology of
pigeons in inner London. British Birds
53:201-212.
Giovanni, M. 1946. Fauna parasitologica pare-
nese. I. Haemoproteus columbae, Celli and
Sanfelici, 1891 em Columba livia nos Pombias
de Curitiba. Arg. Biol. e. Tecnol. 1:19-21.
1986]
Krakowski and Payne — Rock Doves in a Small City
57
Jochen, R. F. 1962. A survey of parasites in a
population of pigeons ( Columba livia, Gmelin)
in Henrico County, Virginia. M.S. thesis,
Univ. Richmond, Richmond, VA. 63 pp.
Kartman, L. 1949. Observations on the Haemo-
proteus of pigeons in Honolulu, Hawaii.
Pacific Sci. 3:127-132.
Murton, R. K., and S. P. Clarke. 1968. Breeding
biology of rock doves. British Birds 61:
429-448.
_ _ _ , C. F. B. Coombs, and R. J. P. Thearle.
1972a. Ecological studies of the feral pigeon
(Columba livia) Var. I: population, breeding
biology and methods of control. J. Appl. Ecol.
9:835-874.
. \912b. Ecological studies of the feral
pigeon (Columba livia) Var. II: flock be¬
haviour and social organization. J. Appl. Ecol.
9:875-889.
_ . 1974. Ecological studies of the feral
pigeon (Columba livia) Var. Ill: reproduction
and plumage polymorphism. J. Appl. Ecol.
11:841-854.
Penn, L. A. 1965. Pigeon control in Milwaukee.
Pest Control 33:16-18.
Potts, R. M. and D. J. Wolmendorf. 1960. Pig¬
eon control in Fresno, California. Vector
Views 7:59-62.
Ricklefs, R. E. 1972. Fecundity, mortality and
avian demography. Page 366-434 in D. S.
Farner, ed. Breeding biology of birds. Nat.
Acad. Sci., Washington, D.C.
Schein, M. W. 1954. Survival records of young
feral pigeons. Auk 71:318-320.
Scott, H. G. 1961. Pigeons — public health impor¬
tance and control. Pest Control 29:9-20.
_ 1964. Pigeon-borne disease control
through sanitation and pigeon stoppage. Pest
Control 32:14-15.
Solman, V. E. 1974. Aircraft and wildlife. Pages
137-141 in Symposium on wildlife in an ur¬
banizing environment. Coop. Ext. Serv., Univ.
Massachusetts, Amherst.
Woldow, N. L. 1972. Studies on the reproductive
capacities of birds with a field study of the
feral rock dove, Columba livia, L., in the ur¬
ban environment. Ph.D. thesis, Rice Univ.,
Houston, TX. 169 pp.
IDENTIFICATION OF WISCONSIN CATFISHES (ICTALURID AE) :
A KEY BASED ON PECTORAL FIN SPINES
Weldon Paruch
West Bend , Wisconsin
Abstract
A key to the pectoral fin spines of the freshwater catfish of Wisconsin is pro¬
vided and these are compared with the spine characters as described from regions
adjacent to or near Wisconsin. The key is based upon the size, shape, and orienta¬
tion of the spines and the bony structures found on them.
Introduction
Identification of catfish species is not
always easy. Conventional means of identi¬
fication are such features as the number of
anal fin rays and the color of chin barbels,
which are not always conclusive since there is
considerable overlap between species. For
example:
Overlap of anal ray counts in the genus Ictalurus
(Slastenenko 1958, Pflieger 1975, Becker 1983).
analyzing pectoral fin spines alone, most
Wisconsin catfishes can be identified to
species.
Since pectoral fin spines are persistent
bony structures they are useful in providing
the biologist with an important tool for the
identification of badly decomposed speci¬
mens, skeletal materials, and food habits of
fish-eating birds, mammals, and reptiles.
Materials and Methods
The following key to the spines of the
ictalurids of Wisconsin is based upon the
observation of spines from 571 Ictalurus
melas, 102 Ictalurus natalis, 83 Ictalurus
nebulosus, 60 Ictalurus punctatus , 4 Pylo-
dictis olivaris , 145 Noturus gyrinus , 74
Noturus flavus, and 44 Noturus exilis.
Personal collections were made from the
Oconomowoc River and from the Wisconsin
River, but the principal source of specimens
was the Museum of Natural History at the
University of Wisconsin in Stevens Point.
In this study the right pectoral spine, while
held at right angles to the body was removed
flush with the body using a jeweler’s saw.
The portion of the spine removed included
the main shaft and its toothlike projections
(barbs). Fin tissue was thoroughly teased
from the spine with pins, razor, and forceps
using a 20X dissecting scope. Characteristics
of the ventral side of the spine were noted.
Occasionally bony material on the dorsal
side obscures size and shape of some barbs.
The bottom (ventral) side of the spine
often shows important distinguishable
features more readily than the top (dorsal)
side. This is particularly true near the base of
bullhead spines where bone on the dorsal
side often obscures detail. Hence all draw¬
ings of the right pectoral spine which follow
are made from the bottom (or ventral) side.
If one were to lay a fish upon its back with
the tail pointing away, the spine on the right
would be in the same position as the draw¬
ings in the key. Drawings of spines indicate
typical shape and average adult size.
58
1986]
Paruch— Identification of Wisconsin Catfishes
59
Terms used appear as follows:
posterior (trailing edge)
Results
Key to Spines of the Ictaluridae of Wisconsin
la. Barbs not present on posterior edge . 2
lb. Barbs present on posterior edge .... 3
2a. Anterior notches prominent, wide, and
deep, extending from tip at least half¬
way along shaft of spine. Surfaces of
the base half of spine smooth and un¬
furrowed.
3a. Barbs present on both posterior and
anterior edges.
FLATHEAD CATFISH
Pylodictis olivaris (Rafinesque)
posterior
STONE CAT
Noturus flavus Rafinesque
posterior
2b. Anterior notches, if present, are
delicate and short, and limited to near
tip. Both dorsal and ventral surfaces of
spine deeply furrowed.
TADPOLE MADTOM
Noturus gyrinus (Mitchell)
posterior
anterior
anterior
3b. Barbs present on posterior edge only 4
4a. Barb heights steadily decreasing from
tip of spine to base, showing consistent
strong inclination toward base.
CHANNEL CATFISH
Ictalurus punctatus (Rafinesque)
anterior
4b. Barb heights not steadily decreasing
from tip of spine to base some upright
or showing inclination away from the
base . 5
\ cm
60
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
5a. Barb heights on posterior edge of spine
equal to or greater than one-half the
diameter of spine shaft at point of barb
attachment.
BROWN BULLHEAD
Ictalurus nebulosus (Lesueur)
7a. Barbs from tip to mid-spine similar in
size, shape, and spacing. Barbs not
pyramidal in shape (as an isosceles
triangle).
YELLOW BULLHEAD
Ictalurus natalis (Lesueur)
posterior
anterior
5b. Barb heights on posterior edge of spine
noticeably shorter than one-half the
diameter of spine shaft at point of barb
attachment . 6
6a. Anterior notches extending from tip at
least halfway along shaft of spine.
SLENDER MADTOM
Noturus exilis Nelson
posterior
anterior
l CYvx
6b. Anterior notches, when present,
limited to tip of spine . 7
posterior
7b. Barbs from tip to mid-spine not similar
in size, shape, and spacing. Barbs often
pyramidal in shape (as an isosceles
triangle).
BLACK BULLHEAD
Ictalurus melas (Rafinesque)
posterior
anterior
Discussion
Black Bullhead
The pectoral spines of the black bullhead
are the most variable of Wisconsin catfish
species, showing few consistent character¬
istics (see ill. under 7b of key). For this
species spines with weak barbs have been
reported from Illinois (Paloumpis 1963),
Missouri (Pflieger 1975), Canada (Scott and
Crossman 1973), Ohio (Trautman 1957),
and Wisconsin (Becker 1983). Illustrations
of black bullhead spines from Missouri,
Canada and Ohio are smooth edged, lacking
barbs.
According to Trautman, the spines of
many young and some small adults may be
“somewhat serrated.” In Illinois, Forbes
and Richardson (1920) reported that weak
teeth occur only in adults, and Paloumpis
(1963) has observed barbed spines at all ages.
All the Wisconsin black bullheads I exam¬
ined had barbs on the spines; however
Becker (pers. comm.) reported that some in-
1986]
Paruch — Identification of Wisconsin Catfishes
61
dividuals “may have only the faintest
resemblance to barbs.* ’ Although the barbs
in the drawing by Becker (1983, p. 145) are
less well defined than those I observed, their
small size and irregularity allow correct iden¬
tification to species using the above key.
Other characteristics of bullhead spines
that may be useful are the anterior serrations
and the anterior notch(es). The anterior edge
of the black bullhead spine is generally
smooth; however anterior serrations, when
present, are small and limited to the part of
the spine closest to the base (see ill. under 7b
in the key). The anterior notch(es) near the
tip of the spine appear(s) in Wisconsin black
bullheads although not well defined. This
characteristic has also been reported by
Paloumpis (1963) from Illinois.
Brown Bullhead
The barbs near the tip of the pectoral
spine of the brown bullhead point toward
the base, those in the middle are erect, and
the barbs near the base point toward the tip
(see ill. under 5a of key). Spines from Illinois
brown bullheads (Paloumpis 1963) are sim¬
ilarly described.
Brown bullhead spines as illustrated from
Missouri (Pflieger 1975), Ohio (Trautman
1957), and Wisconsin (Becker 1983) show
shorter barbs than those I observed in my
Wisconsin specimens. In Ohio (Trautman
1957) and Canada (Scott and Crossman
1973) brown bullhead spines exhibit several
short barbs near the base of the spine.
Yellow Bullhead
The barbs on the spines of the yellow
bullhead in Wisconsin tend to be smaller,
sharper, and more numerous than those of
the two preceding species (see ill. under 7a in
key). In Wisconsin specimens a few near the
base point toward the tip.
Pectoral spines of yellow bullheads from
Illinois (Paloumpis 1963), Canada (Scott
and Crossman 1973), and Ohio (Trautman
1957) are similar to those on Wisconsin fish.
It is noted however, that in individuals from
Canada and Ohio, the barbs at the base of
the pectoral spine were shown inclining
toward the base instead of toward the tip.
Apparently there is plasticity in the mor¬
phology of yellow bullhead pectoral spines
as observed from different parts of its range.
Despite this, such fish would key out cor¬
rectly with the instrument provided above.
Anterior notches and serrations in the
spine of the yellow bullhead are common as
they are in Illinois (Paloumpis 1963) but
their taxonomic use still needs determina¬
tion.
Channel Catfish
Barbs on the pectoral spine of Wisconsin
channel catfish incline toward the base with
barb heights decreasing from tip to base (see
ill. under 4a in key). This characteristic was
diagrammed in the key by Paloumpis (1963).
In Canada (Scott and Crossman 1973)
barbs were found to point in different direc¬
tions on different parts of the spine.
Flathead Catfish
Barbs on the pectoral spine of Wisconsin
flathead catfish are found along the anterior
edge of the spine (anterior barbs pointing
toward the base of the spine) and along its
posterior edge (posterior barbs pointing
toward the tip (see ill. under 3a of the key).
The barbs on the spine of a 24-year-old
specimen I examined were much reduced,
appearing as rounded nubs. Barbs on both
anterior and posterior edges may be im¬
bedded in the soft tissue of the fin beyond
the bony spine.
Stonecat
The characteristic pectoral spine of the
Wisconsin stonecat is illustrated under 2a in
the key. The anterior notches are sharp-
pointed and inclined toward the base. They
are — as Taylor (1969) describes — “recurved
hooks.” In Wisconsin the posterior edge of
the pectoral spine is smooth but Taylor finds
62
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
it “roughened or sometimes with a few
serrae behind.”
Illustrations of pectoral spines of stone-
cats from Canada (Scott and Crossman
1973) and Michigan (Taylor 1969) are similar
to Wisconsin specimens and can readily be
identified to species with the above key.
Tadpole Madtom
The pectoral spine of the tadpole madtom
is short, deeply furrowed on both dorsal and
ventral surfaces, lacks barbs, and the
anterior notches, if present, are delicate and
short (see ill. under 2b in key). Descriptions
of tadpole madtom spines from Ohio (Traut-
man 1957) and Canada (Scott and Crossman
1973) agree with my observations. Illustra¬
tions by Pflieger (1975) and Taylor (1969) of
pectoral spines from Missouri specimens
agree with my observtions and can easily be
identified to species with the above key.
Slender Madtom
The barbs on the pectoral spine of the
slender madtom in Wisconsin are generally
columnar, blunt-tipped, and occasionally
with flat tops having small projections (see
ill. under 6a in key). The barbs are generally
perpendicular to the shaft of the spine,
although some inclination of barbs is not
unusual. Often barbs close to the tip lean
toward the tip. Taylor (1969) also found
barbs “usually straight, but sometimes bent
outward or inward.’’
The distinct anterior notches or “retrorse
hooks” (Taylor 1969) extend from the tip at
least halfway toward the base of the spine.
Acknowledgments
I wish to thank Dr. George C. Becker for
critical reading of the manuscript and for his
helpful suggestions.
Also, Sharon A. Paruch is to be thanked
for her work on the drawings.
Literature Cited
Becker, G. C. 1983. Fishes of Wisconsin. Univ.
of Wis. Press. 1052 pp.
Forbes, S. A. and R. E. Richardson. 1920. The
Fishes of Illinois. Ill. Nat. Hist. Surv. Bull. 3.
1-351.
Paloumpis, A. A. 1963. A key to the Illinois
species of Ictalurus (Class Pisces) based on
pectoral spines. Trans, of the Illinois Acad.
Sci. Vol. 56(3): 129-133.
Pflieger, W. L. 1975. The Fishes of Missouri.
Missouri Dept, of Conservation. 343 pp.
Scott, W. B. and E. J. Crossman. 1973. Fresh¬
water fishes of Canada. Fish. Res. Board
Canada, Ottawa. Bull. 184. 966 pp.
Slastenenko, E. P. 1958. The freshwater fishes of
Canada. Kiev Printers, Toronto. 383 pp.
Taylor, W. R. 1969. A revision of the catfish
genus Noturus Rafinesque with an analysis of
higher groups in the Ictaluridae. Smithsonian
Inst., U.S. Natl. Mus. Bull. 282. 315 pp.
Trautman, M. B. 1957. The fishes of Ohio. Ohio
State Univ. Press, Columbus, Ohio. 683 pp.
SOME MODERN IDEAS IN ANCIENT INDIA
K. S. N. Rao
Department of English
University of Wisconsin-Oshkosh
Although the East is often referred to as
an ancient civilization and India recognized
as having had a great past, little is generally
known about Indians contribution to the
world. Some Western writers occasionally
turn lyrical when they speak of India’s
heritage and pour encomium about her
past,1 but there is often a noticeable reluc¬
tance among most Western writers to put In¬
dia before other countries in certain matters
where she has clearly excelled. It is not un¬
common for a Western Indologist to be ex¬
cited on first discovering India’s greatness in
some area and then cool off on second
thought. An excellent example is Max
Muller, who at first was excited but then
became critical.2 Ancient Indian achieve¬
ments were both great and varied, and while
it is impossible to go into a full discussion of
them in this essay, an attempt is made here
to recount and explain some of the modern
ideas which existed in ancient India.3
First and foremost, perhaps, it should be
noted that the word Arya comes from San¬
skrit, the ancient classical language of In¬
dia, and etymologically means “to till,”
while its literal meaning is “noble.” The
word abounds everywhere in India’s ancient
writings. According to Western scholars, the
Aryans came to India and settled by about
2,000 b.c. They developed the art of
agriculture and were the first in the world to
grow rice.4 They domesticated the cow and
got from it milk, butter, and ghee.5 As
civilization advanced, their predatorial
habits disappeared (though it has been
argued that they were never meat-eaters),
and they became vegetarians. They are sup¬
posed to have drunk soma6 (see Aldous Hux¬
ley’s The Brave New World for a reference
to this drink) and much later developed
panchamrita, a drink consisting of five in¬
gredients, used even today on festive and
religious days, probably a forerunner of the
modern punch.7 The swastika sign origi¬
nated in ancient India (and is still used on
religious and other important days), though
the symbol is reversed in the West. The word
swastika is itself a Sanskrit word and means
“the religiously good or auspicious.”
One of the most fascinating things our
ancestors imagined is space travel. Not only
do we have in the first epic, the Rdmdyana ,
an aerial car called Pushpaka that travels
from city to city, from country to country,
and from planet to planet but we have
descriptions of inter-planetary battles. What
is more strange, the plane is an automatic,
pilotless one. Elsewhere there is an account
of crafts used to travel on water, on land,
and in air — all in one craft — with some
specifications.8 In the same epic we have
flights by Hanuman and also building of
bridges across bays— for example, from In¬
dia to the island of Ceylon.
This epic abounds in the description of the
strange and the fantastic. There are, here,
weapons of war and destruction not imag¬
ined elsewhere till modern times. There are
descriptions of weapons, counter- weapons,
counter-counter weapons, and counter¬
counter-counter weapons, and so on.
There is, for example, the fire weapon
(A gnyeyastra), which the hero of one army
might release so as to burn down all that is
on the other side of the battle field, but
before fire envelopes the whole place (com¬
pare napalm or cluster bombs), the oppo¬
nent releases the water weapon (Varunastra)
putting out the fire while at the same time
trying to flood the other side of the bat¬
tlefield. But the hero quickly releases the
63
64
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Wind weapon (Vayuvyastra), which will
disperse the water, and so on. There are even
terrible world-destruction weapons and
missiles like the Aindrastra, Pashupatastra,
Vaishnavastra, and finally the ultimate
weapon, which can destroy the whole world,
Brahmastra. The last one is unstoppable ex¬
cept by the one who releases and knows how
to retrieve it before it hits the target. The
knowledge of these weapons is restricted to
the few who have been taught by a holy
preceptor and who have earned by merit
their secret and use. There is even in this epic
an instance of something like a chemical
weapon (sammohanastra), which makes the
victim lie helplessly foaming at his mouth.
As though this were not enough, we have
one instance in which the hero, Rama, uses a
straw to convert its atom into an atomic
weapon to destroy a demon attacking Sita,
the heroine.
There are strange beings, animals, and
birds, too, in this epic, which we come across
in the volume entitled the Forest Volume
(Aranya Parva) — mis-shaped animals,
animals with huge bodies but extended limbs
with which to scoop up their prey for food,
birds far bigger than the condor (Jathayu),
and later a demon looking like a hill (Kum-
bhakarna). The Ram ay ana also tells of the
Kingdom of the Apes with descriptions of
very advanced skills, organization, and
knowledge of sophisticated weapons, in¬
cluding some battles and skirmishes. There
are many, many noble thoughts, but one of
the thoughts that a successful politician of the
present day might remember is what Rama
the hero is told: A vast ha pujyate Rama,
shafiram na pujyate — it is the office one
holds that is worshipped, not his person. The
Ramayana also affirms a fantastic belief that
life sleeps in matter, breathes through
plants, speaks through animals, and is com¬
pletely conscious in man. The story of
Ahalya, who becomes a stone and rises from
it again, is astonishing in its foreshadowing
of the modern researchers’ finding life in the
deep sea, frozen antarctic, and hard rocks.
In the Bhagavatha the concept of cities
hanging in outer space appears. The story of
Tripurasura (the Three-City Demon), who
owns the city is a terrible story of a demon
who inflicts punishment on those whom he
does not like by descending with his entire
city and alighting on an earthly city! The
idea that a man in outer space is simply sus¬
pended is best illustrated by the story of
Trishanku, who tries to ascend to heaven
bodily and is rejected at heaven’s gate but is
stopped again by the sage Vishwamithra
with the result that the King Trishanku sim¬
ply is suspended in space! The famous Ten
Incarnation stories of Vishnu or the
Dashavatara stories are a remarkable set of
stories which affirm a variety of beliefs.
These incarnations of Vishnu, the Protector,
are believed to have happened in an order
which is fascinating for certain implications.
Vishnu is supposed to have come down to
earth at the request of the human belings,
age after age, to destroy evil and to uphold
righteousness in the following order: the
Great Fish; the Great Tortoise; the Great
Boar; the Great Half-Man and Half-Lion;
the Dwarf Man; Rama with an Axe; Rama,
the Great Archer; Krishna, the Diplomat;
the Compassionate Buddha; and finally
Kalki, although the very orthodox do not ac¬
cept the ninth one. Biological evolution is
clearly and simply illustrated by these in¬
carnations. Social evolution is illustrated by
the gradual advance of weapons of war and
destruction culminating in the most sophis¬
ticated ones mentioned earlier, which are
then followed by diplomacy as a means of
settling disputes and compassion as the
ultimate salvation of mankind. The stories,
moreover, affirm a cardinal principle of
Hinduism that God is realized by each being
at its own level and that God appears to dif¬
ferent people in different ways in different
ages and speaks in different tongues. In the
story of Rama with an Axe (Parashurama),
there is the affirmation of yet another idea —
that it is the father who is the true parent and
who passes on the heritage. For, when his
1986]
Rao — Modern Ideas in Ancient India
65
father, who suspects his wife of infidelity,
tells the son to kill his mother, the son
hesitates to carry out the behest of the father
but finally resolves his dilemma and decides
that it is the father who is the true parent.
The story of Balarama, the older brother of
Krishna, illustrates yet another modern idea.
When Kamsa, the demon, tries to kill all
babies because of the prophecy in heaven
that a certain baby will kill him and become
the king (reminiscent of Herod- Jesus story),
the embryo in the womb of Devaki is
transferred to another woman’s womb and
Krishna’s older brother is saved. Later on, of
course, Krishna is born, taken to a cow¬
herd’s house and is brought up there, and he
finally kills Kamsa. The story of embryonic
transfer dating back some 3,000 and more
years is astounding. The same work contains
the parallel of the story of Noah’s Ark—
with one difference. In the Indian story it is
not pairs of actual animals that are put in the
ark but the seeds of pairs, something that
can be more realistically accommodated in
an ark.
In the second epic, the Mahdbharata (the
longest ever to be composed by the human
mind— it has about 100,000 verses of 32
syllables each, and the epic is in 18 volumes),
we have even more modern ideas. For exam¬
ple, the story of Abhimanyu’s learning the
peculiar war strategy of Padmavyuha (of
organizing a battle army) when it was being
described by Krishna to his sister, Subhadra,
in whose womb the unborn Abhimanyu is
still resting, contains an extraordinary idea
of teaching a fetus and attests to an old In¬
dian belief that one’s education begins in the
womb and ends in the tomb. Again, the birth
of the Pandavas, the heroes of the epic, by
means of the power of the holy spirits of
gods invoked by Kunthi, (and her earlier
pregnancy while yet a virgin without human
intercourse) clearly foreshadows the story of
Christ’s birth. The way in which the 100
children are born to Gandhari (the idea of
humans coming out of eggs— not believed in
by the moderns till probably around the
beginning of the century — and of one split¬
ting up into 100) is certainly an astonishing
idea, however rudimentary it may be. The
Mahdbharata also contains a highly
developed code of warfare and of treating
enemies, including those who surrender.
Descriptions of fantastic war weapons repeat
themselves in this epic. There are also in¬
teresting descriptions of gambling and
wrestling matches — when we are back about
3,000 years in time. Karate, it must be
remembered, originated in India.9
Scattered in a number of places are other
fascinating ideas. Constantly we come across
the concept of Divya drishti, or literally
divine sight. What this means is that sages
and others who are advanced beings can tune
their minds and know what is happening,
has happened, or will happen — so long as
the frequency of their mind is in tune with
the thing about which they want to know.
Diamonds, cotton, rice, and peacocks
came originally from India. In fact, the
Golconda mines of the southern part of In¬
dia were the mines from which the world
received all its diamonds in ancient times.10
In the words of Basham, “India has con¬
ferred many practical blessings on the world
at large; notably rice, cotton, the sugar cane,
many spices, the domestic fowl, the game of
chess (p. 208), and, most important of all,
the decimal system of numeral notation, the
invention of an unknown Indian mathemati¬
cian early in the Christian era (p. 4951).’’ 11 It
was India and not the Arabs who invented
the so-called Arabic numerals. The myth of
Arabic invention has gone on too long.
There is incontrovertible evidence to prove
that India contributed these numerals and
the concept of zero to the world. Basham
pointedly mentions this fact:
The earliest inscription recording the date by a
system of nine digits and a zero, with place
notation for the tens and hundreds, comes
from Gujarat, and is dated A.D. 595. Soon
after this however, the new system had been
heard of in Syria (p. vi), and was being used as
far afield as Indo-China. Evidently the system
66
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
was in use among mathematicians some cen¬
turies before it was employed in inscriptions,
the scribes of which tended to be conservative
in their system of recording dates; in modern
Europe the cumbrous Roman system is still
sometimes used for the same purpose. The
name of the mathematician who devised the
simplified system of writing numerals is
unknown, but the earliest surviving mathe¬
matical texts — the anonymous “Bakshali
Manuscript,” which is a copy of the text of the
4th century a.d., and the terse Aryabhatiya of
Aryabhata, written in a.d. 499 — presuppose
it.
For long it was thought that the decimal
system of numerals was invented by the
Arabs, but this is certainly not the case. The
Arabs themselves called mathematics “the In¬
dian (Art)” ( hindisat ), and there is now no
doubt that the decimal notation, with other
mathematical lore, was learnt by the Muslim
world either through merchants trading with
the west coast of India, or through the Arabs
who conquered Sind in a.d. 712.
The debt of the Western world to India in
this respect cannot be overestimated. Most of
the great discoveries and inventions of which
Europe is so proud would have been impossi¬
ble without a developed system of mathe¬
matics, and this in turn would have been im¬
possible if Europe had been shackled by the
unwieldy system of Roman numerals. The un¬
known man who devised the new system was
from the world’s point of view, after the Bud¬
dha, the most important son of India. His
achievement, though easily taken for granted,
was the work of an analytical mind of the first
order, and he deserves much more honour
than he has so far received. 12
There is a question in the history of
mathematics asked about India: “When the
whole world was groping in darkness, what
did India contribute?” The answer is,
“Nothing.” This Nothing has been the most
important thing in the development of math¬
ematics. Again, Basham says,
“For x Aryabhata gave the usual modern ap¬
proximate value of 3.1416, expressed in the
form of a fraction 62832/20000. This value of
x, much more accurate than that of the
Greeks, was improved to nine places of
decimals by later Indian mathematicians. . . .
He [Bhaskara] also established mathematic¬
ally what had been recognized in Indian theol¬
ogy at least a millenium earlier, that infinity,
however divided, remains infinite, represented
by the equation -^r- ------ oo.”13
He also adds,
“Despite their inaccurate knowledge of
physiology, which was by no means inferior to
that of most ancient peoples, India evolved a
developed empirical surgery. The caesarian
was known, bone-setting reached a high
degree of skill, and plastic surgery was
developed far beyond anything known else¬
where at the time. Ancient Indian surgeons
were expert at the repair of noses, ears, and
lips, lost or injured in battle or by judicial
mutiliation.”14
The Oxford scholar MacDonell puts it
even more accurately: “In modern times
European surgery has borrowed the opera¬
tion of rhinoplasty, or the surgical forma¬
tion of artificial noses, from India, where
Englishmen became acquainted with the art
in the eighteenth century.”15 As for another
aspect of medicine, MacDonell holds, “The
Atharvaveda and the Sdtapatha Brdhmana
contain an exact enumeration of the bones
of the human skeleton.”16 Again, the same
scholar notes, “One of the Brahamanas [sic]
observes that the sun does not really rise or
set, but produces day and night on the earth
by revolving.”17 A little later he adds that
Aryabhata “maintained the daily rotation of
the earth round its axis, explaining the daily
rotation of the celestial sphere as only ap¬
parent.”18
A number of ideas connected with
language and literature arose in ancient In¬
dia. The oldest grammatical text dealing
especially with phonetics goes back to the
times even before the famous text of Panini
(4th-5th century b.c.), who by all accounts,
is the most celebrated grammarian that has
ever lived. His Ashtddhydyee records a work
which has never been equalled till recent
times. Says John Lyons, “The Indian gram-
1986]
Rao— Modern Ideas in Ancient India
67
matical tradition is not only independent of
the Greco-Roman but also earlier, more
diverse in its manifestations and in some
respects superior in its achievements.”19 He
adds, “Panini’s grammar of Sanskrit has
frequently been described from the point of
view of its exhaustivness ... its internal con¬
sistency and its economy of statement, as far
superior to any grammar of any language yet
written.”20 Indians were also the first to pro¬
duce indexes or Anukramanls21 since they
had to do so for the Rgveda. The first
systematically arranged dictionary, the
Amarakosha, was produced by Indians; it is
unique in its arrangement of nouns, putting
together all synonyms, in the form of verse
stanzas, which students learn by heart as
they would learn poetry. The Panchatantra,
a seminal influence on stories of many coun¬
tries of the world of ancient times, is indeed
a remarkable book. Its framing device, or
the frame story device, has been used subse¬
quently by a large number of writers in¬
cluding Chaucer in his Canterbury Tales. 22 It
influenced Arabian Nights stories, and Mac-
Donell says, quoting another source, “The
story of the migration of Indian fairy tales
from East to West is more wonderful and in¬
structive than many of those fairy tales
themselves.”23
About 4,000 years ago even as today, In¬
dians thought of ten directions— the eight
common ones plus up and down. We read
about the ten directions in the Rgveda, and
in the Ramdyana , the King is called
Dasharatha, one whose chariot can go un¬
challenged in any of the ten directions.
Similarly, in ancient times, as today, India
had thought of five elements constituting the
universe as well as the human body, these
being fire, earth, water, air, and space.
Without space, the fifth element, our bodies
would simply be one single block. Again,
there is a curious question asked in one of
ancient scriptures with a curious answer:
“What is this universe? From what does it
arise? Into what does it go?” “And the
answer is: In freedom it rises, in freedom it
rests, and into freedom it melts away.”24
One of the weapons used by Vishnu and
Krishna is called Chakra (wheel). When it is
released, it goes and kills the enemy and
comes back— a better version of the Austral¬
ian boomerang!
Indians have had their own way of com¬
puting time and their own calendar. They
also thought that time was differently
measured in different parts of the universe.
The Indian concept of time even today as in
ancient India is a circular one— not a linear
concept. They had imagined then, and im¬
agine now, that Brahman, the Creator goes
to sleep for eight billion years and then
wakes up again. In one of his television lec¬
tures Carl Sagan, the American scientist, has
pointed out how this computation of eight
billion years is very close to the scientific
calculation of the contraction of the
universe! One of the ancient philosophers,
Patanjali, is very modern and anticipates
modern science when he says, without postu¬
lating a creation, in his Yogasastra that life
comes into being when matter and life-force
come together. The use of a rosary, washing
of the feet of elders on religious occasions,
putting the sacred ash on one’s forehead
(especially among certain sub-groups of Hin¬
dus), and praying with folded hands (a form
of greeting — in contradistinction to shaking
hands in the West) have all existed for more
than 3,000 years in India and can be easily
documented.
In the composition of secular literature
also India was far advanced in ancient times.
India’s greatest, and not the first, dramatist,
Kalidasa, who has been much extolled by
English, German, and French writers lived in
the 5th century a.d. — eleven centuries before
Shakespeare. His dramas are complete with
plots containing a king, queen, and court
jester and all, and what is more, has a pro¬
logue, acts, scenes and epilogue (Shake¬
speare, it must be recalled, did not divide his
plays into scenes). India had drama theaters
built to exact specifications.25 In secular
literature ancient India was one of the
68
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
earliest civilizations to produce romances,
which are only one step from what is called
novels today. Dandin’s Dash kum arach ari ta
(6th century a.d.), Bana’s Kddambari (7th
century a.d.), and Subandhu’s Vasavadatta
(7th century a.d.) are great works of fiction.
Horrwitz says, “Bana has written the best
Sanskrit novel.”26 Today, the word kadam-
bari is used in three Indian languages (Kan¬
nada, Telugu, and Marathi) to mean “a
novel.” However, modern novels with all
their attention to individuals and with over¬
wrought emphasis on individuals’ feelings
and thoughts and the central importance of
man in the world could not have been pro¬
duced by ancient Indians, who regarded man
as merely a speck in a vast universe except
for his soul power. Only when the influence
of the West, with its Judeo-Christian tradi¬
tion and its belief in man as the center of the
universe, reached India did India produce
modern novels.27
One area in which ancient Indian custom
and modern Western practice are virtually
identical is in the area of teaching. Unlike
the modern Indian practice of professors’
lecturing to passive students, ancient India
chose to teach on an individual basis (each
student chose a teacher and the teacher
would have to accept him) and by means of
question-answer method. The earliest ex¬
amples of this practice are to be found in the
Upanishads, in which stories containing
some of the highest truths of India are found
to be taught in a dialogue fashion. The Pan-
chatantra illustrates the use of circular think¬
ing necessitated by the student’s constant
questions with the result that even before
one story is finished another must begin and
so on. Finally, ancient India had a passion
for analysis. Indians analyzed and analyzed,
and categorized and categorized. Till recent¬
ly, Indian children in grade school used to
learn by heart categories of various things —
those that exist in two’s, in three’s, in four’s
and so on. This analysis and categorization
was applied even to a passionate subject like
love, of which Vatsyayana’s Kdmasutra (The
Hindu Art of Love) is a redoubtable exam¬
ple. These are some of the modern ideas of
ancient India.
Notes
1 See, for example, the respected American Scholar
Arthur W. Ryder’s Introduction to his translations of
Kalidasa’s selected writings, Shakuntala and Other
Writings (New York: Dutton 1959). The book also car¬
ries the German poet Goethe’s exaltation of Kalidasa’s
Shakuntalam. Subsequently, he modelled his Faust
using a Prologue in the manner of Kalidasa. See also
Mark Twain [Samuel Langhorne Clemens], Following
the Equator, in The Complete works of Mark Twain,
American Artists’ ed., 24 Vols (New York: Harper,
1925) 2:16-17, for a frank and mixed reaction.
2 When he gave his first lectures at Cambridge
University, Max Miiller was exultant and called the
Vedas “the first words the Aryan man spoke” and later
turned partly critical. Perhaps the following words from
Max Miiller give a flavour of is natural and spontaneous
initial reaction to the discovery of India’s greatness — a
reaction uninhibited by other considerations. “If I were
to look over the whole world to find out the country
most richly endowed with all the wealth, power, and
beauty that nature can bestow— in some parts a very
paradise on earth — I should point to India. If I were
asked under what sky the human mind has most fully
developed some of its choicest gifts, has most deeply
pondered on the greatest problems of life, and has
found solutions of some of them which well deserve the
attention even of those who have studied Plato and
Kant — I should point to India. ...” Max Muller, India:
What Can It Teach Us? Ed. K. A. NTlakantha Sastry
2nd ed. (Delhi, India: Munshi Ram Manohar Lai, 1961)
6.
3 The term ancient India is used in this essay with the
commonly accepted meaning of referring to the period
from about 1,500 b.c. or 2,000 b.c. till about the 7th
century a.d.
4 See A. A. MacDonell, India's Past: A Survey of her
Literatures, Religions, Languages, and Antiquities.
Varanasi, India: Motilal Banarasidass, 1956, p. 7.
Originally published by Oxford University Press.
5 Ghee is melted butter oil, as it is called in America.
In a hot country at a time when refrigeration was
unknown, how astute it was of Indians some 4,000 years
ago to come up with an idea to preserve butter! Even to¬
day it is the same procedure followed by all in India.
6 Soma was a mildly intoxicating drink but sura was
the forbidden one. For an interesting study of the soma
plant, see R. Gordon Wasson Soma: Divine Mushroom
of Immortality (n.p.: Harcourt, n.d.) Printed in Italy.
7 E. Horrowitz says, “ Punch is an Indian beverage
consisting of ‘five’ ingredients.” See A Short History of
Indian Literature (London: T. Fisher Unwin, 1907) 140,
f.n.
1986]
Rao— Modern Ideas in Ancient India
69
8 See The Hindu, a very highly respected and overly
cautious newspaper of India. “Aeronautics in the Vedic
Age,” Sunday 27 May 1973, the editorial page.
9 Karate originated in India, but some writers merely
recognize its strong influence on its development. See
The Oxford Companion to World Sports and Games ,
ed. John Arlott (London: Oxford UP, 1975) 562.
10 G. F. Herbert Smith, Gem-Stones and Their
Distinctive Characters, (London: Methuen, 1912) 137,
where he says, “The whole of the diamonds known in
ancient times were obtained from the so-called Gol-
conda mines in India.”
11 A. L. Basham, The Wonder That Was India: A
Survey of the Culture of the Indian Sub-continent
Before the Coming of the Muslims, (New York: Grove
Press, 1959)485.
12 Basham 495-496.
13 Basham 496. Ancient Indians had a creative
mathematical imagination, and they imagined vast
numbers of great magnitude. Jawaharlal Nehru gives
some interesting facts about this amazing conception of
stupendous numbers by Indians. Says he, “The time
and number sense of the ancient Indians was extraor¬
dinary. The Greeks, Romans, Persians, and Arabs had
apparently no terminology for denominations above the
thousand or at most the myriad (104= 10,000). In India
there were eighteen specific denominations (1018), and
there are even longer lists. In the story of Buddha’s early
education he is reported to have named denominations
up to 1050.
At the other end of the scale there was a minute divi¬
sion of time of which the smallest unit was approxi¬
mately one-seventh of a second, and the smallest lineal
measure is given as something which approximates to
1.3 x 7 10 inches. ... To them [Indians] the vast periods
of modern geology or the astronomical distances of the
stars would not have come as a surprise.” The Dis¬
covery of India (London: Meridian Books, 1951) 97-98.
14 Basham 499-500.
15 MacDonell 185.
16 MacDonell 180.
17 MacDonell 186. See also Nehru, The Discovery, 76,
where he says, “There is an odd and interesting passage
in one of the Upanishads (the Chhandogya): ‘The sun
never sets nor rises. When people think to themselves
the sun is setting he only changes about after reaching
the end of the day, and makes night below and day to
what is on the other side. Then when people think he
rises in the morning, he only shifts himself about after
reaching the end of the night, and makes day below and
night to what is on the other side. In fact he never does
set at all.’”.
18 MacDonell 190.
19 John Lyons, Introduction to Theoretical Lingustics
(Cambridge, England: Cambridge UP, 1971) 19.
20 Lyons 20.
21 MacDonell 19.
22 See W. F. Bryan and Germaine Dempster, eds..
Sources and Analogues of Chaucer's Canterbury Tales
(New York: The Humanitties Press, 1958) 6.
23 MacDonell 126.
24 Nehru 74-75.
25 A. Berriedale Keith, The Sanskrit Drama: Its
Origin, Development, Theory, and Practice (London:
Oxford UP, 1970) 358-360.
26 Horrwitz 137.
27 It is the theory of this author that the form of
literature called novel today did not develop in India not
because Indians were preoccupied with the fantastic as
some have thought but because of their modesty about
themselves as human beings and their correct under¬
standing of their importance and place in the universe.
They did not make man the supreme creation, God’s
favourite, and centre of the universe. Such a mind can¬
not produce a novel, where sometimes the most trivial
thoughts of a character are delineated at length. Modern
novels give paramount importance to the individual in a
universe where the planet on which an individual lives is
itself of diminutive importance.
ALLUSIONS TO THE AENEID IN PARADISE LOST \
BOOKS XI AND XII
John Banschbach
Marian College
Fond du Lac
Of all of Milton’s works, the last two
books of Paradise Lost are among those
most roundly condemned. C. S. Lewis de¬
scribes them as a “grave structural flaw.”
According to Lewis, Milton “makes his last
two books into a brief outline of sacred
history from the Fall to the Last Day. Such
an untransmuted lump of futurity, coming
in a position so momentous for the struc¬
tural effect of the whole work, is inartistic.
And what makes it worse is that the actual
writing in this passage is curiously bad . . .
Again and again, as we read his account of
Abraham or of the Exodus or of the Pas¬
sion, we find ourselves saying, as Johnson
said of the ballad, ‘the story cannot possibly
be told in a manner that shall make less im¬
pression on the mind . . .’ If we stick to what
we know we must be content to say that
Milton’s talent temporarily failed him . . .
Perhaps Milton was in ill health. Perhaps be¬
ing old, he yielded to a natural, though
disastrous, impatience to get the work fin¬
ished” (129-130). This is not an isolated
opinion. Kenneth Muir (143) and E. M. W.
Tillyard (216, 246) both found the final
books of Paradise Lost to be inferior artis¬
tically to the rest of the poem. And Samuel
Johnson was, I suspect, responding especial¬
ly to the last two books when he said that,
while Paradise Lost is widely acknowledged
to be a great work, no one, coming to the
end of it, has ever wished it to be longer
(108).
My secondary purpose this afternoon is to
demonstrate, at least in one respect, the care
with which these books were fashioned, that
respect being the use of epic allusions. My
primary purpose, and the one that interests
me more, is to argue that, to the first readers
of Paradise Lost , the Aeneid was a guide,
and that in Books 11 and 12 of Paradise
Lost , Milton uses allusions to the Aeneid to
define the meaning and the peculiar merit of
his own epic.
As any annotated edition of Paradise Lost
makes clear, the poem is replete with allu¬
sions to epics, not only to Vergil and Homer,
but also to the later Italian epics of Dante,
Ariosto, and Tasso. Constant allusion to
other epics is part of the genre. The Aeneid is
filled with lines from Homer and from En¬
nius and Statius, Vergil’s predecessors in
Latin epic. Such allusions necessarily invite
comparison; Vergil is reputed to have said
that “it is easier to steal the club from Her¬
cules than to take a line from Homer” (Har¬
ding, 20). The point of such a risk is to claim
equality with, if not superiority to, the works
alluded to. The method is apparent in the
opening lines of Paradise Lost, where Milton
claims to pursue “things unattempted yet in
prose or rhyme” (1.16). Here Milton para¬
phrases the opening of Ariosto’s Orlando
Furioso: “At the same time I shall say of
Orlando something never said before in
prose or rhyme: that through love he became
frenzied and insane and not that man who
earlier was judged so wise.” Whatever we
think of the novelty Ariosto claims for his
subject, the obvious disparity between the
subject of Paradise Lost and Orlando
Furioso , revealed by this allusion, concisely
implies the superiority of Milton’s epic.
For many of Milton’s readers, “epic”
meant the Aeneid. According to Davis P.
Harding, Vergil’s “major works — the
Eclogues , the Georgies, and the Aeneid —
form what might be called the hard core of
the Renaissance grammarschool curriculum.
70
1986]
Banschbach—A lusions to the Aeneid
71
Of all the school authors, only Cicero was
studied with a comparable intensity. It is
probably not too much to say that Renais¬
sance schoolboys practically knew Virgil by
heart” (7). The first allusion to the Aeneid in
Book XI has the same purpose as the open¬
ing allusion to Orlando Furioso. The subject
of the comparison is the nature of deity.
When Adam and Eve pray for forgiveness,
... To heaven their prayers
Flew up, nor missed the way, by envious winds
Blown vagabond or frustrate ... (11.14-16)
The description here echoes Apollo's
response to Arruns' prayer in Book II of the
Aeneid:
Phoebus had heard, and in his heart he answered
Half of that prayer; the other half he scattered
To the swift winds. He granted this: that Arruns
Should strike Camilla down with sudden death;
But did not grant him safe return to his
Illustrious homeland. This last request
The tempests carried to the south winds.
(11.794-98)
The contrast between the two prayers is
sharp. Adam and Eve pray to God for par¬
don, and receive it. Arruns prays that he
might slay Camilla in battle, and that he
might return home safe. Apollo's response is
that both Camilla and Arruns die.
Just as obvious a claim to a superior deity
is Milton's use of augury in Book 11. After
Eve remarks to Adam that, even though they
are fallen, they might manage quite nicely in
the garden of Paradise, Adam notices that
the garden is changing:
Nigh in her sight
The bird of Jove, stooped from his airy tow’r,
Two birds of gayest plume before him drove.
(11.184-86)
In the Aeneid » the fate of swans pursued by
an eagle twice influences the course of
events. In Book 2, Venus uses the re¬
grouping of a scattered flock to persuade
Aeneas that his fleet, scattered by storm, has
gathered safely at Carthage, and that he can
find safety there also (2.393-401). In Book
12, a flock of swans attacks an eagle, forcing
it to drop its prey. Juturna uses this event to
persuade the Italians to break the truce and
attack Aeneas (244-265). Both Venus and
Juturna are divine, but their auguries are
misleading and disastrous for their human
audience. Juturna's counsel leads to the
defeat of the Italians and the death of her
brother, Turnus. Venus's counsel leads
Aeneas to Carthage, where he falls in love
with the queen, Dido, abandons his mission
of founding Rome, is rebuked by Jupiter
and so deserts Dido, who kills herself.
Adam, without divine help, draws the cor¬
rect conclusion, that their present situation is
not secure; if the sign is misleading, it is
misleading only in that it portends a worse
fate for Adam and Eve than in fact occurs.
Through prayer and augury, then, Milton re¬
minds us that the classical gods, in contrast
to the Christian God, are capricious, self-
serving, and deceptive.
Milton does not always use the classical
gods merely as obvious foils. At the begin¬
ning of Adam's vision, the archangel
Michael is twice associated with Venus, and
this association helps us to understand his
mission. The form in which Michael appears
is “solemn and sublime” (11.236):
over his lucid Arms
A military Vest of purple flow’d
His starry Helm unbuckl’d show’d him prime
In Manhood where Youth ended; by his side
As in a glistering Zodiac hung the Sword,
Satan’s dire dread, and in his hand the Spear.
(11.240-41,245-48)
Despite this militaristic and stern guise, the
first allusion associates Michael with a
resplendent Venus. Adam warns Eve that he
sees
From yonder blazing Cloud that veils the Hill
One of the heav’nly Host, and by his Gait
None of the meanest, some Great Potentate
Or of the Thrones above, such Majesty
Invests him coming. (1 1 .228-33)
72
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
When Venus appears to Aeneas to urge him
to Carthage, she has disguised herself as a
huntress, and Aeneas recognizes her as his
mother only as she leaves him:
When she turned,
Her neck was glittering with a rose brightness;
Her hair annointed with ambrosia,
Her head gave all a fragrance of the gods;
Her gown was long and to the ground; even
Her walk was sign enough she was a goddess.
(1.402-409)
This allusion, for all its apparent incongru¬
ity, significantly qualifies Michael’s role.
Although Venus refuses to grant Aeneas the
ordinary personal relationship between a son
and his mother that Aeneas desires, and
although Venus is in part motivated by her
rivalry with Juno, she is also undeniably
motivated by love for her son. Venus re¬
peatedly intercedes with Jupiter on behalf of
Aeneas and often herself gives Aeneas aid.
Michael obviously is the agent of God the
Father’s divine justice, but the association of
Michael with Venus makes us realize that
Michael is, for all his military and judicial
sternness, also the God the Son’s agent, also
the agent of divine, even parental love.
This is also the burden of the second allu¬
sion linking Michael and Venus. Having
ascended the highest hill in the garden.
Michael from Adam’s eyes the film removed
Which that false fruit that promised clearer sight
Had bred; (11.412-14)
The allusion is to the fall of Troy. Aeneas
has seen Priam slain, the Trojan forces scat¬
tered, and, frenzied, he is about to kill
Helen, the cause of the Trojan War, whom
he has discovered hiding at Vesta’s altar.
Venus appears and prevents him:
‘And those to blame are not
the hated face of the Laconian woman,
the daughter of Tyndareos, or Paris:
it is the gods’ relentlessness, the gods’
that overturns these riches, tumbles Troy
from its high pinnacle. Look now — for I
shall tear away each cloud that cloaks your eyes
and clogs your human seeing, darkening
all things with its damp fog; you must not fear
the orders of your mother; do not doubt,
but carry out what she commands. For here,
where you see huge blocks ripped apart and
stones
torn free from stones and smoke that joins
with dust
in surges, Neptune shakes the walls, his giant
trident is tearing Troy from its foundations;
and here the first to hold the Scaean gates
is fiercest Juno; girt with iron, she
calls furiously to the fleet for more
Greek troops. Now turn and look: Tritonian
Pallas
is planted there; upon the tallest towers
she glares with her storm cloud and her grim
Gorgon.
And he who furnishes the Greeks with force
that favors and with spirit is the Father
himself, for he himself goads on the gods
against the Dardan weapons. Son, be quick
to flee, have done with fighting. I shall never
desert your side until I set you safe
upon your father’s threshold.’ So she spoke,
then hid herself within the night’s thick
shadows.
Ferocious forms appear — the fearful powers
of gods that are the enemies of Troy. (2.601-23)
This allusion has several functions. It
demonstrates once again the arbitrariness
and vindictiveness of the classical gods, yet it
demonstrates Venus’s love for her son, and
it thereby represents Michael’s mission not
as vindictive, but as just and loving. It is also
significant (and this is the reason for so ex¬
tended a quotation) for the understanding it
provides us of Adam. To that vision Aeneas
must submit and abandon Troy, and in do¬
ing so he takes the first step toward a new
identity, toward becoming the archetypal
Roman, pater Aeneas. That transformation
demands that Aeneas dedicate himself total¬
ly to the founding of the Roman empire and
to comply with the will of Jupiter. Conse¬
quently, that transformation demands that
Aeneas abandon his homeland, lose his wife,
deny his love for Dido and desert her, lose
his father, wage a prolonged war, unwilling¬
ly, against the Italians, and die in a military
1986]
Banschbach — Allusions to the Aeneid
73
camp, never, in fact, founding a city. It
demands the complete subjugation of his in¬
dividuality to the state. The vision that
Michael shows Adam separates him from the
garden of Paradise, not by its destruc¬
tiveness, but by its promise. In the course of
the vision Adam comes to an understanding
of his new identity, as father of a fallen race.
Also, like Aeneas, through the process of the
vision Adam is taught the role his descen¬
dants are to emulate. For Aeneas, it is
resignation to the will of the gods and self-
sacrifice for the good of the state. For Adam
it is spiritual discernment and trust in God,
for the sake of his descendants, but also (and
this is the key difference) for his own sake.
The significance of the vision of the gods
destroying Troy is underscored by a second
reference to it at the end of Paradise Lost .
This brings us to Eve, who has been sleeping
through much of Books 11 and 12. Allusions
to the Aeneid suggest that her re-appearance
is delayed, in part, to emphasize her impor¬
tance. Eve tells Adam:
Wearied I fell asleep. But now lead on;
In me is no delay; with thee to go,
Is to stay here; without thee here to stay,
Is to go hence unwilling. (12.614-16)
Her words are those of Anchises, the father
of Aeneas, who refused to flee Troy without
a sign from Jupiter. This was duly supplied:
No sooner had the old man spoken so
than sudden thunder crashed upon the left,
and through the shadows ran a shooting star,
its trail a torch of flooding light. (2.938-41)
Anchises declares:
Now my delay is done; I follow; where
you lead, I am. Gods of my homeland, save
my household, save my grandson. (2.701-03)
And what follows becomes one of the most
famous images of antiquity, Aeneas, fleeing
the flames of Troy, bearing his aged father
on his shoulders, holding his young son by
the hand. This image was especially cele¬
brated during the Roman Empire, for it ex¬
presses the devotion of youth, strength, and
military prowess to the service of empire and
of patriarchy. What is missing from this im¬
age is Aeneas’s wife, Creusa, who does not
escape Troy. She follows her husband, her
son, and her father-in-law as they flee, but
she becomes separated from them and is
killed. Eve, of course, leaves paradise with
Adam, and her association with Anchises
makes Adam’s and Eve’s final view of
Paradise an especially complex image:
They, looking back, all th’ eastern side beheld
Of Paradise, so late their happy seat,
Waved over by that flaming brand, the gate
With dreadful faces thronged and fiery arms.
(12.641-44)
This second allusion to the gods destroying
Troy reminds us again of the contrast be¬
tween classical and Christian gods, and
reminds us that separation from Paradise, as
from Troy, is a necessary step in the develop¬
ment of a new identity. The association of
Eve with Anchises defines further that new
identity, and especially distinguishes Para¬
dise Lost from the Aeneid , for it indicates
that the most important human relationship
is not father and son, but husband and wife.
Milton uses the Aeneid to define for the
reader the peculiar character of his epic. Ob¬
viously this discussion has not addressed the
opinion of C. S. Lewis that the writing in
Books 11 and 12 is “curiously bad,” nor
does it fully address the argument that the
final books of Paradise Lost necessarily
imply a decline in artistic power or reveal an
unseemly haste to finish writing the poem.
But it does demonstrate that, to the very end
of Paradise Lost , Milton invokes the Aeneid
as the standard by which to measure the
argument of his own epic. And that suggests
that Milton’s own confidence in his artistic
achievement had not diminished.
Notes
Ariosto, Orlando Furioso. Trans. Sir John Har¬
rington. Ed. Rudolf Gottfried. Bloomington:
Indiana University Press, 1963.
Harding, Davis P. The Club of Hercules: Studies
74
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
in the Classical Background of Paradise Lost.
Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1962.
Johnson, Samuel. Lives of the English Poets.
1925; repr. London: J. M. Dent, 1958.
Lewis, C. S. A Preface to Paradise Lost. 1942;
repr. New York: Oxford University Press,
1961.
Milton, John. Complete Poems and Major
Prose. Ed. Merritt Y. Hughes. Indianapolis:
Odyssey Press, 1957.
Muir, Kenneth. John Milton. 2nd ed. London:
Longmans, 1960.
Tillyard, E. M. W. Milton. Rev. ed. New York:
Barnes & Noble, 1967.
Virgil. The Aeneid. Trans. Allen Mandelbaum.
New York: Bantam, 1972.
PRODUCTIVITY OF RACCOONS IN SOUTHWESTERN WISCONSIN
Neil F. Payne
College of Natural Resources
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
and
David A. Root
College of Natural Resources
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
Abstract:
Age-specific reproduction was determined from 1,361 raccoon (Procyon lotor)
carcasses collected in southwestern Wisconsin during the 1978-79 and 1979-80 trap¬
ping season (about 15 October-31 January). Litter size averaged 3.71 young, with
32% pregnancy for yearlings (N= 32), and 91% pregnancy for older adults
(7V= 142). Age-specific litter size remained fairly constant. About 10% of the
juveniles (N= 100) harvested in October 1979 were born mid-May and mid-July.
Starvation and lack of subcutaneous fat reserves on 19 other juveniles suggested that
raccoons conceived later than the normal February through March mating period
may not survive a long winter in Wisconsin. Low testes weights, lack of sperm in
smears, and non-extrusible penis indicated that juvenile males in southwestern
Wisconsin are incapable of siring offspring. The sex ratio of juveniles (116M:100F)
favored males (P <0.05); the sex ratio of adults did not differ (96M:100F). Of the
known mortality, 98% was attributed to hunting (43%) and trapping (55%). The
harvest consisted of 65% juveniles, 13% yearlings, and 22% older adults. Maximum
longevity approached 10 years; few raccoons (5%) survived more than 5.5 years.
For about 30 years the Wisconsin Depart¬
ment of Natural Resources stocked raccoons
to increase the size of the population, with
no apparent success (Woehler 1957). Then,
during the 1960s the raccoon population in¬
creased to the point where during the 1970s
they caused damage to summer homes, agri¬
cultural crops, waterfowl nests (Woehler
1957), and young muskrat (Ondatra zibethi-
cus) populations (Dorney 1954). Concur¬
rently, interest in hunting and trapping rac¬
coons in Wisconsin increased due to increas¬
ing pelt values. Estimated fur purchases
ranged from 53,000 raccoon pelts in 1967 to
an average of over 94,600 pelts during the
following 10 years. Of 39 states reporting in
1976, Wisconsin ranked 4th in the harvest of
raccoons (Inter. Assoc. Game and Fish Con-
serv. Comm. 1977, unpubl. report). Such
trapping pressure led to the objective of this
study, which was to determine age-specific
reproduction of raccoons in southwestern
Wisconsin.
C. M. Pils, L. E. Nauman, and K. D. Hall
advised and reviewed the manuscript, T.
Zeisler computerized the data, and trappers,
hunters, and furbuyers supplied raccoon car¬
casses. The University of Wisconsin-Stevens
Point, and the Wisconsin Trappers Associa¬
tion provided financial support.
Study Area
Raccoon carcasses were collected within a
13-county region of southwestern Wiscon¬
sin. The region is characterized by open hills
with broad ridges in southern regions to
deeply incised valleys with narrow ridges in
the north (Hole 1977). Croplands are found
75
76
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
on ridge tops and valley floors; intervening
slopes are wooded.
Methods
Reproductive organs and upper mandibles
of 1,361 raccoons were collected during the
1978-79 and 1979-80 fall hunting and trap¬
ping seasons (about 15 October-31 January).
About 75% of the sample was collected from
cooperating furbuyers once/ week; the rest
was saved by trappers and hunters who were
instructed how to collect and store relevant
organs. Most raccoons (98%) were trapped
or shot, but road kills (2%) and 4 starved
animals also were reported. Relevant organs
were frozen for 2-3 months before analysis,
and after sex, date of capture, cause of
death, and county of kill were recorded.
Juvenile raccoons were distinguished from
adults by the presence of canine root apical
foramina (Grau et al. 1970), and aged to the
nearest half month by tooth replacement
patterns when possible (Montgomery 1964).
All remaining specimens were aged by count¬
ing cementum annuli of an upper 1st pre¬
molar (Grau et al. 1970), because we found
numerous accessory lines (Rice 1980) in up¬
per incisors or 4th premolars.
The penis was examined from each male
raccoon to determine if it could be extruded
through the prepubital orifice (Sanderson
1950, 1961). Testes with attached epididy¬
mides were weighed to the nearest 0. 1 g, and
smears from the cauda examined for pres¬
ence of spermatozoa. To reduce the bias in
testes weight caused by body size differ¬
ences, the average weight of each animal’s
testes (g) was divided by the greatest skull
length (mm) and multiplied by 100 (Payne et
al. 1966, Gipson et al. 1975).
Litter sizes were determined from placen¬
tal scar counts from the previous breeding
season (Johnson 1970). Females with turgid
uteri were not examined because estrus tends
to obscure the scars (Johnson 1970, Sander¬
son and Nalbandov 1973).
All raccoons aged at >1.5 years were
designated as adults; racoons <1.5 years as
juveniles; and those aged at 1.5 years old as
yearlings. Barren adults refer to female rac¬
coons that produced no offspring, either
through failure to mate, failure of eggs to be
fertilized, or loss of embryos before implan¬
tation or shortly thereafter, and without
evidence of pregnancy or placental scars in
the uterine horns.
Results
Reproduction
Males. — Average testes weights were
greater {P< 0.001) for adults than juveniles
for each month of collection and all months
combined. Testes of all 67 juveniles weighed
<3.4 g and showed no apparent weight
growth from October through January.
Testes of yearlings reached the adult weight
range (>7.3 g) by October or earlier. Only
4% of 67 juveniles had mature sperm in the
cauda epididymis; all 19 yearlings and 88%
of 42 older adults were reproductively active.
By December, all 14 adults and no juveniles
possessed mature sperm. The baculum could
be extruded through the prepubital orifice of
all 37 adults, but none of 40 juveniles exam¬
ined.
Females.— Of 214 adult females, 71% had
been pregnant (Table 1). Of the 62 females
showing no discernible evidence of placental
Table 1 . Age-specific litter size" and percentage
of barren females for raccoons
from southwestern Wisconsin, 1978-80.
“From placental scar counts.
1986]
Payne and Root — Productivity of Raccoons
77
scars (considered barren), 79% were year¬
lings, the rest older adults. Of 72 yearlings,
68% were barren, as compared to 9% of 142
older females.
The mean litter size of 152 females was
3.71 (range 1-7). The mean litter size of
yearlings (3.65) and older adults (3.72) did
not differ (P>0.05), the mean number of
young/yearling (1.17) was less {t = 9,
P<0.01, N= 152) than for older adult (3.38)
because pregnancy was 32% for yearlings
and 91% for others. Age-specific litter size
was fairly constant.
Late Litters. — Of 100 juvenile raccoons
collected in October 1979, 10% were con¬
ceived later than the mating season of late
January through mid-March in Wisconsin
(Jackson 1961). Ages assigned to them and 7
juveniles collected in November 1979 indi¬
cated that late litters were born between 15
July and mid-September and were conceived
from 15 May through mid- July (Table 2).
These raccoons, and 19 additional juveniles,
had no subcutaneous fat.
Sex Ratios
The overall sex ratio of 1,339 raccoons
collected during this study was 109M:100F
Table 2. Birth and conception dates of 12 raccoon
litters in southwestern Wisconsin, 1979.
“Determined by tooth replacement (Montgomery 1964).
bA 63 -day gestation period was assumed (Whitney and
Underwood 1952).
(52%). The sex ratio of 856 juvenile
raccoons (116M:100F) favored males
(X2 = 4.S3, P <0.05, 1 df); 483 adults were
nearly equally divided by sex (96M:100F,
P>0.05). Although the number of juvenile
males per 100 juvenile females harvested
monthly appeared higher than the number of
adult males per 100 adult females, there was
no significant difference (P >0.05).
Age Structure
Of 1,361 raccoons that were classified into
age groups, 65% were collected as juveniles,
13% as yearlings, and 22% as older adults.
Maximum longevity of males and females
approached 8 and 10 years, respectively,
although few raccoons (5%) survived more
than 5.5 years.
No differences were apparent when age
ratios were compared to method of capture
(P>0.05), but 86% of 22 raccoons killed by
vehicles were under 1 year old (Table 3). The
Table 3. Age composition of raccoons
from southwestern Wisconsin, 1978-80.
juvenile: adult ratio remained relatively con¬
stant through December but indicated that
there may be a greater percentage of adults
harvested in January.
Overall, 98% of known mortality resulted
from hunting (43%) and trapping (55%).
Road kills accounted for the remaining 2%.
Equal numbers of both sexes were harvested
by hunting and trapping.
Discussion
Reproduction
Testes of males from southwestern
Wisconsin do not reach adult size or produce
sperm until at least the end of the 1st year of
78
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
life, as suggested for North Dakota (Fritzell
1978) and Manitoba (Cowan 1973). Juvenile
males therefore probably contribute very lit¬
tle to the annual recruitment in southwestern
Wisconsin. However, most juvenile males in
Illinois are thought to sire most litters pro¬
duced from second ovulations (Sanderson
and Nalbandov 1973). Similarly, Johnson
(1970) found that most males have adult¬
sized testes during the 1st breeding season in
Alabama. The relatively short frost-free
season and the long cold winters in the
northern portion of the raccoon range may
retard the attainment of physical maturity
necessary for breeding during the 1st year of
life (Fritzell 1978).
Of 72 yearling female raccoons, 32%
bred, compared to 54% in Michigan
(Stuewer 1943a), 0% in Washington (Schef¬
fer 1950), 40% in Texas (Wood 1955), 9% in
Alabama (Johnson 1970), 41% in Manitoba
(Cowan 1973), 14% in North Dakota (Frit¬
zell 1978), 36-73% in Illinois (Sanderson and
Nalbandov 1973, Junge and Sanderson
1982, Fritzell et al. 1985), and 66% in
Missouri (Fritzell et al. 1985). Annual varia¬
tions in pregnancy rates was wider in year¬
lings (38-77%) than in adults (68%-96%) in
Illinois and Missouri (Fritzell et al. 1985).
Sanderson and Nalbandov (1973) concluded
that yearling females from Illinois either
conceive at the same time as adults during
their 1st estrus period or do not breed until
the next breeding season. Johnson (1970),
Cowan (1973), and Fritzel (1978) indicated
that yearlings conceive somewhat later in the
year than do adults. Two groups of females,
late-maturing juveniles and reovulating
adults, may be reproductively active
throughout most of the spring and summer
(Fritzel 1978). In southwestern Wisconsin,
about 10% of all juveniles harvested in Oc¬
tober 1979 resulted from late litters con¬
ceived from mid-May through mid-July, in¬
dicating that some females are ovulating in a
3-month period during the summer.
If adverse weather conditions prevent
early spring conceptions, litters from 2nd
ovulations are born in the fall (Steuwer
1943a, Berard 1952, Whitney and Under¬
wood 1952, Lehman 1968, Schneider et al.
1971). Sanderson and Nalbandov (1973)
noted that about 16% of the juvenile rac¬
coons purchased by furbuyers in the fall
following the abnormally severe spring
weather of 1960 in Illinois were born from
August through October. In Manitoba, 14%
of births were as late as the 1st week of
September (Cowan 1973). Fritzell et al.
(1985) observed 21-55% of yearlings and
22-55% of adults with 2 sets of placental
scars, at least 1 of which was unsuccessful
through resorption, abortion, or loss soon
after birth (Sanderson and Nalbandov 1983).
Females could ovulate again 1-6 months
later (Whitney and Underwood 1952,
Schneider et al. 1971, Sanderson and Nal¬
bandov 1973). About 10% of the raccoons
collected in October 1979 in southwestern
Wisconsin were juveniles conceived from
2nd ovulations from May through July.
Although deep snows during the normal rac¬
coon mating season in February may have
impeded the successful movement, location,
and mating of receptive raccoons during the
winter of 1978-79, the exact causes remain
unknown. Malnutrition and disease in win¬
ter adversely affected the success for 1st-
estrus matings in Manitoba (Cowan 1973),
and both were reported in southwestern Wis¬
consin.
If we consider the energy demands during
pregnancy, the 8-10 week nursing period,
and the lengthy female-young relationship
(Schneider et al. 1971, Fritzell 1977), late lit¬
ters would be especially maladaptive in the
severe winter climates in Wisconsin. Litters
produced in the milder environments of the
southern United States may be benefited by
2nd ovulation and fertile juvenile males, but
survival of juveniles whelped from late
breeding females would add little to the total
annual recruitment in Wisconsin. Our obser¬
vations of 4 starved juveniles and 19 others
lacking subcutaneous fat reserves suggests
that some young raccoons may not survive a
1986]
Payne and Root — Productivity of Raccoons
79
long and severe winter in Wisconsin. The
body weight of juveniles in Manitoba de¬
creased about 30% over winter, and winter
mortality was possibly as high as 60% for
this age class (Cowan 1973). Raccoons with¬
out placental scars weigh less than others
(Sanderson and Hubert 1981, Fritzell et al.
1985). Delayed maturity and larger litters in
northern latitudes apparently compensate
for recruitment from late breeding yearlings
in southern ranges; but age-specific litter size
is relativley static, contributing little to an¬
nual changes in recruitment (Fritzell et al.
1985).
Hunting and trapping accounted for 98%
of known human-related mortality of rac¬
coons in southwestern Wisconsin. Only 2%
of the raccoons reported were killed by
vehicles; although an unknown number of
road kills may go unreported, it appears that
this is not an important mortality factor.
Age Structure
Raccoon populations in northern states
have proportionately more juveniles and a
more rapid turnover rate than those in
southern areas (Johnson 1970). The 65%
juveniles collected in southwestern Wiscon¬
sin agrees with reports of juveniles ranging
from 41% to 70% of the harvest in northern
areas (Stuewer 1943 a,b, Sanderson 1951,
Llewellyn 1952, Fritzell et al. 1985), and
reflects differences in productivity, greater
mortality from severe winters, intensive
hunting and trapping pressure, and disease
noted in northern areas over southern rac¬
coon ranges (Johnson 1970). Variation in
pregnancy rates strongly affects annual
recruitment (Fritzell et al. 1985) because of
the high number of yearlings in the breeding
population.
Literature Cited
Berard, E. V. 1952. Evidence of a late birth for
the raccoon. J. Mammal. 33:247-248.
Cowan, W. F. 1973. Ecology and life history of
the raccoon ( Procyon lotor hirtus Nelson and
Goldman) in the northern part of its range.
Ph.D. Thesis, Univ. North Dakota, Grand
Forks, 161 pp.
Dorney, R. S. 1954. Ecology of marsh raccoons.
J. Wildl. Manage. 18:217-225.
Fritzell, E. K. 1977. Dissolution of raccoon sib¬
ling bonds. J. Mammal. 58:427-428.
. 1978. Reproduction of raccoons ( Proc¬
yon lotor) in North Dakota. Am. Midi. Nat.
100:253-256.
_ _ , G. F. Hubert, B. E. Meyer, and G. C.
Sanderson. 1985. Age-specific reproduction in
Illinois and Missouri raccoons. J. Wildl.
Manage. 49:901-905.
Gipson, P. S., I. K. Gipson, and J. A. Sealander.
1975. Reproductive biology of wild Canis
(Canidae) in Arkansas. J. Mammal. 56:
605-612.
Grau, G. A., G. C. Sanderson, and J. P. Rogers.
1970. Age determination of raccoons. J. Wildl.
Manage. 34:364-372.
Hole, F. D. 1977. Photo-mosaic soil map of
Wisconsin. Univ. Wisconsin Cartographic
Laboratory, Madison.
Jackson, H. H. T. 1961. Mammals of Wisconsin.
Univ. Wisconsin Press, Madison. 504 pp.
Johnson, A. S. 1970. Biology of the raccoon
(Procyon lotor varius Nelson and Goldman)
in Alabama. Alabama Agric. Exp. Stn., Bull.
402, Auburn Univ., Auburn. 148 pp.
Junge, R. E., and G. C. Sanderson. 1982. Age
related reproductive success of female rac¬
coons. J. Wildl. Manage. 46:527-529.
Lehman, L. E. 1968. September birth of raccoons
in Indiana. J. Mammal. 49:126-127.
Llewellyn, L. M. 1952. Geographic variation in
raccoon litter size. Presented at 8th Northeast.
Wildl. Conf., Jackson’s Mill, WV. Mimeogr. 7
PP-
Montgomery, G. G. 1964. Tooth eruption in pre¬
weaned raccoons. J. Wildl. Manage. 28:
582-584.
Payne, R. L., E. E. Provost, and D. F. Urbston.
1966. Delineation of the period of rut and
breeding season of a white-tailed deer popula¬
tion. Proc. Southeast Assoc. Game and Fish.
Comm. 20:130-137.
Rice, L. A. 1980. Influences of irregular dental
cementum layers on aging deer incisors. J.
Wildl. Manage. 44:266-268.
Sanderson, G. C. 1950. Methods of measuring
productivity in raccoons. J. Wildl. Manage.
14:389-402.
80
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
_ , and G. F. Hubert, Jr. 1981. Selected
demographic characteristics of Illinois
(U.S.A.) raccoons ( Procyon lotor ). Pages
487-513 in J. A. Chapman and D. Pursley, eds.
Proc. Worldwide Furbearer Conf., Frostburg,
MD.
_ . 1951. Breeding habits and a history of
the Missouri raccoon population from 1941 to
1948. Trans. North Am. Wildl. Conf. 16:
445-461.
_ 1961. Techniques for determining age of
raccoons. Illinois Nat. Hist. Surv. Biol. Notes
45. 16 pp.
_ , and A. V. Nalbandov. 1973. The repro¬
ductive cycle of the raccoon in Illinois. Illinois
Nat. Hist. Surv. Bull. 31:29-85.
Scheffer, V. B. 1950. Notes on the raccoon in
southwest Washington. J. Mammal. 31:
444-448.
Schneider, D. G., L. D. Mech, and J. R. Tester.
1971. Movements of female raccoons and their
young as determined by radio-tracking. Anim.
Behav. Monogr. 4. 43 pp.
Stuewer, F. W. 1943tf. Reproduction of raccoons
in Michigan. J. Wildl. Manage. 7:60-73.
_ 1943 b. Raccoons: their habits and
management in Michigan. Ecol. Monogr. 13:
203-257.
Whitney, L. F., and A. B. Underwood, 1952. The
raccoon. Practical Sci. Publ. Co., Orange, CT.
177 pp.
Woehler, E. E. 1957. How about raccoon stock¬
ing? Wisconsin Conserv. Bull. 22(4): 12-14.
Wood, J. E. 1955. Notes on reproduction and
rate of increase in raccoons in the post oak
region of Texas. J. Wildl. Manage. 19:409-410.
HISTORICAL CHANGES IN WATER QUALITY AND BIOTA OF
DEVILS LAKE, SAUK COUNTY, 1866-1985
Richard A. Lillie
and
John W. Mason
Bureau of Research
Department of Natural Resources
Madison
Abstract
Concerns have been expressed in recent years that the water quality of Devils
Lake may be deteriorating. As a result, water quality and biological studies of the
lake were initiated in 1981 to determine its status. Examination of historical and
recently collected physical and chemical data show considerable variation in some
parameters but no clear trends toward poorer conditions were found. However,
available historical data suggest changes in biological communities have occurred
which may indicate or could cause poorer water quality conditions. These changes
include (1) alteration of the aquatic plant community brought about by the invasion
of Eurasian milfoil (Myriophyllum spicatum), (2) a change in fish population com¬
position and relative abundance, and (3) an increase in phytoplankton biomass at
certain times of the year. Interrelationships between these biotic changes and their
possible effects on the water quality of Devils Lake are discussed.
Introduction
As a scenic and recreational resource,
Devils Lake (Devils Lake State Park, Sauk
County) has always been recognized as one
of Wisconsin’s finest. The lake’s clear water
has made it extremely popular with swim¬
mers, boaters and scuba divers. Its fish
population has historically provided good
fishing opportunities. The unique value of
Devils Lake can be attested to by over one
million annual visitors to the park. How¬
ever, recent observations of the lake’s condi¬
tion have given rise to concern that water
quality may be deteriorating.
In 1981, a Wisconsin Department of
Natural Resource (DNR) Task Force was ap¬
pointed to investigate the problem. The Task
Force concluded, based on the historical
data available, that there probably had been
some decline in the quality of Devils Lake
and recommended that a basic data collec¬
tion program be initiated to monitor condi¬
tions in the lake (WDNR Task Force Report,
June 1981). A data collection program car¬
ried out jointly by park personnel, DNR
Southern District staff, the Bureau of Parks
and Recreation, and Research got underway
in 1981 and continued through 1985.
This report is a compilation and analysis
of the historical and recent data sets on
Devils Lake. The data presented were de¬
rived from many different sources other
than our own work, and we have tried to
give other investigators due credit. Using in¬
formation from so many sources unavoid¬
ably introduces data bias to varying degrees
due to differences in methodologies. How¬
ever, we cannot review all methods used by
different investigators here and have chosen
only to discuss methodologies where we felt
differences were of significance. Details on
methods used can be found in cited docu¬
ments.
We have attempted to interpret this data,
81
82
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Table 1 . Morphometric data for Devils Lake,
January, 1984.
Fig. 1. Morphometric map of Devils Lake. Measure¬
ments made in January 1985, by G. Wegner and G.
Quinn. Drafted by E. Eaton.
where possible, in light of the alleged
changes in the lake’s water quality. As is
generally the case with historical water qual¬
ity data sets, gaps in data collections made
interpretations difficult and in most cases,
prevented identification of long-term trends.
We hope the information presented in this
article will serve as a guide for future studies
of the lake and in efforts to prevent its
deterioration.
The Lake and Its Watershed
Devils Lake has a unique geologic history
and origin, the story of which fills many
volumes (Martin, 1916). It lies in a basin
with steep rocky bluffs along the east, west,
and south shorelines. Because the lake has
no outlet, variations in annual precipitation
are reflected in rather dramatic water fluc¬
tuations. A range in lake levels of nearly 11
feet has been recorded over a 56 year period
with an average annual water-level fluctua¬
tion of 2.64 feet (House, 1985). Minimum
and maximum stage were recorded in 1965
and 1973, respectively (House, 1985). Thus,
morphometric data (Table 1) are dependent
upon lake stage. Devils Lake is a 369 acre
seepage lake with an average maximum
depth of 47 feet (Figure 1).
Nearly all of the Devils Lake watershed is
now in State of Wisconsin ownership,
although a few small privately owned parcels
still remain. The Devils Lake watershed is
characterized by small size, steep relief, large
areas of impervious rock surface or shallow
soils and hardwood forest cover type (Plate
1, Figure 2). Because of these characteristics,
surface runoff from the watershed to the
lake is very rapid during storm events and
snowmelt. The only permanent tributary
enters the lake in the southwestern corner,
and even this stream has very little flow
under dry conditions. Other drainage paths
are normally dry but can carry large volumes
of water during major runoff events. The
total watershed land area was 4.34 miles,2
however, only 2.65 miles2 now drains into
Devils Lake. Since the mid-1970,s, runoff
1986]
Lillie and Mason — Changes in Devils Lake
83
Plate 1 . Air photo of Devils Lake from south.
from the northeastern subbasin has been
permanently diverted to the Baraboo River.
We estimated nutrient runoff from the
two main subbasins of the watershed, the
southwest and the northeast, from 1970-74.
Nitrogen and phosphorus concentrations in
runoff were found to be similar in both sub¬
basins (Table 2). Estimates of nutrient yields
from these two watersheds (Table 3) sug¬
gested runoff coefficients were typical for
forested watersheds in the U.S. (EPA, 1980).
Total watershed P loading to Devils Lake
(excluding atmospheric and groundwater
contributions) was calculated to be 0.206
g/m2/yr. during the 1970-74 period. This
was slightly above the “permissible” rate as
described in various lake loading models
(Dillon, 1975; Vollenweider, 1975; Uttor-
mark and Hutchins, 1980). However, per¬
manent diversion of the northeast subbasin
drainage from the lake has reduced the an¬
nual watershed nutrient loading to the lake
by about 40 percent. Nutrient loading rates
now appear to be well within the “permissi¬
ble” range.
Results
Historical Record — Physical and Chemical
Devils Lake is dimictic with thermal
stratification beginning in late spring or
Fig. 2. Watershed map of Devils Lake. Drafted by S.
Mace.
84
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Table 2. Nitrogen and phosphorus concentrations in drainage waters to Devils Lake, 1970-1974.
Sample nos. in parentheses.
* Drainage now diverted from the lake.
Table 3. Estimated annual nutrient loading to Devils Lake from the watershed, 1970-1974.
* Drainage now diverted from the lake.
early summer (Figure 3) and continuing
through September. The duration of the
spring overturn and the timing of the estab¬
lishment of a permanent thermocline varies
annually dependent upon climatic patterns.
The depth of the epilimnion progressively in¬
creases from 18-20 feet in early summer to 30
feet by late summer (Figure 3). Erosion of
the thermocline, resulting from the passage
of periodic cold fronts (Stauffer, 1974), is
evident in early fall as the mixing zone rapid¬
ly deepened in late September. Complete
mixing generally is established by mid-
November. Hypolimnetic temperatures vary
from 48-53 °F and do not appear to be cor¬
related with spring weather data.
If if if;
Fig. 3. Dissolved oxygen profiles for Devils Lake during a) 1983 and b) 1984 showing depth of thermocline (shaded
area).
1986]
Lillie and Mason— Changes in Devils Lake
85
One of the most important measurements
of lake water quality is water clarity or ap¬
pearance. Water appearance has not been
adequately measured in Devils Lake, prob¬
ably because it is still clear in comparison
with other southern Wisconsin lakes. How¬
ever, while the written record is lacking, the
collective view of many individuals is that
Devils Lake is generally not as clear as it
used to be. For example, scuba divers have
commented upon the apparent decline in
transparency in recent years.
Data to substantiate a water clarity deteri¬
oration is meager. While a considerable
number of measurements of water clarity
have been made over a long period of record
(Figure 4), changes within seasons make
comparisons difficult. Seasonal trends are
evident with declining water clarity from
early to late summer the rule rather than the
exception. Annual trends in water clarities
are less obvious although the data suggest a
probable decline in water clarity during
1976-81 (Figure 5). However, clarities im¬
proved slightly in 1982 and 1985. Histor¬
ically, water clarity in Devils Lake has re¬
mained very good to excellent based upon
comparisons with 1140 other Wisconsin
lakes (Lillie and Mason, 1983).
Dissolved oxygen (D.O.) concentration
profiles within Devils Lake during the period
of thermal stratification were clineograde ex¬
cept for occasional metalimnetic maxima
Fig. 4. Water clarity of Devils Lake for summer and
fall periods of 1975; 1981-85. Data sources are listed in
Figure 5.
(Figure 3). Epilimnetic concentrations were
generally at or close to 100 percent satura¬
tion. Greatly reduced saturations occurred
below the thermocline due to the decomposi¬
tion and respiration processes. Over 150
D.O. profiles were collected since Birge and
Fig. 5. Historical trends in summer water clarity of
Devils Lake, Sauk County for 25 summers (July-Sep-
tember) from 1916 to 1985. Data sources are: Birge and
Juday (1917, 19 and 26); Cline (1945); Jacob (1955); Lee
(1966); WRR-DNR (1967-80); Dunst (1975); Stauffer
(1971-72); Vignon and Armstrong (1974); Schlesser
(1977-81); Martin (1980); and Devils Lake State Park
Staff (1982-85). Water quality index based on Lillie and
Mason, 1983.
Fig. 6. Comparison of dissolved oxygen concentra¬
tions at the 30 to 40 foot contour levels of Devils Lake.
86
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Table 4. Dissolved oxygen depletion rate comparisons for Devils Lake.
Data Source Codes: DNR-BLP = Benchmark Lake Program
DNR-DLSP = Devils Lake State Park
DNR-WRR = Water Resources Research Section
1986]
Lillie and Mason— Changes in Devils Lake
87
Fig. 7. Total phosphorus concentrations (ug/L) in the
hypolimnion (40 foot depth) of Devils Lake, 1981-85.
trations appear to have fluctuated annually
with no trend discernible.
Nutrient concentrations in Devils Lake are
quite low (Table 5) and are among the lowest
on record for lakes in the region (based on
Lillie and Mason, 1983). Epilimnetic phos¬
phorus concentrations generally increased
from summer to fall (Table 6) as did hypo-
limnetic values (Figure 7). Increased
hypolimnetic phosphorus concentrations
were observed in 1981 and 1984. Volume
weighted estimates of total in-lake phos¬
phorus mass indicated an overall increase of
100-400 kg in the water column from early
summer to fall turnover (Table 7). This cor-
• DNR DATA SOURCES
1967 68 69 70 71 ' 72 ' 73 ' 74 ' 75 ' 76 ' 77 78 ' 79 ' 80 ' 81 ' 82 ' S3 ' 84 ' 85
Fig. 8. Epilimnetic total phosphorus concentrations
(X± 1SE) in Devils Lake during 1967-85. (N)
= number of sampling dates. * Laboratory precision
during 1969 was low. Data reported to nearest 0. 1 mg/L
phosphate; those values were within ±16 ug/L
phosphorus.
responds with an observed average increase
of 180 kg from spring to fall. However,
spring phosphorus levels were consistently
low (mean 15 ug/L) and no clear trend was
evident in the 19 year record of epilimnetic
phosphorus concentrations (Figure 8).
Lowest total nitrogen concentrations oc¬
curred during spring turnover (mean 0.35
mg/L) and highest levels occurred during the
fall turnover (mean 0.47 mg/L). Occasional
extreme values have been recorded in surface
waters during late summer algae blooms
(2.12 mg/L maximum), whereas higher
Table 7. Comparison of computed (estimated) mass of inlake total phosphorus for Devils Lake.
Values in kilograms of phosphorus.
Data Source Codes: DNR-BLP = Benchmark Lake Program
DNR-DLSP = Devils Lake State Park
DNR-WRR = Water Resources Research Section
88
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
levels were typically found in the hypolim-
nion. Epilimnetic nitrogen concentrations
appeared to have increased steadily from
1967 to 1971 after which they appeared to
have oscillated back and forth about the
mean (Figure 9). No indications of further
increases were evident. The lake appeared to
be phosphorus limited as total nitrogen to
phosphorus ratios generally exceeded 10:1.
Other commonly reported water quality
parameters were relatively stable, both
seasonally and by depth throughout the
period of historical record. Values generally
were lower than normal for the region (Table
8). No clear trends are apparent in any of
these parameters during the period of record
I <*•
1967 ' 68 ' 69 ' 70 ' 71 ' 72 ' 73 ' 74 ' 75 ' 76 ' 77 ' 78 ' 79 ' 80 ' 81 ' 82 ' 83 ' 84 ' 85 '
Fig. 9. Epilimnetic total nitrogen concentrations
(X ± 1SE) in Devils Lake during 1967-85. (N) = Num¬
ber of sampling dates. *One extremely high value
recorded during summer bloom in 1984.
Table 8. Average annual water chemistry values for
* Arithmetic mean.
** umhos/cm
“ pH units
(Figure 10). Magnesium concentrations ap¬
peared to have more than doubled from 3 to
8 mg/L during 1967 to 1980 but the most re¬
cent data (1983-85) were similar to the
earliest data. Conductivities have been quite
variable but appeared to have been higher
than normal during 1979.
Historical Record — Fish
The fish population of Devils Lake
represents the pinnacle of the food chain and
as such has exerted a great ecological impact
on the lake. What the “ original’ ’ population
was like before any human manipulations
took place is unknown, but a population of
forage, panfish and game fish species similar
to that of other southern Wisconsin lakes
(Becker, 1983) probably existed in pre¬
settlement times. Because of the lake’s
geologic history, its fish population most
likely originated from the Wisconsin River
drainage system. Early settlers may have
found lower standing crops of fish than in
other lakes in southern Wisconsin due to the
unique morphometric characteristics and
relatively low fertility of the lake.
Historical records show 32 different fish
species caught, observed, or stocked in
Devils Lake between 1866-1985 (Table 9);
while past errors in identification cannot be
ruled out, data given in Table 15 are believed
to be reasonably accurate.
Earliest records on the fish species in¬
habiting Devils Lake and early accounts of
fish stocking were gleaned from local news¬
papers by Ken Lange, Devils Lake State
Park Naturalist. The Baraboo Republic
reported that the lake in 1866 had great
numbers of “perch, bass and pickerel, some
of the latter weighing twenty- five pounds.’’
The species of “bass” referred to here is
uncertain, but the “pickerel” weighing 25
pounds were surely northern pike. An un¬
dated brochure on the Cliff House, a resort
on Devils Lake from 1873-1904 lists “pike,
pickerel, black bass, yellow perch, sunfish
and minnows” as present in the lake. Again,
whether the “black bass” were largemouth
1986]
Lillie and Mason— Changes in Devils Lake
89
30
20
TOTAL ALKALINITY
mg/L
10-
i967 68 ' 69 ' 70 ' 7 1 ' 72 ' 73 ' 74 75 ' 76 ' 77 78 ' 79 80 ' 81 ' 82 ' 83 ' 84 ' 85'
6.6-
6.4-
1967 68 ' 69 ' 70 ' 7 1 ' 72 ' 73 ' 74 ' 75 ' 76 ' 77 ' 78 ' 79 ' 80 ' 81 ' 82 ' 83' 84' 85'
28-
26-
24-
22-
20-
18-
CALCIUM
(Co)
140-
120-
100-
80-
60-
CONDUCTIVITY
fjmhos/cm
u
16-
14- 1
1967 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
40-
20-
1967 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
CHLORIDES
.M I111'*
1967 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
TIT
i . r 1
1967 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
10-
9-
SODIUM
(No)
u
1 ! 1" 1 _
1967 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 1
82 83 84 85
. !V» «iT 1 s, Pj 1 t n
1967 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
30-
SULFATE
(S04)
I ’ I
1967 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
Fig. 10. Historical trends in selected water chemistry parameters for Devils Lake during 1967-85. Ranges for surface
and hypolimnetic sample values are given for: a) total alkalinity, b) calcium (Ca), c) magnesium (Mg), d) sodium (Na),
e) potassium (K), f) pH, g) conductivity, h) chlorides (Cl), i) sulfate (S04), and j) iron (Fe).
Table 9. Historical record of fish species inhabiting or introduced into Devils Lake. Numbers indicate information source,
S denotes stocked fish; stocking records after 1944 not included.
90
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters [Vol. 74
58-*786l
8261
*7261
2261
02-8961
2961
S5-*7S6l
8%l
2*761
5*761
*7*7-6861
886 L
2861
5861
*7861
186 L
82-S26L
ZZ6L
ZL6L
9061
5061
*7061
2681
9681
5681
*7681
588 L
*7881
628 L
8281
5281
828 L
9981
Spotfin shiner
Notropi s spi iopterus
Spottail shiner
Notropi s hudsoni us
1986]
Lillie and Mason — Changes in Devils Lake
91
88-1786 1
8Z61
i?Z6l
2Z61
OZ-8961
Z96L
88-17861
8i?6l
L*i6L
Si?6l
i?i?-6£6l
8£6l
Z£6L
S£6l
i?£6l
l£6 L
82-8261
2261
2 161
9061
S06L
I7O6I
Z681
968 L
868 L
17681
8881
o 6 "2
o oa
3 |
3 z
e* o
!§ £
; A ~
1 *3 s
s
2 * *
ON C
— o
fS .£ aJ \
S
> oo
•S Si-
N 1
§ <D X!
: c*
■ z Q
; Q "2
I-£-
88!
£ £
a £
<D 0)
* £
£ e
c P4 a
£ Z §
I Q
«3
g C
1 fi S <g 2 8
a .tt
3 B
ON O <N
.£ £
5 s
© .£ ■
.§* I
I Q
& f
* § ,
o ©
i °
g ■§ ..
« .5 s:
s g u
III
£ £ g
u u r
Z Z £
* c o 5 w
1 3 o a ^ 1
> 8 1 ^ H
isa 8si'
i
jl«>,
<E> ^ !i3 cj
a _r a w •
!« 2 ^
a *3 a g
> a £ <u
S 8 5 S :
z j z a i
N m ^ m ^ h oo
92
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
or smallmouth, or what species of “sunfish”
or “minnows” were there is unknown. The
“pike” were no doubt walleyes. Since the
Cliff House brochure is not dated, some of
the fish species mentioned could have been
introduced into the lake through stocking,
including walleyes. Based on old newspaper
accounts, habitat requirements, and possible
origins of fish species in Devils Lake, we
believe white suckers, rock bass, burbot,
pumpkinseed, darters, and shiners were
probably original lake residents.
One thing is certain, stocking of the lake
began at least as early as 1873 and some
species not originally found there have been
introduced to the lake. “Conservationists”
of the late 1800's apparently recognized the
clear waters of Devils Lake as potential trout
habitat, since the first species reported
stocked were salmonids, e.g. brook trout,
lake trout, Atlantic salmon, and probably
rainbow trout. Brook trout may have
already been present in the lake before they
were stocked; a native population might
have inhabited the southwest inlet. The lake
trout and Atlantic salmon stocked most like¬
ly quickly disappeared from the lake. Rain¬
bow trout were first reported as present in
the lake in 1895 but were probably stocked
much earlier.
Conservation agency workers and co¬
operating sportsmen of the early era believed
stocking and redistributing of fish in the
state's waters were good management prac¬
tices, and as Table 9 clearly shows, Devils
Lake did not escape their “management.”
Species intentionally stocked in the lake in¬
cludes some besides the salmonids which
may not have been there originally. White
bass in all likelihood were not native, yet
they were stocked on at least two different
occasions. Other species stocked, some of
them many times, were largemouth and
smallmouth bass, walleyes, northern pike,
black crappies, bluegills, yellow perch, and
bullheads. Of these stocked species, it ap¬
pears relatively certain northern pike, yellow
perch, and one of the basses (probably
largemouth) were present in Devils Lake
prior to stocking; stockings of some or all of
the other species could have been intentional
introductions. In addition to all these
deliberate plantings, there certainly have
been unintentional introductions of new
species, in particular minnows used as bait
by anglers.
The first comprehensive fish surveys in
Devils Lake were made in the early 1900’s by
University of Wisconsin scientists. Greene
(1935) reported on surveys made between
1925-1928, and examined collections made
earlier by other investigators. He found 14
species, some of which had never been men¬
tioned as present before that time. Since
1937, several studies of the fish population
have been made by the Wisconsin Conserva¬
tion Department/Department of Natural
Resources and good records are available on
fish stocking.
From 1944 to 1984, mostly walleye and
trout were stocked. Trout stocking was
generally viewed as very successful and pro¬
vided a popular and productive fishery
(Jacob, 1954 and 1955; Meier and Ensign,
1967; Brynildson, Ives, and Druckenmiller,
1970). Both rainbow and brown trout have
been found to survive and grow well in
Devils Lake but neither species has ever suc¬
cessfully reproduced there. Evaluation of the
success or failure of walleye stocking pro¬
gram has been considerably more compli¬
cated, because naturally-reproduced wall¬
eyes also presumably exist in the lake.
Walleye fishing reportedly has been good in
some past years, but in recent years the
walleye fishery apparently has declined, even
though large numbers of walleyes were
stocked.
Rough fish have apparently never been
abundant in Devils Lake. White suckers are
believed to have been native to the lake and
were taken in early years by seining and
spearing when they congregated during the
spawning season. Suckers have also been
captured when fish population surveys were
made but never in large number except in
1986]
Lillie and Mason — Changes in Devils Lake
93
May, 1955, when Jacob removed 4,456
pounds from the lake. The presence of carp
in Devils Lake has been noted by personal
observations, but carp have never been cob
lected during any of the fish surveys. The
current status of this species is uncertain but
if carp are now present it is in low numbers.
There is very little historical record of the
minnow population in Devils Lake aside
from a few notations of species present.
Greene (1935) reported mimic shiner, blunt-
nose minnow, and Iowa darter as found in
the lake. In 1945, minnow seining by the
Wisconsin Conservation Department caught
“predominately spot- tail shiner and Johnny
darter.” Meier and Ensign (1967) listed
bluntnose minnow, fathead minnow, spot-
tail shiner, and Johnny darter as present.
Smith (1972) reported seeing “many” fat¬
head minnows. The October, 1984, fish
population survey captured great numbers
of minnows, with mimic shiner, spotfin
shiner, and bluntnose minnow most abun¬
dant. Other species present in lesser numbers
were Iowa darter, Johnny darter, fathead
minnow, and blacknose dace. Based on this
information, there appears to have been
some changes in minnow population com¬
position and abundance since the early
1900’s which could have an important eco¬
logical impact.
Population surveys made over the past 30
years by Jacob (1954, 1955), Meier and En¬
sign (1967), and Mason (1984) suggest that
the fish composition of Devils Lake has
changed (Table 10). These surveys indicate
increases in the bluegill, pumpkinseed, and
largemouth bass populations and possible
decreases in perch, walleye, and smallmouth
bass numbers between 1955-1984. Northern
pike and black crappie numbers also may
have increased during this period. The
greatest increase in the largemouth bass
population appears to have occurred be¬
tween 1955-1967, while the greatest pro¬
liferation of the bluegill-pumpkinseed
population apparently took place between
1967-1984.
The bluegill-pumpkinseed population ex¬
pansion is the most dramatic and potentially
ecologically significant fish population
change. Newspaper records from the late
1800’s do not mention bluegills and only one
account mentioned pumpkinseeds {Bamboo
Republic , July, 1879). Greene (1935) and
other associated scientists captured bluegillls
during their surveys of Devils Lake in the
early 1900’s, providing the first record of
Table 10. Comparison of catch of some warm-water fish species by netting surveys of Devils Lake.
Table 1 1 . Mean length of different age groups of fish species in Devils Lake compared to averages
for other Southern Wisconsin lakes. Sample nos. in parentheses.
94
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
iif?
c a
3 Q
3 O ^
O ^
*1
,8 r
a ^
3 K.
co C. ^
5 .a» ^
3 S'0
3 vs
<N OV /— s
vo Ov vo m Os
— * —I <N —I m
'OVO OO'O^'
in r^’ oo on
vo On omoo^n
iCNtn^ooo
N Ov 't ^ 't
Tt in vd r-" od
O
(S M ON
hfN^t-HMO
<3\ WN -h ^ ^
o^mooo
id id vd rd oo od
^OV tT
ud ud VO VO
r- ^ ^ <n ov t" —< o v
-HNt«r ^ c ov oo r- — ' fN — ^ ' <N
O tT in ^ r% ON vor^
-d rd «n vd rd od od ci id vd od Ov ©
ov ov rs m fs
^ Ov w m os
id d h-' od o d
ov «n oo oo"io
«/d vd rd od od
^oooin^^,
^-s— i t-- — ■ — cN i/~>
cT in" 00 00 VO in in
d d d vd r- oo d
irT ^"oo^rd"©"
— <n vo r~ od
Ow cd Ll
Tt m vo oo
Tt vd od ov
scions
Tt OO VO © Tt
rd od Ov © -d
■rf r*i
-t in
vd rd
in m
oo oo
OV -d
§■
o „
00
T*
.§•1)
Vj (U
$,.2
co'PQ
vo r- o — i ^
»- 1 ON *n (N
-hN(N-hVO
OO VO VO
m m © ro ©
oo vt r- vo M
m m — i m m
<— i Ov Ov «n Ov
vd vd r-d od ov
ts <n <n r-
OvoomO
rr rd ov -d
HN <n
in" © rd
vd Ov o
-H *- 1 —I in
rd In oC^d
Ov -d -d i ‘
— ■ rvi m m vo o M m vt w vo o-HNwvt invot^
<N rj-
tF" rdoo vo vo in
vd od (N id rd ~d
-h — i <N <s <N m
^ , <N <N
r- o ^
(M — vri -h <N
nooCo ^
vd -d r4 Tt vd
— ' rsi <n <N m
wO
vo 'O
vd «n
-H Ov CO «-<
rd(N rs o
rd O >d Ov
—i —i —| - M (N m
-ilOMiO
<N od rd vd
-< N m vt m vo
-H <N r*-) Tj- irv vo
7 41.0(2)
8 41.0(2)
Age group 0 average length determined from length frequency.
1986]
Lillie and Mason-Changes in Devils Lake
95
bluegill presence in the lake. In the period
from 1934-44, the Wisconsin Conservation
Department repeatedly stocked bluegills,
therefore, fish managers in the Department
must have felt the population at that time
was not providing an adequate fishery.
Jacob’s surveys in 1954 and 1955 indicate
that the bluegill and pumpkinseed popula¬
tions remained relatively low through that
period, but when Meier and Ensign sampled
the lake in 1967, the population increase ap¬
parently had begun. By 1968-1970, a creel
census showed bluegills were the most num¬
erous fish caught in Devils Lake, making up
39-57 percent of the catch (Brynildson, et
al., 1970). The 1984 survey data (Mason)
suggest the upward trend in the bluegill and
pumpkinseed populations has continued to
the present; 75 percent of the fish caught in
the survey were bluegills and pumpkinseeds.
Therefore the data indicates bluegill and
pumpkinseed populations have historically
been relatively low and stable in Devils Lake,
but have increased greatly over the past
20-30 years.
Bluegill growth rate may have decreased
as they became more abundant (Table 11).
Early survey data indicate bluegills grew
faster than normal for southern Wisconsin
lakes. From the 1984-1985 age-length data, it
appears growth rate may have slowed since
1954-1955. Length frequency data for blue¬
gills captured in October, 1984 (Figure 11)
show large numbers of small fish, with 88
percent in the 3-6 inch size range. These fish
were of different overlapping age groups.
October, 1984.
Further, average length of 173 young of the
year bluegills caught by shoreline seining in
fall, 1984 was 1.4 inches, suggesting poor
growth during the previous summer.
Lower condition factor of bluegills might
also be anticipated as a result of population
increase, but data limitations prevented valid
statistical comparison of length-weight data
from the fish surveys.
Growth rate of other panfish (yellow
perch, rock bass, and black crappie) in
Devils Lake remains average or above for
southern Wisconsin lakes. Northern pike
growth rate apparently has not changed over
the past 30 years and is as good as, or better
than, in other lakes in the region.
Historical Record— Macrophytes
A major change has taken place within the
macrophyte community of Devils Lake. The
aquatic plants of Devils Lake apparently re¬
ceived little attention prior to 1974, based on
the recovery of only a few sketchy field notes
or observations. While some collections of
various shoreline emergents were made
(Lange, 1984), and specimens undoubtedly
exist in various herbariums throughout the
state, no extensive vegetative survey of the
submergent macrophyte community was ac¬
complished until 1974 (Baker, 1975). While
Baker’s 1974 survey was limited to an area
adjacent to the southeast beach area, it
served as the foundation for assessing his¬
torical changes. Baker reported a plant com¬
munity consisting of 7 species, dominated in
number by Potamogeton robbinsii and in
area by Elodea canadensis. Significant is his
description of Myriophyllum verticillatum as
“relatively scattered, at 1.2 to 4.5 m depths
contributing little to the population of the
total community.” Unfortunately, and con¬
trary to the cited paper, voucher specimens
were not deposited in the University of
Wisconsin herbarium and have since been
lost (pers. comm. Baker). The identification
of the milfoil species was confirmed by UW-
Madison staff.
Systematic vegetation surveys were ini-
96
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
dated by the WDNR in 1978 and were con¬
tinued through 1983 (Bale and Molter, 1979,
1980, 1981; Bainbridge and Molter, 1982;
Molter and Schlesser, 1983; annual surveys).
These surveys documented the presence of
several additional species including the
dominance of Nitella sp. in deeper waters
and the significant contribution of milfoil
(species taxonomy in question) in shallower
areas. Estimated areal coverages and dis¬
tributions based on a grid overlay and rake
samples showed minor fluctuations from
year to year. Elodea was the most abundant
species found in 1982 (Schlesser, Bainbridge
and Molter, 1982).
An extensive survey of macrophyte dis¬
tribution, composition, and dry weight bio¬
mass was conducted in 1984 by the Bureau
of Research, Water Resources Research Sec¬
tion, Wisconsin DNR, (Lillie, 1986). Macro¬
phytes covered 66 acres with an average den¬
sity of 183 g/m2 and total biomass of
51,000 kg (56 tons) dry weight. Sixteen
macrophyte species were recorded (Table
12). Potamogeton robbinsii accounted for 50
percent of the total plant biomass while
Table 12. Aquatic macrophyte composition of Devils Lake (from Lillie, 1986).
* Includes Eleocharis acicularis, Najas sp., Vallisneria americana, Isoetes echinospora, Potamogeton
diver sifolius, P. crispus, P. pusillus, and Char a sp.
Fig. 12. Distribution of Myriophyllum spicatum, Elodea canadensis, and P. robbinsii within Devils Lake during sum¬
mer 1984.
1986]
Lillie and Mason — Changes in Devils Lake
91
Myriophyllum spicatum and Elodea cana¬
densis were next in order of importance. The
distributions of these dominant species were
depth dependent, forming generally contigu¬
ous bands about the lake perimeter (Figure
12). The milfoil beds extended to the surface
at depths from 6-9 feet forming biological
“barrier reefs'* 80-160 feet wide and up to
1,000 feet long. Total milfoil acreage (7
acres) represented only 2 percent of the total
lake acreage but stand densities were so
dense (160-183 g/m2 that the habitat struc¬
ture was nearly impenetrable to divers.
Comparisons with Baker's 1974 (Baker,
1975) survey and with earlier DNR investiga¬
tions, suggest that elodea has greatly de¬
clined, milfoil has greatly expanded, and P.
Robbinsii has remained relatively unchanged
within Devils Lake (Lillie, 1986). Average
total biomass densities were quite similar to
other fertile Wisconsin lakes (Table 13).
Historical Record-Plankton Data
The plankton community of Devils Lake
is very important because of its relationship
to water clarity, nutrient recycling and other
biological populations. However, it has not
been historically well documented.
The zooplankton record is extremely
meager, consisting of only a few represen¬
tative seasonal samples. The large-bodied
cladoceran, Daphnia pulicaria and a
calanoid copepod, Epischura lacustris have
been observed in large numbers as recently
as 1984. Recent collections included great
numbers of smaller-bodied forms including
the rotifers, Kellicottia sp. and Polyarthra
sp., the cladoceran, Bosmina sp., and the
appearance of an additional daphnia species,
D. dubia.
The phytoplankton record is somewhat
more substantial, but data are generally in¬
adequate to draw definite conclusions.
Earliest observations on phytoplankton
composition were primarily of net plankton
only, whereas the recent record includes the
contribution of nannoplankton (Table 14).
Although sampling frequency was low, the
typical pattern of phytoplankton succession
during the recent record was of spring
Table 13. Macrophyte biomass comparisons among Wisconsin lakes. Biomass based on
density per m2 of colonized area unless otherwise noted.
98
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Table 14. Summer phytoplankton associations— Devils Lake, Sauk County.
Data Sources: (1907-09, 15 and 23) Birge and Juday— UW Archive material
(*1914-17) Smith, 1920
(1972) Stauffer, 1974
(1977-84) Last, unpublished DNR collection data
Table 15. Devils Lake Chlorophyll a data, 1971-1985.
Note: Some liberties were taken in rounding-off chlorophyll values to the nearest whole ug/L. Superscript
numbers refer to multiple samples within same month.
Data Source Codes: DNR-BLP = Benchmark Lake Program
DNR-DLSP = Devils Lake State Park
DNR-WRR = Water Resources Research Section
1986]
Lillie and Mason— Changes in Devils Lake
99
diatom blooms followed by late summer and
early fall bluegreen blooms. Diatoms re¬
turned as dominants in late fall. Sampling
was insufficient to characterize winter com¬
position.
The bluegreen, Aphanozomenon flos-
aqua , did not become an important compo¬
nent of the late summer bloom until 1977
and has occurred only sporadically since
then. Gloeotrichia enchinulata, a colonial
filamentous bluegreen and major dominant
in the early record, was missing from the re¬
cent record until 1982 when it was a major
dominant after an absence of nearly 70
years.
Chlorophyll a concentrations were less
than 10 ug/L during spring and summer cor¬
responding to good water quality conditions
(Lillie and Mason, 1983). Concentrations in¬
creased steadily in late summer or early fall,
and then declined as water temperature
cooled. Occasional spring diatom blooms
were generally of much less consequence
than the fall blooms. The historical chloro¬
phyll a data base is very limited as this
parameter has only recently been routinely
measured (Table 15). The mean concentra¬
tion has been 5.9 ±0.8 ug/L for 88 observa¬
tions. Data are insufficient to determine
long-term trends.
Discussion
The impetus which led to this study of
water quality conditions in Devils Lake was
the general concensus of opinion among in¬
dividuals who were well acquainted with the
lake that water quality had deteriorated or
was in the process of deteriorating. A careful
and detailed examination of the available
data, both quantitative and qualitative, has
lead us to conclude that some compositional
changes have occurred in the biota. While no
conclusive evidence was found in the data to
suggest a permanent change in water quality,
the biotic changes noted could be related to
or lead to water quality changes.
Devils Lake appears to be better protected
now than it was formerly against degrada¬
tion from its watershed. External nutrient
loading to the lake has most likely decreased
in recent years. It is estimated that the per¬
manent diversion of the northeast subbasin
drainage resulted in a 40 percent reduction in
annual watershed loading. The purchase and
removal of lakeside cottages and purchase
by the state of private agricultural lands,
with subsequent reversion to natural vegeta¬
tive cover, should likewise result in reduced
loadings via run-off. External inputs via
park users have probably increased, but their
combined quantitative input was estimated
to be minimal. There are no data on loading
via direct precipitation.
The aesthetic appearance of Devils Lake is
a major factor contributing to the lake’s
value and popularity. Water transparency
and color are two critical components in¬
fluencing the appearance of the lake. Color
is influenced by dissolved and suspended
materials and light reflection off bottom
substrates. Transparency is dependent on the
amounts of inorganic and organic suspended
materials contributing to turbidity, on
phytoplankton biovolume (estimated by
chlorophyll a concentration) and on color.
Based on a random survey of 661 Wisconsin
lakes, those which appeared blue or clear
generally had low chlorophyll a concentra¬
tions (less than 10 ug/L) and good water
clarities (Lillie and Mason, 1983). Therefore,
the perceived changes in water appearance
observed by the public would seem to point
to a change in general trophic condition. The
available record of water clarity measure¬
ments seems to substantiate this perception,
since the reduced water clarities in the late
1970’s and early 80’ s coincide with the sub¬
jective observations. However, the most re¬
cent record suggests that these fluctuations
in water clarity may be only temporal in
nature and conditions may revert to a
pre-1976 state. With only limited data
available, it is not possible to determine
whether a water clarity trend has developed
or the changes noted in Devils Lake are
within normal variability. Even with a much
100
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
larger data base, water clarity trends in lakes
are difficult to document, as Stewart (1976)
demonstrated in his work on the Madison
lakes.
As with the reduction in water clarities,
the reductions in hypolimnetic oxygen con¬
centrations observed during 1976-81 appear
also to have been temporal. These anomalies
may have resulted from a combination of ex¬
ternal and internal factors. Climatic varia¬
bility influences annual and seasonal nutri¬
ent loading to the lake, the duration and tim¬
ing of spring and fall overturns (onset of
thermocline establishment), and rate and
timing of thermocline erosion. All of these
factors have been demonstrated to play an
important role in nutrient cycles and subse¬
quent water quality conditions (Lund, 1972;
Stauffer and Armstrong, 1984; Stauffer,
1974). In addition, variations in hydrologic
loading contributed to the fluctuations in
water level previously noted. These varia¬
tions in water level affect the area of the lake
bottom exposed to mixing and resuspension
of sediments and influence the concentra¬
tions of various water chemistry parameters
including hypolimnetic oxygen.
Reduced water levels and aberrations in
the late summer weather pattern (i.e. early
severe cold spells) could have influenced the
thermocline migration mechanism (Stauffer,
1974) and contributed to early onset of
phytoplankton blooms, declines in water
clarity, and increases in the hypolimnetic
oxygen deficit rate in some years. However,
an important distinction is that while similar
climatic conditions may have existed in
earlier years when water levels were the same
or even lower, similar reductions in water
quality were not observed. Undoubtedly
thermocline migration does occur in Devils
Lake and it theoretically could account for
much of the observed progressive increases
in epilimnetic phosphorus and chorophyll a
concentrations late in the summer. However,
it does not account for the differences noted
in water clarity in early summer. These dif¬
ferences may be due to the combined affects
of climate on thermocline establishment and
on diatom bloom dynamics, or on other un¬
identified interrelationships.
Changes in Devils Lake biota were docu¬
mented which could be the result of, or
could result in, changes in trophic state of
the lake. Aphanizomenon flos-aqua, a
filamentous bluegreen algae typically found
in enriched trophic situations, was first
observed in 1977. Myriophyllum spicatum, a
European macrophyte, appeared in the lake
sometime prior to 1974 and since has greatly
expanded. The fish community has experi¬
enced a shift from the “cool water” walleye-
smallmouth bass-perch population type to
dominance by largemouth bass and bluegills.
Also, changes in the minnow population
have taken place. These biological changes,
individually or in concert, could have con¬
tributed to the observed variations in water
quality.
The invasion of milfoil in particular may
have been a major factor. Milfoil grows in
dense stands with stems and shoots reaching
from the bottom to the surface at depths up
to ten feet. As such, this represents a signifi¬
cant change in the structure of the sub¬
merged plant community of Devils Lake.
Two roles are suspected of milfoil. First, the
structure of the milfoil beds created a new
habitat for fish that did not exist in Devils
Lake prior to the invasion. The beds may
serve as excellent refuges for small fish from
predation by the large bass population
prowling the exterior of the beds. The mil¬
foil, by virtue of its very intricate dissected
leaf structure, may harbor numerous inver¬
tebrates, thus serving as an alternative food
source for the smaller fish which might nor¬
mally depend upon the extensive zooplank¬
ton food resources available in the more ex¬
posed pelagic zone. Thus, milfoil beds may
serve to provide both food and refuge to
bluegills and pumpkinseeds, which were
formerly extensively harvested by predator
bass and northern pike. Changes in fish
community structure due to vegetational
structure have been well documented
1986]
Lillie and Mason — Changes in Devils Lake
101
elsewhere (Wegner et al.» 1983; Crowder and
Cooper, 1982; Savino and Stein, 1982; and
Jaeger, 1985). Therefore, the proliferation
of the panfish population could be related to
the invasion of the Eurasion water milfoil.
The second role milfoil may have served was
in the acceleration of the internal nutrient
cycling rate within the littoral zone. Studies
have documented that milfoil may transport
nutrients from underlying sediments to the
overlying water column through root up¬
take, stem growth and subsequent slough¬
ing, death and lysis of plant shoots, stems
and leaves (Smith, 1979; Barko and Smart,
1979; Landers, 1982). A gross estimate of
the calculated input of phosphorus to the
lake during the summer period based on
Prentki’s 1979 work on Lake Wingra shows
that this mechanism might account for as
much as 40 percent of the observed seasonal
increase of phosphorus from spring to fall.
Additional biological influences, such as
zooplankton-phytoplankton interactions
(Shapiro and Wright, 1984), or hypolimnetic
phosphorus retrieval by phytoplankton
(Salonem, Jones and Arvola, 1984) have not
been sufficiently explored in Devils Lake and
are also possible contributers to water qual¬
ity variability.
Because Devils Lake is a seepage lake with
no outlet, nearly all phosphorus entering the
lake is retained. Therefore, continued
phosphorus inputs to the lake would be ex¬
pected to result in a gradual buildup of
phosphorus within the lake or its sediments.
However, the 19 year record of annual
phosphorus concentrations shows no trend
toward such an increase, nor was any change
noted in the spring total phosphorus concen¬
trations. Some mechanisms apparently are
functioning to remove phosphorus from the
water column in Devils Lake; one of these
could be iron-phosphorus co-precipitation
during mixing.
Conclusions
The subjective view that water quality has
declined in Devils Lake appears related to
subtle changes in water color and clarity dur¬
ing the peak summer usage period. Because
these conditions have not always developed
in past years even when similar climatic and
hydrologic conditions existed (including
water levels), the decline in water quality
which may have occurred is masked by in¬
herent variability. Climatic variations, fluc¬
tuating water levels, an increase in internal
recycling, and changes in the lake’s flora and
fauna are the primary suspected causes for
the periodic declines in water clarity that
have been observed.
Studies have been initiated to further in¬
vestigate trophic interactions in Devils Lake.
Wise management of this valuable resource
will depend on gaining a better understand¬
ing of ecological relationships in the lake
system.
Acknowledgements
We acknowledge the work of the many
Devils Lake investigators who preceded us
and sincerely hope we have not omitted
anyone’s contribution in this historical data
analysis. Our thanks go to all the DNR per¬
sonnel who assisted us with recent data col¬
lection efforts, but especially to Devils Lake
State Park staff for their cooperation. Fund¬
ing assistance for data collection came from
the Bureau of Parks and Recreation, and the
DNR Lake Management program provided
funds for publication of this report.
Literature Cited
Baker, F. C. 1975. The littoral macrophyte
vegetation of southeastern Devils Lake. Trans.
Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 63:66-71.
_ Personal communication on November
29, 1985.
Bale, S., and C. Molter. 1979. Macrophyte
survey Devils Lake — 1974. Wis. Dept. Nat.
Resour. Southern District, Rept. 8 pp (mimeo).
_ and _ 1980. Macrophyte survey
Devils Lake— 1980. Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour.
Southern District, Rept. 8 pp. (mimeo).
_ and _ 1981. Macrophyte survery
Devils Lake — 1981. Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour.
Southern District, Rept. 13 pp (mimeo).
102
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Barko, J. W., and R. M. Smart. 1979. The role of
Myriophyllum spicatum in the mobilization of
sediment Phosphorus. In “Aquatic Plants,
Lake Management and Ecosystem Conse¬
quences of Lake Harvesting,” pp. 177-190.
(Proceedings of conference at Madison, Wis.,
Feb. 14-16, 1979). J. E. Breck, R. T. Prentki,
and O. L. Loucks, eds. Pub. by Center for
Biotic Systems, Inst. Environ. Studies, Univ.
Wis. -Madison.
Barnhardt, A. and D. Jameson. 1978. Personal
observations of Lota lota in Devils Lake.
Becker, G. C. 1983. Fishes of Wisconsin. Univ.
Wis. Press, Madison. 1052 pp.
Birge, E. A. and C. Juday. 1907-13, 15, 23. Un¬
published file data in Univ. Wis. Archives.
Brynildson, C. L., D. B. Ives and H. S. Drucken¬
miller. 1970. A two-year creel census of Devils
Lake, Sauk County. Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour.,
Bur. Fish Mgt. Rept. No. 35.
Claflin, _ . 1976. Unpublished data in Sefton,
1977.
Cline, C. L. 1945. Wis. Cons. Dept, memo filed
Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour. Tech. Lib.
Conway, C. J. 1972. Oxygen depletion in the
hypolimnion. M.S. thesis — water chemistry,
Univ. Wis. -Madison.
Crowder, L. B. and W. E. Cooper. 1982. Habitat
structural complexity and the interaction
between bluegills and their prey. Ecology.
63(6): 1 802-1 813.
Dillon, P. J. 1975. The application of the
phosphorus-loading concept to eutrophication
research. Sci. Ser. No. 46. Inland Waters
Directorate, Canada. Center for Inland
Waters, Burlington, Ontario. 14 pp.
Druckenmiller, H. S. 1972. Updated age-length
averages for southeastern Wisconsin game
fishes. Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour., Bur. Fish
Mgmt. Rept. No. 55. 5 pp.
Dunst, R. 1975. Unpublished file data, Water
Resources Research Section, Bureau of Re¬
search, Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour., Fitchburg,
Wisconsin.
Engel, S. 1984. Evaluating stationary blankets
and removable screens for macrophyte control
in lakes. J. Aquat. Plant Manage. 22:43-48.
_ and S. A. Nichols. 1984. Lake sediment
alteration for macrophyte control. J. Aquat.
Plant Manage. 22:38-41.
Greene, C. W. 1935. The distribution of Wis¬
consin fishes. Wis. Cons. Comm., Madison.
235 pp.
House, L. B. 1985. Stage fluctuations of Wiscon¬
sin lakes. Wis. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv., In¬
formation Circular No. 49.
Jacob, B. L. 1954. Test netting and seining survey
of Devils Lake, Sauk County. Wis. Cons.
Dept., Invest. Memo No. 225.
_ . 1955. Test netting and seining survey of
Devils Lake, Sauk County. Wis. Cons. Dept.,
Invest. Memo No. 226.
Jaeger, J. 1985. Effects of recent ecosystem
changes on Lake Wingra bluegills. Trans. Wis.
Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 73:160-166.
Keast, A. 1984. The introduced aquatic macro¬
phyte, Myriophyllum spicatum, as habitat
for fish and their invertebrate prey. Can. J.
Zool. 62:1289-1303.
Kirschbaum, D. 1975. Boom shocker survey of
Devils Lake, Sauk County. Wis. Dept. Nat.
Resour. memo.
Landers, D. H. 1982. Effects of naturally sen-
escing aquatic macrophytes on nutrient chem¬
istry and chlorophyll a of surrounding waters.
Limnol. Oceanogr. 27(3):428-439.
Lange, K. I. 1984. Botanists and naturalists at
Devils Lake State Park, Wisconsin. Trans.
Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 72:117-129.
Last, R. (N.D.) Unpublished phytoplankton data
from various collections, Wis. Dept. Nat.
Resour.
Leopold, A. 1949. Sand County Almanac. Ox¬
ford Univ. Press, N.Y. 226 pp.
Lillie, R. A. 1986. The spread of eurasian water-
milfoil Myriophyllum spicatum in Devils Lake,
Sauk County, Wisconsin. In Proceedings
North Amer. Lake Mgt. Soc. Mtg., Intern.
Symposium on Applied Lake and Watershed
Management, held Nov. 13-16, 1985, Lake
Geneva, Wis.
_ and J. W. Mason. 1983. Limnological
characteristics of Wisconsin Lakes. Wis. Dept.
Nat. Resour. Tech. Bull. No. 138. 116 pp.
Lund, J. W. G. 1972. Changes in the biomass of
blue-green and other algae in an English lake
from 1945-69. In First Intern. Symp. on Tax¬
onomy and Biology of Blue-Green Algae, pp.
305-327. (Held at Madras, Jan. 8-13, 1970).
Mackenthun, K. M. 1949. Age-length and length-
weight relationship of southern area lake
fisheries. Wis. Cons. Dept., Fish Invest. Rept.
#586. 8 pp.
Martin, L. 1916. The physical geography of Wis¬
consin. Wis. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv., Bull.
No. 36, Education Series No. 4. Madison, WI.
1986]
Lillie and Mason — Changes in Devils Lake
103
Martin, R. 1980. Unpublished file data. Water
Res. Mgt., Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour., Madison,
Wisconsin.
Mason, J. W. 1984. Devils Lake survey, October,
1984. Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour. memo.
Meier, H. and A. Ensign. 1967. Lake inventory—
Devils Lake, Sauk County. Wis. Dept. Nat.
Resour. memo.
Molter, C. and R. Schlesser. 1983. Devils Lake
macrophyte survey. Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour.—
Southern District. Rep. 8 pp. (mimeo).
Prentki, R. T. 1979. Depletion of phosphorus
from sediment colonized by Myriophyllum
spicatum L. In Aquatic Plants, Lake Manage¬
ment, and Ecosystem Consequences of Lake
Harvesting, pp. 161-176. (Proceedings of con¬
ference at Madison, Wis., February 14-16,
1979.) J. E. Breck, R. T. Prentki, and O. L.
Loucks, eds. Center for Biotic Systems, Inst.
Environ. Studies, Univ. Wis. -Madison.
Rickett, H. W. 1922. A quantitative study of the
larger aquatic plants of Lake Mendota. Trans.
Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 20:501-527.
_ 1924. A quantitative study of the larger
aquatic plants of Green Lake, Wisconsin.
Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 21:
381-414.
Salonen, K., R. I. Jones and L. Arvola. 1984.
Hypolimnetic phosphorus retrieval by diel ver¬
tical migrations of lake phytoplankton. Fresh¬
water Biology. 14:431-438.
Savino, J. F. and R. A. Stein. 1982. Predator-
prey interaction betgween largemouth bass and
bluegills as influenced by simulated submersed
vegetation. Trans. Amer. Fish Soc. 111:255-
266.
Schlesser, R. A. 1977-81. Unpublished file data.
Water Resour. Mgt., Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour.,
Dodgeville Area.
_ , T. Bainbridge and C. Molter. 1982.
Macrophyte survey Devils Lake— 1982. Wis.
Dept. Nat. Resour. Southern District, Rept.
15 pp (mimeo).
Sefton, D. F. 1977. Productivity and biomass of
vascular hydrophytes on the upper Mississippi.
In Wetlands-Ecology, Values, and Impacts,
pp. 53-61. (Proceedings of the Waubesa Con¬
ference on Wetlands, Madison, Wis., June 2-5,
1977). C. B. Dewitt and E. Soloway, eds. Inst.
Envir. Studies, Univ. Wis. -Madison.
Smith, C. 1979. Phosphorus and nitrogen content
and uptake by macrophytes. In Synthesis
Report on the Efficiency and Potential Conse¬
quences of Macrophyte Harvesting in Lake
Wingra. pp. 91-104. Working paper for Febru¬
ary 14-16, 1979, conference on the efficacy and
impact of intensive plant harvesting in lake
management. Center for Biotic Systems, Instit.
Environ. Studies, Univ. Wis. -Madison.
Smith, G. M. 1920. Phytoplankton of Wisconsin.
Vol. I. Wis. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv., Bull.
No. 57, Sci. Series No. 12.
Smith, T. 1972. Boom shocker survey — Devils
Lake, Sauk County. Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour,
memo.
Stauffer, R. E. 1974. Thermocline migration-
algal bloom relationships in stratified lakes.
Univ. Wis. -Madison, PhD thesis. 526 pp.
_ and D. E. Armstrong. 1984. Lake mixing
and its relationship to epilimnetic phosphorus
in Shagawa Lake, Minnesota. Can. J. Fish.
Aquat. Sci. 41:57-69.
Stewart, K. M. 1976. Oxygen deficits, clarity and
eutrophication in some Madison lakes. Int.
Rev. Hydrobiol. 61(5):563-579.
U.S. EPA. 1980. Modeling phosphorus loading
and lake response under uncertainty: a manual
and compilation of export coefficients. EPA
440/5-80-011. 214 pp.
Uttormark, P. D., and M. L. Hutchins. 1980. In¬
put/output models as decision aid for lake
restoration. Water Resour. Bull. 16(3):
494-500.
Vignon, B. W., and D. E. Armstrong. 1977. The
role of silica and the vernal diatom bloom in
controlling the growth of nuisance algal
populations in lakes. Tech. Completion
Report, Project No. OWRT A-061-WIS, Univ.
Wis. Water Resour. Center, Madison, Wis.
116pp.
Vollenweider, R. A. 1975. Input/output models
with special reference to the phosphorus
loading concept in limnology. Schweiz, z.
Hydrol. 37:53-84.
Werner, E. E., G. G. Mittelback, D. J. Hall and
J. F. Gilliam. 1983. Experimental tests of op¬
timal habitat use in fish: the role of relative
habitat profitability. Ecology 64(6): 1525-
1539.
_ , J. F. Gilliam, D. J. Hall and G. G.
Mittelbach. 1983. An experimental test of the
effects of predation risk on habitat use in fish.
Ecology 64(6): 1540-1548.
Wilson, L. R. 1935. Lake development and plant
succession in Vilas County, Wisconsin. Ecol.
Monogr. 5:207-247.
104
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
_ . 1941. The larger aquatic vegetation of
Trout Lake, Vilas County, Wisconsin. Trans.
Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 33:135-146.
Wisconsin Cons. Dept. 1945. Fish Mgt. Rept.
No. 86, Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour. Tech. Lib.
Wisconsin Cons. Bull. 1948. Lawyer appetites.
Vol. 13, No. 4, p. 31.
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources.
1981. Trends in Devils Lake Water Quality —
Subcommittee Report. Memo to R. H. Weber,
Chairman, Devils Lake Water Quality Com¬
mittee, dated June 16, 1981 . 7 pp.
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources.
Unpublished file data collected by Devils Lake
State Park staff, Baraboo, Wis.
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources.
Unpublished file data collected under the
Benchmark Lake Program, Water Resour.
Mgt., Madison, Wis.
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources.
Unpublished file data collected by Water
Resour. Res. Sect., Bureau of Res., Fitchburg,
Wis.
SUPPLEMENTAL DISTRIBUTION RECORDS FOR
WISCONSIN TERRESTRIAL GASTROPODS
Joan P. Jass
Invertebrate Zoology
Milwaukee Public Museum
The publication of distribution maps for
the terrestrial gastropod fauna of the
Eastern United States (Hubricht, 1985) is a
milestone in determining probable ranges
and focusing on where there may be actual
distribution gaps or simply a lack of col¬
lecting.
As an aid to those who may wish to
expand knowledge of the Wisconsin fauna,
the following list of supplemental county
records has been prepared from the mollusk
collection of the Milwaukee Public Museum.
The sequence of species follows Hubricht
(1985). New county records for a total of 53
species are given including 15 new state
records. Mr. Leslie Hubricht graciously con¬
sented to confirm these records by examin¬
ing the specimens, and all the following
records are accepted by Mr. Hubricht as
being accurate.
I am very grateful to Mr. Leslie Hubricht,
Meridian, Mississippi, for checking the iden¬
tifications; to Alan Solem, FMNH, Chicago,
for reviewing the manuscript; and my fellow
workers at the Milwaukee Public Museum
for all the assistance they have provided.
CARYCHIIDAE
Carychium exile exile H. C. Lea, 1842 Fond
du Lac, Lafayette, Milwaukee, Ozaukee.
Carychium exiguum (Say, 1822) Marquette,
Milwaukee, Ozaukee.
COCHLICOPIDAE
Cochlicopa lubrica (Muller, 1774) Mil¬
waukee, Waukesha.
Cochlicopa lubricella (Porro, 1838) Jeffer¬
son, Milwaukee, Sauk, Washington,
Waupaca, Winnebago; not recorded from
Wisconsin in Hubricht (1985).
Cochlicopa nitens (Gallenstein, 1848) Mil¬
waukee, Winnebago; not recorded from
Wisconsin in Hubricht (1985).
VALLONIIDAE
Vallonia pulchella (Muller, 1774) Milwau¬
kee, Washington, Waukesha, Winnebago.
Vallonia excentrica Sterki, 1893 Milwaukee,
Washington.
Vallonia costata (Muller, 1774) Milwaukee,
Ozaukee, Washington, Waukesha.
PUPILLIDAE
Gastrocopta armifera (Say, 1821) Milwau¬
kee.
Gastrocopta contracta (Say, 1822) Milwau¬
kee, Ozaukee, Waupaca.
Gastrocopta holzingeri (Sterki, 1889)
Ozaukee.
Gastrocopta pentodon (Say, 1821) Kenosha,
Milwaukee, Ozaukee, Waupaca.
Gastrocopta tappaniana (C. B. Adams,
1842) Milwaukee; not recorded from Wis¬
consin in Hubricht (1985).
Vertigo milium (Gould, 1840) Milwaukee,
Ozaukee.
Vertigo ovata Say, 1822 Milwaukee.
Vertigo ventricosa (Morse, 1865) Milwau¬
kee; not recorded from Wisconsin in
Hubricht (1985).
Vertigo tridentata Wolf, 1870 Milwaukee;
not recorded from Wisconsin in Hubricht
(1985).
Vertigo gouldi (A. Binney, 1843) Milwau-
105
106
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
kee, Washington; not recorded from Wis¬
consin in Hubricht (1985).
Columella simplex (Gould, 1841) Adams,
Milwaukee, Ozaukee.
STRORILOPSIDAE
Strobilops labyrinthica (Say, 1817) Adams,
Fond du Lac, Milwaukee, Ozaukee,
Sheboygan.
Strobilops af finis Pilsbry, 1893 Milwaukee.
SUCCINEIDAE
Oxyloma retusa (I. Lea, 1834) Door,
Kenosha, Milwaukee, Washington, “Lake
Winnebago.”
Succinea ovalis Say 1817 Door, Ozaukee,
Sauk, Vilas.
Catinella avara (Say, 1824) Milwaukee.
DISCIDAE
Anguispira alternata (Say, 1816) Dodge,
Kenosha, Milwaukee, Washington.
Discus cronkhitei (Newcomb, 1865) Milwau¬
kee.
Discus catskillensis (Pilsbry, 1898) Kenosha,
Manitowoc, Waukesha.
Discus patulus (Deshayes, 1830) Milwaukee.
HELICODISCIDAE
Helicodiscus shimeki Hubricht, 1962 Mil¬
waukee, Ozaukee.
Helicodiscus parallelus (Say, 1817) Colum¬
bia, Juneau, Kenosha, Milwaukee, Ozau¬
kee, Walworth.
Helicodiscus singleyanus (Pilsbry, 1890)
Columbia; not recorded from Wisconsin
in Hubricht (1985).
Helicodiscus inermis H. B. Baker, 1929
Ozaukee.
PUNCTIDAE
Punctum minutissimum (I. Lea, 1841)
Adams, Iowa, Juneau, Kenosha, Lafay¬
ette, Milwaukee, Ozaukee, Waupaca; not
recorded from Wisconsin in Hubricht
(1985).
LXMACIDAE
Deroceras laeve (Muller, 1774) Ozaukee; not
recorded from Wisconsin in Hubricht
(1985).
ZONITIDAE
Nesovitrea electrina (Gould, 1841) Mil¬
waukee.
Nesovitrea binneyana (Morse, 1864) Adams,
Kenosha, Vernon.
Glyphyalinia indentata (Authors) Kenosha,
Milwaukee, Ozaukee, Walworth; not
recorded from Wisconsin in Hubricht
(1985).
Hawaiia minuscula (A. Binney, 1840) Mil¬
waukee, Ozaukee.
Zonitoides nitidus (Muller, 1774) Racine,
Waukesha.
Zonitoides arboreus (Say, 1816) Dane,
Juneau, Kenosha, Marquette, Walworth,
Waushara.
Striatura milium (Morse, 1859) Walworth.
VITRINIDAE
Vitrina limpida Gould, 1850 Milwaukee,
Waukesha; not recorded from Wisconsin
in Hubricht (1985).
HELICARIONIDAE
Euconulus fulvus (Muller, 1774) Marquette,
Ozaukee, Waupaca.
Guppya sterkii (Dali, 1888) Ozaukee; not
recorded from Wisconsin in Hubricht
(1985).
POLYGYRIDAE
Stenotrema leai leai (A. Binney, 1842)
Milwaukee.
1986]
Jass — Wisconsin Terrestrial Gastropods
107
Stenotrema fraternum fraternum (Say, 1 824)
Burnett, Milwaukee, Waukesha.
Mesodon pennsylvanicus (Green, 1827) Mil¬
waukee, Oconto; not recorded from Wis¬
consin in Hubricht (1985).
Mesodon thyroidus (Say, 1816) Milwaukee,
Ozaukee, Waukesha.
Triodopsis vulgata Pilsbry, 1940 Waukesha;
not recorded from Wisconsin in Hubricht
(1985).
Triodopsis tridentata (Say, 1816) Waukesha;
not recorded from Wisconsin in Hubricht
(1985).
Triodopsis albolabris (Say, 1816) Burnett,
Milwaukee, Ozaukee, Vilas, Waukesha.
Triodopsis multilineata (Say, 1821) Calu¬
met.
Allogona profunda (Say, 1821) Calumet,
Kenosha, Waukesha.
Reference Cited
Hubricht, L. 1985. The distributions of the native
land mollusks of the eastern United States.
Fieldiana Zoology New Series 24:iii-vii, 1-191 .
THE UNUSUAL AND THE EERIE IN AARON BOHROD’S
EARLY PAINTINGS: 1933-1939
Carole Singer
Tarzana, California
American Art of the 20th Century exhibits
a wide diversity of movements and individ¬
ual styles, recalled S. R. Koehler’s remarks
in 1880. According to Koehler, “In periods
of transition, in which some men adhere to
old faiths, and others tear themselves away
from them . . . individualism asserts itself
>> i
The widely divergent styles of the Depres¬
sion Era in the United States, in which
various forms of realism, impressionism, ex¬
pressionism, abstract, mystical and visionary
art flourished are still with us today, as John
I. H. Baur predicted in 1951 in his Revolu¬
tion and Traditions in Modern American
Art. Indeed as Baur cites the view of Rene
d’ Harnoncourt, diversity and change have
become permanent characteristics of our art,
and it would be the “brave critic who would
dare predict what the future balance between
[the various] . . . modes of painting will
be.”2
Given the range of “isms” available to ar¬
tists in the Depression Era, it is often hard to
place individuals in one “school” or
another. This is particularly true of the work
of those young artists who were just begin¬
ning their artistic careers during this volatile
period.
One such artist is Aaron Bohrod, who,
through his lifetime, has been variously la¬
beled as a “painter of the American Scene,”
a “Regionalist,” a “Social Realist,” a
“quasi-expressionist, half-impressionist,” a
“surrealist realist,” and, finally, a “magic
realist.”3
All of the “isms” undoubtedly could have
been applied to Bohrod’s art at one time or
another in the early years of his artistic
career. Like many artists at that time, he ex¬
perimented with the range of styles available
in the Depression Era. The truth is, as
Margaret Fish stated, “[Bohrod] has never
been anything but a realist,”4 meaning that
he has always been an exponent of represen¬
tational art of one variety or another.
There is, however, something “unusual
and eerie” in Bohrod’s early work. It is this
“unusual and eerie” element which mani¬
fests itself completely in the mature work
from 1953 to the present, but that appeared
only in budding form in his early works.
My interest in Bohrod’s work created a
curiosity to investigate the roots of his cur¬
rent style of still lifes of finely-detailed,
tightly composed, ironic and whimsical ar¬
rangements of mundane and art historical
objects painted in a trompe l’oeil technique.5
This interest in the “unusual” in mundane
reality seemed to me to be at the very core of
Bohrod’s current work.
The transition to this style was, in itself,
unusual, in that the majority of artists work¬
ing around Bohrod in the Depression Era
moved from the representational to the more
abstract or from the more tightly controlled
to the more spontaneous. Bohrod’s develop¬
ment was just the opposite. His early repre¬
sentational style is marked by a technique of
painting that shows a degree of spontaneity
and simplicity, which, over the years, has
become progressively more structured
through a strict control of painting tech¬
nique, subject matter and form.6
Several critics and art historians have
noted this development, referring to “glim¬
merings,” and “certain intimations” and a
“developing flair for detailed and precise
rendering of subject matter,” as well as for
an “instinct for finding an unusual angle
108
1986]
Singer — Bohrod’s Early Painting
109
[from the] . . . worn and common place . .
all visible in his early paintings of the
1930’s.7
None of the critics or art historians,
however, have looked closely at his early
works for the specific element already pres¬
ent which presaged the development of his
later work. In this paper I will show that
“the unusual and the eerie,” was, in fact,
present in his early work.
I will examine the unusual and eerie aspect
of Bohrod’s work which, I believe, stems
from his continual use and subtle underlying
emphasis upon the impermanence of the
material world. Bohrod’s view is delineated
by his repeated juxtapositions of objects of
mundane reality generally recognized as
symbolic of decay and age with those that
are symbolic of youth, or material strength
and stability.
In this context, unusual and eerie are
terms which I shall use to describe and define
the unsettling effect this juxtaposition has
upon the viewer looking at the material
world Bohrod presents in the act of “de-
materializing.”
Bohrod achieves this effect through the
use of several techniques, such as positioning
material objects at odd angles, painting in
strange colors, exploiting light effects to
dramatize and distort reality, painting bleak
Midwest winter, night and storm scenes, pre¬
senting figures that have enigmatic facial ex¬
pressions or are turned away or hidden from
the viewer, and finally, by painting sup¬
posedly solid objects and architecture as dis¬
jointed pieces of representational visual in¬
formation.
It is clear that, in order to make a
definitive statement of this view, it would be
necessary to see and study Bohrod’s early
works in good color reproductions. How¬
ever, these materials are not presently
available. Further investigation and research
is needed to locate such materials. There¬
fore, this paper is a “work in progress,”
rather than a final statement of the view here
proposed.
At this point, it will be useful to provide
some personal biographical background on
Bohrod’s early life and artistic training in
order to understand the roots of Bohrod’s
view and techniques.8
Aaron Bohrod was born in Chicago in
1907. He started to draw at the age of three
or four, copying the comics from daily news¬
papers. By 12, he was attending art classes in
the art school located on the bottom floor of
the Art Institute of Chicago. In high school
he became the staff artist for his high school
magazine and in 1917-1918 he designed
several posters for the World War I Liberty
Bond and War Saving Stamps campaigns.
Bohrod describes his childhood family
financial condition as “poor but not
miserably poor.” His Russian-born father
bought a small grocery store in the pre¬
dominantly Jewish neighborhood of the old
“West Side” in Chicago to provide financial
stability for his family. Aaron, aside from
being a stock and delivery boy, took delight
in presenting, each week, a different im¬
aginative arrangement of grocery wares in
the store’s display window. He took pleasure
in “watching the reaction of casual pass-
ersby” to his “first still-life arrangements”
of oatmeal boxes and soup cans stacked in
strange order.
This interest in the arrangement of mun¬
dane material objects and a strong need for
financial stability in a time of depression, I
believe, underlies Bohrod’s long and consis¬
tent history as a representational artist trying
to please a large, public audience as well as
to satisfy his desire to communicate with
them as an artist. Later acquired skills, and
jobs in the commercial world, continued
Bohrod’s link with the representational
world.
As a teenager, Bohrod attended Crane
Technical High School and Junior College
where he learned mechanical drawing. This
skill he later used to support himself while he
continued his art studies. In 1926, while at
the Chicago Art Institute, Bohrod “... ac¬
quired everything in aesthetic education but
110
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
real painting experience/’ In the summer of
1927, Bohrod took a job as a commercial ar¬
tist for a printing house, designing book
jackets and maps, quitting this job to return
to his studies at the Chicago Art Institute on
a scholarship.
This see-saw between commercial art jobs
and fine art studies and productions con¬
tinued throughout Bohrod’s lifetime; in¬
deed, it underscores Bohrod’s concern with
communicating with the public-at-large.
Bohrod had other experiences in the world
of fine art and commercial art which also led
to his development of a visual “editorial”
style, one in which he could make a social
comment using art as his vehicle of com¬
munication.
From 1929 to 1932, with the nation in
financial turmoil, Bohrod took his savings
and went to New York where he spent “two
. . . fragmented years” at the Art Students’
League. Forced to return to Chicago to earn
more funds to support his studies at the
League, Bohrod took a job as Art Director
of a large department store — more arranging
and display of wares. He returned to the
League in New York in 1931.
It was at the Art Students’ League that
Bohrod worked with several well-known ar¬
tists of the time, including Boardman Robin¬
son, John Sloan, Kenneth Hayes Miller,
Charles Locke, Richard Lahey and Eugene
Fitsch, all espousing a representational style
of art.
By all accounts, it was Sloan, however,
who made the deepest and most lasting im¬
pression on Bohrod and his work. It was
with Sloan that Bohrod began to develop his
philosophy of art, his admiration for the
“ash can” style, and his interest in portray¬
ing “an ‘American’ art dealing realistically
with life,” particularly the shabbier side of
city life. Bohrod also picked up some of
Sloan’s reportorial point of view and his in¬
sistence on the importance of drawing.
According to Bohrod, “To [Sloan], paint¬
ing was only drawing with oil color.” Sloan
had admonished his students to “. . . draw
everything you see or imagine or dream of
and draw in every conceivable way and with
every conceivable tool.” And so, Bohrod
recalls, Sloan’s students drew “. . . at night,
in our rooms, we turned out the lights and
drew strange things without being able to see
our paper. We drew from memory. We drew
with the left hand. We drew with both hands
at once. We pretended we were Renoir and
drew like him. Like Picasso. Like Matisse
Bohrod admired Sloan’s “aesthetic
energy, his . . . build-up of form, his ability
to capture the flavor of everyday life.” The
closest Bohrod “. . . ever got to artists of the
Stieglitz group was going up in the elevator
of that building once with Georgia O’Keefe.
They were all much older . . . and had aloof
and elitist approaches to painting with which
I wasn’t comfortable.” But he was aware of
their work, being an inveterate gallery-goer.
Bohrod, under Sloan’s influence and
given his personal background and make-up
and his several successful commercial art
endeavors, felt “. . . more at home with the
art that seemed to have something to say to
the public.”
Bohrod contends that he was attempting
“. . . a sympathetic portrayal of com¬
monplace life . . . taking [his] place beside
the ordinary American . . . discussing his
environment with a silent plea for under¬
standing.”
During his years at the Art Students’
League, Bohrod was a prodigious learner.
As Bohrod recalls, he got off to a bad start
with Sloan, overwhelming him “with the
task of criticism by volume,” and a display
of his commercial “slick wrist” in his
classroom studies. However, Sloan eventual¬
ly became supportive of Bohrod’s work.
In 1930, while in Chicago working to raise
funds to return to the League in New York,
Bohrod entered the first of the Depression-
inspired outdoor exhibitions held in Grant
Park, outside the Chicago Art Institute. This
was the beginning of a long career of exhibit¬
ing there. At this time, he began several life-
1986]
Singer— Bohrod’s Early Painting
111
long and influential friendships with fellow
artists, Ivan and Malvin Albright, Francis
Chapin, Edgar Britton, Constatine Pougialis
and William Schwartz.
In 1933, back from New York permanent¬
ly, Bohrod and his wife took up residence in
a kind of artist’s colony on North Avenue in
Chicago where each artist-family occupied a
single studio space, meeting often in sketch
groups.
It was also in 1933 that Bohrod won the
first of many awards he would receive from
the Chicago Art Institute and other
museums around the country. Shortly after¬
wards, several curators visited Bohrod’s
studio, among them Robert Harshe, Direc¬
tor of the Chicago Art Institute, and Mrs.
Juliana Force, Director of the Whitney
Museum in New York. Between them, they
bought several of Bohrod’s works for their
museums and selected others for exhibition.
Bohrod’s career as an artist was officially
“launched.”
Between 1936 and 1939, Bohrod won three
commissions from the Section of Fine Arts,
Public Buildings Administration of the
Federal Works Agency (FWAP) to paint
murals in the Illinois post offices at Vandalia
(1936), Galesburg (1938), and Clinton
(1939). He also received some financial sup¬
port through his participation in WPA art
projects from 1936 to 1938.
Bohrod won the first of two Guggenheim
Fellowships in 1936 receiving recommenda¬
tions for the grant from fellow artists at the
Rehn Gallery in New York who had ex¬
pressed admiration for his work, Edward
Hopper, Reginald Marsh, Eugene Speicher
and Alexander Brook. Using the Guggen¬
heim funds, Bohrod chose to tour the United
States from 1936 to 1938 rather than go to
Europe, as stated in his application.
Aside from the financial rewards, the
recognition, and the public acceptance it
brought, Bohrod says he valued his entry
into the Associated American Artists Gallery
in 1939 because it provided him with the
“opportunity to meet and work with artists
[he] had long admired,” including Raphael
Soyer, George Grosz, Thomas Hart Benton,
John Steuart Curry, Grant Wood and Joe
Jones.
Bohrod, as stated earlier, “was interested
in viewing [all the] manifestations [in the art
of the ’30’s].” He even deliberately ex¬
perimented with Cubism and Fauvism in
particular, but his “. . . experimentation was
quickly exhausted in the discovery for [him]
that these were mannerisms unsuited to an
artist who would lean on the visual world
» >9
In Bohrod’s opinion, although he admired
Thomas Hart Benton “for the originality of
his vision and for his application of a kind of
baroque old-master layering on contem¬
porary life,” he also found him “grandelo-
quent” and “a little frightening,” and chose
not to follow his “powerful (but rather ob¬
vious) rhythms.”10
Bohrod states that John Sloan’s approach
to ordinary settings instigated his early desire
to “[look] at Chicago in the way Sloan
looked at New York and Philadelphia.”11
Sloan’s view then, was the springboard for
Bohrod’s work of the ’30’s. However, as
Bohrod has said himself, “In the early years,
diverse periods of painting come thick and
fast for the artist ... he is never certain for
long that he is on the right road, that what he
is doing is what he wants to be doing for all
time. The struggle for individual style is the
great bugaboo of the art student and the
young professional. Only when he ceases the
self-conscious search for style and loses
himself in subject matter that grips him does
his painting style emerge.” Bohrod’s “con¬
centrated and thoughtful arrangement of
visual material [and] precise decision of
response required for them provided the
foundation on which his present work in still
life rests . . .”12
Bohrod’s experimentation with a diversity
of styles while he was a student at the Art
Students’ League is exemplified in several of
his works from 1930 to 1933. In Greenwich
Village Gas Station , an opaque tempera,
112
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
1930, Bohrod has attempted to reduce a New
York city scape to Cubist flat planes,
somewhat reminiscent of Stuart Davis' early
handling of similar subject matter in his
abstractions of that time. In Street Corner ,
an oil painting done at the same time as the
Greenwich Village scene, Bohrod worked in
the manner of the “ash can" school and his
mentor, John Sloan, delineating a specific
city scene, employing a tighter, but still
somewhat spontaneous brush stroke, with
the emphasis on a closer, pictorial reality
favored by Bohrod’ s teachers at the League.
Clifton Park “El” Platform, a gouache,
also from 1930, lies somewhere between the
Greenwich Village scene and Street Corner
in terms of the brush work employed.
Bohrod appears to be experimenting here
with Fauvist technique employed to deline¬
ate the “ash can" subject matter of a
specific city scene. The 1933 Abstraction,
represents Bohrod’s only painting done in a
totally non-representational manner and en¬
compasses several modes of abstraction
from Synchromy to a Kandinsky-like
abstract expressionism to Cubism and
Futurism. Head, in Tempera and ink, from
1932, resembles the figurative handling and
painting techniques employed by the Expres¬
sionists, such as Emil Nolde and Georges
Rouault; whereas, North Avenue Beach, a
gouache from 1933 is a combination of im¬
pressionist and expressionist techniques.
Turning from these early, student ex¬
periments in a variety of styles, we can now
consider four works by Bohrod from the
year 1939, when, at the age of 32, he was a
well-established young artist.13
The four works under consideration, the
Clinton, Illinois Post Office Mural, Clinton
in Winter, Under the El (mixed media), La
Salle Street at Night (oil on gesso panel), and
Maxwell Street, Chicago (oil on gesso
panel), represent works which we will exam¬
ine to discover “the unusual and the eerie"
element which was the forerunner of Boh¬
rod’s paradoxically familiar and perplex¬
ingly strange and unusual still-life pictorial
situations.14
Clinton in Winter is a mural painting over
the Postmaster’s door in Clinton, Illinois.
The subject, as described in the FWAP
bulletin, is “a readily recognizable scene in
the town of Clinton. We see a section of the
County Courthouse, the statue of Lincoln,
and some of the business buildings around
the town square. The figures in the fore¬
ground represent types of the town, such as
the town merchant, and the farmer from the
neighboring country. " 1 5
The style and technique exemplified in this
mural appear typical of those selected
throughout the program, one “in which the
artist’s opinion is subordinated to that of the
patron, and the goal is the production of
high-quality art objects . . . patterned on the
traditional system of private patronage,"
which, in this case represented the tastes of
George Biddle and Edward Bruce and their
preference for works in the style of (among
others) Thomas Hart Benton, Reginald
Marsh, Boardman Robinson, Maurice Stern
■—and themselves.16
Looking closely at the mural, Clinton in
Winter, we can discover several elements
that appear unusual for a FWAP mural.
True, this is a scene of the town square and
some local types as described in the FWAP
bulletin, however, if we examine the mural
in detail, we can note some unusual ele¬
ments.
Starting with the less obvious, let us look
at the background. In itself, it gives us a
“stage-set" feeling, as if it is a painted
backdrop for the large, “real" figures in the
central foreground of “the stage" painting.
The scene is winter, the trees are denuded
and twisted, dead limbs stretch up behind
the central figures and are silhouetted
against a darkening sky that suggests an ap¬
proaching storm coming in from the left of
the mural. One street light stands in front of
the group of trees, and another on the other
side of the central square— far back and on
1986]
Singer — Bohrod’s Early Painting
113
the left of the lower mid-plane of the
picture — not much light to illuminate this
large area in the approaching storm.
The horizon point of the mural is quite
low — suggestive of the flat, Midwest land¬
scape. The business buildings and shops,
which stretch across this horizon point from
the left to just beyond the right center, are
squat, dull and drab. We glimpse a church
faintly through a break between the business
district buildings to the left and center and
the ponderously large, old County Court¬
house which looms up across almost the en¬
tire right one fourth of the mural. One
wonders if a visual editorial comment is be¬
ing made here that between the dominance
of a cold and aloof “state” (as represented
by the Old Courthouse) and the importance
of “Business” (as represented by the row of
shops and office buildings) the supposedly
comforting institution of the “Church” is
somehow forced into a hazy background.
The statue of Lincoln is seen in profile, its
back to the Courthouse, and, although cen¬
trally placed in the mural, the figure of Lin¬
coln is just a statue and does not “see” the
plight on the faces of the group of people in
the central foreground, two of whom look
directly at us.
In looking at a detail of this group we see,
on the left, a woman with her hand held to
her head— perhaps against the cold and
wind, or as symbolic of anguish. Although
wearing a nice warm fur-collared coat, her
eyes are closed and the expression on her
face is hard to fathom. The facial expres¬
sion, combined with the hand gesture of her
right hand and the obvious tugging motion
of her left arm to pull her child to her, all
add to an enigmatic impression of the
mother-child relationship, an expression of
grief, or anxiety, or some type of tension
between the two and us, the viewers.
To the right of these two figures, we see
the face of a very small young boy. One can
only describe the expression here as wan and
sad, at the least. The four remaining figures
on the right side of the group are adults. Of
these, the left side figure appears to be a
postman, judging from his official cap — and
the location of the mural in the Main Post
Office of Clinton. This figure does not look
at us — or anybody — just distractedly to the
left side of the mural. The woman on the
right, with a scarf on her head, and wearing
a “fur” collared coat similar to the lady’s on
the left, is partially hidden from our view, in
fact, we do not see her face at all. That
leaves the two central male figures. The
“businessman” (the glasses and clothing are
emblematic of his status) wears a warm over¬
coat, warm gloves, ear muffs and a stylish
hat. He stands behind the “farmer,” his eyes
downcast, not looking at us, or at the
“farmer”; in fact, only the small child and
the wizened, worn old “farmer” look direct¬
ly at us.
There is also a visual editorial comment
which Bohrod appears to be making between
the “businessman”/” farmer” relationship
dependent upon the positioning of the fig¬
ures, the downcast eyes of the “business¬
man,” the gesture of his right, gloved
hand — which is either being raised to further
avert his view of the farmer, or, at least, to
defend himself in some way.
It is the facial expression and body posi¬
tion of the white-haired “farmer” that car¬
ries the major statement of Bohrod’s visual
editorial about the Depression and age, and
is a counterpoint to the facial expression and
position of the small boy, who also stares
straight at the viewer.
The farmer leans a little to the left — off-
balanced— his sagging jacket is open, expos¬
ing him to the freezing cold and revealing his
worn overalls and a shirt without a tie. On
his head he wears what may be either an old
army veteran’s cap or a railroad conductor’s
cap. He has something slung over his back
which he holds tightly with his left hand. His
face is haggard, tired and care-worn, the
skin on his neck sags with age, his white
mustache droops downward, and his eyes ex-
114
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
press an enigmatic emotion— perhaps deep
sadness, or, at least— melancholy.
Far from “heroizing” these figures, as
stated in a local newspaper at the time,17
Bohrod has painted a visual editorial com¬
ment of not only his view of the Depression,
but also of the impermanence and instability
of the “real” world and life itself. His
figures are, indeed, melancholic, not heroic.
As Park and Markowitz point out in their
Democratic Vistas , “The town and its in¬
habitants look drab and grim . . . elements
which are “. . . sometimes characteristic of
Social Realism, “in direct contrast with the
“cheeriness of much American Scene paint¬
ing. Bohrod’s Clinton in Winter mural re¬
flects “social Realist criticism . . . portraying
ordinary citizens as sad, strange, and even
ugly, standing listlessly in dreary places . . .
the victims of the Depression, or perhaps of
small town life.”18
What struck Park and Markowitz about
this work was also discussed by Linda
Nochlin who commented about the
“strangeness” of the work — as if there was
“. . . something ominous, sinister, willful
and . . . alienated — alienating — about
[it],”19 making the work representative not
only of the time — the Depression — but of
the response of Bohrod to it as an individual.
There are other elements which add to this
feeling of “strangeness” besides the melan¬
choly portrayal of the figures, and the
drabness of the town — elements that were
part of Bohrod’ s early work which gave
them the tone of unusual eeriness. In addi¬
tion to this treatment of figures and
buildings, Bohrod also tended to paint
winter, stormy, or night scenes with the
resultant mood associated with them. He
also often depicted denuded and gnarled
trees, large, gloomy Victorian buildings,
peeling paper, crumbling and decaying
buildings of wood and brick ... in fact, the
decomposition of the material world in his
paintings adds to the unusual, eerie and
melancholic quality.
In contrast are Bohrod’ s two earlier Post
Office Murals, one at Vandalia, from 1936,
Old State Capitol , which depicts another
town square, this time dominated by a cen¬
trally placed view of the old state capitol of
Illinois. The scene is in summer-time, and
the figures are quite small and insignificant
in the bucolic setting, except for one peculiar
detail. One of the figures on the lawn is
pointing to a window from which, sup¬
posedly, Abraham Lincoln leaped when, as a
member of the State Legislature, he wished
to avoid a quorum when an issue he opposed
was being voted upon.20
The other mural, in Galesburg, done in
1938, is even more typical of the “heroic”
style of portraying American pioneers — a
style and subject matter even more sought
after by the FWAP.
Some of the eerie and unusual qualities in
the Clinton mural are more readily visible in
works by other artists of the time whom
Bohrod admired, Reginald Marsh, Raphael
Soyer and Edward Hopper. In Raphael
Soyer’s In the City Park , 1934, the melan¬
cholic treatment of the figures is very similar
to that in Bohrod’s Clinton in Winter . The
physical setting is also similar— a park with a
statue that resembles Bohrod’s Clinton town
square setting. The suffering, Depression
Era figures are also in the forefront of the
painting, their expressive faces the focal
point of the painting, as are the figures in the
Bohrod work.
In Under the El, mixed media-gouache
and crayons, the ominous atmosphere pres¬
ent in the small town during the Depression
is depicted in this scene under the trestle of
the Chicago elevated train. Our progress into
the picture is immediately halted by an
orange fence-like material resembling
barbed wire. The abstract lines and patterns
of the elevated trestle at the top of the pic¬
ture are repeated in the shadows below,
where we see a slumped-over figure of a
man, his head hanging down, his arms
clutching his knees, resting against one of
the powerful girders of the “El.” Just
behind and above this figure and girder, we
1986]
Singer— Bohrod *s Early Painting
115
see the face of a young girl on a peeling
advertisement on a red brick wall. On the
telephone pole to the left of the girl’s face
hangs another smaller, torn poster. In the
middle ground, center portion of the picture
we see a few low-lying old buildings with
weeds growing around them. We do not
know if these are houses or warehouses.
Even though the horizon point is low, the
view of the sky is cut into narrow, vertical
bands by the vertical girders of the ‘‘El” and
the telephone pole. What we do see of the
sky is a storm, advancing from the left of the
picture to the right. The left half of the sky
in the picture is gray, the right half, blue, cut
in the middle by the curving sweep of the
“El” from the upper foreground to the mid¬
background. The color in the picture seems
incidental to the draughtsmanship, the em¬
phasis being on the lines of the “El” girders,
the buildings, the wire fence in the lower
foreground, and the lone figure sitting on
the ground beneath the “Eh”
There are two statements being made in
this picture, consistent with Bohrod’ s point
of view regarding the Depression, specifical¬
ly, and Life, in general. Unlike the Preci-
sionists, Bohrod’s depiction of the “El” is
not a positive symbol of the industrial power
of America (like various artists’ scenes of the
Brooklyn Bridge or Sheeler’s factories and
granaries). The “El,” the fence in front, the
buildings around the figure"-- almost lost
under the shadow of this structure, creates a
prison-like atmosphere. At the very least, the
figure appears small, depressed and insignif¬
icant compared to the city structures that
loom around him. This is underscored by the
incoming storm, since we can see that the
“El” trestle is full of holes and will afford
little protection for the man.
The second statement Bohrod makes is
more subtle here, but directly present in his
work from the ’50’s onward— the contrast of
“age and decay” —the man under the “El”
and “youth” — the artificial face on the
advertisement, repeated by the contrast of
the decay of the buildings, the poster and ad
and the seeming stability and strength of the
“El.”
This interest in the contrast of the
“seeming stability” of city and industrial
structure (Society) and the decay through
age and wear (Time) is visible in earlier and
later works of Bohrod as well as in works of
his contemporaries. It is at this point that we
can begin to see in Bohrod’s art the budding
emergence of interest in “surreal” or “fan¬
tastic” effects based on everyday existence
and used, as in the early works of Guglielmi
and Edward Hopper, among others, as a
social or personal commentary heightened
by the use of these strange “surreal”
touches.
This “fantastic” or “strange” view can be
seen again in Bohrod’s 1939 gouache, Ogden
Avenue Viaduct , for which Under the El
may have been a preliminary work. The
whirling clouds, the curve of the viaduct and
the curving stairway create an eerie “eye of
the hurricane” effect. While the curving
stairway does go to the top of the viaduct, it
has the odd effect of going nowhere. Below
the viaduct, a lone figure sits huddled
against one of the supports, just as in Under
the El, and on the right side of the work we
see several shabby apartment buildings and
houses. Here also, the viaduct is not seen as
a heroic product of industrialization, and the
figures in the picture are isolated from one
another.
In an earlier city scene, Clark Street ,
Chicago , 1934, we see this emergent contrast
of stability and decay. Looking at the seem¬
ingly solid brick buildings, one can see the
wear and tear on wooden window sashes,
awnings, foundation bricks and signs—
shown here in careful detail. Even more evi¬
dent, the entire street in front of these “solid
establishments” is being torn up to get at the
“rotten foundations” or “faulty underpin¬
nings.” The artist has even placed an
“observer” of this event in a centrally
located window above the workers. We meet
this meticulous handling of material details
and this concern with the transient and im-
116
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Fig. 1 Waiting for the 3:30. Oil on gesso panel.
1986]
Singer— Bohrod *s Early Painting
117
Fig. 3 Maxwell Street market. Oil, 1939.
Fig. 4 Reflections on a shop Window. Oil on gesso panel, 36 x 28 Vi ", ca. 1941 .
118
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
permanent nature of life again and again in
Bohrod’s mature works.
Charles Burchfield’s Black Iron water-
color painting appeared in the 1940 Interna¬
tional Exhibition of Watercolors in the
Chicago Art Institute about the same time as
Bohrod’s Under the El was done. A Peter
Blume study for Eternal City appeared in
that same show, in which Bohrod was also
exhibiting. Numerous works by Burchfield,
several by Blume, and several by George
Biddle, including Under the Elevated had
appeared in the annual International Water-
color shows at the Chicago Art Institute
from the beginning of Bohrod’s exhibition in
that show since 1931. 21
In Burchfield’s Black Iron, 1935, we see a
view of a ponderous metal structure that has
been viewed as Burchfield’s “grim indict¬
ment of industrial waste, the power of a
technological society to create an inhuman
desert.”22 At the very least, it is not a view of
industrialization as heroic, in this, both
Burchfield and Bohrod concurred.
Bohrod’s Waiting for the 3:30, (in the
Truman Library) an oil on gesso panel
painted around the same time as the Under
the El, combines several of the elements
discussed previously that create an unusual
and eerie atmosphere: a winter scene, decay¬
ing old buildings along railroad tracks,
denuded, gnarled winter trees, and here we
see industrial smoke blowing across the
scene, adding another element to the social
commentary. In this painting, the contrast
of the decay and impermanence of “the
wrong side of the tracks” is with the stylishly
dressed young woman who looks at us as she
clutches her bag and stands alone and un¬
protected in the cold.
By the end of the ’30’s, Bohrod’s work
had certain elements in it that could be called
“unusual and eerie.” These elements he used
to convey a social comment about life in the
Depression and Life in general, with par¬
ticular regard for showing the contrast be¬
tween age, decay and transiency with youth
and the seeming solidity of the “real” world.
This eerie contrast was heightened in a
series of paintings begun in the late ’30’s, of
which La Salle at Night is an example. The
street scene here is again old and run down,
shabby. The neon light from the sign “Eat”
casts a weird glow over the entire painting,
picking out figures, architectural details,
reflections on the damp, cobbled street. This
eerie neon glow is repeated by the moon
glow in the sky behind the central buildings.
One is reminded of Ryder, except here we see
a scene of a mundane street on the near
northside in Chicago. The buildings are
“tumble-down” and lean at odd angles to
one another and the street, which itself runs
at an angle across the picture plane; their
windows are also somewhat askew, particu¬
larly in the house on the right behind the par¬
tial, oddly disengaged picket fence. In fact,
everything, including the car in front of the
building, seems “slightly askew.” One also
wonders about the character of the young
lady walking towards us, arms akimbo, her
dress clinging to her body, a faint smile on
her face. Edward Alden Jewell described
Bohrod’s brushwork in these “Neon Light”
street scenes as “. . .at once vivid and subtle
. . . luscious, alive with texture . . .”23 To
Bohrod, “These neon nocturnes, with streets
and people bathed in pink and green glow
[were filled] with the strange light sometimes
reflected on wet pavement” were fascinating
for several years.24
This interest in “strange” light effects and
the “weird” quality they produced can also
be seen in many of Edward Hopper’s night
scenes which may have been the inspiration
for the enigmatic mood in Bohrod’s paint¬
ings. Bohrod’s Neon Nocturne from around
1940 and Oakdale Avenue at Night, also
around 1940 reiterate this strange lumines¬
cence of neon and moonlight, eerie reflec¬
tions in shop windows, strange, often alone,
female figures; shabby or old, ramshackle
stores or Victorian homes; cloudy, mysteri¬
ous skies; twisted, dead trees, and shop
signs — neon and otherwise. Some paintings,
like La Salle Street are close to Hopper’s
1986]
Singer— Bohrod ’s Early Painting
119
eerie night cityscapes, others, like Oakdale
Avenue , recall paintings by Charles Burch¬
field, like Promenade , “infused . . . with
melancholy fantasy.’ 525
The odd, eerie “off-color” neon light col¬
oration and enigmatically smiling women
staring at the viewer are also suggestive of
Toulouse Lautrec’s and later expressionist
paintings of the bistros and environs of
various red light districts.
This eerie element and interest in the
transiency of material reality continues to
develop in Bohrod’ s work of the late ’30’s
and after World War II, but turns from city
and landscape scenes back to the origins—
Bohrod’s still-life arrangements — the shop
window in his father’s grocery store.
During the ’30’s, Bohrod painted numer¬
ous shop scenes, such as Maxwell Street,
Chicago, without realizing the symbolic
quality of the objects he painted. He only
recalls being fascinated by the “jumbled
bric-a-brac” and “vaguely [suggestive] . . .
junky objects,” and the interesting light ef¬
fects and reflections in the glass window
panes of antique shops.26
Maxwell Street, Chicago, an oil painting
on gesso panel, is a close-up view of the
pushcarts and small shops of this well-
known wholesale market street on the old
West side of Chicago. We are standing in the
street looking at one section of shops and
pushcarts. On the street we see the refuse
and crates of produce of two grocery push¬
carts in the middle and left side of the paint¬
ing. The figure of the grocer has his back
towards us, but it is a self-portrait of
Bohrod, the grocer’s son, nevertheless, in
one of the first of many whimsical inclusions
of himself that appear regularly in his later
still-life arrangements.27 To the left of the
produce scale, in the second grocery cart are
arrangements of sacks of flour, brooms and
potatoes. The contents and structures of
both carts are fairly detailed, as is the
rendering of the dry goods shop directly
behind the center cart, with its racks of
men’s suits and rows of sometimes matched,
and sometimes whimsically mismatched,
shoes. The “proprietor” of the dry goods
shop stands, hands in pocket, cigar in
mouth, eying an approaching young woman,
perhaps a prospective customer. To the
right, two heavy-set pushcart owners (they
have aprons on), stand by their pushcart,
which appears empty. The upper half of the
painting is an intricate composition of the
geometric shapes of the awnings and cur¬
tains above and on the sides of the shops, the
windows above the shops, and the brick
work and signs of the buildings in which the
shops are located. The upper section is
handled in a broader fashion than the
market areas below, although the overall
brush technique is not tightly detailed.
Bohrod’s color here seems incidental to the
drawing — a Sloan-type painting ... a lively
drawing with oil color.
What is of particular interest in this paint¬
ing is the detailed treatment of the material
objects: the produce, baskets, produce scale,
the awnings and side draperies and the
reflections in the large window above the
central pushcart.
We can see this interest in the texture and
appearance of objects in the earlier Land¬
scape Near Chicago, an oil painted in 1934
and purchased by the Whitney Museum. The
detail with which materials and objects are
rendered stands in a direct line to Bohrod’s
later trompe l’oeil technique, particularly in
the rendering of the junk objects in the lower
left corner of the painting, the two central
jalopies and the strange materials of the
somewhat odd, unreal “house,” which has
the appearance of being an old piece of junk,
itself.
Bohrod’s interest in shops and shop win¬
dows can be seen again in the 1939 gouache,
South State Street, Chicago, in which the
central subject is a watch and jewelry store
and everything, including signs, buildings
and people seem to be arranged around this
display of wares.
Coming closer to the fascination with ob¬
jects and their use as symbols is the ’39 oil
120
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
painting, Still Life with Ferdinand, painted
as a deliberate grouping of Bohrod’ s eldest
son’s favorite toys.28 They stand on an up-
tilted table, an angle at which they should all
slide off, and they are rendered with broad
brush strokes— no attempt is made to fool
the eye. however, the table they are “at¬
tached” to stands just in front of an empty
frame — an allusion to the unreality of the
reality of painting, and to the right, we see a
“real” Bohrod framed and ready for ship¬
ping resting against a wall, the paradoxically
familiar and perplexing pictorial situation
which Futtner mentioned in his Arts Maga¬
zine article of May, 1985.
In Reflections on a Shop Window, an oil
on gesso painted ca. 1941 and Antiques , oil
on gesso, painted ca. 1947, we have the fore¬
runners of the objects Bohrod was to use in
his later still-life arrangements — the odd,
jumbled bric-a-brac physical momentos of
life associated, in each of these paintings,
with the process of the physical aging of
people (the old ladies in both paintings), the
transiency and passing of time for the
physical world (the reflections of clouds,
buildings — the impermanent permanent
structures around us), all suggestive in
Bohrod’ s later work of the “elusive beauty”
he sought to report as an artist.29
In his own writings and in those of his
most recent critics, Bohrod acknowledges
the influences of not only John Sloan, and
the Regionalists, but also of the work of his
good friend, Ivan Albright, as well as
recognizing the influence on his later work
of the 19th Century American realists Peto
and Harnett, and, more recently, on an in¬
clusion of a surrealist or fantastic element in
his work.30
In our review of Bohrod’ s early work, we
have seen that his posing of pictorial situa¬
tions which are at once paradoxically
familiar and perplexingly strange has been
part of Bohrod’ s work since he began ar¬
ranging oatmeal boxes and soup cans in a
strange order to watch the reaction of casual
passersby.
Notes
1 S. R. Koehler, “The Future of Art,’’ American Art
Review, 1:32 (1880); as cited in John I. H. Baur,
Revolution and Tradition in Modern American Art,
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts,
1951, p. 146.
2 John I. H. Baur, Revolution and Tradition in
Modern American Art, op. cit., pp. 145-146.
3 Bohrod “labels” appear in various publications, the
following list is a sampling of these appearances:
a) “painter of the American Scene”: in John I. H.
Baur, op. cit., p. 19.; also see Barbara Rose,
American Art Since 1900, Praeger Publishers,
New York, 1975, p. 97.
b) “Regionalist”: Barbara Rose, op. cit., p. 97.,
also see “John Steuart Curry, Aaron Bohrod,
John Wilde: Leaders in Wisconsin Art
1936-1981, “Milwaukee Art Museum, 1982,
catalog, p. 25; also in “Bohrod TV gala,” by
James Auer, Journal Art Critic for The
Milwaukee Journal, November, 1982 (personal
clipping from Aaron Bohrod).
c) “Social Realist”: “Aaron Bohrod: Still Life in
the Old Boy,” television program for WHA-TV,
Madison, Wisconsin, November 16, 1982, writ¬
ten and directed by Steven Jandacek; also see
Marlene Park and Gerald E. Markowitz, Demo¬
cratic Vistas, Temple University Press, Phila¬
delphia, 1984, p. 162.
d) “quasi-expressionist, half-impressionist”:
Clement Greenberg, “A Review of a Ben Shahn
Exhibition,” The Nation, 1 November 1947, pp.
431-482.
e) “magic realist”: “Aaron Bohrod: Still Life in
the Old Boy,” WHA-TV program, op. cit.;
James Auer, “Bohrod TV gala,” op. cit.;
“Aaron Bohrod,” by Joseph L. Futtner, Arts
Magazine, May, 1985, p. 8; John Lloyd Taylor,
“Aaron Bohrod: A Retrospective Exhibition
1929-1966,” Catalog, Madison Art Center,
Madison, Wisconsin, 1966.
f) “surrealist realist”: Joseph L. Futtner, Arts
Magazine, op. cit., p. 8.
4 Margaret Fish Rahill, curator, Charles Allis Art
Museum, catalog, “Aaron Bohrod: Recent Paintings,
July 15-August 31, 1984,” funded by the Wisconsin
Humanities Committee, n.p. (Tha author is also the art
critic for The Milwaukee Sentinel).
5 John Lloyd Taylor, Director, Madison Art Center,
catalog, op. cit.; Margaret Fish Rahill, catalog, op. cit.;
Joseph L. Futtner, op. cit., p. 8.; see also the
illustrations in Aaron Bohrod, Aaron Bohrod: A
Decade of Still Life, The University of Wisconsin Press,
Madison, Milwaukee and London, 1966, pp. 59-298.
6 John Lloyd Taylor, catalog, op. cit.; Joseph L.
Futtner, op. cit., p. 8.
1986]
Singer— Bohrod’s Early Painting
121
7 Margaret Fish Rahill, op. cit.; John Lloyd Taylor,
op. cit.; Joseph L. Futtner, op. cit.; and Jeanette Lowe,
The Art News (personal clipping of Aaron Bohrod—
undated), n.p.
8 All of the biographical material and various quota¬
tions by and about Bohrod come from the following
sources:
a) Personal Correspondence and telephone conver¬
sations between Carole Singer and Aaron Boh¬
rod, Oct. -Nov., 1985.
b) “Aaron Bohrod’’ in Who’s News and Why , Vol.
16, No. 2, February 1955, The H. W. Wilson
Co.: New York.
c) “Aaron Bohrod Papers,’’ Archives of American
Art, Smithsonian Institution.
d) “Holger Cahill Papers,” Archives of American
Art, Smithsonian Institution.
e) Aaron Bohrod: A Retrospective Exhibition
1929-1966, catalog, Madison Art Center, Madi¬
son, Wisconsin, 1966.
f) Aaron Bohrod: Recent Paintings, catalog,
Charles Allis Art Museum, Milwaukee, Wiscon¬
sin, 1944.
g) Harry Salpeter, “Bohrod: Chicago’s Gift to
Art,” Esquire Magazine, March, 1940 (personal
clipping of Aaron Bohrod), pp. 62-63 and
101-102.
h) Aaron Bohrod, Aaron Bohrod: A Decade of Still
Life , The University of Wisconsin Press,
Madison, Milwaukee and London, 1966, pp.
1-25.
i) Patricia L. Raymer, “Aaron Bohrod,” The
Milwaukee Journal Insight Magazine, November
12, 1972, pp. 18-22.
9 Aaron Bohrod, in a letter to Carole Singer,
November, 1985.
10 Ibid.
11 Ibid.; also see Harry Salpeter, op. cit., John Lloyd
Taylor, op. cit., Margaret Fish Rahill, op. cit., and
Joseph L. Futtner, op. cit.
12 Aaron Bohrod, Aaron Bohrod: A Decade of Still
Life, op. cit., p. 13.
13 See autobiographical material — ftnote. 8.
14 Joseph L. Futtner, op. cit., p. 8.
13 FWAP Bulletin, Clinton Illinois Post Office, 1939.
16 As cited by Edith Tonelli, Massachusetts Federal
Art Project, Boston University Ph.D. Dissertation,
1981, pp. 24-26.
17 Personal clipping of local paper from Mrs. Howard
Lee Harrell, Clinton, Illinois.
18 Marlene Park and Gerald E. Markowitz, op. cit.,
p. 162.
19 Linda Nochlin, “Return to Order,” Art in America
69 (September, 1981), p. 76.
20 FWAP Bulletin, Vandalia, Illinois Post Office,
1936.
21 From Catalogs of shows at the Chicago Art In¬
stitute, 1931-1942.
22 Ian Bennett, The History of American Painting,
The Hamlyn Publishing Group Limited, London, 1973,
p. 188.
23 Edward Alden Jewell, New York Times review,
(personal clipping of Aaron Bohrod).
24 Aaron Bohrod, op. cit., p. 21.
23 Suzanne Muchnic, “Welliver,” a review in Book
Section, The Los Angeles Times, Nov. 17, 1985.
26 Aaron Bohrod, op. cit. p. 23.
27 See cover and illustrations of Aaron Bohrod, op.
cit., p. 102.
28 Harry Salpeter, op. cit., p. 102.
29 Aaron Bohrod, op. cit. pp. 23, & 53-55, and also in
Letter to Carole Singer, Nov., 1985.
30 Joseph L. Futtner, Op. cit., p. 8.
HAWTHORNE’S ENOCH: PROPHETIC IRONY IN
THE SCARLET LETTER
Henry J. Lindborg
Division of Arts and Letters
Marian College of Fond du Lac
“A prophet or magician skilled to read the
character of flame”1 must fathom the
mystery of The Scarlet Letter' s little Pearl, a
secret first read by Roger Chillingworth, a
practitioner of black arts, whose subtle tor¬
ture forces the Rev. Mr. Dimmesdale to take
up his principal prophetic office: the public
admission that the child is his daughter.2 In
confessing to his startled flock that he has
put on “the mein of a spirit, mournful
because so pure in a sinful world! — and sad,
because he missed his heavenly kindred” (p.
255), the minister accurately presents the ef¬
fect of his anguished hypocrisy upon the
congregation: they have seen him as angelic.
In his study, Dimmesdale himself had ob¬
served in his glass mocking devils and “a
group of shining angels, who flew upward
heavily, as sorrow-laden, but grew more
ethereal as they rose” (p. 145). These un¬
happy angels provide a significant pattern of
dramatic irony for interpreting Dimmes¬
dale’ s role as prophet in the romance.
During the minister’s Election sermon, the
community is affected “as if an angel, in his
passage to the skies, had shaken his bright
wings over the people for an instant, — at
once a shadow and a splendor,— and had
shed down a shower of golden truths upon
them” (p. 249). So impressed are they, that
it would not “have seemed a miracle too
high to be wrought for one so holy, had he
ascended before their eyes, waxing dimmer
and brighter, and fading at last into the light
of heaven” (p. 252). The people’s apparent
blurring of the distinction between what
were traditionally two separate orders of
creation, men and angels, is suggested earlier
in the book when the sexton remarks to the
minister that the great celestial letter
betokens Governor Winthrop’s being “made
an angel” (p. 158). That Hawthorne may be
accurate in presenting popular belief is sup¬
ported by Puritan tombstone carving— a
sample of which provides the book’s striking
final image — making no distinction between
saved souls and angels.3 The general mind
therefore accorded with a long tradition of
Neo-Platonic philosophers (Marsilio Ficino,
for example), and with Milton, whose Ra¬
phael says to Adam, “Your bodies may at
last turn all to spirit, / Improv’d by tract of
time, and wing’d ascend / Ethereal” {Para¬
dise Lost, V, 497-499). It also accorded with
literature widely read in Hawthorne’s day.4
Readers of such works as Edward Young’s
Night Thoughts, which suggested that,
Angels are men in lighter habit clad,
High o’er celestial mountains wing’d in flight;
And men are angels loaded for an hour,
Who wade this miry vale, and climb with pain,
And slippery step, the bottom of the steep,5
would recognize the plight of Dimmesdale,
“the man of ethereal attributes, whose voice
the angels might else have listened to and
answered,” kept from climbing the Puritan
patriarchs’ “mountain-peaks of faith and
sanctity” by a “burden ... of crime or
anguish” (p. 142).
Dimmesdale’ s identification with angels is
given greater ironic force by his prophetic
office for the community. While he seems to
have attained what the “true saintly fathers”
of the Puritan church lacked, “the gift that
descended upon the chosen disciples, at
Pentecost, in tongues of flame,” which
enabled them to communicate with “the
whole human brotherhood in the heart’s
native langauge” (pp. 141-143), the minister
122
1986]
Lindborg— Hawthorne’s Enoch
123
is tortured by his hypocrisy. He responds to
Hester’s assurance that he is reverenced:
“Canst thou deem it ... a consolation, that
I must stand in my pulpit, and meet so many
eyes turned upward to my face, as if the light
of heaven were beaming from it! — must see
my flock hungry for the truth, and listening
to my words as if a tongue of Pentecost were
speaking!— and then look inward, and
discern the black reality of what they
idolize? (p. 191). Yet as he here presents
himself, and as he appears at the Election
sermon (XXXII), Dimmesdale does fulfill a
prophetic and apostolic role. He may serve,
in fact, as a type of Moses (Exod 34:29) or
Stephen (Acts 6:15), both of whose coun¬
tenances are illuminated like those of angels
while they discourse on essentially the topic
of Dimmesdale’ s sermon, “the relation be¬
tween the Deity and the communities of
mankind” (p. 249).
As he himself recognizes, the minister’s
“apostolic” gifts are linked to his passion
for Hester and his guilt in hiding his paren¬
tage of Pearl. In the forest Dimmesdale,
seemingly a failed Puritan prophet, is
strengthened by Hester, whom he calls “my
better angel”— perhaps in a parody of Kings
19:4— and whose resolution to run away
with him makes him feel “made anew, and
with new powers to glorify Him that hath
been merciful” (pp. 201-202). When he
delivers his sermon, he is indeed taken up by
“a spirit as of prophecy” which constrains
“him to its purpose as mightily as the old
prophets of Israel were constrained” (p.
249), but his final revelation is not of God’s
relationship to men, but of his relationship
to his daughter. Throughout The Scarlet
Letter , the tensions between the minister’s
earthly emotions and the biblical types
through which they are perceived by
Dimmesdale himself and by his Puritan con¬
gregation are particularly amplified in his
role as prophet transformed to angel.
Dimmesdale is supposed to belong natur¬
ally among the elders “whose faculties had
been elaborated by weary toil among their
books, and by patient thought, and ethere-
alized, moreover, by spiritual communica¬
tions with the better world, into which their
purity of life had almost introduced these
holy personages, with their garments of mor¬
tality still clinging to them” (p. 141). Since,
as has been seen, the public view is that
Dimmesdale might be miraculously trans¬
lated to heaven, he may be likened to Elijah,
a prophet so removed. But another figure is
more explicitly suggested.
The Puritan imagination was enough af¬
fected by the matter of prophets lifted to
heaven to have included in The New England
Primer ; the substance of which little Pearl is
said to have mastered (pp. 111-112), its fifth
question, “Who was the first translated?”6
The answer is Enoch, with whom Dimmes¬
dale contrasts himself in a sermon he dare
not deliver: “I, in whose daily life you
discern the sanctity of Enoch— I, whose
footsteps, as you suppose, leave a gleam
along my earthly track, whereby pilgrims
that shall come after me may be guided to
the regions of the blest, — ... I ... am utter¬
ly a pollution and a lie” (p. 143). Even Chill-
ingworth makes reference to Enoch in his
comment on “saintly men, who walk with
God” (p. 122), echoing Genesis 5:24. Enoch,
however, is a figure who transcends the
bounds of orthodoxy, and to understand
him better we must consult “the lore of the
Rabbis” (p. 126), which occupies a place in
the minister’s study.
The pseudepigraphical Book of Enoch ,
based on Genesis 6:1-4, contains the proph¬
et’s visions of heaven, including the punish¬
ment of the fallen angels. It enjoyed popu¬
larity in Europe in several versions, may
have influenced Milton, and appears to have
been on Pico della Mirandola’s reading list;
in discussing man’s potential to make him¬
self “an angel, and a son of God,” Pico
writes, “metamorphoses were popular
among the Jews. ... For the more secret
Hebrew theology at one time reshapes holy
Enoch into an angel of divinity.”7 Romantic
thought also inclined toward such metamor-
124
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
phoses, and the figure of Enoch naturally at¬
tracted its attention, as did those fallen
angels with whom he is associated.8
New translations of Enoch were subjects
of critical discussion in Hawthorne's day. In
addition to striking chords of Neo-
Platonism, they also raised questions about
the nature of revelation and focused atten¬
tion on archetypal readings of the world’s
religious literature. A compendium of
Romantic uses of Enoch's themes is an 1833
review in Fraser's Magazine , which discusses
literature and inspiration. After quoting
Lycidas, it takes up Hawthorne’s favorite
symbol of revelation, the heart: “Home!
sweet home! Look homeward!— there lies
‘the crypt, the ark, the chest!’ or whatever
other ‘receptacle’ in which inspired writings
shall be found. Home! Let each man place
his hand on his heart, and find it there.
There is the place of mystery, both of
godliness and iniquity. Thence must come
every revelation worthy of the name.”9 Cer¬
tainly Dimmesdale’s characteristic gesture of
putting his hand to his heart indicates his
withholding of his inner secret from the
community; and after his confession of his
pose as a mournful spirit, he does in fact
display “what he bears on his own breast,
his own red stigma,” which “is no more
than the type of what has seared his inmost
heart!” (p. 255). This final revelation links
him to Hester and Pearl, the living embodi¬
ment of the scarlet letter.
Pearl’s role is parallel to that of Noah in
The Book of Enoch. Like Noah, she is one
of those strange children more suited to be
among angels than among men (p. 90). In
Enoch, Lamech laments, “I have begotten a
son, unlike to other children.” He worries
that, “He is not human; but resembling the
off-spring of the angels of heaven, is of a
different nature from ours, being altogether
unlike us. His eyes are bright as rays of the
angels.”10 Hester raises similar questions
about Pearl. “What is this being,” she asks,
“which I have brought into the world!” (p.
96). Though Enoch is able to foretell great
things of Noah, however, Dimmesdale can
only assure his daughter a human future by
admission of his own passion in fathering
her.
An admission of passion by the communi¬
ty’s “angel” puts him in the company of
those angels in Enoch who fell for “the
daughters of men” (Genesis 6:2). Carl
Jung’s discussion of Byron’s “Heaven and
Earth,” which treats the union of angelic
and human, summarizes well some of the
themes Hawthorne develops in the case of
Dimmesdale: “The power of God is men¬
aced by the seductions of passion; heaven is
threatened with the second fall of angels. If
we translate this projection back into the
psychological sphere from whence it came, it
would mean that the good and rational
Power which rules the world with wise laws
is threatened by the chaotic, primitive force
of passion.”11 Throughout the romance,
especially in the forest scene, passion is
linked with lawless nature (p. 203). The via
media of passion and reason is domestic.
The home for which each of the characters
strives ought to be a means of keeping pas¬
sion in bounds. Pearl, because she is the em¬
bodiment of adulterous passion, in her final
domestication signals the resolution of the
tension between passion and law.
Unlike Enoch, Dimmesdale can neither
translate nor see into the next world. Hester,
who seems to hope for some reunion there
with the minister, asks him, “Thou lookest
far into eternity, with those bright dying
eyes! Then tell me what thou seest?” He can
only respond with the injunction to trust in
God (p. 256). He is an Enoch who ends up in
the graveyard, where he shares with Hester
the single tombstone indicative of the com¬
munity’s acceptance of their bond in the
stigma of the letter; however, this union is
also found in the living letter, Pearl. For
“their earthly lives and future destinies were
conjoined” in Pearl, who is “at once the
material union, and the spiritual idea, in
whom they met, and were to dwell immor¬
tally together” (p. 207). Dimmesdale is
1986]
Lindborg — Hawthorne's Enoch
125
brought to reveal his relationship to the
organic world in Pearl, and his prophetic of¬
fice points to the values of the human heart
and the domestic circle.
Notes
1 Nathaniel Hawthorne, The Scarlet Letter, ed.
William Charvat, Vol. I. Centenary Edition of the
Works of Nathaniel Hawthorne (Columbus: Ohio State
University Press, 1962) p. 207. All subsequent
references to this volume will appear in the text.
2 Chillingworth’s black arts are treated in my
Hawthorne’s “Chillingworth: Alchemist and Physiog¬
nomist,” TWA, 72(1984), 8-16.
3 Allan I. Ludwig, Graven Images: New England
Stonecarving and It's Symbols (Middletown: Wesleyan
University Press, 1966), p. 216. In addition to the focus
on the graveyard in The Scarlet Letter, see ‘‘Chippings
with a Chisel” in Twice-Told Tales.
4 For an analysis of how this distinction disappeared
in Ficino, see Michael J. B. Allen, “The Absent Angel
in Ficino’s Philosophy,” Journal of the History of
Ideas, 36 (1975), 219-40. The backgrounds of Romantic
thought show a distinct movement in this direction;
angelic transformation is a favorite theme in its occult
sources especially. See Auguste Viatte, Les Sources Oc-
cultes du Romantisme (Paris: H. Champion, 1928).
5 “The Christian Triumph, Night IV,” Vol. I. The
Complete Works, ed. James Nichols (London, 1854),
534-42, p. 59. Night Thoughts originally appeared
1742-1745.
6 The New England Primer (Hartford: Ira Webster,
1843).
7 On the Dignity of Man, trans. Charles Glenn Wallis
(Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1965), pp. 5-6. For spec¬
ulation on Milton’s contact with Enoch, see Grant
McColley, (tThe Book of Enoch and Paradise Lost, ”
Harvard Theological Review 31 (1938), 21-39. Interest
in Enoch was revived in 1773 by Bruce’s discovery of an
Ethiopic translation. Hawthorne would have known of
Enoch from his readings of James Bruce’s Travels to
Discover the Source of the Nile in 1833, and Hiob
Ludolf’s A New History of Ethiopia in 1836. Neither,
however, contains the substance of the book. See
Marion L. Kesselring, “Hawthorne’s Reading,” Bul¬
letin of the New York Public Library, 53 (1949), 174,
195.
8 Consider Wordsworth’s comment: “I used to brood
over the stories of Enoch and Elijah, and almost to per¬
suade myself that, whatever might become of others, I
should be translated, in something of the same way, to
heaven,” in his notes in “Ode” Intimations of Immor¬
tality from Recollections of Early Childhood,” Com¬
plete Poetical Works (London: Macmillan, 1913), p.
358.
9 J. A. Heraud and William Maginn, “The Book of
Enoch, " Fraser's Magazine 8 (November, 1833), 513-
14. The passage from Young previously cited is included
in this article, p. 530. This review concerns itself with
the Romantic use of the angel lore of Enoch, principally
by Byron and Moore.
10 Fraser's, p. 528. Though Dimmesdale’s role as
Enoch and angel is ironic, elsewhere in Hawthorne’s
work he suggests that the capacity to link man with the
angels is a poetic gift. Hawthorne’s ideal preacher seems
to be Ernest in “The Great Stone Face.” In his simple
communion with nature Ernest seems to be a compan¬
ion of the angels, and he fulfills the role ascribed to the
poet who shows “the golden links of the great chain that
intertwined them with an angelic kindred; he brought
out the hidden traits of celestial birth that made them
worthy of such kin” ( The Snow Image Vol. XI,
Centenary Edition (Columbus: Ohio State University
Press, 1974) pp. 43-44. In creating such images for peo¬
ple, Dimmesdale can be seen as reminding them of their
better nature; unlike Ernest, he is not in harmony with
himself.
11 Symbols of Transformation, 2nd ed. (Princeton:
Princeton University Press, 1967), p. 112.
A PRELIMINARY STUDY OF THE MACROBENTHOS OF
WAVE-SWEPT AND PROTECTED SITES ON THE
LAKE MICHIGAN SHORELINE AT
TOFT POINT NATURAL AREA, WISCONSIN
Glenn Metzler
and
Paul E. Sager
Department of Environmental Sciences
University of Wisconsin-Green Bay
Abstract
The near-shore summer macrobenthos community was sampled at protected
and wave-swept sites in Lake Michigan at the Toft Point Natural Area, Door
County, Wisconsin. A total of 85 genera were found. Differences in the species com¬
position at the two sites can be related to the influence of water motion on feeding
mechanisms. Wave-swept sites were dominated by typically lotic organisms which
feed by a collector/scraper mechanism including heptageniid and tricorythid
mayflies and hydropsychid caddisflies. Protected sites were dominated by corixid
and gerrid hemipterans, amphipods, isopods and gastropods. Predaceous in¬
vertebrates were rare at the wave-swept sites but more abundant in the community at
protected sites. The number of genera at protected sites increased gradually through
the summer while at the wave-swept sites, the highest number occurred in early July.
Introduction
In contrast to the deep water benthos, the
macroinvertebrate community of the
shallow, wave swept shores of the Great
Lakes has been examined by very few in¬
vestigators. Krecker and Lancaster (1933)
and Shelford and Boesel (1942) studied the
beaches of the wave zone in western Lake
Erie. Barton and Hynes (1978a) made an ex¬
tensive summer survey of this community in
Lakes Ontario, Huron, Superior and Erie.
In Lake Michigan, Wiley and Mozley (1978)
noted the occurrence of typically sedentary
benthos in the pelagial, near-shore area but
at depths of 6-9 m. Lauritsen and White
(1981), using artificial substrate samplers at
water depths > 0.5 m, compared the ben¬
thos of two locations in Lake Michigan; a
wave-swept, but still somewhat protected,
rocky shoal habitat in the northeast and a
man-made, rocky riprap site in the south¬
east.
The purpose of this study was to make a
preliminary examination of the macroben¬
thos community of shallow water sites ( < 1
m) in Lake Michigan. Specifically, the
community structure and feeding habits of
macroinvertebrates in wave-exposed areas
was compared with that in protected areas.
Site Description and Methods
The study was conducted at the Toft
Point Natural Area on the northwest cor¬
ner of Lake Michigan (Figure 1). Four
sampling sites were selected, two on wave-
swept shorelines (Wl, W2) and two in pro¬
tected areas (PI, P2). Sampling occurred
four times in summer 1983: June 19, July
9, July 28-29, and August 19. On each
sampling day, six to ten samples were col¬
lected within each site at depths from 0-1
m by thoroughly disturbing the sediment
and rocks and then sweeping the area with
a rectangular collecting net having a mesh
126
1986]
Metzler and Sager — Macrobenthos at Toft Point
127
wave-swept (Wl, W2) shores at Toft Point Natural
Area.
size of 1 mm. Each sample was taken from
an area of about 0.5 m2. Large rocks were
carried to shore where the organisms were
picked off. Collection of additional sam¬
ples continued until no new taxa were
found, usually after about two hours. Be¬
cause of the mesh size of the net used in
collecting, small organisms such as Hydra-
carina, Oligocheata and some Chirono-
midae are underrepresented in these collec¬
tions. Chironomids, in contrast to most
other organisms, were not identified to the
generic level and therefore were not in¬
cluded when determining number of genera
present at a site. Specimens were preserved
in 70-80% ethanol. Most organisms were
identified to the generic level using
Hilsenhoff (1981) and Merritt and Gum¬
ming (1978) for insects and Pennak (1978)
for all others.
At sites Wl and W2, the bottom has a
shallow slope with the one meter depth
located approximately 40 meters from the
water’s edge. The substrate here consists of
Silurian Dolomite bedrock with scattered
areas of boulders in the deeper areas and
scattered areas of boulders, cobble, and
gravel in the shallower areas. Tufts of
vegetation were present near the very edge
of the shoreline. Some patches of Cladoph-
ora were present on rocks in the shallower
water.
Site PI was located in a large protected
bay. The substrate consists largely of sand
and the dominant vegetation was Scirpus
sp. Site P2 was located in a small bay,
essentially a pocket in back of the wave-
swept shore. The substrate was mostly par¬
ticulate organic matter and the odor of
hydrogen sulfide could sometimes be
detected while collecting. The vegetation
here consisted largely of Care x sp.
Results
The major taxa found at each site are
listed in Table 1. A complete list can be
obtained from the authors. A total of 85
genera, exclusive of Chironomidae, were
found at the four sites; 47 were found on
the wave-swept shores and 60 in the pro¬
tected areas. In many cases only a single
individual of a genus was found at a site.
If these are excluded because of their rar¬
ity, 29 genera were found on the wave-
swept shores and 29 genera in the protected
areas.
Two insect orders, Ephemeroptera and
Trichoptera, and the Crustacean orders,
Isopoda and Amphipoda, were numerically
dominant on the wave-swept shores. Col¬
onies of Porifera and Bryozoa were also
quite abundant. The latter organisms were
not reported by Barton and Hynes (1978a)
nor observed in a more recent study of the
shallow-water epilithic invertebrate com¬
munity of Georgian Bay (Barton and
Carter 1982). Hemipterans were not found
and Coleopterans were rare; adults were
collected only near shore. Trichoptera lar¬
vae dominated by the family Hydropsy-
chidae were always present at all depths
but were often more abundant in deeper
water. The dominance of Ephemeroptera
128
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Table 1. Major taxa collected at each site and their trophic categories (based on Merritt and Cummins 1978). Abun¬
dances are the maximum obtained during any one sampling: A > 10 individuals, M = 3-9 individuals, R < 2 in¬
dividuals and NC = none collected.
* Placed into trophic categories based on the feeding habits described in Pennak (1978).
1986]
Metzler and Sager— Macrobenthos at Toft Point
129
(Caenidae, Baetidae, Heptageneiidae and
Leptophlebiidae) and Trichoptera (Hydro-
psychidae) was also mentioned by Barton
and Hynes (1978a) for shallow waters in
Lake Huron and Georgian Bay. These
authors reported the stonefly, Acroneuria
(Perlidae), here collected at site W2, (in
late July and August) from Lake Superior,
Lake Huron and Georgian Bay but not
from Lakes Erie or Ontario.
The protected sites were dominated by
Hemiptera, Amphipoda, and Gastropoda.
Corixid nymphs and adults were often ex¬
tremely abundant. Most organisms were
present at all depths out to the edge of the
emergent vegetation. Beyond the emergent
vegetation, very few specimens were col¬
lected. The benthos of the two protected
sites had many similarities, but there were
also some notable differences as might be
expected considering one had sand (PI)
and the other an organic substrate (P2).
Trichopteran larvae with portable cases
(Leptoceridae and Lepidostomatidae) were
present at PI but not P2. Site PI also had
more Ephemeroptera nymphs. Site PI had
large numbers of the amphipods Gam-
marus sp. and Hy a lei la azteca in late sum¬
mer, while at site P2 only the latter was
found and then in large numbers only in
late summer.
Feeding habits of the organisms are an
important aspect of the aquatic inverte¬
brate community. Cummins’ (1973) desig¬
nation of trophic categories for aquatic
insects based on their feeding habits was
used to classify the major taxa found in
this study (Table 1). The categories of col¬
lector, scraper, and plant piercer were
lumped together because specimens were
not keyed to the species level which is
often necessary to distinguish among
categories. In some cases it was still
necessary to partition a genus between two
of the categories. Invertebrates other than
insects were not treated by Cummins,
therefore scavengers were included as an
Fig. 2 Distribution of macrobenthos genera accord¬
ing to trophic categories (Cummins, 1973) at protected
(PI, P2) and wave-swept (Wl, W2) sampling sites at
Toft Point Natural Area.
additional feeding category to accom¬
modate them.
The importance of the various trophic
categories in the community at each site is
illustrated in Figure 2. Wave-swept sites are
almost completely dominated both in diver¬
sity of genera and in abundance of indi¬
viduals by collector/scrapers. These include
the Ephemeroptera, Heptagenia, Steno-
nema, Baetis and Tricorythodes, and the
Trichoptera, Symphitopsyche and Cheu-
matopsyche. Also observed in abundance
were Porifera and Bryozoa, both of which
utilize a collector-filterer type of feeding
mode (Pennak, 1978). The only predator
observed at the wave-swept sites was the
stone fly, Acroneuria. Shredders were not
found at either wave-swept site.
Both protected sites had fewer genera
and lower abundance of collector/scrapers
than the wave-swept sites. Predators, most¬
ly Coenagrionidae (Odonata), Corixidae,
Notonectidae, and Belastomatidae (Hemip¬
tera), however, were much more abundant
at protected sites. Shredders, represented
primarily by Leptoceridae (Trichoptera)
were observed at PI but not P2.
130
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
18 June 9 July 29 July 19 August
Fig. 3 Changes in number of genera of macro¬
benthos at protected (PI, P2) and wave-swept (Wl,
W2) sampling sites through the summer, 1982, Toft
Point Natural Area.
Scavengers were present in similar
numbers at all sites although P2, because
of the absence of the amphipod, Gam-
marus, had the lowest abundance in this
trophic category.
Significant changes in number of genera
occurred in both types of habitats during
the summer but at different times during
the summer (Figure 3). At the wave-swept
sites, the number of genera reached a max¬
imum in early July. Genera which were
rare or absent in mid-June but abundant or
present in moderate numbers in early July
were mostly collectors/scrapers including
Stenonema, Stenacron, Tricorythodes, and
a snail, Physa. Some prominent collec¬
tor/scrapers such as Leptophlebia, Caenis,
and Cheumatopsyche showed the opposite
trend of large numbers of individuals in
early summer but few or none in late sum¬
mer. The predator Acroneuria was absent
in early summer but abundant by late sum¬
mer. Chironomids became more abundant
through mid-summer followed by a decline
at the last sampling.
At the protected sites, the number of
genera continued to increase through the
summer, reaching a peak at the last sam¬
pling. The increase was largely due to
predators: adult Gerris, Belostoma, Noton-
ecta and larval Tropisternus. These
seasonal changes suggest fundamental dif¬
ferences in the trophic-dynamics of the
communities at the two site types.
Discussion
Qualitative differences in the species
composition at the two sites were evident.
At the wave-swept sites, the macrobenthos
consisted mainly of typically lotic species
as noted also by Barton and Hynes
(1978a). Adaptations for the lotic environ¬
ment clearly are also advantageous in the
wave-swept zone of large lakes. Lentic
macrobenthos dominated at the protected
sites.
It is clear that the benthos community
structure is strongly influenced by water
motion. The greater abundance and diver¬
sity of predators at protected sites suggests
that most larger predators are better
adapted for slow or standing waters. In¬
deed, in the wave-swept, marine rocky in¬
tertidal zone, it has been observed that
predators often cannot forage effectively in
highly exposed areas (Connell 1970,
Dayton 1971). There is some evidence of
mechanical limits to size in predators, and
organisms in general, on wave-swept shores
(Denny, et. al., 1985), but predators may
be further hindered by a reduction in the
efficiency of capture due to the turbulence.
The lack of predators in the wave-swept
zone may have community-level ramifica¬
tions. In the marine rocky intertidal,
biological disturbance in the form of
predation can control populations of domi¬
nant primary consumers, thus allowing less
competitive species to exist (Paine 1966,
Dayton 1971). Lubchenco (1978) and Sousa
(1979) have shown that an intermediate
level of disturbance, whether it be bio¬
logical or physical (e.g., waves), tends to
promote greatest diversity and abundance.
The physical harshness of wave-swept sites
on Lake Michigan, perhaps resulting in few
1986]
Metzler and Sager— Macrobenthos at Toft Point
131
predators, might explain the lack of rare
species here as contrasted to the protected
sites.
Several factors could influence the tem¬
poral distribution of macrobenthos at the
wave-swept sites. The increase in number
of genera from June to early July could
still be a part of a recovery process after
scouring by spring storms and late winter
ice abrasion. Recolonization of these
shallow areas could take place from less
disturbed areas (Wiley and Mozley 1978) or
deep water refuges (Barton and Hynes
1978b). The mayfly, Leptophlebia, is
known to migrate from deep waters before
emerging (Edmunds et al. 1976). Increased
abundance of epilithic algae in early sum¬
mer could also explain the appearance in
early July of such groups as Physa, Heli-
copsyche, and some Ephemeroptera.
The disappearance of some genera at the
wave-swept sites in late July may be due to
the turbulent harshness of the environ¬
ment. It could also be explained by com¬
pletion of life cycles, e.g. the immature
Ephemeroptera, Caenis, Leptophlebia , and
Stenonema , were all absent by late July.
Competition or predation could similarly
contribute to the decline. Barton and
Hynes (1978a) suggested an upwelling of
cold hypolimnetic water into the littoral
zone can limit the distribution of some
Ephemeroptera and Trichoptera species.
One possible example of limitation due to
temperature fluctuations in this study is in
the Odonata. While their complete absence
from the wave-swept shores is not unusual,
their low abundance and diversity in the
protected areas (particularly the Anisop-
tera) may be due to cold water intrusions
or severe temperature fluctuations. An¬
other factor to explain the disappearance
or absence of certain groups may be the
lack of deep substrate due to shallow
underlying bedrock (Barton and Hynes
1978c). This would reduce the success of,
or preclude colonization by, species which
have a requirement for deep substrate in
some part of their life cycle. It is note¬
worthy in this sense that the increase in
number of predators in the protected sites
by late summer was mainly due to adult
Hemipterans, most of which are swim¬
ming-skating forms that are less dependent
on a soft bottom substrate.
Conclusions
Differences in species composition of the
macrobenthos community of wave-swept
and protected sites can be related to the
important influence of water motion on
trophic relationships in the community.
Specific adaptations and feeding mechan¬
isms produce a unique assemblage of typi¬
cally lotic organisms in the wave-swept
zone. Examples include taxa from the fam¬
ilies Perlidae, Heptageniidae, Tricoryth-
idae, Hydropsychidae, and Pleuroceridae.
Almost completely absent in this commun¬
ity are predaceous invertebrates. Reduced
water turbulence in the protected areas
allows the development of an invertebrate
community more like those typically found
in small lakes or ponds. Temporal changes
in the number of genera present show a
peak in early July for the wave-swept com¬
munity and a gradual increase throughout
summer for the protected community.
In view of the lack of studies on the
wave-swept zone of large inland lakes, par¬
ticularly Lake Michigan, we encourage fur¬
ther research. There is a need for a year¬
long study of the fauna; even Barton and
Hynes (1978a) in their extensive study of
the Canadian shores of the Great Lakes
relied mainly on summer samples. Studies
of disturbance caused by ice scouring and
spring storms would be very interesting.
These and others could provide valuable
tests of theories concerning community
organization developed in marine rocky
intertidal communities.
Acknowledgment
We thank Drs. Keith White and Harry
Guilford of the University of Wisconsin-
132
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Green Bay and Leonard Smock of Virginia
Commonwealth University for critical com¬
ments on the manuscript. The assistance of
Helen Metzler in field sampling is grate¬
fully acknowledged. The study was sup¬
ported by the Natural Areas Committee of
the University of Wisconsin-Green Bay.
Literature Cited
Barton, D. R., and Hynes, H. B. N. 1978a,
Wave-zone macrobenthos of the exposed
Canadian shores of the St. Lawrence Great
Lakes. J. Great Lakes Res. 4:27-45.
_ _ _ and _ _ _ 1978b. Seasonal variations
in densities of macrobenthic populations in
the wave-zone of north-central Lake Erie. J.
Great Lakes Res. 4:50-56.
_ and ______ 1978c. Seasonal study of the
fauna of bedrock substrates in the wave-zone
of Lakes Huron and Erie. Can. J. Zool.
56:48-54.
Barton, D. R., and Carter, J. C. H. 1982.
Shallow-water epilithic invertebrate com¬
munities of eastern Georgian Bay, Ontario,
in relation to exposure to wave action. Can.
J. Zool. 60:984-993.
Connell, J. H., 1970. A predator-prey system in
the marine intertidal region. I. Balanus glan-
dula and several predatory species of Thais.
Ecol. Monogr. 40:49-78.
Cummins, K. W. 1973. Trophic relations of
aquatic insects. Ann. Rev. Entomol. 18:
183-210.
Dayton, P. K., 1971. Competition, disturbance,
and community organization: the provision
and subsequent utilization of space in a rocky
intertidal community. Ecol. Monogr. 41:
351-388.
Denny, M. W., Daniel, T. L., and Koehl, M. A.
R., 1985. Mechanical limits to size in wave-
swept organisms. Ecol. Monogr. 55:69-102.
Edmunds, G. F., Jensen, S. L., and Berner, L.
1976. The mayflies of North and Central
America, Univ. Minn. Press, Minneapolis.
Hilsenhoff, W. L. 1981. Aquatic insects of Wis¬
consin. Publication number 2. The Natural
History Council, University of Wisconsin-
Madison.
Krecker, F. H.» and Lancaster, L. Y. 1933.
Bottom shore fauna of western Lake Erie: a
population study to a depth of six feet.
Ecology 14:79-93.
Lauritsen, D. D., and White, D. S. 1981. Com¬
parative studies of the zoobenthos of a
natural and a man-made rocky habitat on the
eastern shore of Lake Michigan. Univ. of
Mich., Great Lakes Res. Div. Special Report
No. 74, 65 pp.
Lubchenco, J., 1978. Plant species diversity in a
marine intertidal community: importance of
herbivore food preference and algal com¬
petitive abilities. Am. Nat. 112:23-39.
Merritt, R. W., and Cummins, K. W. 1978. An
Introduction to the Aquatic Insects of North
America. Kendall/Hunt. Publ., Dubuque.
Paine, R. T., 1966. Food web complexity and
species diversity. Am. Nat. 100:65-75.
Pennak, R. W. 1978. Fresh-Water Invertebrates
of the United States, 2nd Ed. John Wiley and
Sons, New York.
Shelford, V. E., and Boesel, M. W. 1942. Bot¬
tom animal communities of the island area of
western Lake Erie in the summer of 1937.
Ohio J. Sci. 42:179-190.
Sousa, W. P., 1979. Disturbance in marine in¬
tertidal boulder fields: the non-equilibrium
maintenance of species diversity. Ecology 60:
1225-1239.
Wiley, M. J., and Mozley, S. C. 1978. Pelagic
occurrence of benthic animals near shore in
Lake Michigan. J. Great Lakes Res. 4:
201-205.
SEASONAL MOVEMENTS OF WHITE-TAILED DEER ON
DECLINING HABITATS IN CENTRAL WISCONSIN
Robert K. Murphy
College of Natural Resources
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
John R. Cary
Department of Wildlife Ecology
University of Wisconsin-Madison
Raymond K. Anderson and Neil F. Payne
College of Natural Resources
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
Abstract
Land use changes may impact winter habitats of deer from a central Wisconsin
grassland area. During 1979-82, we used radio-telemetry to document seasonal
movements and ranges of 19 deer from this area and adjacent wooded uplands.
Home ranges appeared smallest during the fawning period and summer and largest
during fall. Deer that summered in the wooded uplands occupied the same respective
areas year round, but those from the open grassland area moved to the uplands
mainly in early to mid-October and returned during mid-February through March.
Deer in the study area probably will be affected negatively if their common winter
(upland woods) habitat continues to be diminished.
Introduction
The 200-km2 Buena Vista Marsh (BVM) is
a unique grassland area in central Wisconsin
that harbors white-tailed deer ( Odocoileus
virginianus) from late spring through fall.
Wintering areas of deer from BVM are un¬
known; woodlots in surrounding uplands
may serve as winter cover but these are being
replaced by irrigated croplands (Butler
1978). The objective of this study was to ob¬
tain baseline data on seasonal movements
and ranges of radio-marked deer from BVM
and adjacent uplands. Habitat use by these
deer was reported earlier (Murphy et al.
1985).
We are indebted to all landowners for
their cooperation. M. Gratson and O. Rong-
stad offered helpful suggestions during the
study. This work was funded by the Univer¬
sity of Wisconsin Cooperative Research
Projects Consortium.
Study Area and Methods
The 327-km2 study area includes 137-km2
of the drained BVM in southwestern Portage
County, Wisconsin, and 190 km2 of adjacent
uplands. The study area in BVM consists of
38% grassland and grass-shrub types (Ken¬
tucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis ), quackgrass
( Agropyron repens ), goldenrod ( Solidago
spp.), willow (Salix spp.), and shrub-stage
trembling aspen (Pop ulus tremuloides ), 31%
open pasture, 23% cropland (corn, cash
crops, and hay), and 8% small (15-60 ha)
woodlots (aspen). The uplands consist of
42% woodlots and 10% shrub (both domi¬
nated by mixed oak ( Quercus spp.), jackpine
(Pinus banksiana ), and aspen), 35%
133
134
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
cropland (corn, cash crops, and hay), and
13% idle fields and pasture. Soils are
primarily flat sands from glacial outwash.
Mean annual precipitation is 75 cm, in¬
cluding 110 cm of snow; mean annual tem¬
perature is 6°C with extremes of -42° and
42°C.
Deer were captured and marked through¬
out the study area and were radio-located
almost daily as described in Murphy et al.
(1985); multiple daily locations were col¬
lected during the deer hunting season. For
movement data, we recognized 6 periods:
spring (16 Feb-15 May), fawning (16 May-15
Jul), summer (16 Jul-15 Sep), fall (16 Sep-21
Nov), gun deer season (22-30 Nov), and
winter (1 Dec-15 Feb).
The most frequented parts of an animal’s
home range have been termed “core areas”
(CAs) (Ewer 1968:65). Isopleths that con¬
tained 67% of a season’s radio-locations and
that were defined by harmonic mean activity
centers (Dixon and Chapman 1980) were
used to define CAs in this study. Bucks that
moved from their summer CAs during fall
and that were shot during gun season were
considered to be on their winter CAs based
on our knowledge of movements of does
that survived gun season. CA size for deer
that used 2 CAs in a season was considered
the sum of the areas.
Results and Discussion
We captured 29 deer during June 1979-
February 1981; 10 were ear-tagged, and 19
were radio-collared and followed 2-30
months (x±SD = 8.5 ±7.0) each during
November 1979-November 1982. About
2,500 radiolocations were collected. Move¬
ment data were supported by observations of
unmarked deer.
Deer that used BVM during summer (here¬
after, “marsh deer”) had separate winter
CAs in the uplands that averaged 10.2 km
(SD = 5.8) from their summer CAs (Fig. 1).
Deer that used uplands as summer habitat
(hereafter, “woods deer”) maintained year
round CAs.
Winter Range Q Summer Range
Fig. 1 . Winter and summer core areas of 7 deer from
the Buena Vista Marsh, Wisconsin, 1980-82.
Marsh deer moved to uplands mainly in
early to mid-October (Table 1), perhaps in
response to the 1st frosts. Oak mast pro¬
bably attracted deer to uplands (Murphy et
al. 1985). In spring, deer returned to BVM
when successive daily temperatures reached
8-15° C, during mid-February through
March following a mild winter (average Feb.
and Mar. snow depths in 1981 were 8.0 and
0.0 cm, compared to 22.4 and 19.4 cm for
1961-77), and during April following a
severe winter (average Feb. and Mar. snow
depths in 1982 were 47.6 and 20.8 cm) (Table
1). Similarly, Hamerstrom and Blake (1939)
reported that central Wisconsin deer move
from their wintering areas during March and
April, and move earlier after short, mild
winters. In our study, spring movements ap¬
peared to coincide with the availability of
green forage in open areas (Murphy et al.
1985).
Marsh deer winter CAs were in mixed
upland woods mainly west of BVM (Fig. 1)
and overlapped year round CAs of woods
deer. Trail counts conducted on the study
area after fresh snowfall (winter 1981-82)
further suggest that deer winter almost ex¬
clusively in wooded uplands (D. Groebner,
unpubl.). Irrigated cropland probably will
1986]
Murphy , Cary, Anderson and Payne — Seasonal Movements of Deer
135
Table 1 . Movement of radio-collared white-tailed deer to and from summer CAs (core areas) on the
Buena Vista Marsh, Portage County, Wisconsin, 1980-82. S = Summer CA; W = Winter CA.
Distance a
Deer no. (km) Movement chronology
Yearling -females
02
6.0 S - WSW--SW -
~S—
16.5 S— — W?-c;
20.0 S - W - S-
~W - b
-w-
Adult females
26 7.1 S - WSWSWSW - SW-SWS - W-t3
27 7.1 S - W?-c:
Yearling males
12 4.8 S - W -
20 9.7 S - - -W -
•S-
Months JASON DJFM A - S 0 N D J F M A - S 0 N
° Distance between summer and winter CAs.
b Shot during deer hunting season.
c Killed on presumed winter CA by vehicle collision.
d Shot during deer season between winter and summer CAs.
continue to replace these upland habitats
(Butler 1978). Deer make little use of ir¬
rigated cropland, probably because of in¬
herent farming practices (Murphy et al.
1985). Thus, this change in land use may in-
imically impact deer.
Home Range Characteristics
Individual deer CA sizes varied con¬
siderably (Table 2), from 4 ha for an adult
doe in upland woods during winter to 1,932
ha for a yearling buck in open grassland dur¬
ing fall. However, for statistical analyses,
the data set was too fragmented by sex, age,
habitat (“marsh” vs. “woods” deer), and
season variables. Therefore, CA data and
related movements are summarized descrip¬
tively.
Spring CAs appeared intermediate in size
compared to other seasons (Table 2). Deer
made frequent forays (0.7-2. 9 km) to rye
and cornfields (Murphy et al. 1985). During
fawning period and summer, deer appeared
,to use relatively small areas (Table 2), pro¬
bably because habitat needs were well met
during these periods and, except for agri¬
cultural activity, deer were free from distur¬
bance. Relatively small home range size dur¬
ing fawning-summer has been reported by
others (Sparrowe and Springer 1970, Nelson
and Mech 1981). Adult does appeared to use
smaller areas than other deer during the
fawning period, but they increased their
movements during summer as their fawns
became more mobile and social intolerance
toward other deer presumably decreased
(Ozoga et al. 1982).
Increased movements during early fall ap¬
peared to be food-related while those in late
fall were associated with the rut. For exam-
136
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
Table 2. Seasonal core area sizes (ha, x±SD) for radio-collared deer from the Buena Vista Marsh (marsh deer)
and adjacent uplands (woods deer), Portage County, Wisconsin, 1980-81.
Q Age class based on age at fawning season (e.g., “yearlings” are about 0.8 and 1.0 years old during spring and
fawning season, respectively).
b Data were collected during fall-winter, 1979-80.
c Dispersed during fawning season and did not establish a home range until summer.
pie, a yearling buck moved (28 Sep and 6
Oct) 4.0 km from his CA at BVM to a 65-ha
cornfield where he remained 3-4 days. Two
other yearling bucks wandered extensively
over 35-km2 areas at BVM during late fall.
Both bucks and does at BVM made irregular
movements during rut, but those of bucks
seemed more frequent and extensive (Table
2), as Downing and McGinnes (1975) noted
for white-tails in Virginia.
Deer response to hunter pressure during
gun season varied. One adult and 1 yearling
buck reduced their activity to within small,
heavily wooded CAs (Table 2) and survived
5 and 7 days, respectively, of the 9-day gun
season. Four yearling bucks responded to
drives by crossing open areas and were shot
on the 1st day of gun season. Does and
fawns exhibited strong home range fidelity;
hunters drove them 0. 5-9.0 km from their
CAs, but they returned at night.
During winter, deer made regular feeding
trips (0. 4-1.0 km) to hay and to cornfields.
The winters of 1979-80 and 1980-81 were
mild (average Dec., Jan., and Feb. snow
depths were 1.5, 3.8, and 7.9 cm compared
to the 1961-77 averages 9.1, 24.3, and 22.4
cm) and deer probably would have smaller
CAs (Table 2) in more severe winters.
Summary and Conclusions
We observed 2 behavioral patterns on the
study area: woods deer fulfill their needs on
year round CAs in uplands adjacent to
BVM; marsh deer fulfill their food and cover
needs at BVM during spring through fall,
but move to surrounding uplands to fulfill
these needs during winter. Seasonal move¬
ments of marsh deer suggest these deer may
be considered migratory, while woods deer
appear sedentary.
Sizes of areas used by deer appeared
1986]
Murphy , Cary , Anderson and Payne— Seasonal Movements of Deer
137
largest in fall and smallest during the fawn¬
ing period and summer. Seasonal changes in
CA size and movements seemed related to
factors documented in other studies.
Deer that move from BVM supplement
fall populations, and thus the hunting
harvest, of deer in adjacent uplands.
Similarly, movement of deer from some
refuges is important to the deer harvest in
surrounding areas (Hawkins et al. 1971,
Kammermeyer and Marchinton 1976). We
predict that deer harvests at BYM and in sur¬
rounding uplands will decrease if winter
(upland woods) habitat continues to be
removed and trends in local farming prac¬
tices remain unchanged.
Literature Cited
Butler, K. S. 1978. Irrigation in the central sands
of Wisconsin: potentials and impacts. LJniv.
Wis. Coll. Agric. and Life Sci. Res. Bull.
R2960. 51 pp.
Dixon, K. R.» and J. A. Chapman. 1980. Har¬
monic mean measures of animal activity areas.
Ecology 61:1 040- 1 044 .
Downing, R. L., and B. S. McGinnes. 1975.
Movement patterns of white-tailed deer in a
Virginia enclosure. Proc. Southeast. Asso.
Game and Fish Comm. 29:454-459.
Ewer, R. F. 1968. Ethology of mammals. Logos
Press, London. 418 pp.
Hamerstrom, F. N., Jr., and J. Blake. 1939.
Winter movements and winter foods of white¬
tailed deer in central Wisconsin. J. Mammal.
20:206-215.
Hawkins, R. E., W. D. Klimstra, and D. C.
Autry. 1971. Dispersal of deer from Crab Or¬
chard National Wildlife Refuge. J. Wildl.
Manage. 35:216-220.
Kammermeyer, K. E., and R. L. Marchinton.
1976. Notes on dispersal of male white-tailed
deer. J. Mammal. 57:776-778.
Murphy, R. K., N. F. Payne, and R. K. Ander¬
son. 1985. White-tailed deer use of an irrigated
agriculture-grassland area in central Wiscon¬
sin. J. Wildl. Manage. 49:125-128.
Nelson, M. E., and L. D. Mech. 1981 . Deer social
organization and wolf predation in northeast¬
ern Minnesota. Wildl. Monogr. 77. 53 pp.
Ozoga, J. J., L. J. Verme, and C. S. Bienz. 1982.
Parturition behavior and territoriality in white¬
tailed deer: impact on neonatal mortality. J.
Wildl. Manage. 46:1-11.
Sparrowe, R. D., and P. F. Springer. 1970.
Seasonal activity patterns of white-tailed deer
in eastern South Dakota. J. Wildl. Manage.
34:420-431.
NEW DISTRIBUTIONAL RECORDS FOR WISCONSIN
AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES
Philip A. Cochran
Division of Natural Sciences
St. Norbert College
DePere, Wisconsin
and
John D. Lyons
Center for Limnology
University of Wisconsin-Madison
Abstract
Twenty distributional records are provided for thirteen species of Wisconsin
amphibians and reptiles. Most represent new county records.
Introduction
The geographic distribution of the
Wisconsin herpetofauna was summarized
most recently by Vogt (1981), with addi¬
tional records provided by Cochran (1982
a,b,c, 1983 a,b), Cochran and Hodgson
(1985, 1986), Cochran et al. (in press), and
Hodgson and Cochran (1986). The purpose
of this paper is to provide new distributional
information for several Wisconsin amphi¬
bian and reptile species. Not only do these
records fill distributional hiatuses, but they
serve to document the existence of species at
particular points in time and space. Such in¬
formation can be used as baseline data to
compare with future observations.
The following format has been used to
report each new record: scientific name,
common name (after Collins et al. 1982),
locality, date of collection, collector(s),
place of deposition and catalog number
(where appropriate), and comments. Unless
otherwise specified, each specimen described
below represents the first published record
for its respective county, based on Vogt
(1981) and additional references cited in
Cochran (1982d). All specimens except the
Crotalus were verified by one or both
authors.
Caudata
Ambystoma laterale (Blue-spotted
salamander). (1) Sawyer County: one found
beneath a piece of bark in woods on north¬
east side of confluence of Mosquito Brook
with Namekagon River (T41N,R9W,S12). 22
Sep 1983. Cochran, Lyons. Total length: 106
mm, snout-vent length: 57 mm. Erythrocyte
area (Austin and Bogart 1982): X= 728.9
/un2, N = 10, range = 589.0-809.9 jiim2.
Described as uncommon by Briggs and
Young (1976) for nearby Pigeon Lake region
in Bayfield Co. (2) Burnett Co: Five in¬
dividuals found beneath logs near wooded
vernal pool at wayside park along St. Croix
River on south side of Hwy. 70 (T38N,
R20W,S24). 25 May 1984. Cochran, Lyons.
Photograph in University of Wisconsin-
Madison Zoology Museum (UWZ) collec¬
tion (Accession Number 84-147). (3)
Marinette Co: two individuals found
beneath a log at Bear Point Landing on the
Menominee River along Hwy 180; one was
preserved. 24 Jul 1986. Cochran, J. A.
Cochran. UWZ H22633.
Ambystoma tremblayi (Tremblay’s sala¬
mander). Vilas Co: One beneath a rock at
edge of driveway at University of Wisconsin
Trout Lake Station (T41N,R7E,S19). 1 Oct
138
1986]
Cochran and Lyons— Wisconsin Amphibians and Reptiles
139
1983. Cochran, J. Freedman, Lyons. Photo¬
graphed (UWZ Accession Number 84-147).
Total length: 13.5 cm; snout-vent length: 73
cm. Erythrocyte area (Austin and Bogart
1982): X= 1025.9 /un2, N=10, range 917.9-
1119.2 fim2. Diffuse blue coloring along
sides. Reported by Vogt (1981) for adjacent
Oneida and Price Counties. Lyons observed
several additional specimens in spring 1984,
in a small vernal pool next to the Trout Lake
Station Laboratory. The only specimen cap¬
tured had a small fingernail clam attached to
one toe (see Davis and Gilhen 1982).
Hemidactylium scuta turn (Four-toed sala¬
mander). (1) Vilas Co: Found beneath a log
near wooded pool adjacent to Trout Lake
Station Laboratory. (T41N,R7E,S19). 1 Oct
1983. J. Freedman, Cochran, and J. D.
Lyons. Vogt (1981) listed an unconfirmed
record for adjacent Forest Co, and Robin¬
son and Werner (1975) reported its presence
in Michigan’s Upper Peninsula. (2) Portage
Co: In woods on south side of Blackberry
Hill Road (T23N,R7E,S19). 22 Jun 1985.
Cochran, with J. A. Cochran, A. G. Coch¬
ran, D. Watson. Preserved in St. Norbert
College Biology Department reference col¬
lection. Previously reported from the op¬
posite end of Portage Co by Vogt (1981).
This record is included because of the
relative paucity of records for this elusive
species and because it corresponds to what is
apparently atypical habitat (upland forest,
no boggy habitat in the vicinity). Other
species collected include a single Bufo
americanus and numerous Plethodon cine-
reus.
Necturus maculosus (Mudpuppy). (1)
Richland Co: Wisconsin River (T8M,R1E,
S5), 100 m upstream of public boat landing
on north side of river. 13 Apr 1985. David J.
Heath. UWZ H22610. (2) Crawford Co:
Caught in hoopnet in Wisconsin River just
downstream from Hwy 18/35 bridge (T6N,
R6W,S14). 15 Apr 1985. Lyons, S. Landon,
T. Pellett.
Anura
Pseudacris triseriata (Chorus frog).
Sawyer Co: One adult and several tadpoles
preserved from Airport Road between Hwy
63 and Namekagon River (T41N,R9W,S23).
23 May 1984. Cochran, Lyons. UWZ
H22578. This species was heard calling from
several wetlands along Airport Road, with
Hyla crucifer , Rana pipiens, and R. sylvatica
also present. Described as common by
Briggs and Young (1976) for the nearby
Pigeon Lake region in Bayfield Co.
Testudines
Chelydra serpentina (Common snapping
turtle). (1) Green Co: Small adult in Sugar
River, just upstream from Ten Eyke Road
Bridge near Brodhead (T2N,R9E,S26/35).
16 Jun 1983. Cochran, Lyons, F. J. Rahel.
(2) Trempeleau Co: juvenile recently killed
on Hwy 54/35 just south of Trempeleau
River. 30 Apr 1985. Cochran. UWZ
H22634. Substantiates record in Vogt (1981)
not based on examined specimen.
Clemmys insculpta (Wood turtle). Sawyer
Co: Confluence of Mosquito Brook with the
Namekagon River (T41N,R9W,S12). 23
May 1984. Lyons, Cochran. Photographed
(UWZ Accession Number 84-147). Included
on the list of state threatened species.
Previously reported from the northwest cor¬
ner of Sawyer Co by Vogt (1981).
Emydoidea blandingii (Blanding’s turtle).
Jackson Co: Recently killed on Hwy 54
about 1.5 km. east of Kirch Road. 30 April
1986. Cochran. UWZ H22635. Substantiates
record in Vogt (1981) not based on examined
specimen.
Trionyx muticus (Smooth softshell turtle).
Grant County: Collected in fish seine from
main channel of Mississippi River, Pool 11,
River Mile 605. 6 May 1946. J. Greenbank.
Originally included with a preserved sample
of fishes (MR 132), but now recatalogued
separately as UWZ H22581. First published
140
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
record from Pool 11 (Vogt 1981, Williams
and Christiansen 1981).
Trionyx spiniferus (Spiny softshell turtle).
Pierce Co: (1) Collected in fish seine from
Mississippi River, Pool 4, center of back
channel approximately 0.4 km below Goose
Lake outlet. 5 Sep 1947, Miron and Monson.
Originally included with a preserved sample
of fishes (MR 228), but now recatalogued
separately as UWZ H22579. (2) Collected in
fish seine from Mississippi River, Pool 3,
Wisconsin shore of main channel near Dia¬
mond Bluff. 26 Sep 1947. Miron and Mon¬
son. Originally included with a preserved
sample of fishes (MR 238), but now recata¬
logued separately as UWZ H22580.
Serpentes
Heterodon platyrhinos (Eastern hognose
snake). (1) Wood County: Found freshly
killed at ca 2300 h on Hwy 54 about lA km
south of G.B. & W railroads tracks. 6 Aug
1980. Cochran. Many small anurans were
observed hopping on the road in the same
general area after the passage of scattered
thunderstorms. Although Vogt (1981) stated
that this snake is most abundant in Wiscon¬
sin’s central “sand counties,” he included
no record for Wood Co. (2) Jackson Co:
adult recently killed on Hwy 54, just west of
north turnoff for Co Road K. 30 Apr 1986.
Cochran. UWZ H22636. Substantiates rec¬
ords in Vogt (1981) not based on examined
specimens.
Storeria occipitomaculata (Redbelly
snake). Sawyer Co: Federal campsite on
Namekagon River just downstream from
Hwy 63 crossing (T42N,R8W,S31). 20 Sep
1983. Cochran, Lyons. Photographed
(UWZ Accession Number 84-147). De¬
scribed as common by Briggs and Young
(1976) for nearby Pigeon Lake region in ad¬
jacent Bayfield Co.
Crotalus horridus (Timber rattlesnake).
On 24 Jul 1983, a girl was bitten by a timber
rattlesnake just south of Somerset, St. Croix
Co (Keyler 1983). St. Croix Co was not in¬
cluded by Vogt (1981) within the current
range of the timber rattlesnake on the basis
of recent records, but it was included within
the historical range by Schorger (1967-68).
Acknowledgments
We thank Steve Hewett for photographs
of some of the specimens described herein.
Literature Cited
Austin, N. E. and J. P. Bogart. 1982. Erythro¬
cyte area and ploidy determination in the
salamanders of the Amby stoma jefferso-
nianum complex. Copeia 1982:485-488.
Briggs, J. and H. Young. 1976. Amphibians and
reptiles of the Pigeon Lake region. Trans. Wis.
Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 56:29-48.
Cochran, P. A. 1982a. Geographic distribution:
Necturus maculosus. SSAR Herp. Review
13:79.
_ _ . 1982b. Geographic distribution: Rana
catesbeiana. SSAR Herp. Review 13:79-80.
_ . 1982c. Geographic distribution: Trionyx
spiniferus. SSAR Herp. Review 13:80.
_ 1982d. A supplemental bibliography of
publications pertinent to the Wisconsin
herpetofauna. Bull. Chicago Herp. Soc.
17:105-108.
_ . 1983a. Geographic distribution. Coluber
constrictor. SSAR Herp. Review 14:123.
_ 1983b. Geographic distribution: Nerodia
sipedon. SSAR Herp. Review 14:124.
_ and J. R. Hodgson. 1985. Geographic
distribution: Emydoidea blandingii. SSAR
Herp. Review 16:116.
_ and J. R. Hodgson. 1986. Geographic
distribution: Ambystoma laterale. SSAR
Herp. Review 17:26.
_ _ , J. R. Hodgson and R. M. Korb. 1986.
New distributional records for reptiles and
amphibians in Brown County, Wisconsin.
SSAR Herp. Review (in press).
Collins, J. T., R. Conant, J. E. Huheey, J. L.
Knight, E. M. Rundquist and H. M. Smith.
1982. Standard common and current scientific
names for North American amphibians and
reptiles (Second edition). SSAR Herp. Circular
No. 12, 28 pp.
1986]
Cochran and Lyons— Wisconsin Amphibians and Reptiles
141
Davis, D. S. and J. Gilhen. 1982. An observation
of the transportation of pea clams, Pisidium
adamsi , by blue-spotted salamanders, Amby-
stoma later ale. Can. Field-Nat. 96:213-215.
Hodgson, J. R. and P. A. Cochran. 1986.
Geographic distribution: Hyla crucifer . SSAR
Herp. Review 17:26.
Keyler, D, E, 1983. Letter to editor. Minn. Herp.
Soc. Newsl. 3(8):2.
Robinson, W. L. and J. K. Werner. 1975. Verte¬
brate animal populations of the McCormick
Forest. USDA For. Serv. Res. Pap. NC-118,
North Cent. For. Exp. Stn., St. Paul, Minn. 25
pp.
Schorger, A. W. 1967-68. Rattlesnakes in early
Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and
Lett. 56:29-48.
Vogt, R. C. 1981. Natural history of amphibians
and reptiles of Wisconsin. Milwaukee Public
Museum, Milwaukee, Wis. 205 pp.
Williams, T. A. and J. L. Christiansen. 1981.
The niches of two sympatric softshell turtles,
Trionyx muticus and Trionyx spiniferus, in
Iowa. J. Herp. 15:303-308.
FOREST FLOOR BIOMASS AND NUTRIENTS IN RED MAPLE
c Acerrubrum L.) STANDS OF WISCONSIN AND MICHIGAN
James E. Johnson, Carl L. Haag, David E. Goetsch
College of Natural Resources
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point
Abstract
The forest floors of 60 even-aged red maple stands were sampled in northern
Wisconsin and Michigan. Dry weights and nutrient contents were determined for the
Oi + Oe and Oa horizons, as well as for the total forest floor. All data were ar¬
ranged into three soil productivity groups based on site index (18.9, 17.6 and
14.9m). The greatest forest floor dry weight and nutrient contents were associated
with the highest soil productivity group. The lowest group, which consisted of the
dry, sandy outwash sites, had the smallest forest floor dry weights and nutrient
storage. The bulk of the dry weight and nutrient content of the forest floor was in
the Oa horizon.
Introduction
Red maple ( Acer rub rum L.) is a tree
species of interest to many foresters in the
Lake States. Crow and Erdmann (1983) esti¬
mated that red maple is now an important
component on more than 400,000 ha in the
Lake States. Red maple is a moderately
tolerant species, a prolific sprouter and seed
producer, and a fast grower. All of these
characteristics have allowed it to become a
strong competitor for the growing space va¬
cated by American elms ( Ulmus americana
L.) killed by Dutch elm disease. Red maple
occurs on a variety of sites ranging from dry
to wet, but is most abundant in dry-mesic
sites (Curtis 1959).
The forest floor represents an important
component of a forest ecosystem. It provides
a niche for a variety of microflora and
fauna, a seedbed for forest vegetation, and
nutrients that are continuously made avail¬
able for plant growth through mineralization
processes (Pritchett, 1979). In addition, the
forest floor stores water and reduces runoff.
Early forest floor studies in this country
focused on classification for inventory pur¬
poses (Romell and Heiberg 1931, Heiberg
and Chandler 1941), while more recent
investigations have dealt with such topics as
nutrient release through decomposition
(Aber and Melillo 1980). The forest floor has
recently been recommended for classifying
forest ecosystems (Snyder and Pilgrim 1985).
There is still a need for forest floor informa¬
tion for various timber types in the Lake
States. As soil surveys increase in scope and
as forest management intensifies to include
practices such as drainage, fertilization, and
prescribed fire, the need for additional infor¬
mation on soil-site classification and nutri¬
ent cycling in forest ecosystems will become
more pressing.
The information presented here is part of
a larger, regional study investigating soil-site
relationships of red maple. The specific
objective is to report forest floor dry weight,
depth, and macro- and micronutrient con¬
tents associated with red maple stands
growing on three soil productivity groups in
northern Wisconsin and Michigan.
Methods
Sixty even-aged red maple stands were
located throughout northern Wisconsin and
Michigan (Table 1). The stands were all
fully-stocked, and originated from seeds
142
1986]
Johnson , Haag and Goetsch — Biomass and Nutrients in Red Maple
143
Table 1. Mean stand conditions for three soil productivity groups in northern Wisconsin and Michigan1
Mean
Annual
Soil Stand Biomass
Means within a column followed by the same letter are not significantly different at the 0.05 level.
rather than stump sprouting. They occur on
a variety of parent materials, including
lacustrine sediments, glacial till, and glacial
out wash. The soil moisture regimes ranged
from dry mesic to mesic.
Within each stand two 1,000 m2 plots were
established. Site index was obtained from
stem analysis of at least two dominant or co¬
dominant trees per plot. Biomass was com¬
puted from dbh measurements using equa¬
tions developed by Crow (1983). In each
stand a soil pit was dug to a depth of 2 m and
described by horizons. A 0.25 m2 forest floor
sample was collected near each pit, separated
into Oi + Oe and Oa horizons, and returned
to the lab for analysis.
In the lab the Oi + Oe samples were oven-
dried at 65 °C, then ground in a Wiley mill to
pass a 1 mm sieve. The Oa samples were
dried and gently passed through a 2 mm
sieve; organic material not passing through
the sieve was ground in a Wiley mill and
remixed with the rest of each sample. All
forest floor samples were digested in concen¬
trated nitric and perchloric acid, and total P,
K, Ca, Mg, S, B, Mn, Zn, Cu, and Fe were
Table 2. Mean dry weight, nutrient contents, and depth for the total forest floor
(Oi + Oe + Oa horizons) for three soil productivity groups'
Productivity Group
I II III
variable x SD x SD x SD
kg ha~'
' Means, within a row, followed by the same letter are not significantly different at the 0.05 level.
144
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
determined using a Model 34000 ARL
plasma emission spectrophotometer at the
University of Wisconsin-Madison. Total N
was determined on ground subsamples at the
University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point using
the semi-micro Kjeldahl procedure.
During the field sampling phase of the
study, site productivity differences associ¬
ated with soil parent material and drainage
class became apparent. Two measures of
productivity, site index and mean annual
biomass increment, were subjected to cluster
analysis using Ward’s hierarchical method
(Ward 1963). Three distinct groups were
produced, and forest floor dry weights and
depths were stratified by group and sub¬
jected to an analysis of variance followed by
mean separation using Duncan’s Multiple
Range Test at the 0.05 level. All statistical
analyses were performed using SPSS on the
Burroughs B6900 mainframe computer at
the University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point.
Results and Discussion
The three soil productivity groups sam¬
pled differred primarily in soil parent
material and drainage class. The highest
group had a mean site index of 18.9 m, and
consisted of the lacustrine soils and till soils
that were moderately well-drained. The
intermediate group had a mean site index of
17.6 m and consisted of other glacial till soils
and the wet outwash soils. The lowest
productivity group had a mean site index of
14.9 m and consisted of the dry glacial
outwash sites.
In general, the highest soil productivity
group contained the largest forest floor
biomass with the greatest amount of asso¬
ciated nutrient storage (Table 2). For exam¬
ple, soil productivity group I had an average
forest floor dry weight of 45,752 kg/ha. This
was not different from the 44,636 kg/ha
associated with group II, but was significant¬
ly higher than the 29,182 kg/ha found with
the group III sites. Significant differences
were also found with N,P,K,Ca,Mg,S,Zn,B,
Fe, and Cu (Table 2). The same trend was
exhibited with Mn, however, the differences
were not significant.
The greatest dry weight and associated
nutrient storage was found in the Oa horizon
(Tables 3,4). This was due in part to the
associated mineral matter which forms an
integral part of the Oa horizon. The large
amounts of Fe found in the Oa are most
likely associated with this mineral soil. The
Oa horizon comprised 69%, 75%, and 70%
of the total forest floor dry weight for soil
productivity groups I, II, and III respec¬
tively. Although the Oa horizon on group II
sites had a slightly higher dry weight than on
group I sites, the group I sites had higher nu¬
trient contents, indicating a higher nutrient
concentration in the group I Oa horizons.
The association between low (moist)
drainage conditions and higher forest floor
dry weights and nutrient contents has been
documented in the literature (Mader et al.
1977, Reiners and Reiners 1970, Perala and
Alban 1982). In this study the group I and II
sites were noticeably wetter than the dry,
sandy outwash group III sites, which par¬
tially explains the larger forest floor dry
weights and nutrient contents on those sites.
In addition, above-ground biomass produc¬
tion and litterfall have been observed to be
lower on sandy, infertile sites in the Lake
States (Perala and Alban 1982).
Conclusion
This study showed that the higher quality
red maple sites investigated had greater
forest floor dry weights with greater asso¬
ciated macro- and micronutrients, and oc¬
curred on mesic to moist sites. The poorest
quality sites, which occurred on the dry
outwash sands, had forest floors that were
significantly lower in dry weight and nutrient
content. Management practices that are
likely to impact the forest floor (i.e. site
preparation, prescribed burning) should be
practiced with more care on the group III
1986]
Johnson, Haag and Goetsch — Biomass and Nutrients in Red Maple
145
Table 3. Mean dry weight and nutrient contents for the Oi + Oe forest floor horizons
for three soil productivity groups1
Productivity Group
I II III
variable x SD x SD x SD
kg/ha
1 Means, within a row, followed by the same letter are not significantly different at the 0.05 level.
Table 4. Mean dry weight and nutrient contents for the Oa forest floor horizons
for three soil productivity groups'
Productivity Group
/ II III
variable x SD x SD x SD
kg ha~ 1
' Means, within a row, followed by the same letter are not significantly different at the 0.05 level.
146
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
[Vol. 74
sites and nutrient conservation measures
should be followed (Bengston 1981).
Literature Cited
Aber, J. D. and J. M. Melillo, 1980. Litter de¬
composition: measuring relative contributions
of organic matter and nitrogen to forest soils.
Can. J. Botany 58:416-421.
Bengston, G. W. 1981. Nutrient conservation in
forestry: a perspective. South. J. Appl. Forest.
5:50-59.
Crow, T. R. 1983. Comparing biomass regression
by site and stand age for red maple. Can. J.
For. Res. 13:283-288.
_ and G. G. Erdmann. 1983. Weight and
volume equations and tables for red maple in
the Lake States. U.S.D.A. For. Serv., North
Cen. For. Exp. Sta. Res. Pap. NC-242. 14 p.
Curtis, J. T. 1959. The vegetation of Wisconsin.
Univ. Wisconsin Press, Madison. 657 p.
Heiberg, S. O. and R. F. Chandler. 1941. A re¬
vised nomenclature of forest humus layers for
the northeastern United States. Soil Science
32:87-99.
Mader, D. L., H. W. Lull, and E. I. Swenson.
1977. Humus accumulation in hardwood
stands in the Northeast. Mass. Agr. Exp. Sta.
Res. Bull. No. 648. Univ. Mass, Amherst.
37 p.
Perala, D. A. and D. H. Alban. 1982. Rates of
forest floor decomposition and nutrient turn¬
over in aspen, pine, and spruce stands on two
soils. U.S.D.A. For. Serv. North Cen. For.
Exp. Sta. Res. Pap. NC-227. 5 p.
Pritchett, W. L. 1979. Properties and man¬
agement of forest soils. John Wiley & Sons.
New York, 500 p.
Reiners, W. A. and N. M. Reiners. 1970. Energy
and nutrient dynamics of forest floors in three
Minnesota forests. J. Ecol. 58:497-519.
Romell, L. G. and S. O. Heiberg. 1931. Types of
humus layer in the forests of northeastern
United States. Ecology 12:567-608.
Snyder, K. E. and S. A. L. Pilgrim. 1985.
Sharper focus on forest floor horizons. Soil
Survey Horizons 26:9-15.
Ward, J. H. 1963. Hierarchical grouping to
optimize an objective function. J. Amer. Stat.
Assoc. 58:236-244.
ADDRESSES OF AUTHORS: Transactions Wisconsin Academy, 1986
Anderson, Raymond K.
College of Natural Resources
University of Wis. -Stevens Point
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Banschbach, John
Department of English
Marian College
45 S. National Ave.
Fond du Lac, WI 54935
Cary, John R.
Department of Wildlife Ecology
University of Wis. -Madison
Madison, WI 53706
Cochran, Philip A.
Division of Natural Sciences
St. Norbert College
DePere, WI 54115
Dorner, Peter
Dean, International Studies
and Programs
University of Wis. -Madison
Madison, WI 53706
Goetsch, David E.
College of Natural Resources
University of Wis. -Stevens Point
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Haag, Carl L.
College of Natural Resources
University of Wis. -Stevens Point
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Holzaepfel, John
103 Willis Avenue
Port Jefferson, NY 11777
Jass, Joan P.
Invertebrate Zoology
Milwaukee Public Museum
Milwaukee, WI 53233
Johnson, James E.
College of Natural Resources
University of Wis. -Stevens Point
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Keough, Janet R.
U.W. Center for Great Lakes
Studies
600 East Greenfield Ave.
Milwaukee, WI 53204
Krakowski, James
College of Natural Resources
University of Wis. -Stevens Point
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Law, Charles S.
Department of Landscape
Architecture
University of Wis. -Madison
Madison, WI 53706
Lillie, Richard A.
W.D.N.R. Bureau of Research
3911 Fish Hatchery Rd.
Madison, WI 53711-5397
Lindborg, Henry J.
Department of English
Marian College
45 S. National Ave.
Fond du Lac, WI 54935
Long, Charles A.
Department of Biology
University of Wis. -Stevens Point
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Lyons, John D.
Center for Limnology
University of Wis. -Madison
Madison, WI 53706
Mason, John W.
W.D.N.R. Bureau of Research
3911 Fish Hatchery Rd.
Madison, WI 53711-5397
Metzler, Glenn
Biology Department
Virginia Commonwealth Univ.
Richmond, VA 23284
Murphy, Robert K.
Lostwood Nat. Wildlife Refuge
Route 2, Box 98
Kenmare, ND 58746
Murray, Bruce H.
Department of Landscape
Architecture
University of Wis. -Madison
Madison, WI 53706
Paruch, Weldon
1601 Primrose Lane
West Bend, WI 53095
Payne, Neil F.
College of Natural Resources
University of Wis. -Stevens Point
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Pribek, Thomas
Department of English
University of Wis. -La Crosse
La Crosse, WI 54601
Rao, K. S. N.
Department of English
University of Wis. -Oshkosh
Oshkosh, WI 54901
Root, David A.
3017 Stanley St.
Stevens Point, WI 54481
Sager, Paul E.
Department of Environmental
Sciences
University of Wis. -Green Bay
Green Bay, WI 54301-7001
Singer, Carole
4969 Palo Drive
Tarzana, CA 91356
Wright, Doris T.
122 Eighth Ave.
Baraboo, WI 53913
WISCONSIN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, ARTS & LETTERS
MEMBERSHIP INFORMATION
REGULAR (individual or family)
ASSOCIATE .
LIFE .
PATRON .
. $25 annual dues
$10 annual dues (student only)
$300 in one lifetime payment*
. $500 or more
* Academy members who have paid dues for 10 years are eligible to become life members at age
70 upon application and need pay no more dues.
Your membership will encourage research, discussion, and publication in the sciences, arts, and
letters of Wisconsin. Please send dues payment along with name and address to W.A.S.A.L.,
1922 University Avenue, Madison, WI 53705. Academy members receive the annual
TRANSACTIONS, the quarterly REVIEW, and occasional monographs or special reports.
Members are invited to submit manuscripts for publication consideration or for presentation at
Academy meetings.
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts & Letters —
Steenbock Center 1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53 705
Telephone 608 263-1692
the Wisconsin
, .
Academy of
Sciences,
Arts &
Letters
Volume 75
1987
"
1 V . , ;r :
»;./v - M ■ ' .t ^ • • " 'r ■ ■ v. ' H r
'fif- ^
'
b4R \
— H.T7I.V/ « •> >\ ■' . : /v. V.
('4/
Rr..|/R,:'7
: 7 ■
A-;
ual*SB
Transactions
Carl N. Haywood, Editor
134 Schofield Hall
University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire
Eau Claire, Wisconsin 54701
Production Editor
Patricia Allen Duyfhuizen
Assistant Editors/Student Interns
Sharon Falter Tiffany Oliver
Barbara Wortz Anne Moulton
Anne Deal Mary Geisert
Bonnie Meyer
Transactions welcomes articles that explore features of the State of Wisconsin and its people.
Articles written by Wisconsin authors on topics other than Wisconsin sciences, arts, and letters
are also occasionally published.
Manuscripts, queries, and other correspondence should be addressed to the editor.
Transactions is published annually by the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters,
1922 University Avenue, Madison, Wisconsin 53705.
© 1987
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Manufactured in the United States of America
All rights reserved
( ’ ( < 7 'Y, '7' / " . - ^ © ■ 7 ©
:
WaMA
,
<-N/ )' A • ~"h ' U ■ '•■V/-
' © . ' V ‘ ©.V ' i'
■ 7 •„ ' y:
77 ;
TRANSACTIONS
of the Wisconsin Academy
of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Volume 75 • 1987
US8
Contents
Wisconsin Death March: Explaining the Extremes 1
in Old Northwest Indian Removal
James A. Clifton
A study of attempts by governmental officials to force the Lake Superior
Chippewa Indians off their lands in Northern Wisconsin and Michigan’s
Upper Peninsula, The event, which ended in disaster, is placed in the broad
political, economic, religious, and patronage context.
The Aquatic Macrophyte Community 41
of Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin
Roy Bouchard and John D. Madsen
This is a study of the aquatic macrophyte, which comprise an important com¬
ponent of stream ecosystems. Data regarding the macrophyte community of
Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin, collected in 1981 and 1985, are compared. The
authors specifically studied the effects on the macrophyte biomass of the in¬
flow from a sewage treatment plant.
Edgar B. Gordon: Teacher to a Million 57
Anthony L. Barresi
WHA is commonly acknowledged to be the oldest American radio station in
continual usage. In 1921 Edgar Gordon began a music program broadcast over
that station that eventually evolved into what was likely the first media instruc¬
tion in the nation. This is a study of the extraordinary man who literally taught
a million students via this program.
Notes from the Notebooks of Cabin #3 67
Bruce Taylor
A poem based on material contained in a series of “guestbooks” found in a
rental cabin in a small resort on the North Shore of Lake Superior.
Did Patterns of Behavior and Habitat Utilization 70
of Cisco (Coregonus artedii) in Two Wisconsin Lakes
Lars G. Rudstam and Todd W. Trapp
In the examination of did patterns of behavior and habitat utilization of cisco,
it was discovered that both differed between lakes and among age groups.
While no did vertical migration was observed, it was noted that smaller fish in
one lake moved toward the shore during dawn and offshore during dusk. It
was further discovered that cisco probably fed both day and night with only a
small difference in diet between younger and older fish.
Nineteenth-Century Temperature Record 79
at Fort Howard, Green Bay, Wisconsin
Joseph M. Moran and Lee Somerville
An analysis of monthly and annual mean temperatures suggests that recent
months and years in Green Bay were generally cooler than the 1820s and
1830s. This paper, which is a study of the early record keeping and ther¬
mometer locations as well as differences in methods of computation of mean
temperatures, casts doubt on this assumption. The study indicates that com¬
parisons of earlier temperature records with modern ones are probably invalid.
The Status of Canada Lynx in Wisconsin, 1865-1980 90
Richard P. Thiel
Richard Thiel investigates the question of whether or not there is or has been a
permanent lynx community in Wisconsin. All lynx specimens deposited in
museums from Minnesota, Michigan, and Wisconsin were studied, as well as
such factors as lynx vulnerability, lack of adequate remote habitat, and the
role Lake Superior plays in prohibiting direct migrations of lynx from Canada.
The Flora of Wisconsin, Preliminary Report No. 69. 97
Euphorbiaceae — The Spurge Family
James W. Richardson, Derek Burch, and Theodore S. Cochrane
This is part of a continuing, long-time study of the flora of Wisconsin. Eu¬
phorbiaceae is one of the largest families of flowering plants containing 300
genera and at least 7,000 species. The present paper revises earlier treatments
of Euphorbiaceae and is based on specimens deposited in herbaria throughout
Wisconsin.
IV
From the Editor
After completing work on Volume 74, 1986, Philip and Kathryn Whitford resigned as
editors of Transactions. Their dedicated work for the journal, sometimes under difficult
circumstances and without adequate support staff, is greatly appreciated. As the new
editor I wish to acknowledge their contribution, and on behalf of all associated with the
journal, to express our sincere thanks to the Whitfords for their excellent work. My hope
is to maintain the standards of judgment, breadth of view, and quality of product so
long evident under the Whitfords’ editorship.
Readers will note only modest changes in the 1987 volume of the journal. There are a
few technical changes in this issue, but the addition of assistant editors and a production
editor has already meant an increase in the services we have been able to provide to
authors. And recent changes at the Academy office plus the support that naturally
comes from being associated with a university campus, have increased the resources
available to the journal. No dramatic changes are anticipated though I do plan to include
more material from arts and letters. The next volume will have a poetry section, and con¬
sideration is being given to a photographic essay, a series of profiles of Wisconsinites, an
interview, and original ink drawings or woodcuts. It is my hope that Transactions will
reflect the diverse interests and activities of the members of the Wisconsin Academy as
well as continue to serve as a place to present original work by Wisconsin writers or
about Wisconsin.
Three aspects of this volume of Transactions should be noted. The first is the inclu¬
sion of the Bruce Taylor poem, which gives some indication of things to come. Bruce has
agreed to serve as poetry editor for the 1988 volume. The second is the unusually long
and detailed lead article entitled “Wisconsin Death March.” In this article Professor
Clifton meticulously reconstructs the story of an episode in American and Wisconsin
history that injected suspicion and bitterness into the relationship between the Chippewa
Indians and various agencies of the government. The article serves as an ideal
background against which to place the current arguments over the Chippewa’s exercise
of rights they reserved by treaty. The 1987 volume concludes with another article in a
series that began a number of years ago. Botanists are studying the flora of Wisconsin,
and Transactions was selected as the journal to publish the occasional reports. When the
study is completed, this journal will be the major source of information for anyone
studying the flora of Wisconsin. We are pleased to continue our participation in this
project with the publication of the report on Euphorbiaceae — The Spurge Family.
All of us at Transactions hope that you enjoy this volume and that you will consider
submitting ideas or completed works for possible publication.
Carl N. Haywood
Wisconsin Death March:
Explaining the Extremes
in Old Northwest Indian Removal1
James A. Clifton
Throughout the fall of 1850, four offi¬
cials of Zachary Taylor’s administra¬
tion conspired to lure the Lake Superior
Chippewa Indians away from their lands
in Northern Wisconsin and Michigan’s
Upper Peninsula.2 Two of these officials,
Secretary of the Interior Thomas Ewing
and Commissioner of Indian Affairs
Orlando Brown, provided the initial ap¬
proval for the plan, but they did not re¬
main in office long enough to witness its
disastrous results. The others, Minnesota
Territory’s governor, Alexander Ramsey,
and Sub-Agent John Watrous, were di¬
rectly involved as prime movers from start
to end. By moving the place for the an¬
nual annuity payments to a new tem¬
porary sub-agency at Sandy Lake on the
east bank of the upper Mississippi and by
stalling the delivery of annuity goods and
money, they planned to trap the Chip¬
pewa by winter weather, thus forcing
them to remain at this remote, isolated
location.
This scheme, kept secret from both lo¬
cal Americans and the Chippewa, was de¬
signed to break the tenacious resistance of
these Indians, who had rebuffed earlier
efforts to persuade them to resettle in
northwestern Minnesota. The stratagem
failed. It succeeded only in reinforcing the
opposition of the Chippewa to relocation
even though it had killed large numbers of
them: of the some three thousand (mostly
adult males) who gathered at Sandy Lake
James A. Clifton is a Frankenthal Professor of An¬
thropology and History, University of Wisconsin-
Green Bay.
in early October, some four hundred died
before the survivors could make their way
back to their homes by the following
January.3
This incident was demonstrably atypi¬
cal of the experiences of the two dozen
other Indian populations in the Old
Northwest who were subject to the Indian
Removal policy between 1825 and the
early 1850s.4 On the contrary, judged by
the degree of physiological stress and the
casualty rate suffered during the reloca¬
tion process, the Lake Superior Chippewa
case represents an extreme. As such, it
deserves special attention, since it and
others like it generated much contem¬
poraneous commentary while exposing
the interests, aims, and intrigues of the
diverse denominational, political, eco¬
nomic, and ethnic interests directly in¬
volved. Moreover, because it represents
one extreme, to be fully understood, this
Chippewa case must be compared with
other cases of Old Northwest Indians sub¬
ject to dislocation and resettlement. By
examining the Lake Superior Chippewa
case both intensively and comparatively,
we can better appreciate how Old North¬
west Indian communities reacted re¬
sourcefully and variously to American
policy initiatives. In the Chippewa case
the Indians drew effectively on a variety
of relationships with and the support of
Wisconsin citizens to oppose the inter¬
locking national, regional, and local
patronage system which, rather than “set¬
tlement pressure,” had fueled the drive
for their relocation.
1
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Although these Chippewa were cer¬
tainly victimized by a few American of¬
ficials and punished by events under no
individual’s control, ultimately they
emerged from this confrontation as vic¬
tors. During the three years following the
abortive effort to dislodge them, they ef¬
fectively maneuvered, procrastinated, and
negotiated to a standstill those function¬
aries still bent on their dislocation, and in
the end achieved their major goal of re¬
maining on reservations within their pre¬
ferred habitats in Wisconsin and Michi¬
gan by explicit treaty-specified right.
Moreover, the Chippewa were not alone
among the Indians of the Old Northwest
in successfully thwarting American ef¬
forts to implement the removal policy.
Systematic study of the diverse responses
of the two dozen groups of Indians in the
region subject to the various tactics of
Americans to move them west makes this
eminently clear and contributes further
insights into the distinctive features of the
Chippewa case.
Of the more than forty efforts between
1825 and 1855 to bring about the west¬
ward resettlement of Old Northwest In¬
dians, there were just four where outright
force, or— as in the Chippewa example —
furtive deception and trickery, were
employed to produce the results desired
by federal administrators. In these few
cases, the coercive tactics used con¬
tributed to extraordinary hardship and
fatalities, consequences that can be, in
some part, plausibly attributed to the ac¬
tions of American authorities. The other
three involved Black Hawk’s band of re¬
calcitrant Sauk, Fox, and Kickapoo in
1831-1832, certain villages of the Indiana
Potawatomi in 1838, and the Winnebago
intermittently over the course of a decade
and more after 1838. 5
Although each of these four cases had
its own distinguishing features, they
shared a series of specific common ante¬
cedents, one or more of which were lack¬
ing in all other attempts to dislodge and to
relocate groups of Old Northwest In¬
dians. These features in combination con¬
ditioned the resort by Americans to coer¬
cion or deception. In sequence, the first of
these was a serious, prolonged, public
dispute over the legitimacy of a treaty
obligation, with the Indians vehemently
denying the right of Americans to demand
the surrender of particular tracts and their
resettlement and with their adversaries
hewing to the right to evict. Next, such a
dispute had to be moved to a crisis point,
with the Indians adamantly rejecting fur¬
ther American efforts at verbal persua¬
sion and the various incentives proffered.
Finally, there had to be present politically
influential local Americans with strong
vested interests in securing the disloca¬
tion, transportation, and resettlement in
particular places of the Indians involved.
These interests were varied and inter¬
twined. They included some combination
of local political prestige, career enhance¬
ment, visionary dreams of ecclesiastical
colonies, control of patronage resources,
profound power needs, ideological con¬
victions, the need for immediate income,
the aim of thwarting rivals, the lure of
capital accumulation, and others more or
less distinguishable in the historical
record.6
Lacking one or more of these three con¬
ditions, American authorities did not use
force to drive Indians west in a manner
that fits the “Trail of Tears” stereotype.
Ordinarily, officials relied on personal in¬
fluence, on oral argument (enumerating
what they defined as the positive in¬
ducements for moving and the disincen¬
tives for remaining), and on the disposi¬
tions of the Indians to cooperate in what
must be defined as encouraged, but not
forced, migrations. Similarly, numerous
groups of Old Northwest Indians, some¬
times differing with Americans on the
stipulations in treaty engagements, some¬
times not, did not press the issue, but in-
2
Wisconsin Death March
stead escaped or evaded the removal pol¬
icy entirely. By avoiding direct confronta¬
tion, such dissidents avoided a situation in
which Americans were moved to use the
exorbitantly expensive, often ineffective,
and morally demeaning option of armed
escort and manifest compulsion.
Three different cases together represent
the antithesis of the Lake Superior Chip-
pewas’ extraordinary experience. In Sep¬
tember, 1837, the Mdewakonton Dakota
(Sioux), for example, sold their remaining
claim to lands in western Wisconsin in
what has been called a “removal” treaty.
However, their relocation was to them a
profitable non-event. As their capable
agent, Lawrence Taliaferro, remarked in
1836, they were only maintaining the
semblance of a presence in their former
territory east of the Mississippi “so as to
get a good price for it in case of a desire
on the part of the U States to purchase.”7
They had earlier abandoned these lands,
owing to pressures from intrusive Chip¬
pewa and other ecological and social im¬
peratives (well described by Gary C.
Anderson).8 With the help of Agent
Taliaferro, who blew fluff into the ears of
Washington officials about the desirabil¬
ity of “removing” these Indians to the
west, the Dakota leaders then negotiated
a treaty that provided them nearly a mil¬
lion dollars for lands they could neither
safely occupy nor productively use. As
of the fall of 1837, there were no Dakota
east of the Mississippi to be “removed.”
Prompted and advised by Taliaferro, they
had seen in the removal policy an oppor¬
tunity for large profits at no cost to
themselves. The Dakota were not alone
among Indians of the region who recog¬
nized positive incentives in American in¬
itiatives that others, such as the Chippewa
bands nearby, defined as menacing rather
than beneficial.
Among those Indians who found op¬
portunities in the removal policy were two
groups that could not be touched by
American authority, for they were British
subjects residing in Canada. These volun¬
tary participants came from among the
Hurons of Anderdon Township and the
Christian Indians (i.e., Moravian Dela¬
ware) of New Fairfield, Canada West.
Both represented schismatic divisions of
fully Christianized, literate, self-
governing, predominantly English-speak¬
ing communities organized as townships
in the Province of Canada.9 In both these
cases, the decision to emigrate came after
a long irresolvable factional dispute in¬
volving efforts of the Crown to purchase
large portions of their reserved estates.
Those who elected to emigrate were
groups who favored both the sale and
emigration to the West, moves long
blocked by their rivals.
In neither instance was there a hint of
American influence during the prelimi¬
naries. Instead, responding to solicita¬
tions from related peoples with similar
concerns in the United States, both the
Moravian and the Huron factions ap¬
proached American authorities for per¬
mission to participate in the removal pro¬
gram. For the Moravians, the invitation
had come from the “Missouri Party” of
the Stockbridge-Munsee in eastern Wis¬
consin, a faction which also favored reset¬
tlement.10 Theirs was a considerable feat-
of-arms, certainly demonstrating great
enthusiasm for the journey. For in 1837
some 202 Moravians departed the Thames
Rivet valley in open Mackinaw boats,
rowing their way across the western Great
Lakes, via the Green Bay-Fox-Wisconsin
River waterway to the Mississippi, and
then traveling by steamer to St. Louis and
eastern Kansas. In 1843, fewer Anderdon
Hurons traveled west— making an easier
trip of it by canal boat and river
steamer— with their relatives and Metho¬
dist confreres among the Ohio Wyandot.
In neither instance did all from these
Canadian emigrant parties long remain in
the Indian Territory.11 Many soon leased
3
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
or sold their “head rights” to the land
they had acquired and promptly returned
to Canada.
In contrast were the responses of
several major groups of Indians that
evaded or avoided the plans of Americans
by one device or another. Numerous
Potawatomi, Ohio Ottawa, and smaller
numbers from other tribes slipped across
the international border, using Canada as
a temporary or permanent refuge, while
others moved into northeastern Michigan
or northern Wisconsin. Then there were
more who— like those master escape ar¬
tists, the Winnebago — simply refused to
stay put after being repeatedly trans¬
ported west of the Mississippi. 12
Moving Indians into western lands
selected by Americans for their supposed¬
ly exclusive and permanent occupation
was one matter; keeping them there was
an entirely different and often far more
difficult one. As the exasperated Gover¬
nor Alexander Ramsey complained from
Minnesota Territory in the fall of 1851,
“No argus-eyed vigilance on the part of
officers of the Indian department can
erect a Chinese wall between this tribe [the
equestrian Winnebago] and the in¬
habitants of Wisconsin.”13 His an¬
noyance stemmed not only from the reluc¬
tance of dislocated Indians to stay where
they were replanted, but also from the
willingness of many Americans near their
former homes to tolerate or even ease
their return. Obviously, the removal
policy at this date was out of tune with the
disposition of peregrinating Indians and
with the sentiments of numerous citizens
of Wisconsin and Michigan as well.
Although his grievance was expressed a
year after the scheme for displacing the
Lake Superior Chippewa was conceived
and set in motion, Ramsey had been one
of the four actors most responsible for the
design and through 1851 had actively pro¬
moted efforts to carry it out. If other In¬
dians like the Winnebago could not —
short of building and manning a “Chinese
wall” — be separated from their old
homes, then what sense was there in
Ramsey’s conniving to transport west yet
another large population of manifestly
unwilling, notably ambulatory Indians?
That the Chippewa were to be settled
within the governor’s jurisdiction,
however temporarily, is but part of a
necessarily complex answer to this query.
There were, to be sure, considerable
political and economic rewards to be gain¬
ed simply from the business of transport¬
ing Indians westward, as Ramsey knew,
even should they immediately counter¬
march. Yet this fragment of an explana¬
tion still leaves a larger puzzle. How, in
1850, did a Secretary of the Interior, a
Commissioner of Indians Affairs, a Ter¬
ritorial Governor, and a lowly Indian
Sub-Agent come to concoct a scheme
that, in the end, caused the loss of many
Chippewa lives and yet left the Chippewa
in Wisconsin?
The scheme was designed a dozen years
after Andrew Jackson and other leading
advocates of removal had declared im¬
plementation of the policy a success, “as
having been practically settled.”14 The
United States of 1850 was no longer the
geographically compact republic antici¬
pated in 1803 when Jefferson first con¬
ceived of defusing federal-state tensions
by displacing unwanted Indians into a
vast, newly acquired western territory.
Nor was it the developing nation of 1825,
when a “permissive” policy of commu¬
nity-by-community resettlement was is¬
sued by Executive Proclamation, or that
of 1830, when the formal, comprehensive,
nationwide provisions of the Indian Re¬
moval Act obtained congressional sanc¬
tion.15 By 1850, the ideology of Mani¬
fest Destiny had been announced and af¬
firmed, the Mexican war won, Continen-
talism achieved. No national leader could
any longer confidently believe that con¬
flicts involving culturally alien, not read-
4
Wisconsin Death March
Alexander Ramsey. Governor and Superintendent of Indian Affairs for Minnesota Ter¬
ritory, Alexander Ramsey was a prime mover in the effort to dislodge the Wisconsin
Chippewa bands and to move them and their treaty granted resources into his jurisdic¬
tion. Courtesy of the Minnesota Historical Society.
5
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
ily assimilable Indians might be avoided
by relocating them “permanently” in a
huge western Indian Territory on lands
that would be forever theirs. By 1850, this
was no more a realistic plan than was the
abortive parallel policy of reducing sec¬
tional tensions over slavery by repatriat¬
ing Afro-Americans to Liberia. 16
The political pressure for Indian Re¬
moval was effectively removed by events
of the latter 1840s, which saw the
emergence of a geographically larger,
socially more complex United States. The
new continental nation was far more
diverse ethnically than it had been when
the removal and repatriation schemes
were conceived. Nevertheless, through the
1830s and 1840s the promise of perma¬
nency of tenure on tribal lands in an ex¬
clusively Indian Territory legislated in the
1830 Removal Act (essentially a segre¬
gated native homeland or apartheid
policy) was confirmed in every proper
removal treaty. No such stipulation was
included in those negotiated with the Lake
Superior Chippewa in 1837 and 1842 for
the cession of their lands east of the
Mississippi. The 1850 effort to dislodge
them from Wisconsin and to resettle them
near Sandy Lake — east of the Mississippi
— involved a temporary location only, be¬
cause of their specific history of dealings
with the United States.
Occupying the farthest northwestern
reaches of the Old Northwest, the Lake
Superior Chippewa were the last Indians
of that Territory to have their indepen¬
dence erased by formal treaty agreement
with the United States. Although placed
under nominal American sovereignty in
the 1783 Treaty of Paris and again in the
Treaty of Greenville in 1795, this was a
status unknown to these Indians — who re¬
mained in a position of unqualified
political autonomy. The degree of their
continuing independence was marked by
two developments. Unlike other foraging
bands near them, they had sat out the
War of 1812, declining British invitations
to join in active military operations.
Thus, not considered enemies by Ameri¬
can authorities, they did not participate in
any of the several subsequent peace
treaties pressed on neighboring Indians —
including related Chippewa bands— when
hostilities ended. These postwar compacts
restored the status quo antebellum and re¬
quired a fresh acknowledgement of
American authority in the region, which
the Lake Superior Chippewa had yet to
deliver. Moreover, throughout the re¬
moval era, the Lake Superior Chippewa
continued a century-old pattern of war¬
fare against their Dakota neighbors, as
good a measure as any of their autarchy
and a major concern of Americans at¬
tempting to impose peace on this frontier.
Such concerns were expressed between
1825 and 1827, when three treaties were
required at last to bring all these small,
scattered Chippewa bands under some
measure of American authority.17 These
agreements established the meets and
bounds of Lake Superior Chippewa
lands, declared a “peace” between the
Chippewa and their Indian neighbors,
defined a new subordinate political status
for them, and included provisions for
modest educational services and the pay¬
ment of a minor annual annuity. So far as
American authorities were concerned,
these Chippewa thereby became depen¬
dent client societies.
Yet for a decade these agreements had
little consequence for the daily lives of
these Indians. No lands were ceded, while
the small annuity fund and scanty Indian
Office services provided were delivered
mainly to those Chippewa living near
Sault Ste Marie. For another full decade,
contacts between the Lake Superior Chip¬
pewa and Americans, other than traders
and a few ineffective missionaries, re¬
mained occasional and minor. However,
these three treaties expressed the legal
foundation for the Chippewa’s political
6
Wisconsin Death March
and economic future. The ‘‘tribal” boun¬
dary agreements, for example, were in¬
tended to ease, and were later used for,
land sale negotiations, whereas at Fond
du Lac (Duluth) in 1826, American nego¬
tiators had obtained a vaguely defined
privilege from the Chippewa: ‘‘to search
for, and carry away, any metals or min¬
erals from any part of their country.”18
Sixteen years later, when at La Pointe the
Chippewa were pressed hard to cede their
last remaining lands east of the Missis¬
sippi River, this seemingly minor stipula¬
tion about exploration for mineral sam¬
ples was used as a weapon to defeat their
resistance.
For nearly a decade following ac¬
knowledgement of their dependent status,
few new settlers or entrepreneurs ap¬
peared among them, especially in the
interior away from the watercourses.
Then, in 1836, a variety of developments
prompted both Chippewa leaders and
American authorities to arrange the first
of a series of land cession treaties. Among
the Chippewa, the initiative came, signifi¬
cantly, from those along the upper Missis¬
sippi River, who with other bands were in¬
creasingly disturbed by declining income
from the fur trade and were jealous of
neighboring native peoples receiving
annuities from the United States when
they had none. Taking advantage of
Joseph N. Nicollet’s exploration of the
Mississippi’s headwaters, these Chippewa
sent a delegation with this French
astronomer-mathematician on his return
to Fort Snelling. There Flat Mouth of the
Pillager band near Leech Lake, the most
prominent leader among the Mississippi
bands, declaimed a list of their miseries
and wants. Other tribes, including the
Chippewa of Michigan, he complained to
Agent Lawrence Taliaferro, ‘‘are doing
better than us. They have treaties we hear,
and they have goods and money. . . . We
hear of treaties every day with our Nation
on the lakes and yet not a plug of tobacco
reaches us on the Mississippi ... we wish
to know when we might have our expecta¬
tions realized.”19
Unknown to the Chippewa, American
authorities were already moving to ar¬
range a cession of portions of their lands.
That February the Senate had directed the
Executive Branch to arrange a purchase
of tracts north of the Wisconsin River.
Seen from Washington, the aim was to
obtain control of the shores of Lake
Michigan and the Upper Mississippi, both
to make the whole course of that stream
the ‘‘barrier” between Indians and the
organized states and territories and to
gain legitimate access to the vast pine
forests of the region.20 The latter
represented a legislative response to the
growing demand for pine lumber to build
the proliferating new towns of the Missis¬
sippi Valley, a demand that had far out¬
distanced the supply of reasonably priced
lumber shipped from western New York
and Pennsylvania. Moreover, on the
edges of the Chippewa’s pine forests pro¬
per, a coterie of long-resident entrepre¬
neurs, recognizing a profitable new
market when they heard of it, were
already maneuvering to obtain private
control of these valuable Chippewa
resources. These were the old-line prin¬
cipals in the fur trade, the heirs and
assigns of the dismantled American Fur
Company, as well as smaller independent
traders, led by such notables as Hercules
L. Dousman, Samuel C. Stambaugh, H. H.
Sibley, William Aitken, and Alexis
Bailey.
For a number of years, these experi¬
enced local residents had been exploiting
their personal ties among the Chippewa
and other tribes, obtaining from them
leases for sawmill sites and timber cutting
rights in “Indian country.”21 Operating
in the gray areas of Federal Indian law,
their activities were scarcely slowed by an
imperative directive from the Commis¬
sioner of Indian Affairs prohibiting such
7
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
private contracts. In early 1837, the Com¬
missioner dispatched a trusted investi¬
gator, Major Ethan Allen Hitchcock, to
evaluate the situation. He reported that
water-power sites and locations for dams
and impoundments along the streams in
the pinery region, vital for timbering,
were few in number. Hence, unregulated,
the American Fur Company’s successors
could quickly obtain exclusive control of
timber resources, which would block
broader development of the region. From
Fort Snelling, Agent Taliaferro reinforced
Hitchcock’s reports, emphasizing — so he
claimed — the opposition of these en¬
trepreneurs to government interests and
the growing antagonism of the Chippewa
to them. Later, Wisconsin’s territorial
governor, Henry Dodge, expressed addi¬
tional reasons for defining a serious threat
in the efforts of this cabal: they were, he
charged, loyal to British interests.22 Thus,
in addition to the concern with maintain¬
ing the government’s ascendancy in
managing Indians and the need to pro¬
mote extraction of pine timber vital for
regional development, two Jacksonian
specters hovered over the preliminaries to
the Chippewa’s first land cession: the
threats of private monopoly and of in¬
creased British incursions into the econ¬
omy of the Northwest frontier. Under¬
neath, however, the real threat was one of
old-resident, locally influential indi¬
viduals to the established Democratic pa¬
tronage system, interests that threatened
the flow of political benefits to the faith¬
ful.
In May, 1837, Governor Dodge received
instructions for this first Lake Superior
Chippewa land sale. Therein the Commis¬
sioner of Indian Affairs narrowly em¬
phasized to him the importance of acquir¬
ing the pine lands but forbade recognition
of any existing private leases for lumber¬
ing, which in the end only provoked a
land-rush for key sites even before the
treaty was ratified (Fig. I).23 Although a
comprehensive national removal policy
was then being implemented, no hint of
such a provision was contained in these
instructions or expressed during actual
negotiations. On the contrary, Governor
Dodge was directed to press for use of the
proceeds for long-term local Chippewa
social and economic development on their
remaining lands in Wisconsin and Minne¬
sota and to determine whether the western
Chippewa bands would allow the United
States to resettle the Ottawa and Chip¬
pewa of Michigan among them. From the
perspective of Washington and the of¬
ficials of Wisconsin Territory, there was
yet no need to bring about the dislocation
and westward “removal” of these Chip¬
pewa bands. Instead, they were expected
eventually to resettle voluntarily among
their kin to the north and west.24
Practical arrangements for this parley
created immediate and long-range prob¬
lems. Since the Lake Superior Chippewa
had been in an administrative never-never
land (their villages were located between
and remote from the Indian agencies at
Sault Ste Marie and Fort Snelling), they
had never been effectively served by any
Indian agent.25 The latter place was con¬
venient to Governor Dodge’s offices in
Mineral Point, close to the Mississippi
River traffic-way in extreme southwestern
Wisconsin. But his selection of Fort Snell¬
ing as the treaty grounds placed ar¬
rangements for the meeting in the ener¬
getic hands of Agent Taliaferro. Talia¬
ferro was rarely slack in promoting the in¬
terests of Indians within his jurisdiction-
in this instance the Chippewa bands of the
Upper Mississippi — nor reluctant to
thwart the influence of his rival at the
Mackinac Island-Sault Ste Marie Agency,
Henry R. Schoolcraft. Thus from the
start, the Mississippi bands, only a small
fraction of whose lands were involved in
this negotiation, were administratively
much favored.
The second cluster of Chippewa in-
Wisconsin Death March
Henry Dodge. When governor of Wisconsin Territory in 1837, Henry Dodge negotiated
the Treaty of 1837, and later defended the Chippewas’ rights under the 1842 treaty to oc¬
cupy and to exploit their ceded lands for “many years. ’’ Courtesy of the State Historical
Society of Wisconsin.
volved were from bands on the Lake
Superior shoreline, and none of their
lands were ceded that year. Lastly came
the interior Wisconsin Chippewa of the
Mississippi River’s eastern watershed,
whose lands were on the block that sum¬
mer. These interior bands did not receive
an official announcement of the treaty,
and few of their leaders arrived at Fort
Snelling in time to participate in or benefit
immediately from the arrangements. This
happened because neither of the two
newly appointed sub-agents dispatched to
carry word of the meetings — Miles M.
9
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Vineyard from Crow Wing above Fort
Snelling and Daniel P. Bushnell from La
Pointe — visited the interior Wisconsin
bands. Indeed, a year later Bushnell still
hardly knew the locations of the bands he
served or the boundaries of his sub¬
agency.26
Although in earlier treaties the Chip¬
pewa had been identified as a “tribe,” the
treaty sought at the confluence of the
Mississippi and St. Peter’s rivers in July
1837, was negotiated with a new, Ameri¬
can-conceived political-administrative fic¬
tion, the “Chippewa Nation.” The use of
“nation” did not denote any sense of
political sovereignty. Instead it was used
as a means of dealing with the several
Chippewa bands collectively. This novel
appellation allowed American authorities
to negotiate with some of their delegates
as if they represented all and to treat the
whole of the lands they occupied as a “na¬
tional” estate, a concept alien to tradi¬
tional Chippewa thinking. But while the
leaders from the bands on the Lake Su¬
perior shore demurred, on the principle
that the tract being ceded were not theirs
to sell, the powerful chiefs from the
Mississippi bands made no attempt to
disabuse American negotiators of this
10
Wisconsin Death March
Chief Buffalo (Psheke). Old Psheke of La Pointe, the senior leader and speaker of the
Lake Superior shore line Chippewa bands, led the opposition to resettlement in the
west and the drive for reservations in Wisconsin. The marble original of this portrait
bust was carved from life by Francis Vincenti in Washington, 1855. Chief Buffalo was
then about ninety-six years old, and he died later the same year. Courtesy of the Archi¬
tect of the Capitol, Washington, D.C.
misconception. Indeed, since they had lit¬
tle to lose and much to gain, they domi¬
nated the proceedings, intimidating their
kin from east of the Mississippi. The few
leaders from interior Wisconsin, whose
lands were being disposed of, arrived late
and scarcely raised their voices.27
On the American side of the conference
table, although instructed to obtain an
outright sale of the whole region, Gover¬
nor Dodge repeatedly said he wanted only
control of the pine forests. Recognizing
an opening when they saw it, the Chip¬
pewa instructed their official speakers,
11
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Magegabow (The Trap) and the elder
Bugonageshig (the elder Hole in the Day)
in their reply.28 On July 27, Magegabow,
in flowery words embellished by symbolic
gestures, tried to communicate the
Mississippi bands’ chiefs’ interim
negotiating position. The Chippewa, he
proclaimed, would sell the particular
lands wanted by Americans, but they
wished “to hold on to a tree where we get
our living, & to reserve the streams where
we go to drink the water that gives us
life.” The Secretary recording these
debates, Verplanck Van Antwerp, was
nonplussed, noting in the margin of the
minutes, “This of course is nonsense ... I
presume it to mean that the Indians wish
to reserve the privilege of hunting, fish¬
ing, etc. on the lands.” Clearly, this was
not the American intention. Just as clear¬
ly, the Chippewa leaders understood their
adversaries’ aims of acquiring clear
ownership of the whole tract.
Meanwhile, Magegabow continued,
laying an oak bough on the table before
Governor Dodge and saying, this is “the
tree we wish to reserve. ... It is a dif¬
ferent kind of tree from the one you wish
to get from us.”29 Although these
Mississippi bands’ spokesmen had no di¬
rect interest in the lands being sold, they
were declaring their willingness to sell
pinelands (useless to them) and their
desire to reserve from the sale the
deciduous forests and the waterways,
which were of particular value to the in¬
terior Chippewa as the game-poor co¬
niferous forests were not. Certainly the
Mississippi bands’ leaders understood the
American aim to purchase the use and oc¬
cupancy rights to the whole region out¬
right, for the governor had repeatedly ex¬
plained this both before and after Mage¬
gabow’ s speech. What they were doing
was hedging, inserting a qualification into
the official record, one they could later
use to dodge undesirable ramifications of
the agreement or to reopen negotiations.30
The participating Chippewa finally ap¬
proved an outright sale of the whole tract.
Notably, no mention of removal from the
lands was inserted into the agreement;
neither had there been any discussion of
this matter. Instead, the treaty awarded
the Chippewa the temporary privilege of
residing on and taking their subsistence
from the habitat ceded, “during the
pleasure of the President.” With these
words the Senate delegated to the ex¬
ecutive branch the necessary authority to
determine when, in the future, Chippewa
rights to occupy and to exploit the pine
lands should end. Certainly, the Chip¬
pewa, at the time, construed these expres¬
sions to mean a very long time. Since they
could see few Americans in their lands
and since it was to be years before their
basic adaptations were much disturbed by
aliens there, they had no reason to think
otherwise. Indeed, American officials at
the time expressed no definite ideas about
when this privilege would be withdrawn.
However, an eyewitness to the negotia¬
tions recorded a foreboding judgement
about the “pleasure of the President”
phrasing, not about the timing, but about
the way this privilege would ultimately be
withdrawn. Writing to his superior in
Boston, missionary W. T. Boutwell pre¬
dicted “trouble with the Chipys. before
five years should they attempt to remove
them . . . the Inds. have no idea of leav¬
ing their country while they live — they
know nothing of the duration of a man’s
pleasure.”31 An experienced observer of
Chippewa ways, Boutwell was comment¬
ing on several social facts. The scattered,
politically decentralized Chippewa, espe¬
cially those in Wisconsin, would not feel
themselves bound to contracts made by
distant chiefs not their own, and they
would likely resist a later order to aban¬
don the ceded lands issued by any remote
authority figure such as the President.
But so far as American authorities were
concerned, a firm agreement had been
12
Wisconsin Death March
reached: the lands wanted had been ac¬
quired by outright purchase, while con¬
tinued Chippewa use of the area was im¬
permanent. So, too, were realized certain
of the “expectations” expressed by Flat
Mouth the previous year. Those Chip¬
pewa at the treaty grounds received a
modest amount of goods, and the bands
later got the benefits of a substantial
twenty-year term annuity. For a time the
annual payments — whether goods or
money — were shared among some of the
constituent bands of the fictive “Chip¬
pewa nation,” especially those from the
Upper Mississippi and from interior Wis¬
consin. Although few of the latter had
participated in the negotiations, after pro¬
testing the next year, they finally accepted
the treaty’s terms when assured they
would share in these annual payments.32
The Lake Superior shoreline bands,
however, by their own choice were ex¬
cluded from the annual compensation.
Nonetheless, a few of the latter were soon
issuing complaints like those of Flat
Mouth in 1836, expressing envy of those
bands who were receiving payments from
the United States and indicating a disposi¬
tion to sell additional lands in exchange
for annuities. Some American authorities,
too, were concerned with this disparity,
particularly because the lakeshore Chip¬
pewa still regularly visited British posts to
receive “presents,” stipends supposedly
“5 times” greater than the annual per
capita payments from the 1837 treaty.33
Meanwhile, in the interior, the lumber
rush was on. Hardly had the treaty been
signed when the old resident entrepre¬
neurs, whose maneuvers had helped pre¬
cipitate the cession in the first place,
flooded into the pine lands, there pre¬
empting prime mill sites and timber tracts
well before the treaty’s ratification, land
surveys, or public sales.
The resentments of Lake Superior-
shore Chippewa were exacerbated by a
decision reached by American authorities.
Although the large, long established
traders lobbied for Fort Snelling or —
ominously— Sandy Lake, as the point of
distribution for annuity goods, and while
the Chippewa recipients themselves pre¬
ferred several locations convenient to
their villages, the Office of Indian Affairs
fixed on La Pointe as the one place where
the Chippewa had to gather yearly to take
delivery of their treaty dividends. There¬
fore, for several years the lakeshore bands
had to stand by and watch as those from
the west and south assembled amidst them
to receive payments. Certainly, significant
parts of the goods and money delivered
initially to the visiting Chippewa delega¬
tions quickly flowed, through long-
established kin ties and reciprocal ex¬
change networks, into the hands of the
Lake Superior hosts. But this could not
have satisfied the chiefs of the lakeshore
villages, who witnessed their counter¬
parts, especially the notably imperious
and ostentatious leaders of the Mississippi
bands, receive recognition and rewards
denied to them. Thus more fuel was
added to a growing discord, which soon
pitted all Wisconsin Chippewa against
those from the Upper Mississippi.34
However, at the time, no one recog¬
nized the truly hazardous economic
transformation then emerging. For many
decades, these Chippewa, as specialized
winter trappers, had been involved in flex¬
ible, personalized, predictable exchange
relationships with individual traders. Now
they were collectively dependent on a
complex, ill-organized, impersonal fed¬
eral appropriation-purchase-transporta¬
tion-accounting-delivery system, a cum¬
bersome arrangement that rarely brought
payments due to a place on a date com¬
patible with their own seasonal subsis¬
tence work. Over the next decade the
Chippewa learned that this system seldom
worked satisfactorily: long delays and in¬
terference in late fall wild-rice gathering
and winter hunting, not to mention the
13
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
costs of long distance travel to the pay¬
ment grounds, were the rule. On the other
hand, there were unanticipated benefits
from the treaty. As the clear-cutting of
pine forests progressed, the size of the
ecotone — the pine forest-prairie “edge”
where white-tailed deer flourished — was
vastly increased. Since deer were the most
desirable and the prime source of food for
the interior Chippewa, as the size of the
herds increased the subsistence value to
them of the lands they had ceded was also
enhanced. This ramification was precisely
contrary to standing American precon¬
ceptions: that the advance of “civiliza¬
tion” would cause a decline of available
game and the voluntary migration of the
“primitive Indian hunter.”35
Nonetheless, although the issue had not
been raised during the 1837 negotiations
or by the Senate in ratifying this accord,
Indian removal was in the air, for the
resettlement of Indians from other parts
of the Old Northwest was then being
pressed vigorously. In response to rumors
of such dislocations and reactions from
the Chippewa, local Indian agents regu¬
larly advised their supervisors that the
Lake Superior Chippewa would resist this
threat with all riieans available to them.
There was, simultaneously, little or no in¬
dication from neighboring citizens that
moving the Chippewa was a desirable tac¬
tic.36
But these Chippewa had to cope with
the real danger of treaty stipulated reset¬
tlement in the west during September,
1842. That month the same three clusters
of bands that had negotiated the 1837
agreement gathered at La Pointe to de¬
bate a second cession, this one involving
all remaining Chippewa territory in
Wisconsin and Michigan’s Upper Penin¬
sula. Again the Americans sought, not
agricultural lands, but control of a
valuable natural resource, the copper-ore
rich tracts along the Lake Superior shore¬
line.37 The treaty dealings at La Pointe
were in striking contrast to the 1837 coun¬
cil. At the earlier sessions, negotiations
were, by the standards of the day, con¬
ducted in an open and aboveboard fash¬
ion, despite some manifest miscommuni-
cation and confusion. In 1842, the meet¬
ings provoked angry discord between
opposed parties and a lasting controversy.
Before the final 1842 treaty document
was signed, the chief American negotia¬
tor, Robert Stuart, had to engage in a
variety of tricky tactical moves and coer¬
cive threats to force through an agree¬
ment. Moreover, to secure the consent of
the parties most imperiled — Wisconsin’s
interior and the Wisconsin-Michigan
Lake Superior shoreline bands— he had to
issue firm verbal commitments, explicit
stipulations not written into the formal
agreement. Stuart (long a senior agent of
the American Fur Company, recently ap¬
pointed to succeed Henry R. Schoolcraft
as head of the Mackinac Superinten¬
dency) faced an unusually complex and
contentious situation. In addition to his
duty to the United States, he had firmly in
mind the fiscal needs of his former em¬
ployer, John Jacob Astor. Moreover, he
confronted an unruly assembly of diverse
and generally opposed interests: old
trading firms and newly established ones,
several denominations of missionaries,
mining entrepreneurs, the culturally
marginal “half-breed” community, com¬
mercial fishermen, and— by no means the
least divided or quarrelsome — the Chip¬
pewa themselves.38
The latter were now separating deci¬
sively into two divisions, those from the
Upper Mississippi, and those who oc¬
cupied the lands ceded in 1837 and the
tracts to be sold at this meeting. More¬
over, because control of the last of the
Chippewa’s Wisconsin lands was at issue,
all involved were possessed of more than
the usual windfall mania, which often
stimulated dramatic confrontations at In¬
dian treaty proceedings during this era.39
14
Wisconsin Death March
Thus in October the parties gathered in a
variously expectant, threatened, or angry
mood. Most of them, “who otherwise
before-time was but poor and needy, by
these windfalles and unexpected cheats”
eagerly anticipated obtaining some
benefit, security if not wealth.40 They
milled about for days and nights eager to
shake free of the great treaty tree-each in
his own direction— some of its perennial
fruits.
The instructions Stuart received from
Commissioner Thomas H. Crawford were
of a sort to vex or inflame most of these
interest groups. He could allow no pay¬
ment of traders’ claims on the treaty
grounds, a provision subsequently soft¬
ened. Neither personal reservations for
half-breeds or “friends” of the Indians,
nor band reservations for the Lake Supe¬
rior Chippewa were allowed. Most impor¬
tant for the future of these Indians was
the unyielding two-stage requirement for
their dislocation and resettlement. Those
Chippewa immediately affected offered
no opposition to the first of these, the
plan for their immediate abandonment of
those particular tracts containing copper
ore. Neither did they oppose the cession
of nearly all their remaining lands. They
demanded, however, several small band
or community reservations, both within
the area ceded in 1837 and the lakeshore
region now on the table for disposition.
Stuart’s instructions about the removal
provision, however, were firm. The Chip¬
pewa would have now to agree one day to
abandon the land sold and to resettle in
the remaining “national” lands west of
Lake Superior, that is, in the territory
of the rivals, the Mississippi bands. But
the Commissioner of Indian Affairs had
stressed, and Stuart in council repeatedly
emphasized, that this second step migra¬
tion would not be required for a “con¬
siderable time,” not until “policy” re¬
quired the President to call for their
relocation.41
On that issue— the timing of their
resettlement— the fate of the negotiations
hung. While Stuart readily disposed of the
traders’ demands and those of the half-
breeds, the removal issue so threatened
the Wisconsin bands that they resisted
obstinately. It was then that Stuart
resorted to a heavy-handed deception,
claiming that the Chippewa had already
ceded the mineral tracts in 1826, an
allegation that the Chippewa delegates
(and their American allies) denied. Ulti¬
mately, to obtain substantial support for
the treaty from those nominally in control
of the lands, he introduced a decision¬
making novelty— majority rule. The lake-
shore and interior bands, relying on the
traditional requirement of a consensus,
were thereby outmaneuvered. Unaffected
by the cession or the removal provisions,
and in line to reap yet more benefits at no
cost to themselves, the eager chiefs of the
Mississippi bands quickly gave Stuart
their “votes.” They had no more inten¬
tion of welcoming the Wisconsin Chip¬
pewa into their lands than the latter had
of moving there. For entirely different
reasons, so, too, did the small Catholic
and Methodist mission communities on
the Keweenaw Peninsula cast their
“votes” for Stuart’s proposals. This
minority of christianized Chippewa be¬
lieved that they could avoid removal by
becoming landowning, tax-paying, farm¬
ing citizens of the State of Michigan.42
Even so the Wisconsin bands balked
and protested. Stuart then inserted into
the oral record a critical clarification and
stipulation. Yes, he and the Chippewa
soon agreed, they would immediately
have to give up occupancy and use of the
copper ore tracts proper. Additionally,
some day in the future the President
would likely require the Chippewa to
abandon all the lands being ceded and to
settle elsewhere. The question pressed by
the Chippewa chiefs was— when? In the
distant future, replied Stuart. Be more
15
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Robert and Elizabeth Stuart. When the Wisconsin Chippewa were pressured to leave
Wisconsin in the m id-1 840s, Superintendent Robert Stuart defended their right to re¬
main for fifty to one hundred years, an explicit commitment he had made while
negotiating the 1842 treaty. Courtesy of the State Archives of Michigan.
specific, demanded the suspicious chiefs.
Not during your lifetimes, nor those of
your children, not for fifty to one hun¬
dred years, were Stuart’s phrasings as
recorded by different observers. Indeed,
Stuart himself later repeatedly defended
the rights of these Chippewa under such
mutual understandings when others vio¬
lated the explicit assurances this tough-
minded Scot had publicly given.43
16
Wisconsin Death March
Nonetheless, although most of the Wis¬
consin chiefs then capitulated, several re¬
mained unbelievers and refused to place
their marks on the treaty document. In
this manner was created the basis for a
later, prolonged, unresolved dispute over
the meaning of the 1842 agreement, a
controversy over the issue of timing of
Chippewa removal, the first necessary in¬
gredient for the trouble that erupted eight
years later. This controversy raged over
what the Chippewa and their supporters
(including Stuart) saw as premature
demands for these Indians to move. No
further condition, such as the Chippewa’s
“continued good behavior,” had been
discussed during the debates over terms,
nor was any such condition mentioned in
the years immediately following.44
However, for more than a year before
the 1842 treaty, a few key actors in
Wisconsin Territory had regularly misin¬
formed authorities in Washington to the
effect that the Chippewa were eager both
to cede their lands and to resettle west of
Lake Superior. Together with his allies,
Governor James D. Doty— who had strong
personal and political interests in develop¬
ing the new Northern Indian Territory in
Minnesota and the Dakotas— was first
among these promoters.45 Superintendent
Stuart, following his first visits to his new
charges, particularly after his exertions in
extracting a land cession agreement from
them, knew better. When the few advo¬
cating Chippewa removal continued their
efforts, Stuart stood in opposition, argu¬
ing he had personally and officially prom¬
ised them no removal for many years. Of
greater practical importance, he pointed
out, there were no obvious incentives for
the Chippewa to make this move, for they
had ample supplies of fish, game, and
wild rice in their present locations and
were experiencing few problems with the
influx of Americans in the region.46 In ad¬
dition, the Wisconsin bands were by no
means eager to settle among those on the
Mississippi, who twice had been deployed
against them to their disadvantage, espe¬
cially because they knew that the remain¬
ing part of the “national” estate was an
impoverished area.
Chippewa resistance to removal was re¬
inforced because, as they understood the
1842 treaty, they could not be obligated to
give up use and occupancy of the ceded
lands for many years, and this construc¬
tion was championed by numerous Amer¬
icans directly familiar with its negotia¬
tion. Similarly, the tactics used against
them in the 1837 and 1842 negotiations
had led to increased solidarity between
Wisconsin’s interior and lakeshore bands.
Facing a common threat in their politi¬
cally altered environment, they began re¬
sponding with better coordinated opposi¬
tion. Prompt organization of their dissent
was imperative, for within a year follow¬
ing the treaty, new pressures developed
for their immediate dislocation. Despite
the early opposition of Superintendent
Stuart, Commissioner of Indian Affairs
Crawford, Governor Dodge, and others,
who variously argued that immediate re¬
moval was against the spirit of the treaty
expressed in explicit verbal stipulations or
that it would not benefit the Chippewa,
this pestering continued and increased in
strength. Wisconsin Chippewa opposition
came into clear and successful focus in
1847, when the United States made an
abortive effort to secure the cession of the
mineral-rich north shore of Lake Supe¬
rior.47 Knowing how much Americans
valued control of that region, the Wiscon¬
sin Chippewa used as a bargaining token
their rights to this— for their economic
purposes— barren landscape. Without a
treaty-guaranteed right to remain in Wis¬
consin, the Chippewa would have nothing
to do with negotiations for the cession of
the north shore, which they managed to
block until 1854, when their demands for
reservations were finally met.48
When efforts to talk the Chippewa into
17
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
migration continued following the unsuc¬
cessful 1847 treaty councils, these com¬
munities stepped up their political opposi¬
tion. Meanwhile, they proceeded along
self-defined paths toward economic im¬
provement in place, irrespective of what
views American authorities held for their
future. Then, in early August, 1847,
Commissioner Medill signaled the pre¬
liminary design for their removal. The La
Pointe sub-agency was to be closed, its
functions shifted west of the Mississippi
to Crow Wing even if efforts to secure the
north shore of Lake Superior were unsuc¬
cessful. In the latter instance, relocation
of the La Pointe sub-agency and its ser¬
vices, so believed the Commissioner,
would have the effect of luring some
Wisconsin Chippewa west, easing the way
for the removal of the remainder. Later
Medill explained the government’s plans
for resettling all Wisconsin Chippewa that
coming spring to R. Jones, Adjutant Gen¬
eral of the Army. The Chippewa were not
alone in Medills design: the Menomini,
Stockbridge, and those Winnebago still in
Wisconsin (then near statehood) were also
targeted, together with the Winnebago in
the old “Neutral Ground’’ in the north¬
eastern part of the new state of Iowa.
Together, these several relocations were
designed to clear Wisconsin, Iowa, and
southern Minnesota of their remaining In¬
dians, leaving a broad corridor open for
American movement westward, between
the existing Indian Territory southwest of
the Missouri River and a viable new
Northern Indian Territory in north-
central Minnesota.
While these distant plans were being
laid, the Lake Superior Chippewa follow¬
ed their own variegated agenda of eco¬
nomic adaptation. The 1842 treaty had
added a second valuable term annuity to
their annual income. Over the course of
twenty-five years, they would share with
the Mississippi bands yearly an additional
$12,500 in coin, an equal amount in hard
goods, rations, and consumables, and
over $6,000 for the services of black¬
smiths, farmers, teachers, and other arti¬
sans. But this was only a small fraction of
their annual needs, so these Indians pro¬
ceeded to make up the balance by their
own enterprise. Fur- trapping continued
to be of small importance, while on the
lakeshore, Chippewa men were increas¬
ingly engaged in commercial fishing,
either with their own equipment or as
seasonal labor for Americans. As min¬
ing developed, numerous Chippewa men
transported supplies, acted as guides, cut
and supplied mine timber, or delivered
venison and fish. Intensive gathering went
on, and gardening increased, particularly
of root crops; this was largely the work of
women, who traded surplus vegetable
foods and otherwise served the mining
crews. In the interior, where the timber in¬
dustry was expanding along the lower
river valleys, similar changes in economic
behavior occurred, attuned to the labor
and material requirements of that extrac¬
tive industry.49
Some few Chippewa, particularly those
on the Keweenaw Peninsula, as well as at
the Reverend L. H. Wheeler’s experimen¬
tal station at Bad River, even approx¬
imated the old expectation of ill-informed
American philanthropists by engaging in
sometimes productive, male-managed,
animal-powered small farming, although
most others strongly resisted this novelty,
risky at best in these latitudes. The
substantial development, notably, lay in
individual wage work and small-scale
commercial enterprise, primarily in ex¬
tractive industries, not in agriculture. But
of greater long-range importance was the
growing recognition among the local
American population— most of whom
were entrepreneurs, managers, or labor¬
ers, nearly all male, not under-capitalized
small farmers with families seeking cheap
land — that the Chippewa were delivering
services and goods important to their
18
Wisconsin Death March
enterprises. The Chippewa were creating
tight social and economic bonds with
potential allies in their immediate neigh¬
borhood.50
Thus, by early 1848 one necessary ante¬
cedent of a high stress, forced relocation
was firmly in place: there was a pro¬
longed, irresolvable dispute between
Chippewa leaders and American national
authorities over the right of the latter to
demand and enforce abandonment of the
ceded lands. Since Wisconsin’s statehood
was imminent and its laws would soon be
extended over the area inhabited by the
Chippewa, Commissioner Medill made a
firm decision: they would have to leave.
When rumors of government planning for
this step reached the Chippewa they
responded with a variety of political
counter-moves. Some started asserting
their “right” to reservations, claiming
these had been promised during the 1842
negotiations.51 But planning for reloca¬
tion went on, with the 1849 establishment
of Fort Gaines (in 1850, renamed Fort
Ripley) on the upper Mississippi, and the
reshuffling of agents and agencies aimed
at concentrating the Chippewa on their
remaining “national” lands in northern
Minnesota. Chippewa opposition hard¬
ened as well, expressed in systematic lob¬
bying in Wisconsin, Michigan, and Wash¬
ington for the right to remain on small
reserved parcels within the bounds of
their old estate. A few on the Upper
Peninsula, aided by their missionaries,
started preempting and purchasing public
lands, thereby acquiring the status of tax-
paying citizens under state law.52 Mean¬
while, others sent delegations to plead
their case in Washington.53
The Chippewa delegations to the na¬
tion’s capital did not find an attentive
reception, for throughout 1849 and 1850
Congress and President Taylor were pre¬
occupied with larger issues such as in¬
corporating the far West into the Ameri¬
can state and the associated crisis regard¬
ing the extension of slavery in new ter¬
ritories. Nevertheless, despite the un¬
concern with the desires of several thou¬
sand Indians in an already established
Free State, various political-administra¬
tive developments combined to create a
national and a local context for what
Methodist Missionary John H. Pitezel, an
eyewitness on the Lake Superior scene,
subsequently called a “chain of distress¬
ing evils.”54
President Taylor’s patronage sweep
through the positions controlled by his of¬
fice created the official team directly
responsible for the Chippewa’s winter
disaster. Since the Indian Office had been
transferred to the new Department of the
Interior, relations with these Indians were
brought under the supervision of a Taylor
loyalist, Thomas Ewing of Ohio, a man
more concerned with problems of the dis¬
tant West than with those in northern
Wisconsin. Secretary Ewing, however,
strongly favoring the trading firms, kept a
firm grip on the details of managing the
Indian business, causing the new Com¬
missioner, the Kentucky Whig Orlando
Brown, much frustration. The third
member of the administrative chain
responsible for arranging the attempt to
move the Chippewa out of Wisconsin was
the Pennsylvania Whig, Alexander Ram¬
sey, who in March, 1849, was appointed
Governor and Superintendent of Indian
Affairs in the newly formed Minnesota
Territory. This trio had little experience in
the management of relations with In¬
dians, but the team was not yet complete.
It was awaiting its fourth, junior but key,
member, Sub-Agent John S. Watrous.55
Until this time, the relocation of the
Lake Superior Chippewa had been little
more than an administrative intention; no
specific mechansim for accomplishing this
aim had been created. Neither had there
been an immediate impetus for translating
thoughts into deeds. Excepting the Lake
Superior shoreline and the river valleys
19
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
traversing the pine lands, most of the
ceded Chippewa lands were entirely un¬
populated by Americans. The fact that
the Americans residing nearby were al¬
most entirely male likely reduced rather
than increased local support for removal.
However, there was simply too little “set¬
tlement” anywhere to create local “pres¬
sure” for removal.56 In addition, al¬
though they adamantly held to their right
to remain in Wisconsin, the Chippewa
had not forced the dispute to a confronta¬
tion point. Instead, still holding title to
the north shore mineral lands, they re¬
mained pacific and reasonable, employing
lobbying and bargaining tactics, seeking
approval for reservations within their old
estate.
The thrust, but not an explicit mecha¬
nism of Chippewa removal, derived from
the appointment of Governor Ramsey,
who was the titular head of the Whig
party in Minnesota Territory as well as
Governor. Being one of the few Whigs in
a frontier Democratic stronghold and ex¬
pected to deliver economic favors to party
loyalists, his position in this new Territory
was particularly difficult. Thus, concerned
with patronage and with establishing a
firm presence in his new office, when
counseled by a powerful Minnesota
trader, H. H. Sibley, Ramsey could see
that the Wisconsin Chippewa presented
an opportunity. Obtaining their removal
meant also transferring their large annual
annuities and the numerous salaried jobs
associated with their management into his
superintendency. As well as moving an
important patronage resource out of a
Democratic state into his hands, the reset¬
tlement would also have meant a policy
coup, a major step toward rejuvenating
the floundering plans for a Northern In¬
dian Territory.57
The April 22, 1850, appointment of
John S. Watrous as the new Chippewa
sub-agent added a critical figure, a man
with at least some experience in the region
and among these Indians, and one with a
profound vested interest in seeing them
dislodged. Originally from Ashtabula,
Ohio, Watrous had arrived at La Pointe
in 1847 hoping to make his fortune in the
Indian trade, in which he was unsuccess¬
ful. Something of a political chameleon,
in early April he left his desk in the
Wisconsin State Assembly — where he had
briefly served a Democrat constituency in
the northwestern part of the state— to
travel east in search of greater opportu¬
nity, likely drawn there by news of the
Presidential order revoking the Chip¬
pewa’s 1837 and 1842 treaty privileges. In
Washington he presented himself to in¬
fluential friends of his family as a staunch
Ohio Whig and as a man experienced in
dealing with the Chippewa.58
Watrous was a man with plans — for
himself and for dispossessing these In¬
dians. He was soon dispatched to his new
post carrying Commissioner Brown’s of¬
ficial, public orders to bring about the im¬
mediate movement of the sub-agency into
Minnesota Territory, as well as a covert
scheme for dislodging the reluctant, wary
Chippewa. Thus was combined an ongo¬
ing dispute over a treaty and several in¬
fluential local actors— men with vested in¬
terests in securing a removal. A potential
disaster lay waiting only the major con¬
frontation that the Chippewa had been
avoiding. Guided and supported by his
superiors in the administrative hierarchy,
particularly by Governor Ramsey, Wat¬
rous soon manufactured this confronta¬
tion.59
The public version of these plans
specified a summer, 1850, timing for the
relocation. However, aside from closing
down the sub-agency’s operations in
Wisconsin and Michigan’s Upper Penin¬
sula, Watrous did little to bring about the
move that early. Indeed, there is no sug¬
gestion anyone believed the Chippewa
would cooperate had such an attempt
been made.60 Aside from Ewing, Brown,
20
Wisconsin Death March
Ramsey, and Watrous, few if any others
knew of the covert, contingency design,
timed for a tricky, hazardous, early
winter dislocation. In any respect, news of
the President’s executive order withdraw¬
ing the privilege of occupying the ceded
lands spread rapidly, and the reaction was
equally swift. While the Chippewa and
their American allies began mobilizing for
political resistance, there was also much
demoralization. Of those who had been
farming, many would not plant crops that
spring; many more spent long periods in
councils debating how to avoid resettle¬
ment. The time and energy spent in politi¬
cal agitation and the wasted economic in¬
activity resulted in decreased food pro¬
duction that summer and fall. The Chip¬
pewa became even more dependent on
government rations, which contributed to
the winter debacle.
Protestant and Catholic missionaries
associated with the Indians were divided
in their reactions. Being largely dependent
on federal funds for their operations, they
had to tread lightly; the position most
commonly expressed was one of ambiva¬
lent neutrality, and none rose to a heroic
defense of the Chippewa. On the one
hand, they deferred to presidential
authority; on the other, they had to con¬
sider what they saw as their respon¬
sibilities to the Chippewa, which were,
mainly, to see to the future of themselves
and their schools and missions among the
Indians. Most commonly, while not ac¬
tively supporting or opposing relocation,
they would not counsel the Indians to
move or stay.61 In the end, only a few
became active advocates of resettlement.
The Reverend Sherman Hall at La Pointe
was one. Soon after taking office,
Watrous acquired Hall’s loyalty with the
promise of an important job at the pro¬
posed new Indian boarding school in Min¬
nesota.62
However hesitantly, soon some mis¬
sionaries quietly began aiding the Chip¬
pewa in framing their petitions and help¬
ing to mobilize help from other Ameri¬
cans in the region. One active and effec¬
tive supporter was Cyrus Mendenhall, a
mining entrepreneur associated with the
Methodist Episcopal Mission Society,
who on an inspection trip along the Lake
Superior shore in June, 1850, circulated a
memorial among Americans calling for
the recall of the removal order. Most mer¬
chants, mine foremen, lumbermen, and
other influential citizens between Sault
Ste Marie and La Pointe responded to
Mendenhall’s appeal, which was subse¬
quently delivered to Congress and of¬
ficials in Washington. Mendenhall kept
up the pressure and was soon joined by
the Reverend S. B. Treat (Secretary of the
American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign Missions). Their lobbying effort
grew in force and did not end until after
removal order was withdrawn two years
later.
Indeed, from the start there was no
evidence of local public support for the
Chippewa’s removal. Regional newspa¬
pers, echoing and reinforcing the sen¬
timents of their readers, regularly criti¬
cized the President’s order and both the
motives for and the tactics employed in
efforts to implement it. Sault Ste Marie’s
Lake Superior News and Mining Journal
was consistently strident in its support of
the Chippewa, and its editorials and news
clips were picked up and reprinted
throughout the Great Lakes area. The
Chippewa even made the news in Boston,
when one of their delegations passed
through on its way to Washington. The
fact that the whole region occupied by the
Chippewa was strongly Democratic did
not aid the Taylor administration in its ef¬
forts to dispossess them.63
Meanwhile, Sub-Agent Watrous worked
at implementing the public version of his
orders. He first conducted an inspection
tour of Sandy Lake (Fig. 2), the new site
where the Chippewa annuities were to be
21
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
distributed. There he began arranging his
own future as well, at that profitable in¬
tersection between private enterprise and
public business. He established a mutually
promising relationship with the agents of
Chouteau and Company, the St. Louis
firm that dominated trade in that area,
and with potential contractors, suppliers,
and transportation firms in St. Paul. By
the end of July, 1850, he enjoyed a free¬
dom of action greater than most Indian
agents, for three key figures at the top of
the Whig political hierarchy and national
administration were gone, with the death
of President Taylor and the resignations
of Secretary Ewing and Commissioner
Brown. Meanwhile, Congress was vio¬
lently debating the Great Compromise,
not mundane domestic matters such as the
Indian Appropriation Bill. Thus an unan¬
ticipated ingredient was added to
Watrous’s covert plan— whatever he did
or abstained from doing, the vital Chip¬
pewa annuity money would certainly be
dangerously late in arriving. At the same
time, the Chippewa were celebrating what
seemed to them a success. Watrous had
led them to believe that they had only to
come to Sandy Lake— 285 to 485 difficult
canoe and portage miles to the west— to
receive their annuities. Some Chippewa
determined to do this, while all under¬
stood that they could for many years re¬
main in Wisconsin even if it meant giving
up the treaty specified annuities and local
services of blacksmiths and farmers.64
22
Wisconsin Death March
These Indians and local citizens had no
inkling that, earlier in the year, Commis¬
sioner Brown had sent Governor Ramsey
a different set of orders and a plan, which
Watrous, if not himself its principal ar¬
chitect, was certainly aware of before he
left Washington in late April. This plan
was never made public, allowing Ramsey
and Watrous later to deny that a removal
had ever been intended during the winter
of 1850-1851. The scheme was straight¬
forward. Annuity goods and money were
to be paid only to those Chippewa who
traveled to Sandy Lake accompanied by
their families. These payments were not to
be made in late summer or fall, because
then the Chippewa would simply return to
“their old haunts.” Instead, the payments
were to be made only after winter had set
in, preventing travel by canoe. Someone,
most likely Watrous, had advised the
Commissioner of the Chippewa’s great
aversion to overland winter travel. Lured
by their annuities, they were to be trapped
near Sandy Lake by winter’s freeze.65
In early October, the Lake Superior
Chippewa were informed that both their
cash and goods annuities would be
waiting for them at Sandy Lake on the
25th of that month, a date already
dangerously late in the season, which
guaranteed at minimum further disrup¬
tion of their own seasonal subsistence
work. Watrous had by then obtained the
goods specified in the 1837 and 1842
treaties and had them, together with a
grossly inadequate supply of rations,
delivered to Sandy Lake at extraordinarily
high prices. Since the new sub-agency’s
farms were not yet in operation, there
were no public food supplies stored at
that remote location. Thus, once the
Chippewa received their money annuities,
they were heavily dependent for basics on
purchases from the local traders, since the
marshy Sandy Lake region, as well as the
route going and coming, were notoriously
deficient in game. This deficiency was ex¬
acerbated when the upper Mississippi
flooded that season, inundating the crude
structures where the supplies of both the
government and the private traders were
stored, spoiling the inadequate amounts
of flour and salt pork available, and
destroying the local wild rice crop. To
compound these sources of nutritional
stress, the Lake Superior shoreline Chip¬
pewa had a poor fishing season earlier
that year and had already experienced
grave food shortages.66
Constructed in this manner by several
key actors with personal and political
goals overriding any concern they may
have had for their charges, with an assist
from uncontrollable natural and institu¬
tional events, a tragedy lay in waiting for
those Chippewa electing to hazard the
long trip to Sandy Lake. Not all the Lake
Superior Chippewa accepted the high
risks they could see in this dangerous
edge-of-winter journey. The bands at
L’Anse, Ontonagon, Pelican Lake, and
La Vieux Desert refused entirely. Those
from the headwaters of the Wisconsin
River sent but two men, and the villages
on the Chippewa River drainage some¬
what more. More came from the La
Pointe area villages, but in all these in¬
stances the Chippewa took precautions.
Ignoring orders to bring their families,
they dispatched mainly adult males. Ap¬
parently, only from those villages closest
to Sandy Lake, on Lake Superior’s north
shore and on the upper Mississippi, did
some family groups make the journey.
Moreover, intending to pack the annuity
goods for their communities home by
canoe and on their backs, these delega¬
tions traveled light, without the rolls of
birchbark and woven mats needed to
sheath temporary wigwams, many even
without their firearms. These decisions
further contributed to the physiological
stress they experienced over the next three
winter months.67
Those Chippewa bands who sent dele-
23
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
gations to collect their annuities coor¬
dinated their travel plans. Coming by dif¬
ferent routes, they assembled at Fond du
Lac before pressing up the difficult por¬
tages along the St. Louis River, and then
via the Savanna portage to the marsh and
bogs surrounding Sandy Lake. Exactly
how many made the trip is uncertain. It
was likely fewer than 3,000, the figure
Watrous later used in boasting of how
many he had “removed” that winter.
Earlier, he claimed 4,000 had assembled
by November 10, but this number in¬
cluded some 1,500 from the Mississippi
and Pillager bands, present to collect their
annuities, not to be resettled. Watrous
never provided his superiors with careful
counts or lists of those who arrived, for
once confronted with the disaster his ac¬
tions had caused and the great hostility of
the assembled Chippewa, he distributed
the remaining putrefying rations and the
other goods from the flooded warehouses
to those present, disregarding his orders
to deliver only to family groups.68
Those Lake Superior Chippewa hazard¬
ing this journey began arriving at Sandy
Lake in mid-October. They discovered
Watrous gone and no one present author¬
ized to parcel out the goods waiting for
them; he was on his way to St. Louis sup¬
posedly to collect the more valuable an¬
nuity money. Soon the suffering began —
from illness, hunger, and exposure. The
sojourners lacked shelter, and most of the
scanty supply of spoiled government ra¬
tions were quickly consumed, leading to
an epidemic of dysentery so incapacitat¬
ing and deadly that American witnesses
were certain it was cholera. This was soon
accompanied by an epidemic of measles,
which further contributed to high rates of
illness and fatalities. The Chippewa were
concentrated in an unsanitary, water¬
logged area, with few natural food sup¬
plies available. While they lacked shelter
and medical services, were unable to col¬
lect their goods, waited day-to-day for the
arrival of Watrous to bring their critically
needed money payments and to open the
warehouses, the Chippewa’s health and
energy were increasingly sapped by hunger,
infectious diseases, and the winter now on
them. If some of these components had
been absent, they might have scattered,
reducing the rate of reinfection. As it
was, American witnesses reported that on
many days there were eight or nine deaths,
so many that the few who were well could
not inter the corpses properly.69
Watrous saw only the last days of this
calamity, for he was absent from his post
until November 24, a month later than the
promised payment date that had lured the
Chippewa west. After sending messages
for the Chippewa to assemble, on October
6 he left for St. Louis and arrived there on
the 21st, four days before the scheduled
payment, then at least two weeks hard
travel to the north. In St. Louis he soon
learned that no funds had arrived and
none were expected that year, informa¬
tion he could easily have anticipated while
yet in St. Paul, for the national political
crisis had so stalled Congress that for
months little attention was given ordinary
domestic matters. The Appropriation Bill
providing funds for the Chippewa’s an¬
nuities did not pass until November 12,
much too late in the year for the required
physical delivery of the specie to such a
remote location. Watrous on October 26
finally took passage on a steamer for his
return trip, but the vessel was delayed,
and he did not arrive at St. Paul until
November 13. There he tarried two more
days, attending to his own business,
mainly pleading to obtain an upgrading of
his Sub-Agency and a promotion for him¬
self. He did not leave St. Paul until the
15th, and then the onset of winter forced
him to abandon his canoe and travel on
foot overland, an ill augury for the sick,
starving Chippewa at Sandy Lake, who
had been waiting six weeks for their goods
and money.70
24
Wisconsin Death March
The major unanticipated institutional
ingredient adding to the scale of the
disaster organized by Brown, Ramsey,
and Watrous was the failure of Congress
to appropriate funds for the Indian
Department in a timely fashion. Without
hard cash to purchase necessaries for the
winter, the Chippewa— who in addition to
the epidemic illness, great loss of life, and
their general debilitation had lost an en¬
tire season’s subsistence production —
were in even more desperate condition.
However, on arriving at Sandy Lake on
the 24th and seeing the consequences of
his scheme, Watrous set to work cutting
his administrative losses. The idea of try¬
ing to keep these sick, starving Chippewa
near the Mississippi was swiftly dropped.
He then did what little he could to relieve
their “pinching wants.” After much
wrangling over who would be responsible
for the unauthorized expenditure, he per¬
suaded the traders to deliver a small quan¬
tity of ammunition at a highly inflated
cost to the Chippewa for subsistence
hunting on their way home. Similarly, he
drew up arrangements for the traders
to deliver to the Chippewa from their
stores $8,368.40 in provisions, an advance
against their yet unpaid cash annuity, at
what he claimed were “the most reason¬
able terms possible.” The terms were in
fact extraordinary, three to six times those
of prices at St. Paul and other nearby
depots. By Governor Ramsey’s own esti¬
mates, this amount was barely three days
supply of food, entirely insufficient for
the Chippewa’s arduous return trip.71
Finally, on December 3, with winter
fully on them, when their scanty rations
and goods were at last in their hands, the
encampments broke up. The Chippewa
left immediately, abandoning two hun¬
dred sick and a few well adults to care for
them. By then more than a foot of snow
lay on the ground and the streams were
frozen over, preventing the use of canoes,
which the Wisconsin Chippewa jettisoned
along the St. Louis River or scrapped to
be used as fuel for the frigid nights. Then
they set off on foot along the frozen trails
eastward, heavily laden with the goods for
their families. By the Chippewa’s own
reckoning, many more died on the trails
home than had died at Sandy Lake.72
The total mortality for this whole sorry
episode cannot be determined exactly.
Watrous, himself, although sometimes
claiming reports of epidemics and starva¬
tion were exaggerated, admitted that
more than 150 had died at Sandy Lake
proper, including twenty of those left in
his charge after the Chippewa departed.
About two hundred was the estimate of
several missionaries present part of the
time at the new Sub-Agency during these
events, while William W. Warren, a
month after the goods distribution,
reported that nearly two hundred died at
Sandy Lake alone. But the best enumera¬
tions were likely those of the Chippewa
leaders themselves, for they were totaling
up their own deceased kin. Two separate
reports from them, one from the elder
Psheke [Buffalo] and his fellow leaders at
La Pointe in November, 1851, and a sec¬
ond from the interior Wisconsin leaders a
year later, agreed that 170 died during the
time spent waiting at Sandy Lake, with
another 230 dying on the return trip. Most
of these were adults, mainly able-bodied
men, an especially hard blow to these
small populations. Thus, of the popula¬
tion at risk, something less than three
thousand, the Ewing-Brown-Ramsey-
Watrous plan to lure the Lake Superior
Chippewa west and trap them there suc¬
cessfully removed some twelve per cent,
by killing them. The human loss was one
thing: in addition the Chippewa also lost
much capital equipment (their canoes),
much critical subsistence work and other
productive economic activity, and they
went further into debt, when they were
forced to encumber unpaid and future an¬
nuity funds for survival rations.73
25
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
After returning to their homes, the
Chippewa were even more determined to
avoid removal. Neither would they at any
time of the year so much as visit Sandy
Lake, which they now defined as a
“graveyard.” Once information of the
winter’s carnage became public, Watrous
came under sharp, continuing attack from
the Chippewa and their now numerous
supporters. Missionary groups, regional
newspapers, and local citizens led the op¬
position, and the legislatures of Wiscon¬
sin and Minnesota aided, while the Chip¬
pewa themselves began organizing a series
of memorials and delegations to Gover¬
nor Ramsey and to Washington. Within
six months the new Commissioner of In¬
dian Affairs, Luke Lea, and the Secretary
of the Interior responded to this lobbying
effort, seemingly in favor of the Chip¬
pewa.
On August 25, 1851, the Secretary
issued instructions apparently rescinding
the 1850 removal order. Transmitted to
Watrous by telegraph, this information
became immediate public knowledge,
spread by the Lake Superior News in an
account highly favorable to the Chip¬
pewa. A few weeks later, leaders from the
La Pointe and other bands traveled to
Sault Ste Marie for a grand “Indian
Jubilee” celebrating their victory. The re¬
joicing was premature. Although the
removal order itself was publicly with¬
drawn, actual efforts to accomplish this
goal were not ended; for the requirement
that annuities be paid only to Chippewa in
the west remained in force, and Agent
Watrous continued determined efforts to
dislodge them on an even larger scale
than earlier.74
Backed by Governor Ramsey, Watrous
had begun active, large-scale removal
operations early in the year, and these
continued through 1851 and 1852 irre¬
spective of publicized instructions from
Washington. Recognizing that the Chip¬
pewa would have nothing to do with San¬
dy Lake, Watrous selected Crow Wing
and Fond du Lac as destinations more
likely acceptable to them. He marshalled
his forces, employed more personnel,
placed influential marginals such as
William W. Warren and missionaries such
as W. L. Boutwell on his payroll, stock¬
piled resources, let contracts, issued
assembly orders, called for troops to aid
his work (which were refused), and scur¬
ried around the region working to lure the
Chippewa out of their ceded territory, all
the while affecting to keep his plans secret
from the Chippewa and their American
allies.
The one major incentive Watrous had
was the annuity fund, now doubled
because of the accumulation of 1850 and
1851 installments. To increase the pres¬
sure he refused payment in Wisconsin to
any subdivision of the Chippewa: Pagan,
Christian, Successful Farmer, New Land
Owner, Half-Breed, Lake Shore Fisher¬
man, Interior Hunter, whatever. And in
autumn, 1851, he made plain that he still
favored the same deception plan and tac¬
tics that had proved so disastrous a year
earlier. “It is my intention,” he reported
to Ramsey on September 22, “to delay
(unless otherwise instructed) making the
moneyed payment of the present year to
the Chippewas of Lake Superior until
after navigation ceases, which is done to
throw every obstacle in the way of their
returning to their old homes.” The gover¬
nor did not otherwise instruct.75
However, in spite of all the prepara¬
tions and expenditures, most Chippewa
would have nothing to do with these
plans. Many traveled to Fond du Lac or
Crow Wing that fall; after obtaining their
annuities, few tarried to experience a
repeat of the previous year’s debacle.
Nonetheless, the newly promoted Agent
Watrous proclaimed near total success,
reporting that only seven hundred Chip¬
pewa remained in the east subject to later
removal. His reports were seconded by
26
Wisconsin Death March
Governor Ramsey, who also professed
victory in his Annual Report. Both were
dissembling, as local citizens, employees
of the removal effort, missionaries, the
newspapers, and the Indians themselves
well knew. The Wisconsin and Upper Pe¬
ninsula Chippewa remained within their
old band territories, irrespective of the
change in their status caused by Wiscon¬
sin’s statehood and the cession of their
lands.76
These attempts to dislodge the Lake
Superior Chippewa continued through
1852, but with diminishing effect. As the
protests of the Chippewa and their allies
grew in volume, and evidence of costly
failures mounted, a final delegation to
Washington at last produced success.
Following a meeting of old Psheke from
La Pointe with the President in late June,
1852, when another petition from the
citizens of the Lake Superior shore was
presented, Millard Fillmore finally
cancelled the removal authorization en¬
tirely. Of even greater value to the Chip¬
pewa, the President now approved the
payment of back, current, and future an¬
nuities at La Pointe. The Chippewa vic¬
tory was complete two years later. Then,
after a Democratic President had taken
power in Washington, a new Commis¬
sioner of Indian Affairs, George W.
Manypenny, dismantled the old Indian
removal policy and installed a new pro¬
gram emphasizing concentration on reser¬
vations and economic development in
place. On September 30, 1854, the Lake
Superior Chippewa signed their last treaty
with the United States, one severing rela¬
tionships with the Mississippi bands, and
guaranteeing them the right to reside on
and take their subsistence from reserva¬
tions within the environments they had
long inhabited.77
Forty years ago, in the first attempt to
find order in the implementation of
the removal policy among the Indians of
the Old Northwest, Grant Foreman con¬
cluded that their resettlement was, “hap¬
hazard, not coordinated, and wholly un¬
systematized,’’ and further asserted that
the whole period for these peoples was
characterized by no pattern.78 But if we
plot the different responses of all Old
Northwest Indian societies to the removal
policy against the basic forms of their
adaptations to broad biotic zones, their
different types of social organization, and
the paths and various goals of American
intrusions into their lands, a clear matrix
emerges. This underlying pattern yields a
near mutually exclusive distribution of
those Indian communities that did resettle
in the western Indian Territory against
those that did not. By placing their ac¬
tivities into a broader social context, this
pattern also helps to make understandable
the Chippewa’s resistance to relocation.
The Chippewa of Michigan’s Upper
Peninsula and Wisconsin were by no
means alone in their successful resistance
to this American inspired and command¬
ed resettlement program. Despite re¬
peated efforts running over many years,
the federal authorities entirely failed in
efforts to dislodge any of the native
societies in the Great Lakes region similar
to these Chippewa in basic social
organization, technology, subsistence
economy, environmental adaptation, and
culture.
Those Old Northwest Indians whose
assessments of the removal policy were
most strongly negative were foraging
peoples, dependent on hunting, fishing,
and gathering for their subsistence, while
they exchanged for manufactured goods
and money the same products needed for
their own sustenance. They inhabited
biotic zones characterized by numerous
streams, marshes, and lakes, with long,
harsh winters and extensive deciduous
and coniferous forests. They were also
skilled builders and users of framed-up
bark canoes, their main means of trans¬
portation. And their direct contacts and
27
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
experience with the western prairie lands
were few or none.79
Thus, the Lake Superior Chippewa’s
success in thwarting implementation of
the removal policy was true also of exten¬
sive populations of other Chippewa com¬
munities, and the Menomini, Ottawa, and
those Potawatomi villages on the Lake
Michigan shore above present Milwaukee.
Organized as small, autonomous bands,
these native peoples had maintained their
political, social, cultural, and religious in¬
tegrity to a degree well beyond those of
Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois. Moreover,
throughout the era these Old Northwest
Indians were not surrounded by Ameri¬
cans, agriculturalists or otherwise. Hence
they and Americans were not immediately
in open competition for the resources of
the same environments. These foraging
bands, confidently following their own
cultural and adaptational trajectories,
recognized no advantage in westward mi¬
gration away from habitats familiar to
them. Instead, they defined this possibil¬
ity as greatly damaging to their welfare.
Indeed, several thousand Indians from
these communities, when faced with the
prospect of closer dealings with Ameri¬
cans and their authorities, did voluntarily
abandon their lands in the United States.
But these slipped across the international
border into Canada and resettled in loca¬
tions similar in climate, flora, and fauna
to those they had abandoned.80
To the south an entirely different pat¬
tern of Indian responses to the removal
policy emerged. In striking contrast to the
reactions of the foraging bands in the nor¬
thern reaches of the Old Northwest, when
the era closed all the Indians there— with
some few exceptions — had been dislo¬
cated and resettled in the west. These were
multi-community tribal societies such as
the Shawnee, Delaware, Wyandot, Kicka-
poo, and Sauk. They occupied habitats
characterized by relatively long growing
seasons, prairie and parklands, fertile
bottom lands, and hardwood forests.
They lived in large, semi-permanent
villages, and their traditional economies
had been based on a mix of intensive hor¬
ticulture and large-game hunting.81
Moreover, well before the removal era
began in 1825 they had been forced to
adapt to a new environmental reality:
large numbers of American farmers, mer¬
chants, entrepreneurs, and developers
were a significant and threatening part of
their milieu. Occupying the ground di¬
rectly in the path of the post-Revolu-
tionary frontier, for decades their rela¬
tions with these newcomers had been
marked by intense, open rivalries, for
they were involved in sometimes violent
competition for the same environmental
resources. Thus they had long been in¬
volved in land cessions. Some, like the
Mdewakanton in 1837, had more or less
eagerly exchanged less critical portions of
their estates for goods, immediate cash
payments, and annuities. Others had been
driven to such sales by intense pressures
from appointed negotiators and other in¬
terested parties. Understandably, the ef¬
fects of the removal policy fell on them
earlier and heavier than on the northern
foragers like the Chippewa. Indeed, the
first treaties with any Indians— either of
the Old Northwest or the Southeast — to
be impelled by and obtained under the
specific terms of the 1830 Removal Act
were negotiated with several such com¬
munities in Ohio.82
These farming, large-game hunting
tribal societies of the Old Northwest’s
prairie lands were also distinct from the
foraging bands to the north in another
salient characteristic. While the foragers
remained committed to bark canoe trans¬
port, those to the south had long since
abandoned such frail vessels in favor of
horses. Indeed, twenty years before
Thomas Jefferson conceived of using the
newly acquired Louisiana Territory as a
suitably distand homeland for Indians,
28
Wisconsin Death March
numerous Shawnee, and Delaware, fol¬
lowed by lesser numbers of Kickapoo, II-
ini, and Potawatomi, had used their new
means of travel voluntarily to abandon
their land in the Old Northwest and reset¬
tle in Missouri and Arkansas, with some
going as far west as Texas.83 Since horses
facilitated East-West movement of people
and goods across the valleys of the great
midcontinent river systems, even those
who stayed in the remains of their old
tribal estates were enabled to add seasonal
horse-nomadism for purposes of hunting,
trade, diplomacy, and war to their tech¬
nological inventory. Oriented to large
game hunting from the start, when they
faced increased competition with Ameri¬
cans near their lands, they used horses to
bring the resources of the western en¬
vironments within their reach.
Hence, by 1825 not only were many
from these prairie tribes familiar with the
western environments, but several related
pioneer Indian communities were al¬
ready well established there. Indeed,
through the 1830s, emissaries from such
western trail breakers often visited their
kin in Ohio, Illinois, and Indiana,
soliciting new recruits and allies.84 The
Lake Superior Chippewa, and other bark
canoe-using foragers of the north, had no
such experiences, technological capacity,
relationships, or inclinations.
There were some few exceptions to this
general dislocation and westward resettle¬
ment of the prairie tribes. These included
some hundreds of Indiana Miami and
fewer Michigan Potawatomi who were
allowed, by negotiated treaty right, to re¬
main on small parcels in their old en¬
vironments.85 Then there were the many
who escaped the full consequences of
American policy by resettling in British
territory. These included numerous horse-
nomadic Potawatomi, Ohio Ottawa, and
others who settled on the Ontario Penin¬
sula. Making appropriate ecological
choices, these voluntary emigrants se¬
lected locations south of the Canadian
Shield region, in habitats and a climate
like those familiar to them. These im¬
migrants studiously avoided British ef¬
forts to concentrate on the — to them —
barren landscape of Manitoulin Island,
further demonstrating the significance of
both environmental adaptations and the
capacity of Old Northwest Indians to
bend the policies of powerful states to
their own wants and ends.86
More recently than Foreman, Prucha,
stressing the extensive prior moves of the
Old Northwest’s native peoples, conclud¬
ed that “the emigration of these tribes in
the Jacksonian era was part of their mi¬
gration history.87 Such an interpretation
places the most charitable interpretation
conceivable on this American policy, but
it does not distinguish one type of migra¬
tion from another; neither does it look
far beneath the surface appearances of
events. Such an interpretation is rather
like concluding that the experience of
Japanese- Americans between 1942 and
1946 may be adequately explained as part
of their prior migration history as well.
In a larger historical perspective, none
of the Great Lakes-Ohio Valley Indian
societies had ever experienced a program
quite like the American removal policy as
arranged and conducted in the years after
1825. Some, such as the Ontario Iro-
quoian and Michigan’s Algonquian horti¬
cultural tribes, during the second half of
the seventeenth century had been refu¬
gees, fleeing the ravages of war, pesti¬
lence, and starvation. Many had some¬
times responded to the incentives offered
by French or British traders and officials
in selecting sites for new settlements. For
more, including the Chippewa, their ear¬
lier migrations were in response to inter¬
nal stresses such as population increase,
intra-community conflict, resource deple¬
tion, or a particularly successful adapta¬
tion to new technologies and economic
opportunities. Such relocations were
29
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
generally voluntary, even if encouraged
by inducements from European colonial
officials, not forced. None of the Indian
communities in this region had, until the
mid- 1820s, collided with a rapidly ex¬
panding nation-state bent on fueling its
own internal development by the whole¬
sale expropriation of resources and dis¬
possession and dislocation of native in¬
habitants. The fact that in some instances
the goals of particular Old Northwest In¬
dian communities converged with the
policies of the United States does not
distract from this conclusion. It demon¬
strates merely that these Indians were
adaptable enough to hunt out new op¬
portunities in an unmapped thicket of
adversity.
“Settlement pressure” is the most
popular, widespread and persistent ex¬
planation of the timing or the sequence of
efforts at implementing the removal pol¬
icy.88 However, as a single-factor explana¬
tion this will do neither for the examples
of the Chippewa and neighboring forag¬
ing bands nor for Old Northwest Indians
generally. For at the moment the four
American officials conceived their plan to
deceive and dislodge the Lake Superior
Chippewa, there were few or no Ameri¬
cans “pressing” on their lands. Nor were
there many for decades thereafter. In¬
deed, as witnessed, these Indians found
many staunch supporters among the small
populations of neighboring citizens. Simi¬
larly, had the density of neighboring
American population been the major
cause of removals, then the perennially
reluctant Wyandot of northwest Ohio
would have been forcibly transported
west at least a decade before their 1843
capitulation and resettlement. “Settle¬
ment pressure,” perhaps phrased better as
significant competition between Ameri¬
cans and Indians for the latter’s en¬
vironmental resources, helps explain how
and when Indians were pressured to cede
land. By itself it does not explain the drive
to move them to distant locations.
Recognizing this distinction — between
the acquisition of Indian land and their
planned resettlement in distant places—
also requires distinguishing the manifest
from the less well-recognized functions of
the removal policy after 1825. Doing so
helps us better understand not only this
extraordinary Chippewa case, but efforts
to implement this policy among other Old
Northwest Indians generally. For decades
before 1825, the overt business of acquir¬
ing Indian rights to occupy and use the
resources of land had been commonly ac¬
complished without necessarily demand¬
ing or forcing resettlement in remote loca¬
tions, certainly not so to an area officially
demarked as an exclusive “Indian Ter¬
ritory.” Frequently, this was achieved by
acquisition of most or nearly all of an In¬
dian society’s land, leaving them to con¬
centrate on the remaining parcels of their
old estates. Indeed, this was the explicit
intention spelled out in the Chippewa’s
1837 treaty, not the requirement that they
resettle in the west. Moreover, when this
planned resettlement policy was finally
succeeded by its replacement (the reserva¬
tion policy), substantial populations of
near or entirely landless Indians remained
in Michigan and Wisconsin, with smaller
groups in Ohio and Indiana, as well as
throughout the eastern United States.
This did not cause an appreciable slowing
of the populating or economic develop¬
ment of these regions. Before and after
the years when a comprehensive, nation¬
wide removal policy was in effect, indeed,
even between 1825 and the early 1850s,
Americans pressing on Indian environ¬
ments acquired titles to and control of
most Indian land without demanding re¬
settlement in a designated all-Indian Ter¬
ritory.
The Chippewa’s experiences between
1842 and 1852 forces our attention to a
30
Wisconsin Death March
different issue, the understory of the drive
to relocate Indians in the west, and to ad¬
ditional conclusions. Whatever the much
idealized rationalizations of the Jeffer¬
son, Monroe, Adams, and Jackson ad¬
ministrations about the goals of Indian
removal, well before 1842— and especially
so before the disastrous winter of 1850-
1851 “-the transportation and resettle¬
ment of eastern Indians under the ideo¬
logical guise of benevolent public policy
had acquired an institutional life of its
own. In the business of collecting, uproot¬
ing, transporting, and subsisting Indians,
numerous public officials and private
citizens discovered incentives and re¬
wards. Removing Indians was often made
to serve neither the declared wants, the
assessed needs or the passions of neigh¬
boring citizens, nor the long range values
of a nation. It served, rather, the im¬
peratives of the American state and speci¬
fically the narrow political-economic
patronage concerns of whatever admini¬
stration was in power.
In the instance of the abortive effort to
dislodge and to resettle the Lake Superior
Chippewa, we witness a national patron¬
age system gone awry. Secretary of the In¬
terior Ewing, Commissioner of Indian
Affairs Brown, Territorial Governor
Ramsey, and the unusually eager and am¬
bitious Sub-Agent Watrous, each from
his own distinctive concerns, each with his
own network of patrons and henchmen to
serve or to satisfy, were directly responsi¬
ble for arranging this affair. Each bent a
near obsolete public policy to his personal
career interests and political obligations.89
Certainly, the consequences of their deci¬
sions were exacerbated by legislative
chance and environmental accident.
Nonetheless the Chippewa’s death march
was directly caused, to borrow James
MacGregor Burns’ illuminating phrase,
by the self-interested operations of several
of those “little circles of influence” that
have plagued American life for two cen¬
turies.90 Sub-Agent Watrous did not have
to cause the actual permanent relocation
of the Chippewa to achieve his personal
or his political goals; he had only to seem
to do so. Being able to claim a large in¬
crease in the Indians under his jurisdic¬
tion, he was successful in obtaining an
upgrading of the status of his post to a
full agency, a promotion to agent, the
doubling of his salary, and whatever gra¬
tuities grateful St. Paul contractors and
Sandy Lake traders may have delivered
into his hands.
But what did these Chippewa accom¬
plish for themselves by effectively block¬
ing the efforts of American officials to
treat them as an exploitable natural
resource? The late Homer G. Barnett has
noted that “Dispossession of land and its
equivalent, migration, requires adapta¬
tion if a group is to survive.”91 The Lake
Superior Chippewa, by the terms of the
treaties of 1837 and 1842, experienced the
loss of ownership of the habitats they had
conquered a century earlier, although
they skillfully avoided total eviction from
these lands. Nonetheless, although they
escaped forced emigration, they, too, had
to adapt, for their social and physical en¬
vironments did not remain constant. For
decades they were able to apply old
knowledge and skills to obtain the essen¬
tials for their lives, ranging over familiar
terrain, still little settled by Americans,
exploiting known sources of food and raw
material, while also adjusting themselves
to the changing circumstances brought by
booming timber and mining industries,
and by their status as dependent wards of
the federal government.
It was twenty years before all the reser¬
vations granted in the 1854 treaty were
selected and surveyed, at which moment
American settlements had advanced to the
point where the federal government at last
required the Wisconsin Chippewa to settle
31
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
on and to extract their subsistence from
within these confined spaces. It was in the
mid- 1870s that the first clear evidence of
cultural disintegration appeared in the
form of a revitalization movement, the
Dream Dance, a missionary-spread new
religion, which sought through collective
application of supernatural power to
defeat American economic and political
ascendancy. A full century later, the legal
heirs and political successors to the old
Chippewa bands turned to the federal
courts for a different type of aid, seeking
to recover rights allegedly granted to their
ancestors by treaty. Employing quite dif¬
ferent premises and tactics than in earlier
years, the modern Chippewa have met
with somewhat greater success. By the
later 1980s, they were truly experiencing
intensive “settlement pressure,” that is,
competition for scarce natural resources
with their neighbors. The consequences of
this latest engagement between Chippewa,
American neighbor, and the federal pa¬
tronage system will be a task for some
future scholar to describe, assess, and ex¬
plain.92
Endnotes
1 This essay reports some findings of the
Old Northwest Indian Removal Project,
which was supported by a research grant from
the National Endowment of the Humanities.
The author is indebted to numerous readers of
earlier drafts for their aid and useful sugges¬
tions, especially Victor Barnouw, Tom Biolsi,
John Clark, Faye Clifton, Conrad Heiden-
reich, Michael Green, Jeanne Kay, Robert
Kvasnicka, James McClurken, Joseph Manzo,
Bruce Trigger and Richard White; and also
Paul Haas, John D. Haeger, and Paul Prucha.
In the interests of saving space, citations for
this essay have been much abbreviated. A full
bibliography is contained in the author’s The
Voight Decision and Wisconsin Chippewa
Treaty Rights: A Critical Bibliography (Insti¬
tute for the Development of Indian Law,
forthcoming); and in the archives of the Old
Northwest Indian Removal Project.
2 The nomenclature, “Lake Superior Chip¬
pewa,’’ came into use only during negotiations
for the Treaty of 1854 at the insistence of the
Wisconsin and Upper Peninsula of Michigan
bands, who wished to sever all relationships
with the bands on the Upper Mississippi River.
See, R. Ritzenthaler, “Southwestern Chip¬
pewa,” in B. G. Trigger, ed., Handbook of
North American Indians , Vol. 15, Northeast
(Smithsonian Institution, 1978), 743-59.
3 The incident is mentioned in a few older
state and regional histories such as J. N.
Davidson’s, In Unnamed Wisconsin (Mil¬
waukee 1895), 168; and is briefly discussed in
V. Barnouw ’s Acculturation and Personality
Among the Wisconsin Chippewa (American
Anthropological Association Memoir No. 72,
1950), 37, 59. Such descriptions are based on
other secondary and scanty primary sources,
principally the Rev. J. H. Pitezel’s eyewitness
account in Lights and Shades of Missionary
Life (Cincinnati, 1860), 298. E. J. Danziger,
in his The Chippewas of Lake Superior (Uni¬
versity of Oklahoma Press, 1978), 88, and his
“They Would Not be Moved: The Chippewa
Treaty of 1854,” Minnesota History , 43
(1973), 178, touches the episode in passing.
William C. Haygood’s editorial comments,
accompanying publication of excerpts from
Benjamin J. Armstrong’s reminiscences in his
old age, attempted a sketchy assessment of the
incident, but these remarks are not well in¬
formed. See, “Reminiscences of Life Among
the Chippewa,” Wisconsin Magazine of His¬
tory, 4 Parts, 55: 175-96, 287-309; & 56:
37-58, 140-61. In the extensive interviewing
preceding his Wisconsin Chippewa Myths and
Tales and Their Relation to Chippewa Life
(University of Wisconsin Press, 1977), Bar¬
nouw found no oral traditions concerning the
events (Barnouw to Clifton, Personal Com¬
munication, 1985). Nor are there any such
folk memories recorded in the major 20th-
Century collections of Chippewa oral tradi¬
tions, such as the Charles Brown Papers, Col.
HB, State Historical Society of Wisconsin, or
the U. S. Works Progress Administration’s
Chippewa Historical Project Records, Micro¬
film 532, State Historical Society of Wiscon¬
sin. The last recorded Chippewa mention of
this episode dates to 1864, when the Lake
Superior chiefs assembled to record their
memories of treaty dealings with the United
States. See, G. P. Warren, “Statement of
Treaties between the Chippewa Indians and
the United States, from 1825-1864, from the
Chippewa Standpoint,” File 1864, Guide 714
(State Historical Society of Wisconsin).
4 The cases include, in Wisconsin— the Win¬
32
Wisconsin Death March
nebago, Menomini, Potawatomi communities
north of Milwaukee, Chippewa of Lake Su¬
perior, Mdewakonton Dakota, and the Emi¬
grant New York Indians (Oneida, Stock-
bridge-Munsee, and the Brotherton); in
Ohio— five groups; in Indiana— two groups;
in Illinois— three groups; in Michigan— six
groups; and from Ontario— two small groups,
the Moravian Delaware and Anderdon Hu-
rons.
5 For the Indiana Potawatomi episode, see
J. A. Clifton, The Prairie People: Continuity
and Change in Potawatomi Indian Culture
(Lawrence: Regents Press of Kansas, 1977),
270-72, 296-99; and, R. A. Trennert, Jr., “A
Trader’s Role in the Potawatomi Removal
from Indiana: The Case of George W. Ew¬
ing,” The Old Northwest, 4 (1978), 3-24. The
best overview of the Winnebago case is N. O.
Lurie, “Winnebago,” in, Trigger, Handbook
. . . Northeast, 690-707. For the Sauk and Fox
case see A. F. C. Wallace “Prelude to Dis¬
aster,” which is lodged amidst Ellen M.
Whitney’s near comprehensive collection of
documents bearing on that episode, Collec¬
tions of the Illinois State Historical Library,
35 (1970).
6 Recent historical studies of Indian
removal exhibit a striking bias as regards com¬
mercial “motives” in Indian removal. In his
overview of Old Northwest removal, for in¬
stance, F. P. Prucha devotes a full section to
this topic without once mentioning the in¬
volvement and interests of Protestant and
Catholic missionaries in implementation of
the policy in the region. See his, The Great
Father: The United States Government and
the American Indians (University of Nebraska
Press, 1984), Vol. 1, 266-69. Compare, G. A.
Schultz, An Indian Canaan: Isaac McCoy and
the Vision of an Indian State (University of
Oklahoma Press, 1972), 123-40.
7 L. Taliaferro Journals (Minnesota His¬
torical Society), Vol. 10, May 22, 1836; R. W.
Meyer, History of the Santee Sioux (Uni¬
versity of Nebraska Press, 1967), 56-59; H.
Hickerson, Sioux Indians I: Mdewakanton
Band of Sioux Indians (New York: Garland,
1974), 159-205.
8 Kinsmen of Another Kind: Dakota-White
Relations in the Upper Mississippi Valley,
1650-1862 (University of Nebraska Press,
1984), esp. x-xiii and 150-57.
9 For background to the Moravian migra¬
tion, see F. C. Hamil, The Valley of the Lower
Thames, 1640-1850 (University of Toronto
Press, 1951), 108-111; C. A. Weslager, The
Delaware Indians: A History (Rutgers Univer¬
sity Press, 1972); and, I. Goddard, “Dela¬
ware,” in Trigger, Handbook . . . Northeast,
213-239. For the background on the Ander¬
don Hurons, see, C. E. Heidenreich, “Hu¬
ron,” and E. Tooker, “Wyandot,” in Trig¬
ger, Handbook . . . Northeast, 369-88 and
398-406; J. A. Clifton, “Hurons of the West:
Migrations and Adaptations of the Ontario
Iroquoians, 1650-1704,” Research Report,
Canadian Ethnology Service, National Mu¬
seum of Man (Ottawa, 1977); and his, “The
Re-emergent Wyandot: A Study in Ethno-
genesis on the Detroit River Borderland,
1747,” in, K. G. Pryke and L. L. Kulisek,
eds., The Western District (University of
Windsor, 1983); C. G. Klopfenstein, “The
Removal of the Wyandots from Ohio,” Ohio
Histroical Quarterly, 66 (1957), 119-136;
Robert E. Smith, Jr., “The Clash of Leader¬
ship at the Grand Reserve: The Wyandot Sub-
Agency and the Methodist Mission, 1820-
1824,” Ohio History, 89 (1980), 181-205;
and, E. J. Lajeunesse, C.S.B., The Windsor
Border Region (Toronto: The Champlain So¬
ciety, 1960).
10 M. J. Mochon, “Stockbridge-Munsee
Cultural Adaptations: ‘Assimilated In¬
dians.’ ” Proceedings of the American
Philosophical Society 112 (1968), 182-219.
11 Rev. J. Vogler to H. R. Schoolcraft,
April 10; Schoolcraft to Commissioner of In¬
dian Affairs [COIA] C. A. Harris, April 17 &
28; COIA to Schoolcraft, April 29; School¬
craft to Vogler, May 8, 1837, in, Records of
the Michigan Superintendency, National Ar¬
chives Microfilm Series Ml [NAM M1], Rolls
37 & 42. Schoolcraft to COIA August 14, and
to Gov. H. Dodge, 14 August, 1837, NAM
Ml, Roll 37. Supt. W. Clark to COIA, No¬
vember 17, 1837, Office of Indian Affairs,
Letters Received, NAM M234, Roll 756; Har¬
ris to Captain E. A. Hitchcock, December 2,
1837, Office of Indian Affairs, Letters Sent,
NAM M2 1, Roll 23. R. Cummins to Pilcher,
February 4, 1840, NAM M234, Roll 301. J.
Johnston to COIA T. H. Crawford, March
14, 1842, NAM M234, Roll 602; Wyandots of
Canada to Sir Charles Bagot, October 10,
1842, Record Group 10:, Indian Affairs, Red
Series — Eastern Canada (Ottawa, Public Ar¬
chives of Canada) [PACRG10], Vol. 125. For
the joint emigration, See Klopfenstein, “Re¬
moval of the Wyandots.” Petition of the
Hurons to Col. William Jarvis, May 3, 1842,
PAC RG10, Vol. 125. Wyandot Muster Roll
— 1843, Entry 301, Record Group 75, Records
33
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
of the Bureau of Indian Affairs, National Ar¬
chives and Records Service [ RG75 ] .
12 J. A. Clifton, A Place of Refuge For All
Time: Migration of the American Potawatomi
Into Upper Canada (Ottawa: National Mu¬
seum of Man, 1975); R. F. Bauman, “The
Migration of the Ottawa Indians from the
Maumee Valley to Walpole Island,” North¬
west Ohio Quarterly, 21 (1949), 86-1 12.
13 Gov. Ramsey’s report, November 3,
1851, in Annual Report of the Commissioner
of Indian Affairs (Washington, D.C., 1851)
[ARCOIA], 421-22. For sketches of the use of
force and of those communities which avoided
removal, see the relevant chapters in Trigger,
Handbook . . . Northeast: see also, Mochon,
“Stockbridge-Munsee”; Clifton, Prairie Peo¬
ple and The Pokagons, 1683-1983: Catholic
Potawatomi of the St. Joseph River Valley
(University Press of America, 1984), Wallace,
Prelude to Disaster; and, P. K. Ourada, The
Menominee Indians: A History (University of
Oklahoma Press, 1979), 106-123.
14 H. R. Schoolcraft, Personal Memoirs of
a Residence of Thirty Years with the Indian
Tribes on the American Frontiers (Philadel¬
phia, 1851), 628-29; A. Jackson’s Message of
March 4, 1837, in, J. D. Richardson, comp.,
A Compilation of the Messages and Papers of
the Presidents, 1 789-1897 (Washington, D.C.,
1896-1899), Vol. 2, 541; M. Van Buren’s
Message of December 5, 1837, in, F. L. Israel,
ed., The State of the Union Messages of the
Presidents (New York, 1966), Vol. 1, 490;
ARCOIA (1838), 410-411.
15 Prucha’s The Great Father, 241-42, pro¬
vides a useful recent overview of selected
features of Old Northwest Removal. The
author views the whole process through the
eyes of American elites and authorities in
Washington, often reflecting but not pene¬
trating their idealized aims and ideological
pronouncements, while displaying little under¬
standing of the native peoples and their
responses to the policy.
16 W. Miles, “ ‘Enamoured with Coloniza¬
tion’: Isaac McCoy’s Plan of Indian Re¬
form,” The Kansas Historical Quarterly, 38
(1972), 268-286, has done so.
17 Treaty with the Sioux, etc., August 19,
1825, 7 U.S. Statutes 272; Treaty with the
Chippewa, August 5, 1826, 7 U.S. Statutes
290; and, Treaty with the Chippewa, etc.,
August 11, 1827, 7 U.S. Statutes 303. Also,
Charles J. Kappler, comp. Indian Treaties:
1778-1883 (reprinted, New York, 1972),
250-55, 268-71; 281-83.
18 Kappler, Indian Treaties, 269.
19 Flat Mouth’s speech, in, Taliaferro to
Governor Henry Dodge, September 29, 1836.
NAM M234, Roll 757. He was referring to the
1836 treaty with the Ottawa and Chippewa of
Michigan. For accounts of Lake Superior
Chippewa impoverishment in this period, see,
G. Franchere to W. Brewster, 14 March 1835,
Records of the American Fur Company,
Steere Collection, Baylis Public Library, Sault
Ste Marie, Michigan, Box 1, Folder 3; Bisheke
[Chief Buffalo] to H. R. Schoolcraft,
September 8, 1835, NAM Ml, Roll 72; and,
E. A. Brush to Lewis Cass, NAM M234, Roll
664.
20 Secretary of War Lewis Cass to President
Van Buren, March 7, 1836, NAM M2 1, Roll
18.
21 The correspondence, reports, petitions,
and memorials concerning their efforts are ex¬
tensive. For samples, see, S. C. Stambaugh to
H. R. Schoolcraft, June 8, 1836, NAM Ml,
Roll 72; COIA C. A. Harris to Governor
Dodge, October 15, 1836, NAMM21, Roll 20;
and, Bailey to COIA E. Herring, June 18,
1836, NAMM234, Roll 422.
22 COIA Harris to A. Bailey, July 15, 1836,
NAM M21, Roll 19; Hitchcock to Harris,
March 30, 1837, NAM M234, Roll 751;
Taliaferro to Dodge, 30 January, 24 July, and
August 2, 1837, NAMM234, Roll 758; and,
Dodge to Harris, August 15, 1837, NAM
M234, Roll 758. Major Hitchcock, a regular
Army officer, was disbursing agent at the St.
Louis Indian Superintendency. The antago¬
nism of some Chippewa to certain traders was
real. In December, 1836 a party of Chippewa
murdered William Aitken, Jr., the son of a
prominent trader by an Indian woman, one of
the rare acts of violence by these Chippewa
against Americans.
23 Identified as Royce Area 242, Fig. 1 .
24 COIA Harris to Dodge and General
William Smith, May 13, 1837, NAM M21,
Roll 21. General Smith did not arrive to par¬
ticipate in the treaty negotiations. Earlier,
when Secretary of War Cass issued orders for
removal treaties with the Winnebago, Menom-
ini, and Emigrant New York Indians, he ex¬
plicitly excluded the interior Wisconsin Chip¬
pewa. See, Cass to Dodge, July 7, 1836,
NAM M2 1, Roll 19.
25 The first sub-agent at La Pointe, Daniel
P. Bushnell, was appointed by Governor
Dodge in November, 1836, but was not con¬
firmed until the following April. Edward E.
Hill, The Office of Indian Affairs, 1824-1880:
Historical Sketches (New York, 1974), 88.
26 Edward D. Neill, “Occurences in and
34
Wisconsin Death March
Around Fort Snelling, from 1819 to 1840,”
Minnesota Historical Society Collections,
Vol. 2, 131; William T. Boutwell, “Journel,”
July 5, 1837, in, Boutwell Papers. Col. A.B.
781, Minnesota Historical Society; and,
“D. P. Bushell’s Report,” in, ARCOIA,
(1838), 467-68.
27 1 8 3 7 Treaty Journal, end. in Van Ant¬
werp to COIA, September 30, 1837, Docu¬
ments Relating to the Negotiation of Ratified
and Unratified Treaties, with Various Indian
Tribes, 1801-1869 , NAM T494, Roll 3; War¬
ren, “Statement of Treaties.” Also see, Hill,
The Office of Indian A f fairs, 90-9 1 , 1 60-6 1 .
28 Both came from villages outside the area
being ceded. Magegabow was a war chief
from Leech Lake, Bugonageshig an extraor¬
dinarily ambitious upstart village leader from
Gull Lake. See, James G. E. Smith, Leader¬
ship Among the Southwestern Ojibwa, Publi¬
cations in Ethnology No. 7, National Museum
of Man (Ottawa, 1973).
29 See Dodge’s marginal notes on p. 21 of
the treaty journal to this effect.
30 This they subsequently did. See, Warren,
“Statement of Treaties”; and, Obishkaw-
zaugee’s Speech, September 12, 1869, NAM
M234, Roll 394.
31 Boutwell to Rev. David Green, August
17, 1837, American Board of Commissioners
for Foreign Missions Papers (Minnesota
Historical Society — Transcripts of Originals
in Houghton Library, Harvard University)
[ ABCFMPMNHS] , Box 2.
32 Rev. Frederick Ayer to President Martin
Van Buren, September 30, 1837; Gov. Dodge
to COIA, February 17, 1838, NAM M234,
Roll 387.
33 J. Schoolcraft to H. R. Schoolcraft,
November 21 and December 1, 1837, NAM
Ml, Roll 45.
34 B. F. Baker to COIA, January 9, 1838,
NAMM234, Roll 758; Dodge to COIA, July
6, 1838, in, C. F. Carter and J. P. Bloom,
eds., Territorial Papers of the United States
(Washington, D.C., 1934-1969) [TPUS], Vol.
17, 1029-31; and, COIA to Dodge, July 26,
1838, NAM M2 1, Roll 24; A. Brunson to R.
Stuart, July 20, 1843, NAM Ml, Roll 55.
35 A. W. Schorger, “The White-Tailed Deer
in Early Wisconsin,” Transactions of the
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and
Letters, 42 (1953), 197-247; and, H. Hicker-
son, The Southwestern Chippewa: An Ethno-
historical Study, American Anthropological
Association Memoir No. 92 (1962), 12-27.
Gary C. Anderson in, Little Crow:
Spokesman for the Sioux (Minnesota
Historical Society Press, 1986), p. 57, points
out that by 1851 Medwakanton Dakota were
again hunting deer in the St. Croix valley, then
“more abundant than in previous seasons,”
near areas cut-over by timber men.
36 D. P. Bushnell to Dodge, February 12,
1839, TPUS 27:1196; and, H. Dodge to
Secretary of War, April 25, 1841, NAM
M234, Roll 759.
37 Treaty with the Chippewa, October 4,
1842, 7 U. S. Statutes 591; Kappler, Indian
Treaties, 542-45. The lands involved are iden¬
tified as Royce Area 261 , Fig. 1 .
38 For a discussion of “half-breeds,”
“mixed-bloods,” and other cultural margi¬
nals, see, James A. Clifton, Being and Becom¬
ing Indian: Biographic Studies of North
American Frontiers (Chicago, The Dorsey
Press, in press).
39 Kappler, Indian Treaties, 542-45. Of¬
ficial Documentation for this treaty is scanty,
since Stuart kept no journal and delivered no
written report on his deliberations. However,
the Rev. L. H. Wheeler independently pre¬
pared a journal, including a particularly full
eye-witness description of events, which he
sent to his superior, David Greene, May 3,
1843, ABCFMP-MNHS, Box 3. Moreover,
because of the controversy aroused, there is an
unusual amount of supplementary reporting
on these negotiations, for example in Warren,
“Statement of Treaties,” and from other
Chippewa and American participants, such as
A. Brunson to J. D. Doty, January 6, 1843,
NAM Ml, Roll 54.
40 P. Holland, The Philosophie, Com-
monlie Called, The Morals of Plutarchus
(London, 1603), 1237.
41 COIA Crawford to Stuart, August 1,
1842, NAM Ml, Roll 53.
42 A. Brunson, A Western Pioneer (Cincin¬
nati, 1872), Vol. 2, 165-69; Stuart to COIA,
October 24 and November 19, 1842, NAM
Ml, Roll 39; ARCOIA 1842, 401-402; A.
Brunson to Gov. J. D. Doty, January 8, 1843
(end., letter from Chief Buffalo to L. Warren,
October 29, 1842 & speech of White Crow,
December 18, 1842), NAM M234, Roll 388;
and the Rev. Wheeler’s account of the nego¬
tiations, cited above.
43 Stuart, “Substance of Talk to the Chip¬
pewa,” September 29, 1842 (a communication
reconstructed later and enclosed in Stuart to
COIA, March 29, 1844), NAM M234, Roll
389. Cyrus Mendenhall to COIA, January 6,
1851; Rev. L. H. Wheeler, “Journal of 1842
Treaty,” in, Wheeler to Rev. David Greene,
May 3, 1843, ABCFMP-MNHS, Box 3; Stuart
35
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
to Rev. Greene, December 8, 1842; Chief Mar¬
tin to Rev. A. Brunson, end. in Brunson to
COIA, to Gov. Doty, and to Secy. War Spen¬
cer, January 8, 1843, NAM M234, Roll 388;
Warren, “Statement of Treaties” (section on
1842 treaty).
44 In the memoir dictated in his old age,
B. G. Armstrong claimed Stuart had promised
that the Chippewa could remain on their lands
so long as they remained peaceful. There is no
independent suggestion of the truth of this
assertion — that continued occupancy and use
rights were contingent on good behavior as
there is little support for other such claims in
Armstrong’s reminiscences. Americans in the
era would have classified any such misbe¬
havior as “depredations,” individual acts,
which under the Trade and Intercourse Act of
1834 and Chippewa treaties required the pun¬
ishment of the individuals concerned, not the
tribe collectively. Armstrong, a self proclaim¬
ed “friend of the Chippewa,” was actually an
inconsequential figure on this frontier, who in
his later years much inflated his role as mover
and shaker among the Chippewa and in the
corridors of power. He is barely mentioned in
contemporary public and private sources,
where some of his depictions are contradicted
and others unsupported by various eye-witness
participants. The original is, Early Life
Among the Indians (Ashland, Wisconsin,
1892); edited excerpts republished as Arm¬
strong, Reminiscences.
45 Kappler, Indian Treaties, 542-45; Brun¬
son to Doty, July 19, 1842, NAM M234, Roll
388; Stuart to D. Greene, December 8, 1842,
ABCFMP-MNHS, Box. 3. For background
on mining developments in the area, see R. J.
Hybels, “The Lake Superior Copper Fever,”
Michigan History, 23 (1950), 97-119 &
309-26.
46 Doty to Secretary of War, November 17,
1841; H. L. Dousman and H. H. Sibley to Sec¬
retary of War, February 18, 1841; and L.
Warren to Doty, October 2, 1841; in, NAM
M234, Roll 388.
47 Identified as Royce Area 332, Fig. 1.
48 Doty to COIA, April 5, 1843, NAM
M234, Roll 517; and, Stuart to COIA, June 2,
1843, NAM Ml, Roll 39.
49 Doty to COIA, April 5, 1843, NAM
M234 Roll 427. COIA to Stuart, 13 May,
1843, NAM Ml Roll 54. Stuart to COIA, 2
June, 1843 & 29 March, 1844, NAM Ml Roll
39. COIA W. Medill to I. A. Verplanck &
Charles Mix, June 4, 1847, NAM M2 1 Roll
39. COIA to Gov. Dodge, August 2 and 16,
1847, NAM M2 1 Roll 40. C. Borup to W. A.
Richmond, August 31, 1847, NAM Ml Roll
61. COIA to G. Copway, December 14, 1847,
NAM M2 1 Roll 40; and, ARCOIA 1847, 8-9.
50 COIA Medill to Dodge, October 31,
1846; and to Henry M. Rice, October 31,
1846, NAM M2 1 Roll 38. Medill to Dodge,
August 2, 1847; and to Brig. Gen. R. Jones,
December 6, 1847, NAM M2 1 Roll 40.
51 There is no hint of such a commitment in
the records of this treaty negotiation or in the
Chippewa complaints about these immediately
thereafter. The 1848 assertion was probably
an example of Chippewa negotiating style,
although they certainly wanted reservations.
52 They were imitating the Indians of
Michigan’s lower peninsula who had used this
same tactic successfully more than a decade
earlier. See, J. McClurken, “Strangers in
Their Own Land,” The Grand River Valley
Review (1985), Vol. 6, 2-26; and J. A.
Clifton, “Leopold Pokagon: Transformative
Leadership on the St. Joseph River Frontier,”
Michigan History (1985), Vol. 69, 16-23.
53 Medill to R. McClelland, March 3, 1848,
NAM M21 Roll 40; G. Johnston to H. R.
Schoolcraft, June 28 & August 18, 1848,
NAMM234 Roll 771; Medill to J. E. Fletcher,
c/o T. Harvey, August 17, 1848, NAM M2 1
Roll 41; Petition of Lake Superior Chippewa
Head Chiefs, February 5, 1849, House Misc.
Doc. 36, 30-2 [CS 544]; Delegation of Chip¬
pewa Head Chiefs to President, February 5,
1849, NAM M234 Roll 390; Medill to Liver¬
more, August 22, 1848 & February 12, 1849,
NAMM21 Roll 41. S. Hall to A. Hall, March
28, 1849, Northwest Mission Papers [NWMP-
UMD ] Box 1, Folder 1, University of
Minnesota — Duluth; Pitezel Journal, July 9,
1849, /. H. Pitezel Papers [JPP-CHL], Clarke
Historical Library, Central Michigan Univer¬
sity. “Chippewas of L’ance,” Lake Superior
News & Mining Journal [ LSN&MJ ], June 12,
1850.
54 “Removal of the Payments to Sandy
Lake,” Journal V, 1851, JPP-CHL.
55 R. A. Trennert, “Orlando Brown,” in,
R. M. Kvasnicka and H. J. Viola, eds., The
Commissioners of Indian Affairs, 1824-1977
(University of Nebraska Press, 1979), 41-48.
56 Relocating the Chippewa would have
meant the loss of the only females then
available to loggers and miners. Indeed, the
infrequent conflicts that erupted between
Americans and Chippewa were occasioned by
the former trying to gain sexual access to
Chippewa women. See, R. N. Current, The
36
Wisconsin Death March
History of Wisconsin: Civil War Era , 1848-
1873 , (State Historical Society of Wisconsin,
1976), Vol. 2, 154.
57 H. M. White, Guide to the Microfilm
Edition of the Alexander Ramsey Papers and
Records (Minnesota Historical Society),
16-18; and, Current, History of Wisconsin ,
Vol. 2, 197-205. The Lake Superior Chip¬
pewa’s annual monetary value that year con¬
sisted of $22,000, and $44,200 in goods and
services, plus the salaries of employees of the
Indian Department. All cash payable in spe¬
cie-gold and silver. This was a considerable
resource for a struggling, cash-poor new Ter¬
ritory. See “Omnibus Appropriation Bill,’’
House Miscellaneous Document 57, Novem¬
ber 12, 1850, 31-1, Vol. 2, p. 61 [CS 582].
58 Presidential Order, February 6, 1850, in
C. J. Kappler, Indian Affairs: Laws and Trea¬
ties, 5 Vols. (Washington, D.C., 1904-1941),
Vol. 5: 663; Brown to Ramsey, February 6,
1850, NAM M2 1 Roll 43; Ramsey to Liver¬
more, March 4; and, Livermore to Ramsey,
March 21, 1850 NAM M234 Roll 428; Secre¬
tary of State, Legislative Manual of the State
of Wisconsin, 9th Ed. (Madison, 1870), p.
209.
59 Brown to Watrous, April 22, 1850, NAM
M21 Roll 43; “John S. Watrous File,” in,
Minnesota Territory, Appointments Division,
Secretary’s Files, National Archives Record
Group 48, Interior Department Appointment
Papers [ RG48 ].
60 Rev. Wheeler to Ely, June 19 & July 22,
1850; Rev. Hall to Ely, July 16, 1850; in, E. E.
Ely Papers [EFEJ-SHS W] , State Historical
Society of Wisconsin, Vol. 3.
61 S. B. Treat to COIA Lea, May 12, 1852,
ABCFMP-MNHS, Box 6.
62 J. N. Davidson, “Missions on Che-
quamegon Bay,” Collections of the Wisconsin
State Historical Society, Vol. 12, 434-52;
Milwaukee Weekly Wisconsin, June 5, 1850;
J. P. Durban to Secretary of the Interior, Oc¬
tober 3, 1850, NAMM234, Roll 767; D. King,
et ai, to D. Atkins, July 15, 1850, NAM
M234, Roll 771; S. Hall to Treat, 28 March
1850, ABCFMP-MNHS, Box 5; Hall to Ram¬
sey, 28 March 1850, NAM M234, Roll 168;
H. Hall to L. D. Mudgett, March 13, 1850,
NWMP-UMD, Box 1. Hall to Treat, October
7, 1852 and May 17, 1853, ABCFMP-MNHS,
Box 6.
63 Mendenhall to Lea, January 6, 1851,
NAMM234 Roll 767; Congressman J. R. Gid-
dings to President, July 30, 1850, w/ end.,
Petition from Citizens of Lake Superior South
Shore, NAM M234 Roll 390; LSN&MJ, June
5 and 12, 1850; Milwaukee Weekly Wisconsin,
June 5 and July 3, 1850; J. P. Durban to
Secretary of the Interior, October 3, 1850,
NAM M234 Roll 767. D. Aitken to Lea,
August 26, 1850, NAM M234 Roll 771. “Im¬
portant Movement Among the Chippewa,”
and, “Chippewa Delegation,” Detroit Free
Press, November 28, 1848 and February 19,
1849.
64 LSN&MJ, June 5, 1850; Pitezel Journal,
Vol. 5, June 3, 1850, JHPP-CHL; L. H.
Wheeler to E. F. Ely, July 22, 1850, E. F. Ely
Papers [EFEP-MNHS\ , Minnesota Historical
Society, Vol. 3; “Correspondence from J.
Bowron,” Boston Daily Journal, September
14, 1850; Watrous to COIA, December 31,
1850, NAM M234, Roll 767; Watrous to
Ramsey, November 14, 1850. NAM M234,
Roll 767.
65 Brown to Ramsey, March 26, 1850;
Watrous was handed his commission in Wash¬
ington a month later — Brown to Watrous,
April 22; NAM M2 1, Roll 43; “Indians to be
Removed,” June 1, and “From the Lake Su¬
perior Journal,” June 27, 1850, Detroit Free
Press.
66 Pitezel, “President Conditions and Pros¬
pects of the Missions,” Journal, Vol. 5, July,
1850, JHPP-CHL; Hall to Ely, February 24,
1851, EFEP-MNHS, Vol. 3; Pitezel, Lights
and Shades, 247 ; Hall to Ely, February 24,
1850, Vol. 3, EFEP-SHSW; Annual Report of
the Missionary Society of the Methodist Epis¬
copal Church [ARMS-MES], 1850, 70-71.
67 Pitezel, “Journal,” Vol. 5 (1851), JHPP-
CHL; Armstrong “Reminiscences,” 290-92;
W. Bartlett, History, Tradition, and Adven¬
ture in the Chippewa Valley (Chippewa Falls,
Wisconsin, 1929), 67-70, 119-120; Watrous to
Ramsey, n.d. [c. December 12], 1850. NAM
M234, Roll 767.
68 Bartlett. History, Traditions, 69; J. E.
Fletcher to Superintendent T. H. Harvey, No¬
vember 14, 1850, NAM234, Roll 760; Pitezel,
Lights and Shades, 298-99; Watrous to
Ramsey, November 14; n.d. [c. December 12];
6 December 30, 1850; in NAM M234 Roll
767. Chippewa Annuity Pay Rolls, 1850, Item
186, Annuity Pay Lists. RG 75.
69 Pitezel, Journal, Vol. 5 JHPP-CHL
(1851); E. D. Neill, “History of the Ojib-
ways,” Collections of the Minnesota Histori¬
cal Society, 5 (1885), 500; Armstrong, “Remi¬
niscences,” 289-92; Hall to Ely, December 25,
IS50, EEJ-SHSW, Vol. 3.
70 Watrous to Ramsey, November 13 & 14;
37
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
n.d. [c. December 12]; & December 30, 1850;
in NAM M234 Roll 767; Ramsey to COIA;
December, 1850; in NAM M234 Roll 767;
HMD 57, 61.
71 Ramsey to COIA, November 14, end.,
Watrous to Ramsey, November 12, 1850,
NAM M234, Roll 767; Annuity Records,
20607-#798, Sandy Lake Sub-Agency,
December 2, 1850, RG 75.
72 Chippewa Chiefs [of interior] to Presi¬
dent Fillmore, [c. November], 1852; and,
Chief Buffalo, et at., [of lake shore] to COIA
Lea, November 6, 1851; in, NAM M234, Roll
149; Watrous to Ramsey, December 10, 1850;
W. W. Warren to Ramsey, January 21, 1851;
Ramsey to COIA Lea, March 27, 1851; all in
NAMM234 Roll 747. Hall to Treat, Decem¬
ber 30, 1850, A BCFMP-MNHS, Box 5. H.
Hall to L. Burbank, January 14, 1861,
NWMP-UMD, Box 1, Folder 41; and, Pitezel,
Journal Vol. 5, July, 1851, JPP-CHL.
73 Chippewa Chiefs to President Fillmore,
and Chief Buffalo, et at., to COIA Lea, cited
above. Watrous to Ramsey, December 10,
1850; W. W. Warren to Ramsey, January 21,
1851; Ramsey to Lea, March 27, 1851; all in
NAM M234 Roll 747. “Lake Superior and
Mississippi bands Chippewa Chiefs, Sandy
Lake Sub-agency, December 2, 1850, Receipt
for Provisions,’’ Annuity Records, Item
20607-#798, RG 75. Hall to Treat, December
30, 1850, ABCFMP-MNHS, Box 5; Hall to L.
Burbank, January 14, 1851, NWMP-UMD,
Box 1, Folder 41. Pitezel, “Journal,” Vol. 5,
July, 1851, JPP-CHL.
74 Lea to Secretary of the Interior, June 3,
1851, Report Books of the Office of Indian
Affairs, NAM M348, Roll 8. C. K. Smith
(Secretary, Minnesota Territory) to Lea,
February 7, 1851; and, Petition of Wisconsin
Assembly, February 18, 1851; both in NAM
M234 Roll 767. LSN&MJ, June 11 & 18, July
28, & September 27, 1851. P. Greely (Collec¬
tor of the Customs, Boston), w/encl., Boston
news clipping, to Secretary of the Treasury,
August 23, 1851, NAM M234 Roll 149.
Watrous to COIA, July, 1851, NAM M234
Roll 149.
75 Watrous to Ramsey, September 22, 1851,
NAM M234 Roll 149. See also, COIA to
Secretary of the Interior, June 3, 1851, NAM
M348, Roll 8; Lea to Watrous, 25 August,
1851, NAM M2 1 Roll 45; and, Treat to Hall,
September 24, 1851 , ABCFMP-MNHS Box 5.
76 Watrous survived the charges against him
of dereliction in public duty. His patrons in
Washington and Minnesota defended him un¬
til mid- 1852, when he fell under a graver
suspicion, of infidelity in political character.
It was first claimed, then confirmed, that
Watrous had been masquerading under false
party colors. As a Minnesota competitor put it
on February 28, 1853, he came “on to the
Mississippi a rampant Whig. He now pretends
to be a strong Democrat.” It was an ap¬
propriate time for Watrous to adopt this fresh
party hue, for Franklin Pierce was to be in¬
augurated three days later. While this switch
did not save him his position as Indian Agent
under the new Democratic administration, it
did ease the way for his later success in Min¬
nesota. He settled in the Fond du Lac area
where he became the Register of the U. S.
Land Office, and, after Minnesota’s state¬
hood, the first — Democratic — Speaker of the
Minnesota Assembly. As he had anticipated in
1850, a tour as Indian Agent was a profitable
thing for a young man on this frontier, both
financially and as a means of career advance¬
ment. See, E. Whittsley to President Fillmore,
April 17, 1852, NAM M234 Roll 149; and
November 16, 1852, Roll 767. J. R. Carey,
“History of Duluth, and of St. Louis County
to the Year 1870,” Minnesota Historical Col¬
lections Vol. 9, 250. S. B. Olmstead to S. B.
Lowry, February 28, 1853, in, “John Watrous
File,” RG 48.
77 Watrous to Lea, June 7, 1852, NMM234,
Roll 149; Citizens of Lake Superior Petition to
President Filmore, June 4, 1852, NAM M234,
Roll 149; Chief Buffalo to Ramsey, July 23,
1852, NAM M234, Roll 428; B. Armstrong,
Early Life Among the Indians, 26, 30-31, 101.
There is no separate confirmation of Arm¬
strong’s claims to personal credit for this suc¬
cess. “Treaty with the Chippewa, 1854,” Kap-
pler, Indian Treaties, 648-52.
78 The Last Trek of the Indians (University
of Chicago Press, 1946), 14-15.
79 Charles Callender calls this the secondary
or lesser configuration of Old Northwest In¬
dian patterns in his, “Great Lakes-Riverine
Sociopolitical Organization,” in Trigger,
Handbook . . . Northeast, 610.
80 James A. Clifton, A Place of Refuge; J.
McClurken, “Ottawa Adaptive Strategies to
Indian Removal,” The Michigan Historical
Review (1986), Vol. 12, 29-57.
81 Callender refers to this as the dominant
configuration in the Old Northwest, “Great
Lakes-Riverine,” 610.
82 See, Treaties with the Seneca, Shawnee,
38
Wisconsin Death March
and Ottawa, 1831 in Kappler, Indian Treaties,
325-39. Also, Prucha, Great Father, Vol. 1,
247-48.
83 James A. Clifton, “From Bark Canoes to
Pony Herds: the Great Lakes Transportation
Revolution, 1750-1775,” Henry Ford
Museum & Greenfield Village Herald (Vol.
15, 1986), 12-19.
84 C. G. Klopfenstein, “The Removal of the
Indians from Ohio, 1820-1843,” Ph. D. diss.,
Western Reserve University, 1956, 61-62; J.
Johnston to L. Cass, February 3, 1824 and
April 14, 1825, NAM Ml, Rolls 14 and 16;
“Wapokonetta Council,” Niles Weekly
Register, June 25, 1825; E. W. Duval to
Secretary of War Calhoun, November 28,
1824, NAM M234, Roll 60; Actg. Governor
R. Crittenden to Calhoun, September 28,
1823, TPUS, Vol. 19, 549.
85 Bert Anson, The Miami Indians (Univer¬
sity of Oklahoma Press, 1970), 213-33,
266-89; S. J. Raefert, “The Hidden Com¬
munity: The Miami Indians of Indiana,
1846-1940,” Ph. D. diss., University of
Delaware; Clifton, The Pokagons.
86 R. F. Bauman, “Kansas, Canada, or
Starvation,” Michigan History, Vol. 36,
287-98; Clifton, A Place of Refuge.
87 See, Great Father, Vol. 1, 244; compare,
James A. Clifton, “Escape, Evasion, and
Eviction: Adaptive Responses of the Indians
of the Old Northwest Territory to the Jackso¬
nian Removal Policy of the 1830s,” TS, paper
read at the Conference on the American In¬
dian and the Jacksonian Era, Middle Ten¬
nessee State University (1980), 17-18 (Copy
on deposit, D’Arcy McNickle Center, New¬
berry Library, and Wisconsin State Historical
Society).
88 See, H. H. Tanner, ed., Atlas of Great
Lakes Indian History (University of Okla¬
homa Press, 1986), 122-125'.
89 E. Whittsley to President Fillmore, April
17, 1852, NAM M234 Roll 149; and
November 16, 1852, Roll 767. Carey,
“History of Duluth,” 250.
90 The Power to Lead: The Crisis of the
American Presidency (New York, 1984), 122.
91 Qualitative Science (New York, 1983),
203-204.
92 For the later reservation history, see P.
Shifferd, “A Study in Economic Change
Among the Chippewa of Northern Wisconsin:
1854-1900,” The Western Canadian Journal
of Anthropology 6-4 (1976); and, Danziger,
The Chippewas, 91-132.
39
■Mi,
The Aquatic Macrophyte Community
of Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin
Roy Bouchard and John D. Madsen
Abstract . The aquatic macrophyte community of Black Earth Creek , Wisconsin, was
studied in June and July of 1985 and compared to data collected in 1981.
Macrophyte distribution was examined by the line intercept method, with macrophyte
cover negatively correlated to light reduction by tree canopy. The dominant species in
the stream was Potamogeton crispus. Other species included P. pectinatus, P.
vaginatus, Elodea canadensis, Ranunculus longirostris, Hypericum boreale and fila¬
mentous algae, namely Rhizoclonium sp. Average total cover of all macrophytes was
55.6%. Cover of macrophytes was only slightly lower in 1985 than in 1981 , which
was thought to be due to random population fluctuations rather than directional
change in the community. Macrophyte biomass was estimated at three unshaded sta¬
tions. Maximum macrophyte biomass was 789 g dw m~2, with no relation found be¬
tween biomass and the inflow of a sewage treatment plant. Samples of Potamogeton
crispus and Rhizoclonium sp. analyzed for tissue phosphorus indicated that plants are
not near limiting concentrations for P; rather, present data indicate that light
availability limits the growth of macrophytes in Black Earth Creek. Oxygen mass
balance was used to estimate community photosynthesis and respiration, and the
macrophyte /epiphyte contribution to community respiration estimated by in situ in¬
cubations. Macrophyte /epiphyte respiration contributed 47% to 68% of community
respiration. The P/R ratio was 0.62, indicating a heterotrophic stream community.
Aquatic macrophytes are an important
l component of stream ecosystems,
influencing physical, chemical and bio¬
logical processes. Aquatic macrophytes
stabilize the stream substrate, reducing
turbidity and erosion. They also increase
deposition of suspended solids, further
reducing turbidity, and oxygenate the
water by means of photosynthesis. Stream
channels deepen and current increases
between adjacent plant beds, improving
habitat diversity. Aquatic macrophytes
and attached epiphytic algae provide food
John D. Madsen, formerly at the University of
Wisconsin-Madison, is now a research associate at
the Fresh Water Institute, Rensselaer Polytechnic
Institute, Troy, New York.
Roy Bouchard is a member of the Maine Depart¬
ment of Environmental Protection.
and habitat for macroinvertebrates and
other small organisms, as well as protec¬
tion for large fish species. Macrophytes
increase stream productivity beyond
energy gained by allochthonous inputs. In
addition to these benefits, macrophytes
provide surface area for microbes, which
contribute significantly to many chemical
processes in the stream, such as nitrifica¬
tion, respiration, and decomposition.
However, excess growths of macro¬
phytes can also create problems for the
stream ecosystem. Bank-to-bank growths
of aquatic macrophytes will slow current
velocities, causing flooding and siltation.
Homogeneous growths of macrophyte
species reduce habitat heterogeneity.
Most importantly, excessive plant
growths create large daily dissolved oxy-
41
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
gen fluctuations. Nighttime respiration
may reduce dissolved oxygen to levels that
are stressful or lethal to oxygen-sensitive
organisms.
Recent concern for Black Earth Creek
centered on potential eutrophication and
the resultant effect on this highly produc¬
tive trout stream. Decisions on the man¬
agement of plants require some assess¬
ment of their distribution, abundance,
and impact on the stream. With this in
mind, we addressed the following:
1. Species and plant distribution in
1981 and 1985 and their relationship to
several physical factors.
2. The relationship between tree can¬
opy, light availability, and plant growth.
3. Macrophyte biomass in Black Earth
Creek, with sampling above and below a
point source of nutrients.
4. The contribution of macrophyte res¬
piration to the oxygen balance of the
stream.
5. Potential phosphorus limitation of
macrophyte biomass.
Macrophyte Cover
Previous work (Madsen 1982; Madsen
and Adams 1985) on Black Earth Creek
surveying the plant communities and
physical environment in four sections of
Black Earth Creek (Segments 1-4, Figures
1 and 2) indicated that light limitation by
tree canopy and turbidity are probably
the most important factors limiting plant
productivity. The relationship between in-
stream plant communities and shading
has been extensively studied. Light avail¬
ability is likely the most important factor
limiting plant growth (Dawson and Kern-
Hansen 1978; Dawson et al. 1978; Krause
1977; Barko et al. 1985; Peltier and Welch
1969). The effects of removing the tree
canopy were noted by Hunt (1979) in the
Little Plover River (Wisconsin), where
first year increases in macrophyte cover of
more than 200% were seen, with accom¬
panying increases in water temperature
and trout production.
Biomass
The actual impacts of macrophytes on
the stream environment depend heavily
on the amount of plant tissue, or biomass,
present in the stream. Methods for esti¬
mating plant cover are valuable in allow¬
ing rapid quantitative surveys but cannot
be used to estimate biomass at higher
cover frequencies. Quantification of in-
stream biomass is difficult due to the
heterogeneity of such systems and the
large number of samples needed to obtain
statistically meaningful estimates. Recent
work in Badfish Creek, Wisconsin (Mad¬
sen 1986), indicated that even short
stretches (50-100 m) of relatively homog¬
eneous steam may need sample sizes in ex¬
cess of 15 to 20 samples.
Respiration and
Dissolved Oxygen Modeling
Diel variation in dissolved oxygen levels
are caused in part by macrophyte photo¬
synthesis (Ps) and respiration (R) (Kelly et
al. 1983). Macrophytes are only one oxy¬
gen consumer in an aquatic system. Bac¬
teria, algae, macroinvertebrates, and
higher fauna all contribute to overall
respiratory load (McDonnell 1982). Esti¬
mates of reaeration coefficients (K2), Ps,
and R for the community may be made by
finite difference models without detailing
their components. Single station models
commonly rely on assumptions such as
homogeneity of the study reach for some
distance above the sampling point, Ps
proportional to light intensity, and con¬
stant R and K2 despite changes in tem¬
perature (Mace et al. 1984, Owens 1966).
Phosphorus Limitation
Unquantified observations of increased
macrophyte growth below the sewage
treatment plant in Cross Plains caused
Brynildson and Mason (1975) to suggest
42
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
that P input at that point is responsible.
Values reported for total and soluble P
for 1985 (WDNR data, unpub.) indicate a
substantial input of P due to a point
source in the upper watershed. In re¬
sponse to the speculation that phosphorus
input to Black Earth Creek may increase
macrophyte growth, we analyzed tissue
phosphorus from the dominant macro¬
phyte (Potamogeton crispus) at several
sites to check for limiting tissue P concen¬
trations. In a literature review of nutri¬
tional and ecological growth controlling
factors, Barko etal . (1985) concluded that
there are few examples of naturally occur-
ing macrophyte populations exhibiting
limitation by phosphorus. Inorganic car¬
bon and physical factors (e.g., light) seem
to play a dominant role in limiting aquatic
macrophyte growth (Huebert and Gor¬
ham 1983; Peltier and Welch 1969).
Work on lake systems (e.g., Carignan
1982; Carignan and Kalff 1979, 1980;
Barko and Smart 1981) indicates that
sediments provide the bulk of tissue P.
Estimates of the sediment contribution to
plant tissue phosphorus range from 70 to
100% (Huebert and Gorham 1983). Total
removal of P from experimental water
columns resulted in unimpeded growth by
plants with sufficient sediment nutrients.
Mace et al (1984) speculated that the
macrophytes in Black Earth Creek uti¬
lized sediment P more than water column
P, based on a model for other Wisconsin
streams.
Literature reports of tissue P in natural
populations indicate concentrations rang¬
ing from 0.15 to 0.6%. Plants immersed
in greatly enriched waters (e.g., Badfish
Creek, Dane County, WI) may show con¬
centrations as high as 0.7 to 1.0% P
(Madsen 1986). Tissue P levels for all
species of plants sampled in Wisconsin by
Mace et al, (1984) ranged from 0.13 to
0.67%, all of which were above the criti¬
cal growth level of 0.1% established by
Gerloff (1973, 1975).
Methods
Site Description
Black Earth Creek is a highly produc¬
tive, calcareous stream in western Dane
County, Wisconsin (Fig. 1). This lime¬
stone stream is classified as a “class-
one” trout stream by the Wisconsin De¬
partment of Natural Resources (WDNR),
indicating that it sustains a population of
naturally reproducing trout (Brynildson
and Mason 1975). Black Earth Creek is a
valuable natural resource to the state,
with trout productivity (472 kg ha"1 y'1;
Brynildson and Mason 1975) nearly as
high as the Horokiwi Stream in New
Zealand (540 kg ha'1 y"1; Allen 1951) and
higher than other trout streams studied in
the midwest.
Water quality is rated from good to
fair, with some water quality degradation
related to high concentrations of phos¬
phorus and coliform bacteria (Lathrop
and Johnson 1979). Groundwater and
artesian spring water maintain low tem¬
peratures and high oxygen levels, such as
Fig. 1. A map of Wisconsin indicating
location of Dane County and Black Earth
Creek.
43
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
are necessary to support trout and other
oxygen-sensitive organisms in Wisconsin
(Threinen and Poff 1963).
Black Earth Creek is on the edge of the
unglaciated Driftless Area of southwest¬
ern Wisconsin. The watershed is largely
agricultural (Born 1986). Our study area
extends from above the Village of Cross
Plains to just above the Town of Black
Earth, with seven study sections indicated
(Fig. 2). One significant point source of
pollution is the Cross Plains Sewage
Treatment Plant. However, nonpoint
pollution occurs from agricultural ac¬
tivities throughout the watershed as well
as urbanization and development in the
Village of Cross Plains and the Town of
Middleton at the headwaters.
Macrophyte Cover and
Physical Environment
During June and July of 1985, four
areas previously studied in 1981 were
remapped (sections 1-4), along with three
additional sections (Fig. 2) to quantify
any major changes in macrophyte cover
and characterize downstream segments of
the creek. Line-intercept methods were
consistent with those used in 1981
(Madsen 1982). Once each month, twenty
stratified-random transects were sampled
in each segment. The transect was placed
across the stream, and the occurrence of
each macrophyte species in each 1 dm seg¬
ment recorded. A species found in the 1
dm segment was considered to “cover”
that 1 dm segment. Overhead tree canopy
was estimated by eye to the nearest 10%
at each transect site. Photosynthetically
active radiation (PAR) was measured at
the stream surface in the center of the
channel as well as 1.5 m from each shore
using a LiCor quantum meter and probe,
with light availability expressed as a
percentage of open-field light intensity.
Water depth and depth of silt deposits
were measured at 1 m intervals, and
stream width at each transect. The per-
Fig. 2. Map of Black Earth Creek, indicating study sites 1 through 7. Figure reprinted
from Water Resources Management Workshop Report (Born 1986).
44
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
centage of substrate composed of silt,
sand, and gravel at the surface was
estimated at each transect.
Biomass
The ability of the stream to support
plants was quantified by taking standing
crop biomass samples in three represen¬
tative unshaded areas. Phenological
evidence from the literature (Sastroutomo
1981; Kunii 1982) and previous observa¬
tions on Black Earth Creek (Madsen
1982) suggested plant biomass would peak
in early to mid-July. Sampling peak
biomass provides a crude estimate of the
potential productivity in the stream.
One site within each of three sections
(1,3 and 7) was chosen based on the lack
of shade, presence of dense macrophyte
growths, and position relative to the
sewage treatment plant at Cross Plains.
Fifteen stratified random samples were
taken from each site. Sites 1 and 7 were
150 m in length; site 3 was 100 m long
(Fig. 2). These sites had heterogeneous
bottoms of silt over gravel with open
channels scoured to bare gravel between
dense macrophyte beds. Each sample was
harvested from a 0.19 m2 quadrat at the
sediment surface, with inclusion of less
than 10% root material. Samples were
sorted by dominant species and dried at
70°C. Species identifications and
nomenclature follow Fassett (1957).
Respiration and
Dissolved Oxygen Modeling
Dissolved oxygen variations of 6-8 mg
02 1“! observed in the stream over 24-
hour periods (WDNR data, unpubl.)
prompted a concern for adequate oxygen
to sustain sensitive organisms (e.g.,
trout). The percentage contribution of
macrophytes and attached epiphytes to
the whole stream respiration of one area
of Black Earth Creek was estimated to in¬
dicate the role of macrophytes in com¬
munity oxygen depletion.
A single station model developed by
Mark Tusler (WDNR) was applied to Site
1 (Fig. 2). Temperature and dissolved
oxygen data (uncorrected probe readings)
were obtained from the U. S. Geological
Survey (USGS) from the gaging station at
Cross Plains (downstream end of Site 1)
for June 12-14. Simultaneous tempera¬
ture and dissolved oxygen measurements
were taken at 8 a.m. and 2 p.m. at each
end of the study stretch on June 13. Low
variation in temperature (less than 0.2°C)
and dissolved oxygen (less than 0. 1 mg 02
l'1) indicated uniformity of the water
mass in the stretch, a necessary require¬
ment to satisfy the assumptions of the
single station model utilized.
Dark respiration estimates for the
dominant macrophytes (P. crispus at site
1 and P. vaginatus at site 7) were done on
June 13 and 14 with a total of 12 repli¬
cates for each species. Twenty cm ter¬
minal sections of healthy shoots were in¬
cubated in situ in 300 ml BOD bottles
(taped to exclude light) for periods of
2-3.5 hours, along with stream water con¬
trols. Dissolved oxygen concentrations
were determined by the azide modifica¬
tion of the Winkler method (APHA Stan¬
dard Methods 1981). Plants were removed
from the bottles immediately after acidi¬
fication and dried to constant weight at
70°C. Subsamples were used to determine
total ash content at 550°C. No attempt
was made to remove epiphytes prior to in¬
cubation because these contribute directly
to respiration as part of the macrophyte-
epiphyte complex in the stream.
Phosphorus Limitation
Following the rationale of Gerloff
(1973), composite samples of the 10 cm
terminal segments of healthy P. crispus
shoots were randomly harvested on June
20 from all study sites (excluding site 5,
which had little growth of P. crispus). Ad¬
ditionally, a sample of filamentous algae
was harvested from site 6. Samples from
45
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
each site were oven-dried, ground in a
Wiley mill, and split samples analyzed by
the vanadomolybdate procedure (APHA
Standard Methods 1981) in our labora¬
tory and by the Wisconsin State Labora¬
tory of Hygiene.
Results and Discussion
Macrophyte Cover
The physical environment in Black
Earth Creek is heterogeneous with respect
to depth, current, and substrate. These
three interrelated factors have a large im¬
pact on plant distribution, resulting in
highly variable species distribution and
abundance. The stream channel widens
considerably downstream, increasing
from 4.9 m in site 1 to 12.9 m just above
Black Earth. The width/depth ratio aver¬
ages 16.5:1, and also increases in a similar
fashion (Table 1). Much of Black Earth
Creek is composed of relatively uniform
runs broken up by short riffles and pools.
Figure 3 shows the relative distribution
of silt, sand, and gravel covering the bot¬
tom of the sections surveyed. While the
base materials of the stream are gravel
and cobbles, silt deposits have altered the
character of the substrate throughout the
stream, with considerable depths of silt
deposited in places (up to 1 m). Sections 3
and 4 were the only ones that had greater
than 60% gravel substrate and were simi¬
lar in width/depth ratios. Downstream
sections 5 and 7 had 30% or more sand
deposits. Silt deposits were moderately
correlated with plant cover (r = 0.4,
p <0.001). Average depths of silt by site
are listed in Table 1. Observations indi¬
cate that while depths of sediment as great
as 80 cm build up in places along the
stream edges, much of the areal distribu¬
tion is made up of shallower (ca. 10 cm)
deposits held in place by macrophyte
beds. Mace et al. (1984) found a 69%
(presence/absence) occurrence of macro¬
phytes on silty substrates. Kullberg (1974)
also noted the increased frequency of
macrophytes on silt substrates. Dense
beds of R. longirostris , which is usually
located on gravel/cobble substrate, com¬
monly trapped 10 cm or more of sediment
where the plants were not located directly
in a riffle area. Previous observations on
Black Earth Creek (Madsen 1982; Madsen
and Adams 1985) of P. crispus rooting in
silt over gravel tend to confirm the im¬
pression of its significant local impact on
deposition. Macrophytes cause local sedi¬
mentation within a plant bed by reducing
current velocities (Haslam 1978; Gregg
and Rose 1982; Madsen and Warncke
1983). Although moderate siltation may
cause a favorable substrate rich in
nutrients for macrophyte growth, heavy
siltation causes burial and decomposition
of macrophyte beds. Therefore, the
Table 1. Averages for environmental factors for study reaches 1 through 7 for June and
July.
46
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
Fig. 3. Substrate composition in percent gravel, sand and silt for study reaches, and
mean for all reaches.
higher frequency of macrophytes on silt
substrates may be caused by increased
siltation in a macrophyte bed, in addition
to favorable current velocity or substrate
conditions.
The average cover of macrophytes for
all seven sites was 55.6% (S.E. = 2.1) for
June and July combined. The average for
sites 1 through 4 was 60.4%, compared to
the 1981 estimates of 68.8% (Fig. 4).
Section-to-section variability is high be¬
tween and within years, especially in sec¬
tion 1. The major change from 1981 is an
average decrease in the abundance of the
dominant, Potamogeton crispus. How¬
ever, this is most likely due to annual
variation rather than directional change in
the community.
The community in 1985 was composed
of seven species that together made up
more than 96% of total cover (Fig. 5).
One of the notable differences from 1981
was the scarcity ( < 1 %) of formerly domi¬
nant TV. officinale, and the relative abun¬
dance of H. boreale, with 4% cover. In
addition, P. vagina tus occurred with P.
pectinatus in similar abundance, especi¬
ally at site 7. A striking growth of fila¬
mentous algae identified as Rhizoclonium
sp. began in late June and covered large
areas of site 5, which previously showed
very little vegetation despite its lack of
shading. The site is shallow with primarily
gravel substrate and scattered R. longi-
rostris patches providing anchoring sub¬
strate for the usually periphytic filaments.
Localized patches of dense filamentous
algal growths were also encountered at
sites 3, 4, and 6 in shallow areas with ex¬
posure to sunlight. Filamentous algae
were not quantified in 1981. The in¬
creased importance of Elodea, Potamoge-
47
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Total Cover of Macrophytes
1 2 3 4 Mean
Sampling Site
1/ XI June 1981 l\ \J July 1981 X///A June 1985 KNSN3 July 1 98S
Fig. 4. Percent total community cover in Black Earth Creek for June and July of 1981 and
1985.
ton vaginatus and Ranunculus in 1985
versus 1981 is largely due to sampling of
the lower reaches (5, 6, and 7) in 1985 that
were not sampled in 1981. Similarly, the
much higher relative percentage of P.
crispus in 1981 is in part due to the sam¬
pling of only sections 1 through 4. Pota-
mogeton pectinatus and P. vaginatus are
much more prevalent in section 7. A
smaller amount of variation in species
composition between the two years is due
to interannual fluctuations in dominance
(Dawson er al. 1978).
Overhead canopy was negatively corre¬
lated with percent cover of macrophytes
(r = -0.58, p< 0.001) and with the per¬
centage of ambient light reaching the
stream surface (r=-0.87, p <0.001).
This indicates that shading reduces cover
and biomass development by significantly
reducing in-stream light intensity. The
average width of the stream (8-10 m) is
narrow enough for effective shade control
of aquatic vegetation.
Control of stream macrophytes by
shading has been extensively studied and
utilized in European streams (Dawson
1978; Dawson and Haslam 1983; Krause
1977; Jorga et al. 1982). In Wisconsin,
(Madsen 1986) found a 60% reduction in
incident light and a 50% reduction in
macrophyte biomass in areas of Badfish
Creek with natural tree vegetation, as
compared to areas with only herbaceous
riparian cover. Riparian shading by either
naturally propagated or planted tree cover
could be a feasible control technique for
Black Earth Creek macrophytes. Control
of macrophytes should only be imple¬
mented if the macrophyte standing crop is
considered to be detrimental to the oxy¬
gen balance of the stream community.
Over shorter periods of time, light
availability in Black Earth Creek may be
48
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
Relative Frequency of Species
1981 versus 1985
_ Macrophyte Species
IZ71 1981 El 1985
Fig. 5. Relative frequencies of species for 1981 and 1985; E. c., Elodea canadensis; H. h.,
Hypericum boreaie; L. m., Lemna minor; N. o., Nasturtium officinale; P. a., Phalaris arun-
dinacea; P. c., Potamogeton crispus; P. p., Potamogeton pectinatus; P. v., Potamogeton
vaginatus; R. /., Ranunculus longirostris; R. sp., Rhizoclonium sp.
reduced by water turbidity. Periods of
heavy runoff may create turbid conditions
for many days, or even weeks (pers. obs.).
Variability in turbidity from year to year
is one contributor to interannual variabil¬
ity in macrophyte biomass.
Biomass
Biomass provides an estimate of the
ability of Black Earth Creek to support
macrophyte growth (Table 2). Areas of
high biomass and dense growth occurred
in and above site 1, indicating that the
stream is highly productive well before it
encounters the point source of nutrients at
Cross Plains. The input of treated sewage
effluent from the Cross Plains Sewage
Treatment plant does not increase macro¬
phyte biomass, but may stimulate the
growth of periphytic algae. Biomass at
sites 1 and 7 may be higher than site 3
because of edaphic factors, specifically
higher percentage silt. Data from both
1981 and 1985 show site 3 to have lower
total cover, due to both different sedi¬
ment characteristics and higher percent
tree canopy.
Biomass sampling was done on Black
Earth Creek by Mace et al. (1984) in
September, 1982 at a location 11 km
downstream from Cross Plains yielding
an estimate of 282 g m'2. This estimate
does not truly reflect potential biomass on
Black Earth Creek, since the sample was
taken after the senescence of the domi¬
nant species (Potamogeton crispus , P.
49
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Table 2. Above-ground biomass of macrophytes at three sites in Black Earth Creek (July
1,1985).
Species codes: R = Rhizoclonium sp. and other filamentous algae; P.c . = Potamogeton crispus;
P.spp. = P. pectinatus and P. vaginatus; H.b. = Hypericum boreale; R.l. = Ranunculus longirostris;
E.c. = Elodea candensis.
pectinatus and P. vaginatus). A maximum
biomass range of 500 to 800 g dw m"2 is
more reasonable and is comparable to
values reported for fertile limestone
streams in Britain, as well as other
streams (Table 3). Mace et al. (1984)
found an average biomass of 365.5 g dw
m'2 for Mount Vernon Creek, a nearby
stream that receives less point and non¬
point pollution. Peak values for Badfish
Creek, a nearby stream receiving sewage
effluent, were 700 g dw m"2 in 1983 and
626 g dw m"2 in 1984 (Madsen, in prep.).
The similarity of values between Black
Earth Creek and Badfish Creek support
our contention that the macrophytes in
these streams are not nutrient limited.
Respiration and
Dissolved Oxygen Modeling
Respiration estimates for P. crispus and
P. vaginatus averaged 2.43 and 2.90 mg 02
g AFDW"1 h"1, respectively (S.E. was 0.59
and 0.14, corrections for AFDW were
0.854 and 0.843). While these are higher
than the suggested value of 1.5 mg 02 g
dw'1 h'1 as suggested by Westlake (1966),
they compare well with values found for
similar species by Mace et al. (1984) and
our unpublished data for P. pectinatus.
Respiration attributed to microbial and
algal activity in the water column was
estimated to average 4.3 mg 02 l"1 d"1,
which is approximately 10% of the whole
stream respiration estimated below.
The model estimated K2 (adjusted to 25
C) at 8.52 d'1 and Ps and R as 25.1 and
40.7 mg 02 l"1 d"1 respectively. The
estimated K2 appears high compared to
the estimates of 8.5 to 10 d'1 by Grant and
Skavroneck (1983) for an area down¬
stream of Cross Plains that has a higher
gradient and shallower flow than site 1.
However, the K2 calculated had a rather
large confidence interval (5.9-11.1 95%
C.I.), and thus the disparity with the ex¬
pectations based on the results of Grant
and Skavroneck is not surprising. Lack of
Table 3. Macrophyte biomass for representative streams and lakes.
50
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
correction in the model for temperature
effects may produce an overestimation of
K2. MacDonnell (1982), working on a
highly productive hardwater stream in
Pennsylvania, noted that K2 may be
overestimated by as much as 27% in such
situations.
Effects of dissolved oxygen changes on
respiration are probably small, as the
observed range was between 6.8 and 13.9
mg 02 l"1 for the period. This is above the
level (5 mg 02 l"1) at which large effects on
respiration are noted (MacDonnell 1982).
Model assumptions about the uniformity
of the stream flow can be questioned on
the basis of USGS data on groundwater
input. Flow may be augmented approx¬
imately 40% in the area. While informa¬
tion on the dissolved oxygen content of
groundwater is limited, estimates used by
a Waste Load Allocation Study in 1977
(WDNR, unpubl.) were approximately 8
mg 02 l"1. Input of oxygenated water
would tend to reduce calculated rates of
respiration with a consequent overestima¬
tion of the proportion of macrophyte
respiration to total community oxygen
usage.
Using the biomass estimate for site 1 of
789.4 g m"2 (Table 2) and a conservative
estimated respiratory rate of 1.5 mg 02 g
dw"1 h_1 (Westlake 1966), macrophyte
community respiration would be 28,418
mg 02 m“2 d"1. Model whole stream R esti¬
mated as 40.7 mg 02 l"1 d'1 and an average
depth of 0.67 m yields 60,430 mg 02 m"2
d"1. Thus, a conservative estimate of
macrophyte respiration may account for
about 47% of the daily ecosystem respira¬
tion in the study section. Our respiration
estimates for P. crispus were somewhat
higher than the value suggested by West-
lake, so that 68% of community respira¬
tion might be due to macrophytes if all
species at the site had similar respiration
rates to P. crispus.
The overall P/R ratio of 0.62 would
classify Black Earth Creek as an hetero-
trophic stream ecosystem, meaning that it
is a net consumer of oxygen and theo¬
retically uses more allochthonous than
autochthonous energy. This value is
within the ranges noted by Hannan and
Dorris (1970). While this stream is highly
productive on a seasonal basis, the com¬
bined respiratory activity of biota require
more oxygen from the stream than was
produced during this period. While a P/R
< 1 is surprising in light of the lush
growth and healthy condition of the
plants at the time of the trials, the model
estimates of other small streams com¬
monly produce similar results (M. Tusler,
pers. comm.). Small streams are net con¬
sumers of dissolved oxygen, and naturally
variable faunal production during the
season often produces heterotrophy in
productive streams (Hynes 1970). A sea¬
sonal analysis of P/R may show a great
deal of variability in P/R over the year.
The P/R ratio may be greater than one
during winter, spring and early summer
due to low respiratory biomass and low
temperatures. As macrophyte (and peri¬
phyton) biomass increases, self-shading
occurs so that only the upper portion of
the macrophyte canopy exhibits net oxy¬
gen production, but all of the biomass
respires, creating a mid- to late summer
depression of the P/R ratio to less than
one (Naiman and Sedell 1980). Autumnal
P/R will remain below 1 due to decom¬
position of senescent macrophytes and
allochthonous input of deciduous tree
leaves. Therefore, a one-time measure¬
ment of P/R does not indicate the overall
character of a stream as a net producer or
consumer of energy and oxygen, but it
does indicate whether the stream is a net
consumer of oxygen in the summer — the
time of critical oxygen levels for sensitive
organisms.
Phosphorus Limitation
Table 4 indicates the location of
samples and the mean values of tissue P
51
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Table 4. Tissue phosphorus concentra¬
tions in Black Earth Creek Potamogeton
crisp us or Rhizoclonium sp.
found. Samples run by both laboratories
yielded results within 5% of each other.
Macrophyte tissue P values found were
significantly above limiting critical con¬
centrations, indicating that P is not
limiting macrophyte growth. Although
rooted vascular macrophytes are able to
take up P from the water column via the
shoots, the bulk of P is usually taken up
by the roots from the sediment (Carignan
and Kalff 1979, 1980; Carignan 1982;
Barko and Smart 1981; Huebert and
Gorham 1983).
Tissue P concentrations of filamentous
algae were lower than those for P.
crispus, but were still substantially above
critical concentrations exhibited for
Cladophoran species. Work done on
filamentous algae indicate a range of
tissue P critical concentrations for growth
from approximately 0.06% (Cladophora
glomerata) to 0.18% (Draparnaldia
plumosa) (Gerloff 1975; Gerloff and
Krombholz 1966; Neil and Jackson 1982).
While growth-controlling levels and
dynamics of P in Rhizoclonium are not
known, extension of knowledge of Clado¬
phora is reasonable. These genera are
closely related, possibly even variants of
the same genus. Thus, nutritional and
other physiological requirements may be
quite similar (Linda Graham, pers.
comm.). Investigations of Great Lakes
Cladophora growth would indicate that
Rhizoclonium in Black Earth Creek is not
limited by P concentration in the water
column (Canale and Auer 1982; Auer and
Canale 1982a, b). Moore (1977) found
that filamentous algae in British streams
were regulated more by temperature and
light than nutrients.
Dense growths and rapid spread of fila¬
mentous algae were observed in early
July. Temperature conditions and light
are probably optimal at this time of
year for Cladophoran algae based on re¬
sponses of related species in the Great
Lakes (Graham et al. 1982; Lorenz and
Herrendorf 1982) and flowing waters
(Moore 1977).
Summary
Although percent cover was lower in
1985 than 1981, no significant change in
total community cover or composition
was detected. Potamogeton crispus re¬
mained the dominant macrophyte in this
community. Filamentous algae were not
quantified in the 1981 study, but personal
observation indicates that there has been
an increase in noticeable filamentous algal
colonization.
Tree canopy significantly reduced inci¬
dent light levels at the stream surface and
was thus correlated with decreased macro¬
phyte cover. These data suggest that light
is a significant limiting factor to
macrophytes in this stream and that
shading by streambank trees may be
potentially useful in the control of
macrophytes.
Biomass in unshaded areas ranged from
335 to 790 g dw m"2, indicating that the
Cross Plains Sewage Treatment Plant
does not increase macrophyte biomass, as
the highest value was found above the
treatment plant.
The estimated respiratory contribution
to the stream ecosystem of the epiphyte-
macrophyte complex was 47 to 68%. This
52
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
suggests that macrophytes contribute a
substantial proportion of the in-stream
oxygen demand wherever their growth is
dense. If oxygen levels are considered to
be seriously depleted in such areas, the
control of rooted vegetation by shading
may be the only feasible remedial action
available. Filamentous algae would also
respond to control by shading.
Dramatic growth of filamentous algae
in the stream this year prompts questions
as to its impact on oxygen levels. Control
of algal growth may be amenable to re¬
ductions of P from point sources since
algae acquire nutrients solely from the
water column, but important questions
remain to be answered as to the nonpoint
levels of P available and whether in-
stream levels could be reduced below
limiting concentrations for filamentous
algae. Our tissue P data indicate that the
algae are not limited by P availability.
Phosphorus removal from the sewage
treatment plant at Cross Plains is unlikely
to have an impact on the growth of either
rooted macrophytic vegetation or fila¬
mentous algae.
Macrophyte growth in Black Earth
Creek is probably controlled by dynamics
other than phosphorus limitation. Macro¬
phyte tissue samples analyzed were well
above critical concentrations, exhibiting
luxury uptake. We reject the notion that
macrophyte growth in Black Earth Creek
is responding to point source nutrient
enrichment, particularly that of phos¬
phorous, because (1) biomass at separate
sites bears no relation to point sources of
nutrients, (2) plant tissue P concentra¬
tions show no evidence of P limitation,
and (3) biomass levels found in Black
Earth Creek are similar to those found in
calcareous streams in other areas of
Wisconsin, the United States, and
Britain— streams that have a broad range
of impacts from human enrichment, from
near-pristine to heavily polluted.
The impact of macrophyte-induced
sediment deposition in the stream has not
been adequately addressed, especially as it
affects space and reproduction potential
for fish. Optimum values for macrophyte
cover have not been estimated in this
respect or in regard to spatial re¬
quirements of fish or food production.
Aquatic macrophytes provide many
benefits to the stream ecosystem, in¬
cluding those used as trout fisheries.
However, anthropogenic disturbance of
the watershed may cause excessive
growths of macrophytes with deleterious
effects on natural ecosystems.
Acknowledgments
This work was supported by the Water
Resources Management Workshop (Insti¬
tute for Environmental Studies) and the
Anna Grant Birge Memorial Scholarship
Fund of the Oceanography and Limnol¬
ogy Graduate Program, University of
Wisconsin-Madison. A substantial part of
the work reported here was conducted
in conjunction with the University of
Wisconsin-Madison’s WRM Workshop
aimed at assessing water resources of the
Black Earth Creek watershed and pro¬
viding management options for con¬
sideration by state and local management
agencies (Born 1986). Assistance was also
provided by the Wisconsin Department of
Natural Resources, Wisconsin State
Laboratory of Hygiene, and the U.S.
Geological Survey. Special thanks go to
Stephen Born, Linda Graham, Nancy
Johnson, Stanley Nichols, Craig Smith
and William Sonzogni (UW-Madison);
Sandy Engel and Mark Tusler (WDNR);
and Steve Field (USGS). Critical review of
this manuscript was provided by Michael
Adams, Stephen Born, Susan Gawler,
Carolyn Madsen, and Kurt Schulz.
Literature Cited
Allen, K. R. 1951. The Horokiwi stream, a
study of a trout population. N. Z. Mar.
Dep. Fish. Bull. 10. 231 pp.
53
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
American Public Health Association
(APHA). 1981. Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater.
15th Ed. 1134 pp.
Auer, M. and R. Canale. 1982. Ecological
studies and mathematical modeling of
Cladophora in Lake Huron: 2. Phosphorus
uptake kinetics. J. Great Lakes Res.
8(1): 84-92.
_ and R. Canale. 1982. Ecological
studies and mathematical modeling of
Cladophora in Lake Huron: 3. The
dependence of growth rates on internal
phosphorus pool size. J. Great Lakes Res.
8(1): 93-99.
Barko, J. and R. M. Smart. 1981. Sediment
based nutrition of submerged macrophytes.
Aquat. Bot. 10:339-352.
_ , M. S. Adams and N. Clesceri. 1986.
Environmental factors and their considera¬
tion in the management of submersed
aquatic vegetation: a review. J. Aquat. PL
Manage. 24:1-10.
Born, S. M., ed. 1986. Black Earth Creek: A
Watershed Study with Management Op¬
tions. Water Resources Management
Workshop. Institute for Environmental
Studies, University of Wisconsin-Madison.
IES Report 129. March 1986. 289 pp.
Brynildson, O. and J. Mason. 1975. Influence
of Organic Pollution on the Density and
Production of Trout in a Wisconsin Stream.
Wis. Dept. Nat. Resour. Tech. Bull. No. 81.
40 pp.
Canale, R. and M. Auer. 1982. Ecological
studies and mathematical modeling of
Cladophora in Lake Huron. 7: Model
verification and system response. J. Great
Lakes Research 8(1): 134-143.
Carignan, R. 1982. An empirical model to
estimate the relative importance of roots in
phosphorus uptake by aquatic macro¬
phytes. Can. J. Fish. Aquat. Sci. 39(2):
243-247.
_ and J. Kalff. 1979. Quantification of
the sediment phosphorus available to aqua¬
tic macrophytes. J. Fish. Aquat. Sci. 36(8):
1002-1005.
_ and _ . 1980. Phosphorus sources
for aquatic weeds: Water or sediments?
Science 207:987-989.
Dawson, F. H. 1978. Aquatic plant manage¬
ment in semi-natural streams: The role of
marginal vegetation. J. Env. Manag.
6:213-221.
_ , E. Castellano and M. Ladle. 1978.
Concept of species succession in relation to
river vegetation and management. Verb. In-
ternat. Verein. Limnol. 20:1429-1434.
_ and S. M. Haslam. 1983. The manage¬
ment of river vegetation with particular
reference to shading effects of marginal
vegetation. Landscape Planning.
10:147-169.
_ and U. Kern-Hansen. 1978. Aquatic
weed management in natural streams: the
effect of shade by marginal vegetation.
Verb. Internal. Verein. Limnol.
20:1451-1456.
Edwards, R. and M. Owens. 1960. The effects
of plants on river conditions. I. Summer
crops and estimates of net productivity of
macrophytes in a chalk stream. J. Ecol.
48:151-160.
Fassett, N. C. 1957. A Manual of Aquatic
Plants. University of Wisconsin Press,
Madison. 405 pp.
Gerloff, G. C. 1973. Plant Analysis for
Nutrient Assay of Natural Waters. EPA En¬
viron. Health Res. Series, EPA-R1-73-001.
66 pp.
_ 1975. Nutritional Ecology of Nui¬
sance Aquatic Plants. U. S. EPA Ecol.
Research Series 660/3-75-027. 78 pp.
_ and P. H. Krombholz. 1966. Tissue
analysis as a measure of nutrient availabil¬
ity for the growth of angiosperm aquatic
plants. Limnol. Oceanogr. 11:529-537.
Graham, J., M. Auer, R. Canale and J. Hoff¬
man. 1982. Ecological studies and mathe¬
matical modeling of Cladophora in Lake
Huron: 4. Photosynthesis and respiration as
functions of light and temperature. J. Great
Lakes Res. 8(1): 100-1 11.
Grant, R. and S. Skavronek. 1983. Com¬
parison of Tracer Methods and Predictive
Equations for Determination of Stream
Reaeration Coefficients in Three Small
Streams in Wisconsin. U. S. Geological
Survey Water Resources Investigation
80-19. 36 pp.
Gregg, W. W. and F. L. Rose. 1982. The ef¬
fects of aquatic macrophytes on the stream
microenvironment. Aquat. Bot. 14:309-
324.
Hannan, H. H. and T. C. Dorris. 1970. Suc¬
cession of a macrophyte community in a
constant temperature river. Limnol.
Oceanogr. 15:442-453.
Haslam, S. 1978. River Plants: The
Macrophytic Vegetation of Watercourses.
Cambridge Univ. Press, London. 396 pp.
Huebert, D. and P. Gorham. 1983. Biphasic
mineral nutrition of the submersed aquatic
54
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
macrophyte Potamogeton pectinatus L.
Aquat. Bot. 16:269-284.
Hunt, R. L. 1979. Removal of Woody Stream-
bank Vegetation to Improve Trout Habitat.
Wis. Dept. Nat . Resour. Tech . Bull. No.
115.36 pp.
Hynes, H. B. N. 1970. The Ecology of Run¬
ning Waters. Univ. of Toronto Press,
Toronto. 555 pp.
Ikusima, I. 1970. Ecological studies on the
productivity of aquatic plant communities.
IV. Light conditions and community photo¬
synthetic production. Bot. Mag. Tokyo.
83:330-341.
Jorga, W., W-D. Heym and G. Weise. 1982.
Shading as a measure to prevent mass
development of submersed macrophytes.
Int. revue ges. Hydrobiol. 67 (2) : 27 1 —28 1 .
Kelly, M., N. Thyssen and B. Moeslund. 1983.
Light and the annual variation of oxygen
and carbon based measurements of produc¬
tivity in a macrophyte dominated river.
Limnol. Oceanogr. 28(3): 503-5 15.
Kollman, A. L. and M. k Wall. 1976. Intra¬
seas onal variations in environmental and
productivity relations of Potamogeton pec¬
tinatus communities. Arch. Hydrobiol.
Suppl. 5 0(4): 43 9-472.
Krause, A. 1977. On the effect of marginal
tree rows with respect to the management of
small lowland streams. Aquat. Bot. 3:185-
192.
Kullberg, R. G. 1974. Distribution of aquatic
macrophytes related to paper mill effluents
in a southern Michigan stream. Am. Midi.
Nat. 9 1 (2) : 27 1 —28 1 .
Kunii, H. 1982. Life cycle and growth of
Potamogeton crispus L. in a shallow pond,
Ojaga-ike. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 95:109-124.
Lathrop, R. C. and C. D. Johnson. 1979.
Dane County Water Quality Plan. Appen¬
dix B: Water Quality Conditions. Dane
County Regional Planning Commission.
360 pp.
Lorenz, R. and C. Herrendorf. 1982. Growth
dynamics of Cladophora glomerata in
western Lake Erie in relation to some en¬
vironmental factors. J. Great Lakes
Research 8(1):42— 53 .
Mace, S., P. Sorge and T. Leary. 1984. Im¬
pacts of Phosphorus on Streams. Wis.
Dept. Nat. Res. Bureau Water Resource
Mgmt. April 1984. 92 pp.
McDonnell, A. 1982. Oxygen budgets in mac¬
rophyte impacted streams. Water Res.
16:1037-1046.
Madsen, J. D. 1982. The Aquatic Macrophyte
Communities of Two Trout Streams in Wis¬
consin. M. S. Thesis, Univ. of Wisconsin-
Madison. 108 pp.
_ 1986. The Production and Physio¬
logical Ecology of Aquatic Macrophytes in
an Eutrophic Stream, Badfish Creek, WI.
Ph.D. Dissertation, University of Wiscon-
sin-Madison. 449 pp.
_ _ and M. S. Adams. 1985. The aquatic
macrophyte communities of two streams in
Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts,
Letts. 73:198-216.
Madsen. T. V. and E. Warncke. 1983.
Velocities of currents around and within
submerged aquatic vegetation. Arch.
Hydrobiol. 97(3):389-394.
Moore, J. 1977. Some factors effecting algal
densities in a eutrophic farmland stream.
Oecologia (Berl.) 29:251 -261 .
Naiman, R. and J. Sedell. 1980. Relationships
between metabolic parameters and stream
order in Oregon. Can. J. Fish. Aquat. Sci.
37:834-847.
Neil, J. and M. Jackson. 1982. Monitoring
Cladophora growth conditions and the ef¬
fect of phosphorus additions at a shoreline
site in northeastern Lake Erie. J. Great
Lakes Research 8(1):30— 34.
Owens, M. 1966. Some factors involved in the
use of dissolved oxygen distributions in
streams to determine productivity, pp.
211-224. In: Aquatic Environments, C.
Goldman, ed. Univ. of California Press,
Los Angeles.
_ and R. W. Edwards. 1962. The effects
of plants on river conditions. III. Crop
studies and estimate of net productivity of
macrophytes in four streams in southern
England. J. Ecol. 50:157-162.
Peltier, W. H. and E. B. Welch. 1969. Factors
affecting growth of rooted aquatics in a
river. Weed Sci. 17:412-416.
Robel, R. J. 1961. Water depth and turbidity
in relation to growth of sago pondweed. J.
Wildl. Manage. 25(4):436-438.
Sastroutomo, S. S. 1981. Turion formation,
dormancy, and germination of curly pond-
weed, Potamogeton crispus L. Aquat. Bot.
10:161-173.
Threinen, C. W. and R. Poff. 1963. The
geography of Wisconsin’s trout streams.
Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts, Letts.
52:57-75.
Westlake, D. 1966. A model for quantitative
studies of photosynthesis by higher plants in
streams. Air Water Pollut. Internat. J.
10:883-896.
55
Edgar B. Gordon:
Teacher to a Million
Anthony L. Barresi
Each year millions of Americans receive
instruction via radio and television.
In fact, we take for granted the availabil¬
ity of children’s programming such as
“Sesame Street,’’ and we expect broad¬
casters to give us “how to’’ courses in
cooking, home repair, and even remedial
mathematics. If questioned we readily
acknowledge the importance of media in¬
struction, and yet we give little thought to
how such teaching is accomplished. We in
this state would be surprised to learn that
many of these media instructional ap¬
proaches were pioneered in Madison by
Edgar B. Gordon of the University of
Wisconsin. This article will chronicle his
professional career and will focus pri¬
marily upon the adaption and implemen¬
tation of the teaching techniques that he
developed specifically for radio instruc¬
tion.
Born in 1875 in Frankfort, Indiana,
Gordon received the largest part of his
early education in the Winfield, Kansas,
public schools. After his graduation from
high school in 1893, he moved to Chicago
where he studied violin at the Chicago
Musical College. In 1900 he became a resi¬
dent director at the Chicago Commons
Settlement House, a satellite of the
famous Hull House. Gordon’s experi¬
ences working with the city’s immigrant
poor and disenfranchised led him to view
music as did the settlement movement’s
Anthony Barresi is an Associate Professor in the
School of Music and Department of Curriculum and
Instruction at the University of Wisconsin-Madison.
founder, Jane Addams, “as a potent
agent for making the universal appeal and
inducing men to forget their differences’’
(Addams 1910). As a result of his choral
work in the settlement house, Gordon’s
interest for teaching music to underpriv¬
ileged segments of society was whetted.
This interest would later influence his in¬
novative activities in community arts and
radio instruction.
In 1907, the Gordons moved to Los
Angeles to work at the College Settle¬
ment, but they soon resolved to return to
Chicago. Enroute, the young family stop¬
ped to visit family who convinced them to
remain in Winfield. Shortly after, Edgar
was hired to teach violin and theory for
the Winfield College of Music and to
organize and conduct a college-commu¬
nity orchestra at Southwestern College
(Mullet 1983). Over the next few years
Gordon found himself “pretty much in
control of the musical resources of the
community’’ (Gordon Papers).
The young music educator achieved
some national prominence when, in 1913,
Winfield received official state recogni¬
tion as the Kansas community that could
“offer the best environment for raising
children.’’ The judges noted that they
were impressed with the “unusual manner
and degree in which the fine arts were in¬
tegrated into the life of the commu¬
nity’’-— a direct reference to those artistic
activities influenced by Edgar Gordon
(Gordon Papers).
Good Housekeeping Magazine asked
Edgar to write an article about the Win-
57
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
field award for the December 1915 issue
(Mullet 1983). This article attracted the
attention of Peter Dykema of the Univer¬
sity of Wisconsin Extension who invited
Gordon to deliver a paper on the Winfield
activities at the 1916 meeting of the Music
Supervisors National Conference. Dy¬
kema, a noted figure in American music
education, also prevailed upon Edgar to
accept a position with the University of
Wisconsin Extension faculty as Director
of Community Music and Drama (Gor¬
don Papers). In 1921, Gordon became
head of the School Music Department in
the University’s School of Music, a posi¬
tion he held until his retirement in 1944
(University of Wisconsin Employment
Records).
Early Radio Efforts
WHA Radio, one of the first radio sta¬
tions in the nation, resulted from com¬
bined efforts of dedicated University of
Wisconsin physics researchers and public-
spirited programmers. While this station’s
claim to primacy is disputed, its assertion
that it is the oldest American radio station
in continual operation is commonly ack¬
nowledged. Beginning with the 1915 ex¬
perimental transmissions via “wireless te¬
legraphy,’’ radio technology grew swiftly
through the work of Professor Earl M.
Terry and a number of his students. By
1920, WHA was broadcasting daily re¬
ports of weather and road conditions as
well as farm information (McCarty 1937).
That year, Professor Terry, imbued with
the Wisconsin Idea concept, engaged Pro¬
fessor W. H. Lighty of the Extension
Division to expand service broadcasting
activities (Axford 1960). These two men
prevailed upon Edgar Gordon in 1921 to
present a music program that would even¬
tually evolve into a music appreciation in¬
struction over the radio — likely the first
media instruction in the nation and
possibly in the world. Using recordings
and some guest artists, Gordon instituted
First Music Appreciation Broadcasts (c. 1922).
58
Teacher to a Million
weekly broadcasts in which he sought to
play some “good music and make some
explanatory comments that might be help¬
ful in enjoying the music” (Gordon
Papers). After the adoption of a more
formal instructional format in 1922, Gor¬
don routinely introduced each piece by
discussing its composer, the musical
form, its historical development and the
performing artist(s) (Penn 1940). Within
this format he created a Chautauqua lec¬
ture hall illusion in the minds of the
listeners who, for the most part, were in
awe of the medium. The station received
letters from listeners living in areas as far
away as Montana and Canada. A group
of women in Kearney, Nebraska, even
used the weekly program as the basis for
their music appreciation study (Gordon
Papers).
To adapt the lecture hall format to the
purely aural radio medium, Gordon de¬
veloped several unique approaches. First,
he exploited the imaginal potential of
radio and secondly, he sometimes used
on-site participants as “stand ins” for the
listening audience. Gordon recounts the
employment of both of these techniques
during a 1922 Independence Day broad¬
cast. After a patriotic address by a
member of the history faculty, Gordon
led the radio audience in the singing of
America— “a first in the history of
radio,” he claimed. To encourage the au¬
dience to participate, he stimulated their
collective imagination by asking them to
consider themselves as part of a “great
unseen chorus” expressing their patriotic
fervor. In order to reinforce this imaginal
technique and to provide a vocal model
for the listener-singers, he used a small
group of studio singers as an on-site
chorus. Such commonly employed techni¬
ques might appear rather naive to us, but
it is highly probable that the July 4th
broadcast marked the first time that such
approaches were used to encourage active
listener participation. Gordon recounted
E. B. Gordon and early studio group (Minnesingers).
59
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences ; Arts and Letters
E. B. Gordon and Minnesingers visiting children.
that listener response to this broadcast
was very enthusiastic. A highly supportive
letter from one of the “unseen chorus” is
still retained in the State of Wisconsin Ar¬
chives (Lighty Papers).
Gordon’s early efforts in radio instruc¬
tion were recognized when, in the late
1920s, he was asked to serve as an ad¬
visor for the famous Walter Damrosch
music appreciation broadcasts for chil¬
dren. As a result of this experience he
discovered that active student participa¬
tion was preferable over passive listening
in order that varying attention spans of
children and their need for physical in¬
volvement while learning be accommo¬
dated. Moreover, his experiences as a per¬
former and conductor led him to believe
that a child’s active interaction and in¬
volvement with “good music” was an
effective means for developing musical
understandings and a lifelong interest in
music (Gordon Papers). Gordon’s later
programming for children reflected this
understanding and conviction in the in¬
structional techniques and materials used.
Other Broadcast Experiments
Several radio experiments further
honed Gordon’s technique for media
teaching and advanced the efficacy of
radio instruction. In 1929, he and A. F.
Wiledan of the University’s Rural Soci¬
ology Department conducted a radio ex¬
periment that for its time was truly uni¬
que. Gordon conducted a rehearsal of a
100-voice chorus in Viroqua, Wisconsin
from the studio in Madison! Using a
twenty-voice choir in the studio, the Pro¬
fessor conducted the rehearsal with them
while the Viroqua choir sang along.
Because the off-site ensemble could not
observe his conducting gestures, Gordon
used simultaneous verbal cues to inform
them of his musical intent ( Capital Times
press clipping). Later he would often use
60
Teacher to a Million
the verbal cue technique in his programs
for children to compensate for the visual
limitations of the radio instruction.
In 1930, Gordon, as chairman of the
University of Wisconsin Radio Research
Committee, devised a project in which his
music education students taught music
over the radio to twenty-five classes of
sixth, seventh, and eighth-grade children.
A control group was taught the same ma¬
terial in a standard classroom setting.
Comparisons of test results from the
radio students and control group con¬
vinced Gordon that radio teaching could
be a very effective means for music in¬
struction. This project also gave him the
opportunity to develop and implement
teaching approaches and materials spe¬
cifically designed for radio teaching (Gor¬
don 1931).
Journeys in Musicland
When WHA station manager Harold
B. McCarty conceived the idea for a
School of the Air in 1931, he approached
Gordon for advice because he remem¬
bered the Professor’s earlier experimental
projects in radio instruction. Gordon ex¬
pressed the belief that programming for
children should be devised that would
“assist classroom teachers in the teaching
of subject areas for which they were
minimally trained.” As music was a sub¬
ject area typically neglected in most rural
E. B. Gordon conducting a radio festival.
61
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
schools, McCarty encouraged Gordon to
develop a music instruction program (Mc¬
Carty interview, February 3, 1984). And
thus were initiated the “Journeys in
Musicland” broadcasts so popular with
several generations of children from rural
Wisconsin between the years 1931 and
1955.
In these weekly music lessons Professor
Gordon taught songs, some basic music
theory, and a “considerable amount” of
music appreciation. The aim was to
“stimulate the interest of children in good
music and to cultivate the ability to par¬
ticipate in some form of music activity”
(WHA program schedule, September
1933- January 1934). But it took a while
before all of these learning activities were
included in the programs. For the first
few, he confined the activities to listening
experiences. Then Gordon began tentative
efforts to secure some reaction from the
listeners such as responses to rhythm.
When his classroom observers reported
the apparent success of these action-based
approaches, the Professor decided to at¬
tempt the teaching of a song. But he was
not content that the children should
“merely mouth the words”; rather he
wanted singing that was tonally pleasing
and accurate— difficult goals considering
that he could not hear the sung responses
to his instructions.
... I finally decided to try. I chose a lovely
German folk song which I first asked the
children to listen to while it was beautifully
sung by a university student. Then I asked
the children to hum along while it was sung
again. The third time through, the children
were instructed to follow along, this time
using the syllable “loo,” On the fourth
singing the words were used (Gordon Pa¬
pers.
After teaching several songs in this man¬
ner Gordon went into the schools to check
the results. To his great pleasure, the per¬
formance of the children revealed that
they were indeed singing with pleasing
tone and pitch accuracy.
Two innovative teaching techniques,
which might have contributed significant¬
ly to this instructional success, are re¬
vealed in the Gordon description. First,
his selection of a light female voice that
closely resembled that of a child provided
an aural model for the listeners to emu¬
late. Secondly, while his approach to
teaching the rote song was similar to that
commonly used during the 1930s, Gor¬
don’s adaption for radio was aurally con¬
ceived and methodically moved the chil¬
dren from passive to active participation.
Simply stated, he encouraged close con¬
centration while listening to the first ren¬
dition and gradual performance participa¬
tion as familiarity with the song was
gained. By the “fourth singing,” famil¬
iarity with the words and music was suffi¬
cient and a successful performance was
possible (Dvorak interview). Over the
course of a year he would teach about
twenty songs in this manner and would
review them frequently so that they re¬
mained fresh in the minds of the children.
The song material taught by Professor
Gordon was drawn from two major
sources. The largest number of songs were
chosen from folk music of Great Britain,
America, Scandinavia, Germany, the Slo¬
vak nations, Italy, Spain, Mexico, and
France — all ethnic groups represented in
the population of Wisconsin. The other
source of music of “lasting value” was
pieces by major composers of symphonic,
opera, oratorio, or lieder literature. When
adaptions of text were necessary, his wife
Edna Gordon acted as lyricist (Gordon
song books, 1940-1955).
As the years progressed and the educa¬
tional goals of the “Journeys” program
gained more focus, Gordon made a num¬
ber of changes in the instructional format.
In order to create a classroom atmosphere
in the studio, he used a group of singers
62
Teacher to a Million
(later named the Minnesingers) who mod¬
eled good singing tone for the children
and also acted as an on-site class. Evi¬
dently, Gordon was drawing upon the
“unseen chorus” and “radio choral re¬
hearsal” experiments as sources for this
instructional approach. He also devel¬
oped instruction books that contained all
of the songs for the year’s programming
and music theory information and exer¬
cises. These books provided the visual
reinforcement that was missing in the
purely aural instruction, and they pre¬
sented additional information that could
be studied between programs, should the
teacher be so inclined. At first the books
were mimeographed, but by 1940, they
were published by WHA and sold to the
children at cost (Bartell interview). To this
day one may still find these song books in
the homes of numerous Wisconsin fami¬
lies.
Gordon’s previous broadcast experi¬
ences had appraised him of the medium’s
power to stimulate the imagination. He
drew upon this potential whenever he
created the illusion that the young
listeners were part of the class occurring
in the studio. Teachers of participating
students told the author that the children
often felt that the professor was talking
directly to them when he admonished
“the boy in the red sweater to open his
mouth more” or “the girl in the front row
to sit up straight when she sings” (Pischke
interview). By cultivating a fatherly image
that correlated well with his short, rather
plump stature, white hair, and kindly
sounding voice, Gordon created a radio
personality that was loved and respected
by the children (Pickart interview).
Gordon further exploited the illu¬
sionary powers of the medium and his
own charisma by making effective use of
the analogy in the teaching of musical
concepts and music reading understand¬
ings. He often encouraged the perfor¬
mance of crescendo and decrescendo by
likening the increase and decrease in
dynamics to climbing and descending a
mountain. When explaining the relation¬
ships of scalar pitches to each other, he
would often draw comparisons to rela¬
tionships common to the experiences of
the children. On one occasion he charac¬
terized each scale pitch as a neighbor in a
child’s neighborhood with the first pitch
(key pitch or tonic) as home and the
eighth pitch (the same tonic pitch one oc¬
tave higher) as the home of grandparents.
He then taught the intervalic relationships
of the pitches to the tonic pitch by having
the children “visit” (sing) the various
neighbors and return home (tonic pitch)
from time to time. By effectively employ¬
ing analogies that stimulated the mind’s
eye, Gordon was able in another way to
compensate for the radio’s visual limita¬
tion (“Journeys in Musicland” audio tape
recording).
Finally, the use of spoken instructions
under the singing to give directions or in
anticipation of a musical problem was a
favorite instructional technique. Ruth
Pischke, one of the Professor’s studio ac¬
companists, relates that he often gave ver¬
bal directions to the children while con¬
ducting the studio “class” and that he
often joined in the singing to reinforce
difficult melodic passages, awkward
phrase structures, or tricky rhythms.
While it is difficult to attribute the
development of these instructional ap¬
proaches solely to Gordon, that he
adapted them to accomplish his purposes
and pioneered in their use is certain. The
successes that he achieved by the uses of
these instructional approaches within the
“Journeys” format are evidenced by the
astonishing enrollment figures. In the first
year (1931), 793 students participated and
in 1955, the last year under Gordon,
70,000 children were registered. Over the
twenty-four year period, 1,028,125 Wis-
63
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Radio festival (1940s), 3000 children.
consin children participated in this weekly
program (WHA Data Sheet)!
Radio Festivals
The sociological concern that began in
the settlement movement of Chicago, and
subsequently colored all of his profes¬
sional career activities, found its ultimate
expression in the yearly radio festivals
sponsored by WHA. Because the Profes¬
sor wanted “his children’’ to experience
the “ultimate social experience of music
making,” he devised the idea of bringing
children to Madison for a day to sing
together the songs that they had learned in
the radio lessons. Such gatherings also
gave him the opportunity to better evalu¬
ate the effectiveness of his teaching (Mc¬
Carty interview, June 6, 1986).
From the first festival held in the
University’s Old Music Hall and attended
by 300 children (1934) to those of the
1940s and 50s attended by over 3,000 par¬
ticipants, the response to these gatherings
was overwhelming. Increased enrollments
over the years caused moves from Old
Music Hall to the Stock Pavilion and
finally to the largest of the University’s
facilities, the Field House. When enroll¬
ments were so large that the largest
auditorium on the campus could no
longer accommodate those wishing to at¬
tend, the station management and Gor¬
don decided to bring the yearly festival to
the children (McCarty interview, Feb 3,
1984). During the mid- 1940s the radio
professor began to hold festivals in
various centers around the state as well as
in Madison. By 1956, fifteen festivals
were held for about 22,300 children
throughout the state (WHA Radio. The
First Fifty Years , 1969). Recordings of
some of these festivals reveal that the
children sang with expression, precision,
accurate intonation, pleasing vocal qual¬
ity, and dynamic variation. Obviously,
the radio teacher had achieved much more
than “just the mouthing of words.”
Edgar B. Gordon’s radio music teach¬
ing represents a unique chapter in Wis-
64
Teacher to a Million
consin’s history. Receiving no remunera¬
tion for any of his radio work he sought
out the musically underprivileged children
of rural Wisconsin and administered to
their aesthetic needs with the zeal of
a social reformer. He was a man who
learned from his experiences and one who
possessed the creative talent and personal
charisma to implement his ideas effec¬
tively within the unique educational en¬
vironment of the Wisconsin Idea. Indeed,
the entire state was his classroom.
References
Addams, Jane. Twenty Years at Hull-House.
New York: The Macmillan Co., 1910.
Axford, Roger W. William H. Lighty, radio
pioneer. Wisconsin Academy Transactions,
December 1960.
Capital Times undated press clipping, press
scrapbook, WHA Radio Studios, Madison.
Edgar B. Gordon papers. Wisconsin State
Historical Archives, Madison.
Gordon, Edgar B. et al. An experiment in
radio education by radio broadcasting.
School Life, February 1931, 104-105.
_ ed. Journeys in Music land Song
Books. Madison: WHA Radio, 1940-1955.
Interview with Florence Hunt Dvorak,
Madison, March 12, 1984.
Interview with Harold B. McCarty, Madison,
February 3, 1984, June 6, 1986, July 10,
1985.
Interview with Joyce Bartell, Madison, July
10, 1985.
Interview with Margaret Pickart, Madison,
March 30, 1984.
Interview with Ruth Pischke, Baraboo, WI,
February 8, 1985.
Journeys in Musicland, audio tape recordings
of selected broadcasts, Wisconsin State
Historical Society Archives, Madison.
McCarty, Harold B. WHA, Wisconsin’s radio
pioneer. Wisconsin Blue Book. Madison:
State of Wisconsin, 1937.
Mullet, Betty A. The Gordons of Winfield.
Research project, Wichita State University,
1983.
Penn, John. The origin and development of
radio broadcasting at the University of
Wisconsin to 1940. Ph.D. dissertation, The
University of Wisconsin, 1959.
University of Wisconsin Employment
Records, School of Music, Madison.
WHA data sheet. Professor E. B. Gordon’s
Journeys in Musicland, undated.
WHA program schedule, September
1933-January 1934.
WHA Radio. The First 50 Years of University
of Wisconsin Broadcasting. Madison:
WHA Radio, 1969.
W. H. Lighty Papers. Wisconsin State
Historical Archives, Madison.
65
Notes from the Notebooks of Cabin #3
“you are incarnate in
the world and we live
caught up in you. ”
Teilhard de Chardin
“The wicked are like the troubled sea
when it can not rest ”
Isaiah 57:20
“one honeymoon day
one honeymoon night
nothing else to say
nothing else to write”
Anonymous
Everyone mentions the “waves,” of course,
and the “crying” of the gulls
and the “moon,” through the one small window,
“full,” “half,” or otherwise
provocatively sickled against
a “starry” or “starless” sky,
or as Helen Rusted, of Fond du Lac, put it:
“the thriving mysteries of life
unfolding in waves of time
spiriting through
the vast existence in space.”
Many honeymooned or re-honeymooned here,
most are thankful for the change
from whatever to whatever,
everyone goes on almost endlessly
about the peace and quiet.
“we have been married four days
we love each other very much
didn’t get seasick listening to the waves
through faith in the lord
we will be married forever.”
“do we sound boring,
we don’t think we are?”
67
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
They had “wieners and cheese for breakfast” or
“crackers and cheese for breakfast lunch and dinner”
or “champagne and meatballs by candlelight”
or “picked blueberries for pancakes
and raspberries in big dishes with cream.”
“Had some nice fresh herring.”
“hot cookies and milk just out of the cold.”
“In this just right cabin,
the carefully watched toast made
on the top of the stove.”
The lake was a lullaby, or not.
They loved or hated the bed
which was not “big enough for three”
according to “Don & the girls,”
which was “noisy but
sure held up,” “Figgy and Ray,”
in which they slept, if at all,
like a “stone” a “cloud,” a lot of “log's”
a “baby' ' or “the dead. ’ '
“We found #3 by pure luck
almost got rammed by a semi.”
“The evening of the 19th my wife
got stomach flu
and I got the regular flu
the day after that day.”
“fell off the cliff
and lost my shoe but
it could have been worse.”
“We came here to be alone
married three years already with a little girl.
This Shawnee's handprint (slightly enlarged)
5 mos. old, 1st time anywhere”
Mrs. Anthony Swanshera of St. Paul
will be back “if I can talk my husband into it,”
and Ginny, Eddie, Lionda, Edvart and Tottsie
are planning to return, in three years,
“God willing.”
68
Notes from Cabin # 3
“We came to find ourselves once more
to remember that what we need
we have already in each other.”
“We used to come here as children
now we have children
and grandchildren of our own
and we are still coming”
“We are in or ‘70’s
and it makes a good honeymoon spot”
“We loved each other tenderly
and our fondness increased
as we grew old.”
“I sat on the rocks, smoking,
and her reading to me
in the pleasing wild.”
“Cassie found the notebooks
and as she read
years and faces came alive.”
“It has been good
watching this plan unfold,
creating wholeness
in our life.”
Bruce Taylor
note: The quoted material was selected from a series of “guestbooks” dating back to
1937 found in a rental cabin in a small resort on the North Shore of Lake Superior in
1986. People were asked in the original notebook to write whatever they wanted, and
provide another when the current one was full.
69
Diel Patterns of Behavior
and Habitat Utilization of Cisco
(Coregonus artedii) in Two Wisconsin Lakes
Lars G. Rudstam and Todd W. Trapp
Abstract . Diel patterns of behavior and habitat utilization of cisco (Coregonus
artedii) differed between lakes and among age groups. At night , cisco were dispersed
across both lakes , but three different daytime distributions were observed: cisco were
(1) dispersed and distributed across the lake (older fish in Trout Lake), (2) schooled
and distributed across the lake (Pallette Lake), and (3) schooled and distributed closer to
shore (younger fish in Trout Lake). No diel vertical migration was observed, but the
smaller fish in Trout Lake moved toward the shore during dawn and offshore during
dusk. Stomach analyses indicate that cisco may feed both day and night. Younger cisco
were spatially segregated from older fish in Trout Lake, but there were only small dif¬
ferences in diet between the two groups. Possible causes for differences between lakes
and between age groups are discussed.
Pelagic fishes in lakes often exhibit diel
patterns of behavior and habitat
utilization. Vertical migrations toward the
surface at night are common in plank-
tivorous salmonines (Narver 1970, Eggers
1978) and coregonines (Northcote and
Rundberg 1970, Dembinski 1971, Nilsson
1979, Enderlein 1982, Hamrin 1986).
However, Engel and Magnuson (1976) did
not observe any vertical migration of
cisco (Coregonus artedii) in Pallette Lake,
Wisconsin, during summer stratification.
Instead, they reported a horizontal diel
migration. The fish moved onshore at
dawn and offshore at dusk. Horizontal
diel migrations of coregonines have not
been reported elsewhere, but such migra¬
tions have been observed for percids
(Hasler and Bardach 1949, Hasler and
Villemonte 1953), cyprinids (Hall et al.
Lars G. Rudstam is a Ph.D. candidate in Marine
Biology at the University of Stockholm.
Todd W. Trapp is an undergraduate student at the
University of Wisconsin-Madison majoring in
Zoology.
1979, Hanych et al. 1983, Brabrand et al.
1984), and centrarchids (Baumann and
Kitchell 1974).
Engel and Magnuson attributed the
lack of vertical migration of cisco in
Pallette Lake to the narrow depth interval
where temperatures were low and oxygen
levels high enough to support cisco (the
“cisco layer’’ of Frey 1955). Vertical
migrations would then be expected in
larger, deeper lakes with well-oxygenated
hypolimnia. In this paper, we present
results from an investigation of cisco diel
behavior in two northern Wisconsin lakes
(Trout and Pallette Lakes) during summer
stratification, using sonar and vertical gill
nets. We address the following questions:
(1) is the horizontal diel migration pattern
reported from Pallette Lake consistent
over a period of time, (2) can this pattern
be found in another lake, and (3) does
vertical diel migration occur when the
hypolimnion is deep and well oxygenated
(Trout Lake, temperatures below 10° C
and oxygen levels above 3 mg/1 from 12-
70
Diet Patterns of Cisco
m to 30-m depths). In addition, we report
data on diel feeding patterns obtained
from analyses of stomach content of fish
caught during different time periods.
Study Area
Pallette and Trout Lakes are located in
Vilas County in Wisconsin’s Northern
Highland Lake District (46.0°N,
89.7°W). Pallette Lake is a 69 ha seepage
lake with a mean depth of 9.7 m and a
maximum depth of 19.8 m. It has a low
alkalinity (0.15 mmol/1) and can be con¬
sidered oligotrophic. Trout Lake is a 1605
ha drainage lake separated into four
basins. Our investigation was conducted
in the largest and deepest of these basins
with an area of 770 ha, a mean depth of
18 m, and a maximum depth of 35.7 m.
Trout Lake is more productive than
Pallette and has an alkalinity of 0.82
mmol/1.
Materials and Methods
Pallette Lake was investigated on 13-15
July 1981 and Trout Lake on 10-12
August, 17-18 August, and 2-3 Sep¬
tember 1981. The lakes were surveyed
with a 70 kHz echo sounder (Simrad EY-
M, 11° beam width) during day, night,
dawn and dusk periods. The transducer
was towed 0.3-0. 5 m below the surface
from an “A-frame” in front of a small
boat. Towing speed was approximately
1 .5-2 m/s. Transects were made along the
longest diameter of the lake and perpen¬
dicular to this diameter.
Seven 4-m wide multifilament vertical
gill nets were used for the catch, each with
a different mesh size (19, 32, 38, 51, 64,
89 and 127-mm stretch mesh). The seven
nets were set in a straight line for 48 hours
from the surface to the bottom along the
14-m depth contour in Pallette Lake
(13-15 July) and along the 18-m depth
contour in Trout Lake (10-12 Aug.).
Trout Lake was fished for an additional
24 hours with 32-mm and 38-mm mesh
nets suspended from the surface and with
19, 51, 64, 89 and 127-mm mesh nets sus¬
pended from 13-m depth to 28-m depth
(17-18 Aug.). The nets were serviced ap¬
proximately every six hours (Table 1).
Fish were identified and their length
measured. Depth of catch was noted in 1-
m intervals. When available, 10 fish of
each 1-cm-length class were weighed in
the field using a spring balance. Stomachs
Table 1. Median depth of catch for young-of-year (0 + ), I + to II + , and older cisco in
Trout Lake. The 25 and 75 percentiles are given in parentheses. Sunrise at 0455, 11
August, and 0503, 17 August. Sunset at 2114, 11 August and 2105, 17 August.
71
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
from Trout Lake cisco were removed in
the field and preserved in 10% buffered
formalin.
Settled volume of the stomach content
was measured using tapered centrifuge
tubes. An index of stomach fullness was
obtained by dividing the settled volume by
fish weight calculated from a length-
weight regression for Trout Lake cisco
(W = 1.3 10-5 L29, weight (W) in g,
length (L) in cm, N = 117, range 10-22
cm). This index was not correlated with
fish weight (r = -0.11, N = 95,
P > 0. 10). Prey groups were identified and
counted in a subset of the stomachs with a
binocular microscope with 6 to 50 times
magnification.
Results
Cisco constituted 97% of the total
catch in gill nets in Pallette Lake and 87%
in Trout Lake. The other species caught,
yellow perch, Perea flavescens, was
always netted above 7-m depth. We there¬
fore considered all targets on echo charts
in water deeper than 7 m to be cisco.
All cisco were caught between 7 m and
13 m in Pallette Lake (143 fish) and be¬
tween 7 m and 28 m in Trout Lake (171
fish). The four cisco caught during the
day in Pallette Lake were in the same
square meter of netting at 9-m depth. In
the deeper part of Trout Lake, cisco
larger than 190 mm total length (III + and
older, Rudstam 1984) were caught signifi¬
cantly deeper than younger cisco (Table 1
and 2, Fig. 1).
The sonar charts revealed that cisco
were dispersed (not schooled) during the
night (indicated by many dispersed echoes
in Figs. 2 and 3). At dawn schools were
formed both in Pallette Lake and by the
shallower, younger fish in Trout Lake.
No vertical migration was observed in
either lake. The schools broke up at dusk
(Figs. 2 and 3). In Pallette Lake, these
schools were distributed across the lake
whereas in Trout Lake they congregated
in areas closer to shore. These diel
distribution patterns were consistent
among replicate sonar transects (4 day, 4
night, 2 dawn and 2 dusk transects in
Pallette Lake; 14 day, 14 night, 4 dusk
and 4 dawn transects in Trout Lake). The
total absence of smaller cisco in gill nets
during the day in Trout Lake (Fig. 1) is
also consistent with sonar observations.
Older cisco in Trout Lake were caught in
deep water both day and night, and sonar
charts show dispersed echoes in the deeper
water throughout the 24-hour period. No
vertical or horizontal migration was
observed. The absence of daytime schools
of larger cisco could be explained by low
light levels (which ranged from 0.1 to 10
me at 25-m depth in Trout Lake, August
1981, J. Magnuson, unpubl. data). The
schools of several fish species disperse at
these light levels (see review by Blaxter
1979).
Table 2. Comparison of depth distribution of different size classes of cisco in Trout
Lake, Wisconsin. The samples from all time periods are combined for each group
of fish.
72
Diel Patterns of Cisco
Stomach-fullness index (settled vol-
ume/fish weight) for cisco in Trout Lake
did not vary significantly between time
periods except for the comparison be¬
tween morning and night samples from
10-12 August (Table 3). We found what
seemed to be newly ingested material in
stomachs from fish caught both night and
day, and our attempts to classify the
degree of digestion in 54 stomachs did not
yield significant differences between time
periods. Thus, we could not detect any
clear diel feeding peaks; cisco in Trout
Lake appeared to feed day and night.
The diet was dominated by small zoo¬
plankton (copepods and cladocerans) and
Chaoborus larvae and pupae (Table 4).
This is similar to earlier reports (Couey
1935, Engel 1976). Differences were small
in diet composition between older cisco
caught during day and night as well as
between older and younger cisco.
Discussion
Our observations show that cisco diel
patterns of behavior and habitat utiliza¬
tion during summer stratification may
Table 3. Stomach fullness index (stomach
fullness/fish weight, in mm3/g) of cisco
caught during different time periods in
Trout Lake. Fish over 140 mm total length
are included. Only night and morning
10-12 August are significantly different
(Mann Whitney Z-score: 2.39, P<0.02).
differ both between lakes and between age
groups and may change with time within a
lake. At night, cisco were dispersed across
Fig. 1. Depth distribution of cisco I + and older caught in vertical gill nets in Trout Lake,
Wisconsin. The cisco are separated into fish smaller than 189 mm (age /-// + , dotted
bars) and fish larger than 190 mm (age III + and older, solid bars). Except for one fish, all
cisco I + and older were caught in the 32- and 3 8- mm stretch mesh nets. These nets
were set from the surface to bottom (18-m depth, 10-12 August and 28-m depth 17-18
August).
73
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 2. Sonar charts from 2 September 1981 from the deep basin of the southern part of
Trout Lake, Wisconsin. The weather was clear and calm. An eighth moon was up.
Sunset was at 1938 CST. Each transect is approximately 2.5 km long.
74
Die l Patterns of Cisco
Fig. 3. Sonar charts from 14-15 July 1981 from Pallette Lake, Wisconsin. The weather
was overcast and calm with light rain. Sunset was at 1945 CST. Each transect is approx¬
imately 500 m long.
both lakes. This can also be observed in
other Wisconsin lakes (Big Muskellunge
and Sparkling Lake, Vilas Co.; Lake
Mendota, Dane Co., Rudstam 1983).
However, day distributions differed both
between the two lakes and between cisco
age groups. Three patterns were observed:
(1) fish dispersed and distributed across
the lake (older cisco in Trout Lake), (2)
fish schooled and distributed across the
lake (Pallette Lake), and (3) fish schooled
and distributed closer to shore (younger
fish in Trout Lake). No diel vertical
migration was observed in either lake.
Younger cisco in Trout Lake moved
toward the shore at dawn and into the
middle of the lake at dusk. A similar
horizontal migration was observed in
Pallette Lake in 1969-70 (Engel and
Magnuson 1976) but did not occur in that
lake in July 1981.
These observations show that the hori¬
zontal migration pattern described by
Engel and Magnuson (1976) was not an
isolated occurrence. But neither is diel
horizontal migration the rule for cisco.
Changes in the open water fish commu¬
nity of Pallette Lake between 1969-70 and
1981 indicate the possible importance of
inter-specific interactions in regulating
diel migration patterns. Large numbers of
perch occurred pelagically in Pallette
Lake in 1969-70, when cisco migrated
horizontally. These perch had an opposite
diel movement to cisco, toward the shore
at dusk and back to the pelagic zone at
75
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
-O -C
©
©
© -Q
© j;
CO T3
CO C
© 05
° JD
0 ©
N t
'CO 3
o
c o
CD O
© E
O 2
©
©
o ©
§1
p «>
©
©
. Q
O)
c .c
— o
© ©
E E
0 o
■— ©
E°
£ fe
®|
n t
— 0
M
si
td n
© —
s §
<D 2
CO Q.
E£
2i-
° CO
Mt -o
Q o
B ?
© E .
oo 2 "o
j 1°
6) » ro
=3 ^ +
CvT g TD
V S'5
o Q TD
3 ^
^ Q -
5! |
A
S 9 -
. -ic
CD CO -
=3 ^
«c Q
0
Q. CL
0 2
.5 S
C: Cr>
■O ®
C: O)
©
0
©
Q
« %
E ‘~
^ «sr o <<*
o
^ CD
o ^ cm
N CO O CM
in t- co i
© co
<? i
.« s.
© <o
o cm ro cm in eg
V. c
O CM O CO
CL © q
© Q--Z d
Q- O ©
O O 'o "O
O -q O O
2 o§ ©
O Cl O cl
C O ^ O
« O S’ °
CO >^ © —
O O X <
1“
-o
O
o
CO
CO
o
I p. I
T“ 1
©
© „
2 co
E E
o o
c n
o o
.± ©
x: x:
O O
^ CO
EE-
£2-5
©
0)0“
S © °
®xx
■C E Q.
.CO ^ (1)
76
b) includes Bosmina spp. and Chydoris spp.
c) includes both larvae and pupae
d) % by number in diet
e) number of stomachs containing the food item
Diel Patterns of Cisco
dawn. Engel and Magnuson (1976) sug¬
gested that the opposing movements of
the two species enhanced spatial niche
separation. In July 1981, pelagic perch
were rare (only four perch were caught in
the gill nets), and cisco did not migrate
horizontally.
Vertical diel migrations did not occur
even though cisco were not restricted by
high temperatures and low oxygen levels
to a narrow depth layer in Trout Lake.
This differs from observations on vendace
(Coregonus albula, a related Eurasian
cisco), which is generally reported to
migrate vertically (Northcote and Rund-
berg 1970, Dembinski 1971, Nilsson 1979,
Enderlein 1982, Hamrin 1986). Vendace
feed primarily during daylight hours
(Nilsson 1979, Enderlein 1982) and may
increase the length of its feeding period by
migrating toward the surface at dusk.
Since cisco can feed at night (Engel 1976,
Janssen 1980), diel vertical migrations
may be less advantageous.
Although the diel migration patterns of
cisco and vendace differed, both species
show intra-specific habitat segregation
between age groups (Rudstam and Mag¬
nuson 1985, Hamrin 1986). The similarity
in diet of different cisco age groups (Table
4) indicates that this segregation was not
due to an age-specific preference for dif¬
ferent food items that may have been dif¬
ferentially distributed in space. Different
size groups of vendace also have similar
diets (Hamrin 1983). Hamrin (1986) sug¬
gested that younger vendace are more ef¬
ficient planktivores than larger vendace
and that larger fish therefore avoid
younger fish to decrease intra-specific
food competition.
Engel (1976) reported cisco as feeding
during the night, and Emery (1973)
classified this species as a nocturnal
planktivore. However, neither of these
two studies compared fish caught during
day and during night. Our somewhat
limited data does not support a nocturnal
feeding peak. Cisco in Trout Lake ap¬
peared to feed both day and night. This is
in accordance with laboratory experi¬
ments by Janssen (1980) on cisco feeding
both in light and in darkness. The fish
were size-selective and more efficient in
light. However, feeding occurred in dark¬
ness even at the lowest prey density tested
(16 Daphnia/ 1). The fish were then
nonselective. As Janssen points out, the
possible effect of cisco predation on
zooplankton communities depends on the
time of day they feed. This predator-prey
interaction is further complicated when
diel patterns of habitat utilization exist
(e.g. younger cisco in Trout Lake). Cisco
may act as daytime size-selective plankti¬
vores in part of a lake and as nighttime
nonselective planktivores in other areas.
Acknowledgments
We wish to thank John Lyons and
Timothy Kratz for their help during field
sampling. Stanley Dodson and John
Neess gave advice on zooplankton iden¬
tification and stomach analysis pro¬
cedures. John Magnuson and Hannah
Hill improved the manuscript. The study
was supported by the Long Term Eco¬
logical Research Project at the University
of Wisconsin-Madison (NSF grant DEB
8012313, John Magnuson principal in¬
vestigator).
Works Cited
Baumann, P. C., and J. F. Kitchell. 1974. Diel
patterns of distribution and feeding of
bluegill (Lepomis macrochirus) in Lake
Wingra, Wisconsin. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc.
103:255-260.
Blaxter, J. H. S. 1970. Light. Animals. Fishes.
In Marine Ecology vol. 1, ed. O. Kinne.
London: Wiley-Interscience. 213-320.
Brabrand, A., B. Faafeng, and T. Kallqvist.
1984. Can iron defecation from fish in¬
fluence phytoplankton production and bio¬
mass in eutrophic lakes? Limnol. Oceanogr.
29:1330-1334.
77
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Couey, F. M. 1935. Fish food studies in a
number of northeastern Wisconsin lakes.
Trans. Wise. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 19:131—
172.
Dembinski, W. 1971. Vertical distribution of
vendace, Coregonus albula L., and other
pelagic fish species in some Polish lakes. J.
Fish Biol. 3:341-357.
Eggers, D. M. 1978. Limnetic feeding be¬
havior of juvenile sockeye salmon in Lake
Washington and predator avoidance. Lim-
nol. Oceanogr. 23:1114-1125.
Emery, A. R. 1973. Preliminary comparisons
of day and night habits of freshwater fish in
Ontario lakes. J. Fish. Res. Board Can.
30:761-774.
Enderlein, O. 1982. When, where, what and
how much does the adult cisco ( Coregonus
albula L.) eat in the Bothnian Bay during
the ice-free season. Rep. Inst. Freshw. Res.
Drottningholm. 59:21-32.
Engel, S. 1976. Food habits and prey selection
of coho salmon (Oncorhynchus kisutch)
and cisco (Coregonus artedii) in relation to
zooplankton dynamics in Pallette Lake,
Wisconsin. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc.
195:607-614.
Engel, S., and J. J. Magnuson. 1976. Vertical
and horizontal distribution of coho salmon
(Oncorhynchus kisutch), yellow perch
(Perea flavescens) and cisco (Coregonus
artedii) in Pallette Lake, Wisconsin. J. Fish.
Res. Board Can. 33:2710-2715.
Frey, D. G. 1955. Distributional ecology of
the cisco, Coregonus artedii, in Indiana.
Invest. Indiana Lakes Streams 4:177-228.
Hall, D. J., E. E. Werner, J. G. Gilliam, G.
G. Mittelbach, D. Howard, C. G. Doner, J.
A. Dickerman and A. J. Stewart. 1979. Diel
foraging behavior and prey selection in the
golden shiner (Notemigonous crysoleucas).
J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 36:1029-1039.
Hamrin, S. F. 1983. The food preference of
vendace (Coregonus albula) in south
Swedish forest lakes including the preda¬
tion effect on zooplankton populations.
Hydrobiologia 1 0 1 : 1 2 1 - 1 28 .
Hamrin, S. F. 1986. Vertical distribution and
habitat partitioning between different size
classes of vendace, Coregonus albula, in
thermally stratified lakes. Can. J. Fish.
Aquat. Sci. 43:1617-1625.
Hanych, D. A., M. R. Ross, R. E. Magnien
and A. L. Suggars. 1983. Nocturnal inshore
movement of the mimic shiner (Notropis
volucellus): a possible predator avoidance
behavior. Can. J. Fish. Aquat. Sci.
40:888-894.
Hasler, A. D. and J. E. Bardach. 1949. Daily
migration of perch in Lake Mendota, Wis¬
consin. J. Wildl. Manage. 13:40-51.
Hasler, A. D., and J. R. Villemonte. 1953.
Observations on the daily movement of
fishes. Science 118:321-322.
Janssen, J. 1980. Alewives (Alosa pseudo-
harengus) and ciscoes (Coregonus artedii)
as selective and non-selective planktivores.
In Evolution and ecology of zooplankton
communities, ed. W. C. Kerfoot. London:
Univ. Press of New England. 580-586.
Narver, D. W. 1970. Diel vertical movements
and feeding of underyearling sockeye
salmon and the limnetic zooplankton in
Babine Lake, British Columbia. J. Fish.
Res. Board Can. 27:281-316.
Nilsson, N. A. 1979. Food and habitat of the
fish community of the offshore region of
Lake Vanern, Sweden. Rep. Inst. Freshw.
Res. Drottningholm 56:126-139.
Northcote, T. G., and H. Rundberg. 1970.
Spatial distribution of pelagic fishes in
Lambarfjarden (Malaren, Sweden) with
particular reference to Coregonus albula
and Osmerus eperlanus. Rep. Inst. Freshw.
Res. Drottningholm 50:133-166.
Rudstam, L. G. 1983. Cisco in Wisconsin
Lakes: Long term comparison of their
population structure and an analysis of
their vertical distribution. Master’s thesis,
University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Rudstam, L. G. 1984. Long term comparison
of the population structure of cisco,
Coregonus artedii, in smaller lakes. Trans.
Wise. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 72:185-200.
Rudstam, L. G., and J. J. Magnuson. 1985.
Predicting the vertical distribution of fish
populations: an analysis of cisco, Core¬
gonus artedii, and yellow perch Perea
flavescens. Can. J. Fish. Aquat. Sci.
42:1178-1188.
78
Nineteenth-Century Temperature Record
at Fort Howard, Green Bay, Wisconsin
Joseph M. Moran and E. Lee Somerville
Abstract. Fort Howard (located near the present site of Green Bay, Wisconsin) was
one of several nineteenth-century army posts in the Old Northwest that participated
in the nation's first weather observing network. From late 1821 through mid-1841,
and from late 1849 to mid- 1852, medical personnel at the fort maintained a nearly
continuous log of daily weather conditions. A comparison of monthly and annual
mean temperatures suggests that recent months and years in Green Bay were gen¬
erally cooler than the 1820s and 1830s at Fort Howard. However, several factors may
affect the validity of this comparison. Specifically, concern surrounds the accuracy,
exposure, and location of the Fort Howard thermometer, differences in methods of
computation of mean temperatures, and the reliability of Fort Howard's weather
observers. Of these, instrument exposure is probably the most troublesome factor for
it appears likely that at times Fort Howard's thermometer was exposed to direct
sunlight. Such instrument exposure would invalidate comparisons with the modern
temperature record.
Fort Howard, located near the present
site of downtown Green Bay, Wiscon¬
sin, was a member station of the nation’s
first weather observing network. In the
early to mid- 1800s army medical person¬
nel stationed at the fort dutifully main¬
tained a log of daily weather conditions,
providing us with a fascinating glimpse of
climate for a period when such informa¬
tion was sparse throughout much of the
North American interior. Comparison of
the Fort Howard temperature record
with the modern temperature record at
Green Bay suggests that the recent era was
somewhat cooler than the earlier era. The
principal objective of this study is to
assess the validity of that comparison.
While there is little reason to question the
Joseph M. Moran, principal author, is Professor of
Earth Science, College of Environmental Sciences,
University of Wisconsin-Green Bay, Wisconsin
54301-7001. E. Lee Somerville is a student in the
Regional Analysis program at UW-Green Bay.
reliability of Fort Howard’s weather
observers or the accuracy of the ther¬
mometer in use, differences in weather
observing practices between then and now
pose more serious problems. Of these,
differences in instrument exposure appear
to be most significant and may well in¬
validate any comparison between tem¬
peratures at Fort Howard and Green Bay.
The Surgeon General’s
Weather Network
Because the War of 1812 with the
British revealed weaknesses within the
medical service of the United States Ar¬
my, the newly appointed Surgeon Gen¬
eral, James Tilton, M.D., set about in
1813 to reorganize the service by drawing
up a new set of duties and regulations for
all army medical personnel. As part of
that reorganization, on 2 May 1814, Til¬
ton issued an order that, in retrospect,
marked the first step in the eventual
79
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
establishment of a national network of
weather observing stations (Hagarty
1962). Tilton directed the army medical
corp to maintain a diary of weather condi¬
tions at army posts with responsibility
for weather observations falling to the
post’s chief medical officer or surgeon.
Tilton’s objective was to learn more about
the climate encountered by troops in the
then sparsely populated interior of the
continent. He also wanted to assess the
relationship between weather and health
for it was a popular notion at the time
that weather and climate were important
factors in the onset of disease. 1
It took time for Tilton’s order to be im¬
plemented. The War of 1812 was still rag¬
ing, and weather instruments had to be
acquired and distributed along with di¬
rections for proper use. Benjamin Water-
house, M.D., surgeon at Cambridge,
Massachusetts, was the first to submit
weather data (for March, 1816). By 1818,
reports of weather observations at several
army posts began trickling into the
Surgeon General’s office, and under the
direction of Tilton’s successor, Joseph
Lovell, M.D., the data were compiled,
summarized, and eventually published
(Lawson 1840). For this reason Lovell
rather than Tilton is sometimes credited
with being the founder of the govern¬
ment’s system of weather observation
(Landsberg 1964).
At first, a thermometer and wind vane
were the only weather instruments in use
at the army posts. The chief medical of¬
ficer or his assistant read the thermometer
daily at 7 a.m., 2 p.m. and 9 p.m. (local sun
time), and noted the day’s prevailing wind
direction and weather conditions. In a
column labeled “remarks,” comments
were entered concerning the health of the
troops, phenological events, and any ex¬
1 Bates and Fuller (1986) point out that in war¬
time, even as late as World War I, more soldiers died
from non-combat causes (disease, primarily) than
from battle.
treme or unusual weather. In 1836, many
posts (including Fort Howard) were sup¬
plied with rain gages (DeWitt-type) along
with very precise instructions on the
proper siting and use of the instrument.
Rainfall or melted snowfall was measured
in inches (to 0.01 in.) at the end of each
precipitation. Also beginning in 1836,
prevailing wind direction and weather
conditions were recorded for both morn¬
ing and afternoon.
In 1842, the Army Medical Board, in
consultation with some of the era’s lead¬
ing scientists, selected and issued new
weather instruments along with revised
and somewhat more sophisticated obser¬
vation procedures (Mower 1844). These
new procedures were adopted widely in
January 1843 (1849 at Fort Howard), and
except for observation times the instruc¬
tions are similar to those issued to today’s
cooperative weather observers. Tempera¬
ture, cloud cover (in tenths), and wind
direction were recorded four times daily:
at sunrise, 9 a.m., 3 p.m., and 9 p.m. The
wet bulb thermometer was read at sunrise
and 3 p.m., and at some army posts
barometer readings also were recorded.
Later, in 1855 the Surgeon General’s Of¬
fice shifted observation hours back to 7
a.m./2 p.m./9 p.m. , convinced that these
observation times gave a better estimate
of daily mean temperature.
Medical personnel entered weather data
in a journal each day, and quarterly sum¬
maries (January-March, April- June, July-
September, and October-December) were
prepared and then forwarded to the Army
Medical Department in Washington,
D.C. Tabulations of weather data from
all army posts were later published as a
series of Meteorological Registers (Law-
son 1840, 1851, 1855).
By 1838, 16 army posts had compiled at
least 10 complete— albeit not always suc¬
cessive — years of weather data. In ensuing
years the number of military weather
observing stations climbed steadily,
80
Fort Howard Temperature Record
reaching 60 by 1843, and by the close of
the Civil War, weather records had been
assembled for varying periods at 143 loca¬
tions. By the 1870s the Surgeon General’s
weather network and those operated by
the Smithsonian Institution and the U.S.
Army Corps of Engineers were merged
gradually into a single weather observa¬
tion network within the Army Signal
Corps. Eventually, this new network
evolved into the present National Weather
Service (Hughes 1980).
Evaluating the Fort Howard
Temperature Record
Fort Howard’s weather record was
among the earliest and most continuous in
the Old Northwest (Table 1). The fort was
one of several established just after the
War of 1812, primarily to assert U.S.
authority over the fur trade that had been
long controlled by the British (Kellogg
1934). Fort Howard was erected in 1816—
1817 on the low, swampy west bank of the
Fox River very near the river’s mouth at
Green Bay (Fig. 1). Earlier the same site
was occupied by the French fort, St.
Francois (1717-1760), and the British
post, Fort Edward Augustus (1761-1763).
Sometime in early 1820, troops were
removed from the fort and temporarily
garrisoned at Camp Smith, about 6 km up
the Fox River. But by late 1821, Fort
Howard was again reoccupied. Weather
observations began 8 August 1821 and
continued until 30 June 1841 when the
garrison was withdrawn to Florida for
service in the Seminole War and later to
Texas to serve in the war with Mexico.
With the end of hostilities in 1848, troops
returned to Fort Howard, and weather
observations resumed for a brief period.
Weather records are continuous from 1
October 1849 through 31 May 1852, just
prior to final troop withdrawal and aban¬
donment of the fort on 8 June 1852. 2
The Fort Howard weather record is
likely the only weather data available for
the early to mid-nineteenth century in the
Green Bay area. Between 1852 and the
beginning of U.S. Weather Bureau obser¬
vations in the city on 1 September 1886,
only sketchy weather data exist for Green
Bay. How reliable then is the Fort How¬
ard weather record, and is it reasonable to
2 In 1863, the federal government ordered the sale
of the Fort Howard military reservation. Although
the fort was subsequently razed, several of the
buildings remained in use for many decades. Today,
visitors to Green Bay’s Heritage Hill State Park can
view the original Fort Howard hospital (1834-1851)
and reconstructed Surgeon’s Quarters (1834-1851).
The buildings are situated on a hillside overlooking
the Fox River about 6 km upriver of the original site
of the fort.
Table 1. Location and period of record of weather stations in the Old Northwest
operated by the U.S. Army Medical Department
* Not necessarily complete years of data
Sources: Lawson, 1840, 1851; Miller, 1927
81
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Fig. 1. Fort Howard was located near the mouth of the Fox River at Green Bay. When this
map was published in 1833, army medical personnel at the fort had compiled almost 12
years of daily weather data. (North America Sheet V: The Northwest and Michigan Ter¬
ritories, 1833, Society for the Diffusion of Useful Knowledge. From the American
Geographical Society Collection, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee.)
draw comparisons between it and the
modern climatic record of Green Bay?
This question is posed because of to¬
day’s concern over the future course of
climate and how variations in climate
might affect society, a concern that has
sent climatologists in search of an
understanding of both how and why
climate varies. Perhaps the most direct
approach to determining this is to
scrutinize closely the record of past
climate because, after all, what has hap¬
pened climatically can happen again. Un¬
fortunately, in most places a reliable
instrument-based record of past climate is
limited to a little more than 100 years, and
such record lengths simply may not en¬
compass the full range of possible climatic
variations. The lengthier and more detail¬
ed the view of the climatic past, the more
data are available to aid in understanding
how climate has varied and how it might
vary in the future. The potential value,
then, of the Fort Howard and other nine¬
teenth-century weather records is evident.
Among the weather elements that con¬
stitute the Fort Howard weather record,
temperature is the most convenient and
perhaps most useful for drawing com¬
parisons between the climate then and
now. Except for the 1841-1849 hiatus
when the fort was unoccupied, the pub-
82
Fort Howard Temperature Record
FT. HOWARD, 1822-31, 1833-40
GREEN BAY, 1968-1985
80
E 40
Fort Howard
Green Bay
Fig. 2. Comparison of monthly and annual mean temperatures in °F at Fort Howard for
1822-1831 and 1833-1840, and Green Bay, Wisconsin for 1968-1985. Except for April
and September through November, the recent period was cooler than the earlier period.
lished Fort Howard temperature record is
remarkably complete through the cumula¬
tive 22 years and 7 months of weather
observations. Only five days within this
period (27-31 December 1832) are missing
temperature data. Focusing on the first
episode of weather observations and
eliminating 1832 as well as the incomplete
years of 1821 and 1841, there are 18 years
(1822-1831 and 1833-1840) for which
monthly and annual mean temperature
data are available for comparison with the
modern National Weather Service tem¬
perature record at Green Bay. That com¬
parison is made for a recent 18-year pe¬
riod (1968-1985) in Figure 2 and suggests
that, except for autumn (September, Oc¬
tober, and November) and April, recent
years have been cooler than the 1820s and
1830s. Particularly anomalous is January
with a temperature difference of - 5.9 F°.
But just how realistic is this comparison?
Several considerations bear on the integ¬
rity of the Fort Howard temperature
record and hence, the validity of its com¬
parison to modern climatic data. These
considerations are (1) the accuracy, ex¬
posure, and location of the thermometer,
(2) the method of computation of mean
temperatures, and (3) the reliability of the
weather observers.
Although we have no direct informa¬
tion on the thermometer at Fort Howard,
we do have a description of the ther¬
mometer at Fort Snelling, a contemporary
of Fort Howard, located near St. Paul,
Minnesota. According to Ludlum (1968),
William H. Keating, an explorer who
83
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
visited Fort Snelling in 1823, described the
thermometer as “a glass tube attached to
a brass plate, on which the graduation
was marked” and which was made by “a
Mr. Fisher of Philadelphia who sustains a
high reputation as a manufacturer of that
instrument.” D. J. Warner, Curator of
the History of Physical Sciences, The
National Museum of American History,
Smithsonian Institution, advises us (per¬
sonal communication, 1986) that the
Philadelphia city directories from 1793 to
1814 list Martin Fisher (1766-1826) as a
thermometer maker. In 1816, he was
joined by his son, Joseph Fisher (ca.
1795-1864), who continued the business
until 1853. According to Warner, Fisher
thermometers were “well regarded” al¬
though currently there are none in the
museum’s collection.
It is reasonable to assume that at least
during the 1820s and 1830s, the Army
Medical Department supplied all army
posts with the same model thermometer,
that is, a Fisher thermometer. If this
assumption is correct and if Fisher’s
reputation as an instrument maker is
justified, then we can also assume that
Fort Howard’s thermometer was accu¬
rate. Resting on such indirect evidence,
however, this assumption is necessarily
tentative.
Since August 1949 official National
Weather Service instruments for Green
Bay have been located at Austin Straubel
Airport. (Previously, they were at down¬
town sites.) The airport is situated in a
rural area of gently rolling terrain about
10 km southwest of the Fort Howard site.
All other factors being equal, the airport’s
Fig. 3. The waters of Green Bay likely moderated temperatures at Fort Howard on those
days when regional winds were light or calm. But the Bay’s moderating influence prob¬
ably had little effect on monthly and annual mean temperatures. (Lithograph courtesy
of the State Historical Society of Wisconsin.)
84
Fort Howard Temperature Record
higher elevation (208 meters above mean
sea level) versus that of Fort Howard (178
meters above mean sea level) coupled with
the airport’s greater distance from the
moderating influence of the waters of
Green Bay would favor a more continen¬
tal climate at the airport (Fig. 3). (The
more continental the climate, the greater
is the contrast between summer and win¬
ter.) However, based on a comparison of
contemporary temperature observations
at the airport and at a site near the bay
shore (the University of Wisconsin-Green
Bay campus), the difference in continen-
tality is insignificant in the time frame
of months and years. On days when re¬
gional winds are light or calm, winter
mornings typically are several degrees col¬
der, and summer afternoons are a few de¬
grees warmer at the airport. Nonetheless,
there are only slight differences in
monthly and annual mean temperatures.
Since national weather observation
practices were standardized in 1873 (year
of the founding of the International
Meteorological Organization, predecessor
of the World Meteorological Organiza¬
tion), monthly mean temperatures have
been computed by averaging daily mean
temperatures, which in turn are derived
by simply taking one-half the sum of the
24-hour maximum temperature and mini¬
mum temperature. However, thermom¬
eters that register maximum and mini¬
mum temperatures and that can be reset
once every 24 hours were not in use by
the Army Medical Department’s weather
network (Forry 1842). At army posts,
monthly mean temperatures were com¬
puted by averaging the mean tempera¬
tures obtained for each of the daily obser¬
vations.
An estimate of the maximum error in¬
troduced by differences in the two averag¬
ing methods is based on a study by Baker
(1975). Analyzing modern climatic data
from St. Paul, Minnesota, Baker found
that varying the time of day when the
maximum/minimum thermometer is read
and reset (that is, the observation hour)
influences the daily mean temperature
and hence, the monthly and annual mean
temperatures as well. He noted variations
of up to 1.7 F° in annual mean tempera¬
ture and up to 2.3 F° in monthly mean
temperature depending upon the specific
hour of observation. Because observation
hours at army posts were selected to catch
the usual times of the day’s lowest tem¬
perature (near sunrise) and highest tem¬
perature (early afternoon), it appears like¬
ly that the actual error arising from the
army’s averaging method would be less
than that reported in Baker’s study. In¬
deed, it is likely that the two averaging
methods do not produce statistically sig¬
nificant differences in computations of
monthly and annual mean temperatures.
This same conclusion was also reached by
Wahl (1968) and Thaler (1979) in their re¬
spective analyses of the Fort Winnebago
(near Portage, Wisconsin) and West Point
(New York) nineteenth-century tempera¬
ture records.
Any question regarding the reliability
of Fort Howard’s weather observers is
probably unwarranted. Although the ar¬
my’s weather observers were not profes¬
sional meteorologists, the Medical De¬
partment supplied them with very detailed
instructions on how to take and record
weather observations. There were great
demands on the time and energy of medi¬
cal personnel at Fort Howard (and other
posts as well) because they were the only
physicians within hundreds of kilometers
and they tended to the medical needs of
the nearby civilian population as well as
those of the garrison (Kellogg 1934). It is
therefore all the more extraordinary that
they carried out their weather observing
duties with skill and dedication as is evi¬
dent from even a cursory examination of
the original journals (The National Ar¬
chives 1952). Of the 10 weather observers
who served at Fort Howard between 1822
85
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
FT. HOWARD, 1835-40
FT. WINNEBAGO, 1835-40
a :e a p a u u u e c ; o • e n
nbrr ynl gptvc n
u
a
I
g§ Fort Howard |]] Fort Winnebago
Fig. 4. Comparison of monthly and annual mean temperatures in °F for 1835-1840 at
Fort Winnebago and Fort Howard. Even though Fort Winnebago was about 150 km
southwest of Fort Howard, this comparison indicates that Fort Howard was warmer
than Fort Winnebago— especially in winter.
and 1840, some of course were more dili¬
gent than others in their contribution to
the “remarks” section of the journal.
William Beaumont, M.D. who served
from July 1826 to March 1828, was par¬
ticularly conscientious and often made
very detailed notes on weather and health.
Hence, it is reasonable to assume that
the Fort Howard weather observers and
thermometer were reliable and that the
slightly less continentality of the Fort
Howard site and the difference in averag¬
ing methods would contribute only minor
errors to any comparison between Fort
Howard and Green Bay temperature rec¬
ords. A much more serious question con¬
cerns the exposure of the Fort Howard
thermometer.
Instrument Exposure Problem
Today, National Weather Service in¬
struments are housed in a standard white
louvered shelter that provides adequate
ventilation and protects weather instru¬
ments from exposure to precipitation and
direct sunlight. Widespread use of instru¬
ment shelters dates only to the 1870s
even at official meterological stations.3
Previously, thermometers were usually
suspended unprotected just outside a
window— and not always a north-facing
window. An earlier custom of mounting a
3 Middleton (1966) reports that in North America
the earliest account of a sheltered thermometer was
at the Toronto Magnetic and Meteorological Obser¬
vatory in 1841. The thermometer was in a louvered
shelter mounted on the Observatory’s north wall.
86
Fort Howard Temperature Record
PORTAGE, 1951-80
GREEN BAY, 1951-80
a e a p a u u u e c o e n
nbrrynl gptvcn
u
•a
I
H Portage H Green Bay
Fig. 5. Comparison of monthly and annual mean temperatures in °F for 1951-1980 at
Portage and Green Bay. As expected, Green Bay is a colder locality than Portage.
thermometer indoors in an unheated
room had been largely abandoned by
the mid- 1700s (Middleton 1966). Hence,
based on the common practice of the day,
chances are that the Fort Howard ther¬
mometer was outdoors and unsheltered
(Miller 1931).
Studies of nineteenth-century weather
records from Fort Winnebago, West
Point, and Fort Snelling indicate that at
times (diurnally and seasonally) ther¬
mometers were exposed to direct sunlight
(Wahl 1968; Thaler 1979; Baker et al.
1985). This might well have been the case
also at Fort Howard. Such exposure
would introduce a major systematic error
into the temperature record. Further com¬
plicating matters, however, is the possi¬
bility of undocumented changes in the ex¬
posure of the thermometer during the
period of record.
Under ideal circumstances there would
be other weather records from nearby
localities covering the same period that
could be used to corroborate the Fort
Howard temperature record.4 Unfor¬
tunately, the nearest contemporary army
post keeping weather records was Fort
Winnebago, located about 150 km to the
southwest of Fort Howard. For six com¬
plete years of available records (1835-
1840) that overlap, Fort Howard was con¬
siderably warmer than Fort Winnebago —
especially in winter (Fig. 4). However, a
4 Because variations in climate are geographically
nonuniform in both direction and magnitude, the
farther apart two weather stations are situated the
less meaningful is a comparison of their records.
87
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
FT. SNELLING, 1822-31, 1833-40
ST. PAUL, 1968-85
aeapauuuecoen
nbrrynl gptvcn
u
a
9| Ft. Snelling |]| St. Paul
Fig. 6. Comparison of monthly and annual mean temperatures in °F at Fort Snelling for
1822-1831 and 1833-1840, and St. Paul, Minnesota for 1968-1985. Except for January
and August, the recent period was warmer than the earlier period.
comparison of modern climatic data from
Green Bay and Portage indicates that Fort
Howard should have been colder than
Fort Winnebago (Fig. 5).
Going even farther afield (about 390
km west of Fort Howard), the Fort Snell¬
ing temperature record also suggests that
temperature readings at Fort Howard
were anomalously high. Baker et al.
(1985), having the benefit of overlapping
temperature records from nearby locali¬
ties, were able to correct the Fort Snelling
record for instrument exposure prob¬
lems, and they produced a reasonably
homogeneous temperature series for St.
Paul for 1820-1982. A comparison of
monthly and annual mean temperatures
at Fort Snelling for 1822-1831 and
1833-1840 with that at St. Paul for
1968-1985 is shown as Figure 6. January
is the only month that is cooler in the
modern record. A comparison of Figure 6
for St. Paul/Fort Snelling with Figure 2
for Green Bay/Fort Howard supports the
conclusion that temperature reports for
Fort Howard were too high.
Conclusion
Of the many factors that could impinge
on the integrity of the Fort Howard
temperature record, improper instrument
exposure may be the most significant. In
fact, improper instrument exposure may
well invalidate any comparison between
Fort Howard’s temperature record and
the modern temperature record at Green
Bay. The value of the Fort Howard tem¬
perature record then is that it provides in-
Fort Howard Temperature Record
sight on nineteenth-century weather ob¬
servation practices and serves as a warn¬
ing that early temperature records should
be interpreted with caution. On the other
hand, the Fort Howard weather logs in¬
clude data other than temperature that
may be useful in comparing the climate of
then and now. Specifically, a comparison
of the frequency of various weather types
(e.g. snowfalls) might be a fruitful in¬
vestigation.
Acknowledgments
This study benefited greatly from
discussions with Dr. Edward J. Hopkins
of the Center for Climatic Research, In¬
stitute for Environmental Studies, the
University of Wisconsin-Madison. Ms.
Jennifer M. Tillis of the UW-Green Bay
Library provided constructive criticism of
the manuscript and valuable assistance in
the search for historical documents. And
Joy Phillips cheerfully typed the manu¬
script’s numerous drafts.
Works Cited
Baker, D. G. 1975. Effect of observation time
on mean temperature estimation. Journal of
Applied Meteorology, 14:471-476.
_ Watson, B. F., and Skaggs, R. H.
1985. The Minnesota long-term temperature
record. Climatic Change, 7:225-236.
Bates, C. C. and Fuller, J. F. 1986. America's
Weather Warriors 1814-1985. College Sta¬
tion, Texas: Texas A&M University Press.
Forry, S. 1842. The Climate of the United
States and its Endemic Influences. New
York: J. and H. G. Langley.
Hagarty, J. H. 1962. Dr. James Tilton:
1745-1822. Weatherwise, 15:124-125.
Hughes, P. 1980. American weather services.
Weatherwise, 33:1 00- 111.
Kellogg, L. P. 1934. Old Fort Howard. Wis¬
consin Magazine o f History, 1 8 : 1 25 - 1 40 .
Landsberg, H. E. 1964. Early stages of clima¬
tology in the United States. American Mete¬
orological Society, Bulletin 45:268-275.
Lawson, T. 1840. Meteorological Register for
the Years 1826-1830 (1822-1825 appended).
Philadelphia: Hasweil, Barrington and Has-
well.
_ . 1851. Meteorological Register for
Twelve Years from 1831 to 1842 inclusive.
Washington, D.C.: C. Alexander.
_ 1855. Army Meteorological Register
for Twelve Years from 1843 to 1854 inclu¬
sive. Washington, D.C.: C. Alexander.
Ludlum, D. 1968. Early American Winters II
1821-1870. Boston: American Meteorologi¬
cal Society.
Middleton, W. E. K. 1966. A History of the
Thermometer and Its Use in Meteorology.
Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins Press.
Miller, E. R., 1927. A century of temperatures
in Wisconsin. Wisconsin Academy of Sci¬
ences, Arts and Letters Transactions,
23:165-177.
_ . 1931, Extremes of temperature in
Wisconsin. Wisconsin Academy of Sci¬
ences, Arts and Letters. Transactions,
26:61-68.
Mower, T. G. 1844. Meteorological observa¬
tions. New York Journal of Medicine,
2:134-139.
Thaler, J. S. 1979. West Point— 152 years of
weather records. Weatherwise, 32:112-115.
The National Archives, 1952. U.S. Weather
Bureau Climatological Records 1819-1892.
No. III-NNR-12.
Wahl, E. W. 1968. A comparison of the cli¬
mate of the eastern United States during the
1830’s with the current normals. Monthly
Weather Review, 96:73-82.
89
The Status of Canada Lynx
in Wisconsin, 1865-1980
Richard P. Thiel
Abstract. Eighty lynx (Felis canadensis) collected as museum specimens from Min¬
nesota , Michigan , and Wisconsin were associated with periods of lynx invasions from
Canada between 1865 and 1980. Historically, the lynx community in Wisconsin prob¬
ably did not comprise a permanent self-sustaining population but rather was periodically
replenished by lynx invasions from Canada. The continued lynx population probably
did not persist in Wisconsin much beyond 1900. Factors such as lynx vulnerability, lack
of adequate remote habitat, and Lake Superior (which prevents direct lynx movements
to and from Canada) inhibit establishment of a Wisconsin lynx population.
Canada lynx, an intermediate-sized
feline, ranges throughout the boreal
life zone of North America, and Wiscon¬
sin lies on the southern edge of its con¬
tinental range. Lynx populations are ir-
ruptive and closely follow the population
cycles of their primary prey, snowshoe
hares (Lepus americanus) (Keith 1963).
Individual survival and lynx population
densities increase in response to periods of
prey abundance. During and following
prey population crashes, lynx densities
decrease through emigration and lowered
survival rate of individuals. Reliable ac¬
counts of lynx in the state are limited to
records maintained by fur traders who
document that some lynx were encoun¬
tered in historic times (Jackson 1961). The
persistence of reported sightings, tracks
(Pils and Swanberg 1963; Pils and Bluett
1984; Schachte 1965; Records-Bureau of
Endangered Resources, DNR), and even a
few specimens (Doll et al. 1957; Jordahl
1956) have led some observers to conclude
that a permanent lynx population current¬
ly exists in Wisconsin.
Richard P. Thiel is a member of the Bureau of En¬
dangered Resources, Wisconsin Department of
Natural Resources, Madison, WI.
The present study was undertaken to (1)
determine the status of the lynx popula¬
tion in Wisconsin in relation to lynx status
and distribution elsewhere in the upper
Great Lakes Region and (2) bring together
the scattered Wisconsin lynx records so
that future researchers may have easier
access to the available, albeit meager,
data.
Methods
Wisconsin DNR carcass records were
reviewed, and in the upper Great Lakes
states (UGLS) of Michigan, Minnesota,
and Wisconsin, museums were queried to
obtain information on the date, location,
sex, and method of take for each lynx
specimen. Data on date and location of
specimens were then compared with docu¬
mented Canadian lynx irruptions (Elton
and Nicholsen 1942; Keith 1963; Gunder¬
son 1978; Mech 1980) to assess whether
the occurrence of UGLS lynx specimens
were associated with periods of mid¬
continental invasions. Regional literature,
including scientific periodicals, local
histories, newspapers, and the annual
questionnaires (which solicit observations
90
Canada Lynx in Wisconsin
of lynx in Wisconsin) filled out by bobcat
hunters and trappers licensed by the DNR
were also reviewed.
While sight and track reports of lynx by
citizens are of questionable value, speci¬
mens offer bonafide proof of the occur¬
rence of a species. Caution is warranted
when utilizing museum specimens in at¬
tempting to determine species status
because of sporadic or incomplete speci¬
men sampling and because museum col¬
lections tend to underemphasize areas
where a species commonly occurs. The
assumption used to examine the available
lynx data is that, in the absence of other
explanations, lynx specimens associated
with periodic Canadian irruptions in¬
dicate the presence of an established
population, and conversely, specimen oc¬
currences corresponding with periodic ir¬
ruptions suggest the absence of a viable
Wisconsin lynx population.
Results
UGLS Lynx Collections vs. Canadian
irruptions. Figure 1 compares the oc¬
currence of UGLS lynx specimens with
peaks in lynx irruptions reported from
Canada (Elton and Nicholson 1942; Keith
1963; Gunderson 1978; Mech 1980). In
this study eighty lynx specimens — 5 from
Michigan, 16 from Wisconsin, and 59
from Minnesota, were located in mu¬
seums. An additional 12 Wisconsin (Table
1) and 3 Michigan non-museum lynx car¬
cass records were included in the analysis.
Deposition of lynx specimens into muse¬
ums has been sporadic; only 28 of the 95
known specimens were deposited in the 85
years prior to 1950.
Fig. 1. Relationship between Canadian irruptions ( arrows and dates), and the number of
Upper Great Lakes states lynx specimens in museums and DNR carcass records.
91
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Table 1. List of 13 non-museum lynx specimens handled by the Wisconsin DNR since
1960 (source, DNR Bureau of Endangered Resources).
1 Record unclear as to year.
2 A lynx was killed by a train near Viroqua in 1965; however, another record, based on recollec¬
tions, lists one “shot” in Vernon County in approximately 1968. The two records probably refer to
the same event. The 1965 account appears to be more reliable.
3 The skeleton of the stuffed skin displayed at DNR Marinette office is housed and catalogued at
UW-Marinette Extension campus.
Patterns of lynx irruptions from
Canada and the increased collection of
UGLS lynx specimens correspond. With
the exception of 2 specimens (1889 and
1892), all UGLS lynx specimens have been
associated with Canadian irruptions. The
mean lapse between Canadian irruptions
was 9.5 years while the mean lapse be¬
tween collection of Wisconsin lynx speci¬
mens was 9.7 years. Collection of UGLS
lynx specimens lagged 0 to 3 years (1.5
average) behind Canadian irruption
peaks.
Lynx Behavior. Fearless behavior
toward humans is sometimes displayed by
lynx during invasions (Adams 1963; Mech
1973; Gunderson 1978). This behavior has
also been observed in Wisconsin and pro¬
motes the association of lynx presence in
the state with periods of invasions. In July
1926, a lynx was shot while sitting on the
top of a street lamp in downtown Shell
Lake (Washburn Co.) (Stouffer 1961),
and in the fall of 1972, one was shot after
reportedly attacking a man who was
working in his garden within the City of
Tomahawk (Lincoln Co.) (A. Loomans
pers. comm.). The relative “boldness” of
lynx during population irruptions in¬
creases their vulnerability.
Recent Lynx Observations in Wiscon¬
sin. Since 1976 Wisconsin DNR annual
bobcat hunter/trapper questionnaires
have solicited observations on lynx. A
mean of 7% of respondents reported
observing lynx tracks between 1976 and
1984 (W. Creed and C. Pils pers. comm.),
ranging from 2% (1984) to 14% (1976).
Wisconsin’s northwestern counties have
the highest percent of lynx observations
(Fig. 2) with Douglas County, which lies
adjacent to Minnesota, having the
greatest number of lynx observations.
This observation pattern is expected when
lynx movement from Canada occurs.
Sex Ratios. The sex ratio of 1 1 Wiscon-
92
Canada Lynx in Wisconsin
Fig. 2. Number of lynx reports, by county, obtained from annual DNR bobcat harvest
questionnaires, 1976-1984.
sin lynx for which sex was recorded was 3
males and 8 females. Of these, the sex
ratio of 3 lynx taken in the southern half
of the state was 2:1 while the ratio of 8
taken in the northern portion was 1:7.
Mech (1980) observed an even sex ratio
among lynx during the 1972-73 peak in
lynx numbers in northeastern Minnesota
and a prevalence of female lynx as num¬
bers declined in subsequent years. The
same phenomena was noted in Manitoba
during the 1971-73 irruption period
(Koonz 1976).
Cause of Mortality and susceptibility.
Of 18 Wisconsin lynx for which cause of
death was known 13 were shot, 3 were
trapped, 1 was struck by a vehicle, and 1
was struck by a train. Large numbers of
lynx were trapped or shot in North
Dakota following the 1961 irruption
(Adams 1963), and Henderson (1978) and
Mech (1980) noted that lynx were shot,
93
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
trapped, and hit by cars in Minnesota dur¬
ing 1971-75.
Discussion
Lynx Population in Wisconsin
Comparisons of dates of known lynx
mortalities in the UGLS (Fig. 1) and in
Wisconsin (Table 1) with Canadian irrup¬
tion patterns (Fig. 1) indicate that lynx in
Wisconsin and the UGLS are associated
with periodic invasions of lynx from
Canada. The behavior of lynx within
Wisconsin and elsewhere in the UGLS
suggests an origin from areas of Canada
where there is little or no contact with
humans.
Lag time variations occur in Wisconsin
and elsewhere south of Canada and are a
function of distances from population
centers, the amplitude of the irruption
period, as well as the relative size of the
Canadian population of lynx during ir¬
ruptions. Peak numbers of lynx in Min¬
nesota and North Dakota occurred in
1962- 63 while peaks in Montana (Gun¬
derson 1978) and Wisconsin occurred in
1963- 64 (this study) following the massive
1961 Canadian irruption. The effect of
distance on lag time was illustrated by
comparing the season where lynx carcass
retrievals peaked in the northern and
southern portions of Wisconsin. Peak
lynx occurrences in southern Wisconsin
(spring) lagged one full season behind
peak northern occurrences (winter). Four
lynx recovered in southern Wisconsin
(Jefferson Co. 1870; La Crosse Co. 1917;
Green Lake Co. 1965; Vernon Co. 1965)
lagged three to four years behind the
Canadian irruptions.
Lynx that may be present in Wisconsin
between irruptive peaks probably repre¬
sent individuals that failed to return to
Canada following periodic population
surges. If a viable lynx population existed
in Wisconsin, greater numbers of lynx
would be taken incidental to other hunt¬
ing and trapping efforts, at least during
irruptions, and some lynx would be ex¬
pected to be taken between years of irrup¬
tive peaks (Bailey et al. 1986; Koonz 1976;
Mech 1980). This is not indicated by
either the museum specimens or DNR
(carcass) records.
A continuous lynx population probably
has not existed in Wisconsin since about
1900. Historical records (Jackson 1961)
suggest that lynx populations in Wiscon¬
sin probably fluctuated dramatically and
thus probably have been dependent upon
periodic influxes from Canadian popula¬
tion centers for rejuvenation. The im¬
portance of these periodic irruptions to
lynx viability in Wisconsin was probably
similar to the ebbing and waning of
turkey (Schorger 1942) and quail (Er-
rington 1967) population distribution in
Wisconsin during pre-settlement times.
Lynx populations may never have been
totally self-supportive since Wisconsin lies
at the southern edge of the species’ con¬
tinental range.
Prospects of Lynx Recovery Within
Wisconsin. Lynx are not a viable species
within Wisconsin. No documentation of
breeding has been found historically or
within recent times in the state. Individual
lynx are periodically present in Wiscon¬
sin, however, especially following Cana¬
dian irruptions. Conceivably the estab¬
lishment of a resident lynx population
within Wisconsin could occur if some in¬
dividuals successfully colonized areas of
the state following an invasion period.
Since 1900, however, there have been
eight Canadian irruptions of various
magnitudes (Fig. 1), but lynx have failed
to become established in Wisconsin. Ap¬
parently, insufficient numbers of lynx
enter the state to establish a viable
population or conditions in the state are
not conducive to maintaining a perma¬
nent, resident population.
Lake Superior serves as a barrier
against southward movements of lynx in-
94
Canada Lynx in Wisconsin
to Wisconsin and upper peninsula Michi¬
gan. Gunderson (1978) noted that lynx oc¬
currences in Wisconsin and Michigan
were substantially fewer than from Min¬
nesota and North Dakota during the 1961
irruption and suggested that the Great
Lakes “impeded the southward move¬
ment” of lynx. Likewise Mech (1973) and
Henderson (1978) noted unusual numbers
of lynx west from the tip of Lake Superior
as they moved south out of Canada.
The possibility of establishing a lynx
population in Wisconsin might be en¬
hanced through proliferation of a Min¬
nesota lynx population that is speculated
to exist (Henderson 1978; Mech pers.
comm.; Boggess pers. comm.). About 650
lynx were harvested in Minnesota between
1972 and 1974. By 1975, however, none
were harvested (Mech 1980). Lynx were
classified as a “protected” species in Min¬
nesota in 1976 with a limited season
established by the state. Annual seasons,
not exceeding two months, were held
from 1976 through 1983, and the season
was closed entirely in 1984 and 1985. It is
uncertain whether a resident lynx popula¬
tion will expand in Minnesota under cur¬
rent management strategies.
Mech (1980) postulated that the rapid
disappearance of lynx from northern
Minnesota in 1974-75 was due to human-
caused mortality and possibly the return
of lynx to Canada. Mech (1977) docu¬
mented the latter phenomenon with a
female captured in Minnesota in 1974 that
was trapped 480 km north in Ontario in
1977. Although return movements of lynx
may diminish the chances of establishing
a population in Wisconsin, it is also pro¬
bable that Lake Superior acts as a barrier
to northward movements of lynx once
they reach Wisconsin. This may explain
the presence of a few lynx records from
southern Wisconsin up to four years after
Canadian irruptions.
Large numbers of lynx are killed in¬
cidental to other types of hunting and
trapping in the UGLS following inva¬
sions. Lynx may be overexploited in and
around regions accessible to humans
(Bailey, et al. 1986), and they appear to be
more susceptible to hunting and trapping
than wolves (Canis lupus). Accessibility
facilitates increases in human activity,
which is known to limit wolf survival
(Thiel 1985). Lynx are not prevalent in
northern Minnesota where the largest
viable wolf population in the conter¬
minous U.S. exists. It seems that human
activity has more of an impact on lynx
than on wolves. Given present conditions
it is doubtful that lynx could become
established in Wisconsin, where wolves
are highly endangered, partly because of
the greater access and higher levels of
human activity.
Recommendations
Lynx should remain listed as an en¬
dangered species in Wisconsin, and
wildlife officials should be alert for signs
of lynx proliferation following Canadian
irruptions. It is recommended that the
DNR (1) adopt a policy to collect in¬
formation on the date, location, age, sex,
reproductive status, and method of kill
for all future lynx carcasses recovered in
Wisconsin, (2) require that all future lynx
carcasses be deposited in recognized mu¬
seum collections where retention of perti¬
nent data is assured, and (3) incorporate
lynx identification and education efforts
as a part of its youth hunting and trapping
programs.
Acknowledgments
The author wishes to thank the staffs of
the following for their cooperation:
University of Wisconsin (UW)-Madison
Zoology Museum; UW-Stevens Point
Museum of Natural History; Milwaukee
Public Museum; National Museum of
Natural History; University of Michigan
Museum of Zoology; James Ford Bell
Museum of Natural History; Field
95
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Museum of Natural History; Science
Museum of Minnesota; Biology Depart¬
ments of UW-Superior and UW-Mari-
nette; Lake Superior State College; and
Northern Michigan University. Thanks
are extended to numerous reviewers for
their suggested improvement of an earlier
draft of this paper. This paper is sup¬
ported by Wisconsin citizens who have
contributed to the Endangered Resources
tax checkoff program.
Literature Cited
Adams, A. W. 1963. The lynx explosion.
North Dakota Outdoors. 26:20-24.
Bailey, T. N., E. E. Bangs, M. F. Portner,
J. C. Mallow, and R. J. McAvinchey. 1986.
An apparent overexploited lynx population
on the Kenai Peninsula, Alaska. Journal of
Wildlife Management. 50(2):279-290.
Doll, A. D., D. S. Balser and R. R. Wendt.
1957. Recent records of Canada lynx in
Wisconsin. Journal of Mammalogy. 38(3):
414.
Elton, C. and M. Nicholson. 1942. The ten-
year cycle in numbers of lynx in Canada.
Journal of Animal Ecology. 1 1(2)215-244.
Errington, P. L. 1967. Of Predation and Life.
Ames: Iowa State University Press.
Gunderson, H. L. 1978. A mid-continent ir¬
ruption of Canada lynx, 1962-63. Prairie
Naturalist. 10:71-80.
Henderson, C. 1978. Minnesota Canada Lynx
status report, 1977. Minnesota Wildlife
Resource Quarterly. 3 8(4): 222-242.
Jackson, H. H. T. 1961. The Mammals of
Wisconsin. Madison: University of Wiscon¬
sin Press.
Jordahl, H. C. 1956. Canada lynx. Wisconsin
Conservation Bulletin. 21(1 1):22-26.
Keith, L. 1963. Wildlife’s Ten-year Cycle.
Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
Koonz, W. H. 1976. A biological investiga¬
tion of lynx in Manitoba. Manitoba Depart¬
ment of Renewable Resources and Trans¬
portation Services, Resident Branch Depart¬
ment. 76(2): 1 — 35 .
Mech, L. D. 1973. Canada lynx invasion of
Minnesota. Biological Conservation. 5:151—
152.
_ 1977. Record movement of a Canadian
lynx. Journal of Mammalogy . 58:676-677 .
_ 1980. Age, sex, reproduction, and
spacial organization of lynxes colonizing
northeastern Minnesota. Journal of Mam¬
malogy. 61(2):261-267.
Pils, C. M. and C. Swanberg. 1983. The 1982
Wisconsin bobcat harvest summary. Wis¬
consin Department of Natural Resources
Report mimeographed.
_ and R. D. Bluett. 1984. The 1983
Wisconsin bobcat harvest summary. Wis¬
consin Department of Natural Resources
Report mimeographed.
Schachte, A. 1985. The 1984 Wisconsin bob¬
cat harvest summary. Wisconsin Depart¬
ment of Natural Resources Report
mimeographed.
Schorger, A. W. 1942. The wild turkey in
early Wisconsin. The Wilson Bulletin.
54(3): 1 173—1 1 82.
Stouffer, A. L. 1961. The Story of Shell Lake.
Shell Lake, WI: The Washburn County
Historical Society Register.
Thiel, R. P. 1985. Relationship between road
densities and wolf habitat suitability in
Wisconsin. American Midland Naturalist.
1 133(2):404-407.
96
The Flora of Wisconsin
Preliminary Report No. 69
Euphorbiaceae — The Spurge Family
James W. Richardson, Derek Burch, and Theodore S. Cochrane
From the diminutive seaside spurge of
the Great Lakes strand to the gorgeous
Christmas poinsettia of Mexico and the
giant rubber trees (genus Heved) of
Amazonia, the Euphorbiaceae is one of
the largest families of flowering plants. Its
300 genera and at least 7,000 species are
ecologically diverse and widely dis¬
tributed, especially in the drier tropics.
Most are said to be poisonous, a few are
troublesome weeds, and a wide variety are
cultivated as ornamentals (Acalypha,
Euphorbia , Poinsettia , Ricinus, Codi-
aeum). A few others are valued for their
economically important products, includ¬
ing food (Manihot utilissima), natural
rubber (Hevea, Manihot spp.), oils
(Ricinus, Croton, Aleurites), dyes
(Sapium, Mallotus), and drugs (Jatropha
curcas, Croton tiglium).
The Euphorbiaceae are clearly a spe¬
cialized family, as shown by the advanced
morphology of its greatly reduced flow¬
ers, especially the peculiar flower-like
inflorescence (cyathium) of Euphorbia
[sens, lat.], and the complex secretory
tissues, which besides latex (often white)
produce a great variety of compounds. Of
its two major floral patterns, the “Eu¬
phorbia-type” is exhibited by the tribe
Euphorbieae and the genus Dalechampia,
and the “non-Euphorbia-type” by the re-
James W. Richardson is Professor of Biology at the
University of Wisconsin-River Falls.
Derek Burch was formerly associated with the
Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, MO.
Theodore S. Cochrane is a Curator at the Her¬
barium, University of Wisconsin-Madison.
maining genera. In the latter, the perianth
is 5-merous, except where one or both of
the whorls are absent, and the staminate
flower generally has 5 or 10 (or up to 400
or more) free or variously united stamens.
A lobed disk is commonly present, at least
in the pistillate flowers.
The basic unit of the “Euphorbia-
type” inflorescence is a complex, highly
specialized cymose inflorescence called
the cyathium (Fig. 1), containing a
solitary pistillate flower surrounded by
few to several groups (cymules) of sta¬
minate flowers. The pistillate flower con¬
sists of only a single naked pedicellate
pistil, each staminate flower of only a
single stamen jointed to the pedicel (Fig.
1). Each small aggregation of these tiny
naked flowers is surrounded by a hypan-
thium-like involucre, the individual bracts
of which are discernible as lobes at the
rim. The cup-shaped or urn-shaped in¬
volucre usually bears 1 to 5 (or more)
glands on the top between the lobes and
sometimes also horn-like or petaloid ap¬
pendages. That the cyathium as a whole
simulates a single bisexual flower (pseu-
danthium) is enhanced by the central
stipitate ovary (Fig. 1). In fact, the com¬
pound inflorescence of irregularly clus¬
tered cyathia at the summit of the stem
may itself mimic a giant flower, as in
Poinsettia.
The fruit is customarily referred to as a
capsule, although strictly speaking it is a
capsular schizocarp. When ripe, the dor¬
sal walls of the locules separate septicidal-
ly from the persistent central axis (colu-
97
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 1. Euphorbia corollata. Habit of plant and parts of the cyathium during staminate
and fruiting stages. The “Euphorbia-type” inflorescence or cyathium consists of many
reduced staminate flowers and a solitary pistillate flower surrounded by a hypanthium-
like involucre. (From Wood, 1974.)
mella) into 1 -seeded mericarps, which
eventually liberate their seeds through a
ventral opening of the locules.
During development and maturation a
cyathium passes through five basic stages,
which are apparently quite similar among
different species. These stages have been
described and illustrated by Ehrenfeld
(1976).
The Linnaean Euphorbia is probably
one of the most broadly inclusive genera
that still has wide currency in the modern
literature. The problem of whether to
treat the genus in its entirety or to split it
into several genera is one that will un¬
doubtedly be discussed for years to come.
In the major early surveys (Boissier 1862;
Pax & Hoffmann 1931) Euphorbia was
retained intact. Subsequent workers have
attacked the problem in several ways,
either 1) combining all proposed generic
segregates into the single large genus
Euphorbia (Gleason & Cronquist 1963;
Voss 1985); 2) reducing such segregates to
98
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
sections or subgenera of Euphorbia (Nor¬
ton 1900; Wheeler 1941; Fernald 1950;
Gleason 1952; Richardson 1968; Walters
& Tutin 1968); or 3) recognizing these as
separate genera (Rydberg 1932; Small
1933; Croizat 1936; Dressier 1961; Burch
1966b). In the present treatment we
follow the latter authors and regard cer¬
tain natural, albeit weakly defined, seg¬
regates as worthy of generic rank.
A recent paper by Webster (1967) is
perhaps the best single reference to con¬
sult for a more detailed account of the
systematics and phylogeny of the Euphor-
biaceae.
The present paper revises Fassett’s
(1933) treatment of the Wisconsin
Euphorbiaceae. It is based on specimens
deposited in the herbaria of the University
of Wisconsin System, namely Madison
(WIS), Milwaukee (UWM), Oshkosh
(OSH), La Crosse (UWL), River Falls
(RIVE), Rock County Center-Janesville
(UWJ), Green Bay (UWGB), Platteville,
and Eau Claire, as well as Milwaukee
Public Museum (MIL), University of
Minnesota (MIN), University of Iowa
(IA), and the private herbarium of
Katherine D. Rill (Oshkosh, Wisconsin).
Thanks are due to the curators of the
above herbaria for loans of specimens.
Dots on the maps represent specific
locations where specimens have been col¬
lected; triangles indicate county records
when specific locations are not known.
The numbers within each map inset in the
lower left-hand corner show the amount
of flowering and fruiting noted on all
the specimens observed and indicate the
months when the species may be expected
to flower or fruit in Wisconsin. Specimens
with vegetative growth only or buds or
dispersed fruits are not included. For in¬
troduced species and obvious adventives
the year of earliest collection within a
county is also recorded.
EUPHORBIACEAE1 Juss.
Spurge Family
Monoecious or rarely dioecious herbs,
annual (but occasionally perennating) or
perennial, some with milky latex in all
parts. Leaves simple, alternate or some¬
times opposite, usually with stipules. In¬
florescences spicate, unisexual or bisex¬
ual, or with very reduced flowers collected
inside a small cupulate perianth-like in¬
volucre to form a pseudanthium (cya-
thium). Flowers always unisexual, much
reduced, the calyx or corolla minute or
either or both lacking. Staminate flowers
usually several, with 1-many stamens. Pis¬
tillate flower solitary; ovary superior, 3
(rarely l-2)-locular, each locule with a
separate style and 1 ovule. Fruit a capsule,
typically dehiscing elastically into 3 (very
rarely 2) 1 -seeded segments (mericarps).
Seeds often carunculate.
Perennial species flower in late spring
or summer. Most of the annuals become
fertile while very young and have all
stages of flower and fruit present after a
few weeks of growth.
A vast and diverse, mostly tropical
family, represented in Wisconsin by a
miscellaneous assemblage of 22 species in
5 genera (only 3 if Euphorbia is viewed as
an all-inclusive genus). Many of the
species are decidedly weedy and are com¬
mon in disturbed habitats. Phyllanthus
tenellus Roxb., an Old World species
adventive in the southeastern U.S., was
collected “among cult, garden firs.” at
Madison in 1983 {Bremer 21, WIS). It is a
glabrous annual that lacks latex and has
tiny pendulous flowers solitary in the ax¬
ils of alternate entire leaves. It is not, as
yet, an element in our flora.
1 Descriptions and keys apply to Wisconsin
material only.
99
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
KEY TO GENERA
A. Flowers clearly unisexual, variously arranged but not collected into cyathia;
staminate or pistillate flowers or both with a perianth; juice watery.
B. Plants pubescent with at least some stellate trichomes; staminate flowers
mostly with biseriate perianth; pistillate flowers without a leafy bract (Sub-
fam. CROTONOIDEAE Pax) . . . 1. CROTON.
BB. Plants sparsely pubescent with simple hairs; staminate flowers apetalous;
pistillate flowers encircled by a prominent leafy bract (Subfam. ACALY-
PHOIDEAE Ascherson) . 2. ACALYPHA.
AA. Flowers (one central pistillate and few to many staminate) aggregated within a
cupulate involucre (cyathium) simulating a single flower; flowers without a
perianth; juice milky (Subfam. EUPHORBIOXDEAE).
C. Glands of cyathium 1 (rarely 2 or 3), without appendages; leaf bases essen¬
tially symmetrical; cyathia irregularly clustered at summit of erect stem and
ascending branches; annuals . .3. POINSETTIA.
CC. Glands of cyathium consistently 4 or 5, exappendiculate or with petaloid or
horn-like appendages; leaf bases and cyathia various; annuals or perennials.
D. Leaves all opposite, with distinctly inequilateral bases; cyathia solitary
in upper axils or in axillary glomerules (not in “umbels”); annuals with
stems low, prostrate or ascending (rarely suberect or tips erect); stipules
well developed . . 4. CHAMAESYCE.
DD. Leaves alternate at least below, with ± equilateral bases; cyathia in a
terminal umbelliform cyme; annuals or perennials with stems tall and
erect (rarely ascending); stipules none . 5. EUPHORBIA.
1. CROTON L. Croton
Monoecious annual (ours) herbs with¬
out milky latex, variously pubescent with
at least some stellate trichomes. Leaves
alternate (appearing opposite just below
the inflorescence), stipulate, with an
unlobed blade. Inflorescences dichasial or
subcapitate, terminal or axillary, bisex¬
ual, mostly with a few 9 flowers below a
short spikelike raceme of cr flowers. Disk
(of lobes or separate glands) usually pres¬
ent in o’ or 9 flowers or both. Staminate
flowers with biseriate perianth (petals
sometimes rudimentary or none); stamens
equal in number to three times as many as
the small or rudimentary corolla lobes.
Pistillate flowers gamosepalous (calyx 5-
to 9-lobed), apetalous; ovary (2- or) 3-
celled, each locule with 1 ovule; styles
equal in number to carpels, bifid or 2 or 3
times dichotomous. Capsule with 1 seed
per carpel (or in C. monanthogynus
fewer-celled and 1 -seeded by abortion),
usually pubescent. Seeds smooth, usually
glossy, carunculate.
A large but natural genus of 600 to 800
species of herbs, shrubs, and trees, two-
thirds of which are South and Central
American or West Indian; represented in
southern Wisconsin only by three wide¬
spread taprooted annual weeds. A fourth,
entire-leaved southeastern U.S. species,
with 3 styles, erect capsules, and plumply
lenticular seeds about 4 mm broad, C.
capitatus Michx., has been collected at
Poynette as an accidental introduction
among sweet potato vines shipped in from
Tennessee ( Kelton 3 , ca. 1 Sep 1955 [fl,
fr], WIS).
100
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
KEY TO SPECIES
A. Plants dioecious; staminate flower apetalous; styles 3, repeatedly dichotomous;
very rare adventive . . . 1. C. TEXENSIS.
AA. Plants monoecious; staminate flowers with small petals; styles 2 or 3, deeply bifid.
B. Leaves crenate-serrate; leaf blade with 1 or 2 minute glands on lower surface
near junction with petiole; styles 3 (stigmas 6 per flower); mature capsule 3-
seeded; uncommon in disturbed sand prairies. ... 2. C. GLANDULOSUS .
BB. Leaves entire; leaf blade without glands; styles 2 (stigmas 4 per flower);
mature capsule 1 -seeded; rare adventive. .... 3. C. MONANTHOGYNUS .
1. Croton texensis (Kl.) Muell.-Arg.
Skunkweed, Texas croton Map 1.
Dioecious , canescent-stellate, dichoto-
mously branched HERB 0.3-15 (usually
2-8) dm tall. LEAVES linear-oblong to
oblong-lanceolate, 2-8 cm long, entire.
STAMINATE PLANTS smaller and with
narrower leaves than pistillate ones,
usually with numerous flowers: sepals 5,
petals 0 , and stamens 8-12. PISTILLATE
PLANTS with fewer flowers, 1-5 in each
short raceme: petals 0, styles 3, each
divided nearly to the base into 4 or more
branches. Mature CAPSULES 4-6 mm
long, 3-carpellate, stellate-tomentose.
Dry prairies and waste areas in sandy
loam from Ala. to Tex., Ariz. and nw.
Mex., north to Wyo., S.D. and Ill., occa¬
sionally adventive as far east as N. Engl.,
in Wisconsin still known only from a sin¬
gle old collection (plant staminate; un¬
doubtedly a waif): Milwaukee Co.: rail¬
road tracks by the Kinnickinnic River,
Milwaukee {Bennetts s.n ., 4 Sep 1899
[fl], MIL).
2. Croton glandulosus L. var.
SEPTENTRIONALIS Muell.-Arg.
Sand croton Map 2, Fig. 2.
Coarsely stellate-pubescent annual
HERBS 0.5-5 dm tall, usually branched.
LEAVES petiolate; stipules minute;
blades 3-8 cm long, oblong to narrowly
ovate or lanceolate, serrate , with 2 sub-
sessile whitish glands on the abaxial sur¬
face near the junction with the petiole.
INFLORESCENCE terminal, often over¬
topped by 2-4 lateral branches, usually
with 3-5 subsessile 9 flowers at the base
of a short (ca. 10 mm long) spike of o'
flowers. STAMINATE FLOWERS 4- or
5-merous, the petals white, small but
sometimes conspicuous, the stamens 7-9
(or more?). PISTILLATE FLOWERS
with 5 sepals and 5 minute petals , the
ovary 3-carpellate, the styles 3 , bifid
almost to base. CAPSULE subglobose,
Croton glandulosus; B) C. monanthogy-
nus. Adaxial (ventral or raphal) view (left)
and lateral view with raphe on the left and
micropyle up (right).
101
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
4-5 mm long. SEEDS broadly oblong,
3-3.5 mm long, grayish-tan mottled with
black, the surface minutely reticulate and
somewhat shiny; caruncle well developed.
Widespread in eastern N. Am. (N.J. to
Wis., Ia. and Kans., south to Fla., w.
Tex., and n. Mex.), a native of dry open
sandy woods, prairies, and plains, and
adventive in cultivated fields and road¬
sides, in Wisconsin essentially confined to
dry sandy plains on old terraces of the
Mississippi and Wisconsin rivers, occur¬
ring in sunny open habitats, especially in
disturbed sand prairies (with Bouteloua
hirsuta ), margins of blowouts (with
Euphorbia corollata and Hudsonia
tomentosa ), and sand pits, such as at
Bagley, Grant Co., with Polanisia
dodecandra, Cenchrus longispinus, and
Triplasis purpurea (Nee 5432, WIS), occa¬
sionally on roadsides or in fallow fields,
such as near Spring Green, Sauk Co.,
with Cycloloma atriplicifolia, Froelichia
floridana, Mollugo verticillata, Oeno¬
thera cleelandii, and weedy grasses,
including Setaria viridis, Digitaria
ischaemum, and Panicum virgatum
(Cochrane 11473, NY, WIS). Scanty her¬
barium material and field experience in¬
dicate that C. glandulosus is rare, but it
can sometimes be locally abundant. It is
generally thought to be native south of
Wisconsin, and it was not collected in the
southwestern part of our state until 1935
(Columbia Co.). The isolated Sheboygan
collections are from waste places in the
city (Goessl s.n. in 1904 and 1941, both
WIS). Flowering 17 Jun to 11 Sep; fruit¬
ing 18 Jul to 7 Oct.
This species is easily recognized by the
sharply dentate leaves, glands at the base
of the leaf blade, and staminate flowers
with only 7-9 stamens. It exhibits much
variability throughout its range, and
several intergrading varieties have been
distinguished on the basis of hair length
and density, basal gland thickness, and
seed shape and size. Wisconsin specimens
almost invariably have relatively dense
pubescence and hence belong to var. sep-
tentrionalis Muell.-Arg.
3. Croton monanthogynus Michx.
Prairie-tea Map 1, Fig. 2.
Annual HERBS 1-4 dm tall, finely and
densely whitish-stellate or the stems
minutely rusty-glandular; stems umbel-
lately 3- to 4-forked below, repeatedly 2-
to 3-forked or alternately branched
above. LEAVES petiolate, the blades ob¬
long to ovate, 1-3 cm long; stipules
minute. RACEME terminal, overtopped
by one or rarely more laterals, usually
with a solitary 9 flower on a short
recurved pedicel at the base of a short
erect spike of o* flowers. STAMINATE
FLOWERS with 3-5 sepals, 3-5 petals,
and 3-8 stamens. PISTILLATE FLOW¬
ERS with 5 sepals and 0 petals; ovary 2-
celled, one normal and 1 -ovulate, the
other usually aborting; styles 2, each
deeply bifid. CAPSULE ovoid, 4-5 mm
long, 1-seeded. SEEDS plumply len¬
ticular, ca. 3 mm long, dull, slightly
roughened, brown, with a small caruncle.
Common in dry calcareous soil from
Fla. to Tex., north to Md., O., Ill., Ia.,
and Kans. (also ne. Mexico), occasionally
adventive farther north, apparently ad¬
ventive in Wisconsin: Sheboygan Co.:
coal yards, Sheboygan (Goessl s.n., Jul
1903 [fl], WIS); Grant Co.: railroad,
Muscoda (Davis s.n., 11 Jul 1934 [fr],
WIS); sand prairies between railroad and
Hwy. 137, W of Muscoda (litis 28,435, 9
Jul 1978 [fl], WIS).
Specimens from Grant County are not
typical C. monanthogynus. From that
species they differ in stamen number
(8-12) and stigma number (6, the 3 styles
deeply bifid) and in their more fertile cap¬
sules, which are 3-carpellate and 3-seeded,
and larger seeds (3-4 mm long), which are
uniformly shiny brown, only slightly flat¬
tened, and prominently carunculate. In
typical C. monanthogynus the stamens
102
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
are normally 3 to 8, carpels 2, each with a
deeply bifid style, capsule 1- (rarely 2-)
seeded, and seeds 2.8-3. 1 mm long,
plumply lenticular, mottled dark brown,
and with a small caruncle. These Wiscon¬
sin specimens exhibit many of the same
characters found in C. capitatus var.
lindheimeri (Engelm. & Gray) Muell.-
Arg., a variety abundant in the se. U.S.
That taxon, however, has 6-10 calyx
lobes, while typical C. monanthogynus
(and the Grant Co. material) has 5 calyx
lobes and much larger seeds. Additional
collections are needed to more accurately
assess this situation.
2. ACALYPHA L. Acalypha
[Miller, L. W. 1964. A taxonomic study
of the species of Acalypha in the United
States. Ph.D. Dissertation, Purdue
Univ. 198 pp. ]
Annual (ours) herbs with clear (not
milky) latex, sparingly to much-branched.
Leaves alternate, crenate to serrate or en¬
tire, with 2 prominent lateral veins from
the base. Inflorescences spicate; flowers
unisexual, the stamina te very small,
apetalous, clustered in small axillary
spikes borne on a short peduncle, the
pistillate 1-3 at base of same spike or oc¬
casionally in separate ones, surrounded
by a variously lobed foliaceous bract.
Disk none. Ovary 3-locular, each locule
with a single ovule; styles 3, lacerate
almost to base. Capsule usually 3-seeded,
enveloped by the slightly accrescent bract.
Seeds minutely pitted or roughened in
rows, carunculate.
A largely New World genus throughout
temperate and tropical regions, with
about 390 species of annuals, perennials,
and subshrubs. Of the 17 species occur¬
ring in the U.S., only two are known in
Wisconsin.
KEY TO SPECIES
A. Pistillate bracts deeply cut into 6-9 narrowly lanceolate lobes; principal cauline
leaves rhombic-ovate, crenate-serrate; stems densely (above) to sparsely (below)
pubescent with recurved hairs; common native . 1. A. RHOMBOIDEA.
AA. Pistillate bracts mostly with 9-14 ovate or deltoid shallow lobes; leaves narrowly
ovate to broadly lanceolate, slightly crenate to entire; stem with moderately dense
incurved or ascending short hairs; rare adventive . 2. A. GRACILENS.
1 . Acalypha rhomboidea Raf .
Three-seeded Mercury Map 3, Fig. 3.
Sparsely puberulent annual HERB, 1-4
dm tall, sparingly branched. LEAVES
ovate to rhombic, 2-8 cm long (mostly
smaller), serrate, glabrate; stipules in¬
conspicuous; petioles from one-third to
equalling the length of the blade. IN¬
FLORESCENCE small, axillary; pistil¬
late bracts 1-3 near the base of each spike,
7-15 mm long, cut over one-half their
length into 5-11 (primarily 7-9) oblong to
lanceolate lobes, usually turning reddish
with maturity (particularly the lobes).
STAMINATE SPIKES rarely exceeding
9 bracts, 1.5 cm or less long, bearing 3-9
minute apetalous flowers. PISTILLATE
FLOWERS apetalous, 1-3 per bract;
ovary 3-locular, each cell with 1 ovule.
CAPSULE ca. 2 mm in diameter, pubes¬
cent and often glandular at apex. SEEDS
ovoid, 1.2-1. 7 mm long, brownish or
grayish with mottling, with a somewhat
shiny minutely roughened surface and a
small caruncle.
Distributed over most of the eastern
half of N. Am., from s. Que. to Man.,
south to Tex. and Fla., in Wisconsin com¬
mon, occurring mostly south of the Ten¬
sion Zone in a variety of moist to dry
103
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
0 5 mm
Acalypha rhomboidea
Fig. 3. Habit drawing and seed (ventral
and lateral views) of Acalypha rhom¬
boidea.
habitats, including mesic woods, river
bottoms, and grassy meadows, and as a
weed of disturbed ground in farm yards,
cities, gardens, fields, pastures, roadsides,
ditches, and on stream and pond margins,
especially on fill or spoil. Flowering 2 Jul
to 2 Sep; fruiting 8 Aug to 24 Oct.
Specimens of A. rhomboidea have fre¬
quently been misidentified as A. virginica ,
a southern species reaching the Midwest
(Ind., Ill., Ia., Mich.) but not yet col¬
lected in Wisconsin. Acalypha virginica
has bracts with 9-12 sharply acute
lanceolate lobes; the leaves are narrowly
ovate to lanceolate; and the stems and
bracts bear long straight hairs. These two
species and the next are not always easy to
separate.
2. Acalypha gracilens A. Gray spp.
GRACILENS
Slender Mercury Map 4.
Annual HERBS 1-4 dm tall, sparingly
pubescent with short incurved or ascend¬
ing hairs; branches slender, somewhat lax
to ascending. LEAVES narrowly ovate-
lanceolate to elliptic , 1.5-4 cm long,
pubescent with short stiff appressed hairs;
petioles to 1.5 cm long , less than one-
fourth the length of the blade. SPIKES
with 1-3 9 flowers near the base, their
bracts in fruit 5-10 mm long, cut one-
fourth or less their depth into 8-16
lanceolate or deltoid acute to rounded
- lobes , pubescent with short stiff hair and
usually sessile and long-stalked glands as
well. CAPSULE sparsely pubescent and
occasionally glandular at apex. SEEDS
1.2-1. 6 mm long, golden brown or mot¬
tled, the shiny surface with minute pits or
regularly roughened in rows.
Native farther south, rare and probably
adventive in Wisconsin: Sheboygan Co.:
waste places, Sheboygan (Goessl s.n., 29
Aug 1920 [fl], WIS); Green Lake Co.:
open red cedar woods, Marquette (Skin¬
ners s.n., 30 Jul 1938 [fl], WIS); pastured
sandy gravelly slope, same location as
Stunners* (Zimmerman 3625, 9 Sep 1951
[fl], WIS); Buffalo Co.: weedy pasture
bordering Buffalo River (Hartley 5224, 8
Aug 1958 [fl], IA-photos MIL, MIN,
RIVE, WIS). Hartley’s collection bears a
close resemblance to the narrow-leaved
form of A. rhomboidea. Miller (1964) in¬
dicated that A. gracilens is the only
species in the A. virginica complex that is
common on the Coastal Plain, saying
“that the disjunct occurrences in the mid¬
west reflect their being transported into
these areas and are not a part of the true
range of this species.”
104
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
3. POINSETT! A Graham
Summer poinsettia, fire-on-the-mountain
Euphorbia subgen. Poinsettia (Graham)
House
[Dressier, R. L. 1961. A synopsis of Poin¬
settia (Euphorbiaceae). Ann. Missouri
Hot. Gard. 48:329-341.]
Annual herbs with milky latex in all
parts. Leaves alternate near base or op¬
posite or subopposite throughout, petio-
late; stipules minute or absent. Cyathia in
terminal condensed dichasia or pleio-
chasia; involucre 5-lobed, with a single ex-
appendiculate gland (glands rarely 2 to 5
on early cyathia), enclosing 5 cymules of
o’ flowers at the base of a solitary ter¬
minal 9 flower. Staminate flowers
numerous, naked. Pistillate flowers na¬
ked; ovary 3-celled; styles 3, joined at
base, bifid for part of their length. Cap¬
sule 3-celled; seeds 1 in each cell, various¬
ly roughened; caruncle small or absent.
A New World genus of 1 1 or 12 species,
primarily characterized by its reduced
number of deeply cup-shaped exappen-
diculate glands, condensed terminal
dichasial or pleiochasial inflorescences
and tuberculate seeds. The cultivated
Christmas poinsettia, Poinsettia (Euphor¬
bia) pulcherrima (Willd. ex Kl.) Graham,
a familiar pot and seasonal garden plant,
differs from the wild poinsettias in Wis¬
consin by being somewhat woody, having
considerably larger cyathia and seeds, and
displaying many showy white, pink, or
red bracts.
KEY TO SPECIES
A. Plants glabrous or with soft pubescence on upper parts; leaves all or mostly alter¬
nate, generally with two distinctly different shapes, the cauline leaves narrowly
lanceolate to linear, entire, glabrous above, the bracts and bracteal leaves usually
lobed or panduriform, typically red at base . 1 . P. CYA THOPHORA.
AA. Plants usually strigose-hirsute, especially above; leaves all opposite or subopposite,
relatively uniform in shape throughout, the cauline leaves ovate to linear, serrate,
sparsely pubescent on both surfaces, the bracts and bracteal leaves green and
typically mottled with red spots, usually cream-colored at base. 2. P. DENT A TA.
1 . Poinsettia c yathophora (Murr . )
Kl. & Gke.
Map 5, Fig. 4.
Painted spurge, painted-leaf
Euphorbia heterophylla of most
American authors, not L.
Euphorbia heterophylla var. grami-
nifolia (Michx.) Englm.
Poinsettia heterophylla (L.) Kl. &
Gke.
Essentially glabrous annuals 3-4 (rarely
10) dm tall; stem erect, branched.
LEAVES alternate near base of plant ,
often opposite above; blades variable in
size and shape, pandurate, ovate, lanceo¬
late or linear, often assorted on one plant
or in the same population, mostly 5-10
cm long, usually minutely hairy beneath;
bracts or leaves green or often splashed
with red at base, especially in recent
escapes from cultivation. CYATHIA in
terminal clusters of 1 to 10, pedicellate;
gland or glands bilabiate, sessile, some¬
what appressed to the cyathium. CAP¬
SULE 3-4 mm long, glabrous; SEEDS
broadly elliptic-ovoid to subglobose,
2. 5-3.0 mm long, scarcely angled, the
reddish- to blackish-brown coat finely
and sharply tuberculate; caruncle minute
or absent.
Native to eastern U. S. and Mexico,
now a widespread weed in Tropical and
Temperate America and parts of the Old
World, in Wisconsin highly variable and
much less common than Poinsettia den-
106
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
tata, with which it sometimes grows. It is
found primarily in the Mississippi and
Wisconsin river valleys, possibly as a
native in sandy woodland on shores (at
Lake Pepin) but mostly as an adventive
on roadsides, railroad tracks, and in dry
weedy places, rarely in disturbed prairies;
formerly grown in old-fashioned gardens
in the southeastern counties, but ap¬
parently not escaped there. It was col¬
lected as early as 1861 at Lake Pepin on
the Wisconsin side ( T \ J. Hales.n., WIS-2
sheets), again at several places along the
Mississippi from 1910 to 1914, and about
a dozen times since. Flowering (late June)
13 Jul to 26 Aug; fruiting 31 Jul to 27 Sep.
Very variable in vegetative characters,
especially in leaf shape and coloration,
this species has often been subdivided into
varieties or additional species. Plants with
mostly unlobed, linear to lanceolate cau-
line and rameal leaves (var. graminifolia)
intergrade freely with those whose cauline
leaves are ovate to narrowly obovate or
pandurate and whose floral leaves may be
of either broad or narrow shapes (var.
cyathophora). It does not seem reason¬
able to treat plants as distinct varieties
based on foliar polymorphism.
This species has long been known as
Poinsettia (Euphorbia) heterophylla, a
name which according to Dressier (1961)
should be applied to a tropical American
plant whose range hardly extends north of
the frost line in Louisiana and Texas.
2. Poinsettia dentata (Michx.)
Kl.&Gke. Map 6, Fig. 4.
Toothed spurge
Euphorbia dentata Michx.
Euphorbia cuphosperma (Engelm.)
Boiss.
Euphorbia dentata f. cuphosperma
(Engelm.) Fern.
Poinsettia cuphosperma (Engelm.)
Small
Annuals, 2-5 dm tall, the stem,
branches and petioles often strigose -
hirsute , especially toward the tips.
LEA VES opposite or the upper sub oppo¬
site, petiolate, the blades narrowly ovate
to linear, 1-5 cm long, irregularly serrate,
sparsely pubescent on both surfaces; brac-
teal leaves green (never red) or occa¬
sionally white or splashed with purple.
CYATHIA in congested terminal cymes
of 1 to 10, subsessible, the gland or glands
bilabiate, short-stalked but appressed.
CAPSULE 2-3 mm long, 4-5 mm thick,
glabrous to lightly strigose; SEEDS
broadly ovoid to subglobose, (2.2)
2. 3-2. 6 mm long, inconspicuously 4-
angled, finely and sharply tuberculate, the
coat whitish to brown or black; caruncle
ca. 0.5 mm long.
Throughout most of the temperate U.
S. from Ill. to S.D. and Wyo., east to
N.Y. and Va., south to Tex. and Ariz.
(also Mex. and possibly Guatemala),
native primarily on the Great Plains,
locally common in southwestern Wiscon¬
sin, sporadic eastward, in dry sandy,
gravelly or cindery soil along roads and
railroads and in quarries and vacant lots,
also on margins of cultivated fields,
gravelly hillsides and rocky prairies. This
species rarely occurs on very dry lime¬
stone (dolomite) bluffs in the Driftless
Area, where it appears as if native in
prairie remnants virtually free of weeds.
However, natural disturbance is always
present on these steep rocky prairies, and
P. dentata is probably adventive rather
than native in this ecologically “open”
habitat. Significantly, most early Wiscon¬
sin collections date from the 1920’s and
1930’s with the earliest collections dating
from 1915 (Lynxville, Denniston s.n., 31
Aug, 1 Sep, both WIS). Flowering from
the end of June to 21 Sep; fruiting 18 Jul
to 21 Oct.
This species exhibits tremendous varia¬
tion, particularly in leaf form, and some
of these extremes have been given infra¬
specific or even specific rank. The most
distinctive variant is P. dentata var.
107
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
POINSETTIA
P. cyathophora
nectar
gland
P. dentata
I mm
Fig. 4. Habit drawings of Wisconsin Poinsettias: A) Poinsett-ia cyathophora; B) P. den¬
tata. Left, cyathium, and right, seeds, of respective species. (The cyathium of P. cyatho¬
phora is redrawn after Dressier 1961, p. 331.)
cuphosperma, characterized mainly by its material from not only Wisconsin and
narrow leaves, strigose capsules and less Minnesota but also the Great Plains as
strongly tuberculate seeds. Herbarium well as several individual populations ex-
108
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
amined during field work for this report
show complete intergradation from the
occasional narrow-leaved form to the
more typical broad-leaved form (Richard¬
son, 1968 & unpubl. data). Likewise, seed
and capsule variants intergrade complete¬
ly. The reported correlation of strigose
capsules with narrow leaves versus glab¬
rous capsules with typical leaf shapes
failed completely, because in many speci¬
mens with typical var. dentata leaves the
fruits were pubescent. Plants with strigose
capsules occur sporadically and nearly co-
extensively with other character phases.
Furthermore, the amount of pubescence
varies in accord with the relative state of
capsule maturity on the same plant. In the
absence of character correlations it seems
rather hopeless to separate our plants into
more than one taxon. However, Dressier
(1961) indicates that polyploidy is cor¬
related with morphology and that the spe¬
cies does show clinal patterns of variation
northward from centers in the Southwest
and Mexico.
4. CHAMAESYCE S. F. Gray Spurge
Euphorbia subgen. Chamaesyce Raf.
[Wheeler, L. C. 1941. Euphorbia sub¬
genus Chamaesyce in Canada and the
United States exclusive of Southern
Florida. Rhodora 43:97-154, 168-205,
223-286. Reprinted as Contr. Gray
Herb. 136.]
Small, often prostrate annual herbs
with milky latex in all parts, variously
pubescent or essentially glabrous. Leaves
strictly opposite, petiolate, inequilateral
at base, with small interpetiolar stipules.
Cyathia terminal but appearing axillary,
solitary or often clustered; involucre with
5 lobes and 4 glands, with or without ob¬
vious petaloid appendages, enclosing 5 cy-
mules of cr flowers at the base of a
solitary terminal 9 flower. Staminate
flowers few to many, maturing serially,
naked, monandrous. Pistillate flowers
pedicellate, naked or with a pad of tissue
representing a vestigial calyx; ovary 3-
celled, each cell with 1 ovule; styles 3, free
or joined at base, bifid for part of their
length. Capsule 3 -seeded; seeds small,
with a smooth or variously textured sur¬
face, ecarunculate.
A genus or roughly 150-250 species,
worldwide but with the majority in the
New World, represented in Wisconsin by
widespread species, all of which occur in
open, usually disturbed, dry or less often
moist soil.
KEY TO SPECIES
A. Capsules (and ovaries) strigose; stems villous . 1. C. MACULATA.
AA. Capsules glabrous; stems glabrous or ± pubescent (often with only fine incurved
hairs).
B. Leaves entire; seeds terete, smooth (cellular-reticulate under high magnifica¬
tion), the coat usually white.
C. Capsule ca. 3-3.5 mm long; seeds cuneiform-ovoid (i.e., compressed),
2. 3-2.6 mm long; plants of Lake Michigan shore . . .
. 2. C. POL YGONIFOLIA .
CC. Capsule 1.5-1. 8 mm long; seeds ovoid (not compressed), 1.3-1. 6 mm
long; plants widely distributed in western Wisconsin. . 3. C. GEYERI.
BB. Leaves serrulate (at least toward apex or along one side); seeds angular,
smooth, punctate or ridged, the coat usually brown or blackish.
D. Stems pubescent, at least near tips; leaves relatively large (usually more
than 10 mm long), toothed along both margins.
E. Stems erect or ascending, glabrate or crisp-puberulent above,
109
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
tending to be pubescent in lines except at the tips; mature leaves
usually more than 15 mm long; capsules mostly 1.8-2. 3 mm long;
stipules entire or toothed . . . . 4. C. NUTANS.
EE. Stems wide-spreading or prostrate, sparsely pilose or hirsute,
equally pubescent all the way around; mature leaves mostly less
than 15 mm long; capsules 1.5-1. 8 mm long; stipules laciniate.
. 5. C. VERMICULATA.
DD. Stems glabrous; leaves small (mostly less than 10 mm long), toothed
only near apex and along one side toward base.
F. Leaves usually linear-oblong, serrulate, obtuse at apex; seeds with
3-7 evident transverse ridges and furrows on each facet .
. 6. C. GLYPTOSPERMA.
FF. Leaves usually oblong to ovate, entire in lower 2/a, serrulate at the
truncate apex; seeds smooth or punctate or with a few faint trans¬
verse wrinkles . 7. C. SERP YLLIFOLIA .
1 . Chamaesyce maculata (L.) Small
Map 7, Fig. 5.
Wartweed, milk-purslane
Euphorbia maculata L.
E. supina Raf .
Chamaesyce supina (Raf.) Raf.
Prostrate (usually) to ascending annual
HERBS , sparsely to densely villous
throughout. LEAVES oblong to elliptic-
or oblong-ovate, 1-2.5 cm long, often
with a red-purple blotch, slightly serru¬
late; stipules distinct, 2- or 3-toothed or
cleft. CYATHIA solitary on branches of
condensed laterals; glands transversely
elliptic, very small, with minute to evi¬
dent, white or pink appendages. CAP¬
SULE ovoid, 1.3-1. 6 mm long, the angles
obtuse; seeds oblong-ovoid, 0.8-0.9 (1.2)
mm long, 4-angled, each facet traversed
by 3-5 ± regular low transverse ridges,
these often passing through the angles;
coat tan with white covering.
Native of e. U.S. and s. Canada, now
very common is disturbed or waste places
from N.S. and s. Que. to N.D., s. to Fla.
and e. N.Mex., introduced on the West
Coast and in Eu., one of the most abun¬
dant weeds in Wisconsin on gravelly and
sandy road shoulders, railroad embank¬
ments, fallow or cultivated fields, lawns
and gardens, and waste ground, also in
pastures, open woods, sand prairies, and
shores. In addition, this species has the
ability to utilize even the rather unique
habitat offered by cracks in sidewalks and
driveways, and it is commonly associated
with other prostrate species of dry barren
places (e.g., Chamaesyce glyptosperma,
Mo Hugo verticil lata and Polygonum avic-
ulare). While Fassett (1933) suggested that
in northern Wisconsin this species is re¬
placed by C. glyptosperma, herbarium
collections and field observations indicate
that, although the range of the two in the
state is very similar, C. maculata is the
common species in the North. Flowering
12 Jun to 24 Aug with some continuing
until frost; fruiting (18 Jun) 4 Jul to 21
Oct or until frost.
This species has had a tortured nomen-
clatural history. In his excellent study
Wheeler (1941) applied Euphorbia supina
Raf. to it, and his conclusions were
adopted by a number of authors, includ¬
ing Fosberg (1953). According to Croizat
(1962) and Burch (1966a), however, the
epithet maculata ( = supina) must be ap¬
plied to the prostrate species and the
epithet nutans to the larger upright one.
An old specimen ( Schuette s.n., 1889,
F) from Brown Co., cited by Fassett
(1933, p. 182) as Euphorbia humistrata,
110
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
CHAMAESYCE
'«■* c
C. maculata
0.5 mm
C. nutans
Fig. 5. Habit drawings, seeds (ventral and lateral views), and a cyathium of Wisconsin
Chamaesyces: A) and C) Chamaesyce maculata; B) C. nutans.
has been annotated as Chamaesyce macu¬
lata.
2. Chamaesyce polygonifolia (L.)
Small Map 8, Fig. 7.
Seaside spurge
Euphorbia polygonifolia L.
Prostrate, somewhat fleshy annual
HERBS forming open mats to 4 dm in di¬
ameter, glabrous in all parts. LEAVES
narrowly oblong to oblong-lanceolate ,
5-15 mm long, slightly inequilateral at
base, entire; stipules deeply 2- to 3-parted
or rarely entire or toothed. CYATHIA
111
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Fig. 6. Habit drawing and seed (ventral and lateral views) of Chamaesyce geyeri.
solitary on branches of short upper lat¬
erals; glands 4 or often obsolete, broadly
oval to suborbicular, with at most rudi¬
mentary appendages. CAPSULE trun¬
cate-ovoid, relatively large, 2. 9-3. 6 mm
long, the angles obtuse to rounded.
SEEDS cuneiform-ovoid, 2. 3-2. 6 mm
long, the facets slightly (ventral side)
to strongly (dorsally) rounded, smooth,
whitish-gray.
A characteristic species of sand dunes
and sandy or gravelly upper beaches or
strands of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts
(from e. Que. and N.S. south to n. Fla.,
also in La.), disjunct to the shores of the
Great Lakes (except Lake Superior) in s.
Ont. (north to the Bruce Peninsula, Lake
Huron), Mich, and Wis., also naturalized
in w. Eu. (cf. maps in Cain 1944, Guire &
Voss 1963, McLaughlin 1932, Peattie
1922, Wheeler 1941), in Wisconsin re¬
stricted to the sand beaches of Lake
112
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
Fig. 7. Seeds of Wisconsin Chamaesyces: A) Chamaesyce polygonifolia; B) C. vermicu-
lata; C) C. glyptosperma; and D) C. serpyllifolia. Ventral (adaxial) view (left) and lateral
view with raphe on the left and micropyle up (right).
Michigan from Door to Kenosha coun¬
ties. Chamaesyce polygonifolia grows on
both the flatter lower strand relatively
close to the water’s edge, there associated
consistently with Corispermum hyssopi-
folium, Cakile edentula, and C. lacustris
(all likewise annuals), and the looser sand
of upper beach dunes, sometimes partly
buried and often associated with common
dune grasses (Agropyron dasystachyum
var. psammophilum , Calamovilfa longi-
folia var. magnay Elymus canadensis , Poa
compressa) as well as Cyperus schweinit-
zii, Juncus balticus, Prunus pumila,
Oenothera parviflora, and Artemisia
caudata. Flowering from 6 Jul to 23 Aug;
fruiting from 10 Aug to 15 Oct.
This species is listed as being threatened
in Wisconsin (Read, 1976) because of its
small number of stations and its depen¬
dence on a rare habitat type. During the
summers of 1975 and 1976 only a relative¬
ly small number of plants were seen at
Point Beach State Forest (Manitowoc
Co.) and Terrae Andrae State Park (She¬
boygan Co.), and later (1985) fewer yet at
Sand Dunes Park on Washington Island.
The species occupies a very narrow eco¬
logical zone, but, being on public land,
these populations are under some protec¬
tion. Additional sites in other counties
need similar protection to help ensure the
continued existence of not only this criti¬
cal species but its associates and their
rather unique habitat.
A Comment on the
Phytogeography of
Chamaesyce polygonifolia
The history of Chamaesyce polygonifo¬
lia is representative of the many species of
the Coastal Plain having inland exten¬
sions to the Great Lakes area. Like the
majority of such species, seaside spurge is
113
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
generally distributed between the Atlan¬
tic Coast and Lake Michigan, occurring
on the shores of the lower four Great
Lakes and the rivers connecting them, as
well as coming a short distance up the
Hudson River and appearing at a single
inland locality (at Onondaga Lake2) in the
Ontario Basin. Peattie (1922) concluded
that this distribution can best be explained
in terms of step-wise migration westward
in early post-Pleistocene times. A smaller
category of Coastal Plain plants is com¬
prised of species with limited inland
distributions, including Muhlenbergia
uniflora , Echinochloa walteri , and Utric-
ularia resupinata as well as several strik¬
ingly disjunct Cyperaceae (i.e., Rhyncho-
spora macrostachya, Scleria reticularis ,
Psilocarya scirpoides, Fuirena squarrosa,
and the oft-cited Eleocharis me la no-
carp a). As for their occurrence in the
Midwest, Peattie upheld his answer of the
westward migration, suggesting that at
the close of the glacial period the Coastal
Plain flora was far more extensive than at
present and that those species exhibiting
geographical discontinuities were simply
eliminated from the intervening areas.
Later studies, such as the exhaustive
analysis of the sand barrens flora of
Wisconsin by McLaughlin (1932), rein¬
forced Peattie’s explanation, albeit refin¬
ing the geographical groupings of plants
and giving greater consideration to habi¬
tat conditions. Post-glacial migration is
a reasonable hypothesis for dune and
strand plants, such as Chamaesyce poly-
gonifolia , Hudsonia tomentosa, Cakile
edentula (s.l.), and Ammophila brevili-
gulata, which are distributed along natural
avenues of suitable habitats and whose
disjunctions involve only short distances.
2 This station has been listed by catalogers of the
New York flora (and apparently mapped by Peattie)
on the authority of an old floristic list (Goodrich, L.
L. H. 1912, p. 123. Flora of Onondaga County: as
Collected by Members of the Syracuse Botanical
Club. McDonnell Co., Syracuse.)
The possibility of alternative hypoth¬
eses ought not to be excluded, however,
not only for strictly Coastal Plain species,
i.e., those occupying non-littoral habitats,
but also for some of the strand disjuncts.
According to Svenson (1927), the occur¬
rence of maritime plants inland is general¬
ly not controlled by the limits of post-
Pleistocene marine submergence. He
places considerable emphasis upon trans¬
portation of seeds by human agencies and
the influence of favorable sites for estab¬
lishment after dispersal. In discussing
Cakile , Rodman (1974) postulates that C.
edentula (as C. edentula var. edentula) is
an historical introduction (perhaps in
ballast) to the Great Lakes shores (see also
Patman & litis 1960, who were not aware
of the recentness of this introduction) but
that C. lacustris (as C. edentula var.
lacustris) is a locally evolved endemic, its
progenitors having colonized the region
(by ordinary migration) from the Atlantic
Coast. The widely disjunct areas of the
rare, highly localized Cyperaceae men¬
tioned above imply that these probably
arrived in the Midwest via long-distance
dispersal, persisting now only locally due
to the presence of small special habitats.
This pattern also suggests that disjunc¬
tions found among other Coastal Plain
elements may also have been achieved by
long-distance dispersal or a combination
of dispersal and migration, as the case
may be, rather than only by migration
followed by range restriction. It is dif¬
ficult or impossible to apply one explana¬
tion when interpreting distributional dis¬
junctions. The same historical, climatic,
and environmental factors that explain
the distribution of some plants may not
account for the distribution of all species,
even among groups having similar geo¬
graphical patterns, such as Chamaesyce
polygonifolia , Cakile edentula , and
Cakile lacustris. Any explanations con¬
cerning disjunctions must be settled on a
case-by-case basis.
114
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
3. Chamaesyce geyeri (Engelm.) Small
Geyer’s spurge Map 9, Fig. 6.
Euphorbia geyeri Engelm.
Glabrous annual HERBS, with pros¬
trate stems forming open mats to 4 dm in
diameter. LEAVES ovate- to elliptic-
oblong, 4-10 mm long, strictly entire;
stipules deeply 2- to 3-parted. CYATHIA
solitary on branches of short laterals;
glands broadly oval to suborbicular, the
appendages white, smaller than the
glands. STAMINATE FLOWERS 1-5 (6)
per fascicle, 5-27 per involucre. CAP¬
SULE 1.5- 1.8 mm long, strongly lobed,
the angles rounded. SEEDS ovoid, 1.3-
1.6 mm long, the coat smooth, whitish to
light reddish-brown or whitish with dark
orange mottling due to the testa showing
through.
Native to the Great Plains from N.D.,
Minn, and Colo., south to n. Ind., Tex.
and N.Mex., reaching its eastern range
limits primarily in western Wisconsin;
also adventive in Upper Mich. Aside from
certain sand barrens of northwestern
Wisconsin, this species is more or less
restricted to the Driftless Area. It is
definitely associated with sandy soil, oc¬
curring primarily near the larger rivers on
dunes (usually stabilized), sand hills, and
river banks (e.g., at Cruson Slough, Rich¬
land Co., with Polanisia dodecandra [sub
Cochrane & Lewicki 3052] or with such
colonizing grasses as Triplasis purpurea,
Eragrostis pectinacea, Elymus canaden¬
sis, Digit aria ischaemum, and Panicum
virgatum [sub Cochrane & Cochrane
7083]), blowouts and sand pits, and sandy
waste areas and barrens. Although not
widely distributed, C. geyeri does tend to
be locally common, particularly in aban¬
doned agricultural fields, margins of
prairie remnants and roadsides. Flower¬
ing 12 Jul to 17 Aug; fruiting 26 Jul to 2
Oct.
Although not given protective status,
this species might be deserving of recon¬
sideration for listing once its status can be
more thoroughly investigated (Read,
1976).
This species is commonly confused with
C. glyptosperma but may be easily distin¬
guished from the latter by the entire
leaves, higher number of staminate flow¬
ers per cyathium, and smooth whitish
seeds.
4. Chamaesyce nutans (Lag.) Small
Eyebane Map 10, Fig. 5.
Euphorbia nutans Lag.
E. preslii Guss.
E. maculata L. sensu Wheeler and
others
Suberect to ascending annual HERBS
8-30 cm tall; stems mostly simple below,
short-pubescent at tips and in 1 or 2 lines
on young shoots, glabrate. LEA VES
ovate-lanceolate to oblong, often some¬
what falcate, 1-4 cm long, serrulate,
glabrous or sparsely long-pilose par¬
ticularly beneath, typically red-mottled;
stipules connate or distinct, triangular,
entire or toothed. CYATHIA both soli¬
tary and clustered in lateral and terminal
short-stalked compound dichasia; glands
transversely elliptic to circular, the appen¬
dages obsolete or up to 3 times the width
of the gland, white or pink. CAPSULES
broadly ovoid, when mature (1.6) 1.8-2. 4
mm long, strongly lobed, the angles
subacute, glabrous. SEEDS oblong-
ovoid, 1.1 -1.3 mm long; ventral angle
rounded, the others well marked, the 4
unequal facets flat to slightly convex,
rippled or transversely wrinkled by several
(5-9) low irregular ridges; coat dark gray
to dark brown with angles usually lighter
in color.
Widespread in warm- temperate parts of
the world, including eastern N. Am. and
the Great Plains, from Que. to N.D.,
south to Fla. and Tex. (introd. in Wash.,
Calif.), relatively common in the southern
half of Wisconsin, particularly along the
Mississippi and Wisconsin rivers. Gener¬
ally considered a weed, it is common in
116
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
sandy, gravelly or cindery soils along
railroad embankments, roadsides and dry
open ground, also on flood plains, shores
and ditches, disturbed spots in woods and
prairies, hillsides, waste or cultivated
fields, and pastures. C. nutans is very rare
north of the Tension Zone and then only
along railroad embankments or road¬
sides, which apparently provide tem¬
porary avenues into that portion of the
state. Even once established, dispersal
seems to be restricted, few, if any, plants
invading adjacent areas, the populations
tending to remain small. South of the
Tension Zone dispersal is much more effi¬
cient or the climate more agreeable,
because the species is relatively wide¬
spread and occurs in a variety of habitats.
Flowering 9 Jul to 30 Aug (15 Oct); fruit¬
ing 24 Jul to 24 Oct.
Much controversy has centered around
the correct name for this distinct, semi-
erect glabrate species. Burch (1966a)
disagreed with Wheeler’s (1941) inter¬
pretation of the Linnaean E. maculata,
indicating that due to the established
usage of E. hypericifolia for the tropical
or subtropical species, the epithet nutans
should be applied to the upright northern
species. Also, since the specimen used by
Wheeler as the type for E. maculata was
not in Linnaeus’ possession until after
the publication of Species Plantarum, the
name E. maculata must be rejected for
this species and applied to our species no.
1 (see comments under E. maculata).
5. Chamaesyce vermiculata (Raf.)
House Map 11, Fig. 7.
Hairy spurge
Euphorbia hirsuta (Torr.) Wieg.
E. rafinesquii Greene
Prostrate (usually) to ascending annual
HERBS; stems to 4 dm long, sparsely
long-pilose at least in a line on the upper
side and extending down to internode
from the stipules. LEAVES obliquely
ovate to lanceolate, (5) 8-15 (18) mm
long, glabrous or sparsely pilose above,
usually pilose beneath, serrulate; stipules
distinct or united, usually deeply cleft.
CYATHIA solitary, the uppermost some¬
times appearing clustered by the conden¬
sation of a small leafy cyme; glands long-
stipitate, subcircular, the appendages
usually prominent, white. CAPSULE
broadly ovoid, 1.5- 1.8 mm long, glabrous
or rarely pilose and glabrate, the angles
rounded. SEEDS ovoid, 1. 1-1.2 mm
long, quadrangular, gray-brown, slightly
wrinkled, the ventral facets slightly con¬
cave, the dorsal flat to slightly convex.
Locally common in the northeastern
U.S., reaching its western range limits in
Wisconsin (except for B.C., Ariz., and N.
Mex., where introd.?), considered native but
generally found in waste ground and dis¬
turbed sites, such as railroads, roadsides,
ditches, parking lots, city streets, occa¬
sionally yards and gardens. This species is
sporadic in southern Wisconsin; field ob¬
servations indicate that even where C. ver¬
miculata is found, individual plants are
widely scattered. Flowering July through
September (collected specimens: 17 Jul to
10 Aug); fruiting 5 Aug to 14 Oct.
6. Chamaesyce glyptosperma
(Engelm.) Small Map 12, Fig. 7.
Ridge-seeded spurge
Euphorbia glyptosperma Engelm.
Prostrate or ascending glabrous annual
HERBS; stems 5-30 cm long. LEAVES
narrowly oblong to ovate-oblong, 3-15
mm long, strongly inequilateral, ser¬
rulate; stipules usually connate, subulate
or deeply cleft into filiform divisions.
CYATHIA solitary on branches of short
laterals; glands transversely elliptical,
often much reduced, the appendages from
shorter than to equalling the glands or ab¬
sent, white to reddish. ST AMIN ATE
FLOWERS (0) 1-2 per fascicle, 2-7
(usually 4) per involucre. CAPSULE
depressed-ovoid, 1.3-1. 6 mm long, the
angles obtuse. SEEDS oblong-ovoid,
117
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
0. 9-1.0 mm long, strongly 4-angled, the
ventral facets concave , traversed by 3-5
prominent ridges , the dorsal facets con¬
vex, traversed by 5-7 prominent ridges,
the ridges ± passing through the angles;
coat tan but appearing white due to thick
bloom.
Widespread from N. Engl, south to
Tex. and west to B.C. and n. Calif., in
Wisconsin a very common weed of road¬
sides, railroads, sand or gravel pits, waste
areas, and in virtually every available
habitat with open, rather dry sandy,
gravelly, or loamy soils: driveways, fire
lanes, paths, lake shores, prairies, pine
plantations, plowed fields, lawns, play¬
grounds, parking lots, cliffs, ledges, out¬
crops, and talus. It frequently occurs with
Chamaesyce maculata, the two species
apparently having very similar ecological
requirements, both being well adapted
to man-made disturbances and common
in cracks of sidewalks or driveways,
baseball diamonds, tennis courts, etc.
Flowering 20 Jun to 7 Sep (October);
fruiting 1 Jun to 6 Oct.
See notes under C. geyeri (no. 3) and C.
serpyllifolia (no. 7).
7. Chamaesyce serpyllifolia (Per s.)
Small Map 13, Fig. 7.
Thyme-leaved spurge
Euphorbia serpyllifolia Pers.
Prostrate or ascending annual HERBS,
glabrous in all parts; stems 5-30 cm long,
often (at least the distal internodes)
flattened in the plane of the leaves.
LEA VES variable in shape, oblong,
spatulate or obovate, 3-14 mm long,
strongly serrulate above the middle,
typically red-mottled above along the
midrib; stipules distinct, deeply 2- or 3-
parted into linear segments. CYATHIA
solitary; glands transversely oblong, the
appendages very small, white. STAMI-
NATE FLOWERS 1-3 per fascicle, 5-12
(18) per involucre. CAPSULE ovoid, 1.3-
1.9 mm long, glabrous, the angles obtuse.
SEEDS oblong-ovoid, 1.0-1. 2 mm long,
strongly 4-angled; facets essentially
smooth, punctate, or sometimes with
faint transverse wrinkles, the coat gray- to
yellow-brown with a thick bloom.
Primarily in the western states and the
northern Great Plains from B.C. east to
Alta., south to Tex., N. Mex., and Baja
Calif., extending east to Minn., Ia., Wis.,
and n. Mich.; only rarely collected in sites
with undisturbed vegetation. In Wiscon¬
sin it is weedy and probably adventive, the
limited number of collections (ca. 12)
sporadically distributed north of the Ten¬
sion Zone, most often along railroads and
roadsides but rarely in other disturbed
sites (i.e., drained river bed, ditch, and
“dry soil”). Flowering July and August;
fruiting from 19 Jul through September.
Chamaesyce serpyllifolia and C. glyp-
tosperma are similar and frequently grow
together. In both species the leaf blades
are very variable in shape and often ap¬
pear bowed-in along the sides due to the
revolute margins. However, C. serpyl¬
lifolia tends to be relatively robust and
decumbent to ascending in habit. Also, its
seeds are rather smooth to somewhat ru-
gulose, and the red-mottled spatulate to
obovate leaves have the margins unthick¬
ened and serrulate for less than half the
length from the apex. Chamaesyce glypto-
sperma is slender and typically prostrate.
It has seeds with prominent transverse
ridges and oblong to subfalcate leaves
with thickened margins whose serrula-
tions often extend to the base on the lobed
(abaxial) side.
5. EUPHORBIA L. Spurge
Euphorbia L. subgen. Esula Pers.
[Richardson, J. W. 1968. The Genus Eu¬
phorbia of the High Plains and Prairie
Plains of Kansas, Nebraska, South and
North Dakota. Univ. Kansas Sci. Bull.
48:45-112.]
Erect annual or perennial herbs with
milky latex in all parts; stems scarcely
118
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
branched for much of their length, then
umbellate or branching freely (sometimes
dichotomously) above. Leaves alternate
near the base, opposite or alternate above
and usually verticillate below the branches
(rays) of the umbel, mostly estipulate;
blades in shape and character often
changing serially up the stem and on the
fertile branches. Inflorescence of cyathia,
terminal, clustered or usually umbellate;
cyathium 5-lobed, with 4 or 5 glands and
with or without petaloid appendages, en¬
closing 4-5 cymules of a flowers at the
base of the solitary 9 flower. Staminate
flowers naked, few to many, maturing
serially. Pistillate flowers naked, the
ovary 3 -celled, each cell with 1 ovule;
styles 3, ± joined at the base and bifid for
part of their length. Capsule 3-seeded.
Seeds with or without a caruncle.
The largest genus in the family, with
perhaps 1600 species as circumscribed by
Linnaeus and later by Pax and Hoffmann
(1910-1924). Some workers, appalled by
the heterogeneity of this group, have sug¬
gested that Euphorbia s. str. should in¬
clude only a few of the woody or succu¬
lent African species and that the re¬
mainder should be divided among a num¬
ber of more “natural” genera. Further
work may show that this course should be
followed, but until other segregates can be
unequivocally defined, we are accepting
as distinct genera in addition to Euphor¬
bia only the easily recognizable Chamae-
syce and Poinsettia.
Several exotic spurges have been in¬
troduced into North America as ornamen¬
tal plants. Of these, cypress spurge
{Euphorbia cyparissias L.) and leafy
spurge {E. esula L.) are now persistent
weeds in practically every county in Wis¬
consin. The European Euphorbia myrsi-
nites L., a perennial with glaucous fleshy
stems, alternate, obovate to suborbicular
leaves, and dilated, 2-horned glands, was
collected at Oshkosh by Harriman (s.n., 2
Jun 1971 [im fr], OSH-photos MIL,
RIVE, UWM, WIS) as an adventive in his
garden that did not reappear in subse¬
quent years.
KEY TO SPECIES
A. Glands of the cyathia with conspicuous white appendages; seeds ecarunculate
[subgen. Agaloma (Raf.) House].
B. Capsules and involucres pubescent; seeds 3-4 mm long, tuberculate or
reticulate- verrucose; upper leaves and bracts conspicuously white- variegated;
plant annual [sect. Petaloma Boiss.]. . . 1. E. MARGIN ATA.
BB. Capsules and involucres glabrous (variously pubescent when young); seeds
2-2.5 mm long, smooth or with indistinct rows of shallow depressions; all
leaves green; plant perennial [sect. Tithymalopsis (Kl. & Gke.) Boiss.]. .....
. . . . . 2. E. COROLLATA.
AA. Glands of cyathia without petaloid appendages; seeds carunculate [subgen. Esula
Pers.].
C. Leaves entire; glands of involucre lunate, their tips pointed or prolonged into
short horns [sect. Esula (Roeper) Koch].
D. Stem leaves broadly ovate to obovate; seeds pitted; inflorescence with
usually 3 primary rays; plants annual (or short-lived perennial in E.
commutata).
E. Capsule ca. 3 mm long, without keels; seeds finely and uniformly
pitted on all facets, broadly carunculate. . 3. E. COMMUTATA .
EE. Capsule ca. 2.5 mm long, with 2 longitudinal keels on each lobe;
seeds with 4 vertical rows of large pits on the outer facets and 2
119
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
longitudinal furrows on the inner, minutely carunculate.
. 4. E. PEPLUS.
DD. Stem leaves linear to linear-spatulate or lanceolate; seeds smooth; in¬
florescence with 5 or more rays; plants perennial.
F. Principal cauline leaves 1-3 cm long, 1-3 mm wide, densely
crowded; style plus stigma shorter than the young exserted ovary;
plant with many stems from strong horizontal rhizomes.
. 5. E. C YPA RISSIA S.
FF. Principal cauline leaves 3-7 cm long, mostly 3-10 mm wide, less
numerous; style plus stigma equalling or exceeding the immature
capsule in length; plant with fewer stems from deeper rootstocks.
. . . . 6. E. ESULA.
CC. Leaves finely serrate; glands of involucre elliptic or suborbicular [sect. Tithy-
malus Roeper].
G. Capsules verrucose; seeds lenticular, nearly smooth; floral leaves ±
cordate-clasping; rays of primary inflorescences 3. 7. E. OBTUSATA.
GG. Capsules smooth; seeds ovoid-subglobose, conspicuously reticulate-
rugose; floral leaves tapered to base; rays of primary inflorescences 5.
. 8. E. HELIOSCOPIA .
1 . Euphorbia marginata Pursh
Snow-on-the-mountain Map 14.
Subglabrous to densely villous (espe¬
cially on younger parts) annual HERBS;
stems 3-9 dm tall, unbranched below the
rays of the terminal inflorescence.
LEAVES alternate, estipulate, subsessile,
the blades broadly ovate to elliptic, 3-9
cm long, mucronate; whorl of leaves at
base of umbel (ray leaves) and floral
leaves similar, those pairs near the cyathia
narrower and with broad white margins.
Rays of umbel 3 (rarely 4 or 5), simple or
dichotomously branched; CYATHIA
with 4 (usually) or 5 oblong light to dark
green glands, each with a large white ap¬
pendage wider and longer than the gland.
CAPSULES depressed-globose, ca. 5 mm
in diameter, pubescent. SEEDS ovoid-
globose, ca. 3-4 mm long, the white to tan
coat tuberculate or reticulate-verrucose,
ecarunculate.
Native from Tex. to N.M. and on the
central and southern Great Plains,
escaped from cultivation farther north
and east, in Wisconsin cultivated for or¬
nament and occasionally escaped in the
southern half to dumps, vacant lots, road¬
sides, railroads, abandoned fields, farm
yards, and other waste places. Flowering
27 Jul to 20 Sep; fruiting 31 Aug to 10
Oct.
Contact with the milky sap of E.
marginata produces inflammation and
blistering of the skin in many people.
2. Euphorbia corollata L.
Maps 15, 16; Figs. 1, 8.
Flowering spurge
Glabrous or variously villous perennial
HERBS, 3-10 dm tall, usually un¬
branched below. LEAVES alternate,
estipulate, subsessile, the blades elliptic,
oblong or linear, 2-6 cm long, obtuse to
retuse, the whorl at the base of the umbel
similar but usually smaller, the floral
leaves opposite, smaller and narrower
than the others, some with a small light-
colored margin. INFLORESCENCE um¬
bellate, the primary rays 3-6, usually
dichotomously branched at least twice
and with other branches from the upper
nodes reaching the same level to form a
large corymbiform or paniculate cyme.
120
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 8. Seeds and a cyathium of Wisconsin Euphorbias: A) and C) Euphorbia commutata;
B) E. corollata; D) E. peplus; E) E. obtusata; and F) E. helioscopia. Cyathium from above;
seeds in ventral view (left) and lateral view (right).
CYATHIA with 5 small yellowish-brown
glands, each with a showy bright-white
appendage. CAPSULES 3-3.8 mm long,
glabrous or nearly so. SEEDS white to
gray, ovoid, 2. 1-2.7 mm long, smooth or
with shallow depressions arranged in ir¬
regular longitudinal rows, ecarunculate.
Widespread in the eastern U.S. and
Great Plains on dry to moist, sandy or
loamy soils of open woodlands and clear¬
ings, prairies, and abandoned fields, in
Wisconsin this conspicuous species prev¬
alent in a number of native communities
(Curtis 1959), especially in open, sandy or
gravelly sunny places, in prairies, thin
jack pine or scrub oak woods, barrens
and cedar glades, sandstone ridges, lime¬
stone bluffs, sand flats, blowouts, and
122
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
lake shores, commonly weedy in aban¬
doned fields, roadsides, railroads,
fencerows, and occasionally quarries or
city lots, primarily in the southern two-
thirds of the state. As Fassett (1933) in¬
dicated, the occurrence of the species in
northern Wisconsin presumably results
from the plant’s having spread along
railroads and highways beyond its native
range, which possibly reaches as far north
as St. Croix, Wood, and Outagamie coun¬
ties. The overall distribution of the species
has barely changed since Fassett’s study.
Curiously, the earliest Wisconsin speci¬
men seen is from Racine County and was
not collected until 1892, although E. cor-
ollata was listed in a number of early
reports, beginning with Lapham (1836).
Subsequently, collections became increas¬
ingly common, the species being known
from Lincoln Co. as early as 1893 and
several other northern counties by the
1910’s. It was probably spreading rapidly
northward soon after the turn of the cen¬
tury. Flowering 27 May to 1 (21) Sep;
fruiting 8 Jul to 27 Sep, dispersed as early
as (8) 24 Aug.
Several species and/or varieties have
been segregated from the extremely vari¬
able E. corollata complex. These include:
var. corollata , which is glabrous and has
the cyathia on loosely forked inflores¬
cences, pedicels (at the dichotomy) 7-30mm
long, and appendages 7-10 mm broad;
var. paniculata (Ell.) Boiss., also
glabrous, characterized by more crowded
cyathia on shorter pedicels (0.5-5 mm
long) and relatively small appendages (5-7
mm broad); and var. mollis Millsp.,
distinguished from var. corollata by soft
pubescence on the stem and on the sur¬
faces of the leaves. Delimiting varieties on
such characters as leaf width, peduncle
length, pubescence, and appendage width
in our area is of no value because varia¬
tion on an individual plant can, in many
cases, incorporate the spectrum of vari¬
ability. For example, in the most com¬
monly recognized variety, var. mollis,
there is complete intergradation in Wis¬
consin between plants possessing stems
and leaves with dense, almost woolly
pubescence; those with glabrous stems but
one or both leaf surfaces glabrous to
densely hairy; and others completely
glabrous. Gleason (1952) and Steyermark
(1963) both state that the presence or
absence of pubescence appears to be an
environmental response, the more pubes¬
cent plants being found in drier exposed
situations. Richardson (1968) found no
correlation between pubescent forms and
drier habitats on the Great Plains, and his
studies (unpubl.) did not confirm any
demonstrable trends in Wisconsin for in¬
creased pubescence on drier sites. Fur¬
thermore, glabrous and pubescent forms
can usually be found not only in the im¬
mediate vicinity of one another, but
sometimes also mixed within one popula¬
tion. Where variously pubescent forms
were found in a given colony, they were
the most abundant (almost 60% of the
plants); the remaining 40% were com¬
pletely glabrous. These percentages ap¬
pear to hold fairly true for mixed popula¬
tions across the state.
3 . Euphorbia commutata Engelm.
Map 17, Fig. 8.
Wood spurge, tinted spurge
Delicate glabrous perennial HERBS,
the stems ascending, 2-4 dm tall, branch¬
ing throughout their length. LEAVES
broadly ovate to obovate or oblanceolate,
2- 4.5 cm long, those in the whorl at the
base of the umbel somewhat broader, the
floral leaves and bracts subtending
cyathia opposite, broader yet (slightly
broader than long), broadly triangular-
reniform and sometimes connate or envel¬
oping the stem. UMBEL lax, with only
3- 4 primary rays but these dichotomously
branched; glands of cyathium 4, dark,
lunate, extended into slender horns twice
as long as the breadth of the body, occa-
123
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
sionally deeply toothed. CAPSULES 2.7-
2.9 mm long, smooth. SEEDS 1. 9-2.0
mm long, deeply and uniformly pitted,
dark gray, with a broad thin caruncle.
Infrequent in the eastern U.S. decidu¬
ous forest, extending as far west as Minn,
to Tex. along streams and ponds in moist
woods, also on wooded hillsides or cliffs
on or about calcareous soils, native
though very rare in Wisconsin, where
known only from Big Hill Park, on
the west side of Rock River 3Vi miles
north of Beloit, Rock County. It has been
collected there several times, beginning
with T. J. Hale in 1861. The wooded riv¬
erine terrace where this population still
occurs is on public land and should enjoy
protection from future destruction. Flow¬
ering May and early June; fruiting 30 May
to 6 Jul.
4. Euphorbia peplus L. Map 17, Fig. 8.
Petty spurge
Glabrous annual HERBS; stems erect,
1-3 dm tall, freely branching throughout
their length. LEAVES alternate, estipu-
late, petiolate (petioles up to 8 mm long);
blades ovate to obovate, 1-2.5 cm long,
larger and subsessile in the whorl at the
base of the umbel; floral leaves and bracts
subtending the cyathia opposite, similar
in shape to the cauline leaves (slightly
longer than broad). CYATHIA in a leafy
dichotomously branched umbel; glands of
cyathium 4, lunate, greenish-yellow, ex-
appendiculate. CAPSULES 1. 9-2.1 mm
long, each valve with 2 longitudinal keels.
SEEDS oblong, 1.5-1. 6 mm long, the
dorsal surface with four rows of large
pits, the ventral with two longitudinal fur¬
rows, ash-gray, with a ± inconspicuous
conical caruncle.
Native of Eurasia, now a locally estab¬
lished weed across much of N. Am., in
Wisconsin collected rarely (only twice
since the mid-1930’s) in the southeast
quarter of the state as an inconspicuous
weed of yards, gardens, vacant lots, and
waste or cultivated ground. Flowering 28
Jun to 13 Sep; fruiting 8 Jul to 18 Oct.
5. Euphorbia cyparissias L.
Map 18, Fig. 9.
Cypress spurge, graveyard spurge
Glabrous perennial HERBS from ex¬
tensively creeping rhizomatous root¬
stocks; stems solitary or tufted, erect, 1-4
(7) dm tall, unbranched at the base, often
with numerous sterile branches and sev¬
eral axillary rays above. Cauline LEA VES
alternate to scattered, very numerous,
narrowly oblong to linear, linear-filiform,
or linear-spatulate, 1-3 cm long; inflores¬
cence leaves and bracts subtending the
cyathia opposite, broadly cordate to ovate
and often yellow to red or purple in age.
UMBEL with (6) 9-18 rays, simple or 1-3
times dichotomously branched. Glands of
cyathium 4, lunate, yellow-green, exap-
pendiculate. CAPSULES ca. 3 mm long,
rarely produced, glabrous, rugulose and
with short round tubercles along either
side of the sutures. SEEDS (when present)
oblong-ovoid, 1.5-2 mm long, brownish-
gray to silvery-white, never mottled,
smooth, with a papilliform caruncle.
Native of Eurasia, widely grown as a
ground cover and well established as an
escape in the northern states and Canada
from Me. to Minn, and Colo., south to
Va. and Mo., occasionally adventive in
nw. U.S., common throughout most of
Wisconsin along roadsides, railroads,
banks, fields, clearings, and other
neglected areas, often spreading from
unkempt lawns, old homesites, and ceme¬
teries. If not controlled, cypress spurge
can become a serious weed, forming per¬
sistent colonies from extensively creeping
and forking rhizomes. Our earliest collec¬
tions are from 1881 and 1894 in Racine
and Portage counties, respectively. Flow¬
ering from April through August (inflo¬
rescence: 20 Apr to 14 Jun; lateral shoots:
22 Jun to 28 Aug); fruiting, when it oc¬
curs, appears to be from June through
124
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
EUPHORBIA
Fig. 9. Habit drawings and seeds (ventral and lateral views) of Wisconsin Euphorbias: A)
Euphorbia cyparissias; B) E. esula.
August or September. Fruits are rarely
produced, and specimens with viable
seeds are even fewer (in examined cap¬
sules, two of the three developing
chambers were aborted).
This species is extremely variable but
easily recognized, and it is unlikely to be
confused with any other except perhaps
the sterile, narrow-leaved form of Eu¬
phorbia esula. Both species produce
125
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
numerous erect fertile and sterile stems,
often forming large colonies. The stems
are tufted from a crown and scattered
from buds on the rhizomes; but in E.
esula they are taller and less crowded, and
the rootstocks are deeper and more
slender. In E. cyparissias the very
numerous linear leaves are mostly less
than 3 cm long and 2.5 mm wide. They
are especially dense on the axillary
branches, which eventually overtop the
inflorescence and give the plant a bushy
appearance. E. esula has relatively fewer,
generally linear-oblanceolate leaves usual¬
ly more than 3 cm long and 3 mm wide,
with the axillary non-flowering branches
not overtopping the original inflores¬
cence.
6. Euphorbia esula L. Map 19, Fig. 9.
Leafy spurge, wolf’s-milk
E. poderae Croiz. of recent annota¬
tions
Glabrous perennial HERBS from
horizontal rhizomes and deep roots.
Stems solitary or clustered, erect, 4-9 dm
tall, unbranched or sparsely branched
near the base, these branches usually
sterile; branches below the umbel (axillary
rays) usually present and fertile, some¬
times numerous, particularly after dam¬
age to main shoot. LEAVES alternate,
broadly linear to linear-lanceolate or
-oblanceolate or broader in the whorl
subtending the umbel, 3-6.5 cm long;
floral leaves and bracts subtending the
cyathia opposite, shorter and wider than
the cauline, broadly cordate. INFLORES¬
CENCE umbelliform, (5-) 7- to 1 2-ray ed,
each ray dichotomously branched 1-3
times. Glands of the cyathium 4 (5),
lunate, greenish-brown, exappendiculate.
CAPSULES 2.5-3 mm long, exserted as
much as 1 cm beyond the involucre, some¬
what granular-roughened on the keels.
SEEDS oblong-ellipsoid, 2-2.3 mm long;
coat smooth , orangish-brown or silver-
gray to white, typically mottled, with a
dark vertical line (raphe) extending along
one side and a conspicuous flattened
caruncle.
An aggressive and noxious weed, native
of Eurasia, now widely established in N.
Am. from Que. and N. Engl, to B.C.,
south to Md. and Colo., in Wisconsin a
fairly recent adventive now widely
126
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
naturalized and in many areas a trouble¬
some weed in fields, roadsides, railroads,
and other disturbed ground, and an active
invader of open oak woods and undis¬
turbed prairie remnants where its exter¬
mination presents a hard-to-solve prob¬
lem. It was first collected in 1916 in
Oconto County by Goessl {s.n., WIS).
According to Fassett (1933), it was first
seen at Madison in 1929, with the earliest
collections from 1925 (Dane and Ozaukee
cos.), 1928 (Oconto Co.), and 1930
(Adams Co.). A newspaper article from
the Delavan Republican of July 1, 1937,
noted the occurrence of E. esula in
Wisconsin “in small patches” and stated
that it was spreading rather rapidly. The
roots are deep, strong, and spread vigor¬
ously (they have been traced to a depth of
15 ft. [Bakke, 1936]), making leafy spurge
difficult to eradicate. Patches spread
vegetatively 1 to 3 ft. per year and pro¬
duce more than 200 shoots per m2 in light
soils and up to 1,000 shoots per m2 in
heavy soils (see Selleck, 1959). Flowering
primarily 11 May to 2 Jul, with some
flowering as late as 15 Oct; fruiting 13 Jun
through October, with dispersed fruit as
early as 4 Sep.
Over the past 70 years authors have
held widely different opinions concerning
the correct identity of the leafy spurges.
Croizat (1945) claimed that the North
American populations included in the
“esula complex” comprise four taxa, the
great majority of plants being hybrids be¬
tween E. esula and E. virgata Waldst. &
Kit. ( E . Xintercedens Podp. [1922] [non
E. Xintercedens Pax (1905)], E.
Xpodperae Croiz. [1947], as well as
earlier names). Both E. virgata and E.
Xpodperae are closely related to, if not
conspecific with, E. esula , and modern
students of the American and European
floras prefer for now to treat the entire
assemblage as one species, E. esula L.
(1753). However, natural hybrids between
E. esula (including E. virgata) and E.
cyparissias have been reported (as E.
Xpseudo-esula Schur) from Ontario
(Moore & Frankton, 1969), and in the
treatment of the genus Euphorbia for the
Great Plains (McGregor, 1986), two dis¬
tinct entities are given taxonomic rec¬
ognition, E. esula and a presumed hybrid
between E. esula and E. virgata under the
epithet E. Xpseudovirgata (Schur) Soo.
This hybrid consistently produces cauline
leaves that are only 3-5 mm wide, widest
at or below the middle, and tapering to¬
ward the apex, whereas the true E. esula
has the main stem leaves 3-10 mm wide,
widest above the middle, and rounded at
the apex. No segregation of Wisconsin
material has been attempted on these bases .
See notes under E. cyparissias (no. 5).
7. Euphorbia obtusata Pursh
Blunt-leaved spurge Map 20, Fig. 8.
Glabrous annual HERBS; stems erect,
3-7 dm tall, unbranched for most of their
length. LEAVES alternate, estipulate,
sessile, the blades oblanceolate to oblong-
oblanceolate or slightly pandurate, serru¬
late, the upper ones subcordate and some¬
what clasping at the base, those subtend¬
ing the umbel similar but broader, the
floral leaves and bracts subtending the
cyathia broadly ovate. Primary rays of
UMBEL 3 (rarely 5), sometimes branch¬
ing more than once; cyathium with 4
or 5 exappendiculate red or reddish-
or orangish-brown transversely elliptic
glands. CAPSULES 2. 7-3. 2 mm long,
verrucose. SEEDS lenticular , 2-2.1 mm
long, dark grayish-brown, with a smooth
or obscurely reticulate surface and a
papilliform caruncle.
Occasional in the southeastern U.S.
from S.C. to e. Tex., north to Pa., se.
Mich, (where probably adventive), and
la., in more or less damp rich woods
(often on wooded banks of rivers and
ponds), alluvial fields, and roadsides, the
only Wisconsin collection from “Nelson
Rd Sugar River bottom” in Rock County
127
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
C Fell 57-404 , 10 Jun 1957 [fl], WIS). If
assumed to be native rather than adven-
tive from farther south, it is at the north¬
ern edge of the range of the species. It has
been reported from along the Pecatonica
and Sugar rivers in adjacent Winnebago
County, Illinois (Fell, 1955). Flowering
May and June; fruiting primarily in July.
8. Euphorbia helioscopia L.
Map 20, Fig. 8.
Wart weed, sun spurge
Glabrous annual HERBS, the single
main stem ascending, 2-5 dm tall, scarcely
branched. LEAVES alternate, sessile,
soon falling, 1.5-4 cm long, scale-like
below, spatulate to oblong-obovate
higher on the stem and obovate to broadly
elliptic in the whorl below the umbel;
floral leaves and bracts subtending tb
cyathia similar to those in the whorl,
shorter but broader and often yellowish;
all leaves finely serrate , especially at the
very rounded apex. Primary UMBEL usu¬
ally with 5 short rays , each forked into 3
divisions or becoming repeatedly branched
on plants from rich-soil sites; cyathia with
4 suborbicular or elliptic, brownish- or
yellowish-green exappendiculate glands.
CAPSULES 2.6-3. 1 mm long, smooth.
SEEDS ovoid-subglobose, 2-2.2 mm
long, reticulate-rugose, brown; caruncle
conspicuous.
A native of Europe, widely naturalized
from e. Can. to Man., south to N.Y. and
Mich., and locally adventive farther south
to Md. and Ill., in Wisconsin once spar¬
ingly established as an escape or adventive
at the Dells of the Wisconsin River, coun¬
ty not specified (Monroe 9709, 5 Aug
1892 [fr], MIL); Milwaukee (Hasse 744,
Jul 1884 [fl], MIL); and Sheboygan
(Goessl s.n., Jul 1912 [fr], WIS; Davis
s.n., 25 Aug 1926 [fr], WIS), now occa¬
sionally planted as an ornamental and
sometimes escaped to adjacent fields and
waste areas or persisting in recently aban¬
doned gardens. No habitat information is
associated with Wisconsin specimens ex¬
cept for the only recent one: Manitowoc
Co.: Cleveland, green bean field (trans¬
mitted by Doll s.n., ± 26 Aug 1983 [fr],
WIS).
Acknowledgments
Figure 1 and cyathia in Figures 4 and 5
are from A Student's Atlas of Flowering
Plants: Some Dicotyledons of Eastern
North America, by Carroll E. Wood, Jr.,
and are copyrighted (© 1974) by Harvard
University. They are reproduced by per¬
mission of Harper & Row, Publishers,
Inc. Research was supported in part by
UW Institutional Research Grant #0380-
9-75 to J.W.R. The manuscript was read
by Dr. Hugh H. litis, to whom we extend
our thanks.
Literature Cited
Bakke, A. L. 1936. Leafy spurge, Euphorbia
esula L. Iowa Agr. Expt. Sta. Res. Bull.
198:209-245.
Boissier, E. 1862. Subordo I. Euphorbieae, in
DC. Prodr. 15(2):3-188.
Burch, D. 1966a. The application of the Lin-
naean names of some New World species of
Euphorbia subgenus Chamaesyce. Rhodora
68:155-166.
- 1966b. Two new species of Chamae¬
syce (Euphorbiaceae). New combinations,
and a key to the Caribbean members of the
genus. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 53:90-99.
Cain, S. A. 1944. Foundations of Plant Geog¬
raphy. Harper & Bros., N.Y. 556 pp.
Croizat, L. 1936. On the classification of
Euphorbia. I. How important is the
cyathium? Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 63:525-
531.
_ 1945. “Euphorbia esula ” in North
America. Am. Midi. Nat. 33:231-243.
_ . 1962. Typification of Euphorbia
macula ta L. A restatement and a conclu¬
sion. Webbia 17:187-205.
Curtis, J. T. 1959. The Vegetation of Wiscon¬
sin. Univ. of Wisconsin Press, Madison.
657 pp.
Dressier, R. L. 1961. A synopsis of Poinsettia
(Euphorbiaceae). Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard.
48:329-341.
128
Flora of Wisconsin — Spurge Family
Ehrenfeld, J. 1976. Reproductive biology of
three species of Euphorbia subgenus
Chamaesyce (Euphorbiaceae). Amer. J.
Bot. 63:406-413.
Fassett, N. C. 1933. Preliminary reports on
the flora of Wisconsin. No. XXI. Gera-
niales. Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci.
28:171-186.
Fell, E. W. 1955. Flora of Winnebago
County, Illinois. The Nature Conservancy,
Washington, D.C. 207 pp.
Fernald, M. L. 1950. Gray’s Manual of
Botany. Ed. 8. Am. Book Co., N.Y. 1632
pp.
Fosberg, F. R. 1953. Typification of Euphor¬
bia macula ta L. Rhodora 55:241-242.
Gleason, H. A. 1952. The New Britton and
Brown Illustrated Flora of the Northeastern
United States and Adjacent Canada. Vol. 2.
The New York Botanical Garden, N.Y. 655
pp.
_ and A. Cronquist. 1963. Manual of
Vascular Plants of Northeastern United
States and Adjacent Canada. Van No¬
strand, Princeton, N.J. 810 pp.
Guire, K. E. and E. G. Voss. 1963. Distribu¬
tions of distinctive shoreline plants in the
Great Lakes region. Mich. Bot. 2:99-114.
Lapham, I. A. 1836. A Catalogue of Plants
and Shells Found in the Vicinity of Mil¬
waukee on the West Side of Lake Michigan.
Advertiser Office, Milwaukee. 12 pp.
McGregor, R. L. 1986. Euphorbiaceae, in
Great Plains Flora Association, Flora of the
Great Plains. Univ. Press Kansas, Law¬
rence. 1392 pp.
McLaughlin, W. T. 1932. Atlantic Coastal
Plain plants in the sand barrens of north¬
western Wisconsin. Ecological Monogr.
2:335-383.
Miller, L. W. 1964. A Taxonomic Study of the
Species of Acalypha in the United States.
Ph.D. Dissertation, Purdue Univ.
Moore, R. J. and C. Frankton. 1969. Euphor¬
bia X pseudo-esula (E. cyparissias X E.
esula) in Canada. Can. Field-Nat. 83:243-
246.
Norton, J. B. S. 1900. A revision of the
American species of Euphorbia of the sec¬
tion Tithymalus occurring north of Mexico.
Ann. Rep. Missouri Bot. Gard. 11:85-144.
Patman, J. P. and H. H. litis. 1961. Prelimi¬
nary reports on the flora of Wisconsin. No.
44 Cruciferae — mustard family. Trans.
Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 50:17-72.
Pax, F. and K. Hoffmann. 1910-1924.
Euphorbiaceae, in Engler, Pflanzenreich
IV. 147— [I] , II-VII, IX-XVII [Incomplete.]
_ and _ 1931. Euphorbiaceae, in
Engler and Prantl, Pflanzenfam. Ed. 2. 19c:
11-233.
Peattie, D. C. 1922. The Atlantic Coastal
Plain element in the flora of the Great
Lakes. Rhodora 24:57-70, 80-88.
Read, R. H. 1976. Endangered and threatened
vascular plants in Wisconsin. Wis. Dep.
Nat. Res. Tech. Bull. 92. 58 pp.
Richardson, J. W. 1968. The genus Euphorbia
of the high plains and prairie plains of Kan¬
sas, Nebraska, South and North Dakota.
Univ. Kansas Sci. Bull. 48:45-112.
Rodman, J. E. 1974. Systematics and evolu¬
tion of the genus Cakile (Cruciferae).
Contr. Gray Herb. 205:3-146.
Rydberg, P. A. 1932. Flora of the Prairies and
Plains of Central North America. The New
York Botanical Garden. 970 pp.
Selleck, G. W. 1959. The Autecology of Eu¬
phorbia esula L. Ph.D. Dissertation, Univ.
of Wisconsin-Madison.
Small, J. K. 1933. Manual of the Southeastern
Flora. N.Y. 1554 pp.
Steyermark, J. A. 1963. Flora of Missouri.
Iowa State Univ. Press, Ames. 1725 pp.
Svenson, H. K. 1927. Effects of post-Pleisto-
cene marine submergence in eastern North
America. Rhodora 29:41-48, 57-72, 87-93,
105-114.
Voss, E. G. 1985. Michigan Flora. Part II
Dicots (Saururaceae-Cornaceae). Cran-
brook Inst. Sci. Bull. 59 and Univ.
Michigan Herbarium. 724 pp.
Walters, S. M. and T. G. Tutin. 1968.
Euphorbiaceae, in Tutin et al. Flora
Europaea. Vol. 2. Cambridge Univ. Press,
Cambridge, Great Britain. 454 pp.
Webster, G. L. 1967. The genera of Euphor¬
biaceae in the southeastern United States.
Jour. Arnold Arb. 48:303-430.
Wheeler, L. C. 1941. Euphorbia subgenus
Chamaesyce in Canada and the United
States exclusive of southern Florida.
Rhodora 43:97-154.
129
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
The Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters was chartered by the State Legislature on
March 16, 1870, as an incorporated society serving the people of Wisconsin by encouraging
investigation and dissemination of knowledge of the sciences, arts, and letters.
Academy Officers
Jerry Apps, President
John F. Rusch, Vice President-Sciences
Michael Skindrud, Vice President-Arts
Richard Boudreau, Vice President-Letters
LeRoy R. Lee, Executive Director
MEMBERSHIP INFORMATION
Regular (individual or family), $25 annual dues
Associate (student membership), $10 annual dues
Life, $300 in one lifetime payment*
Patron, $500 or more
* Academy members who have paid dues for ten years are eligible to become life members at age
70 upon application and need pay no more dues.
Your membership will encourage research, discussion, and publication in the sciences, arts, and
letters of Wisconsin. Please send dues payment along with name and address to:
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53705
Academy members receive the annual Transactions, quarterly Wisconsin Review and occa¬
sional monographs of special reports.
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts & Letters —
Steenbock Center 1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53705
Telephone 608263-1692
MW
of-
;
My fA
the Wisconsin
Academy of
Sciences,
Arts
' „aV!
' 1 i . ,<> j/ V/-
y ' \ \; . •. v
Letters
&
mi
7 J ( i/; Vi" A ((• " -
■
■ ~ j v ; K W V , r , . V v
Y vK :•') - \f • (V fvS -J (' V
Volume 76
1988
: { ^
%Jk' ^-V ^ V!I^ V'N 7 A
'
4'/ H't,
iM
■i/mi
i. VfX V v>: ■ ;KN> ;‘-y
; -r- .•> i/ , ■. -A v " i\ . ' ' vv
.
■ ' ■■ ■ \ V' S% '' , X ■ ' . VX"\ V '{. ' ./
' .) f. t-\ - i= . .>
■J\^\ G '■■• hs-y-L "7 ' A ^'1 -x- I • \.
' / ;/ ,
r ■bx' /'H . k:
< A- ' Av ~'T.
<7%y/yi "
APR - "ic
■ 1 1 -• •' > / fj 7- .
i
If.:; (
r • f J ■
Transactions
CarlN. Haywood, Editor
136 Schofield Hall
University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire
Eau Claire, Wisconsin 54701
■ ;/ii
Production Editor
Patricia Ajllen Duyfhuizen
Assistant Editors/Student Interns
Patricia Wick Jilloyn Rumpel
Laural Greenwood Stephanie Bystrom
Maureen Kelly Patti Schoenberg
Anne Moulton Terri Rozmarynowski
Transactions welcomes articles that explore features of the State of Wisconsin and its people.
Articles written by Wisconsin authors on topics other than Wisconsin sciences, arts, and letters
are also occasionally published.
Manuscripts, queries, and other correspondence should be addressed to the editor.
Transactions is published annually by the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters,
1922 University Avenue, Madison, Wisconsin 53705-4099.
.©1988
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Manufactured in the United States of America
All rights reserved
TRANSACTIONS
of the Wisconsin Academy
of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Volume 76 • 1988
Contents
Vegetation of Wisconsin’s Benchmark Lakes 1
Stanley Nichols
In 1977 The Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources designated a
group of state lakes as “benchmarks.” This paper describes the macrophyte
vegetation found in the fourteen lakes and should provide the point against
which to measure changes.
“Red Purge”: The 1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers 17
Julian L. Stock ley
In 1946-1947 Wisconsin experienced one of the bitterest strikes in its
history. Amidst charges of “union busting” and “communism” the oppos¬
ing sides created great emotions still evident in the state. Ms. Stockley’s
new interpretation of the event is sure to reopen an old debate.
Fishes of the Upper Trout River, Vilas County, Wisconsin 33
John Lyons
The Trout River is a small warm-water river in north-central Wisconsin,
and although it has 36 species of fish (62% of the total for Vilas County),
almost nothing has been published about the fishes it contains. John Lyons
presents the results of the first detailed survey of a river that has high
potential for both angling and recreation.
Lightning and the Enlightenment: 43
An Essay on Lightning by G. C. Lichtenberg
Ralph Buechler
An eighteenth-century German essay on electricity and lightning ultimately
proved to be of great value to the general reading public of the time. Pro¬
fessor Buechler’s examination of this essay is both timely and profound.
Land-Use and Vegetational Change 47
on the Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve,
Sauk County, Wisconsin
Konrad Liege l
This study records land use and vegetational changes on the Aldo Leopold
Memorial Reserve. Vegetation maps for different eras were prepared by us¬
ing surveyor’s notes, traveller’s accounts, soils information, aerial photo¬
graphs, agricultural records, present vegetation, and on-site observations.
iii
69
Collections of young-of-the-year Blue Suckers
(Cycleptus elongatus) in Navigation Pool 9 of the
Mississippi River
Michael C. Mclnerny and John Held
The blue sucker is rare in Wisconsin and is classified by the state as a
threatened species. Since information of the life history of this fish is
limited, readers will be interested in this report of collections of young-of-
the-year blue suckers from Navigation Pool 9 of the Mississippi River.
Photographs 72
David Ford Hansen
Technical skill and the ability to capture universal human emotion are
readily seen in the work of one of Wisconsin’s outstanding photographers.
Aging Effects and Older Adult Learners: 81
Implications of an Instructional Program in Music
David Myers
What are the effects of aging on the learning process? David Myers’
research into the relationship between age and music-learning achievement
challenges some accepted conclusions. His evidence suggests that increasing
age may not be a disadvantage for older adult participants in performance-
based music programs.
Poetry 91
Some of Wisconsin’s best known and some of our most promising new
poets are represented in the poetry section.
Holocene Lake Fluctuations in Pine Lake, Wisconsin 107
Rodney A. Gont, Lan-ying Lin, and Lloyd E. Ohl
Based on an approximate 300-year subsampling interval, the water-level
fluctuation of Pine lake (one of the “benchmark” lakes) has been mea¬
sured. The conclusions are of interest to readers studying climactic change
and water fluctuations during the past 10,000 years.
The “New Geology” and its Association 117
with Possible Oil and Gas Accumulations in Wisconsin
Albert B. Dickas
Professor Dickas introduces us to the recently developed theories of
Precambrian life and rift tectonics as these have developed into what is
known as “new geology.” This new concept has led to heightened interest
in Wisconsin as a source of oil and gas.
IV
127
Use of Discriminant Analysis to Classify
Site Units Based on Soil Properties and Ground Vegetation
James R . Trobaugh and James E. Johnson
Classification of forest land into distinct units is an important area of
research in the United States. In this paper Professors Trobaugh and
Johnson determine 1) the variation among soil properties and ground
vegetation within site units and 2) the importance of these variables in
discriminating among three common site classification units in northeastern
Wisconsin.
Addendum
In the 1987 Volume of Transactions the publication of the article entitled
“The Flora of Wisconsin, Preliminary Report No. 69. Euphorbiaceae — The
Spurge Family’’ by James W. Richardson, Derek Burch, and Theodore S.
Cochrane was aided by the Norman C. Fassett Memorial Fund.
v
From the Editor
In Volume 75 (1987) of Transactions , I indicated my intention that the journal will
continue to reflect the diverse interests and activities of the members of the Wiscon¬
sin Academy as well as serve as a place where original work by Wisconsin writers or
about Wisconsin will be published. Articles for Volume 76 (1988) were selected with
this intent, and it is hoped that the readers will enjoy both the diversity and quality.
Each article has undergone careful review by outside readers as well as by a number
of staff members. Rigorous professional review and editing are part of the process
articles undergo prior to being presented to the readers of Transactions. This pro¬
cedure has resulted in what I think is an outstanding issue.
Two aspects of this volume are new. Readers will remember the poem presented in
the 1987 edition; in the current issue there are additional poems that represent the
high quality of the work of Wisconsin poets. In addition to the poetry, there is a
series of photographs by David Ford Hansen, one of Wisconsin’s most talented pho¬
tographers. One will quickly recognize the technical skill and the universal human
emotion captured in both the poetry and the photographs. Though no definitive deci¬
sion has been made, it is my hope that Transactions will continue to include a poetry
section and photographs or a photographic essay in future volumes. Anyone wishing
to submit material for the latter should contact the editor.
Two articles in this volume will be of particular interest to many readers. In 1977
The Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources (DNR) designated a group of lakes
as “benchmarks.” The purpose of this was to collect data in order to monitor long¬
term limnological conditions and changes in lakes minimally affected by human ac¬
tivities. The result should provide benchmarks against which to measure changes.
Transactions is pleased to publish Professor Nichols’ study of “Vegetation of
Wisconsin’s Benchmark Lakes” in which he describes the macrophyte vegetation
found in the fourteen lakes. A second paper that will draw immediate note presents a
new interpretation of the bitter strike at the Allis-Chalmers plant in West Allis,
Wisconsin, in 1946-1947. Julian Stockley has reexamined the data and argues for a
new interpretation of an event that still raises great emotions in many Wisconsin
circles.
We at Transactions are pleased to present this volume of the journal to our
readers. Any comment, suggestion, or submission should be addressed to the Editor.
Carl N. Haywood
VI
Vegetation of Wisconsin’s Benchmark Lakes
Stanley A. Nichols
Abstract . This paper describes the macrophyte vegetation found in 14 benchmark
Wisconsin lakes. This information forms a base to study long-term changes in the plant
community when compared to future sampling efforts. A variety of limnological
parameters were compared to vegetational characteristics of the benchmark lakes. Cor¬
relations between pH, alkalinity, specific conductance, free C02, substrate type, and
acres less than 6 m and the community attributes of maximum depth of plant growth,
open area in the littoral zone, diversity, and littoral zone development were tested singly
and with multiple regression analysis. Not surprisingly no significant linear correlations
were found. Different factors are probably responsible for determining each plant com¬
munity; the dominant species in these communities often have unique adaptations to
cope with environmental limitations.
In 1977 The Wisconsin Department of
Natural Resources (DNR) selected a
group of lakes as benchmark lakes. The
objective of the benchmark lakes program
is to monitor basic limnological condi¬
tions and long-term limnological changes
in lakes that are minimally affected by
human activities. Changes occurring in
these lakes are primarily due to natural
causes, and it is assumed that changes will
be much slower than in lakes that are in¬
fluenced by human activities.
Besides their undisturbed nature, pri¬
mary selection criteria included some
assurance that neither the lake nor the
associated watershed undergo significant
manipulation in the future. The lakes
were geographically distributed and
screened for limnological characteristics
so that a spectrum of lake types were
represented (Fig. 1). These lakes were
selected by DNR personnel; no effort was
made to select the lakes randomly. Where
Stanley A. Nichols is a Professor of Environmental
Sciences, University of Wisconsin-Extension. He is a
biologist at the Wisconsin Geological and Natural
History Survey, and he is associated with the En¬
vironmental Resources Center and the Department
of Liberal Studies at UW-Madison. Past articles in
Transactions deal with aquatic plant resources in
Wisconsin Waters.
human influence on lakes is historically
significant, such as in southeastern Wis¬
consin, efforts were made to select the
best available lakes to represent the lake
types of the region.
Macrophyte sampling occurred in the
lakes between 1978 and 1981. This paper
reports aquatic vegetation found in the
lakes during the first sampling effort.
This information forms a base to study
long-term community changes.
A variety of authors (Pearsall 1920;
Fig. 1. Location of benchmark lakes.
1
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Spence 1972; Seddon 1972; Moyle 1945;
Lind 1976; Olsen 1950; Swindale and Cur¬
tis 1957; Barko et al. 1986) found that
pH, alkalinity, free C02, conductivity,
and sediment type influenced the char¬
acter of aquatic plant communities. These
limnological parameters were compared
to vegetational characteristics of the
benchmark lakes. The objective was to
better define the relationship between the
aquatic environment and the aquatic
vegetation, especially in light of recent in¬
formation regarding the relationship of
carbon to the form, function, and physi¬
ology of aquatic plants (Adams 1985).
Methods and Analysis
Depending on the importance of mac¬
rophytes in the lake, the macrophyte com¬
munity was sampled annually for from
one to four years. Sampling was con¬
ducted by DNR field staff of the district
in which the lake occurred. This sampling
generally took place during late July or
August. The macrophyte sampling tech¬
nique used was that of lessen and Lound
(1962). To assure geographic coverage of
the lake, sampling points were selected by
overlaying a grid on a lake map. Grid size
and the number of sampling points per
lake varied depending on the size of the
lake.
At every sampling point, water depth
was measured and the substrate was cate¬
gorized as being hard (sand or gravel) or
soft (silt, muck, or flocculent). All plant
species within a 2-m diameter circle
around the sample point were recorded,
and a qualitative density rating was
assigned to each species on the basis of the
criterion established by Jessen and Lound
(1962). Species unknown by the field staff
were collected and sent to the Wisconsin
Geological and Natural History Survey
for identification or verification. They
were then sent to the University of Wis¬
consin Herbarium as voucher specimens.
From this data a variety of floral and
vegetational characteristics of the lakes
was established (Table 1). The maximum
depth of plant growth is the depth of the
deepest sampling point where vegetation
was found during all sampling periods.
The open area in the littoral zone was
calculated as the frequency of occurrence
of sampling points with no vegetation that
were found in water depths equal to or
more shallow than the maximum depth of
plant growth.
A species was included in the flora of a
lake and thus contributed to the total taxa
found in the lake if it occurred in the lake
during any sampling period. The frequen¬
cy of occurrence of a species was calcu¬
lated as the number of occurrences of a
species divided by the total number of
sampling points with vegetation. Likewise
average density was calculated as the sum
of the density ratings for the species di¬
vided by the total number of sampling
points with vegetation. The frequencies
were relativized and an importance value
(IV) was calculated by multiplying the
relative frequency by the average density.
The importance value of a species is re¬
ported if it was at least 5 in at least one
lake.
The sum of the IV of a lake could vary
from zero in a lake with no plants to 500
in a lake where 100% of the plants have
an average density of 5. Littoral zone
development was calculated by multiply¬
ing the sum of the IV by one minus the
percentage of open area in the littoral
zone (i.e., sum of IV [1 - percent of open
area in littoral zone]). Again, this value
could vary from 0 to 500. It gives a
general indication of the robustness and
distribution of the macrophyte commu¬
nity.
Diversity was calculated using the for¬
mula one minus the sum of the relative
frequencies squared of the species in a
lake [i.e., 1-sum of (relative frequen¬
cies)2]. This is a modification of Simp¬
son’s (1949) diversity index.
2
Vegetation of Wisconsin ys Benchmark Lakes
The mean dissimilarity per year was
calculated using the dissimilarity index
1 - 2w/a + b (Bray and Curtis 1957) on
species IV for each sampling period.
These dissimilarities were then averaged
for all sampling periods for each lake.
The values for alkalinity, pH, specific
conductance, secchi disk reading, and
area less than 6 m deep were obtained
from DNR files. Free C02 was calculated
using the nomogram technique found in
Standard Methods (AHPA 1971) and as¬
suming a standard temperature of 20° C
and total dissolved solids equal to 0.65
times the specific conductance. The
percentage of hard bottom was the fre¬
quency of sampling points with vegetation
having a sand or gravel substrate. Physi¬
cal and community characteristics of the
lakes are presented in Table 1. Two multi¬
variate techniques were used to display
the similarities and differences of lakes
based on physical factors: a Bray and
Curtis (1957) ordination using a dissimi¬
larity index of 1 - 2w/a + b and a cluster
analysis using the number cruncher statis¬
tical system (Hintze 1986). The physical
factors used were pH, alkalinity, conduc¬
tivity, free C02, and percent hard bottom.
The lakes in Tables 1-3 (see end of arti¬
cle) are organized by the group they
formed in the above ordination. Group I
lakes are listed at the top or left side of a
table. These lakes have low alkalinity, low
pH, and low specific conductance. Group
V lakes are on the right side or bottom of
the tables. They are lakes with high alka¬
linity, high pH, and high specific conduc¬
tance.
Results
Flora
Table 2 displays plant species identified
for the lakes. In total 95 taxa were iden¬
tified. The species richness varied from 10
species in Ennis Lake to 35 species in
Anodanta and Allequash Lakes. Average
species richness is 20 species per lake.
By examining the columns of Table 2,
one can observe in which group or groups
of lakes a species was found. Allequash
and Anodanta were the two most species-
rich lakes. Each lake contained 35 species.
Both lakes are near neutral pH, have a
moderate alkalinity and light penetration,
and have a predominantly soft bottom. In
addition, Allequash Lake has a large area
less than 6 m deep. However, no signifi¬
cant linear correlation was found between
species richness and specific conductance,
pH, alkalinity, free C02, secchi disk read¬
ing, percent of quads with a hard bottom,
or bottom area less than 6 m deep for the
benchmark lakes.
Chara spp., Dulichium arundinaceum,
Eleocharis spp., Eiodea canadensis, Najas
flexilis, Nuphar variegatum, Potamoge-
ton amplifolius and Vallisneria americana
were the taxa most frequently found. All
the above mentioned species were found
in 50% or more of the lakes (Table 2). All
the submerged species in this group are
dominant members of the plant com¬
munity in one or more lakes (Table 3).
Myriophyllum spicatum and Potamo-
geton crispus, two foreign invasive
species, were collected in the benchmark
lakes. M. spicatum was found in Town
Line and Devils Lakes. The author also
collected M. spicatum from Pine Lake in
Waukesha County during the summers of
1984 and 1985. Ottawa Lake was the sole
location for P. crispus. All these lakes, ex¬
cept Town Line, are in southern Wiscon¬
sin where lake use is much more intense.
Community attributes and correlation
with environmental factors
Correlations between alkalinity, pH,
specific conductance, free C02, percent
hard bottom, and acres less than 6 m deep
and the community attributes of maxi¬
mum depth of growth, open area in the
littoral zone, diversity, and littoral zone
development were tested singly and with
multiple regression analysis. No signifi-
3
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
cant linear correlations were found. It is
especially surprising that there was no
correlation between secchi disk reading
and maximum depth of growth.
Species diversity between lakes is dif¬
ficult to compare. The vegetation param¬
eters for calculating diversity were not
based on equal sampling areas. Thus,
larger lakes could have a higher diversity
because of the larger area sampled. This
may be the case for Allequash Lake.
However, Prong, Perch, Town Line, and
Anodanta Lakes have a high diversity but
a small littoral zone.
The above calculations only indicate
that there was no significant linear cor¬
relation found between the environmental
and vegetational parameters studied. The
environmental influence on the vegetation
and community attributes based on ordi¬
nation analysis is presented later in the
paper.
Community change
For all lakes except Allequash, Clear,
and perhaps Moon, Ennis, and Devils, the
aquatic plant communities are very stable.
Cox (1969) indicates that replicate
samples of the same community usually
show a coefficient of similarity of 0.85
(i.e., a dissimilarity of 0.15). All lakes ex¬
cept those mentioned above have dissimi¬
larity values near 0.15. Therefore, the
plant communities changed very little dur¬
ing the years they were studied.
The difference in Clear Lake from
August 1979 to August 1980 is due to a
dramatic increase in Isoetes sp. and Na-
jas flexilis. They increased in importance
from 6.8 to 26.1 and 0.1 to 11.2, respec¬
tively. Both species nearly doubled the
frequency of quadrats in which they were
found and their average density rating.
Allequash Lake experienced a decrease
in the importance of Ceratophyllum
demersum and Elodea canadensis be¬
tween August 1979 and August 1980.
They decreased in importance from 50.5
to 17.7 and 13.6 to 4.8 respectively. The
decrease was due primarily to a drop in
density of growth rather than in a change
in frequency.
In Moon Lake there was a decrease in
growth and distribution of Char a sp. be¬
tween late July 1979 and early August
1981. This was accompanied by an in¬
crease in growth and distribution of
Vallisneria americana. The importance
value of Chara sp. dropped from 34.4 to
12 and that of V. americana increased
from 43 to 1 10.7 during this time period.
In Devils Lake there was a trend of
gradually decreasing Myriophyllum
spicatum importance from August 1978
to August 1981. Importance decreased
from 84 to 32 during this time period. A
dramatic increase in Elodea canadensis
from 19 in August 1980 to 105 in August
1981 also occurred. This trend has
changed more recently. Lillie (1986)
found Potamogeton robbinsii to be the
most important species in Devils Lake,
and M. spicatum became more important
at the expense of E. canadensis.
Chara sp., Potamogeton praelongus
and Najas flexilis shifted in importance in
Ennis Lake between August 1978 and Au¬
gust 1981, but no trend was apparent.
Lake communities
Table 3 displays the frequency, relative
frequency, average density, and impor¬
tance value of the common species in each
lake. A species was retained if it had an
importance value of 5 or more in any lake
within its group.
By imposing an importance value cri¬
terion of 5 on the species, the number of
taxa was reduced from 95 to 28. In other
words, only about 29% of the taxa re¬
corded for the lakes were very important
in one or more lakes.
Vegetational relationships to ordination
and clustering of physical characters
The lakes with similar environmental
4
Vegetation of Wisconsin ’s Benchmark Lakes
0.7-1
0.6-
0.5
0.4-1
0.3
0.2-
0.1 -
^ Pine (w) ^
Ottawa ^ * Moon
Ennis /
/
<• Anodanta
Bearpaw f
Devils /
/
/
/
• Allequash
/
/
/
I
/£ \ \ Prong
/ /
/# Clear
//
V#/ Frank
U
(•) Pine (c)
Town Line rc^
Fig. 2. Ordination of benchmark lakes based on environmental attributes.
attributes were grouped using ordination
and clustering techniques. The ordination
of lakes is displayed in Figure 2. The lake
groups displayed in Figure 2 were deter¬
mined by inspection and are therefore
subjective. The groups formed display a
distinct flora, vegetation, and littoral
zone development. Each group has a
unique assemblage of important species,
the littoral zone development between the
groups varies tremendously, and the high¬
est commonality of the flora between
groups is 58% (Tables 3, 4 and 5).
Cluster analysis gave slightly different
results. To form five groups, clustering
lumped Pine(w), Ottawa, and Ennis;
Town Line and Perch; and Prong, Clear,
and Frank. To this extent, clustering gave
similar results as ordination. Clustering
added Devils to the Prong-Clear-Frank
Lake group and Pine(c) to the Perch-
Town Line group, and separated Alle-
quash-Bearpaw Lakes and Moon-Ano-
danta Lakes. Although the determination
of groups using clustering may be more
mathematically rigorous, the selection of
the final number of groups is subjective,
so it is probably no better or worse than
the inspection technique.
The groups formed by ordination and
inspection were selected as a basis for
discussion in this paper. The comparison
of the two methods indicates that describ¬
ing plant communities found at the ex¬
tremes of environmental conditions will
likely be easier than describing those
found in moderate conditions. For in¬
stance, Devils Lake has a floral similarity
of 0.21 with Group I lakes and 0.22 with
the remaining Group IV lakes. On the
basis of flora, it could logically be com¬
bined with Group I, Group IV, or con¬
sidered intermediate. The case for placing
Pine(c) lake in Group III versus Group I
5
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Table 4. Summary of vegetation attributes
on the basis of floral similarity is better
(coefficient of floral similarity is 0.46 vs.
0.36), but not overwhelmingly so. A much
larger data base is needed to better define
plant communities in moderate environ¬
mental conditions.
Discussion and Conclusions
The benchmark lakes are only a small
percentage of Wisconsin’s 14,000 lakes
and the taxa represented constitute less
than half of the potential plants in
Wisconsin’s lakes (R. Read, Wisconsin
DNR, personal communication). There¬
fore, the sampling is not necessarily
representative of the variety of Wisconsin
lakes and lake plants. However, inter¬
esting relationships between aquatic
vegetation and habitat factors emerge
even in this small group of lakes.
Group I. Lakes in Group I have low
pH, alkalinity, and specific conductance,
which lead to low free C02 and low total
dissolved inorganic carbon. Low carbon
availability may be the key factor explain¬
ing the vegetation and productivity of
these lakes. The plant community is
strongly dominated by floating leaved
species such as Brasenia schreberi and
rosette plants such as Isoettes spp. The
stomata of B. schreberi occur on the up¬
per epidermis of the floating leaf (Scul-
thorpe 1967). This is a useful adaptation
in a carbon limited environment because
atmospheric C02 can be utilized for
photosynthesis. In other words, as Stee-
man-Nielsen (1944) points out, aquatic
plants that have organs of assimilation
above the surface of the water are not
photosynthetically aquatic plants.
Some rosette plants, especially the
Isoetids, can maximize the utilization of
C02 through such mechanisms as
crassulacean acid metabolism, the use of
sedimentary dissolved inorganic carbon, a
leaf morphometry that lowers the boun¬
dary layer resistance to C02 flux across
the unstirred layer of water next to the
leaf, and recycling of respired C02
(Adams 1985).
Group II. Pine Lake in Chippewa
County is the lone lake in Group II. The
vegetation of Pine Lake is clearly distinct
from Group I or Group III lakes (Tables 4
and 5) Potamogeton epihydrus is the only
submerged species that Groups I and II
have in common. Pine Lake is not florally
depauperate. However, the majority of
the species are emergent or floating leaved
species, including Nymphaea tuber osa,
the only important species in the lake.
Even the submerged species Potamogeton
natans, Potamogeton gramineus, and Po¬
tamogeton epihydrus can have floating
leaves. Again, these species have their
organs of assimilation out of the water so
they are not totally dependent on the
water to obtain their resources. However,
6
Vegetation of Wisconsin ’s Benchmark Lakes
water depth limits the potential habitat
they can occupy.
No submerged species are important in
this lake. More recent water chemistry
data indicate a higher pH and lower
alkalinities than those reported in Table 1
(pH 6. 6-7.0, total alkalinity 6. 0-8.0).
These data would slightly shift the loca¬
tion of Pine Lake in the ordination;
however, they better explain the vegeta¬
tion pattern. There is no development of
acidophilous flora (Wetzel 1984) and free
CO 2 would be much more limited.
Group III. The vegetation in the Group
III lakes is typical of a bog lake. The
alkalinity, specific conductance, and pH
of the lakes are low but the littoral zone
development is high. The primary habitat
difference between Group III lakes and
Group I and II lakes appears to be that
Group III lake bottoms consist primarily
of soft sediments.
The adaptation of the floating leaves of
B. schreberi and N. odor at a for living in a
carbon-poor environment has been dis¬
cussed previously. The genus Utricularia
also has some interesting adaptations.
Many members of this genus are sub¬
merged and free floating. They have a
large surface area because of their finely
dissected leaves, which allows them to ab¬
sorb nutrients over their whole surface.
This may give them an advantage in ob¬
taining nutrients and carbon from a
nutrient-poor environment or obtaining
nutrients and carbon from rich organic
sediments (Wetzel et al. 1985). Many
Utricularia are carnivorous. Aquatic
animals caught in the traps of these carni¬
vores are probably a significant source of
phosphorus, nitrogen, and perhaps some
minor elements (Hutchinson 1975).
Group IV. The mesic lakes are contain¬
ed in Group IV. Alkalinities are higher in
Group IV lakes than they are in Groups I,
II, or III lakes. Therefore, dissolved in¬
organic carbon conditions are more fa¬
vorable for the growth of submerged
Table 5. Floral similarity of lake groups
Similarity
species. All the important species except
Nuphar advena are submerged species.
Species in this group, such as Elodea
canadensis and Myriophyllum spicatum,
have the ability to use bicarbonate as a
carbon source for photosynthesis (Nichols
and Shaw 1986). This is an advantage in
lakes where alkalinities are moderate to
high, but where high pH limits the free
C02. Group IV represents a large and
diverse group of lakes. As mentioned
previously, subgroups could probably be
defined with a larger sampling of this lake
group.
Group V. The hard-water lakes of
Group V typically have a high alkalinity,
high pH, and high specific conductance.
They also are low in free C02. Species
that are predominant in these lakes need
bicarbonate to photosynthesize effective¬
ly. The data indicate that Chara is the
most successful species under these condi¬
tions. Little was found in the literature
about the ability of Chara to use bicar¬
bonate. Wetzel (1960) suggests the large
surface area of Chara aids carbon uptake
and that some algal species can utilize
bicarbonate ion faster than higher plants
because the chloroplasts are much closer
to the carbon source. Carbon need not be
transported as far as is the case with
vascular hydrophytes, so there is less
resistance to carbon flux from the en¬
vironment to the chloroplast. These two
factors could explain the dominance of
Chara under the conditions found in
Group V lakes. However, Maberly and
7
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Spence (1983) rated Chara sp. much lower
in its ability to extract inorganic carbon
from the water than M. spicatum, and
somewhat similar in ability to P. crispus
and E. canadensis.
Chara is interesting because it is a
widespread species, but becomes domi¬
nant only in the hard-water lakes. In other
lakes Chara and Najas flexilis act as early
successional species and are readily
replaced by other macrophytes (Nichols
1984; Engel and Nichols 1984). This does
not appear to be the case in Group V
lakes.
Wetzel (1966) states that low produc¬
tivity is characteristic of this lake type.
This is not inconsistent with the fact that
these lakes have the highest littoral zone
development. Littoral zone development
refers more to the area the plants occupy
rather than their productivity. Chara spp.
and Najas flexilis are often small in
stature and do not produce a lot of struc¬
tural material. They can occupy a large
area without being productive.
It is interesting to note that Najas flexi¬
lis, Ceratophyllum demersum, Elodea
canadensis, Myriophyllum spicatum and
Vallisneria americana displayed dramatic
population shifts in the lakes during the
course of the study. These species often
cause aquatic nuisance problems in lakes
(Trudeau 1982). These data indicate that
these species are naturally dynamic and
can therefore rapidly take advantage of
plant population shifts in a lake. In a lake
where a perturbation occurs, these species
may readily be able to take advantage of
the situation and become dominant.
In summary, this study supports the
observations of other authors cited in the
introduction that pH, alkalinity, specific
conductance, free C02, and substrate type
are important in determining the plant
community and plant distributions in
lakes. It is not surprising that there is a
lack of linear correlations between these
factors and vegetational characteristics.
Different factors are probably responsible
for determining each plant community,
and the dominant species in these com¬
munities often have unique adaptations to
cope with environmental limitations.
Acknowledgments
The Wisconsin Department of Natural
Resources is acknowledged for providing
access to the benchmark lake files. The
benchmark lake files that contain all the
original quadrat data and lake distribu¬
tion maps are archived in the Office of
Inland Lake Renewal. Michael Adams,
Sandy Engel, and James Vennie are grate¬
fully acknowledged for critically review¬
ing the manuscript.
Works Cited
Adams, M. 1985. Inorganic carbon reserves of
natural waters and the ecophysiological
consequences of their photosynthetic deple¬
tion: (II) Macrophytes. In Lucas, W. J.
(Ed.) Inorganic Carbon Uptake by Aquatic
Photosynthetic Organisms. The American
Society of Plant Physiologists. Baltimore,
p. 421-435.
APHA 1971. Standard Methods for the Ex¬
amination of Water and Wastewater.
American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C. 874 pp.
Barko, J., M. Adams, and N. Clesceri. 1986.
Environmental factors and their considera¬
tion in the management of submersed
aquatic vegetation. J. Aquat. Plant
Manage. 24:1-10.
Bray, J. and J. Curtis. 1957. An ordination of
upland forest communities of southern
Wisconsin. Ecol. Monog. 27:325-349.
Cox, G. 1969. Laboratory Manual of General
Ecology. W. C. Brown Co. Dubuque, Iowa
165 pp.
Engel, S. and S. A. Nichols. 1984. Lake sedi¬
ment alteration for macrophyte control. J.
Aquat. Plant Manage. 22:38-41.
Hintze, J. L. 1986. Number Cruncher Statis¬
tical System, version 4.21. Published by Dr.
Jerry L. Hintze, Kaysville, Utah. p. 20.1-
20.3.
8
Vegetation of Wisconsin ’s Benchmark Lakes
Hutchinson, G. 1975. A Treatise on Lim¬
nology, Volume III. Limnological Botany.
John Wiley and Sons, New York. 660 pp.
Jessen, R. and R. Lound, 1962. An evaluation
of survey techniques for submerged aquatic
plants. Game Investigational Reports No.
6, Minn. Dept. Cons., St. Paul. 8 pp.
Lillie, R. A. 1986. The spread of Eurasian
watermilfoil Myriophyllum spicatum in
Devils Lake, Sauk County, Wisconsin. Pro¬
ceedings of the 1985 North American Lake
Management Society Meetings. Lake Ge¬
neva, WI. p. 64-68.
Lind, C. 1976. The Phytosociology of
Submerged Aquatic Macrophytes in
Eutrophic Lakes of Southeastern Minne¬
sota. Ph.D. Thesis. Univ. Wis. -Madison. 81
PP-
Maberly, S. C. and D. N. H. Spence. 1983.
Photosynthetic inorganic carbon use by
freshwater plants. J. Ecol. 71:705-724.
Moyle, J. 1945. Some chemical factors in¬
fluencing the distribution of aquatic plants
in Minnesota. Am. Midi. Nat. 34:402-421 .
Nichols, S. A. 1984. Macrophyte community
dynamics in a dredged Wisconsin lake. Wat.
Res. Bull. 20:573-576.
_ and B. Shaw. 1986. Ecological life
histories of three aquatic nuisance plants,
Myriophyllum spicatum, Potamogeton cris-
pus and Elodea canadensis. Hydrobiologia
131:3-21.
Olsen, S. 1950. Aquatic plants and
hydrospheric factors I. Aquatic plants in
SW-Jutland, Denmark. Svensk Bot. Tidskr.
44:1-32.
Pearsall, W. 1920. The aquatic vegetation of
the English Lakes. J. Ecol. 8:163-199.
Sculthorpe, C. 1967. The Biology of Aquatic
Vascular Plants. Edward Arnold Ltd.
Lond. 610 pp.
Seddon, B. 1972. Aquatic macrophytes as lim¬
nological indicators. Freshwat. Biology
2:107-130.
Simpson, E. 1949. Measurement of diversity.
Nature. 163:688.
Spence, D. 1972. Factors controlling the
distribution of freshwater macrophytes with
particular reference to the lochs of
Scotland. /. Ecol. 55:147-170.
Steeman-Nielsen, E. 1944. Dependence of
freshwater plants on quantity of carbon
dioxide and hydrogen ion concentration, il¬
lustrated through experimental investiga¬
tions. Dansk bot. Ark. 11 (8): 1-25.
Swindale, D. and J. Curtis. 1957. Phyto¬
sociology of the larger submerged plants in
Wisconsin lakes. Ecology 38:397-407.
Trudeau, P. 1982. Nuisance aquatic plants
and aquatic plant management programs in
the United States vol. 3. Northeastern and
North Central Region. Mitre Corp. Mc¬
Lean, Virginia. 157 pp.
Wetzel, R. 1960. Marl encrustations on hydro¬
phytes in several Michigan lakes. Oikos
11:223-228.
_ . 1966. Productivity and nutrient rela¬
tionships in marl lakes of northern Indiana.
Verb. Internat. Verein. Limnol. 1 6:321 —
352.
_ , E. Brammer, and C. Forsberg. 1984.
Photosynthesis of submerged macrophytes
in acidified lakes I. Carbon fluxes and
recycling of C02 in J uncus bulbosus L.
Aquat. Bot. 19:329-342.
_ , _ , K. Lindstrom and C.
Forsberg. 1985. Photosynthesis of submerg¬
ed macrophytes in acidified lakes II. Car¬
bon limitation and utilization of benthic
C02 sources. Aquat. Bot. 22:107-120.
9
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
i -c £
1111
a o>
S o c <
OO-CC'
Q. ^5 S '
to C =>
CO*OOtD^NCONS(DNCOin
T-QNOJi-r-T-CM^Cgi-i-CMr-
oZododoooooooo
ONNtDNOOOrotDWSSCMW
cm i-i-oooooNCMin'tOi-n
bP ->9 ■
CO(OCO<Dt-COCDO(D^^^
^^(O'-ooinrgiflcoiDi-oo
CMi— CMCMi— CMi- t— COi— COi— i— CM
ooiNcDoami-insooooo)'
10001^-00051-1-1
a) m a) 5 a)
2 2 ?z 8 s S'! 1 1
>>00m00«>5cD^|
a)
co
2^ |» !«=!*« *
®S£cB>oOo®c«
ci:-.Ea)o®®-£c-cj-
CLLlOCLQ_HCDQ<^<Q-UJO
CO 0)
10
Table 2. Flora of the benchmark lakes.
Vegetation of Wisconsin ’s Benchmark Lakes
(DN(D(DNi-O^SO)NOON(OS^
CO COCO Mfl 1- CM 10m CO 1-
OOt-OO-^OOOOOt-OOOOO
OOOOOt-OOOOOOt-OOOO
OOOi-Ot-OOOOOOOOOOO
OOOt-Ot-OOOOQt-y-Ot-OO
OOOOOt-OOOOOOt-OOOO
t— t— Ot-Ot— OOOOOt— t— oooo
OOOt-Ot-OOOOOOt-OOOO
OOt-OOOt-OOOOt-t-Ot-OO
t-OOOt-Ot-OOOOt-OOOOO
t-OOt-OOt-OOt-OOOt-t-OO
t-OOOOOt-Ot-t-t-t-OOOOO
OOt-OOt-t-t-Ot-Ot-t-Ot-t-O
OOt-OOt-t-OOOOOOOOOt-
T— Ot— OOt— t— t— Ot— OOOOt— O
NT-TtT-NM-(OT-NM-Tj-^-IS.>StTfTt
CM T— CM T— CO CM T-T-T- T-T-T-
oooooooooooooooo
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOt-
oooooooooooo oooo
Ot-OOOOOt-t-Ot-OOO Ot-
Ot-OOOOt-OOOOOOOOO
Ot-OOOt-Ot-OOt-t-OOOO
OOOt-OOOOOOOOOt-OO
OOOOOOt-OOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOt-OO
OOOt-OOt-t-OOOOt-OOO
OOt-OOOt-OOOOOOOOO
OOOOOt-t-OOt-Ot-OOt-O
OOt-t-OOOOOOOOOOOO
t-OOOt-OOOOt-OOOOt-O
E E
EE §
o
(0 —
CD =
. ID 5
■ ffl 5
Em
2 i =
CO . T TT
\ _2 _c o
CO g- CL CL
' CL O O
) X i | -
) i? CD CO CO
9- E
co a □
CO CO 03
. CD 2 o .E
£ S
— m £ w co co co
CL CL 2
CL CL .E
C/5 « £
.« O o;
E E E E E
3 3 3 3 3
£ 'O -O
i £ D ®
IQOlU
> CD .y
1-2 >•£?
LULULUUJIULULLIOOO
O CD
O X5 •
CD O
(fl (/) (O m - CO
q5CDCDCDd22 =
^©©©gcig
X 1 1 8 S| ® «j o
o cl a
CO o O
CJ) z z
CD >>
> > >
-C .C O
CL CL CL
o o o
11
Table 2. Flora of the benchmark lakes.— Continued
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
I*
si
1
Is
II
1
it
I
I!
II
I
is
I
I
I
t-t-OOt— Oi— Oi-1-OOOOO-i-i— 000-1-000
0->-000000t-000000t-00000i-00
t-OOi-OOOO'i-Oi-OOOOt-OOOO^Oi-O
OOi-OOOT-OOf-OT-OOT-1-OOi-OOT-OO
O-^OOOOOOOOOOi-OOi-OOOt-OOOO
OT-OOOOOOi-i-^-OOOOT-O-r-OT-OOOi-
OOOOOOt-OOOOOOOOt-OOOt-i-OOO
Ot-OOOOOi-OOO-i-OOOt-OOOt-Oi-OO
OOOOOOt-Oi-Ot-OOi-Oi-OOi-i-Oi-OO
OOOOOOOOO-^OOOOOOO Ot-OOOOi-
OOOOOOOOi-Ot-OOOi-OOO-^t-O-^-OO
0i-t-00i--i-0-»-000000-^00000000
0i-0000t-0t-0-<-000i-000000000
OOOOOOOOOOt-t-Ot-OOOOi-OOOi-O
Oi-OOOOOOO
OOt-OOOOOO
Ot-OOOOOOO
1-Or-t-T-i-OOO
OOO-i-T-i-OOO
-I-Of-O-I-I-Of-O
OOl-OO-i-OOO
ooooooooo
000-1-00000
ooooooooo
OOOOOOOOi-
OOOt-OOi-OO
ooooooooo
OOOOOt-OOO
12
Potamogeton
Potamogeton vaseyi
Potamogeton zosteriformes
Potamogeton spp.
Vegetation of Wisconsin *s Benchmark Lakes
© © T~ o O O O O O O O O O 1” T~ O O O O O o O O O 1" T- T- o
OOOOOOOOOOO'1-OOt-OOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOi-OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
O 1" o O O O O O O i- O O i- i- o i- o '
O O O 1- T- o o
Ot-OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOt-OO
Oi-OOOOOOt-t->i-OOi-Ot-OOOOOOOt-t-t-i”Ot-
^t-OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOt-OO
OOOT-OOOOi-OOOOOOOOOOOf-OOOOOOOO
O O O O O O O O 1- T- O o O O O O >r '- O O O r- o O O i" o o o
O O O O O O O' O T-OOOOr-OT-O-r-OOOOi-r-OOOOO
OOT-OOOOOT-OT-Or-T-OOOOOO'r-OOOOOOOO
OOOOr-O-r-OOOT-OOOOOOOr-OOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOr-Or-r-OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOT-Or-OOOOOT-OOOOOOOOOOr-OOOT-1-OO
E E
“5 a «
: 5 j-
- « 2
« o § « m O « g
CO TO ^ - CT—OQ.O ■—
•n c .c ^ Q, b- _ P
r3 (S o ^ to 0
E E e E §. O ®
— 3 3 3
= o o o
C c c c
® 3 3 3
43 C C C
O CO co CO
0. DC DC C
JtJ2 T„ co C 0* “ 9-
2 .5 .2 .2 S o >
2 2 5 S = 3 1 S '
' .? .? .? a a a a !
» 03 D> O) -- "k- ~ 1
3 CO CO CO O O O O 1
) CO (0 C/3 CO (0 CO C/3 C
„2 .2 .2 co
CO CO
. a. o.
CO CO
3 _ ™ CO CO CO CO
•— •—
03 2 co
Pdf
3 at
> 03 CO
<0 CO CO
co co (0 CO ®
13
Zanichellia palustris
Zizania aquatica
Table 3. Community attributes in benchmark lakes.
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
o o w o o into
o q p o o co co
O O t~ O O CO CD
O O 05 O O 00 CD
o o -r- o o ^ oo
o o o o o o o
o o I'- o o o CM
q o co o o oo o
o o in o o s oi
O O T- o o ^ o
qqcNjqocD-r-
d d oo d d T-' d
o o oo o i- oo o
o o oo o t- r- o
o 6 cb o o c\i o
O O 00 O ^ CO o
O O 00 o o ^ o
d d d o d d d
o o n- o oo oo o
O 00 O ^ ^ (O o
^ o i- o r". i- o
o ^ o to ^ o o
CD CM CNJ CM I'- t~ o
m o) co cd in o
t-1 o d d d d d
05 -m- CM ^ t— co o
'd- O 00 S 00 ^ o
d c\i c\j d oo t: d
00 00 00 CD O CD O
r- in co in oo n o
t~ T“ CNJ ID i— 00
ID 00 00 CM CVJ
0)
: O dJ.
; o Q- d o ■
I to <2 05 co §;
E.?SSS»
i
! ® 'oi E E <5
O CO > >> £ O
</) Z Z O *
ID CM O O O 05
co co o o o cm co
in c\i o o o ^ cd
CM CM O O O CM O
) CD O O O 00 00
r^-'^oooiofx-
oq N- q q q 05 oo
d d d d oo
oo CD h- oo
O ID 00 ID CD O O
O 00 1- CO 00 o o
d rd oo rd d d d
CM 00 00 CM
O CM 00 ID ■
O 05 ID ID O O
O i- ^ 00 ID O O
dco^diridd
o m- i^- o o o
O 00 CD CM 00 O O
d d co cd oo d d
in CD CD vf
CM O O O O O O
CD O O O O O
oo rd d d d d d
I"'- CM O O O O O
id CO O O O O O
CM CM O O O O O
in n o o o o o
ID N O O O O O
'JJ w —
r: > m c/5 —
0 > c C «
D (0 ® E « ^
CD **- Q) 0)a
O I B.E > o
C0 — CO CD CD CD
CD ^ “9 E E 05
•— -9 JO CD _CD O
. 5 o 3 3 3 E
»” o O O (0
. S? >* d d d o
Z CD 2 D
O00O05OOCMCMlD^-lDOOO
qqqqqqqcM^r'^cDOOo
dcMdcvidddd^oodddd
00005001— CM00505000
qqq^qqqo)0)0)rooo
ddddddddi^ddddd
OlDO^OOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOi— OOCDi— CDOOlDOOO
qqqooqqiqoqqcDooooo
ddd^ddiDi^cMdi^ddd
CM r- co 00 CD CM r-
O-M-OOOOCMCOOi— OCOOOO
O'r-OT-O'^-lDCDlDOOOOOO
ddddddndcodddddd
0050CDOI^LD^t-Ot-000
OOOOOOO1D1D1— OCMOOO
dddddi-^T^r^dddddd
O^rOOOOOCOlDCMOOOOO
OlDOCMO-M-CMCMCDOi-OOO
di-'dcMdcD-^cM^d^tddd
CM CM CM
or-ocMoor^ooooooo
id r- o o o o ■
000000
05OOOOCMOOOOOO
irjodiDddddddddddd
ID CM
00000005000000
^•'M-cooooor^-oooooo
00000000000000
00000000000000
tbriddddd^dddddo
E := w
D 2 £ 05 «
~ o !q co E co
w ~ Jo ® E
D Oq co :
CL C0 2 ^ p S OJ
c E c "O E 't; E
o ^ o CD ^ CD
1 1 •§ 1 1 5 g |
ro^o^iDNco
Oa.5o.lUON>
S 11
5 o -2
£ E a
q-2 E
D o >i
Z CL Z
E j
9 cl :
— cl
> CO V
14
Nupharadvena 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Potamogeton amplifolius 15.07 7.97 0.37 2.95 16.44 2.54 0.34 0.86
Nvmphaea tuberosa 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 43.11 6.67 1.18 7.87
Vegetation of Wisconsin ’s Benchmark Lakes
T-^or>-a>h»ooT-ojo
O(\IOOIDNOt-(*)0)t-
diriooocboor^r-'iri
■m- o oo co o o ■
OONOWNSOI
COOOnNNOCOCM^QO
NOOP)(D(DONC\|^N
^(boifi^oodiricdcviiri
unCDOT-OOOCDOOO
I^COOi-r-OOOOOOO
^aiddddd^ddd
CMOOinCMOO05C5OO
CMCOOOi-OOOOOO
^dddddd-r-ddd
ir'-or-.oooi-ooo
COr-Ot-COOO’M-OOO
E :=
^ .9 -9
Z3 CL
-Q co
c E c -D
O 3 O (0
d o ~ cd
a a > O! S
% c CL B a
ffl L O t ®
co « ■= 2 to
■ -c o o .2
Oq.2q.iu
CO =
o r
"O CO — —
p o 05 > co
3 = E E o
= 5 cj d ^
>* O- .2 = CL .CO
CL ® CD -c 2 ~
o ® c a to ns
c to o jz c
2 CO = -C Q. E
a> .N co ^ 3 CD
O N > ^ z -I
co m co o m cm
in o o oo oo
CM cm i- o o co
d cd d d d t-
ooor-oinr-
co cm cm o oo oo
in d cm o t-1 cm
S 00 in O CD N
(00(00
0 00 0 ^000
o m o) co n o
d t-1 d d
O M1 M- CO 00 O
O CO CM CM CM p
o o ^ co co o
CM CM CM i-
O M M CD O O
M- m m co
in tj- o o m o
in oo o o o o
d d d d
co co
OO CO o o ^ o
in t- o o o o
cm ■ d d d d
CT> in o o o o
05 ^ o o co o
dsodr^d
in cm
O O) O O 05 O
in o o p p
co in d d t~ d
co co
o
CD E
2 3
Q. (5 CO
„ CO =3
•- o .2 !2
dx © co 2
Q. (D C35 > >
O W C O J- to
° s 2 I -C Q.
“ co .*5, 2 cl ^
>r os o 3 o
2UZHZW
E
n
E
I •
> 05
. - O
>> Q)
.tr cl
CO CO
is
0) 05
O) 05
05 TD
> o
CO CD
Q ' o'
C o
ffiO
o ^
cr O
<D
> TD
d "D
CO CO
£ o
I f
S’ 5
**- co
05
> ‘o
« C
C m
Zg
05
II
15
“Red Purge”:
The 1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
Julian L. Stockley
In 1947, Harold Story, Allis-Chalmers’
labor policy engineer and attorney, ad¬
dressed a convention of the National
Association of Manufacturers in New
York. He told his audience that, during
the 1946-1947 strike at Allis-Chalmers’
plant at West Allis, Wisconsin, the com¬
pany had finally been able to expose what
he called the Communist leadership of
Local 248:
Until recently, public opinion has blindly
and wholeheartedly supported unionism
and collective bargaining. . . .
. . . During Allis-Chalmers’ last strike,
public opinion changed. Only then was
Allis-Chalmers in a position to tell its
employees . . . [about] the devastating
destructiveness of Communist union leader¬
ship in the labor movement. 1
Story then described how Allis-Chalmers,
manufacturers of heavy machinery and
farm equipment, had used this shift in
public opinion to win the eleven-month
strike and break the union. Instead of
negotiating the disputed contractual
issues that would determine who would
control the shop floor and employee
loyalty, Allis-Chalmers’ management
mounted a press campaign against the
alleged Communists among Local 248 ’s
most active membership. In this way,
management sidestepped the contractual
points of contention and focused public
attention on what they labeled the Com¬
munist infiltration in Local 248. Until
recently the assertion that Local 248 was
Communist dominated has been popu¬
larly accepted. But a careful study of the
Julian L. Stockley, a graduate of the University of
Wisconsin— Eau Claire, is currently enrolled in an
intensive Russian language program at Middlebury
College.
evidence indicates that the charges are un¬
proven and that the company only used
them to avoid negotiating a legitimate
contractual agreement. It was thus that
Allis-Chalmers won the strike and broke
the union, dismissed over ninety of the
local’s most active union members, and
forced an unprecedented turnover in
Local 248’s leadership.
The company found support for its
position in the emerging national anti¬
labor attitude, reflected in and fostered by
the local and national press, and in the
development of a postwar Red Scare.
Allis-Chalmers was also convinced that it
had relinquished too much managerial
control to Local 248 in the decade before
the 1946-1947 strike. From 1936-1946,
while the local was building its member¬
ship and hoping to gain union securities
comparable to those won by like brother¬
hoods, relations between Allis-Chalmers
and Local 248 were strained. The com¬
pany viewed the 1946-1947 strike as an
opportunity for a final showdown.
In 1946 when Local 248 members
walked out in the hope of securing wages
comparable to national industrial wage
rates, an improved grievance procedure,
and union security, Allis-Chalmers’
management was unwilling to address
these contractual points or negotiate a
compromise. Local 248 not only had to
withstand Allis-Chalmers’ managerial
pressure, changes in national attitudes,
and the press campaign orchestrated by
the company, but also had to conduct its
strike with reserved support from the
leaders of its international, the United
Automobile Workers (UAW), and the
Congress of Industrial Organizations
(CIO) of which the UAW was a member.
17
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
After World War II, the UAW underwent
an administrative shift. Its rising leader,
Walter Reuther, used the public’s percep¬
tion of a Communist threat to gain the
UAW presidency and purge the organiza¬
tion of alleged Communists. The CIO’s
president, Philip Murray, also employed
the Communist issue to purge the federa¬
tion’s ranks. At the same time, the Ameri¬
can public was following the House Com¬
mittee on Un-American Activities’ inves¬
tigations of Communism in labor unions
in the United States. It was in this setting
that Local 248 attempted to wrest a con¬
tract from Allis-Chalmers. After an
eleven-month strike, Local 248 was forced
to capitulate; employees returned to work
without a contract, while the company
dismissed Local 248 ’s most active mem¬
bers.
Local 248 was founded in the late
1930s, amid the growing tide of industrial
unionism. Up until this time, Allis-
Chalmers’ West Allis plant had remained
unorganized except for a modest member¬
ship among the company’s selective craft
unions, which excluded assembly-line
workers. From October 1936 to Jan¬
uary 1937, Allis-Chalmers’ Federal Labor
Union (FLU) 20136, affiliated with the
American Federation of Labor (AFL),
was under the leadership of Harold Chris-
toffel. During this brief period, members
of Allis-Chalmers’ AFL trade and craft
unions deserted wholesale to the Federal
Labor Union, so that by January 1937 the
local’s membership exceeded 2,000 in a
plant of approximately 8,000 employees.
Because the newly created Federal Labor
Union derived its membership from the
assembly-line workers as well as the
plant’s skilled craftsmen, it came into
conflict with the Federated Trade Council
in Milwaukee. In March 1937, Allis-
Chalmers’ FLU 20136 decided to join the
newly chartered CIO to become Local 248
UAW-CIO. As an affiliate of the CIO,
Local 248 was no longer required to heed
craft-union lines while organizing, which
allowed for greater growth and flexibility
in its intensive organizational program.
The greatest challenge for the new local
was Allis-Chalmers’ traditional anti-labor
stance: Allis-Chalmers had a strike in
1906 and another in 1916, both of which
“were crushed by the Company and re¬
sulted in the total destruction of the
unions.”2 After the implementation of
the National Industrial Recovery Act in
1933, the company set up a paternalistic,
company-dominated union, the Allis-
Chalmers Works Council, which existed
from 1933 to 1937 and seated only Allis-
Chalmers’ most conservative employees.
But the council functioned as a grievance
board and never held contractual rela¬
tions with Allis-Chalmers.
Even in the late 1930s, when other firms
were moving to open labor-management
communications, Allis-Chalmers’ man¬
agement pursued a markedly inflexible
labor policy. The firm’s executives con¬
tinued to voice opinions that questioned
or rejected labor’s role in areas they con¬
sidered to be under managerial authority,
balked at the idea of a closed shop, and
opposed any measure that legitimized
union authority on the shop floor. Bert
Cochran, author of Labor and Commu¬
nism, notes a discrepancy between the
company’s statements and actions:
The company maintained that it sincerely
accepted collective bargaining, and was
pledged to a hands-off policy in the union’s
internal affairs. Outside observers conclud¬
ed that it was not the disinterested bystander
that it pretended to be. Dr. John Steelman,
head of the U.S. Labor Department Con¬
ciliation Service, was of the opinion that
Max Babb, the company president, was hos¬
tile to unions, and in order to keep the CIO
off balance, encouraged AFL craft organi¬
zations to come into his plants.3
It was in this environment that Local 248
attempted to gain recognition as the
employees’ contractual bargaining agent
18
1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
and won its first nonexclusive contract
with the firm in March 1937. After the
local won a National Labor Relations
Board election in January 1938, Local 248
became the bargaining agent for the
employees at the West Allis works.
During the close of the 1930s, the union
signed relatively weak contracts compared
to the contracts being signed by other
UAW locals. Although recognized as the
workers’ bargaining agent, Local 248 still
did not enjoy union security, freedom
from management’s arbitrariness, or a
wage package comparable to those paid
by area manufacturers. The contract did
not provide a maintenance-of-member-
ship clause to protect the union from
membership desertion, nor did the firm
dissuade AFL brotherhoods from orga¬
nizing in the West Allis plant. Allis-
Chalmers only agreed to remain “neu¬
tral” on the union issue, neither challeng¬
ing the local directly nor aiding it in secur¬
ing members. The contracts of the late
1930s also failed to free workers from
Allis-Chalmers’ arbitrary managerial con¬
trols. The company’s shop foremen still
maintained control over the write-up of
employees’ grievances, and management
retained control over employee dismis¬
sals. Nonetheless, this period marked a
limited shift in the balance of power on
the shop floor at the West Allis works.
The lack of real union security re¬
mained a pressing concern for the leader¬
ship of Local 248 and was the cause of a
seventy-six-day strike in 1941, which was
characterized by the national press as a
political strike called by the “Com¬
munist” leadership of Local 248. How¬
ever, according to Stephen Meyer, the
strike in fact had “all the earmarks of a
standard union battle” and was actually
called because Allis-Chalmers had been
encouraging the AFL to organize in the
West Allis works, thus challenging the
CIO’s Local 248 on the issue of union
security.4 The strike was settled only after
the federal government intervened. The
issues focused on the labor-management
conflict over shop, production, and
worker control; yet, more important than
this, the 1941 strike introduced the public
to and provided the firm with publicized
allegations of the Communist Party’s in¬
fluence in Local 248.
During World War II, the labor-man¬
agement conflict over authority on the
shop floor continued as Local 248 attemp¬
ted to gam recognition as an autonomous
power from the company. By using the
grievance procedure provided in the con¬
tract and taking advantage of the non¬
partisan referee assigned to judge these
cases, Local 248 was able to modify some
contractual boundaries, increase its in¬
fluence in the shop, and gain a limited
amount of managerial authority in the
West Allis plant. Had the “Communist”
leadership of Local 248 been heeding the
advice of such leading Communist figures
as Earl Browder, the union would have
curtailed its use of the grievance pro¬
cedure and listened to Browder’s urging
that “Communists must avoid alienating
employers” in order to maximize war¬
time production. Instead, the local’s
leadership
. . . ignored the Party’s admonitions to
cooperate with management to increase pro¬
duction. Grievances were magnified and,
although both union and management had
long approved incentive pay, the union
stubbornly refused to have it applied to the
brass foundry. It also opposed the fifty-
six-hour week that the navy had requested
to speed up production on navy orders.5
Local 248 refused to relent in its struggle
for union security, recognition as a
legitimate shop power, and economic
gains on behalf of its membership. The
war afforded the union one gain. In 1943,
after the National War Labor Board was
called in, Allis-Chalmers was forced to
put a maintenance-of-membership clause
in the new contract. By guaranteeing that
19
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
dues-paying members had to maintain
paid membership and could not leave the
union once they joined, Local 248 was
awarded its first contractual clause grant¬
ing relative union security. The company
refused to renew this clause during
postwar contractual negotiations.
Wartime relations between Local 248
and Allis-Chalmers were strained, and
quite often government agents had to be
called in to resolve the contractual dis¬
putes of previous years. In the spring of
1946, the local was still negotiating for a
contract, which had been under discus¬
sion since April 1944 when the previous
contract had expired; West Allis em¬
ployees had been working under the old
contract since that time. During the
negotiations, Allis-Chalmers ignored the
suggested bargaining concessions that the
War Labor Board and the Federal Concil¬
iation Service recommended and also
ended the referee system that had been
used to settle grievances during the war.
In an additional show of strength, the
company decided to adhere “to its tradi¬
tional policy which stated that ‘no em¬
ployee’s job at Allis-Chalmers shall de¬
pend on membership in the Union, ’” to
its stand on tightening grievance pro¬
cedures, and to its final wage offer, which
was five cents below the national pattern.6
As labor-management tensions were
nearing strike porportions at its West
Allis home plant in the spring of 1946,
Allis-Chalmers also faced conflicts with
seven out of its eight plants nationwide.
By 30 April 1946, Allis-Chalmers had
four plants on strike: LaPorte, Indiana;
Springfield, Illinois; Norwood, Ohio; and
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. Three more of
its plants went on strike that day: Boston,
Massachusetts; LaCrosse, Wisconsin; and
West Allis, Wisconsin. Since late 1945,
union representatives from various Allis-
Chalmers’ plants had been meeting with
the hope of drawing up a master contract
that would cover all of the company’s
plants. Had Allis-Chalmers accepted the
unions’ offer to bargain on this scale, the
company would have been recognizing the
unions as legtitimate, autonomous bar¬
gaining partners. But management re¬
jected this idea because it interfered with
the company’s belief in a fundamental
managerial right — the right to decide the
terms of the contract offered. After the
strike began and as individual unions were
forced to settle, Allis-Chalmers sister
unions maintained contact through let¬
ters, encouraging the locals still out to
hold the strike fronts.
Allis-Chalmers also refused Local 248 ’s
offer of arbitration because, as Ozanne
has observed,
the party which feels stronger and is anxious
to gain something by its power which it
fears it might not get from an arbitrator
will, of course, refuse arbitration.7
Allis-Chalmers was ready for a showdown
with the unions that challenged its
managerial prerogatives, and the com¬
pany was especially keen on confronta¬
tion with Local 248. As has been pointed
out, in its home plant of West Allis, the
company evaded the main points of con¬
tention: wages, grievance procedures, and
union security. Instead, Allis-Chalmers
launched a propaganda drive aimed at
persuading the public and its West Allis
employees that the leadership of Local
248 and its strike were actually a
“Communist-inspired plot to disrupt
American industry” and that Local 248 ’s
“Communist” leadership did not have
the workers’ best interest at heart.8
When Allis-Chalmers readied its public
relations campaign against Local 248 in
1946, it was addressing a public that had
become increasingly concerned about the
“Red Bogey” in America, to use David
M. Oshinsky’s terminology.9 From the
perspective of most American citizens,
there seemed to be good reason for alarm
over the new “Red menace.” While the
20
1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
press highlighted news of Stalin’s increas¬
ing boldness in Eastern Europe, and of
the Canadians exposing a Soviet spy ring,
the Truman Administration fueled the na¬
tion’s frenetic agitation by gearing up for
cold war with the newly emerging Soviet
enemy. The American people seemed to
conclude that although they could not
control threats from the outside, they
could at least identify and eliminate the
enemy within their own ranks.
In 1946, the nation elected the first
Republican Congress in eighteen years.
Republicans championed the anti-Com-
munist cause, an issue with voter appeal.
Lawrence S. Wittner has suggested that
American businessmen were the Republi¬
can’s “keenest supporters” and that they
were still “smarting from a generation of
social criticism by journalists, news com¬
mentators, labor leaders, artists, and in¬
tellectuals.” In 1946 and 1947, the United
States Chamber of Commerce felt the in¬
ternal Communist threat so keenly that it
published the pamphlets “Communist In¬
filtration in the United States: Its Nature
and How to Combat It,” “Communists
in the Government, The Facts and a Pro¬
gram,” and “Communists within the La¬
bor Movement, Facts and Countermea¬
sures.” In 1947, the same group put for¬
ward the idea that the Justice Department
should make public “at least twice a year
a certified list of Communist-controlled
front organizations and labor unions.”
The postwar labor strikes foundered un¬
der the suspicious eyes of the American
public.10
During the postwar period, labor
unions, many of which had benefited
from the organizational skill and commit¬
ment of Communist activists, became tar¬
gets for press “exposures” and Con¬
gressional hearings. Under Franklin D.
Roosevelt’s tutelage ten years earlier, the
public explored the possibilities of a
cooperative marriage between labor and
management as one means of curing de¬
pression ills. After the war, however, the
public was less willing than it had been
during the late 1930s to view labor’s
courtship in a positive light and often felt
as though it had been duped by Commu¬
nist labor leaders. Sometimes business
leaders, organizations, various presses
(including the influential Hearst syn¬
dicate), and Congressional committees
undertook to further their own interests
by labeling and exposing the “un-
American” elements at the forefront of
the American labor movement and by
crusading against Communist subversion
and subversives. After the 1946-1947
strike at the West Allis plant, Allis-
Chalmers’ management took pride in its
“battle scar” and victory over the
union — with the help of the local and na¬
tional press and two congressional com¬
mittees— because the company chose
“battle with a Communist-dominated
union rather than appeasement. ” 1 1
Although Walter Geist, Allis-Chal¬
mers’ president, maintained that the
“fight was the result of Communist in¬
filtration,” he also admitted that the
conflict “was to determine whether the
company or the union was to run our
shops.”12 When the negotiations ended in
late April of 1946, the Wisconsin CIO
News: Local 248 Edition cited ten issues
still under contention: discrimination,
union security, pay rate, grievance pro¬
cedure, discipline, layoff, layoff in lieu of
transfer, transfers, seniority, and press
statements. The three issues that were
paramount to the local were the clauses
governing union security, grievance pro¬
cedures, and wages. Each of these was in¬
directly and directly concerned with shop
control. Unable to reach an agreement on
any of these issues, and after a strike vote
of 8,091 to 251 on 29 April 1946, employ¬
ees at the West Allis plant walked out.
When the strike began at the West Allis
works, both the company and the local,
anticipating a final power contest, mo-
21
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
From the Wisconsin CIO News: Local 248 Edition, 5 April 1946, p. 8
bilized their forces and entrenched them¬
selves in their respective positions. The
local’s mouthpiece, the Wisconsin CIO
News: Local 248 Edition, ran articles and
cartoons that satirized the company’s
position and outlined the logic of the
union’s position. Most of the articles and
cartoons called attention to instances in
which an individual had suffered discrimi¬
nation or had been refused a contractual
right. For example, the paper cited cases
in which a foreman had refused an em¬
ployee the right to call his shop steward in
order to file a grievance. In another in¬
stance, the paper satirized the company’s
practice of calling in timestudy experts to
determine the rate at which a task should
be performed. Often the timestudy ex¬
perts cut the allowable task time. Thus
those employees who were paid not only a
base rate, but also according to the
number of tasks completed, found the
company cropping their wages to fit the
projection of the timestudy. Again, the
issue was one of shop authority, and the
union had no voice in the procedure.
Even before the strike had been
authorized at the West Allis works, the
rhetorical battles had begun. Walter
Geist, the company president, began mail¬
ing letters to Allis-Chalmers’ employees
explaining the company’s position.
Geist’ s first set of letters offered members
of the “Allis-Chalmers family” assur¬
ances that none of their rights as workers
were being violated and that wage de¬
mands would be met as soon as the Wage
Stabilization Board reviewed Allis-Chal¬
mers’ wage increase application. The
company also sent out a letter to all
employees refuting the “claims made in
these [Local 248] flyers,” which were “ex-
22
1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
amples of irresponsibility and untruth¬
fulness which bring discredit upon the
Union and its leadership.” The company
also claimed Local 248 designed these
flyers to 4 4 mislead employes into sup¬
porting a strike” and that the local was
4 ‘trying to do this by the propaganda
method.” From the beginning of the
strike, the company's rhetoric was inflam¬
matory; as the strike wore on, the inten¬
sity of the propaganda increased greatly. 13
In the Wisconsin CIO News: Local 248
Edition , Local 248 printed responses to
the Company letters and to the articles
published in the local newspapers. Besides
appealing to union membership through
these rebuttals, Local 248 printed a book
of labor poetry entitled The Pavement
Trail. The volume came out in June of
1946 and is a good barometer of employee
attitudes at the time of the strike. The
following example is a satirical profile of
Harold “Buck” Story, Allis-Chalmers'
executive attorney and labor policy
engineer.
Ode to Buck Story
Buck’s pictures lately
So royal and stately
Have enhanced our newspaper pages.
No use denying
Old Buck keeps trying
To look like the King of the Sages.
Buck’s quite a guy
But there’s more meets the eye
In sizing up this venerable gent.
He’s tried since the beginning
To give the Unions a skinning;
He’s after organized labor hell bent.
Buck’s toothy grin
Is misleading as sin;
He wants the Union forever dissolved.
Don’t let him succeed
’Cause brother you’ll bleed
All, or nothing at all, he’s resolved.
His platinum locks
And loud-colored socks
Could easily put you off guard.
But brother, don’t turn
Or your tail-end he’ll burn;
He wants Unionism feathered and tarred.
He’s a right smart dresser
And at tricks a good guesser
To the public he appears ready and willing.
Old Buck would be good
Were he in Hollywood
As a villain he’d get a number one
billing. 14
Besides taking jabs at leading Allis-
Chalmers’ executives, poems and prose in
The Pavement Trail also satirized the
company’s anti-union stance, explained
their unwillingness to bargain, and served
as rousing shows of union solidarity.
After the publication of The Pavement
Trail, Allis-Chalmers responded with let¬
ters to its employees explaining the com¬
pany’s position on the maintenance-of-
membership clause and the modification
of grievance procedures. In both cases the
company demonstrated its desire to main¬
tain control over its employees and the
shop floor without having to contend with
Local 248. The company maintained that
it should have the final say in the case of
dismissals and that employees should feel
free to come to their foreman with a pro¬
duction problem before seeking a union
steward. From a union perspective, the
problem with the foreman’s maintenance
of control over the initial step in the
grievance procedure was that it did not
protect employees from being coerced
back to work or prevent the foreman
from simply denying workers’ com¬
plaints. In September 1946, the letters
sent out by Allis-Chalmers changed tone.
Instead of continuing to outline the com¬
pany’s stance on contractual differences,
the letters informed employees that other
plants were already returning to work
after having settled and that some of the
West Allis works’ employees were asking,
“Can I go back to work?”15
23
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
24
1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
September 1946 marked the beginning
of a more urgent phase in the rhetorical
battle of the strike. It was in September
that the Milwaukee Sentinel began run¬
ning a fifty-nine-day series of articles ex¬
amining Communist involvement in the
Wisconsin State CIO Council and the
Milwaukee County CIO Council. The ar¬
ticles were signed by “John Sentinel,”
which was “supposedly the pseudonym
for a Sentinel reporter,” but was actually
the pseudonym for an Allis-Chalmers
researcher. As the largest CIO union in
the state, Local 248 was involved in shap¬
ing the policies of both CIO councils. For
instance, Local 248 's president, Robert
Ruse, was also president of the Milwaukee
County CIO Council. Not only did the
state and county CIO organizations come
under attack, but so did Local 248' s
leadership. Using an old offensive tactic,
Allis-Chalmers and the municipal police
worked closely with the press to construct
cases that would incriminate the “Com¬
munists” within Local 248 and its leader¬
ship.16
In October, even though picketing
workers had told Walter Geist to “save
your postage,” Allis-Chalmers continued
sending letters trying to start a back-to-
work movement. One letter claimed that
over 2,500 had already returned to work.
Despite having been on strike for five
months, Local 248 's membership rallied
around the returning Harold Christoffel,
Local 24 8’ s honorary president and
founder, who had just returned from
military duty. The strike would continue
for another six months.
In the middle of October, the company
mailed a pamphlet to its employees; the
pamphlet cover stated, “Principle repre¬
sented: COMMUNIST” and then asked,
“Would you sign YOUR name under
this?” The pamphlets were a collection of
selected gubernatorial nomination papers
for Sigmund E. Eisenscher, whose sup¬
porters had circulated his nomination
papers on the Allis-Chalmers' picket line.
Members of Local 248 who had signed the
papers had their signatures pinpointed on
the nomination papers and, on the facing
page, found their full names with a per¬
sonal sketch outlined in a bold red block.
Allis-Chalmers' management accepted
this as proof that Local 248' s most active
members were Communists. 17
In the next issue of the Wisconsin CIO
News , members of Local 248 explained
their signatures:
“I signed because I believe anyone who
wants to run for office has a right to. . .
“Since when is it illegal to sign nomina¬
tion papers? I signed all kinds of nomina¬
tion papers this year-— for Republicans,
Democrats and Socialists, and the company
didn’t single me out for signing them. ...”
“I believe in democracy, and that means
free elections and the right of people of all
political beliefs to run for office. That’s
why I signed Eisenscher’s papers. . . .”18
These statements were not given the press
circulation that the Communist charges
received in area and national papers. The
Milwaukee area, as well as the nation, was
exposed chiefly to media stories that were
based on information furnished by Allis-
Chalmers. As the company's media cam¬
paign picked up, the local's popular sup¬
port dropped.
In the first issue of November, the
Wisconsin CIO News: Local 248 Edition
carried a cartoon entitled “Time Stands
Still,” which equated Allis-Chalmers'
management with the witch hunters of
Salem. Still, the paper's sardonic humor
could not counter Allis-Chalmers' public
press charges against Local 248 's leader¬
ship, waning popular support, and drop¬
ping strike contributions. It is at this point
that the lack of support from Local 248 's
international became critical. The UAW's
newly elected president, Walter Reuther,
in order to gain his office had pledged to
purge the UAW ranks of Communists— in
spite of his own leftist sympathies. Be-
25
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
cause of this pledge and, perhaps even
more important, because he could not set
aside his personal loathing of Local 248 ’s
founder and honorary president, Harold
Christoffel, or his “machine,’ * Reuther
withheld the international’s full sup¬
port.19
Even the CIO offered Local 248 only
halfhearted support. Philip Murray, the
CIO’s president, had never been able to
work with Communist members of the
CIO in the same detached manner that
former CIO president John L. Lewis had.
Lewis used to “wave aside charges that he
was harboring Communists with the com¬
ment, ‘I do not turn my organizers or CIO
members upside down and shake them to
see what kind of literature falls out of
their pockets.’” Murray, being staunchly
conservative and a devout Catholic, was
repulsed by CIO Communists and their
fellow travelers. In fact, Murray and his
friends often sneered at “pinkos” like
Reuther. Following the war, there was
growing pressure on Murray to purge the
CIO.20
As the 1946-1947 strike reached its
climax in the final months of 1946, Walter
Reuther offered the local the assistance of
the UAW’s former president and current
vice-president, R. J. Thomas, although
Reuther himself did not become directly
involved. Philip Murray also failed to
take an active role in the local’s fight and,
for the most part, remained aloof from
the strike. This lack of wholehearted, visi¬
ble support from both the UAW and the
CIO was another factor contributing to
the eventual loss of the strike. It seemed
as though the national union leaders
viewed Local 248 ’s desperate situation
as an opportunity to oust the union’s
leaders.
At the beginning of November, R. J.
Thomas came to West Allis in order to
give the public a show of UAW support.
November was marked by the most public
displays of the local’s power and shows of
force by the municipal police: large
parades were organized, more strikers
were placed on picket duty, and the police
force became more visible. The UAW and
the CIO called on other unions to offer
their support to the striking Allis-
Chalmers’ workers. Members of area
locals would often join strikers on the
picket line or parade. The UAW’s largest
local, Local 600 from the Ford plant in
Michigan, sent its key union members
with their “sound truck” so that Local
248 would get an opportunity to tell its
story to the Milwaukee public.
R. J. Thomas also served as a
negotiator during the November talks
with Allis-Chalmers. Members of the
UAW’s executive board accused
the company of using the Communist
charges to sidestep the contractual issues
under contention. Even after talks were
moved to Chicago for the convenience of
the federal negotiators, the company re¬
mained “defiant” and in an off-the-
record comment said that “they had the
strike won; their propaganda barrage had
borne fruit and that public opinion was in
their favor.” The talks ended at the begin¬
ning of December; Thomas said that
bargaining with the company was like
“bargaining with a stone wall.” Addi¬
tional reports from UAW representatives
stated that employee wages at Allis-
Chalmers were below area industrial
wages and, again, stated that the com¬
pany was avoiding the real issues under
contention in favor of the Communist
“hype.”21
The strike continued into December
with little change. The number of dem¬
onstrations picked up and so did police in¬
volvement. There were incidents of vio¬
lence on the picket lines. In December,
Allis-Chalmers dismissed Robert Buse,
Local 248 ’s president, and Joseph Dom-
bek, Local 248’s vice-president, for mak¬
ing statements against the company. Fi¬
nally, at the end of the month, after a
26
1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
Taken during the height of picket-line violence in the winter of 1946, the photograph
was part of the evidence submitted by Allis-Chalmers during the 1947 congressional
hearings as purportedly showing Communist-inspired violence.
series of political maneuvers involving
charges of rigged elections, state CIO
positions were lost by officers sym¬
pathetic to Local 248. Letters from other
Allis-Chalmers’ locals continued to en¬
courage Local 248 to hold out even
though all other striking locals had been
forced to sign contracts in order to
preserve their unions. Despite the en¬
couragement from other locals, Local
248’s strike power was declining.
By January 1947, Allis-Chalmers re¬
fused to bargain with Local 248’s leader¬
ship and refused Thomas’ offer to submit
the dispute to arbitration. The company
waited until an independent union formed
and called the Wisconsin Employment
Relations Board (WERE) for a represen¬
tative vote within Local 248. Following
this direct challenge to Local 248’s
bargaining and plant authority, telegrams
were sent and announcements made in
support of the local by the UAW’s and the
CIO’s two most obviously silent mem¬
bers: Philip Murray and Walter Reuther
offered the local encouragement and also
told strikers that only a vote for Local 248
would win the strike. After the local won
the WERB election by only a narrow mar¬
gin, some ballots were challenged by the
WERB, of which Harold Story, the Com¬
pany’s attorney, was a member, accord¬
ing to the local’s newspaper. Local 248
was again confronted with the possibility
of having to face another election.22
While Local 248 held its officer elec¬
tions during the last part of February and
saw all of its incumbent officers re¬
elected, Allis-Chalmers, working in con¬
junction with the editor of the Milwaukee
Sentinel, invited the Committee on Un-
American Activities and the Committee
27
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
on Education and Labor to investigate
what the company alleged to be the Com¬
munist leadership of Local 248. The hear¬
ings before the Committee on Un-Ameri¬
can Activities began in Washington, D.C.
at the end of February and concentrated
on interviewing opponents of Local 248
and its leadership. At the beginning of
March, hearings began in Milwaukee
before the Committee on Education and
Labor, which focused on Local 248’s
most active members. While investigating
Communism in American labor unions,
the hearings concluded, based on guilt
by association, that certain members of
Local 248 were Communists. Both the
Milwaukee Sentinel (a member of the
Hearst syndicate) and the Milwaukee
Journal gave the hearings primary
coverage. The final cooperative push by
Allis -Chalmers’ management, the Mil¬
waukee Sentinel , and the Congressional
committees played a major part in break¬
ing the strike and led to the expulsion of
Local 248’s leadership.23
By the beginning of March, there were
an estimated 5,000 workers back in the
West Allis plant. Local 248 continued the
strike, despite the continued attacks from
Allis -Chalmers’ management, the local
and national press, and Congressional
hearings, and despite only halfhearted
support from the UAW and the CIO.
Moreover, after the state and county CIO
conventions elected less sympathetic of¬
ficers, the strikers faced diminished sup¬
port from their own area locals. At the
end of March, Harold Christoffel was
discharged by Allis-Chalmers, and Local
248 sent its officers to meet with UAW-
CIO heads in order to discuss proposals to
break the stalemate. On 24 March 1947,
employees returned to work without a
contract.
On the day that the strike ended,
Walter Geist sent a letter to all employees
announcing “THE STRIKE IS OVER!”
and outlining, once again, the company
position:
... we will continue to fight with all our
strength against those who try to undermine
the relations between you and the Com¬
pany.24
The eleven-month strike had been a con¬
test over the control of employee loyalty
and the West Allis plant. Yet, most of the
rhetoric surrounding the strike concerned
itself with the Communist issue: the com¬
pany’s accusations and the local’s refuta¬
tions.
Although the Wisconsin CIO News
reported “248 Surprise Move Throws
A-C in Panic,” the decision to return to
work without a settlement was, in fact, a
last effort to save Local 248 before the
company called another WERB represen¬
tative election.25 In a letter to Allis-
Chalmers’ employees, Walter Geist
summed up the strike in this fashion:
As the Company prospers we will prosper
with it. By the Company I mean every man
and woman on the payroll because you are
the Company. You are Allis-Chalmers.
Together we are a big family— there are
29,000 of us.
In the lives of nearly every family there
comes a time at home when little frictions
develop. We recognize these things as a nor¬
mal part of living together, but we don’t let
people on the outside of our own family cir¬
cle magnify these differences. . . .
... It is important, however, that all of us
keep in mind the motives of those who at¬
tempt to magnify our differences in an ef¬
fort to destroy our friendly relations and to
promote an outside selfish interest.26
The letter’s tone indicates that even after
the strike Allis-Chalmers’ president still
desired to foster a paternalistic company-
employee relationship. From Geist’s per¬
spective, Local 248 and its leadership were
outsiders who had disrupted the develop¬
ment of an Allis-Chalmers’ employee
28
1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
family. By mid-April, over ninety of
Local 248 ’s most active members, most of
whom were longstanding Allis-Chalmers’
employees, were dismissed by the com¬
pany in an effort to remove the perceived
threat. In a Milwaukee Journal inter¬
view, Walter Geist said that it was a
“tonic” for him to see the plant running
again and did not feel there would be any
more difficulties now that the “trouble¬
makers” were gone.27
Because some of the dismissed union
members were also those who were elected
to bargain with Allis-Chalmers, the com¬
pany’s management refused to bargain
with the selected committee. Walter
Reuther, UAW president, came to
Milwaukee to discuss an agreement with
Allis-Chalmers without notifying Local
248’s leadership, thus undermining any
hope of recovery that the local’s leader¬
ship had harbored. Shortly after the
UAW’s fall convention in 1947, Reuther
placed Local 248 under administrator-
ship.
In November 1947, Pat Greathouse was
chosen to serve as Local 248’s ad¬
ministrator. In February 1948, Reuther
extended his administratorship to ensure
that the “recalcitrant local” would be
brought into his camp. Before his depar¬
ture in July, Greathouse had scheduled
new officer elections, appointed interim
stewards, and had filed charges against
thirteen former Local 248 officers for
misappropriation of funds. Then, in that
same year, after new union officers con¬
ducted an inquiry, Harold Christoffel and
key members of his administration were
expelled from Local 248. Public opinion
had changed. And Allis-Chalmers had
succeeded in forcing the removal of “the
devastating destructiveness of Communist
union leadership” in Local 248.
Endnotes
1 Harold Story, “Address to the National
Association of Manufacturers”; cited in
Robert W. Ozanne, “The Effects of Com¬
munist Leadership on American Labor
Unions” Ph.D. dissertation, University of
Wisconsin — Madison, 1954, pp. 232-233.
2 Ozanne, “The Effects of Communist
Leadership,” p. 189.
3 Bert Cochran, Labor and Communism:
The Conflict that Shaped American Unions
Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1977,
p. 169.
4 Stephen Meyer, “The State and the
Workplace: New Deal Labor Policy, the
UAW, and Allis-Chalmers in the 1930s and
1940s,” paper prepared for NEH-funded Re¬
search Conference, Dekalb, Illinois, 10-12
October, 1984, pp. 15-16.
5 Harvey Levenstein, Communism, Anti¬
communism, and the CIO. Westport, Connec¬
ticut: Greenwood Press, 1981, pp. 162, 174.
6 See Wisconsin CIO News: Local 248 Edi¬
tion, 4 January 1946, p. 8; 15 February 1946,
p. 8; Cochran, Labor and Communism, p.
272; Walter F. Peterson, An Industrial Heri¬
tage: ATlis-Chalmers Corporation. Milwau¬
kee: Milwaukee County Historical Society,
1976, p. 343.
7 Ozanne, “The Effects of Communist
Leadership,” p. 235.
8 David M. Oshinsky, Senator Joseph Mc¬
Carthy and the American Labor Movement.
Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1976,
p. 30.
9 See David M. Oshinsky, A Conspiracy So
Immense: The World of Joe McCarthy. New
York: Free Press, 1983. Chapter Six for a
discussion of the Red Bogey in America.
10 Lawrence S. Wittner, Cold War America:
From Hiroshima to Watergate. New York:
Praeger Publishers, 1974, p. 88.
11 Peterson, A n Industrial Heritage, p. 345.
12 Walter Geist, Allis-Chalmers: A Brief
History of 103 Years of Production. Prince¬
ton: Princeton University Press for New¬
comen Publications, 1950, p. 23.
13 See Walter Geist to All Men and Women
of Allis-Chalmers, 17 April 1946; W. C. Van
Cleaf to Allis-Chalmers Workers’ Union, 25
April 1946, Box 1, Folder 5, Don D. Lescohier
Papers, Wisconsin State Historical Society,
Madison, Wisconsin.
14 From The Pavement Trail: A Collection
of Poetry and Prose from the Allis-Chalmers
Picket Lines, 1946, Adolph Germer Papers,
WSHS, Madison, Wisconsin.
15 See W. C. Van Cleaf to All Employes at
the West Allis Works, 19 June 1946; 25 July
1946; 20 September 1946, Box 1, Folder 5,
29
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
DDL Papers, WSHS, Madison, Wisconsin.
16 See Levenstein, Communism, Anticom¬
munism, and the CIO, pp. 236, 248 and Coch¬
ran, Labor and Communism, p. 273.
17 The majority of secondary sources that
discuss either the 1941 or 1946-1947 strikes at
Allis-Chalmers work under the assumption
that officers of Local 248 were Communists.
These same sources cite Robert Ozanne’s dis¬
sertation as their major source, but also cite
newspaper articles, Congressional hearings, or
the gubernatorial nomination papers cir¬
culated on the Allis-Chalmers’ picket lines
during the 1946-1947 strike. In his 1954
dissertation, Ozanne uses all of the sources
mentioned as well as anonymous interviews in
an attempt to prove that Harold Christoffel
and members of his administration were Com¬
munists.
Ozanne failed to take into consideration
that the area and national press and Congres¬
sional committees worked in close association
with Allis-Chalmers, which had something to
gain by ousting the longstanding leadership of
Local 248. Ozanne’s reliance on anonymous
interviews which, given the time frame and the
fact that they were probably granted by rivals
of the Christoffel administration, may be
discredited as well. The one piece of evidence
that may have proved convincing to Ozanne
was the gubernatorial nomination papers that
members of Local 248 signed. He did not con¬
sider, however, that nomination papers can be
signed by any voter of any party affiliation
and that they were circulated on the picket
lines during the 1946-1947 strike. And as Sig¬
mund G. Eisenscher, the Communist guberna¬
torial candidate, points out in a letter to R. J.
Thomas: “The only persons involved who had
in any way pledged themselves to support my
candidacy as such were those who circulated
the petitions — not the signers.”*
* (Sigmund G. Eisenscher to R. J. Thomas,
14 February 1947, Box 1, Folder “Correspon¬
dence, 1941-1951,” Fred Basset Blair Papers,
WSHS, Madison, Wisconsin.)
18 Wisconsin CIO News, 18 October 1946,
p. 1.
19 Levenstein, Communism, Anticom¬
munism, and the CIO, pp. 83-84, 199-200.
20 Cochran, Labor and Communism, pp.
97, 265-267.
21 See WICIO: 248, 8 November 1946, p. 8;
WI CIO News, 15 November 1946, p. 3; 22
November 1946, pp. 1, 3; 29 November 1946,
p. 3.
22 See WICIO News, 10 January 1947, p. 3;
17 January 1947, pp. 1, 4, 4A; 31 January
1947, p. 3; 14 February 1947, p. 3; 21
February 1947, p. 1.
23 See WI CIO News, 14 February 1947, p.
1; WICIO: 248, 28 February 1947, p. 8; Lev¬
enstein, Communsim, Anticommunism, and
the CIO, pp. 242, 246.
24 Walter Geist to All Employes at West
Allis Works, 24 March 1947, Box 1, Folder 5,
DDL Papers, WSHS, Madison, Wisconsin.
25 See WI CIO News, 28 March 1947, p. 2
and Cochran, Labor and Communism, p. 275.
26 Walter Geist to All Employes at West
Allis Works, 4 April 1947, Box 1, Folder 5,
DDL Papers, WSHS, Madison, Wisconsin.
27 See WICIO: 248, 11 April 1947, p. 8; WI
CIO News, 18 April 1947, p. 1; and Milwau¬
kee Journal, Business Section, 6 April 1947, p.
11.
Primary Sources
In order to provide a contrast and comple¬
ment to secondary sources that examine the
1946-1947 strike at Allis-Chalmers, this
paper’s primary sources are The Wisconsin
CIO News 1945-1948 and The Wisconsin CIO
News: Local 248 Edition 1945-1947, Local
248’s press. The Milwaukee Journal 1946-
1947 and the Milwaukee Sentinel 1946-1947
were also consulted, but are used thoroughly
in Ozanne’s dissertation. Manuscript collec¬
tions of Fred Basset Blair, Adolph Germer,
Don D. Lescohier, and Harold W. Story were
also consulted. These collections are housed
by the Wisconsin State Historical Society in
Madison. The Lescohier Papers contain the
official letters of Allis-Chalmers that are ad¬
dressed to its employees and the Local during
the strike years; the Story Papers contain the
official testimony of Allis-Chalmers’ officials
before the Congressional committees in 1947.
Government documents consulted were the
Congressional hearings before the Committee
on Un-American Activities, Hearings Regard¬
ing Communism in Labor Unions in the
United States, 80th Cong., 1st sess., 1947 and
Congressional hearings before the Committee
on Education and Labor, Amendments to the
National Labor Relations Act, Hearings on
Bills to Amend and Repeal the National Labor
Relations Act, and for Other Purposes, 80th
Cong., 1st sess., 1947.
Secondary Sources
The most thorough accounts of the 1946-
1947 strike at Allis-Chalmers are covered in
30
1946-1947 Strike at Allis-Chalmers
three unpublished sources: Robert W.
Ozanne’s 1954 Ph.D. dissertation, “The Ef¬
fect of Communist Leadership on American
Labor Unions,” for the University of
Wisconsin-Madison; Richard L. Pifer’s 1983
Ph.D. dissertation, “Milwaukee Labor Dur¬
ing World War II: A Social History of the
Homefront,” for UW-Madison; and Stephen
Meyer’s 1984 paper, “The State and the Work
Place: New Deal Labor Policy, the UAW, and
Allis-Chalmers in the 1930s and 1940s,”
prepared for an NEH-Funded Research Con¬
ference. Ozanne’s dissertation is the Local 248
primer, providing valuable background in¬
formation on the history of Local 248 and its
relations with Allis-Chalmers, but the work
fails to maintain a scholarly perspective in its
commentary about the 1941 strike and subse¬
quent events. Pifer’s dissertation provides the
most thorough coverage of wartime relations
between Local 248 and Allis-Chalmers’ man¬
agement, placing the conflicts in the context of
an industrial struggle, not a struggle against
Communism. Likewise, Meyer’s paper high¬
lights the Allis-Chalmers/Local 248 conflict as
a struggle over managerial control. Meyer
proves the best secondary source for informa¬
tion and commentary on the 1946-1947 strike.
Published secondary sources that provide
peripheral coverage of the strike or more
general histories of labor in Wisconsin include
Thomas W. Gavett’s Development of the
Labor Movement in Milwaukee, Howell John
Harris’ The Right to Manage: Industrial Rela¬
tions Policies of American Business in the
1940s’ Robert W. Ozanne’s The Labor Move¬
ment in Wisconsin: A History, and Walter
Peterson’s An Industrial Heritage: Allis-
Chalmers Corporation, the official history of
Allis-Chalmers.
Both Bert Cochran’s Labor and Commu¬
nism: The Conflict that Shaped American
Unions and Harvey Levenstein’s Commu¬
nism, Anticommunism, and the CIO are ex¬
cellent histories of the growth of American
labor unions and leftists’ involvement. Both
books also provide insights into the roles of
the UAW and the CIO in determining the out¬
come of the 1946-1947 Allis-Chalmers strike.
The books Senator Joseph McCarthy and the
American Labor Movement, A Conspiracy So
Immense: The World of Joe McCarthy, both
by David M. Oshinsky, and Cold War Amer¬
ica: From Hiroshima to Watergate by Law¬
rence S. Wittner, examine the national climate
at the time of the strike. Oshinsky and Wittner
provide insights into the roots and causes of
America’s second postwar Red Scare and
America’s reactions to the perceived Com¬
munist threat.
31
Fishes of the Upper Trout River,
Vilas County, Wisconsin
John Lyons
Abstract. The Trout River, a small warm-water river in north-central Wisconsin, con¬
tains a rich assemblage of fishes over the upper 7.5 kilometers of its length. The river has
at least 36 species, 62% of the total number reported for Vilas County. One short stretch
contains at least 29 species and another contains at least 25, which is greater than the
number encountered at over 99% of 1151 stretches on similarly sized streams and rivers
in southern and western Wisconsin. Four of the species found in the Trout River, the
pugnose shiner (Notropis anogenus), the greater redhorse (Moxostoma valenciennsi),
the northern longear sunfish (Lepomis megalotis pelastes), and the least darter
(Etheostoma microperca), are rare in all parts of Wisconsin, while two others, the
banded killifish (Fundulus diaphanus) and the fantail darter (Etheostoma flabellare), are
rare in north-central Wisconsin. The Trout River should be managed primarily to pro¬
tect its unusual fish fauna and wilderness characteristics and secondarily to increase its
recreational use.
North-central Wisconsin has a large
number and diversity of lakes,
streams, and rivers. The fish populations
of the lakes have been heavily studied
since the turn of the century, but the fish
populations of the streams and rivers have
received much less attention. Studies of
streams have been restricted for the most
part to waters cold enough to support
trout. Warm-water streams and rivers in
the region have been essentially ignored
by biologists; species lists for most of
these streams and rivers are incomplete,
and in many cases even the presence or
absence of major gamefish species is
uncertain (Black et al. 1963).
Fishing pressure is heavy in north-
central Wisconsin, and many lakes in the
region are crowded with anglers, boaters,
and swimmers during certain times of the
John Lyons has been interested in fish for as long as
he can remember. He received his BS degree in
Biology from Union College, Schenectady, New
York, and his MS and PhD degrees in zoology from
the University of Wisconsin-Madison. He is
employed as a fisheries research biologist by the
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources and
acts as Curator of Fishes at the University of
Wisconsin Zoological Museum.
year. One possible way to relieve this con¬
gestion, as well as to increase recreational
opportunities, is to develop and promote
fishing and boating in warm-water
streams and rivers (Wisconsin Depart¬
ment of Natural Resources 1979). At pres¬
ent, warm-water streams and rivers in
north-central Wisconsin are little-used
relative to lakes. Development and pro¬
motion of fishing opportunities in these
streams and rivers requires an evaluation
of their potential fishery resources. The
first part of such an evaluation is a
description of fish species composition
and relative abundance.
Data on the fishes of warm-water
streams and rivers in north-central Wis¬
consin is also necessary in order to
preserve rare and endangered species. The
distribution and abundance in north-
central Wisconsin of the fishes on Wis¬
consin’s Endangered, Threatened, and
Watch Lists is poorly known. Elsewhere
in Wisconsin most of the fishes on these
lists are limited to warm-water streams
and rivers (Becker 1983).
In this paper, I present the results of the
first detailed survey of the fishes of the
33
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 1. Map of the Trout River and vicinity, showing sampling locations. For clarity, only
rivers and lakes directly connected with the Trout River are shown.
Trout River, a small warm- water river in
north-central Wisconsin. Almost nothing
is known about the fishes of this river,
although the high potential value of the
river for angling was recognized over
twenty years ago (Black et al. 1963).
Study Area
The Trout River is located in central
and western Vilas County (Fig. 1). The
river arises from Trout Lake and flows 22
kilometers west and north to its con¬
fluence with Manitowish Lake and the
Manitowish River. Water from the Trout
River ultimately empties into the Missis¬
sippi River. Over the upper 1 1 kilometers
of its length the Trout River receives
water from three permanent tributaries,
whereas over the lower 9 kilometers the
river flows through three lakes. Four per-
34
Fishes of the Upper Trout River
manent tributaries drain into Trout Lake
and could be considered the headwaters
of the Trout River.
I sampled only in the upper 7.5 kilo¬
meters of the Trout River, from the outlet
at Trout Lake to a logging road bridge
located about 2 kilometers upstream of
the County Highway H bridge (Fig. 1). I
sampled within four stretches: 1) a 0.5
kilometer stretch between Trout Lake and
the State Highway 51 bridge (Highway 51
stretch), 2) a 1 kilometer stretch just
above the river crossing at the Trout Lake
Golf Course (golf course stretch), 3) a 1
kilometer stretch adjacent to the wilder¬
ness campsites along the river (campsite
stretch), and a 0.5 kilometer stretch just
above the logging road bridge (logging
road stretch). Within each stretch, I
sampled a total of approximately 200
meters of the river.
The Highway 51 stretch consists of
short deep pools alternating with short
deep riffles and runs. Maximum depth of
pools is 1.8 meters, while the average
width of the river is about 8 meters.
Substrate is gravel and cobbles with some
sand. Large woody debris are common in
and along the river, but macrophytes are
rare. Conifer forests line both banks;
these banks are low and marshy. Current
is swift (up to 1 m/sec) and strong.
The golf course stretch contains varied
habitat. Some parts of the stretch are
slow-moving (<0.1 m/sec), 15 to 25
meters wide, and up to 2 meters deep. At
the head of the stretch the river has
formed a pond-like area of several hec¬
tares. Bottom substrates are sand and
silt, both submerged and emergent macro¬
phytes are common, and the banks are
low, marshy, and lined with shrubs. Other
parts of the golf course stretch are similar
to the Highway 51 stretch with alternating
pools, riffles, and runs, and areas of fast
current. These parts of the golf course
stretch average about 12 meters in width
and have a maximum depth of 1.2 meters.
Substrate is gravel and cobbles, macro¬
phytes are scarce, and the banks are lined
with a mixed hardwood-conifer forest.
The campsite stretch has few riffles and
consists mainly of long pools and runs
with moderate current (0.1 to 0.6 m/sec).
Width averages 12 meters and maximum
depth is 1.3 meters. Substrate is sand and
gravel, with a few cobbles and boulders.
Large woody debris and submerged and
emergent macrophytes are common. A
mixed conifer-hardwood forest lines the
banks.
The logging road stretch also has few
riffles and a moderate current. Width
averages 1 1 meters and maximum depth is
2.2 meters. Substrate is sand and gravel,
with silt in areas of slower current.
Submerged macrophytes are common and
emergent macrophytes line the banks. A
mixed conifer-hardwood forest covers the
upland away from the river.
Water quality in the Trout River is ex¬
cellent. The water in the river is very clear
and rarely becomes turbid, even after
heavy rains. The only permanent human
habitation along the upper part of the
river is the golf course, and here a buffer
zone of undisturbed vegetation appears to
minimize runoff and erosion into the
river. The forests in the vicinity of the
river are regularly logged, and erosion
from clear-cut areas could have a negative
impact on water quality. However, from
the appearance of the forests, the area
within a few hundred meters of the river
has not been logged in many years, so log¬
ging impacts on the river are probably
low. The Trout River has slightly alkaline
water, with a pH of 7.5, a methyl-orange
alkalinity of 41 mg/1, and a conductivity
of 87 umhos/cm (Black et al. 1963).
Methods and Materials
I sampled the Trout River for fish from
1980 through 1984, although I did not
sample every stretch in every year. All my
35
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
sampling occurred between mid-May and
early October.
I used a variety of gears to sample each
stretch. In riffles and other areas of swift
current, my primary sampling gears were
seines (3.2 or 6.4 mm stretch mesh) and a
direct-current backpack electroshocker.
In slower-moving water, I also used fyke
nets (0.8 m diameter hoops, 10 cm
throats, 6.4 mm stretch mesh, 4.6 m
leads), dip nets, minnow traps, angling,
and visual observations.
Effort and sampling techniques varied
from date to date and from stretch to
stretch. I expended the most sampling
effort at the Highway 51 and campsite
stretches, and the least at the golf course
stretch. My goal was not to collect de¬
tailed quantitative data during each day
of sampling, but rather to capture at least
one individual of each species present
within each stretch and to get a general
idea of their relative abundance. I had
three abundance categories: common— al¬
most always captured or observed, usu¬
ally in large numbers (>50 individuals);
present— regularly captured or observed,
but usually in low numbers (<10 indi¬
viduals); and uncommon — captured only
once or twice, and always in low numbers.
I identified to species and counted all
fish that I captured or observed. I pre¬
served one or more individuals of most
species that I captured and deposited
these specimens in the University of
Wisconsin Zoological Museum (UWZM).
I developed species lists and relative
abundances for each stretch based on my
collections, supplemented with collections
made by University of Wisconsin-Madi-
son Field Zoology students during the
1960s and 1970s [UWZM specimens and
the Wisconsin Department of Natural Re¬
sources (WDNR) Fish Distribution Sur¬
vey Database (Fago 1984)]. I also de¬
veloped species lists for areas upstream
(Trout Lake and tributaries) and down¬
stream (Manitowish Lake) of the Trout
River, using my own collections, collec¬
tions by other University of Wisconsin-
Madison and WDNR personnel, UWZM
specimens, the WDNR Fish Distribution
Survey Database, Greene (1935), Becker
(1983), and Lyons (1984). I also surveyed
or requested information on holdings of
Trout River fishes in the collections of the
Bell Museum of Natural History, Minne¬
apolis, Minnesota, the Milwaukee Public
Museum, the University of Michigan Mu¬
seum of Zoology, Ann Arbor, the Univer¬
sity of Wisconsin-Stevens Point Museum
of Natural History, and the United States
National Museum, Washington, D.C.
However, none of these museums had
specimens from the Trout River.
Results
I captured 36 species of fish, in 11
families, from the Trout River (Table 1).
The dominant families, in terms of
number of species, were Cyprinidae (14
species), Centrarchidae (6 species), and
Percidae (6 species). The dominant spe¬
cies, in terms of distribution and relative
abundance, were the common shiner and
the hornyhead chub (Table 2). The most
widespread and abundant panfish were
the rock bass and the yellow perch. I cap¬
tured many large rock bass and bluegills,
but relatively few large gamefish.
The 36 species that occur in the Trout
River represent 62% of the total number
of species known from Vilas County
(Greene 1935; Becker 1983; WDNR Fish
Distribution Survey Database, personal
observations). If species that are restricted
to lakes or cold water ( < 22 C) are not
counted, the percentage jumps to 73. Six¬
teen species reported from either up¬
stream or downstream from the Trout
River are absent from the Trout River
itself (Table 1); most of these species are
restricted to lakes or cold water.
The campsite stretch had 29 confirmed
species, while the logging road stretch had
25. Most stretches on similarly sized
36
Fishes of the Upper Trout River
streams and rivers in Wisconsin do not
have as many species. The WDNR Fish
Distribution Survey sampled 1151 stret¬
ches between 5 and 50 m in average width
throughout the southern and western
halves of Wisconsin, and only one stretch
(Mukwanago River, below Phantom
Lake, Waukesha County) had more than
29 species (WDNR Fish Distribution
Survey Database). Less than one percent
of the 1151 stretches had 25 or more
species.
The Trout River contains four species,
the pugnose shiner, the greater redhorse,
the northern longear sunfish, and the least
darter, that are rare in Wisconsin (Becker
1983, personal communication; WDNR
Fish Distribution Survey Database). The
pugnose shiner is on the watch list in
Wisconsin (WDNR Bureau of Endan¬
gered Resources unpublished data), which
means that, while not in immediate dan¬
ger of extirpation, this species is rare in
the state and needs to be regularly moni¬
tored to determine whether its population
remains stable (Les 1979). The pugnose
shiner is found only in the north-central
United States and southern Ontario and is
nowhere common (Gilbert 1980). This
species typically occurs in clear, weedy
streams and lakes. These types of habitats
are common in north-central Wisconsin,
but, excluding one individual that was
caught in Manitowish Lake, the nearest
other records of this species are hundreds
of kilometers to the south and west of the
Table 1. Fish species reported as present from selected areas of the Trout River
drainage basin. See Text for sources of data. A “?” indicates that the species is
reported or suspected to be present, but is not confirmed.
37
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Table 1. (Continued)
38
Fishes of the Upper Trout River
Trout River (Becker 1983; WDNR Fish
Distribution Survey Database).
The greater redhorse is also on the
watch list in Wisconsin (Les 1979). This
species is found in the north-central and
northeastern United States and southern
Canada, and like the pugnose shiner, is
nowhere particularly common (Jenkins
1980). The greater redhorse occurs mainly
in small to medium-sized warm-water
rivers. While these types of rivers are
common in north-central Wisconsin, the
nearest other records of this species, ex¬
cluding Trout Lake (Greene 1935; per¬
sonal observations), are hundreds of
kilometers to the south and west of the
Table 2. Relative abundance of fish species in four stretches of the Trout River.
C = common or abundant; P - present in moderate numbers; U = uncommon or rare;
? = suspected or reported as present, but no specimens were observed or captured.
39
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Trout River (Becker 1983; WDNR Fish
Distribution Survey Database).
The least darter is also on the watch list
in Wisconsin (Les 1979). This species is
found in the north-central United States
and southern Canada and is fairly com¬
mon in parts of Michigan (Burr 1980).
The least darter occurs in small to
medium-sized, clear, weedy streams, and
again, while this is a common habitat in
north-central Wisconsin, the nearest
records of this species are hundreds of
kilometers to the south and west of the
Trout River (Becker 1983; WDNR Fish
Distribution Survey Database).
The northern longear sunfish is threat¬
ened in Wisconsin, which means that this
species may become endangered and ulti¬
mately extirpated if existing populations
are not protected (Les 1979). This species
is common throughout the central and
south-central United States, and the
northern edge of the main body of its
range is in southeastern Wisconsin (Bauer
1980, Becker 1983). However, isolated
populations exist (or formerly existed) in
northwestern and northeastern Wiscon¬
sin, central Minnesota, northern Michi¬
gan, and southern Ontario; the Trout
River population can be added to this list
of isolated populations. The northern
longear sunfish typically occurs in clear,
medium-sized streams or small rivers,
which are common in north-central Wis¬
consin, but the nearest populations of this
species are 200 kilometers to the east and
west of the Trout River (Becker 1983;
WDNR Fish Distribution Survey Data¬
base). One northern longear sunfish and
one northern longear X unknown sunfish
hybrid were captured from Manitowish
Lake during extensive sampling of the
lake in the early 1980s (Harland Carlson,
WDNR-Woodruff, personal communica¬
tion).
Two species that reach the edge of their
range and are rare in north-central
Wisconsin, the banded killifish and the
fantail darter, occur in low numbers in the
Trout River. Both species are common in
southern Wisconsin (Becker 1983). The
fantail darter is also found in low num¬
bers in Trout Lake, whereas the banded
killifish is found in low numbers in
Stevensons and Mann Creeks, two tribu¬
taries of Trout Lake (Greene 1935;
WDNR Fish Distribution Survey Data¬
base; personal observations).
Discussion
The Trout River contains a diverse as¬
semblage of fishes. This diversity prob¬
ably results, at least in part, from two fac¬
tors, the essentially pristine condition of
the river, and the wide variety of habitat
present. Excluding a minimal amount of
runoff from the golf course and logging
operations in the watershed, the Trout
River is not adversely affected by human
activities. Fish species richness in streams
generally declines with increasing environ¬
mental degradation (Karr 1981). Fish spe¬
cies richness in streams is usually high in
areas with diverse habitat (Gorman and
Karr 1978), particularly when cover and
large woody debris are common (Anger-
meier and Karr 1984). The Trout River
contains a wide range of habitat types,
and macrophytes, boulders, and large
woody debris are common in many areas.
The Trout River also has an unusual com¬
bination of both high, medium, and low
gradient stretches; diversity of gradient is
directly related to fish species distribution
and richness in streams (Burton and
Odum 1945, Hocutt and Stauffer 1975).
The species richness of the Trout River
is probably higher than my sampling in¬
dicated. WDNR surveys during the early
1960s reported muskellunge and walleye
from the river below the County Highway
H bridge. These two species probably oc¬
cur in small numbers in the stretches that I
sampled; my sampling gears were not par-
40
Fishes of the Upper Trout River
ticularly effective for large gamefish.
Golden and silver redhorse have been
reported (Harland Carlson, WDNR-
Woodruff, personal communication) but
not confirmed from Trout Lake, and
silver redhorse are present in the
Manitowish River and Manitowish Lake
(WDNR Fish Distribution Survey speci¬
mens). I have observed large aggregations
of spawning redhorse in the Trout River
in the spring, and I would not be surprised
if these aggregations contained silver and
possibly golden redhorse. A troutperch
was captured at the outlet of Trout Lake
in 1908 (UWZM specimen), and this spe¬
cies, which is common in Trout Lake,
may occasionally enter the river. During
the early 1980s, a lake whitefish used the
Trout River to travel between Trout Lake
and Little Star Lake (Lyons 1984). Black
crappie may also enter the river from
Trout or Manitowish Lakes.
The Trout River contains several spe¬
cies that, excluding other waters in the
Trout River drainage, have not otherwise
been reported from within at least 200
kilometers of Vilas County. Yet many
drainages in north-central Wisconsin
besides the Trout River appear to contain
habitat suitable for at least some of these
species. This suggests that the Trout River
drainage may be an unusual environment,
with some combination of characteristics
that does not exist elsewhere in the region.
Conversely, the absence of records of
these species from outside the Trout River
drainage may reflect the lack of sampling
of warm-water streams and rivers in
north-central Wisconsin, rather than a
true absence of these species.
Management Recommendations
The Trout River currently has very little
fishing pressure. During all my sampling I
saw only three groups of anglers and one
group of bait minnow collectors. Clearly
the river can support greater fishing
pressure. Large panfish are common in
the river. Although relatively few large
gamefish occupy the river, those present
add diversity to angling opportunities on
the river and give the angler at least a
chance of catching a large fish.
One of the reasons for the low fishing
pressure on the Trout River is a lack of ac¬
cess. The only easy public access points in
the 7.5 km area that I sampled are the
Highway 51 and the logging road bridges.
The easiest and probably most popular
way to fish the river is from a canoe,
floating the river between these two
bridges. Fishing float trips on the river are
particularly enjoyable because the ab¬
sence of human habitations or people
along the shore gives the river a “wilder¬
ness” quality that is all too rare in most
parts of Wisconsin. Thus, I suggest that
efforts to increase angling on the river
focus on encouraging more fishing from
canoes, rather than increasing the number
of access points.
Given the species-rich fish assemblage
and the rare species present, I recommend
that the Trout River be managed primar¬
ily for preservation of the existing fish
assemblage, and only secondarily for fish¬
ing. It would be a tragedy if some of the
rare fish in the river were eliminated
because of a poorly conceived fish stock¬
ing or habitat modification designed to
improve fishing.
Although much of the river’s watershed
is state forest land, lumbering in the
riparian zone or along tributaries is a
potential threat to the continued integrity
of the Trout River ecosystem. To protect
the fish fauna and undegraded character
of the river, I recommend that the portion
of the river that I sampled be considered
for inclusion in the Wisconsin Natural
Areas Program. If designated as a Nat¬
ural Area, the Trout River would be pro¬
tected from most sources of environmen¬
tal damage and would be likely to retain
41
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
its current fish assemblage for many years
to come.
Acknowledgments
I thank Phil Cochran, Louis Doelp,
Tim Draissic, Mike Jech, Barry Johnson,
Vincent Lyons, Greg Marron, John Os¬
borne, and Dan Schneider for help with
sampling. I also thank Harland Carlson
for providing information on fish sam¬
pling in Manitowish and Trout Lakes,
and Don Fago for showing me how to ac¬
cess the WDNR Fish Distribution Survey
Database. Cheryle Hughes drew the fig¬
ure. Support for field work came from the
Center for Limnology and the University
of Wisconsin Zoological Museum. This
report was financed in part by the Fed¬
eral Aid in Fish Restoration Act under
Dingell- Johnson Project F-83-R, Study
501.
Works Cited
Angermeier, P. L. and J. R. Karr. 1984. Rela¬
tionships between woody debris and fish
habitat in a small warmwater stream.
Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 113:716-726.
Bauer, B. H. 1980. Lepomis megalotis (Rafi-
nesque). Longear sunfish. p. 600 in D. S.
Lee, C. R. Gilbert, C. H. Hocutt, R. E.
Jenkins, D. E. McAllister and J. R. Stauf¬
fer, editors. Atlas of North American
freshwater fishes. N.C. State Mus. Nat.
Hist., Raleigh. 854 pp.
Becker, G. C. 1983. Fishes of Wisconsin.
Univ. Wise. Press, Madison. 1052 pp.
Black, J. J., L. M. Andrews and C. W.
Thrienen. 1963. Surface water resources of
Vilas County. Wise. Cons. Dept., Madison.
317 pp.
Burr, B. M. 1980. Etheostoma microperca
Jordan and Gilbert. Least Darter, p. 668 in
D. S. Lee, C. R. Gilbert, C. H. Hocutt,
R. E. Jenkins, D. E. McAllister and J. R.
Stauffer, editors. Atlas of North American
freshwater fishes. N.C. State Mus. Nat.
Hist., Raleigh. 854 pp.
Burton, G. W. and E. P. Odum. 1945. The
distribution of stream fish in the vicinity of
Mountain Lake, Virginia. Ecology 26:182-
194.
Fago, D. 1984. Retrieval and analysis system
used in Wisconsin’s Fish Distribution
Survey. WDNR Res. Rept. No. 126. 35 pp.
Gilbert, C. R. 1980. Notropis anogenus
Forbes. Pugnose shiner, p. 227 in D. S. Lee,
C. R. Gilbert, C. H. Hocutt, R. E. Jenkins,
D. E. McAllister, and J. R. Stauffer, edi¬
tors. Atlas of North American freshwater
fishes. N.C. State Mus. Nat. His., Raleigh.
854 pp.
Gorman, O. T., and J. R. Karr. 1978. Habitat
structure and stream fish communities.
Ecology 59:507-515.
Greene, C. W. 1935. The distribution of Wis¬
consin fishes. Wise. Cons. Comm. Rept.,
Madison. 235 pp.
Hocutt, C. H. and J. R. Stauffer. 1975. In¬
fluence of gradient on the distribution of
fishes in Conowingo Creek, Maryland and
Pennsylvania. Chesapeake Sci. 16:143-147.
Jenkins, R. E. 1980. Moxostoma valencien-
nesi Jordan. Greater redhorse. p. 434 in D.
S. Lee, C. R. Gilbert, C. H. Hocutt, R. E.
Jenkins, D. E. McAllister, and J. R. Stauf¬
fer, editors. Atlas of North American fresh¬
water fishes. N.C. State Mus. Nat. Hist.,
Raleigh. 854 pp.
Karr, J. R. 1981. Assessment of biotic integ¬
rity using fish communities. Fisheries
6:21-27.
Les, B. J. 1979. The vanishing wild— Wis¬
consin’s endangered wildlife and its habitat.
Wise. Dept. Nat. Resour. Publ., Madison.
36 pp.
Lyons, J. 1984. The distribution and zoo¬
geography of lake trout, lake whitefish and
ninespine stickleback in Vilas and Oneida
Counties, Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad.
Sci. Arts Lett. 72:201-211.
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources.
1979. Fish and Wildlife Comprehensive
Plan. Management strategies 1979-1985.
Wise. Dept. Nat. Resour., Madison.
42
Lightning and the Enlightenment:
An Essay on Lightning by G. C. Lichtenberg
Ralph C. Buechler
After Benjamin Franklin had installed
a lightning rod on his Philadelphia
home in 1749 and performed his legen¬
dary kite-flying experiment in 1752, Euro¬
pean scientists like Priestly in England,
Volta in Italy, and Lichtenberg in Ger¬
many soon joined him in the exploration
of the nature of electricity.
Probably the least known of these,
Georg Christoph Lichtenberg was Pro¬
fessor for Experimental Physics at the
newly founded Hanoverian University of
Gottingen. This discussion will deal with
Lichtenberg’ s work Uber Gewitterfurcht
und Blitzableitung (On Lightning Rods
and the Fear of Lightning ), written in
1795 after Lichtenberg became the first
citizen of Gottingen to attach a lightning
rod to his home.
Lichtenberg understands the fear of
thunder and lightning and the imagina¬
tion underlying it and suggests an enlight¬
ened response to these natural phenomena
based upon a knowledge of nature (sci¬
ence) and a practical solution to nature
(here, the lightning rod). “Tell him,”
Lichtenberg advises in regard to the un¬
informed person who trembles at each
peal of thunder and flash of lightning,
“that lightning, whose thunder shakes the
ground, may be led through a bit of wire
or a little metal covering to wherever one
might want it.”1
Prior to the latter half of the seven¬
teenth century the nature of electricity
was as mysterious as its application. In¬
deed, observations on electricity were
Ralph Buechler is currently a lecturer in German
language and literature at the University of Wis-
consin-Madison, Division of University Outreach.
He is a scholar on G. C. Lichtenberg and the
eighteenth-century German essay.,
limited to lightning storms on the one
hand and to curiosity about the peculiar
forces of attraction demonstrated by such
minerals as amber and lodestone on the
other.
But during the eighteenth century, the
understanding of electricity was advanced
beyond hearsay, ignorance, and mere
conjecture. In 1660 Otto von Guericke of
Magdeburg constructed the first primitive
electro-static generator; in 1729 Stephen
Gray discovered the principle of conduc¬
tion; and in 1745 Ewald G. Kleist and
Pieter van Musschenbroeck independent¬
ly fashioned the Leyden jar, the first elec¬
trical condenser to store an electrical
charge.
By the middle of the eighteenth century
interest in lightning had taken a central
position amidst all this generating, con¬
ducting, and storing of static electricity.
Once mythified as the thunderbolt of
Zeus and Jupiter or as the wrath of God,
lightning was now observed to have prop¬
erties that appeared to be similar to those
noted during experimentation with static
electricity.
Deducing from his own experiments
with static electricity and the Leyden jar,2
Benjamin Franklin hypothesized as early
as 1749 the relationship between electric¬
ity and lightning. He subsequently tested
his hypothesis in the famous kite experi¬
ment of 1752. 3 But even prior to his ex¬
periment Franklin had suggested that a
sharp metal rod pointed skyward and con¬
nected to the ground would attract
charges of electricity and lead them into
the ground, keeping them away from
buildings.4
It proved to be of inestimable impor¬
tance to the European scientific com-
43
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
munity that Franklin wrote of his find¬
ings in clear and detailed letters to a cer¬
tain Peter Collinson, London merchant
and member of the Royal Society. These
letters were published in the Society’s
Transactions , and Franklin himself was
made a fellow of the Society in 1756.
Just two years later Johann Carl Wilcke
of Wismar translated Franklin’s Experi¬
ments and Observations on Electricity in¬
to German.5 A dozen years later still, in
Gottingen, where Wilcke himself had
studied from 1753-1755, Lichtenberg was
named professor of experimental physics.
In the capacity of researcher and teacher,
he studied and repeated the experiments
of Franklin and the leading European
electro-physicists.
Lichtenberg broke no new ground with
his experiments and reflections on elec¬
tricity; he repeated and varied the work of
others before him6 primarily for self¬
edification and, most importantly, for his
classes at the university.
Lichtenberg’s essay On Lightning Rods
and the Fear of Lightning is not an objec¬
tive, verifiable, and exhaustive treatment
or treatise contributing new knowledge.
Why, then, did Lichtenberg write it?
Lichtenberg writes of lightning from
the standpoint of the scientist, the
philosopher, and the individual who is
fascinated and awed by thunderstorms.
He collected accounts of storms from his
friends and colleagues as avidly as others
might collect stamps or coins. He writes in
a July 1783 letter: “The news of your
thunderstorms was for me as entertaining
as it was terrible. I always receive such
news with gratitude, especially the exact
description of the route taken by the
lightning near buildings and other large,
physical bodies.”7
Lichtenberg does not deny the subjec¬
tive and aesthetic experience of nature.
His own notes and the memoirs of his
students are replete with his personal,
often nervous, responses toward the ap¬
proach of a storm. In his letters he writes
enthusiastically of the sublime nature of
thunder and lightning; they both repel
and attract him. Thus Lichtenberg re¬
marks in the letter of July 1783 that “my
body is, as it should be for the body of a
physics professor, a never-failing barom¬
eter, thermometer, hygrometer, manom¬
eter, etc.”8 Still more revealing is a letter
to his friend Franz Ferdinand Wolff on 21
July 1783:
Just now the first rays of sunshine have ap¬
peared after a fearfully beautiful thunder¬
storm with hail, which has just passed and
of which the roofs are still dripping. I was
not a little concerned about our town. As
the storm arose, it turned almost dark and
every flash of lightning struck home. . . .
The day had been unbearably hot and I was
unusually sensitive, on top of which it is the
anniversary of my father’s death. Nothing
in the world could resemble more my state
of mind than such weather. Once, as it
thundered deeply, I thought it was directly
under me, so I can truly say, I’ve never felt
my mortality more than at that moment. In¬
deed, tears came to my eyes out of amaze¬
ment. Surely, there is nothing more grand
or majestic.9
Lichtenberg attempts from the outset
of his essay to demonstrate the unreason¬
ableness of the fear of lightning by devel¬
oping an analogy between stormy weather
and disease. Between the unstable condi¬
tions of the atmosphere and the human
body, the potential of danger and suffer¬
ing operates as the point of comparison.
Lichtenberg even collapses the two into
one metaphor, speaking, for example, of
“smallpox weather” or of clothing as
“dysentery rods.” He begins:
As I write this (at the beginning of August,
1794) one may note in our vicinity as in
others, evidence of dysentery. Already six
people are said to have perished; that would
be twice as many in a few days as lightning
has killed in our city in the last half century;
and how many people has dysentery prob¬
ably killed in that half century? But no one
44
Lightning and the Enlightment
seems upset by that. I see that one hardly
bothers with the simplest “dysentery
rods.”10
Lichtenberg responds to this unreason¬
able disparity between perceived and ac¬
tual danger with an understatement:
“Isn’t that curious?”
But Lichtenberg does more than iden¬
tify the human reaction to thunderstorms.
He offers three different antidotes: the
use of imagination, the use of reason, and
the implementation of a practical solu¬
tion — the lightning rod.
As to the first, if brontophobia (the
fear of thunder) is largely the result of an
over-active imagination, Lichtenberg sug¬
gests employing that same faculty in con¬
juring up images of true danger, such as a
battlefield, so that one may become aware
of the ridiculous nature of such irrational
fears. He prescribes laughter as an anti¬
dote. Recounting an actual case in which
a man subject to extreme fear of thunder
tried this “antidote,” Lichtenberg re¬
marks: “I know that this strategey was so
effective, that, while the thunder rolled
and the rain beat like hail against the win¬
dow, the patient himself began to smile
at his own fears, due to the obvious con¬
trast.”11
Second, Lichtenberg identifies the roots
of brontophobia in childhood from the
use of fear as an instrument of discipline.
More dominant still is the power of
sound, causing us to misplace our fear in
thunder, not lightning. Thus Lichtenberg
muses: “I’d really like to know, if anyone
has ever heard of someone deaf who is
fearful of a thunderstorm.”12 Here he
proposes the simple truth as a route out of
naivety, prejudice, and ignorance:
Against this fear — planted by improper up¬
bringing and supported by human nature— I
know no other advice than that one instruct
the patient in the truth, pure and simple.
Explain to him what lightning is without
understatement or exaggeration. Compare
the dangers of lightning to that of diseases,
and demonstrate that thunderstorms are the
gentlest of diseases that can befall a city.
More persons die of heart attacks in every
city in one year than of lightning through¬
out the whole country in ten years. 13
On a third level Lichtenberg’ s attempts
at enlightenment reach a practical ful¬
fillment— the use of the lightning rod:
But now, if it were in our power, perhaps
not to destroy, but to control this lightning
which frightens us so when accompanied by
a barrage of thunder, to protect ourselves
from it as we do from the rain? We can, and
with the same certainty with which we
escape from the rain under a good roof or
the sun under a thick shade tree. 14
Comparing lightning to the cold, Lich¬
tenberg notes the similarity between
lightning rods and fuel or clothing. In
either case, failure to avail oneself of
these protective instruments may result in
dire consequences. “Extreme cold is
much more horrible and dangerous than
all the thunderstorms of six summers
together, although the latter causes a
great deal more commotion. But is one
not afraid of the cold? Because we have
proven ‘cold rods’ against it, namely, fuel
and clothing.”15
Although he does refer to some aspects
of the correct installation of a lightning
rod,16 Lichtenberg states outright that
“our purpose here is not to give a lesson
in proper lightning rod installation.”
Ostensibly a discussion on lightning and
lightning rods, Lichtenberg’s essay is
really a dialogue between writer and
reader on ignorance, superstition, truth,
and knowledge. The topic is the nature of
lightning, but the theme is human nature.
Lichtenberg’s essay seeks to fulfill three
major didactic functions. On a psycho¬
logical level it speaks of the irrationality
of human phobias toward lightning by
speaking of the truths garnered from the
connection established between lightning
and electricity. On an aesthetic level he
45
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
seeks to replace this fear of lightning with
the experience of the sublime effect of
storms — one can hardly enjoy a good
storm if one is afraid of it. Lastly, he
speaks of the social welfare that accrues
through peace of mind and actual prop¬
erty protection from the construction of
lightning rods.
In conclusion, an eighteenth-century
German essay on electricity and lightning
ultimately proves to be of great value to
the general reading public of his time.
Lichtenberg’s essay functions as a literary
lightning rod that serves as an instrument
to control, channel, and ground supersti¬
tion and unreason.
Notes
1 Georg Christoph Lichtenberg, “Uber Gewitter-
furcht und Blitzableitung,” in Aufsatze gelehrten
und gemeinnutzigen Inhalts, Vol. Ill of his Schriften
und Brief e, ed. Wolfgang Promies (Miinchen: Carl
Hauser Verlag, 1972), p. 133. All subsequent cita¬
tions of Lichtenberg’s essay are taken from this
source.
2 Franklin proposed correctly that, in contrast to
the two-fluid theory of Dufay and others, electricity
must be understood as a single “fluid” that may be
positively charged.
3 Acting upon Franklin’s suggestions, the French
scientist D’Alibard charged an electric bottle from a
flash of lightning, thus demonstrating the identity of
electricity and lightning.
4 Franklin included a detailed account of the con¬
struction and function of the lightning rod in his
Poor R ichard ’s Almanac of 1753.
5 See Benjamin Franklin, Des Herrn Benjamin
Franklins Brief e von der Elektrizitdt, trans. Carl
Wilcke, eds. Roman Sexl and Karl von Meyenn
(Braunschweig: Edition Vieweg, 1983).
6 Lichtenberg’s discovery of his “Lichtenberg
Figures” — snowflake-like structures of dust on the
surface of an electrophor caused by static electrical
discharge — represents a minor exception.
7 “To Gottfried Hieronymous Amelung,” 3 July
1783, Letter 398, in Briefe, Vol. IV of his Schriften
und Briefe, ed Wolfgang Promies (Miinchen: Carl
Hauser Verlag, 1972), p. 515. All subsequent cita¬
tions of Lichtenberg’s letters are taken from this
source.
8 “To Gottfried Hieronymous Amelung,” 3 July
1783, Letter 398 in Briefe, p. 515.
9 “To Franz Ferdinand Wolff,” 21 July 1783,
Letter 402 in Briefe, p. 519.
10 Lichtenberg, “Uber Gewitterfurcht und Blitz¬
ableitung,” p. 130.
11 Lichtenberg, “Uber Gewitterfurcht und Blitz¬
ableitung,” p. 132.
12 Lichtenberg, “Uber Gewitterfurcht und Blitz¬
ableitung,” p. 133.
13 Lichtenberg, “Uber Gewitterfurcht und Blitz¬
ableitung,” p. 133.
14 Lichtenberg, “Uber Gewitterfurcht und Blitz¬
ableitung,” p. 134.
15 Lichtenberg, “Uber Gewetterfurcht und Blitz¬
ableitung,” p. 135.
16 Lichtenberg, was among the first to insist that
grounding the lightning rod is the most essential
component of proper lightning rod installation.
46
Land Use and Vegetational Change on the
Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve
Konrad Liegel
Abstract . This study records land use and vegetational changes on the Aldo Leopold
Memorial Reserve in Sauk County , Wisconsin. Vegetation maps were prepared for the
early European settlement (1840s) and early Leopold (1930s) eras through interpretation
of surveyor’s notes , traveller’s accounts , soils information , aerial photographs , agri¬
cultural records, present vegetation, and on-site observations. These maps, compared
with each other and with the present vegetation map (1978, rev. 1986), show trends in
vegetational change since the time of settlement. Closed communities of shrub-carr and
forest have replaced open communities of low prairie, sedge meadow, and oak savanna.
The primary factor responsible for this change is the control of fire.
Land-use records indicate that agricultural use helped to delay this succession of com¬
munities. Grazing kept the savannas open although it destroyed the natural groundlayer.
Therefore, in 1940 more prairie species remained in the minimally grazed black oak
forests than in the heavily grazed white oak savannas. The mowing of marsh hay, mean¬
while, kept the wet prairie and sedge meadow open. When grazing and mowing stopped,
shrubs and trees quickly invaded. Agricultural use peaked in the 1920s, but declined in
the 1930s through the 1960s due to meager natural soil fertility, the introduction of
modern mechanized farming, and farmer attrition.
The plant communities of southern
Wisconsin have changed dramatically
in the years since glaciation. European
settlement and subsequent land use, in
particular, thoroughly modified the plant
communities, primarily through the con¬
trol of fires that resulted from lightning
strikes and Indian activities (Dorney
1981). In the absence of fire, the sunny
oak openings of southern Wisconsin grew
up into the oak woodlots of today, while
shrub-carr and aspen invaded the sedge
meadows and low prairies. Lumbering
and farming transformed most of the re¬
maining expanses of prairie, savanna,
marsh, and forest into today’s fields of
corn and hay (Curtis 1959).
This study records the changes in land
use and vegetation on what is now the
Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve. The
Konrad Liegel is a native of Wisconsin and has had a
long time interest in Aldo Leopold. He is currently
an attorney in Seattle, Washington.
Reserve is the “sand country” of Aldo
Leopold, where he and his family spent
their weekends and vacations in the 1930s
and 1940s restoring a worn-out farm
north of Baraboo, Wisconsin. Leopold
studied the land-use and ecological
history of his farm searching for guidance
on how to restore it to a healthy state.
Leopold’s experiences at the farm also
helped in shaping his philosophy of man’s
relationship to his environment — the land
ethic — which is expressed in A Sand
County A Imanac ( 1 949) :
Conservation is getting nowhere because
it is incompatible with our Abrahamic con¬
cept of land. We abuse land because we
regard it as a commodity belonging to us.
When we see land as a community to which
we belong, we may begin to use it with love
and respect. There is no other way for land
to survive the impact of mechanized man,
nor for us to reap from it the esthetic
harvest it is capable, under science, of con¬
tributing to culture.
47
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
It seems fitting, therefore, that the
ecological story of the Leopold farm and
the Reserve surrounding it be told. This
land-use and vegetational history illus¬
trates a principle implicit in the writings
of Leopold: the pattern and composition
of vegetational communities reflect the
choices human cultures have made in land
use.
Description of the
Leopold Memorial Reserve
The Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve is
a private landowner’s cooperative tract of
approximately 1400 acres dedicated to the
memory of Aldo Leopold. Among other
properties, it contains Leopold’s original
farm, which includes “the Shack,” now
listed in the National Register of Historic
Places. A refurbished chicken coop, later
memorialized in A Sand County Alma¬
nac , the Shack was home to the Leopold
family during visits to their farm. The
Reserve is located in Fairfield Township,
Sauk County, Wisconsin (R7E, T12N,
Sec. 2, 3, 4, 5; R7E, T13N, Sec. 32, 33,
34, 35) (Fig. 1) where the Wisconsin River
Fig. 1. Location of the Aldo Leopold
Memorial Reserve, Sauk County, Wiscon¬
sin.
and its floodplain cut a swath through the
ground moraine with its wetlands left by
the last ice sheet.
Glaciation, subsequent wind erosion,
and the fluvial action of the Wisconsin
River have molded the Reserve’s surface
features (Fig. 2). The Reserve is covered
with a mantle of supraglacial sediments
and till laid down by a series of glacial
advances, the last being the Green Bay
Lobe of late Woodfordian age (Black and
Rubin 1967-1968), which reached its max¬
imum advance into the area about 13,000
years ago (Socha 1984). As the glacier
melted, an extension of Glacial Lake
Wisconsin formed to the east of the ter¬
minal moraine, covering the Reserve. The
north-south-trending ridges in the Reserve
area were probably fashioned during this
time as deltas in the lake at the ice margin.
The proglacial lake existed in the Reserve
area until the ice margin cleared the east
end of the Baraboo range and uncovered
a low area near Portage. The proglacial
lake drained through this outlet, estab¬
lishing the present course of the Wiscon¬
sin River. Subsequently, the river eroded
the north end of the sand and gravel
ridges. Eolian processes reworked both
the proglacial fluvial and modern fluvial
deposits and formed blowouts and dunes,
leaving the topography of today (Socha
1984).
Fire stress, fluctuating water levels, and
siltation levels have determined the chang¬
ing pattern and composition of plant
communities on the Reserve (Liegel 1982).
Presently, about two-thirds of the area is
floodplain forest and marshland, dotted
with ponds and laced with river sloughs.
The remainder is hilly ground moraine
covered by a mixed oak-hickory-pine
forest and broken by a few fields still
under cultivation (Luthin 1980; Bradley
1987). A deep, sandy substrate underlays
the entire Reserve and produces an easily
eroded soil of low fertility (Sharp and
Bowles 1985).
48
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
49
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
European immigrants settled the area in
the 1840s. At that time oak savanna main¬
tained by fires was the dominant ecotype
(Liegel 1982). Lumbering, cultivation,
drainage of wetlands, overgrazing, mow¬
ing, and fire suppression caused rapid
changes in the vegetative cover. Farming
reached its zenith in the mid- 1920s, with
farms being abandoned to brush and
weeds, wind and weather during the
drought and depression of the 1930s. In
1935 Aldo Leopold purchased one of
these abandoned farms and started to
reverse the process of land deterioration
through management and restoration, an
activity that continues today under the
direction of Frank Terbilcox, Manager,
and Charles and Nina Bradley, Co-
Directors of Research of the Leopold
Memorial Reserve, and through the finan¬
cial support of the Sand County founda¬
tion.
Methods
I based this study of vegetational
change on a land-use chronology of the
Leopold Memorial Reserve and on a
series of vegetation maps of the Reserve
during the 1840s (Liegel 1982), 1930s, and
1970s (Luthin 1978, rev. Ferber 1986).
Land-use chronologies are an effective
tool for generating hypotheses as to the
relation between past land-use actions and
present ecological effects, for broadly il¬
lustrating the significant impact human¬
kind has had on the environment, and for
helping to make management decisions
(Leopold 1940; Grange 1948; Leopold
1949; Scott 1980). A comparison of vege¬
tation maps for different time periods of
the same piece of land, meanwhile, graph¬
ically and quantitatively shows the precise
changes in percentage land cover by dif¬
ferent plant community types over time
(Curtis 1959; Vogl 1964).
Land-Use Chronology
This land-use chronology is based on
historical documents that covered events
within a larger area than the Reserve
itself, namely that portion of Wisconsin
surrounding the Wisconsin River between
Wisconsin Dells and Portage. The histori¬
cal documents considered include the
following: state histories (Smith 1854;
Nesbit 1973; Smith 1973; Current 1976);
regional histories (Gregory 1932), county
histories (Canfield 1861a; Butterfield
1880a and 1880b; Jones 1914; Cole 1918;
Lange 1976); the published accounts of
early explorers (including Carver [1766]
1838; Nuttall [1810] 1951; Schoolcraft
[1820] 1953; Featherstonaugh 1847),
pioneers (including Childs 1859; Kinzie
1856), and lumbermen (including Babing-
ton 1928); newspaper articles (Baraboo
and Portage); and the journals of Reserve
inhabitants Melvin Felt (1879-1899),
Aldo Leopold (1935-1948), and Charles
Bradley (1978-1987).
Written descriptions have their limita¬
tions for reconstructing past landscape
and land-use patterns. Such historical
descriptions are frequently vague, occa¬
sionally biased, and almost always very
general (Vale 1982). However, for some
time periods, especially prior to 1840,
they are the only resource a land historian
has to reconstruct past vegetation.
Finally, the chronology is based on the
1860-1900 Agricultural Census Schedules
for Wisconsin of the U.S. Department of
Agriculture (the records for 1910 and
1920 were destroyed in a fire) and the
1923-1972 Annual Enumeration of Farm
Statistics by Assessors of the Wisconsin
Department of Agriculture, both found in
the Archives of the State Historical Soci¬
ety of Wisconsin. The agricultural sched¬
ules record, by individual farmer and
county, the following statistics: amount
of land owned; acreage devoted to various
crops, pasture land, marsh hay, wood¬
land, and unplowed land; numbers and
kinds of livestock; and use of electricity,
centralized heating, tractors, and ferti¬
lizers.
Agricultural census records likewise
50
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
have their limitations for reconstructing
past agricultural-use patterns. Census
figures often were conservative estimates
from the farmers (Statz 1982, pers.
comm.), and occasionally they appeared
somewhat incomplete or inconsistent. To
minimize these problems, the census
figures were closely compared with the
other historical documents.
In order to use the records, the land
ownership history of the Reserve was
determined through a search in the Sauk
County Register of Deeds and in in¬
dividual abstracts for particular proper¬
ties. Then the agricultural records for
each property were tabulated by indi¬
vidual landowner and year. Finally, by
comparing the agricultural records with
each other, and with the journals of
Reserve inhabitants, field observations of
the various fence lines, aerial photographs
(1937; 1940; 1955; 1968), and various plat
maps of Fairfield Township (Canfield
1861b; Tucker 1877; 1906; 1920; 1936;
1947; early 1950s; 1961; 1972; 1976), I
was able to determine approximately
when individual parcels were cultivated,
mowed, or grazed, and for how long.
Vegetation Maps
Vegetation maps were prepared for the
early European settlement (early 1840s)
and early Leopold (late 1930s) eras of the
Leopold Reserve for comparison with
each other and with the present vegetation
map (1978, rev. 1986) to show trends in
vegetational change since the time of set¬
tlement. These periods were chosen be¬
cause of their special importance to
understanding the ecological history of
the Reserve and because of the availability
of survey information and/or aerial pho¬
tographs for making a map of the vegeta¬
tion during that period. The plant com¬
munity types were delineated to follow
those described by Curtis (1959).
A detailed description of the methods
used in preparing the map of the early
European settlement vegetation of the
Reserve can be found in Liegel (1982).
The vegetation map of the Leopold Re¬
serve in the late 1930s was prepared from
the 1940 Agricultural Stabilization and
Conservation Service (ASCS) aerial pho¬
tograph. Community types and bound¬
aries were derived from the following
sources used in conjunction with the 1940
ASCS aerial photograph:
1 . The Bordner Land Economic Inven¬
tory (1938) for Sauk County, the data
originally recorded by field workers who
traversed each quarter mile of land,
noting both vegetational communities and
human land use;
2. The ASCS aerial photograph of
1937;
3. The Shack journals of Aldo Leopold
(1935-1948);
4. A herbarium collection of Carl Leo¬
pold (1938-1940);
5. Recollections of the Leopold family.
In addition, a stereoscopic wetland map¬
ping procedure, developed by the Wiscon¬
sin DNR Wetlands Inventory (Wetlands
Mapping Staff 1981), was used to deline¬
ate boundaries between different wetland
community types that otherwise could not
have been delineated on the aerial photo¬
graphs.
Luthin (1978; 1979; 1980) prepared the
present vegetation map through field
observations while accompanying a base¬
line survey of the Reserve. Ferber (1986)
revised the vegetation map through com¬
parison with the 1976 infrared and 1978
aerial photographs and through addi¬
tional field checks. This present vegeta¬
tion map shows the Reserve boundaries of
1986, whereas the 1840s and 1930s vegeta¬
tion maps show the Reserve boundaries as
of 1980 when the maps were compiled.
The relative area coverage for the dif¬
ferent community types was determined
by counting dots on a grid placed over
each map. The 1980 Reserve boundaries
were used in making the calculations so
51
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
that the relative area coverage for dif¬
ferent community types could be quan¬
titatively compared.
Leopold Reserve Chronology
Prehistory (13,000-300 Years Ago )
The Prehistory era was one of great
geologic and climatic change, accom¬
panied by a series of changes in vegetation
types from the boreal swamp woodlands
of the proglacial period to the mosaic of
mesophytic forest, oak savanna, and
marsh communities found by the earliest
European explorers (Maher 1981; Maher
1982; Winkler 1985). The changes in
vegetation, in turn, were accompanied by
a change from nomadic tribes of Indians
to more sedentary tribes (Quimby 1960;
Wittry 1979a; Wittry 1979b).
The first documented aboriginal use of
the area surrounding and including the
Leopold Reserve was by the Effigy
Mound culture of the Woodland Indians
about 700 to 1200 years ago (Quimby
1960). Although they still lived by hunting
and fishing, the Woodland Indians were
the first people in the region to use pottery
of fired clay, to raise crops, and to erect
mounds over their dead or in the shape of
effigies. Several Effigy Mound culture
mounds were found near or within the
Leopold Reserve, including a possible
village site southwest of the Terbilcox
residence (Stout 1906; Brown 1924) (Fig.
2). Unfortunately, nothing more is now
known about the aboriginal land use of
the Reserve area during this period.
Exploration Era ( 1660-1836 )
Social upheaval characterized the Ex¬
ploration Era. The French, the English,
and later the Americans fought for con¬
trol of the region, and Indian tribes
displaced one another as European set¬
tlers pushed them westward (Smith 1973).
Indian tribes exerted an indirect but
substantial effect over the composition of
plant and animal communities through
the use of fire (Day 1953; Martin 1973;
Lewis 1980; Dorney 1981). European
trappers affected plant community com¬
position to a somewhat lesser, but per¬
haps still significant, degree through over-
exploitation of fur-bearing and large
game animal species (Cole 1918; Smith
1973).
The Wisconsin River was the principal
means of transportation in the study area
prior to settlement. Descriptions of the
vegetation and animal life along its
banks provide the best evidence of eco¬
logical conditions during this period.
When the French explorer and first
European visitor Father Marquette pad-
died his canoe up the Fox, across the Por¬
tage, and down the Wisconsin River in
1673, he found a wild land with few In¬
dians and much game. He wrote of the
Wisconsin River:
On the bank one sees fertile land, diversified
with woods, prairies, and hills. There are
oak, walnut, and basswood trees; and
another kind, whose branches are armed
with long thorns. We saw there neither
feathered game nor fish, but many deer,
and a large number of elk. (Kellogg 1917)
Soon after Marquette’s explorations,
French trappers plyed the Fox-Wisconsin
route in search of gold, fur, and skins
(Smith 1973). The fur trade system, which
continued for the next 125 years, altered
the relationships between Europeans and
Indian tribes by making the Indians de¬
pendent upon French-supplied weapons,
traps, ammunition, and blankets (Kellogg
1925). The Indians received these supplies
on credit, which they paid for by furs.
The cumulative effect of excessive trap¬
ping and hunting began to show up in the
area around the Reserve soon after the
Americans took over the territory after
the War of 1812. By this time elk, moose,
and beaver were largely eradicated from
the region, and deer were significantly
52
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
decreased in numbers (Cole 1918; School¬
craft 1953).
The dominant Indian tribe that oc¬
cupied the area around the Leopold
Reserve at the time of the arrival of Euro¬
pean explorers was the Winnebago. The
Winnebago made their living by farming
and hunting and lived in permanent vil¬
lages. Two of their villages were in
Baraboo and Wisconsin Dells. An Indian
path from the village in the Dells tra¬
versed the Reserve (Brink 1845). The Win¬
nebago used fire to make good pasture
for deer, to drive game, to provide for a
renewed growth of blueberries and huck¬
leberries, and for communication (Quim-
by 1960; Peske 1971; Lange 1976; Dorney
1981).
On a journey from Green Bay to St.
Louis in 1821, the Green Bay pioneer,
Ebenezer Childs, saw 4 4 but seven white
men in the whole distance, outside the
forts” (Childs 1859). Europeans were
moving into the area, however, making
the local Winnebago Indians restless. To
keep the tribe in check, the American
government built Fort Winnebago in 1828
near what is now Portage (Prucha 1964).
The temporary barracks were constructed
of pine logs obtained from an area known
as Pine Island about six miles west of Por¬
tage (Turner 1898), which was in the close
vicinity of the Reserve. In describing the
“portage” during a trip through Wiscon¬
sin in 1835, the English scientist Feather-
stonaugh made this prophetic remark:
[The portage was covered with] tall wild
grass, no longer kept cropped by roving
buffaloes, which had been driven beyond
the Mississippi. ... It could not be long
before the Indians will go the way of the
buffalo, and cultivated grasses replace the
native one. . . . The scythe of what is called
4 'civilization” is in motion, and everything
will fall before it. (Featherstonaugh 1847)
Two years later the Winnebago Indians
ceded their land to the United States
government, thereby allowing permanent
settlement of the region (Gregory 1932).
Pioneer Era (1837-1865)
The Pioneer era was a transitional one,
during which the first pioneers settled and
began to farm what is now the Leopold
Memorial Reserve. These pioneer farm¬
ers, mostly native-born Yankees (Canfield
1861a; Cole 1918), allowed their livestock
to run at large and placed fences around
their cropland (Gregory 1932). Wildfires
were common, especially in the spring¬
time (Gregory 1932). The frontier was
pushing westward, with thousands of im¬
migrants using an early state road (now
Levy Road) that traversed the Reserve
following the original Indian path (Cole
1918; Davis 1947). The cutting of the
Wisconsin Pinery north of Wisconsin
Dells was in full swing, with 4 ‘almost a
constant run” of log rafts down the Wis¬
consin River from early spring till early
fall ( Wisconsin Power Service Commis¬
sion v. Federal Power Commission , Tran¬
script of Record, 1944).
At the time of European settlement of
the Reserve area in the early 1840s, the
vegetation of the Reserve was an open,
fire-maintained mosaic of oak savanna
(38% by relative area coverage), flood-
plain forest (33%), marshland (27%), and
upland forest (2%) (Table 1).
Traveller, surveyor, and pioneer ac¬
counts provide differing pictures of the
vegetation of the area. While surveying
the Leopold Marsh, John Brink wrote in
his field notes: “Land Level wet and
sandy (Quick Sand) 3rd Rate-— Black &
Yellow Oak and not much of that —
Marsh bad enough and good for nothing”
(Brink 1845). In contrast, a Gazetteer
used to attract immigrants to Wisconsin
gave the following general description of
the area (Hunt 1853):
The openings, which comprise a large
portion of the finest land of the state, owe
53
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Table 1. Relative area coverage of the plant community types in what is now the
Leopold Memorial Reserve, Sauk County, Wisconsin, during the 1840s, the 1930s, and
the 1970s.
their present condition to the action of the
annual fires which have kept under all other
fast growth, except those varieties of oak
which can withstand the sweep of that ele¬
ment.
This annual burning of an exuberant
growth of grasses and of underbrush, has
been adding, perhaps for ages, to the pro¬
ductive power of the soil, and preparing it
for the plough-share.
It is the great fact, nature has thus
“cleaned” up Wisconsin to the hand of the
settler, and enriched it by yearly burnings,
and has at the same time left sufficient
timber on the ground for fence and fire¬
wood, that explains, in a great measure, the
capacity it has exhibited, and is now ex¬
hibiting for rapid settlement and early
maturity.
There is another fact important to be
noticed in this connection. The low level
prairie, or natural meadow, of moderate ex¬
tent, is so generally distributed over the face
of the county, that the settler on a fine sec¬
tion of arable land, finds on his own farm,
or in his immediate neighborhood, abun¬
dant pasturage for his stock in summer, on
the open range; and hay for the winter, for
the cutting— the bounty of nature supplying
his need in this behalf, till the cultivated
grasses may be introduced and become suf¬
ficient for his use.
In 1843, Amos Anderson, a native of
Norway, settled on the western end of the
Leopold Reserve, preparing the ground
that year for crops that gave him prof¬
itable returns in the following year
54
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
(Gregory 1932). He was the first settler in
Fairfield Township. Although most of the
land within the Reserve passed into
private hands by the early 1850s, it was
not actively farmed but rather was held
onto for a year or more, possibly for
speculative purposes, and then sold. By
1854, virtually all of the Reserve lands
were being actively farmed.
These pioneer farmers only had about
30 acres under the plow, the rest being
used as open range for sheep and cattle.
The areas put under cultivation included
the “Shack” and “Coleman” prairies
(Fig. 2). Corn, wheat, and oats were
the primary crops, produced in approxi¬
mately equal quantities. The principal
market was the Pinery (Staines 1852).
Wildfires were common during the
1840s and 1850s, especially in the spring¬
time, but diminished thereafter as the area
became settled (Gregory 1932). In the ear¬
ly 1860s, after the cessation of wildfires,
pines began to germinate in the “An¬
chor” woods of the floodplain forest
(Leopold 1942) (Fig. 2).
Farming Era ( 1866-1934 )
In southcentral Wisconsin, the Farming
era began for both man and wildlife as a
time of plenty, but ended for both as a
time of devastation. Soldiers returning
from the Civil War in the late 1860s
placed the remaining fertile land under
cultivation (Scott 1980). These farmers
cultivated the rolling upland savannas,
left the ridge savannas to succeed into
forest, and burned off the marshlands for
mowing of the marsh hay. A 1870 law,
forbidding farmers from allowing their
livestock to run at large, stopped in¬
discriminate grazing but intensified graz¬
ing in certain areas (Schafer 1922). The
resulting mixture of fields, brushlands,
and marshlands created excellent condi¬
tions for wildlife. Leopold (1934) de¬
scribed it this way:
The optimum conditions for game came
after settlers had begun to farm the sur¬
rounding hill country. The settlers burned
large openings in the tamaracks and used
them as hay meadows. Every farmer who
owned a quarter-section in the hills also
owned a forty in the marsh, where he re¬
paired every August to cut his hay. In
winter, when frost had hardened the marsh,
he hauled the hay to his farmstead.
The open haymeadows, separated by
stringers of grass, oak, and popple, and by
occasional remnants of tamarack, were bet¬
ter crane, duck, and sharptail range than the
primeval bogs. The grain and weeds on the
farms abutting the marsh acted as feeding
stations for prairie chickens, which soon
became so abundant as to take a consid¬
erable part of any grain left in the fields.
These were the golden days of wildlife abun¬
dance. Fires burned parts of the marsh
every winter, but the water table was so high
that the horses had to wear “clogs” at mow¬
ing time, hence no fire ever “bit” deep
enough to do any lasting harm.
However, by 1890, after all the fertile
uplands were under cultivation, farmers
made attempts to crop the marshland in
dry years. The first results were bountiful
beyond reason and agriculture started
with a rush. The marshland fertility un¬
fortunately quickly disappeared and an
added succession of wet years reduced the
farmers to desperation. To rehabilitate
these farmers Wisconsin passed the
Drainage Law of 1894, which provided an
incentive to restore wetlands to agricul¬
ture through ditching and draining
(Wisconsin Regional Planning Committee
1934). Now during dry years the exposed
peat itself began to burn, rendering
cultivation impossible (Leopold 1934). In
addition, the meager natural fertility of
the upland sandy meadows was depleted.
By the 1930s many farms were abandoned
in the “sand counties” to brush and
weeds, wind and weather (Wisconsin Re¬
gional Planning Committee 1934).
55
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Farming activity on the Leopold Me¬
morial Reserve closely followed this
regional scenario (see Fig. 2 for the loca¬
tions on the Reserve of the parcels dis¬
cussed in this section). During the late
1860s and 1870s most of the fertile land,
now part of the Reserve, was being
farmed. For the remainder of the century,
the cultivated land included practically all
of the rolling uplands with the addition of
the “Shack” prairie and the “Coleman”
prairie. Most of the marsh, except the
wetter portion of the “great marsh”
southeast of Chapman Lake, was being
mowed for marsh hay, with intermittent
fires being set to stimulate production.
The oak opening and low prairie around
present day Turner Pond and the flood-
plain forest were grazed, encouraging the
spread of thorny shrubs. The ridges suc¬
ceeded into forest in the absence of fire
and grazing, probably remaining undis¬
turbed until intensive cutting for firewood
began in the late 1800s. In the mid- 1880s,
the clearings within the “Anchor” woods
and “Susan’s savanna” were brought un¬
der cultivation. Around the turn of the
century, the “Draba” prairie was brought
under cultivation, and the “Coleman”
prairie was abandoned. Farms were diver¬
sified with the most important crops being
corn, oats, spring wheat, and potatoes.
Sheep were the most important animal
stock.
Equally dramatic changes occurred on
the Leopold Reserve lands in the early
1900s. Between 1910 and 1920, farmers
dug drainage ditches across the “long
marsh” west of Chapman Lake. In the
1920s, cultivation of the riverbottom
openings ceased. Grazing of the wetlands
east and west of what is now the Terbilcox
house began. In the late 1920s, the “is¬
land” north of the Shack, currently part
of the mainland, was logged. The marsh
burned for the last time. In the early
1930s, the “Shack” prairie was aban¬
doned. Unfortunately, the agricultural
census records covering much of this
period were destroyed in a fire, making it
impossible to reconstruct the precise
record of cultivation.
Leopold Era (1935-1949)
The Leopold era was a transition be¬
tween older farming practices and modern
mechanized agriculture, and the begin¬
ning of a land restoration movement. The
depression and drought of the 1930s had
taken their toll on the Reserve lands, with
one farm being abandoned, the house
burned down, and the property falling in¬
to the hands of the county. Aldo Leopold
purchased this property in 1934; his friend
Tom Coleman purchased an adjacent
farm in 1937 (Fig. 2). With their pur¬
chases began a new attitude toward the
land, whereby landowners started to
reverse the process of land deterioration
and to build it back to something like its
pre-settlement condition. Toward the end
of this era, new farming practices, par¬
ticularly the use of tractors, made mowing
the marsh hay or cultivating the small
floodplain openings mechanically dif¬
ficult and economically unfeasible. This,
in turn, presaged the end of farming in the
area.
About the time Leopold purchased his
land, what is now the Leopold Memorial
Reserve was still a relatively open,
farming-maintained mixture of marsh¬
land (30% by relative area coverage),
floodplain forest (24%), upland forest
(19%), agricultural fields (17%), and oak
savanna (10%) (Table 1). Leopold (1949)
provides a description of the area:
My own farm was selected for its lack of
goodness and its lack of highway; indeed
my whole neighborhood lies in a backwash
of the River Progress. My road is the origi¬
nal wagon track of the pioneers, innocent of
grades or gravel, brushings or bulldozers.
My neighbors bring a sigh to the County
Agent. Their fencerows go unshaven for
years on end. Their marshes are neither
56
The Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve
dyked nor drained. As between going
fishing and going forward, they are prone
to prefer fishing.
During the majority of Leopold’s ten¬
ure on the Reserve, the floodplain forests
were grazed but the upland forests were
not (Leopold 1942; Liegel 1981) (see Fig.
2 for the locations on the Reserve of the
parcels discussed in this section). The
abandoned fields began to succeed back
into prairie. The pines in the “Anchor”
woodland were cut. The marsh areas were
mowed until the mid- 1940s when tractors
became common among farmers on the
Reserve. Grazing of the wetlands east and
west of what is now the Terbilcox resi¬
dence ended. Grazing of the “Kammerer
meadow” began. Shrubs began to slowly
invade the wetlands margins when cultiva¬
tion and mowing ceased, fanning out par¬
ticularly from the drainage ditch south of
“long marsh.”
Almost immediately after purchase of
their farm, the Leopold family began the
planting of thousands of native trees, par¬
ticularly pines, and woodland shrubs and
wildflowers (Leopold 1935-1949). Vir¬
tually all of the plantings from 1936 to
1938 died because of drought (Leopold
1936, 1937), but the family persisted and
by the early 1940s the Shack was sur¬
rounded by young pine seedlings. In the
late 1930s Leopold began to transplant
prairie plants into the field in front of the
Shack, a process which continued until his
death in 1949. However, he did not burn
the “Shack” prairie.
Agricultural Era (1950-1967)
Commercial farming for all practical
purposes ended on the Leopold Memorial
Reserve during the Agricultural era. The
Reserve farms were simply too small, too
infertile, and too varied in their soils and
topography to lend themselves to modern
farming techniques and the use of tractors
and commercial fertilizers. Gentleman
farmers, who for the most part rented out
the larger and more fertile fields, replaced
the older farmers throughout the Reserve.
Shrubs and trees quickly invaded the
riverbottom forests and marshlands when
grazing and mowing ceased.
Farmer attrition occurred throughout
the 1950s and 1960s (see Fig. 2 for the
locations on the Reserve of the parcels
discussed in this section). In 1947 Carl
Anchor moved his house out of the Re¬
serve. In 1955 Howard Kammerer pur¬
chased a farm, allowing only intermittent
grazing of the riverbottom forest and of
the “Kammerer meadow” just east of the
farmhouse. In 1956 Russ Van Hoosen in¬
herited a farm, ending grazing of his
property. In 1957 Frank Terbilcox pur¬
chased a farm, ending grazing of his prop¬
erty. In the early 1960s the construction of
the interstate highway put an end to the
agricultural use of the Sinner Property. In
1961 Charles Anchor inherited a farm and
ended all agricultural activity. In 1962
Ray Turner ended grazing of the wetland
shrub carr around present day Turner
Pond.
The ending of agricultural activity on
the Reserve lands began to have a dra¬
matic effect on its character and ecology.
The previously cultivated fields continued
their succession into prairie. Prickly ash
(Xanthoxylum americanum) began to fill
in the previously open mixed floodplain
forest and floodplain oak barrens. The
wetland margins continued to succeed in¬
to shrub carr. And the shrub carr suc¬
ceeded on low prairie sites into mixed
hardwood forest.
With the death of Aldo Leopold in 1949
and the movement of his family away
from Wisconsin, the restoration of the
Leopold property ceased. The 1950s and
1960s were quiet times with little visitation
and almost no management. In 1967 the
Leopold family deeded the property to
what is now the Aldo Leopold Shack
Foundation. They established this family
57
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
foundation in order to provide for
maintenance of the Shack, not only for
their own use but as a laboratory for con¬
tinued ecological and restoration studies.
Leopold Reserve Era ( 1968-present )
The Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve
was created in 1968 as a cooperative
private wildlife preserve memorializing
Aldo Leopold. In response to a growing
threat of recreational development in the
Baraboo area, Reed Coleman, the son of
Leopold’s good friend and neighbor Tom
Coleman, persuaded the other land-
owners surrounding the Leopold tract to
pool their properties under common
management funded by what is now the
Sand County Foundation. The five land-
owners who cooperated in this private
preserve were Reed Coleman, Franklin
Terbilcox, the Leopold family, Russell
Van Hoosen, and the Sand County Foun¬
dation. Robert Ellarson, one of Leopold’s
students, drafted a generalized manage¬
ment plan. Terbilcox accepted the job of
Reserve Manager.
During the subsequent years, the Sand
County Foundation began purchasing
some of the adjoining properties. The
Foundation purchased the Sinner Prop¬
erty in 1968, part of the Turner Property
and the “island” in 1970, the Anchor
Property in 1972, the Kammerer Property
in 1977, the Ragan Property in 1982, and
another parcel of the Turner Property in
1982 (Fig. 2).
With the creation of the Aldo Leopold
Memorial Reserve, Leopold’s land reha¬
bilitation program of the 1930s and 1940s
was continued and expanded to include
the entire Reserve. The focus of the early
to mid-1970s was predominantly on wild¬
life management. Reserve Manager Ter¬
bilcox cleared a network of trails, dug a
number of duck ponds (Turner and Van
Hoosen ponds, 1969-1970; Center pond,
1977), planted “wildlife patches” around
the ponds and in part of the “long
marsh” west of Chapman Lake, occa¬
sionally mowed the “long marsh,” and
burned the “Shack” and “Coleman”
prairies (Fig. 2).
In 1976, eight years after the Reserve
was established, Charles and Nina Leo¬
pold Bradley retired on the Reserve and
began a student research program for
ecological studies of the area. The
Bradleys built the Study Center, with a
laboratory and work area in the lower
level (Fig. 2). The first Leopold fellows
created a working base map and started a
comprehensive inventory of the Reserve,
including plants and plant communities
(Luthin 1978; 1979; 1980), land-use and
vegetational history (Liegel 1982; and the
present report), palynology (Winkler
1985), glacial geology (Socha 1984), soils
(Sharp and Bowles 1985), hydrology (Zo-
lidis 1985), birds (Mossman and Reed
1978), and wildlife (Mossman 1980;
Tohulka 1979).
During the late 1970s and up to the
present, the focus of management efforts
has been more on restoring and maintain¬
ing native plant community types once
more common on the Reserve. Manage¬
ment efforts have included restoration of
old fields into prairie, brush management
in the low prairie and oak barrens, and
thinning of the Leopold pines.
Today the Leopold Memorial Reserve
is a relatively closed combination of up¬
land forest (34% by relative area cover¬
age), floodplain forest (26%), marshland
(23%), oak savanna (6%), and cultivated
fields (11%) (Table 1).
Vegetational Change
Following European
Settlement
The preceding land-use chronology
displays the panorama of vegetational
change that has occurred on the Leopold
Memorial Reserve during the last 13,000
years. The vegetation maps of the 1840s,
58
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
1930s, and 1970s, to be examined in this
section, show more graphically the precise
changes in percentage land cover by dif¬
ferent plant community types since settle¬
ment, and the land-use factors responsible
for these changes.
Ten natural and three disturbed vegeta¬
tion types were identified as comprising
the vegetation of the Leopold Memorial
Reserve in the 1840s, 1930s, and 1970s
(Fig. 3-Fig. 5). The relative area covered
by each vegetation type for the different
time periods is given in Table 1. Succes-
sional trends for selected plant commu¬
nity types between 1840 and 1980 are
shown in Table 2. The characteristics of
each community type are given in Table 3.
As previously discussed elsewhere (Lie-
gel 1982), three interdependent factors
seem to have been crucial in influencing
the pattern and composition of the pre¬
settlement vegetation types on the Re-
Table 2. Successional trends in selected plant community types on what is now the
Leopold Memorial Reserve, Sauk County, Wisconsin, between 1840 and 1980.
Plant % of Original Plant Community Type
Community Type having succeeded into other types
during the 1840s by the 1930s by the 1970s
Sedge Meadow (lOOf
Wet Meadow (6) - - - - — > Wet Meadow (13)
_ _ —
— ► Sedge Meadow (67) - — — * Sedge Meadow (47)
'^Shrub-Carr (27) - - - — - — * Shrub-Carr (40)
Low Prairie (100).
-► Low Prairie (25).=r:
-*Wet Meadow (25)r
^Shrub-Carr (50)-*..
— > Low Prairie (0)
Wet Meadow (25)
•st Shrub-Carr (25)
^ Mixed Hard. F. (50)
Shrub-Carr (6) - - — • - -*• Mixed Hard. F. (6)
Oak Opening (100)5^ — — - — -* Oak Opening (6)g^“^ > Oak Opening (0)
^ Oak Barrens (3) ~ —
^ Dry Upland F. (46) -
S^Cult. Fields (39)- ~
Mixed Flood. F. (6)
Dry Upland F. (59)
* Cult. Fields (32)
Oak Barrens (100)^- -
— *
► Oak Barrens (43) — —— — — — — — > Oak Barrens (14)
» Dry Upland F. (43) - — - Dry Upland F. (86)
k Cult. Fields (14) - —
59
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
serve: topography, hydrology, and fire.
Four land-use factors seem to have been
crucial in influencing the pattern and
composition of the post-settlement vege¬
tation types on the Reserve: fire control,
grazing, mowing, and cultivation. The
probable role of these land-use factors
in vegetational change on the Reserve will
be analyzed by examining successional
trends in the following community types:
(1) oak opening, (2) oak barrens, (3) sedge
meadow, and (4) low prairie.
Oak Opening to Upland Oak Forest
Oak opening was the dominant plant
community type on the Leopold Reserve
at the time of settlement, covering almost
one-third of the total land surface (Fig. 3;
Table 3. Characteristics of the plant community types on the Leopold Memorial Re¬
serve, Sauk County, Wisconsin.
60
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
61
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
62
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
63
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Table 1). Today dry upland oak forest is
the dominant plant community type of
the Reserve; oak opening with an intact
natural groundlayer is no longer present
(Table 2).
After settlement, the rolling upland oak
openings, which comprised about 40% of
the oak openings, were cultivated. Most
of the rolling upland oak openings re¬
mained under cultivation (Table 2).
Meanwhile, virtually all of the ridge oak
openings, which comprised about 50% of
the oak openings, quickly succeeded into
dry upland oak forest, due to the absence
of fire and grazing. Thereafter, the oak
forests were occasionally but never inten¬
sively grazed, and were also selectively cut
for firewood. They remain dry upland
oak forest today (Table 2). Finally, the
lowland oak openings, which comprised
about 10% of the oak openings, succeed¬
ed into shrub carr or were maintained by
grazing until the early 1950s. Grazing may
have maintained the lowland oak open¬
ings, but it destroyed the natural ground-
layer. The lowland oak openings are
mixed hardwood forest today (Table 2).
Floodplain Oak Barrens to
Cultivated Fields to Floodplain
Oak Barrens/Upland Oak Barrens
to Dry Upland Oak Forest
Oak barrens were scattered on sandy
sites throughout the Leopold Reserve at
the time of settlement, occupying about
12% of the total land surface (about 5%
of which is labelled as mixed floodplain
forest in the 1840s map) (Fig. 3; Table 1).
Today virtually all of the original flood-
plain oak barrens remain oak barrens,
while 86% of the original upland oak bar¬
rens has succeeded into dry/upland forest
(Table 2).
The floodplain oak barrens were for the
most part cultivated after settlement, but
were abandoned several decades later
when the meager natural soil fertility ran
out (Fig. 4); After abandonment, these
“dry meadows’’ began to succeed back
into a dry-mesic prairie, and now are oak
barrens again. However, unlike the origi¬
nal floodplain oak barrens, today’s flood-
plain oak barrens are invaded by prickly
ash (Xanthoxylum americanum). The
ridge oak barrens, meanwhile, succeeded
into dry upland black oak forest, due to
the absence of fire and grazing, but at a
slower rate than the ridge oak openings
(Table 2). Unlike the white oak forest
formed from former ridge oak openings,
the dry upland black oak forest main¬
tained an intact natural groundlayer, pre¬
sumably because of the relatively open
canopy and infertile soils (Curtis 1959;
Vogl 1964). Therefore, the dry upland
black oak forest on the Reserve easily
lends itself to restoration, as demon¬
strated in the restoration of “Frank’s”
prairie (Holtz and Howell 1983) (Fig. 2).
Sedge Meadow to Wet Meadow
and Shrub Carr
Sedge Meadow occupied about 15% of
the total land surface of the Leopold
Reserve at the time of settlement (Fig. 3;
Table 1). Today about half of the original
sedge meadow remains, the remaining
half having succeeded into shrub carr or a
disturbed version of the sedge meadow
community known as wet meadow (Table
2).
Most of the sedge meadow on the Re¬
serve was maintained from settlement
through the mid- 1940s by the periodic
mowing of marsh hay. The remainder of
the sedge meadow succeeded into shrub
carr and wet meadow (Fig. 4). When
mowing of the sedge meadows ceased in
the 1940s, succession into shrub carr ac¬
celerated (Fig. 5). Drier hydrologic condi¬
tions, resulting from groundwater move¬
ment away from the marsh and toward
the drainage ditch and from changes in
river morphology, most likely also con¬
tributed to this successional trend (Bed¬
ford et al. 1974).
64
The A Ido Leopold Memorial Reserve
Stevens (1985) utilized the 1937 to 1975
aerial photographs to analyze the rates of
shrub invasion on Reserve sedge meadow
over time. Shrub cover increased in “long
marsh” from 27% in 1937 to 50% in 1966
with a slight decrease due to mowing in
1955. South of the drainage ditch, the
change was even more dramatic, with
shrub cover increasing from 35% in 1937
to 83% in 1977.
Low Prairie to Shrub Carr
to Mixed Hardwood Forest
Low prairie occupied about 8% of the
total land surface on the Leopold Reserve
at the time of settlement (Fig. 3; Table 1).
Today, the low prairie has virtually disap¬
peared as a community type on the Re¬
serve, having been replaced by wet
meadow, shrub carr, and mixed hard¬
wood forest (Table 2).
In the absence of fire or mowing, or in
the presence of grazing, about half of the
original low prairie succeeded into shrub
carr by the 1930s (Fig. 4) and ultimately
into mixed hardwood forest thereafter
(Fig. 5), Mowing delayed this succession
in the low prairie near Chapman Lake
(Stevens 1985) (Fig. 3-Fig. 5). When
mowing ended in the late 1930s, shrubs
quickly invaded, increasing from 17% in
1937 to 40% in 1949 but remaining cons¬
tant until 1975 due to infrequent mowing.
In 1975, shrub cover had reached 61%
and has continued to increase ever since
due to lack of mowing and burning.
Summary
The changes in vegetation on the Leo¬
pold Memorial Reserve since glaciation
have been dramatic. The proglacial boreal
forest and sphagnum bog communities of
approximately 12,000 years ago have
given way to the fire-maintained, rela¬
tively open oak savanna, marshland, and
floodplain forest communities of pre-
European settlement Wisconsin. These
aboriginally influenced communities, in
turn, have given way to the agriculturally
influenced, relatively closed oak forest,
shrub carr, cultivated field, and flood-
plain forest communities of today.
The character and appearance of the
landscape of the Leopold Reserve has
changed significantly since European set¬
tlement. At the time of settlement, two-
thirds of the Reserve lands were com¬
posed of open communities of savanna
and marshland; today, two-thirds of the
Reserve is composed of closed commu¬
nities of upland oak forest, mixed flood-
plain forest, and shrub carr. The primary
factor responsible for this change is the
control of fires that resulted from light¬
ning strikes and Indian activities.
Agricultural use of the area helped to
delay this succession of open communities
into closed ones. Grazing and cultivation
kept the savannas open but destroyed
the natural groundlayer. The mowing of
marsh hay, meanwhile, kept the low prai¬
rie and sedge meadow open. Agricultural
use probably peaked in the 1920s, drop¬
ped throughout the 1930s, 1940s, and
1950s, and then leveled off in the 1960s.
This decline in agriculture was due to the
meager natural fertility of the soil, the in¬
troduction of modern mechanized farm¬
ing, and farmer attribution.
Reflecting over the immense changes
that had occurred since European settle¬
ment, an early pioneer of the township
lamented in these somewhat florid words:
Fairfield in pioneer days was a veritable
flower garden. Wherever the sod was un¬
broken the ground was literally covered
with flowers. It was a delight to look upon
them and think that God and not man nor
woman planted them and that Solomon in
all his glory was not arrayed like one of
these. There was one variety for which I
looked in vain, the dandelion. The dear
home flower, how I missed it and longed for
the sight of it. The 2nd or 3rd year my
sister, who was always looking for it as well
as I, found just one and Mrs. Wing laugh-
65
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
ingly tells the story of Mrs. Emily how find¬
ing a dandelion and being so overjoyed that
she shed tears. Neither was there a stalk of
mullein to be seen in all the land. But we
said: “with the coming of the sheep the
mullein will grow,” which has passed true
and the time has come when we could dis¬
pense with the everlasting presence of both
dandelion and mullein. (Luce 1912)
Acknowledgments
Many persons deserve special thanks
for helping with this project. In par¬
ticular, I wish to acknowledge the help the
late Walter E. Scott gave in sharing with
me his insights about the land-use history
of the region and his extensive library of
materials on Wisconsin. I also wish to
thank Evelyn Howell (Department of
Landscape Architecture, University of
Wisconsin-Madison) and Kenneth I.
Lange (Naturalist, Devil’s Lake State
Park) for their advice and editorial sug¬
gestions, my wife Karen Atkins for her
assistance with producing the maps and
figures, and Nina and Charles Bradley for
their graciousness and generosity. I am
also grateful to the Sand County and
Aldo Leopold Shack Foundations; with¬
out their financial support during my four
years of fellowship studies on the Leopold
Reserve, I cound not have completed my
studies.
Works Cited
Babington, R. S. 1928. Raft life on the
Wisconsin River. The Wis. Mag. 6(5): 122-
127.
Bedford, B. L., E. H. Zimmerman, and J. H.
Zimmerman. 1974. The wetlands of Dane
County, Wisconsin. Dane County Regional
Planning Commission and Wisconsin De¬
partment of Natural Resources, Madison,
Wis. 581pp.
Black, R. F., and M. Rubin. 1967-1968.
Radio-carbon dates of Wisconsin. Trans.
Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and Lett. 56:99-115.
Bordner, J. S. 1938. Land economic inventory
of the State of Wisconsin. Field maps. Sauk
County.
Bradley, C. 1978-1986, unpubl. The Bradley
Study Center Log.
_ . 1987. The Leopold Memorial Re¬
serve. In: T. Tanner, ed. Aldo Leopold: the
man and his legacy. Soil Cons. Soc. of
Amer., Ankeny, Iowa: 161-64.
Brink, J. 1845. GLO survey field notes.
Brown, C. E. 1924. Plat book of Wisconsin,
containing maps of archeological finds in
Wisconsin. W. W. Hixon.
Butterfield, C. W. 1880a. The history of Co¬
lumbia County, Wisconsin, containing an
account of its settlement etc. Western
Historical Co., Chicago, Ill. 1095 pp.
_ , ed. 1880b. The history of Sauk Coun¬
ty, Wisconsin. Western Historical Co.,
Chicago, Ill.
Canfield, W. 1861a. Outline sketches of Sauk
County.
_ . 1861b. Plat map of Fairfield Town¬
ship, Sauk County, Wisconsin.
Carver, J. 1838. Travels in Wisconsin. From
the 3rd London ed. Harper & Bros., New
York, New York. 376 pp.
Childs, E. 1859. Recollections of Wisconsin
since 1820. Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll. 4.
Cole, H. E. 1918. A history of Sauk County.
Vol. 1. Lewis Publ. Co., Chicago, Ill. 566
pp.
Conkey, T. 1845. GLO survey field notes.
Current, R. 1976. The civil war era, 1 848—
1873. The history of Wisconsin, Vol. II.
State Historical Soc. of Wis., Madison,
Wis. 659 pp.
Curtis, J. T. 1959. The vegetation of Wiscon¬
sin. Univ. of Wis. Press, Madison, Wis. 657
pp.
Davis, M. G., ed. 1947. A history of Wiscon¬
sin highway development, 1835-1945. State
Highway Commission of Wisconsin, Madi¬
son, Wis. 272 pp.
Day, G. 1953. The indian as an ecological fac¬
tor in the northeastern forest. Ecology
34(2):329-346.
Dorney, J. R. 1981. The impact of native
Americans on presettlement vegetation in
southeastern Wisconsin. Trans. Wise.
Acad, of Sci., Arts and Lett. 69:26-36.
Featherstonaugh, G. W. 1847 (Rep. Ed.
1970). A canoe voyage of the Minnay Sotor.
Minnesota Historical Soc., St. Paul, Minn.
416 pp.
66
The Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve
Felt, M. 1879-1899. unpubl. Journal.
Grange, W. B. 1948. Wisconsin grouse prob¬
lems. Federal aid in wildlife restoration
project #9R. Pub. 328. Wis. Conserv. Dep.,
Madison, Wis. 318 pp.
Graustein, J. E., ed. 1951. NuttalPs travels in¬
to the old Northwest; an unpublished 1810
diary. Chronica Botanica Co., Waltham,
Mass. 88 pp.
Gregory, J. G, ed. 1932. Southwestern Wis¬
consin: a history of old Crawford County.
Vol. II. S. J. Clarke Publishing Co.,
Chicago, Ill. 1514 pp.
Holtz, S. and E. Howell. 1983. Restoration of
grassland in a degraded woods using the
management techniques of cutting and
burning. In: R. Brewer, ed. Proc. Eighth N.
Am. Prairie Conf. Dep. of Biol., West.
Mich. Univ., Kalamazoo, Mich: 124-29.
Hunt, J. W. 1853. Wisconsin gazetteer, con¬
taining the names, locations, and ad¬
vantages of the counties, cities, towns,
villages, post offices, and settlements,
together with a description of the lakes,
water courses, prairies, and public locali¬
ties, in the State of Wisconsin. Beriah
Brown, Printer, Madison, Wis. 255 pp.
Jones, J. E. 1914. A history of Columbia
County, Wisconsin: a narrative account of
its historical progress, its people, and its
principal interests. Lewis Publ. Co., Chi¬
cago, Ill. Vol. I. 443 pp.
Kellogg, L. P., ed. 1917. Early narratives of
the northwest, 1634-1697. Charles Scrib¬
ner’s Sons, New York, New York. 382 pp.
_ . 1925. The French regime in Wisconsin
and the northwest. State Historical Soc. of
Wis., Madison, Wis. 474 pp.
Kinzie, J. A. 1856 (1968 Ed.). “Wau-bun” —
the “early days” in the northwest, including
life at Fort Winnebago 1830-1833. The Na¬
tional Soc. of Colonial Dames in Wis.,
Menasha, Wis. 390 pp.
Lange, K. 1976. A county called Sauk: a
human history of Sauk County, Wisconsin.
Sauk County Historical Society. 168 pp. In¬
cludes: Lange, K. 1973. Presettlement vege¬
tation map of Sauk County and Caledonia
Township, Columbia County, Wisconsin.
Leopold, A. 1934. The Wisconsin River
marshes. National Waltonian (Sept.). 3 pp.
_ 1935-1948, unpubl. “Shack jour¬
nals.”
_ . 1940. Wisconsin wildlife chronology.
Wis. Conserv. Bull. 5(1 1):8— 21 .
_ . 1949. A sand county almanac. Oxford
Univ. Press, New York, New York. 226 pp.
Lewis, H. T. 1980. Indian fires of spring.
Natural History 89(l):76-83.
Liegel, K. 1982. The pre-european settlement
vegetation of the Aldo Leopold Memorial
Reserve. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts and
Lett. 70:13-26.
Luce, Mrs. J. 1912. Fairfield in the fifties.
Baraboo Weekly News. May 2, 1912.
Luthin, C. 1978. Rev. Ferber, D. 1986.
Vegetation map of the Aldo Leopold Me¬
morial Reserve, Sauk County, Wisconsin.
_ . 1979, unpubl. Herbarium of the Aldo
Leopold Memorial Reserve, Sauk County,
Wisconsin. 47 pp.
_ . 1980, unpubl. Plant communities of
the Aldo Leopold Memorial Reserve, Sauk
County, Wisconsin. 33 pp.
Maher, L. J., Jr. 1981. The Green Bay sub¬
lobe began to retreat 12,500 B.P.: total
pollen influx during the early Greatlakean
Substage (11,900 to 10,900 B.P.) was but
half the influx during Twocreekan. Geo.
Soc. of Amer., Abstracts with Programs, v.
13, pp. 288.
_ 1982. The palynology of Devils Lake,
Sauk County, Wisconsin. In: J. C. Knox, L.
Clayton, and D. M. Michelson, eds. Qua¬
ternary history of the driftless area. Wis.
Geo. and Nat. His. Sur., Field Trip Guide
No. 5:119-135.
Martin, C. 1973. Fire and forest structure in
the aboriginal eastern forest. The Indian
Historian 6(3):23— 26.
Mossman, M. 1980. unpubl. An ecological
survey of small mammals on the Leopold
Memorial Reserve, Sauk County, Wiscon¬
sin. 87 pp.
_ and J. Reed. 1978, unpubl. Breeding
bird survey, Leopold Memorial Reserve.
Nesbit, R. C. 1973. Wisconsin: a history.
Univ. of Wis. Press, Madison, Wis. 573 pp.
Peske, G. R. 1971. Winnebago cultural adap¬
tation to the Fox River waterway. Wiscon¬
sin Archaeology 52:62-70.
Prucha, F. P. 1964. Guide to the military
posts of the United States, 1789-1875. State
Hist. Soc. of Wis., Madison, Wis. 178 pp.
Quimby, G. I. 1960. Indian life on the upper
67
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
great lakes, 11,000 B.C. to A.D. 1800.
Univ. of Chicago Press, Chicago, Ill. 182
pp.
Schafer, J. 1922. A history of agriculture in
Wisconsin. State His. Soc. of Wis., Madi¬
son, Wis. 212 pp.
Schoolcraft, H. R. 1953. Ed. Narrative jour¬
nals of travels through the northwest re¬
gions of the United States. M. L. Williams,
ed. Michigan State College Press, East Lan¬
sing, Mich. 520 pp.
Scott, W. E. 1947. The “old north’’ returns: a
study of wildlife in central Wisconsin with
special reference to recent hunting seasons.
Wis. Cons. Bull. 12(4).
_ . 1980. A Wisconsin deer management
chronology (1836-1980). Pages 111-16 in
R. L. Hine and S. Nehls, eds. Whitetailed
deer population management in the north
central states. Proc. 1979 Symp. North
Cent. Sect. Wildl. Soc. 116 pp.
Sharp, S. E., and J. Bowles. 1985, unpubl. A
detailed study of soil and plant relationships
on the Leopold Memorial Reserve. 95 pp.
Smith, A. E. 1973. From exploration to settle¬
ment. The history of Wisconsin, volume I.
State Historical Soc. of Wis., Madison,
Wis. 753 pp.
Smith, W. R. 1854. The history of Wisconsin
in three parts: historical, documentary, and
descriptive. Beriah Brown, Printer,
Madison, Wis. Vol. I: 432 pp. Vol. II & III:
443 pp.
Socha, B. J. 1984. The glacial geology of the
Baraboo area, Wisconsin and application of
remote sensing to mapping surficial geol¬
ogy. M.S. Thesis. Univ. of Wis., Madison,
Wis. 154 pp.
Staines, H. B. 1852. Agriculture of Sauk
County. Trans. Wis. State Agr. Soc.
1:215-17.
Statz, Roman. 1982. Personal communica¬
tion. Soil conservation specialist of Sauk
County.
Stevens, M. 1985, unpubl. Effects of mowing
on shrub encroachment in a sedge meadow
in Central Wisconsin. M.S. Thesis. Univ. of
Wis., Madison, Wis. 182 pp.
Stout, A. B. 1906. Summary of the archae¬
ology of eastern Sauk County, Wisconsin.
The Wis. Archaeologist 5 (2): 227-288.
Tohulka, M. 1979, unpubl. A census of rep¬
tiles and amphibians on the Leopold Me¬
morial Reserve. 8 pp.
Tucker, M. 1877. Plat map of Fairfield Town¬
ship, Sauk County, Wisconsin.
Turner, A. J. 1898. The history of Fort Win¬
nebago. Wis. His. Soc. Coll. 14:65-102.
Vale, T. R. 1982. Plants and people: vegeta¬
tion change in North America. Assoc, of
Amer. Geographers, Washington, D.C. 88
pp.
Vogl, R. 1964. Vegetational history of Crex
Meadows, a prairie savanna in northwest¬
ern Wisconsin. The Amer. Midi. Nat. 72(1):
157-175.
Wetlands Mapping Staff. 1981 ed. Wisconsin
wetlands inventory training manual. Wis.
Dep. of Nat. Res., Madison, Wis.
Winkler, M. G. 1985. Late-glacial and holo-
cene environmental history of south-central
Wisconsin: a study of upland and wetland
ecosystems. Ph.D. Thesis. Institute for En¬
vironmental Studies. Univ. of Wis., Madi¬
son, Wis. 261 pp.
Wisconsin Department of Agriculture. 1923-
1972. Annual Enumeration of Farm Statis¬
tics by Assessors.
Wisconsin Power Service Commission v. Fed¬
eral Power Commission, U.S. Circuit Court
of Appeals. 1944. Transcript of record. No.
8427. Petitions for review orders of the
Federal Power Commission. Gunthrop-
Warren Printing Co., Chicago, Ill. 637 pp.
Wisconsin Regional Planning Committee.
1934. A study of Wisconsin, its resources,
its physical, social and economic back¬
ground. State of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
501 pp.
Wittry, W. L. 1959a. The raddatz rockshelter,
Sk5, Wisconsin. The Wis. Archaeologist
40(2):33-69.
_ . 1959b. Archaeological studies of four
Wisconsin rockshelters. The Wis. Archae¬
ologist 40(4):137 -261 .
U. S. Department of Agriculture. 1860-1900.
Agricultural Census Schedules for Wiscon¬
sin.
Zolidis, N. 1985, unpubl. Hydrogeology of
the Leopold Memorial Reserve. 30 pp.
68
Collections of young-of-the-year Blue Suckers
(Cycleptus elongatus) in Navigation Pool 9
of the Upper Mississippi River
Michael C. Mclnerny and John W. Held
Abstract. Ten young-of-the-year blue suckers (Cycleptus elongatus) were collected in
July 1979 and June 1980 from intake screens of a steam-electric station located on the
east shore of Navigation Pool 9 (River Mile 678.5) of the Mississippi River. These blue
suckers probably hatched in early May and may have been reared in the tail race below
Lock and Dam No. 8.
The blue sucker (Cycleptus elongatus) is
rare but widespread in the Missouri
and Mississippi Rivers and their tribu¬
taries (Pflieger 1975). Dam construction
resulting in reduced current velocity, in¬
creased siltation, and barriers to spawning
migrations was thought to be responsible
for the decline of this once abundant
species (Cross 1967; Pflieger 1975). Blue
suckers are rare in Wisconsin and are
classified by the state as a threatened
species (Wis. Dep. Nat. Resour. 1987).
Johnson (1987) listed the blue sucker as a
species of special concern in Minnesota.
In Wisconsin, blue suckers are limited to
the Mississippi River drainage (Becker
1983). Rasmussen (1979) reported that
collections of blue suckers in Navigation
Pool 9 of the Upper Mississippi River
were rare between 1969 and 1979, but they
were not collected in adjacent Pools 8 and
10. Blue suckers in Pools 8 and 10 had
been collected before 1969.
Information on the life history of blue
suckers is limited. Rupprecht and Jahn
(1980) presented data on growth, food
habits, and spawning in Navigation Pool
Michael C. Mclnerny is Associate Scientist at the
Applied Science Center, Duke Power Company,
Huntersville, North Carolina.
John W. Held is a Professor of Biology and
Microbiology at the University of Wisconsin-La
Crosse.
20 of the Mississippi River, and Moss et
al. (1983) provided similar information
for the Neosho River, Kansas, plus data
on habitat use by all life stages except
larvae. We report collections of young-of-
the-year blue suckers from Navigation
Pool 9 of the Mississippi River.
Methods and Materials
Weekly 24-hr samples of fishes were
collected from intake screens of Dairy-
land Power Cooperative’s Genoa #3
steam-electric station from August 1978
through June 1980. Descriptions of the
collection baskets used are described in
Mclnerny (1980). Although not a tradi¬
tional sampling gear, intake screens are
practical and useful for qualitatively
sampling fish populations in the vicinity
of the intakes (Margraf et al. 1985). All
fish collected were identified to species,
measured (total length in mm), counted,
and weighed (g).
Genoa #3, a coal-fired steam-electric
station (350 MWe) is on the east shore of
Navigation Pool 9 of the Mississippi River
(River Mile 678.5) approximately 0.8 km
downstream of Lock and Dam No. 8 and
1.2 km south of Genoa, Wisconsin. The
intake structure of Genoa #3 was con¬
structed along a rip-rap shoreline that ex¬
tends from Lock and Dam No. 8 to ap¬
proximately 0.8 km downstream of the
steam station. The rip-rap generally con-
69
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
sisted of large (>250-mm diameter)
rocks.
River water temperatures on each sam¬
ple day were obtained from plant person¬
nel at Genoa #3. Current velocity at the
surface was determined by measuring the
time required for a semi-bouyant float to
move a fixed distance. River discharge
data at Lock and Dam No. 8 during
sampling were obtained from the U.S.
Army Corps of Engineers.
Results and Discussion
One blue sucker, 67 mm TL, was col¬
lected on the intake screens on 16 July
1979. Water temperature was 23 °C and
river discharge was 83,000 mVmin. Nine
blue suckers, ranging from 37 to 53 mm
TL, were collected on 25 June 1980; water
temperature was 22 °C and river discharge
was 50,000 mVmin. Current velocity
averaged 0.3 m/s at the shoreline and 0.8
m/s 20 m from shore. Current along the
rip-rap shoreline in the vicinity of the in¬
take screens presumably attracted these
young-of-the-year blue suckers. Moss et
al. (1983) reported that juvenile blue
suckers in the laboratory preferred
smooth substrates of fine gravel (>2
mm), large cobble ( > 128 mm) or bedrock
(>256 mm) and preferred the strongest
current (1 to 1.2 m/s).
We estimated that these blue suckers
hatched in early May each year. These
estimations were based on mean lengths
of larval blue sucker at hatching (8.7
mm), and growth rates of 0.5 mm/da for
larvae <23 mm TL and ~ 1 mm/da for
larvae >23 mm (Semmens 1985). Water
temperatures in late April/early May were
13 to 14°C, within the range (13 to 17°C)
that Rupprecht and Jahn (1980) observed
turberculated male blue suckers in ob¬
vious spawning condition (free-flowing
milt) at Navigation Pool 20 of the
Mississippi River. Larval catostomids
were collected on 18 June 1979 and week¬
ly from 20 May through 19 June 1980, but
were identified only to family (Mclnerny
1980). Additional collections of larvae in
Navigation Pool 9, along with improve¬
ments on identification of larval blue
suckers (Yeager and Semmons 1987),
could demonstrate that the tailrace of
Lock and Dam No 8 is used by blue
suckers for spawning and rearing of
young. This information could be crucial
for maintaining this species in Wisconsin.
Acknowledgment
Dairyland Power Cooperative, La
Crosse, Wisconsin, provided funds for
this project.
Works Cited
Becker, G. C. 1983. Fishes of Wisconsin.
University of Wisconsin Press, Madison,
Wisconsin: 1052 pp.
Cross, F. B. 1967. Handbook of fishes of
Kansas. Museum of Natural History, Kan¬
sas University, Lawrence, Kansas: 357 pp.
Johnson, J. E. 1987. Protected fishes of the
United States and Canada. American Fish¬
eries Society Special Publication, Bethesda,
Maryland: 42 pp.
Margraf, F. J., D. M. Chase, and K. Strawn.
1985. Intake screens for sampling fish
populations: the size-selectivity problem. TV.
Am. J. Fish. Mgmt. 5:210-213.
Mclnerny, M. C. 1980. Impingement and en¬
trainment of fishes at Dairyland Power
Cooperative’s Genoa site. M.S. Thesis. Uni¬
versity of Wisconsin-La Crosse, La Crosse,
Wisconsin: 1 1 1 pp.
Moss, R. E., J. W. Scanlon, and C. S. Ander¬
son. 1983. Observations on the natural
history of the blue sucker ( Cycleptus
elongatus Le Sueur) in the Neosho River.
Amer. Mid. Nat. 109(1): 15-22.
Pflieger, W. L. 1975. The fishes of Missouri.
Missouri Dept, of Conservation, Jefferson
City, Missouri: 343 pp.
Rasmussen, J. L. (ed.). 1979. A compendium
of fishery information on the Upper Missis¬
sippi River, 2nd edition. Upper Mississippi
70
Young-of-the- Year Blue Sucker
River Conservation Committee, Rock Is¬
land, Illinois: 259 pp.
Rupprecht, R. J. and L. A. Jahn. 1980. Bio¬
logical notes on blue suckers in the Missis¬
sippi River. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 109:323—
326.
Semmens, K. J. 1985. Induced spawning of
the blue sucker (Cycleptus elongatus). Prog.
Fish-Cult. 47:119-120.
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources.
1987. Wisconsin natural history inventory
working list: fish. Wis. Dept. Nat. Res.,
Madison, Wisconsin.
Yeager, B. L. and K. J. Semmens. 1987. Early
development of the blue sucker (Cycleptus
elongatus). Copeia 1987: 312-316.
71
The Photography of David Ford Hansen
Those readers familiar with State photograph attributions have seen the name
David Ford Hansen in virtually every major State newspaper and magazine. His
photographs have illustrated three books about the Mississippi as well as a recent book
on the Chippewa Valley. David is known not only for his technical skill but for his abil¬
ity to capture universal human emotions. This collection of photographs, taken between
1973 and 1988, illustrates these two points. The technical skill demonstrated in the
winter scenes allows the viewer to concentrate not only on the images but also on the
contrasts, the starkness, and the incredible detail. In the three photographs of people,
one encounters the joy and wonder of the young, the complexity of a boy on a bicycle,
and the enigma of a young girl as she views herself in a mirror.
David Hansen teaches photography and writing courses as Assistant Professor of
Journalism at the University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire.
72
Photographs of David Hanson
73
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
74
Photographs of David Hanson
75
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
76
Photographs of David Hanson
77
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
78
Photographs of David Hanson
79
Aging Effects and Older Adult Learners:
Implications of an Instructional Program
in Music
David E. Myers
A persistent concern in educators’ at¬
tempts to meet the needs of an ex¬
panding adult clientele has been the rela¬
tionship between learning and the aging
process (Cross 1981; National Center for
Education Statistics 1983; Gamson 1984).
Despite longstanding evidence of dimin¬
ishing cognitive, perceptual, and motor
skills associated with increasing age
(Chapanis 1950; Konig 1957; Lebo and
Redell 1972; Salthouse 1979, 1982; Bot-
winick 1984), the practical effects of such
declines in learning performance have not
been clearly established. Some researchers
suggest, for example, that the normal and
expected effects of aging may have only
limited negative effect on the tasks of
everyday life (Schaie and Parr 1981). As
learners, older adults may overcome po¬
tentially adverse effects of age-related
deficits by drawing on their considerable
life experience, by using a broad range of
compensatory strategies, and by selective¬
ly attending to matters of particular
meaning or relevance (Schaie and Parr
1981; Perlmutter 1983; Labouvie-Vief
1985).
Historically, assumptions of less effi¬
cient learning among older adults have
paralleled other more general negative at¬
titudes and beliefs regarding aging (Bot-
winick 1984). Research based on labora¬
tory tests has tended to support the view
that older adults do not learn as fast or as
much as younger adults. However, such
research sometimes has been based on
content and procedures having little
David E. Myers is Assistant Professor of Music at
Georgia State University in Atlanta.
familiarity or meaning for older adults
(Demming and Pressey 1957).
Age-related declines in sensory process¬
ing and behavior time raise particular
questions regarding older adult learners in
a subject such as music, which incorpo¬
rates sensorimotor skill development.
Combinations of activities involving
simultaneous listening, moving, singing,
and playing instruments are considered
central to music learning (Mark 1986);
Gordon (1980) and Mursell (1958) have
suggested that the inherent processes of
music learning do not change with age.
Gibbons (1982) found that elderly sub¬
jects desired music education programs
because they wanted to improve their
music skills. However, Gilbert and Beal
(1982) found in a survey that adults over
fifty-five expressed reluctance to par¬
ticipate in physically active, skills-based
music learning.
Gardner (Brandt 1987-1988) has con¬
tended that assessment in the arts is
fruitless unless people have had oppor¬
tunities to become actively involved in ar¬
tistic experiences. Thus, it is possible that
older adults who have not participated in
physically active music learning (or have
not done so for an extended period of
time) may express reluctance to partici¬
pate in skills-based programs. Cross
(1981) has suggested that development of
education programs for older adults
should not be based on conclusions from
research confounded by situational vari¬
ables but on investigations into the physi¬
cal, psychological, and sociocultural char¬
acteristics of older learners.
81
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
To date, almost no research has ad¬
dressed questions of adult music learning
in the context of characteristics observed
in an implemented skills-based instruc¬
tional program. In this study, the
relationship between age and music learn¬
ing was assessed within an implemented
skills-based music fundamentals program
founded on a widely tested model of in¬
struction (Froseth 1983). The criteria pro¬
viding a framework for the study were as
follows: (1) an instructional program that
provided sequential acquisition of skills
and knowledge deemed integral to under¬
standing in music; (2) accessibility and
flexibility in adapting techniques and
materials to the needs and interests of
participants; and (3) a performance-based
assessment model that incorporated fun¬
damental musical response as a basis
for comparing aspects of music learning
among adults of various ages. These cri¬
teria helped to ensure both the validity of
instructional practice and the focus of the
research on the music learning process.
Purpose
The primary purpose of this study was
to investigate the relationship between age
and music-learning achievement among
three age groups of adults. Ancillary pur¬
poses included age-group comparisons of
learning rate and of self-perceived attain¬
ment. Implementation of an instructional
model that merged sequential develop¬
ment of music skills and understanding
with the needs and interests of partici¬
pating adults was considered central to
these purposes.
Research subjects were volunteers who
responded to a call for subjects and a
description of the program offered
through newspaper advertisements, visits
by the researcher to community and se¬
nior centers, and posters. They repre¬
sented three age levels: 22-37, 50-59, and
60-76 years. Though nineteen others par¬
ticipated, analyses were limited to thirty-
two subjects who attended at least sixteen
of twenty offered hours of heterogeneous
group instruction and completed a testing
program. Of these, eight were in the
youngest age group, six were in the middle
group, and eighteen were in the oldest
group. All participants considered them¬
selves unskilled in fundamental music
learning, and all were individuals who
maintained active, independent life styles.
The instruction focused on the develop¬
ment of aural-discrimination learning as a
foundation for musical understanding.
Four primary response modes were em¬
ployed: (1) kinesthetic response through
movement to beat (steady pulse), tempo
(faster and slower pulse), and meter (beat
groupings); (2) singing, including aural
imitation of melodic patterns sung and
played by the instructor, association of
melodic syllables with the patterns, and
vocal performance from melodic nota¬
tion; (3) instrumental performance, in¬
corporating imitation of melodic patterns
played by the instructor and heard on a
tape, and performance of patterns from
notation using a soprano recorder; and (4)
vocal rhythmic response, incorporating
aural imitation of patterns performed by
the instructor, association of rhythmic
syllables with patterns, and performance
of rhythmic patterns from notation.
Autoharp and guitar performance tasks
were included but not tested. Instruction
moved in sequence from imitative experi¬
ences in moving, listening, and singing
through aural-verbal association skills
(melodic and rhythmic syllables) and
visual-verbal association skills (notation)
to music reading and performance. In¬
structional technique consisted of presen¬
tations of material synchronized with
tape-recorded musical backgrounds,
modeling-imitation sequences, and op¬
portunities for review, practice, and
elaboration of presented materials.
82
Older Adult Learners
Method
The study was designed as a cross-
sectional assessment of learning achieve¬
ment, learning rate, and self-perceived at¬
tainment. Performance behaviors taught
in the program provided the basis for
assessment of achievement. Five pretests
were administered to obtain baseline data
on levels of musical skills: musical
discrimination, kinesthetic response to
music, melodic imitation skills, and
melodic and rhythmic reading-performing
skills. Posttests included the same in¬
struments for musical discrimination and
kinesthetic response. Six additional post¬
tests were devised to assess facets of
achievement specific to the instructional
program: melodic imitation and syllable
association (singing); melodic imitation¬
playing skills (soprano recorder); melodic
reading-singing skills; melodic reading¬
playing skills; verbal rhythmic imitation
and syllable association; and rhythmic
reading skills (verbal). Tasks included
answering multiple-choice questions
(musical discrimination), tapping a wood¬
block (kinesthetic response), singing
(melodic and rhythmic), and playing re¬
corder (melodic tasks).
Learning-rate observations were re¬
corded on a three-point scale (1 = slowest,
3 = fastest) during portions of instruc¬
tional sequences that used a tape-recorded
musical accompaniment to maintain con¬
sistent music tempos and rates of content
presentation for all learners. Two trained
unobtrusive observers recorded data dur¬
ing seven class sessions in five categories
of activities reflecting the instructional
sequence used for each class. These cate¬
gories were: kinesthetic response, rhyth¬
mic imitation and association skills (lis¬
tening and chanting syllables), melodic
imitation and association skills (listening
and singing syllables), melodic ear-to-
hand skills (listening and playing), and
reading-performing skills.
Self-perceived attainment was assessed
by means of a questionnaire. Subjects
used a five-point scale to indicate self¬
perceptions of their enjoyment, the per¬
sonal value of learning tasks, their success
on learning tasks, their progress over the
course, and their overall levels of par¬
ticipation. In each category, responses
were requested for specific learning ac¬
tivities emphasized in the instructional
program: movement, melodic syllables,
rhythmic syllables, music reading, re¬
corder playing, autoharp/guitar experi¬
ence, and applications in performance.
Age-group comparisons of the data
were made on the basis of appropriate
parametric and nonparametric measures,
including t tests, analyses of variance and
covariance, the Mann- Whitney U test, the
Kruskal- Wallis analysis of variance by
ranks, correlations, and the chi-square
test. Because the sample was small and
nonrandomized, nonparametric analyses
were compared with parametric analyses
for all data. Results consistently were
similar. Because of the widely docu¬
mented lessening of aural acuity asso¬
ciated with age, all subjects received a
hearing screening administered by a cer¬
tified audiologist.
Pearson product-moment correlations
for inter-rater evaluations for three judges
on achievement tests ranged from .97 to
.99. Inter-rater reliabilities for two judges
on unobtrusive observation of learning
rate ranged from .81 to .99.
Findings
Instructional Efficacy
Statistically significant achievement
(p<.G5) in musical discrimination and
kinesthetic response, assessed by paired t
pretest-posttest comparisons, was at¬
tained in all age groups (Table 1). Posttest
means on remaining measures indicated
achievement among all age groups (Table
2).
83
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Table 1. Pretest-Posttest Mean Comparisons for Musical Discrimination and Kines¬
thetic Response
Musical Discrimination
Achievement
No evidence was found to suggest
declining achievement associated with in¬
creasing age. Statistically significant age-
group achievement differences (p<.05)
were found only on the assessment of
melodic reading-singing skills. On this
measure, the oldest age group was fa¬
vored over the youngest age group. Both t
test comparisons and the one-way analysis
of covariance, adjusting for previous
music learning experience and pretest
achievement, supported this result (Table
3).
On pre-instructional levels of kines¬
thetic response, the oldest age group was
significantly inferior (p<.05) to the
youngest age group. On the posttest as¬
sessment of kinesthetic response, how¬
ever, there were no significant age-group
differences (Table 4). Thus, a pre-
instructional kinesthetic disadvantage
among the oldest learners was apparently
diminished over the course of instruction.
This finding is notable in light of physical
limitations often experienced by older
adults and in view of research findings
suggesting a reluctance among older
adults to participate in physically active,
skills-based music learning (Gilbert and
Beal 1982).
Aural acuity did not appear to be a fac¬
tor in pretest, posttest, and change-score
measures. Hearing patterns followed the
documented trend of high frequency
losses associated with increasing age
(Konig 1957). Three subjects in the oldest
group failed the hearing screening. How¬
ever, all of these individuals realized
achievement in the program. Inclusions
and exclusion of failing subjects’ achieve¬
ment data did not alter age-group com¬
parative analyses. A review of raw data,
however, did indicate tendencies of failing
subjects to score in the lower two quartiles
on achievement measures. A notable ex-
84
Older Adult Learners
Table 2. Maximum Attainable Posttest Scores, Extreme Scores, Means, and Standard
Deviations By Age Group
Melodic Imitation/Syllable Association (Singing)
85
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
ception to this trend was one failing sub¬
ject’s placement in the highest quartile on
musical discrimination change scores.
Learning Rate
Learning rate, defined as immediacy of
success on specific performance tasks, ap¬
peared to be slower for middle and oldest
subjects than for youngest subjects in all
five of the assessed categories (Table 5).
Unpredictable attendance patterns, how¬
ever, made consistent data collection and
planned analyses impossible. Though an
apparently slower learning rate did not
seem to have an impact on achievement,
there was some anecdotal evidence to sug¬
gest that learners in the oldest group were
more inclined to practice between sessions
than were their younger counterparts.
Slower rates may thus have been compen¬
sated in the oldest group by increased ef¬
fort and rehearsal.
Self-Perceived Attainment
Analyses using the Mann- Whitney U
test and the Kruskal- Wallis one-way
analysis of variance by ranks indicated
that self-perceived attainment scores were
stronger for oldest than for youngest
learners in five categories: overall par¬
ticipation; overall attainment in melodic
syllables tasks; participation in melodic
syllables tasks; enjoyment of melodic
syllables tasks; and enjoyment of music
reading tasks (p<.05). On recorder¬
playing tasks, however, oldest learners’
self-perceptions of their success were
significantly lower (p<.05) than those of
youngest learners (Table 6).
Qualitative Observations
Qualitative observations recorded by
the researcher following each instruc¬
tional session and during individual
testing supported quantitative findings.
Oldest subjects responded more favorably
than youngest subjects to melodic singing
tasks. Though youngest subjects appeared
to demonstrate greater rhythmic respon¬
siveness than those in the middle and
oldest groups, no quantitative results sup¬
ported this observation. A distinctive trait
of the oldest group was the stability of at¬
tendance patterns in contrast to less con¬
sistent attendance patterns of the young¬
est group. At eighty years, the oldest par¬
ticipant did not complete the testing pro¬
gram but did improve markedly in his
ability to discriminate pitch and perform
accurately in singing and playing re¬
corder. He reported that he believed the
results of his participation would have
been no different at age thirty from those
realized at age eighty.
Discussion and Implications
Evidence obtained in this study suggests
that increasing age may not be a disad¬
vantage for older adult participants in
performance-based music learning pro¬
grams. Not only was there an absence of
diminished achievement among older
adults, but those subjects in the oldest age
group scored significantly higher on
melodic reading-singing tasks than those
in the youngest age group.
In relation to the superior performance
of older adults on the melodic reading¬
singing assessment, it must be noted that
adults in the oldest group clearly were
more comfortable than those in the
youngest group with learning tasks that
involved singing. It is possible that
generational differences contributed to
this result. Older adults were perhaps
more likely to have experienced family
and social group singing during their
youth. In addition, the popular musical
idioms of their young adult years were no
doubt strongly melodic, perhaps estab¬
lishing lifelong predispositions toward
melodic sensitivity and singing tasks.
Another facet of older adults’ singing
inclinations may have been that singing
was once a primary element not only of
music education programs but of school
86
Older Adult Learners
Table 3. Age-Group Comparisons of Melodic Reading-Singing Skills
Table 4. Kinesthetic Response Comparisons for Youngest and Oldest Age Groups
Table 5. Mean Age-Group Learning Rates Over Seven Assessments
* Only six assessments were made in the Reading/Performance category.
(3 = fastest rate)
87
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Table 6. Comparisons of Oldest and Youngest Groups on Self-Perceived Attainment
experience in general. Singing tasks,
therefore, especially when combined with
the reading skills that make melodies
more accessible, may have been strongly
congruent with older adults’ existing con¬
notations of music learning. Motivation
for melodic singing tasks thus may have
been stronger in the oldest age group. In
addition, if melodic tasks had greater
meaning, they were probably valued more
highly than nonmelodic tasks.
Although in this study learning rate ap¬
peared to lessen with age, achievement
was not affected. Oldest learners, how¬
ever, were consistently more likely than
middle and youngest learners to take ad¬
vantage of elaboration offered immedi¬
ately following controlled presentation
segments. It is possible, therefore, that
lack of diminished achievement among
oldest subjects may have been related to
these subjects’ willingness to request
repetition and/or explanation of material.
Stronger self-perceptions in the oldest
group for participation and enjoyment in
melodic syllables activities and for enjoy¬
ment of music-reading activities are con¬
sistent with achievement results favoring
the oldest age group on melodic reading¬
singing tasks. Similarly, strong self¬
perceptions of overall participation
among the oldest group parallel reports of
high motivation levels among older adults
documented in nonmusic studies (Kasten-
baum 1979).
The less favorable self-perceptions of
success among older learners on recorder¬
playing tasks, however, were not reflected
on melodic imitation (playing) and read¬
ing-playing achievement measures. This
result suggests the possibility of a
dichotomy between real and self-per¬
ceived capabilities. Older learners may be
subject to their own stereotypical notions
of decreased capability, especially where
psychomotor skills are involved. Particu¬
larly if they have experienced certain of
the physical declines associated with
aging, older learners may tend to feel less
successful than younger learners on multi-
sensory manipulative tasks. The impor¬
tance of sequential, success-oriented in¬
struction that enhances self-perceptions
would thus seem to be paramount for
older adults.
Music educators have long held that
learning opportunities should be available
to people of all ages. Further investigation
88
Older Adult Learners
of the trends suggested in this study,
along with increased information regard¬
ing the developmental needs and interests
of adults, will help ensure design of
appropriate music education programs
for adult learners.
Works Cited
Brandt, R. 1987-1988. On assessment in the
arts: a conversation with Howard Gardner.
Educational Leadership, 45(4):30-34.
Botwinick, J. 1984. Aging and behavior : A
comprehensive integration of research find¬
ings (3rd ed.). New York: Springer.
Chapanis, A. 1950. Relationships between
age, visual acuity and color vision. Human
biology, 22:1-33.
Cross, K. P. 1981. Adults as learners. San
Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Demming, J. A., and Pressey, S. L. 1957.
Tests “indigenous” to the adult and older
years. Journal of Counseling Psychology,
2:144-48.
Froseth, J. 1983. The comprehensive music in¬
structor: listen, move, sing, and play ;
teacher’s planning guide. Chicago: G.I.A.
Gamson, Z. 1984. Liberating education. San
Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Gibbons, A. 1982. Musical aptitude scores in a
noninstitutionalized elderly population.
Journal of music therapy, 20:21-29.
Gilbert, J., and Beal, M. 1982. Preferences of
elderly individuals for selected music educa¬
tion experiences. Journal of research in
music education, 30:247-253 .
Gordon, Edwin E. 1980. Learning sequences
in music. Chicago: G.I.A.
Kastenbaum, R. 1979. Humans developing: a
lifespan perspective. Boston: Allyn and
Bacon.
Konig, E. 1957. Sensory processes and age ef¬
fects in normal adults. Acta otolaryngo-
logica, 48:475-489.
Labouvie-Vief, G. 1985. Intelligence and
cognition. In J. E. Birren and K. W. Schaie,
eds., Handbook of the psychology of aging,
(2d ed.) (pp. 500-530). New York: Van No¬
strand Reinhold.
Lebo, C. P., and Redell, R. C. 1972. The
presbycusis component in occupational
hearing loss. Laryngoscope, 82:1399-1409.
Mark, M. 1987. Contemporary music educa¬
tion (2nd ed.). New York: Schirmer.
Mursell, James L. 1958. Growth processes in
music education. In Nelson B. Henry, ed.,
Basic concepts in music education, (pp.
140-162). Chicago: National Society for the
Study of Education.
Olsho, L., Harkins, S. and Lenhardt, L. 1985.
Aging and the auditory system. In J. E. Bir¬
ren and K. W. Schaie, eds., Handbook of
the psychology of aging (2nd ed.), (pp.
332-337). New York: Van Nostrand
Reinhold.
Perlmutter, M. 1983. Learning and memory
through adulthood. In M. W. Riley, B. B.
Hess, and K. Bond, eds., Aging in society:
selected review of recent research, (pp.
219-241). Hillsdale, N.J.: Erlbaum.
Salthouse, T. A. 1979. Adult age and the
speed-accuracy trade-off. Ergonomics,
22:811-821.
_ . 1982. Adult Cognition. New York:
Springer-Verlag.
Schaie, K. W., and Parr, J. 1981. Intelligence.
In A. Chickering, ed., The modern Ameri¬
can college (pp. 117-138). San Francisco:
Jossey-Bass.
89
From Wisconsin Poets
Much of the poetry in this issue has been informed by the area in which the poets
live and work. Most apparently this is demonstrated in the sense of living history,
whether recent or remote, in poems such as “The Mission of Birds’’ by Frank Smoot,
which draws its title and inspiration from the 1898 Black River Falls high school year¬
book, and in “Trees,” a dark and terrifying sestina by Sara Rath, which was occasioned
by an excerpt from the Wisconsin State Journal in 1987.
Broader influences and concerns are evidenced in the stark landscapes of John Jud-
son and Denise Panek — the former, one of the most consistent and recognized, the latter
one of the newer and most promising poets living in Wisconsin. Even the savage irony
involved in land-locking the oceanic passions of Tristan and Iseult, or Aphrodite and
Neptune, into a prairie cornfield as does Gianfranco Pagnucci in “La Mer La Mer,” or
the microscopic attention to naturalist detail of Travis Stephens’ poems can best —
though not, of course, exclusively— be appreciated within a Midwestern context.
Finally, the indictments — delicate or immense — of first “Christy,” then “The
Children of Nicaragua” by J. D. Whitney, or the absolute poetic mastery displayed in
Dick Terrill’s “The Azaleas” or “Azaleas” — which begins with the problems of love,
particularly lost love— transcend any geographical concerns, and speak to the scope and
variety of subjects and attitudes displayed by Wisconsin poets today.
91
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
The Mission of Birds
Black River Falls, Wisconsin, 1898
This girl, dead or past a hundred,
who under a tall jack pine
lay all afternoon and wrote a speech
about The Mission of Birds,
is lying in a photo album
wearing her best print dress,
just failing to look stern enough.
It’s the same dress she lifted as she climbed
the stairs of the platform in the gym
to give that speech — keeping the promise
of the motto of her class,
“We’ll find a way or make one.”
She married a Falls boy three years older
who also finished school,
raising a hand to his class motto,
“Work is the law of life.”
At that abandoned house they’d built
fall is a tragic afternoon,
each dusk more slender
than the last, the light gone early
toward winter solstice — their fumbling desire.
A hawk hunts the wreckage of an elm
for mice, against all hope.
Frank Smoot
Frank Smoot is currently finishing a graduate degree in poetry in Vermont. He has edited an anthology of
poetry and fiction and served as editor of several Wisconsin poetry magazines. When not in Vermont, he and
his wife Susan Enstrom (a musician and artist) live in Milwaukee.
92
Poetry of Wisconsin Poets
Making History
for my mother
“Watch the hands,” she says, “if he moves
his hands like this, she also moves like that.
The skates, arms, eyes are parallel like one dancer.”
My mother has seen one son attempt suicide.
She has started new, at fifty, judging goats—
she made all the national journals this year.
And now she’s watching Torville and Dean,
the British ice dance team, skating to Bolero.
It makes history, their perfection.
She’s businesslike about the goats
and loves them and her tears at this
are like the stars caught in the ice.
Meanwhile my father, a gentle atheist
who has seen a son join the Catholic Church,
is in his shop, tinkering and drinking wine.
One time he spent the whole day
shaping hickory into a one-inch cube —
it’s an impossible exercise in fine carpentry.
They spend their summer days
with the gate from shop to barn between them,
his hands like this, hers like this.
Frank Smoot
93
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
American Tale
The herring gulls increased over landfill
where Interstate signs directed tomorrow.
Lined with taxis, the streets dreamed of ending,
spoke in accents, dressed Italian,
denyed the black at their militant heart.
Then Saturdays came — cigars over bitter coffee,
newsprint news that came off on my hands.
Sundays were park swans, longing for children.
And when I told what I saw, they said:
The algorithm’s not quite in your favor.
You must know computers, follow your broker
as the beggar does his one white cane —
This century won’t be caught dead in poems.
Its epic is color, smaller camcorders,
Koreans out-researching the Japanese.
But in March, at light, I remembered a stream
seining through pastures, granite tucked
along shoulders where green
repeated its reasons.
And I forgot the width of pavements,
and walked, again, toward what first scented the air.
John Judson
John Judson teaches at the University of Wisconsin-LaCrosse and is editor for Juniper Press. His most recent
book, North of Athens, was published by Spoon River Poetry Press. His current poems are found in such
diverse places as the Kansas Quarterly, The Laurel Review, and Poetry.
94
Poetry of Wisconsin Poets
Rivercliff: 1939
No children of divorce, no separation
enforced by law in our homes, all
distance had to be earned, all
privacy burned at alters mothers served,
gossiping by phone how good we were,
and thereby advertising affiliation.
So we took to the woods in gangs,
Robin Hooding the north shore of The Sound
a society structured and planned
by how close you lived to water:
some had houses moored
to docks that rose and fell
on what Wall Street walked upon;
others chained to dingys and yachts,
summer passage by wind
to darker sand, or islands
abandoned as Maine.
Until the War, when
older brothers and fathers left
and only some came back,
and the Coast Guard called upon us
for the duration
to drown light each night,
and those not working for Defense
went without four years of gas
or vacation.
John Judson
95
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Snapshot 1: Ashland, Wisconsin, February 11, 1987
The great Lake Superior is white and black
open patches of darkness, a watery landscape
yesterday, 46, today the winds
leave blisters of ice
on the cars parked,
with their engines bleating at the cold —
from the car, people like us
read the historical markers
about Moningwanekoning and about
the Jesuits and the about the people
they called the Chippeways.
Snapshot 2: The German sisters, February 14, 1947,
Black and White
Wearing white butcher’s aprons
and hose that ended at the knee
black to match shoes and hairnets
over hair pulled back so tightly
the corners of their eyes tilted up
on Sundays, the sisters watch televised mass
on the Zenith, the picture of Pope
Pius hung above the television console,
votive candles on ivory doilies — their houses
dark except for the dim artificial lights
of the manger scene complete with Star of Bethlehem
The setting took up half their living room area
until Mother’s Day.
96
Poetry of Wisconsin Poets
Snapshot 3: Farm Auction, Olney, Illinois,
“The White Squirrel Capitol of the World,” April 20, 1986
Tilted seed caps block the afternoon sun
while eyes follow the red and black chainsaw
Homelite, black and heavy, it goes for 25.
The Mennonite woman wears her bonnet
in an unusually reckless fashion
but it is too warm to keep
a bow lighted neatly beneath the chin —
somewhere a clang of horseshoes and old garden tools
are brought out into the open
like quarrelling roosters before a crowd of gamblers
they are examined quickly and then the
auctioneer raises the dusty crate
high above the crowd, asking
who will give him a dollar bill.
Denise Panek
Denise Panek lives in Eau Claire where she is Manager of Conferences and Institutes for the School of Arts
and Sciences Outreach Program. She is a White Earth Ojibwe whose poetry and fiction have appeared in such
journals as: Calyx, Sinister Wisdom, and Plainswoman.
97
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
La Mer, La Mer
Two porpoises along a sea coast would laugh
at you, white Aphrodite up from pastures of holsteins
and me Neptune of prairie corn, blackbirds in my hair,
laugh at how each summer we meet in the bed of the lake,
our feet planted in sand
and embrace seas of earthy emotions we hardly understand.
Sometimes we gulp water, and a land breeze laughs through the trees.
When a herring gull drops out of the air,
surveys the lake close up, east then west,
and goes off after the taste of salt in his nostrils,
we look up, remember a small hill of sand
and climb down toward our pond, laughing to ourselves.
Soon we shiver away from each other;
the gull’s raucous cries come back from nowhere.
This far inland it’s hard to imagine the sea.
Gianfranco Pagnucci
Gianfranco Pagnucci is a member of the English faculty of the University of Wisconsin-Platteville. His poetry
has appeared in numerous periodicals and anthologies, and he has published three books of stories and poems
with fourth and fifth books due to be published in the fall and winter, 1988.
98
Poetry of Wisconsin Poets
Wildflowers for Dorothy
That was the summer I waited for darkness,
and told myself I didn’t have time.
I pretended to ignore my friend,
who lived alone with her widowed father
and sold subscriptions to magazines.
She seemed as quaint and old fashioned
as a childhood fantasy I’d outgrown.
Each May Day I’d searched
for the earliest hepaticas,
wood-sorrel, buttercups, trillium,
yellow violets; wrapping a quaint
nosegay in a paper doily laced
with ribbon. I’d place it in Dorothy’s lap
by her hand that lay like a dead white bird
on the shawl that concealed
her withered legs.
That summer I slipped books of Gothic romance
out of the village library and hid
in my bedroom to dream until twilight.
Later, Dick and I lay in the long wet grass
of the park behind the bandstand, pushing
adolescent bodies against each other
until our cheeks were chapped
and we were exhausted, breathless, from
silent passion in the streetlights’ shadows.
The papery-thin whiteness of the dead
bird hand Dorothy waved in my dreams
was a haunting farewell.
That summer wood-sorrel and rue anemonoe
wilted in a jelly jar next to my bed.
I pressed violets between pages
of Teasdale’s poems, plucked petals
from bloodroots and recited the frightening
litany he loves me, he loves me
not, he loves me . . .
Sara Rath
99
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Trees
There are hiding places here no one has seen
but me. I crouch in shadows dark with night
beneath a sky of leaves along the edge
of pastureland nearby; these trees
and that oak grove the cardinal whistles from
remind me of my childhood and Grandpa’s woods.
There’ d been a slaughter house down in that woods
of childhood, where we played out gory scenes
with cowskulls in the grass, bleached remnants from
past decades, never going there at night,
too frightened by pale ghosts among the trees
or moss-crumbling walls at river’s edge.
When I was twenty-nine I toed the edge
of danger and abandon in dense woods
much like these, dancing nude among the trees,
posed while a camera caught that jubilant scene.
I felt a reckless sense of joy that night,
a secret courage. I’d escaped from
rigid roles: wife and mother; from
identities that pressed me toward the edge
of thirty. But, ironically one night
much later — fifteen years perhaps, I would
suppress the memory of that pose, that scene.
A friend in prison wrote, “Watch out for trees!”
I asked him what that meant, and he said, trees
was prison slang for rapists. Coming from
a source like that, I now look at this scene
of mossy oaks and rocks with nervous edge.
They’ve found abducted women in our woods,
nude, chained to trees, shot dead. One more last night.
100
Poetry of Wisconsin Poets
This summer women lock their doors at night
and walk outside with caution. Even trees
are threatening; I’ll escape this woods
and others but there is no hiding from
the darkness that begins along this edge
foreshadowing the nightmares we will see.
As investigators combed the scene for clues last night
deer appeared at the edge of the trees
and wild turkeys called from the walnut and oak woods
in the valley . . .
excerpt from Wisconsin State Journal
Madison, WI August 6, 1987
Sara Rath
Sara Rath has been a freelance writer for over twenty years. Her third book of poems, Remembering the
Wilderness, received the Wisconsin Library Association’s Banta Award while her most recent book About
Cows won the Council for Wisconsin Writers award for best nonfiction book of 1987.
101
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Morchella esculenta
This musette is bulging with dinner
fit for the taking. Morels.
Along this dusty road they hide
in damp-sandy pockets where
the sun is slow to arrive.
“Good thing we beat the road grader,”
I say as you dash to the next cluster,
“if only all summer were as easy as this.”
Later, at the pump,
you slowly pumping,
I wash sand from the waxy heads.
What a delicate fist is the mushroom,
locking so much in wafer ribs.
Like fish from the river,
berries from the woods,
a respite of luck
there for the taking.
Travis Stephens
Travis Stevens is a 1985 graduate of the University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire and most frequently writes of the
northern Wisconsin dairy and pulp wood region. These poems, however, come directly from experiences of the
past several years spent working in Glacier Bay, Alaska.
102
Poetry of Wisconsin Poets
The Tiniest Crab
Walking the beachline out
beyond where tidal flats stretch,
where tide has just receded
we sift the sand
for becalmed offerings.
A crab is found,
shell intact but empty,
wide across as two fingers
side by side.
In that lacy fringe of seaweed scrap
at surf’s farthest fingertip reach
we find more.
A Dungeness, a Tanner, both
empty and small, hollow,
and light as a flower.
And later,
the tiniest crab,
smaller than a fingertip
all legs intact, light as breath.
He comes with us wrapped
in a tissue, tucked into a pocket.
Tossed much farther than
the great ocean intended.
Travis Stephens
103
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
“The Azaleas” or “Azaleas”
“When you go,” “If you go” begin two translations
of the great poem by Kim Sowol,
whose azaleas, which burn in version A,
are gathered twice on a green mountainside, or perhaps a hill.
Are the famous flowers in armfuls or in another measure,
unspecified?
Is she through with him, or just sick and tired
is what choice we’re left as the poet,
that lover who bids good-bye quietly
or without a word,
is left, we conclude, with emptiness.
Some evenings in her dim office we translated
the minor poets — Mi Kyung with dictionary,
her desk light a yellow island,
me with pacing coffee about to make
art out of the least utterance, out of
the brown creaking of her dusty chair.
Mostly her voice became soft
when she began to read
her finished drafts— title first,
inflection dropping in lyric pain — a cultural obsession —
followed by a dark pause for stillness:
“Spring Night” “Paper Kite”
“To the Wind” “Musky Scent”
“Rainy Day”. . . . She was afraid, she said,
it would not sound the same or right in English
but it’s all I can know, the translations, and so today
I will not weep or show tears,
perish or die, but want
to scatter, strew azaleas in her path
before her light, soft, gentle, gentle step.
Richard Terrill
Richard Terrill has received the Wisconsin Arts Board Literary Arts Fellowship and is currently a Regents
Fellow in American Culture at the University of Michigan. He has been a Fulbright Professor of English in
Korea and a Visiting Professor of English in the People's Republic of China.
104
Poetry of Wisconsin Poets
The Children of Nicaragua
will disappoint us.
Their faces
bright.
The
depths of their eyes.
You could almost think
if
less off-white
they were American.
They even smile.
If they are moving
toward
a future
it
is the wrong one.
They will disappoint us.
We want them
strong
& tireless
moving
relentlessly north
great
bunches of fruit on their
backs for us.
Bananas.
Their
soft meat
delicate
& sliced
to grace our breakfast.
J. D. Whitney
J. D. Whitney lives and works in Wausau, Wisconsin. He is professor of English at the University of
Wisconsin-Marathon Center and has published a number of collections of poetry including Hello, Tracks, The
Nabisco Warehouse, Some, Tongues, Mother, and most recently, Word of Mouth (Juniper Press, 1986) and sd
( Spoon River Poetry Press, 1988).
105
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
“Christy”
on
her back¬
pack
blonde
7
maybe
8
a
hook where
one hand was
she
rides the bus.
She is
lovely
small &
clear light’s
in her eyes.
She
&
friend
whisper
some out¬
rageous thing
about
the
driver’s
hairy ears.
He
is crabby
every
day
deserves it.
Warm
days
she
wears no
mittens
cold
days
one.
J. D. Whitney
106
Holocene Lake Fluctuations
in Pine Lake, Wisconsin
Rodney A. Gont, Lan-ying Lin, and Lloyd E. Ohl
Abstract. Middle and late Holocene water level fluctuations were inferred from a com¬
parison of fossil diatom communities found in the sediments of the main basin and a bay
of Pine Lake , Wisconsin. From 7500 to around 4500 years bp the water table was low
enough to have kept the bay separated from the main basin. By 3765 bp, the barrier had
been overcome and the lake surface was near its present elevation. Based on an approx¬
imate 300 year subsampling interval, the water level has risen and fallen three times on a
1300 year cycle since 3765 bp but has varied less than one meter in elevation.
The surface level of a lake can be af¬
fected by a number of environmental
factors. The effects of periodic drought,
clearing of wooded watersheds by fires or
logging, and blocking of drainage by
dams last as long as half a century, but
they usually persist far less than this
(Charles and Norton 1986; Borman et al.
1974; Birch et al. 1980). More lasting are
the changes wrought by climate, which
often reach regional and even continental
scale (Wright 1969, Webb and Bryson
1972, Webb 1981, Winkler et al. 1986).
Pine Lake (Fig. 1), an oligotrophic, soft
water, seepage lake on the Chippewa-
Rusk county line in West-Central Wiscon¬
sin, has characteristics that dampen short¬
term lake level fluctuations. This was evi¬
dent during a three-year (1979-1981)
monthly benchmark study when the sur¬
face level of Pine Lake varied less than 35
cm. Located on noncalcareous till of a
stagnant ice-core moraine (Cahow 1976),
Pine Lake has a surface area of 106 hec¬
tares, maximum depth of 33 meters, a
small drainage basin of only 197 hectares,
and a shoreline development index of 2.56
(Sather and Threinen 1963). Soils of the
Rodney A. Gont, RR 1, Jim Falls (Chippewa Coun¬
ty), Wisconsin. Lin Lang-ying is Associate Professor
of Biology at Jinan University, Guangzhou, Peo¬
ple’s Republic of China. Lloyd E. Ohl is a professor
of Biology at the University of Wisconsin-Eau
Claire.
drainage basin are almost exclusively
Amery sandy-loam (Aid), class 4e, 12-
25% slope (D. Goettl, USDA SCS Chip¬
pewa County office, personal communi¬
cation). Recent land usage has kept the
surrounding terrain mostly wooded (95%
wooded in 1963) and only approximately
50 summer homes rim the shoreline. In
1976 Pine Lake was included in the
Wisconsin Department of Natural Re¬
sources Benchmark Lake Program as an
example of an undisturbed lake system.
Beauty Bay (Fig. 1), 2.4 hectares with a
maximum depth of 15 meters, is located
on the west side of Pine Lake. It is
presently united to the main basin, but ac¬
cess is restricted by a submerged bar
across the mouth of the bay. The apex of
this bar, under approximately one meter
of water, is comprised exclusively of
boulders, apparently washed clean by
wave action. The ground water flows
from Beauty Bay toward the main basin
(Tinker 1985).
A number of pertinent features are
apparent on the USGS topographic map
for the area (Chain Lake, WI N4515
W9122.5/7.5): 1) the immediate banks of
both Beauty Bay and the main basin have
a steep grade, 2) the system has an inter¬
mittent outlet, 3) there is a lack of
agricultural development, and 4) no
boggy or low areas are shown to directly
abut either basin. A 1939 lake survey map
107
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 1. Pine Lake, Wisconsin. Location of study sites in the main basin and in Beauty
Bay.
of Pine Lake, compiled by the then Wis¬
consin Conservation Department using
data from the WPA Lake Survey Project,
indicates the immediate shoreline was
completely comprised of upland woods of
oak, oak-aspen, or pine. Recent cursory
inspection of the surrounding woods con¬
firmed the presence of sizable quantities
of red oak (Quercus borealis), quaking
aspen (Populus tremuloides), and white
pine (Pinus strobus) directly at the lake
front. In fact, one of the more noticeable
features of both Beauty Bay and the main
basin is the remarkable scarcity of aquatic
macrophyte, lowland, and transition
vegetation at the shoreline.
The oldest historic record of Pine Lake
and its drainage basin is probably found
in the original land survey conducted in
the Pine Lake area in 1852. Features that
would have been incidentally cited when
encountered by the surveyor would have
included Indian trails, roads, burned-over
lands, and windthrows (Bourdo 1956).
None of these nor any other human-
related features were cited for the im¬
mediate vicinity of Pine Lake. The
surveyor’s description of Pine Lake at
that time was “banks very high and steep,
shores gravel and sand, water clear and
deep, bottom sand, timber surrounding
pond — Pine, maple, oak, and aspen.” A
present-day description would differ very
little.
No direct evidence of historic human
alteration of the bar separating Beauty
Bay from the main basin was found. The
1972 Chain Lake, Wisconsin, 7.5-minute
108
Holocene Lake Fluctuations in Pine Lake
USGS topographic map, both the 1948
and 1950 Weyerhauser, Wisconsin, 15-
minute USGS topographic maps, and the
1939 Wisconsin Conservation Depart¬
ment Lake Survey Map all show Beauty
Bay clearly united to the main basin.
Alteration by pre-European natives might
be conjectured, but there was no evidence
for this and the bar appears to be a
naturally deposited barrier, swept clean
by wave action to leave boulders.
This study depended on the physical
relationship of Beauty Bay to the main
basin, the stability of the main basin, and
the sedimentary record of fossil diatoms.
The premise was quite simple. During
periods of high water, when the mouth
bar of Beauty Bay lay deeper beneath the
surface, water would be more freely inter¬
changed with the main basin. This would
result in “contamination” of the littoral
community of Beauty Bay with plank¬
tonic species adapted to the large, deep
main basin. Conversely, when water levels
were low, the bar would be covered by less
water and could even be exposed. This
restricted or blocked access to Beauty Bay
would reduce, and possibly even elimi¬
nate, any similarity of the two diatom
communities.
Procedure
In Beauty Bay a sediment core 320 cm
long was removed using a Livingstone-
style piston corer (Livingstone 1955). In
the main basin the upper 115 cm were
taken using a freeze-coring device (Swain
1973) while the sediment from 150 cm to
375 cm was extracted using the Living¬
stone corer.
During piston-coring, due to the depth
of water over the study sites, a rigid pipe
casing was assembled between the ice and
the water-sediment interface. This casing,
just slightly larger in diameter than the
piston corer, was used as a guide to the
proper location in the sediments and to
prevent bending of the thrust rods during
sampling. To increase penetration of the
corer, two winches were attached, one end
of each to the thrust rod of the corer and
the other hooked under the ice. At maxi¬
mum penetration, sufficient force was be¬
ing applied to visibly flex the part of the
thrust rod extending above the corer cas¬
ing. Although the piston corer was forced
into the sediments as far as possible, it
would not penetrate a highly organic com¬
pact layer at 375 cm (7535 bp ± 135 yrs) in
the main basin nor a similar layer at 310
cm (7565 bp ±85 yrs) in Beauty Bay. This
layer apparently is not a universal charac¬
teristic of Chippewa moraine lakes since
the same corer was also used on nearby
Oliver Lake #2 (Gont and Ohl 1985) to get
sediments 14C dated at over 11,000 years
(unpublished data).
The piston cores were left in the sample
tubes, frozen in the field, and taken to the
laboratory where they were kept frozen
during removal and subsampling. The
freeze core was removed from the corer in
the field, immediately wrapped in foil,
and transported on dry ice to the lab¬
oratory, where it was kept frozen until
subsampled.
Slices of sediment approximately 0.3
cm thick were cut from each core with a
hacksaw at 10,0-cm intervals. This was
later determined to approximate 300-year
sampling intervals over the 4500-year time
span when the two basins had prevalent
species in common. These subsamples
were oxidized using the hydrogen perox¬
ide and potassium dichromate method
(van der Werff 1953) and strewn-mounted
(Patrick and Reimer 1966) on microscope
slides using Hyrax (R.I. 1.65) as the
mounting medium. In the main basin,
random transects from a slide from each
subsample were examined at 1250X with a
Zeiss research microscope until a mini¬
mum of 500 (Stockner and Benson 1967,
Weitzel 1979) diatom valves were iden¬
tified and tabulated. Once the main basin
prevalents were discovered, it was un-
109
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
necessary to identify all frustules from the
Beauty Bay subsamples, since only the
“contaminants” from the main basin
could affect the percent similarity index.
A minimum of 500 diatom valves per slide
were still inspected in the simplified count
of each Beauty Bay subsample, but those
species that had not appeared as preva-
lents in the main basin were tabulated as
others. However, complete counts of 500
had been made at approximately 50-cm
intervals along the Beauty Bay core in a
preliminary study (unpublished data) and
were available for reference. In all of the
counts, the “dilution effect of domi¬
nants” (Kingston 1986) was not taken in¬
to account.
Dating was done by a 14C method on 5-
cm long core sections (minimum of lOg
dry wt.) sent to the Radiation Laboratory
of Washington State University (WSU
sample numbers 3180-3187, 3189). Re¬
gional corrections for 14C dates are
available (Grootes 1983), but the dates in
this paper have been presented as uncor¬
rected.
Results
In the 34 subsamples examined from
the Pine Lake main basin core, represent¬
ing the last 7500 years, only three of the
212 diatom taxa identified were found in
greater than 3% relative abundance in
three or more levels. The distributions of
these three, Cyclotella stelligeroides
Hust., Cyclotella comta (Ehr.) Kutz.,
and Tabellaria fenestrata (Lyng.) Kutz.
are shown in Figure 3. In the 32 sub¬
samples examined from Beauty Bay, also
representing the last 7500 years, the above
prevalent species of the main basin sud¬
denly appeared in relative abundance
greater than 3% approximately 4500 years
bp and remained as prevalent species in
varying proportions to the present (Fig.
2).
Similarities of subsamples were deter¬
mined by a 2w/(a + b) percent similarity
index used by Bray and Curtis (1957),
where w is the summation of the lowest
count of each species in the two assem¬
blages being compared, a is the total
count from one assemblage, and b is the
total count from the other. This index can
range from 0 to 1 — it equals 0 when the
two assemblages to which it is applied
have no species in common and 1 when all
species are in common and the relative
abundance of each species is identical as
well. Because linear interpolation between
14C dates was used to date many of
the subsamples, correspondence between
main basin and Beauty Bay basin sub¬
samples could only be approximated. For
this reason, a similarity index was
calculated for two sets of data: 1) every
Beauty Bay subsample and the nearest-
aged main basin subsample and 2) every
Beauty Bay subsample and the average of
the two nearest-aged main basin sub¬
samples. Both sets ot indices were similar
(r2 = 0.93, p<0.01) so only the data of set
1 were used in the analysis (Fig. 3). Sub¬
samples with the greatest similarity to the
main basin were labeled as high water
levels and those with the least similarity as
low water levels.
Discussion
An important consideration in any
fossil study is how representative the
sedimentary record is. This aspect was not
directly tested in Pine Lake. However,
diatoms have recently become the subject
of numerous fossil studies investigating
acid precipitation effects, and these
studies have repeatedly reported that
diatom remains in surficial sediments ac¬
curately represent the living community
(Charles 1985, Haworth 1980).
The problems of sediment mixing and
differential preservation of frustules have
also been reviewed (Binford et al. 1983).
By taking cores from the deepest part of
the basin, the probability of mixing is
greatly reduced (Kreis 1986). But even if
110
Holocene Lake Fluctuations in Pine Lake
0 CD
0)
03 °-
0 O
.§ 0
■o -Q
■ present
1940
+ 70
3765
± 65
6660
t 105
main basin
Beauty Bay basin ±
7565
± 85
Fig. 2. Species that appeared in three or more subsamples at >3% relative abundance
in the sediments of the main basin of Pine Lake, and their abundances in the Beauty
Bay basin. Sediment age rather than subsampling interval is on the linear scale. Each
horizontal hash represents one subsample. Subsamples were taken every 10 cm along
the cores. Sediment ages are uncorrected 14C dates.
Ill
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 3. Inferred water level fluctuations of
Pine Lake over the past 5000 years.
Similarity is based on a 2w/(a + b) index.
Sediment ages in parentheses were de¬
termined by linear interpolation between
14C dates. Those dates not in parentheses
are uncorrected 14C dates.
sediments were mixed on a small scale, to
the order of tens of years (Davis and Smol
1986), it is unlikely that events on the
scale of hundreds of years would be
masked (Haworth 1980). The physical
features of Pine Lake, in conjunction
with the stable diatom community, also
support an assumption of minimal distur¬
bance of the sediments at the study site.
Eroded and broken frustules commonly
occur in fossil diatom material. To test
the extent of increasing dissolution and
breakage over time all diatom valves and
fragments with radial symmetry, identi¬
fiable to species or not, were counted on a
sequence of eight microscope slides span¬
ning the entire main basin core. On each
slide at least 60 specimens were tabulated.
Radial symmetry was used as the criterion
because C. stelligeroides, a small radially
symmetrical species, was the major preva¬
lent in every core subsample. A ratio of
“identifiable valves” to a total count, in¬
cluding “specimens not identifiable,”
ranged only from 0.765 to 0.821 with no
trend detected from top to bottom of the
core. Although it is obvious that a totally
eroded valve is impossible to detect, it
would be expected that valves eroded to
the point of no longer being identifiable
would increase with depth if dissolution
over time were a problem. This did not
seem to happen in Pine Lake, at least dur¬
ing the last 7500 years.
The remarkable simplicity and con¬
stancy of the diatom community of the
main basin over the past 7500 years are
evidence that any water-level fluctuations
had little effect. The fact that there were
only three prevalents, C. stelligeroides , C.
comta, and T. fenestrata, which usually
comprised 80% of the counts of 500 at all
levels examined in the main basin, empha¬
sizes this point. This has been attributed
to several characteristics of the Pine Lake
basin and its watershed. The lake’s posi¬
tion in the very headwaters of the drain¬
age was important because it limited the
area that any surface drainage distur¬
bance could affect. The steep slopes of the
sides of the lake bed gave Pine Lake a
large volume in relation to its surface,
which diluted incoming nutrients. Al¬
though fire and windthrow undoubtedly
hit the drainage basin, the results of these
forces would have been patchy and ir¬
regular due to the uneven nature of the
surrounding moraine. In any case, dis¬
turbed forested watersheds provide a
surge of nutrients but rapidly recover
(Borman et al. 1974). Pine Lake was able
to absorb any short-term surges without
showing detectable effects. Even post-
European settlement disturbances, re¬
stricted apparently to logging and summer
home development, produced minimal
changes. In short, Pine Lake probably
had minimal watershed disturbance and
was well insulated from any disturbances
that did occur.
Apparently the three main basin diatom
112
Holocene Lake Fluctuations in Pine Lake
species thrived only in the open water of
the main basin since, in the subsamples
dated c. 7500 bp to 4500 bp examined
from Beauty Bay when the two basins
were inferred as being separate, not a
single specimen of C. stelligeroides, C.
comta, nor T. fenestrata was found. It
was not until c. 4500 bp, and continuing
to the present, that these three species ap¬
peared in Beauty Bay as prevalents. Even
if isolated from the main basin, the prox¬
imity of Beauty Bay makes it unlikely that
accidental introduction and establishment
in the basin could have been avoided for
the 3000 years prior to 4500 bp if water
conditions were favorable. Whether they
actually thrived after this time or were
merely resupplied by water flow, it is
probable that the presence of the three
main basin prevalents in Beauty Bay for
the last 4500 years was due to significant
influx of water from the main basin.
Some information is always lost when
raw data is condensed. In Pine Lake, the
reference basin (main basin) had only the
same three prevalent species in all sub¬
samples of the core. Since the remaining
nonprevalent species not used in the
analysis, amounting cumulatively to less
than 20% of each count of 500, were di¬
vided among at least 30 additional species
at each sediment level examined, it is
unlikely that the abundance of any one of
these species, or even several of them,
would materially affect the similarity
comparisons to Beauty Bay. This is rein¬
forced by the index itself, which treats
each individual equally and does not give
weight to species out of proportion to
their abundance (Kershaw 1968). Varia¬
tions in similarity values of equivalently
aged main basin-Beauty Bay subsamples
would thus be a function of the degree of
“contamination” of Beauty Bay with the
three main basin prevalents.
It should be mentioned that Beauty Bay
had a great many other prevalents (un¬
published data), but since the focus was
on Beauty Bay “contamination” by main
basin species and not on the community
dynamics of Beauty Bay itself, this would
not create a problem — as long as produc¬
tivity in Beauty Bay remained relatively
constant. To determine roughly if major
changes in productivity took place since
the inferred water level rise that united the
two basins around 4500 years bp, pre¬
liminary counts of 500 valves each for
three sediment subsamples from Beauty
Bay within this span were examined. Pin-
nularia biceps Greg, was recorded at
9.2%, 16.3%, and 22.5% relative abun¬
dances at 0 years bp (0 cm), c. 1616 years
bp (50 cm), and c. 3157 years bp (100 cm),
respectively; Synedra tenera W. Sm. was
recorded at 8.5% relative abundance at 0
years bp (0 cm); and Navicula pupula v.
capitata Skv. and Meyer was recorded at
8.2% and 10.7% relative abundance at c.
1616 years bp (50 cm) and c. 3157 years bp
(100 cm), respectively. No other species,
besides the three main basin prevalents,
were found in greater than 5% relative
abundance during this time. The mainte¬
nance of only the same six most common
species over the past 4500 years would in¬
dicate that productivity did not greatly
change during this time.
Prior to c. 4500 years bp the diatom
community of Beauty Bay was quite dif¬
ferent. Instead of the six species cited in
the previous paragraph, Stauroneis an-
ceps Ehr., Melosira islandica O. Mull.,
Melosira italica (Ehr.) Kutz., Fragilaria
construens v. venter (Ehr.) Grun.,
Synedra famelica Kutz., and Fragilaria
brevistriata Grun. were most prevalent,
all reaching greater than 10.0% relative
abundance at one time or another in the
preliminary counts (unpublished data). A
major difference like this would be ex¬
pected if the two basins were separate
prior to 4500 years ago and united after
that time.
Based on the degree of similarity be¬
tween the Beauty Bay and Pine Lake
113
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
diatom communities and roughly a 300-
year sampling interval, dependent on
sedimentation and compaction rates, the
following sequence of surface fluctua¬
tions were inferred (Fig. 3):
1. From 7500 to c. 4500 years bp, the
water table was low enough to keep the
Beauty Bay basin separated from the
main basin by a ridge. During this time
span there were no main basin prevalents
found in the Beauty Bay basin.
2. At c. 4400 bp main basin prevalents
were first found in Beauty Bay and by
3765 bp the two communities had a
similarity index of 0.469. This is com¬
parable to the 0.444 index at present.
Once the barrier between basins had been
overcome at c. 4400 bp the lake level
stabilized near its present level.
These first two inferences concur with
the existence and timing of a Middle
Holocene dry period, discussed by Wink¬
ler et al. (1986) and supported by 19
regional studies cited by them as evidence
for this dry period.
3. Since 3765 bp the level has fallen and
risen three times at the scale investigated.
High levels occurred approximately every
1300 years as determined by linear inter¬
polation between 14C dates. The two in¬
tervening high points had similarity in¬
dices of 0.408 and 0.412.
4. The lowest water levels after the two
basins were united, around 4500 years bp,
centered around 3200, 2200 and 600 years
bp. The similarity indices at these three
times were 0.191, 0.157, and 0.197 respec¬
tively.
5. Since c. 4500 years bp, water levels
have not been low enough to reisolate
Beauty Bay, nor high enough to put the
mouth bar under much more water than
at present. The bar is now under one
meter of water, so the surface level of the
lake has varied less than one meter in
elevation for any extended period during
this time.
Acknowledgment
We thank the members of the Pine
Lake Association whose contributions
made this study possible.
Works Cited
Binford, M. W., E. S. Deevey, and T. L.
Crisman. 1983. Paleolimnology: An his¬
toric perspective on lacustrine ecosystems.
Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 14:255-286.
Birch, P. B., R. S. Barnes, and D. E. Spy-
ridakis. 1980. Recent sedimentation and its
relationship with primary productivity in
four Western Washington Lakes. Limnol.
Oceanogr. 25:240-247.
Borman, F. H., G. E. Likens, T. G. Siccama,
R. S. Pierce and J. S. Eaton. 1974. The ex¬
port of nutrients and recovery of stable con¬
ditions following deforestation at Hubbard
Brook. Ecol. Monogr. 27:325-349.
Bourdo, E. A. 1956. A review of the general
land office survey and of its use in quan¬
titative studies of former forests. Ecology
37:754-768.
Bray, J. R. and J. T. Curtis. 1957. An ordina¬
tion of the upland forest communities of
southern Wisconsin. Ecol. Monogr. 27:325-
349.
Cahow, A. C. 1976. Glacial geomorphology
of the southwest segment of the Chippewa
lobe moraine complex. Ph.D. thesis, Michi¬
gan State University.
Charles, D. F. 1985. Relationships between
surface sediment diatom assemblages and
lakewater characteristics in Adirondack
lakes. Ecology 66:994-101 1 .
_ and S. A. Norton. 1986. Paleolimno-
logical evidence for trends in atmospheric
deposition of acids and metals. In Acid
deposition: long term trends. National
Research Council, Committee on Monitor¬
ing and Assessment of Trends in Acid
Deposition. Washington, D.C.: National
Academy Press, 506 pp.
Davis, R. B. and J. P. Smol. 1986. The use of
sedimentary remains of siliceous algae for
inferring past chemistry of lake water —
problems, potential and research needs.
Pages 291-300. In Diatoms and Lake Acid¬
ity, Developments in Hydrobiology. No. 29.
Smol, J. P., R. W. Battarbee, R. B. Davis
114
Holocene Lake Fluctuations in Pine Lake
and J. Merilainen (eds.). Dordrecht: Dr. W.
Junk.
Gont, R. and L. Ohl. 1985. A history of Oliver
Lake #2, Chippewa County, Wisconsin,
based on diatom occurrence in the sedi¬
ments. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett.
73:189-197.
Grootes, P. M. 1983. Radioactive isotopes in
the Holocene. Pages 86-105. In Late
Quaternary Environments of the United
States. Vol. 12. The Holocene. H. E.
Wright (ed.). Minneapolis: University of
Minnesota Press.
Haworth, E. Y. 1980. Comparison of con¬
tinuous phytoplankton records with the
diatom stratigraphy in recent sediments of
Blelham Tarn. Limnol. Oceangr. 24:1093-
1329.
Hustedt, F. 1927-1965. Die Kieselalgen
Deutschlands, Osterreichs und der Schweiz
unter Beriicksichtigung der uberigen Lander
Europas sowie der angrenzenden Meersge-
biete. In Rabenhorsts Kryptogamenflora
von Deutschland, Osterreich und der
Schweiz. Band 7, Teil 1,2,3. Leipzig,
Deutschland, Akademische Verlagegesell-
schaft Geest und Portig. K.-G.
_ . 1945. Diatomeen aus Seen und Quell-
gebieten der Balkan-Halbinsel. Archiv fur
Hydrobiol. 40:867-973.
Kershaw, K. A. 1968. Classification and or¬
dination of Nigerian savanna vegetation. J.
Ecol. 56:467-482.
Kingston, J. C. 1986. Diatom analysis-Basic
Protocol. Pages 6-1 thru 6-8. In Paleoeco-
logical Investigation of Recent Lake Acidi¬
fication-Methods and Description. EPRI
EA-4906, Project 2174-10, Interim Report,
November 1986. Electric Power Research
Institute. Prepared by Indiana University,
Bloomington.
Knudson, B. M. 1952. The Diatom Genus
Tabellaria: I Taxonomy and Morphology.
Ann. Bot.N.S. 16:421-440.
Kreis, R. G. 1986. Variability study. Pages
17-1 thru 17-19. In Paleoecological In¬
vestigation of Recent Lake Acidification-
Methods and Description. EPRI EA-4906,
Project 2174-10, Interim Report, November
1986. Electric Power Research Institute.
Prepared by Indiana University, Bloom¬
ington.
Livingstone, D. A. 1955. A lightweight piston
sampler for lake deposits. Ecology 36:137-
139.
Patrick, R. and C. W. Reimer. 1966. The
Diatoms of the United States exclusive of
Alaska and Hawaii I. Monographs of Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila. 13:1-688.
Sather, L. M. and C. W. Threinen. 1963. Sur¬
face water resources of Chippewa County,
Wisconsin. Wisconsin Conservation De¬
partment. 153 pp.
Stockner, J. G. and W. W. Benson. 1967. The
succession of diatom assemblages in the re¬
cent sediments of lake Washington. Limnol.
Oceanogr. 12:513-132.
Swain, A. M. 1973. A history of fire and
vegetation in northeastern Minnesota as
recorded in lake sediments. Quat. Res.
3:383-396.
Tinker, J. R. 1985. Preliminary investigation
of ground-water flow system of Pine Lake,
Wisconsin. Unpublished report presented to
the Pine Lake Association by Dr. John
Tiner, Jr., professional Geologist AIPG
#3317.
Webb III, T. 1981. The past 11000 years of
vegetational change in eastern North Amer¬
ica. Bioscience 31:501-506.
_ and R. A. Bryson. 1972. Late and
postglacial climatic change in the northern
Midwest USA: Quantitative estimates de¬
rived from fossil pollen spectra by multi¬
variate statistical methods. Quat. Res.
2:70-115.
Weitzel, R. L. 1979. Periphyton measure¬
ments and applications. Pages 3-33. In
Methods and Measurements of periphyton
Communities: A Review. ASTM STP 690.
R. L. Weitzel (ed.), American Society for
Testing and Materials.
van der Werff, A. 1953. A new method of
concentration and cleaning diatoms and
other organisms. Verhand. Intern, verein.
theor. Limnol. 12:276-277.
Winkler, M. G., A. M. Swain and J. E. Kutz-
bach. 1986. Middle Holocene Dry Period in
the Northern Midwestern United States:
Lake Levels and Pollen Stratigraphy. Quat.
Res. 25:235-250.
Wright, H. E. 1969. Proc. 22nd Conf. Great
Lakes Res. 1969: Pages 397-405. Internat.
Assoc. Great Lakes Res.
115
The “New Geology”
and its Association with Possible
Oil and Gas Accumulations in Wisconsin
Albert B. Dickas
The history of exploration for petro¬
leum in the United States can be sub¬
divided into distinct intervals based upon
the prevailing philosophy employed in
such exploration. Since the initial
discovery of crude oil in the United States
among the rolling hills outside Titusville,
Pennsylvania, by “Colonel” Edwin
Drake in 1859 (Hubbert 1966), the pro¬
cesses of exploration for this commodity
have been under continual scrutiny. Nu¬
merous scientific, and some decidedly not
so scientific, theories regarding the origin,
migration, and accumulation of subsur¬
face oil and gas have been advanced. One
of the earliest, the concept of “creek-
ology,” suggested crude oil was to be
found underlying areas of principal sur¬
face drainage. The anticlinal theory, ad¬
vocated by White (1885), associated
petroleum accumulation to the upper
reaches of rock folded by compressional
or other forces.
On the 10th day of the twentieth cen¬
tury, the Spindletop field discovery well
was brought in along the Texas Gulf
Coast, flowing out of control at the rate
of 100,000 barrels of crude oil per day.
Immediately wildcatters sought means of
effectively identifying subsurface salt-
domes, miles-high intrusions of rock salt
that seemed to trap oil and gas unlike any
other geologic phenomena. Other ex¬
ploration hypotheses of temporary sig¬
nificance have included low angle (over-
Albert B. Dickas is Professor of Geology at the
University of Wisconsin-Superior. He was , for many
years, an exploration geologist with Mobil Oil and
Standard Oil of California.
thrust) displacement belts and anoma¬
lously high energy-wave (bright-spot)
analysis.
During the peak of each new ortho¬
doxy, a different geographic sector of the
country obtained the prosperity attendant
upon the expanding oil and gas industry.
For example, the anticlinal theory of ex¬
ploration was responsible for the expan¬
sion of the American oil industry west¬
ward from the Keystone state into the
Ohio River Valley during the late nine¬
teenth century. Unfortunately this move¬
ment never reached Wisconsin. Attempts
were made; in fact 56 wells have been
drilled since 1865, but all were “dry and
abandoned” (Fig. 1). By World War II
Wisconsin had been written off, declared
lacking in commercial petroleum-dis¬
covery potential because the rock strata
were considered geologically too old for
petroleum generation.
Consistency of change is one of few
undeniable absolutes, and it was only a
matter of time until a new concept of
geologic exploration should focus upon
the ancient terranes of Wisconsin, and in¬
deed, did so in Bayfield County in the
Autumn of 1983. Agents representing ma¬
jor American corporations began leasing
private and public lands for petroleum ex¬
ploration. During 1984 and 1985, geo¬
physical crews conducted seismic, gravity,
and magnetic surveys in northwestern
Wisconsin. Why, after a century and a
quarter, had these lands become the focus
of such costly attention? The answer is to
be found in the annals of geologic debate
that raged internationally from approxi¬
mately 1900 until 1966. Two topics are of
117
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 1. Wells drilled for oil and/or gas prior to 1985 in Wisconsin. All were declared dry
and abandoned by operator.
significance. The first dealt with “solving
the mystery of the Earth” (Wood 1985),
or more precisely, the identification of
forces responsible for first-order surface
features — continents, ocean basins, and
mountain ranges. The second scientific
debate involved the question of when life
on Earth originated.
Plate Tectonics
The solution of the great Earth mystery
suffered from schismatism. One school of
knowledge depended upon a fixist state
whereby Earth gradually constructed its
surface morphology through periodic ver¬
tical movements caused by crustal con¬
traction. In opposition stood the mobil-
118
The “New Geology ”
ists, arguing for horizontal crustal motion
according to the recent discoveries, by
Henri Becquerel in 1896 and Pierre and
Marie Curie in 1903, of the processes of
radioactivity (Eicher 1968). The fixists
perceived our planet as dying, with its en¬
dowed internal engine gradually slowing
as a result of irretrievable conductive loss
of heat power. The mobilists argued that
conductive loss was being replaced by new
heat volumes derived through the newly
discovered elemental radioactive decay.
In 1915 Alfred Wegener, a German me¬
teorologist, geophysicist, and explorer of
Greenland, published “Die Entstehung
der Kontinente und Ozeane” (On the
Origin of Continents and Oceans), a uni¬
fying theory of earth-crust motion bound
by mobilistic concepts of his own deriva¬
tion. While ultimately silencing the fixist
school of thought, this “continental
drift” theory over the next several dec¬
ades became increasingly mired in con¬
troversy among geoscientists, physicists,
chemists, and mathematicians. Consoli-
lated by opposition status quo defenses
>f a lack of proof of continental move¬
ment and frictional forces of impossible
magnitudes, the drift theory slowly lost
relevance with the death of Wegener on
the Greenland ice-cap in 1930 and the ap¬
proach of a worldwide depression and
war.
In the aftermath of that war, Wegener’s
ideas were again seriously discussed by
geoscientists employing new analysis
techniques. The fathometer (depth re¬
corder) and magnetometer (magnetic field
analyzer) had been technologically modi¬
fied and miniaturized early in World War
II for anti-submarine surveillance. With
the arrival of peace these instruments,
along with the ships and aircraft upon
which they were mounted, were declared
surplus by the military and adopted for
use by a generation of fledgling ocean¬
ographers unfettered by older scientific
theories.
By the late 1950s Maurice Ewing, Bruce
Heezen, and Marie Tharp, among many
others, working out of the Lamont
Doherty Geological Observatory in down-
state New York, had gathered sufficient
depth data to present an artist’s view of
the ocean floors (Heezen et al. 1959).
Startling in their appearance, these charts
for the first time displayed a ridge and rift
system, generally occupying a central
position that could be traced worldwide
from the Indian to the Atlantic to the
Pacific Ocean (Fig. 2). Within the next
decade, coalescing scientific discoveries
began to complete the picture. Previously
disjointed masses of paleontological,
gravimetric, paleomagnetic, and petro¬
graphic data now came together in the
minds of physicists, biologists, and
geologists as one unified theory. By 1966,
the “mystery of the Earth” had been
identified, and Wegener had been vin¬
dicated in his belief that a precise analysis
and understanding of rocks, their struc¬
tures, and fossils would require very dif¬
ferent arrangements of the continents in
the past than those of the present
(Schwarzbach 1986). In this updated ver¬
sion the phrase “continental drift” had
been altered in the best interests of scien¬
tific nomenclature to “plate tectonics.”
Since the mid-1960s plate tectonics has
caused a major academic revolution with¬
in the earth sciences, with the result that
most practicing petroleum geologists have
altered their techniques of applied oil and
gas exploration.
Life on Earth
The second great development in scien¬
tific philosophy important to the commer¬
cial oil or gas potential in Wisconsin is the
debate on the origin of life on Earth.
Rocks outcropping over much of Wiscon¬
sin are Precambrian in age; that is, they
were deposited in their present position in
excess of 570 million years ago. To many
geologists, Precambrian rock is seen as
119
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 2. Artist’s view of the topography of the ocean floor showing relative locations of
centrally positioned ridge and rift.
the end geologic product of thousands of
millennia during which turbulent events
created earth environments entirely un¬
favorable to the ultimate development of
petroleum and natural gas. As recently as
two decades ago it was believed that pro¬
longed earth movements and periods of
rock deformation, both characteristic of
the Precambrian era, did not permit the
evolution or preservation of life forms.
Jones (1956) emphasized this bias by stat¬
ing that “the recognition of evidence of
life in Precambrian strata is one of the
most controversial problems in all geol¬
ogy and there is considerable doubt ex¬
pressed by many paleontologists concern¬
ing the nature of the micro-fossils which
have been reported.” Similar statements
aided in the development of anti-early-life
philosophies that have been prevalent
among many petroleum geologists. How¬
ever, this early learned bias is rapidly
disappearing with the acceptance that the
appearance of life was an early develop¬
ment in Earth history and that fossili-
ferous, organic-rich sedimentary rocks
form a significant portion of the Precam¬
brian stratigraphic record (McKirdy
1974). Since the 1950s fossils have been
discovered in rock as old as 3.5 billion
years in South Africa (Levin 1988), Aus¬
tralia, the Soviet Union, and along the
north shore of Lake Superior (Tyler and
Barghoorn 1954); it has been shown that
this primordial organic material does not
differ in any respect from that which is
much younger as a potential source ma¬
terial for oil or gas (Fig. 3). The East
Siberian Platform (Irkutsk Amphitheater)
Petroleum Province, USSR, contains the
largest known reservoirs of indigenous
Precambrian gas, oil, and condensate
(Meyerhof f 1980). More than ten com¬
mercial fields have been reported since
1962 from this isolated sector of the
Soviet Union, all of which contain at
least one reservoir horizon within the
Precambrian section (Fig. 4). The oldest
of these strata are approximately 925
million years old. In 1963, The Oora-
minna #1, a 1861 meter (6,100 feet) test of
Precambrian rocks, was drilled in the
Amadeus Basin of Australia. While a pro¬
duction test flowed at an uneconomic
120
The “New Geology ”
PRECAMBRIAN
FOSSIL
MORPHOLOGY
a. Lake Superior
b. U.S.S.R.
c. Australia
Fig. 3. Examples of fossil morphology from rocks of Precambrian age as collected on
three continents. (After Raup and Stanley 1971; Levin 1988).
12,000 cubic feet of natural gas per day,
this well was a resounding geologic suc¬
cess as it constituted “irrefutable evidence
of indigenous hydrocarbons in the Pre¬
cambrian of Australia” (Murray et al.
1980). Recent exploratory drilling in
Australia discovered “live oil, possibly
the oldest oil in the world,” in rocks 1.4
billion years of age (Fritz 1987). In 1964,
the discovery well for the Weiyuan gas
121
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 4. Commercial oil and/or gas fields in China, Australia, and the USSR in which pro¬
duction is derived from Precambrian-age rocks.
field in the central Sichuan Basin of
the People’s Republic of China was an¬
nounced (Fig. 4). Here the principal pro¬
ducing interval lies within the Dengying
Formation of Upper Sinean (late Precam-
brian) age (Shicong et al. 1980).
In the short span of three years during
the early 1960s, decades of prejudice
against hydrocarbon association with
Precambrian strata were overcome. Not
only has Precambrian life been generally
accepted (Cooper et al. 1986), but so has
the economic significance of rift struc¬
tures created through the dynamics of
plate tectonics. Either one or both of
these concepts were responsible for the
petroleum discoveries in the USSR, Aus¬
tralia, and China. In the early 1980s
several entrepreneurs employing these
“new geology” concepts as their principal
exploratory philosophy began to view
northern Wisconsin with enthusiasm.
These individuals were interested in the
Midcontinent Rift, a geologic structure
known principally through geophysical
research and considered an ideal field
analog to the features formed by exten-
sional plate tectonics.
Midcontinent Rift
The Midcontinent Rift is an ancient
crustal scar, first identified in subsurface
rocks in northwestern Kansas (Woollard
1943) and traceable by analysis of earth’s
gravity field for 1,400 kilometers (870
miles) north and east across Iowa, Min¬
nesota, and into northern Wisconsin (Fig.
5). There, the rift trend branches along
the north and south shores of Lake Su¬
perior. This scar is evidence of Precam¬
brian pressures operating within the man¬
tle of the Earth. These pressures began to
divide the early version of the North
American continent into two distinct land
122
The “New Geology”
STAGE IV
Lake Superior
0 Km 20C.
J BOUGUER GRAVITY
0 Mi 100
STAGE II
Fig. 5. Trend of the Midcontinent Rift System in the central United States as identified
by the Bouguer component of the Earth gravity field. Shown is the geographic extent of
the four stages of geologic development which together compose the entirety of the rift
(modified from Dickas 1986).
masses. Initiated approximately 1.1 bil¬
lion years ago, these gigantic tectonic
movements increasingly bifurcated the
land for some 50 million years. Then,
with a maximum separation measuring
60-70 kilometers (40-44 miles), the inter¬
nal forces dissipated, and the rift gradu¬
ally healed itself.
While undergoing plate tectonic
spasms, the rift served as a conduit for the
expulsion of thousands of feet of lava on¬
to the surface of the Earth. These lava
fields today can be traced over 100,000
square kilometers (39,000 square miles) of
both the north and south shores of Lake
Superior (Green 1982). Here, they form
123
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
the basement upon which younger sedi¬
mentary rocks ultimately were deposited.
This post-lava series of strata, included in
the Keweenawan Supergroup (Morey and
Green 1982), is more than 7,600 meters
(25,000 feet) thick and can be found out¬
cropping along the river bottoms and
shorelines of Douglas, Ashland, and Bay-
field counties (Dickas 1985 and 1986). It is
this accumulation of sandstone, siltstone,
and regionally distributed organic shale,
deposited in rifted basins, that has drawn
the recent interest of oil and gas explora¬
tionists.
A three-dimensional model of the Mid¬
continent Rift in northern Wisconsin
would be constructed of three rectangular
slabs, lying side by side (Fig. 6). The cen¬
tral block would be elevated relative to the
flank blocks. Initially these slabs would
be composed of basaltic (lava) rock. Over
the central, or horst block, a lens-shaped
volume of lightweight material (sandstone
and shale) replaces that portion of the
lava rock lost to ancient erosion. The
flank blocks are covered rather uniformly
by thick layers of similar low density
rocks, protected from erosion by their
depressed elevation. Finally all three slabs
are covered by a thin veneer of unconsoli¬
dated sediment representing glacial ac¬
cumulations of the past several thousand
years.
The Rock Character
Rift structures of Precambrian age have
been proven to have economic petroleum
potential elsewhere in the world, but to
date no oil or gas reserves in this country
are known to be associated with rift
rocks, regardless of their geologic age.
While philosophical freedoms allowed by
“new geology” theories encouraged ex¬
plorationists to enter northern Wisconsin
in 1983, commercial success in our state
will ultimately depend upon the subsur-
GLACIAL VENEER-?
Y V- - ‘ • — - — - •
SHALE
.'•/•-ahdv':
-\X* * X X X Xy*x V
A * * v v * * X X
* y * X x X X X
x x X X x X * <
"'VAX X ^ X ^ X x
sandstoneVA x * LAVA *
. •■ •• • '::\v x x * * x x
* * < X X
X X X x x x x
x x x x x x x
xxx xxxx x ' X x
x x.x x x x x X\x
B
>0464 fifl]
* xAi
„ x , ,x xxxxxxx
x X V x xxxxxxx
Xy/X XXXXXXXX
xxXxxxxx
X
y J/ * X
X X X l X X
X x x X X x
X x X X X a X
Fig. 6. Cross-sectional model of the Midcontinent Rift for northern Wisconsin. Orienta¬
tion is A (area of Superior) southeast to B (area of Hayward). Arrows represent relative
movement of major geologic blocks.
124
The “New Geology' *
face physical characteristics of the Ke-
weenawn Supergroup strata.
Such success relies on the presence of
three geologic conditions: (1) an organic-
rich rock that acts as the source of
petroleum; (2) an adjacent and permeable
rock that allows concentration of migrat¬
ing petroleum into an economic accumu¬
lation; and (3) another adjacent but
impermeable rock that prevents the accu¬
mulated petroleum from being lost by mi¬
gration to the surface. In the vicinity of
the Wisconsin-Michigan border a source
rock is known. Identified in the 1880s
(Irving 1883), the Nonesuch Shale is rich
in organic matter and actually drips small
quantities of crude oil through the ceiling-
rocks of the White Pine copper mine of
Michigan’s Upper Peninsula. This source
rock has been traced westward into
the Lake Nebagamon region of Douglas
county, Wisconsin, but its presence fur¬
ther southwest along the Midcontinent
Rift is a matter of speculation.
The presence in northern Wisconsin of
rock capable of pooling and trapping
hydrocarbons is also speculative. The
primary purpose of the seismic, magnetic,
and gravimetric analyses conducted on
land during 1984 and offshore Lake Su¬
perior during 1985 was to indirectly ascer¬
tain and qualify these characteristics.
The Future for Wisconsin
Between the Autumn of 1983 and end
of 1985 an estimated four to five million
dollars was spent on geological and geo¬
physical evaluation of hydrocarbon po¬
tential in northern Wisconsin. A 3,660
meter (12,000 foot) test well was an¬
nounced by Amoco Production Company
(USA) in 1985, to be located in Bayfield
County (Fig. 1). Soon after, however, the
price of a barrel of crude oil collapsed
from $25 to less than $9, placing all drill¬
ing programs “on-hold.” The American
oil and gas industry entered a negative
economic cycle that produced unemploy¬
ment and lowered exploration expendi¬
tures to levels not experienced since the
great depression of the 1930s. In spite of
this unprecedented event, most drilling
leases in northern Wisconsin have been
maintained by the companies who have
established positions in this area, and all
are watching the slow, long-term recovery
of the price of a barrel of crude oil.
All scientific endeavors require an
amount of luck to reach successful con¬
clusions. This is no less true for Wiscon¬
sin’s potential as an oil or gas-producing
state. Should such potential be realized
within the next several years, credit must
be given to the numerous researchers
worldwide who amalgamated the recently
developed theories of Precambrian life
and rift tectonics into “new geology”
philosophies of petroleum exploration.
Works Cited
Cooper, John D., Miller, Richard H., and
Patterson, Jacqueline. 1986. A trip through
time: principles of historical geology . Mer¬
rill Publishing Company, 469 p.
Dickas, Albert B. 1985. Wildcatting in north¬
ern Wisconsin. Lake Superior Port Cities,
Spring Issue: 11-14.
_ . 1986. Comparative Precambrian stra¬
tigraphy and structure along the Mid¬
continent Rift. American Association of
Petroleum Geologists Bulletin, 70:225-238.
Eicher, Don L. 1968. Geologic time. Prentice-
Hall, Inc. Foundations of Earth Science
Series, 150 p.
Fritz, Mary. 1987. “New frontier in Precam¬
brian basins.” American Association of
Petroleum Geologists Explorer, April:
16-17.
Green, John C. 1982. “Geology of Ke-
weenawan extrusive rocks.” Geological
Society of America Memoir 156: 47-82.
Heezen, B. C., Tharp, M., and Ewing, W. M.
1959. “The floor of the oceans, 1: North
America.” Geological Society of America
Special Paper No. 65.
Hubbert, M. King. 1966. “History of petro¬
leum geology and its bearing upon present
and future exploration.” American Asso¬
ciation of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin,
50:2504-2518.
Irvin, R. D. 1883. “The copper-bearing rocks
125
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
of Lake Superior.” U.S. Geological Survey
Monograph 5, 464 p.
Jones, D. J. 1956. “Introduction to micro¬
fossils.” Harper and Brothers, 406 p.
Levin, Harold L. 1988. The Earth through
time (3rd Ed.). Saunders College Publish¬
ing, 593 p.
McKirdy, D. M. 1974. “Organic geochemistry
in Precambrian research.” Precambrian
Research, 1:75-137.
Meyerhoff, A. A. 1980. “Geology and
petroleum fields in Proterozoic and Lower
Cambrian strata, Lena-Tunguska petro¬
leum province, eastern Siberia USSR.” In
“Giant oil and gas fields of the decade
1968-1978,” ed. M. T. Halbouty. Amer¬
ican Association of Petroleum Geologists
Memoir 30: 225-256.
Morey, G. B., and Green, John C. 1982.
“Status of the Keweenawn as a strati¬
graphic unit in the Lake Superior region.”
Geological Society of America Memoir 156:
15-25.
Murray, G. E., Kaczor, M. J. and McArthur,
R. E. 1980. “Indigenous Precambrian pe¬
troleum revisited.” American Association
of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin, 64:1681-
1700.
Raup, D. M. and Stanley, S. M. 1971. “Prin¬
ciples of paleontology.” W. H. Freeman
and Company, 388 p.
Schwarzbach, Martin. 1986. “The father of
continental drift.” Science Tech, Madison,
241 p.
Shicong, G., Dungzhow, Q., Xiaqun, C.,
Fungten, Y., Huaiyu, Y., Shoude, W.,
Jingcai, Z., and Sioche, C. 1980. “Geologic
history of late Proterozoic to Triassic in
China and associated hydrocarbons.” In
Petroleum geology in China, ed. J. F.
Mason, 142-153. Tulsa: Penn Well
Publishing Company.
Tyler, S. A. and Barghoorn, E. S. 1954.
“Occurrences of structurally preserved
plants in Precambrian rocks of the Cana¬
dian Shield.” Science, 119:606-608.
Wegener, Alfred R. 1915. “Die entstehung der
kontinente und ozeane.” Braun-Schweig,
p. Vieweg.
White, I. C. 1885. “The geology of natural
gas.” Science, 5(125):521-522.
Wood, Robert M. 1985. The dark side of the
Earth. London: George Allen and Unwin
Ltd.
Woollard, G. P. 1943. “Transcontinental
gravitational and magnetic profile of North
America and its relation to geologic struc¬
ture.” Geological Society of America Bul¬
letin, 54:747-790.
126
Use of Discriminant Analysis
to Classify Site Units Based on
Soil Properties and Ground Vegetation
John R. Trobaugh and James E. Johnson
Abstract. Ten forested plots were located in each of three site units in northeastern
Wisconsin. The site units selected for study , Padus , Pence , and Vilas , reflect a range in
productivity from high to low based on soil-site equations for red pine fPinus resinosa
Ait.). Soil physical and chemical properties and percent frequency of ground flora were
used as independent variables in a canonical discriminant analysis to separate the site
units. The percent correct classifications were as follows: soil variables only , 67%;
vegetation variables only , 57%; soil and vegetation variables 83%. The strongest soil
discriminator variables generally reflected finer textures and higher nutrient content
associated with the Padus units , while the strongest vegetative discriminators indicated
either the more mesic, nutrient rich Padus sites fViola spp., Polygonatum biforum
(Walt.) Ell., and Dryopteris spinulosa [O.F. Mull.] Watt.) or the dry, acidic Vilas sites
(Gaultheria procumbens L., Vaccinium angustifolium Ait., and Waldsteinia
fragarioides [Michx. ] Tratt.).
Classification of forest land into dis¬
tinct units is currently an important
area of research and development in the
U.S. Two recent symposia (Bockheim
1984, Wickware and Stevens 1986) have
included numerous papers dealing with
the development of classification systems
and associated methodologies. Systems in
common use in the U.S. include single
factor systems such as soil surveys (Ar¬
nold 1984) and habitat typing (Kotar and
Coffman 1984), and multifactor systems
such as ecological forest site classification
that considers climate, geology/parent
material, physiography, soils, and
vegetation (Barnes et al. 1982).
An important aspect of land classifica¬
tion is that the site units must be rec¬
ognizable on the landscape and must rep-
John R. Trobaugh is a Forester with the Bureau of
Forestry, Wisconsin Department of Natural
Resources in Fitchburg, Wisconsin.
James E. Johnson is an Assocate Professor of For¬
estry in the Department of Forestry at Virginia Tech
in Blackburg, Virginia.
resent somewhat homogeneous soil and
vegetation conditions. In order to be
useful for management purposes the units
must also reflect differences in produc¬
tivity and management interpretations
(Barnes et al. 1982).
Both the single and multifactor ap¬
proach are being used in forested areas of
Wisconsin. In order for these systems to
reflect differences in productivity and
management interpretations, studies are
needed to determine the amount of varia¬
tion within site units. This study was
established to determine (1) the variation
among soil properties and ground vegeta¬
tion within site units and (2) the im¬
portance of these variables in discrimi¬
nating among three common site classifi¬
cation units in northeastern Wisconsin.
Methods
Study Area
The study area was located in Oneida
and Forest Counties, Wisconsin (Fig. 1).
This area is located within a single
homogeneous macroclimatic zone (Rau-
127
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
scher 1984), with the following climatic
features: average annual maximum tem¬
perature 11.2°C, average annual mini¬
mum temperature -0.6°C, average frost
free season from 87 to 117 days, average
annual precipitation 782 mm with 60%
falling during the growing season, and an
average annual snowfall of 1,397 mm.
Throughout the study area the bedrock
is undifferentiated crystalline rock of pre-
Cambrian age, overlain by glacial drift
deposited during the Woodfordian Sub¬
stage of the Pleistocene. Most of the
glacial deposits are sorted, stratified,
glaciofluvial sand and gravel. The topog¬
raphy is primarily pitted and unpitted out-
wash; however, study plots were generally
located on level landscape positions.
Site Units
The forest land classification units
selected in this study were generally de¬
fined as site units and are similar to the
Ecological Land Types (ELT’s) used by
the Nicolet National Forest (Nicolet Na¬
tional Forest 1983). These site units have
similar landform and climatic conditions,
but differ in soil and vegetation features.
The three site units were all located on
glacial outwash plains or uplands within
the two county study area. The site units,
named for the predominant soil series
found in each, have the following fea¬
tures:
Fig. 1. Study area in northeastern Wiscon¬
sin.
These site units represent a range of site
productivity from high (Padus) to low
(Vilas) as follows:
All three are especially important
throughout the study area because they
128
Discriminant Analysis to Classify Site Units
are commonly converted from the existing
cover type to pine plantations. The level
landscapes and sandy soil textures gener¬
ally make these site units well-suited for
site conversion and pine plantation man¬
agement.
Field Methods
During the summer of 1984 ten Padus,
ten Pence, and ten Vilas site units were
identified within the study area. Within
each unit a circular 100 m2 plot was
located, and all trees greater than 12.7 cm
in dbh were tallied by species, dbh, and
height. On a nested 25 m2 plot all trees
between 2.5 cm and 12.7 cm dbh were re¬
corded by species. On a nested 4 m2 plot
all woody stems less than 2.5 cm dbh and
1 m in height were recorded by species and
percent canopy cover. Woody vegetation
measured on these plots roughly corre¬
sponded to the overstory, upper under¬
story, and lower understory strata. On 12
systematically located 1 m2 plots all
ground herbaceous and woody vegetation
(less than 1 m tall) was recorded by
species, and percent frequency was calcu¬
lated.
Adjacent to each 100 m 2 plot a 1 by 1.5
m soil pit was dug to the C horizon. A
complete field description was conducted,
including horizon designation, horizon
depth, color, texture, structure, pH, mot¬
tle identification, and consistence. Soil
samples from each horizon were collected
from the soil pit and from four additional
auger samples taken near the plot. These
five samples were then composited into a
single sample for the plot. Four forest
floor samples were collected from the
vicinity of the pit. These samples were
separated into Oi + Oe and Oa horizons
and then composited by horizon.
Lab Methods
All soil samples were air-dried, ground
to pass a 2-mm sieve, and subjected to the
following physical and chemical analyses:
1) particle size analysis using the hydro¬
meter method (Day 1965), 2) total nitro¬
gen using micro-Kjeldahl (Bremner 1965),
3) available phosphorus using the ammo¬
nium molybdate method following extrac¬
tion in 0.025N HC1 and 0.03N NH4F, 4)
the same extract was used to determine
available potassium using a flame pho¬
tometer following the same extraction
procedure as for P, 5) exchangeable
calcium and magnesium by flame pho¬
tometry following extraction in IN
NH4OAc (Liegel et al. 1980), 6) pH using
a glass electrode with 7.5 g soil in 10 ml of
distilled water, 7) organic matter content
using the Walkley-Black method (Walkley
and Black 1934), and 8) buffer pH using
the method of Shoemaker et al. (1961).
Forest floor samples were dried to a
constant weight at 65 °C. Samples were
then weighed and ground to pass a 1-mm
sieve. Total nitrogen was determined
using micro-Kjeldahl (Bremner 1965), and
total phosphorus, potassium, calcium,
and magnesium were determined using an
ARL plasma emission spectrophotometer
following digestion in concentrated nitric
and perchloric acid (Liegel et al. 1980).
Statistical Analysis
The three site units were used as
qualitative groups and suites of 53 soil
variables and 60 ground vegetation
species were used as discriminator
variables in a canonical discriminant
analysis (Klecka 1980). Variables con¬
sidered to be independent were selected
for analysis. The analysis was conducted
using the soil variables, vegetation
variables, and the two combined. The
jackknife method was used to determine
the percentage of correct classification
following each discriminant analysis. The
jackknife method is recommended when
sampled size is small relative to the
number of variables (Lachenbruch and
Mickey 1968). Using this method, one
plot at a time was withheld from the data
129
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
set, and the discriminant function was
derived from the remaining 29 plots. In¬
dependent variables from the withheld
plot were used to calculate the site unit
classification. This procedure was re¬
peated for each of the 30 plots, and the
percent correct classification was deter¬
mined.
Analysis of variance and mean separa¬
tion using the Sheffe test at the 0.05 prob¬
ability level were used to determine
significant differences between the soil
and vegetation discriminator variables.
Results and Discussion
Site Unit Vegetation
All plots located on the three site units
were forested (Table 1), with pines, aspen-
birch, spruce-fir, and red maple {Acer
rubrum L.) predominating in the over¬
story. The plots on the Pence site units
had the highest basal area and number of
stems/ha, followed by the Padus and
Vilas site units. The upper understory,
however, was densest on the Padus site
units, followed by the Vilas and Pence site
units (Table 2). The lower understory was
dominated on all site units by beaked
hazel {Corylus cornu ta Marsh.), but was
densest on the Vilas site units (Table 3).
Curtis (1959) identified beaked hazel as
the most common shrub species in the
northern mesic forests of Wisconsin, and
is commonly considered a strong competi¬
tor to tree regeneration in these stands
(Buckman 1964).
Site Unit Soil and
Forest Floor Properties
Soil physical and chemical properties
for representative profiles from each of
the site units are shown in Table 4. The
Padus soils tended to be finer-textured
and higher in nutrient content than the
Pence and Vilas soils. In general, the
Padus site units reflect soil conditions
typical of Curtis’ (1959) northern mesic
forest, the Pence site units are typical of
the northern mesic/dry-mesic forest, and
Vilas site units are typical of the dry-
Table 1. Mean overstory number of stems/ha, basal area/ha, and dominant species of
second-growth forests on three site units in northeastern Wisconsin.
130
Discriminant Analysis to Classify Site Units
Table 2. Mean upper understory number of stems/ha, basal area/ha, and dominant
species of second-growth forests on three site units in northeastern Wisconsin.
131
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
E d
(0 c
o t
"rn
SI
C
0 CO
_Q •-
-st ^
oo ^
m in ^
0)0 0
CM CO
00 M-
0(0 0)
n in co
CM ^
^ CO ^
cc cc cc
> > >
in in o
s n r"
co cm in
CM CM CM
CM r-
cm
^ CO ^
CC CL CC
> > >
in m in
n: i^:
i- co in
co d co
t— ■m- co
s ^ o
CO CO N
cm co
CM 5 CO
CO CO ^
cc cc cc
>- > >■
in m in
h- cm
"7 V
d ^ n.
132
42+ 10YR4/4
Discriminant Analysis to Classify Site Units
Table 5. Forest floor dry weight, depth, and nutrient content from plots representing
typical features of the Padus, Pence, and Vilas site units in northeastern Wisconsin
mesic/xeric forest. The forest floor physi¬
cal and chemical properties for repre¬
sentative site units are shown in Table 5.
The Pence site unit had the forest floor
with the greatest dry weight, but was
largely intermediate in nutrient content.
The Padus forest floor had the greatest P,
Ca, and Mg, while the Pence forest floor
had the greatest K and the Vilas had the
greatest N.
Discriminant Analysis
The discriminant analysis resulted in
three functions, one based on soil proper¬
ties, one based on ground vegetation fre¬
quency, and one based on a combination
of soil and vegetation variables. For site
units to be considered useful, they must
represent unique features of landforms,
soils, or vegetation, or must have dis¬
tinct management interpretations (Moon
1984). In this analysis common soil prop¬
erties considered part of routine soil
analysis and the existing ground vegeta¬
tion were found to be effective in dis¬
tinguishing among the three site units.
This procedure was also useful in sepa¬
rating site units in Michigan, where a suite
of eight soil and topographic variables
and nine vegetation variables discrimi¬
nated between 11 upland forest ecosys¬
tems on the McCormick Experimental
Forest (Pregitzer and Barnes 1984).
The soil, vegetation frequency, and
combined variables used in the discrimi¬
nant analysis are presented in Tables 6-8.
The 21 site, soil, and forest floor variables
(Table 6) reflect a combination of physi¬
cal and chemical properties, the most
important of which is the soil-site index
(Alban 1976). This value represents the
calculated red pine site index based upon
soil texture, depth, and the presence
of fine-texture bands that may signifi¬
cantly influence tree growth (Hannah and
Zahner 1970). It indicates a significant
difference between the Padus and Pence
site units but not between the Pence and
Vilas. In general, the finer soil textures
associated with the Padus site unit, cou¬
pled with higher soil and/or forest floor
P, K, Ca, and Mg, resulted in strong dis¬
crimination between the Padus and other
site units. Using the jackknife validation
procedure, the predicted site unit mem¬
bership was as follows: Padus, 80%;
Pence, 50%; and Vilas, 70%, for an
overall correct classification of 67%.
The presence of key species of vegeta¬
tion have been shown to be strong in¬
dicators of edaphic factors in forest
ecosystems (Pregitzer and Barnes 1982)
133
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Table 6. Means, standard deviations (in parentheses), and F statistics for site and soil
discriminator variables presented in order of stepwise inclusion for the Padus, Pence,
and Vilas site units in northeastern Wisconsin.
Variables F Prob. Padus Pence Vilas
Red Pine
1 Means within a row followed by the same letter are not significantly different at the 0.05 level
using the Scheffe test.
and have been widely used in developing a
habitat type system for use in northern
Michigan and Wisconsin (Coffman and
Hall 1976, Kotar 1986). The percent fre¬
quency of the important discriminating
species (Table 7) indicate that Gaultheria
procumbens L., Vaccinium angustifolium
Ait., Corylus cornuta Marsh., and Wald-
steinia fragarioides (Michx.) Tratt. are all
strong discriminators of the Vilas site
unit. The more productive Padus site is
discriminated by Polygonatum biforum
(Walt.) Ell. and Dryopteris spinulosa
(O.F. Mull.) Watt. The Pence site unit is
generally intermediate; however, Prenan-
thes alba L., Clematis virginiana L.,
and Lycopodium lucidulum Michx. were
found only on the Pence site units. Of
these indicator species, only Vaccinium
was identified by Pregitzer and Barnes
(1982) as being a key indicator on the Mc¬
Cormick Experimental Forest in Upper
Michigan. The jackknife validation pro¬
cedure resulted in an overall 57% correct
classification, with 60% of the Padus site
units correctly classified, 10% of the
Pence units correctly classified, and 100%
of the Vilas units correctly classified.
The combined soil and vegetative dis¬
criminator variables are presented in
Table 8. Combining these variables in¬
creased the classification percentage to
83, with 90% of the Padus units, 70% of
the Pence units, and 90% of the Vilas
units correctly classified. The soil and
forest floor variables generally reflect the
finer textures and higher nutrient content
of the Padus and Pence site units, and the
higher organic matter content of the
Padus units. The vegetative species differ
134
Discriminant Analysis to Classify Site Units
Table 7. Means, standard deviations (in parentheses), and F statistics for vegetation
discriminator variables presented in order of stepwise inclusion for the Padus, Pence,
and Vilas site units in northeastern Wisconsin.
Variable (% Frequency) F Prob. Padus Pence Vilas
Gaultheria procumbens L. 0.0000
Vaccinium angustifolium Ait. 0.0000
Lycopodium obscurum L. 0.3742
Polygonatum bi forum (Walt.) Ell. 0.0137
Aster macrophyllus L. 0.2424
Prenanthes alba L. 0.1248
Corylus cornuta Marsh. 0.0976
Dryopteris spinulosa (O.F. Mull.)
Watt. 0.2998
Coptis tri folia (L.) Salisb. 0.4046
Fragaria virginiana Duchesne. 0.1553
Streptopus roseus Michx. 0.8473
Waldsteinia fragarioides
(Michx.) Tratt. 0.0103
Antennaria neglecta Grenne. 0.381 1
Clematis virginiana L. 0.381 1
Actaea alba (L.) Mill. 0.3811
Linnaea borealis L. 0. 1 979
Woodland grass 0.2844
Lycopodium lucidulum Michx. 0.381 1
Rubusspp. 0.4179
Myrica asplenifolia L. 0.0777
Pyrola virens Schweigg. 0.61 20
Means within a row followed by the same letter are not significantly different at the 0.05 level
using the Scheffe test.
somewhat from those of Table 7. Melam-
pyrum lineare Desr. and Antennaria
neglecta Grenne. emerged as good dis¬
criminators for the Vilas units and Viola
spp. for the Padus site units.
Conclusion
The development of usable forest site
classification systems for large land
ownerships is an important area of re¬
search. Multiple factor systems based on
landform and climate, soils, and vegeta¬
tion appear to be emerging as superior to
the traditional single-factor approaches
such as the soil survey. The usefulness of
understory vegetative indicators to ac¬
count for soil differences (Carleton et al.
1985, Pregitzer and Barnes 1982) makes
those systems based on ground vegetation
desirable. For forestry purposes it is also
important that the defined units in the
classification system be distinct in terms
of site productivity and management in¬
terpretations.
In this study three site units from a two-
county area in northeastern Wisconsin
were subjected to a discriminant analysis
based on groups of independent soil and
vegetation variables. The strongest
analysis, based on 11 soil and 12 vegeta¬
tive variables, resulted in an overall cor¬
rect classification of 83%. The Padus,
Pence, and Vilas site units are distinct en¬
tities, separable in the field based upon
soil and vegetative features, and have im¬
portant soil physical and chemical prop¬
erty differences that readily separate the
units when subjected to a stepwise dis¬
criminant analysis.
135
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Table 8. Means, standard deviations (in parentheses), and F statistics for site, soil, and
vegetation discriminator variables presented in order of stepwise inclusion for the
Padus, Pence, and Vilas site units in northeastern Wisconsin.
1 Means within a row followed by the same letter are not significantly different at the 0.05 level
using the Scheffe test.
Of the 23 discriminating variables listed
in Table 8, 11 are soil or site variables,
and 12 are vegetative variables. Calcu¬
lated site index, an integrated site
variable, was the most significant. Soil
variables that were important included
physical properties such as depth and tex¬
ture, and chemical properties such as fer¬
tility (potassium content), organic matter
content, and pH. Important vegetative
discriminators included Viola spp.,
Polygonatum biforum , Corylus cornuta,
and Apocynum androsaemifolium.
Works Cited
Alban, D. H. 1976. Estimating red pine site in¬
dex in northern Minnesota. U.S.D.A. For.
Serv. North Cen. For. Exp. Sta. Res. Pap.
NC-130. 13 pp.
Arnold, R. W. 1984. A pedological view of
forest land classification, in Forest Land
Classification: Experience, Problems, Per¬
spectives. Symp. Proc. Univ. Wisconsin,
Madison, pp. 18-31.
Barnes, B. V., K. S. Pregitzer, T. A. Spies,
and V. H. Spooner. 1982. Ecological forest
site classification. Jour. Forest. 80:493-498.
Bockheim, J. G. ed. 1984. Forest land classi¬
fication: experience, problems, perspec¬
tives. Symp. Proc. Univ. Wisconsin,
Madison. 276 pp.
Bremner, J. M. 1965. Total Nitrogen, in C. A.
Black (ed.). Methods of Soil Analysis Part
2. Agronomy 9. Am. Soc. Agron. Madison,
WI. pp. 1149-1178.
Buckman, R. E. 1964. Effects of prescribed
burning on hazel in Minnesota. Ecology
45:626-629.
Carleton, T. J., R. K. Jones, and G. Pierpont.
1985. The prediction of understory vegeta-
136
Discriminant Analysis to Classify Site Units
tion by environmental factors for the pur¬
pose of site classification in forestry: an ex¬
ample from northern Ontario using residual
ordination analysis. Can. Jour. For. Res.
15:1099-1108.
Coffman, M. S. and N. J. Hall. 1976. The use
of plant indicator species to predict produc¬
tivity in red pine plantations. Mich. Aca¬
demician 9:157-172.
Curtis, J. T. 1959. The vegetation of Wiscon¬
sin. Univ. of Wisconsin Press. Madison.
657 pp.
Day, P. R. 1965. Particle size fractionation
and particle size analysis, in C. A. Black
(ed.). Methods of Soil Analysis Part 2.
Agronomy 9. Am. Soc. Agron., Madison,
WI. pp. 545-567.
Hannah, P. R. and R. Zahner. 1970. Non-
pedogenetic texture bands in outwash sands
of Michigan: their origin and influence on
tree growth. Soil Sci. Soc. Amer. Proc.
34:134-136.
Klecka, W. R. 1980. Discriminant Analysis.
Sage Pub., Inc. 71 pp.
Kotar, J. 1986. Soil-habitat type relationships
in Michigan and Wisconsin. Jour. Soil and
Water Conser. 41 : 348-350.
_ and M. Coffman. 1984. Habitat-type
classification system in Michigan and
Wisconsin, in Forest Land Classification:
Experiences, Problems, Perspectives.
Symp. Proc. Univ. Wisconsin, Madison,
pp. 100-113.
Lachenbruch, P. A. and M. R. Mickey. 1968.
Estimation of error rates in discriminant
analysis. Technometrics 10:1-11.
Liegel, E. A., C. R. Simson, and E. E.
Schulte. 1980. Wisconsin procedure for soil
testing, plant analysis, and feed and forage
analysis. Dept, of Soil Science, Univ. of
Wise. -Extension, Madison, WI. 51 pp.
Moon, O. E. 1984. Forest land resources
inventory in British Columbia, in Forest
Land Classification: Experience, Problems,
Perspectives. Symp. Proc. Univ. Wisconsin,
Madison, pp. 66-81.
Nicolet National Forest, 1983. Ecological
land types on the Nicolet National Forest.
U.S.D.A. For. Serv. Nicolet Nat. Forest.
Rhinelander, WI. 37 pp.
Pregitzer, K. S. and B. V. Barnes. 1982. The
use of ground flora to indicate edaphic fac¬
tors in upland ecosystems of the McCor¬
mick Experimental Forest, Upper Michi¬
gan. Can. Jour. For. Res. 12:661-672.
_ and B. V. Barnes. 1984. Classification
and comparison of upland hardwood and
conifer ecosystems of the Cyrus H. McCor¬
mick Experimental Forest, upper Michigan.
Can. Jour. For. Res. 14:362-375.
Rauscher, H. M. 1984. Homogeneous macro-
climatic zones of the Lake States. U.S.D.A.
Forest Service North Cen. For. Exp. Sta.
Res. Pap. NC-240. 39 pp.
Shoemaker, R. K., E. O. McLean, and P. F.
Pratt. 1961. Buffer methods for determin¬
ing lime requirement of soils with ap¬
preciable amounts of extractable alumi¬
num. Soil Sci. Soc. Amer. Proc. 25:274-
277.
Walkley, A. and L. A. Black. 1934. An ex¬
amination of the Degtjareff method for
determining soil organic matter and a pro¬
posed modification of the chromic acid
titration methods. Soil Sci. 37:29-38.
Wickware, G. M. and W. C. Stevens. 1986.
Site classification in relation to forest
management. Can. Forest. Serv. Great
Lakes Forest. Cen. Symp. Proc. O-P-14.
142 pp.
137
J
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
The Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters was chartered by the State Legislature on
March 16, 1870, as an incorporated society serving the people of Wisconsin by encouraging inves¬
tigation and dissemination of knowledge of the sciences, arts, and letters.
1988 WISCONSIN ACADEMY COUNCIL
James R. Johnson, President
Meredith Ostrom, President-Elect
Jerry Apps, Past President
Susan Nurrenbern, Vice President-Sciences
Michael Skindrud, Vice President- Arts
Richard Boudreau, Vice President-Letters
Pat Blankenburg, Secretary-Treasurer
^ Vx V V > -
Councilors-at-Large
Terry Haller, Madison
Jon Harkness, Wausau
Nancy Noeske, Milwaukee
Ann Peckham, Middleton
Gary Rodhe, River Falls
William Stott, Jr., Ripon
Councilor-at-Large Emeritus
John Thomson, Mount Horeb
LeRoy R. Lee, Executive Director
MEMBERSHIP INFORMATION
Associate Member
Receives Transactions and Inside the Academy
Annual Member
Receives Transactions , Inside the Academy,
and the Wisconsin Academy Review
Supporting Member
Receives all publications
Patron Member
Receives all publications and other benefits
$25 annual dues
$40 annual dues
$100 annual dues
$500 annual dues
Life Member $1,000
Receives all publications and other benefits (one lifetime payment)
U;;V p:
Your membership will encourage research, discussion, and publication in the sciences, arts,
and letters of Wisconsin. Please send dues payment along with name and address to:
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53705-4099
608/263-1692
• ^ 1
' 4 Vi- "
:,yy
\
' * : ' vxmx H'h-^1 1 1 :
:3"A ]\ %
fern
(#
/s-- <;>’x-
' ". ■,' • ' r A- xW,1 < •(•f; '• -*\C -■ .,/••* •
\ p4 3 yfAA/.v- 3 ' ' ?/x- vA/f!3y.i 'A <?
4, -r 1 •■ >:f~r) :Hf\ rh^M 1 '* •. i
T,
vr^v)ff’1 ;yyy
■\i, V,l'pr/ ) ; ' i'/ .,-//
f ' \ ' 4\ A J - \ J:t
\
/-/ -t m
ViX,:
K
v {
xk
■t-M
■ - V, ■J/Sy.r
mklm
< ’■■' TAyy
77 ,77 7*4% A' x'--
- / ■ ? A \ ' .
" ■: \\ ', :, Vy&ts v«y . ' :sk*{
A.y, ' :: \4
s , .. rvf / , ; • ; , ^ ' 3 4 •-- / \ ' ■' ,\r A . 1 \ J
Xjky, ’^7yt3 7>'\: : - 47 •' - • Ja • Ai iyyy, ,
A 1 A I
iih-xr xkM":
wm
7' 'A
f • K
... '.. ,lc. ', '■■:<■ \ V
\V a 4 •' < n A , r.;s^;
kiky
-.(I y ^ <j. V vu >., v f- 3' ''/ ^4 ' . \3% r4^S'4 '; 3 "
-t, 4ryy yyy 7V vf. VFfFtt :>.$&$
. yyi yA 4:77 y.A yy <4 ■ v y
U\-l
HR V.X vi-i ; ■ y./: 1 -<-3
/,( .. ; 7 (■; , - v V Vy^V', -yr :; / ) •- 3
:’." .'■>
0MVM
- ;.'V'
v !’! :li;
; v ■ If
■
r%.-
~ y y B
- 1 A- /- vl>< \ {
ff '
. (i J ■ ■
;:yy
mwm
6y^-Jkrryv
"' 3«Vv* %
T-.S/it
vA,,y':y7y' x:;;y#yyA
' y\:V:vy%yv%K‘
\v
< ;
^A- N ' V- '
_
ly
v/y
' 31
-Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts & Letters-
Steenbock Center 1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53 705
Telephone 608263-1692
yy v' xvx *<-■ a
A.y .
A .1
G
- of —
the Wisconsin
» ■ ■ / 1 v
- A}- . . X:>' S\ . '
xy
v-i
f);)
’G^nC'^^n .vX" - bK •:£’•■ / 7'
Academy of
Sciences,
Arts &
Letters
Volume 77
v #■" “
V i- ■ - <:-
il '
r •' M’
y.f;
7959
WX
X."
V/ Arf:fX
hB^I ' .; *~-^r s\r i\l‘ 't" J. ■■ • V,
"* "r,v)vi/^::, ■-' ; \ iV’e W
f t-nfw* xi/'U'J: Vk :■■•; -■
I ' , • \ a : ...
'VXA
Xi?)tX
A ;Wf
•>>; A:
A W, \
■ V>£i^ v=v,\X , Ps
fX • •' ; v:'4v Y . XX ( /, • .i'Y • -, \ -' • y° ,'A • AaSwX' ftp
Iffe -XX XXX XX7 A
BEA^- . I 7~ A' 7 X7 /' ' /Sv-7 ’ 'N-y ,\ . /•:
u/v'-w-!1
xxr
V ^7 '. ■ >- X '7' /' : - \
^7-.. , -y<— ' . V-flV v. '"■-, :;y ■,- ' ^ V;V0C- \ XV -
r xA • • ■ r 5 J’; ;>v.
>Wf c 1 n7vw V , /-./'I - ° A ■ ' ^ ;
7 y ■’ s ~ '
A \ ' . 1 (’
Transactions
Carl N. Haywood, Editor
136 Schofield Hall
University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire
Eau Claire, Wisconsin 54701
Production Editor
Patricia Allen Duyfhuizen
Poetry Editor
Bruce Taylor
Assistant Editors/Intems
Patricia Wick Jilloyn Rumpel
Rebecca Fairbank Kenneth Kruse
mmm
Transactions welcomes articles that explore features of the; State of Wisconsin and its people. Articles
written by Wisconsin authors on topics other than, Wisconsin sciences, arts, and letters are also occa¬
sionally published. V ^ 1(^1
Manuscripts, queries, and other correspondence should be addressed to the editor.
Transactions is a publication of the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters, 1922 University
Avenue, Madison, Wisconsin 53705-4099.
LeRoy R. Lee, Executive Director
© 1989 ^ . I,. '<V ■
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Manufactured in the United States of America
All rights reserved
TRANSACTIONS
of the Wisconsin Academy
of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Volume 77
1989
Contents
Whittling Time: Photography and the Poetry of Memory 1
David Graham
Photography has become a universal metaphor for remembering. Rather than making
memory more reliable. Professor Graham argues that photography has, in crucial
ways, made it difficult to trust what we do recall. By analyzing a poem by Douglas
Dunn, St. Kilda s Parliament, Graham examines a troubling question: when memory
and photography are at odds, as they must often be, which shall we trust?
Wisconsin’s Changing Dairy Industry and the 11
Dairy Termination Program
John A. Cross
The effects of the Department of Agriculture’s Dairy Termination Program on
Wisconsin’s dairy industry is examined in this well-researched paper. The data are
examined statistically and displayed through a series of maps. The paper concludes
with an analysis of the impacts of the program upon the participating farmers and
their future agricultural activities.
Survey of Timber Rattlesnake Distribution (Crotalus horridus) 27
along the Mississippi River in Western Wisconsin
Barney L. Oldfield and Daniel E. Keyler
What is the status of the timber rattlesnake in Wisconsin? Oldfield and Keyler
surveyed sites ranging from southern St. Croix County to northern La Crosse County
along the Mississippi River Valley. Their conclusion is that the timber rattlesnake
may not be as widely distributed or as numerous as previously thought. There may
even be a need for both habitat and species protection.
Poetry 35
Some of Wisconsin’s well-known poets as well as some who are relatively new to
our state are represented in the poetry section.
The Role of Plant Root Distribution and Strength 5 1
in Moderating Erosion of Red Clay in the
Lake Superior Watershed
Donald W. Davidson, Lawrence A. Kapustka, and Rudy G. Koch
Erosion of the glacially-derived red clay soils in the western Lake Superior Basin
is a serious problem. This paper is an examination of the influence of plant root
systems on erosion of these soils. The evidence indicates that vegetation comprised
of woody, advanced successional species afford the best protection against both
surface and deep-seated stream bank erosion.
65
Manifest Details and Latent Complexities in
Flannery O’Connor’s “A Good Man is Hard to Find”
Paul J . Emmett
It is commonly agreed that Flannery O’Connor placed great importance upon details
in fiction. In light of this, it is somewhat surprising that critics have generally
ignored the evocative details in O’Connor’s own fiction. Emmett argues that state¬
ment comes from detail and that detail provides the “intellectual meaning of a
book.’’ The final scene in this story cannot be accounted for until we account for
the vivid details that precede it.
Population Ecology of Painted and Blanding’s Turtles 77
( Chrysemys picta and Emyoidea blandingi ) in Central Wisconsin
David A . Ross
The population of both the Painted and the B landing turtle was studied over a six
year period. The populations were compared to those found in Michigan, Minnesota,
and Missouri. The study, particularly of the B landing turtle, indicates that habitat
should be set aside to preserve populations of this species.
Racism and Its Limits: Common Whites and Blacks 85
in Antebellum North Carolina
Bill Cecil-Fronsman
Common whites were white nonslaveholders and small slaveholders who were
perceived by themselves and others as not being members of the society’s political,
social, or economic elites. Many scholars have ascribed to the common whites a
harsh racism bom out of a fear of competition. And it is widely assumed among
historians that this racism cemented loyalties to the slaveholders and led the common
whites into the Civil War in order to preserve slavery. Professor Cecil-Fronsman
challenges many of the commonly accepted conclusions in this incisive study of
common whites and blacks.
Fluctuations of a Peromyscus Leucopus Population 97
over a Twenty-two year Period
James W. Popp , Paul E. Matthiae, Charles M. Weise, and
James A . Reinartz
A good understanding of population fluctuations in P. leucopus has been hampered
by a lack of a long-term study. This paper reports the results of a twenty-two year
study based on live trapping. The magnitude of the population fluctuations and
whether these fluctuations were regular or cyclic were studied.
IV
101
The Aquatic Macrophyte Community of
Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin: 1981-1986
John D. Madsen
The biomass and relative species abundance of the submersed aquatic macrophyte
communities in Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin, were examined in 1986 and com¬
pared to data gathered in 1981 and 1985. The study indicates that although total
macrophyte biomass and abundance may fluctuate dramatically due to physical
events, the relative frequency and dominance of species remain relatively constant.
Announcement
The Wisconsin Arts Board has awarded the Academy a
grant to help publish an anthology of contemporary Wis¬
consin poetry as a special edition of Transactions. There
has not been such an anthology for over thirty years, and
we think this work will serve as both a showcase and a
historical record of the broad geographical, ethnic, and sty¬
listic cross-section of Wisconsin poetry.
Poets who are interested in additional information and
directions for submitting poetry should write to the Editor.
Since work will be underway before this announcement is
published, authors should not delay their inquiries.
v
From the Editor
We are pleased to be able to publish the 1989 issue of Transactions (Vol. 77) in the year
of its date. During the past two years we have worked to shift the publication time from
February to the fall; it now appears that this distribution schedule can be maintained. Work
has already begun on Volume 78 (1990), and Wisconsin writers and people writing about
Wisconsin are invited to submit articles or proposals for publication.
The poetry and photography sections contained in the 1988 volume have been well received
by members of the Academy. And we are pleased to include another selection of poetry from
some of Wisconsin’s noted poets in this issue. Though there is no photography section in the
current volume, it is hoped that 1990 will see a return of that feature. Anyone wishing to
submit a proposal for photography is asked to contact the editor.
Readers of this issue of Transactions will see great variety in subjects. Papers range from
the concluding one in the series on Black Earth Creek to an analysis of Wisconsin’s Changing
Dairy Industry to a study of common whites and blacks in Antebellum North Carolina. The
opening article, however, is based on a paper presented at the 1988 annual meeting held in
Menomonie. The subject of the relationship of photography to memory is common, but David
Graham introduces us to “Whittling Time: Photography and the Poetry of Memory.’’ Those
who attended the 1989 annual meeting in Green Bay will recognize that this topic was the
basis of a symposium presented by three of Wisconsin’s leading poets and one of its leading
photographers.
In addition to the diversity in the articles presented, I am particularly impressed with the
high quality of the work done by people who live in or write about Wisconsin. Making
Transactions reflect the vigorous intellectual life in the sciences, arts, and letters in our state
has been the goal of the Wisconsin Academy for over a hundred years, and it is hoped that
the current issue of the journal continues that long tradition.
Comments, submission, or suggestions should be addressed to the Editor.
Carl N. Haywood
vi
Whittling Time:
Photography and the Poetry of Memory
David Graham
My subject is, from one perspective, en¬
tirely traditional. The link between
photography and poetry can be expressed in
the most ancient terms: both are children of
Zeus and Mnemosyne. The goddess of mem¬
ory, Mnemosyne, as mother of the Muses,
is naturally the source of all the arts and
sciences, traditionally defined. Poetry’s kin¬
ship to memory requires little elaboration; the
Greeks delegated authority for poetry to three
of Mnemosyne’s nine daughters: Calliope,
Erato, and Polyhymnia (representing epic,
lyric, and sacred poetry, respectively). Pho¬
tography, which aims to stop time and pre¬
serve the present into the future, is, if any¬
thing, even more closely allied to memory.
The Muse of photography is most likely Clio,
the Muse of history, for history is photog¬
raphy’s subject and medium.
From another perspective, however, the
pairing of poetry and photography raises
questions that are not easily dealt with in
traditional terms. I want to focus on these
issues by way of a close look at a single
poem, Scottish poet Douglas Dunn’s re¬
markable dramatic monologue, “St. Kilda’s
Parliament: 1879-1979.” But first, I want
briefly to provide the poem and photography
itself some historical context.
Photographer Paul Strand claimed in a 1917
essay that photography “is the first and only
important contribution thus far, of science to
David Graham is an Assistant Professor of English at
Ripon College. He has written two books of poetry,
Magic Shows and Common Waters, and has published
poems and essays in various magazines.
the arts” (219). A hyperbolic assertion, per¬
haps, but it points in a useful direction. For
science, in its oldest meaning, is simply
knowledge; and the modem era is character¬
ized by countless developments in science
and technology which, in supplying new ways
of viewing the world, have thus influenced
the arts directly or indirectly. Though not
always mentioned with science and technol¬
ogy, the invention of photography has ar¬
guably had as much influence on our ways
of knowing the world as any other: it has led
to developments as varied as cinema, tele¬
vision, electron microscopy, surveillance
cameras, and modem techniques of propa¬
ganda, advertising, and book printing and
illustration.
Indeed, some writers have gone further
than Paul Strand, declaring that photography
has effected an alteration in human con¬
sciousness comparable to the theories of Dar¬
win and Freud. As just one instance of such
large claims, consider Walter Benjamin’s fa¬
mous essay of 1936, “The Work of Art in
the Age of Mechanical Reproduction,” in
which he specifically details the way that
photography, like Freud’s theories, funda¬
mentally modified the way we perceive our
reality; and in which he also firmly places
photography at the center of the political up¬
heavals in modem life predicted by Marx.
Whether such radical claims for photography
may hold up remains an open question and
falls outside the scope of this essay. But, as
I will argue later on, photography has im¬
portant links to at least one crucial devel¬
opment of modem thought, quantum
physics.
1
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Since photography made it possible, as
never before, for nearly everyone to record
the features of loved ones, places visited, and
public or private events, it has become a uni¬
versal metaphor for remembering itself. It is
this idea and its ramifications that I want to
examine more closely. For if the ways in
which photography has altered our views of
reality are not yet fully charted, we may be¬
gin to understand them, at least, by looking
closely at a single theme.
Photography’s importance to the poetry of
memory is obvious. What is less obvious, at
least to the general public, is the possibility
that in crucial ways photography has made
it difficult to trust what we do recall. We all
want to believe that the camera never lies,
but, as we all probably sense instinctively,
it does lie, and with a maddening, pervasive
persistence. Not only does the camera portray
reality as what it is not — -a series of static,
two-dimensional slices of time — but even more
critically, the photograph cannot, by defini¬
tion, capture what we tend to value most: the
imaginative or interpretive meaning of a scene,
its full context. John Berger is correct in
pointing out that “unlike memory, photo¬
graphs do not in themselves preserve mean¬
ing. They offer appearances — with all the
credibility and gravity we normally lend to
appearances — prised away from their mean¬
ing. Meaning is the result of understanding
functions” (51).
Meaning can in fact be fraudulently im¬
posed on a scene. This happens not just when
there is propagandistic intent, but whenever
a photograph is taken, because any photog¬
rapher must frame the shot, decide on angles
and exposures, and ultimately select the
“best” picture for display. Similarly, as many
photographic historians and critics have dem¬
onstrated, the visual information provided in
photographs is sometimes inherently ambig¬
uous; we need the captions in order to un¬
derstand numerous photos. Janet Malcolm
writes,
One of the chief paradoxes of photography is
that though it seems to be uniquely empowered
to function as a medium of realism, it does so
only rarely and under special circumstances,
often behaving as if reality were something to
be avoided at all costs. If “the camera can’t
lie,” neither is it inclined to tell the truth, since
it can reflect only the usually ambiguous, and
sometimes outright deceitful, surface of reality.
(77)
The photograph’s ability to distort reality is,
or ought to be, a truism. Yet photography
does indeed capture something; as Susan
Sontag notes, we assume that each photo,
even if visually enigmatic, nonetheless is “a
piece of the world” (93). As such, it still
possesses an uncanny persuasive power, even
when we know better than to trust it fully.
Here is what is perhaps photography’s richest
paradox, between what Roland Barthes in his
book Camera Lucida calls each photograph’s
“certificate of presence” (87) and its inev¬
itable warpings of reality.
With these tensions and paradoxes in mind,
I want now to look in detail at Douglas Dunn’s
poem, which appeared in 1981 as the title
poem of his book St. Kilda’s Parliament. In
it he conducts a focused meditation, with far-
reaching implications, on a single photo¬
graph. This image may have been invented
by the poet, or it might be a Active composite
of many similar photographs. It is neverthe¬
less treated as real in the poem’s fiction. (Worth
keeping in mind here is the likelihood that
without the rich record of historical docu¬
mentary photographs, Dunn, bom in 1942,
could not have written this poem.)
Since it is fairly long and not well known,
I give the poem here in its entirety:
2
Photography and the Poetry of Memory
St. Kilda5 s Parliament: 1879-1979
The photographer revisits his picture
On either side of a rock-paved lane.
Two files of men are standing barefooted,
Bearded, waistcoated, each with a tam-o’-shanter
On his head, and most with a set half-smile
That comes from their companionship with rock,
With soft mists, with rain, with roaring gales,
And from a diet of solan goose and eggs,
A diet of dulse and sloke and sea-tangle,
And ignorance of what a pig, a bee, a rat,
Or rabbit look like, although they remember
The three apples brought here by a traveller
Five years ago, and have discussed them since.
And there are several dogs doing nothing
Who seem contemptuous of my camera,
And a woman who might not believe it
If she were told of the populous mainland.
A man sits on a bank by the door of his house,
Staring out to sea and at a small craft
Bobbing there, the little boat that brought me here.
Whose carpentry was slowly shaped by waves,
By a history of these northern waters.
Wise men or simpletons— it is hard to tell —
But in that way they almost look alike
You also see how each is individual,
Proud of his shyness and of his small life
On this outcast of the Hebrides
With his eyes full of weather and seabirds,
Fish, and whatever morsel he grows here.
Clear, too, is manhood, and how each man looks
Secure in the love of a woman who
Also knows the wisdom of the sun rising,
Of weather in the eyes like landmarks.
Fifty years before depopulation —
Before the boats came at their own request
To ease them from their dying babies—
It was easy, even then, to imagine
St. Kilda return to its naked self,
Its archaeology of hazelraw
And footprints stratified beneath the lichen.
See, how simple it all is, these toes
Playful 11 v clutching the edge of a boulder.
It is a remote democracy, where men,
In manacles of place, outstare a sea
That rattles back its manacles of salt.
The moody jailer of the wild Atlantic.
Traveller, tourist with your mind set on
Romantic Staffas and materials for
Winter conversations, if you should go there,
Landing at sunrise on its difficult shores,
On St. Kilda you will surely hear Gaelic
Spoken softly like a poetry of ghosts
By those who never were contorted by
Hierarchies of cuisine and literacy.
You need only look at the faces of these men
Standing there like everybody’s ancestors.
This flick of time I shuttered on a face.
Look at their sly, assuring mockery.
They are aware of what we are up to
With our internal explorations, our
Designs of affluence and education.
They know us so well, and are not jealous,
Whose be-all and end-all was an eternal
Casual husbandry upon a toehold
Of Europe, which, when failing, was not their fault.
You can see how they have already prophesied
A day when survivors look across the stem
Of a departing vessel for the last time
At their gannet-shrouded cliffs, and the farewells
Of the St. Kilda mouse and St. Kilda wren
As they fall into the texts of specialists,
Ornithological visitors at the prow
Of a sullenly managed boat from the future.
They pose for ever outside their parliament.
Looking at me, as if they have grown from
Affection scattered across my own eyes.
And it is because of this that I, who took
This photograph in a year of many events —
The Zulu massacres, Tchaikovsky’s opera —
Return to tell you this, and that after
My many photographs of distressed cities.
My portraits of successive elegants,
Of the emaciated dead, the lost empires,
Exploded fleets, and of the writhing flesh
Of dead civilians and commercial copulations,
That after so much of that larger franchise
It is to this island that I return.
Here I whittle time, like a dry stick,
From sunrise to sunset, among the groans
And sighings of a tongue I cannot speak,
Outside a parliament, looking at them,
As they, too, must always look at me
Looking through my apparatus at them
Looking. Benevolent, or malign? But who,
At this late stage, could tell, or think it worth it?
For I was there, and am, and I forget. (13-15)
3
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Dunn’s beautifully comprehensive poem
manages to touch on most of the issues I have
mentioned while focusing on the idea of us¬
ing photography as an aid to memory. Pre¬
cisely this problem has interested many poets:
when memory and photography are at odds,
as they must often be, which shall we trust?
Dunn’s subtitle, “the photographer revisits
his picture,” reminds us from the start of the
difficulty in evaluating the past through both
memory and photographic record. Presum¬
ably a visit will never be the same as a re¬
visiting. In this case he puts the closely allied
questions of memory’s reliability and pho¬
tography’s truthfulness at the heart of things
in several related ways. First, the photo¬
graphed scene took place in a village that no
longer exists: as the poem relates, the island
of St. Kilda (actually a group of four small
islands), located at the outermost of the Outer
Hebrides, was depopulated fifty years after
the photo was taken. Victorian Britons had
been charmed to discover an example of a
relatively primitive, “untainted” culture so
close to home. The islanders had lived for
centuries in comfortable isolation from tech¬
nological developments on the mainland.
Naturally, with the influx of tourists to their
island, their way of life began to be disrupted
with epidemic diseases as well as the break¬
down of their traditional economy. In 1879,
the year of the photograph, this process would
have been well underway, though the end
may not yet have been in sight. To twentieth-
century ears, of course, that end has a sadly
familiar ring: by 1930, the few who had not
already emigrated had to be evacuated by the
British government from a home that was no
longer hospitable. The island is now a nature
preserve and, with restoration efforts, is once
again a destination for tourists (Tindall 169—
71).
Whether or not Dunn is referring to an
actual photograph, he is describing a com¬
mon social use of photography. As James
Guimond notes, from the inception of pho¬
tography, “whenever people believe [d] that
something [was] going to be destroyed, they
rush[ed] to photograph it” (788). Photog¬
raphers have always been “obsessed with the
desire to capture what are called ‘vanishing
ways of life.’ ” Guimond continues, “pho¬
tographers . . . have shared the . . . deter¬
mination to record the images of aboriginal
cultures which were on the brink of disap¬
pearing or being assimilated” (788). The
nostalgic and sentimental impulse that, in
America, produced stories, art, and photo¬
graphic documentation of our “vanishing
frontier,” sent British Victorian photogra¬
phers across the world in search of quaint,
primitive, and exotic cultures. Finding such
a people so close to home was especially
exhilarating. The inescapable irony here, and
one of which Dunn’s narrator seems keenly
aware, is that the curiosity for information
about such endangered cultures helped con¬
tribute to their extinction.
Thus, the photographer in 1979 views a
reality that is permanently ended. In addition,
the photographer, unless he is well over a
century old, must be speaking to us from the
grave and so is himself doubly removed from
the described scene. Therefore, he may also
be intended as a sort of historical Everyman,
looking back on the first century and a half
of photography’s existence. In any event, he
makes it plain in his monologue that he feels
at home neither in St. Kilda, “among the
groans / and sighings of a tongue [he] cannot
speak,” nor in the “larger franchise” of
modem life. I will have more to say about
this uneasiness shortly.
Furthermore, we readers are distanced from
the scene by its very unfamiliarity. As Dunn
notes, these remote islanders photographed
in 1879 live without knowledge of
. . . what a pig, a bee, a rat,
Or rabbit look like, although they remember
The three apples brought here by a traveller
Five years ago, and have discussed them since.
Such details clearly are what attracted tourists
in the first place. These islanders were inev¬
itably seen in patronizing terms by the in¬
habitants of industrialized Britain, praised and
condescended to simultaneously, as repre-
4
Photography and the Poetry of Memory
sentatives of the persistent myth of pastoral
simplicity and innocence.
Obviously the barriers to comprehension
here are formidable and many-layered. These
islanders are inescapably other (different,
strange) in habit, outlook, experience, and,
of course, in time. The melancholy of such
separation (even from someone, like the pho¬
tographer, who has been there) is frequent in
poems about photographs. Here, Dunn’s nar¬
rator sees such separation, understandably,
as being slightly threatening to him. Most of
the men in the photo, he notes, display “a
set half-smile / That comes from their com¬
panionship with rock, / With soft mists, with
rain, with roaring gales . . . .” Even dogs
“seem contemptuous of [his] camera,” he
feels, commenting of the islanders generally:
Wise men or simpletons — it is hard to tell —
But in that way they almost look alike
You also see how each is individual,
Proud of his shyness and of his small life
On this outcast of the Hebrides ....
This photographer is intelligent enough to
know that however “alike” such people may
look to the outsider’s eye and the camera’s
lens, they maintain an ineffable individual¬
ity, one that he can only express, perhaps,
by oxymoronic phrases like “proud of his
shyness.” This recognition shows up in many
small details throughout the poem, in the poet’s
fussy or self-deprecating tone, in his cautious
qualifiers, but most of all in his savoring of
the visible details of the scene, tacitly rec¬
ognizing that such appearances are the lion’s
share of what he really knows. In a sense,
he can be sure only of what is outwardly
apparent, such as the ‘ ‘toes / Playfully clutch¬
ing the edge of a boulder.”
We see more than a trace of envy, too, in
the speaker’s noting that each St. Kilda man
looks “secure in the love of a woman who
/ Also knows the wisdom of the sun rising,
/ Of weather in the eyes like landmarks.”
These dead men and women, in other words,
are secure in more than one sense: safe in
each other’s love, they are also secured against
doubt by their customs and remoteness, and,
finally, protected utterly from intrusion by
their eternal dwelling in that vanished year.
Here we are not far in spirit, of course, from
the happy lovers on Keats’s Grecian Urn,
who, imprisoned in their artistic image, are
thus preserved from the depredations of time
and remain eternally young and lovely. As
much as he leans on such romantic notions,
however, Dunn never lets us forget that these
St. Kildans were actual people in a real place.
The poem grows more explicit about the
photographer’s melancholy envy as it con¬
tinues, granting these doubly exiled islanders
an ironic triumph over both the reader and
the photographer himself. In turning to ad¬
dress the modem tourist, the “Traveller,”
the narrator speaks across the double gulfs
of time and poetic fiction, and explicitly im¬
plicates the contemporary reader in his themes:
... if you should go there,
Landing at sunrise on its difficult shores,
On St. Kilda you will surely hear Gaelic
Spoken softly like a poetry of ghosts
By those who never were contorted by
Hierarchies of cuisine and literacy.
You need only look at the faces of these men
Standing there like everybody’s ancestors,
This flick of time I shuttered on a face.
Look at their sly, assuring mockery.
They are aware of what we are up to
With our internal explorations, our
Designs of affluence and education.
They know us so well, and are not jealous,
Whose be-all and end-all was an eternal
Casual husbandry upon a toehold
Of Europe, which, when failing, was not then-
fault.
The sly mockery here is, of course, not so
much read in the photo as read into it by the
speaker, who believes that in many ways the
more technologically advanced society which
absorbed these people is inferior to their cul¬
ture. No doubt he achieved this perception
only as time passed. He may now regret his
part, as a nineteenth-century tourist, in the
corruption of the St. Kildans’ traditional ways,
even though as a photographer he is also
party to its preservation in images. The St.
5
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Kildans had, or so he now believes, no need
for “internal explorations’’ (such as this poem,
for instance), and were not warped by the
presumably spurious “hierarchies” of civi¬
lized life, including “literacy” itself as well
as “designs of affluence and education.”
Up to this point Dunn’s view of these is¬
landers might seem sentimental, as if he saw
them as somehow noble in their simple-minded
farming of their “toehold” of an island. It
is a familiar symbolic structure: ever since
Virgil, poets have been lauding an Arcadian
ideal, the rural life far from the corruptions
of city and court. Yet if the language spoken
by the St. Kildans, “a poetry of ghosts,” is
the idiom of lost innocence, it is of a special
kind. There is indeed an implicit judgment
in their “casual husbandry,” an indictment
of the mainland culture and its simplistic be¬
lief in progress. These islanders, after all,
have survived since prehistoric times with an
unchanging, self-sufficient economy, how¬
ever primitive it might appear to outside eyes.
However, the narrator is careful to declare
that though the islanders may “know us so
well,” that is, well enough to mock our ob¬
sessive trust in progress, still they “are not
jealous” and evidently do not regret the im¬
minent passing away of their own way of
life. The islanders are not seen as simple
pastoral types; they embrace modem life
pragmatically or fatalistically enough, for their
own unstated reasons.
The poem’s photographer imagines that
these people, fifty years in advance, have
“already prophesied” their departure from
St. Kilda, and still “pose for ever outside
their parliament, / Looking at me, as if they
have grown from / Affection scattered across
my own eyes.” Although they were indeed
real enough, their representation in the pho¬
tograph derives precisely from the “affection
scattered” across the photographer’s eyes be¬
cause the photographer has arranged the mo¬
ment, posed them, and, most of all, pre¬
served his photo for a century. Why did he
do so? Why is he compelled (even from the
grave) to revisit his own photograph? No doubt
he needs to verify, with the photograph’s aid,
his feelings for these people and their van¬
ished way of life. All ways of life are van¬
ishing, from such a perspective, and the pho¬
tographer is one whose profession involves
an attempt to halt such flux. This effort is
doomed, of course, and the photographer must
know it as well as anyone does. He sees these
islanders as not being jealous of him, we may
presume, precisely because he is jealous of
them.
The poignancy of such a moment — look¬
ing back at the photographed past, knowing
absolutely its eventual dissolution and yet
remembering, with the photo’s aid, its vivid
presence — is central to this poem and to oth¬
ers like it. In fact, as Roland Barthes has
written, this paradox lies at the heart of his¬
torical photography’s ability to move us.
Commenting on an 1865 photo of a soon-to-
be-executed criminal, Barthes notes:
... he is going to die. I read at the same time:
This will be and this has been; I observe with
horror an anterior future of which death is the
stake. ... I shudder . . . over a catastrophe
which has already occurred. Whether or not
the subject is already dead, every photograph
is this catastrophe. (96)
Similarly in Dunn’s poem: “looking at them,”
the photographer notes that “they, too, must
always look at me / Looking through my
apparatus at them / Looking.” Richard Pow¬
ers, in Three Farmers On Their Way To A
Dance, his complex historical novel revolv¬
ing about a similar re-viewing of an old pho¬
tograph, has suggestive things to say about
such self-conscious moments:
We scour over a photo, asking not “What world
is preserved here?” but “How do I differ from
the fellow who preserved this, the fellows here
preserved?” Understanding another is indistin¬
guishable from revising our own self-image.
The two processes swallow one another. Photos
interest us mostly because they look back. (332)
This unsettling feeling of being watched,
even judged, that often comes to us while
looking at old photographs, derives from the
“catastrophe” Barthes describes, that shud-
6
Photography and the Poetry of Memory
der of recognition coexisting with the inev¬
itable feeling of separation. It is normal to
feel pity for the inhabitants of the past in old
photographs because we presumably know
more than they do; we may even know the
details of their own future catastrophes. Yet,
as Barthes knew and Dunn implies, what really
animates our pity is the sense that these dis¬
appeared people also knew much that we never
will. Likewise, the one invisible but sugges¬
tive presence in any old photograph, of course,
is the photographer himself, who is just as
much a disappeared person as the nominal
subjects. Looking at a photograph we have
taken spurs us to ask questions of ourselves
the answers to which are largely lost.
Dunn’s narrator concludes by asking, of
the St. Kildans’ looking through time at him,
“Benevolent, or malign?” And he answers
himself unsparingly: “But who, / At this late
stage, could tell, or think it worth it? / For
I was there, and am, and I forget.” What
does it all matter, then, if forgetting is in¬
evitable, as it surely is?
The answer, to the extent that a paradox¬
ical compromise can be one, must lie in the
interplay of viewer and viewed. For the poem
recognizes that there is really no such thing
as disinterested observation. Having been to
St. Kilda before its culture vanished, having
been indulged by the islanders, the photog¬
rapher is forever marked by the exchange.
He feels impelled by “affection” to return
not just to St. Kilda, but to “a year of many
events—- / The Zulu massacres, Tchaikov¬
sky’s opera . . . ”— in other words, a year
like any other, equally rich with human suf¬
fering and high achievement. His return both
reflects and implicitly rejects “that larger
franchise” of worldly pain, loss, dissolution,
and tawdry display that this photographer
confesses he spent many subsequent years
recording, and from which these St. Kildans
are forever protected:
. . . photographs of distressed cities,
My portraits of successive elegants,
Of the emaciated dead, the lost empires,
Exploded fleets, and of the writhing flesh
Of dead civilians and commercial copulations ....
Listed thus, these familiar elements of the
modem age, so often the impetus for sen¬
sational photographs, seem flat and pathetic.
Dead and gone, the people of St. Kilda can¬
not writhe or suffer exploitation. The pho¬
tographer, in returning to tell them this, is
obviously telling himself and us, and seeking
(without real hope) the impossible stasis of
a prelapsarian world. He finds that world not
in memory, precisely, but in the shaping of
memory represented by photography, which
both preserves and distances the past and its
inhabitants. His solace depends upon con¬
vincing himself not just that St. Kilda did
indeed exist as he remembers it, but also that
its natives were in fact knowing in a way
forever denied to him. He senses their knowl¬
edge as a tight-lipped judgment of him, which
he can feel but never fully understand. And
thus, paradoxically, the photographer and his
subjects are united while being forever
separated.
This paradox, lying at the heart of the pho¬
tographic act, is relevant to modem notions
of the ambiguity and relativity of all knowl¬
edge. Einstein’s central idea, like Freud’s,
has spread beyond its original context, be¬
coming part of the intellectual inheritance of
modernity. As Jacob Bronowski summarized
it, “relativity is the understanding of the world
not as events but as relations” (38), a remark
that could fairly stand as a description of one
of Dunn’s themes here. The photographer
revisiting his picture is not revisiting a thing
or a place, but is involved in preceiving the
relation between his various selves over time.
Similarly, Werner Heisenberg’s Principle of
Uncertainty has infiltrated areas beyond
quantum physics; many modem poets have
been impressed by the fact that nothing can
be measured without being in some way al¬
tered. If such a notion seems little more than
common sense today, it is a mark of how
deeply we have been influenced by such sci¬
entific ideas.
Photography, then, is like a scientific ex¬
periment: in recording reality, it also invar¬
iably changes it, however subtly. The sub¬
jects of any photograph always look back.
7
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
So if the photographer is to the people of St.
Kilda like a “[visitor] at the prow / Of a
sullenly managed boat from the future,” they
are to him the never escapable fact of his
own and the world’s past. The interplay of
viewer and viewed is of the essence. Again,
Richard Powers provides in his novel an el¬
oquent gloss on this aspect of the poem:
To look at a thing is already to change it. Con¬
versely, acting must begin with the most rev¬
erent looking. The sitter’s eyes look beyond
the photographer’s shoulders, beyond the frame,
and change, forever, any future looker who
catches that gaze. The viewer, the new subject
of that gaze, begins the long obligations of
rewriting biography to conform to the inverted
lens. Every jump cut or soft focus becomes a
call to edit. Every cropping, pan, downstopping
receives ratification, becomes one’s own.
(334-5)
Thus have novelists and poets internalized,
even if in oversimplified form, both relativ¬
ity theory and Heisenberg’s Principle of
Uncertainty.
Photography, the art that is both of time
and beyond it, is uniquely able to render such
tensions. It is of time in that each photograph
records a particular, actual instant; it is time¬
less in the same way any work of art is. As
Dunn’s speaker says earlier in the poem, “Here
I whittle time, like a dry stick, / From sunrise
to sunset, among the groans / And sighings
of a tongue I cannot speak . . . .” Any pho¬
tographer does this, of course, marking out
the implications of the still scene which we
know is never really stilled. So, as Dunn’s
speaker reminds us, a photo is not a record
of time itself, or even of time’s passing, but
simply of discrete instants, paralyzed and
solitary, like notches on a stick. Eventually,
following the metaphor’s implications, we
must suppose that the stick will be whittled
away; of course, there is one inevitable end
to all memory, the grave.
Even before death, though, our efforts to
remember and preserve the past are compro¬
mised. Indeed, the whole poem, in its anx¬
ious dependence on and swerving away from
the consolations of Keats’s “Ode on a Gre¬
cian Urn,” suggests reflection on the limits
of its own descriptive power. How well, after
all, does Dunn’s narrator succeed in render¬
ing for us the material world of St. Kilda?
His description at first seems tangible enough,
studded with details of barefooted peasants,
boats bobbing in the swells, dogs lounging
about, and all the “manacles of place.” And
he is shrewd enough to lace his description
with appealingly localized diction: “a diet of
dulse and sloke and sea tangle,” and an “ar¬
chaeology of hazelraw” — precisely the kind
of exoticism that draws in an armchair
traveller.
A closer look at the poem, however, soon
reveals that it is not very descriptive at all.
The details noted above occur in its first half
only and do not really add up to a very full
picture. We have only to think of the pages
that Conrad or D.H. Lawrence might have
devoted to the photographed scene to realize
how spotty and selective Dunn’s description
is. Furthermore, as the second half of the
poem gives itself over entirely to reflection
rather than description, Dunn continues to
refer rather unconvincingly to what “you can
see” in the photograph. Readers are in¬
formed, as I have noted, that they can see
how the St. Kildans “have already prophes¬
ied” their departure; and that they are “aware
of what we are up to” in our very different
society. It is no mere literalism to point out
that these are exactly the sorts of things that
the readers cannot see; they are interpretive
remarks not backed up by any tangible evi¬
dence from the scene. In fact, such judg¬
ments obviously cannot exist in any mute
image.
Given the poem’s frequent emphasis on
what cannot be known (all part of the ‘ ‘poetry
of ghosts”), it seems reasonable to suggest
that Dunn’s deepest concern here is to devise
a language that is adequate not to the people
of St. Kilda but to his own sighing, observ¬
ing, and scattering of affection. To para¬
phrase Heisenberg, Dunn is not simply de¬
scribing a memory but self-consciously
examining his process of remembering. The
Photography and the Poetry of Memory
pathos of this poem and similar ones is that
it inexorably becomes aware of its own in¬
adequacy at capturing outward events and
their attendant meanings.
The more we study our time-bound world,
then, the stranger and more remote it seems.
And naturally, the more we rely on photos
as aids to memory, the more our powers of
memory are bound to deteriorate, and the
more, in turn, we will seek out photography:
a vicious circle. Just as the spread of printed
books dealt a never-rescinded blow to the
oral tradition of memorization and recital, the
proliferation of photography into all areas of
life has probably rendered it increasingly more
difficult for us to recall and interpret what
has happened. “Not only is the photograph
never, in essence, a memory,” according to
Roland Barthes, “but it actually blocks
memory, quickly becomes a counter-mem¬
ory” (91). To put it in less exaggerated terms,
memory is a complex activity, rich with con¬
text and ripe with imagination, while a pho¬
tograph’s meanings are inevitably limited,
cut off from context.
There is one final, related problem as well,
which has occurred to nearly every com¬
mentator on the history of photography. As
Dunn’s Active photographer is shrewd enough
to notice, this age of the news photograph
and documentary tends to conflate the values
of all events, finding “Zulu massacres” pre¬
cisely as interesting and photographically
valuable as “commercial copulations.” As
Sontag puts it: “Images transfix. Images an¬
esthetize” (20). The result is another of the
peculiar dualities of photography. Images an¬
esthetize in that the very things we find touch¬
ing in photographs, like the one of St. Kilda’s
Parliament, tend to lose, through over-ex¬
posure, their ability to move us. Images of
almost everything that was once remote, sen¬
sational, or fascinating are so widely acces¬
sible that each one carries less and less of a
kick. Yet at the same time, paradoxically,
images transfix in that, with time, all pho¬
tographs come to look like works of art, re¬
gardless of their subjects. Photography, for
all its fabled truthfulness, can easily glorify
abstract form, thus beautifying the ugly or
the evil. In Max Kozloff’s stem summary of
the history of photography,
the genres of information were all leveled, made
interchangeable with each other and of equal
value. International conferences, swimming
meets, strikes, and doggie pranks came to have
the same, unstressed, driveling importance.
(23-4)
It is a sad enough circumstance: the glut of
historical photographs causes them to lose
their original significance, whether we look
to them for truth or for beauty. In Dunn’s
poem, the casual juxtaposition of “the ema¬
ciated dead” and “successive elegants,” and
of the “writhing flesh / Of dead civilians and
commercial copulations” seem obvious in¬
stances of the leveling of value that Kozloff
complains about. Less apparent, perhaps, is
the way in which Dunn’s photographer has
inevitably, though unwittingly, aestheticized
the grim reality of these St. Kildans’ lives.
Whatever hardships they have endured;
whatever angers they feel; whatever pain or
despair is to come — all tend to dissolve into
the picturesque. Craggy, wind-marked faces
are inescapably photogenic, and it is hard to
avoid a sentimentalizing effect, however much
the narrator wants to show contempt for tour¬
ists in search of “materials for / Winter
conversations.”
Ultimately, then, the “sly, assuring mock¬
ery” of the villagers in Dunn’s poem is as¬
suring us of one uncomfortable fact about
our technological progress: that the more we
have striven to grasp and record experience
with our fine instruments of perception, the
more impediments we have inadvertently
placed between ourselves and reality — not
just the reality of the past, but the present
and the future as well. The “tongue [the pho¬
tographer] cannot speak’ ’ is not just the Gaelic
of the inhabitants of St. Kilda, but, more
fundamentally, our failure to order and ex¬
plain the mysteries of time and memory. It
is an ancient theme after all, the chief novelty
being our continuing naive belief in photog¬
raphy’s accuracy.
9
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Works Cited
Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida: Reflections on
Photography. Translated by Richard Howard.
New York: Hill & Wang, 1981.
Benjamin, Walter. “The Work of Art in the Age
of Mechanical Reproduction.” Translated by
Harry Zohn. 1936. Photography in Print: Writ¬
ings from 1816 to the Present. Edited by Vicki
Goldberg. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1981 .
319-334.
Berger, John. About Looking. New York: Pan¬
theon, 1980.
Bronowski, Jacob. A Sense of the Future: Essays
in Natural Philosophy. Edited by Piero E. Ariotti.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1978.
Dunn, Douglas. St. Hilda s Parliament. London:
Faber & Faber, 1981.
Guimond, James. “Toward a Philosophy of Pho¬
tography.” The Georgia Review 34(4) (Winter
1980): 755-800.
Kozloff, Max. Photography and Fascination.
Danbury, New Hampshire: Addison House,
1979.
Malcolm, Janet. Diana & Nikon: Essays on the
Aesthetic of Photography . Boston: David God-
ine, 1980.
Powers, Richard. Three Farmers On Their Way
To A Dance. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987.
Sontag, Susan. On Photography. New York: Dell,
1977.
Strand, Paul. “Photography.” 1917. Photogra¬
phy: Essays & Images. Edited by Beaumont
Newhall. New York: Museum of Modem Art,
1980. 219-20.
Tindall, Jemima. Scottish Island Hopping. New
York: Hippocrene Books, 1981.
10
Wisconsin’s Changing Dairy Industry
and the Dairy Termination Program
John A. Cross
Abstract . Wisconsin' s leadership role in the United States dairy industry has increased over
the past half century, although the number of dairy herds has declined by three-quarters.
The U.S. Department of Agriculture' s Dairy Termination Program eliminated over sixteen
hundred of Wisconsin' s dairy operations, with the leading milk producing areas losing pro¬
portionately the fewest operators. An additional twenty -four hundred dairy farms were lost
during the two years since the first buyout herds were eliminated. Marginal areas within
northern Wisconsin proportionately lost far more production than the state's leading milk
producing areas. Most buyout participants remain in farming, relying upon hay and beef
sales.
The dairy industry of Wisconsin has been
marked by a steady decline in the num¬
ber of herds, an increase in herd size on the
remaining farms, and a rising productivity
per cow over the past several decades. In an
effort to reduce milk surpluses Congress in
late December 1985 enacted the Food Se¬
curity Act of 1985 (Public Law 99-198). One
provision of this legislation established the
U.S. Department of Agriculture’s Dairy Ter¬
mination Program (DTP), whereby the dairy
herds of participating farmers would be
slaughtered or sold for export. This paper
examines statistically the impact of the Dairy
Termination Program, commonly called the
whole-herd buyout program, on the changing
spatial pattern of the dairy industry in Wis¬
consin, “America’s Dairy Heartland.’’ The
impacts of the program upon the participating
John A. Cross received his Ph.D. degree from the Uni¬
versity of Illinois at Urbana. Since 1979 he has taught
at the University of Wisconsin-0 shkosh, where he is
presently an associate professor of geography. His other
recent publications have dealt with geographic literacy
and natural hazards.
Funding for part of this research was provided by a
grant from the University of Wisconsin-O shkosh Faculty
Development Research Board.
farmers and their future agricultural activities
are also explored.
Data Collection Methodology
Several strategies were utilized to collect
data for this paper. Raw statistics were ob¬
tained from the Wisconsin State Agricultural
Stabilization and Conservation Service Of¬
fice concerning each accepted buyout bid and
summary statistics reporting bids accepted,
bids submitted, bid values, herd sizes, and
1985 milk marketing of accepted herds. A
questionnaire was sent during June 1987 to
each county-level office of the U.S. Depart¬
ment of Agriculture’s Agricultural Stabili¬
zation and Conservation Service (ASCS)
within Wisconsin. Because these officials had
the responsibility of administering the DTP
at the local level, it was anticipated that they
could provide information concerning dairy¬
ing trends within their counties, activities
of DTP farmers, and characteristics of DTP
farmers. Completed questionnaires were re¬
ceived for sixty-three of Wisconsin’s seventy
dairying counties (there are no commercial
herds in Menominee and Vilas counties),
representing a response rate of 90%. A four-
11
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
page questionnaire was mailed in July 1987
to nearly four hundred farmers whose buyout
bids were “potentially accepted.’’ Com¬
pleted survey forms were received from 305
farmers scattered throughout the state, rep¬
resenting a response rate of 80%. This survey
queried farmers concerning their motivations
for participating in the program, their past
and present agricultural activities, their over¬
all socio-economic characteristics, and their
future intentions.
Changes in the Dairy Industry
Since 1930
Wisconsin’s national leadership in dairy
production has increased over the past half
century,1 even though the nation’s leading
milk-producing county is found outside the
state. In 1930 Wisconsin contained 8.9% of
all U.S. milk cows. By 1985 this figure had
risen to 17%. In 1930 Wisconsin’s milk pro¬
duction was 11.2% of the nation’s total, in¬
creasing to 17.5% by 1985 (Wise. Agr. Stat.
Ser. 1986). In 1930, three of the top five —
and five of the top ten — milk-producing
counties were found in Wisconsin. Although
as recently as 1969 Wisconsin held two of
the top five and five of the top ten positions
(U.S. Bureau of the Census 1932 and 1972),
by 1985 Wisconsin’s only milk-producing
county in the top ten was Marathon County,
ranked eighth. Nevertheless, in 1985, ten of
the top twenty milk-producing counties re¬
mained in Wisconsin (Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser.
1986), the same share as in 1930. Nationally,
the biggest shifts in milk production have
been the declining prominence of New York
counties (in 1930 St. Lawrence County, New
York ranked number one nationally, with that
state having six of the twenty largest pro¬
ducers) and the rising role of California (with
eight of the top twenty counties and the na¬
tion’s leading producer — San Bemandino
County — by the mid-1980s). Wisconsin’s milk
production in 1985 was one and a half times
that of California — the nation’s second larg¬
est producer (Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser. 1986).
At that time 80% of Wisconsin’s milk was
used to manufacture dairy products, with
Wisconsin producing 35.4% of the cheese
and 23.7% of the butter produced in the United
States. Thus in raw milk, cheese, butter, as
well as condensed milk, Wisconsin’s premier
position is unchallenged.
At the beginning of 1986 Wisconsin’s dairy
herd included 1,876,000 dairy cows, the
largest number since 1968 and less than
500,000 below the all-time high reached in
the mid- 1940s (Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser. 1986).
Although the number of Wisconsin dairy cows
declined until 1978, it subsequently in¬
creased, rising 3.4% in the five years leading
up to the buyout program. Largely because
of greater milk production per cow (by ge¬
netic improvement of herds by use of arti¬
ficial insemination, presently used to produce
three-quarters of all Wisconsin calves), milk
production in Wisconsin rose by 12.6% in
the same half decade. By 1985 Wisconsin
cows produced 25.1 billion pounds of fluid
milk or an average of 13,383 pounds an¬
nually per cow (Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser. 1986).
Although the number of dairy cows within
the state had only increased by 2% since 1930,
the number of dairy farms2 had plummeted
73.6% by the 1982 Census of Agriculture, a
drop from 166,996 to 44,093 (U.S. Bureau
of the Census 1932 and 1984). The number
of commercial herds, represented by those
undergoing the Brucellosis Ring test, dropped
an additional 5.9% between March 1982 and
March 1986, at which time Wisconsin had
40,950 dairy herds (Wise. Stat. Rep. Ser.
1982; Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser. 1986).
Considerable spatial variations were dis¬
cerned in the impacts of these changes in
Wisconsin’s dairy industry. Declines in the
number of dairy herds over the past half cen¬
tury (Fig. 1) as well as between 1981 and
1986 (Fig. 2) have been the greatest in the
counties of northern Wisconsin, those coun¬
ties encompassing and surrounding the Mil¬
waukee metropolitan area, and several coun¬
ties within the center of the state along the
Wisconsin River. Indeed, two counties of
northern Wisconsin no longer have any dairy
herds. Overall the smallest declines in the
number of herds have been in the south-
12
Wisconsin's Changing Dairy Industry
western counties. Although the number of
dairy cows within the state as a whole rose
slightly since 1930, six counties within
northern Wisconsin recorded losses exceed¬
ing 50%, as did four counties in southeastern
Wisconsin (Figs. 3 and 4). Conversely, large
increases were noted in several counties of
southwestern Wisconsin as well as in a band
of counties extending across central Wiscon¬
sin from Kewaunee County on Lake Mich¬
igan, through Marathon County in the center
of the state, to Buffalo and Pepin Counties
along the Mississippi River. The most inten¬
sive dairying region of Wisconsin in the 1980s,
if measured by the number of cows per square
mile, is Calumet County, situated along the
eastern shore of Lake Winnebago.
Participation in the Whole Herd
Buyout Program
The U.S. Department of Agriculture’s Dairy
Termination Program thus came at a time
when many changes were already reshaping
Wisconsin’s dairy industry (Table 1). Ninety-
six hundred Wisconsin dairy farmers, rep¬
resenting 23.4% of Wisconsin’s dairy herds,
submitted bids to participate in this whole
herd buyout program (Wise. State ASCS 1986;
Hill 1986; Wisconsin Agriculturalist 1986).
Nearly seventeen hundred of these bids were
provisionally accepted in March 1986. Thus,
this buyout program eliminated 4. 1 % of Wis¬
consin’s dairy herds between April 1986 and
August 1987. The buyout herds totalled 62,633
cows. Although the dairy herds could either
be sold for export or slaughter, 98% of the
Wisconsin DTP dairy cows were terminated
13
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
by slaughter. These terminated herds had ac¬
counted for 3. 1% of the state’s milk produc¬
tion in 1985 and contained 3.3% of Wiscon¬
sin’s dairy cow population.
A smaller proportion of Wisconsin dairy
farmers were accepted into the dairy termi¬
nation program than within any other state
except Nevada and Pennsylvania, even though
Wisconsin led the nation in the number of
total bids submitted— 24.4% of all bids sub¬
mitted nationally. Although nationally 35.4%
of all bids submitted were accepted, Wis¬
consin’s acceptance rate (17.4%) was by far
the nation’s lowest. Acceptance rates within
all four states adjoining Wisconsin exceeded
40%, and Minnesota had the nation’s largest
number of herds accepted for termination—
2,150 (Illinois State ASCS 1986; Iowa State
ASCS 1986; Michigan State ASCS 1986;
Table 1. Recent decline in number of Wisconsin dairy herds and participation in USDA Dairy
Termination Program by county.
14
Wisconsin s Changing Dairy Industry
Table 1. Recent decline in number of Wisconsin dairy herds and participation in USDA Dairy
Termination Program by county. (Continued)
Data Sources:
Wisconsin State Agricultural Stabilization and Conservation Services Office. (1986). Madison: USDA. Un¬
published statistics.
(number of bids accepted, and milk cows (excluding heifers and calves) accepted for termination)
Wisconsin Agricultural Statistics Service, 1 986.
(number of herds tested for Brucellosis in March 1986 test period-used to calculate percentages.)
Wisconsin Agricultural Statistics Service, 1 988.
(number of herds tested for Brucellosis in test period ending March 1988.)
Hill, 1986 and Wisconsin Agriculturalist, 1986.
(number of bids submitted and bids accepted.)
15
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
Figure 5
Minnesota State ASCS 1986; and
Halladay 1986).
The proportion of dairy farmers within each
Wisconsin county submitting buyout bids was
the greatest within the counties of northern
Wisconsin where 40% or more of the dairy
farmers submitted bids in three counties
(Fig. 5). With the exception of Milwaukee
county (where no bids were received from
that county’s four dairy farmers) and Vilas
and Menominee counties (where there are no
commercial herds), Fond du Lac county
dairymen were proportionately least likely to
submit buyout bids, with only 16% submit¬
ting offers.
Although fewer than 2% of the dairy herds
in the leading milk producing counties of
central Wisconsin were accepted for termi¬
nation, participation rates exceeded 10% in
several counties of northern Wisconsin where
dairying was already declining (Figs. 6 and
7). Indeed, the Dairy Termination Program
reduced the number of herds in Iron and Oneida
counties by 23.5 and 40.0%, respectively.
Tables 2 and 3 and a comparison of Figures
1 through 4 with Figures 6 and 7 illustrate
that participation in the buyout program was
proportionately greatest in those counties al¬
ready experiencing declines in dairying. Par-
Figure 6
ticipation was proportionately the least within
those counties experiencing the largest ex¬
pansions in the number of dairy cows and
having the greatest intensity of dairying
(Table 4). A stepwise regression, with the
proportion of dairy herds accepted for elim¬
ination as the dependent variable, found that
the percent decline in number of dairy farms
(1930-1982) and decline in commercial herds
16
Wisconsin’s Changing Dairy Industry
Table 2. Long-term decline in number of dairy farms (1930-1982) and USDA Dairy
Termination Program bid acceptances by county.
Chi-Square = 42.19, Significance = .0000
Table 3. Recent decline in number of dairy herds (March 1981 -March 1986) and USDA
Dairy Termination Program bid acceptances by county.
Chi-Square = 9.73, Significance = .0453
Table 4. Intensity of dairy farming (milk cows per square mile) and participation in USDA
Dairy Termination Program by county.
Chi-Square = 18.63, Significance = .0009
between March 1981 and March 1986 ex¬
plained 56.3% of the variation of the depen¬
dent variable (Multiple R = 0.75).
The average value of the accepted buyout
bids was generally highest within the coun¬
ties of west-central and southwestern Wis¬
consin. On the other hand, the average bid
in several counties of northern Wisconsin and
within two counties near Milwaukee were
over $2.00 less than the statewide average
accepted bid of $16.85 per hundredweight
(Fig. 8). Statistically, the greater the per¬
centage of the county’s dairy farmers who
submitted accepted bids, the lower the av¬
erage bid (Table 5).
The mean buyout herd size was generally
highest within those counties having the most
intensive dairy industry (Fig. 9). On the other
hand, when the average number of head within
the terminated herds is compared with the
average herd size within the county, a dif¬
ferent picture emerges. Throughout central
Wisconsin the typical herd accepted for ter¬
mination was smaller than the mean herd size
within those counties, while within several
counties of northern and southeastern Wis¬
consin the buyout herds closely approxi¬
mated or exceeded the average herd size within
the various counties.
Participant Characteristics
Participants in the buyout program repre¬
sented a broad spectrum of Wisconsin dairy
17
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
farmers. Several comments from county-level
ASCS officials clearly make this point: “It
was a typical cross-section of . . . farmers
that submitted bids and were accepted. There
was really no significant trend to any partic¬
ular group of farmers”; “We [in a southwest
Wisconsin county] did not notice any sub¬
stantial differences — buyout producers ranged
in age from 25 to 70 — from 20 cows to 85
cows — from new farmer to experienced — it
cut across all types”; and “those with ac¬
cepted bids were either good operations or
poor operations— as a group tended to be
middle of the road. . . .” Although DTP
participants were considered by ASCS offi¬
cials (Table 6) as typical of the average Wis¬
consin dairy farmer with respect to their ed¬
ucational attainments, their farm acreage, and
their herd grade, they differed, at least re¬
gionally, from continuing dairy operators in
several key aspects, particularly age and
experience.
The typical Wisconsin dairyman (all but
4% were male) participating within the U.S.
Department of Agriculture’s Dairy Termi¬
nation Program was nearing retirement age
and had operated his farm for at least twenty-
five years. Indeed, 41.8% of the participants
were at least sixty years of age, with only
13.4% under forty years old. These figures
contrast sharply with the ages of Wisconsin
dairy farm operators reported in the 1982
Census of Agriculture. For example, al¬
though the census indicated that individuals
aged sixty-five years and older comprised 7.9%
of the state’s dairy farmers, this age group
Table 5. Average buyout bid price per county and participation in USDA Dairy Termination
Program.
Chi-Square = 14.88 , Significance = .0049
18
Wisconsin’s Changing Dairy Industry
Table 6. Characteristics of typical DTP participants: Observations of county-level ASCS
officials in Wisconsin.
comprised 20.1% of the Dairy Termination
Program participants. Thirty-two percent of
the state’s dairy operators were at least fifty-
five years old, but 56.9% of the DTP partic¬
ipants were this age. Conversely, the Census
reported that 22.3% of Wisconsin’s dairy
farmers were under thirty-five (U.S. Bureau
of the Census 1984), yet only 4.6% of the
DTP participants were this young.
Eight percent of the Wisconsin DTP par¬
ticipants had entered dairying within the pre¬
vious five years; however, the preponderance
were leaving the dairy business after a life¬
time of involvement. Only within the north¬
ernmost counties of Wisconsin, where dairy¬
ing was already a marginal agricultural
activity, and within the north-central portion
of the state, including the major dairy coun¬
ties of Marathon and Barron, did significant
numbers of dairymen with less than fifteen
years of experience enter the DTP. Indeed,
within the northernmost counties 45.8% had
less than fifteen years of experience, while
18.7% of those participants within the south¬
ern third of the state had that little longevity.
Economically, DTP participants were quite
varied. Indeed, total 1985 milk marketing of
these farmers ranged from a low of 225 hun¬
dredweight for one Price County farm to
118,808 hundredweight on a Dane County
dairy, with their termination payments, cor¬
respondingly, ranging from $2,678 to
$2,132,606. Nevertheless, average DTP herd
size of thirty-seven cows plus twenty-seven
heifers and calves was smaller than the
average-sized Wisconsin herd. Although one
ASCS official wrote that “surprisingly, many
poorer producers didn’t submit bids,” the av¬
erage buyout cow was 850 pounds under the
state average in her milk production. Indeed,
one DTP farmer wrote that he was partici¬
pating because his cows were all old. Con¬
versely, another ASCS respondent indicated
that, at least within his central Wisconsin
county, “for the most part they were more
progressive farmers.” For many participants,
as discussed in the following section, their
higher-than-average debt loads brought them
into the program.
The overwhelming majority of DTP par¬
ticipants had herds of Holsteins (91.4%), with
only 2% having Guernseys and 1% having
Jerseys. The few remaining dairymen had
herds comprised of several varieties. Thus,
19
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
Holsteins are over-represented within the
buyout program. Statewide, Holsteins ac¬
count for 79% of Wisconsin’s dairy herd.
Jerseys for 13%, and Guernseys for 5% (Vo-
geler 1986). Fifty-five percent of the buyout
herds were rated Grade A, similar to the 59.6%
figure for all Wisconsin herds at the begin¬
ning of 1986 (Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser. 1986).
Motivations for Entering
Buyoot Program
Buyout participants were asked both “What
was the main reason you decided to submit
your dairy buyout bid?” and to indicate the
importance of several factors, including “de¬
sire to retire” and “farm debts” (Table 7).
Responses to the first question indicated that
although most participants had several mo¬
tivations, age, poor health, and retirement
were among the most frequently cited. Nine¬
teen percent of the respondents explicitly
mentioned that they submitted bids so they
could retire, with an additional 23.6% indi¬
cating that their age or poor health were mo¬
tivations. Although frequently related to age,
the lack of help with the dairy operation was
another frequently cited factor (by 9.8%),
especially among those farmers whose chil¬
dren were no longer at home helping with
the farm chores — a factor of critical impor¬
tance to the typical labor-intensive family op¬
eration. These responses, together with the
DTP participant’s ranking of the importance
of their “desire to retire” in the submission
of their bids, indicates that 59.9% of the par¬
ticipants saw the program as a way to leave
dairying for retirement, age, or health rea¬
sons. If those who cited a lack of help are
included, this retirement figure rises to 63.3%.
However, retirement from dairying should
not imply that all these individuals have to¬
tally retired from farming. An additional 6.2%
of the respondents indicated that a desire for
more free time and less work — but not re¬
tirement — motivated their participation in the
buyout program. Such motivations for DTP
participation parallel the responses of farmers
in Walworth, Rock, and Jefferson counties
who were surveyed concerning their deci¬
sions to leave dairying before 1985. Indeed,
Richler writes, “reasons included age of
farmer, desire for a different life style, lack /
cost of farm labor, and high capital invest¬
ment and excessive debt vis a vis economic
return” (Richler 1985).
Economic problems facing America’s
farmers, including over-production and low
prices, have received considerable attention
by journalists within the past few years. In¬
deed, the DTP was legislated in an effort to
reduce milk surpluses. However, economic
considerations were cited by only 39.5% of
the survey respondents as a motivation for
their participation. Nevertheless, 7.7% of the
DTP participants entered the program to ‘ ‘get
out of debt” and an additional 1.8% claimed
their participation would enable them to avoid
bankruptcy and a farm auction. The size of
DTP payment that the farmers received was
statistically related to their voiced concerns
about their personal economic problems, with
the dairymen who received the largest pay¬
ments being most likely to express economic
concerns.
The typical Wisconsin dairy buyout pro¬
gram participant had relied upon the sales of
milk or dairy products to generate the pre-
Table 7. Motivations of DTP participants for terminating their herds.
20
Wisconsin’s Changing Dairy Industry
ponderance of his farm sales. Indeed, 50.1%
indicated that milk sales accounted for at least
four-fifths of their farm sales before they ter¬
minated dairy operations, while only 5.3%
reported that milk and dairy products pro¬
vided for less than two-fifths of their farm
income. Fewer than one in ten reported off-
farm income exceeding their income from
farming before they sold their daily herd, and
over half the participants indicated that nei¬
ther they nor their spouse had any off-farm
employment.
Impacts Upon Wisconsin’s
Dairy Industry
Sixty-three thousand cows (plus 27,600
heifers and 18,500 calves) were accepted for
slaughter or export under the buyout plan at
a cost of $125.5 million (Wise. State ASCS
1986). Nevertheless, during the eighteen
months during which these DTP herds were
eliminated, the number of milk cows in Wis¬
consin dropped by 93,000. By June 1988
Wisconsin’s dairy herd had dropped to
1,760,000, the smallest number since 1920
(Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser. 1988). However, be¬
cause the average milk production per cow
has been steadily rising (up by 9.1% in the
past five years), total milk production is still
higher than what it was at the beginning of
the decade (Wise. Agr. Stat. Ser. 1988).
Viewed from this context, the Dairy Ter¬
mination Program has only resulted in mo¬
mentarily slowing the long-term trend of in¬
creased production that produced the milk
surpluses the program sought to reduce.
The impact that the elimination of 4.1%
of Wisconsin’s dairy farmers through the
buyout plan will have upon the long-term
decline in the number of operators is more
subject to speculation (see Table 1). By March
1988, the number of dairy operators in Wis¬
consin had fallen to 36,924 (Wise. Agr. Stat.
Ser. 1988). Thus in the two years since the
first herd was slaughtered under the Dairy
Termination Program, the number of Wis¬
consin dairy herds has dropped by 4,026 —
a whopping 9.8%. During the first year of
the buyout program, when 71% of the 1,681
accepted herds were scheduled for termina¬
tion, the number of Wisconsin dairy herds
actually fell by 2,724, a drop of 6.7% (Wise.
Agr. Stat. Ser. 1987). Within the previous
five years, between March 1981 and March
1986, the number of dairy farms within Wis¬
consin had decreased by only 7.1%.
Nearly 8,000 of the Wisconsin dairy farm¬
ers who submitted buyout bids had their bids
rejected, being in excess of the $22.50 per
hundredweight cut-off. Thus, had all the sub¬
mitted bids been accepted, 22.9% of the state’s
dairy operations would have been elimi¬
nated — far more than the actual 4.1%. County-
level ASCS officials estimated that one-quarter
of these individuals would leave dairying by
1992, the year that participating farmers may
begin to re-enter the dairy business. How¬
ever, the loss of nearly twenty-four hundred
Wisconsin dairy operators who were not DTP
participants within the past two years indi¬
cates that these officials’ estimates may be
too conservative.
The total declines in the number of dairy
herds between March 1986 and March 1988
(including the DTP herds) are indicated in
Figure 10. Comparison of this map with those
of previous declines and DTP participation
indicates that the problems facing dairy op¬
erators in the northernmost portions of Wis¬
consin appear to be expanding farther south.
For example, historically the highest rates of
decline (in northern Wisconsin) were in those
counties along Lake Superior and the Mich¬
igan border (plus Oneida county). The de¬
cline in this last two-year period has extended
farther south to include Polk, Rusk, Lan¬
glade, and Marinette counties, which all had
substantial numbers of herds. Polk county
lost 17% of its herds. Rusk county lost 18%.
Even the state’s leading dairying county,
Marathon, reported a decline exceeding the
state average. Although Milwaukee county
actually showed an increase (the county had
only six dairy operations in early 1988), de¬
clines in the collar counties all greatly ex¬
ceeded the state average. Of particular in¬
terest is the continued prosperity of dairying
in the state’s southwestern comer. This area
21
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
experienced the smallest decline in number
of dairy operators between 1930-1982, be¬
low average declines between 1981 and 1986,
below average DTP participation, and de¬
creases in the number of herds between 1986
and 1988 that were half of the state average.
Grant and Vernon counties are now the state’s
third and fourth leading counties in number
of herds.
Farming Activities in 1987
Most of the buyout farms remained in some
type of agricultural production in 1987. Live¬
stock production was still occurring on 73%
of the operating DTP farms (Table 8). Beef
production was most common, being re¬
ported by 95% of DTP operators raising live¬
stock, many who indicated they were now
concentrating their efforts upon “dairy beef”
or “Holstein steers.” Beef production was
uniformly attractive to these former dairymen
across the state. Hogs were being raised by
one-fifth of those farms with livestock. Hog
production, although reported by former
dairymen throughout Wisconsin, was most
attractive to farmers within the southwestern
portion of the state. Nearly one- third of all
DTP farms in production within southwest¬
ern Wisconsin were raising hogs in 1987.
Although other farmers reported raising
chickens, sheep, goats, horses, and donkeys,
not one of these animals was found on as
many as 5% of the DTP farms.
Statewide, 96% of those DTP participants
whose farms were in production reported that
crops were grown in 1987. Only in Wiscon¬
sin’s northernmost counties did any sizeable
number of these farmers report that crops
were not being produced. The most com¬
monly grown crops were hay (on 86.7% of
all operating DTP farms), com (on 78.4%),
and oats (on 43.8%).
Hay (including alfalfa and clover) was uni¬
formly popular as a crop among former dairy
operators across Wisconsin, although the dis¬
tribution of com and oats was spatially less
uniform. Com was produced on at least 80%
of all operating DTP farms except for the
northernmost area, where only one-third of
Figure 10
the farms were growing the crop. Oats, like¬
wise, were under-represented in the northern
counties, although they were least popular
within southeastern Wisconsin.
Less commonly grown crops included soy¬
beans (on 11.5% of all operating DTP farms),
tobacco (on 4%), vegetables (4.9% — includ¬
ing sweet com, peas, and snap beans), and
barley (4%), plus several other crops — none
of which were reported by more than 2% of
the DTP participants. Although soybeans were
grown by a few farms in all areas of the state,
only within southwestern Wisconsin did as
many as a third of the farmers cultivate this
crop. Tobacco was only grown by DTP farms
in the south-central and southwestern por¬
tions of Wisconsin. Vegetables were pre¬
dominately grown by DTP participants in
south-central Wisconsin.
Most DTP farmers reported production of
several crops and livestock. Hay and beef,
however, were expected to provide the great¬
est source of farm income (Table 9). Indeed,
when asked “what single crop or livestock
do you expect to provide the most income to
your farm this year [1987]?” statewide 35.7%
indicated hay and 33% reported beef. Hay
was either the first or second most frequently
cited income source in every region of Wis¬
consin, while beef was similarly reported in
22
Wisconsin’s Changing Dairy Industry
■5 co
© CM
§
. o
2 P II
o UJ
00 ^
£5®
=3,
I S 11
CO Q ^
€ to00
3 CD II
,o §> 11
cos^
co -fc
CD C
Uj CD
m ^
5 CM
yv
5 CO
1 "
0 2:
"S Co'
^ 2 CO
t* ■«
§ § 11
2°?
v.S'f
si ii
° =3
CD "p
§;£
S0 vfl vP -O .p -Q
05 05 CM CD N 00 LO O 05
c\i 05 ^ iccdcdco^^^
\0 sO sO -vO
poo ooooo(
in in ud in in in o in
CO C£) i- 05 CO 00 Tf co
sO ^ sO s§ sO
ODN^- O 05 O’} Sd CO CO
oo lo K dcviTtoo^Ttr^
co co t- o CO O) ^ t- i- r-
00 %• O So So 00 O So 05 0
d s o) cdcod-r^cdcM
00 h- CM 05 05 05 LO t-
o° o5 o'® o5 o5
Tf Tt o n lo ^ r-
dos d cd t- d -- 1
Is- h- OOICONt-
£ o° o° <£<£<£<£
O N LO O ^ O CO CO
udoocsi d^diriio<
a® o° o° o° o°
^ K O O CO CO CO
05 cd t- o o cd in in c
co co i- o o co in
^Ov.OvO .o
So00 05 ^ O OO T- O Q
in cd od tj- o cd d
N- h~ CO 00 CO CO
o £ os
-2 05 CD 8 -5
><DO CO O CO O O CD
□ CD X OIOOWh>
»“ W H—f
^ z i .12
,®mMQ
“i9d
2 o9g
2 s»zS
© -2 -o c
co § c6
2 Bs^
5cz“
3® ®I
|>S = S
< C ° O
.s®SS^
g*l J
l— S-
OH D
o n
c= ©
§■2
S8|
^ o E
2 S
tjQ I
k • ©
Cl^. CD ©
© Z *" ®
■ 0) W T
d £ ® ■£
© zj
8OT
c2:®
■8 8.se
q. 05 .
w is I
8 §> g !
C 8
CD £ CD °
£ oO g
GZr 2
co co
£i£§m
§ © © c
3.ees
c (fl n
■g*
05 -c O CO
DC S-2 «
Sr -o Q 2
O
co is
CD co
t* C~
CD 4£
co ^
r°
11
t*
CD CD
0:1 g
2 8
<D c:
>2 CD
o!i
0) Q)
1 1
Q) ^3
c m
§ £
co
§
^ 'co
2 P
H C
W(
1 1
8*
<0 c
^<3
§ s
o p
Q CO
l.s
03
vP vP vP vP
O ' o'' o" d''
CO CO CO CO
cd cd in
CO CM CO
o'- 6s o' oN
'P 'P 'P -p
o' o'- ©"
vP vP vP 'hP
o" o^ o''
oN oN oN oN
a5 ^
rt; p 00 r-
05 'M1 1-
m co 1-
^ © fc -c
CO CD O 2=
X CD O O
23
Regions same as defined in Table 8.
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
all areas except the south-central and south¬
eastern parts of the state where com was equal
to hay in importance.
On-Farm and Off-Farm
Employment in 1987
The summer of 1987 found the former dairy
farmers looking towards other economic pur¬
suits. One-third (32.7%) of the DTP partic¬
ipants reported that either they or their spouse
had obtained off-farm employment since en¬
tering the program, while one-fifth had re¬
tired. Jobs that these farm operators reported
having in mid- 1987 ranged from providers
of farm services to factory workers, from
unskilled laborers to plumbers and electri¬
cians, and from sales to the professions. Al¬
though great employment diversity was re¬
ported, several of the most frequently reported
off-farm jobs included driving trucks (7% of
those not retired), driving school busses
(2.6%), logging (2.6%), and sales (of all va¬
rieties, 6.1%). Nevertheless, of those who
had not retired, farming was still considered
by half of the DTP participants as their oc¬
cupation in 1987.
Farming remains the primary occupation
for most DTP participants. Although many
commented about how much they missed their
cows, the long hours without any vacation
were not missed. Although 59.9% indicated
that a motivation for leaving dairying was to
retire, 96% of those who owned farmlands
before they entered the DTP still owned their
lands, even though 22.9% of these persons
responded that they wished to sell their farms.
Of those farmers who had not sold their farms,
22% rented their lands to other farmers, but
only 5.5% of the farms had been totally taken
out of production (with three-quarters of these
located within the northern third of Wiscon¬
sin). Thus, 74% of the Wisconsin dairy farm¬
ers who entered the DTP still had at least
part of their lands in production in 1987.
Statewide, 18.3% of the DTP participants
entered at least part of their farmland into the
Conservation Reserve Program, whereby lands
vulnerable to soil erosion are removed from
production. This program included one-third
of the buyout farmers within the southwest¬
ern and south-central portions of Wisconsin.
Undoubtedly, more farmers would have en¬
tered this program had their lands been eli¬
gible, as several farmers responded that their
requests for inclusion into the program were
rejected because their lands were too level.
A Return to Dairying?
The vast majority of buyout participants
were satisfied with their decision to enter the
program. In response to the question “Do
you still think you made the correct decision
by participating in the dairy herd buyout pro¬
gram?’’ 79.7% answered affirmatively, 7.3%
responded negatively, while 13% were un¬
certain. The farmers who had the most pro¬
ductive cows were significantly more satis¬
fied with their participation than those with
below-average milk yields.
When surveyed after being in the buyout
program for one year, fewer than one in ten
of the DTP participants indicated that they
planned to re-enter dairy operations after the
required five-year moratorium elapses. A much
smaller survey, conducted by the Wisconsin
Agriculturalist shortly after the winning bids
were announced, found that only one out of
fewer than one hundred respondents hoped
to return to dairying (Morrow 1986). In re¬
sponse to a direct inquiry on my survey, 7.3%
indicated that they intended to return to dairy¬
ing, 23.8% responded that they were un¬
certain, while 68.9% stated they had no in¬
tention. Such responses were not surprising
considering the large proportion of the buy¬
out participants who used the DTP as an av¬
enue for retirement. Indeed, only 20.3% of
Wisconsin farmers within the buyout pro¬
gram expected to still be dairying within five
years if their herd had not been accepted for
termination. An additional 26.3% replied that
they were uncertain as to whether they would
be operating by 1992. Even among those dairy
operators under fifty years of age, 39.8%
expected to have left dairying by 1992, and
an additional 26.5% were uncertain as to
whether they would still be in business. Thir¬
teen percent of those buyout farmers who
24
Wisconsin's Changing Dairy Industry
were not retiring expected to re-enter dairy¬
ing, although 44.3% felt they had perma¬
nently left the business. Thus, only one of
twenty Wisconsin buyout participants had any
intention of returning to dairying.
The Dairy Termination Program, in con¬
clusion, has sped up the consolidation of
Wisconsin’s dairy industry into fewer hands.
However, this shrinkage would have oc¬
curred even without the program; most par¬
ticipants would have quit dairying anyway
because of age or economic pressures. The
ongoing process of farm consolidation state¬
wide and retrenchment from the agricultural
frontiers of northern Wisconsin and the cen¬
tral Wisconsin River Valley and from the
expanding urban areas in southeastern Wis¬
consin has only been hastened. Participation
rates were less than 2% in the leading milk
producing counties of north-central Wiscon¬
sin, while rates exceeded 10% (to as high as
40%) within Wisconsin’s northernmost
counties where historically dairying was al¬
ready in a precipitous decline.
Even without the cows, most DTP partic¬
ipants in Wisconsin remain involved in ag¬
ricultural pursuits. Considering that a smaller
proportion of DTP bids from Wisconsin
farmers were accepted than within any other
state and that Wisconsin’s herd was propor¬
tionately reduced less than within any state
except Nevada and Pennsylvania, Wisconsin
remains the nation’s dairy land. If anything,
its role has been strengthened. Likewise, the
same arguments may be made within Wis¬
consin. Marginal areas within the northern¬
most counties proportionately lost far more
production than the state’s leading milk pro¬
ducing areas. Considering the proportion of
DTP participants who continue to produce
hay (and that one-third still consider it their
leading source of farm sales) and those who
have concentrated upon cultivating feed grains,
farmers remaining in dairying should find lit¬
tle — save low milk prices — to keep them from
expanding their herd sizes. In the past, such
overproduction has done little to diminish
overall production; it has just driven the less
productive producer out of business and con¬
centrated production into fewer hands. In ret¬
rospect, it is doubtful whether the Dairy Ter¬
mination Program will have any lasting effect
upon overall milk production, but it may have
accelerated the process of farm consolidation
and the increased size of the remaining op¬
erations. The USDA Dairy Termination Pro¬
gram has merely advanced trends that have
been redefining Wisconsin’s dairy industry
for over a half century, spatially restricting
the dairy belt within the state.
Notes
•Comparable data on the number of Wisconsin
farms reporting milk cows is unavailable for cen¬
suses before 1930.
2The 1930 and 1982 U.S. Census of Agriculture
data on the number of farms reporting milk cows
was utilized. The Wisconsin Agricultural Statis¬
tics Service reports precise data on the number of
dairy herds that have had the Brucellosis Ring test,
required for all commercial herds. The Wisconsin
statistics may not precisely correspond to the U.S.
Census data (which is also adjusted to compensate
for nonresponse and sample errors). The 1982
Census was the most recent prior to the beginning
of the DTP, while the Brucellosis Ring Test data
for the period ending March 1986 immediately
preceded the beginning of the buyout program.
Works Cited
Halladay, D. 1986. The whole herd bids are in —
and 13,998 dairies are out. The Dairyman 66,
no. 4 (April): 12-1 3.
Hill, F. 1986. Most state farmers bid too high in
dairy buyout. Wisconsin Agriculturalist 113,
no. 10 (May 24):6.
Illinois State Agricultural Stabilization and Con¬
servation Services Office. 1986. Springfield:
USDA. Unpublished statistics and computer
printout listing for Dairy Termination Program
in Illinois.
Iowa State Agricultural Stabilization and Conser¬
vation Services Office. 1986. Des Moines:
USDA. Unpublished statistics and computer
printout listing for Dairy Termination Program
in Iowa.
Michigan State Agricultural Stabilization and
Conservation Services Office. 1986. Lansing:
USDA. Unpublished statistics and computer
25
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
printout listing for Dairy Termination Program
in Michigan.
Minnesota State Agricultural Stabilization and
Conservation Services Office. 1986. St. Paul:
USDA. Unpublished statistics and computer
printout listing for Dairy Termination Program
in Minnesota.
Morrow, A. 1986. Few buyout participants plan
to return to dairying. Wisconsin Agriculturalist
113, no. 19 (October 25): 18.
Richler, D. M. 1985. Change in the southern Wis¬
consin dairy area. The Wisconsin Geographer
l(Spring):41-55.
U.S. Bureau of the Census. 1932. Fifteenth Cen¬
sus of the United States , 1930: Agriculture,
Volume II, Part / — The Northern States and
Part II — The Southern States. Washington: U.S.
Department of Commerce.
U.S. Bureau of the Census. 1972. 1969 Census
of Agriculture, Part 14, Wisconsin, Section 2:
County Data. Washington: U.S. Department of
Commerce.
U.S. Bureau of the Census. 1984. 1982 Census
of Agriculture: Volume 1 Geographic Area
Studies, Part 49: Wisconsin State and County
Data. Washington: U.S. Department of
Commerce.
Vogeler, I. 1986. Wisconsin: A Geography. Boul¬
der: Westview Press.
Wisconsin Agricultural Statistics Service. 1986.
Wisconsin 1986 Dairy Facts. Madison: Wis¬
consin Department of Agriculture, Trade and
Consumer Protection, Agricultural Statistics
Board.
Wisconsin Agricultural Statistics Service. 1987.
Wisconsin 1987 Dairy Facts. Madison: Wis¬
consin Department of Agriculture, Trade and
Consumer Protection.
Wisconsin Agricultural Statistics Service. 1988.
Wisconsin 1988 Dairy Facts. Madison: Wis¬
consin Department of Agriculture, Trade and
Consumer Protection.
Wisconsin Agriculturalist. 1986. Buyout won’t hit
any area hard. 113, no. 11 (June 14):23.
Wisconsin State Agricultural Stabilization and
Conservation Services Office. 1986. Madison:
USDA. Unpublished statistics and computer
printout listing: number of bids submitted, sta¬
tistics by county and data on each bid accepted
(bid price, total bid value, 1985 milk market¬
ing, number of milk cows, heifers and calves,
delivery period, and milk diversion program
participation).
Wisconsin Statistical Reporting Service. 1982.
Dairy Facts 1982. Madison: U.S. Department
of Agriculture.
26
Survey of Timber Rattlesnake
0 Crotalus horridus )
Distribution Along the Mississippi River
In Western Wisconsin
Barney L. Oldfield and Daniel £. Keyler
Abstract. A study of sites ranging from southern St. Croix County to northern La Crosse
County along the Mississippi River Valley was made to determine the current geographical
distribution of the timber rattlesnake (Crotalus horridus) in western Wisconsin. A total of
forty -two surveys were made at sixteen different sites from April If 1988, through October
15, 1988. A total of twenty-five specimens were observed with the earliest observation being
made on May 1 and the latest on September 11 . Limited biological data were obtained on
eighteen snakes. The most northern and southern specimens came from northwestern Pierce
County and southern Trempealeau County, respectively. A single specimen found 16.9 km
from the Mississippi River in Buffalo County represented the furthest inland observation. Of
the forty-two survey trips, C. horridus were only observed on sixteen occasions. Large numbers
of snakes were not found at any one site. Thus, the timber rattlesnake may not be as widely
distributed or present in as large of numbers as have been reported historically. These
preliminary data suggest the need for further investigation of C. horridus distribution and
population in western Wisconsin and may even warrant the need for both habitat and species
protection.
Wisconsin and Minnesota are the most
northwestern geographical range of
the timber rattlesnake (Crotalus horridus ).
Early reports of this species in Wisconsin
date back to 1680 when L. Hennepin, on a
voyage up the Mississippi River, observed
“Serpens Sonnettes” or what is now known
as the timber rattlesnake. Later in 1700,
Barney L. Oldfield, D.V.M., is a veterinarian engaged
in dairy practice in southeastern Minnesota. He has had
a lifelong interest in field study and photography of
reptiles and amphibians.
Daniel E. Keyler is Clinical Assistant Professor, Divi¬
sion of Toxology, at the Department of Medicine at
Hennepin County Medical Center, Minneapolis, Min¬
nesota. Current research interests involve development
of monoclonal antibodies to drugs, environmental tox¬
ins, and natural toxins.
Le Seur reported that it was dangerous to
enter caverns near Lake Pepin because of
rattlesnakes (Schorger 1968). Historical ref¬
erences yield reports of ninety-nine speci¬
mens being found in a single day at a single
site, confirming the existence of large pop¬
ulations in the past (Schorger 1968). It is the
concentration of this species in a given area
for denning and/or other reasons that has
made the species vulnerable to predation by
man. Crotalus horridus represents the largest
species of rattlesnake occurring in the north¬
ern United States (Klauber 1982), and its
notoriety rivals that of another wilderness
species, the timber wolf (Canus lupus). Prior
to 1975, large numbers of timber rattlesnakes
were taken in Wisconsin when the state’s
27
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
bounty system was still in force. Although
historically the timber rattlesnake was af¬
forded a much wider range, as literature and
museum records attest to, more recent rec¬
ords on distribution (Cochran 1986) and pop¬
ulation status for this species have been
sparse. Therefore, the current study was un¬
dertaken to determine the present-day distri¬
bution of C. horridus along the Mississippi
River valley in western Wisconsin.
Methods and Materials
Timber rattlesnake museum records and
published literature were used initially to es¬
tablish known historical distribution for the
seven western Wisconsin counties under study
(St. Croix, Pierce, Pepin, Buffalo, Dunn,
Trempealeau, and La Crosse). USGS quad¬
rangle (7.5 minute series) topographical maps
were evaluated for potential timber rattle¬
snake survey sites. USGS Wisconsin county
quadrangle maps were used to plot survey
sites and results. Early in the study, prior to
snake emergence in the spring, and on days
of inclement weather, time was spent driving
country roads to search for potential denning
areas. Also, several landowners were inter¬
viewed concerning known local snake
populations.
It became evident during the study that
conducting site surveys to establish the pres¬
ence of the timber rattlesnake could be a time-
consuming activity. This made it necessary
to concentrate efforts in the four central
counties of the survey area.
Sites were surveyed on foot. Careful
searches for rattlesnakes were conducted in
accessible habitat. When a snake was found
if possible, it was captured with a Furmont
snake hook, and biological data were re¬
corded. A Miller and Weber cloacal ther¬
mometer was used to measure body temper¬
ature. Sex of the snake was determined using
Furmont snake sexing probes (Fuhrman Di¬
versified, Inc., La Porte, Texas). Live mea¬
surements from snout to base of rattle and
from snout to vent were taken with a con¬
ventional tape measure. The rattles were
counted beginning with the button as 0 and
all free segments thereafter numbered con¬
secutively. The animal was placed in a cloth
bag and weighed with a Sargent-Welch spring
scale (Sargent-Welch, Skokie, Illinois) with
either a 0-2000 gm range or a 0-200 gm
range scale previously tared for bag weight.
After release at the capture site, photographs
were taken. A Taylor digital thermometer
(Markson, Phoenix, Arizona) and a Miller
and Weber surface thermometer (Miller and
Weber, Inc., Queens, New York) were used
to record air and substrate temperatures.
Several sites were repeatedly surveyed in
an attempt to establish the presence of C.
horridus at a particular site and to obtain
population data from sites where snakes were
known to occur. All snakes were handled for
study in accordance with the 1987 Guidelines
for Use of Live Amphibians and Reptiles in
Field Research.
Results
Habitat. A total of sixteen different geo¬
graphical sites were surveyed on forty-two
different occasions. The sites had many sim¬
ilarities; all had areas of rock, bluff prairies.
Oaks ( Quercus spp.), and other mixed veg¬
etation and were at elevations between 198 m
and 350 m above sea level (Table 1).
Distribution and Numbers. The northern¬
most site at which a specimen of C. horridus
was observed was PIE-6 (Clifton, Civil town,
Pierce County) and the southernmost site of
observation was TRE-1 (Trempealeau, Civil
town, Trempealeau County). These were also
the northern and southern extremes of sites
surveyed (Table 1, Fig. 1). A single site ap¬
proximately 16.9 km inland from the Mis¬
sissippi River BUF-3 (Alma, Civil town,
Buffalo County) yielded a single specimen.
A total of twenty-five specimens of C. hor¬
ridus were found during the course of the
study. However, these were only observed
at nine of the sixteen different sites surveyed.
One female specimen was observed on three
different occasions. The largest number of
snakes found at a given site over the period
28
Survey of Timber Rattlesnakes
Table 1. Geographical Location and Habitat of Timber Rattlesnake Sites Surveyed in
Western Wisconsin
‘Timber Rattlesnake confirmed at these sites
of the study was twelve, and the most snakes
found at a single site at a given time was five
(Table 2).
Chronology of Surveys and Climatology.
The first spring survey was made on April
11, with the first specimens not being ob¬
served until May 1 . In the fall, surveys were
made until October 15, but the last specimen
was seen on September 11 (Table 2). All
surveys were made between 1100 and 2000
hours. The average air and substrate tem¬
peratures were 28.3°C and 30.1°C, respec¬
tively. Weather conditions varied consider¬
ably from sunny to cloudy, calm to windy,
and hot (29.8°C) to cool (16.8°C) with spec¬
imens having been observed under all the
different conditions (Table 2).
Biology. Of the twenty-five specimens of
C. horridus observed, limited and incom¬
plete biological data were obtained due to
limited numbers of field personnel and equip¬
ment, snakes unable to be captured, and pre¬
carious circumstances on several occasions
(Table 3). The mean body temperature for
nine specimens was 29.6°C. Total body lengths
ranged from 35.5 cm to 123.2 cm, and body
masses ranged from 30 g to 1110 g. Two
snakes had complete rattles of eight seg-
29
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
Figure 1
ments; these were the largest rattles ob¬
served. Of the nine specimens in which sex
was determined, five were female and four
were male and were from seven different sites.
Two females were determined to be gravid
by palpation. An interesting observation was
noted on two specimens as they possessed
post-ocular stripes and prominent mid-dorsal
stripes. These markings were apparent on a
female and a male from different sites.
Discussion
Timber rattlesnakes have been extirpated
in many areas of Wisconsin; thus, they re¬
main in the most rugged and nearly inacces¬
sible micro- wilderness areas of the state. Be¬
cause of this fact, their secretive nature, and
their absence for six to seven months of the
year due to hibernation, they are a difficult
animal to study. Furthermore, legends and
stories have contributed a variety of un¬
founded reasons for man’s irrational fear of
the animal.
The objectives of this field survey of C.
horridus were to ascertain present-day dis¬
tribution in seven counties for historical com¬
parisons, to assess habitat requirements in
western Wisconsin, and to make recommen¬
dations regarding conservation of the spe¬
cies. A substantial amount of information was
gathered to fulfill these objectives consider¬
ing the extent of the geographical area under
study and constraints of time and budget.
Although incomplete, some biological data
were accumulated during the study.
Crotalus horridus is a species of the steeply
dissected, forested hills along the Mississippi
River and its tributaries in western Wiscon¬
sin. The snake reaches the extreme north¬
western limit of its U.S. range here and in
Table 2. Chronology, Climatology, and Number of Timber Rattlesnakes by Study Site
Mean + SD 26.3 ±3.3 30.1 ±5.5
30
Survey of Timber Rattlesnakes
Table 3. Various Biological Information for 18 Timber Rattlesnakes by Study Site in Western
Wisconsin
SBR = Snout to base of rattle, SVL = Snout-vent Length, BT = Body Temperature, BM = Body Mass
adjacent southeastern Minnesota (Conant
1975). Timber rattlesnakes den in areas of
bluffs and steep rock outcrops on south and
southwest facing hillsides. They are found
near these rock outcrops during the spring
and again in the fall. In these northern lati¬
tudes this species of rattlesnake requires rock
outcrops or bluffs of limestone, sandstone,
or dolomite with ample sun exposure. Plants
associated with these outcrops and bluff prai¬
ries are cedar, oak species, birch, cotton¬
wood, hackberry, sumac species, poison ivy,
wild grape, bittersweet, columbine, harebell,
puccoon, violet species, wood sorrel, and
various grass species. Crotalus horridus moves
in nearby mixed deciduous forests and ag¬
ricultural lands during the summer (Vogt
1981). The summer foraging areas need to
be in close proximity to the denning areas as
this species seldom travels more than 2.4 km
from its den (Martin 1966). Adequate ground
cover, suitable drinking water, and a stable
food supply are provided by mixed deciduous
forests of oak species, maple species, bass¬
wood, elm, and hickory. While searching for
rodents, the timber rattlesnake will also uti¬
lize forest edge next to agricultural fields and
woodlots.
The range of C. horridus has been shrink¬
ing and fragmenting across the northeastern
United States ever since European settlers
began colonizing. Since the turn of the cen¬
tury, wanton destruction of rattlesnakes has
occurred in Wisconsin. Our study was
prompted by the apparent, but undocumented
decline of C. horridus in Wisconsin. His¬
torical distribution prior to 1880 is shown in
Figure 3 as adapted from Schorger. Figure 1 ,
which was generated by our study, compares
favorably with Figure 2, which was adapted
from Vogt. Results of our study show that
the northern and southern points of distri¬
bution along the Mississippi River closely
coincide with those reported by Schorger and
Vogt. However, inland distribution contin¬
ues to be of concern. Recent sightings and
reports by landowners (personal communi¬
cation) did not afford any confirmation of
present-day inland distribution.
The extreme northern record for C. hor¬
ridus in Wisconsin, as reported by Breck-
enridge (1944) prior to 1939, came from the
31
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Figure 2
civil town of Troy in St. Croix County. Our
study confirmed a population in the extreme
northwestern comer of Pierce County (PIE-1)
about 8 km south of the Troy record.
Schorger reported sixteen references to lo¬
calities in six civil towns in Pierce County.
Vogt indicated four localities within the county
personally verified by him. Our study estab¬
lished localities in five civil towns.
All of Schorger’ s data from Dunn County
refers to massasauga rattlesnakes ( Sistrurus
catenatus) , and the single locality in the county
submitted by Vogt (1981) was unverified.
Time constraints precluded any field work in
Dunn County by our study.
Only one C. horridus locality was reported
in Pepin County by Schorger. This was near
the town of Frankfort. Vogt (1981) reported
one locality northeast of Frankfort. In our
study, a population was found near the Mis¬
sissippi River in the civil town of Stockholm.
We surveyed three additional sites in this
county and could not establish the presence
of the rattlesnake.
References to seven localities in six dif¬
ferent civil towns for Buffalo County exist,
and six of these localities are inland. Vogt
(1981) map-plotted six sites of which only
two were verified by him. We were able to
demonstrate the presence of C. horridus at
three localities in three different civil towns.
One inland site was verified by our field work.
We surveyed one site in Trempealeau
County, and this was Brady’s Bluff in Perrot
State Park. The existence of C. horridus was
verified. Several other sightings were re¬
ported by park officials and visitors during
1988 within the park (personal communica¬
tion, Perrot State Park officials). The park
was the only map locality given by Vogt. In
addition to the park, Schorger listed four
inland sites.
While three C. horridus localities have been
historically reported in La Crosse County,
we were unable to do field surveys in
La Crosse County for present-day verifica¬
tion. Martin (personal communication) in¬
dicated that he had two reports of sightings
of rattlesnakes in La Crosse County in recent
years; however, specifics as to species or ex¬
act localities were not available.
Evaluation of population densities was not
within the scope of our study; however, re¬
sults suggest that large populations of timber
rattlesnakes as reported historically no longer
exist. Schorger presented a number of cita¬
tions in which thirty or more snakes were
killed at one time at various locations; and
reported that ninety-nine rattlesnakes were
killed in 1862 at Gilmanton (Buffalo County)
on a rattlesnake hunt (Schorger 1968). We
32
Survey of Timber Rattlesnakes
spent 136 actual field hours and located twenty-
five timber rattlesnakes from late April through
October 1988. This calculates out to be 5.5
field hours per timber rattlesnake encounter.
Forty-two site visits produced snakes only
sixteen times, or on 38% of the site visits.
The largest number of snakes found at a sin¬
gle site visit was five, supporting the theory
that large populations no longer exist.
The biological data gathered by our study
(Table 3) from eighteen timber rattlesnakes,
although incomplete in some aspects, does
give useful information. The sex ratio of 4:5
(four males and five females) is approxi¬
mately 1:1, and suggests no dominant sex
ratio. The average body temperature of eight
snakes was 29.6°C; this closely approximates
the preferred body temperature of other North
American pit vipers as reported by Lilly white
(Seiger et al. 1987). A single specimen had
a body temperature of 21 .6°C, but this animal
was found coiled underneath a rock on a cool,
rainy day and does not reflect a preferred
temperature. An established preferred body
temperature for timber rattlesnakes could not
be located in the literature.
Recently there has been considerable sci¬
entific controversy concerning the validity of
the subspecies C. horridus atricaudatus
(Brown et al. 1986 and Pisani et al. 1977).
During the course of the present study two
specimens were found with distinct post-ocular
stripes, and several displayed obvious mid¬
dorsal stripes. Both of these characteristics
are criteria used to partially describe the
southern subspecies. A marked variation in
pattern and coloration was observed among
the animals studied.
Conservation of the timber rattlesnake has
two important facets: habitat preservation and
snake protection. Economic incentive threat¬
ens habitat alteration of bluff prairies and
steep rock outcrops by man and may be an
immediate threat to the snake. Land devel¬
opment and residential building sites at the
base of rattlesnake hills or on top near dens
generally has a deleterious impact on snake
populations due primarily to increased en¬
counters with man. Periodically timber rat¬
tlesnakes show up in the yards of residents
near bluffs in Pierce County (personal com¬
munication, Bob Burnett, two reports during
the summer of 1988 near Hager City). A
golfer searching for golfballs in the rough at
Clifton Hollow Golf Course suffered a rat¬
tlesnake bite on June 24, 1988 (personal
communication, D. Foley, attending physi¬
cian). Roadkills claim an unknown number
of rattlesnakes each year on highways and
roads located near C. horridus habitat. Land
developers continue to subdivide and sell
building sites along the bluffs in southern
Pierce and northern Pepin Counties. Thus,
habitat encroachment by man continues at a
substantial pace.
Man’s persistent predation of the timber
rattlesnake has reduced populations to the
point of requiring total legal protection in
several northeastern states (Martin 1982). The
vulnerability of this species at ancestral den
sites makes it an easy target for snake hunt¬
ers. A bounty system deploys more snake
hunters and also increases the chance of
snakebite. Nontarget and protected snake
species may also be destroyed by indiscri¬
minant bounty hunters. Minnesota had an ac¬
tive rattlesnake bounty until August, 1989.
A snake hunter from Buffalo County indi¬
cated that snakes could be taken from Wis¬
consin into Minnesota for payment of boun¬
ties (personal communication). Our study data
strongly upholds a non-bounty policy in Wis¬
consin and in fact gives support to total pro¬
tection of this species. In many states (Con¬
necticut, Massachusetts, Vermont, Rhode
Island, New York, New Jersey, Texas, Mis¬
souri, and Kentucky) the timber rattlesnake
is a protected species (Allen 1988).
The results of our preliminary survey sug¬
gest the need for future studies of C. horridus
in Wisconsin with information needed on re¬
maining inland populations. Surveys should
be conducted along the Mississippi River
from La Crosse to the Illinois border. De¬
vising a method for evaluating population
densities would be extremely valuable for
management of the species. Considerable
time and effort are required to do rattlesnake
33
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
fieldwork. Our study consumed 136.25 field
hours, 79 travel hours, 20 field days and
3,950 miles. Adequate allotments for time
and effort will help to ensure the collection
of an adequate volume of data.
The timber rattlesnake is a non-aggressive,
secretive animal of steep bluffs and adjacent
forests. It undoubtedly plays an important
role in biological balance as a rodent pred¬
ator. The snake has few natural enemies, a
low reproductive rate, and a long lifespan
(Martin 1966). The timber rattlesnake is a
symbol of the wilderness, as is the timber
wolf, and should be provided the opportunity
for continued survival in the natural world.
Acknowledgments
We would like to give special thanks to
Gary Casper of the Milwaukee Public Mu¬
seum for providing museum records, pub¬
lished information, and interview material
from naturalists and snake hunters of western
Wisconsin. He also offered technical assis¬
tance and encouragement with the project.
Several individuals generously volun¬
teered their time to assist with field surveys.
We wish to thank Jim Gerholdt, Del Jones,
Tom Keyler, Don Leaf, John Moriarty, and
Casey Oldfield. Bob Burnett with extensive
field experience hunting timber rattlesnakes
in Pierce, Pepin, and Buffalo counties pro¬
vided us with useful information concerning
localities and general hunting advice. He also
assisted with field surveys. Dave Lindenrude
and Cindy Swanberg of the Wisconsin De¬
partment of Natural Resources provided use¬
ful locality data. The authors wish to thank
W. H. Martin of Harpers Ferry, West Vir¬
ginia, for distribution information of C. hor-
ridus in Western Wisconsin. We also are most
appreciative for the efforts of Diane Loudon
in the preparation of this manuscript.
Finally, we wish to extend special thanks
to our wives and families for their support
and cooperation throughout the rattlesnake
season.
Works Cited
Allen Jr., William B. 1988. State lists of endan¬
gered and threatened species of reptiles and
amphibians, May.
Breckenridge, Walter J. 1944. Reptiles and am¬
phibians of Minnesota. Minneapolis: Univer¬
sity of Minnesota Press.
Brown, Christopher W. and Carl H. Ernst. 1986.
A study of variation in eastern timber rattle¬
snakes, ( Crotalus Horridus Linnae C. Ser-
pentes: Verperidae). Brimleyana No. 12
(September).
Cochran, Philip A. and John D. Lyons. 1986.
New distributional records for Wisconsin am¬
phibians and reptiles. Transactions of the Wis¬
consin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
74.
Conant, Roger. 1975. A field guide to reptiles and
amphibians of eastern and central North Amer¬
ica. 2nd Ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
Guidelines for use of live amphibians and reptiles
in field research. American Society of Ichthy¬
ologists (ASIH) and Herpetologists League (HL),
and Society for the Study of Amphibians and
Reptiles (SSAR), 1987.
Klauber, Laurence M. 1982. Rattlesnakes — their
habits, life histories, & influence on mankind.
Abridged Edition. Berkeley, Los Angeles, and
London: University of California Press.
Martin, W. H. 1966. Life history of the timber
rattlesnake Crotalus Horridus. Investigator’s
Annual Report, United States Dept, of Interior
National Park Service, National Sciences Re¬
search, Shenandoah National Park.
Martin, W. H. 1982. The timber rattlesnake in
the Northeast: Its range, past and present. Herp.
Bulletin of the New York Herpetological Society
17(2).
Pisani, George R. , Joseph T. Collins, and Stephen
R. Edwards. 1972. A re-evaluation of the sub¬
species of Crotalus horridus. Transactions of
the Kansas Academy of Science 75(3).
Schorger, A. W. 1967-1968. Rattlesnakes in early
Wisconsin. Transactions of the Wisconsin
Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters.
Seiger, Richard A., Joseph T. Collins, and Susan
S. Novak. 1987. Snakes! ecology and evolu¬
tionary biology. New York: MacMillan Pub¬
lishing Company.
Vogt, Richard Carl. 1981 . National history of am¬
phibians and reptiles in Wisconsin. Milwaukee:
Milwaukee Public Museum.
34
From Wisconsin Poets
In this, the second issue in which we have featured poetry, all the poets represented are
once again from our state. We are particularly pleased that our call for poetry resulted in
submissions by poets as well known and admired as Ron Ellis, Mary Shumway, Susan Firer,
David Steingass, Ronald Wallace, and Kelly Cherry. We are also pleased to present the work
of David Graham and Karen Loeb who are relatively new voices to readers of Wisconsin
poetry. We hope the appearance of poetry of such quality and distinction will please our
readers and continue to establish Transactions as a showcase for poetry in Wisconsin.
35
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts , and Letters
About the Poets
David Graham is Assistant Professor of English at Ripon College. He is the author of two
collections of poetry, Magic Shows and Common Waters. In addition, his poems and essays
have appeared in such places as Poetry Review, The Georgia Review, Poetry, and College
English. “The Naked and the Nude,’’ presented here, is part of a recently completed man¬
uscript of poems concerning photography entitled Mirror With a Memory.
Ron Wallace directs the creative writing program at UW -Madison. He has published numerous
books, and his anthology, Vital Signs: Contemporary American Poetry From the University
Presses, will be published in August by University of Wisconsin Press. His work has also
appeared in The New Yorker, The Atlantic, The Nation, Poetry, and elsewhere.
Mary S humway teaches at UW -Stevens Point. Her poems have appeared in a variety of
journals including Denver Quarterly, Northeast, Prairie Schooner, and Wisconsin Academy
Review. Her next manuscript is to be published by Juniper Press.
Kelly Cherry is the author of seven books, most recently Natural Theology. She has been
awarded numerous fellowships and two PEN Syndicated Fiction Awards. The Fellowship of
Southern Writers has just named her the recipient of the first Poetry Award, which is given
in recognition of a distinguished body of work. She teaches at UW -Madison.
David Steingass lives in Madison where he conducts public school writing workshops. His
books Body Compass and American Handbook were published by The University of Pittsburgh
Press, while his poems are found in numerous journals. His chapbook, Homesick for Fox-
Blood, is scheduled to be published in 1990. He is the first recipient of the Paulette Chandler
Award from the Council of Wisconsin Writers, 1988.
Ron Ellis teaches writing at UW -Whitewater and edits the poetry journal Windfall. He is not
only well known for his poetry, but his special interest in performance has gained national
recognition. His audio cassette album, Open My Eyes, has been favorably reviewed in The
Village Voice and has been aired on National Public Radio as well as WNCY in New York.
Susan Firer , whose work is published in a number of poetry journals, is the author of My
Life with the Tsar and Other Poems. She says that the two strongest influences on her daily
work are her family and Lake Michigan. Susan teaches creative writing at UW -Milwaukee.
Karen Loeb recently moved to Wisconsin from Florida. She has published fiction , poetry,
and non-fiction in numerous journals. Her recent stories are found in The South Dakota
Review, Korone, Footwork, and in New Visions: Fiction by Florida Writers. Two of her
stories have received PEN Syndicated Fiction Awards and appeared in participating news¬
papers.
36
Wisconsin Poetry
The Naked and the Nude
— three photos by Imogen Cunningham
1. Side, 1930s
A side of what? It could be flesh, could be
some twisted glove or over-ripe pepper.
If flesh, male or female? Does it matter?
Only bent leg, rippled skin, and curving edge
of spine survive the cropping. Neither naked
nor nude, these whorls and eddies of torso,
textured like rock, water, sand in shadow,
even a hint of scar part of the design.
(In my book a banana plant bristles
on the opposite page, though without label
it could be rumpled foil, or farmland
from an airplane.)
Looking closer, I see
how nothing but living skin shines this way,
curled for the naked eye to judge, easy to love
as a meal. Anonymous and true,
flesh consumed with or without label.
2. Two Sisters, 1928
No doubt it was fashion to crop their faces,
as if to show photography can mimic
the headless heroines of ancient Greece.
Yet if they are no more than light and form,
why the title? For as they are sisters
they are stories, and as they are stories
they blur and fade, they will not sit still.
Are they twins? Do they enjoy being nude
together before this accurate eye?
Can form be beautiful without content?
And if their goose bumps, their moles, and the hair
between their legs are not beautiful,
then the eye is false witness to the heart.
37
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Half a century later, these women
may still live. Imagine eighty-five year old twins
sharing an apartment in Florida,
sleeping in the same bed, taking baths,
always nude, always together,
their changed bodies still mirror images.
Even if she only exists before
I was bom, a nude woman interests me,
but any sister would know we are best
unobserved, loveliest seen through the eyes
of self-fulfilling love. This photograph
has love in it, more than most, but no one
could wholly love these women and still see.
3. Triangles, 1928
Clouds, leafy shade, the long roll of water
between wind and stone, mirage of desire:
mother-triangles in the rectangle
of art. Light and dark, light and dark again,
until the thing comes right, becomes word
without turning to statement, becomes nude
open to light, casting shadows herself
on herself, softness created by light
more than by smooth belly, nipple, and thigh,
and all folded into triangles, yes,
like a mother folded around her daughter
yet to be bom, yet to be conceived.
David Graham
38
Wisconsin Poetry
Winter Strings Concert
Dwarfed by cellos,
violins and violas stuck under chins,
arms and legs akimbo, they grin
out at the audience. Please,
says the teacher, as one Japanese
boy leaves weeping, jabbed by a bow,
this can be dangerous.
My daughter, shy in her finery
mouths Father, go home,
as I lip read.
And they’re off! Cellos grumbling,
violins squeezing the lemony air,
from Humoresque to Hot Cross Buns,
from Jelly Roll Blues to Jingle Bells,
from the Halls of Montezuma to
the Shores of Tripoli
they trill inexplicably, solemnly
gazing into space as if
they were anyplace else but here,
hamstrung in sound,
each instrument wandering off
on its own lonely inventions.
Until, measure by measure
the years collapse,
and crescendoed with tears, I’m back
in my own gradeschool gymnasium,
the future a symphony
warming before me, furiously
sawing my way out of childhood,
playing the dangerous music of nostalgia
to the roar of improbable applause.
Ronald Wallace
39
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letter#
In the Sculpture Garden
Ernest Trouva’s “Poet”
in his cloak and rakish hat
sits flat beneath his flat black tree,
mere silhouette, mere shadow
among the dying elms and maples.
Edging the wrought-iron woods,
“Three Women Poets,”
arm in arm, and stiff as nuns,
walk in place.
A hundred years ago
they’d not have worn
this black absence of our imagination
as they met and talked
Rimbaud and Baudelaire
in those flamboyant hours
' when everything was possible.
Where is the gaudy eloquence?
Where the bluff and strut?
This is no time for poets.
On the near horizon
oil drums loom red and magenta —
toppled, tubular stacks.
What Easter Island of the mind,
what Stonehenge of the soul
will some unimaginable future
make of this
which baffles even us?
Meanwhile, Garnett Puet’s bees,
mistaking a wax-filled plywood box
for a hollow tree,
are busy sculpting
a woman out of honeycomb.
Bees in eyes and nipples.
Pubic hair of bees.
We watch like drones.
We glance furtively back.
Ronald Wallace
40
Wisconsin Poetry
Mr. Evans’ Oracle:
Sally Rand Vacations in the Dells
They cut and harvested more than usual that winter
but the icehouse was almost empty. Kids
no longer played among the blocks nested
in straw to escape the stubborn sun. Lids
of tarp, lowered as the ice was sold or melted,
couldn’t mold, even dried by midday in that sun-
dogged and long July. The men grumbled,
thumbs in their overalls, long after they’d won
their bets — or lost — on rain that never came.
Thomas shuffled toward the door. “It’s low,
perilous low,” he mumbled. They all knew what
he meant, and Thomas would be first to go
when the rest was sold, probably in August.
Hans remembered, and to cheer him said,
“You better find a bench downtown today,
Mr. Evans. A certain dancer’s here to spread
her feathers.” “Or shed ’em,” Lambert added
with lust he summoned only for the rain
and the river’s rise and the early cold to make
ice enough to last through fall, and plain
hearty meals regular as pay allows
until the winter harvesting again. He grinned,
a little thin though, and Evans’ face frowned
into a pending storm announcing Lambert sinned
to pass such news. It was nothing to him. Nevertheless,
without a backward glance he turned toward town
and found a bench unoccupied by sun, one
at least he wouldn’t stick to, and settled down
41
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
to watch the traffic at the ice cream stand
across the street. The icehouse kids, adrift
among the tourists, pigtailed to the counter
where flavors melted to a ribboned gift
of possibilities. Two scoops for a nickel,
and nickels rarer than this summer’s rain,
choice amounted to responsibility —
dark, heavy as a man’s long pain
of idleness. And then a shadow passed.
Thomas stirred and frowned into the sky.
Above the glass and unrelenting blue,
plumes of mare’s tails splayed — too high
for shadow. But low across the hills, atilt
as Bessie’s cones, scoop on scoop, clouds
piled. The children’s voices dropped, their eyes
and mouths round with awe. He saw crowds
cleave and gather as Sally stole the show
amid grins and consternation paired
imperfectly. The icehouse kids even feathered out
around, deft as her fabled fans, and stared.
They never saw the clouds. Sally played
their spellbound impudence, her walk a game
that out-maneuvered fans with grace of one
who knows her house, her claim of space, her fame.
Well, dour old Thomas, caught between
those feathers high and low, rose and pranced
adrift uncertain air that freshened with the lift
of bright and tendered promises, and danced.
Mary S humway
42
Wisconsin Poetry
The Final Visit With Her Brother
She remembers the drafty rooms,
the front lawn where mud blooms,
how he lay there, legs like sticks
of kindling, drinking six-
pack beer or “tonic water.”
My eye. Later,
how he insisted on standing and taking her
in his arms, after making clear
how deeply he felt she’d let him down,
and said he loved her anyway, but soon
she pulled away, feeling caught
in the embrace she had fought
so hard to free herself from,
and he lay back down on the bed and said, “Come
again, you hear?”— softly mocking
the Southern sense of what is kindly, what is shocking—
and turned the TV on again,
the black-and-white portable, when
she left, as if denying—
oh, everything.
Kelly Cherry
43
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Portrait in Blue and Red
Her nerves were shot.
Dr. Fear had paid her a housecall.
After he left, she stood alone in the hall
As if expecting the front door to burst open,
Someone to come in like Jack Nicholson
With a knife in his hand.
In the mirror above the blue china bowl on the marble stand
She saw a small girl jumping rope.
(The apples in the bowl were ripe,
Radiating redness.) When she was five,
She’d loved being alive,
Wearing her hair in pigtails, jumping rope.
But already, she could see, she’d been desperate, and losing hope.
Kelly Cherry
44
Wisconsin Poetry
The Margin For Loss
To live through winter
we need to see our best direction
lost in snow. Then ambition finds
each of us alone. We recognize
what once we turned our backs on
we’d leave home for. We feel wind
shape our thoughts, and find owls
crouched inside dark pines. Their eyes,
a constellation’s cold fire,
lead us away. We name zero
the margin of error, total
the margin for loss.
David Steingass
45
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
Front Door Open
sunlight untouched by glass
air we’ll take raw
step out
talk about
picking up the yard
redwings
crows
cranes
until a silence
a spreading attention
the shadow
swoop
red-tailed hawk
a sudden remembering
until the first
redwing call
Ron Ellis
46
Wisconsin Poetry
Easter Sunday Afternoon
Aunt Virginia sleeps two sheets to the wind
upstairs in the martini spinning bed.
She has once again drunk the children’s
Easter bubbles and removed
her wig with her bonnet.
Easter lamb fragrance,
white coconut covered lamb cake.
One snowy spring years ago
the Du sen berg of death drove Edward,
her only husband, away on a snow
blowing Sunday. Only his glasses
and Sunday Journal left behind
on their marital bed. Once widely traveled
heavily jeweled, when young chauffeured
Virginia became a proofreader on the
Milwaukee Journal. “Never trust
the advice columnist,” she warned
me when I was ten. “I’ve shared
the lavatory with her, never washes
her hands when she’s finished.”
Many bridge games and a half dozen
well fed and collared dachshunds later
Virge rests upstairs. God bless all
childless Aunts who give themselves
to unappreciative nieces and nephews,
take them to plays, buy them books,
or like Virge bought me when I was ten:
a leopard skin coat and garnets.
God bless all, but especially
Aunt Virge whose keys are once
again locked in her baby blue T-Bird.
We’re going through the trank for them
this Easter. Wish us and her luck.
Susan Firer
47
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Stirring
“Always stir
from left to right,”
my mother said
moving the wooden spoon
through the chocolate pudding.
After all
Grandma stirred
from left to right.
Something to do
with gravitational pull
maybe the moon
and the tides.
Who knows
what unseen forces
have caused people to stir
from left to right.
“It’s why the clock goes
from left to right,”
she said
tapping the spoon on the pot
like a metronome.
I never wondered
why the clock
didn’t go the other way
never thought it was
related to stirring.
48
Wisconsin Poetry
My father too
knew about this stirring.
I found him at the stove.
He held the spoon
differently than my mother
but he stirred
from left to right.
If you’re stirring something,
can’t remember the direction,
think of the clock
and the way it knows to go.
Karen Loeb
The Role of Plant Root Distribution and
Strength in Moderating Erosion of Red Clay
in the Lake Superior Watershed
Donald W. Davidson, Lawrence A. Kapustka, and Rudy G. Koch
Abstract. Erosion of the glacially derived red clay soils in the western Lake Superior Basin
is a serious problem and has been known to be a problem since the settlement of western
Lake Superior lands. We investigated the influence of plant root systems on erosion of the
red clay soils. Measurements of the rates of surface erosion and of deep-seated slope failure
( slumping ) were made between August, 1975, and June, 1978. Slope failure as monitored
along transects was greatest in areas with sparse trees or herbaceous cover. The most stable
area had a dense tree cover along with a dense understory of Corylus comuta and Comus
stolonifera. The estimated soil loss (mton • ha~x) during the period 15 May through 15 October
1977 was stable grassed area, 0.2; grassed areas experiencing slumping, 7.8; stable wood
areas, <0.1; wooded areas with slumping, 0.4. During the same period detailed measurements
of vertical root distributions, root tensile strength, and vegetation cover along and adjacent
to stream banks were obtained. Roots were excavated from 36 quadrat sites adjacent to 8 of
12 transects established to quantify slumping of soils. The excavation of 0.2 m2 quadrats was
accomplished at 10 cm intervals to a depth of 50 cm. All roots obtained from the excavation
were sorted according to 12 diameter classes to determine total root mass and calculate total
root length. Essentially all roots occurred in the upper 50 cm of clay soil, and 50% of the
root mass occurred in the 0-10 cm zone. The tensile strength of roots less than 2 mm diameter
of selected species was determined for 5 cm segments of roots. The tensile strength of small
fresh roots (less than 1 mm diameter ) was 1 . 5-8.5 times greater in woody species than in
herbaceous species. Among woody species, later successional species characteristically had
stronger roots than early successional species. Collectively these data indicate that vegetation
comprised of woody, advanced successional species afford the best protection against both
surface and deep-seated stream bank erosion.
Vegetation effectively reduces both sur¬
face erosion and subsurface slumping
by intercepting and reducing the velocity of
Donald W. Davidson is Professor of Biology at the Cen¬
ter for Lake Superior Environmental Studies, University
of Wisconsin-Superior.
Lawrence A. Kapustka is a Research Ecologist and Team
Leader of the Plant Toxicology and Hazardous Waste
Team of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Environmental Research Laboratory, Corvallis, Oregon.
Rudy G. Koch is Professor of Biology at the University
of Wisconsin-La Crosse.
precipitation and retaining soil particles and
reinforcing soil structure (Penman 1963).
Among the most significant features in this
regard are (a) an increase in the shear strength
of soils as a result of reinforcement by roots
and ( b ) soil arching, the transfer of stress
across a potential failure surface in the soil
(Gray 1976).
Significant correlations between tree cover
and slope stability have been developed in
several field studies (Gray 1973, 1974; Marsh
and Koemer 1972; Bishop and Stevens 1964;
51
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Anderson 1972). Swanston (1970) found an
apparent soil cohesion and shear strength
caused by roots that is not reflected by the
physical properties of Karta soils in south¬
eastern Alaska. His study of root deterior¬
ation following clear cutting indicated that
the contribution by tree roots to soil shear
strength diminished within three to five years.
This decline coincided with the observed time
lag for landslide acceleration following tim¬
ber harvest. DeGraff (1979) further distin¬
guished the relative advantages of various
vegetation types with respect to erosion. His
work identified increased landslide activity
when tree and brush cover was converted to
grassland cover. The apparent causes were a
concomitant increase in soil moisture and a
reduction in the consolidating root network.
The erosion of red clay, a source of natural
pollution of the south shore of Lake Superior,
has been a problem since the last glacier re¬
ceded (Mengel 1970). This erosion has had
an impact on the ecology of the Lake Su¬
perior waters. The physical parameters of the
red clay loading of Lake Superior have been
studied in detail by Oman and Sydor (1978),
Diehl et al. (1977), Sydor et al. (1978), Stortz
and Sydor (1980), and Sydor et al. (1978).
These workers dealt mainly with red clay
contaminants in Lake Superior through Land-
sat 1 data, and turbidity dispersion in Lake
Superior and in the Duluth-Superior harbor,
through use of Landsat data. Stortz (1976)
pointed out that “western Lake Superior is
characterized by clean water periodically
contaminated by the red clay particles, orig¬
inating mainly from glacial-lacustrine de¬
posits along the shores of Douglas and Bay-
field counties, Wisconsin ...”
Chemical loading was also examined by
Bahnick et al. (1972), Bahnick et al. (1978),
Bahnick (1977), and Bahnick et al. (1979).
These studies focused on nutrient loading,
especially orthophosphates, into southwest¬
ern Lake Superior. They reported up to 240
mtons of soluble orthophosphate from soil
entering Lake Superior annually from shore¬
line erosion and 63 mton from river partic¬
ulates (Bahnick 1977).
Swenson (1978) studied the influence of
red clay turbidity on fish abundance in west¬
ern Lake Superior. He found that light pen¬
etration in western Lake Superior is reduced
significantly even at very low concentrations
of red clay turbidity.
Although plant properties related to ero¬
sion abatement are accepted generally, the
relative contributions of each applied to a
specific problem are speculative. We have
sought to define the capacity of vegetation to
moderate erosion of the red clay zone of
western Lake Superior. These investigations
have had three main thrusts: (1) the descrip¬
tion of the vegetation, presettlement and con¬
temporary; (2) the influence of the vegetation
on soil water content and the susceptibility
to erosion; and (3) the distribution and strength
of plant roots in the region. Our studies re¬
ported here describe the relationship of sur¬
face erosion and slumping with the distri¬
bution and strength of roots of selected spe¬
cies and vegetation types. Our hope is that
slumping of red clay soils may be retarded
by working with plants that have stronger
roots.
The soil types encountered in the drainage
basin of western Lake Superior fall into four
general types: red clays, loam upland soil,
northern sandy soil, and alluvial soil (Hole
1976). The red clay soils of the Superior plain
consist of clays of glacial-lacustrine origin
that are predominantly of the montmorillon-
ite type, with small quantities of illite, chlor¬
ite, and kaolinite (Andrews 1979; Hole 1976).
The characteristic red color results from ex¬
tractable iron oxide that constitutes approx¬
imately 2% by weight. Lenses of unsorted
sands, gravel, and cobble are encountered
frequently in the otherwise uniform clay. The
clay fraction has a bulk density (g cm-3) of
1.05 + 0.10.
Several physical properties important in
maintaining are influenced by the moisture
content. At typical sites, especially below the
root zones, moisture content ranges between
40% and 50%. Field capacity of the upper
15-cm zone generally approaches 55%, while
the permanent wilting point is around 12%
52
The Role of Plant Roots in Moderating Erosion
(Kapustka et al. 1978). The plastic limit (the
brittle solid state) ranges from 20% to 330%,
while the liquid limit (fluid state) is 40-80%.
Upon wetting, the dry clay swells to 120-
140% of the original volume (Mengel and
Brown 1976a, b).
The mechanical strength of soil of the red
clay region is determined primarily by the
montmorillonite fraction. Slow-rate triaxial
shear tests indicated failure of soil slopes at
18-200. Natural slope angles, however, ap¬
pear to be stable around 100. The cohesion
of the clay changes from 0.05 kg cm-3 near
the surface to 0.35 kg cm-3 at depths of 25
m (Mengel and Brown 1976a, b).
Methods
Erosion by Slumping
Field sites were selected in August 1975
to monitor slumping activity at ten locations
in the Little Balsam Creek and at twelve lo¬
cations in the Skunk Creek sub-basins of the
Nemadji River Basin in northwestern Wis¬
consin and east-central Minnesota (Fig. 1).
The vegetation of the transects represents a
diverse cross section of the major types pres¬
ent in the Nemadji Basin. Four principal types
are apparent: (a) hardwood forest dominated
by Populus tremuloides Michx.; (b) conifer¬
ous forest dominated by Abies balsamea L.;
(c) mixed hardwood coniferous forest with
varying amounts of P. tremuloides, A. bal¬
samea, Betula papyrifera Marsh, Picea glauca
(Moench) Voss, and Quercus macrocarpa
Michx.; and (d) grassed areas (dominated by
Phleum pratense and Festuca sp.). Each
transect extended from the hilltop above the
creek to the stream bank along a compass
direction approximately perpendicular to the
stream. A series of 50 cm long stakes were
driven approximately 35 cm into the ground,
above and below breaks (cracks) in the soil
surface in areas where breaks occurred and
at regular intervals where there were no ap¬
parent failure zones. A variety of vegeta-
Fig. 1. Location map of Skunk Creek and Little Balsam Creek transects.
53
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
tional types was selected for the transects
with P. tremuloides, A. balsamea, B. pa-
pyrifera, and grass cover, as well as bare soil
represented. The difference from the base
point at the top of the transect to each of the
downhill stakes, as well as the distance be¬
tween each of the adjacent stakes, was mea¬
sured between 7-22 August 1975, 1-8 No¬
vember 1975, 16-22 April 1976, 14-21
October 1976 and 12-23 May 1977, 5-11
August 1977, 12 November 1977, and 21-
23 June 1978. Distances between stakes were
recorded to the nearest 3 mm.
The precision of the transect stake mea¬
surements was determined by repeated mea¬
surements of Little Balsam transect no. 9.
This transect was judged to be as difficult as
any to measure due to topographic and veg-
etational features. Five replicate measure¬
ments were performed, and the standard de¬
viation was used to calculate the 95%
Confidence Interval for the values measured.
The precision of the between-stake distances
was 1.7 + 2.0 mm, while the precision of
measurements from the crest to each stake
was 2.9 +1.7 mm. Based on these values,
we conservatively judged that differences in
measurements between sample dates greater
than 6 mm indicated movements of the stakes
rather than errors in measurements. Differ¬
ences of less than or to equal 6 mm were
ignored in our calculations.
Vegetation Cover of Stable and Slumped
Sites
To compare the vegetational cover of sta¬
ble and slump sites, quadrats were randomly
placed in slumped sites and adjacent stable
areas with similar physical features. All trees
within a 10 m-2 area were tabulated and their
diameter at breast height measured. In ad¬
dition, all shrubs within a 5 m-2 plot nested
within the tree quadrat were counted. All
herbs within a 0.25 m-2 quadrat randomly
placed within the larger tree quadrat were
clipped at ground level, field sorted to spe¬
cies, and dried to constant weight. The dried
weight was recorded as phytomass. From these
data, relative dominance, relative density, and
relative frequency for each species was cal¬
culated and used to derive the importance
percentages.
Surface Runoff
Four sites in the vicinity of Little Balsam
Creek (transects 5 and 8) were chosen to
represent (1) tree cover — stable; (2) tree
cover — slumping; (3) herbaceous cover —
stable; and (4) herbaceous cover — slumping.
At each site five enclosures (1 m wide and
2 m long) characterized by different slope
gradients and representative cover were con¬
structed to monitor surface erosion during
1975 and 1976. The perimeters were defined
with galvanized metal roofing, partially bur¬
ied leaving as approximate 115 cm-border
above the soil surface. A polyurethane border
was added between the metal and the ground
surface to ensure a proper seal. At the base
of each enclosure, the surface runoff was
collected in 20-1 polyethylene carboys. A
140-1 plastic garbage can was connected as
overflow reservoir from the 20-1 container.
After each period with greater than 5 mm of
rain, the volume of runoff was recorded. A
100-ml sample was filtered through a 0.45
um millipore filter system, and the dry weight
of the suspended solids trapped on the filter
was determined.
Root Distributions
Excavation sites for determining root dis¬
tribution patterns were located adjacent to
eight of the twenty-two transects established
to quantify slope movement. Up to five sites
(0.5 m wide x 1.0 long x 0.5 m deep) were
selected from each transect to reflect the pos¬
sible variation in soil and vegetation envi¬
ronment from the crest to the valley. Long
was placed down-slope. At each site the fol¬
lowing measurements and/or samples were
taken:
1. The 0.5 m-2 quadrat served as the
center for a larger quadrat (10m 2) in which
54
The Role of Plant Roots in Moderating Erosion
a complete census of trees (greater than or
equal to 10 cm dbh— diameter at breast height)
was conducted. The following information
was recorded for each tree: (a) species iden¬
tifications; (b) geometric position from the
center of the inner quadrat; (c) dbh; and
(i d) approximate canopy height.
2. Sapling and shrub counts were taken
within a 5 m 2 quadrat concentric with the
excavation quadrat.
3. The living herbaceous vegetation within
the 0.5 m-2 quadrat was clipped at ground
level and brought to the laboratory where it
was sorted as to species or general growth
forms when taxonomic separation was dif¬
ficult. Subsequently, the phytomass (oven dry
weight) was determined for each identifiable
group.
4. The litter within the 0.5 m~2 quadrat
was collected and treated in the same manner
as the herbaceous cover.
5. Soil and root samples were obtained.
The excavation of the 0.5 m-2 quadrat was
done in 10 cm increments. The visible root
material within each 10 cm level was col¬
lected and brought to the laboratory. Adher¬
ing soil particles were washed from the roots.
Subsequently, the roots were sorted into 12
size-classes based on root diameter (cm): less
than 0.5, 0.5-0.99, 1.0-1.99, 2.0-2.99, 3.0-
3.99,4.0-4.99,5.0-5.99, 10.0-14.99, 15.0-
19.99, 20.0-24.99, and greater than 30. Oven
dry weights of the roots were determined for
each size class.
The soil from each 10 cm level was thor¬
oughly mixed in the field, and a subsample
(approximately 2 kg) was brought to the lab¬
oratory to extrapolate the total quantity of
roots remaining in the soil. The roots in the
subsample were carefully removed and sorted
into diameter size classes. The mass of the
roots from the subsample was adjusted by a
multiplication factor (mass of soil excavated/
mass of subsample x bulk density of the
soil).
The relationship between root length and
root mass was determined for roots less than
5 mm diameter (Table 1). These relationships
were used to obtain an estimate of root length
as a function of root mass. The length of
roots greater than 5 mm diameter were mea¬
sured to the nearest cm. The root distribution
data for each sample therefore consist of
(a) the measured mass of roots retrieved from
each depth of each hole; ( b ) the measured
mass of roots retrieved from the correspond¬
ing soil subsample; (c) the measured length
of roots greater than 5 mm diameter; and
(d) the calculated length of roots less than 5
mm diameter.
Root Tensile Strength
Roots of selected species were excavated
in the field. To ensure proper identity, only
roots that could be traced back to the stem
of an identifiable shoot were used. The ex¬
cavated roots were kept moist and brought
into the laboratory where the adhering soil
particles were washed away. Immediately after
washing, the roots either were prepared for
measurement of tensile strength or were pre¬
served in a solution of 8 parts isopropyl al¬
cohol and 1 part formaldehyde (Burroughs
Table 1 . Length-weight relationships for small roots
55
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
and Thomas 1977).
Roots having a generally uniform diameter
were cut into segments approximately 7-8
cm long. One end of the root was secured in
a rubber clamp attached to an Ametek force
gauge; the end was clamped to a rubber clamp
handle so that precisely 5 cm of root was
exposed between the clamps. The root was
subjected to a continually increasing force
until breakage occurred. If the break occurred
within approximately 2 mm of either clamp
the data for that segment was discarded.
Otherwise the tensile strength was recorded
along with the average diameter of the seg¬
ment obtained from three measurements made
with vernier calipers. Approximately 75 de¬
terminations of tensile strength were made
for each plant excavated. A log-log trans¬
formation of the tensile strength and diameter
provided a linear distribution of the data.
Subsequently, linear regression analysis was
performed expressing the log tensile strength
as a function of the log root diameter. No
apparent differences in tensile strength be¬
tween fresh and preserved roots were observed.
Additional measures of root tensile strength
were obtained from plants grown under
greenhouse conditions on flat surfaces. Seeds
of Bromus inermis Leyss, Coronilla varia L. ,
Festuca arundinaceae , F. rubra, Lolium per-
enne, Lotus corniculatus L., Poa pratensis
L., and P. tremuloides were planted in red
clay soil in boxes 15 cm in depth. Except for
P. tremuloides, plants were harvested after
seed set had begun.
Results and Discussion
Soil Slump Erosion
From the time of installation of the stakes,
observations were taken at seven seasonal
intervals over the 34-month period: I) August
1975-November 1975; II) November 1975-
April 1976; III) April 1976-November 1976;
IV) October 1976-May 1977; V) May 1977-
August 1977; VI) August 1977-November
1977; VII) November 1977- June 1978. The
summary of slumping as determined from
between stake measurements indicates con¬
siderably more slumping activity occurred
during periods II and VII than the other five
periods. This is apparent in the number of
transect intervals exhibiting displacement, the
magnitude of individual displacements (both
maximum displacements and the net dis¬
placement along the transect). During period
II all 22 transects had net displacements of
greater than 3 cm. In period VII all of the
Skunk Creek sites and three of the Little Bal¬
sam sites had displacements greater than 3
cm. Periods I, III, IV, V, and VI had, 6, 14,
16, and 4 transects with greater than 3 cm
respectively.
Significant soil movement occurred over
the 34-month period with a maximum dis¬
placement of 2.02 m in Skunk Creek Tran¬
sect 1 1 and 1 .05 in Little Balsam Creek Tran¬
sect 8. Seven other transects had greater than
30 cm elongation. In addition, Skunk Creek
1 1 and Little Balsam Creek 8 lost a total of
1.5 and 2.9 m of stream bank during floods
of 1976, 1977, and 1978.
Three general types of soil movement are
apparent in the data: (1) overall elongation
of the transect (positive displacements);
(2) overall compression of the transect (neg¬
ative displacements resulting from the crest
setting); and (3) combinations of positive and
negative displacements relating to the ridge
top (Fig. 2).
During the periods of higher activity most
of the movement led to a general elongation
of transect, while periods of lesser activity
tended to have both positive and negative
displacements. It is likely that both types were
present even in the periods of higher activity
but were masked by a general downward
slippage.
Although the influence of freeze-thaw is
generally considered to be a major stimulus
to trigger slumping, our data suggest that soil
moisture conditions may be equally critical.
Our maximum activity occurred in the springs
of 1976 and 1978. In both periods the soils
were at or near saturation. The soils in the
56
The Role of Plant Roots in Moderating Erosion
activity to account for (1) elongation of the
transect , (2) compression of the transect, and
(3) coupled internal positive and negative
displacements, i.e. rotational slumping. A and
B represent measurement stakes.
spring of 1977 were quite dry, and there was
relatively little slumping.
Though several factors interact to affect
erosion, the type of cover appears to be closely
related to the magnitudes of slumping. The
maximum displacements occurred in Skunk
Creek 11, which is treeless, Little Balsam 6,
a grassed slope, and Little Balsam 8, a sparsely
covered P. tremuloides area, P. tremuloides
covered sites exhibited a wide range of ero¬
sion activity. Generally, the moderately dense
P. tremuloides areas having an understory
with hazel ( Corylus spp.) appeared to be more
stable than stands with a less developed shrub
layer. The mixed conifer-hardwood stands
also appear to be correlated with greater
stability.
Vegetation Cover of Stable and Slumped
Sites
The results of cover analysis of vegetation
on slumped and stable sites are recorded in
Table 2. The slumped sites tend to be char¬
acterized by equal to slightly greater amounts
of P. tremuloides and conifers than stable
sites and with lesser amounts of B. papyri-
fera. In addition, the shrub layer of the slumped
sites support lesser numbers of beaked hazel
(C, cornuta Marsh) and dogwood (C. sto-
lonifera Michx.) species which have higher
tensile strengths.
Surface Runoff
Following the installation of the surface
runoff enclosures a total of 29 rain periods
were monitored during the late summer of
1975 and summer 1977. Our system was not
suited to handle the spring melt runoff. Con¬
sequently, the runoff and sediment valves we
report are applicable for summer conditions
only.
The volume of runoff in areas with slump¬
ing was considerably higher than in stable
areas for both grassed and wooded areas and
tended to increase logarithmically with in¬
creasing amounts of rainfall, as is shown in
Table 3. In both grassed and wooded areas
the amount of runoff from the stable soils
appears relatively high in the greater-than-
60-mm-of-water category. Only three rains
of this magnitude were recorded, and two
occurred after the soil surface had frozen and
leaf fall begun. Other than these three rains,
the volume of runoff between the wooded
and grassed areas is remarkably similar.
The sediment load was extremely variable,
especially in the grassed areas. Again major
differences are apparent between the slumped
and stable areas. The major differences oc¬
curred between the grassed and the wooded
areas with approximately 10-20-fold or more
sediment in the runoff from the grassed areas.
The estimated soil loss (mton • ha-1) during
the period 25 June-4 October 1976 was sta¬
ble grass, <0.1; slumped grass, 1.7; and
slumped woods, 0.2. During the period 15
57
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
Table 2. Comparison of major (I.P. values > 5.5) species of vegetation on slumped and
stable sites, Nemadji River Basin (n = number of quadrats)
’Visual estimate includes vascular plant cover, litter, lichens, and bryophytes.
2X ± S, for the five replicate plots, umhos were used as the measurements for conductivity, rather than
SI units, as a conductivity meter was used.
58
The Role of Plant Roots in Moderating Erosion
May- 15 October 1977 the soil loss was sta¬
ble grass, 0.2; slumped grass, 7.8; stable
woods, <0.1; slumped woods, 0.4.
Root Distribution
The mass and total length of roots within
the soil profile were related to differences in
vegetative cover and soil texture. On clay
soils tree cover tended to have about twice
as much root mass as herbaceous cover (Ta¬
ble 4). (Extensive tabular summaries are
available from the authors). In addition, the
roots from tree cover occurred in a relatively
steep-sloped log-linear pattern with roughly
50% of the root mass in the 0-10 cm level.
The rooting pattern under herbaceous cover
declined very steeply with up to 90% of all
roots confined to the 0-10 cm level. Fur¬
thermore, the differences in the amounts of
roots in the various size classes were dra¬
matic between grassed and wooded areas.
Generally in the wooded areas, the less than
0.5 mm category constituted 15-22% of the
total root mass. As root diameters increased,
the mass gradually diminished per size class.
In the predominantly grass-covered Little
Balsam 6, approximately 60% of the root
mass was distributed nearly uniformly among
the four size classes between 0.5 and 5.0
mm. The composition of the two herbaceous
cover transects was quite different in both
quantity and type of plants. Little Balsam 5
was sparsely vegetated and had considerable
amounts of horsetail (Equisetum sp.) rhi¬
zomes occurring uniformly throughout the 50
cm profile. In the sandy soils roots tended
toward a gently sloping log-linear distribu¬
tion (Tables 4 and 5) but with a greater var¬
iance than in the clay soils. From field ob¬
servations it was apparent that 50 cm depth
was sufficient to recover essentially all roots
in the clay soils. However, in the sandy soils
roots penetrated to much greater depths.
Among the species commonly used to sta¬
bilize roadside erosion areas, Lolium perenne
and Festuca arundinaceae produced the
greatest above ground phytomass and had
20-25% of their total phytomass as roots and
rhizomes (Table 5). Coronilla varia pro¬
duced a relatively good amount of root, but
this occurred primarily as a thick tap root.
Thus the amount of soil reinforcement was
less than for plants with a more diffuse pat¬
tern for a similar amount of root mass (e.g.,
P. tremuloides , Table 6).
Table 4. Summary of root distribution data1
Mean percentage of
Total root mass total root mass (g) in
X ± S, glplot o-10 cm 10-20 cm
Herbaceous cover — clay
^ulk density values used for the various soil textures were: sand, 0.95; sandy clay loam, 1.00; sandy
clay, 1.05; clay, 1.10 determined previously.
Only one sample excavated at this site.
59
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Table 5. Summary of phytomass production of selected species grown in red clay soil under
greenhouse conditions
Root Tensile Strength
Measures of root tensile strength show ma¬
jor differences among woody and herbaceous
species (Table 6). Small roots (1 mm di¬
ameter) of woody plants were 1.5 -8. 5 times
stronger than of herbaceous plants generally
used in roadside stabilization.
The tensile strength of small roots of de¬
ciduous woody species may be correlated with
the strength of wood as measured by the mod¬
ulus of rupture. Wells (1976) demonstrated
a relationship among numerous morpholog¬
ical features and the successional position of
species in the Eastern Deciduous Forest
Complex. The modulus of rupture was sig¬
nificantly and positively correlated with ad¬
vancing successional development.
Representative values of the amounts of
rupture (K Pa) for major taxa in our area are
Salix sp., 33,000; P. tremuloides Michx.,
35,000; Fraxinus nigra Marsh, 41,000; B.
papyrifera Marsh, 44,000; Ulmus americana
L., 50,000; Acer rubrum L., 53,000; Quer-
cus borealis Michx. f., 57,000; Acer sac-
charum Marsh, 57,000; A. balsamea (L.) Mill,
34,000; P. glauca (Moench) Voss, 37,000;
and P. strobus L., 34,000 (Forest Products
Laboratory 1974). If the relationship between
root tensile strength and the modulus of rup¬
ture is widespread, then the more advanced
successional species can be expected to have
the greatest per unit root strength. Our mea¬
sures of root strength show A. rubrum to be
substantially stronger than P. tremuloides in
nearly the same proportions as the modulus
of rupture would suggest (Table 6). The con¬
ifers do not seem to follow this pattern. Abies
balsamea, P. glauca, and P. strobus exhibit
a range of root tensile strength (Table 6) while
the modulus of rupture for these taxa are
similar.
Root Distribution and Root Strength
High erosion rates are often associated with
high amounts of soil moisture. However, due
to the special character of the clay with re¬
spect to water content, it is not always fa¬
vorable to maintain low water levels. During
the years with normal amounts of precipi¬
tation, the soils under all vegetation types
tended to remain at or near field capacity
throughout the summer. Under these condi¬
tions the clay acts as a liquid; therefore the
ability of the vegetation to protect against
erosion is due to a combination of root dis¬
tribution and root strength. During the oc-
60
The Role of Plant Roots in Moderating Erosion
Table 6. Summary of root tensile strength measures
casional dry year certain vegetation types with
high rates of evapotranspiration , such as
grassed areas and P. tremuloides forests, re¬
duced the soil moisture content to near the
permanent wilting point, which is well above
the plastic limit for the clay (Kapustka et al.
1978). Under these vegetation types the soil
developed extensive fissures often up to 2 cm
wide, several meters long, and 15 or more
cm deep. Such fissures tend to remain in the
soil for years. Thus during subsequent wet
periods moisture drains down these openings
and promotes deep seated failures below the
root zone. When this occurs no vegetation is
capable of withstanding the tremendous force
exerted on its roots and a block of soil often
several meters across slides downhill leaving
a newly exposed soil surface. Once initiated,
these erosional processes seem to perpetuate
indefinitely. The more advanced succes-
sional vegetations tend to have a thicker litter
layer and a lower apparent evapotranspiration
rate and thus prevent the soil fissures from
forming even during the dry years.
It appears that root distribution and root
strength properties are the most critical veg-
61
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts , and Letters
etation features in reducing both slumping
and surface erosion of the red clay soils. Ex¬
tensive litter cover can be valuable especially
as it relates to maintenance of the surface soil
moisture. Later successional species tend to
provide both more litter and a stronger root
system than earlier successional types.
General Conclusions
Our work on the root properties and ero¬
sion in the red clay region revealed that
a. essentially all roots occur in the upper 50
cm of clay soil;
b. for similar sites with respect to soil con¬
ditions, areas with tree cover tended to
have about twice the root mass per unit
volume of soil compared to areas with
only herbaceous cover;
c. the rooting pattern for wooded sites fol¬
lowed a log-linear relationship for root
mass vs. soil depth, with approximately
50% of the root mass occurring in the 0-
10 cm zone;
d. on sites with herbaceous cover up to 90%
of the root mass was in the 0-10 cm zone;
e. on wooded sites 15-22 % of the total root
mass was in the 0-0. 5mm diameter size
class and as root diameter increased the
mass per size class decreased;
/. on herbaceous sites approximately 60%
of the root mass was in the 0-0. 5mm size
class with essentially all roots confined to
less than 2 mm diameter;
g. the strength of small roots (up to 1mm
diameter) was 1.5 -8. 5 times stronger in
woody species than in herbaceous species;
h. among woody species later successional
species tended to have stronger roots than
early successional species;
i. vegetation comprised of woody, ad¬
vanced successional species appeared to
offer the best protection against both sur¬
face and deep-seated erosion;
j. certain species tended to afford greater
protection against deep-seated soil move¬
ment than others.
P. tremuloides-domimted sites exhibited
a wide range of slumping activity. Generally,
moderately dense P. tremuloides dominated
areas with a well developed shrub understory
were more stable, especially when C. cor-
nuta Marsh was dominant. Mixed conifer-
hardwood stands were also quite stable. Ad¬
ditional data comparing vegetation on slopes
with obvious slumping activity to apparently
stable slopes revealed an approximate two¬
fold higher density of trees on the stable sites
and higher amounts of C. cornuta and/or C.
stolonifera in the understory. Furthermore,
surface runoff rates (mton • ha-1) during May
through October 1977 were estimated at 0.2
for stable grassed areas, 7.8 for disturbed
grass areas, <0.1 for stable wooded areas,
and 0.4 for disturbed wood areas.
Acknowledgments
This work was supported by the Red Clay
Project, U.S. EPA Grant GOQ5 140-01, and
the Wisconsin Sea Grant Institute, Madison,
Wisconsin. CLSES Paper #49. We would
like to thank Mr. Donald Dailey, Mr. Karl
McConnell, and Ms. Marilyn Hoglund for
their help in connection with the Ametek Force
Gauges. Dr. Paul C. Tychsen was of great
assistance in laying out the transects to mea¬
sure the slumping.
Works Cited
Anderson, H. W. 1972. Relative contributions of
sediment from source areas and transport pro¬
cesses. USDA Agric. Res. Serv. Sediment Yield
Workshop. Oxford, Miss. (Nov.): 28-30.
Andrews, S. 1979. Impact of nonpoint pollution
control of western Lake Superior. Western Lake
Superior Basin Erosion/Sediment Control Pro¬
ject. Red Clay Project Summary Report. EPA
Great Lakes Program Office. EPA 905/9-79-
002.
Bahnick, D. A. 1977. The contribution of red clay
erosion to orthophosphate loadings into south¬
western Lake Superior. J. Environ. Quality
6(2):217-222.
Bahnick, D. A., J. W. Horton, R. K. Roubal,
and A. B. Dickas. 1972. Effects of south shore
drainage basins and clay erosion on the phys¬
ical and chemical limnology of western Lake
62
The Role of Plant Roots in Moderating Erosion
Superior. Proc. 15th Conf. Great Lakes Res.
237-248. Internal. Assoc. Great Lakes Res.
Bahnick, D. A., T. P. Markee, C. A. Anderson,
and R. K. Roubal. 1978. Chemical loadings to
southwestern Lake Superior from red clay ero¬
sion and resuspension. J. Great Lakes Res.
4(2): 186-193.
Bahnick, D. A., T. P. Markee, and R. K. Roubal.
1979. Chemical effects of red clays on western
Lake Superior. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. Region V. Great Lakes National Pro¬
gramming Office. Chicago.
Bishop, D. M. and M. E. Stevens. 1964. Land¬
slides on logged areas in southeast Alaska. U.S.
Forest Service Research Paper NOR-1.
Borroughs, E. R. and B. R. Thomas. 1977. De¬
clining root strength in Douglas fir after felling
as a factor in slope stability. USDA Forest Ser¬
vice, Research Paper INT-190, Ogden, Utah.
DeGraff, J. V. 1979. Initiation of shallow mass
movement by vegetation type conversion. Ge¬
ology 7: 426-429.
Diehl, S., W. Maanum, T. Jordan, and M. Sydor.
1977. Transports in Lake Superior. J. Geo¬
physical Res. 82(6): 977-978.
Forest Products Laboratory. 1974. Wood Hand¬
book: Wood as an engineering material. Forest
Service, U.S. Dept, of Agriculture.
Gray, D. H. 1973. Effects of forest clear-cutting
on the stability of natural slopes: Results of field
studies. Interim report to National Science
Foundation, Dept, of Civil Engineering, Univ.
of Michigan, Ann Arbor.
Gray, D. H. 1974. Reinforcement and stabiliza¬
tion of soil by vegetation. J. of the Geotechnical
Engineering Division , ASCE, Vol. 100, No.
GT6, 696-699.
Gray, D. H. 1976. The influence of vegetation on
slope processes. In Proceedings GLBC Work¬
shop, 2 Dec. 1976, Chicago, Ill.
Hole, F. 1976. Soils of Wisconsin. Univ. of Wis¬
consin Press, Madison.
Kapustka, L. A., D. W. Davidson, and R. G.
Koch. 1978. The significance of vegetation in
moderating red clay erosion, 79-96. In R. G.
Christiansen and C. D. Wilson (eds.), Volun¬
tary and regulatory approaches for nonpoint
source pollution control. USEPA, Great Lakes
National Program Office, Chicago, IL.
Marsh, W. M. and J. M. Koemer. 1972. Role of
moss in slope formation. Ecology 53(3): 489-
493.
Mengel, J. T. 1970. The geology of western Lake
Superior region. Published by the author, Dept,
of Geology, Univ. of Wisconsin-Superior.
Mengel, J. T. andB. E. Brown. 1976b. Culturally
induced acceleration of mass wastage on red
clay slopes. Little Balsam Creek, Douglas
County, Wisconsin. Univ. of Wisconsin-
Superior.
Oman, G. J. and M. Sydor. 1978. Use of remote
sensing in determination of chemical loading
of Lake Superior due to spring runoff. Can. J.
Spectroscopy 23(2): 52-56.
Penman, H. L. 1963. Vegetation and hydrology.
Tech. Commun. No. 53, Commonwealth Bu¬
reau of Soils, Harpenden.
Stortz, K., R. Clapper, and M. Sydor. 1976. Tur¬
bidity sources in Lake Superior. J. Great Lakes
Res. 2(2): 393-401.
Stortz, K. R. and M. Sydor. 1980. Transports in
the Duluth-Superior Harbor, J. Great Lakes Res.
6(3): 223-231.
Mengel, J. T. and B. E. Brown. 1976a. Red clay
slope stability factors. Final report. USEPA Red
Clay Project Grant No. G-005 140-01.
Swanston, D. N. 1970. Mechanics of debris av¬
alanching in shallow till soils of southeast Alaska.
U.S. Forest Serv. Res. Paper PNW-103.
Swenson, W. A. 1978. Influence of turbidity on
fish abundance in western Lake Superior.
USEPA. Environmental Research Laboratory.
Duluth, Minnesota.
Sydor, M., K. R. Stortz, and W. R. Swain. 1978.
Identification of contaminants in Lake Superior
through Landsat 1 data. J. Great Lakes Res.
4(2): 142-148.
Wells, P. V. 1976. A climax index for broadleaf
forests: an n-dimensional ecomorphological
model for succession . In J. S. Fralish, G. T.
Weaver, and R. C. Schlesinger. Proc. First
Central Hardwood Forest Conference, 17-19
Oct. 1976, Southern Illinois University,
Carbondale.
63
Manifest Details and Latent Complexities
in Flannery O’Connor’s
“A Good Man Is Hard to Find”
Paul J. Emmett
You might say that [symbols] are details that,
while having their essential place in the literal
level of the story, operate in depth as well as
on the surface, increasing the story in every
direction ... it is from the kind of world the
writer creates, from the kind of . . . detail he
invests it with, that a reader can find the in¬
tellectual meaning of a book ... the novelist
makes his statement by selection, and if he is
any good, he selects every word for a reason,
every detail for a reason . . . (O’Connor, Mys¬
tery 71-75).
These passages from Flannery O’Con¬
nor’s ‘‘The Nature and Aim of Fiction”
suggest O’Connor’s insistence upon the im¬
portance of details in fiction. In light of this
insistence, it is somewhat surprising that many
critics have ignored the evocative details in
O’Connor’s own fiction. Even the details in
‘‘A Good Man Is Hard to Find,” O’Connor’s
most popular short story, have been fre¬
quently overlooked. Indeed, in 1972 C. R.
Kropf took critics of ‘‘A Good Man Is Hard
to Find” to task for their tendency to focus
almost exclusively on the conclusion of this
short story. ‘‘The final scene is no doubt a
crucial one,” said Kropf, ‘‘but the story is
full of vivid details for which such discus¬
sions fail to account” (177-80, 206). And
Kropf’ s indictment was most apt since early
O’Connor critics not only focused on the
grandmother’s climactic ‘‘moment of grace,”
Paul J. Emmett is Associate Professor of English at the
University of Wisconsin-Manitowoc; he is currently
working on a book about Flannery O’Connor.
they also tended to discuss broad themes rather
than specific details. But by 1981 Hallman
Bryant could say that his design was ‘‘to shed
light on the significance of some small details
in ‘A Good Man Is Hard to Find’ ” (301—
07), and this is characteristic of the swing
toward detail that has taken place since 1972.
Robert Woodward has discussed the latent
implications of the route that Bailey chooses;
James Ellis has examined the apparently in¬
consequential details of the grandmother’s
Edgar Atkins Teagarden Story; Frederick As-
als has explored the strategic juxtapositions
of seemingly unrelated details; Steve Portch
has explained ‘‘subtle details” related to the
grandmother’s cat and the Misfit’s specta¬
cles; and Bryant himself has demonstrated
O’Connor’s deft use of place names in this
short story (2-5; 7-8; 144; 19-20; 301-07).
So we are moving in the right direction,
but still O’Connor’s subtle details are even
more subtle and detailed than has been sup¬
posed. The latent depths in which they ‘‘op¬
erate” are more complicated, and darker, than
has been suggested. As O’Connor herself
notes, every word is important and every de¬
tail increases the story’s depth in numerous
directions. “A Good Man Is Hard to Find”
has, in fact, the density of dream. And to
present this density, to probe the depths, and
to penetrate the details I will make frequent
use of Freudian theory. I will not be using
Freud the philosopher that O’Connor was
‘‘against tooth and toenail”; I will be using
the other Freud that she had ‘‘quite a respect
for,” the one she saw ‘‘bringing home to
65
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
people the fact that they weren’t what they
thought they were” (O’Connor, Being 110,
490-491). This Freud, who exposes people
and depths, can help expose details in “A
Good Man Is Hard to Find.” And this help
is essential because Kropf’s indictment — that
vivid details as well as the final scene must
be taken into account — was not strong enough.
The final scene cannot be accounted for until
we account for the vivid details that precede
it. Statement comes from detail; detail pro¬
vides “the intellectual meaning of a book.”
There are, then, many reasons for looking
at some of the details in “A Good Man Is
Hard to Find” before considering the cli¬
mactic confrontation between the grand¬
mother and the Misfit. These details suggest
both the density and the direction of the depths
of Flannery O’Connor’s fiction, and they lead
us to the understanding of both prefatory and
ultimate moments. Consider just one exam¬
ple. At Red Sammy’s the children’s mother
plays “The Tennesse Waltz.” And it might
not be surprising that this small detail has
never been considered by critics since the
most it seems to do is to add Southern flavor.
Yet even if this detail seems obvious, its
context demands explanation.
The children’s mother put a dime in the ma¬
chine and played ‘The Tennessee Waltz,’ and
the grandmother said that tune always made
her want to dance. She asked Bailey if he would
like to dance but he only glared at her. He didn’t
have a naturally sunny disposition . . . (121).
Why does Bailey glare at his mother? Why
does his mother ask him to dance? Why, for
that matter, is selecting “The Tennessee
Waltz” the only action that the children’s
mother initiates throughout the entire story?
The answers are in the “obvious” detail —
“The Tennessee Waltz.” The grandmother
had wanted to go to Tennessee, but for once
she didn’t get her way, and now the mother
is rubbing it in. But the mother’s attack goes
much deeper. As O’Connor says, detail in¬
creases the story in many directions. “The
Tennessee Waltz” is about a woman who
steals her friend’s sweetheart away. And once
66
we realize this, the context here becomes
clearer. At the latent level of the story the
mother is saying, “I’m glad we’re not going
to Tennessee” and “you stole my husband.”
The grandmother counters by asking Bailey
to dance, because she knows both the game
and the lyrics— “while they were dancing
my friend stole my sweetheart away.” Bai¬
ley, in turn, responds with a glare. This son’s
overreaction suggests his own latent obses¬
sion with this unnatural game: most as¬
suredly, he does not have “a naturally ‘sunny’
disposition.”
Understanding this one detail does more
than help us explicate the scene at Red Sam¬
my’s. It suggests the limitations of the com¬
mon assumptions that the grandmother is su¬
perficial but kind, that the children’s mother
is completely passive, and that the story itself
represents a contrast between a happy family
and vicious killers. Even as an isolated detail
that hints at the jealousies and passions rag¬
ing beneath the surface of the story, it sug¬
gests the striking contrast between surface
and depths, manifest and latent. But “The
Tennessee Waltz” is much more than an iso¬
lated detail. It is part of a network of details
that reinforce and refine each other as they
lead us to ultimate meanings, a network of
details that emphasizes and elucidates the la¬
tent relationship between Bailey and the
grandmother. And since we have to under¬
stand this relationship before we can under¬
stand the one between the Misfit and the
grandmother, we must begin with this net¬
work of reinforcing and refining details.
A close look at the accident itself, for ex¬
ample, reinforces and refines the implications
of “The Tennessee Waltz.” And a close look
is necessary since O’Connor’s repetition of,
and use of capitals in, “ACCIDENT” (125,
126) suggest that this accident is more than
the automobile mishap that the children revel
in.
Pitty Sing, the cat, sprang onto Bailey’s shoul¬
der. The children were thrown to the floor and
their mother, clutching the baby, was thrown
out the door onto the ground; the old lady was
thrown into the front seat . . . (124).
Details and Complexities in ‘ ‘ A Good Man is Hard to Find ’ ’
The children are discarded on the floor; the
wife, with her baby, is cast out of the front
seat, and the grandmother ends up alone in
the front seat with Bailey. Again the grand¬
mother takes the mother’s place. This is the
latent “ACCIDENT” that “destroys” the
family, the accident foreshadowed in “The
Tennessee Waltz.”
Before considering how the accident re¬
fines “The Tennessee Waltz,” we should note
the extent of the reinforcement. The latent
accident is suggested with the pairings in the
very first lines of the story: John Wesley and
June Star are reading on the floor and the
mother is feeding the baby on the couch,
while the grandmother is with Bailey at the
table, showing him both her newspaper and
her hip. “ ‘Now look here Bailey ... see
here, read this’ . . . she stood with one hand
on her thin hip and the other rattling the
newspaper at his bald head” (117). The pair¬
ings suggest what the accident and “The
Tennessee Waltz” later confirm: the grand¬
mother has taken over Bailey. The details
suggest that the grandmother is in the wife’s
place because she has never relinquished her
own place as mother. With hip and news¬
paper, this temptress and chastiser rattles at
bald Bailey. At the latent level they relive
the nursery scene. They are stuck in the past,
mommy and baby, because the grandmother
will not let go. “She wouldn’t stay at home
for a million bucks . . . afraid she’d miss
something . . . she has to go everywhere we
go” (118). So Bailey remains “Bailey Boy”
(128, 129, 131) and the children’s mother is
always called “the children’s mother.” She
is never once called “Bailey’s wife.”
An understanding of the extent of the
grandmother’s control helps with, and is
reinforced by, other subtle details. It’s dif¬
ficult to see, for example, why the children’s
mother goes calmly to certain death. “ ‘Lady,’
the Misfit asked, ‘would you and that little
girl like to step off yonder with Bobby Lee
and Hiram and join your husband?’ ‘Yes,
thank you,’ the mother said faintly” (131).
And as manifest explanations come up short
(could she be that traumatized?) we turn, al¬
most of necessity, to the latent level where
the difficulties fade once we focus on “join
your husband.” For once the grandmother
can’t come along; for once — and this is lit¬
erally the only time — Bailey can be called
“husband.” In death the family achieves a
union that the ever present grandmother has
made impossible in life.
Now we can see why the grandmother
doesn’t really seem to lament Bailey’s death
until his wife is shot. When Bailey is taken
away the grandmother says “ ‘Bailey Boy!’
... in a tragic voice but she found she was
looking at the Misfit . . .” (128). When Bai¬
ley is shot “the grandmother could hear the
wind move through the tree tops like a long
satisfied insuck of breath. ‘Bailey Boy!’ she
called’ ’ (129). But when the wife is shot ‘ ‘the
grandmother raised her head like a parched
old turkey hen crying for water and called,
‘Bailey Boy, Bailey Boy!’ as if her heart
would break” (132). And the incongruity here
is difficult, until we again focus on “join
your husband.” The grandmother’s heart does
not break when she loses her son to death; it
breaks when she loses him to her hated rival.
And to see why the grandmother’s reaction
is so intense, we must turn to another detail
of the accident since the accident not only
reinforces the problem suggested in “The
Tennessee Waltz,” it also refines it by in¬
dicating the cause of the problem.
The surface accident, the automobile mis¬
hap, is initiated by the grandmother’s cat,
Pitty Sing, and to understand the latent ac¬
cident, the family mishap, we must consider
the symbolic implications of Pitty Sing. But
Pitty Sing is another detail which is virtually
ignored by O’Connor critics. Only two have
spent any time at all on the grandmother’s
cat. In 1970, Josephine Hendin asserted that
“the cat is too slender of a figure to carry
much symbolic weight,” and then flawed an
otherwise perceptive analysis by discussing
the male cat as female. In 1978, Steve Portch
recognized the importance of the cat and of
the Misfit picking up the cat at the end of the
story, but because he did not discuss the
“symbolic weight” of Pitty Sing, he could
merely assert that the Misfit’s gesture is “a
moment of unconscious warmth” (150-51;
67
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
19-20). So Pitty Sing provides a paradigm
of the critical dilemma concerning O’Con¬
nor’s use of detail. When details are taken
too lightly, crucial ones are ignored or mis¬
interpreted. But even with the increasing
concern for detail, the ending of the story
cannot be analyzed without careful consid¬
eration of what Flannery O’Connor refers to
in relation to Hulga’s wooden leg in “Good
Country People’’ as “accumulating symbolic
meaning’’ {Mystery 99). And like Hulga’s
leg, the grandmother’s cat is an exemplary
O’Connor symbol: it “operates in depth as
well as on the surface, increasing the story
in every direction’’ (O’Connor, Mystery 99).
At one level “Pitty Sing’’ takes us to Pitti
Sing of The Mikado. This allusion, confirmed
by the Misfit’s repeated concern that society
should “let the punishment fit the crime,’’
reinforces what we’ ve learned in the accident
since The Mikado is about an old man who
wants to marry his ward and an old woman,
Katisha, who wants to marry the Mikado’s
young son. At another level, the grandmoth¬
er’s cat is like the grandmother’s son. Like
Bailey Boy, the cat cannot get free of mother:
“She didn’t intend for the cat to be left alone
in the house for three days because he would
miss her too much and she was afraid he
might brush against one of the gas burners
and accidentally asphyxiate himself’’ (118).
Like “Bailey Boy,” the cat is rendered puer¬
ile by the grandmother’s denominations: Pitty
Sing is the infantile form of “pretty thing.’’
Like Bailey Boy, the cat is emasculated by
the grandmother: Pitty Sing/Pitti Sing/pretty
thing. The cat could “accidentally as¬
phyxiate himself,’’ but Bailey is asphyxiated
by the accident: both are smothered.
It is, however, Pitty Sing’s leap from be¬
neath the smothering hippo’s head valise that
initiates the accident, and to understand this
incident, there is one more level that must
be considered. In the accident Pitty Sing is
associated with the grandmother: both fly into
the front seat; the grandmother ends up cat¬
like “curled up under the dashboard’’ (125);
Pitty Sing ends up grandmother-like “cling¬
ing to Bailey’’ (125). And this is typical since
throughout the story subtle details associate
cat and grandmother — the grandmother, for
example, takes “cat naps’’ (123). This cru¬
cial association is itself reinforced in an ear¬
lier draft of the story. “Granny thought that
she was the only person in the world that
[Pitty Sing] really loved, but the truth was
he had never really looked any farther up than
her middle, and he didn’t even like other
cats” (Manuscript). The ambiguous syntax
here suggests that Granny is one of the other
cats; Pitty Sing’s restricted vision suggest that
he is associated with Granny’s lower half,
her animal nature. And although the crude
pun on pussy is toned down in the final ver¬
sion, the sexual overtones are still there.
Granny hides the cat, for example, because
“Her son, Bailey, didn’t like to arrive at a
motel with a cat” (118).
Pitty Sing, then, increases the story in many
directions. Indeed, for the purposes of inter¬
pretation there might seem to be too many
directions. For example, if Pitty Sing rep¬
resents Bailey Boy’s sexuality, stunted and
suppressed, then his leap from Grandmoth¬
er’s basket onto Bailey’s shoulder would seem
to be a leap to freedom. But how could a
leap to freedom initiate the accident: how,
that is, could a leap to freedom cause the
grandmother to take the wife’s place? If, on
the other hand, Pitty Sing represents the
grandmother’s sexuality, potent and primal,
then his leap from basket to shoulder would
seem to be an attack. But why would the cat
then cling to Bailey “like a caterpillar” (125):
why, that is, would there be the suggestion
of rebirth as a butterfly? To answer these
difficult questions and to understand the ac¬
cident, we must see that these two latent di¬
rections fit together because Pitty Sing is both
the phallus of Bailey Boy and the phallus of
the grandmother. Indeed, he is the phallus
that the grandmother now possesses because
she has taken it from her son. Pitty Sing is
the male rendered female by the grandmoth¬
er’s denomination, but he is also the male
under female guise — the lost potency of the
son and the dominating potency of the
grandmother.
68
Details and Complexities in * A Good Man is Hard to Find ’ ’
In the drafts, Pitty Sing has a “yellow hind
leg,” and this fairly transparent phallic image
is related to Bailey’s yellow shirt because
yellow is the point. If Bailey Boy weren’t
afraid, he could recapture the phallus. This
is why Pitty Sing clings like a caterpillar that
could become a butterfly: the escape of this
caterpillar offers sexuality and rebirth. Bai¬
ley, however, can’t cope with the cat, and
his failure is what actually causes the acci¬
dent. Pitty Sing springs from beneath the va¬
lise that the drafts refer to as “the grand¬
mother’s grip’’ to Bailey’s shoulder. But even
though the phallus is out from under the ‘ ‘grip’ ’
of the grandmother and Bailey should have
control, he doesn’t. He loses control of the
car and causes the accident. Mother replaces
wife because Bailey Boy wants both what he
should have, the phallus, and what he can’t
have, the mother.
After the accident, Bailey still has the
phallus and, hence, a chance to take charge.
“The car turned over once and landed right-
side-up in a gulch off the side of the road.
Bailey remained in the driver’s seat with the
cat — gray-striped with a broad white face and
an orange nose — clinging to his neck like a
caterpillar” (124, 125). The phallus has been
turned over once and is now right-side-up,
back to its original owner, and as the pause
for the parenthetical phrase here emphasizes,
“with the cat” Bailey is indeed “in the driv¬
er’s seat.” Even the grandmother cowers: “The
grandmother was curled up . . . under the
dashboard, hoping she was injured so that
Bailey’s wrath would not come down on her
all at once” (125). But ultimately Bailey wants
neither phallus nor control: he flings away
the cat, and immediately gets out of the driv¬
er’s seat.
Like the mythic Attis who castrates him¬
self under a pine tree out of frustrated desire
for his mother, Bailey, who tosses the phallic
cat “against the side of a pine tree” (125),
emasculates himself. And the very next lines
of the story emphasize that the cause is frus¬
trated desire for mother.
Then he got out of the car and started looking
for the children’s mother. She was sitting against
the side of the red gutted ditch, holding the
screaming baby, but she only had a cut down
her face and a broken shoulder. ‘We’ve had an
ACCIDENT!’ the children screamed in a frenzy
of delight. ‘But nobody’s killed,’ June Star said
with disappointment . . . (125).
Bailey’s tossing away the cat and looking for
the children’s mother might for a second seem
to be moves in the right direction. Yet, al¬
ready he’s made a few mistakes: he should
bring the cat/phallus with him, and he should
be looking for “his wife,” not “the chil¬
dren’s mother.” We know, however, that these
are not mistakes. Like Attis, Bailey rejects
the phallus because he is really still looking
for mother, and mother is inaccessible be¬
cause of the incest taboo. So when Bailey
finds his potentially vaginal wife in a “red
gutted ditch” (125) he doesn’t even talk to
her. He merely notes “but she only had a
cut down her face and a broken shoulder.”
And the apparent incongruity in “ but she
only had” suggests the ultimate horror. Like
June Star, who says, “ ‘but nobody’s
killed!’ ” with disappointment, Bailey looks
for his wife in hopes of finding her dead.
Only when his wife is completely out of the
picture could mother become wife.
Bailey’s wife, however, is not dead, and
although the grandmother has lost the phal¬
lus, she has not lost control over her son.
Saying, “I believe I have injured an organ,”
the grandmother “limps” out of the car (125).
Since anyone as well read as O’Connor in
mythology knows that a limp is the mythical
representation of castration (Jobes 2: 931),
these two actions reinforce each other. Since
hats have phallic connotations (Freud 5: 1900-
01) both actions, in turn, are reinforced by
the damage done to the grandmother’s hat.
“The grandmother limped out of the car, her
hat still pinned to her head but the broken
front brim standing up at a jaunty angle and
the violet spray hanging off the side” (125).
The imagery here is particularly telling: al¬
though the hat is battered, it is not lost com¬
pletely. The “violet spray” is “hanging off
the side,” not gone completely, and this is
important since after his emasculation, At-
69
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
tis — who is sometimes hanged on the pine
tree — reappears as violets. So the hanging
violet spray emphasizes that despite her
“limp” the grandmother, who wears another
violet spray at her bosom (118), still keeps
hold of her castrated Attis.
Without the phallus Bailey ends up lost in
the feminine. Sitting in the vaginal ditch,
“Bailey’s teeth were clattering. He had on a
yellow sport shirt with bright blue parrots
designed in it and his face was as yellow as
the shirt” (125). Since Bailey is as yellow
as the cat’s hind leg that he has lost, grand¬
mother is quickly back in power. She cuts
off the next words that Bailey utters, just as
she has “cut off” Bailey all his life. “ ‘Look
here now,’ Bailey began suddenly, ‘we’re in
a predicament! We’re in ... ’ The grand¬
mother shrieked ...” (127). O’Connor’s
deft juxtaposition, “we’re in a predicament,
we’re in the grandmother,” emphasizes that
the grandmother is the predicament that Bai¬
ley Boy is lost in. And Bailey is lost. He
does nothing to defend himself or his family
against the Misfit. As he is led off to death
our final view of him reinforces the problem
one last time. “They went off toward the
woods and just as they reached the dark edge,
Bailey turned and supporting himself against
a gray naked pine trunk, he shouted, ‘I’ll be
back in a minute, Mamma, wait on me!’ ”
(128). The recurring image of the pine tree
which in myth represents both Cybele and
Attis; the details “supporting himself against
a gray naked pine trunk”; the first use of
“Mamma”; and the fact that Mamma is Bai¬
ley’s only concern — all tell the latent story.
By supporting himself on Mamma and re¬
jecting the phallus, Bailey has castrated him¬
self. In a few moments he will be shot, but
at the latent level his impotence and depend¬
ence, his inability to act, have rendered him
lifeless. Like Attis he has sacrificed himself
to the grand-mere, the Great Mother.
The Great Mother will not be without a
son, however, and even before Bailey is shot
the grandmother has found a new potential
victim. “ ‘Bailey Boy,’ the grandmother called
in a tragic voice but she found she was look¬
ing at the Misfit squatting on the ground in
front of her” (128). The grandmother says
“Bailey” but looks at the Misfit — "who is
squatting just like Bailey was a minute ago
(128) — because the Misfit is to be her new
Bailey. But our study of the details of the
latent relationship between Bailey Boy and
the grandmother demonstrates that the Misfit
is not Bailey. Indeed, we can discover a lot
about both the Misfit himself and his cli¬
mactic relationship with the grandmother just
by contrasting details. Unlike Bailey who has
“clattering teeth,” (125) the Misfit has “a
row of strong white teeth” (127). Unlike Bai¬
ley, the Misfit won’t put up with the grand¬
mother’s fabrications: “ ‘We turned over
twice!’ said the grandmother. ‘Once,’ [the
Misfit] corrected. ‘We seen it happen’ ” (126).
Unlike Bailey, the Misfit cuts the grand¬
mother off: “ ‘Pray, pray,’ the grandmother
began, ‘pray, pray . . . ’ ‘I never was a bad
boy . . . ’ ” (130). And most importantly,
unlike Bailey, the Misfit won’t be mothered.
The climactic scene is a most violent rejec¬
tion of the grandmother as mamma and of
the maternal breast.
She saw the man’s face twisted close to her
own as if he were going to cry and she mur¬
mured, ‘Why you’re one of my babies. You’re
one of my own children.’ She reached out and
touched him on the shoulder. The Misfit sprang
back as if a snake had bitten him and shot her
three times through the chest. (132)
We could emphasize these contrasts to see
“A Good Man Is Hard to Find” as a story
of the ultimate defeat of the Great Mother.
And since the Misfit sees the grandmother as
a snake and picks up Pitty Sing after he kills
the snake, we could see the story as the defeat
of the Phallic Mother, the son’s violent re¬
possession of the phallus. And there is some
validity to this view — but only some. The
Misfit, for example, makes a correct asso¬
ciation: the grandmother/snake has even
“hissed” earlier in the story (121). But the
snake is not just phallic, it also represents
temptation. The Misfit suspects what the
grandmother needs: a hard man is good to
70
Details and Complexities in ‘ A Good Man is Hard to Find ’
find. But his realization, “she would have
been a good woman . . . if it had been some¬
one there to shoot her every minute of her
life,” (133) is far too extreme. The Misfit
accepts the phallus: he picks up the cat that
has been rubbing against his leg (133). But
the phallus has been neutered since Pitty Sing
is now referred to as “it,” not “he” (133).
And the qualifications here emphasize just
what we might expect from an author already
renowned for manifest complexities: the la¬
tent story is not just a schematic presentation
of the defeat of one son and the victory of
another. It is not just a story of contrasts.
The Misfit is not simply “unlike Bailey.”
There is, in fact, some validity to the grand¬
mother’s feeling that the Misfit is the new
Bailey. After all they do both squat, and
squatting is feminine. The Misfit does put on
Bailey’s yellow shirt; he is scrawny like Bai¬
ley. And there’s another particularly telling
parallel between the two. Before Bailey goes
to the woods and death he has one last mo¬
ment of passivity, one last moment of talk
without action.
“Listen,” Bailey began, “we’re in a terrible
predicament! Nobody realizes what this is,”
and his voice cracked. His eyes were as blue
and intense as the parrots in his shirt and he
remained perfectly still. (128)
Since voices have phallic connotations (Bunker
392), Bailey’s cracking voice, like his im¬
mobility, reinforces his castration. But these
reinforcements are particularly important later
when the Misfit’s voice changes: “ ‘Listen,
[just what Bailey said] lady,’ The Misfit said
in a high voice, ‘if I had of been there I would
of known and I wouldn’t be like I am now.’
His voice seemed about to crack . . . ” (132).
The Misfit’s voice is “about to crack,” but
it never actually does because he stops talk¬
ing and starts shooting. The shooting of the
grandmother, that is, is the Misfit’s desperate
attempt to shore up his tenuous and threat¬
ened masculinity. His voice almost cracks;
he almost becomes Bailey: “ ‘Why you’re
one of my babies. You’re one of my own
children!’ ” (132). And almost is far too close
for this man who is made nervous by children
(126, 127) because he is nervous about still
being a child. The Misfit will not be Bailey
Boy; he will not be rendered puerile; he will
not be smothered; he will not be caught in
the Oedipal trap. Inept, insecure, and intim¬
idated, he overcompensates with violence.
The Misfit’s very assertion of maturity and
independence manifests his immaturity and
dependence. No one is more lost in Mother
than Oedipus, and the Misfit resembles Oed¬
ipus. He has killed his father1, and now with
this phallic gun he attacks the mother. He
fires three shots and after the attack his first
concern is for his “red-rimmed” eyes (132).
No wonder he sees the Great Mother as snake:
she is the Oedipal temptation that cannot be
avoided. Indeed, the intensity of the Misfit’s
aggression suggests the intensity of the temp¬
tation he’s struggling to avoid. But even as
he kills the temptress, at the latent level he
succumbs to her. The grandmother smiles in
death.
The Misfit is controlled just when he seems
to take control, and this dilemma is rein¬
forced by subtle details throughout the story.
The sun and cloud imagery, for example,
provides a perfect paradigm of the Misfit’s
plight. Before the Misfit comes on the scene,
the children play their shape guessing game
with a cloud “the shape of a cow,” (120)
and we are told twice that the sun is out (1 19,
122). Since we are also told that Bailey doesn’t
have “a naturally sunny disposition,” (121)
the latent implications here are not too subtle.
The cloud which is the cow, the maternal
principle, blocks off Bailey Boy, this most
unnatural “sun.” But when the Misfit ar¬
rives, he seems to rectify the situation. “Ain’t
a cloud in the sky . . . Don’t see no sun but
don’t see no cloud neither” (127). The man¬
ifest improbability of this abrupt shift in the
weather emphasizes the latent facts, which
seem to be that, unlike Bailey, the Misfit is
not lost behind the mother and that mother/
sun imagery is not even relevant to the Misfit.
These seem to be the facts— until we realize
that the Misfit is not much of a meterologist.
71
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
A day that seems to be without sun or clouds
really isn’t. When the sun is not visible, it
is being completely obscured by high level
layered clouds, cirrostratus. It’s no wonder
that the grandmother responds to the Misfit’s
assertion that there is neither sun nor clouds
with the seemingly incongruous “ ‘Yes, it’s
a beautiful day’ ” (127). It’s beautiful for
the Great Mother because this “son” doesn’t
even know he’s lost in the clouds, lost in the
maternal.2
And there appears to be little hope for the
Misfit to escape the maternal since the Great
Mother is as encompassing on earth as she
is in the heavens. Since the Misfit has “plowed
Mother Earth” (129) we might assume that,
unlike Bailey who groans when the grand¬
mother tricks him into going on a dirt road,
(124) the Misfit has confronted and tran¬
scended the Maternal. But again this is not
the case. The Misfit describes his later stay
in prison in terms of the Maternal principle.
“I never was a bad boy that I remember of
. . . but somewheres along the line I done
something wrong and got sent to the peniten¬
tiary. I was buried alive,” and he looked up
and held her attention to him by a steady stare.
(130)
This bad boy Oedipus, killed his father and
was “buried alive,” lost in the maternal: The
Earth Mother is his penitentiary. That his
“escape” from the penitentiary only seems
to distinguish him from Bailey who never
escapes alive is emphasized in the last line
here. The Misfit’s staring at the grandmother
immediately after he says “buried alive”
emphasizes that the Earth Mother, the real
penitentiary, is omnipresent.3 The Misfit’s
stare holds her attention to him, but it’s her
“attention” that “holds” Bailey Boy, Pitty
Sing, and the Misfit. That’s why the Misfit
still “plows” Mother Earth. “The Misfit
pointed the toe of his shoe into the ground
and made a little hole and then covered it up
again ... the Misfit . . . drew a little circle
in the ground with the butt of his gun . . .
the Misfit kept scratching in the ground with
the butt of his gun” (127, 128, 129). Like
the shooting of the grandmother, the union
of toe or gun and Mother Earth— the union
both dirty and obsessive— is the symbolic
rendering of the repressed Oedipal union that
the Misfit both dreads and desires.
The union of gun and ground is, however,
more than the sublimated fulfillment of re¬
pressed desires. The Misfit is struggling to
find — struggling to free — his own self that
is still buried alive. And “struggling” is the
key word. This is what makes the Misfit un¬
like Bailey. The Misfit struggles; Bailey gives
up. It’s a case of “approach-avoidance”: the
Misfit approaches; Bailey avoids. The Misfit,
as his daddy said, is one of those “ ‘that has
to know why,’ ” (129) and from his first
appearance in the story he is struggling to
see so that he can comprehend.
In a few minutes the family saw a car some
distance away on top of a hill, coming slowly
as if the occupants were watching them ... It
came to a stop just over them and for some
minutes, the driver looked down with a steady
expressionless gaze to where they were sitting
. . . The driver got out of the car and stood by
the side of it, looking down at them. (125, 126)
The Misfit’s gaze, which will soon be fo¬
cused solely on the grandmother, distin¬
guishes him from Bailey, who is also char¬
acterized by his initial visual response to the
grandmother — her hip, her newspaper, and
her efforts to go to Tennessee: ‘ ‘Bailey didn’t
look up from his reading” (117). Bailey, that
is, avoids dirt, cat, and grandmother: he fears
the filth of his phallic Oedipal desires. The
Misfit approaches dirt, cat, and grandmother:
he is not afraid to discover his “dirty” self.
And if he doesn’t understand what he sees,
he at least looks; if he overreacts, he at least
reacts; if his voice almost cracks, he at least
stops talking; if his masculinity is threatened,
he at least cares. And if he repeats, sym¬
bolically, his unconscious Oedipal longings,
at least he repeats those longings. Bailey does
not. Bailey’s longings are so repressed that
he never even enacts symbolic sexual union.
The Misfit has a better chance to find himself
in, and free himself from, the Earth Mother
72
Details and Complexities in * ‘ A Good Man is Hard to Find ’
because his desires which he must come to
“know” are closer to the surface, and his
symbolic confrontations provide him oppor¬
tunities to understand. If he succumbs to the
temptress, at least he has a chance to under¬
stand the nature of the temptation. Indeed, it
seems that the violent intensity of the Misfit’s
killing/possessing of the Great Mother thrusts
him forward towards knowledge and free¬
dom. He at least has removed the blocking
figure. When the grandmother is dead the
weather changes again. Now there is merely
a “cloudless sky” (132).
The cloudless sky emphasizes that the
blocking mother is gone and suggests that it
is no longer necessary to talk of “sun.” The
Misfit, who first moved from looking at
grandmother to “looking beyond her,” (132)
has now moved from confronting Mother to
transcending her. After the shooting he im¬
mediately “[puts] his gun down on the ground
and takes off his glasses and begins to clean
them” (132). Now he will be able to see
beyond the dirt of the obsessions he has just
confronted. He knows instinctively that he
will no longer need the gun for shooting or
digging: the mother has been encountered,
possessed, and purged; the Misfit has plowed
Mother Earth and he no longer needs to look
for himself in the dirt. He is free. He no
longer needs to assert his masculinity.
“Without his glasses, the Misfit’s eyes were
red-rimmed and pale and defenseless-look¬
ing” (132, 133). He is, then, not only beyond
the violent masculinity implicit in his gun,
he is beyond gender. He picks up “the cat
that is rubbing itself against his leg” (133).
And it is now “the cat” not “Pitty Sing”,
“itself”, not “himself” because now the
phallus is neither feminized nor masculin¬
ized. Like the only androgyne in O’Connor’s
work, the cat is “it.”4 Beyond mother, be¬
yond Oedipal violence, beyond gender, the
Misfit has come to knowledge. Bobby Lee,
tugging the grandmother out of the ditch to
throw her with Bailey, yells “some fun,”
(133) but the final word is the Misfit’s “shut
up, Bobby Lee, it’s no real pleasure in life”
(133). The Misfit has come a long way from
“No pleasure but meanness” (132). He has
come a long way from the Oedipal “pleas¬
ures” that Bobby Lee still “wrestles” with,
a long way from the ditch that he wrestles
in. The Misfit, because he approaches, ends
up with knowledge. Bailey Boy, because he
avoids, ends up with Grandmother.
We, in turn, end up with an understanding
of the story’s depths because we began with
“The Tennessee Waltz;” we began by con¬
sidering subtle details. And this is how all
of O’Connor’s work must be read. Through¬
out her fiction, apparently inconsequential
details reveal themselves under the scrutiny
of a Freudian frame of reference. And it is
these revelations that lead to ultimate under¬
standing. Still, even a listing of details that
could lead us into other O’Connor stories
would be quite lengthy. But all of O’Con¬
nor’s work forms an intricate whole: she her¬
self says, “In the future, anybody who writes
anything about me is going to have to read
everything I have written in order to make
legitimate criticism” ( Being 450). O’Con¬
nor’s stories reinforce and refine each other.
So the process of finding and explicating de¬
tails is not as formidable as it might seem
since many pivotal details are recurrent, and
their latent associations are being continually
refined and reinforced. Consider a few ex¬
amples of how our understanding of ‘ ‘A Good
Man Is Hard to Find” can suggest places to
penetrate other stories by shedding light on
details that might initially seem inconse¬
quential or incomprehensible. In “Comforts
of Home” Thomas thrusts his gun into Sarah
Ham’s purse, and since we’ve seen that guns
are, among other things, phallic, we should
suspect that Thomas’ action has latent im¬
plications. Indeed, once we know where to
look, the latent implications are almost trans¬
parent since the details reinforce the symbol.
“He grabbed the red pocketbook. It had a
skin-like feel to his touch and as it opened,
he caught an unmistakable odor of the girl.
Wincing, he thrust in the gun and then drew
back” (402). When Thomas’ mother “[col¬
lapses] full-length on his couch lifting her
small swollen feet upon the arm of it” (387)
73
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
we see how the swollen feet, which takes us
to Oedipus (Jobes 2: 931), help us with the
scene because we know how O’Connor uses
Oedipal concerns and subtle allusions. When
Thomas, bareheaded, talks to the imposing
Farebrother with his “Texas type hat,” (400)
Thomas uses a “lamer voice” (400) and we
know what’s going on because we’ve seen
some of the association of hats, limps, and
voices.
This, too, is typical O’Connor: the images
we have learned to deal with in “A Good
Man Is Hard to Find” reinforce each other
throughout O’Connor’s work. In “A Circle
in the Fire,” for example, guns and hats help
us understand Sally Virginia’s attempt to be¬
come the dangerous phallic male. “[She] had
put on a pair of overalls over her dress and
had pulled a man’s old felt hat down as far
as it would go on her head and was arming
herself with two pistols” (190). In “The Par¬
tridge Festival” guns and hats expose Sin¬
gleton’s phallic nature right before Singleton
exposes his phallus. “On his head was a
black hat, not the kind countrymen wear, but
a black derby hat such as might be worn by
a gunman in the movies” (442). In “Green-
leaf” guns and hats along with suns and our
awareness of the mother and son’s struggle
for the phallus help us with a more complex
passage. “[Mrs. May] was conscious that the
sun was directly on top of her head, like a
silver bullet ready to drop into her brain”
(325). Mrs. May is hatless so her unprotected
head is most vulnerable to the phallic shaped
sun — the son’s gun. But when the mother
wears a hat as LucyNell Crater does in “The
Life You Save May Be Your Own” things
are different.
She was about the size of a cedar fence post
and she had a man’s gray hat pulled down low
over her head . . . The old woman watched
him with her arms folded across her chest as
if she were the owner of the sun. (146)
This hatted post, this phallic mother is most
assuredly the “owner” of this one-armed son.
Pitted against this devouring mother, “rav¬
enous for a son-in-law,” (150) it is Mr. Shift-
let “deeply hurt by the word milk” (153)
who is vulnerable. Our images demonstrate
that Shiftlet’s attempts to avoid and suppress
mother are— as we might expect— futile. After
Shiflet has taken LucyNell Crater’s car and
abandoned her daughter.
A cloud, the exact color of the boy’s hat and
shaped like a turnip, had descended over the
sun, and another, worse looking, crouched be¬
hind the car. Mr. Shiftlet felt that the rottenness
of the world was about to engulf him. (156)
Since we’ve seen that clouds can be mater¬
nal, we might be surprised that Shiflet links
this cloud with a boy’s hat. But we must
recall that the boy’s hat is gray (155) just
like Mrs. Crater’s hat. So the engulfing gray
turnip shaped cloud is really the Earth Mother,
the phallic mother, and Shiftlet’s focus on
the boy’s hat demonstrates his own desires
to repress the mother and retrieve the phallus.
However, these desires are ineffectual; the
“sun” is lost; Shiftlet, who has repeatedly
fed the Crater women because he has always
feared that he himself might be their next
meal, is engulfed. And not only does our
study of “A Good Man Is Hard to Find”
help us with his defeat, the oral nature of his
defeat helps us with “A Good Man Is Hard
to Find.’ ’ The devouring mother in ‘ ‘The Life
You Save May Be Your Own” points us
toward the devouring mother— the oral pre¬
cursor of the Oedipal phallic mother — in “A
Good Man Is Hard to Find.” Now we can
understand certain details in this story. We
can see why Bailey, with his “clattering teeth”
(125) makes sure that the grandmother gets
two lunches, one on the road and one at Red
Sammy’s. And we can see why the Misfit
with his “strong white teeth” (127) shoots
the grandmother in the chest when she bites
him.
The process, of course, is endless. Latent
obsessions reinforce and refine each other;
stories reinforce and refine each other; image
clusters reinforce and refine each other in a
particular story and throughout the O’Connor
canon. It’s all quite complicated, but it all
began with “The Tennessee Waltz.” And we
74
Details and Complexities in ‘ (A Good Man is Hard to Find ’ ’
should learn from Bailey: “ya dance with
who brung ya.” Careful consideration of
manifest details takes us into and through
O’Connor’s maze of latent complexities.
Endnotes
1 The illogic of the Misfit’s denial of this murder
suggests that he has suppressed his patricide.
“It was a head doctor at the penitentiary said
what I had done was kill my daddy but I know
that for a lie. My daddy died in nineteen ought
nineteen of the epidemic flu and I never had a
thing to do with it. He was buried in the Mount
Hopewell Baptist churchyard and you can go
there and see for yourself” (130). That the
tombstone reads, “died of the epidemic flu” is
almost as unlikely as it reading “19019.” In
any case Eggenschwiler has demonstrated that
is makes little difference whether the Misfit’s
patricide is actual or symbolic. (143)
2 It’s interesting to note here that even the only
possible manifest “excuse” for the Misfit’s er¬
ror actually reinforces the latent point. Perhaps
the Misfit is too deep in the ditch to view the
sun and clouds — well perhaps, but he’s either
lost in the clouds or lost in the “red gutted
ditch” (125).
3 The grandmother is most assuredly the Earth
Mother. The first earth we see is the “blue
granite ... the brilliant red clay banks slightly
streaked with purple; and the various crops that
made rows of green lace work on the ground”
(119). The grandmother has the blue, her blue
hat and dress (118); the red, her red face (124);
the purple, her purple spray of violets (118);
and even the lace, her lace trimmed collar and
cuffs (110). She is just like the earth — except
for the green. She offers neither Bailey Boy nor
the Misfit fertility. The children’s mother, on
the other hand, never takes off her ‘ ‘green head-
kerchief that [has] two points on the top like a
rabbit’s ears” (117).
4 The androgynous “freak” in “A Temple of the
Holy Ghost” is referred to as “it” (245).
Works Cited
Asals, Frederick. Flannery O'Connor: The Imag¬
ination Of Extremity. Athens: University of
Georgia Press ,1982.
Bryant, Hallman B. “Reading The Map In ‘A
Good Man Is Hard To Find,’ ” Studies In Short
Fiction 18(3) (1981) :301-07.
Bunker, H.A. “The Voice As Female Phallus.”
Psychoanalytic Quarterly 3(1934):392.
Eggenschwiler, David. The Christian Humanism
of Flannery O’Connor. Detroit: Wayne State
University Press, 1972.
Ellis, James. “Watermelons And Coca-Cola In
‘A Good Man Is Hard To Find,” Holy Com¬
munion In The South.” Notes On Contempo¬
rary Literature 8(3)(1978):7-8.
Freud, Sigmund. The Complete Works Of Sig¬
mund Freud. Edited by James Strachey. Lon¬
don: The Hogarth P and the Institute of Psyco-
Analysis, 1953.
Hendin, Josephine. The World Of Flannery
O’Connor. Bloomington: Indiana University
Press, 1972.
Jobes, Gertrude. Dictionary Of Mythology, Folk¬
lore And Smbols. 2 vols. New York: The Scare¬
crow Press, 1962.
Kropf, C.R. “Theme and Setting in ‘A Good Man
Is Hard To Find.’ ” Renaissance 24(1972): 177-
80, 206.
O’Connor Flannery. The Collected Stories of
Flannery O’Connor. 4th ed. New York; Farrar,
Straus and Giroux, 1974.
Flannery O’Connor: The Habit Of Being. Edited
by Sally Fitzgerald. New York: Farrar, Straus
and Giroux, 1979.
Mystery and Manners. Edited by Sally and Robert
Fitzgerald. New York: Farrar, Straus and Gi¬
roux, 1961.
Unpublished manuscripts. Flannery O’Connor
Collection, Georgia College, Milledgeville.
Portch, Stephen R. “O’Connor’s ‘A Good Man
Is Hard To Find.’ ” Explicator 37(1)(1978):19-
20.
Woodward, Robert. “A Good Route Is Hard To
Find: Place Names and Setting In O’Connor’s
‘A Good Man Is Hard To Find.’ ” Notes On
Contemporary Literature 3(5)(1973):2-5.
75
Population Ecology of Painted and Blanding’s
Turtles (Chrysemys picta and Emydoidea
hlandingi) in Central Wisconsin
David A. Ross
Abstract. A Blanding’s turtle (Emydoidea blandingi) population was studied for six years
in central Wisconsin. To date, five studies of Blanding s turtle populations have appeared
in the literature. Females matured at 172 -mm plastron length and at about 18 years of
age. Size and age at maturity in males remains unknown. Density and biomass were 27.5
turtles I ha and 45 kg/ ha; these densities are greater than those found in Michigan marshes
but less than densities reported for Missouri pond populations. Biomass was greater than
that found in Michigan marshes. As in three other studies, no small juveniles were captured.
Similar to two other studies, growth rate was greatest early in life and steadily declined
thereafter. The Wisconsin population exhibited faster growth than that reported for Ontario
and Massachusetts populations. The rapid growth rate, especially in the first several years
of life, is probably related to organic substrates in the wetlands and associated high pro¬
ductivity of animal food items. Individuals were recaptured frequently and often moved among
several adjacent wetlands. Habitat for E. blandingi should be set aside to preserve populations
of this species.
Male and female painted turtles (Chrysemys picta), studied simultaneously with E. blan¬
dingi, matured at about 85 -mm and 130-mm plastron lengths, respectively. This is similar to
that found in southern Minnesota, but both sexes mature at larger sizes than those in southern
Michigan. Density of the C. picta population was 104 turtles/ha, less than that found in other
studies. Ages at maturity were three and seven years for males and females, respectively.
Males matured at an earlier age than those in southern Michigan and at the same age as
those in New Mexico and Illinois. Females matured at the same age as most other upper
Midwest populations. Growth rate was rapid during the first several years of life, similar to
other Midwest populations. Interspecific competition for food and basking sites may exist
between E. blandingi and C. picta.
Data are available from several studies
on the population dynamics of Bland¬
ing’s turtle (Emydoidea blandingi ) (Gibbons
1968a; Graham and Doyle 1977; Congdon et
al. 1983). The State of Wisconsin lists E.
David A. Ross is presently a Wildlife Ecologist with
Wisconsin River and Consolidated Water Power Com¬
panies, affiliates of Consolidated Papers, Inc. His eco¬
logical interests include amphibians and reptiles, marsh
birds, raptors, and hydroelectric impacts on vertebrate
populations.
blandingi as threatened (NR 27.03, effective
October 1979). Only one study (Ross and
Anderson in press) has been conducted on
Blanding’s turtle in Wisconsin. That study
examined habitat use and movements in the
present population. Painted turtle (Chryse¬
mys picta) ecology has been studied in Wis¬
consin (Pearse 1923; Ream and Ream 1966)
and other parts of midwestem North America
(Cagle 1942, 1954; Sexton 1959b; Gibbons
1968; Ernst and Ernst 1972; Wilbur 1975;
77
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
MacCulloch and Secoy 1983). The objec¬
tives of this study were to examine size class
distribution, size/age at maturity, population
density, and biomass ( E . blandingi only) of
sympatric populations of painted and B land¬
ing’s turtles in Wisconsin.
Study Area and Methods
The study was conducted on the Petenwell
Wildlife Area (PWA), a 291 ha wetland com¬
plex located in the Town of Strongs Prairie,
Adams County, Wisconsin (T18N, R4E). The
PWA wetlands consist of small (<0.2 ha)
ponds, marshes, creeks, ditches, alder
swamps, and oak ( Quercus spp.) and aspen
( Populus spp.) woods. Dominant emergent
vegetation includes cattail ( Typha spp.), sedge,
and bulrush (J uncus sp.). Dominant sub¬
merged vegetation includes coontail ( Cer -
atophyllum demersum ), elodea ( Elodea can¬
adensis ), and pondweeds ( Potamogeton spp.).
The PWA is located in the flat, sandy glacial
outwash plain of central Wisconsin (Martin
1965).
Turtles were trapped in ponds (hereafter,
pond complex), with hoop nets (Legler 1960)
during June to September 1985, and May to
July 1986, for a total of 1,290 trap nights.
Recapture data of turtles marked during 1982
and 1983 (Ross and Anderson in press) were
used in some of the present analyses. Traps
were baited with frozen fish that were re¬
newed daily. The surface area of the pond
complex was 0.8 ha. Occasionally, individ¬
uals were captured by hand, mainly nesting
females on land. All turtles were individually
marked by notching marginal scutes with a
hacksaw (Cagle 1939). Emydoidea blandingi
were classified as male if a concave plastron
was present and as female if the plastron was
flat (Graham and Doyle 1977). Chrysemys
picta were classified as male if elongated claws
were present on the front feet and as female
if the individual was larger than the largest
mature male and lacked male secondary sex
characters. Turtles less than the smallest ma¬
ture male were classified as immatures.
X-ray photography (Gibbons and Greene 1979)
and specimen dissection (Tinkle 1961) are
accurate methods for determining the age of
turtles at sexual maturation. However, in¬
spection of secondary sexual characters (i.e. ,
females are classified as those individuals
lacking male sex characters greater than the
smallest known male) were the best methods
available for this study. Shell measurements
were taken with calipers, and body weights
were obtained with spring scales. Plastral
growth annuli, when distinguishable, were
measured with dial calipers and were used to
age turtles (Sexton 1959a). The relative lengths
of the abdominal laminae and the plastron
remain about the same throughout the life in
Emydoidea (Graham 1979). Previous annual
growth was estimated by applying the equa¬
tion Lj/L2 = C,/C2 where Q represents the
length of the annulus, C2 the length of the
abdominal scute, L2 the plastron length (PL),
and Lj the length of the plastron at the time
the annulus was formed (Sergeev 1937).
Population size was calculated according to
the Schnabel method (Schnabel 1938) using
Chapman and Overton’s (1966) method of
calculating confidence limits (CL). Biomass
was estimated as the sum of the weights of
all E. blandingi captured in the pond complex
during 1985 and 1986. Daily air temperatures
were obtained from the Necedah Weather
Station, about 6 km west of the PWA.
Results and Discussion
A total of 32 E. blandingi were trapped in
the pond complex (Fig. 1). Twenty-three
(72%) turtles were recaptures from previous
years of study (1982 and 1983) (Ross and
Anderson in press). Of the total B landing’s
turtles, 9 (28%) were males and 23 (72%)
were females. Of these, there were 4 im¬
mature females and 1 possibly immature male.
The sex ratio was 1 (male): 2.5 (female) and
significantly different from 1:1 (P<0.05,
X2 = 6.2). However, the relatively small
sample size and statements by Ream and Ream
(1966) and Gibbons (1970) question the va¬
lidity of sex ratios differing from 1:1. Of the
total adult painted turtles, 72 (58%) were
78
Ecology of Painted and B landing’ s Turtles
Fig. 1. Size classes of Blanding’s and painted turtles. M and F indicate size at maturation in
males and females , respectively.
males, and 53 (42%) were females. The sex
ratio is not significantly different from 1:1
(P>0.05, X2 = 2.8). This is similar to that
found in other studies (Table 1). Immatures
represented about 35% of the population (Fig.
1); the immature to adult ratio was 1.8:1.
Age ratios in C. picta vary widely among
studies (Table 1). Such variation is due to
sampling design and a variety of other factors
(e.g., predation, longevity, and habitat
quality).
No E. blandingi smaller than 111 mm PL
were captured. Gibbons (1968) and Graham
and Doyle (1977) all noted an apparent scar¬
city of juvenile Blanding’s turtles. Congdon
et al. (1983) believe that considering prob¬
able high mortality and predation of eggs and
hatchlings, a true scarcity of younger age
classes exists. However, on 25 May and 9
June 1987, two road-killed E. blandingi (65
mm PL and 114 mm PL, respectively) were
collected near shallow (<0.5m) marshes ad¬
jacent to the PWA. Perhaps juveniles use
habitats separate from adults, thus rendering
them less vulnerable to sampling techniques
employed in this study.
The Blanding’s turtle population in the pond
complex was estimated at 21 individuals (CL
= 15-29), providing a density estimate of
27.5 Blanding’s turtles/ha. Blanding’s turtles
occur at lower densities in marshes in south¬
ern Michigan (8.8 and 10.0 turtles/ha)
(Congdon et al. 1986), while a pond in Mis¬
souri held densities of 55 turtles/ha (Kofron
and Schreiber 1985) (Table 2). These density
estimates are low in comparison to those of
other freshwater turtle populations (Iverson
1982). Painted turtles attained an estimated
density of 104 turtles/ha in the pond com¬
plex, lower than that of other similar studies
(Iverson 1982). The biomass estimate for the
Blanding’s turtle population in the pond com¬
plex is 45 kg/ha. Biomass estimates for two
Michigan marshes (Congdon et al. 1986) were
79
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Table 1 . A comparison of age compositions in painted turtles ( Chrysemys picta)
Immatures Adults Ratio
x = 2.86
SD = 2.721
Table 2. A comparison of estimated densities in Blanding’s turtle ( Emydoidea blandingi)
populations
Extrapolated data.
7.9 kg/ha and 8.8 kg/ha, respectively. The
differences between the two localities may
be a reflection of the concentrated habitats
found in the present study (there is little sim¬
ilar habitat nearby), as well as the apparent
abundance of aquatic prey. Aquatic macroin¬
vertebrates (e.g., Odonata sp., leeches, and
snails), small fish, and frogs are common in
the pond complex. Iverson (1982) states that
populations within ponds tend to have higher
biomasses than those in marsh habitats. Bio¬
mass in reptiles and amphibians often ex¬
ceeds that of sympatric higher vertebrates
(Burton and Likens 1975; Fitch 1975; Iverson
1982; Reichenbach and Dalrymple 1986) that
receive greater management attention. Con¬
servation agencies should give more consid¬
eration to reptiles and amphibians because,
ecologically, they are equally as important
as more highly managed (i.e. game) species.
Female E. blandingi reached sexual ma¬
turity at about 172 mm PL as all gravid fe¬
males with visible annuli captured were greater
than or equal to this length (x = 191.4, range
172-215 mm PL). Age at sexual maturity in
males remains unknown. All females greater
than 172 mm had at least 18 visible annuli.
This indicates that maturity, in Wisconsin
individuals, may be related to size rather than
age, the opposite for Emydoidea in Massa¬
chusetts (Graham and Doyle 1977). This
characteristic has been noted in other species
of turtles as well (Bury 1979). Blanding’s
turtles in Michigan mature at about 162 mm
PL, the age at maturity remaining unknown
(Congdon et al. 1983). The largest Emydoi-
80
Ecology of Painted and Standing’s Turtles
dea in this study was a 215 mm PL female.
Sexual maturity was attained in C. picta
at 80-85 mm PL and 130 mm PL in males
and females, respectively. All gravid females
captured were between 130 mm and 158 mm
PL, similar to measurements of gravid fe¬
males found in other midwestem populations
(Gibbons 1968; Christiansen and Moll 1973;
Tinkle et al. 1981). Females and males reached
sexual maturity at about seven and three years
of age, respectively, similar to findings by
Ernst and Ernst (1972) and Christiansen and
Moll (1973). Gibbons (1968) and Tinkle et
al. (1981) found that females and males ma¬
ture at about seven and five years of age in
southern Michigan. Cunningham (1922) found
that males and females mature at 88 mm and
130 mm, respectively, in Wisconsin. Males
and females matured at 90 mm PL and 112
mm PL, respectively, in southern Michigan
(Tinkle etal. 1981). Southwestern Minnesota
C. p. belli display variable growth rates after
the first season, with the growth rate declin¬
ing as turtles increase in size. Maturity in
males is reached at a PL of about 95 mm in
the third or fourth year. Females mature at
about 110 mm PL and in their fourth or fifth
year (Ernst and Ernst 1972). Male Chrysemys
typically reached maturity before females (Fig.
1). The largest Chrysemys captured in the
PWA was a 168 mm PL female.
Percent growth in Emydoidea was greatest
during the first year of life (85.9%), and
thereafter growth steadily declined until year
8 (Table 3), after which many annuli were
indiscernible. These growth rate data corre¬
spond with Graham and Doyle’s (1977) data,
except that growth in their Massachusetts
population was slightly less (81.4%) during
the first year of life. Two B landing’s turtle
populations in Ontario grew at an even slower
rate in the first year (65.5% and 58.5%) (Pe-
tokas 1986) than did PWA turtles. The growth
rate during the following seven years in the
Ontario populations was also less than that
of the PWA population. This should be ac¬
cepted with caution because Petokas (1986)
aged E. blandingi that were greater than 1 1
years of age, which was not possible in the
present study due to excessive plastral wear.
Prey abundance may be greater in PWA hab¬
itats, thus increasing the growth rate in the
population (Graham and Doyle 1977). Tur¬
tles inhabiting wetlands with organic sub¬
strates display more rapid growth than turtles
from sand-bottomed (low organic) wetlands
(Quinn and Christiansen 1972; Moll 1976).
The pond complex has an organic substrate
while Petokas ’s (1986) population inhabited
wetlands with sand substrate. This phenom¬
enon is probably related to the relatively high
productivity of animal prey in organic sub¬
strates versus that of wetlands with sand sub¬
strate, resulting in faster growth rates (Gib¬
bons 1967; Moll 1976; Quinn and Christiansen
1972). MacCulloch and Secoy (1983) sug-
Table 3. Estimated plastra! growth of nine Emydoidea blandingi from the Petenwell Wildlife
Area, 1986-1988. N refers to the number of individuals.
81
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
gested that the large body size and rapid growth
rate observed in C. p. belli from Saskatch¬
ewan is probably due to a carnivorous diet.
Growth rate in C. picta was rapid during
the first year of life (95.7%) and declined
rapidly thereafter (Table 4). This growth rate
is similar to that found by Ernst (1971a),
Ernst and Ernst (1973), and Hart (1982). At¬
tainment of maturity caused growth rate to
slow even further (Table 4) as found in other
midwestem studies (Ernst and Ernst 1972;
MacCulloch and Secoy 1983).
Certain areas of the pond complex ap¬
peared to hold concentrations of C. picta.
This was probably due to the availability of
basking sites, food, or mating behavior (Vogt
1979). Chrysemys basked as early as 28 Feb¬
ruary due to sunny skies and air temperatures
of 1 9°C . Vogt ( 1 98 1 ) observed painted turtles
active under the ice during early March in
Lake Mendota, Wisconsin. Ernst (1971b) also
observed painted turtles active as early as
March in Pennsylvania.
During this study, many E. blandingi were
recaptured. Time intervals spanning recap¬
ture varied from one day to four years; the
length of time separating trapping dates may
have affected these results. Increased trap¬
ping efforts during other seasons would prob¬
ably have lessened the time span between
recaptures. Movements were common among
the wetland complex as shown in the trapping
data. Blanding’s turtles (N = 17) moved
relatively long distances within the wetland
complex (x = 396.2 m, SD = 114.47 m,
Range 212-652 m). Fifteen other Emydoidea
were considered “residents” of the pond
complex as they were only captured within
that complex. Congdon et al. (1983), work¬
ing in Michigan, found that many individuals
were “residents” of a particular area. Of 30
turtles recaptured within the pond complex
or nearby (<600 m) wetlands, 27 (90%) tur¬
tles were trapped in that complex at least
twice during the present study, indicating a
resident population.
Most of the C. picta population on the
PWA consists of subadults and young adults
(Fig. 1), indicating a stable, growing popu¬
lation. Additionally, recaptures of many in¬
dividuals indicates a well-defined sedentary
population. The immature adult ratio is greater
than that in other similar studies (Table 1).
There also appears to be little difference in
age at maturity of C. picta populations in the
PWA as compared with that of other upper
Midwest populations. Growth rate of PWA
C. picta is rapid early in life (Table 4), sim¬
ilar to that found in other studies.
Low-density freshwater turtle populations
may be related to a scarcity of basking sites
(Pritchard and Greenwood 1968; Harless
1979). Chrysemys populations attaining higher
densities are found in shallower habitats
(Gibbons 1968b; Ernst 1971b) than those in
the present study; maximum depth in PWA
habitats is 0.7 m— - 1 . 3 m. Chrysemys and
Emydoidea may be competing for food and
basking sites. In Wisconsin, C. picta and E.
blandingi feed on similar prey (Vogt 1981).
Table 4. Estimated plastral growth of 53 Chrysemys picta from the Petenwell Wildlife Area,
1985-1988. N refers to the number of individuals.
82
Ecology of Painted and B landing’s Turtles
However, E. blandingi attains a greater size
than C. picta (Fig. 1), allowing speculation
that E. blandingi feeds on larger prey than
does C. picta. Within the PWA, few basking
sites exist disjunct from shore; both species
frequently bask in close proximity to one an¬
other during April and May. The turtles may
not be using the best available basking sites
as 26% of the C. picta population was de¬
predated apparently while basking in April,
1987 (Ross 1988). Spring predation of im-
matures and adults may be a factor in limiting
the C. picta population in the PWA. Simi¬
larly, both species reach their greatest den¬
sities in pond habitats. (E. blandingi, Table
2; C. picta, Bury 1979; Iverson 1982). Chry-
semys males exhibit higher rates of growth
in pond habitats than in river habitats (Gib¬
bons 1967). Petokas (1986) speculated that
in one high-density Ontario population of E.
blandingi, intraspecific competition for food
resources was present.
Competition between sympatric species
often limits the population size or growth rate
of either or both species. Despite apparent
basking sites and, perhaps, food competition,
E. blandingi and C. picta in this study attain
larger body sizes than several studies of the
respective species in southern Michigan.
Growth rate early in life in PWA E. blandingi
and C. picta is rapid. These characters are
probably positively correlated with the wet¬
land productivity in the PWA. Habitat quality
in relation to population characteristics should
be studied in other reptiles to provide base¬
line data for future protection and manage¬
ment guidelines.
Acknowledgments
I thank J. E. Lovich for reviewing this
paper.
Works Cited
Burton, T., and G. Likens. 1975. Energy flow
and nutrient cycling in salamander populations
in the Hubbard Brook Experimental Forest, New
Hampshire. Ecology . 56:1068-1080.
Bury, R. B. 1979. Population ecology of fresh¬
water turtles. In Turtles: Perspectives and re¬
search, ed. M. Harless and H. Morlock, 571-
602. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Cagle, F. R. 1939. A system of marking turtles
for future identification. Copeia 1939:170-173.
_______ . 1942. Turtle populations in southern
Illinois. Copeia 1942:155-162.
_ _ 1954. Observations on the life cycles
of painted turtles (Genus Chrysemys). Am. Midi.
Nat. 52:225-235.
Chapman, D. G., and W. S. Overton. 1966. Es¬
timating and testing differences between pop¬
ulation levels by the Schnabel estimation method.
J. Wildl. Manage. 30:173-180.
Christiansen, J. L., and E. O. Moll. 1973. Lat¬
itudinal reproductive variation within a single
subspecies of painted turtle Chrysemys picta
belli. Herpetologica 29:152-163.
Congdon, J. D., D. W. Tinkle, G. L. Breiten-
bach, and R. C. van Loben Sels. 1983. Nesting
ecology and hatching success in the turtle Emy-
doidea blandingi. Herpetologica 39:417-429.
Congdon, J. D. , J. L. Greene, and J. W. Gibbons.
1986. Biomass of freshwater turtles: A geo¬
graphic comparison. Am. Midi. Nat. 115:165-
173.
Cunningham, B. 1922. Some phases in the de¬
velopment of Chrysemys cinerea. J. Elisha
Mitchell Sci. Soc. 38:51-73.
Ernst, C. H. 1971a. Growth of the painted turtle,
Chrysemys picta , in southeastern Pennsylvania.
Herpetologica 27 : 1 35 - 1 44 .
_ _ _ 1971b. Population and activity cycles
of Chrysemys picta in southeastern Pennsyl¬
vania. J. Herpetol. 5:151-160.
Ernst, C. H., and E. M. Ernst. 1973. Biology of
Chrysemys picta bellii in southwestern Min¬
nesota. J. Minn. Acad. Sci. 38:77-80.
Fitch, H. S. 1975. A demographic study of the
ringneck snake ( Diaphophis punctatus ) in Kan¬
sas. Univ. Kansas Mus. Nat. Hist. Misc. Publ.
62:1-53.
Gibbons, J. W. 1967. Variation in growth rates
in three populations of the painted turtle Chry¬
semys picta. Herpetologica 23:296-303.
_ . 1968a. Observations on the ecology and
population dynamics of the Blanding’s turtle,
Emydoidea blandingi. Can. J. Zool. 46:288-
290.
_ _ 1968b. Population structure and sur¬
vivorship in the painted turtle, Chrysemys picta.
Copeia 1968:260-268.
_ _ . 1970. Sex ratios in turtles. Res. Popul.
Ecol. 12:252-254.
Gibbons, J. W., and J. L. Greene 1979. X-ray
83
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
photography: A technique to determine repro¬
ductive patterns of freshwater turtles. Herpe-
tologica 35:86-89.
Graham, T. E. 1979. Life history techniques. In
Turtles: Perspectives and research, ed. M.
Harless and H. Morlock, 73-95. New York:
John Wiley and Sons.
Graham, T. E., and T. S. Doyle. 1977. Growth
and population characteristics of Blanding’s
turtle, Emydoidea blandingi, in Massachusetts.
Herpetologica 33:410-414.
Harless, M. 1979. Social behavior. In Turtles:
Perspectives and research, ed. M. Harless and
H. Morlock, 475-492. New York: John Wiley
and Sons.
Hart, D. R. 1982. Growth of painted turtles, Chry-
semys picta, in Manitoba and Louisiana. Can.
Field - Nat. 96:127-130.
Iverson, J. B. 1982. Biomass in turtle populations:
A neglected subject. Oecologia 55:69-76.
Kofron, C. P., and A. A. Schreiber. 1985. Ecol¬
ogy of two endangered aquatic turtles in Mis¬
souri: Kinosternon flavescens and Emydoidea
blandingi. J. Herpetol. 19:27-40.
Legler, J. M. 1960. A simple and inexpensive
device for trapping aquatic turtles. Proc. Utah
Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 37:63-66.
MacCulloch, R. D., and D. M. Secoy. 1983.
Demography, growth, and food of western
painted turtles, Chrysemys picta belli (Gray),
from southern Saskatchewan. Can. J. Zool.
61:1499-1509.
Martin, L. 1965. The geography of Wisconsin.
Madison: Univ. of Wisconsin Press.
Moll, D. 1976. Environmental influence on growth
rate in the Ouachita map turtle, Graptemys
pseudogeographica ouachitensis . Herpetolo¬
gica 32:439-443.
Pearse, A. S. 1923. The abundance and migration
of turtles. Ecology 4:24-28.
Petokas, P. J. 1986. Patterns of reproduction and
growth in the freshwater turtle Emydoidea blan¬
dingi. Ph.D. diss., State Univ. New York at
Binghamton.
Pritchard, P. C. H., and W. F. Greenwood. 1968.
The sun and the turtle. Int. Turtle Tortoise Soc.
J. 2:20-25, 34.
Quinn, A. J. 1972. The relationship between pond
bottom type and growth rate of western painted
turtles Chrysemys picta belli in Iowa, a prelim¬
inary report. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 78:67-69.
Ream, C., and R. Ream. 1966. The influence of
sampling methods on the estimation of popu¬
lation structure in painted turtles. Am. Midi.
Nat. 75:325-338.
Reichenbach, N. G., andG. H. Dalrymple. 1986.
Energy use, life histories, and the evaluation
of potential competition in two species of garter
snake. J. Herpetol. 20:133-153.
Ross, D. A. 1988. Chrysemys picta. Predation.
Herpetol. Rev. 19:85, 87.
Ross, D. A., and R. K. Anderson. Habitat use,
movements and nesting of Emydoidea blan¬
dingi in Central Wisconsin. J. Herpetol. (In
press).
Schnabel, Z. E. 1938. Estimation of the total fish
population of a lake. Am. Math. Month. 45:348-
352.
Sergeev, A. 1937. Some materials to the problem
of reptilian post-embryonic growth. Zool. J.
Moscow. 16:723-735.
Sexton, O. J. 1959a. A method of estimating the
age of painted turtles for use in demographic
studies. Ecology 40:716-718.
_ . 1959b. Spatial and temporal move¬
ments of a population of the painted turtle Chry¬
semys picta marginata (Agassiz). Ecol. Mon-
ogr. 29:113-140.
Tinkle, D. W. 1961. Geographic variation in re¬
production, size, sex ratio, and maturity of Ster-
notherus odoratus (Testudinata: Chelydridae).
Ecology 42:68-76.
Vogt, R. C. 1979. Spring aggregating behavior
of painted turtles, Chrysemys picta (Reptilia,
Testudines, Testudinidae). J. Herpetol. 13:363—
365.
_ _ 1981. Natural history of amphibians
and reptiles of Wisconsin. Milwaukee Public
Museum. Milwaukee.
Wilbur, H. M. 1975. The evolutionary and math¬
ematical demography of the turtle Chrysemys
picta. Ecology 56:64-77.
84
Racism and Its Limits:
Common Whites and Blacks
in Antebellum North Carolina
Bill Cecil-Fronsman
In 1802 the “Incorporated Mechanical So¬
ciety of Wilmington’’ petitioned the North
Carolina General Assembly to tighten up en¬
forcement of the laws prohibiting slaves from
hiring their own time. According to the pe¬
tition, slaves were working for less than half
the rate a white mechanic charged and were
hiring apprentices who, with their employ¬
ers, were free to consort and plot insurrec¬
tions. The petition concluded that because
the white mechanics served on juries, per¬
formed military duties, and paid taxes, it was
unfair that “bread should be taken out of the
mouths of themselves and families by per¬
sons, who circumstanced as they are, are the
irreconcilable enemies of the Whites.” 1
In 1809 John P. Waters of Wilkes County,
a county located on the western edge of the
piedmont, drafted a petition asking that the
State Legislature relieve him of a large fine.
It seems that Waters had fallen in love with
Elisabeth Culms, “a woman of colour,” and
had begun living with her. The petition stated
that he knew this was wrong and that he
wanted to marry her, but he knew that such
a marriage was illegal. “In the mean while,”
he wrote, “an Intimacy took place which
appeared Irresistable, the fruits of which has
been six fine children.” John and Elizabeth
were convicted and fined twenty-five pounds
each, a sum greater than the value of all he
possessed. Although he knew that living with
her was “unlawful and Irreligious,” he re¬
fused to abandon his family. “He is from the
love he bares his said little children and their
kind mother, still desirous to keep them to¬
gether to do a fatherly & Husbands part by
Bill Cecil-Fronsman is Assistant Professor of History at
Washburn University of Topeka, Kansas.
them, as time or circumstance cannot alienate
them from him.” 2
These two petitions, written only seven
years apart, in the same state, by men of
comparable status, demonstrate the range of
common- white beliefs about race. Common
whites were white nonslaveholders and small
slaveholders who were perceived by them¬
selves and others as not being members of
the society’s political, social, or economic
elite. It is admittedly more difficult to deter¬
mine who was not a common white than who
was. An individual owning twenty slaves
certainly would not have been a common
white. Most individuals owning no slaves
would have been, although some nonslave¬
holders were quite wealthy or politically and
socially prominent. In North Carolina, where
this study is focused, 70.8 percent of the
whites owned no slaves in 1860. Of the nearly
35,000 slaveholders only around 9,100, or
approximately 7.7 percent of the total pop¬
ulation, owned as many as ten. For the pur¬
pose at hand one may assume that roughly
eighty to eighty-five percent of North Car¬
olina’s white population was “common.” 3
It is a widely held assumption among his¬
torians that the common whites were extraor¬
dinarily racist and that their racism cemented
their loyalties to the slaveholders’ regime.
This racism further led them to plunge them¬
selves into a blood bath to preserve slavery
in 1861. The standard accounts of the roles
of common whites in the political crisis of
the 1850s all emphasize this point. “The im¬
portance of the racial issue cannot be over¬
emphasized,” writes William L. Barney.
“Racism was the secessionists’ greatest
weapon. They knew precisely what South¬
erners dreaded most and by constantly ex¬
acerbating this fear . . . [they] succeeded in
85
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
building up tensions and hatreds which looked
to secession as an outlet.” The racism of the
common whites was, in the words of William
J. Cooper “omnipotent” and led them to
have “no interest in challenging the social
order guaranteed by the slave system, which
provided social peace despite the presence of
millions of blacks, a group white yeomen
believed absolutely inferior.”4
Historians who have grappled with the
problems of common-white racism have rec¬
ognized that this racism took a different form
than the paternalism that some historians have
ascribed to the planter class. Eugene D. Gen¬
ovese argues that a sense of responsibility to
the alleged inferiors on the plantation evolved
among the slaveholding class. This argu¬
ment, however, has little bearing on the in¬
dividuals who did not own any slaves. In¬
stead, most scholars have ascribed to the
common whites a harsher racism, bom out
of a fear of competition. Steven Hahn writes
how yeoman farmers viewed blacks as
“symbols of a condition they most feared —
abject and perpetual dependency.” The slaves’
strict subordination “provided essential safe¬
guards for their [yeomanry’s] way of life.”
As petty property owners, they sought to de¬
fine “the dispossed out of the political
community.” 5
For some commentators, common- white
racism is chiefly defined by its competitive
quality. Pierre L. van den Berghe’s compar¬
ative study of race relations sets out two broad
types of biracial societies. The first is the
paternalistic type, in which wide gulfs in sta¬
tus, occupation, and income separate racial
castes. The second, or the competitive type,
is an arrangement in which a color bar exists,
but the existence of that color bar does not
prevent members of the subordinate race from
approaching members of the dominant race.
The result is often competition. In the pa¬
ternalistic type, all persons know their places,
and the dominant group needs relatively little
violence to ensure its position. In the com¬
petitive type, roles are ill-defined and vio¬
lence serves to enforce the dominant race’s
position. In these regimes a kind of herren-
volk democracy emerges, in which egalitar¬
ian ideals may flourish but are restricted to
the dominant race. George M. Fredrickson
has developed this perspective by contending
that the southern elite class used the rhetoric
of herrenvolk democracy to protect their po¬
sitions from potential assaults from within
the region and from real assaults from the
North.6
The thesis of this essay is that these char¬
acterizations of common whites must be
qualified. No one who has studied antebellum
southern whites can deny their racism or deny
that it played an important role in ensuring
that they would take steps to protect slavery.
But a close examination of the records they
left behind suggests that there were limits to
their racism. Some common whites rejected
and others significantly modified the racism
that was so pervasive. They set limits to then-
racism because they found that such limits
met their personal needs for intimacy and
friendship or because they found an “om¬
nipotent” racism to be incompatible with then-
conflicts with the planter class.
For the purpose at hand, racism will be
defined as the collection of norms that pre¬
scribe strict boundaries between the social
space of whites and that of blacks. It is a
cultural phenomenon that requires barriers
separating blacks and whites. These barriers
might include the way people act in public,
the kinds of jobs they can hold, the sorts of
people they can love, or with whom they can
engage in sexual relations. Racist norms as¬
sert that the barriers are not only legitimate,
but that steps must be taken to strengthen and
maintain them.7
If one accepts the notion that racism is a
phenomenon that designates strict barriers
between whites and blacks, then certain racist
actions start to make sense. For example, in
1818 an Iredell County militia company re¬
quested a law to prevent blacks from loitering
while the company drilled. Although Iredell
County was less than one-quarter black, the
men complained about “the Numirous quan¬
tity of Negroes which generally assemble at
Regimental or batalion Musters . . . which
is productive of much vice & immorality.” 8
By taking this action, common whites helped
86
Common Whites and Blacks in Antebellum North Carolina
to widen the gulf between themselves and
blacks by asserting that some kinds of activ¬
ities were simply not appropriate for so de¬
graded a caste. White observers, in contrast,
were obviously not members of an inferior
caste because their presence was welcome.
A second sentiment which these Iredell
County petitioners asserted was that the black
presence led to vice and immorality. This
implied not only a generalized aversion to¬
wards blacks but also imputed to them a par¬
ticular, inevitable quality. This projection
helped ensure that the boundaries between
the races would remain fixed. Common whites
could define themselves in contrast to blacks:
“they are given to vice and immorality; we
are not.” Common whites thus appropriated
a certain status for themselves by assigning
the opposite one to blacks.
Among the many characteristics which
common whites projected onto blacks was
that of thievery. In 1848 when James G.
Mitchell of Raleigh asked for permission to
erect a shanty on a state rock quarry, he off¬
handedly noted that it might protect the quarry
from “negro and other plunderers.” 9 There
was a basic acceptance of this belief. Com¬
mon whites humorously referred to the al¬
leged “negro trait” in this popular folk ditty:
Some folks say a nigger won’t steal
But I caught seven in my com field
One had a bushel and the other had peck
One had a roas’n ear strung around his neck.10
By conceiving of black people as thieves the
common whites thus defined themselves as
something else and hence worthy of
admiration.
Not only did common whites differentiate
themselves from blacks by conceiving of them
as transgressors of the law, as shown by the
folk ditty and the example of the Wilmington
mechanics cited in the introduction, they also
used their beliefs about black sexuality to set
themselves apart. A joke from eastern North
Carolina illustrates a widely held common-
white assumption about black men. A planter
had a slave, Sam, whom he used for breed¬
ing. A friend of the planter’s asked to borrow
him for the women on his own plantation.
The owner left the decision up to Sam. The
slave was reluctant; his owner encouraged
him, saying there were some ‘ ‘nice black gals
waiting there.” — “How many?” — “five
or six” — “Boss, if it jes’ as well wid you,
I druther not go. Too far a piece fer jes’ a
half-day’s work.”11
In 1802 there was an insurrection scare in
the northeastern part of the state. The anxi¬
eties expressed suggest something of what
lay behind the fears of common whites and
their planter neighbors. According to the re¬
ports of this alleged conspiracy, the rebels
planned to bum the town of Windsor. They
were then to kill all the white men and older
black women. After accomplishing this deed
they would keep the white women for them¬
selves while using the black girls as servants.
From then on, the reports claim, “they were
to have their freedom and live as white
people.” 12
Common-white men believed that pos¬
sessing white women was one of the symbols
that set them apart from black men. When
they imagined blacks on a rampage, it was
natural that they believed the slaves would
seek to capture the whites’ own prized pos¬
sessions. In order to have freedom and live
as white men, blacks would need white
women. By denying blacks access to their
women, whites believed they were denying
something that was necessary for living as
free men. The racial and sexual double stan¬
dard that permitted white men to indulge
themselves with black women (but denied
white women and black men a comparable
privilege) reinforced this symbolic division.
Common-white men who used some form of
coercion to gain sexual access to black women
were strengthening the barriers between
themselves and blacks. They were asserting
power over blacks. They were asserting that
“we can have access to your women but you
cannot have access to ours.” The legal sys¬
tem tolerated this practice as well. The law
severely punished white women who bore
mixed-race children; it left unpunished white
men who fathered mulattoes.13
When law and custom tolerated common-
white abuses of blacks but prevented blacks
87
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
from replying in kind or even defending
themselves, a clear message was being given:
common whites could act like free men; blacks
could not. However poor and degraded a white
man might be, he could still rent a slave from
one of his wealthy neighbors and expect def¬
erential behavior from him. Should this be¬
havior not be forthcoming, common whites
could then take steps to coerce it.14
Common whites seeking to strengthen the
barriers might turn to actions that humiliated
or degraded blacks. In 1842 Lunsford Lane,
a former slave, returned to Raleigh to buy
some of his family and take them to the North.
A mob, which one commentator called “some
of our rowdies,” met him. They accused him
of preaching abolition and tarred and feath¬
ered him. After the mob had completed its
task the mood changed. The people returned
Lane’s clothes, and, to his surprise, his watch.
“They all expressed great interest in my wel¬
fare, advised me to proceed with my business
the next day, told me to stay in the place as
long as I chose, and with words of like con¬
solation, bade me good-night. They felt that
they had now degraded me to a level beneath
themselves.” 15
Lane’s comment was perceptive. The mob
was interested in reminding Lane (and more
importantly themselves) that his status was
beneath theirs. Although he might have been
a well-dressed, articulate man with contacts
in some important places, he was still a black
man whom they could abuse without fear of
retribution. An unbridgeable gap separated
them from him, and they were going to make
sure the differences were widely known.
It is actions like these that lend credence
to characterizations of the common whites as
universally racist. And one cannot deny the
pervasiveness of their racism. But one must
keep in mind how racism helped to establish
clear, definable boundaries between common
whites and blacks. Common whites did not
normally think of blacks as “the irreconcil¬
able enemies of the whites” (to use the
expression employed by the Incorporated
Mechanical Society of Wilmington). But when
boundaries were crossed, and when that
crossing threatened the common-white po¬
sition, they would take actions or make char¬
acterizations that rigidly and racistly defined
the black sphere.
However pervasive these racist attitudes
may have been, they tell only part of the
story. If common- white racism insisted on
perpetuating certain boundaries, there were,
nevertheless, areas of social space allotted to
blacks. Within those areas common whites
and blacks could interact in a manner ap¬
proaching equality and engage in behaviors
that would challenge the rigid social bound¬
aries in other areas. Different individuals,
naturally, drew the lines in different places.
A wide spectrum of beliefs about the appro¬
priate distinctions between white and black
emerged, challenging any notion that the
common whites were uniformly, unthink¬
ingly, or omnipotently racist.
At the extreme end of the spectrum were
the religious antislavery advocates. They be¬
lieved that not only were all people equal in
the eyes of God but that society must struc¬
ture itself along more equal lines by abolish¬
ing slavery. Levi Coffin, who grew up in the
Quaker community of New Garden, Guilford
County, recalled, “Both my parents and
grandparents were opposed to slavery, and
none of either of the families ever owned
slaves; and all were friends of the oppressed,
so I claim that I inherited my anti-slavery
principles. ” 16 Coffin’s antislavery principles
led him to action. Although one might doubt
his claim to being the president of the un¬
derground railroad, Coffin did help slaves
escape their bondage at considerable personal
risk. Coffin was exceptional, of course, and
the Quaker sect to which he belonged was a
minority, but Coffin was a common white
who did what he could to end slavery.
Coffin was not alone. In 1807 Eli and Wil¬
liam Copeland of Hertford County sought to
free their mulatto slave because “they have
considered for a length of time that it is in¬
compatible with the tenets of Christianity”
to enslave a man.17 Not only were the Cope¬
lands sacrificing a substantial portion of their
estate, they were also obliterating the basic
distinction between themselves and this par¬
ticular slave. They could not change his skin
88
Common Whites and Blacks in Antebellum North Carolina
color; they could not change his manner of
speaking, way of dressing, style of religion,
or any number of other symbols that sepa¬
rated him from themselves. But they could
undermine the greatest boundary between
them; they could destroy the distinction
whereby they were free and another man was
a slave.
More typical examples of common-white
resistance to slavery were ad hoc measures
to help runaway slaves. Slaveholders were
suspicious at times that local common whites
had abetted their runaway chattel. An 1803
advertisement from Franklin County de¬
scribes a slave and adds, “I have Reasons to
believe that the Negro obtained a Pass from
a trifling Person.” Another advertisement from
1801 notes “The Negro is so well known in
the Neighborhood of Waynesborough . . .
where I presume he is harboured by white
persons, that there needs no particular
Description.” 18
When common whites had personal rela¬
tionships with slaves, they might run the risk
of assisting in escapes. This seems to have
been more prevalent among common whites
who shared degraded positions with blacks.
Daniel O’ Rafferty worked as a journeyman
tailor in the same Craven County shop as a
slave, Albert. O’ Rafferty was said to be
“greatly under the influence and control” of
Albert who “possessed the entire confi¬
dence” of O’ Rafferty. When his owner died
in 1846, Albert convinced O’ Rafferty that he
was to be freed. O’ Rafferty then tried to help
his friend leave the state. O’ Rafferty’s Irish
background may have led him to be more
sympathetic with his friend’s plight. As the
former slave, Charity Austin, recalled of her
youth in Granville County: “We children stole
eggs and sold ’em during slavery. Some of
de white men bought ’em. They were Irish¬
men and would not tell on us.” 19
At times common whites and slaves be¬
came a good deal more than friends. In 1825
Jim, a slave of Abraham Peppinger of Dav¬
idson County, and Polly Lane, a hired white
girl on the farm, became lovers and planned
to escape together. A visitor to the farm lost
his pocketbook containing $260 and the con¬
sensus of those in the neighborhood was that
the two had stolen the money in order to get
away. Unfortunately for Jim, when the news
broke, Polly abandoned him and accused him
of raping her. When her mulatto child was
bom considerably less then nine months after
the alleged rape, her story lost credibility.20
Common whites did not have to take dra¬
matic measures to soften the lines separating
them from blacks. Some common whites who
would never have dreamed of helping slaves
escape formed friendships with slaves that
challenged the harsh racial boundaries. Chil¬
dren in particular seem to have been freer of
the culture’s stifling racism. In areas where
lower-class whites, upper-class whites, and
black children grew up together, one play¬
mate might well be as good as another. Elias
Thomas, an ex-slave from Chatham County,
recalled: “we thought well of our poor white
neighbors. We colored children took them as
regular playmates. Marster’s boys played with
’em too.” After childhood some common
whites continued the friendships they had
started in their youth. Archibald Campbell,
also of Chatham, was convicted of playing
cards with a black man. A nonslaveholder,
Campbell lived “in a section of country where
the same thing is often done.” In addition,
Campbell’s petition asserted that “[he] knew
no difference between playing with a white
man or sporting with a coloured one, not
knowing that the laws of the county forbid
the latter. ’ ’ Campbell was not the only com¬
mon white to get in trouble with the law for
this offense. The small slaveholders, Simon
D. Pemberton and John Smith of Richmond
County, were convicted because they “un¬
lawfully did play at cards with certain slaves
... to the evil example of all others.” 21
Twentieth-century sociological studies
suggest that the poorest whites have not been
the most virulent racists. Rather, the worst
racists tend to be whites whose social posi¬
tion approaches the boundary between non¬
elite and elite status without fully entering
the higher position. John Dollard noted in his
1937 study that blacks believed their real an¬
tagonists were “strainers.” Those straining
to get on in the world stressed racial differ-
89
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
ences because they were unsure of their own
positions. The lowest-status whites also suf¬
fered various forms of discrimination and
hence, developed a certain sympathy towards
blacks. Studies of bigots corroborate Dol-
lard’s findings. Individuals with “authori¬
tarian personalities” normally come from the
lower-middle class. They are unsure of then-
own positions relative to those above and
below them and feel safe only if everyone
stays in his or her place. The lower-middle
class, then, would be the group most depen¬
dent on overt social statements of racial su¬
periority, not the lowest class. One should
not assume that the poorest whites have been
the staunchest proponents of rigid racial
boundaries.22
The antebellum record seems to have been
similar; associations between blacks and whites
occurred with the greatest frequency among
the poorest elements of the common whites.
The Irish tailor who helped his black fellow
journeyman to escape and the servant girl
who stole a purse to bankroll her and her
black lover’s aborted flight did so because
their sense of common plight allowed them
to broaden their racial boundaries. This same
sentiment was present in 1836 when two whites
and three slaves joined forces and bored a
passage out of the Tarboro jail. Feelings of
a common plight were again present in Ashe¬
ville where, according to George Swain (father
of the future governor), a grog shop was so
infamous that nobody went there “by day¬
light except Negros and Drunkards.” In Fay¬
etteville crime reports reveal relaxed color
prohibitions in which some poor whites and
blacks drank, whored, and plotted crimes
together.23
Not only did low estate lead some common
whites to disregard some of the racial bound¬
aries, but so, too, did strong emotions and
powerful passions. The common- white males’
racial code set white women apart for them¬
selves. This did not prevent some common-
white women from having sexual relation¬
ships with black men. For example, Lewis
Tombereau petitioned the State Legislature
in 1824 for a divorce from his wife. The
French-immigrant shoemaker living in Mar¬
90
tin County described her in his petition as
“one of the most frail, lewd, and depraved
daughters of Eve.” The petition claimed that
she abandoned her husband, took up with a
mulatto barber, and bore a racially mixed
child. After this she “became and continues
to be, a public and notorious prostitute in the
most unlimited sense of that word. She [is]
indulging in an unreserved, and promiscuous
intercourse with men of every colour, age,
class, and description she meets. In a similar
instance John Hancock of Hertford County
asked for a divorce from his wife, Tabetha,
in 1813. The woman “abandoned herself to
the most vile prostitution and debauchery —
has had Children of various colours and com¬
plexions.” A supporting statement added,
“She Cohabbets and Equallises her Self with
Mulattoes and Negroes in all Cases and . . .
Lives at a Negro Quarter among Negroes. ”24
Despite enormous social pressures to the
contrary, some common whites formed deep
attachments with blacks. The divorce pro¬
ceedings show numerous white women with
black lovers, though this was probably be¬
cause white men could more easily conceal
forbidden love affairs than white women.
Sometimes, however, the women did try. In
1821 Caleb Miller asked for a divorce from
his wife Rachael. Six months after their mar¬
riage she gave birth to a child. Miller was
away for much of the time, and Rachael kept
the baby in a dark room. Although Miller
did not suspect anything, local gossip began
claiming that the child was a mulatto. He
took it to a doctor, and another woman pro¬
nounced it black. In another case, Sarah
Cowan of Rowan County gave birth to a mu¬
latto child in 1794. Although it was clear to
the neighborhood that the child was not white,
’’such was the exalted opinion which he en¬
tertained of the decency and virtue of his
wife,” that her husband, Isaac, “could not
believe or harbor an unchaste thought” of
her. He waited, and as the child grew older
he saw that it was obviously not his own. He
remained loyal and maintained hope of her
repentance “until the birth of a second of the
same hue with the first.” In 1802 he asked
for a divorce.25
Common Whites and Blacks in Antebellum North Carolina
It was not always necessary for children
to bear witness to a woman’s infidelity.
Sometimes the women made no secret of their
love affairs. In 1832 John Johnson of Orange
County petitioned the legislature to dissolve
his marriage, “being distitute of Land of his
Own he was induced to become a Partner in
a farm with a free Negro during which time
his wife Peggy formed an attachment to said
negro and consequently treated your Peti¬
tioner in such a way that he was forced to
abandon her.” Between 1800 and 1835, 7.5
percent of all divorces were granted for co¬
habitation with blacks.26
Common whites who formed romantic at¬
tachments with blacks did so at considerable
risk. The story of John P. Waters and Elis¬
abeth Culms cited earlier is one example of
the consequences befalling those who vio¬
lated their society’s norms.
Most common whites did not fall in love
with blacks. But many of them did interact
with neighboring slaves and free blacks in a
manner that approached equality and blurred
of racial boundaries. Common whites and
blacks attended churches together, prayed to¬
gether, and went to revivals together. They
might partake of the same extrareligious be¬
liefs as well. For instance, James Reel of Pitt
County, who owned a few slaves, regularly
visited a black conjuror who told him he was
being tricked by persons who wanted his
property. The two groups might also join in
illegal activities. Thomas Jones of Chowan
County stole four pigs from his uncle and
sold them to a free black woman.27
However, most of the joint thefts appar¬
ently worked the opposite way. Slaves would
steal from their masters and sell or trade the
goods to local common whites. The practice
seems to have been commonplace. David
Thomas of Bladen County ran into trouble
in 1827 for trading with slaves. Thomas
pointed out that he was a “very poor man,”
afflicted with rheumatism, “and if in this
instance he has violated the laws of his County,
he has done nothing more than what others
more able to support themselves then he is
are in the daily habit of doing, with
impunity.” 28
To engage in this kind of traffic, common
whites and slaves had to develop a relation¬
ship and trust to carry on the exchanges and
avoid getting caught. One ex-slave from Wake
County complained that sometimes owners
made blacks violate this trust. A master might
force a slave to take things from his house
and sell or trade them to local common whites.
Then the slaveholder would come along, dis¬
cover his property, and swear out a writ. The
owner would then give the poor white the
chance to sell out to him and leave or face
the consequences.29 But this kind of setup
was probably rare.
Not only did the slaves and common whites
have to develop a degree of trust, but they
also had to engage in a comparable amount
of planning. In 1844 in Northampton County,
James Hart found himself on trial for trading
stolen goods with a slave. A witness de¬
scribed what had taken place: about two hours
before dawn a slave took a bag of cotton and
a jug to Hart’s house. A short while later the
slave left the house with an empty bag and
a full jug.30 No slave would have ever gone
up to a strange house in the middle of the
night with a bag of stolen cotton. The trans¬
action had to have been arranged some time
before.
The common whites in these situations were
in effect hiring slaves to steal from their mas¬
ters. However much they might dislike blacks,
the common whites’ greed and hostility to¬
wards the planters prompted them to make
common cause with blacks. William D. Val¬
entine recalled that when he was a boy on
his father’s eastern plantation “a few mean
and occasionally scoundrally families did for
a long time keep a familiarity and traffic with
our black portion of the family. There were
no other negroes in the neighborhood.” The
Valentines, the only slaveholders in the
neighborhood, were a ready target for
common- white hostility. The traffic with slaves
was in many ways comparable to the poach¬
ing that supplemented the diets of eighteenth-
century Englishmen. One could not injure the
interests of another lower-class Englishman
by poaching game, only the interests of the
lord who owned it. Similarly, nonslavehold-
91
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
ers could not be injured when slaves stole
goods from their masters and traded them to
common whites. In both cases the law served
to protect the interests of the ruling classes
at the expense of the lower classes. Yet the
common whites had sufficient solidarity to
tolerate the practice of trading stolen goods
with blacks. When their numbers were large
enough they might refuse to convict of¬
fenders or merely slap them on the wrist.
Apparently the trade was impossible to cur¬
tail. A group of planters from Pasquotank
County complained in 1848: “Efforts have
been made, and are constantly being made
by our citizens to bring these offenders to
justice, some times successfully — but not to
such an extent as to remedy the evil.” 31
The common whites’ ability to get along
well enough with neighboring blacks calls
into question blanket assumptions about their
racism. They did not have to like blacks in
order to hire them to steal. But common whites
did have to be willing to treat them with a
modicum of respect and dignity. Blacks cer¬
tainly did not have to go to a particular com¬
mon white with their stolen goods. Unless
he treated them decently, there was little rea¬
son to suppose slaves would keep coming
back. By trading with slaves common whites
were allowing the racial boundaries to be¬
come fuzzy. Their own self-interest de¬
manded that they see slaves as sharing in a
common predicament.
The common whites, then, were willing
to let the boundaries between the races be¬
come blurred when it was in their own in¬
terest. When they could get a particular good
at a cheap price (and have the added pleasure
of causing a neighboring planter fits), they
would lower the barriers. When they could
get love or friendship at a time when they
felt alone in the world or during some other
curious set of circumstances, they would
abandon the sharp lines of racial separation
in favor of ones that were less distinct. Here,
then, were the limits of racism.
The common whites’ perceptions of slav¬
ery were scarcely monolithic. They were quite
aware that slavery was anything but a benign
system for upgrading the welfare of con¬
tented blacks. In 1845 the leading Demo¬
cratic Party newspaper, the North Carolina
Standard, which claimed to be the advocate
of the common man’s interests, printed a joke
under the heading “African Candor.’’ The
joke describes a conversation between a slave
named Cudjo and his master. The master asks
him if he had attended church. Cudjo says
he had and adds, “an’ what two mighty big
stories dat preacher did tell.’ ’ The master asks
him what stories (that is, what lies) the preacher
told. “Why he tell the people no man can
serve two massas — now dis is de fuss story,
’cause you see Old Cudjo serves you, my
old massa, an’ also young massa John. Den
de preacher says, ’he will lub de one and hate
de other’ while de Lord knows, / hate you
boffr At one level, common whites recog¬
nized that the slaves had every reason to de¬
spise the men who enslaved them.32
Common whites were not unaware of the
horrors that took place in slavery. Their gen¬
eral reaction was to ignore them, rationalize
them, or even participate in some of them.
But at the same time common- white culture
recognized that slavery could be a cruel sys¬
tem capable of making a man insane. A folk
tale collected in Burlington in the 1930s il-
llustrates the cultural memory that existed
long after slavery had ended. The story tells
of an A. M. Duncan, who allegedly lived
around 1800. Duncan was known to be cruel
to his slaves. He hung them by their thumbs
in the smokehouse; he would cut off their
ears and hang them up. He was alleged to
have twenty pairs of black ears hung in that
smokehouse alone. He would tie his slaves
to stakes, beat them with a cat-o’ -nine-tails,
and rub salt and vinegar on the wounds.
Duncan’s favorite target was a slave named
Crazy Sam. Sam was a mulatto; some said
he was Duncan’s half-brother. Such talk only
made Duncan beat him more frequently. One
moonless night Sam had taken enough. He
went to the master’s bedroom and drove an
ax into the head of the person asleep on the
bed. Unfortunately for Sam, he had not killed
Duncan but a boy who lived with him. The
92
Common Whites and Blacks in Antebellum North Carolina
next morning Duncan came with gun in hand,
looking for the murderer. Sam rushed Dun¬
can with his ax and split his master’s head
to his shoulders.
Word of the incident reached the com¬
munity. The neighbors and constable came.
Sam held them off with Duncan’s gun and
killed the constable. Stray shots hit another
white man, Sam’s wife, and his children.
Finally, Sam was killed. According to leg¬
end, from then on the house was haunted.
Every night Duncan’s ghost would bind Crazy
Sam’s ghost to the whipping stake, lash him,
pour salt on his cuts, and hang him by the
thumbs in the smokehouse. Any traveller
hearing Sam’s screams would be instantly
turned stone deaf.33
The folktale says a great deal about the
people who created it. The common whites
thought of slavery as a brutal institution that
might drive men crazy. Crazy Sam appar¬
ently lost his sanity under the pressure from
his tormentor. Sam murdered his master, but
his response did not seem unreasonable.
Clearly the brute in the story was Duncan,
not his black slave. Although the story showed
the common whites’ sympathy for the plight
of the slave, it also showed that they would
not allow the slaves to resort to insurrection
to alter their condition. The community ral¬
lied to kill Sam even though they knew what
kind of beast his owner was. Common whites
were willing to defend slavery even though
they might believe it was wrong. In general,
this was the common- white view of slavery.
Although they approved of the institution’s
ability to define the black place in society,
they also recognized the essential inhumanity
inherent in the system. Elmina Foster’s rec¬
ollections of her childhood attitudes towards
slavery were probably typical of many com¬
mon whites. Although she grew up in a non¬
slaveholding family of Quakers, she remem¬
bered pitying the slaves’ conditions: “Brought
up as I was in a slave holding neighborhood,
accustomed to seeing slaves at work on all
sides, in the fields, I supposed conditions to
remain the same always, for slavery was a
vast, far reaching thing, so deeply entrenched
in society, it did not seem possible that it
should ever be eradicated.” 34
Endnotes
'This petition is found in Legislative Papers
North Carolina State Division of Archives and
History, Raleigh, NC, Box 192 (hereafter cited
as LP 192).
2LP 237.
3For a more thorough discussion of the defini¬
tion of common whites see Bill Cecil-Fronsman,
‘ ‘The Common Whites: Class and Culture in An¬
tebellum North Carolina,’ ’ Chap. 1 in Ph.D. diss. ,
University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, 1983.
4William L. Barney, The Secessionist Impulse:
Alabama and Mississippi in 1860 (Princeton:
Princeton University Press, 1974), pp. 229-30;
William J. Cooper, Jr., Liberty and Slavery:
Southern Politics to 1860 (New York: Alfred A.
Knopf, Inc., 1983), p. 249.
5Eugene D. Genovese’s theories of paternalism
are best stated in The World the Slaveholders Made:
Two Essays in Interpretation (New York: Alfred
A. Knopf, 1969), Book II. For an alternative read¬
ing of the slaveholders that emphasizes the harsher
side of their racism see James Oakes, The Ruling
Race: A History of American Slaveholders (New
York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1982). The quotations
from Hahn are from Steven Hahn, The Roots of
Southern Populism: Yeoman Farmers and the
Transformation of the Georgia Upcountry, 1850-
1890 (New York: Oxford University Press, 1983).
6Pierre L. van den Berghe, Race and Racism:
A Comparative Approach (New York: John Wiley
& Sons, Inc., 1967), Ch. 1. George Fredrickson
has stated his position in several places. A good
introduction to his use of the herrenvolk concept
is The Black Image in the White Mind : The Debate
on Afro-American Character and Destiny , 1817-
1914 (New York: Harper & Row, 1967), pp 58-
70.
There is, of course, an extensive literature on
racism. In addition to the works cited in this ar¬
ticle, I have found James M. Jones, Prejudice and
Racism (Reading, Mass.: Addison- Wesley, 1972)
to be of particular help. Space limitations prevent
a discussion of the process by which these norms
evolved within common- white culture. See Cecil-
Fronsman, “The Common Whites,’’ chapter 3 on
this point. Readers should note that most scholars
believe that however racist common whites may
have been in the antebellum period, their descen¬
dants were far more racist in the postbellum pe-
93
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
riod. See Joel Williamson, The Crucible of Race:
Black-White Relations in the American South Since
Emancipation (New York: Oxford University Press,
1984).
8LP 312.
9LP 631.
“Newman Ivey White, gen. ed. , The Frank C.
Brown Collection of North Carolina Folklore
(Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 1952, 1961),
III 508. See also George P. Rawick, ed., The
American Slave: A Composite Autobiography vols.
XIV and XV: North Carolina Narratives (West-
port, Conn.: Greenwood Publishing Co., 1972)
(hereafter cited, Rawick, NC Narratives) XIV 424
where a former slave discusses how slave patroll¬
ers sang this song.
MRoy Johnson, “A Sampling of Eastern Oral
Folk Humour,’ ’ North Carolina Folklore Journal
XXin (1975):5.
12This incident is well discussed in John Scott
Strickland, “The Great Revival and Insurrection¬
ary Fears in North Carolina: An Examination of
Antebellum Southern Society and Slave Revolt
Panics,’’ Class, Conflict, and Consensus: Ante¬
bellum Southern Community Studies, ed. Orville
Burton and Robert C. Me Math, Jr. (Westport,
Conn.: Greenwood Publishing Co., 1982), pp 62-
63.
13See Katherine Ann McGreachy, “The North
Carolina Slave Code,’’ Master’s thesis, University
of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, 1948.
14 This practice was confirmed by the North
Carolina Supreme Court in the case of State v.
Jowers 11 Iredell 55 [1850].
15 William G. Hawkins, Lunsford Lane: or An¬
other Helper From North Carolina (New York:
Negro Universities Press, 1969 [1853]), p. 156.
The comment about the mob is by David W. Stone
and is found in a letter to Supreme Court Chief
Justice, Thomas Ruffin. See J. G. deRoulhac
Hamilton, ed., The Papers of Thomas Ruffin (Ra¬
leigh: Publications of the North Carolina Histor¬
ical Commission, 1918) II 205.
l6Levi Coffin, Reminiscences of Levi Coffin:
The Reputed President of the Underground Rail¬
road, 2d ed. with appendix (Cincinnati: Robert
Clarke & Co., 1880), p. 11.
17LP 226.
"Raleigh Register 12-12-1803, 1-17-1801.
19Govemors Papers, North Carolina Division of
Archives and History, Box 1 16 n.d. [1846] (here¬
after cited as GP 116); Rawick, NC Narratives
XIV 59.
“See documents in GP 55.
21Rawick, NC Narratives XV 345; GP 94; State
v. Pemberton and Smith 2 Devereux 281 [1829].
22 John Dollard, Caste and Class in a Southern
Town. 2d ed. (New York: Harper & Brothers,
1937, 1949), p. 77-78; Joel Kovel, White Rac¬
ism: A Psychohistory (New York: Pantheon Books,
1970), p. 56.
23North Carolina Standard 1-11-1836; George
Swain to David Swain 8-16-1822, Swain Collec¬
tion, Southern Historical Collection, University
of North Carolina; Harry L. Watson, Jacksonian
Politics and Community Conflict: The Emergence
of the Second American Party System in Cum¬
berland County, North Carolina (Baton Rouge:
Louisiana State University Press, 1981), p. 44.
^LP 377; LP 276.
“LP 336; LP 192.
26LP 485; Guion Griffis Johnson, Ante-Bellum
North Carolina: A Social History, (Chapel Hill:
University of North Carolina Press, 1937), p. 211.
21 Reel v. Reel 2 Hawkes 53 [1822]; State v.
Jones 3 Dev. and Bat. 2 [1833].
28LP 415.
“Rawick, NC Narratives XIV 319.
^State v. Hart 4 Iredell 246 [1844].
31William D. Valentine Diary, 10-23-1842,
Southern Historical Collection, University of North
Carolina; Eugene D. Genovese, Roll, Jordan, Roll:
The World the Slaves Made (New York: Pantheon
Books, 1974), p. 642; LP 637. On poaching see
Douglas Hay, “Poaching and the Game Laws on
Cannock Chase,’’ Albion's Fatal Tree: Crime and
Society in Eighteenth-Century England ed. Doug¬
las Hay et al., (New York: Pantheon Books, 1975),
pp. 202-12.
32North Carolina Standard 11-5-1845.
33This remarkable tale was collected by an anon¬
ymous Federal Writers Project writer from Flora
Fowler of Burlington. It is printed as “The Old
Duncan House,” North Carolina Folklore
l(1948):7-8. It is impossible to tell with complete
certainty whether this tale was fashioned before
or after the Civil War. The references to slavery
and the year 1800 suggest that it had antebellum
origins. Moreover, a similar tale was collected in
Lincoln County, Kentucky, which sets the inci¬
dent about the same time. See William Lynwood
Montel, Ghosts Along the Cumberland: Deathlore
in the Kentucky Foothills (Knoxville: University
of Tennessee Press, 1975), p. 117. There were
no A. M. Duncans living in Alamance County,
where Burlington is located, nor were there any
in Orange County, the county from which it was
formed. A. M. Duncan may be a corruption of
94
Common Whites and Blacks in Antebellum North Carolina
Duncan Cameron, a distinguished Orange County
planter from the early nineteenth century. His rep¬
utation, however, was one of gentleness to his
slaves and unlike the character in the story, he
had seven children. See William S. Powell, ed.,
Dictionary of North Carolina Biography (Chapel
Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1979),
1:311. The story is clearly a white folktale. The
1943 Burlington city directory lists Florence Fow¬
ler as white.
34Elmin Foster Reminiscences, Typescript,
Southern Historical Collection, University of North
Carolina, p. 7.
95
Fluctuations of a Peromyscus Leucopus
Population Over a Twenty-Two Year Period
James W. Popp, Paul E. Matthiae, Charles M. Weise,
and James A. Reinartz
Abstract. Fluctuations in population size of a Peromyscus leucopus population in southeastern
Wisconsin over a twenty -two year period were determined by annual live-trapping. The
population exhibited moderate fluctuations in size, but there was no evidence for regular or
cyclic fluctuations. A severe ice storm in the middle of the study period caused dramatic
changes in the woodland habitat of the population under study. Fluctuations in population
size increased after the ice storm, with the largest relative increase in population size occurring
immediately after the ice storm.
Peromyscus populations have tradition¬
ally been thought to be relatively stable
(Terman 1968). Recent studies indicate,
however, that populations of Peromyscus
leucopus may exhibit fluctuations of over ten
fold in population size (Sexton et al. 1982;
Wolff 1985, Vessey 1987). Some authors
suggest these fluctuations may reflect regular
or cyclic fluctuations similar to those reported
for microtine rodents (Wolff 1985).
A better understanding of population fluc¬
tuations in P. leucopus has been hampered
by the paucity of long-term studies of the
species. In this study, we report results of
twenty-two years of annual live-trapping data
for a P. leucopus population in southeastern
James W. Popp is Lecturer in the Department of Bio¬
logical Sciences and Specialist in the Graduate School
at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee .
Paul E. Matthiae is Chief, Natural Areas Section at the
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources.
Charles M. Weise is Professor in the Department of
Biological Sciences at the University of Wisconsin-
Milwaukee.
James A. Reinartz is Associate Scientist and Manager 1
Resident Biologist at the University of Wisconsin-
Milwaukee Field Station.
Wisconsin. Our analysis centered on two areas.
First, we investigated the magnitude of pop¬
ulation fluctuations and whether these fluc¬
tuations were regular or cyclic using the cri¬
teria of Henttonen et al. (1985). Second, we
examined what effect a major change in hab¬
itat, caused by a severe ice storm in the mid¬
dle of the study period, had on the magnitude
of population fluctuations. Peromyscus leu¬
copus is a habitat generalist, found in habitats
ranging from grasslands to mature forest (Adler
and Wilson 1987). The species shows a pref¬
erence for wooded habitats with complex
vertical structure, including a definite shrub
layer and presence of fallen trees, stumps and
logs (M’Closkey and Lajoie 1975; Kaufman
et al. 1983). An ice storm in 1976 resulted
in increased canopy openings, increased den¬
sity of herbaceous and shrub species, and
increased the number of fallen branches and
dead trees. The ice storm generally improved
habitat quality for P. leucopus in the study
area.
Methods
This study was conducted between 1966
and 1987 at the University of Wisconsin-
97
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
Milwaukee Field Station, Ozaukee County,
Wisconsin. The study area was in mature
upland forest dominated by sugar maple (Acer
saccharum), white ash (Fraxinus ameri-
cana), American beech (Fagus grandifolia) ,
basswood (Tilia americana), hophombeam
(Ostrya virginiana) and shagbark hickory
(Cary a ovata) (Dunnum 1972). Live-trapping
was done on a 0.5625 ha grid. The grid con¬
sisted of 25 trap stations, 15 m apart in a 5
X 5 array. From 1966 to 1979, two Sherman
type traps were placed on the ground at each
station; from 1980 on, two Longworth traps
were used at each station. Trapping was con¬
ducted in September or early October of each
year. No trapping was done in 1980, and
insufficient data were collected for analysis
in 1985 because of heavy trap raiding by
raccoons (Procyon lotor). Animals received
temporary ear marks. Trapping was done as
a class demonstration but was always con¬
ducted by one of the authors and was
standardized.
Population sizes were estimated using the
Bayesian approach of Gazey and Staley
(1986). We used the standard deviation of
the logarithm of population size (s) to test
for regular or cyclic fluctuations (Henttonen
et al. 1985). Henttonen et al. (1985) have
shown that a value of s greater than 0.5 is a
good indicator of cyclic fluctuations in mi¬
crotine populations. In March 1976, a severe
ice storm occurred at the study site, which
caused considerable damage to the trees. Be¬
fore the storm, the canopy was essentially
closed, herbaceous vegetation was low, and
shrub cover was patchy at a low density, with
little downed wood or litter on the forest floor.
After the ice storm, macro-litter volume of
downed wood on the floor was 19.4 m3/ha,
which accounted for a loss of approximately
35% of the canopy (Bruederle and Steams
1985). Because of the greatly increased light
penetration after the canopy loss, the her¬
baceous and shrub cover increased.
Results
Population sizes of P. leucopus exhibited
moderate fluctuations (Fig. 1). The greatest
continuous increase in population size was
between 1976 and 1978, when a 3.2-fold
increase occurred (peak population size/pre¬
vious low size), following the ice storm of
March 1976. Annual changes in population
size (higher population size/lower population
size) ranged from 1.0 to 2.9 (mean = 1.8,
SD = 0.66). There was no evidence for cyclic
or regular fluctuations. The value of s was
0.18, which is well below the 0.5 used by
Henttonen et al. (1985) to distinguish cyclic
populations.
Annual fluctuations in population size ap¬
peared to be greater in the years after the ice
storm. A comparison of mean annual change
in population size for 1966-1976 and 1977-
1987 support this suggestion. Mean fluctua¬
tions were greater for the period after 1977
(1966-1976: mean = 1.41, SD = 0.45, ver¬
sus 1977-1987: mean = 2.11, SD = 0.72;
T-test: t = 2.39, d.f. = 14, P < 0.05).
When comparing years in which population
size increased, the mean finite rate of in¬
crease was greater after the ice storm (1966-
1976: mean = 1.52, SD = 0.57, versus
1977-1987: mean = 1.98 SD = 0.69). This
difference, however, is not significant, prob¬
ably because of the small sample size (t =
1.09, dif. = f, p > 0.05). Mean population
size was not significantly different between
the two periods, but the variance of the pop¬
ulation size was different (1966-1975: mean
= 36.13, SD = 10.09, versus 1977-1987:
mean = 47.13, SD = 21.26; T-test for un¬
equal variances: t = 1.42, d.f. = 11.2, P
> 0.05; F-test: F = 4.44, d.f. = 8.9, P <
0.05). Values of s calculated for before and
after the ice storm showed greater variation
after the ice storm but still provide no evi¬
dence for regular fluctuations (1966-1975: 5
= 0.15; 1977-87: 5 = 0.20).
Discussion
The P. leucopus population under study
exhibited moderate fluctuations in population
size. The fluctuations were, however, not as
great as recently reported for other popula¬
tions (Sexton et al. 1982; Vessey 1987). The
fluctuations observed in this population showed
98
Perornyscus Leucopus Population Fluxuations
Fig. 1. Estimated size of a population of Perornyscus leucopus in southeastern Wisconsin over
a twenty-two year period. Vertical bars represent .05 and .95 quantiles. The arrow indicates
occurrence of ice storm.
no evidence of being regular or cyclic and
probably reflect annual changes in population
size rather than multiannual cycles. The value
of ^ from this study (0.18) was within the
range of values previously reported for this
species. Values reported have ranged from
0.07 to 0.56, with most values between 0.16
and 0.27 (Ostfeld 1988).
The occurrence of the ice storm in the mid¬
dle of this long-term study provided an op¬
portunity to examine the effects of a large
change in the environment on the size fluc¬
tuations of a population. Although in this
study the mean population size was not sig¬
nificantly greater after the ice storm, the pop¬
ulation had its greatest increase in size after
the ice storm, presumably because of im¬
proved habitat conditions. After this peak,
the population then experienced a series of
its largest size fluctuations, perhaps repre¬
senting a period of instability as the popu¬
lation adjusted to the new environmental
conditions.
Works Cited
Adler, G. H. and M. L. Wilson. 1987. Demog¬
raphy of a habitat generalist, the white-footed
mouse, in a heterogeneous environment. Ecol¬
ogy 68: 1785-1796.
Bruederle, L. P. and F. W. Steams. 1985. Ice
storm damage to a southern Wisconsin mesic
forest. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 112: 167-175.
Dunnum, J. 1972. The phytosociology of a beech-
maple woods in Ozaukee County, Wisconsin.
M.S. Thesis, University of Wisconsin-
Milwaukee.
Gazey, W. J. and M. J. Staley. 1986. Population
estimation from mark-recapture experiments
using a sequential Bayes algorithm. Ecology 67:
941-951.
Henttonen, H., A. D. McGuire and L. Hansson.
1985. Comparisons of amplitudes and frequen¬
cies (spectral analyses) of density variations in
long-term data sets of Clethrionomys species.
Ann. Zool. Fennici 22: 221-227.
Kaufman, D. W., S. K. Peterson, R. Fristik and
G. A. Kaufman. 1983. Effect of microhabitat
features on habitat use by Perornyscus leuco-
99
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
pus. Amer. Midland Nat. 110: 177-185.
M’Closkey, R. T. and D. T. Lajoie. 1975. De¬
terminants of local distribution and abundance
in white-footed mice. Ecology 56: 467-474.
Ostfeld, R. S. 1988. Fluctuations and constancy
in populations of small rodents. Amer. Nat.
131: 445-452.
Sexton, O. J., J. F. Douglass, R. R. Bloye and
J. Pinder. 1982. Thirteen-fold change in pop¬
ulation size of Peromyscus leucopus. Can. J.
Zool. 60: 2224-2225.
Term an, C. R. 1968. Population dynamics, p. 412-
450. In: J. A. King (ed.). Biology of Pero¬
myscus (Rodentia). Spec. Pub. #2. Amer. Soc.
Mammal.
Vessey, S. H. 1987. Long-term population trends
in white-footed mice and the impact of supple¬
mental food and shelter. Amer. Zool. 27: 879-
890.
Wolff, J. O. 1985. Comparative population ecol¬
ogy of Peromyscus leucopus and Peromyscus
maniculatus. Can. J. Zool. 63: 1548-1555.
100
The Aquatic Macrophyte Community of
Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin: 1981 to 1986
John D. Madsen, Michael S. Adams, and William Kleindl
Abstract. The biomass and relative species abundance of the submersed aquatic macrophyte
community of Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin were examined in 1986 at three sites and com¬
pared to data gathered in 1981 and 1985. Although total biomass was significantly lower in
1986 than 1985, the relative frequency of species was similar from 1981 to 1986. Macrophyte
species are segregated along the length of the stream, with Potamogeton crispus dominant
upstream and Potamogeton pectinatus dominant downstream, due to changes in water tem¬
perature. In reviewing species associations for Wisconsin streams, P. crispus and P. pectinatus
were typical of eutrophic streams, and native species were typical of unimpacted mesotrophic
streams. In summary, this study indicates that although total macrophyte biomass and abun¬
dance may fluctuate dramatically due to physical events (e.g., flooding), the relative frequency
and dominance of species both spatially and temporally remain relatively constant.
A although studies of submersed aquatic
macrophytes in lakes are relatively
common, studies of the ecology of this group
of plants in streams are relatively rare. This
paucity of research on stream macrophytes
does not reflect the importance of controlling
stream ecosystem structure and processes
(Westlake 1973, 1975). Macrophytes are im¬
portant to productivity in some stream sys-
John D. Madsen is a Research Scientist with the Rens¬
selaer Fresh Water Institute, Rensselaer Polytechnic In¬
stitute, Troy, New York, and is currently studying the
ecological impact of invasive aquatic plants on native
aquatic vegetation.
Michael S. Adams is Professor of Botany and Director
of the Center for Biotic Studies, Institute for Environ¬
mental Studies of the University of Wisconsin-Madison.
William Kleindl is a graduate of the Department of Bo¬
tany at the University of Wisconsin-Madison and is cur¬
rently a foreign observer for the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration.
terns and may play an important role in nu¬
trient dynamics, particularly phosphorus
(Dawson 1976; Minshall 1978; Madsen 1986).
Macrophytes provide habitat for fish and
macroni vertebrates (Dawson 1978; Haslam
1978) and are substrate for epiphytic micro¬
flora that control water column chemical pro¬
cesses and contribute to primary productivity
and community oxygen metabolism.
Within the state of Wisconsin, relatively
few studies on stream macrophytes have been
published. In the northeast, Smith (1978)
studied the distribution of submersed macro¬
phyte species in the Pine and Popple River
systems. He found stream communities to be
dramatically different in composition from
adjacent lake communities. In a Wisconsin
Department of Natural Resources (WDNR)
report, Mace et al. (1984) discussed the re¬
sults of an intensive survey of submersed
101
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
macrophytes in southeastern Wisconsin
streams in which they modeled biomass and
community oxygen metabolism based on nu¬
trient loadings from point sources. In another
WDNR study, Hunt (1979) indicated that the
removal of streamside woody vegetation im¬
proved trout fisheries by stimulating stream
macrophyte growth. Badfish Creek has been
studied for several years, first by Madison
Metropolitan Sewerage District staff, and
subsequently in dissertation work by Madsen
(1986).
Of the macrophyte communities in all
Wisconsin streams, that of Black Earth Creek
has been most extensively studied. Field
studies on the macrophyte community of Black
Earth Creek were conducted in 198 1 (Madsen
1982; Madsen and Adams 1985) and in 1985
in conjunction with a joint program by the
WDNR, U.S. Geological Survey (USGS),
and the University of Wisconsin-Madison In¬
stitute for Environmental Studies Water Re¬
sources Management Workshop (Bom 1986;
Bouchard and Madsen 1987). In 1986, this
study was conducted in conjunction with fur¬
ther studies by the USGS. Relative frequency
data for 1981 and both biomass and relative
frequency data for 1985 and 1986 allow for
inter-annual comparisons. In addition, data
from various stream sites throughout the
summer allow a comparison of species dis¬
tribution and seasonal succession between
years.
Plant biomass and species composition in
streams may be sensitive to many factors;
however, most factors do not change greatly
from year to year. For instance, plant pro¬
ductivity and resultant biomass is often light-
limited, yet the shading regime of a given
stream changes little from year to year, bar¬
ring windthrow or human activity (Peltier and
Welch 1969;Kullberg 1974;Hametal. 1982).
However, flooding events of varying mag¬
nitude and duration may greatly affect spe¬
cies composition and total biomass of mac¬
rophytes both within a single year and from
year to year (Bilby 1977; Dawson et al. 1978).
Therefore, historical events are the most im¬
portant factors explaining year-to-year vari¬
ation in total biomass and species succession.
Materials and Methods
Site Description
Black Earth Creek is located in south-cen¬
tral Wisconsin in the western portion of Dane
County (Fig. 1) on the edge of the nongla-
ciated “Driftless Area.” Black Earth Creek
is a calcareous, highly productive stream
classified as a “class-one” trout habitat,
meaning that natural reproduction maintains
the trout population (Brynildson and Mason
1975). It is undoubtedly the most productive
trout stream in Wisconsin and, coupled with
its location close to Madison, one of the most
important trout fishery resources in the state
(Bom 1986).
The baseflow of the stream is predomi¬
nantly groundwater and artesian spring flow.
Storm runoff and overland flow may produce
substantial flooding. Land use in the drainage
basin is predominantly agricultural (Bom
1986).
In this study, biomass was sampled at three
of the sites used in the 1985 study: sites 1,
Fig. 1 . Location of Black Earth Creek in
Wisconsin.
102
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
3 (labeled 3a), and 7 (Fig. 2). Biomass data
from 1986 were compared to biomass data
from 1985 sampled at sites 1,3, and 7 (Bou¬
chard and Madsen 1987; Bom 1986), and
relative frequency data from biomass sam¬
ples in 1986 were compared to relative fre¬
quency data from cover for sites 1 through
7 from 1985 and sites 1 through 4 from the
1981 study (Madsen 1982; Madsen and Ad¬
ams 1985).
Methods
At each sample site, twenty biomass sam¬
ples were taken based on a stratified-random
pattern, sorted to species, and dried at 70°C
to constant weight. Biomass was sampled on
three dates during the summer of 1986: 23
June, 15 July, and 7 August. Relative fre¬
quency of each species, a measure of dom¬
inance, was calculated as a percentage of
total biomass. Relative frequency from bio¬
mass is comparable to, but not the same as,
relative frequency from cover. Although these
values are compared, no statistical tests are
used in the comparison of relative frequency
data due to this difference.
Species nomenclatme is based on Gleason
and Cronquist (1963), although Fassett (1957)
and Voss (1972) were used for initial inden-
tification. Species observed in Black Earth
Creek in 1986 were Callitriche stagnalis
Scop., Elodea canadensis Michx., Pota-
mogeton crispus L. , Potamogeton pectinatus
L. , Ranunculus longirostris Godr. , and Zan-
nichellia palustris L. Voucher specimens were
deposited in the University of Wisconsin-
Madison herbarium.
Results and Discussions
Total Biomass
Total submersed macrophyte biomass was
significantly higher at sites 1 and 7 in 1985
than in 1986 (789 and 512 vs. 323 and 19 g
dw m-2, respectively), while site 3 shows
little variation between the years (335 vs. 347
g dw m-2, respectively; see Fig. 3). Since
biomass for 1985 was sampled on 1 July
1985, this value is best compared to the bi¬
omass for 23 June 1986. We interpret this
wide divergence in biomass to be the result
103
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
+ 1 standard error.
of flooding after a major storm on 25 July
1985 (Steven Field, USGS, pers. comm.).
The flood scoured the soft sediments at sites
1 and 7, removing both the plant shoots pre¬
sent and the propagules in the sediment re¬
sulting in lower biomass the following year.
Site 3, with its more stable gravel substrate,
was relatively unaffected in terms of sedi¬
ment scour.
Biomass at sites 1 and 3 peaks in late June
due to the early phenology of its dominant
species, P. crispus, which peaks in mid- June
and senesces by mid- July (Sastroutomo 1981).
Potamogeton pectinatus, the dominant at site
7, peaks in early August (134 g dw m 2), as
has been observed for P. pectinatus in nearby
Badfish Creek (Madsen 1986).
Interannual Species Dominance
Despite the large variation in total bio¬
mass, the relative frequency of species has
varied little over the five-year period exam¬
ined (Fig. 4). The species, P. crispus and P.
pectinatus, have remained dominant
throughout the period. Some variation can be
explained by a shift in methodologies; 1981
and 1985 data were computed from cover
data gathered over extensive reaches, whereas
1986 data were calculated from biomass from
more limited stretches. For instance, R. lon-
girostris is commonly found in riffle areas,
a habitat that is underrepresented within bi¬
omass sample sites. Also, 1981 data were
collected for only sites 1 through 4, empha¬
sizing reaches in which P. crispus is domi¬
nant. Lastly, distinct but minor changes in
species occurrence have been observed be¬
tween the years. Elodea canadensis was be¬
low one percent of the total cover for sites 1
through 4 in 1981 but now is frequently found
in those stretches. The two dominant species
have changed little.
104
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
RELATIVE FREQUENCY OF SPECIES
BLACK EARTH CREEK
MACROPHYTE SPECIES
\Z~A 1981 F\X] 1985 V77X 1986
Fig. 4. Relative frequency of macrophyte species for 1981, 1985, and 1986. Species codes:
CS, Callitriche stagnalis; EC, Elodea canadensis; HB, Hypericum boreale; PC, Potamogeton
crispus; PP, Potamogeton pectinatus; PV, Potamogeton vaginatus; RL, Ranunculus longirostris;
ZP, Zannichellia palustris.
Flooding acts to initially remove shoot bi¬
omass in the first year. This effect is defi¬
nitely differential with respect to species, re¬
sulting in a change in species composition
(Bilby 1977; Madsen and Adams 1985).
However, the primary effect is to remove
biomass. A major flooding event could affect
biomass the following year if a sufficient pro¬
portion of propagules were also removed, as
apparently happened in 1985-1986. Theo¬
retically, a major flooding event could alter
species composition in following years if flood
scour had a differential impact on the pro¬
portion of propagules of each species re¬
moved. In this instance this was not ob¬
served. Species composition has been
relatively stable from 1981-1986. One factor
in this stability could be the overwintering
adaptations of the dominant species (Table
1). The only species that reproduce signifi¬
cantly by seed are those inhabiting the edges
of the stream or very stable substrates (e.g.,
C. stagnalis and Z. palustris). The other four
species are cited by Haslam (1978) as flood
tolerant. Elodea canadensis is generally found
in sheltered sites and can overwinter as either
dormant apices above the sediment level or
as dormant rhizomes. Ranunculus longiros¬
tris also utilizes dormant shoots but is mostly
found in very stable substrates. The two dom¬
inants, P. crispus and P. pectinatus, are ca¬
pable of overwintering in dormant structures
under the sediment surface that are resistant
to all but heavy scour. These two species also
produce an abundance of highly dispersable
propagules, which are an important aspect of
their ability to dominate in eutrophic waters.
None of these last four species appears to
105
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Table 1. Forms of overwintering propagules and flood tolerance (Haslam 1978) for
submersed macrophyte species in Black Earth Creek.
have propagules more tolerant of flood scour
than the others.
Drastic changes in the species composition
of Black Earth Creek would result from
changing the light regime. Open stretches,
which are common, tend to form the highest
biomass and to be dominated by either P.
crispus or P. pectinatus. By allowing riparian
tree vegetation to grow, a more diverse com¬
munity with lower biomass would result. Such
a management strategy would be employed
if macrophyte biomass was considered so high
as to be deleterious to the the trout fishery
(Bom 1986; Bouchard and Madsen 1987).
Still, a certain amount of macrophyte bio¬
mass is desirable (White and Brynildson 1967;
Hunt 1979), and we suggest the best strategy
would be to allow a mixture of open areas
with high macrophyte biomass and shaded
areas of lower biomass and higher plant
diversity.
Seasonal Succession-1986
Seasonal succession follows a fairly con¬
sistent pattern in Black Earth Creek (Fig. 5).
Potamogeton crispus dominates throughout
most of the stream in June and begins se-
nescing by mid-July. By August, P. crispus
biomass is only in the form of dormant and
propagules. Other species peak after P. cris¬
pus based on their distribution within the
stream, with E. canadensis or P. pectinatus
being a common late season dominant. The
late season dominants for sections 1 and 3
were E. canadensis or remaining P. crispus
biomass, while P. pectinatus continued to
dominate at site 7 throughout the season, as
has also been observed at Badfish Creek
(Madsen 1986). Discriminant analysis indi¬
cated three species as having significant sea¬
sonal changes in biomass: P. crispus (p =
0.0000), P . pectinatus (p = 0.0036), and E.
canadensis (p = 0.0889). This type of sea¬
sonal pattern was observed in 1981, except
that E. canadensis was not a significant com¬
ponent of the community at that time, and
flooding removed most of the submersed
macrophyte cover in early August of 1981.
Distribution between Sites -1986
As mentioned before, P. crispus was the
dominant species in sites 1 and 3, and P.
pectinatus was the dominant at site 7 (Fig.
6). Among the nondominant species, only R.
longirostris had a significant presence at site
7. The near-monoculture of P. pectinatus at
106
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
SEASONAL SUCCESSION OE SPECIES
BLACK EARTH CREEK 1986
MACROPHYTE SPECIES _ !
[771 JUNE [XXI JULY 2223 august !
Fig. 5. Seasonal succession of species in Black Earth Creek during 1986 as based on relative
frequency. Species codes: CS, Callitriche stagnalis; EC, Elodea canadensis; PC, Potamogeton
crispus; PP, Potamogeton pectinatus; RL, Ranunculus longirostris; ZP, Zannichellia palustris.
site 7 was also observed in 1985, except that
P. vaginatus was also present in significant
proportions. Potamogeton vaginatus was seen
at site 7 in 1986 but not quantified. Pota¬
mogeton pectinatus often forms a dense mon¬
oculture in warmer eutrophic streams (e.g.,
Badfish Creek, Madsen 1986), whereas P.
crispus tends to be the dominant species in
cooler eutrophic environments. The domi¬
nance of P. crispus at sites 1 and 3 is con¬
sistent with observations made in 1981 and
1985. Discriminant analysis indicated that all
species except R. longirostris (p = 0.1398)
were significantly different in their biomass
distributions between the three sites (e.g.,
p < 0.05), indicating the sharp divergence
of vegetation in sites 1 and 3 from that in
site 7.
Increased water temperature is the envi¬
ronmental factor most likely responsible for
the shift in dominance from P. crispus at sites
1 and 3 to P. pectinatus at site 7. Although
both Potamogeton species are common dom¬
inants in eutrophic, high alkalinity waters,
P. crispus tends to be dominant either in
cooler lakes and streams or earlier in the sea¬
son while water temperatures are low (e.g.,
Sahai and Sinha 1976; Engle 1985; see Table
2). In each case reported in the literature, P.
crispus reaches maximum biomass and se-
nesces at lower water temperatures or earlier
in the growing season for given regions (Ta¬
ble 2). This is especially noticeable where
the two species occur together in the same
community. Potamogeton crispus often se-
nesces when water temperatures exceed 20°C.
107
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts , and Letters
RELATIVE FREQUENCY OF SPECIES
BLACK EARTH CREEK 1986
MACROPHYTE SPECIES
\7~7\ SITE 1 1X3] SITE 3 £22 SITE 7
Fig. 6. Relative frequency of macrophyte species at sites 1, 3, and 7 in Black Earth Creek
during 1986. Species codes: CS, Callitriche stagnalis; EC, Elodea canadensis; PC, Potamo-
geton crispus; PP, Potarmogeton pectinatus; RL, Ranunculus longirostris; ZP, Zannichellia palustris.
Potamogeton pectinatus, on the other hand,
is relatively insensitive to high temperature
in the temperate zone and may form dense
monocultures in streams with maximum daily
temperatures above 23°C (Wong et al. 1978).
In this respect, Badfish Creek and Black Earth
Creek near Black Earth are similar in their
thermal regimes. The longitudinal trend for
warming downstream creates the conditions
that promote a P. pectinatus monoculture at
site 7.
Although the monthly maximum temper¬
ature at Black Earth is only 1-2°C higher
than at Cross Plains, the critical temperature
to initiate the senescence of P. crispus (ap¬
proximately 20°C) is reached in May rather
than late June (Fig. 7). Therefore, the phe¬
nologies of the two sites would be radically
different. Potamogeton crispus theoretically
would senesce much earlier at site 7 than sites
1 and 3, which may either mean that it was
already senescent by the time that research
began or its potential for success at site 7 is
too poor for it to survive or compete against
P. pectinatus.
Cover data from 1985 for sites 1 through
7 do not indicate a gradual transition from
P. crispus to P. pectinatus, but rather a dra¬
matic increase in P. pectinatus in site 7 from
low relative percentages upstream. The rel¬
ative percentage of P. crispus is also reduced
in sites 5 and 6 from sites 1 through 4. We
expect this is due to increased shading and
lack of suitable substrates in sites 5 and 6,
rather than to the observed temperature shift.
The effect of temperature was further in-
108
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
Table 2. Water temperature (°C) range or season of the year* for the growth and
dominance of Potamogeton crispus and P. pectin atus.
* Month of the year rather than temperature (°C)
* Indicated as Potamogeton sp.
1, Anderson and Low 1976; 2, Barko et al. 1984; 3, Carpenter 1980; 4, Engel 1985; 5, Filbin and Barko
1985; 6, Harman 1974; 7, Howard-Williams 1978; 8, Kadono 1984; 9, Kollman and Wali 1976; 10, Kunii
1982; 11, Madsen 1986; 12, Peverly 1979; 13, Purohit and Singh 1985; 14, Rogers and Breen 1980; 15,
Saha 1986; 16, Sahai and Sinha 1976; 17, Saxena 1986; 18, Schloesser et al. 1985; 19, Tobiessen and
Snow 1984; 20, Wong et al 1978.
vestigated by examining the submersed mac¬
rophyte flora of streams in south-central Wis¬
consin, both from literature sources and by
a one-time confirmatory visit to most of the
ten streams (Table 3). Unfortunately, there
is insufficient data on both the occurrence of
P. crispus and P. pectinatus to draw any
conclusions, other than that the two Pota¬
mogeton species are not the typical macro¬
phyte species of the average south-central
Wisconsin stream. Both sites withP. crispus,
Black Earth Creek and Vermont Creek (a
tributary to Black Earth Creek), are enriched
by nonpoint source pollutants. The only stream
other than Black Earth Creek and Badfish
Creek to have P. pectinatus is Rutland Branch,
where it only grows in the 100 m of that
stream above its confluence with Badfish
Creek. Therefore, these two Potamogeton
species appear to be restricted to the most
eutrophic streams in the area. In the absence
of excessive cultural eutrophication, Black
Earth and Badfish Creeks would probably
have vegetation more typical for calcareous
streams of the region, namely, Elodea can¬
adensis, Nasturtium officinale (a semi-
emergent macrophyte), Ranunculus longi-
rostris, and Veronica catenata.
When sites from across Wisconsin tabu¬
lated from literature sources are examined, a
distinct pattern emerges when comparing the
four previously mentioned native, or meso-
trophic, species and the two nonnative, eu¬
trophic species (Table 4). Potamogeton pec¬
tinatus and P. crispus do indeed tend to be
found in the most eutrophic of streams, while
Elodea, Nasturtium, Ranunculus, Veronica
are the predominant species of relatively clear,
clean, cool streams. Because of its combi¬
nation of species, both mesotrophic and eu¬
trophic, Black Earth Creek appears to be
transitional between the two, with a trend
from mesotrophic in the headwaters to eu¬
trophic near Black Earth. This trend is in
109
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
26
24
22
20
18
1 6
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
J FMAMJ JASONDJ FMAMJ JAS
MONTH
□ CROSS PLAINS + BLACK EARTH
BLACK EARTH CREEK
MAXIMUM MONTHLY WATER TEMPERATURE
Fig. 7. Maximum monthly temperatures from 1985 through 1986 for Black Earth Creek at Cross
Plains (site 2) and Black Earth (site 7). Data provided by Steve Field, U.S. Geological Survey.
large part due to the change in water tem¬
perature along its length but is also due to
heavy nonpoint and point inputs of nutrients
(Bom 1986). Our conclusion of decreasing
water quality in the downstream direction is
substantiated by the Hilsenhoff Biotic Index
on macroinvertebrate species for three sep¬
arate years of collections (Bom 1986).
A statistical analysis of the occurrence of
these species throughout the state by the Fish¬
er’s Exact Test indicate some interesting eco¬
logical relationships Elodea canadensis was
found to inhabit both mesotrophic and eu-
trophic streams with no partiality (p = 0.25).
However, N. officinale (p = 0.009) and R.
longirostris (p = 0.0003) occurred most
commonly in mesotrophic streams. Pota-
mogeton crispus (p = 0.08) and P. pectin-
atus (p = 0.0009) occurred significantly more
often in eutrophic streams. However, this trend
should not be construed as being a set of
obligate “indicator species” for water qual¬
ity, good or bad. Nasturtium officinale would
best indicate cool, spring-fed streams, but not
a range of nutrient concentrations. The oc¬
currence of P. pectinatus does not necessarily
indicate eutrophic conditions as it can occur
in pristine, mesotrophic streams, especially
those with sandy substrates. For instance, P.
pectinatus is a common submersed macro¬
phyte on sandy substrates in Lawrence Creek
(Madsen 1982) and in the Bois Brule River
(Thomas 1944), both very clean streams.
However, P. pectinatus is a very common
species in eutrophic streams throughout North
America.
Conclusions
Total biomass at sites 1 and 7 was signif¬
icantly lower in 1986 than 1985 but was sim¬
ilar for the two years at site 3. The difference
110
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
Table 3. Occurrence of submersed macrophyte species and maximum summer water
temperature (°C) in south-central Wisconsin streams, and frequency* among the ten streams.
Streams: 1, Badfish Creek; 2, Frogpond Creek; 3, Oregon Branch; 4, Rutland Branch; 5, Spring Creek;
6, Black Earth Creek; 7, Garfoot Creek; 8, Vermont Creek; 9, Mount Vernon Creek; 10, Little Sugar
River.
References: 1, This Study; 2, Born 1986; 3, Brynildson and Mason 1975; 4, DCRPC 1980; 5, Johnson
1969; 6, Lathrop and Johnson 1979; 7, Mace et al 1984; 8, Madison Metropolitan Sewerage District
unpubi. data; 9, WDNR 1977.
between the two years’ biomass is attributed
to flood scouring, which greatly affected the
sediments at sites 1 and 7, but not at site 3.
Although total biomass is significantly dif¬
ferent, species composition is consistent for
the three years examined. For sites 1 and 3,
P. crispus is dominant, with an assemblage
of C. stagnalis, E. canadensis , P . pectinatus ,
R. longirostris , and Z. palustris. At site 7,
a near-monoculture of P. pectinatus occurred
with only a small percentage of R. longiros¬
tris as a marginal plant. This species shift is
due to increased water temperature and eu¬
trophication downstream. Seasonal succes¬
sion patterns were also typical of previous
years, with P. crispus as an early season
dominant and E. canadensis and P. pectin¬
atus as late season dominants. The two Po-
tamogeton species are typical dominants of
eutrophic streams, whereas native species,
such as Nasturtium and Ranunculus , domi¬
nate in relatively unpolluted mesotrophic
streams. Black Earth Creek is at the transition
between a mesotrophic and eutrophic state,
with water quality decreasing downstream.
In general, historical factors, such as floods,
may greatly alter total biomass for the current
and following years but were not observed
in this case to significantly alter species com¬
position in the following year.
Acknowledgments
This research was performed in coopera¬
tion with the U.S. Geological Survey. The
authors would like to thank Steven Field and
David Graczyk for their assistance and Car¬
olyn Madsen for comments on the manuscript.
Works Cited
Anderson M. G., and J. B. Low. 1976. Use of
sago pondweed by waterfowl on the Delta Marsh,
Manitoba. J. Wildl. Manage. 40(2):233-242.
Avery, E. L. 1978, The influence of chemical
reclamation on a small Brown Trout stream in
southwestern Wisconsin. Wis. Dept. Natur. Re¬
sour c. Tech. Bull. No. 110. (Madison, WI).
_ _ _ . 1985. Sexual maturity and fecundity of
Brown Trout in central and northern Wisconsin
streams. Wis. Dept. Natur. Resourc. Tech. Bull
No. 154. (Madison, WI).
Ill
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Table 4. Occurrence of six macrophyte species common to either mesotrophic or eutrophic
streams in Wisconsin, and p-value for a Fishers Exact Test.
TS, Trophic Status (M, Mesotrophic; E, Eutrophic); EC, Elodea canadensis ; NO, Nasturtium officinale ;
RL, Ranunculus longirostris ; VC, Veronica catenata ; PC, Potamogeton crispus ; PP, Pontamogeton
pectinatus.
References: 1, This Study (see Table 3); 2, Avery 1978; 3, Avery 1985; 4, Avery and Hunt 1981; 5, Hunt
1979; 6, Mace et al 1984; 7, Madsen 1982; 8, Madsen 1986; 9, Smith 1978; 10, Thomson 1944.
T — reported as Ranunculus tricophyllus.
Avery, E. L., and R. L. Hunt. 1981. Population
dynamics of wild Brown Trout and associated
sport fisheries in four central Wisconsin streams.
Wis. Dept. Natur. Resourc. Tech. Bull. No.
121. (Madison, WI).
Barko, J. W., D. J. Bates, G. J. Filbin, S. M.
Hennington, and D. G. McFarland. 1984. Sea¬
sonal growth and community composition of
phytoplankton in a eutrophic Wisconsin im¬
poundment. J. Freshwat. Ecol. 2(6):5 19—533.
Bilby, R. 1977. Effects of a spate on the macro¬
phyte vegetation of a stream pool. Hydrobiol.
56(2): 109-1 12.
Bom, S. M., ed. 1986. Black Earth Creek: A
watershed study with management options. Water
Resources Management Workshop, Institute for
Environmental Studies, University of Wiscon-
sin-Madison. Inst. Environ. Studies Report 129.
(March 1986).
Bouchard, R., and J. D. Madsen. 1987. The aquatic
112
Aquatic Macrophytes of Black Earth Creek
macrophyte community of Black Earth Creek,
Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts, Letts.
75:41-55.
Brynildson, O. M., and J. W. Mason. 1975. In¬
fluence of organic pollution on the density and
production of trout in a Wisconsin stream. Wis.
Dept. Natur. Resourc. Tech. Bull. No. 81.
(Madison, WI).
Carpenter, S. R. 1980. Estimating net shoot pro¬
duction by a hierarchical cohort method of her¬
baceous plants subject to high mortality. Amer.
Midi. Nat. 104(1): 163— 175 .
Dane County Regional Planning Commission.
1980. Base flow water quality trends in Dane
County, Wisconsin. DCRPC. (Madison, WI).
Dawson, F. H. 1976. The annual production of
the aquatic macrophyte Ranunculus penicillatus
var. calcareus (R. W. Butcher) C. D. K. Cook.
Aquat. Bot. 2:51-73.
_ , . 1978. Aquatic plant management in
semi-natural streams: The role of marginal veg¬
etation. J. Environ. Manage. 6:213-221.
Dawson, F. H., E. Castellano, and M. Ladle.
1978. Concept of species succession in relation
to river vegetation and management. Verh. In-
ternat. Verein. Limnol. 20:1429-1434.
Engel, S. 1985. Aquatic community interactions
of submerged macrophytes. Wis. Dept. Natur.
Resourc. Tech. Bull. No. 156. (Madison, WI).
Fassett, N. C. 1957. A Manual of Aquatic Plants.
Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
Filbin, G. J., and J. W. Barko. 1985. Growth and
nutrition of submersed macrophytes in a eu-
trophic Wisconsin impoundment. J. Freshwat.
Ecol. 3(2):275-285.
Gleason, H. A. and A. Cronquist. 1963. Manual
of vascular plants of northeasem United States
and adjacent Canada. New York: D. Van
Nostrand.
Ham, S. F., D. A. Cooling, P. D. Hiley, P. R.
McLeish, H. R. A. Scorgie, and A. D. Berrie.
1982. Growth and recession of aquatic macro¬
phytes on a shaded section of the River Lam-
bourn, England, from 1971 to 1981. Freshwat.
Biol. 12:1-15.
Harman, W. N. 1974. Phenology and physiog¬
nomy of the hydrophyte community in Otsego
Lake, N.Y. Rhodora 76(808):497-508.
Haslam, S. M. 1978. River plants: The macro-
phytic vegetation of watercourses. London:
Cambridge Univ. Press.
Howard-Willaims, C. 1978. Growth and produc¬
tion of aquatic macrophytes in a south temper¬
ate saline lake. Verh. Internat. Verein. Limnol.
20:1153-1158.
Hunt, R. L. 1979. Removal of woody streambank
vegetation to improve trout habitat. Wis. Dept.
Natur. Resourc. Tech. Bull. No. 115. (Madi¬
son, WI).
Hutchinson, G. E. 1975. A Treatise on Limnol¬
ogy. Vol. III. Limnological Botany . New York:
Wiley.
Johnson, M. P. 1969. The macroinvertebrates of
Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin. M. S. Thesis,
University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Kadono, Y. 1984. Comparative ecology of Jap¬
anese Potamogeton: An extensive survey with
special reference to growth form and life cycle.
Jap. J. Ecol. 34:161-172.
Kollman, A. L., and M. K. Wali. 1976. Intra-
seasonal variations in environmental and pro¬
ductivity relations of Potamogeton pectinatus
communities. Arch. Hydrobiol./Suppl.
50(l):439-472.
Kullberg, R. G. 1974. Distribution of aquatic
macrophytes related to paper mill effluents in
a southern Michigan stream. Amer. Midi. Nat.
91 (2):27 1— 28 1 .
Kunii, H. 1982. Life cycle and growth of Pota¬
mogeton crispus L. in a shallow pond, Ojaga-
ike. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 95:109-124.
Lathrop, R. C., and C. D. Johnson. 1979. Dane
County Water Quality Plan, Appendix B: Water
Quality Conditions. Dane County Regional
Planning Commission, (Madison, WI).
Mace, S. E., P. Sorge, and T. Lowry. 1984.
Impacts of phosphorus on streams. Milwaukee,
WI. Wis. Dept. Natur. Resourc., Bureau Water
Resourc. Manage., Southeastern District. (April
1984).
Madsen, J. D. 1982. The aquatic macrophyte
communities of two trout streams in Wisconsin.
M. S. Thesis, University of Wisconsin-Madison.
_ _ . 1986. The production and physiological
ecology of the submerged aquatic macrophyte
community in Badfish Creek, Wisconsin. Ph.D.
Diss., University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Madsen, J. D., and M. S. Adams. 1985. The
aquatic macrophyte communities of two streams
in Wisconsin, Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts,
Letts. 73:198-216.
Minshall, G. M. 1978. Autotrophy in stream eco¬
systems. BioScience 28(12):767-771.
Peltier, W. H. , and E. B. Welch. Factors affecting
growth of rooted aquatics in a river. Weed Sci¬
ence 17(4):412-416.
113
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts, and Letters
Peverly, J. H. 1979. Elemental distribution and
macrophyte growth downstream from an or¬
ganic soil. Aquat. Bot. 7:319-338.
Purohit, R., and S. P. Singh. 1985. Submerged
macrophytic vegetation in relation to eutrophi¬
cation level in Kumaun Himalaya. Environ.
Pollut. Ser. A. 39:161-173.
Rogers, K. H,. and C. M. Breen. 1980. Growth
and reproduction of Potamogeton crispus in a
South African lake. J. Ecol. 68:561-571.
Saha, L. C. 1986. Productivity of major Indian
aquatic macrophytes. J. Aquat. Plant Manage.
24:93-94.
Sahai, R., and A. B. Sinha. 1976. Productivity
of submerged macrophytes in polluted and non-
polluted regions of the eutrophic lake, Ram-
garh, (M. P.). Ch. 15 in: Aquatic weeds in
Southeast Asia , eds. C. K. Varsheny and J.
Rzosha, 131-140. Proceedings of a regional
seminar on noxious aquatic vegetation, New
Delhi, India, 12-17 Dec. 1973. The Hague:
Dr. W. Junk, 1976.
Sastroutomo, S. S. 1981. Turion formation, dor¬
mancy, and germination of curly pond weed,
Potamogeton crispus. Aquat. Bot. 10(2): 161—
174.
Saxena, M. K. 1986. Dry matter production in
freshwater and marsh plants around Jaipur.
Limnologica 17(1): 127-138.
Schlosser, D. W., T. A. Edsall, and B. A. Manny.
1985. Growth of submersed macrophyte com¬
munities in the St. Clair-Detroit River system
between Lake Huron and Lake Erie. Can. J.
Bot. 63:1061-1065.
Sculthorpe, C. D. 1967. The biology of aquatic
vascular plants . London: William Clowes and
Son.
Smith, S. G. 1978. Aquatic macrophytes of the
Pine and Popple River system, Florence and
Forest Counties, Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad.
Sci., Arts, Letts. 66:148-185.
Thomson, J. W., Jr. 1944. A survey of the larger
aquatic plants and bank flora of the Brule River.
Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., Arts, Letts. 36:57-76.
Tobiessen, P., and P. D. Snow. 1984. Temper¬
ature and light effects on the growth of Pota¬
mogeton crispus in Collins Lake, New York
State. Can J. Bot. 62:2822-2826.
Voss, E. G. 1972. Michigan Flora. Part 1 of Gym-
nosperms and Monocots . Bloomfield Hills, Mn:
Cranbook Institute for Science.
_ _ _ 1985. Michigan Flora. Part 2 of Dicots.
Bloomfield Hills, Mn: Cranbrook Institute for
Science Bulletin 59.
Westlake, D. F. 1973. Aquatic macrophytes in
rivers: A review. Pol. Arch. Hydrobiol. 20(1)31—
40.
_ _ 1975. Macrophytes. In River Ecology,
ed. B. A. Whitton, 106-128. Studies in Ecol¬
ogy, Vol. 2. Berkeley: University of California
Press.
White, R. J. , and O. M. Brynildson. 1967. Guide¬
lines for management of trout stream habitat in
Wisconsin. Wis. Dept. Natur. Resourc. Tech.
Bull. No. 39. (Madison, WI).
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources. 1977.
Preliminary and primary wasteload allocation
survey for Black Earth Creek at Cross Plains.
August 25 and September 26, 1977. Madison,
WI.
Wong, S. L., B. Clark, M. Kirby, and R. F.
Kosciuw. 1978. Water temperature fluctuations
and seasonal periodicity of Cladophora and Po¬
tamogeton in shallow rivers. J. Fish. Res. Bd.
Can. 35(6):866-870.
114
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
The Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters was chartered by the State Legislature on March
16, 1870, as an incorporated society serving the people of Wisconsin by encouraging investigation and
dissemination of knowledge of the sciences, arts, and letters.
- — - - - - - — — - “ - - — - - - * — — —
1989 WISCONSIN ACADEMY COUNCIL
Officers
Meredith Ostrom, President , Middleton
Katharine Lyall, President-Elect, Madison
James Johnson, Past-President, River Falls
Susan Nurrenbem, Vice President-Sciences, Menomonie
Michael SMndnid, Vice President- Arts, Madison
William Urbrock, Vice President-Letters', Oshkosh
Pat Blankenhurg, Secretary-Treasurer , Madison
Councilors
John Barlow, Appleton
Terry Haller, Madison
Jon Harkness, Wausau
Samuel Hope III, Wauwatosa
Dan Neviaser, Madison
Ann Peckham, Middleton
Gary Rohde, River Falls
William Stott, Jr. , Ripon
Councilor Emeritus
John Thomson, Mount Horeb
MEMBERSHIP INFORMATION
■Associate Member
■ 'Receives Transactions and Inside the Academy
Annual Member
Receives Transactions, Inside the Academy,
and the Wisconsin Academy Review
Supporting Member
Receives all publications
Patron Member
Receives all publications and other benefits
Life Member
Receives all publications and other benefits
$25 annual dues
$40 annual dues
$100 annual dues
$500 annual dues
$1,000
(one lifetime payment)
Your membership will encourage research, discussion, and publication in the sciences, arts, and letters
of Wisconsin. Please send dues payment along with name and address to:
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53705-4099
608/263-1692 -
'
'■.y -v',v rti
'
jM A f > -M : ' is 4? 4 14 <;.
' ,■ > - - \ | .
U ' iil #k f | 5 'i ■ \ f
: f ' ■ v 7 ^.->'v> ‘rr .-. ', A^ .'.' ^4;^ 1
l fc . ■ " . - - «
1 V^4Mf44'4 -k ^m
:,C i- ;" . v l-H ' ■ M V ; :\€c 4 \
'444 4c4
.& '1 vvy; " y H ■ """4
k
| jl fy 444 4;y ^444^ r 4|4 4:4 44444 4
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts & Letters
r . \Vvvt4
1../'
_
■yyi
'( 4444 ■:
y I ''':■#£
P.J
Steenbock Center 1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53705
Telephone 608 263-1692
1i ' re
;.a| \%^r>
'■
, ry '^m
m
44 ■
- \ • • : ) r4v .■ 4, ■ y 4 / 1
■' !
'
t / - y ••,-<> ■ \ ' • , '(
y/1 r 1
. -
/ 4. ;• 4
M \-i\:
y T%yr(-.., (
4> - ri.vf '•
''■V
CD CO
TRANSACTIONS
the Wisconsin Academy of
Sciences. Arts & Letters
Breaking New Waters
A Century of Limnology at the University of Wisconsin
Transactions
Carl N. Haywood, Editor
134 Schofield Hall
University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire
Eau Claire, Wisconsin 54701
Production Editor
Patricia Allen Duyfhuizen
Assistant Editors/Student Interns
Sharon Falter
Anne Moulton
Mary Geisert
Transactions welcomes articles that explore features of the State of Wisconsin and its people.
Articles written by Wisconsin authors on topics other than Wisconsin sciences, arts, and letters
are also occasionally published.
Manuscripts, queries, and other correspondence should be addressed to the editor.
Transactions is published annually by the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters,
1922 University Avenue, Madison, Wisconsin 53705.
© 1987
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters
Manufactured in the United States of America
All rights reserved
TRANSACTIONS
of the Wisconsin Academy
of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Special Issue
Breaking New Waters
A Century of Limnology at the
University of Wisconsin
Annamarie L. Beckel
with a contributing chapter
by Frank Egerton
From the Editor
It is with pleasure that the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters presents
this Special Issue of Transactions. Limnology, at least as an organized study, had its in¬
fancy in Wisconsin, and much of the early research of the organizers (Juday, Birge,
Hasler) was published in Transactions. These were men of strong commitment to
scholarship and excellence in research, and their personal stamp has been indelibly made
on limnology.
We at Transactions are happy to continue our ties with limnology and to be able to
make the current study available. We think it will be of interest not only to Academy
members but to people with special interests in limnology.
This publication was made possible by financial support from the University of
Wisconsin Graduate School, the National Science Foundation (BSR 8514330), and the
Center for Limnology Endowment Fund of the University of Wisconsin Foundation.
Carl N. Haywood
Contents
Foreword iv
Preface v
1 Beginnings 1
2 New Waters 1 1
3 New Directions 31
4 Expansion 41
5 The Wisconsin 85
Limnology Community
Foreword
History provides a context to help us understand the present and insights to help us
shape the future. We welcome this history of two schools of limnology at a time when
the insights that can come from it are of special value. This history project began soon
after the formal establishment of the Center for Limnology on the Madison Campus in
July 1982. This special issue of the Transactions constitutes a look back as Wisconsin
limnologists continue the search to break new waters. In a less parochial context this
book comes in the year that the 50th meeting of the American Society of Limnology and
Oceanography (ASLO) was celebrated in Madison. The Society formed from the efforts
of many limnologists, especially Paul Welch at the University of Michigan; ASLO and
the collections of scientists it represents are halfway through their first century. Again, a
look back can serve us well as we move ahead.
Chancey Juday, the first president of ASLO (then the Limnological Society of
America) is one of the principals in this history. He, Edward A. Birge, and Arthur D.
Hasler are portrayed on the cover and are catalysts of our history. We thank these lim¬
nologists and their many colleagues for a rich history of personal and scientific accom¬
plishment. We thank Annamarie L. Beckel and Frank N. Egerton for preparing these ex¬
cellent perspectives on two schools of Wisconsin limnology, and we thank the Wisconsin
Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters for publishing these perspectives.
John J. Magnuson
Director, Center for Limnology
University of Wisconsin
680 North Park Street
Madison, Wisconsin 53706
IV
Preface
The development of the science of limnology is inextricably entwined with the careers
of Edward Asahel Birge and Chancey Juday, and later with that of Arthur Davis
Hasler. The limnological research program at the University of Wisconsin-Madison has
been one of the foremost in the nation. The research and ideas generated there have
played a major role in shaping the growth and development of limnology in North
America and abroad.
Scientific limnology began with the publication in 1895 of the first two volumes of
Alphonse F Orel’s monograph, “Le Leman; monographic limnologique,” which em¬
braced geology, physics, and chemistry (Egerton 1983, Elster 1974). It was the partner¬
ship of Birge and Juday, however, that substantially laid the foundations of limnology
in North America (Cole 1979, McIntosh 1977, Welch 1935). The work they and their
associates performed during the first 40 years of this century marked the onset of
modern American limnology and made conditions in Wisconsin lakes a touchstone for
later studies in other regions (Cole 1979). Nearly 200 of the 400 scientific reports written
by this group were published in the Transactions of the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences,
Arts, and Letters, of which Birge was an active member. As noted by Frey (1963), a
chronological listing of the papers and reports arising from their efforts closely parallels
the general development of the science of limnology as reflected by changing rationale,
methods of attack, and problems being investigated.
During their forty-year partnership Birge and Juday had chosen no successor to lead
the Wisconsin limnological program. With the death of Juday in 1944 and the waning
strength of Birge, research in limnology began to decline, and the Wisconsin school
nearly went out of existence. Arthur Hasler, a former student of Juday, returned to the
University of Wisconsin as an instructor in 1937. Although he seemed like a natural
choice for the next leader of the Wisconsin program, neither Birge nor Juday gave him
any help or encouragement in his own research endeavors, which were in an entirely dif¬
ferent direction from theirs. Hasler turned away from the descriptive, comparative
research conducted by Birge and Juday and established experimental limnology as the
hallmark of the Wisconsin school. He was instrumental in reestablishing the reputation
of the University of Wisconsin as a leader in limnological research.
Hasler retired from teaching and active research in 1978. He made the leadership tran¬
sition much easier for his successor, John J. Magnuson, than Birge and Juday had for
him. Under Magnuson’s leadership, the Center for Limnology at the University of
Wisconsin-Madison continues to be known internationally for its contributions to the
science of limnology.
The purpose of this book is to chronicle the century of development in limnology at
the University of Wisconsin-Madison, from Birge’s arrival at the university in 1875 to
Hasler’s retirement from active research in 1978. The first four chapters take a much dif¬
ferent approach than the last chapter written by Frank N. Egerton, an historian of
science from the University of Wisconsin-Parkside. The first chapters tell the story of
Wisconsin limnology from the perspective of the participants — Birge, Juday, Hasler,
and their associates — the observers from the “inside.” These chapters include relatively
little analysis or evaluation of the participants’ perspectives or memories — the limnolo-
gists themselves tell the story as they saw it. Egerton, on the other hand, considers the
development of the Wisconsin limnological community from the analytical and technical
perspective of a contemporary historian of science— the observer from the “outside.”
The main focus of Egerton’s discussion is on the contrasting development of the
Wisconsin program under the leadership first of Birge and Juday and then of Hasler. He
discusses the similarities and differences in outlook, goals, methodologies, and major
achievements of the two programs and, in some cases, arrives at different conclusions
than the limnologists themselves.
The major sources of information for the first four chapters include interviews and
discussions with former students and colleagues of Birge, Juday, and Hasler, as well as
interviews with Hasler. Most of these interviews were conducted at a conference,
“History of Limnology in Wisconsin,” held in May 1983 at the University of Wisconsin
Trout Lake Station in northern Wisconsin. Many former students and colleagues who
could not attend the conference contributed written interviews. Transcripts of taped in¬
terviews, written interviews, and questionnaires are catalogued in the University of
Wisconsin archives. I made extensive use of G. C. Sellery’s biography of Birge (1956),
including C. H. Mortimer’s chapter, “An Explorer of Lakes,” in which Mortimer
evaluates the scientific contributions of Birge. I also acknowledge my debt to David G.
Frey and Arthur Hasler for their chapters in Limnology in North America (Frey 1963).
Additional sources of information included the Birge Collection in the State Historical
Society of Wisconsin, correspondence between Juday and two of his students, Stillman
Wright and Robert W. Pennak, and the technical publications of Birge, Juday, and
Hasler. For his chapter, Egerton conducted extensive interviews with Hasler, but Eger¬
ton’s analysis of the achievements of the Birge- Juday program and the Hasler program
relies on written records and the documented contributions of the Wisconsin school to
limnology.
This book is not meant to be a biography of any of the principal players, but Egerton
and I do hope to present a picture of how individual personalities can shape the growth
and development of a scientific community. There are certainly some major differences
in the ways that Birge and Juday and Hasler envisioned their research programs and in
the ways they dealt with colleagues, graduate students, funding agencies, and the public
that influenced how the Wisconsin program developed.
In the book we have discussed some of the major contributions of the Wisconsin pro¬
gram to limnology. More than 100 limnology related master’s and doctoral theses, as
well as nearly 800 other publications, were produced by Birge, Juday, Hasler, and their
associates between 1875 and 1978. Certainly not all these studies are discussed in detail.
Complete lists of the graduate students of Juday and Hasler are included in the appen¬
dix. Lists of the publications of Birge and Juday and their students and associates and of
Hasler and his students and associates can be obtained from the Center for Limnology,
University of Wisconsin, 680 North Park Street, Madison, Wisconsin 53706. For addi¬
tional discussion of these research projects see the chapters written by Frey and Hasler in
Limnology in North America (Frey 1963).
Annamarie L. Beckel
University of Wisconsin , 1987
VI
References
Cole, G. A. 1979. Textbook of Limnology. C. V. Mosby Co., St. Louis. 426 p.
Egerton, F. N. 1983. The history of ecology: achievements and opportunities, part one. J. Hist.
Biol. 16(2): 259-311.
Elster, H.-J. 1974. History of limnology. Mitt. Internat. Verein. Limnol. 20: 7-30.
Forel, F. A. 1892. Le Leman: monographie limnologique. Tome 1. Lausanne, F. Rouge.
_ . 1895. Le Leman: monographie limnologique. Tome 2. Lausanne, F. Rouge.
Frey, D. G. 1963. Wisconsin: the Birge-Juday era. In D. G. Frey (ed.). Limnology in North
America. University of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 3-54.
Hasler, A. D. 1963. Wisconsin 1940-1961. In D. G. Frey (ed.). 1963. Limnology in North
America. University of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 55-93.
McIntosh, R. P. 1977. Ecology since 1900. In F. N. Egerton (ed.). History of American Ecology.
Arno Press, New York. pp. 353-372.
Mortimer, C. H. 1956. An explorer of lakes. In G. C. Sellery. E. A. Birge. A Memoir. University
of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 165-211.
Sellery, G. C. 1956. E. A. Birge. A Memoir. University of Wisconsin Press, Madison. 221 p.
Welch, P. S. 1935. Limnology. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York. 471 p.
'
Acknowledgments
We would like to thank all the participants in the “History of Limnology in Wiscon¬
sin” conference held in May, 1983, at the University of Wisconsin Trout Lake Station.
We would also like to thank all of those who agreed to be interviewed or who took the
time to fill out questionnaires regarding their experiences in the Wisconsin limnological
program. The list of conference participants and those who were interviewed or filled
out questionnaires is as follows:
John E. Bardach (Ph.D. 1949) was a student of Hasler. His thesis research was on the
population dynamics and life history of yellow perch in Lake Mendota. He is officially
retired, but continues to hold appointments and to work as adjunct research associate at
the East-West Resource Systems Institute at the East-West Center in Honolulu, Hawaii,
and in the Departments of Oceanography and Geography at the University of Hawaii.
George C. Becker was a student of Hasler (M.S. 1951) and of John Neess (Ph.D.
1962). Since 1951 he has been conducting research on the fish in the lakes and streams of
Wisconsin. He is currently living in Rogers, Arkansas, having retired as Emeritus Pro¬
fessor of Biology and Curator of Fishes at the University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point.
W. A. Broughton was a student of geologist W. H. Twenhofel and also received ad¬
vice from E. F. Bean, the State Geologist. During the summers of 1937 and 1939 he con¬
ducted research on the sediments of Crystal Lake and a number of other lakes and bogs
in the Trout Lake area. He is currently living in Plattville, Wisconsin, having retired as
the Chairman of the Geology Department at the University of Wisconsin-Plattville.
George L. Clarke was a visiting scientist from the Woods Hole Oceanographic In¬
stitute in the summer of 1939 when he worked with Birge and Juday at the Trout Lake
Station. There he conducted research on the transparency of lake water and perfected
the Clarke-Bumpus plankton sampler. He is currently living in Belmont, Massachusetts.
Faye M. Couey (M.S. 1932) was a student of endocrinologist Frederick Hisaw and
parasitologist Chester A. Herrick. In 1931 and 1932 he conducted fish food studies at the
Trout Lake Station. He is now living in Kalispell, Montana, having retired from the
Montana Fish and Game Department.
Herbert J. Dutton (Ph.D. 1940) was a student of physical chemist Winston Manning
and plant physiologist Benjamin Duggar. In the summer of 1940 he had a postdoctoral
appointment to work on chromatic adaptation in relation to color and depth distribution
of freshwater phytoplankton and large aquatic plants in the Trout Lake region. In 1980
he retired as Chief of the USDA’s Oilseed Crops Laboratory, Northern Regional
Research Center, Peoria, Illinois, and was subsequently appointed Honorary Fellow,
University of Minnesota at the Hormel Institute. He now shares research time between
that institution, the Trout Lake Station, and his home on Diamond Lake in Cable,
Wisconsin.
W. T. Edmondson, Ph.D., was a student of G. E. Hutchinson at Yale University. He
spent the year 1938-1939 studying limnology and doing research at the University of
Wisconsin-Madison and at the Trout Lake Station under the sponsorship of Juday. He
is now Professor Emeritus of Zoology at the University of Washington in Seattle.
Daniel J. Faber (Ph.D. 1963) was a student of Hasler. His thesis research was on
limnetic larval fish in several northern Wisconsin lakes. He is currently a Senior Scientist
at the National Museum of Natural Sciences in Ottawa, Ontario.
IX
David G. Frey (Ph.D. 1940) was the last student of Juday. As an undergraduate he
worked as an assistant to William Spoor, who was also Juday’s student, and to Juday at
the Trout Lake Station in 1934. His thesis research was on the growth and ecology of
carp in Madison lakes. He is currently Professor Emeritus in the Department of Biology
at Indiana University in Bloomington.
Bradford C. Hafford (Ph.D. 1942) was a student of V. W. Meloche, working on
techniques for analyzing the chemistry of lake waters. He worked as a chemistry assis¬
tant at the Trout Lake Station in 1939 and 1940. He became involved in pollution abate¬
ment research in his industrial career and retired as Vice President of Research and
Development for the Natural Resources Group of Gulf and Western Industries. He cur¬
rently lives in Hawley, Pennsylvania.
Donald L. Halverson (M.S. 1918) was a member of the instructional staff and then
Director of Residence Halls for 22 years at the University of Wisconsin where he came to
know Birge when he was Dean and later, University President, and Juday when he was
Professor of Limnology. During the summers of the years Birge and Juday were at the
Trout Lake Station, Halverson saw them almost daily as they were close neighbors on
the Trout Lake Point. In later years, Halverson and Hasler became close friends.
Halverson retired from the university as a Professor of housing. He died September 6,
1987.
William T. Helm (Ph.D. 1958) was a student of Hasler and John Neess. He worked on
the population dynamics of young walleye in stocked and unstocked lakes, the effects of
alkalization and fertilization in Cather Lake , and, for his doctoral thesis, the ecology of
fishes in Lake Wingra. He is currently in the Department of Fisheries and Wildlife at
Utah State University in Logan.
John R. Hunter (Ph.D. 1962) was a student of Hasler, working on the net avoidance
behavior and reproductive behavior of fishes in both laboratory and field studies. He is
currently with the U.S. National Marine Fisheries Service, Southwest Fisheries Center in
La Jolla, California.
Richard E. Juday (Ph.D. 1943) is the son of Chancey Juday. He worked as an assis¬
tant to “Dad’s scientists’’ at the Trout Lake Station from 1934 to 1940. He completed an
undergraduate degree at Harvard University and returned to the University of Wisconsin
for a doctorate in organic chemistry. He has recently retired from the Chemistry Depart¬
ment at the University of Montana in Missoula.
Charles M. Kirkpatrick (Ph.D. 1943) was a student of physiologist R. K. Meier and
wildlife ecologist Aldo Leopold, working on the endocrinological development of Ring¬
necked Pheasants. In the summers of 1939 and 1940 he worked as an assistant to Juday
and to botanist John Potzger at the Trout Lake Station, where he also conducted in¬
dependent research on the foods of young Great Blue Herons. He is now Emeritus Pro¬
fessor in Wildlife Ecology in the Department of Forestry and Natural Resources at Pur¬
due University in West Lafayette, Indiana.
Gail Kirkpatrick accompanied her husband to the Trout Lake Station in the summer
of 1940. She was paid $50 plus her food and lodging for the summer to work as the cook
for about ten of the scientists and graduate students.
E. David Le Cren (M.S. 1947) was a student of Hasler, working on perch population
ecology in Lake Mendota. He has recently retired as Director of the Freshwater
Biological Association at the Windermere Laboratory in England.
John J. Magnuson joined the Zoology Department at the University of Wisconsin-
Madison in 1968. He had completed a Ph.D. in 1961 at the University of British Colum-
bia and had worked on the behavior and physiology of tuna in Hawaii for seven years
before coming to Wisconsin. He is currently Director for the Center for Limnology at
the University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Villiers W. Meloche was the chief chemist for Birge and Juday at the Trout Lake Sta¬
tion following George Kemmerer’s death in 1928. He was known as a pioneer in develop¬
ing new techniques for the chemical analysis of lake water. He was interviewed in 1979
about his experiences at Trout Lake. Meloche died in 1981 .
John C. Neess (Ph.D. 1949) was a student of Hasler. His thesis research on the
population ecology of bluntnose minnows was conducted in artificial ponds in the
University of Wisconsin Arboretum. He joined the Department of Zoology at the
University of Wisconsin-Madison shortly after completing his degree. Over the years he
advised a number of Hasler’s students on problems in experimental design and statistical
analysis.
Robert W. Pennak (Ph.D. 1938) was a student of Juday. He worked as an assistant to
Juday at the Madison campus from 1934 to 1936 and at the Trout Lake Station during
the summers of 1935 through 1938 while he did his own thesis research on the ecology of
psammolittoral organisms (beach interstitial faunas). He is currently Professor Emeritus
in the Department of Environmental, Population, and Organismic Biology at the
University of Colorado in Boulder.
John J. Peterka (M.S. 1960) was a student of Hasler, working on the survival of trout
in bog lakes in northern Wisconsin. He is currently in the Department of Zoology at
North Dakota State University in Fargo.
Gerald Prescott was a visiting scientist from Albion College and later, from Michigan
State University when he worked at the Trout Lake Station in the summers of 1936
through 1938. He conducted research on the taxonomy and distribution of algae in
relation to the chemistry of lake waters. He is currently Emeritus Professor of Botany at
Michigan State University in East Lansing and at the University of Montana in
Missoula, but resides in Wyoming, New York.
Robert A. Ragotzkie (Ph.D. 1953) was a student of Hasler and Reid A. Bryson, con¬
ducting research on the physical limnology, zooplankton, and heat budgets of lakes. He
is currently Director of the Sea Grant Institute at the University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Rex J. Robinson (Ph.D. 1929) was a student of analytical chemist George Kemmerer,
working on methods for the chemical analysis of lake water. He worked as an assistant
to Birge and Juday at the Trout Lake Station in the summers of 1926 through 1929.
From 1929 through 1971 he was a member of the Chemistry Department at the Univer¬
sity of Washington in Seattle. From 1931 to 1955 he was also a member of the Oceano¬
graphic Laboratories at the University of Washington. Robinson retired in 1971 as
Emeritus Professor of Chemistry and now lives in Seattle.
Clarence L. Schloemer (Ph.D. 1939) was a student of Juday, but also received advice
from Ralph Hile, who was working for the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries when he worked
with Birge and Juday at Trout Lake. Schloemer conducted research on the age and rate
of growth of bluegill and also worked on the growth of game fish, such as muskellunge
and walleyes, in northern Wisconsin lakes. He is currently Professor Emeritus at
Michigan State University in East Lansing.
William R. Schmitz (Ph.D. 1958) was a student of Hasler. For his thesis research, he
studied winterkill conditions in northern Wisconsin lakes. He was Associate Director for
the Trout Lake Station from 1966-1977, and is currently in the Department of Biological
Sciences at the University of Wisconsin-Marathon campus.
XI
Edward Schneberger (Ph.D. 1933) was a student of Juday, but also received advice
from fisheries biologist Ralph Hile. He conducted research on the bottom fauna of lakes
and also on the distribution, ecology, age, and growth of fishes in northern Wisconsin
lakes. His thesis research was on the growth of yellow perch in three lakes in the Trout
Lake region. Shortly after graduation, he was employed by the Wisconsin Conservation
Department, now the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources. He served as Fish¬
eries Biologist, Superintendent of Fish Management, and Director of Research and
Planning. He has retired from the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources, and he
and his wife, Helen, now live in Middleton, Wisconsin.
Helen Schneberger accompanied her husband to the Trout Lake Station during the
summers of 1930-1934. In 1932 she was hired to be the cook for the scientists and
students at the station.
Fredrick J. Stare, Ph.D., M.D., was a student of C. A. Elvehjem. He was an under¬
graduate when he worked at the Trout Lake Station as a chemistry assistant to V. W.
Meloche in the summers of 1928 through 1931. He founded the Department of Nutrition
at Harvard University in 1942 and is currently Professor Emeritus of Nutrition in the
Harvard University School of Public Health in Boston, Massachusetts.
Raymond G. Stross (Ph.D. 1958) was a student of Hasler and advisee of John Neess.
He continued the experimental lake liming project on Peter-Paul lakes. The research
focused on retention of the lime and its effect on water transparency, iron, and
phosphorus retention, and on zooplankton production. His study was the first to
estimate turnover times in wild Daphnia populations. He also studied predator substitu¬
tion in a fishless lake. He is currently in the Department of Biological Sciences at the
State University of New York at Albany.
Dale Toetz, Ph.D., was an undergraduate assistant to Hasler’s students, Daniel Faber
and William Helm, in 1958 when they were conducting research on walleye year-class
strength. He was also a student of John Neess (M.S. 1961) and later received a Ph.D.
(1965) from Indiana University. He is currently Professor of Zoology at Oklahoma State
University in Stillwater.
Clyde W. Voigtlander (Ph.D. 1971) was a student of Hasler. For his thesis research he
worked on the biology of white bass in Lake Mendota. He is currently with the En¬
vironmental Quality Staff of the Tennessee Valley Authority in Knoxville.
Leonard R. Wilson (Ph.D. 1935) was a student of botanist Norman Fassett and
geologist Frederick Thwaites. In the summers of 1932 through 1934 he worked at the
Trout Lake Station as an assistant to Birge and Juday, and in 1936, as a visiting scientist
from Coe College in Iowa. He conducted research on vegetation types, abundance, and
succession in northern lakes. He is currently George L. Cross Research Professor of
Geology and Geophysics, Emeritus, and Curator of Micropaleontology and Paleo¬
botany at the Museum of Science and History at the University of Oklahoma in Nor¬
man.
Warren J. Wisby (Ph.D. 1952) was a student of Hasler. He conducted both laboratory
work and field research on homing in salmon. Wisby also studied homing in black bass.
He is currently Associate Dean of the Rosenstiel School of Marine and Atmospheric
Science at the University of Miami in Florida.
Thomas E. Wissing (Ph.D. 1969) was a student of Hasler. His thesis research was con¬
cerned with the ecological energetics of young-of-the-year white bass in Lake Mendota.
He is currently Professor of Zoology at Miami University in Oxford, Ohio.
Stillman Wright (Ph.D. 1928) was a student of Juday, conducting research on
xii
zooplankton in Madison lakes and in South America. The summers of 1925 and 1927 he
was employed by the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries as an assistant to Juday in investigations
of northern lakes. Wright began working for the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries in 1938 and
retired from the Office of Foreign Activites of the Bureau in March 1963. He currently
resides in Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
Claude E. ZoBell was a visiting scientist from Scripps Institution of Oceanography
when, as a Postdoctoral Fellow at the University of Wisconsin from September 1938
through May 1939, he studied the role of bacteria in lake metabolism. Janice Stadler,
who was subsidized by the Works Progress Administration, was his full-time research
assistant at the University of Wisconsin. ZoBell is currently Professor Emeritus of
Marine Microbiology at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of Califor¬
nia, San Diego, La Jolla.
We would like to thank those people who helped conduct interviews: Carl Bowser,
Department of Geology and Geophysics; Thomas Frost, Associate Director for the
Trout Lake Station, Center for Limnology; and Jean Lang, University-Industry Re¬
search Program. We also appreciate the advice and comments of Art Spingarn, Botany
Department, William Coleman, History of Science Department, Thomas Brock, De¬
partment of Bacteriology, Timothy Kratz, Center for Limnology, Robert McIntosh, De¬
partment of Biological Sciences, University of Notre Dame, W. T. Edmondson, Depart¬
ment of Zoology, University of Washington, and Katherine Webster, Wisconsin Depart¬
ment of Natural Resources, who reviewed early manuscripts of the book. The coopera¬
tion of the State Historical Society of Wisconsin in providing photographs for the book
is also greatly appreciated.
xiii
1
Beginnings
Limnology at the University of Wisconsin began with the research of Edward A. Birge,
' who arrived in Madison in 1875 as an instructor of natural history at the university.
Birge had begun studying Cladocera, a group of zooplankton, while he was a student at
Williams College in Massachusetts. He continued research on the systematics of
Cladocera at his new university post, but it was not until more than 20 years later, when
Birge became interested in the physical and chemical conditions controlling the seasonal
distribution of zooplankton in Lake Mendota, that his research became limnological.
About the turn of the century when Birge’ s research interests were turning toward lim¬
nology, he acquired a partner — a young limnologist from Indiana named Chancey Ju-
day. The story of limnology in Wisconsin from 1900 to 1940 is the story of this famous
partnership.
Birge was born in 1851 and grew up on a farm near New Haven, New York. He receiv¬
ed A.B, (1873) and A.M. (1876) degrees from Williams College in Massachusetts. In the
fall of 1873 Birge went to the Museum of Comparative Zoology in Cambridge to work
with Louis Agassiz, probably the most well-known geologist and biologist in the country
at that time.
“Agassiz had all of the large collection of sea-urchins in the Museum brought out and placed on
long tables in one of the corridors. I was to work them over, arrange and reclassify them, a task
which would have occupied me for a couple of years or more. Agassiz visited me daily, asked
about my progress, advised me as to books, etc. I suppose that if he had lived I should now be a
specialist on the group of Echinodermata.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built,”
an address to the Madison Literary Club.
Agassiz died only three months after Birge arrived, but Birge was given the opportu¬
nity to continue his education at Harvard, which was then organizing a graduate school
(Sellery 1956). In 1875, before he had completed his doctoral degree, Birge left Harvard
for Wisconsin.
At the time Birge arrived at the University of Wisconsin the school was only 25 years
old and had only four to five hundred students. Birge was the first trained zoologist at
the university, despite the fact that the 1870-1871 course catalog lists zoology as a
department equipped for graduate work (Noland 1950). He constituted a one-man
biology department, teaching courses in zoology, botany, bacteriology, human
anatomy, and physiology (Frey 1963). After only four years as an instructor, including
time off to complete a Ph.D. at Harvard in 1878, Birge was promoted to professor.
Birge played a major role in developing a research program in zoology and physiology
at the University of Wisconsin. Before his arrival, there had been almost no biological
research conducted at the university nor were there facilities or equipment for doing so.
An 1850 inventory of the university library listed only one book on zoology, two on con-
chology, two on natural history, two on chemistry, 1 1 on medicine, and 62 on theology
(Noland 1950).
1
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Birge was among the first to emphasize individual laboratory work by students as a
method of teaching. Although he initiated research courses for students, Birge found lit¬
tle time for his own research on Cladocera.
“It is significant of the state which the University had then reached [1880] that no thought
entered my head, or that of anyone else, that I should apply part of this time in research. Nor
was there any thought of developing zoological teaching to the stage of graduate and profes¬
sional courses. I decided to offer advanced undergraduate courses which should give a better
scientific training to future students of medicine. . . . This teaching fully occupied my time for a
decade, 1881-1891, and during those years there was little or no work on lakes. . . . During
those years my interest in lakes and their inhabitants was not dead but was dormant.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
Birge’s first attempts at research were concerned primarily with the anatomy and
systematics of Cladocera and were not really limnological. He has started studying
Daphnia at Williams College and had continued his research at Harvard.
“When the time came for a thesis Daphnia came to the fore again. I used my study of its
anatomy and I worked up the group of microcrustacea to which it belongs as represented in
Fresh Pond at Cambridge and later at Madison, especially in Lake Wingra. The resulting thesis
was a very poor one, judged by any modern standards, even the most charitable, but it was the
first attempt in this country to give a systematic account of the group of Crustacea.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
He became an authority on the taxonomy and ecology of Cladocera, as was recog¬
nized later when he was asked to write a chapter on Cladocera for H. B. Ward and G. C.
Whipple’s Freshwater Biology (1918). Prior to that monograph, Birge had written just
four major papers dealing with the systematics of Cladocera, (1879, 1892, 1893, 1910b).
About the turn of the century his research took a distinct limnological turn, not so
much by design as by accident. Birge had encountered a short paper by France' (1894)
on diel migration, which demonstrated that in Lake Balaton in Hungary, the
zooplankton come to the surface at night and do not descend to greater depths until
about dawn, where they remain until early afternoon (Frey 1963). Birge was interested in
determining how extensive the migration might be in Lake Mendota, a deeper lake than
Balaton. To sample discrete water depths, he designed a vertical tow net that could be
opened at any depth by means of a messenger and then closed again by a second
messenger after pulling the net through a desired thickness of water (Frey 1963). Birge
and his two senior thesis students, O. A. Olson and H. P. Harder, collected
microcrustacea from different depths and counted the numbers of each species. This
procedure was repeated every three hours, day and night, for several groups of days in
July and August and also later in the year. When they had counted the Crustacea in all
the catches, they found no evidence of vertical migration at dusk or dawn, but Birge and
his students did find an unexpected vertical distribution of the plankton.
“No one could have had limnology less in mind than I did when in 1894 I started to work out,
by quantitative methods, the annual story of the microcrustacea of Lake Mendota ... for the
best authority tells us that the word limnology did not appear in English until more than a year
after our work began. . . .
“I meant to make a thorough study, so I selected a primary station about half way out to Pic¬
nic Point, where the water is about sixty feet deep. This depth was to be divided into six levels of
ten feet each; the Crustacea were to be collected separately from each level, and the different
2
Breaking New Waters
species determined and counted. This process was to be continued for a year or more. In fact, it
went on until the end of the year 1897, and included from the several depths nearly five thou¬
sand catches, each containing up to a dozen forms of Crustacea, of which eight species were
abundant. . . .
“May I not venture just a hint that, when a monument seems to suit my condition better than
a dinner, a spar-buoy properly painted and firmly anchored there [end of Picnic Point] would
suitably commemorate my transfer from zoology to limnology.
“In the early days of this study, Mendota surprised me by a revelation of a peculiarity in her
life as a lake which was to determine my thinking and my work in science for all the following
years. As our crustacea-catching continued into midsummer we found that our booty began to
disappear from the lower waters of the lake. The process continued until the lake became di¬
vided into two widely different parts. There was an upper lake, about 30 feet thick, whose water
was warm and was filled with abundant plant and animal life. Below this lay an abrupt transi¬
tion to the lower and colder half of the lake, which was not only cold but also without living
plants and animals. . . .
“As Mendota cooled in autumn its upper and active stratum gradually became thicker and
the lake reached its full activity at all depths in late October or early November, an activity
limited only by the lower temperature of the water. This process is repeated every year.
“This story, which Mendota told me without my asking for it was the revelation that sent me
into limnology.”
E. A. Birge, 1940, First Symposium on Hy¬
drobiology, held in Madison on Birge’s 89th
birthday to honor him for his contributions to
limnology.
In these studies of zooplankton in Lake Mendota, Birge became more and more in¬
trigued with the physical and chemical conditions controlling the distribution of the
Crustacea. Research on the seasonal distribution of plankton led him directly into an in¬
vestigation of thermal stratification and lake chemistry.
These early studies of plankton distribution in Lake Mendota (Birge, Olson, and
Harder 1895, Birge 1897) marked the beginning of limnology at the University of
Wisconsin and of Birge as a limnologist (Frey 1963, Mortimer 1956). In these reports
Birge not only described the seasonal and vertical distribution of eleven species of crusta¬
ceans, he also documented the story of the lake’s seasons of circulation and stratifica¬
tion. It was not the first presentation of the annual temperature cycle in a lake, but
Birge’s interpretation of it in terms of the interplay of sun and wind has become classic
(Mortimer 1956). In a paper on the annual thermal regime of Lake Mendota (Birge
1898), he noted many phenomena that are now part of our general understanding of the
thermal dynamics of lakes— the lowering of the thermocline during summer, the increase
in water temperature beneath the ice, the marked rise in temperature of the bottom water
during the destruction of thermal stratification in autumn, and the variations in position
and thickness of the thermocline under various wind stresses (Frey 1963). In this report,
Birge introduced the word “thermocline” to limnology and oceanography. He intro¬
duced “epilimnion” and “hypolimnion” in a later paper on temperature seiches (Birge
1910a).
About the same time that Birge was completing his first plankton studies on Lake
Mendota, the Wisconsin legislature established the Wisconsin Geological and Natural
History Survey. The Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters, of which Birge
was an active member, had played an instrumental role in the creation of the Survey. In
1893, the Academy had established a committee composed of Chairman C. R. Van
3
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Hise, Birge, C. R. Barnes, G. L. Collie, and A. J. Rogers, to draw up a bill for presenta¬
tion to the state legislature (Bean 1937). The legislature, however, was reluctant to con¬
sider the bill.
“In 1873 the Wisconsin legislature commissioned what has come to be known as the [Thomas
C.] Chamberlin Survey, which resulted in four volumes on the geology of Wisconsin, the last
published in 1882. The legislature incorrectly thought that once a survey was done, it was done,
there was no need to do another.
“University scientists, however, agitated for a permanent survey. In 1893 the Wisconsin
Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters appointed a committee, led by geologist Charles Van
Hise, to put together a proposal for a bill to establish a permanent survey. The bill was finally
approved in the 1897 session.”
M. E. Ostrom, Director and State Geologist of
the Wisconsin Geological and Natural History
Survey, 1987, personal communication.
The legislature allocated $5000 a year for the Survey and appointed Birge as the Direc¬
tor (Bean 1937). He now had at his disposal considerably greater resources for conduct¬
ing research. He found, however, that he had little time for research. Birge was not only
Director of the Survey, but also Chairman of the Zoology Department (1875-1906),
Dean of the College of Letters and Science (1891-1918), and Commissioner of Fisheries
(1895-1915) for the state of Wisconsin. And in 1900 he was appointed Acting President
of the University of Wisconsin, a position he held until 1903 (Frey 1963, Noland 1950).
To keep his research program from suffering he began to look for a partner. He found
Chancey Juday, whom he hired as Biologist for the Survey in 1900.
“. . . the founding of the Survey in 1897 is an all important fact. . . . Looked at in the large, the
story from this time on is a new one. . . . The most important result in the end was that it made
possible the presence and work of Dr. Juday. ... He was the first and for years the only lim-
nologist in the country, and we knew the fact though we did not discover the word for a good
many years.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
Chancey Juday was born in 1871 in Millersburg along the northern edge of the lake
district in Indiana. He received his A.B. (1896) and A.M. (1897) degrees from Indiana
University where he met Carl Eigenmann, who in 1895 had established a biological sta¬
tion on Turkey Lake (currently Lake Wawasee) only a few miles from Juday’s home
(Frey 1963). It may have been through Birge’s contacts with Eigenmann that Birge
learned of the young limnologist who had studied plankton in Turkey Lake (Juday
1897), Lake Maxinkuckee (Juday 1902), and Winona Lake (Juday 1903). In Lake Max-
inkuckee Juday had also studied the diurnal movements of plankton.
Juday’s first assignment as Survey Biologist was to study diel migration of
zooplankton in Mendota and other lakes of southeastern Wisconsin (Frey 1963).
After only a year with the Survey, however, Juday developed tuberculosis and had
to leave the Midwest. For the next few years, while he served on the biology or
zoology staffs of the Universities of Colorado and California, there was a hiatus in
limnology at the University of Wisconsin (Frey 1963, Noland 1945).
Juday rejoined the Survey in 1905 and was made a half-time lecturer in Limnology in
the Department of Zoology at the University of Wisconsin in 1908. In 1909 he began
teaching the first courses offered at the university in limnology and plankton organisms.
4
Breaking New Waters
From October 1907 to June 1908 Juday travelled in Europe, visiting universities and
biological stations in Germany, Denmark, Sweden, Austria, Hungary, Italy, France,
and England, where he became acquainted with the leading aquatic biologists of Europe
(Juday 1910). In February 1910 Juday travelled to Central America to study four semi-
tropical lakes in Guatemala and El Salvador. As a result of his research there, he
published one of the first studies in tropical limnology (Juday 1915).
Dirge and Juday’s early efforts as a team were concentrated on the Madison lakes,
especially Mendota, and on other lakes in southeastern Wisconsin. Although their first
joint paper was published in 1908, Dirge and Juday’s first major effort came in 1911
when they published the now classic paper on dissolved gases, “The inland lakes of
Wisconsin: The dissolved gases of the water and their biological significance.” The
dissolved gases study had evolved directly from Dirge’s research on the seasonal distribu¬
tion of microcrustacea in Lake Mendota.
“It was an obvious guess that exhaustion of oxygen was at least one of the factors at work in
summer, in the deeper water of Lake Mendota, to exclude the higher life of the lake from that
region. So in 1904 there began the serious study of the dissolved gases of the lake water. Along
with this there necessarily went careful observations of temperature; a little was done with light;
much was done on conditions and changes in the minute life of the waters as affected by
dissolved gases. The center of this activity was chemical and, therefore, with this study began
that cooperation in our work of various University departments; out of this cooperation has
come much of its success.
“To this investigation Dr. Victor Lehner gave his time and energy without stint; he devised
apparatus and methods; he directed the earlier work in person; then he initiated Dr. R. C. Ben¬
ner as his successor.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
During the five-year study a tremendous amount of information on water chemistry,
temperatures, and plankton was accumulated from 156 lakes, mainly in southeastern
Wisconsin, although many lakes in the northeastern and northwestern lake districts were
examined briefly (Birge and Juday 1911). The 259-page report showed how seasonal
changes in the distribution of dissolved gases are geared to the annual cycle of circula¬
tion and stratification and to the activities of plants, animals, and bacteria.
“Judged by its influence on the subsequent development of limnology, the dissolved-gases
report is the most outstanding single contribution of the Wisconsin school. In the remarkable
introductory essay . . . Birge charts those regions of the lake environment which he had so
largely helped to explore, and outlines some problems lying ahead. Holding within its many
subsidiary ones, was the main problem: 'Why do lakes differ so widely in productivity or in
ability to support a population of plankton?’ This was a puzzle destined to occupy Birge and
Juday for the rest of their lives, and one to which limnologists are still striving to find the solu¬
tion.”
C. Mortimer, 1956, “An Explorer of Lakes.”
In the 1911 dissolved gases study Birge and Juday established two traditions that were
to continue throughout the course of their partnership and were to become trademarks
of their work. The first tradition was a multidisciplinary approach to limnological
research; the second was the collection of tremendous amounts of data. Birge and Juday
recognized limnology as a synthetic science. Collaboration with scientists from other
disciplines reached its height during later years when Birge and Juday were conducting
5
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
research in Wisconsin’s northeastern lake district. Many of these collaborators are
discussed by Frank Egerton in chapter five.
“The title pages of most of these reports carry the names of more than one author, and the list
of such collaborators exceeds 50. The number is far greater of those who have helped bring
together the data for these reports but who took no part in writing them. I emphasize the large
number of collaborators, for the study of lakes is a synthetic science. . . . The biologist alone is
quite helpless if he attempts to determine the laws governing the production of fish in a lake. He
must ask help from the chemist, physicist, geographer, geologist, and meteorologist if he is to
understand these laws or even appreciate their presence and estimate their influence.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
“A good many European limnologists used to talk about the broad base of limnology.
Theinemann, Ruttner, Wolterek, and some of the other major European limnologists would
stress the fact that limnology consisted of chemistry, plankton, bottom fauna, geology,
microbiology, physics, rooted aquatics, and so forth. But these other people never gave it more
than lip service. For the first time, Birge and Juday synthesized and realized as Birge put it, ‘in
order to find out how a lake keeps house, you’ve got to study all of these various aspects of the
lake.’ In my own view, they were really the first group in the world to put into being the idea
that limnology is a synthesis of many different kinds of sciences.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
The second tradition, collecting a wealth of data, was based on Birge and Juday’ s
belief that if enough data are gathered, the data will speak for themselves. They both
thought that theorizing on the basis of too few data could be dangerous, and they shared
a disdain for “desk-produced” papers.
“As our work has progressed we have been increasingly impressed by the complexity of the
questions involved. This has become more and more manifest as our experience has extended to
numerous lakes and to many seasons. If this report had been written at the close of the first or
second year’s work, it would have been much more definite in its conclusions and explanations
than is now the case. The extension of our acquaintance with the lakes has been fatal to many
interesting and at one time promising theories.”
E. A. Birge and C. Juday, 1911, “The Inland
Lakes of Wisconsin. The Dissolved Gases of
the Water and Their Biological Significance.”
Martin Gillen, a long-time friend and former student of Birge’s, related this story:
“I asked him [Birge] one evening, ‘How many tests have you made with your “light machine”
in the northern lakes?’ He said, ‘19,952.’ I replied, ‘Well, Doctor, it will not be very long now
before you will be able to announce a solution of this problem.’ He stopped a moment, shook
his head, and said, ‘Martin, I think after this work is kept up twenty-five or thirty years longer,
we may have the answer to it all.’ ”
M. Gillen, 1940, First Symposium on Hydrobiology.
Birge and Juday were field limnologists and were somewhat skeptical of the value of
laboratory experiments.
“I suspect that [G. Evelyn] Hutchinson’s conclusions regarding the killing of Cladocera by the
zinc in Bear Lake was like a good many other conclusions derived from laboratory experiments;
6
Breaking New Waters
they are not valid in nature. Limnologists still have a lot to learn about plants and animals in
their natural environment.”
C. Juday, 1940, letter to S. Wright.
Birge was attracted to the complexity of lakes and the then fashionable concept of a
lake as a closed system, a microcosm or a “unit of environment,” an individual with
physiological processes analogous to those of an organism (Frey 1963, Mortimer 1956).
No doubt both Birge and Juday were influenced by Stephen A. Forbes classic paper
(1887) on the lake as a microcosm. The concept of the lake as a “unit of higher order”
became a guiding principle in their work.
“Perhaps the chief interest which our work has had for us has been the fact that its progress has
revealed to us the existence of physiological processes in lakes as complex, as distinct, and as
varied as those of one of the higher animals. . . . These are examples of questions whose solu¬
tion demands not merely a knowledge of the biology of the several species of algae, but also the
study of the several lakes as physiological individuals of a higher order.”
E. A. Birge and C. Juday, 1911, “The Inland
Lakes of Wisconsin. The Dissolved Gases of
the Water and Their Biological Significance.”
“The lake is the one true microcosm, for nowhere else is the life of the great world, in all of its
intricacies, so clearly disclosed to us as in the tiny model offered by the inland lake.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
As indicated in the dissolved gases report, Birge and Juday were aware of the rapid
changes occurring in the young science — that limnology was evolving from the “natural
history” phase toward being a true science.
“Various papers which have been recently published on the problems of limnology show that
the science is passing from the initial stage of the collecting of more or less disconnected facts to
that of the establishment of principles.”
E. A. Birge and C. Juday, 1911, “The Inland
Lakes of Wisconsin. The Dissolved Gases of
the Water and Their Biological Significance.”
The dissolved gases study led directly to quantitative studies of plankton standing
crops (Birge and Juday 1922), and still later to an investigation of the dissolved organic
content of lake waters (Birge and Juday 1926, 1927a, 1927b, 1934) as a means of study¬
ing the differences among lakes in their ability to produce organic matter. As was true of
much of their research, their investigations of dissolved organic matter led to the
development of new techniques and equipment.
“With 1911 began the second stage in our education. We took up the determination of the
kinds, quantities, and composition of the fundamental foodstuffs produced in Lake Mendota.
At first we employed the standard methods; the use of fine silk nets to strain this food from the
water; the methods were modified so as to give quantitative results. But it was plain that much
of the finer foodstuffs escaped through the meshes of the net and our problem was to find a
way of obtaining this food in large amounts and in a shape such that further studies could be
made on it. The solution came to us from Dr. Hotchkiss, the State Geologist. He had seen a
milk clarifier at work in our Agricultural Department and suggested that such a machine might
do our work.
“This was the introduction into limnology of the continuously acting centrifuge and it
7
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
wrought a revolution in our possibilities of investigation. ... In the years of our study we
strained through the silk net more than 2000 tons of water from Lake Mendota and obtained
from this water foodstuffs amounting to about one and one-half pounds of dry organic
material. We ran through the centrifuge nearly 200 tons of water and extracted about 10 ounces
of dry foodstuffs. . . . With this new and powerful extractor we were able to get a definite no¬
tion of the quantity of this food stuff and of its nutritive value as determined by chemistry. For
the first time we had a definite notion of one important element in the lake’s housekeeping. ...”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
The study involved thousands of analyses which brought Dr. Henry Schuette and
others in the university chemistry department into a collaboration more intensive than
that in the dissolved gases study (Mortimer 1956). The main effort was expended in
determinations of organic matter and nitrogen content. When this pioneer survey was
extended to other lakes, the effort was aided greatly by the development, under Pro¬
fessor George Kemmerer’s direction, of techniques for estimating minute amounts of
carbon and nitrogen (Mortimer 1956). Like the dissolved gases study, the quantitative
studies of plankton standing crops are considered among Birge and Juday’s major con¬
tributions to limnology (Frey 1963, Mortimer 1956).
After 1917 Birge and Juday’s efforts shifted away from the Madison region; from
1921 to 1924 they carried out intensive chemical and biological investigations of Green
Lake, the deepest lake in Wisconsin. By the mid- 1920s, however, their attention was
drawn to the lake district in northern Wisconsin, where in 1925 they established the
Trout Lake research station.
‘‘The third stage of our education by the lakes, that from 1917 to 1924, was the most important
and fruitful. ... It culminated in the discovery that lake waters contain, in solution, a very
large quantity of organics. . . . Here we had for the first time a definite notion of the total quan¬
tity of food and eaters handled by the lakes in the process of their housekeeping. . . . Thus after
nearly 20 years of experience in the study of lakes we had learned to ask the question: How does
a lake keep house? Twenty years had been sufficient time to teach us how to ask the question
with a fair degree of intelligence, though they were far too few to give more than a hint at the
answer. But we did not think little of the progress we had made.
‘‘So we celebrated that turning point in our history by departure to new waters. Our field
work on gases had made us acquainted with the lake region of Northeastern Wisconsin whose
center may be placed at Trout Lake. Here is a triangular area of some 3000 square miles that
contains literally thousands of lakes. These differ in every character. . . . Thus these lakes pre¬
sent to the student what may well be called a countless number of native experimental plots,
where nature is trying out her experiments in aquiculture [5/c aquaculture], under a wide variety
of conditions and with every degree of success and failure in the limitless range of experiment.
‘‘So we were bold enough to make the fourth period of our work a beginning of the study of a
group of lakes, instead of concentrating our labors on one or two lakes or at most on a few. We
hoped to get a sort of average for the varied housekeeping present in a group, and thus to arrive
at a better understanding of the general principles underlying the process.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
8
Breaking New Waters
References
Bean, E. F. 1937. State geological surveys of Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 30:
203-220.
Birge, E. A. 1879. Notes on Cladocera. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 4: 77-1 12.
_ . 1892. Notes and list of Crustacea Cladocera from Madison, Wisconsin. Trans. Wis.
Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 8: 379-398.
_ . 1893. Notes on Cladocera, III. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 9: 275-317.
_ . 1897. The vertical distribution of the limnetic Crustacea of Lake Mendota. Biol. Centr.
17:371-374.
_ . 1898. Plankton studies on Lake Mendota, II. The Crustacea of the plankton from
July, 1894, to December, 1896. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 11: 274-448.
_ 1910a. On the evidence for temperature seiches. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 16:
1005-1016.
_ . 1910b. Notes on Cladocera, IV. Trans. Wis . Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 16: 1017-1066.
_ . 1936. A House Half Built. An address before the Madison Literary Club, October 12. In
the Birge papers, State Historical Society of Wisconsin. 33 p.
_ . 1940. Edward A. Birge, Teacher and Scientist. Addresses delivered at a dinner on
September 5, 1940, given to honor Birge for his contributions to the science of limnology and in
commemoration of his eighty-ninth birthday by the Symposium on Hydrobiology. University
of Wisconsin Press, Madison. 48 p.
_ and C. Juday. 1911. The inland lakes of Wisconsin. The dissolved gases of the water and
their biological significance. Wis. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv., Bull. 22, 259 + x p.
_ and _ . 1922. The inland lakes of Wisconsin. The plankton. I. Its quantity and
chemical composition. Wis. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv., Bull 64, 222 + ix p.
_ and _ 1926. The organic content of lake water. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 12: 515-519.
_ and _ . 1927a. Organic content of lake water. Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. 42: 185-205.
_ and _ . 1927b. The organic content of the water of small lakes. Proc. Amer. Phil.
Soc. 66: 357-372.
_ and _ . 1934. Particulate and dissolved organic matter in inland lakes. Ecol. Monogr.
4: 440-474.
_ , O. A. Olson, and H. P. Harder. 1895. Plankton studies on Lake Mendota. I. The vertical
distribution of pelagic Crustacea during July, 1894. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 10:
421-484.
Forbes, S. A. 1887. The lake as a microcosm. Bull. Peoria (III.) Sci. Assoc. 1887. Reprinted in
Bull. III. Nat. Hist. Surv. 15: 537-550 (1925).
France', R. H. 1894. Zur Biologiedes Planktons. Biol. Centr. 14: 33-38.
Frey, D. G. 1963. Wisconsin: the Birge-Juday era. In D. G. Frey (ed.). Limnology in North
America. University of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 3-54.
Juday, C. 1897. The plankton of Turkey Lake. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1896: 287-296.
_ 1902. The plankton of Lake Maxinkuckee, Indiana. Trans. Amer. Microscop. Soc. 24:
61-62.
_ 1903. The plankton of Winona Lake. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1902: 120-133.
_ . 1910. Some European biological stations. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 16:
1257-1277.
_ 1915. Limnological studies on some lakes in Central America. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci.
Arts Lett. 18:214-250.
Mortimer, C. H. 1956. An explorer of lakes. In G. C. Sellery. E. A. Birge. A Memoir. University
of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 165-21 1 .
Noland, L. E. 1945. Chancey Juday. Limnol. Soc. Amer., Spec. Publ. 16: 1-3.
_ 1950. History of the Department of Zoology, University of Wisconsin. Bios 21 : 83-109.
Sellery, G. C. 1956. E. A. Birge. A Memoir. University of Wisconsin Press, Madison. 221 p.
Ward, H. B. and G. C. Whipple. 1918. Freshwater Biology. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
1111 p.
9
2
New Waters
The “Trout Lake Limnological Laboratory of the Wisconsin Geological and
Natural History Survey,’’ as it was called by Birge and Juday, was established in
June, 1925, shortly after Birge retired from the university presidency at the age of 73.
Birge and Juday were attracted to Wisconsin’s northeastern lake district by the great
number and diversity of lakes. Their hope was that by studying these lakes, which varied
widely in their physical, chemical, and biological characteristics, they would discover
general limnological principles.
Their research on the northeastern lakes, where the relatively soft water makes analyz¬
ing for chemical content difficult, was made possible by the development of
microanalysis.
“Dr. Pregl, Professor of Chemistry in the University of Graz, had devised methods and ap¬
paratus for what he called microanalysis, in which were employed incredibly small quantities of
material. . . . The Survey purchased his apparatus in 1923, but no chemist in the University, or
for that matter in the country, had ever used the method, and none seemed to think that it was a
practical affair. ... It [the apparatus] stood in my office, unused for a year or so, when it at¬
tracted the attention of Dr. Kemmerer, who was then giving much of his research time to aiding
our work. He remodeled the apparatus, putting in electrical methods instead of gas. He
simplified it. . . . This was the second time that apparatus had revolutionized our work, the first
being the use of the centrifuge in obtaining plankton. The centrifuge and microanalysis have
made limnology into a new and wholly different science.”
E. A. Birge, 1936, “A House Half Built.”
For the first three years the research station was in an old schoolhouse and garage near
the Wisconsin State Forestry Headquarters on Trout Lake. Part of the garage building
served as an office and laboratory. The chemistry laboratory was in the nearby
schoolhouse. Birge had a room in the Forestry Headquarters Building for sleeping, but
Juday and the others slept in tents on the lake shore and ate their meals with the forestry
workers (R. Robinson 1983, personal communication). Beginning in 1927 Juday
brought his family to Trout Lake, and they stayed in a log cottage near the station. Ju-
day’s son Richard, who later graduated with a Ph.D. (1943) in chemistry from the
University of Wisconsin, began helping as a field assistant in 1934.
“I started rowing Dick Wilson around in ’34. From then through the summer of ’40 I worked
every summer here. Before that, we had cabins in various places. Sometimes, I’d just go out
and Father would say, ‘Well, we’re going to such and such lakes,’ and then we’d go tag along.”
R. Juday, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Just getting to the northeastern lake district was a major feat in itself. In 1925 there
were only 20 miles of paved roads between Madison and Trout Lake. The other 200
miles was rough gravel. On one of his first trips to Trout Lake Juday broke an axle on
11
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
his Model T Ford (R. Juday 1983, personal communication). Getting out to the lakes to
get samples was also no easy task.
“We used a Model T Ford for transportation to the neighboring lakes. The ‘improved’ roads
were gravel and became very rough during heavy summer usage. Remote lakes were served with
dirt roads, usually of very poor quality. Many lakes were inaccessible except by trail. We made
use of rowboats at resorts whenever available. If no boat was available, we set up a portable
wood-frame canvas boat or inflated a portable rubber boat. A few times one of us would swim
out a distance from shore to take a water temperature and obtain a water sample.”
R. Robinson, 1983, personal communication.
If one of the researchers swam, it was not Birge or Juday, as neither of these eminent
limnologists could swim (A. Hasler and R. Juday 1983, personal communication).
However, Juday’s daughter, Mary, notes that her father could swim a little (M. Juday
1987, personal communication).
Even though the facilities were modest, the staff grew from three biologists (Birge, Ju¬
day, and Stillman Wright, a graduate student of Juday) and one chemist (Stanton
Taylor, a graduate student of George Kemmerer) in 1925 to seven biologists and three
chemists by 1928. By the mid- 1930s there would be as many as twenty-two scientists and
assistants at the Trout Lake Station each summer.
In 1928 the Wisconsin Conservation Department (later the Department of Natural
Resources) gave the Survey permission to use two wooden bathhouses on the shore of
Trout Lake for permanent laboratories. Birge and Juday had another building con¬
structed, and every few years added an additional building to the station facilities. Some
were built during the Depression of the 1930s using WPA labor.
Juday was the director of the research station from 1925 until his retirement in 1942.
During those years the north-central lake district was the main center for limnological
research at the University of Wisconsin. The approach at Trout Lake was not so much
problem oriented or lake oriented. The researchers were concerned primarily with
surveying large numbers of lakes for various chemical and biological properties and
studying the range of variation of these properties and their presumed controls, especi¬
ally as they related to drainage and seepage lakes (Frey 1963). Under Juday’s direction,
and with the help of student labor, more than 500 lakes were examined, chiefly during
the period 1925 to 1932, for water chemistry, plankton, and for the intensity and color
of underwater illumination. A complete set of field determinations comprised 19 dif¬
ferent chemical, physical, and biological items (Frey 1963). George Kemmerer directed
the chemical work for Birge and Juday at Trout Lake and in Madison from 1925 to his
death in 1928. Rex Robinson was a graduate student working under the direction of
Kemmerer.
“During the summers I was at Trout Lake we investigated well over 500 lakes in Vilas and ad¬
joining counties. ... As most of the lakes had not been investigated limnologically before, we
would first sound the lake for depth with lead and calibrated line to establish our station at the
location of deepest depth. Water temperatures at different depths were taken to establish the
thermocline. Samples of water and plankton were then taken at appropriate depths. Readings
for turbidity were usually taken with the Secchi disc.
“After our samples were taken we would hurry home to the laboratory for the analytical
work. Thousands of analyses were made during the summer’s work. The normal list included:
pH, dissolved oxygen, free and fixed carbon dioxide, soluble phosphate, organic phosphorus,
soluble silicate, nitrate, nitrite, ammonia, organic nitrogen. Each day the results were reported
12
Breaking New Waters
to Dr. Birge or Dr. Juday. Dr. Birge evaporated water samples to determine water residue and
also to obtain samples for C-H analyses later in Madison. Dr. Birge made light penetration
measurements by making measurements at different water depths with a photometer. He also
made measurements for different bands of wavelengths by covering the eye of the photometer
with different colored glass filters. . . .
“Our lives were busy ones. Breakfast at 7 a.m. and off to the selected lake(s) of the day as
soon as we could load up the auto with the necessary bottles and needed equipment. We worked
seven days a week. The only diversion for the young folks was fishing on Trout Lake or the
Saturday night dance at the Trout Lake Dance Pavilion at the south end of Trout Lake. But
those were pleasant summers and I treasure the memories.”
R. Robinson, 1983, personal communication.
The period from 1925 to the early 1940s was an extremely productive time for the two
limnologists and their many colleagues. At the University of Wisconsin, zoologists,
botanists, chemists, bacteriologists, geologists, and others were being drawn more and
more into a cooperative program (Frey 1963).
“The research that was being carried on up here was really at the forefront of limnology around
the world. . . . Even though they were doing these extensive studies here, they were also doing
the intensive studies on the six lakes. [Trout, Nebish, Weber, Crystal, Muskellunge, Silver
(Sparkling)]. They were involved in really current things.”
D. Frey, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
The research Birge and Juday wanted to conduct required the participation of people
from many disciplines and a large number of “helping hands.” Birge was particularly
well placed in Madison to obtain those “helping hands.” As former Dean and President
he could enlist the help of university chemists, biologists, bacteriologists, physicists, and
instrument-makers. He was able to obtain financial support for the work, for equip¬
ment, and for assistance in the field.
“One of Birge’s great contributions was his ability to go across the university and find the ex¬
pert he needed. There weren’t many places in the world where you had such a combination of
talent. Birge’s political savvy and his aggressiveness, combined with his having attained a lead¬
ership role in the university at a very young age, enabled him to get both money and experts.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Most of the funding for research conducted during this period came directly from the
state through the Geological and Natural History Survey. Birge and Juday also obtained
money from the university, the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, the Wisconsin
Conservation Department and the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries, with whom Juday main¬
tained a consulting and cooperating relationship for many years. The limnologists also
received substantial funds from private sources, such as the Brittingham Fund, which
was established by Thomas Brittingham in 1927 with the understanding that his gifts
would be applied to subjects that were of “prime scientific importance, yet so complex
and so remote from immediate practical use that we [Birge and Juday] did not think it
right to employ the limited state funds in their study” (Birge 1940). Birge and Juday
were not above a bit of “book juggling” to get additional funds for equipment.
“They did have one unique way of getting funds. They were able to get some money from the
Bureau of Fisheries for labor. If they needed equipment they would put somebody on the
13
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
payroll for a month. When the check came, that individual endorsed it and they bought the
equipment. I know I endorsed several of those checks.”
E. Schneberger, 1983, “History of Limnology
in Wisconsin Conference.”
The involvement of so many people in the research program at Trout Lake and in
Madison makes their contributions to limnology difficult to summarize. The single ma¬
jor effort at Trout Lake was the broad survey involving more than 500 northeastern
lakes. Juday and Birge (1933) reported on transparency, color, and specific conductance
for most of these lakes. Following Kemmerer’s death, direction of the chemical work
was taken over by Villiers W. “Mel” Meloche, who was a pioneer in the application of
new instruments to chemical analyses. In the chemical reports, which were written in
association with Meloche, the researchers reported analyses of silicon, iron, manganese,
calcium, magnesium, fluoride, chloride, sulfate, and ammonia, nitrite, nitrate, and
nitrogen. The ranges and frequency distributions were given, as well as the distribution
with depth and the relation to the general chemical conditions in the lakes (Juday, Birge,
and Meloche 1938). They also reported on phosphorus content (Juday and Birge 1931),
sodium and potassium (Lohuis, Meloche, and Juday 1938), dissolved oxygen and oxy¬
gen consumed (Juday and Birge 1932), and carbon dioxide and pH (Juday, Birge, and
Meloche 1935).
“I provided the chemists and Birge and Juday provided the facilities. ... I brought up platinum
dishes to evaporate water to get residues. We took the samples back to Madison, and, with the
help of assistants, we analyzed the residues for chemical content. . . . We made the best use of
the available equipment and invented equipment that would make the analyses faster. Advances
in instruments opened new fields of research.
“The great advances in physical, analytical chemical instrumentation occurred close to the
end of the war in 1945. Prior to that, much was done by the ‘guess by gosh’ method.”
V. Meloche, 1979, personal communication.
One of the assistants to Meloche was Fredrick Stare, who later founded the Depart¬
ment of Nutrition at Harvard University. When he was at Trout Lake he was an
undergraduate majoring in chemistry. Stare recalled that it was not all work and no play.
“I enjoyed very much working with Meloche up here. We used to go trout fishing with
homemade reels. We’d take two pie plates and put them together somehow. In the flange bet¬
ween the pie plates you could wrap quite a bit of string. We used to catch loads of trout way
down deep — 100, 1 10, 125 feet. It was loads of fun.”
F. Stare, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
It may have been the assistants, many of whom did not have their own thesis projects
to work on, who had the most fun at Trout Lake. Bradford Hafford worked as a
chemistry assistant in 1939 and 1940.
“On Trout Lake we generally trolled for walleyed pike in the evening for supper. After sexing
the catch, we would filet and eat them — delicious. My wife Jean caught the largest walleye on
our side of the lake, about a six pounder. The record only held for about a day when Dick Ju¬
day brought in a fish one half pound larger. It developed later that Dick had stuffed his fish
with more than one pound of lead sinkers before weighing.”
B. Hafford, 1983, personal communication.
14
Breaking New Waters
Life at Trout Lake was certainly far more work than play, however. In addition to the
broad chemical and biological survey of lakes, Birge and Juday selected for intensive
study six lakes that covered the range of chemical and biological conditions found in
northern lakes.
“The research assistants were organized into crews with two or three assistants per crew, a fish
crew, a microbiology crew, a chemical crew, and a plankton crew. ... I was on the plankton
crew and regularly about every ten days, we would visit one of six lakes that were chosen for in¬
tensive study. These were Trout, Nebish, Weber, Crystal, Muskellunge, and Silver [Sparkling]
lakes.
“Early on most mornings we would hitch up the boat and trailer to the plankton truck, we
went out and took our chemical samples, took the plankton samples and brought them back to
the laboratory. We went out in all kinds of weather. If it rained that day it didn’t make any dif¬
ference, you went out anyway. If it was windy, you went out anyway. We used these heavy old
oak boats in those days. There were no life preservers. The boats were heavy, but none of us
ever worried about having the boat dump over. If it had dumped over, I’m sure we would have
drowned. . . . We never gave it a thought and worked along blissfully. . . .
“We would come back with our water samples late in the morning or around noon and then
the chemists would run pH, carbon dioxide, dissolved oxygen, and so forth, and either I or
someone else would run the plankton samples through the Foerst centrifuge for phytoplankton
counts. We used the Juday plankton trap for quantitative zooplankton counts. In addition to
our regular chores of taking plankton and chemical samples, we often had other temporary
assignments given to us. For example, frequently, once or twice a week I would be required to
go out and take bottom fauna samples. We’d use an Ekman dredge and a Peterson dredge and
bring the samples back to the lab and count the bottom organisms and have it entered into the
record.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Although Birge was into his 80’s by the time the survey investigations were in full
swing, he was a determined and relentless researcher.
“One time I was driving Birge over near Sayner somewhere. We were on a gravel road and we
came around a curve and somebody came toward us. We couldn’t get out of the way and the lit¬
tle Model A slowly tipped on its side. Birge had been sitting next to me and was now down on
the lower side of the tipped car and I was up against him. Birge was now 85 years old,. I man¬
aged to get out of the left door of the car and I helped haul Birge out of the thing too. It had
tipped over so gently there wasn’t any appreciable damage to it. And we both got around and
saw the dumped over car just off the edge of the road and Birge, being a devout churchman
said, ‘Goddammit Pennak, put it back on its wheels, the Survey must go on.’ ”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
At the Trout Lake Station Birge continued his studies of light penetration that he had
begun in Madison in 1912. He had been the first to measure the penetration of sunlight
into a wide range of lakes with precise equipment. Birge used a “pyrolimnometer,” an
instrument produced by collaboration with university physicists. The instrument
measured the total energy of the sun’s rays by the electrical effect they produced when
falling on the sensitive surface of the thermopile. Using the pyrolimnometer, Birge, with
the assistance of a student helper, Hugo Baum, measured the transmission of solar
radiation and the factors influencing the differences in transmission observed among
15
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
lakes and from one depth to another in the same lake. Lester Whitney, who conducted
several studies of light transmission (1938, 1941), extended Birge’s measurements on
light transmission to intensities as small as 2 x 10"6 of surface light by means of a photo¬
electric cell and an amplifier.
“Les Whitney was a marvelous technician. He was marvelous at cooking up apparatus. I had
an electronic thermometer that was custom-made for me by Les Whitney that would read
temperatures to a hundredth of a degree and get reliable replicates from one reading to
another.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
With the help of J. P. Foerst, a mechanic and instrument maker in the Physics Depart¬
ment, Birge and Juday and their colleagues developed new instruments or modified ex¬
isting ones. From rough sketches or from suggestions as to the kinds of data needed,
Foerst was often able to devise pieces of equipment, many of which are standard items
even today (Frey 1963).
“Somehow Birge and Juday got money to pay Foerst specially to concoct instruments for them
in the physics workshop. They modified the Ekman dredge, which had originated in Sweden.
They invented the Kemmerer water sampler. Juday, along with Birge I suppose, invented the
plankton trap — various sizes of it. And Foerst built for Juday the little Foerst centrifuge that
was used for centrifuging water samples to get out the phytoplankton and seston determina¬
tions. . . .”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
The equipment invented, particularly the super-centrifuge, was not always considered
entirely safe by the research assistants.
“Both Birge and Juday were anxious to get out every bit of colloidal material that was in the
water. They weren’t satisfied with the Foerst centrifuge, which works on the same principle as a
cream separator. So they got hold of an air compressor that could deliver 200 psi constantly. It
was said to be the largest portable air compressor in all of northern Wisconsin. That thing was
installed in the Plankton lab on a concrete base and it delivered this jet — actually a multiple
jet — of compressed air against a rotor that we were using to try and separate out little tiny frac¬
tions of colloidal particles still left in the water. It was a terrifying thing. All of us were
frightened to death of it. It had a rather large rotor and we were afraid that at the speed at
which it was running — it would run on a cushion of air — that the bowl would fly apart. As a
result we built a heavy protective covering for the thing out of 2 x 4’s. We used to turn the thing
on, quick run out of the lab, and assume a low profile in the event that the thing ever blew
apart.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
George Clarke, a visiting scientist from the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institute,
perfected the Clarke-Bumpus sampler while at Trout Lake. And Herbert Dutton, a post¬
doctoral student working with physical chemist Winston Manning and chemist Far¬
rington Daniels, also used equipment that was ahead of its time in his research on
chromatic adaptation in relation to color and depth distribution of freshwater
phytoplankton and large aquatic plants at the Trout Lake Station in 1940.
“I used a spectrophotometer before there were spectrophotometers. It was a glass prism about
16
Breaking New Waters
12 inches tall. When I did my first measurements of the absorption spectra of pigments it was a
matter of watching a galvanometer on a meter stick. But it was an effective instrument.”
H. Dutton, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
As the work of Birge and Juday and their colleagues became better known, they began
attracting the attention of the European limnologists who began citing their work and
visiting the University of Wisconsin and the Trout Lake Station. Certainly in Madison,
faculty and students interested in limnology recognized that Trout Lake was the “place
to be,” that good and important research was going on there.
“We chemistry students knew about Trout Lake as an exciting, challenging place to live and
work. . . . There was an aura about coming to Trout Lake. If you were real good and real lucky
you might have that opportunity. So I think the people that came up here, came up quite starry-
eyed and were the top people.”
H. Dutton, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
While at the Trout Lake Station, graduate students and other researchers had very lit¬
tle contact with Birge even though he continued to come up to the station every summer
through 1938. Juday was the one who directed the research and the students.
“Juday was the real clearinghouse. We all talked with him and I think Juday talked with Birge.
. . . Dr. Birge didn’t have a great deal to say. He would ask a very pointed question at times. But
he never really had any suggestions.”
L. R. Wilson, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
“Birge was a driver, he was the front man, he was the publicity man, he was the fund-raiser as I
pictured it. Juday was kind of in the background in those things. Yet he was the consistent,
steady slugger. I think he probably had more of the ideas than Birge had.”
E. Schneberger, 1983, “History of Limnology
in Wisconsin Conference.”
Their associates at the Trout Lake Station were largely unaware of Birge and Juday’s
scheme of research, but there was no question that the pair had long-term plans for their
research program.
“During my first year as a graduate student [1934] I was assigned the task of presenting to a
proseminar group a paper on aspects of the life of Professor Birge as an outstanding biologist.
... He [Birge] graciously gave me over an hour’s time and during this time outlined the 10 year
research program he had in mind. He was about 85 years old at the time.”
C. Schloemer, 1983, personal communication.
The students and technicians always knew in detail what they would be doing from
day to day, but the outline of the research plan and the goals of the research were never
discussed with them. Juday rarely went out into the field with the research assistants ex¬
cept to show them how to take samples (Pennak 1983, personal communication).
“Certainly there was a fabric and plan laid out by Dr. Juday’s broad concepts, but it was such
that we really couldn’t interpret quite what the overall pattern was. ... You had the feeling that
17
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
you had a specific problem and you did it. You didn’t quite see the broader aspects and implica¬
tions of the particular research you were doing, where it fitted in. . . . Certainly there was no
overview of where we were going.”
H. Dutton, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
The problem of communication was exacerbated by the lack of seminars or any for¬
mal set-up for the exchange of ideas. There were certainly discussions around the poker
table in addition to the “I’ll raise you 30,’’ as well as conversations that were a combina¬
tion of shop talk and story-telling around bonfires on the beach. In later years students
did discuss ideas and research problems over the dinner table. Neither Birge nor Juday,
however, participated in these activities. Nor did Birge and Juday introduce their
students to the many European researchers who visited Trout Lake or the university.
“In the four summers I was here we didn’t have a single seminar presentation. . . . This is one
reason why theory and empirical ideas simply did not come out in the open because we did not
have this kind of discussion.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Graduate student theses were, for the most part, independently conceived and ex¬
ecuted. There was very little guidance from either Birge or Juday. Students were given a
free hand and time to do their own research while they worked for Birge and Juday, but
it was an individualistic effort — the student was on his own to either sink or swim. For¬
tunately, most swam.
Funding for the Trout Lake Station had always been relatively meager, but in 1931 the
Wisconsin state legislature discontinued funding for the natural history portion of the
Geological and Natural History Survey. The funding cut-off may have had as much to
do with old political rivalries as the Depression of the 1930s.
“Dr. Birge and Bob LaFollette, Sr., got to be rather bitter enemies when LaFollette was gover¬
nor [Birge was then university president]. They differed on how they thought the university
should be operated. Dr. Birge was quite insistent on trying to keep the activities pretty well
within the bounds of the campus, while LaFollette wanted the university spread out, to be of
more service to the people of the state. ... So when LaFollette’s son Phil became governor, that
animosity apparently continued because with one stroke of the pen, he wiped out the funds for
the natural history part of the budget, which left Juday and me out of a job. But the university
came to the rescue and took it over. So after that it was funded by a university appropriation
and Juday was given university status [full professorship in zoology, formerly he had been a
half-time lecturer].”
E. Schneberger, 1983, “History of Limnology
in Wisconsin Conference.”
Living and working conditions at the Trout Lake Station had never been luxurious,
but the Depression made things even worse. There was no running water or electricity in
the living quarters, and the ice box was a hole in the ground insulated with Sphagnum
moss.
“In 1935 we all lived in a leaky tarpaper shack that served as both bunkhouse and cookhouse.
In later years we had a frame bunkhouse. . . . This was Depression time and we were just
recovering from the Depression of the ’30’s. . . . We worked from about 7:15 to about 4:30 or
5:00, six days a week, although we did very little on Saturday afternoons. Sunday we were free.
18
Breaking New Waters
We slept, did our laundry, we read, we loafed. There was no booze. There wasn’t even any
beer. There were no radio stations in the area, so a radio up here wouldn’t do you any good. . . .
Saturday nights most of us would indulge in a poker game or otherwise we would go into
Minocqua and walk up and down what was then the entirety of Minocqua, about three or four
blocks long and one block deep.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
“My impression of the Trout Lake laboratory [1939 and 1940] was that we were very poor. All
the equipment was very much out of date . . . trucks literally falling apart ... the boats were in
bad order. Oars were short — it was almost a matter of stealing oars from one another to get a
good oar to go with your boat. We had no more than three or four motors at that time and it
was hard to keep the motors running. It was really in poor shape.”
C. Kirkpatrick, 1983, “History of Limnology
in Wisconsin Conference.”
Despite the Depression and the harsh conditions it imposed, the research program at
Trout Lake flourished. In addition to the lake survey work, Birge and Juday’s colleagues
and students at Trout Lake made wide-ranging studies of lake sediments and sedimenta¬
tion processes, aquatic bacteria, aquatic plants, psammolittoral organisms, fisheries
ecology, and lake productivity and community structure. (A complete list of the papers
published by Birge and Juday and their associates can be found in C. Juday and A. D.
Hasler, 1946. A list of publications dealing with Wisconsin limnology 1871-1945. Trans.
Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 36: 469-490.)
Juday, Birge, and Meloche (1941) published an extensive paper on the chemistry of
lake sediments involving 18 lakes in northeastern Wisconsin and three in southeastern
Wisconsin. W. H. Twenhofel, a geologist from Madison, and his students, W. A.
Broughton and Vincent E. McKelvey, studied sediments and sedimentation both in the
Madison area and at Trout Lake. Paul S. Conger, a visiting scientist from the Carnegie
Institution in Washington, examined diatoms in sediment cores in Crystal Lake and was
one of the first researchers to use diatoms to interpret previous ecological conditions in a
lake. Pollen chronologies in lake and bog sediments were examined by Leonard R.
Wilson and John E. Potzger, a visiting scientist from Butler University.
Birge and Juday recognized early the importance of bacteria in lakes. Their early
studies on numbers of bacteria in Mendota were continued by E. B. Fred and Letitia M.
Snow. Claude E. ZoBell was a visiting scientist from Scripps Institution of Oceanog¬
raphy when he studied the role of bacteria in lake metabolism. Ruby Bere was one of the
first persons to make direct microscopic counts of bacteria in waters. Studies of this type
were extended by William Stark and Elizabeth McCoy in the lakes of northeastern Wis¬
consin. During this interval quite a number of persons, including Yvette Hardman,
William Stark, Mary A. Jansky, and Dorothy E. Kinkel, received Master’s and Ph.D.
degrees in bacteriology on problems directly related to limnology (Frey 1963).
Gerald Prescott, widely known for his research on algae, came from Albion College
and later, Michigan State University to work at Trout Lake in the late 1930s. His book,
Algae of the Western Great Lakes Area (Cranbrook Press) was based on these investiga¬
tions. In 1952 he would receive the first grant for ecological research ($3900) from the
National Science Foundation for “Ecological Survey of Arctic and Alpine Algae in
Relation to Glaciation and the Disjunctive Distribution of Phanerogams” (Burgess
1981). Prescott was also renowned as the best poker player at Trout Lake.
19
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
“My excuse for having been here was my interest in algae and the work on phytoplankton that
G. M. Smith did back in the 1920s on these same lakes. . . . Dr. Birge, through the Wisconsin
Geological and Natural History Survey, picked me to complement his studies and do the
filamentous and other groups of algae. . . .
“Birge and Juday encouraged my interest in relating types of flora to water chemistry and to
fish production ... to get a bird’s eye view of the kinds and quantities of algae in different
kinds of lakes and relate that to the chemistry and to the amount and kinds of fish produced.
... In my wanderings I tried to visit every and almost any lake in this whole area.
“I came to this lake in Boulder one afternoon. I didn’t bother anybody else and waded out
with my little scum skimmers to do my collecting. In a very short time the director of the camp
[YMCA] came out on the porch and bellowed out, ‘What are you doing out there?’ The wind
was blowing and I didn’t know what to tell him. I couldn’t explain about algae and fish food
organisms and so forth. He kept bellowing at me. I felt really embarrassed, so I made my col¬
lection and left. I felt so guilty that I wrote a letter to the director and apologized for not giving
him a full six weeks’ course in algae with the wind blowing against me. The net result was that
he sent me an invitation to come out and have dinner with the boys.”
G. Prescott, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Norman Fassett, Leonard R. Wilson, John E. Potzger, and Willard A. Van Engel
studied the distributions of aquatic plants in lakes varying widely in chemical and
biological characteristics. They were concerned with communities or associations of
plants in relation to soil type and depth zone. Wilson was also interested in the succes-
sional relationships of communities from primitive lakes with inorganic soils to ad¬
vanced lakes with organic soils, and he attempted to relate the distribution and abun¬
dance of aquatic plants to various environmental factors (Frey 1963). Wilson’s research
was, of course, done before the advent of SCUBA gear.
“The first summer we worked on Weber Lake my wife rowed the boat while I had a little square
of iron that I dropped down. Then I’d dive down and pick up plants and bring them to the top.
I crawled over most of Weber Lake bottom right to the extent of the attached vegetation. ... I
think I also crawled over more of the bottom of Trout Lake than anybody in existence. We did
something like 68 transects and it was a tremendous job.”
L. R. Wilson, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Robert Pennak, a graduate student of Juday’s, pioneered in the study of the psam-
molittoral community — organisms living in interstitial water on beaches. He collected
extensive data on the horizontal and vertical distribution of the various organisms and
on the chemistry of the psammolittoral zone.
“After I did my thesis work and it was published in Ecological Monographs (1939) as an 80-
page paper — of course you couldn’t get a paper that long accepted these days — it immediately
attracted the attention of marine biologists. In 1939, the year after I got my degree, I went to
Wood’s Hole and did a similar project on Wood’s Hole beaches with reference to the tide lines.
We discovered that there is indeed a similar kind of assemblage of microfauna on sandy ocean
shores.
“Now this was pioneer work — nobody had done anything like this ever. Since those days very
little of this kind of work has been done on freshwater, but in the ocean the thing has absolutely
burgeoned. So now there is an international society of myobenthologists and they publish their
own journal having to do with organisms living in — they’ve now gone down into the mud bot-
20
Breaking New Waters
tom below tide level as well — the sandy beach area here . . . but in freshwater habitats there’s
been almost nothing done since I did my pioneer work back now so many years ago.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Minna Jewell, from Thornton College in Illinois, spent several summers at the Trout
Lake Station studying freshwater sponges. She had studied stream ecology with Victor
Shelford at the University of Illinois and had hoped to conduct research on water pollu¬
tion. She began studying sponges at the suggestion of Edward Schneberger, a former
student.
“Two things were wrong about her continuing her profession: her desire to study stream
pollution— -people weren’t accepting those things in those days — and women’s lib hadn’t come
along yet, so being a woman, she had trouble finding employment. ... I felt she was going to
pot at Thornton and needed some activity to use her talent. I had seen these sponges in lakes
here and I conceived the idea that that would be a good project for her.”
E. Schneberger, 1983, “History of Limnology
in Wisconsin Conference.”
Jewell was somewhat eccentric— she wore G.I. clothing from World War I and called
her sponges, “spon-jaz” (Pennak 1983, “History of Limnology in Wisconsin Con¬
ference” ). She is most fondly remembered, however, as someone who was always ready
to take a struggling student “under her wing.”
Juday and Birge had been receiving research support from the U.S. Bureau of
Fisheries for some years, but with the establishment of the Trout Lake Station they also
began receiving support for research on fish from the Wisconsin Conservation Depart¬
ment. This phase of aquatic investigation at the University of Wisconsin may be con¬
sidered to have started with the study begun in 1925 by Stillman Wright on the growth of
the rock bass. From this time on there was a steady succession of papers concerned with
various aspects of fishery biology and management, including a number of now classic
papers by Ralph Hile on cisco and rockbass. Hile was a recent graduate of Indiana
University and was employed by the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries. He was sent to work with
Birge and Juday, and he and Schneberger worked together on much of the fisheries
research conducted at Trout Lake. Schneberger later became Head of Fisheries for the
Conservation Department and was instrumental in arranging for the continuation of
cooperative fisheries research between the university and the department.
Other papers in fishery biology were written either by Juday, based on data gathered
by WPA workers, or by students, such as Edward Schneberger, Clarence Schloemer,
George Bennett, William Spoor, and David Frey, who received their Ph.D.'s under Ju¬
day' s supervision (Frey 1963).
One very important paper of this period described the method developed by Zoe
Schnabel (1938) and her colleagues, E. Hull and M. Ingraham in the Mathematics
Department, for estimating the size of a fish population by marking and recapturing.
Schnabel's work was done between 1936 and 1938 when she was a graduate assistant in
the Computing Laboratory of the Mathematics Department in Madison.
“The laboratory had been established in the early 30s to assist university researchers with the
statistical analysis of data. Members of the mathematics faculty served as consultants and I and
an assistant did the computations, using a standard 8-bank calculator and a manual-type 13-
bank model which had been motorized. Dr. Chancey Juday . . . was one of the first persons to
21
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
use the laboratory. He and his associates were doing studies on the fish populations of several
Wisconsin lakes using capture-recapture procedures. My paper of 1938 summarized the
methods which had been developed in the laboratory for estimating population size.”
Z. Schnabel Albert, 1980, in letter to David R. Anderson.
In the last decade of his productive life as a limnologist, Juday turned his attention to
the measurement of the rates of energy fixation and the subsequent utilization of energy
within the trophic structure of the ecosystem (Frey 1963). Juday and his associates made
some fundamental contributions to this area of research. Plant ecologist John T. Curtis
and Juday, for example, conducted one of the very early bioassays of productivity. In
1936, Winston Manning, a physical chemist at the University of Wisconsin, joined the
summer program at Trout Lake with a much more sophisticated approach toward pro¬
ductivity. Herbert Dutton, a post-doctoral student advised by Manning, conducted some
of the earliest field research on chromatic adaptation.
“I was working with Dr. Manning and we had just discovered that carotenoids absorbed energy
and transferred it to chlorophyll A with an efficiency almost equal to the chlorophyll in
chlorophyll B or chlorophyll A itself. So the logical extension of that was, ‘how did it work in
real life and how would it do in Trout Lake — is there any chromatic adaptation?’ So far the
study was a matter of examining the family of Potomageton as it extended out into Trout Lake
to see whether there was any correlation of color with depth.
H. Dutton, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
During World War II Manning worked on the Manhattan project and later became
the Associate Director of Argonne National Laboratories. He had asked Dutton to join
him on the Manhattan project, an offer Dutton reluctantly turned down.
“Winston Manning wrote to me and said, ‘We have a discovery that is as important as x-rays.
(This was the Manhattan project.) Would you like to join us?’ I went to my bosses in the
government and they said it was not important work and that what I was doing [analyzing
dehydrated foods] there was much more important. They told me, ‘If you want to go, go, but
your job won’t be here when you return.’ ”
H. Dutton, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Other research on lake productivity included the first study of the amount and
distribution of chlorophyll in lakes, which was carried out on northeastern lakes in 1937
by Zygmunt Kozminski, a visiting scientist from the Wigry Hydrobiological Station in
Poland. In two other papers Juday attempted to set up an energy budget for Mendota
(Juday 1940) and to investigate the relationships between various components of the
standing crop of organic matter (Juday 1942). Perhaps the most important study in this
series was the last one by Juday, J. M. Blair, and E. F. Wilda (1943) in which the daily
productivity for an entire lake was determined from continuous records of dissolved
oxygen at several depths, as measured by dropping mercury electrodes (Frey 1963). Ju¬
day also attempted to increase production in Weber Lake by adding fertilizers. He and
his colleagues tried various commercial mineral fertilizers, as well as soybean meal and
cottonseed meal.
Despite the large number of research projects conducted during this era, relatively few
students received graduate degrees under the direct supervision of Birge and Juday. Very
22
Breaking New Waters
early in his career Birge took on heavy administrative duties that probably precluded
supervising graduate students. By the time he and Juday established the Trout Lake Sta¬
tion, Birge was already 73 years old. During the late 1800s Birge did supervise a number
of Bachelor's theses and a few Master's theses including those of Julius Nelson and Ruth
Marshall, but Birge never had any Ph.D. students. Juday had been hired as Biologist
with the Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey with a simultaneous appoint¬
ment as Lecturer in the Zoology Department. He was not made a professor until 1931
when he was 60 years old and did not begin supervising students until late in his career.
Juday's first Ph.D. students were Stillman Wright, Edward J. Wimmer, and
Abraham H. Wiebe, who completed their degrees in 1928 and 1929. Juday supervised
the Ph.D. research of ten other students including Willis L. Tressler (1930), J. P. E.
Morrison (1931), Ruby Bere (1932), Edward Schneberger (1933), William A. Spoor
(1936), Arthur D. Hasler (1937), Robert W. Pennak (1938), George W. Bennett (1939),
Clarence L. Schloemer (1939), and David G. Frey (1940). (A list of Juday’s Ph.D.
students and their theses is included in the Appendix.) Even though Juday had only 13
Ph.D. students during the “Trout Lake years” a number of students in the departments
of Botany, Chemistry, Geology, and Bacteriology received Ph.D.’s based on lim¬
nological research.
Mortimer (1956) suggests that Birge and Juday’s survey work at Trout Lake did not
contribute as significantly to limnology as did their research on Wisconsin’s southern
lakes, partly because a great deal of the data they collected on northern lakes was never
fully analyzed.
“The plankton studies were never published, the bottom fauna studies were never published,
the super-centrifuge studies were never published, the seston data were never published. These
are golden data because they represent samples taken in the same way over a whole series of
years from the same series of lakes, the like of which does not exist anywhere in limnology. I
greatly regret that Juday did not live long enough or give the data to somebody else to work
them up for publication. . . . They should be published somehow or other because there will be
an enormous demand for them. They are unique, they are massive, and for this reason mean a
lot to limnology as a whole.”
R. Pennak, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin conference.”
Not only did much of their data remain unanalyzed, but Birge and Juday did not at¬
tempt to put their data on various aspects of the physics, chemistry, and biology of lakes
into any kind of larger picture, or to build any type of limnological theory from their
observations. Most of the papers published using data from the 500-lakes survey were
concerned less with interpretation of results than with descriptive presentation (Frey
1963). They were certainly in tune with the times, as the ecological sciences in North
America from 1920 to 1950 were largely descriptive rather than theoretical (Egerton
1977). Juday, in particular, disdained the new mathematical approach to limnology.
“[Edward] Deevey tells me that H. [G. Evelyn Hutchinson] is writing a book on Limnology and
it is to be chiefly mathematical. So you can look forward to the worst.”
C. Juday, 1941, letter to R. Pennak.
“The Yale school of mathematical-limnologists is having a high time displaying their
mathematical abilities. The interesting part about it is that they are applying mathematical for-
23
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
mulae used in sub-atomic physics where all of the forces are presumably uniform to lim¬
nological problems where there are all sorts of un-uniform factors involved, such as differences
in temperature in different habitats, in waves and currents, in soil substrata, etc. Apparently
they do not have brains enough to see the point in the two very different situations. It is quite
interesting to see that Deevey seems to think that a single sample from the bottom of a lake may
be sufficient to tell the story of the bottom fauna, so why take more. He can prove
mathematically that it is adequate. In a short time I shall expect them to tell all about a lake
thermally and chemically just by sticking one, perhaps two, fingers into the water, then go into
a mathematical trance and figure out all of its biological characteristics. As the next stage in
their evolution they will probably be able to give a lake an ‘absent treatment’ similar to a
spiritualist, so it will not be necessary to visit a lake at all in order to get its complete chemical,
physical and biological history. Then all limnological problems will soon be solved and they
will be looking for greener pastures. Such is life in limnology.”
C. Juday, 1942, letter to R. Pennak.
When Juday was asked in 1941 to review for the journal Ecology Raymond
Lindeman’s now classic paper on energy flow in ecosystems (Lindeman 1942), he recom¬
mended that the paper be rejected because there were insufficient data to support the
theoretical model and because he felt theoretical essays were inappropriate for Ecology
(Cook 1977). The same recommendation was made by Paul Welch of the University of
Michigan. At that time Juday and Welch were considered the two most prominent lim-
nologists in the country (Cook 1977). Lindeman’s paper was accepted for publication in
1942 despite Juday and Welch’s severe criticism.
“. . . a large percentage of the following discussion is based on ‘belief, probability, possibility,
assumption and imaginary lakes’ rather than actual observation and data. . . . According to our
experiences, lakes are ‘rank individualists’ and are very stubborn about fitting into
mathematical formulae and artificial schemes proposed by man.”
C. Juday, 1941, review of Lindeman’s paper
for Ecology as quoted by Cook (1977).
“It seems to me unfortunate if the space which should be occupied by research papers is partly
consumed by ‘desk produced’ papers unless they be of a most unusual and significant kind. In
my humble opinion this kind of treatment is premature. Limnology is not yet ready for
generalizations of this kind. . . . What limnology needs now most of all is research of the type
which yields actual significant data rather than postulations and theoretical treatments.”
P. Welch, 1941, review of Lindeman’s paper
for Ecology as quoted by Cook (1977).
G. Evelyn Hutchinson, who with his students would lead the way in theoretical
ecosystems ecology and limnology, came to the defense of Lindeman’s paper. Lindeman
had gone to work with Hutchinson at Yale University in 1941 after completing his Ph.D.
degree at the University of Minnesota. Hutchinson’s response to Juday and Welch’s
reviews contained an implicit criticism of Birge and Juday’s research on Wisconsin’s
northern lakes.
“Far from agreeing with Referee 2 [Welch] as to what limnology needs, I feel that a number of
far-reaching hypotheses that can be tested by actual data and which, if confirmed, would
become significant generalizations, are far more valuable than an unending number of marks
on paper indicating that a quantity of rather unrelated observations has been made. . . .
“At times I have felt quite desperate about the number of opportunities that have been
24
Breaking New Waters
missed in the middle Western regions for obtaining data confirming or disproving the
hypotheses that have been forced on us by our little lakes.”
G. E. Hutchinson, 1942, response to Juday
and Welch’s reviews of Lindeman paper as
quoted by Cook (1977).
W. T. Edmondson had graduated from Yale in 1938, having worked in Hutchinson’s
lab since early high school. He spent a year at the University of Wisconsin, including a
summer at Trout Lake working on sessile rotifers, before returning to Yale for a Ph.D.
“Yale and Wisconsin were vastly different. The Wisconsin emphasis seemed to be to assemble
measurements of some property from a large number of lakes, finding ranges and means (many
of the standard statistical techniques used commonly today had not yet been invented). There
was a little but not much attempt to notice relations between variables, and minimal attention
to the limnological processes that would connect them together, e.g. the oxygen and
phosphorus cycles. There was some trend in that direction, but it had not got very far in 1939.
Some visitors were plowing new ground, as Manning with measurements of photosynthesis.
There were some gestures toward experiments, as with the ineffective lake fertilization studies.
This whole approach may have been conditioned by the summer laboratory system; measure
something like mad all summer, then spend the winter doing arithmetic to find out what you
had.
“In New Haven, there was plenty of data gathering, but it was directed at something other
than a statistical description of a population of lakes. I have seen Hutchinson come in from a
lake and spend the rest of the day running phosphates, titrating oxygens, filtering samples, and
then running up the results with a slide rule, but some ideas had been thought out ahead of time
and the particular samples were collected for a purpose beyond just finding out what was
there.”
W. Edmondson, 1983, personal communication.
Limnology was such a new science and there were still so few limnologists in the world
that the research conducted by Birge and Juday and the scientists and students working
with them must still be considered pioneering and a major contribution to the under¬
standing of limnological processes.
“One of the great contributions of the team was in how they observed. . . . They brought in¬
struments and approaches to observing lakes that were new and difficult. . . . They collected
data in these lakes that had never been gathered by anyone with the precision and accuracy that
they did.”
R. Ragotzkie, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
In the 1920s and 1930s limnological research flourished not only at the University of
Wisconsin and Yale, but also at the University of Michigan and the University of Illi¬
nois. Limnology was beginning to attract larger numbers of students and in 1936 the
Limnological Society of America was organized. Juday was elected its first president,
having played a role, albeit somewhat reluctantly, in the formation of the society. He
was reelected to the post the following year.
“We had a hydrobiological program at the AAAS meeting in Pittsburgh during the holiday
season and had a very good turnout; over a hundred at the meeting. We also decided to
organize a Limnological Society of America. It will be launched at the 1935 meeting in St. Louis
next December. I am curious to see how many people can be induced to join it. Welch has been
25
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
wanting to organize for the past three or four years, but some of us have been discouraging
him; we decided, however, to let him try it after talking the proposition over at the Pittsburgh
meeting.”
C. Juday, 1935, letter to S. Wright.
In a mere five years since the formation of the Society, Juday would witness the
tremendous growth of interest in limnology, but he remained skeptical that this interest
would last.
“Last week I attended the AAAS meetings in Columbus, chiefly those of the limnologists and
ecologists. One of the striking things about the limnological sessions was the large attendance,
from 100 to 200 at all sessions — most of them youngsters. Limnology is certainly on the boom;
everybody is talking about it now and all kinds of colleges and universities are now offering
courses in it. I am wondering how long the boom will last.”
C. Juday, 1940, letter to S. Wright.
Although the limnological research program at Trout Lake and in Madison survived
the Depression relatively well and even flourished during those years, the program began
to decline as Birge and Juday grew older. World War II also took its toll.
“Four of us came up June 20 to get things ready for the summer campaign which opened up on
July first. ... I have a crew of five this summer; Dean Fred asked me to reduce our force to a
minimum, so I asked for men to help in only two projects, namely, fish population studies and
a crew for plankton together with bottom fauna and flora. . . . Counting the wife of one of the
boys who is cooking for the crew, we have a total of eight as compared with 21 last year.”
C. Juday, 1942, letter to S. Wright.
“. . . the Laboratory there [Trout Lake] is going to be one of the war fatalities this coming sum¬
mer. It is impossible for me to get competent assistants, so I shall not go up to Trout Lake this
summer, the first summer I have missed since 1925.”
C. Juday, 1943, letter to S. Wright.
Although he had set out to write a comprehensive review of Wisconsin limnology, Ju¬
day died March 29, 1944, before he could complete it. He was also unable to finish a
number of papers he had hoped to write using the large amounts of unpublished data he
and his colleagues had collected at Trout Lake.
“At the present time I am preparing a book on our Wisconsin investigations and it is a tough
job to get the stuff all lined up and correlated. I would much rather prepare papers on the great
amount of data that we have accumulated during the years and which has not been utilized for
papers so far. But that is something to look forward to after the book is completed.”
C. Juday, 1943, letter to S. Wright.
Although Birge lived until June 9, 1950, the last paper he published was with Juday in
1941. The two partners had been very similar in some ways, but widely different in
others. Despite a professional partnership that lasted more than four decades, the two
had not been close friends.
“Birge and Juday were colleagues, but not necessarily friends. Juday was not a social person.
. . . Birge and Juday got along well. I think Juday looked up to Birge . . . but Birge and Juday
went their separate ways socially. . . . Juday was pleasant, affable, but rather withdrawn. He
was not a pusher, but he was a great scientist. . . . Juday was always willing to show you what
26
Breaking New Waters
was going on if you were interested. He was cordial and helpful and liked you as long as you
were interested in limnology.”
D. Halverson, 1985, personal communication.
Mary Juday, however, notes that the Juday and Birge families often socialized and
frequently spent holidays together. She and her older brother, Chancey, called Birge’ s
wife, Anna Grant Birge, “Grandma” (M. Juday, 1987, personal communication).
The two partners varied considerably in their teaching styles. Birge was considered an
excellent teacher, who inspired loyalty and admiration. His first bacteriology class in¬
cluded Harry L. Russell, who went on to a distinguished career in bacteriology and to
become Dean of the College of Agriculture at the University of Wisconsin.
“As my class advisor, he [Birge] warned against the danger of over-specialization in too nar¬
row a field. He insisted on my taking courses in history under another marvelous teacher in the
University, Professor William F. Allen, when I wanted to load my schedule with more courses
in science. He wished his students to secure an all-round training, to get the breadth of view that
comes only from a broad survey of the various fields of knowldege. The specialist in pursuit of
his own particular line digs his canyon of activity deeper and deeper, narrowing his vision more
and more until he loses his perspective on the broader problems of life. Dr. Birge belongs to the
group that views the world from the mountain top rather than from the canyon depth.”
H. Russell, 1940, First Symposium on Hydrobiology.
Martin Gillen, another of Birge’s early students, was inspired to create a nature
preserve. He purchased 6000 acres including 22 lakes on the boundary between Wiscon¬
sin and Michigan’s Upper Peninsula “to be guarded from the further scars of the white
man’s civilization and forever dedicated to the study of the sciences relating to the flora
and fauna of our state” (1940, First Symposium on Hydrobiology). When asked how,
after a lifetime of activity in legal and industrial affairs, he had become interested in the
work of biologists, Gillen responded:
“Thirty-nine years ago [1894], as a young student at the University of Wisconsin, my electives
included biology and bacteriology. All this summer [1933 when Birge was 81] I have watched
Dr. Birge in dungarees accompanied by 16 or 17 young scientists still exploring the field I once
studied, still working to lay the foundation upon which will be based the solution to problems
that confront our people, our state, and our nation. I am once again his student and helper and
there is much to be done.”
M. Gillen, 1940, as quoted by General Ralph Immell
at the First Symposium of Hydrobiology.
Unlike Birge, Juday is not remembered for his teaching skills or inspiring lectures.
Although his former students have the highest regard for his knowledge of limnology
and his skill as a researcher, they recalled that his courses in limnology and plankton
organisms were “just deadly.”
Whereas Juday had been known as mild-mannered, quiet, and withdrawn, Birge was
renowned for his caustic comments and astringent wit. He was not so much beloved by
his students as respected and admired.
Birge was concerned for his students’ training, but he seemed relatively unconcerned
about their general welfare. According to the story related by E. Schneberger (1983, per¬
sonal communication), one of Bernhard Domogalla’s tasks while he was working as a
student assistant for Birge in Madison was to take water temperatures in Lake Mendota
27
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
throughout the year. One spring when the ice was getting thin and “black,” Birge asked
Domogalla to take the water temperature with the Whitney thermometer, but added, “if
you start going through, throw the thermometer toward shore— it’s the only one we
have.”
Birge must have had his tender side, however, even though it was rarely seen. While
Schneberger was at the Trout Lake Station, his wife, Helen, who was the “camp cook”
in 1932, and his young daughter, Wilma Jean, came with him in the summers of 1930 to
1934. Birge always remembered to write a letter and get a present for Wilma Jean on her
birthday (H. Schneberger 1983, personal communication).
Both men were relatively distant and taciturn. Neither had much use for small talk,
which was not so much the result of rudeness, but rather the inability to make conversa¬
tion upon any topic but an important one. Juday seemed to be completely devoted to
limnology and spent nearly every waking moment working.
“Father used to work a seven-day week including evenings and Sundays. ... He was definitely
a ‘workaholic.’ He had virtually no outside interests. He didn’t read books for pleasure. He
didn’t go to movies or any of that stuff. . . . Mother was much more outgoing. . . . They always
got along well I think. She felt her role was to make it easy for him to do what he wanted. So she
took charge of raising us. Father was rather remote I’d say. He was around, but he didn’t take
any great interest in what was going on. ... I never worked with Dad, I never learned
zooplankton, which was his speciality. ... He did not discuss his work with us.”
R. Juday, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Birge was certainly hard-driving, but unlike Juday, he was a man of wide-ranging in¬
terests and a voracious reader of philosophy, history, religion, and novels, as well as
science. The rumor was that he served on the City Library Board in Madison just so he
could read the new books before they went on the shelves. He was also known as a
religious man. He regularly attended the First Congregational Church where he taught
an adult class and gave annual sermons on St. Paul at the Grace Episcopal Church. His
religious beliefs, his scientific views, and his considerations of literature seemed to have
been integrated into a coherent philosophy of life.
“. . . something must be done in the right way and this is true of religion just as it is of those
other things. It is true that if you practise the violin in the right way, the instrument finally talks
to you and you to it. It is also true that you may practice scales till you die and never find
music — only technique. And of course the same is true of religion. That is why St. Paul says,
‘Walk by faith’ not merely ‘Walk.’ And it isn’t easy to say what this necessary faith is in this
connection or indeed in any other. How must you study Latin grammar so as to get on the in¬
side of Latin literature? If you do it in the right way the result comes — certainly and, as you see
afterwards, inevitably. If done in the wrong way — grudgingly or of necessity or ‘for marks’ or
in many other ways — nothing results that is worthwhile. So of science — work may result in
technique and nothing more if it is done in that spirit. . . . And the thing must be done simply
and in a way for its own sake — not ‘to be seen of man’ ... or for any other reward. Especially
you mustn’t be looking for a revelation of music or science or religion or of God in any similar
relation. If you do the revelation isn’t likely to come.”
E. A. Birge, 1925, in a letter to Mrs. Peckham,
widow of well-known biologist, George W.
Peckham of Milwaukee, as quoted by Sellery
(1956).
28
Breaking New Waters
Birge and Juday form an outstanding example of the value of partnership. Their abil¬
ity to work together despite their differences, the strength of their personalities, and
their intense interest in lakes shaped the growth and development of limnology not only
in Wisconsin, but in North America and Europe as well. But they had chosen no suc¬
cessor and the Wisconsin school declined for some years before another strong leader,
Arthur D. Hasler, took over and led the Wisconsin limnological school in an entirely
new direction.
29
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
References
Birge, E. A. 1936. A House Half Built. An address before the Madison Literary Club, October
12. In the Birge papers, State Historical Society of Wisconsin. 33 p.
_ 1940. Edward A. Birge, Teacher and Scientist. Addresses delivered at a dinner on
September 5, 1940, given to honor Birge for his contributions to the science of limnology and in
commemoration of his eighty-ninth birthday by the Symposium on Hydrobiology. University
of Wisconsin Press, Madison. 48 p.
Burgess, R. L. 1981. United States. In E. J. Kormandy and J. F. McCormick (eds.). Handbook of
Contemporary Developments in World Ecology. Greenwood Press, Westport, Connecticut,
pp. 67-101.
Cook, R. E. 1977. Raymond Lindeman and the trophic-dynamic concept in ecology. Science 198:
22-26.
Egerton, F. N. 1977. Introduction. In F. N. Egerton (ed.). History of American Ecology. Arno
Press, New York.
Frey, D. G. 1963. Wisconsin: the Birge-Juday era. In D. G. Frey (ed.). Limnology in North
America. University of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 3-54.
Juday, C. 1940. The annual energy budget of an inland lake. Ecology 21: 438-450.
_ . 1942. The summer standing crop of plants and animals in four Wisconsin lakes. Trans.
Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 34: 103-135.
_ and E. A. Birge. 1931. A second report on the phosphorus content of Wisconsin lake
waters. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 26: 353-382.
_ and _ . 1932. Dissolved oxygen and oxygen consumed in the lake waters of north¬
eastern Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 27: 415-486.
_ and _ . 1933. The transparency, the color and the specific conductance of the lake
waters of northeastern Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 28: 205-259.
_ , _ , and V. W. Meloche. 1935. The carbon dioxide and hydrogen ion content of the
lake waters of northeastern Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 29: 1-82.
_ , _ , and _ . 1938. Mineral content of the lake waters of northeastern Wisconsin.
Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 31: 223-276.
_ , _ , and _ . 1941. Chemical analyses of the bottom deposits of Wisconsin lakes.
II. Second report. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 33: 99-1 14.
_ , J. M. Blair, and E. F. Wilda. 1943. The photosynthetic activities of the aquatic plants of
Little John Lake, Vilas County, Wisconsin. Amer. Midland Nat. 30: 429-446.
_ and A. D. Hasler. 1946. A list of publications dealing with Wisconsin limnology
1871-1945. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 36: 469-490.
Lindeman, R. L. 1942. The trophic-dynamic aspect of ecology. Ecology 23: 399-418.
Lohuis, D., V. W. Meloche, and C. Juday. 1938. Sodium and potassium content of Wisconsin
lake waters and their residues. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 31: 285-304.
Mortimer, C. H. 1956. An explorer of lakes. In G. C. Sellery. E. A. Birge. A Memoir. University
of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 165-211.
Schnabel, Z. E. 1938. The estimation of the total fish population of a lake. Amer. Math.
Monthly. 45: 348-352.
Sellery, G. C. 1956. E. A. Birge. A. Memoir. University of Wisconsin Press, Madison. 221 p.
Whitney, L. V. 1938. Continuous solar radiation measurements in Wisconsin lakes. Trans. Wis.
Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 31: 175-200.
_ . 1941. A general law of diminution of light intensity in natural waters and the percent of
diffuse light at different depths. J. Opt. Soc. Amer. 31: 714-722.
30
3
New Directions
Under the leadership of Arthur Davis Hasler, limnological research at the University
of Wisconsin shifted away from the classical, descriptive studies conducted by
Birge and Juday, toward the new field of experimental limnology, in which the precise
methods of the experimental laboratory were applied to research in the field.
“I could see that it was presumptuous to try to make a reputation by following in the Birge and
Juday research tradition. Moreover, you couldn’t get money for that type of research — record¬
ing the environment. . . . Besides, my research interests were in a different direction —
experiments in the natural environment.”
A. D. Hasler, 1985, personal communication.
Hasler and his students were among the first limnologists to do field experiments that
included controls and repetitions. Moreover, they improved the experimental techniques
used in the field. Under Hasler’s leadership, rigorous experimental methodology became
the hallmark of the Wisconsin limnological school.
“Experimental work was done in Germany at the turn of the century with fertilizers and carp
ponds. And the Chinese did it before that. So experimental limnology is not a tradition which
started here. . . .
“We all ask who was the first to do something. It’s usually pretty hard to say. What we did
was to refine experiments and equipment, to improve upon them. . . . We were not necessarily
the first to do things, but we were perhaps the first to ‘do them right.’ ”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Hasler spent much of his career trying to show skeptical laboratory scientists that
rigorous experiments could be conducted outdoors.
“Having been raised in a department of molecular biologists and cytologists, it’s been quite a
chore to justify being an experimental scientist to them. I believe that the average laboratory
biologist just can’t quite conceive that outdoor research can be done in a rigorous way. We’ve
always had a battle to convince them that what we were doing experimentally was legitimate.
They think we’re at Trout Lake fishing or sunning ourselves.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
In the course of their research, Hasler and his associates not only became far more ex¬
perimental than Birge and Juday, they also came to view lakes in a different way. Birge
and Juday saw the lake as a microcosm, a unit of the environment. Hasler and his
associates began to give much greater consideration to the watershed.
“We’ve emphasized the fact that lakes are mirror images of the landscape around them. . . .
This stems from my collaboration with Wisconsin botanists, especially ecological botanists like
Fassett and Curtis. They taught me early how a lake is influenced by what drains into it. ... I
think my ideas about salmon homing stem from that, the fact that the vegetation and the soils
31
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
lend to the river a quality of odor that makes it unique. No two rivers are alike. So this whole
idea of interactions between land and water is something we emphasize.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, ‘‘History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Hasler [b. 1908] had grown up in Utah — a state not known for extensive limnological
resources. He attended Brigham Young University as an undergraduate.
‘‘My father was a physician and his plan was for my brother, who was in medical school, and
me — that the three of us should set up a clinic when I got through too. But the Depression oc¬
curred at that time and my father was stricken with cancer, which took him out of practice for
several years. So the financial structure of the family fell apart. In those days you couldn’t bor¬
row money to go to medical school so it meant that I had to find some alternative to medicine.
. . . That was my junior year of college.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, ‘‘History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
During his junior year at Brigham Young, Hasler accompanied one of his professors
on a research expedition to the Granddaddy Lakes in the Uinta Mountains and soon
became interested in limnology. Unable to pursue a career in medicine, he entered
graduate school at the University of Wisconsin in 1932. His major professor was
Chancey Juday.
‘‘When I first began to think about being a limnologist I wrote several letters, one to A. S.
Pearse, a former professor of zoology at Wisconsin, but then at Duke University. He had writ¬
ten a book on ecology and I wrote him asking what a young man ought to do to prepare
himself. His answer was ‘first become a physiologist and then become an ecologist.’ So I came
to Wisconsin and that’s just exactly what Juday did for me — he requested that I get my minor in
physiological chemistry and physiology. So obviously it was the concept of the time— to get
students trained in experimental thinking.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, ‘‘History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
For his thesis research Hasler worked on the digestive enzymes of copepods and
cladocerans (Hasler 1935, 1937) with H. C. Bradley in the Department of Physiological
Chemistry. The experiments, most of which were carried out at the Wood’s Hole
laboratory in Massachusetts, were conducted with controls and repetitions. His ex¬
perience with controlled experiments made Hasler aware of the deficiencies in the field
“experiments” conducted at the Trout Lake Station when he worked with Juday during
the summers of 1933 and 1934.
‘‘I was here in 1934 when Weber Lake was being fertilized with a sequence of chemicals. One
year it was soybean meal, another year it was phosphorus, another year it was lime. I was part
of the team putting the chemicals in for that series of tests. I won’t call them experiments. When
you think about what was known of experimentation at the time— principally owing to R. A.
Fisher, who had written a book on biometry and design of experiments for agriculture plots —
the Weber study couldn’t qualify as an experiment.
‘‘One of the benefits of working as an assistant to Juday, however, was learning how to do
scientific work outdoors, how to work in the field. And it was valuable experience going from
lake to lake to see the variability.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
32
Breaking New Waters
Hasler’s first experience with manipulating animals under controlled conditions in the
field came early in his career. Before he had completed his Ph.D. thesis, he was hired by
the United States Bureau of Fisheries to work on Chesapeake Bay in Yorktown, Vir¬
ginia. He was to conduct field experiments on the effects on oysters of effluents from
paper pulp mills (Hasler et al, 1938, Hasler et al., 1947). Hasler worked as an assistant
biologist for the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries from 1935 to 1937.
After completing his doctoral degree, he was asked to return to the University of
Wisconsin in 1937 as an instructor in the Zoology Department. He had been invited back
to Wisconsin not by Birge or Juday, but by Michael F. Guyer, who was then Chairman
of the Zoology Department. Birge and Juday were approaching retirement and Guyer’s
intent was for Hasler to take over their duties. These arrangements had been made
without consulting Birge and Juday, however (Hasler 1979, personal communication).
“Birge and Guyer were antagonists. Guyer came into zoology [from the University of Cincin¬
nati in 1911] with the understanding that Birge would have nothing to do with his program. He
[Guyer] built that little lab [1933] at the end of Park Street [on Lake Mendota] and he wouldn’t
allow either Birge or Juday to set foot in that lab. . . . Who brought me into zoology? Not Birge
or Juday, but Guyer.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983 “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Hasler had never been well acquainted with Birge, who was already 81 when Hasler
first came to Wisconsin, and he has always felt that Birge viewed him as a young upstart.
(Hasler 1979, personal communication). Neither Birge nor Juday invited him to use
their facilities on Trout Lake, but he was assigned to Guyer’s new boat house on Lake
Mendota. The basement provided boats and space for aquaria, and the room above had
apparatus and desks for students. A Quonset hut near the lake lab was made available
for aquaria about 1950.
Shortly after returning to Wisconsin, Hasler, in cooperation with Roland K. Meyer,
began conducting physiological research on fish. They were among the first biologists in
North America to study fish endocrinology in their investigations of the use of pituitary
extracts for inducing premature spawning in trout and muskellunge (Hasler, Meyer, and
Field 1939, 1940). Hasler and Meyer (1942) also investigated the respiratory responses
of normal and castrated goldfish to fish and mammalian hormones. During this time
Hasler was also conducting field research on fish in Crater Lake, Oregon (Hasler 1938,
Hasler and Farner 1942), and in Lake Mendota, and spent two summers teaching and
conducting research at the Lake Geneva School of Science in southeastern Wisconsin
(Hasler and Nelson 1942).
When Juday retired in 1941, Hasler took over the course work and research area for
which Juday had been responsible, but supervision of the Trout Lake Station went to
Lowell Noland of the Zoology Department in 1942, and then later to other university
faculty. Hasler would not become director of the Trout Lake Station until 1962, the year
he built the Limnology Laboratory on Lake Mendota.
“There were advantages to my not being appointed director of the station earlier. I might have
gotten stuck in the Birge-Juday research tradition. As it was, I was able to start in my own
direction early. I got into the salmon work on the west coast, which I might not have had I been
confined to the station.”
A. D. Hasler, 1979, personal communication.
33
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
World War II disrupted limnological research in Madison and at Trout Lake, as it did
elsewhere. During the spring and summer of 1945 Hasler served with the United States
Air Force Strategic Bombing Survey in Germany. After the war’s end, he was able to
visit a number of biological stations and laboratories in England, Germany, and
Austria. He met animal ecologist Charles Elton at the Bureau of Animal Populations in
Oxford, England, fish physiologist Werner Jacobs of the Zoologisches Institut at the
University of Munich, alpine limnologist and ecologist Professor Otto Steinbock at the
University of Innsbruck, and the director of the Reichsanstalt fur Fisherel Weissenbach,
Dr. W. Einsele, who in 1939 and 1940 had been conducting experiments adding
phosphorus to lakes near the Bodensee.
Hasler also met his “scientific hero,’’ Professor Karl von Frisch, a man he had ad¬
mired for several years “because of his outstanding research on the sensory abilities of
fish, bees, and other animals” (Hasler 1945). Von Firsch recalled his first meeting with
Hasler in his autobiography.
“The first days of the occupation were full of incident and excitement. There were innumerable
strict rules, and quite often our homes were being searched by soldiers with rifles at the ready.
We lived in constant fear that the military might requisition our houses for the troops. So when
one fine day in June an American jeep with four officers stopped in front of our home, we were
not a little worried. However, the man who got out first did not inquire about billets but asked
after me and my honey-bees. My wife directed him to the observation hives, and there, for the
time being, he remained. He was Professor A. D. Hasler, biologist at the University of Wiscon¬
sin, who was staying in Salzburg to investigate war damage. . . . Hasler came often to our house
that summer, we became fast friends, and later visited each other in our laboratories.’’
K. von Frisch, 1967, A Biologist Remembers.
In his reports on the post-war conditions of European biological stations, Hasler
described the devastation the war had brought to so many laboratories and research
facilities including those of von Frisch.
“The director of the Zoologisches Institut [University of Munich], Professor von Frisch, was
forced to move to his summer cottage near Salzburg when his residence in Munich was com¬
pletely destroyed. Because he thought the Munich residential area would not be bombed he had
moved his library to his home. Thus one of the finest libraries in sensory physiology was blown
up. ... He has worked extensively on sense of smell, color changes in fish and was the
discoverer of ‘Schreckstoff,’ a secretion from injured skin of Phoxinus which, in extremely
small concentrations, is perceived by schools of this minnow who are alarmed and seek cover.”
A. D. Hasler, 1945, “A War Time View of
European Biological Stations.”
Hasler would visit with von Frisch again in 1954 when, on a Fulbright Research
Scholarship, he returned to Germany with his wife Hanna and their six children. During
that year Hasler also met the German animal behaviorist Konrad Lorenz. Hasler’s own
ideas on fish homing behavior would be greatly influenced by Lorenz’s studies of
imprinting — the process of rapid and irreversible learning during a critical period of
development that generally elicits a stereotyped pattern of behavior.
With his background in physiology, and inspired by his many discussions with von
Frisch, Hasler, with his students, began research on the sensory physiology of fish when
he returned to Madison in 1945.
“. . . a returning veteran, T. J. Walker expressed interest in olfactory physiology of fish and re-
34
Breaking New Waters
quested a Ph.D. research topic. Having become interested in macrophytes through Prof. N. C.
Fassett (Botany) and the research of another graduate student of mine, J. D. Andrews, I sug¬
gested to Walker that we test the ability of fish to distinguish aquatic plants by smell. I reasoned
there might be some interaction between fish and macrophytes — after all, they lay their eggs on
them, eat insect larvae living on them, and find cover among them from predators.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
About this same time Hasler became fascinated with the mystery of how salmon find
their way from the open ocean to their natal stream to spawn. The combination of his
fascination with salmon homing, his interest in Lorenz’s recent studies of imprinting,
and his and his students’ research on the abilities of fish to discriminate plants by odor
led Hasler and his student, Warren Wisby, to develop a hypothesis about salmon hom¬
ing. The olfactory hypothesis for salmon homing, first presented by Hasler and Wisby in
1951, had three basic tenets: 1) because of local differences in soil and vegetation of the
drainage basin, each stream has a unique chemical composition and thus, a distinctive
odor; 2) before juvenile salmon migrate to the sea they become imprinted to the distinc¬
tive odor of their home stream; and 3) adult salmon use this information as a clue for
homing when they migrate through the home stream network to the home tributary
(Hasler and Scholz 1983). The story of the research on salmon homing and orientation
conducted by Hasler and his associates is told in greater detail in Chapter 5.
Research on salmon homing and orientation became Hasler’s life work and the
research for which he became best known. With his graduate students and associates, he
spent the better part of 35 years testing the olfactory hypothesis of salmon homing. The
list of students and collaborators in the homing research includes Warren J. Wisby, Ross
M. Horrall, Andrew E. Dizon, Aivars B. Stasko, Dale M. Madison, Jon C. Cooper,
Peter Hirsch, Peter B. Johnsen, and Allan T. Scholz. Hasler drew together the various
studies on fish homing behavior in 1966 for Underwater Guideposts and again in 1983
for Olfactory Imprinting and Homing in the Salmon, the latter written in collaboration
with his student, Allan Scholz.
The olfactory homing hypothesis explained how salmon recognize their home stream,
but it could not explain their movements in the open sea. In a series of field and
laboratory tests conducted from 1955 through 1971, Hasler and his associates, Horrall,
Wisby, Wolfgang Braemer, Horst Schwassmann, E. S. Gardella, H. F. Henderson, and
Gerald Chipman, demonstrated that a number of fish species possess a sun-compass
mechanism and that they can orient by the sun to maintain a constant compass direction
in unfamiliar territory.
“Here again Karl von Frisch, who discovered this [sun-compass orientation] in bees, and
Gustav Kramer in Germany, who discovered it independently in birds, were sources of inspira¬
tion. Our contribution lay not in the concept, but in the methodology of demonstrating how
fish use sun-compass orientation.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
The first major funding for the salmon research came from the Office of Naval
Research (ONR). After the war the Navy also supplied Hasler and his students with
sophisticated equipment.
“George Sprugel, research coordinator for ONR, heard my research report at a national scien¬
tific meeting on the sense of smell of fishes and orientation, held about 1947. He invited me to
write a research proposal to finance the beginning of our studies on salmon. . . .
35
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
“From the contacts we had with the ONR, they provided us with these expensive instruments
free-of-charge. You couldn’t buy them on the market or at least you didn’t have enough money
to buy them on the market. . . . Because of our connections with ONR, all kinds of surplus navy
equipment became available after the war . . . including sonar for recording pelagic fish and do¬
ing bathymetric maps of lakes, underwater sound recorders for listening to fish ‘voices’, a
motor launch, jeeps and ultrasonic transducers.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Although perhaps best known in scientific circles for his research on salmon homing,
Hasler and his students were also involved in a great many other research areas. From
the very beginning of his career Hasler had been influenced by the work of R. A. Fisher,
and he encouraged his students to study statistics. Two of his early students, John Neess
and Richard Parker, minored in statistics. Hasler and his students began applying
“R. A. Fisher criteria” to field experiments.
“When R. A. Fisher applied the methods of biometry to the design of experiments on
agricultural field plots, and their evaluation through multiple correlations, he performed an in¬
valuable service to biology. In doing so, he broke with the traditions of experimentation, which
had been imposed by the exact sciences — namely, the manipulation, during an experimental
series, of only one factor at a time.”
A. D. Hasler, 1964, “Experimental Limnology.”
Hasler’s first graduate students, Jay D. Andrews (1944), Elizabeth Jones (1947), and
John C. Neess (1949), constructed experimental ponds for studies of interactions among
macrophytes and plankton, and in Neess’ project, fish and macrophytes. Although
Neess’ study got off to a rough start, eventually it was successfully completed.
“Four ponds were dug in the Gardner Marsh [University of Wisconsin Arboretum] for use by
John Neess in his Ph.D. thesis project. The initial attempt to dig the ponds with explosions of
dynamite failed. The force impelled the peat straight in the air and it cascaded right back again.
This feat became known in Arboretum circles as ‘Hasler’s Folly.’ ”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
The desire to simulate more natural conditions than experimental ponds soon led
Hasler to perform the “whole lake manipulations” for which he became so well known.
Many of the ideas and techniques for these studies grew out of the interdepartmental
communication Hasler fostered throughout his career.
“The monthly meetings of the Graduate Biological Division provided occasions to meet senior
colleagues campus wide. ... At one of the meetings I conversed with Bob Muckenhirn about
our brown-water and acid bog lakes. He introduced me to Prof. Emil Truog who had studied
the chemistry of bog soils. He had observed that the drainage of these limed soils became clear,
and hence allowed that we might clear up our bog lake with calcium hydroxide, Ca(OH)2.
[Some scientists had already tried calcium carbonate, CaC03, which did not work because it is
insoluble in lake water.] Laboratory studies confirmed this hunch, hence we could then try to
alkalize a whole lake, which we did experimentally in Cather, and later in the twin lakes, Peter
and Paul.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
The Cather Lake study was a “before and after” experiment. That is, William Helm,
a student of Hasler, investigated the limnological characteristics of Cather Lake for two
36
Breaking New Waters
years, and then commercial hydrated lime (Ca(OH)2) was added. But Hasler was not en¬
tirely satisfied with the rigor of this type of experiment.
“When you go to bigger things than ponds — dealing with larger units and manipulation — you
get into a great deal of difficulty. There, rigorous experiments are much more difficult to ac¬
complish and you have to make modifications or concessions about rigorous research when you
deal with large bodies.
“The concession we made with Bill Helm’s program [Gather Lake], when we were trying to
reduce the bog colloids in the lakes by lime treatment (calcium hydroxide), was that we chose to
study the plankton and fish populations for two years and then have two years of treatment, so
that we had a before and after type experiment. The weakness is that you don’t know whether
some natural events might have caused the change rather that the lime you put in.
“Then I learned from John Curtis [Botany] about the lakes up at the Notre Dame property,
the former Gillen Estate. I had told John that I needed to go one step closer to rigorous and he
told me that there was a lake there that had a constriction in it. Now we had a lake that we could
divide by a barrier so that we could have a reference lake and an experimental one — I don’t call
it control, but reference, because unless they’re identical in their size, volume, and so forth, you
can’t use the word control. We upgraded the rigor of the before and after design by the Peter
and Paul situation.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Hasler’s students, Waldo E. Johnson and Ray Stress, conducted research using the
two halves of the hourglass-shaped lake. Both projects, as well as the Gather Lake study,
are discussed in Chapter 5. Johnson was later hired by the Canadian government where
he worked his way up in the administration of water management.
“Johnson was instrumental in convincing the Canadian government to set aside a vast area of
twenty-odd lakes in Manitoba for experimental research. Obviously his training in Wisconsin
on Peter and Paul Lakes gave him this motivation. . . .
“It was in one of these Canadian lakes that a very crucial experiment on eutrophication took
place. Using the same technique we used on Peter and Paul, they divided a lake with an artifi¬
cial barrier and put phosphates on one side and left the other side as a reference. They showed
that you could develop a eutrophic lake. Then when they stopped fertilizing it, the lake became
normal again. So these two experimental lakes in the 70s were definitive tests of the
eutrophication hypothesis. All over the country, people, especially engineers, had doubted that
phosphorus was the critical element in eutrophication. ... So I’m proud of the contribution the
Peter and Paul experiment made on the North American scene.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
These were the days before the National Science Foundation and large-scale govern¬
ment funding for research. Hasler obtained the money for the lake manipulation studies
by contacting the owners of small lakes and getting their support. Many of these projects
could not have been done on public lands because of legal restrictions or public in¬
terference. Some of the lake-shore property owners, such as Guido Rahr, Ben
McGiveran, and Stib Stewart, made substantial contributions to the university to sup¬
port the projects. In several instances four-year research assistantships were established
by private donors, thus enabling several graduate students to gather data for master’s or
doctoral theses. The grants were rarely ample, however. The conditions under which
students conducted field research had not improved much since the Depression of the
37
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
1930s. William Schmitz, a student of Hasler, recalled the conditions he found when he
took over the Cather Lake project.
“I remember the first night when I was given the task of taking over the research in Chippewa
County [Cather Lake]. I think we’d been married for two years — I still called her my bride. It
was on a June night that we drove down the hill to the converted chicken shack, a Quonset hut
made of plywood. We opened the door and she looked in there and she was starting to feel
pretty apprehensive. There was no electricity. There was no light at all, other than the
headlights on the truck. The air was so thick with mosquitos in the month of June that you
could hardly breathe. We went in and moved all this junk. . . . We had to move the boats and
the paint buckets, the anchors and the rope, the poles, and the weed collections to clear a path
to the bunkbed.
“During the night she heard crawling and moving. I shined the flashlight over on the table.
The deermice had taken up residence in the desk, where they were eating creel cards and
chemical records, and also nursing their young. The bats were fluttering in between the ceiling.
The poor woman was beside herself.
“All the things that had to be kept cold, I kept in the hypolimnion in a basket. It smelled like
rotten eggs once you got the package open even though everything was alright. She left after
about a week, so I spent the next three summers pretty much alone.”
W. Schmitz, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Many lake-shore property owners gave money to the limnology program because they
felt the research might have practical applications, such as making bog lakes suitable for
trout; they could also get a tax deduction by giving money for research.
“We used applied aspects of research to get money, but what we were really interested in were
hypotheses and ideas about lakes.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
38
Breaking New Waters
References
Hasler, A. D. 1935. The physiology of digestion of plankton Crustacea. I. Some digestive en¬
zymes of Daphnia. Biol. Bull. 68: 207-214.
_ . 1937. The physiology of digestion in plankton Crustacea. II. Further studies on the diges¬
tive enzymes of a. Daphnia and Polyphemus; b. Diaptomus and Calanus. Biol. Bull. 72:
209-298.
_ . 1938. Fish biology and limnology of Crater Lake, Oregon. J. Wildl. Mgt. 2: 94-103.
_ 1945. This is the enemy. Science. 102: 431.
_ . 1964. Experimental limnology. Bioscience 14: 36-38.
_ . 1966. Underwater Guideposts. Homing of Salmon. University of Wisconsin Press,
Madison. 155 p.
_ and D. S. Farner. 1942. Fisheries investigations in Crater Lake, Oregon, 1937-40. J.
Wildl. Mgt. 6: 319-327.
_ and P. S. Galtsoff, W. A. Chipman, and J. B. Engle. 1938. Preliminary report on the
cause of the decline of the oyster industry of the York River, VA, and effects of pulp-mill pollu¬
tion on oysters. U.S. Bur. Fish. Invest. Report No. 37. 42 p.
_ and _ , _ , _ , and H. N. Calderwood. 1947. Ecological and physiological
studies of the effect of sulfate pulp mill wastes on oysters in the York River, VA. Fish. Bull, of
the Fish and Wild. Ser. No. 51: 59-186.
_ and R. K. Meyer. 1942. Respiratory responses of normal and castrated goldfish to teleost
and mammalian hormones. J. Exptl. Zoo/. 91: 391-404.
_ and _ , and H. M. Field. 1939. Spawning induced prematurely in trout with the aid of
pituitary glands of the carp. Endocrinology. 25: 978-983.
_ , _ , and _ . 1940. The use of hormones for the conservation of muskellunge,
Esox masquinongy immaculatus Garrard. Copeia 1940: 43-46.
_ and M. N. Nelson. 1942. The growth, food, distribution and relative abundance of the
fishes of Lake Geneva, Wisconsin in 1941. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 34: 137-148.
_ and A. T. Scholz. 1983. Olfactory Imprinting and Homing in Salmon. Investigations into
the Mechanism of the Imprinting Process. Springer-Verlag, New York. 134 + xix p.
von Frisch, K. 1967. A Biologist Remembers. New York, Pergamon Press. 200 p.
39
4
Expansion
With the establishment of the National Science Foundation (1950) and the Atomic
Energy Commission (1946), the era of “big money” in science began and Hasler
was on the ground floor. Early in his career Hasler became a “grant getter,” a person
who could get the money that would allow other people to carry out the research. From
these new funding agencies, he was able to obtain substantial monies for his research and
for the construction of a new laboratory on Lake Mendota in 1962. He was also for¬
tunate to be in a state where there was strong interest in conservation. Cooperation be¬
tween the state of Wisconsin and the university allowed Hasler and his students to have
access to state resources, primarily through the Conservation Department (now the
Department of Natural Resources).
“Hasler made a conscious decision early on. He could do his own research or get into
biopolitics — grantsmanship — and have lots of graduate students. He made the decision to be
associated with biopolitics. Hasler recognized early what his strengths were — he could get
money to provide the setting for other people to do research.
“He was the right man at the right time. Right after Sputnik, there was a big push for science.
Money was available everywhere. Hasler had one of the few programs in the country that had
shown progress. The salmon experiments and the research on Peter and Paul Lakes were well
known. ... He devoted himself full-time to getting funds. Hasler saw the opportunity and he
took it.”
C. Voightlander, 1983, personal communication.
Although many of his graduate students and colleagues feel that Hasler had a “grand
scheme” for the Wisconsin limnological school and that grant-getting was a part of that
scheme, Hasler recalls his past actions as being less well-planned.
“There was a lot of opportunism in my activities — opportunism and ambition — rather than
long-range planning. ... I just like working with more than one thing at a time. I enjoy multiple
activities and a variety of personalities.”
A. D. Hasler, 1985, personal communication.
In addition to money, Hasler also had lots of good, innovative ideas. The ideas and
the availability of funds attracted top-notch graduate students, who had good research
ideas of their own. Hasler soon had a large number of students involved in a broad range
of research topics. In his pet area, salmon homing and orientation, he called the shots.
But otherwise, he was not intimately involved in his students’ research. Like Birge and
Juday, Hasler expected students to be independent and develop their own ideas, and he
gave students the freedom to make their own decisions.
“Students had to be independent to survive. The lake lab was no place for someone who was
dependent. . . . Students had to define their own projects, their own line of inquiry, preferably
in a proposal on paper, then Hasler approved the ideas. Hasler was hard-nosed about
research, but he allowed a great deal of latitude.”
C. Voightlander, 1983, personal communication.
41
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Hasler’s favorite quote comes from Louis Pasteur, “Chance favors only the prepared
mind.” Hasler tried to create an environment in which both he and his students could
take advantage of serendipity. He felt that the best preparation for the generation of
good ideas for research was to be in a stimulating environment.
“New and challenging ideas for research were the principal features which attracted money,
equipment, collaborators, and graduate students into the limnology program. ... I tell my
students to discuss their ideas with others and not to be afraid if an idea is stolen. You don’t
belong in science if you have so few ideas you fear having one stolen. You get ideas by discus¬
sing them. Hence you gain more than you lose.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
Hasler established a program to bring in eminent scientists and, unlike Birge and Ju-
day, he made a point of introducing them to the graduate students. Through his research
grants, he kept a flow into the lab of well-known people from around the world. These
scientists commonly brought with them new ideas and experimental methods.
“We had talent from all over the world coming in and I’m sure we picked up ideas and sharp¬
ened our own. We had a policy of taking a visitor who was going to be there for a week and sit¬
ting him down with every graduate student without our presence. The student could sharpen his
ideas against another bright guy.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
The environment Hasler provided — innovative ideas, talented graduate and post¬
doctoral students, interdepartmental collaboration, and visiting scientists from around
the country and the world — sparked the generation of new ideas.
“The resources for advanced graduate students were ideal — lots of technical help as well as in¬
tellectual stimulation. . . . There was also a tradition of excellence that one felt must be
continued — one occasionally felt that Birge and Juday were watching. . . .
“New graduate students were inundated with ideas from other graduate students. . . . Most
of the research ideas came from other students. ... All of this, of course, subject to the ap¬
proval and modification by ADH — and the constant scrutiny and ‘constructive criticism’ by
other students.”
C. Voightlander, 1983, personal communication.
Hasler’s graduate students commonly took their research problems, especially prob¬
lems in experimental design and statistics to Hasler’s former student, John C. Neess,
who joined the Zoology Department after completing his Ph.D. degree in 1949. Within
the first couple years as a faculty member, Neess separated from Hasler and the lim¬
nology lab because he did not want to be thought of as Hasler’s successor (Neess 1983,
personal communication). He continued, however, to advise Hasler’s students.
“John Neess was a person who was a friend as well as advisor. . . . When we would have dif¬
ficulties we would go to John, particularly on things like sampling and statistical analysis. . . .
John’s habit of being available was a tremendous resource for us because you could catch him
almost any time. How he got his own work done I don’t know. We were always after him for
help and he gave it willingly.”
W. Helm, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
42
Breaking New Waters
Hasler’s students formed a congenial and mutually supporting group. For many
students, the most influential people in the actual development of research — writing, ex¬
perimental design, and conceptual development of the problem — were fellow graduate
students (Hunter, Voightlander, and Wissing 1983, personal communication). At both
formal and “brown bag’’ seminars, which were often attended by people from the Wis¬
consin Conservation Department, Hasler’s students openly exchanged and challenged
research ideas. They also commonly helped each other with their field research.
“As long as I have been associated with limnology in Madison, neither up here [Trout Lake]
nor in Madison, did you get any sense of competition or the withholding of information or
guarding of information. People were generous with collaboration.’’
W. Schmitz, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.’’
“Everybody helped each other. We all got experience doing these different things. . . . Hasler
didn’t explicitly tell students to help on other projects, but there was peer pressure.’’
R. Ragotzkie, 1983, personal communication.
Hasler’s students were involved in a broad range of research areas, only a few of
which are discussed here. One major area of study was the extension of the use of ra¬
dionuclides in experimental limnology. E. Zicker, K. Berger, and Hasler (1956) first
began using isotopes to trace the movements of nutrients, specifically phosphorus, in
lakes. They found that radiophosphorus, applied to the surface of the mud, does not dif¬
fuse readily into the water in an undisturbed system.
Hasler then proposed using lakes as models of the sea in experiments designed to study
the physical-biological transport of nuclides in marine situations.
“The Office of Naval Research held a conference in the 1950s on marine disposal of radioactive
waste. We biologists challenged the disposal in meromictic [thermally and chemically stratified]
areas because migratory animals would transport it to surface waters. We simulated this in a
meromictic lake in Wisconsin. To have done it at sea would have been too expensive and
technically impossible.’’
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
From preliminary studies conducted in a small, chemically stratified lake in north¬
western Wisconsin, Hasler and his student, Gene Likens, discovered that dipteran larvae
transported measurable quantities of radioiodine from the deep water of the lake to the
surface and thence, as pupated flying insects, to the shoreline, indicating that radioactive
wastes could be transported to the surface and out of the lake or ocean by animals
(Likens and Hasler 1963). Likens and Hasler also used radiosodium to measure the
movements of water in a lake during both ice-covered and open-water conditions
(Likens and Hasler 1962).
The research conducted by Hasler’s students and associates covered almost every
aspect of what is considered traditional limnology. Studies, for example, included
research on the distribution of cobalt in lakes (Parker and Hasler 1969), heat budgets in
Madison lakes (Stewart 1973) and in the Madison River in Yellowstone National Park
(Wright and Horrall 1967), airborne litterfall as a source of organic matter in lakes
(Gasith and Hasler 1976), the distribution of zooplankton in Lake Mendota (Ragotzkie
and Bryson 1953), plankton Crustacea in Lake Michigan (McNaught 1966, McNaught
and Hasler 1966), invertebrates on aquatic plants (Andrews and Hasler 1942), the
43
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
population ecology of chironomids (Dugdale 1955), ecology of riffle insects in the
Firehole River in Wyoming (Armitage 1958, 1961), caloric values of various in¬
vertebrates (Wissing and Hasler 1968, 1971b), and the behavioral ecology of caddisflies
(Gallepp 1974a, 1974b, 1976, 1977).
Another contributor to the Wisconsin limnological program was G. A. Rohlich of the
Departments of Civil and Environmental Engineering and Water Chemistry. The
research of Rohlich and his associates was concerned primarily with the origin and quan¬
tities of plant nutrients in the Madison lakes and tributaries (see Hasler 1963).
The Wisconsin school of limnology under Hasler’ s direction conducted far more
research on fish than was customary elsewhere.
“Neither Birge, Welch, nor Hutchinson emphasized the fish of lakes and rivers. It was one of
my goals to correct this neglect. Only in 1982 was a textbook published [Goldman] on lim¬
nology that had even a chapter on fish communities.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
The following list of research topics is by no means exhaustive, but it does illustrate
the breadth of research on fishes conducted by Hasler and his associates. Many of the
early studies, such as those on the movements, distribution, and population ecology of
perch (Bardach 1951, Hasler 1945, Hasler and Bardach 1949, Hasler and Villemonte
1953, Hergenrader and Hasler 1965, 1967, 1968), carp (Neess, Helm, and Threinen 1955,
1957), cisco (John 1956, John and Hasler 1956), white bass (Horrall 1961, Voightlander
and Wissing 1974, Wright 1968), and yellow bass (Helm 1958, Wright 1968) were con¬
ducted in Lake Mendota and Lake Wingra.
Research was not confined to Madison-area lakes, however. There were also studies
on the trout introduced into alkalized and nonalkalized lakes in northern Wisconsin
(Johnson and Hasler 1954), on alleviating winterkill conditions in northern lakes
(Schmitz 1959, Schmitz and Hasler 1958), on the feeding ecology of trout in the Brule
River in northern Wisconsin (Hunt 1965), on muskellunge and perch populations (Gam¬
mon and Hasler 1965), and on limnetic larval fish in northern Wisconsin lakes (Faber
1967). Hasler’s student, Francis Henderson, with limnology technician Gerald Chipman
developed an ultrasonic transmitter for use in studies of fish movements (Henderson,
Hasler, and Chipman 1966).
Another student, William Helm, was the first to build and use an electroshocker in
Wisconsin. In this case, necessity was truly the ‘ ‘mother of invention.” Helm had been
trying to conduct research on walleye in northern Wisconsin and was frustrated in his ef¬
forts to catch them.
“I tried daytime seining, nighttime seining, nice gravely beaches, woody areas— nothing. I was
not getting walleye. So we tried to figure out whether we could trawl. From what I could tell of
the bottom, that was not a very good prospect.
“I had read somewhere about boom shockers. We had an old surplus generator sitting in a
shed down in Madison, so I grabbed that and had an Arkansas traveler boat brought up here.
Between a few things I scrounged in Madison and stuff that I bought at a hardware store up
here, I put together a boom shocker to find out whether it would work. And it did. So we
regrouped and constructed it well enough that it would work for that fall and then went ahead
and shocked. It was, to my knowledge, the first workable boom shocker in the state of Wiscon¬
sin. . . .
“All that fall there was a steady procession of people in here to look at that boom shocker to
see how it worked, because I was collecting walleye with a very, very low mortality rate. We
44
Breaking New Waters
were also collecting musky with a low mortality rate, so the musky people came charging over
here. During the wintertime I built a real gaudy thing, one that allowed me to vary the elec¬
trospacing depending on water hardness, conductivity. ... It improved the efficiency tremen¬
dously.”
W. Helm, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Some students also continued in one of Hasler’s original lines of research in fish
physiology. James Gammon investigated the conversion of food in young muskellunge
(Gammon 1963), Thomas Wissing examined the effects of swimming and food intake on
the respiration of young-of-the-year white bass (Wissing and Hasler 1971a), and Calvin
Kaya investigated the effect of photoperiod and temperature on the gonads of green sun-
fish (Kaya and Hasler 1972). S. Chidambaram, in collaboration with zoologist, Roland
K. Meyer, conducted research on the effects of brain lesions and ACTH on the blood of
bullheads (Hasler, Chidambaram, and Meyer 1973).
In addition to training students to be qualified limnologists, Hasler also trained them
to be scientists who would be at home on the sea, in a marine bay, on a saltwater lake, or
in a river. He also tried to train his students to be opportunists, to be flexible enough to
take advantage of new research opportunities and funding sources when they arise.
“I didn’t know a damn thing about atomic energy when we got into the isotope research. I had
to learn it. I advise my students to train themselves to be able to change. . . . The best thing you
can do in your earliest stages is to give yourself the kind of training that isn’t final. Get the
basics, so you can tackle anything in a systematic, intelligent way with the curiosity, the motiva¬
tion, and the inspiration to learn it. ... I think it’s a great shame if anyone starts with any sub¬
ject in science today with the idea that he’s going to be doing that all his life. He’s a fool to
think he can get away with it.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
His students were also trained to be able administrators of their own research pro¬
grams.
“Hasler’s goal was to train people capable of directing a laboratory in totality. ... He always
said, ‘There’s more to this business than rowing around the lake.’ And he made sure that
students knew how to write grants, run a lab, and deal with the public and the politicians. . . .
Graduate students did the grant writing. Hasler was the editorial manager.”
C. Voightlander, 1983, personal communication.
Students did get plenty of training in running the limnology lab, because Hasler
travelled a great deal and was often absent from the lab. The lab was, for the most part,
organized and run on a day-to-day basis by students. There were committees — the boat
committee, library committee, and so forth. No one was required to work on Hasler’s
pet projects, but he did require personal responsibility in managing the lake lab in
Madison.
Hasler’s training of students ensured that many would find their way into influential
research and administrative positions. As previously discussed, Waldo Johnson was in¬
strumental in getting the Canadian government to set aside an experimental lakes area in
Manitoba. Robert Ragotzkie is the Director of the Sea Grant Program at the University
of Wisconsin. Gene Likens is Director of the Institute of Ecosystem Studies at the New
45
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
York Botanical Garden. John Bardach recently retired as Director of the East-West
Resource Systems Institute in Hawaii. H. Francis Henderson is in charge of the Fish
Stock Evaluation Branch of the Food and Agriculture Organization in Rome. Richard
A. Parker is Dean of the Graduate School at Washington State University in Pullman,
and Warren Wisby is Associate Dean for the Rosenstiel School of Marine and Atmo¬
spheric Science at the University of Miami.
From the 1940s to the late 1950s the Trout Lake Station had been relatively unim¬
portant to the development of the Wisconsin limnological program. With the coming of
the second World War and the retirement of Juday in 1941, limnological research at the
station had come to a standstill. Not only had Hasler not been invited to use the
facilities, but his research interests had been focused on lakes in southeastern Wisconsin.
Although some students, including Oscar Brynildson, William Helm, Ray Stross, Waldo
Johnson, Gene Likens, and William Schmitz, had been conducting research on several
northern Wisconsin lakes, the Trout Lake Station did not serve as a base for the lim-
nologists until the late 1950s. Hasler’s students recall that in the 1940s and 1950s there
was no great agitation to “get something going’’ at Trout Lake. The station was viewed
as a “rough and ready” place with no good research facilities. There was no modern
laboratory there until 1967. The real emphasis was on Lake Mendota in Madison, the
liming of bog lakes in northeastern Wisconsin, and the salmon homing and orientation
research.
From 1942 through 1955, the Trout Lake Station was used by a variety of researchers
other than limnologists, including parasitologist Chester Herrick, plant ecologist John
Curtis, and wildlife ecologist Robert Dorney. In 1947 Hasler and some of his graduate
students made a brief trip north to take to Madison any equipment that might be useful
for research on Lake Mendota (Neess and Le Cren 1983, personal communication).
Their trip became quite an expedition.
“The Trout Lake Station had been ‘mothballed’ soon after the outbreak of the war and had re¬
mained unvisited for some while. In the summer of 1947, Art Hasler decided that he would visit
it to see that the bathhouse laboratories were still standing and such equipment as was there
was still in good shape. Accordingly an expedition was planned. We were to drive up from
Madison on one day, spend the night there and return the next. . . . One of the stores in
Madison had recently bought a batch of ex-Army ‘jungle hammocks’ that they were selling off
for $5.00 each. Several of us had bought one of these and we thought that we would try them
out at Trout Lake.
“The party consisted of Art Hasler, John Neess, John Bardach, Ed Nelson, and David Le
Cren. . . . We found the huts still standing and full of miscellaneous apparatus (and junk!) just
as they had been left some five years before. Art checked things over and rescued some items to
use on Mendota. . . .
“Ed disdained the hammocks (which, considering his weight, was wise) and settled down in
his sleeping bag onto the sand. The rest of us chose pairs of pine trees and tied up the ropes of
our hammocks. However, the fun then began. The hammocks had fly-sheets over the top of
them connected to the hammock proper with mosquito-netting. One had to open a zip, insert
one’s top half and then leap off the ground and pull one’s legs in. This was easier said than
done, and most of us promptly ended upside down in the fly-sheet. I believe that Art actually
rotated two or three times before coming to rest. It then became apparent that the strings on
which the hammocks were suspended had been quietly rotting away while stacked in some
damp Army store. There was a succession of loud reports, as under tension, first one and then
another gave way under the strain of shaking laughter that had by now afflicted the party. I
think that John Neess and David did eventually spend quite restful nights in their hammocks.
46
Breaking New Waters
The others involuntarily joined Ed on the ground; he by now was cursing us for keeping him
awake with our mirth and oaths.”
D. LeCren, 1983, personal communication.
In 1962 Hasler had applied for and obtained funds from the National Science Founda¬
tion to build a modern research laboratory on Lake Mendota. He was able to have
William Kaeser appointed architect for the building to assure a unique style for the
prized lake site. In 1967 he was approached by the university administration to get
money for a new laboratory on Trout Lake. With matching funds from the university,
the National Science Foundation provided money to build the new research facilities. A
few graduate students (Philip Doepke, Daniel Faber, James Gammon, William Helm,
William Schmitz) had used the facilities at Trout Lake in the 1950s and 1960s, but
research activity did not really pick up there until after the new lab was built.
“When I came up in ’57 it was the first contact the limnology group had had with the station
since the ’40s. . . . There was a little resistance to our using the station at first, but I think it was
a matter of guarding territories. . . .
“When I was up here, there was a minimum level of activity — only three people working on
projects living over here at the time. . . . We were almost in a vacuum.”
W. Helm, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
The Department of Natural Resources owned the land on which the first station had
been built. The state wanted the station moved from its original location and offered an
80-acre site on the south shore of South Trout for the new laboratory. William Schmitz,
one of Hasler’s former students and now a faculty member at the University of
Wisconsin-Marathon campus, was appointed Associate Director of the station in 1966.
In 1965 he had gone to meetings in Warsaw and visited stations in Austria, Denmark,
northern Germany, and Poland to garner ideas for the new laboratory at Trout Lake.
Under Schmitz’s supervision, the new laboratory was built in 1967. Some of the old
wooden buildings that Birge and Juday had used as laboratories were pushed across the
ice from the old station on the north shore of South Trout to the new site and used for
living quarters and warehouses. Birge and Juday had intended the Trout Lake Station to
be a temporary research facility (Juday and Birge 1930). With the building of the new
lab, the station became a permanent laboratory and went from being only a summer sta¬
tion to providing facilities for research year-round. Hasler remained Director of the sta¬
tion until 1975 when John J. Magnuson succeeded him.
Hasler continued the tradition of interdisciplinary research begun by Birge and Juday.
During the Hasler era, however, the involvement of other departments was more
biological and behavioral than chemical and physical. Students took courses and sought
advice from Norman Fassett, who was interested in aquatic macrophytes, John Curtis, a
plant ecologist, Aldo Leopold, a wildlife ecologist, and James Crow, a population
geneticist who coadvised Hasler’s student, Ralph Nursall.
“In the late 1940s the students of Hasler, Leopold, and Fassett formed a congenial group even
though they were doing different things. . . . The University of Wisconsin was one of the few
places that had several ecologists, who were all good and who all worked well together. It was a
strong campus. Leopold and Fassett recognized ecology as an important discipline, so there
were lots of contacts for graduate students interested in ecology.”
J. Neess, 1983, personal communication.
47
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Hasler and his students consulted other faculty in addition to the ecologists.
Psychologists were intimately involved in designing the behavioral tests used in experi¬
ments on the olfactory, homing, and orientation abilities of fish. Faculty from soil
physics and soil chemistry advised with the work on liming bog lakes, and faculty and
technicians from mechanical engineering helped design and construct equipment for the
limnologists.
“As far as I’m concerned, the engineering people were of most use to me. I borrowed gas
meters for measuring air flow. I consulted with Professor Villemonte, who was very helpful.
They weren’t helpful entirely out of generosity. They got to go fishing up there [Trout Lake].
Every time I consulted with anybody I usually had to spend a half day fishing with them. I
fished with everybody. ... I fished with good fishermen, bad fishermen, and indifferent
fishermen. But you know, it was fun to have done that, because you also had a chance to spend
some time with them and you pick their brain and you have an enjoyable time.”
W. Schmitz, 1983, “History of Limnology in
Wisconsin Conference.”
Hasler and his students also sought statistical advice from Arthur Chapman in the
Statistics Department in the School of Agriculture. And when computers first came into
use, the limnologists sought advice on their application to limnological data.
Interdepartmental cooperation became institutionalized in 1962 when the Graduate
School approved as an experimental program the interdepartmental Oceanography and
Limnology Graduate Program.
“In the 1960s several professors across the campus agreed to collaborate in offering a graduate
curriculum in O & L. Acknowledging that traditional zoology and botany were too restrictive,
especially in the areas of water chemistry, physics, meteorology, geology, geophysics, micro¬
biology and hydrology, our program opened O & L to disciplines other than biology.”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
The O & L Program attained full status as a recognized degree program in spring
1969. Participating departments include Bacteriology, Botany, Civil and Environmental
Engineering (including Water Chemistry), Geology and Geophysics, Meteorology, the
Institute for Environmental Studies, and Zoology.
In 1972, through the efforts of Hasler, Robert Ragotzkie, a former student, and Clif¬
ford Mortimer, a limnologist from the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, Sea Grant
status was granted to the University of Wisconsin system. It was only the sixth Sea Grant
College in the nation and the first in the Midwest. Ragotzkie was appointed Director of
the Sea Grant Program, which in Wisconsin stresses applied research on the Great
Lakes. In the course of the salmon homing and orientation research, Hasler and his
students had conducted extensive experiments on Lake Michigan, but the Sea Grant Pro¬
gram expanded the scope of Great Lakes research, as well as the resources available to
the Wisconsin limnological school.
Even though Hasler and his students were well-funded, the rapid growth of Wiscon¬
sin’s limnology program from the 1950s to the 1970s still made substantial financial
demands on the Zoology Department of which it was a part. Like any leader of a strong
research program, Hasler generated some ill-will among a few of his colleagues through
competition for departmental funds. He and his students in the lake lab were also
isolated from the rest of the Zoology Department, so at times there was a lack of com¬
munication between the limnologists and the other zoologists.
48
Breaking New Waters
“Art wanted the limnology program self-contained and he tried to run the limnology lab as a
separate institution. He didn’t like being just a faculty member within a department. He went
outside the department [to university deans] to get influence, which was irritating to other
departmental faculty. Hasler thought the only claim to fame that zoology had was the lim¬
nology program — an attitude that tended to irritate other members of the department.”
J. Neess, 1983, personal communication.
The intradepartmental conflicts Hasler had with other zoology faculty were, however,
relatively minor. Hasler served three years as Chairman of the department, having been
elected by a majority vote of the Zoology staff and appointed by the Dean of Letters and
Science. And, the rivalries did not affect his students.
“Once he made a commitment to a student, he would back you to the hilt, especially in depart¬
mental conflicts. Conflicts did not filter down to affect students. There were certain people you
avoided on your committees. Hasler shielded his students from his antagonists in the Zoology
Department. It was not an overwhelming problem for us. The students were not penalized.”
T. Wissing, 1983, personal communication.
Unlike Birge and Juday, who had remained socially aloof from their students and
were uninvolved in their personal lives, Hasler made strong efforts to reduce the social
distance between him and his students and among the students themselves. He often
entertained students in his home.
“I first met Hasler in September, 1943. He was not like Birge. Hasler was a good t erson to have
as a friend. You could depend on him for personal support.”
J. Neess, 1983, personal communication.
Hasler’s wife Hanna held regular monthly meetings of the “Fish Wives,” a group
composed of graduate students’ wives.
“Hanna Hasler’s meetings of the wives were important. They provided support for the
graduate students through the wives. The Haslers’ always gave gifts to the wives when their
husbands graduated. . . . There’s a feeling of closeness among the graduate students that con¬
tinues 20 years later.”
D. Faber, 1983, personal communication.
The Haslers’ efforts at providing personal support as well as academic and financial
support for students may have stemmed from values learned early. Both Hasler and his
wife had been brought up as Mormons where they learned a strong sense of community.
“Being raised a Mormon played a big role in shaping my values. I learned to be a team worker,
learned public speaking, and how to conduct meetings. . . .
“As a scientist, one has difficulties. ... I could have said, ‘to hell with my church, I’m just
going to quit and not have anything to do with religion.’ But then, how am I going to teach my
children and other young people I deal with how a scientist thinks? One thing I took on was
evolution. I used to give lessons at our church on evolution. The church doesn’t accept it at all,
but I thought our young people ought to be exposed to evolution. And the Mormon church for
many years wouldn’t let Blacks hold the priesthood. I took this on and gave many talks about
the biology of the equality of man and called for a change in policy, which took place about
1980. Of course, many other Mormon intellectuals did as I did. If I’d run away and thrown
stones from the outside there wouldn’t have been any change. ... A lot of scientists just pull
away from these things and don’t help to change society.
49
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
“Theologically, I’m not a good Mormon, but I’ll defend them to my dying day. ... I had
five sons and one daughter. My colleagues in the Mormon community in Madison took the
children to baseball games and Boy Scout activities, taught them social dancing, and took them
on canoe trips when I was away on research trips and committee assignments in Washington.
They were surrogate fathers to them. . . . They were also supportive and compassionate during
my late wife’s illness with cancer. . . .
“As a scientist, it hasn’t been easy to be a Mormon. ... In 1965 I was one of two candidates
for a deanship at a large West Coast university. I had been told by a friend that I had the posi¬
tion. But when I was called the next day, I was told I didn’t get it because I was a Mormon. In
retrospect it was my good fortune, for I could not have done exciting salmon experiments
[which led to Hasler’s election to the National Academy of Sciences] had I become an ad¬
ministrator.’’
A. D. Hasler, 1985, personal communication.
Despite his personal interest in students, Hasler did have an authoritarian presence.
He was on a first name basis with a graduate student only after that person became a
Ph.D. student. Hasler was also known for his insistence on keeping the lake lab neat and
clean. Particularly trying to the graduate students were the preparations they had to
make in advance of a site visit from the National Science Foundation.
“Site visits literally involved white-glove inspections with white lab coats. Hasler would have
someone behind him taking notes. There would be a flurry of cleaning up. Hasler was very
meticulous. The graduate students once even suggested renting a truck for a day to load
everything on, so the lab would look neat for the site visit.”
C. Voightlander, 1983, personal communication.
As busy as Hasler was with his graduate students and research, he made time for
public service. From the time he returned to the University of Wisconsin and taught his
first course in limnology in 1938, Hasler was concerned with conservation.
“In a state with over 5000 lakes it was my view that every drug store clerk should learn the
rudiments of limnology. Because limnology was not in the college student’s vocabulary in 1938,
the course bore the designation Conservation of Aquatic Resources. ”
A. D. Hasler, 1983, personal communication.
Long before the ecological awareness of the 1960s and 1970s, Hasler worked with
politicians and lobbied for legislation to protect Wisconsin’s lakes and streams. He even
recruited Fritz Albert to make a “propaganda” film, “What’s Happening to Our
Lakes?” Unlike Birge and Juday, who had avoided controversial issues such as water
pollution and were criticized for leaving the polluted Madison lakes to work on the
unspoiled lakes in northern Wisconsin, Hasler and his students were often involved in
the research and politics of water pollution and resource conservation (Hasler 1938,
1947, 1967, 1969a, 1969b, 1972, 1973).
In 1972, while he was president of the International Association for Ecology, Hasler
helped obtain funds for the workshop on Global Ecological Problems, which was spon¬
sored by The Institute of Ecology. One product of this workshop was the book Man in
the Living Environment. A Report on Global Ecological Problems.
“I’ve always taken some pride in having had the opportunity to be a scholar, a teacher, and a
public servant. There’s been a lot of satisfaction in serving broadly in the community. . . . But 1
50
Breaking New Waters
don’t want to pat myself on the back, because public service has also had its rewards. When I
served on committees I met people with whom I could discuss research and get new ideas.”
A. D. Hasler, 1985, personal communication.
Hasler was also active in professional societies. He was selected by the executive com¬
mittee of the American Society of Limnology and Oceanography to be the chairman of
the 15th International Congress of Limnology held in Madison in 1962. It was the first
time the Congress had been held outside Europe. He applied to the National Science
Foundation for funds to support the Congress, which included publication of the book
Limnology in North America , edited by David Frey, a former student of Chancey Ju-
day.
By 1978, when Hasler retired from teaching and directing the limnology lab, he had
trained 53 doctoral students and 41 master’s degree students and had co-advised many
others (listed in appendix). Many of these students “minored” with collaborating col¬
leagues across the campus. Although he became Emeritus Professor in 1978, Hasler con¬
tinues to write and to remain active in the activities of the limnology lab, and especially
in professional societies such as the prestigious National Academy of Sciences to which
he was elected in 1969 and the American Academy of Arts and Sciences to which he was
elected in 1972 (see Chapter 5).
Unlike Birge and Juday, who had left the limnology program without strong leader¬
ship when they retired, Hasler ensured continuation of the program at Wisconsin by
bringing in and training new people to take over when he decided to step down. Hasler
recommended John J. Magnuson for appointment in 1968. Magnuson had grown up in
the Midwest and had obtained bachelor’s (1956) and master’s (1958) degrees in fisheries
from the University of Minnesota and a Ph.D. (1961) in zoology and oceanography
from the University of British Columbia. His major professor was Peter Larkin, but he
was also advised by C. C. Lindsey and Bill Hoar.
After completing his doctoral degree, Magnuson went from British Columbia to
Hawaii where he was the program leader for the tuna behavior and physiology program
sponsored by the Bureau of Commercial Fisheries (now part of the National
Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration). Hasler felt that Magnuson’s ex¬
perience as a “blue-water oceanographer” and his strong background in behavior and
physiology would help broaden Wisconsin’s research program. One of Magnuson’s
duties was to direct the Trout Lake Station.
‘‘I fell in love with the station and the northern lakes. It fit in with my background and in¬
terests. In Hawaii, I had become interested in how tuna respond to vertical environmental
gradients. This interest transferred well to lakes in northern Wisconsin where there are vertical
gradients in temperature, oxygen, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide.”
J. Magnuson, 1985, personal communication.
Magnuson had been warned by some colleagues not to take the position in Wisconsin,
warned that in working with Hasler he would not have the freedom to develop his own
research interests. He quickly discovered, however, that the warnings were unfounded.
“I did not want to become Art’s successor with his lines of research, and he did not push me in
that direction. ... I found that Hasler was rigid in some ways — when I tried to hang a picture
of Birge on my office wall he gave me a lecture about ‘false idols.’ I also had to attempt to keep
my desk clean. But he provided a great deal of freedom where I wanted it. He did not try to con-
51
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
trol my teaching, research, or use of facilities. . . . We exploited each other in the best sense of
the word. My association with Art opened doors for me that might never have been opened.”
J. Magnuson, 1985, personal communication.
There has been no abrupt change in the direction of limnological research as there had
been between the Birge and Juday era and the Hasler era, and the transition between
leaders has been much smoother. Magnuson has gone in his own direction, however.
“We’ve tried to take the best of both schools (descriptive-comparative and experimental) and
incorporate that into our approach. We didn’t choose the approach of one school and reject the
other. . . . One element that was not exemplified in either era was mathematical or ecosystems
theory— the advances in theoretical ecology were not made at Wisconsin. We hope to add a
more theoretical approach.
“We also want to encourage tolerance and diversity, and provide an environment where new
ideas are welcome, where people are unrestricted by certain directions or avenues. We want to
prevent any one faction, discipline, approach, taxon, or whatever from ‘winning.’ When only
one ‘wins,’ it is everyone’s loss.”
J. Magnuson, 1985, personal communication.
Shortly after Magnuson’s arrival, James Kitchell, a recent graduate of the University
of Colorado (Ph.D. 1970), was hired in 1970 in a postdoctoral appointment with the In¬
ternational Biological Program. This program included a major research project on
Lake Wingra. Kitchell became a faculty member in the Zoology Department in 1974.
“Kitchell greatly enriched our program with an ecosystems approach to limnology. He ex¬
emplifies both the use of hypothesis testing in manipulating ions of natural lakes and extending
the results through computer modeling and simulation. He also is a good team player and en¬
joys crossing the boundary between fundamental ecological studies and their application to
significant problems in fisheries management.”
J. Magnuson, 1985, personal communication.
The limnological research program at the University of Wisconsin-Madison is also
strengthened by contributions from scientists not directly associated with the limnology
lab. Thomas D. Brock of the Department of Bacteriology is widely known for his
research on thermophilic microorganisms in hot springs (Brock 1978). He and his
students and associates have also conducted extensive research on Lake Mendota, par¬
ticularly on the phytoplankton, zooplankton, and bacteria. These studies, as well as
previous research on Lake Mendota conducted by Birge and Juday and their associates,
are described and synthesized in A Eutrophic Lake: Lake Mendota, Wisconsin (Brock
1985). Other contributors include Robert Ragotzkie, Director of the Sea Grant Pro¬
gram, Stanley Dodson, Jeffrey Baylis, and Marion Meyer of the Zoology Department,
Michael Adams and Timothy Allen of the Botany Department, David Armstrong and
Anders Andren of the Water Chemistry Department, and Carl Bowser, Mary Anderson,
and Clarence Clay of the Geology and Geophysics Department.
On July 1, 1982, Hasler finally gained a long-term goal when, at Magnuson’s urging,
E. David Cronon, Dean of Letters and Science at the University of Wisconsin, created
the Center for Limnology as a separate institution within the university. Magnuson was
appointed Director for the Center and Kitchell became Associate Director for the Lim¬
nology Laboratory in Madison. Thomas M. Frost, a recent graduate of Dartmouth Col¬
lege (Ph.D. 1978) who had spent two years on a postdoctoral appointment (University of
52
Breaking New Waters
Colorado) in Venezuela studying tropical limnology, was appointed Associate Director
for the Trout Lake Station. Under Magnuson’s leadership, the Wisconsin school con¬
tinues to be known internationally for its contributions to the science of limnology.
53
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
References
Andrews, J. D. and A. D. Hasler. 1942. Fluctuations in the animal populations of the littoral
zone in Lake Mendota. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 34: 137-148.
Armitage, K. B. 1958. Ecology of the riffle insects of the Firehole River, Wyoming. Ecology 39:
571-580.
_ . 1961. Distribution of riffle insects of the Firehole River, Wyoming. Hydrobiologia 17:
152-174.
Bardach, J. E. 1951. Changes in the yellow perch population of Lake Mendota, Wisconsin, be¬
tween 1916 and 1948. Ecology 32: 719-728.
Brock, T. D. 1978. Thermophilic Microorganisms and Life at High Temperatures. Springer-
Verlag, New York. 465p.
_ 1985. A Eutrophic Lake. Lake Mendota, Wisconsin. Springer-Verlag, New York. 308 p.
Dugdale, R. C. 1955. Studies in the ecology of the benthic Diptera of Lake Mendota. Ph.D.
Thesis, University of Wisconsin.
Faber, D. J. 1967. Limnetic larval fish in northern Wisconsin lakes. J. Fish. Res. Bd. Can. 24:
927-937.
Gallepp, G. W. 1974a. Diel periodicity in the behaviour of the caddisfly, Brachycentrus
americanus { Banks). Freshwat. Biol. 4: 193-204.
_ 1974b. Behavioral ecology of Brachycentrus occidentalis Banks during the pupation
period. Ecology 55: 1283-1294.
_ . 1976. Temperature as a cue for the periodicity in feeding of Brachycentrus occidentalis
(Insecta: Trichoptera). Anim. Behav. 24: 7-10.
_ . 1977. Responses of caddisfly larvae ( Brachycentrus spp.) to temperature, food availabil¬
ity and current velocity. Am. Midi. Nat. 98: 59-84.
Gammon, J. R. 1963. Conversion of food in young muskellunge. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 92:
183-184.
_ and A. D. Hasler. 1965. Predation by introduced muskellunge on perch and bass, I: Years
1-5. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 54: 249-272.
Gasith, A. and A. D. Hasler. 1976. Airborne litterfall as a source of organic matter in lakes. Lim-
nol. Oceanogr. 21: 253-258.
Hasler, A. D. 1938. Pulp-mill pollution in the York River, VA, and its connection with the decline
of the oyster industry. Gamma Alpha Record 28: 44-45.
_ . 1945. Observations on the winter perch population of Lake Mendota. Ecology 26: 90-94.
_ . 1947. Eutrophication of lakes by domestic drainage. Ecology 28: 383-395.
_ . 1963. Wisconsin 1940-1961. in D. G. Frey (ed.). Limnology in North America. Univer¬
sity of Wisconsin Press, Madison, pp. 55-93.
_ 1967. Technology and man’s relation to his natural environment. In C. P. Hall (ed.)
Human Values and Advancing Technology. Friendship Press, New York. pp. 158-167.
_ . 1969a. Acting responsibly to our environment, a profoundly human issue. Intercol
Bulletin 1: 2-12.
_ 1969b. Cultural eutrophication is reversible. Bioscience May: 425-431.
_ 1972. A zoologist’s responsibility to our living environment. Amer. Zool. 12: 9-11.
_ . 1973. Poisons, phosphates, preservation, people and politics— -a fish eye’s view of ecol¬
ogy. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 102: 213-224.
_ and J. E. Bardach. 1949. Daily migrations of perch in Lake Mendota, Wisconsin. J.
Wildl.Mgt. 13:40-51.
_ , S. Chidambaram and R. K. Meyer. 1973. Effect of hypophysectomy and ACTH on
glycemia and hematocrit in the bullhead, Ictalurus melas. J. Exp. Zool. 184: 75-80.
_ and J. R. Villemonte. 1953. Observations on the daily movements of fishes. Science 118:
321-322.
Helm, W. T. 1958. Some notes on the ecology of panfish in Lake Wingra with special reference to
the yellow bass. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Wisconsin. 88 p.
54
Breaking New Waters
Henderson, H. F., A. D. Hasler and G. G. Chipman. 1966. An ultrasonic transmitter for use in
studies of movements of fishes. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 95: 350-356.
Hergenrader, G. L. and A. D. Hasler. 1965. Diel activity and vertical distribution of yellow perch
( Perea flavescens) under the ice. J. Fish Res. Board Can. 23: 499-509.
_ and _ . 1967. Seasonal changes in swimming rates of yellow perch in Lake Mendota
as measured by sonar. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 96: 373-382.
_ and _ . 1968. Influence of changing seasons on schooling behavior of yellow perch. J.
Fish. Res. Board Can. 25: 71 1-716.
Horrall, R. M. 1961 . A comparative study of two spawning populations of the white bass, Roccus
chrysops (Rafinesque), in Lake Mendota, Wisconsin, with special reference to homing
behavior. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Wisconsin. 181 p.
Hunt, R. L. 1965. Surface-drift insects as trout food in the Brule River. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett.
54: 51-61.
John, K. R. 1956. Onset of spawning activities of the shallow water cisco, Leucichthys artedi
(LeSueur) in Lake Mendota, Wisconsin, relative to water temperatures. Copeia 2: 116-118.
_ and A. D. Hasler. 1956. Observations on some factors affecting the hatching of eggs and
the survival of young shallow-water cisco, Leucichthys artedi LeSueur. Limnol. Oceanogr. 1:
176-194.
Johnson, W. E. and A. D. Hasler. 1954. Rainbow trout production in dystrophic lakes. J. Wildl.
Mgt. 18: 113-134.
Juday, C. and E. A. Birge. 1930. The highland lake district of northeastern Wisconsin and the
Trout Lake limnological laboratory. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 25: 337-352.
Kaya, C. M. and A. D. Hasler. 1972. Photoperiod and temperature effects on the gonads of green
sunfish, Lepomis cyanellus (Rafinesque), during the quiescent, winter phase of its annual sex¬
ual cycle. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 101: 270-275.
Likens, G. E. and A. D. Hasler. 1962. Movements of radiosodium (Na 24) within an ice-covered
lake. Limnol. Oceanogr. 7: 48-56.
_ and _ . 1963. Biological and physical transport of radionuclides in stratified lakes.
In V. Schultz and Klement (eds.). Radioecology. Reinhold Publ. Corp., New York. pp.
463-470.
McNaught, D. C. 1966. Depth control by planktonic cladocerans in Lake Michigan. Univ. of
Mich. Great Lakes Res. Div. Publ. 15: 98-108.
_ and A. D. Hasler. 1966. Photoenvironments of planktonic Crustacea in Lake Michigan.
Verb. Internat. Verein. Limnol. 16: 194-203.
Neess, J. C., W. T. Helm, and C. W. Threinen. 1955. Carp census on Lake Wingra. Wis. Con-
serv. Bull. 20: 1-4.
_ , _ , and _ . 1957. Some vital statistics in a heavily exploited population of carp.
/. Wildl. Mgt. 21:279-292.
Parker, M. and A. D. Hasler. 1969. Studies on the distribution of cobalt in lakes. Limnol.
Oceanogr. 14: 229-241.
Ragotzkie, R. A. and R. A. Bryson. 1953. Correlation of currents with the distribution of adult
Daphnia in Lake Mendota. J. Mar. Res. 12: 157-172.
Schmitz, W. R. 1959. Research on winterkill of fish. Wis. Conserv. Bull. 24: 1-3.
_ and A. D. Hasler. 1958. Artificially induced circulation of the lake by means of compress¬
ed air. Science 128: 1088-1089.
Stewart, K. M. 1973. Detailed time variations in mean temperature and heat content of some
Madison lakes. Limnol. and Oceanogr. 18: 218-226.
Voightlander, C. W. and T. E. Wissing. 1974. Food habits of young and yearling white bass,
Morone chrysops (Rafinesque), in Lake Mendota, Wise. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 103: 25-31.
Wissing, T. E. and A. D. Hasler. 1968. Calorific values of some invertebrates in Lake Mendota,
Wisconsin. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 25: 2515-2518.
55
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
_ and _ . 1971a. Effects of swimming activity and food intake on the respiration of
young-of-the-year white bass, Mor one chry sops. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 100: 537-543.
_ and _ . 1971b. Intraseasonal change in caloric content of some freshwater inver¬
tebrates. Ecology 52: 371-373.
Wright, T. D. 1968. Changes in abundance of yellow bass (Morone mississippiensis) and white
bass (M. chrysops) in Madison, Wisconsin lakes. Copeia 1: 183-185.
Wright, J. C. and R. Horrall. 1967. Heat budget studies on the Madison River, Yellowstone Na¬
tional Park. Limnol. Oceanogr. 12: 578-583.
Zicker, E. L., K. C. Berger, and A. D. Hasler. 1956. Phosphorus release from bog lake muds.
Limnol. Oceanogr. 1:296-303.
56
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 1. E. A. Birge and C. Juday with plankton trap on Lake Mendota, about 191 7. Source:
State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
57
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 2. E. A. Birge, H. W. March, and C. Juday on Lake Mendota with the first mud then
mometer, about 1927. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
Fig. 3. Stillman Wright and E. A. Birge at the first Trout Lake Station, 1925. Source:
Stillman Wright.
58
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 4. Stillman Wright, E. A. Birge, and C. Juday at the first Trout Lake Station, 1925.
Source: Stillman Wright.
Fig. 5. Fredrick Stare working in the chemistry laboratory at the Trout Lake Station,
1929. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
59
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 6. E. A. Birge and C. Juday, 1930. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
60
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 7. E. A. Birge with the “sun machine’’ (on top of car) on Crystal Lake in northern
Wisconsin, about 1930. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
61
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 8. E. A. Birge and Hugo Baum making observations with the “sun machine, ’’about
1933. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
62
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 9. Hugo Baum and A. D. Hasler building lime floats at the Trout Lake Station, 1933.
Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
63
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 10. C. Juday, Villiers (Mel) Meloche, Edward Schneberger, and William Spoor at
the Trout Lake Station, 1933. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
64
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 11. The Trout Lake Crew in the summer of 1933. Back row (L to R): V. W. Meloche,
L. R. Wilson, Ray Langford, A. D. Hasler, Robert Hunt, Harold Schomer. Front row (L to
R): Hugo Baum, Edward Schneberger, C. Juday, Sam X. Cross, Militzer, and William
Spoor. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
65
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 12. The Trout Lake Crew in the summer of 1934. (L to R): David Frey, Martin Baum,
John Schreiner, Don Kerst, Flarold Schomer, C. Juday, E. B. Fred, Richard Juday, A. D.
Flasler, Paul Pavcek, and E. A. Birge. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
66
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 13. The Trout Lake Crew in the summer of 1935. (L to R): E. A. Birge, C. Juday,
Lester Whitney, Delmont Lohuis, John Curtis, Martin Baum, Richard Juday. Source:
Robert Pennak.
Fig. 14. Robert Pennak and Al Dimond counting benthic fauna, Trout Lake Station,
1937. Source: Robert Pennak.
67
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
'QC
CT3
O O
■*T g, P>
Ctj
tr ^ uj
o
QC
cTO
o .
CO D)
O qc ^
00 o 5
00
00
05
O 05
CL
■p
r~
1°
0) =3
^ "5
r~ P
^ -C CO
5 £ Q
6 ^ .2
0^0=
£ q5 o
K a: £
• §>*
•5>o5
u. O ll
68
Gillette. Source: State Historical Society of Wisconsin.
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 16. Trout Lake Station about 1940. Source: Charles Kirkpatrick.
Fig. 17. Part of Trout Lake Crew in 1940. (L to R): Charles Moore, Vincent McKelvey,
Genevieve McKelvey, unidentified, Gaii Kirkpatrick, John Potzger, and Fred Granburg.
Source: Charles Kirkpatrick.
69
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Fig. 18. Arthur D. Hasler at U.S. Fisheries Service Laboratory in Yorktown, Virginia,
1936. Source: Arthur Hasler.
70
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 19. Warren Wisby training bluntnosed minnows to identify the water from dif¬
ferent Wisconsin rivers by the sense of smell, about 1951. Positive training is by food
reward; negative, by mild electrical shock. This work on behavior by smell led to studies
of olfactory imprinting in homing salmon. Source: Arthur Hasler.
71
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 20. Fritz Hasler, A. D. Fiasler’s son, sprays fluidized Ca(0hl)2 hydrated lime or
calcium hydroxide on Peter Lake to alkalize the water and precipitate the bog colloids
that reduce water clarity, about 1952. The adjoining Paul Lake serves as the untreated
reference lake. Peter and Paul Lakes are in the University of Notre Dame Environmental
Research Center in Michigan. Source: Arthur Flasler.
72
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 21. William R. Schmitz and A. D. Hasler at Saw Mill Pond on the Guido Rahr Prop¬
erty adjacent to the University of Notre Dame Environmental Research Center, about
1956. They are studying the possibility of using air bubbles to “turn over a lake, ” that is,
disturb the stratification of the lake and thereby aerate it. The air tube goes the full
length of the lake. Source: Arthur Hasler.
73
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Fig. 22. A. D. Hasler and Wolfgang Braemer, a German ethologist from the Max Planck
Institut, studying sun-compass orientation in fish, about 1957. Fish were placed in the
center of the tank and trained to enter only the northerly compartments. The shade,
peace, and quiet of a chamber were the rewards. Electric shock was given if incorrect
direction was taken. Source: Arthur Hasler.
74
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 23. William Helm and Wisconsin’s first operational boom shocker, 1958. The
shocker was built by Helm and was used for his walleye studies on Little John,
Erickson, and Sparkling Lakes in northcentral Wisconsin. Source: William Helm.
75
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Fig. 24. Physicist John W. Anderegg, Gene Likens, and A. D. Hasler on Gather Lake in
northern Wisconsin about 1961. Anderegg is holding a scintillation counter used for the
detection of isotopes in a study of the movement of radioactive nuclides from the bot¬
tom of a stratified lake. Source: Arthur Hasler.
76
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 25. The Limnology Laboratory on Lake Mendota shortly after it was built in 1963.
The building was designed by architect William Kaeser. Source: Arthur Hasler.
77
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 26. Limnology Laboratory Crew in 1964. Back row: Clyde Voigtlander, Allan Kings¬
bury, Don McNaught, Erich Schwartz, John Williamson, Tom Wright, Ed Gardella, Jim
Bruins, Pete Wall, Paul Sager, Phil Doepke, Nick Lenz. Second row: Gary Hergenrader,
Kenton Stewart, Jonce Sapkarev, Ken Maleug, Fran Henderson, Gerald Chipman, Andy
Dizon, David White. Front row: Arthur Hasler, Mits Teraguchi, Arne Salli, Henry
Eichhorn, Tom Wirth, Russell Dunst, Mike Parker. Source: Arthur Hasler.
78
Breaking New Waters
Fig. 27. A. D. H aster, Francis Ftenderson, and Gerald Chip-
man tracking fish that have been released with electronic
transmitters in Lake Mendota, about 1965. Source: Arthur
Hasler.
79
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Fig. 28. Peter Hirsch and A. D. Master conditioning the hearts of fish to electric shock,
about 1976. When one odor is presented the fish receives an electric shock; it receives
no shock when a second odor is presented. After the fish is trained, it is possible to
determine when it detects the odor because its heart stops beating. This technique is
thought to have greater validity than direct electronic monitoring of the olfactory bulb.
Source: Arthur Hasler.
80
Breaking New Waters
81
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
82
Fig. 30. “Old-timers” at the 1983 History Conference. Front row: Robert Pennak, L. R. Wilson, Arthur Hasler,
Edward Schneberger, Charles Kirkpatrick, Gail Kirkpatrick, Fredrick Stare. Second row: Richard Juday, Gerald
Prescott, David Frey, Herbert Dutton. Source: Don Chandler.
Breaking New Waters
83
Fig. 31. The Trout Lake crew in the summer of 1987. Front Row: Susan Knight, Walt Haag, Tim Kratl, Joan Elias, Tim Meinke,
Dan Schneider, Louise Weber, Yan Zhao, Rick Hanson, Amy McMillan, Malcolm Butler, Doug Lieurance, Ned Grossnickle.
Back Row: Tom Frost, Carl Watras, Ken Brown, Xi He, Steve Klosiewski, Christer Bronmark, John Morrice, Robert Walasek,
Erik Schoff, Annamarie Beckel, Emily Greenberg, Michelle Marron, Dave Benkowski, Amy Finley, Mark Kershner, Dave Simon,
Lauren Elmore, Ned Haight, Robert Wood, Pat Charlebois, Tim Simonson.
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Fig. 32. Personnel at Lake Mendota Laboratory in the fall of 1987. Front Row: Maria Gon¬
zalez, Dan Schneider, Jim Yasko, Barbara Benson, Gerald Chipman, Joyce Tynan, Den¬
nis Heisey, Redwood Nero, Dale Robertson, John Post, Dave Benkowski, Pat Sanford,
Paula Barbian, Linda Holthaus, Rob Striegl, Jim Kitchell, Xi He, Don Stewart, Cliff Kraft.
Back Row: Jo Temte, Mike Vanni, John Magnuson, Dave Egger, Glen Lee, Myriam
Ibarra, Jennifer Twomey, Terry Schenck, Mary Smith, Barry Johnson, Mike Miller,
Muhamed A lam, Connie Linehan (hidden), Greg Slater, Steve Carpenter, Charoen
Nitithamyong, Cindy Lunte, Jay Nelson, Rusty Wright, Tom Frost, MikeJech, David Hill,
Paul Jacobson.
84
5
The Wisconsin
Limnology Community
Frank N. Egerton
The Wisconsin limnology community appears to have been foremost in America
throughout this century. This chapter focuses upon the development and operation
of this community during the periods in which it was run first by Edward Asahel Birge
and Chancey Juday and then by Arthur Davis Hasler. Unlike the previous chapters,
which dealt primarily with how the participants themselves viewed their own experiences
in the Wisconsin limnological school, this chapter takes a more analytical and
sociological approach to investigating the development of a scientific community.
Although historical studies published in the past two decades leave us much better in¬
formed than previously about the history of ecology (Egerton 1977, 1983-1985, McIn¬
tosh 1985), much of the history of ecology for the twentieth century has yet to be writ¬
ten. Writing it is a formidable task because of the diffuseness of the science and the sheer
volume of contributions from ecologists. One needs a definite point of view. The one
used here — the history of a scientific school — provides not only a point of view, but also
yields some different conclusions than earlier historical accounts of the Wisconsin lim¬
nological community.
The three basic requirements for a cohesive scientific community are scientists, ideas,
and resources — both financial and material. Any active group of scientists will possess
all of these, but to transform a group into a scientific community, one or more of the
scientists must provide a coherent research program that the group follows. To under¬
stand a particular scientific community, one must discover the important characteristics
of its scientists, ideas, and resources. These basic attributes are so different in the
Wisconsin limnological community under Birge and Juday and under Hasler that one
could argue they were different even though the Hasler community grew out of the Birge
and Juday tradition. The Birge-Juday period is already fairly well known from earlier
historical accounts. The Hasler period is less well known. Fortunately, I am able to draw
upon Hasler’s memories as a resource. For these two reasons I devote more discussion to
the Wisconsin school under his direction than under Birge and Juday’s.
Ronald Tobey has already used effectively this approach of focusing on a scientific
community to write the history of “the first coherent group of ecologists in the United
States, the grassland ecologists of the Midwest” (1981: 5). However, it was not just
grassland ecology that arose in America’s Midwest but also terrestrial animal ecology
and limnology. Price (1963) has argued that it is easier for new sciences to arise in young
universities than in older ones, where the funds for science are already committed to
established sciences. In the 1890s, when the ecological sciences arose, eastern universities
were decades, if not centuries, older than midwestern ones. Not surprisingly, then, lim¬
nology arose in the Great Lakes states. The science was not stimulated by proximity to
the Great Lakes, however. Investigations on large lakes require more elaborate and ex¬
pensive equipment than those on smaller lakes, and when a science gets started, research
85
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
budgets are usually limited (Beeton and Chandler 1963: 537). It was the numerous small
lakes in the glaciated areas of these states that first challenged America’s limnologists.
A historian of a limnological community in North America starts off in a better posi¬
tion than did Tobey when he began work on the history of American plant ecology,
because American limnologists have already written a partly historical assessment of
their science (Frey 1963a). The occasion for doing so was the meeting in Wisconsin of the
15th Congress of the International Association of Limnology held in 1962. The initiative
for writing Limnology in North America came from David G. Frey and Arthur D.
Hasler, both former graduate students at Wisconsin. Frey wrote the first chapter,
“Wisconsin: The Birge-Juday Era’’ (1963b), and Hasler the second, “Wisconsin,
1940-1961’’ (1963a). No other state is accorded two chapters and most of the chapters
encompass several states. Because Limnology in North America . was published by the
University of Wisconsin Press and its publication was arranged by two limnologists who
received doctorates from that state’s university, one may wonder if the history of lim¬
nology in Wisconsin received preferential emphasis. A Wisconsin historian is not the
best judge of the matter, but I can point out that the Congress was held in this state in
recognition of the achievements of the Wisconsin limnological school.
Scientists in Michigan, Illinois, Indiana, and Ohio also produced important early con¬
tributions to limnology. Michigan and Illinois are given chapters in the book, but In¬
diana and Ohio are lumped together into a regional chapter with Tennessee, Kentucky,
and West Virginia (Gerking 1963). Judging by the book’s space allocations, only Illinois
and Michigan rate serious consideration as early rivals for leadership with Wisconsin. If
Illinois is compared with either Wisconsin or Michigan in this respect, it is rather like
comparing prairie ecology at the Universities of Nebraska and Chicago, the one being in
the midst of the prairie and the other on its edge. In Illinois rivers are much more promi¬
nent than lakes, and, correspondingly, limnology was oriented toward rivers (Gunning
1963). On the other hand, both Michigan and Wisconsin have numerous lakes formed by
glaciers. Michigan’s limnological work seems to be the strongest rival to Wisconsin’s
(Chandler 1963, Robertson 1976). The early differences in limnology at Michigan and
Wisconsin are not easily summarized, but in the long run Wisconsin distinguished itself
under Birge and Juday by emphasis on energy budgets of lakes and under Hasler by em¬
phasis on experimentation.
The Birge-Juday Period
Tobey (1981) is undoubtedly correct in seeing the relative success of different scientific
communities as due to a combination of intellectual, social, and other factors. When one
evaluates these factors in plant ecology, Frederic E. Clements, the founder of the
Nebraska school, does not seem to have had a suitable personality for founding a scien¬
tific community. He lacked an outgoing personality; he had no charisma. He was ab¬
sorbed in his research, and after a decade of teaching he exchanged his academic career
for one as a full-time research scientist at the Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Clements was, however, probably indispensable as founder of the Nebraska community
of prairie ecology, and his publications dominated the outlook there for four decades.
Yet, it was his student and collaborator, John Weaver, who did most of the training of
the other students, without whom there might have been a Nebraska collaboration, but
no cohesive community.
With regard to the characteristics of its founder, the situation in limnology at
Madison, Wisconsin, was not very different from that in plant ecology at Lincoln,
86
Breaking New Waters
Nebraska. The founder of the Wisconsin school of limnology was Edward A. Birge,
whose career indicates that he also was more absorbed in research and administration
than in teaching. His personality was as stiff as Clements’. Although he never left the
university, when opportunity came, he did leave the classroom (in 1911) for various
administrative posts, including, finally, the presidency of the university (Sellery 1956).
He apparently also lost interest in training biologists. Lowell E. Noland, while a
graduate student in zoology, worked one summer as Birge’s research assistant at Trout
Lake, and in the fall back in Madison, Birge would walk by him with no sign of recogni¬
tion (pers. comm.).
Birge began his career as an invertebrate zoologist. He had gone to Williams College
in 1869 to prepare for medical school, but stayed on after receiving his B.A. degree to
earn a M.A. degree in science. He went to Harvard for his doctoral degree, where he
was Louis Agassiz’s last student, though Agassiz died shortly after Birge arrived.
Although one might argue that Agassiz had established a comparative zoology com¬
munity at Harvard, virtually all of his students defected from Agassiz’s Cuverian
paradigm to some form of evolutionary biology. Moreover, with Agassiz past his prime,
whatever community of zoology he had once held together had all but disappeared
before Birge arrived (Dexter 1965, 1974, 1979). Birge certainly learned some zoology
from him, but he must have learned little or nothing about running a scientific com¬
munity.
Birge’s studies on invertebrates in Lake Mendota led him as easily into limnology as
had similar studies on Lake Geneva led Francois A. Forel into this science several
decades earlier (Egerton 1962, 1978). Although Forel spent practically his entire career
teaching anatomy and physiology to premedical students at the Academie de Gendve in
Lausanne and never trained limnologists, he is the true founder of this science. His great
study on all aspects of science concerning Lake Geneva (1892-1904) may still be the most
exhaustive monograph on any lake in the world. He realized, however, that beginning
students could not be expected to read his three large volumes; he therefore published
the first textbook on limnology (1901).
Tobey attributes the distinctive character of prairie ecology in Nebraska in part to
Clements’ attempt to adapt the methods that C. G. Oscar Drude used in the forests of
Germany to the prairies of America. Birge faced a less dramatic challenge in his transfer
of Forel’s methods to Wisconsin lakes, although in his long scientific career Birge would
have plenty of opportunities to develop new methods and equipment.
Just as Clements’ publications dominated American plant ecology from the early
1900s until World War II, so Birge’s dominated American limnology during the same
period. And, as Clements had Weaver to train disciples, so Birge had Chancey Juday. Of
course, there were differences as well as similarities between the situations at Nebraska
and Wisconsin. Juday was not one of Birge’s students. He had studied limnology at In¬
diana University under Carl Eigenmann and had then come to Madison in 1900, with
only a master’s degree, as Birge’s assistant and collaborator. In 1908 he visited European
universities and field stations engaged in hydrobiological research (Juday 1910), which
was for him “a great stimulus, an insight into the newer approaches in European lim¬
nology, and contact with the leading men in the field” (Noland 1950: 96).
Both Birge and Juday, in the development of their limnological interests, made the
same kind of progression that Forel had, from a strong interest in the invertebrate life in
lakes, to the quest for the factors controlling those life forms, particularly the physical
and chemical attributes of lakes (Mortimer 1956, Frey 1963b). The shift in emphasis was
87
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
gradual and never led to abandonment of their earlier interests. The turning point seems
to have been Birge’s masterful presidential address to the American Microscopical So¬
ciety in July, 1903, on “The Thermocline and Its Biological Significance” (Birge 1904).
Although he did not discover the thermocline, by measuring the temperature of lake
waters at different seasons of the year, Birge made the first thorough study on the ther¬
mocline and the mixing of waters in spring and fall in lakes in temperate climates. He
also explained the implications of temperature stratification for the life of lakes. He, Ju-
day, and their collaborators also studied light penetration, dissolved minerals, and
hydrogen ion concentration in the lakes of Wisconsin.
Unlike Clements, Birge did not develop a comprehensive theory to guide his research
and that of his co-workers and thereby provide intellectual cohesion for the Wisconsin
community. One reason the early differences between the Wisconsin and Michigan
schools of limnology are not very obvious is that in America limnology did not develop
the theoretical polarity that Tobey claims distinguished the Nebraska and Chicago com¬
munities of prairie ecology. Nevertheless, Birge and Juday had a definite research
agenda. They, with their research associates and students, took an inventory of the en¬
vironmental factors that prevailed in the Wisconsin lakes, and they monitored various
environmental factors at different lakes for various periods. Their late emphasis upon
the energy budgets of lakes constitutes, if not a theory, at least a theoretical perspective.
Birge never had doctoral students; he did supervise the thesis research of two or three
dozen candidates for the bachelor’s degree and also those of a few candidates for the
master’s degree. Juday began lecturing in limnology in 1909. However, he might never
have advised graduate students had not his position with the Wisconsin Geological and
Natural History Survey been eliminated entirely during the Depression year of 1931.
Subsequently, Birge was able to have him appointed to a professorship in zoology at the
university. The research on which Juday collaborated with Birge was more than
equivalent to writing a doctoral dissertation, and in 1933 Indiana University bestowed
upon him an honorary doctoral degree.
Juday was to supervise the doctoral research of 13 graduate students (listed in the ap¬
pendix). One of them, Robert W. Pennak, later dedicated his Fresh-Water Invertebrates
of the United States (2nd ed., 1978) “To the memory of C. Juday.” It may seem surpris¬
ing that a leading community of limnology produced only 13 doctorates in its first four
decades. However, this is at the same rate doctorates in prairie ecology were being
graduated from the University of Nebraska during the same period (Tobey 1981:
120-121). Had either university produced two or three times as many, some of them
would have had difficulty finding suitable jobs. The Depression was a bad time to be a
graduate student or to look for employment.
An ecology community that produces only 13 doctorates in four decades may be
respectable, but is it a leading community? The minimal requirement of a leading scien¬
tific community is probably that it produces both outstanding students and outstanding
scientific contributions. The quantity of both need not be great, but surely it is unusual
for a leading scientific community not to produce a high number of either students or
publications. The Wisconsin limnological group in the Birge-Juday period was very pro¬
ductive in publications. Since its productivity in students was not high, how did it
manage to be so productive in research? High productivity is usually a result of having
many students engaged in publishable research. Birge and Juday’s great industry and
commitment to research were important, but not sufficient to account for all the papers
that were published. If students did not do a large portion of the research as thesis proj-
88
Breaking New Waters
ects, who did? Some of it was done by hired student assistants, such as Noland who
worked for Birge that summer at Trout Lake. However, a large portion of it was done by
other scientists, mostly on the faculty of the University of Wisconsin, but some hired
briefly by the Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey, and later by the Works
Progress Administration.
The Wisconsin limnological school under Birge and Juday was probably very atypical
of successful scientific groups. Until 1925 the community was small and not very
cohesive. There was a Birge-Juday research partnership and occasional graduate
students whose limnology-related dissertations were supported by the Wisconsin
Geological and Natural History Survey. Examples of this type of work include research
done by Smith, Rickett, and Schuette.
The study of lake algae began in the 1910s and 1920s when Gilbert Morgan Smith (b.
1885) compiled lists of algal species found in Wisconsin lakes for the Wisconsin
Geological and Natural History Survey. Smith’s interests were not limited to taxonomy,
however, as indicated in his study of “The Vertical Distribution of Volvox in the
Plankton of Lake Monona’’ (1918). He was from Beloit and received his B.S. degree
from Beloit College in 1907. He took his Ph.D. in botany from the University of
Wisconsin in 1913, and was a member of the botany faculty until he left for Stanford
University in 1925.
Harold W. Rickett (b. 1896) received his bachelor’s, master’s and doctor’s degrees
from the University of Wisconsin and stayed on two years as an instructor before leaving
for the University of Missouri in 1924. While at Wisconsin, he published quantitative
studies on the larger aquatic plants in Lake Mendota and Green Lake (1920, 1921, 1924).
Henry A. Schuette (1885-1978) was from Green Bay, educated in chemistry at the
University of Wisconsin, and was a member of the university’s chemistry faculty for his
entire career. He wrote a doctoral dissertation on the biochemistry of plankton in Lake
Mendota (Ph.D. 1916, dissertation published in 1918) and retained a research involve¬
ment in the biochemistry of aquatic plants for another decade (Frey 1963b: 30, 52)
before turning to his main researches on the biochemistry of human foods (Ihde 1978).
The addition of such studies to the work of Birge and Juday added to the intellectual
foundation for a scientific community. However, more was needed before one could say
that a community existed.
Most university professors give up research in their discipline when they become
administrators. Those who do not generally conduct research at a lesiurely pace. The
fact that Birge could continue his research even while president of the university
(1918-1925) is probably owing to his long years of working with Juday. During these
years Birge could have merely discussed what needed to be done with Juday and de¬
pended upon the latter to carry out the actual work, with Birge stepping in again to assist
in evaluating the results and writing the papers for publication. When Birge retired from
the presidency on September 1, 1925, six days before his 74th birthday, he and Juday
had won a distinguished reputation for the scope and quality of their work. If Birge had
rested on his laurels and played bridge and shuffle board for the rest of his life an
outstanding limnological community at the University of Wisconsin might never have
come into being.
Once free of other responsibilities, however, Birge’s research ambitions were far
greater than he and Juday alone could ever accomplish. The conventional way to satisfy
such ambitions is for a professor to attract graduate students to share in the research.
This avenue was not open to a retired professor, however, and apparently he had not yet
89
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
thought of having Juday made a professor. The high quantity and quality of scientific
papers that the Wisconsin limnological school ultimately published required the par¬
ticipation of many experienced scientists. Such an aggregation could seldom have been
assembled anywhere before World War II because of financial constraints. A university
professor ordinarily could not build a very large “empire” on campus because he could
not provide the financial and social incentives to lure colleagues away from the priorities
established within their own disciplines.
What incentives could Birge offer his colleagues that were strong enough to enable
him to build a much larger “empire” than was commonly possible? As an eminent
retired scientist/administrator, he continued to have considerable influence within the
university, and collaboration with him might enhance one’s career. Furthermore, he
could provide research funds, equipment, and facilities. Although the Carnegie Institu¬
tion of Washington began supporting ecological research early in this century (Colin
1980, McIntosh 1983), it supported the work of only a few scientists. During those years
the federal government mainly supported research done by its own scientists (Dupree
1957). The research of science professors at state universities was usually supported with
state funds, which were seldom ample. Although Birge was on record as opposed to any
university policy favoring one department to the detriment of another (Sellery 1956: 19),
his impartiality must not have applied to competition for research funds. His clout as an
administrator apparently was used to channel a disproportionate amount of university
funds into limnological research.
Even so, these university funds were not enough to satisfy the needs of his research
program. Therefore, he came to dominate two other state institutions that could provide
additional funds: the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters and the Wiscon¬
sin Geological and Natural History Survey. The Academy is a private organization, the
Survey, a state organization. Birge was director of the latter from its establishment in
1898 until funding for the Natural History section was discontinued in 1931. He thus
controlled both the research and publication funds of the Survey, and he was the
heaviest user of the publication funds of the Academy.
In 1925, after retiring, Birge established a limnological research station in northern
Wisconsin at Trout Lake, where he and Juday conducted much of their own summer’s
research, and where they brought both graduate students (often in non-biological
sciences) and visiting scientists to conduct research. Some of his colleagues in Madison
believed that Birge decided to establish the station in northern Wisconsin so that he
could study lakes and their life away from human pollution. The pleasant summer
climate at Trout Lake must have been encouraging. More importantly, Birge and Juday
had already studied intensively several lakes in southern Wisconsin. The major attrac¬
tion of northern Wisconsin was the great variety of pollution-free lakes. By conducting
extensive surveys there they were hoping to find general principles that would apply to
all lakes. For some of these researches they tapped still another new source of funding,
the Wisconsin Conservation Department.
The University of Wisconsin was not a pioneer in establishing a limnological research
station. In fact, it was rather much slower than neighboring states in doing so. The
university’s Madison campus is located on one lake and near a string of others. Because
these lakes were fully utilized by limnologists from the earliest days of Birge, it would
have been difficult to make a compelling case to the university administration for
building student facilities at Trout Lake. Even now, the summer courses in limnology
are taught in Madison. Thus, the Trout Lake station has always been exclusively for
90
Breaking New Waters
research. At times, this meant that the university administration felt less concerned for
its fate than it might have if the station had been a teaching facility. On the other hand,
the facilities there probably accommodated more research scientists than would have
been convenient if its existence had ever been justified on the basis of a teaching mission.
Frey (1963b: 29) surveyed the productivity of this school from 1924 to 1944 and found
that
during this interval more than 260 papers were published by the Wisconsin group and their
associates. The peak came in the late ’30’s and early ’40’s, with as many as 34 papers listed for a
single year (Juday and Hasler, 1946). During this period the Transactions of the Wisconsin
Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters were dominated by the enormous and varied lim¬
nological output of this group of limnologists, sometimes to the virtual exclusion of other
studies.
This domination was achieved at the cost of some colleagiality. The university’s Pro¬
fessor of Chemistry and History of Science, Aaron J. Ihde, recalls that (pers. comm.)
the limnologists created a bad storm in the Academy because they virtually monopolized the
Transactions, to the exclusion of the papers of members in other areas. I remember caustic
remarks at the time and the dissent probably forced the limnologists to eventually publish
elsewhere. Birge was, of course, still active and no one in the Academy was anxious to cross
swords with him. However, 34 papers in one volume was too much for even the timid academi¬
cians.
The involvements of the faculty members ranged from one-time to long-time. Most of
them established reputations independently of the limnological community, but a few
were known primarily for their work with the group. Some of these collaborations are
discussed briefly by Frey and are also indicated by the authorships and
acknowledgements of the papers listed in Frey’s “Wisconsin: The Birge- Juday Era”
(1963b: 44-54). It will suffice here to discuss briefly some of the more important col¬
laborators in order to indicate the nature of their involvement with the limnological
community.
The Botany Department evidently regretted losing Rickett, whom it had trained in the
study of aquatic vascular plants, because in 1925 it hired another with this specialization:
Norman C. Fassett (1900-1954), from Massachusetts; his degrees were all from Har¬
vard. Fassett’s Manual of Aquatic Plants (1940; 2nd ed., 1957) became the standard
work on the subject for North America. Fassett had “a forceful and stimulating per¬
sonality,” and he devoted much time and care to building up the university’s herbarium
(Bean et al. 1954). Another botanical collaborator who enjoyed a national reputation
was John T. Curtis (1913-1961). From Waukesha, he received his bachelor’s degree
from Carroll College in 1934 and his Ph.D. from the University of Wisconsin in 1937.
His interests were broad, and when he worked with Juday in 1935 Curtis was a plant
physiologist. However, during and after World War II, Curtis’ interests shifted to plant
ecology. His Vegetation of Wisconsin (1959) remains a classic, both for its accurate pic¬
ture of Wisconsin’s vegetation and as a model for other studies (Cottam et al. 1961,
Stearns 1961).
In bacteriology, the limnologists were able to attract the collaboration of the
remarkable Edwin B. Fred (1887-1981) long enough to get four papers published in
1924-1925 concerning the ecology of lake bacteria, but Fred was too busy with his own
scientific and administrative goals to be absorbed for long into someone else’s group (D.
Johnson 1974). However, as Dean of the Graduate School (1935-1943) Fred was in a
91
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
powerful position to assist administratively with Birge and Juday’s research. Further¬
more, Fred’s student, Elizabeth McCoy (1903-1978), who became his colleague and
sometimes his collaborator, occasionally became actively involved with the limnological
school from the 1930s onward. She was a native of Madison and owned a farm on the
banks of Lake Monona. Her concern for preserving Wisconsin’s lakes and streams
motivated her to continue research on lake bacteria even after her retirement. Her value
as a collaborator is indicated in this judgement from her colleagues: “It is doubtful that
anyone can match Elizabeth McCoy’s breadth and depth of knowledge about
microorganisms and their activities’’ (Bennett et al. 1978).
The limnologists had a number of important chemistry collaborators. George I. Kem-
merer (1879-1928), from Janesville, was motivated to collaborate, in part at least, by his
lifelong interest in “the application of scientific methods in the study of problems
related to fish and game conservation’’ (Mathews et al. 1928, Ihde 1975). William H.
Peterson (1880-1960), a professor of biochemistry, came to the University of Wisconsin
after receiving his master’s degree from Columbia University in 1909. He then taught
chemistry to home economics students while earning his Ph.D. from the university in
agricultural chemistry. He is best known for his long-time collaboration in research with
E. B. Fred. He was also the dissertation advisor to more than fifty doctoral students. He
published, either alone or in collaboration, more than 300 scientific papers — mostly on
the chemistry of microorganisms (Baldwin et al. 1960).
One of Peterson’s students was Bernhard P. Domogalla (1894-1970), from Milwau¬
kee, who collaborated with Peterson, Fred, and Juday in the mid 1920s in studies on the
nitrogen content of lakes around Madison. As a student Domogalla assisted Birge in tak¬
ing lake temperatures. The story of Birge’s notorious instructions to him one winter day
is told elsewhere in this volume. Domogalla served as the biochemist for Madison
(1924-1946). Because Lakes Mendota and Monona, which are adjacent to the city,
began experiencing repulsive algal blooms in summer from eutrophication caused by
sewage, Domogalla experimented for eleven years with the application of copper sulfate
to the lakes. Copper sulfate was applied by the freight car load in concentrations high
enough to kill algae, but presumably low enough to spare fish (Domogalla 1935, 1941,
Brock 1985). His researches eventually led to the development of the commercially
significant algicide, Cutrine. He occasionally employed university faculty and students
for city water research, but by 1943 he was unable to obtain research funds for all his
projects. Domogalla therefore employed a familiar Birge tactic and filed excess salary
claims for his regular employees and used those funds to hire part-time research person¬
nel. By 1946, when this practice was discovered, the misappropriated funds totaled
$1220. He was forced to resign and to donate $3000 worth of his personal equipment to
the city in restitution (The Capital Times , 18 Dec. 46). He then returned to Milwaukee
and opened a biochemical consulting firm (Scott 1970), and was soon advising govern¬
ments in North and South America on controlling water pollution (Badger Chemist no.
5, 1957: 8).
Villiers Willson (“Mel’’) Meloche (1895-1981) was an active collaborator with Birge
and Juday in the 1930s. Their last joint paper appeared in 1941. Meloche was born in
Port Huron, Michigan, but in 1905 his parents decided to move to Madison to enable
their four children to take advantage of its educational opportunities. All four graduated
from the University of Wisconsin, with Mel Meloche receiving three degrees and then
joining the chemistry faculty. His involvements with Birge and Juday were similar to
those of Kemmerer in the 1920s. Meloche enjoyed working at Trout Lake so much he
92
Breaking New Waters
made his summer home there, and he often had his graduate students come up during
the summer and assist in his researches. He supervised the dissertations of 44 doctoral
students in chemistry (Ihde 1981).
The geologist who actively collaborated with Birge and Juday was William Henry
Twenhofel (1875-1957), a Kentuckian who had received his education at Yale, and who
was a member of the Wisconsin faculty from 1916 until his retirement in 1945. He was
widely known for his textbooks on sedimentation, and he and his students published a
number of studies on the sediments in Wisconsin lakes in the 1930s and 1940s (Bryan et
al. 1957).
Birge and Juday’s main collaborator in physics was Lester Vincent Whitney
(1902-1964), who was from Chicago but received his three physics degrees from the
University of Wisconsin. He began working with Birge and Juday early in the 1930s and
continued to do so after joining the faculty of Southwest Missouri State College in 1937.
He studied the transmission of solar heat and light through the waters of Wisconsin
lakes. His studies were supplemented by the physics dissertation of Harry Raymond
James (b. 1890, Ph.D. 1934; see James and Birge 1938).
Zoologists are absent from the list of collaborators because that was Birge and Ju¬
day' s area of expertise. Nevertheless, members of the zoology faculty also occasionally
were included in limnological projects. For example, Frey’s bibliography includes four
papers written by Lowell E. Noland (1896-1972), an invertebrate zoologist on the fac¬
ulty (Burns et al. 1972). A potentially valuable member of the Wisconsin limnological
school was ecologist Arthur S. Pearse (1877-1956), who taught zoology at the University
of Wisconsin from 1911 to 1927 and published eight papers on fish ecology cited by
Frey. Although he enjoyed living in Madison, he left in 1927 because he felt that he had
been assigned unfairly heavy teaching responsibilities (Pearse 1952: 32-34).
Some of the scientists from other states who worked for one or more summers at
Trout Lake published studies that advanced the knowledge of Wisconsin limnology. For
example, John E. Potzger (1886-1955), a professor of botany at Butler University, con¬
tributed five papers from 1942 to 1944 on the vascular plants along the shores of north¬
ern Wisconsin lakes (Frey 1963b: 51, Anon. 1956). Another example is Gerald W.
Prescott (b. 1899), who would become well known for his research on North and South
American algae. Prescott came to the Trout Lake Station from Albion College and later
Michigan State University to study the taxonomy and distribution of algae in relation to
the chemical characteristics of the lakes. Leonard R. Wilson (b. 1906), who had been one
of Norman Fassett’s Ph.D. students, returned to the station from Coe College in Iowa to
investigate the distribution and quantity of aquatic plants in northern lakes.
G. Evelyn Hutchinson, who stayed too briefly to make such a contribution, has never¬
theless published his recollection of his experience.
Professor E. A. Birge and Professor Chancey Juday were kind enough to let me spend a week at
the Trout Lake Laboratory in Vilas County, in northeastern Wisconsin. I had learned a
fabulous amount about limnological technique but had come away with two feelings of
dissatisfaction. One was that it would be nice to know how to put all their mass of data into
some sort of informative scheme of general significance; the other was that it would be nice to
have either tea or coffee, without seeming decadent and abnormal, for breakfast. I now suspect
a connection.
The last thought occurred to Hutchinson when reflecting upon Juday’s having advised
the editor of Ecology not to publish Raymond Lindeman’s paper on the trophic-
93
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
dynamic concept because it was based upon insufficient data (Hutchinson 1979: 248; see
also Cook 1977).
An important test of leadership for a scientific school is the recognition that its
leaders receive from their peers. For Birge and Juday, that recognition is summarized by
Frey (1963b: 6):
Both men were active in national affairs, serving variously as president of the American
Microscopical Society, American Fisheries Society, Ecological Society of America, and the
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters. Moreover, Juday was one of the persons in¬
strumental in bringing about the birth of the Limnological Society of America, and he was
elected president for its first two years. Juday was awarded the Leidy Medal by the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia in 1943, and Birge and Juday together were awarded the Einar
Naumann Medal by the International Association of Limnology in 1950 in recognition of their
important and numerous contributions to the field.
The Limnological Society of America was established in 1936; in 1948 it became the
American Society of Limnology and Oceanography (Lauff 1963).
Birge retired from teaching in 1911, from the university presidency in 1925, and from
his scientific research in 1941; he died in 1950 at age 98. Juday retired from teaching in
1937 and from the directorship of the Trout Lake Limnological Laboratory in 1942; he
died in 1944 at age 73. Juday had had to work as long as he could because Birge had
never arranged for him to receive any retirement pay from the Geological and Natural
History Survey, though he may have received a little from the university. Mrs. Juday,
after her husband’s death, expressed her displeasure at Birge’s neglect by not consulting
him on the disposal of Juday’s library. She sent his books to the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia.
The Hasler Period
Arthur Davis Hasler was one of those 13 students who obtained a doctorate under Ju¬
day. The continuity of the Wisconsin limnological community from Birge and Juday to
Hasler would appear to be, therefore, a routine matter. In reality, it was far from
routine, and limnology might well have been a casualty rather than a beneficiary of the
transition if the university had hired a less determined and industrious limnologist than
Professor Hasler proved to be. Birge and Juday both faded from the university scene
just as the country was becoming distracted by World War II, and the post-war years
were a period of such comprehensive readjustment that many traditions were discarded
in favor of new approaches and new directions. Hasler was shrewd enough to wed the
university’s old commitment to limnology to new methods, and thereby emerge from the
transition period with a stronger program than existed before he took over. To under¬
stand how and why this happened we need to examine his early life, education, and pro¬
fessional experience down to the time when he deliberately established his new methods
for the Wisconsin limnological school.
He was born a Mormon at Lehi, Utah, on January 5, 1908. No one who knows him
doubts his own strong conviction that his pioneering Mormon background provided him
with ethical and intellectual values that contributed substantially to his successful career.
His boyhood interests were in fishing, raising livestock, camping, nature study, and the
Boy Scouts. These interests did not lead him inevitably into limnology, however. While
an undergraduate at Brigham Young University he seriously considered following his
father’s example in becoming a physician and was only deflected from that by the finan-
94
Breaking New Waters
cial constraints of the Depression and an ill father. While considering a medical career,
however, he developed a permanent interest in physiology. His major in zoology en¬
compassed both this new subject and also many of his boyhood interests. His broad in¬
terests were to be strong assets later when he directed the Wisconsin limnological school.
Having decided that it was financially more expedient to go to graduate school than
medical school (in the former he could earn expense money as he studied), Hasler
became a graduate student at Madison in 1932. Acting on the advice of A. S. Pearse and
Juday, he minored in medical physiology and physiological chemistry. His major was
zoology, with emphasis on limnology and the physiology of Crustacea.
At the time, there was considerable interest in the food of plankton, especially in
whether or not some of these organisms can use dissolved organic matter. Birge and Ju¬
day were themselves investigating aspects of the subject (1922, 1934). Juday suggested,
therefore, that Hasler undertake his dissertation research on the physiology of digestion
in plankton Crustacea. Hasler agreed. Despite Birge and Juday’s experience on related
topics, Hasler performed his research under the supervision of Professor H. C. Bradley,
in the Department of Physiological Chemistry. As an undergraduate, Hasler had learned
in Professor Wayne Hale’s chemistry class of the importance of duplicating experimen¬
tal findings. Now, under Professor Bradley, it was a routine matter that “the ex¬
periments were duplicated and run with controls’’ (Hasler 1935: 212); routine, that is, in
physiology and in physiological chemistry, and routine at certain biological laboratories
at Woods Hole, where Hasler spent the summer of 1935 testing the results he had ob¬
tained from the fresh-water cladoceran, Daphnia, upon the marine copepod, Calanus
(Hasler 1937). Experimental controls and duplication were not routine, however, in the
Birge-Juday school.
By 1935, Hasler had had experience with controlled laboratory experiments and
uncontrolled field experiments when he assisted Juday with the Weber Lake studies.
While at Woods Hole, Paul Galtsoff of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service employed him
to conduct research on the effects of sulfate pulp mill wastes on oysters in the lower
stretches of the York River in Virginia. It was presumed that the wastes adversely af¬
fected the oysters, but proof of the significance of this pollution was needed before ac¬
tion could be taken. Hasler transferred sick oysters from the polluted York River to the
nearby unpolluted Piankatank River (near where these rivers enter Chesapeake Bay) and
healthy oysters from the Piankatank to the York. Undisturbed oysters in both locations
served as controls. He found that sick oysters recovered when moved to the Piankatank
and healthy oysters became sick when moved to the York (Galtsoff et al. 1947). This
project constituted a large-scale controlled experiment in the field.
In 1937, at Prof. Michael F. Guyer’s invitation, Hasler returned to the University of
Wisconsin as an instructor. Neither Birge nor Juday offered Hasler any help in
establishing his own limnological research after he returned. However, Guyer assigned
to him a small two room laboratory on Lake Mendota. That was as far as the red carpet
extended. Juday was still in charge of the Trout Lake station, and he did not invite
Hasler to use it. Hasler was promoted to assistant professor in 1941, associate professor
with tenure in 1945, and full professor in 1948. Yet, he did not feel free to use the Trout
Lake station until 1950. There had been such strong faculty resentment toward Birge and
Juday for administering the Trout Lake Station exclusively for limnology that a reaction
set in with their departure, and the station was administered by scientists from other
disciplines until 1962.
Clements had his Weaver and Birge his Juday, but Hasler had to establish and main-
95
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
tain his scientific community without a lieutenant. Not that he did not recognize the
desirability of having one, and several times he attempted to obtain one. He agreed with
the Department of Zoology’s decision to hire his student, John C. Neess (Ph.D. 1949),
believing that he would assume such a role. Neess, however, preferred to work alone.
Neess also declined to seek outside funding to support research, which limited the scope
of his and his students’ research. When he obtained tenure, Hasler’s chances of obtain¬
ing a lieutenant decreased. Nevertheless, Neess was available to help Hasler’s students,
and he was of substantial assistance to some of them, particularly with statistical and
sampling problems.
Hasler thought he had finally gained a lieutenant in another of his former students, H.
Francis Henderson (Ph.D. 1963), but Henderson was unable to obtain tenure (although
he remains a productive fishery biologist, now with the U.N.’s Food and Agriculture
Organization in Rome). With Henderson’s departure, and at Hasler’s recommendation,
the Zoology Department in 1968 hired John J. Magnuson and appointed him Director of
the Trout Lake Station. He was both a productive scientist and a “team player.’’ Before
Magnuson arrived, however, Hasler had already demonstrated his ability to maintain
and direct a first-rate limnology community. How had he done so for so long without a
lieutenant?
Hasler depended upon his ability to work with many different colleagues and graduate
students. This strategy was a flexible arrangement that made maximum use of the talents
of all involved. Furthermore, his graduate student, Robert A. Ragotzkie (Ph.D. 1953),
who had a double major in zoology and meterology, eventually obtained a faculty posi¬
tion in the Department of Meterology. And another of his students, Ross M. Horrall
(Ph.D. 1961), was appointed project associate in limnology at the University of Wiscon¬
sin in 1965, and later, associate scientist in the Marine Studies Center. Ragotzkie and
Horrall’s cooperation and advising were important for the growth and vitality of the
Wisconsin limnological school.
Hasler also maintained cohesiveness among his students by conducting a weekly
seminar, begun about 1948 (and still going strong). The seminar included speakers from
both on and off campus. Limnology graduate students were expected to speak before
this seminar about their dissertation research, and Hasler treated their presentations as
practice sessions for speaking at a scientific society’s annual meeting. He also expected
his students to attend the weekly seminars held by the Zoology Department.
To advise effectively his large number of graduate students while maintaining his own
scientific productivity, Hasler hired able research managers, paid out of research grants.
This position, which required a M.S. degree, was held at different times by Henry
Eichhorn (1959-1964), James Bruins (1964-1969), Jane Ruck (1970), and David Egger
(1970-present). During Hasler’s Fulbright year abroad, Warren J. Wisby, who had
received his Ph.D. under Hasler the year before (1952), assumed this position, which
then carried more responsibility than usual. The Zoology Department also had a full¬
time mechanic (Frank Eustice at first, later Glen Lee), and between Hasler’s grants and
the department’s resources, funds were sometimes available to hire an electrical
engineer, Gerald Chipman. Furthermore, William R. Schmitz (Ph.D. under Hasler,
1958) served as Assistant Director of the Trout Lake Station beginning in 1967.
For special occasions, Hasler obtained special assistance. In 1961 he brought
Associate Professor John C. Wright from Montana to help organize the first Interna¬
tional Congress of Limnology held in the U.S. In the early 1970s, when Hasler served as
Director of the Institute of Ecology, Royce LaNier and Felix Rimberg assisted him for
96
Breaking New Waters
two years, helping assemble specialists to write an evaluation of the status of ecology for
the 1972 U.N. Conference on the Human Environment in Stockholm (Workshop on
Global Ecological Problems 1972). Nor did Hasler shirk teaching for the sake of his and
his students’ research. For forty years he taught courses in limnology, ecology of fishes,
comparative physiology, field zoology, and second-semester freshman zoology to about
150 students per year (including me in limnology in the fall of 1960).
Soon after Hasler joined the faculty, his interest in the physiology of fish led to ex¬
periments conducted jointly with his colleague, Roland K. Meyer, an endocrinologist.
They conducted experiments on fish both in the laboratory and in outdoor fish hatchery
raceways, always maintaining other fish in controlled conditions. In both of their proj¬
ects they advanced the time of spawning by injections of carp pituitaries (Hasler, Meyer
and Field 1939, Hasler and Meyer 1942). This line of research was not pursued long
before being interrupted by World War II. Much later, it would be important for
aquaculture, especially in China.
The rise of Nazism and the coming of war were painful for all Americans, but
especially so for those with ties to the Germanic people and culture. Hasler’s father was
the son of Swiss pioneers, but both his father and he spent their Mormon field service (a
generation apart) in Germany and Austria. This experience stimulated a permanent in¬
terest in the German language and culture, and led Arthur Hasler to become fluent in
German. Furthermore, his late wife, Hanna Priisse Hasler (1908-1969), was from an im¬
migrant German family that retained a high regard for its heritage. When Hasler began
lecturing in hydrobiology and in comparative physiology in 1937, he became aware that
much of the literature needed by his students was available only in German. While study¬
ing this literature, he came to admire the work done by the German zoologist, Karl von
Frisch. Von Frisch was an especially brilliant experimentalist (his research eventually
won him a Nobel Prize; see Frisch, 1967a, b). When Hasler entered Germany in the
spring of 1945 with the U.S. Strategic Bombing Survey, he took the opportunity to
become friends with von Frisch in Munich at the partially destroyed Zoologisches In-
stitut, which the Rockefeller Foundation had built for von Frisch before the war (Hasler
1945, 1946). Besides the studies on the language of bees that brought him such fame, von
Frisch and his students made fundamental investigations into the sensory physiology of
fish. This latter work especially interested Hasler and influenced his own outlook and
research.
Another scientist whom Hasler visited during his time away from military duties was
Wilhelm G. Einsele at the Anstalt fur Fischerei, Weissenbach am Attersee, near
Salzburg, Austria. Although all of Einsele’ s pre-war assistants were casualties of the
war, he had managed to carry on his work with the help of women and older fishermen.
His primary objective was to increase the productivity of fish in the Attersee and other
Austrian lakes. His research had included an attempt to increase the natural phosphate
level of a small South German lake (Schleinsee) by adding large quantities of super¬
phosphate (Einsele 1941). This research attracted Hasler’s interest, and later he en¬
couraged one of his graduate students to publish a literature review on the “Develop¬
ment and Status of Pond Fertilization in Central Europe” (Neess 1949a).
After five months Hasler returned to the U.S. concerned for the welfare of the
biologists whom he had met in western Europe and stimulated by his opportunity to
learn first-hand from their work. Although he returned to Wisconsin to pick up his lim¬
nological work, there had been enough disruption and stimulation to cause him to reflect
upon what he wanted to accomplish as a scientist. There was some momentum left over
97
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
from the Birge-Juday period and from his own work before 1945 that he could draw
upon, but with nothing new to offer in the post-war period, undoubtedly he would have
found that momentum quickly spent. It was then, after his own long experiences with ex¬
perimentation and after having witnessed the experimental work of von Frisch and
Einsele, that Hasler realized he wanted to leave his mark on limnology by helping to
make it a far more rigorous experimental science than it was in 1945. This approach was
already an integral part of his teaching, but in two papers published in 1947 and 1948, he
took the opportunity to remind his peers that they should carefully design experiments
with controls (Hasler 1947: 391, Hasler and Einsele 1948: 530). It was easy for him to
cite published articles showing uncritically designed field experiments, but he found only
one showing critical awareness of the problem (Mottley 1942). Some years later he
published an article on experimental limnology illustrated with examples from his and
his students’ work (Hasler 1964).
Although it would be risky to make a strong claim of uniqueness for Hasler’s con¬
trolled field experiments, it nevertheless seems true that he was unique in seizing upon
this approach to limnology as an organizing principle for the program of a limnological
school. Such an organizing principle is just what is needed for developing a cohesive
scientific school (Crane 1972, Tobey 1981). Good ideas, however, are important only
when successfully implemented. How did Hasler use this organizing principle in relation
to particular scientists, ideas, and resources to achieve an outstanding scientific school?
Hasler continued the Birge-Juday example of consulting faculty from other sciences
concerning research projects, but he depended rather less than they had upon those
scientists as active collaborators and rather more upon graduate students in limnology.
Hasler supervised the dissertation research of 53 doctoral students and partially directed
that of 14 others; he also supervised the thesis research of 41 master’s degree students. In
this respect, he was following the normal pattern of development for a scientific com¬
munity, although we may doubt that the leaders of many scientific communities gradu¬
ate as many students. The limnological ideas that he and his school explored were as
diverse as those explored by the school under Birge and Juday. But while the work of
Birge and Juday had been narrow in scope to begin with and had gradually expanded,
the range of Hasler’s interests and competencies were broad from the start. He could
therefore attract a range of students who had somewhat different interests from each
other. He was able to find some means of support for them while in graduate school and
a job when they left.
The financial and material resources available to the Hasler group were substantially
better than they had been for the Birge and Juday group, partly because of the
cumulative advantages of their earlier activities, but mostly because the country was will¬
ing and able to allocate more resources to science after the war than before. However,
although more resources became available around 1950, there was competition for them,
and any scientist who obtained enough to run a scientific school had to have a research
program that was convincing to his peers who allocated the resources. It was a definite
help to have momentum already when the National Science Foundation (on the history
of the NSF see England 1982), the Federal Water Quality Administration, and the
Atomic Energy Commission were established. Before funds from these agencies became
available in the 1950s, Hasler and his students obtained research funds from the
Graduate School, the Wisconsin Conservation Department, the Office of Naval
Research, and several private donors.
Elizabeth Jones (now Mrs. David G. Frey) was the first of Hasler’s students whose
98
Breaking New Waters
dissertation topic exemplified the experimental approach of his group. Her task was to
investigate whether rooted aquatic vegetation and algae found in the same body of water
either compete for nutrients or produce inhibitors. R. N. Pond’s experiments (1903) had
not indicated any connection, but later observations of algae blooms on Lake Mendota
indicated that blooms were not as abundant in years in which the rooted vegetation of
the lake flourished. She tested the question in four silos, each 3.6 m in diameter and 1 m
deep, which were placed in a large fish hatchery pond (drained, then refilled). Her
research was supported with funds (via the Graduate School) from both the Wisconsin
Alumni Research Foundation and the Wisconsin Conservation Department. She re¬
ceived her degree in 1947, having found that rooted vegetation does inhibit algae (Hasler
and Jones 1949). Although this was a successful example of the Hasler approach to ex¬
perimental limnology in the field, the silos in the hatchery pond were artificial environ¬
ments, even if they were outdoors.
The next step would be to conduct experiments in somewhat less artificial environ¬
ments. Another of his early doctoral students, John C. Neess, investigated the popula¬
tion ecology of the bluntnose minnow (Neess 1949b). Six small identical ponds were dug
at the University Arboretum and each was stocked with 12 males and 12 females. This
investigation was also experimental limnology, in a sense; the ponds were an experimen¬
tal situation. However, the reason there were six ponds was to provide data on the range
of variation that might develop under similar circumstances. (It turns out there was con¬
siderable variation in the colonization of the ponds by plants and also in the rate of in¬
crease of the minnows.) Nevertheless, after the ponds were established, there was no at¬
tempt to use some as controls and to alter conditions in others.
In 1948 Hasler decided to test on northern bog lakes the possibility that he and Einsele
proposed, that dystrophic lakes could be made more transparent if they were alkalized
with hydrated lime (1948: 549). Encouraged by Professor Emil Truog in the Department
of Soil Science, Hasler tested the suggestion in his laboratory and obtained favorable
results. Therefore, it seemed worth trying on a bog lake. Assisting in this project were
two graduate students, Oscar Brynildson and William Helm, who would later write doc¬
toral dissertations under Hasler’s supervision. They ran their alkalization experiments
on Cather and Turk Lakes, on property belonging to Ben McGiveran in Chippewa
County. (Probably it would have been difficult to obtain permission to conduct these ex¬
periments on state-owned lands.) The experimental plan was to collect limnological and
fishery data on these bog lakes for two years before treatment, then replace the resident
fish with rainbow and brown trout, treat both lakes with hydrated lime (which, unlike
powdered limestone, is readily soluble), and finally to measure the lakes’ productivity
under the new conditions. The hypothesis was that increased transparency would allow
plant growth at greater depths than in the naturally brown humic water, plant growth
would increase the dissolved oxygen, and introduced trout would make better use of the
new situation for growth than would the original resident species. Their findings sup¬
ported these assumptions (Hasler, Brynildson and Helm 1951).
Hasler next decided that he needed to use at least one pair of lakes for conducting even
cleaner and more tightly controlled experiments within the same season. The ideal exam¬
ple of the Hasler approach was, therefore, the dissertation research of Waldo E.
Johnson on Peter and Paul Lakes on Notre Dame University’s property in Gogebic
County near the Wisconsin state line. These lakes are adjacent and are connected by a
narrow neck. If the connection were filled in, two similar lakes could be used, with one
(untreated) serving as a reference lake. The use of lakes so far from Madison for disser-
99
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
tation research indicates that experimental limnology is not necessarily a convenient
science.
These slightly acid bog lakes seemed ideal for the experiments, and being isolated,
were free from incidental public interference. Notre Dame University granted permis¬
sion to use them and to build an earthen dam across their connecting neck. Using these
lakes, one could determine not only the likely importance of some single factor, as in
Jones’ dissertation, but also the actual importance of the factor upon the life of a lake in
nature. For example, Johnson used Peter and Paul Lakes to study the changes produced
by alkalization upon rainbow trout productivity (Peter being the treated and Paul the
reference lake). He found that productivity increased, because the alkalization of
brown-water bog lakes increased the light penetration and stimulated photosynthesis in
deep water, hence preventing oxygen depletion at times (especially in winter) when other¬
wise some of the trout would have died (Johnson and Hasler 1954: 133). His research
was supported by grants from the Guido Rahr Foundation and from J. Bruce Allen of
Chicago {ibid., 113). Johnson later convinced the Fisheries Research Board of Canada
to establish an experimental lake station near Winnipeg, with him as director (Johnstone
1977: 263-269).
Johnson had used these lakes to answer only a limited series of questions relating to
fish productivity. Therefore it seemed desirable to have another graduate student use
Peter and Paul Lakes to investigate more generally the changes in metabolism of dystro¬
phic lakes caused by the addition of hydrated lime. Raymond G. Stross undertook this
project for a doctoral dissertation. Both Johnson and Stross also studied their ex¬
perimental problems on two or three other lakes to get a broader experience. Stross com¬
pleted his dissertation in 1958 and the results, that the rate of turnover of the
zooplankton was markedly greater in the alkalized lake, were published shortly
thereafter (Stross and Hasler 1960). These studies also indicated that lime, presumably
an important source of bicarbonate, may be a limiting factor in primary production (see
also Hutchinson 1963: 685). The experimental condition established at Peter and Paul
Lakes continued in effect under Hasler’s auspices for some three decades, after which
time bottom sediments could be used to trace the long-range effects of increased light
penetration owing to the continued artificial alkalization and enrichment with bicar¬
bonate (Kitchell and Kitchell 1980).
Thus far in discussing the Hasler period of Wisconsin limnology the emphasis has
been upon the distinctive aspects of Hasler’s methodology and outlook, to illustrate how
different the community had become under his direction. Nevertheless, it would not
have progressed as rapidly as it did in this new period had he not also utilized the earlier
resources. The Trout Lake Station was the most conspicuous of these resources (though
not available to him until 1957). Also very important were faculty members who had
worked with Birge and Juday and had become experts on aspects of limnology touching
their professional teaching and research.
The university administration appointed a faculty Lakes and Streams Committee that
functioned from 1952 to 1963. The committee’s concern was with water purity in the
complex of lakes connected to the Yahara River in the vicinity of the university. Lake
Mendota especially was something more than a scenic asset to the university and city and
a convenient place to do research. By virtue of having become the most studied lake in
the world (Brock 1985), it was now part of America’s (and the world’s) historical heri¬
tage. The coordinator of the committee was bacteriologist William Sarles, and the
membership included Hasler in limnology, Gerald Gerloff and F. K. Skoog in botany,
100
Breaking New Waters
Verner Suomi and Reid Bryson in meteorology, Robert Muckenhirn and Marion
Jackson in soils, Gerald Rohlich in civil and environmental engineering, and Mel
Meloche in chemistry. The committee’s accomplishments included working with State
Legislator Norman Anderson and law professor Jacob Beuscher on a bill, passed in
1965, to divert sewage from the Yahara drainage basin to the Nine Springs Treatment
Plant. Hasler also served for many years on Madison’s Lake Mendota Problems Com¬
mittee (Threinen 1968). By taking an active part in such committees, Hasler built rela¬
tionships with both older and newer faculty members. These relationships were impor¬
tant for advancing such an interdisciplinary subject as limnology.
As stimulating as he found some of his interactions with colleagues in related
disciplines at Madison, it had been even more stimulating for Hasler to interact with
European authorities on subjects in which he was directly involved. He decided,
therefore, that it was important to bring to Madison for lectures and discussions such
authorities from both Europe and North America. Among the first of them was Karl
von Frisch, who came in 1949 and whose memories of the trip are included in his
autobiography (1967a: 165-166). Another was C. H. Mortimer, who was a visiting pro¬
fessor in Madison in 1962-1963 and who came back to the University of Wisconsin-
Milwaukee in 1966 as Distinguished Professor of Zoology and first Director of the
Center for Great Lakes Studies. By 1962, Hasler was bringing in between six and fifteen
per year. Many of them were brought in with funds from the Federal Water Quality Ad¬
ministration. In addition to these distinguished guests, Hasler was also able to arrange
for young limnologists from Europe and Asia to come and work with him in Madison.
These post-doctoral students not only carried back with them insights gained from the
Wisconsin limnological community, they also left behind the stimulating influence of
their knowledge and perspective, contributing thereby to the sophistication of all those
involved.
It was equally important, both to Hasler and his students, that he continue to travel to
distant places to broaden his knowledge of limnology and fishery biology. He took short
trips at various times to Lake Tahoe, Crater Lake, Hawaii, and Point Barrow in the
U.S., to Newfoundland, Quebec, Ontario, Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and British Co¬
lumbia in Canada, and abroad to U.S.S.R. (including Siberia), China, Japan, Eniwetok
Atoll, Bikini, Argentina, Brazil, Guyana, Mexico, Puerto Rico, Costa Rica, Guatemala,
England, France, Spain, Portugal, Netherlands, Poland, East and West Germany,
Finland, Scandinavia, Iceland, Italy, Yugoslavia, Czechoslovakia, Romania, Ghana,
and Israel. He returned from these refreshing trips with many valuable ideas.
In 1953 Hasler was awarded a Fulbright Research Scholarship that enabled him to go,
with his wife and their six children, to the University of Munich for the academic year
1953-1954. There he conducted research in association with von Frisch. It was from von
Frisch’s strong interest in the physiology and behavior of fish that Hasler hoped to
benefit. Hasler brought with him several years of his own experimental knowledge on
the sense of smell in fish, and now he wished to expand his understanding of the ways
fishes perceive their environment.
It was appropriate that he return to Munich for some of this work, because his earlier
acquaintance with von Frisch and his researches played a role in getting Hasler interested
in doing research on this subject. In 1946, the year following his visit to occupied Ger¬
many, Hasler had returned to his hometown of Provo for a vacation. This was a chance
to indulge once more in two favorite hobbies of his youth — hiking the trails and fishing
the streams of the Wasatch Mountains. As he climbed the eastern slope of Mt. Tim-
101
Breaking New Waters
panogos, he pondered the question of how salmon find their way back to their home
stream to spawn. His thoughts were momentarily interrupted by a homing experience of
his own: “I approached a waterfall which was completely obstructed from view by a
cliff; yet, as a cool breeze, bearing the fragrance of mosses and columbine, swept around
the rocky abutment, the details of this waterfall and its setting on the face of the moun¬
tain suddenly leapt into my mind’s eye. In fact, so impressive was this odor that it
evoked a flood of other boyhood associations, long since vanished from conscious
memory.” If the smell of his boyhood haunts evoked such a strong memory association
in him, perhaps it did the same for salmon; here was a hypothesis worthy of investiga¬
tion (Hasler and Scholz 1983: xi-xiii). Later, when he recalled this experience, he appre¬
ciated the observation made by Louis Pasteur in his opening speech to the Faculte des
Sciences at Lille, 7 December 1854: “chance only favours the prepared mind” (Vallery-
Radot 1923: 79).
Hasler’s serendipitous experience on Mt. Timpanogos led to his most important line
of research. But was his idea for this research based upon a fortuitous impression, or is
the parallel between fish and human memory real? The range of childhood experiences
in humans is so vast that this would be a difficult question to answer scientifically.
However, if someone else unaware of Hasler’s experience reported a similar one, this
would strongly support the possibility of his experience representing a parallel capacity
in fish and humans. I have found such a report in Wallace Stegner’s Wolf Willow: A
History , a Story , and a Memory of the Last Plains Frontier (1962: 17-21). Stegner (b.
1909) grew up along the Frenchman River in southern Saskatchewan, and he returned to
his childhood haunts after several decades to experience again memories of the region.
One memory in particular haunted him, associated with the river bank where he once
swam and fished. Returning to the spot did not satiate his quest until he smelled once
more the odor which he earlier associated with the place — an odor he discovered coming
from the flowers of a shrub along the bank, wolf willow.
Are salmon guided by the memory of smell when they return from the sea to their
home stream to reproduce? It is a question presumably susceptible to a “yes” or “no”
answer. Yet, for Hasler, it was a question that led to a lifetime of research, and not just
for himself. Among the essential characteristics of a leader of a scientific school is the
ability to establish a meaningful research program for himself and others in the school.
This subject became the most important of the various research themes developed at the
Wisconsin limnological school under Hasler’s direction. It is appropriate, therefore, to
follow it in more detail than the others, to see both what was learned and how the school
worked.
If Hasler had been teaching in a western university, perhaps he would have begun work
immediately upon salmon. Being located in Wisconsin, however, he wondered if his
question might not be clarified, at least in part, by some initial studies on other species.
If salmon are guided by odors, perhaps some common Wisconsin fish, such as the blunt-
nose minnow (Pimephales notatus), might be also. It was worth an investigation, and
probably worth a doctoral dissertation for an interested graduate student. Theodore J.
Walker (Ph.D., 1948) was one who was interested, and he studied the capacity of this
minnow to discriminate between the odor of water-milfoil (Myriophyllum exalbescens),
common hornwort (Ceratophyllum demersum), and 12 other species. Hasler and Walker
sought the assistance of Wisconsin faculty in psychology concerning experimental ap¬
paratus, experimental design, and measurements having statistical significance. Walker
found that he could, in 2.5 months, train his fish to distinguish the odors of these plants.
102
Breaking New Waters
The fish obtained food— positive conditioning — when it went toward the odor of one
species, but an electrical shock — negative conditioning when it went toward the odor of
a second species (Walker and Hasler 1949).
These findings were encouraging, but there is a great leap between showing that a
minnow can discriminate between two plant odors and claiming that salmon use odors
for homing. The next step in bridging this gap was to show that bluntnose minnows can
discriminate between the odors of different streams. Warren J. Wisby, who had written
his M.S. thesis under Hasler on “Techniques for Investigating the Ecological Aspects of
the Behavior of Fishes” (1950), undertook this research for a doctoral dissertation
(Ph.D. 1952). Norman Fassett advised on the selection of two streams near Madison,
Otter and Honey Creeks, that had strikingly different water chemistry, soils, and plant
communities. The minnows were then trained in an experimental situation similar to that
used by Walker. Later Hasler explained the influence of these streams on fish as
analogous to the differences in aroma and taste to humans of wines made from grapes
grown on different soils and in different climates. Wisby found that in two months he
could train his minnows to distinguish between the waters of the two streams. Then
when the olfactory sacs of trained fish were destroyed the fish no longer distinguished
between these waters, which proved that smell rather than taste supplied the cue. Experi¬
ments using chemical fractionations of the component parts of the waters indicated that
the minnows were responding to a volatile, organic substance in the waters. These ex¬
periments were also later done successfully on salmon (Hasler and Wisby 1951 : 224).
But did the capacity of fish in nature to discriminate odors equal their capacity to do
so in the laboratory? Would salmon with occluded nasal chambers make the same choice
of a breeding stream as they made with normal olfactory chambers? Only a test of
salmon in nature would answser satisfactorily the latter question. Wisby and Hasler,
with the collaboration of Lauren R. Donaldson from the University of Washington, cap¬
tured salmon above the junction of the Issaquah Creek and East Fork of Issaquah Creek
(east of Seattle). Half of those captured were tagged as controls, and the other half were
tagged as experimental fish in which the olfactory sacs were plugged with vaseline-coated
cotton. All fish were then trucked downstream well below the junction of the creek.
Most of those with normal olfaction swam back up the stream of their previous choice,
but those with occluded “noses” were as likely to choose one stream as the other. “The
results, therefore, are in accord with those which would be expected if the fish were rely¬
ing on their sense of smell in making this choice” (Wisby and Hasler 1954).
The success of all these investigations indicated that Hasler’s hunch was on the right
track — the organic odors of each stream were different. He therefore wrote a compre¬
hensive physiological monograph on “Odour Perception and Orientation in Fishes”
(1954) and, for the more general audience of Scientific American , “The Homing
Salmon” (Hasler and Larsen 1955).
Yet, even though Hasler’s hunch about the salmon’s selection of a stream being con¬
trolled by odor seemed correct, he came to realize that this could not be the whole story.
Stream odors might be the cue for salmon to recognize their home river, but how did
they find their way back to the correct river after several years at sea? Something else
must be operating in this segment of their homing. Use of the sun for orientation was a
possibility that came to his mind— its importance for migrating birds was already under
investigation (Griffin 1952: 382-384, Kramer 1953). Hoping to investigate this possibil¬
ity, Hasler sought a Fulbright Research Scholarship for the 1953-1954 academic year to
work in Munich with von Frisch and to visit Gustav Kramer in Wilhelmshafen. They
103
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
were both doing exciting work on the use of the sun for orientation, the former working
with bees and the latter with birds. Hasler also visited Konrad Lorenz at Buldern bei
Dulmen. In Munich Hasler found that the common European minnow, Phoxinus laevis,
could orient itself toward a lamp (simulating the sun) in a laboratory setting in order to
obtain food, even when other environmental factors were varied randomly (Hasler
1956a).
After that stimulating year abroad, he returned to Madison pondering further ques¬
tions concerning sun orientation. Could fish be trained to orient themselves when the
lamp was moved around the room to simulate the apparent movement of the sun across
the sky during the day? Could a capacity for sun-compass orientation also be
demonstrated in fish in a natural environment? These questions would be answered
affirmatively in an article that is especially interesting from our standpoint of illustrating
a scientific community in action. The leader of an effective group must be able to raise
significant, but solvable, questions that will keep both him and his associates produc¬
tively occupied. These two questions are both on fish orientation, yet one falls within the
domain of the laboratory and the other within the domain of field studies. In practice,
few scientists are as active as Hasler has been in both domains; by inclination most will
pick one or the other as their preference, and their imagination will then operate primar¬
ily on questions raised within that domain.
Hasler was aware of this tendency, and as collaborators on this project he had Wisby
(then a “postdoc”), who as a graduate student had worked under him in both laboratory
and field, Ross M. Horrall, a graduate student whose inclinations ran toward field
research, and Wolfgang Braemer, a German behavioral physiologist whose inclination
for laboratory research was influenced by his loss of a leg in World War II. HorralPs in¬
itial experiments on homing in white bass in Lake Mendota (Hasler et al. 1958) were con¬
tinued for his doctoral dissertation (Ph.D. 1961). Braemer’s experiments on sun-com¬
pass orientation formed the basis for “A critical review of the sun-azimuth hypothesis”
(Braemer 1960). Even that was not to be the end of this line of research. Hasler started
another graduate student, Horst O. Schwassmann (whom he had met in Germany before
Schwassmann immigrated to Milwaukee), on the study of sun-compass orientation in
fish native to different latitudes. Schwassmann and Hasler trained fish in Madison, then
moved them to a different latitude (on the equator in Brazil) and attempted to retrain
them. This work was far enough along in 1960 for them to report preliminary results at
the Cold Spring Harbor Symposium on biological clocks (Hasler and Schwassmann
1960), and Schwassmann continued this research for his doctoral dissertation (Ph.D.
1962).
To discover whether they returned home by random or directed swimming, Hasler and
Horrall tracked the movements of displaced white bass in Lake Mendota by attaching
floating plastic balls to the fish with a nylon thread and fish hook (illus. in Hasler 1963:
66, Hasler 1966a: 88). This technique was adequate for the small-scale study in Lake
Mendota, but was unsatisfactory for tracking salmon because the float interfered with
the speed and changes in depth of the fish. Hasler assigned the task of developing a more
flexible tracking technique to another graduate student, H. Francis Henderson. With
assistance from Gerald Chipman, an electronics engineer, Henderson developed a sonic
transmitter that could be inserted into a fish’s stomach or abdomen and could transmit
signals up to 200 m for about 15 hours (Hasler and Henderson 1964, Hasler 1966:
128-129). This research was sufficient for Henderson’s dissertation (Ph.D. 1963) and
secured his appointment to the faculty in the Zoology Department.
104
Breaking New Waters
By 1963 Hasler, his students, and research associates had studied the homing abilities
of fish from enough different perspectives for him to develop a comprehensive synthesis
of their findings. He found the time to write Underwater Guideposts: Homing of
Salmon during a semester spent at the University of Helsinki as a Distinguished Ex¬
change Professor. This book, which appeared in 1966, was an important milestone for
him as a scientist and as the leader of an important scientific community. Many scientists
devote their entire career to the elucidation of various narrow questions and never
publish a comprehensive synthesis. Such had been the case with Birge and Juday. They
had achieved prominence by virtue of the high quality and vast quantity of their work.
They had explored many aspects of limnology, but for a synthesis, they depended upon
the attention their work received in such textbooks as The Life of Inland Waters (1916;
2nd ed., 1930; 3d ed., 1937) by the Cornell limnologists James G. Needham and J. T.
Lloyd and Limnology (1935) by Paul S. Welch of the University of Michigan. Because
there had been only a few competing communities of limnology, their work did receive
due attention. Hasler, however, worked in a far larger arena, where the approach of
Birge and Juday would have attracted far less notice than it had in their day. Hasler’s
book provided a convincing and detailed answer to a long-standing puzzle: how could
salmon swim out into a vast, trackless ocean and yet return to the stream of their birth to
spawn? The book is also a more prominent record of the most important achievement of
the Wisconsin limnological school under his direction than were individual scientific
papers. It illustrates the use of experimentation in both laboratory and field for solving
limnological problems.
Even if Hasler did not, after that, merely rest on his laurels, there were so many dif¬
ferent subjects under investigation at the Laboratory of Limnology by 1966 that one
might expect that the subject of salmon homing would have been dropped — after all, it
had been done. Furthermore, both the Atlantic and Pacific salmon live a long way from
Madison; it would be more convenient and practicable to study problems that could be
solved within the state of Wisconsin. However, at about the time that such thoughts
were going through Hasler’s head, “the Departments of Natural Resources in Michigan
and Wisconsin introduced coho salmon into the Great Lakes to feed on and thus reduce
the alewife population and to revitalize the Lake Michigan fishery” (Hasler and Scholz
1983: xv). The coho flourished — to the delight of sports fishermen — and thus provided
an opportunity to answer questions still lingering from earlier investigations and also
new ones arising from the management of salmon in the Great Lakes. Hasler’s decision
to exploit this unexpected opportunity was another example of “chance favoring the
prepared mind.”
The primary question that intrigued him was how olfactory imprinting occurred in
young salmon. At the end of their paper on “Discrimination of stream odors by fishes
and its relation to parent stream behavior” Hasler and Wisby had suggested the experi¬
ment of “exposing salmon to a constant, artificial odor through the fingerling stage and
then determining if the fish conditioned in a hatchery could be decoyed to a neighboring
stream upon return from the sea” (1951: 237). Neither they nor apparently anyone else
had actually tried it, but twenty years later it was an experiment that could be tried in
rivers flowing into Lake Michigan. Some of Hasler’s graduate students in the 1970s —
Andrew E. Dizon (M.S. 1966, Ph.D. 1971), John C. Cooper (Ph.D. 1974), Peter J.
Hirsch (Ph.D. 1977), Peter B. Johnsen (M.S. 1976, Ph.D. 1978), Allan T. Scholz (M.S.
1977, Ph.D. 1980) — collaborated with him and Horrall in designing and carrying out ex¬
periments on salmon imprinting. They raised thousands of salmon, mostly inland in
105
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Wisconsin hatcheries, imprinted them to morpholine, and later released them in Lake
Michigan. When sexually mature, they began to search for their home stream. Mor¬
pholine was then used to scent one of the rivers. The number of imprinted salmon,
distinctively marked, returning at sexual maturity to the scented stream was ten times
greater than the number of controls returning to the stream. Another chemical, phen-
ethyl alcohol, worked equally well in another series of duplicate experiments. These
experiments were repeated several times to establish their validity.
There were as many as seven co-authors to some of the papers published by this group
working on salmon homing in Lake Michigan in the 1970s. All of their work was finally
collected and synthesized in Hasler and Scholz’s book, Olfactory Imprinting and Hom¬
ing in Salmon (1983 with references). The work of this group has not only broadened
and deepened our understanding of salmon physiology and ecology, it has also provided
the key insights needed to transform the salmon fishery from a wild one of modest value
into an invaluable domestic one (Hasler and Scholz 1978, 1980, Thorpe 1980, Donaldson
and Joyner 1983). Furthermore, their work has been singled out as a model of a rigorous
experimental method applied to a field problem in biology (Baker and Allen 1982:
14-19).
This work on salmon is atypical of a limnological school. Textbooks on limnology fre¬
quently have little or nothing to say about fish — a ridiculous bias, in Hasler’s opinion.
However, in his effort to redress that omission, he did not err in the other direction and
neglect the more typical preoccupations of the limnologist. His own article, “Wisconsin,
1940-1961“ (1963) is an ample survey of all aspects of limnology pursued at the Univer¬
sity of Wisconsin under his leadership, and other examples of research conducted by
Hasler and his students are provided in preceding chapters. One emphasis of the Wiscon¬
sin school under Hasler was on limnological research during the winter. Birge and Juday
had taken a few winter measurements, mostly in Madison, but no one before Hasler had
conducted so many winter studies. Twenty-two of his 195 published papers report on
research performed in severe winter conditions, many at northern lakes far from
Madison.
The Birge-Juday community existed for almost forty years and the Hasler community
slightly more than forty years. The two periods are thus comparable in duration, and
this invites a comparison in achievement. The Hasler community seems to have been
more productive and more influential than was the Birge-Juday community. This is, of
course, what one would expect, because science has been better supported since 1940
than it was previously, and a larger number of Americans have been active scientists
since that date than before. Limnology has grown along with other sciences, and the
Wisconsin story reflects that. On the other hand, competition for science resources,
students, and honors has also increased with the increase in the number of active scien¬
tists. For example, regardless of how rapidly the American Society of Limnology and
Oceanography has grown, only one member is honored each year with its presidency.
Thus, it would be surprising if limnology in America had not grown steadily during the
period in which Hasler headed the Wisconsin group, but all of that growth could have
occurred on other campuses. It was only because Hasler seized the opportunities that so
much of the growth in American limnology continued to occur at Wisconsin.
Publications are lasting indicators of scientific achievements, but other measures are
also important. Students are one, and the 41 who received their M.S. degree and the 53
who received their Ph.D. degree under Hasler’s direction are impressive indicators of
success. Although some of these students were supported in part by teaching or research
106
Breaking New Waters
assistantships, a scientific school cannot achieve distinction unless it attracts research
funds. For his time, Birge was notably successful in this respect, and Hasler was even
more so. The record of this success, discussed to some extent earlier in this chapter, is
found in the acknowledgments of the theses and publications coming from this com¬
munity.
Another measure of academic success, so dear to the heart of administrators, are
university buildings. Birge had established the Trout Lake Station, although it was
housed in very modest wooden structures. Michael Guyer had also used university funds
to build the small lab on Lake Mendota, first used under Hasler. However, Hasler and
associated faculty and research assistants had to retain offices in Birge Hall, because
their lab at the end of Park Street was too small to hold offices. This inconvenience was
compounded by the fact that the limnological school was essentially an informal subdivi¬
sion of the Department of Zoology. Although Hasler served as chairman of that depart¬
ment in 1953 and again from 1955 to 1957, whenever new needs arose in limnology, they
had to be evaluated within the competing needs of the department as a whole.
Sometimes the needs of this growing field had to be deferred to the needs of some
discipline that attracted fewer students (its equipment could still become obsolete)
because the latter had already waited a long time to have its needs met.
A way around this impediment came in 1962, when Hasler obtained funds from the
National Science Foundation to build a new Laboratory of Limnology on the shore of
Lake Mendota. Because he had obtained the NSF funds, Hasler was given the initiative
to choose the site, the general plan for the building, and the architect. He was already ac¬
quainted with Albert Gallistel, Superintendent of Buildings and Grounds, from their
long association on the Arboretum Committee. Hasler knew that Gallistel shared his
concern for landscape architecture and environmental quality. They agreed on a site
west of the Memorial Union, near the Hydraulics Lab. By placing it there, they
prevented an automobile road from being built along the lake (as opposed to the bike
and foot path that is still there). In 1957 Hasler and a few colleagues had led the faculty
opposition that had saved the view from the Union becoming a 600-car parking lot —
advocated by university regent Oscar Rennebohm and approved by President E. B.
Fred — by convincing the faculty and its parking committee that the lake was too sacred
to the university and to science to be desecrated by the contemplated landfill.
The general concept for the cantilevered laboratory was sketched by Mrs. Holger Jan-
nasch, a German architect who spent a year in Madison with her husband, a postdoc¬
toral fellow and an eminent marine and freshwater microbiologist. Hasler chose William
Kaeser, a Madison architect, to develop her plan in detail, and in 1963 Hasler proudly
described it in the American Zoologist (p. 339):
An attractive formed-concrete building cantilevered over the waters of Mendota has recently
been completed. The new Laboratory of Limnology provides offices, laboratories, conference
rooms, a library, and supporting facilities for a staff of 35 people, as well as adequate fish¬
holding and storage facilities. The basement level encloses a boat slip opening to Mendota be¬
tween concrete entrance piers. A large shop, rooms for gear and boat storage, fish holding
tanks, small rooms for recording instruments, motors, and batteries, and a shower room with
locker facilities complete the lower floor.
The first floor includes laboratories for graduate students and visiting personnel, for paleo-
and latitudinal-limnology, hydrobotany, and microbiology. A dark room, culture room,
isotope room, instrument room, and chemical laboratory are also included. The second floor
consists of laboratories for the study of the behavior and physiology of fishes, zooplankton and
107
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
benthos, physical limnology, and fishery biology. Offices of the director, secretaries, a library,
large aquarium room, graduate laboratories, and offices for investigators are welded into a
working unit. The laboratory was designed not only for the needs of the students and faculty,
but also to meet those of visiting investigators.
Because of his success in obtaining NSF funds for this laboratory, the university later
asked him to try to obtain funds for a sorely needed laboratory at the Trout Lake sta¬
tion. He agreed to try, providing the university this time put up half the money; it did,
and he obtained the other half from NSF in 1966.
Hasler remained head of the Laboratory of Limnology from its opening in 1963 until
his retirement — from formal duties, at least — as Professor Emeritus in 1978. Occa¬
sionally administrative posts interested him but did not come his way. In retrospect, he is
glad they did not, because administrative responsibilities would have interfered with his
salmon research, for which he has received so much enthusiastic recognition, both na¬
tionally and internationally. He has maintained membership in 19 professional societies
and held various offices in a number of them, including president of the American Soci¬
ety of Limnology and Oceanography (1949-1950), Ecological Society of America (1961),
American Society of Zoologists (1971), International Association for Ecology
(1967-1974), and of the latter Association’s First Congress (The Hague, 1974). He has
been elected to membership or honorary membership in a number of scholarly organiza¬
tions, both here and abroad, including the prestigious National Academy of Sciences
(1969) and the American Academy of Arts and Sciences (1972). In 1977 the American
Fisheries Society honored him with its Award of Excellence. In 1980 both the American
Institute of Biological Sciences and the Sea Grant Association presented him with distin¬
guished service awards.
One might suppose that, as a past president of both the American Society of Lim¬
nology and Oceanography and the Ecological Society of America, Hasler’s greatest pro¬
fessional involvements would be with one or both of those societies. Since joining the
National Academy of Sciences, however, that organization has been the main focus of
his scientific activities. He was proud of the fact that, when elected, only he and one
other limnologist, G. Evelyn Hutchinson, were members of that august body of 900
senior scientists. He assisted in writing two of its reports for 1969, Resources and Man
(269 pp.) and Eutrophication: Causes , Consequences , Correctives. Proceedings of a
Symposium (661 pp.). Other National Academy of Sciences reports he helped prepare
are entitled: Biology and the Future of Man (1970) and Rehabilitation Potential of
Western Coal Lands (1974).
By every standard of scientific success, Hasler has been acknowledged by his peers as a
leading scientist and the head of a leading scientific school. He has always enjoyed the
involvements and interactions that his successes have brought, but he has also resisted
the temptation to “wheel and deal’’ just for ego satisfaction. That is a trap that, among
other things, leads to the neglect of one’s students. Although Hasler demanded high
levels of performance from his students, in return he gave generously of his time,
thoughts, and efforts. One student, Scholz, remembered “his cussedness and refusal to
give up in the face of adversity during a bout with colon cancer in 1971-1972.’’ The 53
students who had received doctorates under him showed their appreciation by returning
to Madison for a commemorative celebration when he retired in March, 1978. They also
commissioned a composition in his honor, a quartet for horn and strings by David Dia¬
mond of the Juliard School of Music. This idea came from their awareness that, for 25
years, Hasler had played horn for the Madison Civic Symphony. The premier per-
108
Breaking New Waters
formance was by the Pro Arte Quartet in Madison in October, 1978, with Douglas Hill
as hornist.
A further recognition of his achievement as head of an outstanding school of lim¬
nology was the large drawing of his academic “genealogical tree” by Kandis K. Elliot in
1978. This chart is an imaginative and thoughtful display of the history of the Wisconsin
limnological school under his direction, as revealed by the master’s and doctor’s degrees
of his students. It hangs in the Laboratory of Limnology.
When Hasler retired in 1978 and turned over the Center for Limnology to his col¬
league, John J. Magnuson, he, like Birge and Juday after 1937, continued his profes¬
sional activities. Because those activities have enhanced the reputation not only of
himself, but also of the limnological school, it is relevant to give some indication of
them. In 1981 he submitted to the National Academy of Sciences (NAS) a proposal,
“Salmon for Peace in the North Pacific,” for a cooperative program of salmon ranch¬
ing to be undertaken by the Soviet Union, the People’s Republic of China, and Japan.
The proposal includes the establishment of hatcheries, the use of artificial imprinting,
and the restocking of the Amur (Heilong) and Wusuli (Ussuri) Rivers along the China-
U.S.S.R. border. In 1983 the Chinese Fisheries Society, intrigued by the proposal, in¬
vited him to China under auspices of the NAS Distinguished Scholar Exchange Pro¬
gram. Hasler accepted the invitation and traveled around that country explaining his
plan and also giving more general lectures and advice on limnology and fishery biology.
He was received by very enthusiastic audiences. In 1984, because there are good pro¬
spects for developing a valuable fishery, the Soviet embassy requested that he evaluate a
plan for international collaboration (Hasler 1984), and he also traveled to the U.S.S.R.
as a NAS Distinguished Scholar for six weeks in 1986.
Conclusions
The history of a scientific community appears to be a very good way to present the
history of modern ecology. By its nature ecology is a science that has imprecise boun¬
daries, and any historical study should have a plausible way to delimit its scope. Ideally,
history of science should include both substantive history of achievements and the cir¬
cumstances under which the scientists worked. The history of a scientific community
permits the presentation of both. In this case the focus is on the contrasting development
of the limnology community at the University of Wisconsin under the leadership first of
Birge and Juday and then of Hasler.
Birge and Juday were intent upon doing limnology, not upon developing a scientific
school. Although there were theoretical aspects of their work, no elaborate scientific
theory guided their endeavor. They achieved leadership in American limnology by virtue
of the quality and quantity of their descriptive limnology. Their limnological community
developed slowly and was really a by-product of their efforts to expand the number of
scientists involved in their research. It might have been limited to their colleagues had
Juday not gotten bumped from the Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey
during the Depression, which led to his full-time appointment as a professor of zoology
with graduate students. While they imparted to their students some of the skills and
perspective needed by competent scientists, their primary objective remained the produc¬
tion of limnological knowledge, not the running of a scientific school.
Hasler was one of Juday’s 13 doctoral students, but his work under other biologists at
the university was as important to him as his limnological training under Juday. Both as
109
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
a student and later as a faculty member Hasler compared his experience in the Wisconsin
limnological community under Birge and Juday with what went on elsewhere in the uni¬
versity, and he decided that he should offer his students a richer experience than he had
received. Furthermore, whereas they had started out as zoologists and had only gradu¬
ally developed broader interests in the aquatic environment, Hasler’s interests were very
broad from the time he arrived in Wisconsin from Utah. In addition, he also had a
methodological commitment — even a mission — that guided much of his pioneering work
and his teaching. He set for himself high standards of performance in teaching, research,
and service to university, community, and profession. Remarkably, he was able to main¬
tain that commitment for more than four decades. Those Mormon values of his
childhood had been good enough for a lifetime. Hasler handed over to Magnuson a
much stronger limnology program than he had received.
Acknowledgments
My foremost debt is to Professor Emeritus Arthur Davis Hasler, who patiently ex¬
plained his work to me and also helped me to understand how the Wisconsin lim¬
nological school worked during the period of his involvement with it. I also appreciate
Professor Emeritus Aaron J. Ihde’s providing me with information on Wisconsin
chemists and their reactions to the limnologists during the 1930s. Annamarie L. Beckel
and William Coleman have provided much-appreciated advice, both substantive and
stylistic. And I thank M. Elaine Wright, in the Office of the Secretary of the Faculty, for
sending me copies of memorial resolutions on former faculty members.
110
Breaking New Waters
References
Anon. 1956. In memoriam, John E. Potzger, 1886-1955. Wis. Acad. Rev. 3: 75.
Baker, Jeffrey J. W. and Garland E. Allen. 1982. The Study of Biology. Ed. 4. Reading, MA:
Addison-Wesley.
Baldwin, I. L., Robert H. Burris, Noble Clark, Chester P. Higby, and Marvin J. Johnson. 1960.
Memorial resolution on the death of Emeritus Professor William Harold Peterson. Univ. Wis.
Fac. Doc. 1436.
Bardach, J. E., John J. Magnuson, R. C. May, and J. M. Reinhardt, eds. 1980. Fish Behavior
and Its Use in the Capture and Culture of Fishes. Manila: ICLARM.
Bean, E. F., John T. Curtis, H. C. Greene, Joseph J. Hickey, and John W. Thomson. 1954.
Memorial resolutions on the death of Professor Norman Carter Fassett. Univ. Wis. Fac. Doc.
1141.
Beeton, Alfred M. and David C. Chandler. 1963. The St. Lawrence Great Lakes. In Frey 1963a,
ch. 19.
Bennett, E. Maxine, Robert H. Burris, Robert P. Hanson, Arthur D. Hasler, Kenneth B. Raper,
and William B. Sarles. 1978. Memorial resolution on the death of Emeritus Professor Elizabeth
McCoy. Univ. Wis . Fac. Doc. 316.
Birge, Edward A. 1904. The thermocline and its biological significance. Amer. Microscop. Soc.
Trans. 25: 5-33 + 2 pis.
_ and Chancey Juday. 1922. The inland lakes of Wisconsin. The plankton I. Its quantity
and chemical composition. Wis. Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv. Bull. 64: 1-222 + ix pp.
_ and _ . 1934. Particulate and dissolved organic matter in inland lakes. Ecol. Monogr.
4: 440-474.
Braemer, Wolfgang. 1960. A critical review of the sun-azimuth hypothesis. Cold Spring Harbor
Sym. 25:413-427.
Brock, Thomas G. 1985. A Eu trophic Lake: Lake Mendota, Wisconsin. New York: Springer-
Verlag 1985 xii + 308 pp.
Bryan, George S., Richard C. Emmons, Emil Truog, Stanley A. Tyler, and Lewis M. Cline. 1957.
Memorial resolutions on the death of Emeritus Professor William Henry Twenhofel. Univ.
Wis. Fac . Doc. 1262.
Chandler, David C. 1963. Michigan. In Frey 1963a, ch. 3.
Colin, Patrick L. 1980. A brief history of the Tortugas Marine Laboratory and the Department of
Marine Biology, Carnegie Institution of Washington. In Sears and Merriman 1980, 138-147.
Cook, Robert E. 1977. Raymond Lindeman and the trophic-dynamic concept in ecology. Science
198:22-26.
Cottam, Grant, Arthur D. Hasler, Robert J. Muckenhirn, Jonathan D. Sauer, and John F. Stauf¬
fer. 1961. Memorial resolution on the death of Professor John T. Curtis. Univ. Wis. Fac. Doc.
1486.
Crane, Diana. 1972. Invisible Colleges: Diffusion of Knowledge in Scientific Communities.
Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press, x + 213 pp.
Dexter, Ralph W. 1965. The “Salem Secession’’ of Agassiz zoologists. Essex Inst. Hist. Coll. 101:
27-39.
_ . 1974. From Penikese to the Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods Hole — the role of
Agassiz’s students. Essex Inst. Hist. Coll. 1 10: 151-161.
_ . 1979. The impact of evolutionary theories on the Salem group of Agassiz zoologists
(Morse, Hyatt, Packard, Putnam). Essex Inst. Hist. Coll. 115: 144-170.
Domogalla, Bernhard. 1935. Eleven years of chemical treatment of the Madison lakes: — its effect
on fish and fish food. Amer. Fish. Soc. Trans. 65: 115-121.
_ . 1941. Scientific studies and chemical treatment of the Madison lakes. Pp. 303-310 in: A
Symposium on Hydrobiology. Madison: Univ. Wisconsin Press.
Donaldson, Lauren R. and Timothy Joyner. 1983. The salmonid fishes as a natural livestock. Sci.
Amer. 249, no. 1 (July): 50-58.
Ill
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
Dupree, A. Hunter. 1957. Science in the Federal Government: a History of Policies and Activities
to 1940. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Univ. Press, xi + 460 pp.
Egerton, Frank N. 1962. The scientific contributions of Frangois Alphonse. Forel, the founder of
limnology. Schweiz. Z. Hydrol. 24: 181-199.
_ . 1977. A bibliographic guide to the history of general ecology and population ecology.
Hist. Sci. 15: 189-215.
_ . 1978. Frangois Alphonse Forel (1841-1912). Dictionary of Scientific Biography 15:
158-159.
_ . 1983-85. The history of ecology: achievements and opportunities. J. Hist. Biol., 16:
259-311; 18: 103-141.
Engel, J. Ronald. 1983. Sacred Sands: the Struggle for Community in the Indiana Dunes. Middle-
town: Wesleyan Univ. Press, xxii + 352 pp.
England, J. Merton. 1982. A Patron for Pure Science: the National Science Foundation’s For¬
mative Years, 1945-1957. Washington: National Science Foundation, x + 443 pp.
Frey, David G., ed. 1963a. Limnology in North America. Madison: Univ. Wisconsin Press,
xvii + 734 pp.
_ . 1963b. Wisconsin: the Birge-Juday era. In Frey 1963a, ch. 1.
Forel, Frangois Alphonse. 1892-1904. Le Leman: Monographic Limnologique. 3 vols. Lausanne:
F. Rouge.
_ . 1901. Handbuch der Seenkunde: Allgemeine Limnologie. Stuttgart: Engelhorn. x + 249
pp.
von Frisch, Karl. 1967a. A Biologist Remembers. Transl., Lisbeth Gombrich. New York:
Pergamon. ix + 200 pp.
_ . 1967b. The Dance Language and Orientation of Bees. Transl., L. E. Chadwick. Cam¬
bridge, MA: Harvard Univ. Press, xiv + 566 pp.
Galtsoff, Paul S., Walter A. Chipman, Jr., James B. Engel, and Howard N. Calderwood. 1947.
Ecological and physiological studies of the effect of sulfate pulp mill waste on oysters in the
York River, Virginia. U.S. Fish & Wildl. Serv. Fish. Bull. 43: 57-176.
Gerking, Shelby D. 1963. Central states. In Frey 1963a, ch. 7.
Griffin, Donald R. 1952. Bird navigation. Biol. Rev. 27: 359-393.
Gunning, Gerald E. 1963. Illinois, In Frey 1963a, ch. 5.
Hasler, Arthur D. 1935. The physiology of digestion of plankton Crustacea. I. Some digestive en¬
zymes of Daphia. Biol. Bull. 68: 207-214.
_ . 1937. The physiology of digestion in plankton Crustacea. II. further studies on the
digestive enzymes of a. Daphnia and Polyphemus; b. Diaptomus and Calanus. Biol. Bull. 72:
290-298.
_ . 1945. This is the enemy. Science. 102: 431.
_ . 1946. War time view of European biological stations. Bios. 28: 81-93.
_ . 1947. Eutrophication of lakes by domestic drainage. Ecology. 28: 383-395.
_ . 1954. Odour perception and orientation in fishes. Fish. Res. Bd. Can. J. 11: 107-129.
_ . 1956a. Influence on environmental reference points on learned orientation in fish (Phoxi-
nus). Zeit. Vergl. Physiol. 38: 303-310.
_ . 1965b. Perception of pathways by fishes in migration. Quart. Rev. Biol. 31: 200-209.
_ . 1963a. Wisconsin, 1940-1961. In Frey 1963a, ch. 2.
_ . 1963b. The Laboratory of Limnology and associated field units of the University of
Wisconsin. Amer. Zool. 3: 337-340.
_ . 1964. Experimental limnology. BioScience 14: 36-38.
_ . 1966. Underwater Guideposts: Homing of Salmon. Madison: Univ. Wisconsin Press.
xii + 155 pp.
_ . 1984. Editorial: How lucky can you be? J. Great Lakes Res. 10: 333.
_ , Oscar M. Brynildson, and William T. Helm. 1951. Improving conditions for fish in
brown-water bog lakes by alkalization. J. Wildl. Mgt. 15:347-352.
112
Breaking New Waters
_ and Wilhelm G. Einsele. 1948. Fertilization for increasing productivity of natural inland
waters. N. Amer. Wild l. Conf. Trans. 13: 527-552.
_ and H. Francis Henderson. 1964. Tracking migrating salmon. Science 146: 426.
_ and James A. Larsen. Aug. 1955. The homing salmon. Sci. Amer. 193, no. 2:
72-76 + cover.
_ and Gene E. Likens. 1963. Biological and physical transport of radionuclides in stratified
lakes. In Schultz and Klement 1963, pp. 463-470.
_ _ and Roland K. Meyer. 1942. Respiratory responses of normal and castrated goldfish to
teleost and mammalian hormones. J. Exper. Zool. 91: 391-404.
_ , _ _ and Howard M. Field. 1939. Spawning induced prematurely in trout with the aid
of pituitary glands of the carp. Endocrinol. 25: 978-983.
_ and Allan T. Scholz. 1980. Artificial imprinting: a procedure for conserving salmon
stocks. In Bardach et al. 1980, pp. 179-199.
_ and _ _. 1983. Olfactory Imprinting and Homing in Salmon: Investigations into the
Mechanism of the Imprinting Process. New York: Springer- Verlag. xix-i- 134 pp.
, _ and Ross M. Horrall. 1978. Olfactory imprinting and homing in salmon. Amer.
Sci. 66: 347-355.
_ and Horst O. Schwassmann. 1960. Sun orientation in fish at different latitudes. Cold
Spring Harbor Sym. 25: 429-441.
_ _ and Warren J. Wisby. 1951. Discrimination of stream odors by fishes and its relation to
parent stream behavior. Amer. Nat. 85: 223-238.
_ and _ . 1958. The return of displaced largemouth bass and green sunfish to a
“home” area. Ecology 39: 289-293.
Hutchinson, G. Evelyn. 1963. The prospect before us. In Frey 1963a. ch. 26.
_ . 1979. The Kindly Fruits of the Earth: Recollections of an Embryo Ecologist. New Haven:
Yale LJniv. Press, xiii + 264 pp.
James, Harry R. and E. A. Birge. 1938. A laboratory study of the absorption of light by lake
waters. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts & Lett. Trans. 31: 1-154.
Ihde, Aaron J. 1975. Kemmerer remembered, with some reflections on limnology. Badger Chem.
22: 14.
_ 1978. Henry August Schuette, 1885-1978. Badger Chem. 25: 1, 4-6.
_ . 1981. V. W. Meloche, 1895-1981. Badger Chem. 28: 1,4-5.
Johnson, Diane. 1974. Edwin Brown Fred: Scientist, Administrator, Gentleman. Madison: Univ.
Wis. Press, x + 179 pp.
Johnson, Waldo E. and Arthur D. Hasler. 1954. Rainbow trout production in dystrophic lakes. J.
Wildl.Mgt. 18: 113-134.
Johnstone, Kenneth. 1977. The Aquatic Explorers: a History of the Fisheries Research Board of
Canada. Toronto: Univ. Toronto Press, xvi + 342 pp.
Juday, Chancey. 1910. Some European biological stations. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts & Lett. Trans.
16: 1257-77.
_ _. 1942. The summer standing crop of plants and animals in four Wisconsin lakes. Wis.
Acad. Sci. Arts and Lett. Trans. 34: 103-135.
_____ and Arthur D. Hasler. 1946. List of publications dealing with Wisconsin limnology,
1871-1945. Wis. Acad . Sci. Arts & Lett. Trans. 36: 469-490.
_ _ , C. L. Schloemer and C. L. Livingston. 1938. Effect of fertilizers on plankton production
and growth of fish in a Wisconsin lake. Prog. Fish Cult. no. 40: 24-27.
Kitchell, Jennifer A. and Kitchell, James F. 1980. Size-selective predation, light transmission, and
oxygen stratification: evidence from the recent sediments of manipulated lakes. Limnol.
Oceanogr. 25: 389-402.
Kramer, G. 1953. Wird die Sonnenhohe bei der Heimfindeorientierung verwertet? J. Ornithol.
94:201-219.
113
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Lauff, George H. 1963. A history of the American Society of Limnology and Oceanography. In
Frey 1963a, ch. 25.
Likens, Gene E. and Arthur D. Hasler. 1962. Movements of radiosodium (Na 24) within an ice-
covered lake. Limnol. Oceanogr. 7: 48-56.
McIntosh, Robert P. 1983. Pioneer support for ecology. BioSci. 33: 107-112.
_ . 1985. The Background of Ecology: Concept and Theory. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ.
Press. 1985. xiii + 383 pp.
Mathews, J. H., S. H. Goodnight and R. J. Roark. 1928. Memorial resolutions on the death of
Professor Kemmerer. Univ. Wis. Fac. Meeting Min. 3 Dec., pp. 124-125.
Mortimer, C. H. 1956. E. A. Birge, an explorer of lakes. In Sellery 1956, pp. 163-21 1 .
Mottley, C. McC. 1942. Experimental designs for developing and testing a stocking policy. N.
Amer. Wildl. Conf Trans. 7: 224-232.
Neess, John C. 1949a. Development and status of pond fertilization in central Europe. Amer.
Fish. Soc. Trans. 7: 335-358.
. 1949b. A contribution to aquatic population dynamics. Ph.D. diss., Univ. Wisconsin.
iv + 103 pp.
Noland, Lowell E. 1950. History of the Department of Zoology, University of Wisconsin. Bios.
21: 82-109.
Pearse, Arthur S. 1952. Adventure . . . Trying to be a Zoologist. Durham: Author. 68 pp.
Pond, R. N. 1903. The biological relation of aquatic plants to the substratum. U.S. Commis¬
sioner of Fish and Fisheries Report 117: 483-526.
Price, Derek de Solla. 1963. Little Science, Big Science. New York: Columbia Univ. Press,
xv + 1 19 pp.
Rickett, Harold W. 1920. A quantitative survey of the flora of Lake Mendota. Science, 52:
641-642.
_ . 1921. A quantitative study of the larger aquatic plants of Lake Mendota. Wis. Acad. Sci.
Arts Lett. Trans. 20: 501-527.
_ . 1924. A quantitative study of the larger aquatic plants of Green Lake, Wisconsin. Wis.
Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. Trans. 21 : 381-414 4- 2 pi.
Robertson, Carol Kelly. 1976. Limnology in Michigan: an historical account. Mich. Acad. 9:
185-202.
Russell, Harry L. 1940. Doctor Birge as a teacher. In University of Wisconsin 1940, pp. 7-14.
Schultz, Vincent and Alfred W. Klement, Jr., eds. 1963. Radioecology: Proceedings of the First
National Symposium on Radioecology. New York: Reinhold; Washington: A.I.B.S. xx + 746
pp.
Scott, G. M. 1970. Bernard P. Domogalla, 1894-1970. Wis. Acad. Rev. 17: 16.
Sears, Mary and Daniel Merriman, eds. 1980. Oceanography: the Past. New York: Springer-
Verlag. xx + 812 pp.
Sellery, George C. 1956. E. A. Birge, a Memoir. Madison: Univ. Wis. Press, vii + 221 pp.
Stearns, Forest W. 1961. Resolution of respect, John T. Curtis, 1913-1961. Ecol. Soc. Amer.
Bull. 42: 167-170.
Stegner, Wallace. 1962. Wolf Willow: A History, a Story, and a Memory of the Last Plains Fron¬
tier. New York: Viking Press, vi + 397 pp.
Stross, Raymond G. and Arthur D. Hasler. 1960. Some lime-induced changes in lake metabolism.
Limnol. Oceanogr. 5: 265-272.
Thorpe, John E., ed. 1980. Salmon Ranching. New York: Academic Press, x + 434 pp.
Threinen, C. W. 1968. What About Lake Mendota. Madison: n.p. 18 pp.
Tobey, Ronald C. 1981 . Saving the Prairies: the Life Cycle of the Founding School of American
Plant Ecology, 1895-1955. Berkeley: Univ. Calif. Press, x + 315 pp.
University of Wisconsin. 1940. Edward A. Birge, teacher and scientist: addresses delivered at a
dinner on September 5, 1940 given to honor him for his contributions to the science of lim-
114
Breaking New Waters
nology and in commemoration of his eighty-ninth birthday by the Symposium on
Hydrobiology. Madison: Univ. Wis. Press. 48 pp.
Vallery-Radot, Rene. 1923. The Life of Pasteur. TransL, R. L. Devoshire. Garden City: Double¬
day, Page, xxi + 484 pp.
Wisby, Warren J. and Arthur D. Hasler. 1954. Effect of olfactory occlusion on migrating silver
salmon (O. kisutch). Fish Res. Bd. Can. J. 11: 472-478.
Workshop on Global Ecological Problems. 1972. Man in the Living Environment. Madison:
Univ. Wis. Press, xxiii + 288 pp.
115
Appendix
Ph.D. Students with Chancey Juday
Bennett, George W.
1939. Ph.D. Limnological investigations in Wisconsin and Nebraska. I. The limnology of some
gravel pits near Louisville, Nebraska. 63 p. II. The growth of the large mouthed black bass,
Huro salmoides (Lacepdde), in the waters of Wisconsin. III. Growth of the small-mouthed
black bass, Micropterus dolomieu (Lacepdde), in Wisconsin waters.
Bere, Ruby.
1932. Ph.D. the bacterial content of some Wisconsin lakes. 27 p. The effect of freezing on the
number of bacteria in ice and water from Lake Mendota. 18 p. Copepods parasitic on fish of
the Trout Lake region, with descriptions of two new species.
Frey, David G.
1940. Ph.D. Growth and ecology of the carp, Cyprinus carpio Linnaeus, in four lakes of the
Madison region, Wisconsin. 248 p.
Hasler, Arthur D.
1937. Ph.D. The physiology of digestion of plankton Crustacea. I. Some digestive enzymes of
Daphnia. II. Further studies on the digestive enzymes of A. Daphnia and Polyphemus, B. Diap-
tomus and Calanus.
Morrison, J. P. E.
1931. Ph.D. A report on the Mollusca of the northeastern Wisconsin lake district. Studies on
the life history of Acella haldemani (“Desh.” Binney).
Pennak, Robert W.
1938. Ph.D. The ecology of the psammolittoral organisms of some Wisconsin lakes, with
special reference to the Tardigrada. Copepoda, and Rotaroria. 180 p.
Schloemer, Clarence L.
1939. Ph.D. The age and rate of growth of the bluegill, Helioperca macrochira (Rafinesque).
113 p.
Schneberger, Edward.
1933. Ph.D. The growth of yellow perch {Perea flavescens Mitchell) from Nebish, Silver and
Weber lakes in Vilas County, Wisconsin. 73 p.
Spoor, William A.
1936. Ph.D. The age and growth of the sucker. Catostomus commersonii (Lacep£de), in
Muskellunge Lake, Vilas County, Wisconsin. 90 p.
Tressler, Willis L.
1930. Ph.D. Limnological studies of Lake Wingra. 35 + v p.
Wiebe, Abraham H.
1929. Ph.D. Productivity of fish ponds. I. The plankton. 95 + ii p.
Wimmer, Edward J.
1928. Ph.D. A study of two limestone quarry pools.
Wright, Stillman.
1928. Ph.D. Studies in aquatic biology. I. A chemical and plankton study of Lake Wingra. 35
p. II. A revision of the South American species of Diaptomus. III. A contribution to the
knowledge of the genus Pseudodiaptomus.
M.S. and Ph.D. Students with Arthur Davis Hasler
Allsopp, Herbert W.
1949. M.S. No thesis.
116
Breaking New Waters
Andrews, Jay D.
1946. Ph.D. The macroscopic invertebrate populations of the larger aquatic plants in Lake
Mendota. 104 p.
Armitage, Kenneth B.
1954. Ph.D. The comparative ecology of the riffle insect fauna of the Firehole River,
Yellowstone Park, Wyoming. 50 p.
Bardach, John E.
1949. Ph.D. Contribution to the ecology of the yellow perch (Perea flavescens Mitchell) in Lake
Mendota, Wisconsin. 74 p.
Batha, John.
1966. M.S. Observations on movements of freshwater mussels. 43 p.
♦Baumann, Paul C.
1972. M.S. Distribution, movement, and feeding interactions among bluegill and three other
panfish in Lake Wingra. 48 p.
Becker, George C.
1951. M.S. No thesis.
♦Bjerke, John.
1962. M.S. The use of ribonucleic acid in zooplankton as an index of biological productivity in
freshwater lakes. 80 p.
*Bott, Thomas L.
1968. Ph.D. Ecology of Clostridium botulinum type E. 85 p.
Brynildson, Clifford.
1950. M.S. No thesis.
Brynildson, Oscar M.
1958. Ph.D. Lime treatment of brown-stained lakes and their adaptability for trout and
largemouth bass. 191 p.
Budd, John C.
1950. M.S. No thesis.
Chidambaram, S.
1972. Ph.D. Hormonal regulation of pigmentation, glycemia and natremia in the black
bullhead, Ictalurus melas. 158 p.
Cooper, Jon C.
1974. Ph.D. Olfactory imprinting and memory in salmonids. 137 p.
Dizon, Andrew E.
1966. M.S. The scoptic spectral sensitivity of the white bass, Roccus chrysops. 22 p.
1971. Ph.D. Ecological aspects of the evoked olfactory bulb electroencephalograph of fish with
special reference to homing behavior in salmon. 168 p.
Doepke, Philip A.
1963. M.S. Arsenic distribution in a shallow lake treated with an herbicide of sodium arsenite.
1969. Ph.D. An ecological study of the walleye, Stizostedion vitreum, and its early life history.
202 p.
Dugdale, Richard C.
1952. M.S. No thesis.
Dunst, Russell C.
1970. M.S. The effect of stream flow upon brown trout in Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin. 34 p.
Faber, Daniel J.
1963. Ph.D. Larval fish from the pelagial region of two Wisconsin lakes. 122 p.
♦Fee, Everett J.
1972. Ph.D. A numerical model for the estimation of integral primary production and its ap¬
plication to Lake Michigan. 169 p.
Gallepp, George W.
1974. Ph.D. The behavioral ecology of larval caddisflies, Brachycentrus americanus and
Brachycentrus occidentalis. 169 p.
117
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Gammon, James R.
1957. M.S. A comparative study of the northern pike and the muskellunge. 42 p.
1961 . Ph.D. Contributions to the biology of the muskellunge. 144 p.
Gasith, Avital.
1974. Ph.D. Allochthonous organic matter and organic matter dynamics in Lake Wingra.
Wisconsin. 209 p.
*Haase, Bruce L.
1969. Ph.D. An ecological life history of the longnose gar. Lepisosteus osseus (Linnaeus), in
Lake Mendota and in several other lakes of southern Wisconsin. 224 p.
Hazelwood, Donald H.
1954. M.S. No thesis.
Helm, William T.
1958. Ph.D. Some notes on the ecology of panfish in Lake Wingra with special reference to the
yellow bass. 88 p.
Henderson, H. Francis.
1963. Ph.D. Orientation of pelagic fishes. I. Optical problems. II. Sonic tracking. 132 p.
Hergenrader, Gary L.
1967. Ph.D. Echo sounder and sonar studies of the diel and seasonal movements of pelagic lake
fishes. 194 p.
Hirsch, Peter J.
1977. Ph.D. Conditioning the heart rate of coho salmon (Oncorhynchus kisutch) to odors.
82 p.
Holt, Charles S.
1962. M.S. The influence of physical characteristics of substrates of stream bottoms on
repopulation of denuded areas by macroinvertebrate organisms. 61 p.
Horrall, Ross M.
1961. Ph.D. A comparative study of two spawning populations of the white bass, Roccus
chrysops (Raf.), in Lake Mendota, Wisconsin, with special reference to homing behavior.
181 p.
♦Howmiller, Richard P.
1966. M.S. No thesis.
1971. Ph.D. The benthic macrofauna of Green Bay, Lake Michigan. 225 p.
Hunt, Robert L.
1959. M.S. The role of insects of the surface drift in the diet of Brule River trout. 30 p.
Hunt, John R.
1958. M.S. Progress report on the behavior of net avoidance in fish. 20 p.
1962. Ph.D. The utilization of the nests of Lepomis cyanellus by Notropis umbratilis. 138 p.
Huver, Charles W.
1961 . M.S. Variation and speciation in coregonid fishes. 27 p.
Jaeger, James W. A.
1972. M.S. The effect of different weather conditions on the feeding of northern pike, Esox
lucius. 80 p.
John, Kenneth R.
1954. Ph.D. An ecological study of the cisco, Leucichthys artedi (LeSueur), in Lake Mendota,
Wisconsin. 121 p.
Johnsen, Peter B.
1976. M.S. Handbook of aquatic biotelemetry.
1978. Ph.D. Contributions on the movement of fish: I. Behavioral mechanisms of upstream
migration and homestream selection in coho salmon (Oncorhynchus kisutch). II. Winter aggre¬
gations of carp (Cyprinus carpio) as revealed by ultrasonic tracking.
Johnson, Waldo E.
1954. Ph.D. Dynamics of fish production and carrying capacity of some northern soft-water
lakes. 51 p.
118
Breaking New Waters
Jones, Sara E.
1947. Ph.D. An ecological study of large aquatic plants in small ponds. 166 p.
*Judd, John H.
1969. Ph.D. Effect of salt runoff from street deicing on a small lake. 145 p.
Kaya, Calvin M.
1967. M.S. Effects of temperature on nesting and gonadal development of Lepomis macro-
chirus (Rafinesque) and Lepomis cyanellus (Rafinesque). 49 p.
1971. Ph.D. Relation of the annual reproductive cycles of the green sunfish. Lepomis cyanellus
(Rafinesque) to seasonal changes in temperature and photoperiod. 193 p.
Kingsbury, A. P.
1966. M.S. Discrimination of lake water odors by the white bass, Roccus chrysops (Rafi¬
nesque). 72 p.
Koonce, Joseph F.
1969. M.S. Estimations of phytoplankton production and biomass in a small acid bog lake.
63 p.
1972. Ph.D. Seasonal succession of phytoplankton and a model of the dynamics of phyto¬
plankton growth and nutrient uptake. 192 p.
Kunny, Bartholomew K.
1967. Ph.D. An analysis of the distribution of the macroscopic riffle fauna in 32 small streams
in the southern half of Wisconsin and some of the interdependent ecological factors affecting
this fauna. 200 p.
Le Cren, E. David.
1947. M.S. No thesis.
Lenz, Andrew N.
1965. M.S. Studies on diversity and respiration of periphytic bacteria in a thermal river system.
23 p.
Likens, Gene E.
1959. M.S. Exchange of elements across the chemocline of a meromictic lake. 30 p.
1962. Ph.D. Transport of radioisotopes in lakes. 152 p.
*Lind, Christopher T.
1967. Ph.D. The phytosociology of submerged aquatic macrophytes in eutrophic lakes of
southeastern Minnesota. 1 18 p.
♦Loeffler, Robert J.
1954. Ph.D. A new method of evaluating the distribution of planktonic algae in freshwater
lakes. 205 p.
Lovshin, Leonard L.
1966. M.S. The relation of water temperature to growth of wild brook trout (Salvelinus fon-
tinalis) in Lawrence Creek, Wisconsin. 48 p.
*Lueschow, Lloyd A.
1964. M.S. The effects of arsenic trioxide used in aquatic weed control operations on selected
aspects of the bioenvironment. 66 p.
Lutz, Paul D.
1958. M.S. A study of general behavior in fishes, with emphasis on the homing pattern. 18 p.
*McNabb, Clarence D.
1956. M.S. No thesis.
1960. Ph.D. Part I. A method for enumerating freshwater phytoplankton concentrated on the
membrane filter. Part II. A study of the phytoplankton and photosynthesis in sewage oxidation
ponds in Wisconsin. 128 p.
McNaught, Donald C.
1965. Ph.D. A study of some ecological relationships and the role of vision in the diel migra¬
tions of Daphnia. 169 p.
McNaught, Mary E.
1964. M.S. No thesis.
119
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences , Arts and Letters
Malueg, Kenneth W.
1966. Ph.D. An ecological study of Chaoborus. 231 p.
Miller, John A.
1958. M.S. A review of investigations, conducted at Wisconsin, on the olfactory mechanism of
fishes and olfactory discrimination, by the bluntnose minnow (Hyborhynchus notatus), of
water from different marine water masses. 18 p.
Mueller, Warren M.
1975. M.S. Growth responses of sagittal otoliths to selected environmental variables. 16 p.
Mullen, Robert E.
1969. M.S. An investigation of the diel swimming activity of Hyalella azteca (Saussure) in Lake
Mendota, Wisconsin. 49 p.
Nataraj, Jasharee.
1961. M.S. No thesis.
Neess, John C.
1949. Ph.D. A contribution to aquatic population dynamics. 103 p.
Nelson, Edward M.
1947. Ph.D. The comparative morphology of the Weberian apparatus in the family Cato-
stomidae. 38 p.
Nursall, John R.
1953. Ph.D. The functional significance and evolution of the myomere pattern of fish-like
chordates. 85 p.
Ogawa, Hisako.
1947. Ph.D. Studies on the origin, development and seasonal variations in the blood cells of the
perch, Perea flavescens. 149 p.
Olsen, Eric K.
1971. M.S. Vertical and horizontal distribution of the pelagic fry of the walleye, Stizostedion
vitreum (Mitchell), and yellow perch, Perea flavescens (Mitchell). 61 p.
1977. Ph.D. Distribution of pelagic yellow perch and walleye fry in two northern Wisconsin
lakes. 86 p.
*Pampel, Leonard F.
1959. M.S. No thesis.
Parker, Michael.
1963. M.S. Preliminary observations on vitamin B12 in Lake Mendota. 34 p.
1966. Ph.D. Studies on the distribution of cobalt in lakes. 74 p.
Parker, Richard A.
1956. Ph.D. A contribution to the population dynamics and homing behavior of northern
Wisconsin lake fishes. 86 p.
Peterka, John.
1960. M.S. Consideration of some problems in estimating trout populations in small lakes. 34
P-
*Ragotzkie, Robert A.
1953. Ph.D. The distribution of Daphnia in Lake Mendota and their mode of feeding. 98 p.
Robinson, John P.
1973. M.S. Migratory movements of adult coho salmon (Oncorhynchus kisutch) in Lake
Michigan as revealed by ultrasonic telemetry methods. 91 p.
Sager, Paul E.
1963. M.S. Some effects of aeration additions of anhydrous ammonia on a small dystrophic
lake. 57 p.
1967. Ph.D. Species diversity and community structure in lacustrine phytoplankton. 201 p.
Salli, Arne J.
1962. M.S. A study of the age and growth of the rainbow trout ( Salmo gairdneri Richardson) of
the Brule River, Douglas County, Wisconsin, prior to migration to Lake Superior. 79 p.
120
Breaking New Waters
1974. Ph.D. The distribution and behavior of young-of-the-year trout in the Brule River of
northwestern Wisconsin. 278 p.
Schmitz, William R.
1953. M.S. Observations of the northern pike in Lake Mendota 1952. 38 p.
1958. Ph.D. Artificially induced circulation in thermally stratified lakes. 96 p.
Scholz, Alan T.
1977. M.S. No thesis.
Schwassmann, Horst O.
1962. Ph.D. Experiments on sun orientation in some freshwater fish. 153. p.
Siewert, Horst F.
1973. Ph.D. Thermal effects on biological production in a pond. 173 p.
Snow, Howard.
1972. M.S. No thesis.
♦Sparr, M. C.
1958. M.S. The effect of chemical and physical treatments upon light penetration and
phosphorus content of bog waters. 69 p.
1960. Ph.D. I. Quantitative chemical analysis of lake water using ion exchange resins. II. In¬
vestigation of the nutrient status of bog lakes using the growth of Chlorella pyrenoidosa as an
index. 132 p.
Stewart, Kenton M.
1965. Ph.D. Physical limnology of some Madison lakes. 167 p.
Stone, Roderick C.
1961. M.S. Preliminary investigations of winter activity and movements of the yellow perch,
Perea flavescens (Mitchell), in Lake Mendota, Wisconsin. 78 p.
Stress, Raymond G.
1958. Ph.D. Experimentally induced changes in lakes, a) Environmental changes following lime
application to stained lakes, b) Changes in the planktonic Crustacea following the introduction
of trout to a fish-free lake. 125 p.
Teraguchi, Mitsuo.
1969. Ph.D. Did vertical migration of Mysis relicta (Loven) in Green Lake, Wisconsin. 229 p.
Tibbies, J. J.
1956. Ph.D. A study of the movements and depth distribution of pelagic fishes in Lake Men¬
dota. 193 p.
Voightlander, Clyde W.
1971 . Ph.D. A study of growth rates of white bass, Morone chrysops (Rafinesque), with special
reference to the utilization of the von Bertalanffy growth model. 206 p.
Walker, Theodore J.
1947. Ph.D. Olfactory discrimination of aquatic plants by Hyhorhynchus notatus (Raf.). 86 p.
* Walton, Craig P.
1971. Ph.D. A biological evaluation of the molybdenum blue method for orthophosphate
analysis. 218 p.
White, David A.
1967. Ph.D. Trophic dynamics of a wild brook trout stream. 183 p.
White, Ray J.
1964. M.S. Progress report on a study of the wild brown trout population and its habitat in
Black Earth Creek, Wisconsin. 109 p.
1972. Ph.D. Responses of trout populations to habitat change in Big Roche-a-Cri Creek, Wis¬
consin. 296 p.
Williamson, John L.
1965. M.S. The artificial stocking of walleye fry to augment native year class strength in Little
John and Erikson Lakes, Vilas County, Wisconsin. 16 p.
121
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
♦Winter, Donald R.
1970. M.S. Water quality and trophic condition of Lake Superior (Wisconsin waters). 69 p.
Wisby, Warren J.
1952. Ph.D. Olfactory responses of fishes as related to parent stream behavior. 42 p.
Wissing, Thomas E.
1969. Ph.D. Energy transformations, food habits and growth rates of young-of-the-year white
bass, Morone chrysops, in Lake Mendota, Wisconsin. 147 p.
Wright, Thomas D.
1964. M.S. Aspects of the early life history of the white bass, Roccus chrysops. 38 p.
1968. Ph.D. An electrophoretic analysis of the effects of isolation, homing behavior, and other
factors on the serum proteins of the white bass (Morone chrysops) in some Wisconsin lakes.
75 p.
Yokoyama, Misako O.
1947. Ph.D. Studies on the origin, development and seasonal variations on the blood cells of
the perch, Perea flavescens. 150 p.
♦Zicker, Eldon.
1955. Ph.D. The release of phosphorus from bottom muds and light penetration in northern
Wisconsin bog lake waters as influenced by various chemicals. 89 p.
♦Partial or joint supervision.
122
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
The Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters was chartered by the State Legislature on
March 16, 1870, as an incorporated society serving the people of Wisconsin by encouraging
investigation and dissemination of knowledge of the sciences, arts, and letters.
Academy Officers
Jerry Apps, President
John F. Rusch, Vice President-Sciences
Michael Skindrud, Vice President-Art
Richard Boudreau, Vice President-Letters
LeRoy R. Lee, Executive Director
MEMBERSHIP INFORMATION
Regular (individual or family), $25 annual dues
Associate (student membership), $10 annual dues
Life, $300 in one lifetime payment*
Patron, $500 or more
* Academy members who have paid dues for ten years are eligible to become life members at age
70 upon application and need pay no more dues.
Your membership will encourage research, discussion, and publication in the sciences, arts, and
letters of Wisconsin. Please send dues payment along with name and address to:
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters
1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53705
Academy members receive the annual Transactions , quarterly Wisconsin Review and occa¬
sional monographs of special reports.
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts & Letters —
Steenbock Center 1922 University Avenue
Madison, Wisconsin 53705
Telephone 608263-1692
WITHSON IAN- INSTITUTION NOIxnilXSN^NVINOSHilWS^SS I BVB8 IT^tl B RAR I ES 2 SMITHSONIAN
r” z n „ z r* z i
o X^STirlTpx _ Vvv O ^mTt^x — * O
iSi ZZ (jy _
tflNOSHHWS S3IHVden LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOlinillSNI NVINOSHIIIAIS
z v t/> z
#' | w i y !-^ § w
/UTHSONIAN^INSTITUTION^NOIXflXIXSN^NVINOSHXIWS^SS I aVBa n\lBRAR I ES^SMITHSONIAN
r= go _ _ ^ \ co
<
C£
CD
Q ~ X^ASVy>^ <CJ _ X^AST^ Q
Z -J 2 ' -j z
NN0SH1MS S3IBVH8H LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOlinillSNI NVIN0SH1MS
z •“ ^ _ 2: r* z r*
iN/ “** O ““ /^soaJX o — .AX/
m XgN. DCJ/
_ -- — — in .
dlTHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOlXfUIXSNI NVINOSHXIIAIS SSiaVHflH LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
z AV CO Z CO z
< .<*&N ... 2 < X^SOA^X 2 , <
^ 2 5 J.'% jtSK R ^ 'fM
- -- -— — - — ~H o
2
> N^Uu^^,<
/IN0SH1IIAISWS3 I BVBail~LIBRARI ES^SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOlinillSNI NVI N0SH1MS
= </> ^ _ CO “
W m Xs^ovX CiJ /^Tx ^
o X^AjpC^X “ *^ess,r Q
vllTHSON IAN- INSTITUTION NOUnilXSNI^NVINOSHillNS^SB I HVB 8 II^LI B RAR I ES^ SMITHSONIAN
r- z r- , z r- 2:
° m ^ 2 x^SSS*. “ xT52*5x 2
tfiNOSHXHNS S3 lava an libraries Smithsonian institution noixtixixsni nvinoshiiws
^ 5 \ g ^ ^ Z CO z
2 ^ 2 /«\ < ,v s <
° ;
s rsr § s '''^' !•"
^ITHSONIAN_ INSTITUTION^NOIXflXIXSNI NVINOSHXIINS^SS I a Va a IT^LI B RAR I ES”SMITHSONIAN
5 , _ _ « „ _ z \ « _ _ _ 5
85*. X-,n lil ✓'tTc.TlTT/X “T LiJI ✓fiCTI -c-
CO _ , _ \ CO _ _ ~ to
2 x mm lafe: -e ^ ^SBr
O o r X^VASV^X 5
Z -j z ' -J 2 _j
/iNOSHXHNS saiavaan libraries Smithsonian institution noixitxixsni nvinoshxiws
ft
H [fg
c VSE
z?
O Xgy.p.c^ “ O p^
Tl0N^N0linilXSNI^NVIN0SHJ.I«sfs3 I MWa a nJU B RAR I ES^SMITHSONIANJNSTITUTION ~NOU
w 52 m 5 XxItiS^' m X$|w&' <2 ’ m
00 £ y> ' £ (/>
an LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOliniliSNI NVIN0SH1IWS S3 I BVa B IT LIB
Z , co __ z » co z co z
< w 2 ^ <
v S 5 «/> vv to >d§r
O V*W. n^7 *r ^ « o J%r&y;,
2 .VA'
>' 2 X^yosv^ >'
riON " NOIXflXiXSNI NVINOSHXIIAIS' S3 lavaan^LIBRARI ESWSMITHS0NIAN ^INSTITUTION NOIJ
z V ^ ^asiso 1 _ « 5
o SW" 2 o
2: _j 2
8 11 LI B RAR ! E$ SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOliniliSNI _ NVIN0SHUIAJS S3 I d Vd 9 IT LIB
r- 2 : _ _ _ 2: n „ . z
ni Ns2£L£S>/ ^ m xg*xusg>
to £ - c/> x £ co
TION NOliniliSNI NVIN0SH1IWS S3 1 H VH Q I “I LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOI.
2 , < ...» 2 ><S5vJ?X. <
v 2 E ^mmw 2 t £
<y > 2 2 ^ ^
lan^^-iBRARI ES^SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOliniliSNI NVINOSHIIINS^SB 1 d Vd 8 ll^ LI B
9 _ _ to 2 _ _ _ m 5 ..-. CO ____ =
Q X^oc^ — XiOiix^iX o ^ T NgoxustjX o
TION ~~ NOliniliSNI ^"NVINOSHllWS^S 3 IdVdOll^UBRARI E$:2SMlTHSONIAN"'lNSTITUTION NOIJ
2 r* Z r- Z E ^ ^ 2
O ><^ttt<7>v w O ><CiSTir<7X y^ai^\ O O
18 11 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOliniliSNI NVIN0SH1IWS $3ldVd8ll LIBI
z <£ ^ ^ 2: co z a> z %
o o x Wj4a q £ M'm 8 v
;v
CO
60
O w ^
2 , *y /J _
> ‘ 2 X^yosv^yr >
TION “'N0IXnXIXSN|-NVIN0SHilWS'"S3 i a va a nZLI BRAR I es“5smithsonian2institution "NOIJ
“ CO ~ ___ to
^ m V«°7 ~ X^vW" to g X^4isp/ m ' " x cd
Z 3 2:
Jan libraries Smithsonian institution noiioiiisni nvinoshiiins saidvdan lib
2 r* _ _ Z r .. z
^ i i i